Cat Dwyer Catalogo General 2011

CT-D-I
Corporate Headquarters
DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC.
102 Indiana Highway 212,
P.O. Box 373
Michigan City, IN 46361, U.S.A.
PHONE
219/879-8000
FAX
219/872-9057
United Kingdom
DWYER INSTRUMENTS LTD
Unit 16, The Wye Estate, London Road
High Wycombe, Bucks HP11 1LH-U.K.
PHONE
(+44) (0) 1494 461707
FAX
(+44) (0) 1494 465102
Australia
DWYER INSTRUMENTS, PTY. LTD.
Unit 1, 11 Waverley Drive
Unanderra, NSW 2526 Australia
PHONE
(+61) (0) 2 4272 2055
FAX
(+61) (0) 2 4272 4055
INTERNATIONAL CUSTOMERS
Dwyer has local distributors in over 50 countries. Contact the office of your country or contact the corporate headquarters to find your
local distributor.You can also go to our website at the following address to be contacted by your local distributor:
http://www.dwyer-inst.com/Distributors/DistContactInfo.cfm.
PHONE
In the U.S. call toll free:
800/872-9141
Outside the U.S. call:
219/879-8000
FAX
219/872-9057
EMAIL
orders@dwyer-inst.com
WEBSITE
www.dwyer-inst.com
TECHNICAL SUPPORT
tech@dwyer-inst.com
LITERATURE REQUESTS
lit@dwyer-inst.com
QUOTATION/BID REQUESTS
quotes@dwyer-inst.com
GENERAL INFORMATION
info@dwyer-inst.com

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879 8000 U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494 461707 Australia Phone (+61) (0) 2 4272 2055 I
Dwyer Instruments, Inc. produces a broad range of competitively priced precision instruments for measuring,
transmitting and controlling pressure, temperature, level and flow.
Many of these instruments are widely known by their individual brand names, such as Magnehelic
and
Spirahelic
pressure gages, Photohelic
switch/gages, Rate-Master
, Mini-Master
and Visi-Float
flowmeters,
Slack Tube
and Flex-Tube
manometers, and Dwyer
pressure switches.
Other established Dwyer brands, including Flotect
flow and level switches, Hi-Flow
valves, Self-Tune
temperature controllers and Iso Verter
signal converters/isolators, are the products of companies that are now

divisions of Dwyer Instruments Mercoid, W. E. Anderson, Proximity Controls and Love Controls.
Founded in 1931, Dwyer Instruments, Inc. moved its manufacturing and headquarters from Chicago, Illinois, in
1955, to newly constructed, greatly-expanded facilities in Michigan City, Indiana. The company has since added
three more Indiana facilities in Wakarusa, Kingsbury and Wolcott as well as manufacturing facilities in Anaheim,
California; Fergus Falls, Minnesota; and Kansas City, Missouri.
In addition to making and selling quality precision instruments, Dwyer Instruments, Inc. is committed to a
standard of customer service, including competitive prices and knowledgeable, courteous technical support, that
generates and sustains long-term relationships.
DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC.

VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer inst.com www.dwyer inst.co.uk www.dwyer inst.com.au
II
PHONE
800/872-9141
EMAIL
orders@dwyer-inst.com
PHONE
800/872-9141
EMAIL
quotes@dwyer-inst.com
REAL PEOPLE
Courteous and professional customer service representatives are
available via phone and email to process and provide assistance with your
order. Dwyer provides industry leading response time to answer your call
quickly without making you wait.
PRICING
Contact us for formal quotes, Dwyer offers bids and project quotes.
Discounts are available for particular customer types based on quantities
purchased.
LARGE INVENTORY LOCATED CENTRALLY IN THE U.S.
Dwyer is committed to get you your order quickly with more than 5,000
line items in stock in our Michigan City, Indiana headquarters and in most
cases lead times less than two weeks for non-stock products.
FAST PROCESSING AND PACKING
Our dedicated shipping staff packs and ships your order the same day on
stock items ordered before 2:00 PM U.S. Central Time.
FLEXIBLE SHIPPING
Dwyer offers blanket orders for OEMs to schedule out your product
shipments to be when you need them. Contact us for details.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879 8000 U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494 461707 Australia Phone (+61) (0) 2 4272 2055 III
All of our technical sales staff are degreed engineers trained to be product
and industry experts. We listen to your needs and get you the answers you
want quickly.
WE HELP YOU FIND A SOLUTION
Product Selection
Application Assistance
Regulatory and Agency Approval Compliance
Installation Guidance
Maintenance and Repair
Product Customization for OEMs
TO CONTACT A TECHNICAL SUPPORT ENGINEER
PHONE
800/872-9141
FAX
219/872-9057
EMAIL
tech@dwyer-inst.com
At Dwyer it all starts with innovative products designed according to the needs of our customers. We strive to
make products optimized for ease of use, dependability and manufacturability. Through our over 75 years of
manufacturing excellence, Dwyer has found the means to manufacture products cost effectively to offer the best
value to our customers. We supply the highest quality products and stand behind them. Dwyer products are
trusted in applications all over the world in almost every industry.

DWYER DIGITAL CATALOG
Browse the catalog on the web or download to your
computer to have access to it when offline
Search by any word or phrase in the catalog
Print or email pages
Add notes to any page
PRODUCT INFORMATION
We offer more than what is in the Dwyer catalog
more products, more options and more technical details
Instruction manuals and catalog pages in PDF format
for easy viewing and download
Product dimensions viewable in web browser
Product drawings in DWG format for downloading and
using in CAD software
Agency approval certificates CE, FM, UL, CSA and ATEX
PRODUCT SEARCH
Search by model number, keyword or series
PRODUCT CONFIGURATOR
Easy to use graphic interface lets you see all available options and select
what you need for your application
Shows option rules so that you can see what options are not compatible
AND MORE!
Product applications and technical guides
Download product brochures and catalogs in PDF format
Frequently asked questions
IV

Special instrument designs can be supplied to meet a wide range of OEM requirements and specific application needs.
Custom scales and private brand identification can easily be furnished. These include: chrome or specially painted bezels,
special membranes, special ranges and calibrations, dual scales, reflective scales, special cleaning and OEM identification.
For specific information please contact our customer service department at 219-879-8000.
Offered in a wide variety of designs, features and scales.
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 Australia Phone (+61) (0) 2 4272 2055 V
V_ShippingOEM.P:Layout 2 2/15/11 2:57 PM Page 1
VI
Terms and Conditions of Sale
1. Prices and Specifications are subject to change without notice.
2. Shipping dates are approximate. They are dependent upon credit approval and subject to delays beyond our control.
3. Terms: Net 30 days to companies with established credit rating. In the event Buyer fails to fulfill previous terms of payment, or
in case Seller shall have any doubt at any time as to Buyers financial responsibility, Seller may decline to make further deliveries
except upon receipt of cash in advance or other special arrangements.
4. Liability Point and Title: All material is sold EXW Ex Works Dwyer Instruments, Inc. Title to all material sold shall pass to buyer
upon delivery by Seller to carrier at shipping point.
5. State and Local Taxes: Any taxes which the Seller may be required to pay or collect upon or with respect to the sale, purchase,
delivery, use or consumption of any of the material covered hereby shall be for the account of the Buyer and shall be added to the
purchase price.
6. Special tooling, dies, silk screens and molds acquired specially to produce goods for Buyer remain the property of Dwyer In-
struments, Inc., and may not be removed. They will be maintained in good condition for a minimum period of three years from the
date of the original purchase order.
7. Export Orders: Terms, discounts and conditions of sale for purchase orders originating or for shipment to final destinations out-
side the U.S.A. will be furnished upon request.
8. Limited Warranty: The Seller warrants all Dwyer instruments and equipment to be free from defects in workmanship or mate-
rial under normal use and service for a period of one year from date of shipment. Liability under this warranty is limited to repair or
replacement EXW Ex Works Dwyer Instruments, Inc of any parts which prove to be defective within that time or repayment of the
purchase price at the Sellers option provided the instruments have been returned, transportation prepaid, within one year from
date of purchase. All technical advice, recommendations and services are based on technical data and information which the Sell-
er believes to be reliable and are intended for use by persons having skill and knowledge of the business, at their own discretion.
In no case is Seller liable beyond replacement of equipment EXW Ex Works Dwyer Instruments, Inc or the full purchase price. This
warranty does not apply if the maximum ratings label is removed or if the instrument or equipment is abused, altered, used at rat-
ings above the maximum specified, or otherwise misused in any way.
THIS EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF AND EXCLUDES ALL OTHER REPRESENTATIONS MADE BY ADVER-
TISEMENTS OR BY AGENTS AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, BOTH EXPRESS AND IMPLIED. THERE ARE NO IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR GOODS COVERED HERE-
UNDER.
9. Buyers Remedies: THE BUYERS EXCLUSIVE AND SOLE REMEDY ON ACCOUNT OF OR IN RESPECT TO THE FUR-
NISHING OF NON-CONFORMING OR DEFECTIVE MATERIAL SHALL BE TO SECURE REPLACEMENT THEREOF AS
AFORESAID. THE SELLER SHALL NOT IN ANY EVENT BE LIABLE FOR THE COST OF ANY LABOR EXPENDED ON ANY
SUCH MATERIAL OR FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES TO ANYONE
BY REASON OF THE FACT THAT IT SHALL HAVE BEEN NON-CONFORMING OR DEFECTIVE.
10. Acceptance: All orders shall be subject to the terms and conditions contained or referred to in the Sellers quotation, ac-
knowledgment, and to those listed here and to no others whatsoever. No waiver, alteration or modification of these terms and con-
ditions shall be binding unless in writing and signed by an executive officer of the Seller. All orders are subject to written acceptance
by Dwyer Instruments, Inc., Michigan City, Indiana, U.S.A.
Discount Schedule and Conditions of Sale

1-112
113-150
151-236
237-312
313-362
363-404
405-420
421-464
465-536
537-562
563-568
569-586
Differential Pressure Gages, Differential Pressure Gages/Switches (Digital & Dial), Manometers (Stationary), Differential Pressure Switches,
Differential Pressure Transmitters, Single Pressure Gages (Dial & Digital), Single Pressure/Temperature Gages, Single Pressure
Gages/Switches/Transmitters (Digital), Single Pressure Switches, Single Pressure Transmitters
Flow Sensors, Pitot Tubes, Air Flow Switches, Fume Hood Monitors, Air Velocity Transmitters, Humidity Switches, Humidity/Temperature
Switches, Humidity/Temperature Transmitters, Carbon Monoxide Transmitters, Carbon Dioxide Transmitters, Occupancy Sensors, Damper
Actuators
Flowmeters (Variable Area, In-Line, Orifice Plate & Totalizing), Flow Sensors (In-Line), Sight Flow Indicators, Flowmeters with Switch, Flow
Switches (Paddle, Shuttle/Piston, Thermal & Piezo), Flow Transmitters (In-Line, Paddlewheel, Turbine & Ultrasonic), Mass
Flowmeters/Controllers
Thermometers (Dial, Glass & Digital Solar), Thermometers with Switch, Thermometers with Transmitter, Temperature Labels/Strips, Temperature
Crayons, Temperature Indicators (Digital), Temperature/Process Controllers, Weatherproof Enclosures, Temperature Switches (Digital, DIN Rail
& Mechanical), Temperature Transmitters, Temperature Sensors, Thermostat Covers
Level Indicators, Water Leak Detectors, Level Switches (Float, Ultrasonic, Optical, Displacer, Conductivity, Capacitive, Tuning Fork, Paddle,
Diaphragm & Tilt), Proximity Sensors, Level Transmitters (Ultrasonic, Submersible, Capacitive & Float), Level/Pump Controllers, Pump Leak
Detectors, Bin Vibrators/Aerators
Panel Meters/Indicators, Annunciators/Alarm Modules, Fan Speed Controls, Signal Conditioners/Isolating Transmitters, Relays, Current
Transformers/Switches, SSR Monitors, Signal Converters, Intrinsically Safe Barriers, Power Supplies, Timers, Timer Controllers,
Ground/Continuity Controls, Particulate (Dust or Broken Bag) Transmitters, Particulate (Dust or Broken Bag) Sensors, Speed Switches,
Belt Alignment Switches, Cable Pull Switches
Data Loggers (Indicating, Miniature, Stainless Steel, USB, Surface Mount & Level), Data Acquisition Software, Recorders (Paper)
Manometers (Portable & Air Velocity), Air Velocity Meters, Thermo-Anemometers, Air Flow Hoods, Wind Meters, Vane Anemometers,
Thermohygrometers, Thermometers (Thermocouple, Immersion & Infrared), Thermocouple Calibrators, Hand Held Thermocouples, pH/ORP
Temperature Meters, pH Testers, Switch Testers, Total Dissolved Solids Testers, Conductivity Testers, Gas Leak Detectors, Gas Analyzers/Kits,
Signal Generators/Multimeters, Calibration Pumps, Pressure Calibrators, Tachometers
Valves (Globe, Needle, Angle Seat, Plug, Ball, Check, Butterfly, Shuttle, Zone, Diaphragm Pulse & Solenoid), Manual Gear Operators, Bulk Head
Connectors, Steam Traps, Current to Pressure Transducers, Electro-Pneumatic Controllers, Positioners, Position
Indicators/Switches/Transmitters
Reference Books, Filters, Regulators, Lubricators, Shut-Off Valves, Cooling Extensions, Pressure Snubbers, Gage Guards, Strap Wrenches,
Fittings (Stainless Steel & Nylon), Static Pressure Sensors, Gage Connectors, Pressure Connectors and Fittings, Mounting Brackets and
Accessories, Pumps, Product Carrying Cases, Psychrometers, Slide Charts, Air Filter Kits, Gage Fluids, Pressure Tubing
PRESSURE
AIR QUALITY
FLOW
TEMPERATURE
LEVEL
PROCESS CONTROL
DATA LOGGERS & RECORDERS
TEST EQUIPMENT
VALVES
ACCESSORIES & BOOKS
TECH GUIDE
INDEX
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879 8000 U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494 461707 Australia Phone (+61) (0) 2 4272 2055 VII
See page 569 for a detailed product index by Series or Model Number and Category.

NEW! PRODUCTS
VIII
SERIES DM-1200
DigiMag
Digital Differential
Pressure and Air Flow Gage
Air velocity or air flow operation
24 Volt, battery powered or
battery as back-up
Fits Magnehelic
gage cut-out
page 12
SERIES EDPS
H.V.A.C. Differential
Pressure Switch
Approved to standard UL-508
Housing materials UL94 V0 rated
Field-adjustable set-point knob
page 29
SERIES BYDS
Bypass Damper Switch
Solid state differential pressure control
of motorized by-pass dampers
Solid state operation can handle the
high cycle rates of by-pass damper
actuation
Solid state output prolongs life of
switch and motor
Field adjustable set-point knob
page 30
SERIES CMT
Carbon Monoxide Transmitter
Models for wall or duct installations
High accuracy electrochemical sensor
Internal display standard on all models
page 146

NEW! PRODUCTS
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879 8000 U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494 461707 Australia Phone (+61) (0) 2 4272 2055 IX
SERIES 628CR
Pressure Transmitter
Robust ceramic sensor
Compact design
1% F.S. accuracy
page 104
SERIES 3100
Explosion-proof Differential
Completely configurable using
zero/span buttons
(no calibrator required)
Rangeability (100:1)
High accuracy (0.075%)
Automatic ambient temperature
compensation
Fail-mode process function
page 56
SERIES 3200
Explosion-proof
Completely configurable using
zero/span buttons
Automatic ambient temperature
compensation
Fail-mode process function
page 111
SERIES SVT
Solenoid Valve Enclosure
with Timer
Timer and solenoids in one
enclosure
90 to 240 VAC power supply
Adjustable on-time and off-time
settings
Downtime cleaning
page 398

NEW! PRODUCTS
X
SERIES TE
Temperature Sensors
Available in duct or immersion
configurations
Integral terminal block
Optional enclosure with
multiple conduit knock outs
page 302-303 SERIES TS3
Temperature Switch
Field selectable
engineering units
Intelligent defrost
Real time clock with
HACCP alarm monitoring
page 276
SERIES V7
Flotect
Vane Operated
Flow Switch
Magnetic linkage with no mechanical
linkages or seals to wear or break
Rated to 250 psi and 250F and is
UL353 approved making it perfect for
boiler use
Weatherproof enclosure standard
page 202
SERIES PFT
Paddlewheel Flow Sensor
Insertion style with one model
that fits 1/2 to 40 pipe
Non-magnetic sensor
technology so no concern
with magnetic material in the flow
Weatherproof and submersible
rated for irrigation applications
page 220

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 Australia Phone (+61) (0) 2 4272 2055 XI
N
E
W
!

P
R
O
D
U
C
T
S
Model A-286
Magnehelic
Gage
Panel Mounting Flange
Flange for Panel Mounting
4-1/2 Diameter Gages
page 6
Series PTGD
Differential Pressure
Piston-Type Gage
Excellent Accuracy and
Over-Pressure Ratings
page 13
Series SGC2
Spiral Tube Pressure Gage
Compact Size, 1 Dial
page 62
Series DPGAB & DPGWB
Digital Pressure Gage
with Rubber Boot
0.5% Full Scale Accuracy,
Selectable Engineering Units
page 85
Model 670
Fume Hood Monitor
Ensures Proper Fume
Hood Performance
page 131
Model RHRS
Outside Air Humidity
Radiation Shield
6 Plate Design,
Integral Pipe Mounting Kit
page 140
Series WHP
Wireless Humidity/Temperature
Sensors
Transmits up to 100 Feet,
Battery Operated
page 141
Wireless Temperature/Humidity
Product Accessories
Accessories To Be Used
With WTP & WHP
page 142-143
Model OSC-200
Omnidirectional Occupancy Sensor
300 Detection Pattern, Energy Efficient
page 148
Model OSW-100
Wall Mount Occupancy Sensor
Wide Viewing Angle, Easy Install
page 148
Model WTI-100
Wall Plate Digital LCD
Temperature Indicator
Battery Operated, Less Than 1 Deep
page 254
Model 4V-3
1/4 DIN Valve
Temperature Controller
Valve Position Feedback,
RS-485 Communications
page 265
XI_NewProducts.P:Layout 2 2/15/11 3:02 PM Page 1
XII
N
E
W
!

P
R
O
D
U
C
T
S
Series SCD-8
Multi-Loop DIN Rail Mount
Up to 8 Control Loops,
Optional Display
page 270
Series 40T
Digital Thermocouple/RTD
Temperature Switch
3 1/2 Digit Display,
Programming Configuration Key
page 275
Series TSX3
Digital Refrigeration
Temperature Switch
Intelligent Defrost,
HACCP Alarm Logging
page 276
Series TE-W
Wall Mount Temperature Sensor
Discrete Wall Mount Housing
page 304
Series WTP-W
Wireless Wall Mount
Temperature Sensors
with Manual Override
page 304
Series WTP-R
Wireless Remote Probe
Temperature Sensors
Up to 25 Capillary
page 305
Series WTP
Wireless Temperature Sensors
NEMA 4X Enclosure
page 306
Series WD2
Water Leak Detector
Visual & Audible Alarm,
Drain Pan Level Switch
page 319
Model FD
Fluidizer Disk
Self Cleaning
page 357
Model MFD
Micro Fluidizer Disk
Compact Design
page 357
Series EBV
Electric Bin Vibrator
Adjustable Vibration Intensity
page 362
Series EMR
Electromechanical Relay
30 Amp, SPDT and DPDT Operation
page 383

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879 8000 U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494 461707 Australia Phone (+61) (0) 2 4272 2055 XIII
N
E
W
!

P
R
O
D
U
C
T
S
Model BPS-015
Low Cost DC Power Supply
1.5A, Fuse Protection
page 391
Model CBAS
Belt Alignment Switch
Adjustable Activation Angles,
Two Micro Switches
page 404
Model CPS
Cable Pull Switch
For Emergency or Normal Shut Off
page 404
Series DLP
Pressure/Temperature Data Logger
1/4 NPT Fitting, Up to 5000 PSIA
page 409
Series ISDL
Temperature/Humidity
Data Logger
Submersible, Measures Humidity
and Temperature
page 413
Model AFH2
Air Flow Hood
Measures Volumetric Flow Rate with
Highly Accurate Digital Manometer
page 438
Model 89088
Pocket Wind Meter
Measures Wind Speed,
Wind Chill and Temperature
page 440
Model 1207A
Handheld Flue Gas
Combustion Analyzer
Rotary Dial Selection, Display 4
Parameters Simultaneously
page 455
Model LPTK
Gas Pressure Test Kit
Convenient Kit Perfect For Testing
LP and Natural Gas Controls
page 456
Series TAC3
Pocket Tachometer
Multi Function, NIST Certified
page 464
Model TNV
PTFE Needle Valve
All PTFE and PCTFE Wetted Parts
page 477
Series PGV
Compact Plug Valve
One Piece Body,
Low Operating Torque
page 482

XIV
N
E
W
!

P
R
O
D
U
C
T
S
Series MSV
Compact Two Way Ball Valve
Blowout Proof Ball & Stem
page 483
Series SMV
Mini Stainless Steel Ball Valve
Economical, Compact
page 484
Series SVB
Stainless Steel V-Ball Valve
Control Valve,
ISO 5211 Mounting Pad
page 490
Series HBV
NI-Alloy C Ball Valve
Corrosion Resistant, Full Port
page 490
Series 3MSV
Compact 3-Way Ball Valve
3 Way Blow Out Proof Ball & Stem
page 491
Series ZV2
Two-Way Detachable Zone Valves
Floating or Modulating
page 517
Series 3ZV2
Three-Way Detachable Zone Valves
page 517
Series VPI
Valve Position Indicator
Low Cost, Mechanical or
Proximity Limit Switches
page 530
Pneumatic Shut-Off Valves with
Quick-Connect Connection
page 546
Series A-1012
Stainless Steel Fitting Line
page 552
Stainless Steel
Static Pressure Tips
page 557

PRESSURE
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879 8000 U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494 461707 Australia Phone (+61) (0) 2 4272 2055 1
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
pages 2 3
Differential Pressure Gages
pages 4 13
Gages/Switches, Digital
pages 14 18
Gages/Switches, Dial
pages 19 23
Switches
pages 27 39
Transmitters
pages 40 56
Single Pressure Gages,
Dial
pages 57 75, 77 82
Manometers, Stationary
pages 24 26
Single Pressure Gages,
Digital
pages 83 86
Single Pressure
Gages/Switches/Transmitters,
Digital
pages 87 89
Single Pressure Switches
pages 90 101
Single Pressure/Temperature
Gages
pages 75 76
Single Pressure Transmitters
pages 102 112

2
T
y
p
c
a

A
p
p
c
a
t
o
n
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Differential pressure
gage assists
operator in
adjusting venturi
pressure drop in
dust scrubber.
Air Supply
Magnehelic

Gages
HI
LO
2
1
B
A
A zero-center Dwyer
Magnehelic
differential pressure gage with

an 0.25 wc range either side of zero makes an effective monitor
for proper operation of room pressurization systems. In the
example, differential gage B has its high pressure port open to
room 2 and its low pressure port to room 1; gage A has its high
pressure port open to room 1 and its low pressure port open to the
atmosphere. With the makeup air supply damper adjusted
properly, room 2 will be a higher pressure than room 1 which is at
higher than atmospheric pressure; both gages will read positive.
Should the air supply to room 2 be obstructed, gage B will read
negative. If the air supply fails entirely, both gages will read zero.
For even better security, a Photohelic
switch/gage will provide

automatic alarm or start-up of a backup system.
Dwyer
gages indicate pressurization of

special rooms.
The Dwyer
Series DPG with oxygen cleaning and 5000 psi range

is used in gas blending applications for filling scuba diver's air
tanks. The DPG is the master mixing gage in this manifold
apparatus. Two or three gases may be blended with the manifold
to produce the appropriate blend of breathable gas depending on
the diver and the depths they will reach. With the flow adjustment
knobs and the 0.25% full scale accuracy DPG, precise tank
charging rates are maintained.
Series DPG-100
Diving
Tanks
Large
Tank
Large
Tank
Filling scuba divers air tanks.
This scrubber design
removes unwanted dust or
particulate matter from air
or gas using an adjustable
throat venturi. To adjust
the pressure drop across
the venturi, a jack-screw-
actuated sliding vane
varies the slot width. A
permanently mounted
Dwyer
Magnehelic
differential pressure gage

indicates the venturi
pressure drop while the
operator adjusts to the desired or design setting. Where water may
possibly enter the gage sensing lines, as in this application, drop
legs with drain valves are needed to permit draining the lines at
their lowest point. Good engineering practice dictates that the
Magnehelic
gage always be mounted above the sensing tap

when possible to prevent moisture accumulation in the lines and
gage. At minimum, mount the gage above the lowest point in the
sensing lines.
Magnehelic
Gage
Clean
Gas
Drain
Drop Legs
HI
LO
Dirty Gas
Water Supply
Nozzles
Venturi Slot
Gasoline vapor recovery system.
Some area pollution control agencies require that 90% or more of
gasoline vapor vented at service stations when fuel is dispensed
must be prevented from venting to atmosphere. Using a dual hose
dispenser, this vapor recovery system is a vacuum assist, vapor
burnoff type. The blower creates a low vacuum at the nozzle,
routing vapor from the automobile tank to underground storage
tanks. As uncondensed vapor pressure reaches 2 to 3 w.c.
pressure, a Dwyer 1950 Series explosion-proof differential
pressure switch activates a rooftop burnoff unit, which ignites
excess vapor. The Magnehelic

mounted on the station wall monitors tank pressure to verify
system operation. The gage is calibrated in inches of gasoline,
from +6 to -2. This allows the operator to determine the necessary
level correction due to tank pressure prior to dipsticking the tanks
through the fill pipe.
Processing
Unit
Dispensing
Pump
Vapor
Collection
Line
Fill
Pipe
Gasoline
Line
Underground Tank
Condensate
Drain Lines
Relief
Valve
HI
1950
Explosion-Proof
Differential
Pressure Switch
Magnehelic
Gage

T
y
p
c
a

A
p
p
c
a
t
o
n
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
This portable pressure monitor alarm utilizes a Dwyer
Mini-
Photohelic
differential pressure switch/gage to monitor either

positive pressure, as in a clean room, or negative pressure, as in
a fume or paint spray hood. It sounds an alarm, both audible and
visual, when pressure exceeds either a preset high or low limit.
The unit can be used temporarily to verify proper operation after
initial installation. Or it can be mounted permanently for continuous
monitoring. In applications where a single fixed alarm pressure
level is sufficient, a differential pressure switch can be used
instead.
Compact switch/gage monitors pressure,
actuates alarm.
Blower
and Air
Filter
Pressurized
Clean Room
Fume Hood
Portable Monitor
and Alarm Units
Exhaust
Mini-Photohelic
HI
LO
A controlled inert atmosphere glove-box is used in the fields of
physical chemistry and metallurgy for handling and welding special
or hazardous materials. A Dwyer
Photohelic
differential pressure
switch/gage serves as an automatic and readily adjustable
pressure control for the helium, argon or nitrogen gas used in the
system. The box is first evacuated, then pressurized with the
required gas. Therefore, a zero-center Photohelic
switch/gage is
used, permitting both pressure and vacuum to be read and
controlled by a single gage. Use of the low pressure gage
connection (rear chamber of gage) and a Buna-N diaphragm is
suggested to minimize leaks from or to the atmosphere.
Zero-center switch/gage controls the inert atmosphere
in glove box.
Glove
Box
LO
Solenoid
Valve
Pressure
Relief
Valve
Regulator
Gas Supply
Vent to
Atomosphere
in Safe Area
Photohelic
Switch Gage
Demand for compressed gas varies in this gas line. So a Mercoid
Series DA adjustable deadband pressure switch is included to turn

the compressor on at low pressure and off when the maximum
pressure is reached.
Mercoid
Series DA pressure switch maintains desired

gas pressure in tank.
Mercoid
Series DA
Pressure Switch
Receiver
Pressurized
Gas Out
Compressor
Gas
Supply
Overpressure
Relief Valve
When using differential pressure transmitters in fluid applications,
it is essential to periodically make sure that there is no air in the
system, as this can cause erroneous readings. Unfortunately, the
necessary three-valve bleed system is often expensive and large,
making installation difficult and bulky. For this reason, Dwyer
Instruments, Inc. offers the 3V option on all 629 Wet/Wet
Differential Pressure Transmitters. This compact, lightweight, and
economical bleed manifold is shipped factory-installed on the 629,
eliminating the hassle of constructing a custom apparatus. The
629, when combined with the three-valve option, makes for an
ideal setup to monitor hydraulic filter clogging or other fluid
pressure sensing applications.
Three-valve manifold simplifies installation of wet/wet
differential pressure transmitter.
Series 629
Wet/Wet
Differential
Pressure
Transmitter
Liquid Flow

VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com www.dwyer-inst.co.uk www.dwyer-inst.com.au
4
D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Mounting
A single case size is used for most models of Magnehelic
gages. They can be flush or surface mounted with standard

hardware supplied. With the optional A-610 Pipe Mounting
Kit they may be conveniently installed on horizontal or
vertical 1-1/4 - 2 pipe. Although calibrated for vertical
position, many ranges above 1 may be used at any angle
by simply re-zeroing. However, for maximum accuracy, they
must be calibrated in the same position in which they are
used. These characteristics make Magnehelic
gages ideal
for both stationary and portable applications. A 4-9/16 hole
is required for flush panel mounting. Complete mounting
and connection fittings plus instructions are furnished with
each instrument.
Vent Valves
In applications where pressure is continuous and the
Magnehelic
gage is connected by metal or plastic tubing

which cannot be easily removed, we suggest using Dwyer
A-310A vent valves to connect gage. Pressure can then
be removed to check or re-zero the gage.
High and Medium Pressure Models
Installation is similar to standard gages except that a 4-
13/16 hole is needed for flush mounting. The medium
pressure construction is rated for internal pressures up to
35 psig and the high pressure up to 80 psig. Available for all
models. Because of larger case, the medium pressure and
high pressure models will not fit in a portable case size.
Installation of the A-321 safety relief valve on standard
Magnehelic
gages often provides adequate protection

against infrequent overpressure.
See Note.
Select the Dwyer
rr Magnehelic
gage for high accuracy guaranteed within 2% of full

scale and for the wide choice of 81 models available to suit your needs precisely. Using
Dwyer's simple, frictionless Magnehelic
gage movement, it quickly indicates low air or non-

corrosive gas pressures either positive, negative (vacuum) or differential. The design
resists shock, vibration and over-pressures. No manometer fluid to evaporate, freeze or
cause toxic or leveling problems. It's inexpensive, too.
The Magnehelic
gage is the industry standard to measure fan and blower pressures,

filter resistance, air velocity, furnace draft, pressure drop across orifice plates, liquid
levels with bubbler systems and pressures in fluid amplifier or fluidic systems. It also
checks gas-air ratio controls and automatic valves, and monitors blood and respiratory
pressures in medical care equipment.
Note: May be used with hydrogen. Order a Buna-N diaphragm. Pressures must be
less than 35 psi.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases (natural gas option available).
Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
Housing: Die cast aluminum case and bezel, with acrylic cover. Exterior finish is
coated gray to withstand 168 hour salt spray corrosion test.
Accuracy: 2% of full scale (3% on - 0, -100 Pa, -125 Pa, 10MM and 4% on - 00,
-60 Pa, -6MM ranges), throughout range at 70F (21.1C).
Pressure Limits: -20 Hg to 15 psig (-0.677 to 1.034 bar); MP option: 35 psig
(2.41 bar); HP option: 80 psig (5.52 bar).
Overpressure: Relief plug opens at approximately 25 psig (1.72 bar), standard
gages only. See Overpressure Protection Note on next page.
Temperature Limits: 20 to 140F* (-6.67 to 60C).
Size: 4 (101.6 mm) diameter dial face.
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. Consult factory for other
position orientations.
Process Connections: 1/8 female NPT duplicate high and low pressure taps - one
pair side and one pair back.
Weight: 1 lb 2 oz (510 g), MP & HP 2 lb 2 oz (963 g).
Standard Accessories: Two 1/8 NPT plugs for duplicate pressure taps, two 1/8
pipe thread to rubber tubing adapter and three flush mounting adapters with screws.
(Mounting and snap ring retainer substituted for 3 adapters in MP & HP gage
accessories.)
*Low temperature models available as special option.
For applications with high cycle rate within gage total pressure rating, next higher rating
is recommended. See Medium and High pressure options at lower left.
Series
2000
Magnehelic

Indicate Positive, Negative or Differential, Accurate within 2%
OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Flush, Surface or
Pipe Mounted
1/8 FEMALE NPT
HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1-3/4
(44.45)
1/2
(12.70)
1/8 FEMALE
NPT LOW
PRESSURE
CONNECTION
11/16
(17.46)
17/32
(13.49)
4-3/4 (120.65) PANEL CUTOUT
5
(127)
4-47/64
(120.27)
3/16
(4.76)
2-17/32
(64.29)
15/32
(11.91)
4-1/2
(114.3)
1-1/4
(31.75)
5-1/2
(139.70)
MOUNTING RING
RUBBER PRESSURE RELIEF
PLUG WILL UNSEAT ITSELF
WHEN GAGE IS
OVERPRESSURIZED
(3) 6-32 X 3/16 (4.76) DEEP HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED ON A 4-1/8
(104.78) BOLT CIRCLE FOR
PANEL MOUNTING
1/8 FEMALE NPT
HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1-3/4
(44.45)
1/2
(12.70)
1/8 FEMALE NPT
LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
11/16
(17.46)
15/32
(11.91)
1-11/16
(42.86)
4-1/2
(114.3)
1-1/4
(31.75)
17/32
(13.49)
.025 (.64) SPACE CREATED BY 3
SPACER PADS WHEN SURFACE
MOUNTED. DO NOT OBSTRUCT.
PROVIDES PATH FOR RELIEF OF
OVERPRESSURE.
1/8 FEMALE
NPT HIGH
PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1/8 FEMALE
NPT LOW
PRESSURE
CONNECTION
7/16
(11.11)
4-3/4
(120.65)
Transparent Overlays
Furnished in red and green to highlight and emphasize critical
pressures.
Adjustable Signal Flag
Integral with plastic gage cover. Available for most models
except those with medium or high pressure construction. Can
be ordered with gage or separate.
Add suffix -ASF to end of gage model number
LED Setpoint Indicator
Bright red LED on right of scale shows when setpoint is
reached. Field adjustable from gage face, unit operates on 12-
24 VDC. Requires MP or HP style cover and bezel.
See Note.
Add suffix -SP to end of gage model number
004.P.N:Layout 2 2/15/11 3:14 PM Page 1
D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Quality design and construction features
O-ring seal for cover assures pressure integrity of case.
OVERPRESSURE PROTECTION
Blowout plug is comprised of a rubber plug on the rear which
functions as a relief valve by unseating and venting the gage
interior when over pressure reaches approximately 25 psig
(1.7 bar). To provide a free path for pressure relief, there are
four spacer pads which maintain 0.023 inch clearance when
gage is surface mounted. Do not obstruct the gap created by
these pads.
The blowout plug is not used on models above 180 inches of
water pressure, medium or high pressure models, or on gages
which require an elastomer other than silicone for the
diaphragm.
The blowout plug should not be used as a system overpressure
control. High supply pressures may still cause the gage to fail
due to over pressurization, resulting in property damage or
serious injury. Good engineering practices should be utilized to
prevent your system from exceeding the ratings or any
component.
Die cast aluminum case is precision made and iridite-dipped
to withstand 168 hour salt spray corrosion test. Exterior
finished in baked dark gray hammerloid. One case size is used
for all standard pressure options, and for both surface and
flush mounting.
Silicone rubber diaphragm with integrally molded O-ring is
supported by front and rear plates. It is locked and sealed in
position with a sealing plate and retaining ring. Diaphragm
motion is restricted to prevent damage due to overpressures.
Samarium Cobalt magnet mounted at one end of range spring
rotates helix without mechanical linkages.
Bezel provides flange for flush mounting in panel.
Clear plastic face is highly resistant to breakage. Provides
undistorted viewing of pointer and scale.
Precision litho-printed scale is accurate and easy to read.
Red tipped pointer of heat treated aluminum tubing is easy
to see. It is rigidly mounted on the helix shaft.
Pointer stops of molded rubber prevent pointer over-travel
without damage.
Wishbone assembly provides mounting for helix, helix
bearings and pointer shaft.
Jeweled bearings are shock-resistant mounted; provide
virtually friction-free motion for helix. Motion damped with
high viscosity silicone fluid.
Zero adjustment screw is conveniently located in the plastic
cover, and is accessible without removing cover. O-ring seal
provides pressure tightness.
Helix is precision made from an alloy of high magnetic
permeability. Mounted in jeweled bearings, it turns
freely, following the magnetic field to move the
pointer across the scale.
Calibrated range spring is flat spring steel. Small amplitude of
motion assures consistency and long life. It reacts to pressure
on diaphragm. Live length adjustable for calibration.
Series 2000 Magnehelic

Gage Models and Ranges
Page VI shows examples of special models built for OEM customers. For special scales furnished in ounces per square inch, inches of mercury, metric units, square root scales
for volumetric flow, etc., contact the factory.
3 0 3
5 0 5
10 0 10
Range, Pa
10 0 50
0 60
0 100
0 125
0 250
0 300
0 500
0 750
0 100 x 10
Range MM
of Water
0 6
0 10
0 15
0 25
0 30
0 50
0 80
0 100
0 125
0 150
0 200
0 250
0 300
Range in W.C./
Velocity F.P.M.
0 .25/300 2000
0 .50/500 2800
0 1.0/500 4000
0 2.0/1000 5600
0 5.0/2000 8800
0 10/2000 12500
Range,
kPa
0 0.5
0 1
0 1.5
0 2
0 2.5
0 3
0 4
0 5
0 8
0 10
0 15
0 20
0 25
0 30
.5 0 .5
1 0 1
1.25 0 1.25
1.5 0 1.5
Range,
Pa or kPa
0 62 Pa
0 125 Pa
0 250 Pa
0 500 Pa
0 750 Pa
0 1.0 kPa
0 1.25 kPa
0 1.5 kPa
0 2.0 kPa
0 2.5 kPa
0 3.7 kPa
0 5 kPa
0 6.2 kPa
0 12.4 kPa
0 15 kPa
Range, Pa
30 0 30
50 0 50
60 0 60
100 0 100
125 0 125
150 0 150
250 0 250
500 0 500
Range Inches
of Water
.05 0 .2
0 .25
0 .50
0 1.0
0 2.0
0 3.0
0 4.0
0 5.0
0 6.0
0 8.0
0 10
0 12
0 15
0 20
0 25
0 30
0 40
0 50
0 60
0 80
0 100
0 120
0 150
0 160
0 180
0 250
Range
PSI
0 1
0 2
0 3
0 4
0 5
0 10
0 15
0 20
0 30
0.125 0 0.125
.25 0 .25
.5 0 .5
1 0 1
2 0 2
5 0 5
10 0 10
15 0 15
Range,
CM of
Water
0 15
0 20
0 25
0 50
0 80
0 100
0 150
0 200
0 250
0 300
2 0 2
5 0 5
15 0 15
ACCESSORIES
A-299, Surface Mounting Bracket
A-300, Flat Flush Mounting Bracket
A-310A, 3 Way Vent Valve
A-321, Safety Relief Valve
A-432, Portable Kit
A-448, 3 piece magnet kit for mounting Magnehelic
gage directly to magnetic surface

A-605, Air Filter Kit
A-610, Pipe Mount Kit
OPTIONS To order, add suffix: I.E. 2001 ASF
ASF, Adjustable Signal Flag
HP, High Pressure Option
LT, Low Temperatures to 20F
MP, Med. Pressure Option
SP, Setpoint Indicator
Scale Overlays, Red, Green, Mirrored or
Combination, Specify Locations
These ranges calibrated
for vertical scale position.
Accuracy +/ 3%
Accuracy +/ 4%
*MP option standard
**HP option standard
2300-00
2300-0
2301
2302
2304
2310
2320
2330
Model
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2210*
2215*
2220*
2230**
Dual Scale Air Velocity Units
For use with pitot tube
Zero Center Ranges
Zero Center Ranges
2300-6MM
2300-10MM
2300-20MM
Model
2000-00AV
2000-0AV
2001AV
2002AV
2005AV
2010AV
Model
2000-15CM
2000-20CM
2000-25CM
2000-50CM
2000-80CM
2000-100CM
2000-150CM
2000-200CM
2000-250CM
2000-300CM
Model
2000-60NPA
2000-60PA
2000-100PA
2000-125PA
2000-250PA
2000-300PA
2000-500PA
2000-750PA
2000-1000PA
Model
2000-6MM
2000-10MM
2000-15MM
2000-25MM
2000-30MM
2000-50MM
2000-80MM
2000-100MM
2000-125MM
2000-150MM
2000-200MM
2000-250MM
2000-300MM
Model
2000-0.5KPA
2000-1KPA
2000-1.5KPA
2000-2KPA
2000-2.5KPA
2000-3KPA
2000-4KPA
2000-5KPA
2000-8KPA
2000-10KPA
2000-15KPA
2000-20KPA
2000-25KPA
2000-30KPA
2300-4CM
2300-10CM
2300-30CM
2300-1KPA
2300-2KPA
2300-2.5KPA
2300-3KPA
Model
2300-60PA
2300-100PA
2300-120PA
2300-200PA
2300-250PA
2300-300PA
2300-500PA
2300-1000PA
Model
2000-00N
2000-00
2000-0
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2008
2010
2012
2015
2020
2025
2030
2040
2050
2060
2080
2100
2120
2150
2160
2180
*
2250
*
Dual Scale English/Metric Models
Model
2000-OOD
2000-OD
2001D
2002D
2003D
2004D
2005D
2006D
2008D
2010D
2015D
2020D
2025D
2050D
2060D
Range,
In. W.C.
0 .25
0 0.5
0 1.0
0 2.0
0 3.0
0 4.0
0 5.0
0 6.0
0 8.0
0 10
0 15
0 20
0 25
0 50
0 60
Zero Center Ranges
Zero Center Ranges
Zero Center Ranges

6
D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Pressure
Reference
Port
03/16
[4.8]
1/4
[6.4]
3/4
[19.1]
6-1/2
[165.1]
5-3/8
[136.5]
5-3/8
[136.5]
6-1/2
[165.1]
04-33/64
[114.7]
SPECIFICATIONS
Material: White ABS plastic.
The A-464 Mounting Kit provides a flush mounting solution for Magnehelic
gage
installations for applications such as clean rooms and mechanical equipment rooms. The A-
464 can also be used as an alternative means to flush mount Magnehelic
gages on control
panel enclosures. The space pressure reference port eliminates the need to drill separate
holes and run tubing long distances. Utilizing the A-464 for Magnehelic
gage installations
reduces installation time while also producing an aesthetically pleasing result.
Flush Mount Kit for Magnehelic
Gages
Ideal for Clean Rooms & Control Panels
Model
A-464
Magnehelic
Accessories
A-432 A-605
A-610
Flush ...Surface...or Pipe Mounted
A-464 Back View
Shown with A-465
Model A-464
Model A-432 Portable Kit
Combine carrying case with any Magnehelic
gage of standard range, except high

pressure connection. Includes 9 ft (2.7 m) of 3/16 I.D. rubber tubing, standhang
bracket and terminal tube with holder.
Model A-605 Air Filter Gage Accessory Kit
Adapts any standard Magnehelic
gage for use as an air filter gage. Includes

aluminum surface mounting bracket with screws, two 5 ft (1.5 m) lengths of 1/4
aluminum tubing two static pressure tips and two molded plastic vent valves, integral
compression fittings on both tips and valves.
Model A-610 Pipe Mounting Kit
With the optional A-610 Pipe Mounting Kit Magnehelic
Gages may be conveniently

installed on horizontal or vertical 1-1/4 - 2 pipe. Although calibrated for vertical
position, many ranges above 1 may be used at any angle by simply re-zeroing.
However, for maximum accuracy, they must be calibrated in the same position in
which they are used. These characteristics make Magnehelic
gages ideal for both

stationary and portable applications. A 4-9/16 hole is required for flush panel
mounting. Complete mounting and connection fittings plus instructions are furnished
with each instrument.
The new mounting flange can be used on any Dwyer Instruments, Inc. gage that possesses
a 4-1/2 (115 mm) diameter housing. The flange is secured to the gage behind its bezel with
three set screws. The set screws hold the gage tight in place. The gage/flange can then be
quickly attached to a surface or panel with a drill and the supplied mounting screws. The
flanges three mounting holes follow the industry standard mounting pattern. The flange is
made of a robust plastic composite and comes with three pre-installed set screws, an allen
wrench for tightening and three flange mounting screws.
SPECIFICATIONS
Flange Materials: Plastic.
Weight: 2.3 oz (65 g).
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
3 Pre-installed metal set screws
3 Mounting screws
1 Allen wrench
1 Instruction manual with mounting template
Magnehelic
Gage Panel Mounting Flange

Flange for Panel Mounting 4-1/2 Diameter Gages
Model
A-286
11/16
[17.46]
1/2
[12.70]
(3) #6-32 X 3/16 [4.76] OP HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED ON A 4-1/8 [104.78]
BOLT CIRCLE FOR PANEL MOUNTING
(3) 11/32 [8.73] X 82 COUNTERSINK
3/16 [4.76] X THRU ON A 5-17/32 [140.49]
BOLT CIRCLE FOR PANEL MOUNTING WITH FLANGE
1/8 FEMALE NPT HIGH
PRESSURE CONNECTION
1-3/4
[44.45]
17/32
[13.49]
4-31/64
[113.89]
15/32
[11.91]
1019/32
[40.48]
15/32
[11.91] 4-3/4
[120.65]
6-9/32
[120.65]
5/8
[15.88]
1/8 FEMALE NPT HIGH
PRESSURE CONNECTION
1/8 FEMALE NPT LOW
PRESSURE CONNECTION
1-1/4
[31.75]
1/8 FEMALE NPT LOW
PRESSURE CONNECTION
(3) #8-32 X 1/4 [6.35] LG
SET SCREWS EQUALLY SPACED
Model A-286
006.P.N:Layout 2 2/15/11 3:19 PM Page 1
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 Australia Phone (+61) (0) 2 4272 2055 7
D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Venturi Flowmeter with Magnehelic
Gage
2.5% Accuracy, Dual Scale in SCFM & w.c.
The Venturi Flow Meter with Magnehelic
Gage is fabricated from

aluminum and has a gradual Venturi profile to reduce pressure losses through
the meter. Flexible connections enable the meter to be used in vertical or
horizontal applications. The Magnehelic
gage provides a large, clear and

accurate display of your differential pressure reading. Each meter is calibrated
at standard atmospheric conditions. The dual scale reads in SCFM and in w.c.
The meter is supplied with easy to read reference charts for various flow
conditions. It is available in line sizes from 1 to 4 and can handle vacuum and
pressure applications.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases. (Natural gas
option available).
Wetted Materials: Aluminum, silicone, acrylic, polycarbonate, high
carbon steel, low carbon steel, brass, paper, acrylic paint, enamel paint,
alkyd coating, nickel plate, zinc plate, helsel FC, 300 series stainless
steel, PTFE, Loctite
AV sealant, commercial black rubber, neoprene,

samarium cobalt, nickel alloy steel cover, beryllium copper.
Housing: Die cast aluminum case and bezel, with acrylic cover. Exterior
finish is coated gray to withstand 168 hour salt spray corrosion test.
Accuracy: 2.5% FS.
Pressure Limits: -20 Hg to 15 psig (-0.677 bar to 1.034 bar); MP
option: 35 psig (2.41 bar). For applications with high cycle rate within
gage total pressure rating, next higher rating is recommended.
Overpressure: Relief plug opens at approximately 25 psig (1.72 kPa).
Temperature Limits: 20 to 140F (-6.67 to 60C).
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. Consult factory
for other position orientations.
Process Connection: Female NPT of nominal line size. (See chart).
Weight: Gage only: 1 lb 2 oz (510 g), MP & HP 2 lb 2 oz (963 g).
Venturi: see chart.
[A]
[F]
[E]
FLOW
[C]
[B]
[4.750]
[D]
90 APPROX.
[G] [H]
[.500]
[1.250]
[.687]
SIDE PORTS
PLUGGED
GAGE ASSEMBLY IS SHOWN
TO ILLUSTRATE MOUNTING
ORIENTATION WITH THE
VF KIT.
VFLO Kit
VF1
VF2
VF3
VF4
VF5
Line Size
1 FNPT
1.5 FNPT
2 FNPT
3 FNPT
4 FNPT
A
4.500
6
7.750
11
14.500
B
2.687
2.562
2.562
2.734
2.734
C
2
2.500
3
4
5.000
D
2.015
2.625
3.312
4.625
5.172
E
2.125
2.375
2.875
4
5.000
F
3.125
3.375
3.875
5.500
6.500
G
1.359
2
2.703
4
5.328
H
1.125
1.375
1.750
2.375
3.000
J
4.625
5.250
5.750
7
9.250
K
6.375
7.125
7.875
9.625
11.500
Option
Number
2000-10VF1
2000-20VF1
2000-40VF1
2000-10VF2
2000-20VF2
2000-40VF2
2000-10VF3
2000-20VF3
2000-40VF3
2000-10VF4
2000-20VF4
2000-40VF4
2000-10VF5
2000-20VF5
2000-40VF5
Range
0-10 in w.c. & 0-20 SCFM air
0-20 in w.c. & 0-30 SCFM air
0-40 in w.c. & 0-40 SCFM air
0-10 in w.c. & 0-50 SCFM air
0-20 in w.c. & 0-70 SCFM air
0-40 in w.c. & 0-100 SCFM air
0-10 in w.c. & 0-85 SCFM air
0-20 in w.c. & 0-120 SCFM air
0-40 in w.c. & 0-160 SCFM air
0-10 in w.c. & 0-200 SCFM air
0-20 in w.c. & 0-290 SCFM air
0-40 in w.c. & 0-395 SCFM air
0-10 in w.c. & 0-350 SCFM air
0-20 in w.c. & 0-500 SCFM air
0-40 in w.c. & 0-675 SCFM air
Line
Size
1
1
1
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
Loctite

is a registered trademark of Henkel Corporation
Series 2000, Magnehelic
Differential Pressure Gage

To Create Venturi Model, add option from chart to end of 2000.
Ex: 2000-10VF1 for 10 in w.c. & 20 SCFM of Air Scale with 1
Venturi Flow Tube
Weight (Not Including Gage)
lb (kg)
3 (1.36)
3 (1.36)
3 (1.36) ( )
4.5 (2.04)
4.5 (2.04)
4.5 (2.04) ( )
6 (2.72)
6 (2.72)
6 (2.72) ( )
11 (4.99)
11 (4.99)
11 (4.99) ( )
18 (8.16)
18 (8.16)
18 (8.16)
ACCESSORIES
MV4-LM1, Mini brass ball valve with lever handle.
1/8 F X 1/8 MNPT
MV4-LM2, Mini brass valve with tee handle.
1/8 M X 1/8 FNPT
MV5-WM1, Mini brass ball valve with wedge handle.
1/8 M X 1/8 FNPT
007.P.N:Layout 2 2/16/11 9:36 AM Page 1
8
D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Combining clean design, small size and low cost with enough accuracy for
all but the most demanding applications our Minihelic
II gage offers the latest

in design features for a dial type differential pressure gage. It is our most
compact gage but is easy to read and can safely operate at total pressures up to
30 psig. The Minihelic
II is designed for panel mounting in a single 2-5/8

diameter hole. Standard pressure connections are barbed fittings for 3/16 I.D.
tubing; optional 1/8 male NPT connections are also available. Over-pressure
protection is built into the Minihelic II
gage by means of a blow-out membrane

molded in conjunction with the diaphragm. Accidental over-ranging up to the
rated total pressure will not damage the gage. With removable lens and rear
housing, the gage may be easily serviced at minimum cost.
With the housing molded from mineral and glass filled nylon and the lens
molded from acrylic, the gage will withstand rough use and exposure as well
as high total pressure. The 5% accuracy and low cost of the Minihelic
II gage
make it well-suited for a wide variety of OEM and user applications. OEM
applications include cabinet air purging, medical respiratory therapy
equipment, air samplers, laminar flow hoods, and electronic air cooling
systems. As an air filter gage, the Minihelic
II gage finds many end use

applications on large stationary engines, compressors, ventilators, and air
handling units. The Minihelic
II gage is suitable for many of the same

applications as the Magnehelic
gage where the greater accuracy, sensitivity,

and higher and lower differential pressure ranges of the Magnehelic
gage are
not required.
PRESSURE CONNECTIONS
B A
LOW PRESSURE PORT
7/16 [11.11] HOLE IN
PANEL FOR SURFACE MOUNT
(2) 5/32 HOLES
IN PANEL FOR SURFACE
MOUNT
HIGH PRESSURE PORT
7/16 [11.11] HOLE IN
PANEL FOR SURFACE MOUNT 2-21/64 [59.18]
SURFACE
MOUNT HOLES
1
[25.40]
3-1/16
[77.79]
2-19/32
[65.88]
2-3/8
[60.33]
9/32
[7.14]
1-7/16
[36.51]
Minihelic
II Differential Pressure Gages

Combining High Accuracy, Compactness, Dependability, and Low Cost
Series
2-5000
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and compatible gases.
Housing: Glass filled nylon; acrylic lens.
Accuracy: 5% of full scale at 70F (21.1C).
Pressure Limits: 30 psig (2.067 bar) continuous to either pressure
connection.
Temperature Limits: 20 to 120F (-6.67 to 48.9C).
Size: 2-1/16 (52.39 mm) diameter dial face.
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. Consult factory
for other position orientations.
Process Connections: Barbed, for 3/16 I.D. tubing (standard); 1/8
male NPT (optional).
Weight: 6 oz (170.1g).
Agency Approvals: RoHS.
A. The standard Minihelic
II gage is supplied with

two barbed pressure taps molded into the rear
housing of the gage. These connections allow easy,
fast connection to the gage using 3/16 I.D. rubber or
plastic tubing.
B. For applications in systems having higher total
operating pressures, optional male 1/8 NPT
pressure connections can be supplied.
Note: the oblong over-pressure vent hole on the
back of the gage at the right of the connections. This
vent is sealed by a membrane molded in conjunction
with the diaphragm and will blow out at
approximately 75 psi.
CAUTION: For use only with air or compatible gases.
RoHS
008.P.N:Layout 2 2/11/11 9:07 AM Page 1
D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Housing is molded from strong mineral and glass
filled nylon.
Pointer stops of molded rubber prevent pointer
over travel without damage.
Full view lens is removable and molded of acrylic.
Aluminum scale litho printed black on white,
enhances readability.
Red tipped aluminum pointer, rigidly mounted to
helix is easy to see.
Wishbone assembly provides mounting for helix,
helix bearings, and pointer shaft.
Jewel bearings provide virtually friction free helix
motion.
Helix is free to rotate in jewel bearings. It aligns
with magnetic field of magnet to transmit pressure
indications to pointer.
Zero adjustment screw, located behind the
removable lens, eliminates tampering.
Range spring calibration clamp fixes live length
of spring for proper gage calibration and is factory
set and sealed.
Silicone rubber diaphragm allows accurate
response to a broad range of temperatures and at
extremely low pressure. Incorporates blow out area
for overpressure protection.
Diaphragm support plates of lightweight
aluminum on each side of the diaphragm minimize
position or attitude sensitivity and help define
pressure area.
Flat leaf range spring reacts to pressure on the
diaphragm. Live length is adjustable for calibration.
Small amplitude of motion minimizes inaccuracies
and assures long life.
Low pressure tap connects to rear chamber.
Coil spring link provides a resilient connection
between the diaphragm and the range spring.
Ceramic magnet mounted on a molded bracket at
the end of the range spring rotates the helix without
direct mechanical linkage.
High pressure tap connects with the front
chamber through passageway in the plastic case
and a sealing ring molded into the edge of the
diaphragm.
Simplicity of Design Ensures Reliable Operation
Mounting hardware is supplied with the Minihelic
II gage for panel

mounting through a single hole, 2 5/8 (67 mm) in diameter. Panel
thickness up to 1/2 (13 mm) can be accommodated with the
hardware supplied. If necessary, surface mounting of the gage can
be accomplished by means of two 4 40 screws into the tapped
mounting bracket stud holes in the rear of the gage. Surface
mounting requires clearance holes in the panel for the two pressure
taps.
PANEL MOUNTING
Model
2-5000-0
2-5001
2-5002
2-5003
2-5005
2-5010
2-5020
2-5040
2-5060
2-5100
Model
2-5000-25MM
2-5000-50MM
2-5000-100MM
Model
2-5000-125PA
2-5000-250PA
2-5000-500PA
Model
2-5000-1KPA
2-5000-3KPA
Model
2-5205
2-5210
2-5215
Range,
Inches of
Water
0 0.5
0 1.0
0 2.0
0 3.0
0 5.0
0 10
0 20
0 40
0 60
0 100
Range,
PSI
0 5
0 10
0 15
Range,
MM of
Water
0 25
0 50
0 100
Range,
Pascals
0 125
0 250
0 500
Range,
kPa
0 1
0 3
ACCESSORIES
A-434, Portable Kit
A-497, Surface Mtg. Brkt
For optional 1/8 male NPT connections, add suffix NPT to model numbers listed above.
Example: 2 5001 NPT.

10
D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
The Capsuhelic
gage is designed to give fast, accurate indication of differential

pressures. The gage may be used as a readout device when measuring flowing fluids,
pressure drop across filters, liquid levels in storage tanks and many other applications
involving pressure, vacuum or differential pressure.
Using the basic design of Dwyers time-proven Magnehelic
gage, the Capsuhelic

gage
contains a simple, frictionless movement that permits full scale readings as low as 0.5 inch
water column. The pressure being measured is held within a capsule which is an integral
part of the gage. This containment of the pressure permits the use of the gage on system
pressures of up to 500 psig, even when differentials to be read are less than 0.1 inch w.c.
The diaphragm-actuated Capsuhelic
gage requires no filling liquid which might limit its

outdoor applications. Zero and range adjustments are made from outside the gage, and
there is no need to disassemble the gage in normal service.
Note: May be used with hydrogen where pressures are less than 35 psi. Order with
a Buna-N diaphragm.
OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES
Series
4000
Capsuhelic
Pressure Gage has a large, easy-to-read 4" (102 mm) dial. Dimensions, Series 4000 Capsuhelic
Pressure Gages.
Flush mounted
in panel.
Back view shows flush
mounting adapters.
Back view for
surface mounting.
MOUNTING
Capsuhelic
gages may be flush mounted in a panel or surface mounted.

Hardware is included for either. For flush mounting, a 4-13/16 diameter cutout in
panel is required. Where high shock or vibration are problems, order optional A-
496 Heavy Duty flush mount bracket. Optional A-610 kit provides simple means of
attaching gage to 1-1/4-2" horizontal or vertical pipe. Installation is same as
Magnehelic
gage shown on page 4. All standard models are calibrated for vertical
mounting. Gages with ranges above 5 in. w.c. can be factory calibrated for horizontal
or inclined mounting on special order.
Capsuhelic

Measures Pressure, Vacuum or Differential, Suitable for Internal Pressures to 500 psig
1/4 FEMALE NPT LOW
PRESSURE CONNECTION
(AIR OR GAS)
35 TYP
13/32
[10.32] TYPE
2-19/32
[65.86]
1/2
[12.70]
5
[127.00]
4-45/64
[119.46]
3/4 [19.05] TYP
1/4 FEMALE NPT HIGH
PRESSURE CONNECTION
(AIR OR GAS)
(4) #6-32 X 3/8 [9.53] DP
HOLE ON A 4-11/32 [110.33]
BOLT CIRCLE
1/4 FEMALE NPT HIGH
PRESSURE CONNECTION
(LIQUID)
1/4 FEMALE NPT LOW
PRESSURE CONNECTION
(LIQUID)
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Aluminum case: Air and compatible gases and oil based liquids;
Brass case: Air and compatible gases and water based liquids.
Housing: Die cast aluminum with impregnated hard coating, standard. Optional
forged brass housing is required for water or water based fluids. Special material
diaphragms available, contact factory.
Accuracy: 3% of full scale at 70F (21.1C). (2% on 4000S models, 4% on
4200, 4210, 4215, 4220, 4300, 4400, and 4500).
Pressure Limits: -20 Hg to 500 psig. (-0.677 bar to 34.4 bar).
Process Connections: 1/4 female NPT high and low pressure taps, duplicated -
one pair top for air and gas, and one pair bottom for liquids.
Weight: 3 lb, 3 oz (1.45 kg) aluminum case; 7 lb, 13 oz (3.54 kg) brass case.
Standard Accessories: Two 1/4 NPT plugs for duplicate pressure taps, four flush
mounting adapters with screws and four surface mounting screws.
Adjustable Signal Flag
Integral with plastic gage cover; has external reset screw.
May be ordered factory installed on gage or separately for
field installation. Specify ASF suffix after model number.
A-314 Bleed Fitting
For easier, safer purging of trapped air when using gage with
liquids. Also useful for draining condensate when installed
in lower ports. To open, simply loosen hex nut. Solid brass.
Forged Brass Case
For applications involving water or water based liquids. To
order, add suffix B after model number. Example: 4205B.
Transparent Scale Overlays
Available in bright red, green or yellow to accent critical
pressure zones. Specify which color and portion of scale
to be covered with each.
A-471 Portable Kit
Includes plastic case, mounting bracket, A-309 3-way
manifold valve, (2) A-230 high pressure hoses and all
necessary fittings. Assembly required. Gage not included.
010.P.N:Layout 2 2/15/11 3:24 PM Page 1
D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
*These ranges available for vertical scale position only.
These ranges use Spirahelic
gage movement.
Straightforward design assures maintenance-free performance
Series 4000 Capsuhelic

Gage
Scales reading directly in flow, heights, etc., are also available.
Bezel provides flange for flush mounting in panel.
O-ring seal for cover assures dust tight integrity of
case.
Clear plastic front cover is highly resistant to
breakage. Provides undistorted viewing of pointer
and scale.
Precision scale, screen printed on aluminum, is
accurate and easy to read.
Samarium cobalt magnet mounted at end of range
spring rotates helix without mechanical linkages.
Wishbone assembly provides mounting for helix,
helix bearings and pointer shaft.
Thin wall magnetic window is well braced and of
minimum area for maximum pressure capability.
Jeweled bearings for helix are shock resistant
mounted. They provide virtually friction free rotation
for helix. Rotation is damped with high viscosity
silicone fluid.
Helix is precision milled from an alloy of high
magnetic permeability, mounted in jeweled bearings,
and rotates to align with magnetic field of magnet
and transmit pressure indication to pointer.
Zero adjustment screw is conveniently located in
plastic cover, accessible without removing cover. O
ring seal provides dust seal.
Top low pressure connection (for Air or Gas)
connects to chamber in back of diaphragm. High
pressure air or gas port (cut away; not shown)
connects with chamber in front of diaphragm through
passageways in case.
Precision made case is offered in two materials.
Standard is die cast aluminum coated inside for
resistance to most oils and similar fluids. Optional
forged brass case is recommended when using water
or water based liquids. One case size for all pressure
ranges can be either surface or flush mounted.
Silicone rubber diaphragm with integrally molded O
ring is sealed between the case and backplate.
Diaphragm motion is restricted to prevent damage due
to over pressure.
Diaphragm support plate of stainless steel minimizes
position or attitude sensitivity.
Calibrated range spring is a flat leaf of nickel plated
spring steel. Small amplitude of motion assures
consistency and long life. It reacts to pressure on
diaphragm. Live length factory adjusted for calibration.
Bottom high pressure connection (for Liquids)
connects to chamber in front of diaphragm. Low
pressure liquid connection (not visible) connects with
chamber in back of diaphragm through
passageways in case.
Range spring calibration is set by custom
camlock. Rate adjust and rate adjust lock are
coaxial and are factory set and sealed.
Model
*4000-0
*4001
*4002
*4003
*4004
*4005
*4006
*4008
*4010
*4015
*4020
*4025
*4030
*4040
*4050
*4060
*4080
*4100
*4150
*4200
*4300
*4400
*4500
Model
4201
4202
4203
4204
4205
4210
4215
4220
4230S
4260S
42100S
42300S
Model
*4302
*4304
4310
4320
4330
Range,
Inches
of
Water
0 .50
0 1.0
0 2.0
0 3.0
0 4.0
0 5.0
0 6.0
0 8.0
0 10
0 15
0 20
0 25
0 30
0 40
0 50
0 60
0 80
0 100
0 150
0 200
0 300
0 400
0 500
Range
Zero Center
Inches of
Water
1 0 1
2 0 2
5 0 5
10 0 10
15 0 15
Range
PSID
0 1
0 2
0 3
0 4
0 5
0 10
0 15
0 20
0 30
0 60
0 100
0 300
ACCESSORIES
A-309, 3 way Manifold Valve
A-314, Bleed Fitting
A-370, Mounting Bracket
A-471, Portable Kit
A-496, Flush Mount Bracket
A-610, Pipe Mount Kit
OPTIONS
Add Options as Suffix, Example 4001 ASF
ASF (Adjustable Signal Flag)
B (Brass Case)
Scale Overlays Red, Green, Mirrored or combination. Specify Locations

12
D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
DM-1000
DigiMag
Digital Differential Pressure

and Flow Gages
24 Volt or Battery Powered, Fits in Magnehelic
Gage Cut-Out
The Digi-Mag
Series DM-1000 Digital Differential Pressure and Flow Gages

monitor the pressure of air and compatible gases just as its famous analog predecessor the
Magnehelic
Differential Pressure Gage. All models are factory calibrated to specific ranges
as listed in the chart below. The 4-digit LCD can display readings in common English and
metric units so conversions are not necessary. The simplified four button operation reduces
set up time and simplifies calibration with its digital push button zero and span.
The DigiMag
Digital Gages are more versatile than analog gages with their ability to be
field-programmed to select pressure, air velocity or flow operation depending on model.
The DigiMag
Digital Gages have an added feature for filter applications where a set point
can be input where the display will blink when the filter is dirty, alerting the user that a
maintenance action needs to occur.
Programming the Series DM-1000 is easy using the menu key to access 4 simplified menus
which provide access to depending on model: Security level; engineering units; K-factor for
use with various Pitot tubes and flow sensors, circular or rectangular duct size for
volumetric flow operation; filter set point; view peak and valley process readings; digital
damping for smoothing erratic process applications; display update to conserve battery life;
zero and span field calibration.
The Series DM-1000 DigiMag
Digital Differential Pressure and Air Flow Gages possess a

full-scale accuracy of 1% on ranges down to 2 w.c. and 2% accuracy down to the very low
ranges of 1 to 0.25 w.c. DigiMag
Digital Differential Pressure Gages offer power

versatility by working with 9-24 VDC line power or simply 9V battery power. If using line
power and connecting the 9V battery, the battery will act as a back-up if line power is lost
or interrupted.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non combustible, compatible gases.
Housing Materials: Glass filled plastic.
Accuracy: 1% F.S. including linearity, hysteresis and repeatability; 2% F.S. for
ranges 1 in w.c. and below.
Temperature Limits: 0 to 140F ( 18 to 60C).
Compensated Temperature Limits: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Long Term Stability: 1% F.S. per year.
Thermal Effect: 0.05% F.S./F typ.; 0.10% F.S./F for ranges 1 in w.c. and
below.
Display: 4 digit LCD (digits: 0.60H x 0.33W).
Display Update: Selectable for 1 second to 10 minutes or update only from button
push.
Pressure Limits: Normal and bi directional ranges 5 w.c. and lower = 2 psi (13.7
kPa); Normal and bi directional ranges 10 w.c. and higher = 11 psi (75 KPa).
Selectable Engineering Units: in w.c., psi, kPa, Pa, mm w.c., mBar, in Hg, mm
Hg, FS (0 100%).
Power Requirements: 9V battery or external power supply 9 24 VDC. Battery
included but not connected.
Type of Battery: 9V alkaline battery (Duracell
PC 1604 or equivalent).
Battery Service Life: Battery life depending on the display update setting: 150
hours (typical) if display update = 1 second; 9 month (typical) if display update =
10 minutes; 1.5 years (typical) if display update is disabled. Battery may last up to
four times longer when using lithium based battery ULTRALIFE U9VL J.
Current Consumption: 5 mA maximum.
Electrical Connections: Removable terminal block for 16 to 26 AWG.
Electrical Entry: Cable gland for 0.114 to 0.250 (2.9 to 6.4 mm) diameter cable.
Process Connections: 1/8 (3 mm) I.D. tubing.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66).
Weight: 1.18 lb (535 g).
Size: 5 (127 mm) O.D. front face.
Agency Approvals: CE.
Model
DM-1102
DM-1103
DM-1104
DM-1105
DM-1107
DM-1108
DM-1109
DM-1110
DM-1111
DM-1112
(in w.c.)
0.250
0.500
1.000
2.000
5.000
10.00
15.00
25.00
50.00
100.0
psi
0.181
0.361
0.543
0.903
1.806
3.613
kPa
0.062
0.124
0.249
0.498
1.245
2.491
3.738
6.227
12.45
24.91
Pa
62.20
124.5
249.1
498.2
1245
2491
3738
6227
mbar
0.622
1.245
2.492
4.982
12.45
24.91
37.38
62.27
124.5
249.1
mm w.c.
6.35
12.70
25.40
50.80
127.0
254.0
381.0
635.0
1270
2540
in Hg
0.368
0.736
1.104
1.839
3.678
7.355
mm Hg
0.467
0.934
1.868
3.736
9.34
18.68
28.02
46.71
93.42
186.8
NEW PRODUCT!
% of FS
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
5.00
2.33
MENU
WAKE
DigiMag
E
Contact the factory for available bi directional ranges from 0.25 w.c. to 10 w.c.
Range
ACCESSORIES
A-299, Surface Mounting Braket
A-300, Flat Flush Mounting Braket
A-286, 4 1/2 Gage Panel Mounting Flange
A-310A, 3 Way Vent Valve
A-480, Plastic Static Pressure Tip
A-481, Installer kit. Includes 2 plastic static pressure tips
and 7 ft (2.1 m) of PVC tubing
Resolution
(in w.c.)
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.002
0.010
0.010
0.010
0.020
0.100
Note: For air flow models change 11XX to 12XX.

D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
The Series PTGD Differential Pressure Piston-Type Gage can be used
to measure the pressure drop across filters, strainers, pump performance
testing, and heat exchanger pressure drop monitoring. Its simple, rugged
design possesses weather and corrosion resistant gage front with a shatter
resistant lens. The Series PTGD contains a piston-sensing element which
provides different differential pressure ranges with full-scale accuracies of
2%. Constructed with aluminum or 316SS and available with two 1/4 female
NPT end connections, the Series PTGD provides over-range protection rated
to 3000 psig (200 bar) or 6000 psig (400 bar) depending on model. Standard
models come with in-line connections. Back or bottom connections are also
available.
Series
PTGD
Differential Pressure Piston-Type Gage
Excellent Accuracy and Over-Pressure Ratings
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
Wetted Materials: Gage body: Aluminum or 316 SS; Piston: Aluminum or
316 SS; Spring: 302 SS; Seals: Buna N (standard); PTFE, Ceramic
magnet; Dial case: Nylon 6 30% glass filled gage case.
Window: Acrylic.
Accuracy: 2% FS ascending.
Temperature Limit: 176F (80C).
Pressure Limits: 3000 psi (206 bar) for aluminum body; 6000 psi (413
bar) for SS body.
Size: 2.5 (63 mm) or 4.5 (115 mm).
Mounting Orientation: Mount in any position.
Process Connections: 1/4 female NPT end connections standard; 1/4
female NPT back or bottom connections available. All styles available
with 1/4 BSP.
Weight: Aluminum: 2.5 0.88 lb (399 g); 4.5 1.35 lb (612 g); Stainless
steel: 2.5 1.75 lb (794 g); 4.5 2.3 lb (1.04 kg).
1-9/32
[32.20]
1-4
[6.50]
6-7/32
[157.93]
1/4 NPT
BOTH ENDS
1-13/16
[46.00]
3 [76.00]
3-31/32
[101.00]
5-1/4
[133.30]
1-3/32 [28.10]
2-1/8
[54.00]
1 [25.20]
1/2 [12.60]
7-9/32
[32.20]
1-31/32
[50.00]
4X 3/16 [5.16]
EQUALLY SPACED
ON A 5-5/8 [142.85]
BOLT CIRCLE
5-9/32 [133.97]
PANEL CUTOUT
1-31/32
[50.00]
2X 1/4 UNC
1/2 [12.60]
1 [25.20]
1-7/8
[47.60]
7/8 [22.00]
3-31/32
[101.00]
3[76.00]
1-13/16
[46.00]
1/4 NPT
BOTH ENDS
4X 3/16 [5.16]
EQUALLY SPACED ON A
3-1/2 [88.90] BOLT CIRCLE
3-1/32 [76.99]
PANEL CUTOUT
HIGH LOW
HIGH LOW
3
[76.20]
3-3/32
[83.00]
Model
PTGD-AA01A
PTGD-AA02A
PTGD-AA03A
PTGD-AA04A
PTGD-AA05A
PTGD-AA06A
PTGD-AA07A
PTGD-AA08A
PTGD-AA09A
PTGD-AA10A
PTGD-AA11A
PTGD-AA12A
PTGD-SA01A
PTGD-SA02A
PTGD-SA03A
PTGD-SA04A
PTGD-SA05A
PTGD-SA06A
PTGD-SA07A
PTGD-SA08A
PTGD-SA09A
PTGD-SA10A
PTGD-SA11A
PTGD-SA12A
Description
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Stainless Steel
2.5 Stainless Steel
2.5 Stainless Steel
2.5 Stainless Steel
2.5 Stainless Steel
2.5 Stainless Steel
2.5 Stainless Steel
2.5 Stainless Steel
2.5 Stainless Steel
2.5 Stainless Steel
2.5 Stainless Steel
2.5 Stainless Steel
NEW PRODUCT!
OPTIONS
-V, FKM fluoroelastomer seals
-N, EPDM seals
-PY, Glycerine fill
-PF, Pointer follower
-RP, Reverse port
-SP1, 0.5A SPST with DIN plug
-SP2, 0.25A SPDT with DIN plug
Note: For 4.5 dial face, change AA to AC for Aluminum and
SA to SC for Stainless Steel
For back or bottom connections as well as female BSP threads,
contact the factory
Range
0 5 psid (0.25 bar)
0 10 psid (0.75 bar)
0 15 psid (1 bar)
0 20 psid (1.6 bar)
0 25 psid (1.6 bar)
0 30 psid (2 bar)
0 40 psid (3 bar)
0 50 psid (3.5 bar)
0 60 psid (4 bar)
0 80 psid (5.5 bar)
0 100 psid (7 bar)
0 150 psid (10 bar)
0 5 psid (0.25 bar)
0 10 psid (0.75 bar)
0 15 psid (1 bar)
0 20 psid (1.6 bar)
0 25 psid (1.6 bar)
0 30 psid (2 bar)
0 40 psid (3 bar)
0 50 psid (3.5 bar)
0 60 psid (4 bar)
0 80 psid (5.5 bar)
0 100 psid (7 bar)
0 150 psid (10 bar)

14
D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
G
a
g
e
s
/
S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,

D
g
t
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Digihelic
Differential Pressure Controller

Digihelic
Controller in Photohelic
Gage, Square Root Output for Flow

Series
DH3
(4) 6-32 HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED ON A
5-1/8 [130.18] B.C.
PANEL MOUNTING
1/8 FEMALE NPT
LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1/8 FEMALE NPT
HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION
2-1/16
[52.39]
2
[50.80]
1-1/4
[31.75]
4-47/64
[120.25]
5
[127.00]
4 [101.60]
FACE
5-1/2 [139.70] O.D.
MOUNTING RING
5/8 [15.88]
PANEL MAX
2-1/2
[63.50]
3/16
[4.76]
1/8 FEMALE NPT HIGH
PRESSURE CONNECTION
1/2
[12.70]
1-9/32
[32.54]
11/16
[17.46]
30
1-3/4
[44.45]
1/2 [12.70]
11/16
[17.46]
1/8 FEMALE NPT
LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
(3) 3/16 [4.77] HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED ON A
4-1/8 [104.78] B.C.
SURFACE MOUNTING
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing Material: Die cast aluminum case and bezel.
Accuracy: < 5 w.c. (except 2.5 w.c.) : 1%; All other ranges: 0.5%
at 77F (25C) including hysteresis and repeatability (after 1 hour warm
up).
Stability: < 1% per year.
Pressure Limits: Ranges 2.5 w.c.: 25 psi; 2.5, 5 w.c.: 5 psi; 10
w.c.: 5 psi; 25 w.c.: 5 psi; 50 w.c.: 5 psi; 100 w.c.: 9 psi.
Temperature Limits: 32 to 140F (0 to 60C).
Thermal Effects: 0.020%/F (0.036/C) from 77F (25C).
Power Requirements: 12 28 VDC, 12 28 VAC 50 to 400 Hz.
Power Consumption: 3 VA max.
Output Signal: 4 20 mA DC into 900 ohms max.
Zero & Span Adjustments: Accessible via menus.
Response Time: 250 ms (damping set to 1).
Display: Backlit 4 digit LCD 0.4 height LED indicators for set point and
alarm status.
Electrical Connections: 15 pin male high density D sub connection.
18 (46 cm) cable with 10 conductors included. 4 and 10 cables
available.
Process Connections: 1/8 female NPT. Side or back connections.
Mounting Orientation: Mount unit in vertical plane.
Size: 5 (127 mm) O.D. x 3 1/8 (79.38 mm).
Weight: 1.75 lbs. (794 g).
SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS
Switch Type: 2 SPDT relays.
Electrical Rating: 1 amp @ 30 VAC/VDC.
Set Point Adjustment: Adjustable via keypad on face.
Model
DH3-002
DH3-003
DH3-004
DH3-005
DH3-006
DH3-007
DH3-009
DH3-010
DH3-011
DH3-013
DH3-014
DH3-015
DH3-016
DH3-017
DH3-018
The Series DH3 Digihelic
Differential Pressure Controller is a 3 in 1

instrument possessing a digital display gage, control relay switches, and a
transmitter with current output all packed in the popular Photohelic
gage style
housing. Combining these 3 features allows the reduction of several instruments
with one product, saving inventory, installation time and money. The Digihelic
controller is the ideal instrument for pressure, velocity and flow applications,
achieving a 1% full scale accuracy on ranges down to the extremely low 0.25 w.c.
to 2.5 w.c. full scale. Ranges of 5 w.c. and greater maintain 0.5% F.S. accuracy.
Bi-directional ranges are also available.
The Series DH3 Digihelic
controller allows the selection of pressure, velocity

or volumetric flow operation in several commonly used engineering units. 2
SPDT control relays with adjustable deadbands are provided along with a
scalable 4-20 mA process output.
Programming is easy using the menu key to access 5 simplified menus which
provide access to: security level; selection of pressure, velocity or flow operation;
selection of engineering units; K-factor for use with flow sensors; rectangular or
circular duct for inputting area in flow applications; set point control or set point
and alarm operation; alarm operation as a high, low or high/low alarm;
automatic or manual alarm reset; alarm delay; view peak and valley process
reading; digital damping for smoothing erratic process applications; scaling the
4-20 mA process output to fit your applications range and field calibration. See
applications below for some popular uses.
APPLICATIONS
SCFM flow in ducts
Filter status
Static pressures in ducts or buildings
Damper control
Fan control
ACCESSORIES
A-298, Flat Aluminum Bracket for flush mounting.
A-370, Mounting Bracket flush mount bracket. Bracket is then
surface mounted. Steel with gray hammertone epoxy finish.
Ranges
0 0.25 w.c.
0 0.5 w.c.
0 1 w.c.
0 2.5 w.c.
0 5 w.c.
0 10 w.c.
0 25 w.c.
0 50 w.c.
0 100 w.c.
0.25 0 0.25 w.c.
0.5 0 0.5 w.c.
1 0 1 w.c.
2.5 0 2.5 w.c.
5 0 5 w.c.
10 0 10 w.c.

D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
G
a
g
e
s
/
S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,

D
g
t
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Digihelic
II Differential Pressure Controller

NEMA 4 (IP66) Housing With Large, Bright LCD, Square Root Output for Flow
Series
DHII
The Digihelic

II Controller just got better with the New Series DHII
Differential Pressure Controller. The DHII takes all the fabulous features
of the standard Digihelic
Pressure Controller and packages them in a robust

NEMA 4 (IP66) housing.
The Digihelic
II Pressure Controller combines the 2 SPDT control relays, 4-20

mA process output and Modbus
communications with a large, brightly backlit

4 digit LCD display that can easily be seen from long distances. The electrical
wiring has also been enhanced in the DHII with its detachable terminal blocks.
The removable terminals allow the installer to easily wire the terminal block
outside the housing and then attach to the circuit board, reducing wiring
difficulties and installation time in the process.
The Digihelic
II Differential Pressure Control in the new NEMA 4 (IP66)

enclosure enables this product to be the perfect choice when mounting pressure
controls outdoors in such applications as rooftop air handlers. This housing also
makes it the ideal solution for surface mounting in clean rooms or facilities
where water or a cleaning solution is utilized in maintaining plant cleanliness.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non combustible,
compatible gases.
Housing Material: Aluminum,
glass.
Accuracy: 0.5% at 77F (25C)
including hysteresis and
repeatability (after 1 hour warm
up).
Pressure Limits: Ranges 2.5
in. w.c. = 2 psi; 5: 5 psi; 10: 5
psi; 25: 5 psi; 50: 5 psi, 100: 9
psi.
Temperature Limits: 32 to 140F
(0 to 60C).
Compensated Temperature
Limits: 32 to 140F (0 to 60C).
Thermal Effects: 0.020%/F
(0.036/C) from 77F (25C).
Power Requirements:
High voltage power = 100 to 240
VAC, 50 to 400 Hz or 132 to 240
VDC; Low voltage power = 24
VDC 20%.
Power Consumption:
Low voltage power = 24 VDC
130 mA max; High voltage power
= 100 to 240 VAC, 132 to 240
VDC 7VA max.
Output Signal: 4 20 mA DC into
900 ohms max.
Zero & Span Adjustments:
Accessible via menus.
Response Time: 250 ms
(dampening set to 1).
Display: 4 digit backlit LCD 0.6
height. LED indicators for set point
and alarm status.
Electrical Connections: Euro
type removable terminal blocks
with watertight conduit fittings for
1/2 watertight conduit.
Process Connections: 1/8
female NPT.
Enclosure Rating: Designed to
meet NEMA 4 (IP66).
Mounting Orientation: Mount
unit in horizontal plane.
Size: 4.73 x 4.73 x 3.43 (120
mm x 120 mm x 87.1 mm).
Weight: 2 lb 10 oz (1.19 kg).
Serial Communications:
Modbus
RTU, RS485, 9600

baud.
Agency Approvals: CE, UL.
Electrical Rating: 8 amps at 240
VAC resistive.
Set Point Adjustment:
Adjustable via keypad on face.
1-1/2
[38.35]
1-45/64
[43.18]
2-23/64
[59.94]
1-31/64
[37.62]
4-23/32
[120]
4-23/32
[120]
3-7/16
[87.12]
1-5/16
[33]
1-17/32
[38.61]
45/64
[17.78]
1-1/16
[26.97]
1-7/8
[47.5]
1-45/64
[43.18]
MOUNTING HOLE
PATTERN
4X 3/16 [4.76]
CLEARANCE HOLES FOR
MOUNTING
3-17/64
[83]
4-1/8
[105]
*Velocity and volumetric flow not available on bi directional range units and models DHII 009 & DHII 010.
Modbus

is a registered trademark of Schnieder Automation, Inc.
in wc
.2500
1.000
5.000
10.00
25.00
50.00
100.0
ft wc
.4167
.8333
2.083
4.167
8.333
mm wc
6.350
25.40
127.0
254.0
635.0
1270
2540
cm wc
0.635
2.540
12.70
25.40
63.50
127.0
254.0
psi
.1806
.3613
.9032
1.806
3.613
in Hg
.3678
.7356
1.839
3.678
7.356
mm Hg
0.467
1.868
9.342
18.68
46.71
93.42
186.8
mbar
0.623
2.491
12.45
24.91
62.27
124.5
249.1
Pa
62.28
249.1
1245
2491
6227
kPa
0.249
1.245
2.491
6.227
12.45
24.91
hPa
0.623
2.491
12.45
24.91
62.27
124.5
249.1
oz/in
2
0.144
0.578
2.890
5.780
14.45
28.90
57.80
Available Pressure Engineering Units
Model
DHII-002
DHII-004
DHII-006
DHII-007
DHII-008
DHII-009*
DHII-010*
Bi-Directional* Ranges also available: DHII-012, Range: 0.25 0 0.25 w.c.
DHII-014, Range: 1.0 0 1.0 w.c.
DHII-015, Range: 2.5 0 2.5 w.c.
DHII-016, Range: 5 0 5 w.c.
DHII-017, Range: 10 0 10 w.c.
ACCESSORIES
351-9, Mother Node
silver RS 232 to RS 485 Converter with DB9F

Connector. Includes 120 VAC to 12 VDC adapter
MN-1, Mini Node
USB/RS 485 converter

A-438, Surface Mounting Brackets
DigihelicLinks
, Communications Software

16
D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
G
a
g
e
s
/
S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,

D
g
t
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Digihelic
Differential Pressure Controller

3-in-1 Instrument: Gage, Switch and Transmitter, Square Root Extractor for Air Flow
Series
DH
The Series DH Digihelic
Differential Pressure Controller is a 3-in-1

instrument possessing a digital display gage, control relay switches, and a
transmitter with current output. Combining these three features allows the
reduction of several instruments with one product, saving inventory, installation
time and money. The Digihelic
Controller is the ideal instrument for pressure,

velocity and flow applications, achieving a 0.5% full scale accuracy on ranges
from 5 to 100 in. w.c.
The Digihelic
Controller allows the selection of pressure, velocity or volumetric

flow operation in several commonly used engineering units. Two SPDT control
relays with adjustable dead bands are provided along with a scalable 4-20 mA
process output. The Series DH provides extreme flexibility in power usage by
allowing 120/220 VAC and also 24 VDC power which is often used in control
panels.
Programming is easy using the menu key to access five simplified menus which
provide access to: security level; selection of pressure, velocity or flow operation;
selection of engineering units; K-factor for use with flow sensors; rectangular or
circular duct for inputting area in flow applications; set point control or set point
and alarm operation; alarm operation as a high, low or high/low alarm;
automatic or manual alarm reset; alarm delay; view peak and valley process
readings; digital damping for smoothing erratic process applications; scaling
the 4-20 mA process output to fit your applications range; Modbus
communications; and field calibration.

With all this packed into one product it is easy to see why the Digihelic
Controller is the only instrument you will need for all your pressure applications.
APPLICATIONS
Dust collection bag filters
SCFM flow in ducts
Air flow for industrial ovens
Filter status
Clean room pressure
Fume hood air flow
Pharmaceutical or bio medical glove box pressures
Static pressures in ducts or buildings
Damper control
Fan control
1-3/4
[44.45]
4-1/2
[114.30]
1/2
[12.70]
4-1/2
[114.30]
3-19/32
[91.28]
1-15/16
[49.21]
3-25/32
[96.04]
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing Material: ABS plastic, UL approved 94 V 0.
Accuracy: 0.5% at 77F (25C) including hysteresis and repeatability.
Pressure Limits: Ranges 2.5 in. w.c. = 2 psi; 5: 5 psi; 10: 5 psi; 25:
5 psi; 50: 5 psi, 100: 9 psi.
Power Requirements: High voltage power = 100 to 240 VAC, 50 to 400
Hz or 132 to 240 VDC. Low voltage power = 24 VDC 20%.
Power Consumption:
Low voltage power = 24 VDC 130 mA max;
High voltage power = 100 to 240 VAC, 132 to 240 VDC 7VA max.
Output Signal: 4 20 mA DC into 900 ohms max.
Response Time: 250 ms.
Display: 4 digit LCD 0.4 height. LED indicators for set point and alarm
status.
Electrical Connections: Screw terminals.
Process Connections: Compression fitting for use with 1/8 ID X 1/4 OD
tubing (3.175 mm ID x 6.35 mm OD).
Enclosure Rating: Face designed to meet NEMA 4X (IP66).
Mounting Orientation: Mount unit in horizontal plane.
Size: 1/8 DIN.
Panel Cutout: 1.772 x 3.620 in (45 x 92 mm).
Weight: 14.4 oz (408 g).
Serial Communications: Modbus
RTU, RS485, 9600 baud.

Electrical Rating: 8 amps at 240 VAC resistive.
Set Point Adjustment: Adjustable via keypad on face.
Modbus


D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
G
a
g
e
s
/
S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,

D
g
t
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
*Velocity and volumetric flow not available on bi directional range units and models DH 009 & DH 010.
One Control for all your Pressure Applications
Reduces Instruments, Inventory, Installation Time and Cost
ACCESSORIES
The Mother Node
and Mini Node
converters are an easy solution for utilizing the Digihelic
Controllers RS 485
serial communication and connecting to virtually any PC.
Available Pressure Engineering Units
in wc
.2500
1.000
5.000
10.00
25.00
50.00
100.0
ft wc
.4167
.8333
2.083
4.167
8.333
mm wc
6.350
25.40
127.0
254.0
635.0
1270
2540
cm wc
0.635
2.540
12.70
25.40
63.50
127.0
254.0
psi
.1806
.3613
.9032
1.806
3.613
in Hg
.3678
.7356
1.839
3.678
7.356
mm Hg
0.467
1.868
9.342
18.68
46.71
93.42
186.8
mbar
0.623
2.491
12.45
24.91
62.27
124.5
249.1
Pa
62.28
249.1
1245
2491
6227
kPa
0.249
1.245
2.491
6.227
12.45
24.91
hPa
0.623
2.491
12.45
24.91
62.27
124.5
249.1
oz/in
2
0.144
0.578
2.890
5.780
14.45
28.90
57.80
Compact 1/8 DIN housing reduces
panel space.
Set Point Status LED Indicators display
set point activation. Allows user to view
process status from a distance.
Hot Key saves time by allowing
instant access to set point and alarms.
Set points/alarms can be easily
adjusted with arrow keys.
Menu Key Scrolls through menus to
adjust settings. 5 simple menus allow
for quick set up and reduced installation
time.
Adjustable clip for panel mounting.
Set point 2 or alarm output (SPDT).
Selectable direct acting control relay
with adjustable deadband or high, low
or high low alarm.
4-20 mA process output. View process
remotely or send signal to PLC.
Alleviates purchase of a separate
transmitter.
24 VDC power supply. Universal power
supply eliminates options, inventory and
ordering mistakes.
Selectable Engineering Units in
Pressure, Velocity or Flow, programmed
on one unit. Alleviates time consuming
conversions and flow charts.
Alarm LED Indicator shows alarm
activation status. View alarm status
from a distance.
Reset button for clearing an alarm
when alarm is set for manual operation.
Enter a menu or store a value. From
home display press to view full scale
range.
120-240 VAC power supply.
Reduce inventory and eliminate lead
times with universal power supply.
Set point 1 output (SPDT).
Direct or reverse acting control relay
with adjustable deadband.
Durable compression fittings for 1/4
O.D. x 1/8 I.D. plastic tubing. Secures
tubing in harsh applications where
vibration & temperature fluctuations
occur.
RS-485 serial communications
View, record, and adjust control settings
remotely from a computer with Modbus
protocol.
Remote reset switch for alarm.
Acknowledge alarm from remote
location. For users that need quick
alarm reset from a distance.
MN-1, Mini Node

351-9, Mother Node
silver RS 232 to RS 485 Converter with DB9F Connector.

Includes 120 VAC to 12 VDC adapter
A-266, Digihelic
surface mounting bracket

A-203, 1/8 I.D. x 1/4 O.D. PVC tubing
DigihelicLinks
, Communication Software
Model
DH-002
DH-004
DH-006
DH-007
DH-008
DH-009*
DH-010*
Bi-Directional* Ranges also available: DH-012, Range: 0.25 0 0.25 w.c.
DH-014, Range: 1.0 0 1.0 w.c.
DH-015, Range: 2.5 0 2.5 w.c.
DH-016, Range: 5 0 5 w.c.
DH-017, Range: 10 0 10 w.c.

18
D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
G
a
g
e
s
/
S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,

D
g
t
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Data Acquisition and Logging Software
Designed for Communication with Series DH & DHII
Digihelic
Differential Pressure Controllers

Model
Digihelic Links
The Digihelic Links
Communications Software is an easy to use

Windows
based program. Data logging and graphing can be set up by the

individual control with varying logging periods. Event logging, live instrument
status, remote calibration as well as uploading pre-saved configuration files are
some of the higher end capabilities the Digihelic Links
Communications
Software provides. The Digihelic Links
Communications Software is
compatible with all Series DH and DHII Digihelic
Controllers.
FEATURES
Log and graph data up to 10 units simultaneously. View up to
40 units
Easy to use Windows
based operator interface

Data logging at individually adjustable rates
On screen graphing of process values
Upload and download saved control configuration profiles
Remote calibration of controls
Required Equipment Computer Requirements
The Digihelic Links
Communications Software application will run on

Windows
95/98 and Windows
NT Workstation 4.0 (Service Pack 3

recommended), Windows
2000 and Windows
XP software. The
hardware requirements for each of these operating systems can be found
in the documentation provided with that operating system. One available
RS 485 port is needed to communicate with the control(s). A minimum of
4 MB of hard disk space is needed for the Digihelic Links
Communications Software application files, and additional hard disk space
is needed to store data log files. Log file size will vary depending on the
duration and rate selected for the controls and the number of controls on
line.
Communication Requirements
To communicate with the Digihelic
Differential Pressure Controller from

a PC with an RS 232 Serial Communications Port, an RS 485 to RS 232
converter is required to convert the signal from the Digihelic

controller
RS 485 format to the RS 232 input of the PC. Recommended converters
are the Models 351 9 RS 485 to RS 232 converter or Model MN 21 RS
485 to USB converter. For RS 485 systems a 120 ohm resistor is also
needed to terminate the last control on the control network. Shielded
twisted pair cable is recommended for wiring the controls together.
Windows

is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation
Model Digihelic Links, Communications Software CD
ACCESSORIES
351-9N, Mother Node
silver RS 232/RS 485 converter

with DB9F connector
351-9, Mother Node
silver RS 232/RS 485 converter

with DB9F connector (includes 120 VAC to 12 VDC adapter)
MN-1, Mini Node

D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
G
a
g
e
s
/
S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,

D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Mini-Photohelic
Differential Pressure Switch/Gage

Compact, Low Cost Switch Gage
Series
MP
LOW PRESSURE PORT
HIGH PRESSURE PORT
3-1/32 [77.00]
1 [25.4]
SPECIFICATIONS
GAGE SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 5% of full scale @ 70F (21.1C). Gage face mounted in
vertical position.
Pressure Limits: 30 psig (2.067 bar).
Temperature Limits: 20 to 120F ( 6.7 to 49C).
Process Connections: Barbed for 3/16 I.D. tubing (STD); 1/8 male
NPT (optional).
Size: 4 1/8 (104.78 mm) depth x 3 1/16 (77.79 mm) diameter.
Weight: 23 oz (652 g).
Switch Type: (2) SPDT relays.
Electrical Rating: 5A @ 120/240 VAC resistive; 5A @ 30 VDC.
Electrical Connections: Screw type terminal block. Accepts 22 12
AWG wire.
Power Requirements: 24 VDC / 24 VAC 50/60 Hz 4 watts.
Mounting Orientation: Gage face in vertical position.
Set Point Adjustment: Push buttons.
Standard Accessories: (2) mounting screws, (1) .050 hex allen
wrench.
Agency Approvals: UL, cUL, CE.
The Series MP Mini-Photohelic
differential pressure switch/gage combines

the time proven Minihelic
II differential pressure gage with two SPDT

switching setpoints. The Mini-Photohelic
gage is designed to measure and

control positive, negative, or differential pressures consisting of non-combustible
and non-corrosive gases. Gage reading is independent of switch operation.
Switching status is visible by LED indicators located on the front and rear of the
gage. Set points are adjusted with push buttons on back of unit. This extremely
compact switch/gage is ideal for fume hoods, dust collection, pneumatic
conveying and clean room applications.
3-1/16
[77.79]
2-19/32
[65.88]
3-13/16 [96.84]
3-1/32 [77.00]
9/32 [7.134]
Model
MP-000
MP-001
MP-002
MP-003
MP-005
MP-010
MP-020
MP-040
MP-060
MP-100
Model
MP-5PSI
MP-10PSI
MP-15PSI
Model
MP-25MM
MP-50MM
MP-100MM
Model
MP-125PA
MP-250PA
MP-500PA
Model
MP-1KPA
MP-3KPA
Range,
Inches of
Water
0 0.5
0 1.0
0 2.0
0 3.0
0 5.0
0 10
0 20
0 40
0 60
0 100
Range, PSI
0 5
0 10
0 15
Range,
MM of
Water
0 25
0 50
0 100
Range, Pa
0 125
0 250
0 500
Range, kPa
0 1
0 3
For optional 1/8 male NPT connections, add suffix NPT to model
numbers listed above.
Example: MP 000 NPT. Allow additional lead time.

20
D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
G
a
g
e
s
/
S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,

D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
A3000
Photohelic
Pressure Switch/Gages
3-in-One Indicating Gage, Lo-Limit and Hi-Limit Control
2-1/2 [63.50]
2-1/16 [52.39]
2 [50.80]
1-1/4
[31.75]
(4) 6-32 HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED ON
A 5-1/8 [130.18] B.C.
4-47/64
[120.25]
5
[127.00]
4 [101.60]
FACE
5-1/2 [139.70]
O.D.
MOUNTING
RING
5/8 [15.88]
5/8 [15.88] PANEL
MAX
3/16 [4.76]
3-7/8 [98.43]
5-1/8 [130.18]
6-3/8 [161.93]
(7-5/8 [193.68]) 4-3/8 [111.13]
HOUSING REMOVAL
3/4 CONDUIT
CONNECTION
4-3/4
[120.65]
3-7/8 SQ
[98.43]
1/8 FEMALE NPT HIGH
PRESSURE CONNECTION
1/8 FEMALE NPT LOW
PRESSURE CONNECTION
Set points are instantly
adjusted with front knobs.
SPECIFICATIONS
GAGE SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 2% of full scale at 70F (21.1C). 3% on 0 and 4% on 00
models.
Pressure Limits: 20 Hg. to 25 psig ( 0.677 to 1.72 bar). MP option; 35 psig
(2.41 bar), HP option; 80 psig (5.52 bar). A36003S 36010S; 150 psig (10.34
bar). A36020S and higher; 1.2 x full scale pressure.
Temperature Limits: 20 to 120F ( 6.67 to 48.9C). Low temperature option
available.
Process Connections: 1/8 female NPT.
Size: 4 (101.6 mm) dial face, 5 (127 mm) O.D. x 8 1/4 (209.55 mm).
Weight: 4 lb (1.81 kg).
Switch Type: Each setpoint has 2 form C relays (DPDT).
Repeatability: 1% of full scale.
Electrical Rating: 10A @ 28 VDC, 10A @ 120, 240 VAC.
Electrical Connections: Screw terminals. Use 167F (75C) copper
conductors only.
Power Requirements: 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 240 VAC & 24 VAC power
optional.
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. Consult factory for
other position orientations.
Set Point Adjustment: Adjustable knobs on face.
Agency Approvals: UL, CSA, CE. Optional EXPL explosion proof
enclosure does not possess any agency approvals.
OPTIONS
Single contact, right set point, for actuation on increasing or decreasing
pressure.
OEM Model, less relay and transformer components and housing but including
infrared diodes and phototransistor(s), light shutter and set pointer(s). For single
or double contact.
Remote-Mounted Relay, relay pack may be mounted remotely from gage.
Standard length is 5 ft. For other lengths, specify cable length required.
Tamper-proof knobs, low temperature option, special scales, voltages and
other features and modifications are available.
Special Housings available include Weatherproof (NEMA 4) and Explosion
proof (NEMA 7 CD, 9 EFG; NEC Class I, DIV. 1 & 2, Groups C, D, Class II, Div.
1 & 2, Groups E, F, G, Class III.) Contact Customer Service for detailed
dimension drawings.
Photohelic
Switch/Gages function as versatile, highly repeatable pressure

switches combined with a precise pressure gage employing the time-proven
Magnehelic
gage design. The Photohelic
gage measures and controls positive,

negative or differential pressures of air and compatible gases. Standard models are
rated to 25 psig (1.7 bar) with options to 35 (2.4) or 80 (5.5 bar) psig. Single pressure
36000S models measure to 6000 psig (413 bar) with a 9000 psig (620 bar) rating.
Two phototransistor actuated, DPDT relays are included for low/high limit control.
Easy to adjust setpoint indicators are controlled by knobs located on the gage face.
Individual setpoint deadband is one pointer width less than 1% of full scale.
Setpoints can be interlocked to provide variable deadband ideal for control of fans,
dampers, etc. Gage reading is continuous and unaffected by switch operation, even
during loss of electrical power. Choose from full scale pressure ranges from a low 0-
.25" (0-6 mm) w.c. up to 30 psi (21 bar); single positive pressure to 6000 psig (413 bar).
Photohelic Sensing - How It Works
In typical applications, these Dwyer switch/gages control between high and
low pressure set points. When pressure changes, reaching either set point
pressure, the infrared light to the limiting phototransistor is cut off by the helix
driven light shutter. The resulting phototransistor signal is electronically
amplified to actuate its DPDT slave relay and switching occurs. Dead band
between make and break is 1% of full scale or less just enough to assure
positive, chatter free operation.
Relay - Transformer Features
A plastic housing protects all electronic components. Solid state and integrated
circuit electronics are on glass epoxy printed circuit boards and self
extinguishing terminal boards.
APPLICATIONS - PHOTOHELIC
SWITCH/GAGES
In both series of pressure switch/gages, you get the convenience of a visual
indication plus high low limit switching. For both OEM and in plant applications,
the Photohelic
switch/gage is used to control pressures in air conditioning

systems, clean rooms, fluidic and pneumatic control systems, materials
handling equipment, alarm or control fume exhaust systems, control pressure
in air structures, and monitor respiratory and blood pressures.
Standard Model
Two phototransistor actuated circuits and two DPDT relays permit both high
and low alarms or limit controls. Relays are de energized when gage pointer
is to the left of respective set points; relays are energized as pointer passes to
the right of set points. Loss of electrical power or loss of pressure provide fail
safe protection.
High and Low Latching Circuits
Dwyer Photohelic
switch/gages can be wired for high-latching, low-latching

or combination high-low latching circuits. That is, the equipment will hold in
these respective positions once activated and until manually reset. This can
be particularly useful for alarm and signal applications where control is
accomplished by another Photohelic
switch/gage or other means. Complete

wiring and operational instructions are included. Where manual reset is
required a dry circuit push button such as Dwyer Part A 601 should be used.

D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
G
a
g
e
s
/
S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,

D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Bezel and front cover (with set point
knobs and zero adjustment screw)
removed to expose Photohelic
gage set
point mechanism. Cover is clear
polycarbonate plastic.
Gage pointer and light shutter are
mounted on helix and balancing
counterweight. Shutter passes through
slot in optical limit switch to expose
phototransistors to integral infrared light
source or mask them depending on
applied pressure.
Light shield effectively protects
phototransistors from strong outside light
sources yet allows free pointer
movement. It also gives interior a clean
finished look.
Optical limit switches are used for
reliability and long service life. Attached
directly to set pointers, they are
individually aligned to assure precise
switching accuracy.
Semi-Flexible drive shaft connects to
set point knobs.
Zero adjustment screw connects to
screw in cover to adjust zero pressure
reading.
Plastic enclosure protects electronic
components and electrical connections.
Polycarbonate connection or terminal
board is self extinguishing.
Glass-epoxy printed circuit boards for
durability and performance.
Load relays are DPDT with latching
feature for maximum application
versatility.
Electronics are designed to operate on
50/60 Hz, 120 volt current with 10% over
or under voltage. Special units for other
voltages are available.
Switch set pointers show switch
settings at all times.
Spring loaded friction clutch prevents
operator damage of set point
mechanism.
Check these features for dependable control
Models and Ranges - Series A3000 Photohelic
Switch/Gages
Note: Special models can be built to OEM customers' specifications with scales reading in special pressure units like ounces per square inch,
inches of mercury, etc. Square Root Scales reading in FPM or SCFM are also available. Custom logos and special graduations can also be included.
Contact factory for minimum quantities and pricing.
OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES - Add options as a suffix. Example: A3001 LT
Model
A3000-00
A3000-0
A3001
A3002
A3003
A3004
A3005
A3006
A3008
A3010
A3015
A3020
A3025
A3030
A3040
A3050
A3060
A3080
A3100
A3150
Model
A3000-00AV
A3000-0AV
A3001AV
A3002AV
A3010AV
Zero Center Ranges
Zero Center Ranges
Zero Center Ranges
Zero Center Ranges Zero Center Ranges
Pitot tube required
Model
A3000-6MM
A3000-10MM
A3000-25MM
A3000-50MM
A3000-80MM
A3000-100MM
Model
A3000-60PA
A3000-125PA
A3000-250PA
A3000-500PA
A3000-750PA
Bi-Directional Range
A3000-00N
Model
A3300-0
A3301
A3302
A3304
A3310
A3320
A3330
A3300-20MM
A3300-30MM
Model
A3000-1KPA
A3000-1.5KPA
A3000-2KPA
A3000-3KPA
A3000-4KPA
A3000-5KPA
A3000-8KPA
A3000-10KPA
A3000-15KPA
A3000-20KPA
A3000-25KPA
A3000-30KPA
Model
A3300-250PA
A3300-500PA
A3300-4CM
A3300-10CM
A3300-30CM
A3300-1KPA
A3300-3KPA
-SRH, Single Relay Activates on Increase

-SRL, Single Relay Activates on Decrease
-OLS, OEM model
-RMR, Remote mounted relay
-TAMP, Tamper proof knobs
-MP, Medium pressure
-HP, High pressure
-LT, Low temperature ( 20F)
A-601, Manual reset switch net
10 0 10
15 0 15
2 0 2
5 0 5
15 0 15
Range,
In W.C.
0 .25
0 .50
0 1.0
0 2.0
0 3.0
0 4.0
0 5.0
0 6.0
0 8.0
0 10
0 15
0 20
0 25
0 30
0 40
0 50
0 60
0 80
0 100
0 150
Range In W.C.
/Air Velocity,
F.P.M.
0 .25/300 2000
0 .50/500 2800
0 1.0/500 4000
0 2.0/1000 5600
0 10/2000 12500
Range,
Pascals
0 60
0 125
0 250
0 500
0 750
Range,
MM W.C.
0 6
0 10
0 25
0 50
0 80
0 100
.05 .20
Range,
In W.C.
.25 0 .25
.5 0 .5
1 0 1
2 0 2
5 0 5
10 0 10
15 0 15
Range,
Kilopascals
0 1
0 1.5
0 2
0 3
0 4
0 5
0 8
0 10
0 15
0 20
0 25
0 30
Range,
Pascals
125 0 125
250 0 250
.5 0 .5
1.5 0 1.5

22
D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
G
a
g
e
s
/
S
w
i
t
c
h
e
s
,

D
i
a
l
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Using solid state technology, the Series 3000MR and 3000MRS Photohelic
switch/gages combine the functions of a precise, highly repeatable differential pressure

switch with a large easy-to-read analog pressure gage employing the durable, time-proven
Magnehelic
gage design. Switch setting is easy to adjust with large external knobs on the
gage face. Gage reading is unaffected by switch operation will indicate accurately even
if power is interrupted. Solid state design now results in greatly reduced size and weight.
Units can be flush mounted in 4-13/16 (122 mm) hole or surface mounted with hardware
supplied. 3000MR models employ versatile electromechanical relays with gold over silver
contacts ideal for dry circuits. For applications requiring high cycle rates, choose
3000MRS models with SPST (N.O.) solid state relays. All models provide both low and high
limit control and include 18-inch (45 cm) cable assemblies for electrical connections.
Gage accuracy is 2% of full scale and switch repeatability is 1%. Switch deadband is one
pointer width less than 1% of full scale. Compatible with air and other non-combustible,
non-corrosive gases, they can be used in systems with pressures to 25 psig (1.725 bar).
Optional construction is available for use to either 35 psig (2.42 bar) or 80 psig (5.51 bar).
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Mounting ring, snap ring (4) 6-32 x 1-1/4 RH machine screws
18 (45 cm) cable assembly (panel mounting)
(2) 3/16 tubing to 1/8 NPT adapters (3) 6-32 x 5/16 RH machine screws
(2) 1/8 NPT pipe plugs (surface mounting)
Series
3000MR
3000MRS
Photohelic
Switch/Gages
Combines Differential Pressure Gage with Low/High Set-points
Series 3000MR, 3000MRS Photohelic
SPECIFICATIONS
GAGE SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-combustible,
compatible gases.
Accuracy: 2% of full scale (3000-0
3% of full scale). (3000-00 4% of full
scale).
Pressure Limit: -20 Hg. to 25 psig
(-0.677 bar to 1.72 bar). MP option;
35 psig (2.41 bar), HP option; 80 psig
(5.52 bar).
(-6.67 to 48.9C).
Process Connections: 1/8 female
NPT (duplicated side and back).
Size: 4 (101.6 mm) dial face, 5
(127 mm) O.D. x 3-1/8 (79.38 mm).
Weight: 1.8 Ib (816 g).
SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS 3000MR
Switch Type: Each setpoint has 1
form C relays (SPDT).
Relay Contacts: (Resistive load) 1
form C rated 1.0A @ 30 VDC, 0.3A
@ 110 VDC or 0.5A @ 125 VAC.
Gold over clad silver - suitable for dry
circuits.
Electrical Connections: 18 (46 cm)
cable assembly with 8 conductors.
Optional lengths to 100 (30.5 m).
Power Requirements: 24 VDC,
regulated 10%.
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in
vertical position. Consult factory for
Set Point Adjustment: Adjustable
knobs on face.
SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS 3000MRS
Switch Type: Each setpoint has a
solid state relay.
Switching Voltage: 20-280 VAC
(47-63 Hz).
Switching Current: 1.0 amp (AC)
max., 0.01 mA (AC) min., (2) SPST
N.O.
Electrical Connections: 18 (46 cm)
cable assembly with 6 conductors,
optional lengths to 100 (30.5 m).
Power Requirements: 24 VDC,
regulated 10%.
Set Point Adjustment: Adjustable
knobs on face.
(4) 6-32 HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED ON A
5-1/8 [130.18] B.C.
4 [101.60]
FACE
5-1/2 [139.70] O.D.
MOUNTING RING
2-1/2
[63.50]
3/16
[4.76]
5/8 [15.88]
PANEL MAX
5/8
[15.88]
5
[127.00]
4-47/64
[120.25]
2-1/16
[52.39]
2
[50.80]
1/8 FEMALE NPT HIGH
PRESSURE CONNECTION
1/8 FEMALE NPT LOW
PRESSURE CONNECTION
1-1/4
[31.75]
Model
3000(MR)(MRS)**-00
3000(MR)(MRS)*-0
3001(MR)(MRS)
3002(MR)(MRS)
3003(MR)(MRS)
3005(MR)(MRS)
3010(MR)(MRS)
3015(MR)(MRS)
3020(MR)(MRS)
3030(MR)(MRS)
3050(MR)(MRS)
3100(MR)(MRS)
Model
3000(MR)(MRS)-60PA*
3000(MR)(MRS)-125PA
3000(MR)(MRS)-250PA
3000(MR)(MRS)-500PA
Model
3000(MR)(MRS)-1KPA
3000(MR)(MRS)-3KPA
3000(MR)(MRS)-4KPA
Model
3000(MR)(MRS)-6MM*
3000(MR)(MRS)-10MM
3000(MR)(MRS)-25MM
3000(MR)(MRS)-50MM
3000(MR)(MRS)-100MM
Model
3000(MR)(MRS)-20CM
Range,
Kilopascals p
0-1.0
0-3.0
0-4.0
Range,
MM W.C.
0-6
0-10
0-25
0-50
0-100
Range,
CM W.C.
0-20
Minor
Divs.
.02
.10
.10
Minor
Divs.
.20
.50
.50
1.0
2.0
Minor
Divs
.50
Range,
Inches w.c.
0-0.25
0-0.5
0-1.0
0-2.0
0-3.0
0-5.0
0-10
0-15
0-20
0-30
0-50
0-100
Range,
Pascals
0-60
0-125
0-250
0-500
Minor
Divs.
.005
.01
.02
.05
.10
.10
.20
.50
.50
1.0
1.0
2.0
Minor
Divs.
2.0
5.0
5.0
10.0
When ordering, select either MR or MRS
suffix to Series 3000 number.
Examples: 3001MR or 3001MRS
( )( )
Tamper-proof Knobs, require spanner type key (supplied) to change
setpoints. Add suffix -TAMP
Low Temperature Option for use under 20F (-6.7C).
Add suffix -LT
Medium Pressure increases maximum rated pressure to 35 psig
(2.41 bar). Add suffix -MP
High Pressure increases maximum rated pressure to 80 psig
(5.5 bar). Add suffix -HP
Weatherproof Housing Option.
Add Suffix -WP
A-298, Flat Aluminum Bracket for flush mounting 3000MR/MRS
A-370, Mounting Bracket flush mount 3000MR/MRS bracket. Bracket
is then surface mounted. Steel with gray hammertone epoxy finish
A-600, R/C Snubber recommended for inductive loads like a
solenoid or contactor
022.P.N:Layout 2 2/11/11 8:55 AM Page 1
D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
G
a
g
e
s
/
S
w
i
t
c
h
e
s
,

D
i
a
l
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
43000
Capsu-Photohelic

Pressure Switch/Gages
Lo-Limit and Hi-Limit Control, Aluminum or Brass Case Available
Series 43000
Capsu-Photohelic
Switch/Gage.
Set points are instantly
adjusted with front knobs.
SPECIFICATIONS
GAGE SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases and
liquids. Brass case option required
for water based liquids.
Wetted Materials: Consult
factory.
Accuracy: 3% of full scale at
70F (21.1C). 2% on 43000S
models; 4% on 43215, 43220
and 43500.
Pressure Limits: -20 Hg to 500
psig (-0.677 to 34.5 bar).
(-6.67 to 48.9C). Low
temperature option available.
female NPT.
Size: 4 (101.6 mm) dial face, 5
(127 mm) O.D. x 9-3/16 (233.36
mm).
Weight: 5 lb, 8 oz (2.49 kg).
Brass 11 lb, 2 oz (5.05 kg).
Switch Type: Each setpoint has 2
form C relays (DPDT).
Electrical Rating: 10A @ 120
VAC, 6A @ 240 VAC, 60 Hz res.
10A @ 28 VDC.
Electrical Connections: Screw
terminals.
Power Requirements: 120 VAC,
50/60 Hz; 240 VAC & 24 VAC
power optional.
Mounting Orientation:
Diaphragm in vertical position.
Consult factory for other position
orientations.
Set Point Adjustment:
Adjustable knobs on face.
Capsu-Photohelic
Switch/Gages function as versatile, highly repeatable

pressure switches combined with a precise pressure gage employing the time-
proven Magnehelic
gage design. The Capsu-Photohelic
gage employs an
encapsulated sensing element for use with both liquids and gases at pressures
to 500 psig (34 bar). Optional cast brass case is available for water or water
based liquids.
Two phototransistor actuated, DPDT relays are included for low/high limit
control. Easy to adjust setpoint indicators are controlled by knobs located on
the gage face. Individual setpoint deadband is one pointer width less than 1%
of full scale. Setpoints can be interlocked to provide variable deadband ideal
for control of pumps, etc.
(4) 6-32 HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED ON A
5-1/8 [130.18] B.C.
1/4 FEMALE NPT
LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
(AIR OR GAS)
1/4 FEMALE NPT
HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION (AIR OR GAS)
1/4 FEMALE NPT
HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION
(LIQUID)
3/4 [19.05] TYP
[101.60]
FACE
5-1/2 [139.70] O.D.
MOUNTING RING
1/4 FEMALE
NPT LOW
PRESSURE
CONNECTION
(LIQUID)
5
[127.00]
4-47/64
[120.25]
5/8 [15.88]
5/8 [15.88]
PANEL MAX
3/16 [4.76]
3-7/8 [98.43]
5-1/8 [130.18]
7-5/16 [185.74]
8-9/16 [217.49] 4-3/8 [111.13]
HOUSING REMOVAL
3/4 CONDUIT
CONNECTION
4-3/4
[120.65]
3-7/8 SQ
[98.43]
3-1/16 [77.79] TYP
Series 43000
Capsu-Photohelic
Switch/Gage with
Brass Body
Model
43000-0
43001
43002
43003
43004
43005
43006
43008
43010
43015
43020
43025
43030
43040
43050
Model
43060
43080
43100
43150
43200
43300
43400
43500
43302
43304
43310
43320
43330
OPTIONS
Single Contact, right set point, for actuation on increasing or
decreasing pressure.
Power Supply, 24 VAC or 220 VAC powered relay pack.
Remote-Mounted Relay, relay pack may be mounted remotely
from gage. Specify cable length required.
Tamper-proof Knobs, low temperature option, special scales,
voltages and other features and modifications are available.
Special Housings available include Weatherproof (NEMA 4) and
Explosion-proof (NEMA 7 CD, 9 EFG; NEC Class I, DIV. 1 & 2,
Groups C, D, Class II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G, Class III.
Contact Customer Service for detailed dimension drawings.
Brass Body, for water based liquids order optional brass case
by adding B to the end of the model number.
Example: 43001B
ACCESSORY
A-298, Flat Aluminum Bracket for Flush Mounting
Range,
in w.c.
0-.5
0-1.0
0-2.0
0-3.0
0-4.0
0-5.0
0-6.0
0-8.0
0-10
0-15
0-20
0-25
0-30
0-40
0-50
Range,
in w.c.
0-60
0-80
0-100
0-150
0-200
0-300
0-400
0-500
1-0-1
2-0-2
5-0-5
10-0-10
15-0-15
023.P.N:Layout 2 2/15/11 3:27 PM Page 1
24
M
a
n
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

S
t
a
t
i
o
n
a
r
y
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Model
250-AF
250.5-AF
251-AF
252-AF
209-AF
260-AF
350-AF*
451-AF
452-AF
Range:
Water
Column
.10-0-1.0
.10-0-1.0
.05-0-.50
.20-0-2.0
.20-0-3.0
0-1.5
0-4
0-1
0-2
Minor
Divisions
.02
.01
.01
.02
.02
.02
.10
.01
.02
Scale
Length
Inclined)
(Inches)
5-1/2
8
5-1/2
8
8
5-1/2
4-1/2*
8
8
Overall
Size
(Inches)
8-1/2 x 4-1/8 x 1
11-3/8 x 4 x 1
8-1/4 x 3-3/8 x 1
11-1/8 x 6-1/2 x 1
11-1/4 x 6-7/8 x 1
8-3/8 x 5-7/8 x 1
3 x 8-1/4 x 1
11 x 2-1/2 x 5/8
11 x 4 x 5/8
*Vertical Scale 2 PSI Maximum Working Pressure
FEATURES
Highly accurate and easy to use yet almost indestructible, Dwyer
Series 250-AF
Inclined Air Filter Gages are foolproof and dependable. There are no moving parts
no mechanical linkages nothing to wear out, jam or deteriorate from vibration.
They never need calibration.
The mirror polished inclined scale allows the operator to easily read minute
differences in differential pressure across the filter accurately without parallax error.
The only servicing required is occasional zeroing. If cleaning is necessary, it is easily
done with soap and water.
Construction
Dwyer
DURABLOCK
Series 250-AF Gages are precision machined 1" thick solid

acrylic plastic, virtually unbreakable and free of distortion. The fluid bore is precision
drilled to .0002 to assure life long accuracy. A glass spirit level is built into the body
and encapsulated to prevent damage or tampering. The scale is mirror polished
chrome plated brass to assure parallax free reading by alignment of the meniscus
with its reflection. Safety traps are incorporated in the body to prevent loss of fluid
due to pressure surges. Red and green signal flags indicate clearly when a filter
change is necessary. Gages are suitable for use in ambient temperatures of -20 to
150F. Connection fittings are positively sealed by O rings but easily removed for
zeroing or addition of fluid. Furnished complete with instructions.
Inclined Manometer Air Filter Gages
Precision Machined, Solid Acrylic Plastic Gages, Accurate To 1% Of Full Scale
Model 250.5-AF Model 451-AF
Series
250-AF
Economy Models 451-AF and 452-AF are similar to the 250 Series except they are
not equipped with over pressure traps. Two A-324 14 compression fittings are
included with each gage but not shown. Bodies are of 5/8 thick acrylic and scales are
mirror polished, epoxy coated aluminum.
Exclusive Dwyer
over pressure safety traps assure that over range

pressures whether gradual or a sudden surge will not force the liquid
out of the gage. Over pressures simply raises the float, force the O-
ring over the opening and seal the fluid in the gage. When pressure
is reduced, float drops down releasing the O-ring safety trap opens
and the gage continues in operation.
Over-Pressure Safety Traps Prevent Fluid Loss
310 solid plastic vertical style stationary gage. 200.5 solid plastic inclined style stationary gage. Dimensions, Inches
Model
200.5
201
202.5
209
215
244
246
300
306
308
310
A
7
7
9
9
7
11
13-1/2
7
7
7
7
B
13
10
13
13
10
16-1/2
23
10
16
16
16
C
3-15/16
3-15/16
5-5/8
7
3-1/16
3-1/8
11
D
11-3/8
8-1/4
12
11-1/4
9-1/2
15-5/8
22
E
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
2
4
4
4
F
4-1/2
3
4-1/2
4-1/2
3
8-1/2
15
3
4
4
4
G
8-1/4
10-7/8
13-1/16
15-1/4
Note: Model 200.5 replaces Model 200. Model 202.5 replaces model 202.
Dwyer
solid plastic stationary gages or draft gages are offered in inclined and vertical
(well-type) styles for highly accurate laboratory or general industrial service, for measurement
of low range gas and air pressures, positive, negative or differential. To assure the accuracy
required in instruments of this type, all machining of bores and wells is to the highest
standards of precision backed by Dwyers years of experience in the fabrication of
acrylic instruments.
Durablock
Solid Plastic Stationary Gages

Suitable for Total Pressures Up to 100 psig, Temperatures Up to 150F.
Accuracy 2% of Full Scale (1% on Models 215, 244, 246 Only)
Incline Type
Vertical or Well-Type
Series
200 &
300
Model
200.5
201
202.5
209
215
244
246
Range Inches
of Water
.10-0-1.0
.05-0-.50
.20-0-2.0
.20-0-3.0
.05-0-.25
0-4
0-6
Minor Scale
Divisions
.01
.01
.01
.02
.005
.02
.02
Scale
Length
8-1/4
5-1/2
8-3/4
8-3/4
6
13-1/4
20
300
306
308
310
0- 4
0- 6
0- 8
0-10
.10
.10
.10
.10
4-1/2
7-3/4
9
11-1/8
Weight
Ibs-oz.
3-11
2-12
4-7
4-11
2-14
9-11
13-14
2-5
3-3
3-7
3-10
024.P.N:Layout 2 3/1/11 9:13 AM Page 1
M
a
n
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

S
t
a
t
i
o
n
a
r
y
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Durablock
Inclined-Vertical Manometers
Accuracy To 1/4 Of 1%
STANDARD ACCESSORIES
Include two 3/4 oz bottles of .826 red gage oil (1.91 blue gage oil for models 421-23
and 422-23), rapid shut-off type a connections, two 3 ft lengths of clear plastic
tubing and two 1/8 NPT tubing adapters two sets for double column models.
Dwyer
Model 424 inclined-vertical manometers are extremely accurate instruments

designed and made especially for precision measurement of low differential pressures in
laboratory and test applications. The inclined range bore has a length of 20 to provide
ample multiplication of indicating fluid movement in this critical lower part of the range.
424-10 Inclined-Vertical
Manometer.
Series 420 Inclined-Vertical Manometers Accurate To 1%
Ranges And Dimensions Suitable for Total Pressure up to 100 psig, Temperatures up to 150F
Typical of Series 420 Inclined-Vertical Manometers is Model 422-10
double column manometer with a total range of 0 to 10 of water. Single
column models are also furnished. Design features are essentially the
same as for the Series 424. They are accurate to 1% and are
particularly suited for use with pitot tubes and in flow measurement or
similar applications.
Model
424-5
424-10
421-5
421-10
421-23
422-5
422-10
422-23
D
o
u
b
l
e
S
i
n
g
l
e
C
o
l
u
m
n
C
o
l
u
m
n
Inclined
Range
Inches
of Water
0-2.0
0-2.0
0-1.0
0-1.0
0-2.2
0-1.0
0-1.0
0-2.2
Inclined
Minor
Div.
.01
.01
.01
.01
.02
.01
.01
.02
Length
of
Inclined
Scale
20
20
6-1/2
6-1/2
6-1/8
6-1/2
6-1/2
6-1/8
Vertical
Range
Inches
of Water
2.1- 5
2.1-10
1.1- 5
1.1 -10
2.4-23.0
1.1 -5
1.1-10
2.4-23.0
Vertical
Minor
Div.
.10
.10
.10
.10
.20
.10
.10
.20
Length
of
Vertical
Scale
3-1/4
9
4-5/8
10-1/8
10-1/4
4-5/8
10-1/8
10-1/4
A
10-1/2
16-1/2
9-7/8
15-1/2
15-1/2
10-1/2
16-1/8
16-1/8
B
25-1/4
25-1/4
9-5/8
9-5/8
9-5/8
11-1/2
11-1/2
11-1/2
C
12-5/8
12-5/8
4-7/8
4-7/8
4-7/8
5-1/8
5-1/8
5-1/8
D
1
1
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
E
10-1/2
10-1/2
6-1/2
6-1/2
6-1/2
6-1/2
6-1/2
6-1/2
F
5-3/8
5-3/8
3-1/4
3-1/4
3-1/4
3-1/4
3-1/4
3-1/4
G
10
16
9-7/8
15-1/2
15-1/2
10-1/2
16-1/8
16-1/8
Weight
lb-oz
14-8
22-12
4-12
6-10
6-10
6-10
10-13
10-12
Dimensions
*Single column metric-ranges and divisions in millimeters.
Series
424
Flex-Tube
Well-Type Manometers
1230 Series Wall Mounting
1235 Series Panel Mounting
Model
1230-8
1230-12
1230-16
1230-20
1230-24
1230-36
Scale in
Inches
of Water or
Mercury
0- 8
0-12
0-16
0-20
0-24
0-36
Dimensions
B
A
2-3/4
2-3/4
2-3/4
2-3/4
2-3/4
2-3/4
W/M
15-13/16
19-3/8
23-1/2
27-9/16
32-7/8
43-1/8
D
16-3/4
21-7/8
27
32-1/8
37-3/16
51-1/4
C
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
Mercury
Req'd
to Fill
(Wt.)
12 oz
14 oz
16 oz
18 oz
20 oz
26 oz
Note: Water/Mercury models. For 0.826 S.P.
Gage Oil models change -W/M to a -D.
Dwyer
Flex-Tube
Well Type Manometers are designed to meet the need for a direct
reading single column instrument providing highly accurate pressure readings; positive,
negative or differential. Unlike other makes, Dwyer
manometers have no hidden wells or

packing glands. These instruments are constructed of shatterproof clear plastic tubing
permanently bonded to well assemblies with leakproof glued joints. Well assemblies are
precisely machined from solid acrylic plastic. Overpressure safety traps assure protection
against loss of fluid. Heavy pure white acrylic plastic scales have sharp black silk screened
figures and graduations sealed with clear mylar coating. Scales are adjusted with quick-
acting positive mechanism. Heavy heat treated aluminum back plates have durable gray
hammerloid finish. These manometers are rated to 100 psig (6.89 bar). Not recommended
for vacuum service beyond 5 in. Hg (68 in w.c.).
Include one set of type a connections, .826 sp. gr. red gage oil for D style or
fluorescein green dye concentrate with wetting agent for W/M styles, two 3 ft
lengths of clear vinyl tubing and two 1/8 NPT tubing adapters.
Series
1230
&
1235
Model
1235-8
1235-20
1235-36
Scale in
Inches
of Water
or Mercury
0- 8
0-20
0-36
Dimensions
B
A
2-3/4
2-3/4
2-3/4
W/M
17-3/8
29-5/16
45-1/16
D
18-1/2
33-9/16
51-15/16
C
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
Mercury
Req'd
to Fill (Wt.)
12 oz
18 oz
26 oz
Model Model
1230-8-W/M 1230-20-W/M
1230-12-W/M 1230-24-W/M
1230-16-W/M 1230-36-W/M
Model
1235-8-W/M
1235-20-W/M
1235-36-W/M
025.P.N:Layout 2 3/1/11 9:20 AM Page 1
26
M
a
n
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

S
t
a
t
o
n
a
r
y
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Mark II Model No. 40-1 inclined manometer
Mark II Molded Plastic Manometers
3% Accuracy For Stationary And Portable Applications At Minimum Cost
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 3% full scale.
Maximum Working Temperature: 140F (60C).
Maximum Internal Working Pressure: 10 psi (70 kPa).
SPECIFICATIONS
Maximum Working Temperature: 130F (54C).
Maximum Internal Working Pressure: 15 psi (100 kPa).
Scale Length: Approx. 8 1/4 (21 centimeters).
1-7/16
[35.53]
1-1/4
[31.75]
1-1/8
[28.58]
2-1/4
[57.15] MAX
7/32 [5.56] HOLE
5-29/32
[150.02]
4-23/32
[119.86]
3-11/16
[93.66]
5/8
[15.88]
7-13/32 [188.12]
25/32 [19.84]
4-25/32
[121.44]
25/32
[19.84]
7/32 X 13/32
[5.56 X 10.32]
MOUNTING SLOT
15/64 [5.95] x 13/32 [10.32]
MOUNTING SLOT
10-5/8 [269.88]
5-5/16
[134.95]
MAX
4-5/8
[117.48]
2-31/32
[75.41]
25/32
[19.84]
15/64 [5.95] MOUNTING HOLE
1-1/4
[31.75]
2-1/4 [57.15]
MAX
4 [101.60]
Mark II Model No. 25 inclined-vertical manometer.
(shown with optional A-612 portable stand)
Model
Mark II 25
Mark II 26
Mark II 27*
Mark II 28*
Mark II MM-80
Mark II MM-180
Mark II M-700PA
Range
0 3 in w.c
0 7 in. w.c.
0 7000 fpm
0 10,500 fpm
0 80 mm w.c.
0 180 mm w.c.
10 0 700 Pa
Model
Mark II 40-1
Mark II 40-25MM
Mark II 40-250PA
Mark II 41-2
Mark II 41-60MM
Mark II 41-600PA
Mark II 40-1-AV*
Mark II 40-250PA-AV*
Mark II 41-2-AV*
Range
.1 0 1.0 in. w.c.
0 26 mm w.c.
10 0 250 Pa
.2 0 2.4 in. w.c.
0 60 mm w.c.
20 0 600 Pa
0 1.1 in. w.c. & 0 4200 fpm
0 260 Pa & 0 21 mps
0 2.5 in. w.c. & 0 6300 fpm
Series
Mark II
Dwyer
Mark II series molded manometers are of the inclined and inclined-vertical types. The
curved inclined-vertical tube of the Model 25 gage provides higher ranges with more easily read
increments at low readings. The Model 25 is excellent for general purpose work. The Model 40
inclined gage provides linear calibration and excellent resolution throughout its range. The Model
40 is ideally suited for air velocity and air filter gage applications. Both gage types are capable of
pressure measurements above and below atmospheric as well as differential pressure
measurements.
Construction
Mark II manometers are economically priced, compact and available in both stationary
and portable configurations. Portable stand is standard on Model 40, available as
optional A 612 stand for Model 25. Construction is simple with virtually indestructible
molded white styrene acrylonitrile housing, indicating tube and fluid wells, molded ABS
knobs and zero adjust plunger, shock mounted glass level vial and leak proof O ring
seals. Moderate overpressures are accommodated by an overflow tank incorporated In
the Model 25. Greater protection is provided by float operated overflow traps in the
Model 40. Scales are lithograph printed on aluminum and epoxy coated.
Installation
Mark II manometers can be mounted on any vertical surface with the two mounting
screws provided. A built in spirit level simplifies leveling before mounting screws are
tightened. Simply fill the reservoir, adjust fluid level to zero, connect the tubing, and the
gage is ready for operation.
ACCESSORIES
Included with each Mark II manometer are two tubing connectors for 1/8" pipe or sheet
metal ducts, two mounting screws, 3/4 ounce bottle of indicating fluid, red and green
pointer flags and complete instructions.
The Model 25 also includes 8 feet of flexible double column plastic tubing. Portable
operation of the Model 25 is made possible by the use of the optional A 612 portable
stand. A short piece of tubing can be slipped over the Model 25 pressure connections
to contain the gage oil in transit.
The Model 40 contains two 4 1/2 foot lengths of clear plastic tubing, a plastic swing out
stand and leveling screw for portable operation. It also features convenient rapid shutoff
pressure connections and integral overpressure safety traps.
OEM Specials
All Dwyer
Mark II molded plastic manometers can be supplied in OEM quantities with

your name or special graphics and scales.
*Require Pitot tube at additional cost. See Air Quality section.
*Require Pitot tube at additional cost. See Air Quality section
A-612, Portable Stand
Fluid Used
Red oil, .826 s.g.
Blue oil, 1.91 s.g.
Red oil, .826 s.g.
Blue oil, 1.91 s.g.
Red oil, .826 s.g.
Blue oil, 1.91 s.g.
Red oil, .826 s.g.
Fluid Used
Red oil, .826 s.g.
Red oil, .826 s.g.
Red oil, .826 s.g.
Blue oil, 1.91 s.g.
Blue oil, 1.91 s.g.
Blue oil, 1.91 s.g.
Red oil, .826 s.g.
Red oil, .826 s.g.
Blue oil, 1.91 s g.

D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
PDPS
Compact Economic Differential Pressure Switch
Low Pressures down to 0.07 in w.c.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Polyphenylene
oxide styrene housing, florosilicon
diaphragm, stainless steel spring.
Temperature Limits: 40 to 185F ( 40
to 85C).
Operating Pressure: 0.07 w.c. to 1.0
w.c.
Repeatability: 0.02 of w.c.
Burst Pressure: 3.5 psi (0.241 bar).
Proof Pressure: 1.0 psi (0.069 bar).
Switch Type: Conventional snap
action switch.
Electrical Rating: 5 A @ 125/250
VAC.
Process Connections: Multi barb port
connections for 1/4 and 3/8 I.O.
tubing.
Mounting Orientation: Mount switch
with diaphragm in a vertical position
unless customer has specified
otherwise.
Set Point Adjustment: Set point
adjusted at factory.
Agency Approvals: UL 508 industrial
controls; UL 353 pilot duty
requirements; BS EN 1854: 1997.
Weight: 2.7 oz (76.5 g).
The Series PDPSs large diameter diaphragm and snap action switch make it dependable
and ideal for OEM applications. The Series PDPS Pressure Switches are available for
pressure, vacuum, and differential applications and are factory preset for pressures from
0.07 of w.c. to 1.0 of w.c. with full-scale repeatability of 0.02 of w.c. Other features of
the PDPS pressure switch include standard multi-barb port connections, inherent mounting
and quick disconnect terminals, which make the Series PDPS perfect for many OEM
applications.
1-17/64 [32.15]
2x 3/16
[4.76]
1-45/64
[43.26]
3-5/32
[80.17]
9/64
[3.57]
5/16
[7.94]
3/4
[19.05]
3x 1/4
[6.35]
19/64
[7.54]
27/64
[10.72]
1-17/32
[38.89]
61/64
[24.21]
9/64
[3.57]
27/64
[10.72]
29/32
[23.02]
1-1/32
[26.19]
8x 1/8
[3.18]
2
[50.8]
1-39/64
[40.88]
1-39/64
[40.88]
2
[50.8]
1-57/64
[48.02]
1-9/16
[39.69]
1-19/64
[32.94]
PDPS - - -
Model
Number
Pressure Range
1 0.07 to 0.14 w.c.
2 0.14 to 0.32 w.c.
3 0.32 to 0.64 w.c.
4 0.64 to 1.0 w.c.
Switch Direction
I Activate on Increase
D Activate on Decrease
Factory Preset Set Point
Example: 007 for 0.07 w.c.
or 100 for 1 w.c.
Note: All purchases must be of 50 units or more.
Series 1700 Differential Pressure Switches were specifically designed to satisfy the
demands of high volume original equipment manufacturers for a tough, dependable limit switch
at a very low price. The Model 1710 uses Dwyers simple, time-proven method of mechanically
coupling a sensitive 3 diameter silicone rubber diaphragm to a versatile SPDT snap switch.
The switch housing is precision molded of a high strength glass filled PPO which has excellent
dimensional and thermal stability. This unique combination of existing and new technologies
enables Dwyer to offer a limit switch priced less than comparable units without sacrificing
performance. Installation is fast and simple with twist and tighten mounting screw slots, 1/4
quick connect electrical terminals and dual size barbed pressure ports for 1/8 and 3/16 ID
vinyl or rubber tubing.
For use with air and other non-combustible, non-corrosive gases, switches are UL and CSA
recognized. Two models are offered with field adjustable ranges from .15 to .55 and .50 to 7.5
in. w.c. Units are rated for 2 PSIG maximum system pressure, temperature limit is 190F and
weight is only 4 oz.
APPLICATIONS
High efficiency furnaces
Duct pressure monitor
Laboratory fume hoods
Monitor air filter condition
Engine diagnostic equipment
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible non combustible
gases.
Pressure Limit: 2 psig (13.79 kPa).
Switch Type: SPDT.
Electrical Rating: 5 amps, 125, 250,
277 VAC, 1/10 HP 250 VAC, 150 VA.
Consult factory for low current
applications.
Electrical Connections: (3) 1/4 quick
connect.
Process Connections: Dual size for
1/8 and 3/16 ID vinal or rubber tubing.
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm
vertical.
Set Point Adjustment: External slotted
head screw.
Housing: Glass filled PBT
(polybutylene terephthalate).
Weight: 4 oz (113.4 g).
Agency Approvals: CSA, UL.
Model
1710-0
1710-5
Range,
in w.c. (mm w.c.)
.15 .55 (3.81 13.97)
.50 7.5 (12.71 190.5)
Low Differential Pressure Switches Designed
for OEM Products
Competitively priced limit switch combines fast, simple installation with quality construction and materials. U.L. and C.S.A. recognized
Series
1700
Operating Ranges and Dead Bands
3-9/16
[90.49]
12 TYP
LOW
PRESSURE
COM
N.O.
N.C.
SET POINT
ADJUSTMENT
SCREW
1-9/16
[39.69]
HIGH
PRESSURE
5/16 [7.94]
4-11/16
[119.06]
3/16 [4.78] TYP
STANDARD
CONNECTORS ARE
1/4 [6.35] WIDE
GOLD CONTACT
CONNECTORS ARE
3/16 [4.76] WIDE
11/32 [8.73]
TYP 2 PLACES
4-1/8
[104.78]
BOLT CIRCLE
15/32
[11.90]
13/32
[10.32]
29/32 [23.02]
Note: All purchases must be 50 units or more.

At Maximum
Set Point
.06 (1.53)
.50 (12.71)
At Minimum
Set Point
.03 (.77)
.10 (2.55)
Approximate Dead Band

Note: Models that include installer kit add C to the end of the model number
Installer kit includes two static tips and 7 ft or PVC tubing.
For optional 1/2 NPT conduit connection, change 2 N to 1 N.
28
D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
H.V.A.C. Differential Pressure Switch
With Dual Scale Field Adjustable Set Point Knob
Series
ADPS
The Series ADPS Adjustable Differential Pressure Switch is designed
for pressure, vacuum, and differential pressures. The dual scaled adjustment
knob in inches water column and pascals allows changes to the switching
pressure to be made without a pressure gage. The ADPS is available with
settings from 0.08 w.c. (20 Pa) up to 16 w.c. (4000 Pa). The silicone diaphragm
and PA 6.6 body make the series ADPS ideal for use with air and other
noncombustible gases. The compact size, adjustment knob and low cost make the
ADPS the perfect choice for H.V.A.C. applications.
APPLICATIONS
Monitoring air filters and ventilators
Monitoring industrial cooling air circuits
Overheating protection for fan heaters
Monitoring flows in ventilation ducts
Controlling air and fire protection dampers
Frost protection for heat exchanges
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Diaphragm material: silicone; Housing material: POM switch body: PA
6.6; Cover: Polystyrene.
Temperature Limits: Process and ambient temperature from 4 to 185F
( 20 to 85C).
Pressure Limits: Max. operating pressure: 40 w.c. (10 kPa) for all
pressure ranges.
Switch Type: Single pole double throw (SPDT).
Electrical Rating: Standard: max., 1.5A/250 VAC, max. switching rate: 6
cycles/min.; Gold contact option: 0.4 A/ 250 VAC.
Electrical Connections: Push on screw terminals. M20x1.5 with cable
strain relief or optional 1/2 NPT connection.
Process Connections: 5/16 (7.94 mm) outside diameter tubing, 1/4
(6.0 mm) inside diameter tubing.
Mounting Orientation: Vertically, with pressure connections pointing
downwards.
Mechanical Working Life: Over 10
6
switching operations.
Weight: 5.6 oz (160 g).
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 13, IP54.
Agency Approvals: CE, RoHS.
Model
ADPS-01-2-N
ADPS-04-2-N
ADPS-03-2-N
ADPS-05-2-N
ADPS-06-2-N
ADPS-07-2-N
11/64
[4.5]
21/64
[8.5]
2-17/64
[57.5]
7/8
[22]
2-21/64
[59]
19/64
[7.5]
51/64
[18]
-
(P2)
+
(P1)
15/64
[6]
2-9/16
[65]
1-31/32
[50]
Approx. Dead Band @ Min
Set Point in w.c. (Pa)
0.04 (10)
0.06 (15)
0.08 (20)
0.4 (100)
0.6 (150)
1.0 (250)
Set Point Range
in w.c. (Pa)
0.08 to 0.80 (20 200)
0.12 to 1.60 (30 400)
0.20 to 2.00 (50 500)
0.80 to 4.00 (200 1000)
2.00 to 10.00 (500 2500)
4.00 to 16.00 (1000 4000)
Dual Scale
Field Adjustable
Set Point Knob
A-480
RoHS
ACCESSORIES
A-288, L type metal mounting bracket with screws
A-289, S type metal mounting bracket with screws
A-480, Plastic static pressure tip
Approx. Dead Band @ Max
Set Point in w.c. (Pa)
0.05 (12)
0.09 (22)
0.09 (23)
0.5 (130)
0.8 (200)
1.4 (350)

D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
H.V.A.C. Differential Pressure Switch
Meets Standard UL508, Housing Materials UL94 V0 Rated
Series
EDPS
The Series EDPS Adjustable Differential Pressure Switch is designed
for pressure, vacuum, and differential pressures. The dual scaled adjustment
knob in inches water column and pascals allows changes to the switching
pressure to be made without a pressure gage. The EDPS is available with
settings from 0.08 w.c. (20 Pa) up to 16 w.c. (4000 Pa). The silicone diaphragm
and PA 6.6 body make the series EDPS ideal for use with air and other
noncombustible gases. The compact size, adjustment knob and meeting the
UL508 standard make the EDPS the perfect choice for H.V.A.C. applications.
APPLICATIONS
Monitoring air filters and ventilators
Monitoring industrial cooling air circuits
Overheating protection for fan heaters
Monitoring flows in ventilation ducts
Controlling air and fire protection dampers
Frost protection for heat exchanges
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and noncombustible, compatible gases.
Materials: Diaphragm material: Silicone; Housing material: Switch
body: PA 6.6; Cover: Polystyrene; Materials UL94 V0 rated.
Temperature Limits: Process and ambient temperature from 4 to
140F ( 20 to 60C).
pressure ranges.
Electrical Rating: Max.1.0 A/250 VAC, 50 60 Hz, max switching rate: 6
cycles/min.
Electrical Connections: Push on screw terminals. 1/2 NPT
connection. M20x1.5 with cable strain relief optional.
downwards.
6
Weight: 5.6 oz (160 g).
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 13 (IP54).
Agency Approvals: CE; ETL approved to UL508 and CSA C22.2#14,
RoHS.
Model
EDPS-08-1-N
EDPS-04-1-N
EDPS-03-1-N
EDPS-05-1-N
EDPS-06-1-N
EDPS-07-1-N
11/64
[4.5]
21/64
[8.5]
2-17/64
[57.5]
7/8
[22]
2-21/64
[59]
19/64
[7.5]
51/64
[18]
-
(P2)
+
(P1)
15/64
[6]
2-9/16
[65]
1-31/32
[50]
Approx. Dead Band @ Min
Set Point IN W.C. (Pa)
0.04 (10)
0.06 (15)
0.08 (20)
0.4 (100)
0.6 (150)
1.0 (250)
Set Point Range
IN W.C. (Pa)
0.08 to 1.20 (20 300)
0.12 to 1.60 (30 400)
0.20 to 2.00 (50 500)
0.80 to 4.00 (200 1000)
2.00 to 10.00 (500 2500)
4.00 to 16.00 (1000 4000)
A-480
Dual Scale
Field Adjustable
Set Point Knob
RoHS
NEW PRODUCT!
Note: Models that include installer kit add C to the end of the model number
Installer kit includes two static tips and 7 ft of PVC tubing.
For optional M20 cable gland connection, change 1 N to 2 N.
ACCESSORIES
A-288, L type metal mounting bracket with screws
A-289, S type metal mounting bracket with screws
A-480, Plastic static pressure tip
Approx. Dead Band @ Max
Set Point IN W.C. (Pa)
0.05 (12)
0.09 (23)
0.09 (23)
0.5 (130)
0.8 (200)
1.4 (350)

30
D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
BYDS
Bypass Damper Switch
Controls Zone Static by Modulating Motorized Damper
The Series BYDS Bypass Damper Switch is designed to control motorized
bypass dampers. As individual zone dampers open and close, the system static
pressure will rise and fall. In order to maintain proper airflow and static
pressure through the HVAC system, a bypass system incorporating a floating
type motorized damper and a static pressure control should be incorporated. A
typical on/off pressure switch cannot operate in this application due to the high
cycle rate that would result, eventually causing contact burn-out. The BYDS
static pressure control is equipped with a solid-state switching and timing circuit
to enhance operation and improve long-term reliability in this demanding
application.
CONTROL OPERATION
The BYDS Bypass Damper Switch is designed for use with a three wire
floating point damper actuator used to control the static pressure on zone
control systems requiring motorized bypass dampers. A bypass damper,
bypasses air from the discharge air side of the HVAC unit back in the
return air side. The air flow is modulated in order to maintain a constant
static pressure in the system as individual zone dampers open and close.
The static pressure control is equipped with solid state switching which
dramatically increases the life of the control. On an increase in static
pressure the BYDS will send 24 volts out and start the actuator to drive
open. When the static pressure reaches set point the actuator will stop.
After a ten second delay the actuator will start to drive the damper closed
if there has not been an increase in static pressure. A green LED indicates
when the damper is in the open position or being driven open. A 24 VAC
transformer is required to power the BYDS control and damper actuator.
The unit includes tubing and two static pressure probes.
INSTALLING THE BYPASS DAMPER AND STATIC PRESSURE
CONTROL ASSEMBLY
SPECIFICATIONS
Materials:
Diaphragm material: Silicone;
Housing material: Switch body: PA 6.6 and POM;
Cover: Polystyrene.
Temperature Limits: Process and ambient temperature from 4 to
185F ( 20 to 85C).
pressure ranges.
Electrical Rating: 1A @ 24 VAC.
Electrical Connections: Screw terminal block. M20 x 1.5 with cable
strain relief or 1/2 NPT connection.
downwards.
6
Weight: 5.6 oz (160 g).
21/64
[8.5]
11/64
[4.5]
2-17/64
[57.5]
15/64
[6]
2-9/16 [65]
1-31/32 [50]
2-21/64
[59]
7/8
[22]
19/64
[7.5]
+
(P1)
-
(P2)
51/64
[18]
ADJUSTMENT KNOB
LOCATION
REMOVABLE CONNECTOR
1/2 NPT OR M20 x 1.50
ADJUSTMENT KNOB
SCALE 2:1
BYDS-01-1, Bypass Damper Switch, .08 .8 w.c.,
1/2 NPT connection
BYDS-01-2, Bypass Damper Switch, .08 .8 w.c.,
cable gland connection
Note: For alternate ranges contact the factory.

D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
MDS
Miniature Pressure Switch
Shock and Vibration Resistant, Lightweight and Compact, Gold Contacts
SPECIFICATIONS
Switch Type: SPST normally open.
Switching Media: Air or compatible fluids on high side.
Pressure Limits: Set point <3.0 in w.c.: 8 psi; Set point >3.0 in w.c.: 15
psi.
Current Rating: Gold contact switch providing maximum 40 mA
resistive load allowing for life in excess of 20 million cycles.
Electrical Connections: Brass tab type for use with quick
disconnections.
Pressure Connections: Two barbed ports for use with 1/8 3/16 ID
tubing.
Housing: Polycarbonate.
Diaphragm Material: Polyurethane.
Weight: Less than 0.353 oz (10 g).
Agency Approval: UL.
3/32 4
PLACES
[2.54]
25/64
[9.92]
25/64
[9.92] 1 SQ
[25.4 SQ]
1/2
[12.7]
2x 5/16
[7.94]
2x 47/64
[18.65]
3/8
[9.53]
3/16
[4.52]
Series
MDA
Miniature Adjustable Pressure Switch
Adjustable Set Points from 0.1 to 100 in w.c.
Sense differential pressure with the Series MDA Miniature Adjustable
Pressure Switch. The switch features field adjustable set point and gold inlay
contacts. Air or other compatible fluids can be used on the high side. The
lightweight and compact size make the MDA ideal for any application with space
constraints. Applications include industrial, HVAC, pump and motor control,
medical, automotive, pools and spas.
SPECIFICATIONS
Switch Type: SPST normally open.
Switching Media: Air or compatible fluids on high side.
Pressure Limits: MDA 011: 8 psi; MDA 111: 8 psi; MDA 211: 8 psi;
MDA 311: 15 psi. MDA 411: 25 psi.
Current Rating: 40 mA resistive for life in excess of 20 million cycles.
Contacts: 18K gold inlay.
Electrical Connections: Terminals 0.187 x 0.20: spade (recessed)
for use with quick disconnects.
Pressure Connections: Smooth port 5/32 diameter for 1/8 ID tubing.
Housing: Polycarbonate.
Diaphragm Material: Polyurethane.
Operating Voltage: AC/DC 30V or less with resistive load.
Mounting: Use #4 screws through mounting lugs or #2 screws through
eyelets.
Weight: Less than 0.353 oz (10 g).
7/32
[5.59]
HIGH
PRESSURE
PORT
1/8 4 PLACES
[3.18]
High
23/32
[18.29]
1 SQ
[25.40]
13/64 TYP
[5.08]
25/32
[19.81]
5/16 TYP
[7.87]
LOW
PRESSURE
PORT
5/32 TYP
[3.96]
31/64
[12.19]
23/32 TYP
[18.29]
Series MDA
Low
19/32
[15.24]
1 5/32
[29.21]
23/32
[18.29]
Model
MDS-0
MDS-1
MDS-2
MDS-3
MDS-4
MDS-6
Set Point
0.5 in w.c.
1.0 in w.c.
1.5 in w.c.
2.0 in w.c.
3.0 in w.c.
6.0 in w.c.
Model
MDS-7
MDS-8
MDS-10
MDS-12
MDS-14
Set Point
8.0 in w.c.
10.0 in w.c.
15.0 in w.c.
30.0 in w.c.
50.0 in w.c.
Model
MDA-011
MDA-111
MDA-211
MDA-311
MDA-411
Minimum
0.1 (0.25)
0.5 (1.25)
2.0 (4.98)
15 (37.37)
60 (149.3)
Maximum
0.5 (1.25)
2.0 (4.98)
15 (37.37)
60 (149.3)
100 (249.10)
Set Point in w.c. (mbar)
The Series MDS Pressure Switch is designed with a double diaphragm to
protect false actuation due to shock and vibration. This low cost pressure switch
has a minimum 20 million cycle life expectancy, and an extremely fast response
time, making this an ideal device for OEM orders.

32
D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Low Differential Pressure Switches
for General Industrial Service
Set Points from 0.07 to 85 w.c. Repetitive Accuracy within 2%
3-39/64
[91.68]
7/8 [22.23]
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
3-1/8
[79.38]
4
[101.60]
1-27/32
[46.83]
1-1/8
[28.57]
1/8 FEMALE NPT
HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1/2 MALE NPT
MOUNTING SPUD
1/8 FEMALE NPT
LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
3-27/32
[97.63]
2-3/32
[53.18]
2-1/8
[53.98]
CLEARANCE FOR
COVER REMOVAL
3/4
[19.05]
Essential for industrial environments, the Series 1800 combines small size and
low price with 2% repeatability for enough accuracy for all but the most demanding
applications. Set point adjustment inside the mounting stud permits mounting switch on
one side of a wall or panel with adjustment easily accessible on the opposite side. UL and
CSA listed, FM approved.
Series 1823 Switches
Operating Ranges & Deadbands
Series
1800
SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
to 82.2C). 1823 00, 20 to 180F
( 28.9 to 82.2C).
Pressure Limits: 10 psig (68.95 kPa)
continuous, 25 psig (172.4 kPa) surge.
Switch Type: Single pole double throw
(SPDT).
Repeatability: 2%.
Electrical Rating: 15 A @ 120 480
VAC, 60 Hz. Resistive 1/8 HP @125
VAC, 1/4 HP @ 250 VAC, 60 Hz. De
rate to 10 A for operation at high cycle
rates.
Electrical Connections: 3 screw type,
common, normally open and normally
closed.
NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: Screw type
inside mounting spud.
Weight: 1 lb, 5 oz (595 g).
Agency Approvals: CE, UL, CSA and
FM approved. Optional EXPL
explosion proof enclosure does not
possess any agency approvals.
1/8 FEMALE NPT
LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1-1/2 [38.10]
1-1/4 [31.75]
3/32 [2.38]
1-1/2 [38.10] TYP
1/8 FEMALE NPT HIGH
PRESSURE CONNECTION
1-7/16
[36.53]
4-1/16
[103.19]
3/4 [19.05]
CLEARANCE
FOR COVER
REMOVAL
5/16 [7.94]
MOUNTING
HOLES
TYP 4 PLACES
6 [152.40]
SQ
4 [101.60
TYP
1/2 FEMALE NPT
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
3
[76.20]
6-3/4
[171.45] TYP
7-1/2
[190.50]
Model
1823-00
1823-0
1823-1
1823-2
1823-5
1823-10
1823-20
1823-40
1823-80
Operating
Range,
Inches W.C.
0.07 to 0.22
0.15 to 0.5
0.3 to 1.0
0.5 to 2.0
1.5 to 5.0
2.0 to10
3 to 22
5 to 44
9 to 85
1/8 FEMALE NPT

HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION
5/16 [7.94]
TYP 4 PLACES
1/8 FEMALE NPT
LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
4-1/4
[107.95]
TYP
5-7/8
[149.23]
TYP
6-3/8
[161.93]
4-1/4
[107.95] TYP
7/16
[11.11]
3-3/4
[95.25]
CLEARANCE
FOR COVER
REMOVAL
6-15/16
[176.21]
2-3/4
[70.61]
1/2 FEMALE NPT
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
1-1/16
[26.99]
MIL Environmental Construction Unlisted Model 1820 can be furnished with a
special sealed snap switch for protection against high humidity, fungus and/or
military applications. Similar to Model 1823 except dead band is slightly greater and
some lower setpoints may not be possible. To order, add suffix MIL.
Example: 1820 2 MIL.
No. A-389 Mounting Bracket is 16 ga. steel, zinc plated and dichromate dipped
for corrosion resistance. Provides rugged, permanent mounting and speeds
installation.
Explosion-Proof Housing:
Cast iron base with aluminum cover. Rated Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Group D; Class II,
Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G; Class III and NEMA 7 CD, 9 EFG. Wt. 7 1/2 Ibs
(3.4kg). Switch must be factory installed. Change base number to 1824 and add
EXPL suffix.
Example: 1824 1 EXPL
Weatherproof Housing:
16 ga. steel enclosure with gasketed cover (NEMA 4, IP66) for wet or oily
conditions. Withstands 200 hour salt spray test. Wt. 5 1/2 Ibs. (2.5 kg). Switch
must be factory installed. Change 1823 base number to 1824 and add WP suffix.
Example: 1824 1 WP
Approximate
Dead Band
At Min.
Set Point
0.05
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.14
0.18
0.35
0.56
1.30
At Max.
Set Point
0.05
0.06
0.08
0.12
0.28
0.45
0.70
1.10
3.0

D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
4 [101.6] SQ.
7/8
[22.23]
3/4
[19.05] 3/4 [19.05]
4-3/4
[120.65]
5-1/2
[139.7]
HIGH PRESS.
CONN. 1/8 NPT
2

[
5
0
.
8
]
3

[
7
6
.
2
]
(4) 5-16 [7.94] DIA.
MTG. HOLES
WEATHERPROOF ELECTRIC
CONNECTION HUB
1/2 NPT FEMALE
1-1/8
[28.58]
1-1/4 [31.75] 3/32
[2.38]
3 [76.2]
3-1/8 [79.38]
LOW PRESS.
CONN. 1/8 NPT
Compact LowDifferential Pressure Switches
Set Points from 0.07" to 20" W.C. Repetitive Accuracy within 3%
Series 1910 switch with conduit
enclosure off. Shows electric
switch and set point adjustment
screw located on same side for
easy installation.
The Dwyer-engineered force-motion amplifier increases the
leverage of diaphragm movement and results in a switch with
excellent sensitivity and repeatability.
41/64
[16.27] 1-19/32
[40.48]
2-11/32
[59.53]
7/8 [22.23]
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
1-3/4 [44.45]
CLEARANCE
FOR COVER
REMOVAL
3
[76.20]
3-1/2
[88.90]
60 TYP
1/8 FEMALE NPT
HIGH PRESS.
CONNECTION
1-5/16
[33.32]
TYP
2-7/16 [61.90]
2-9/32
[57.94]
1-7/8
[47.63]
(2) 3/16 [4.76]
MOUNTING HOLES
ON A 4-3/16 [106.36] B.C.
1/8 FEMALE NPT
LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
51/64
[20.24]
Series
1900
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Limits: 30 to 180F ( 34 to 82.2C).
Pressure Limits: 45 w.c. (11.2 kPa) continuous, 10 psig (68.95 kPa) surge.
Repeatability: 3%.
Electrical Rating: 15 A @ 120 480 VAC, 60 Hz. Resistive 1/8 HP @125 VAC, 1/4
HP @ 250 VAC, 60 Hz. Derate to 10 A for operation at high cycle rates.
Electrical Connections: 3 screw type, common, normally open and normally
closed.
Set Point Adjustment: Screw type inside conduit enclosure.
Weight: 1lb, 4.5 oz (581 g).
Agency Approvals: CE , UL, CSA, and FM. Optional EXPL explosion proof
enclosure does not possess any agency approvals.
Our most popular series combines advanced design and precision construction to make
these switches able to perform many of the tasks of larger, costlier units. Designed for air
conditioning service, they also serve many fluidics, refrigeration, oven and dryer
applications. For air and non combustible compatible gases, Series 1900 switches have set
points from 0.07 to 20 (1.8 to 508 mm) w.c. Set point adjustment is easy with range screw
located inside conduit enclosure. Internal location helps prevent tampering. UL, CE, CSA
listed, and FM approved.
Model
1910-00
1910-0
1910-1
1910-5
1910-10
1910-20
Operating
Range,
Inches W.C.
0.07 to 0.15
0.15 to 0.55
0.40 to 1.6
1.40 to 5.5
3.0 to 11.75
4.0 to 20.0
4-1/4
[107.95]
5-3/4
[146.05]
1/8 NPT HIGH PRESSURE CONN.
TAPPED FOR
1/2 ELECTRICAL
CONDUIT CONN.
1/16
[1.59]
1/8 NPT LOW
PRESSURE CONN.
4-5/16 [10.54]
5-13/32 [137.32]
1-1/16
[26.99]
2-3/4
[69.85]
4-1/4
[107.95]
5-3/4
[146.05]
Series 1910 Switches
Operating Ranges, Deadbands
SPECIAL MODELS & ACCESSORIES
Manual reset Model 1900 MR includes special snap switch which latches on
pressure increase above the setpoint. Switch must be manually reset after pressure
drops below the setpoint. To order, change base model to 1900 and add MR suffix
after range number. Example: 1900 10 MR. Available on 1, 5, 10 or 20 ranges
only. Option is not UL, CSA or FM listed
Note: Manual Reset (MR) Option for use only in single positive pressure applications.
A-399, Duct Pressure Monitor Kit For use with standard or manual reset model
switches. Includes mounting flange, tubing and adapters.
A-329, Street Ell Brass adapter for applications requiring right angle connections.
Two required for differential pressures.
Approximate
Dead Band
At Min.
Set Point
0.04
0.10
0.15
0.30
0.40
0.40
At Max.
Set Point
0.04
0.10
0.16
0.30
0.40
0.50
Weatherproof Housing
16 ga. steel enclosure with gasketed cover (NEMA 4, IP66) for wet or oily
conditions. Withstands 200 hour salt spray test. Wt. 5 Ibs. (2.3 kg). Switch must be
factory installed. Change 1910 base number to 1911 and add WP suffix. Example:
1911 1 WP.
Explosion-Proof Housing
Cast iron base with brass cover. Rated Class I, Groups D; Class II, Div. 2, Groups
E, F, G; Class III and NEMA 7, 9 NEMA 3. (7 lbs). Switch must be factory installed.
Change model to 1911 and add EXPL suffix. Example: 1911 1 EXPL

34
D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Our highest precision conventional large diaphragm pressure switch provides maximum
dependability. In addition, it incorporates a visible set point indicator for maximum
convenience. UL and CSA listed, FM approved for general service, these switches are suitable
for most applications in air conditioning and industrial service. Electrical capability of 15 amps
handles most small electrical loads.
SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
( 34.4 to 43.3C).
Pressure Limits: 10 psig (68.95 kPa)
continuous, 25 (172.4 kPa) psig surge.
Switch Type: Single pole double throw
(SPDT).
Repeatability: 1%.
VAC, 60 Hz. Resistive 1/8 HP @ 125
VAC, 1/4 HP @ 250 VAC, 60 Hz.
closed.
NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: Screw type
with enclosed scale.
Weight: 4 Ib, 14 oz (2.21 kg).
Agency Approvals: UL, CSA and FM.
Model
1638-0
1638-1
1638-2
1638-5
1638-10
Operating
Range,
Inches, W.C.
0.05 to 0.25
0.20 to 1.0
1.0 to 3.0
2.0 to 6.0
3.0 to 12
At Max.
Set Point
0.05
0.06
0.08
0.25
0.30
At Min.
Set Point
0.04
0.04
0.06
0.07
0.11
Approximate Dead Band
Large Diaphragm Pressure Switches
Visual Set Point Adjustment in 5 Standard Ranges,
0.05 to 12 w.c. Repetitive Accuracy within
+
1%
Environmental (MIL) Construction. Unlisted Model 1635 can be furnished with a
special snap switch sealed against the environment for high humidity, exposure to
fungus, and/or for military applications. Similar to Model 1638 except dead band is
slightly greater and some lower set points may not be available. Specify Model 1635
(Range No.) MIL and required set point in ordering.
Special Models Available
9/32 [7.14]
MOUNTING HOLE
TYP 4 PLACES
1-1/4
[31.75]
3-3/32
[78.58]
4
[101.60]
3
[76.20]
TYP
1/2 [12.70]
TYP
2 [50.80]
TYP
3/4 [19.05]
3
[76.20]
5-7/8
[149.23]
6-1/2
[165.10]
2-1/4 [57.15]
CLEARANCE FOR COVER REMOVAL
SCREW TYPE ELECTRICAL
TERMINAL TYPE 3 PLACES
1/8 FEMALE NPT
HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION
7/8 [22.23]
CONDUIT CONNECTION
22.5
1/8 FEMALE NPT LOW
PRESSURE CONNECTION
R 4-5/16 [109.54]
TYP 2 PLACES
7-3/4
[196.85]
3-39/64
[91.68]
Series
1630

D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Our old faithful switch design is still best where highest precision combined with
diaphragm sealed leak proof construction and mounting simplicity are required. Model 1626
and 1627 differential pressure switches are identical in design and construction except that
Model 1626 has a single electric switch and Model 1627 has dual electric switches. Model
1627 can therefore provide dual control when required. It can be set to open or close two
independent electrical circuits, each preset for its own actuation pressure. Both units have
diaphragm sealed motion take outs providing maximum protection against leakage.
Model
(1626 shown,
1627 similar)
1626-10
1626-20
Operating Range
Inches, w.c.
2.0 to 11
8.0 to 24
Adj. Diff. Between Set
Points (1627 Only)
2.3
5.0
Approx.
Dead Band
Min. Max.
.25 .65
.50 1.20
Single and Dual Pressure Switches
High Reliability . . . Repetitive Accuracy within
+
1%
9/32 [7.14]
MOUNTING HOLE
TYP 2 PLACES
1-1/2
[38.10]
5-7/8
[149.23]
8-7/8
[225.43]
8-1/4
[209.55]
7-3/4
[196.85]
45 TYP
22.5
1/8 FEMALE NPT
HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1/8 FEMALE NPT
LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
R 4-5/16 [109.54]
TYP 2 PLACES
3 [76.20]
4-11/16 [119.06]
3-1/16
[77.79]
1-5/16 [33.34]
3/4 [19.05]
1/2 CONDUIT
CONNECTION
Series
1620
Floating Contact Null Switch for
High and Low Actuation
Visual Set Point Adjustment...Adjustable Null Zone

Series
1640
The unique electric switch design in the 1640 is another Dwyer Instruments, Inc.
innovation. The Dwyer
Model 1640 Differential Pressure Switch resembles the Series

1630 switches described on the previous page. The Model 1640, however, is equipped with
a single pole, double throw floating contact switch (not snap acting) so it functions as a null
switch.
Drawing shows the switching action schematically. As the diaphragm moves in response to
pressure changes, it moves the floating contact to cause switching action at two preset
points with no switching action between these points. The high circuit will be closed when
rising pressure differential reaches the preset level. The low circuit will be closed when
falling pressure differential reaches the preset level.
9/32 [7.14]
MOUNTING HOLE
TYP 4 PLACES
1-1/4
[31.75]
3-3/32
[78.58]
4
[101.60]
3 [76.20]
TYP
1/2 [12.70]
TYP
2 [50.80]
TYP
3/4 [19.05]
3
[76.20]
5-7/8
[149.23]
6-1/2
[165.10]
2-1/4 [57.15]
CLEARANCE FOR
COVER REMOVAL
SCREW TYPE ELECTRICAL
TERMINAL TYPE 3 PLACES
1/8 FEMALE NPT
HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION
7/8 [22.23]
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
22.5
1/8 FEMALE NPT LOW
PRESSURE CONNECTION
R 4-5/16 [109.54]
TYP 2 PLACES
7-3/4
[196.85]
3-39/64
[91.68]
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Limits: 30 to 110F ( 34.4 to 43.3C).
Pressure Limits: 10 psig (68.95 kPa) continuous, 25 psig (172.4 kPa) surge.
Switch Type: Single pole double throw (SPDT) floating contact (not snap action).
Electrical Rating: Non inductive 2.5 A @ 110 VAC; 1.5 A @ 220 VAC; 1 A @
24 VDC; 0.5 A @ 110 VAC; Inductive 1 A @ 110 VAC; 0.5 A @ 220 VAC; 0.5 A
@ 24 VDC (de rate 70 80% for very slow pressure changes).
closed.
Set Point Adjustment: Screw type.
Weight: 4 Ib 13 oz (2.18 kg).
Adjustable Null Span
Model
1640-0
1640-1
1640-2
1640-5
1640-10
Ranges
Inches, w.c.
.01 to 0.2
0.2 to 1.0
1.0 to 4.0
2.0 to 6.0
3.0 to 12.0
Min. Set
.01
.02
.03
.03
.04
Max. Set
.03
.06
.12
.18
.20
Model
(1626 shown,
1627 similar)
1626-1
1626-5
Operating Range
Inches, w.c.
.15 to 1.5
.5 to 6.0
Adj. Diff. Between Set
Points (1627 Only)
0.5
1.2
Approx.
Dead Band
Min. Max.
.10 .20
.15 .35
SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
( 34.4 to 54.4C).
Pressure Limits: Max. 50 in. w.c.
(12.44 kPa) continuous, 2 psig (13.79
kPa) surge.
Switch Type: 1626, single pole double
throw (SPDT); 1627, two single pole
double throw (SPDT) .
Repeatability: 1%.
VAC, 60 Hz. Resistive, 1/8 HP @ 125
VAC,1/4 HP @ 250 VAC, 60 Hz.
closed.
NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: Screw
adjustment.
Weight: Model 1626, 3 Ib, 9.8 oz (1.64
kg); Model 1627, 3 Ib, 11.8 oz (1.69 kg).

Gas Pressure/Differential Pressure Switches
External Adjustment, Visible Dial, Hermetically Sealed Snap or Mercury Switch
36
D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
i
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
* SPST switches shown are close on increase of pressure. For open on increase of pressure
replace 3 in middle of model number with 2. Example: PG-2-P1.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air, natural & manufactured gas, LP gas.
Temperature Limits: 32 to 110F (0 to 43.3C). -30 to 110F (-34.4 to 43.3C) for
dry gas or dry air.
Pressure Limits: 45 w.c. (11.2 kPa) continuous; 10 psig (68.95 kPa) surge.
Switch Type: Single-pole double-throw (SPDT).
Electrical Rating: 15A @ 120-480 VAC, 60 Hz. Resistive 1/8 H.P. @ 125 VAC, 1/4
H.P. @ 250 VAC 60 Hz.
Electrical Connections: 3 screw type, common, normally open, normally closed.
Process Connections: 1/8 female NPT or 1/4 male NPT.
Vent Connection: 1/8 female NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in horizontal position. Consult factory for other
Set Point Adjustment: Screw type with visible indicator, inside conduit enclosure.
Weight: 1 lb 2.3 oz (349 g).
Agency Approvals: CE, UL, CSA, FM.
Reliable and convenient, the 1996-5 and the 1996-20 Gas Pressure Switches serve as a
compact, low cost switch for gas fired furnaces and equipment. Pressure ranges for both
models are ideal for high or low gas pressure interlock. Visible set point and on-off
indicators add convenience in servicing. Use either NO or NC contacts on SPDT switch.
Bottom connection has both 1/8 female and 1/4 male threads for pipe nipple or coupling.
Top connection vents diaphragm chamber to outside or to furnace combustion chamber.
Mount switch with diaphragm in a horizontal position and gas pressure connection at
bottom. Used with natural, manufactured or LP gas. Also see Model 1950G.
Series
1996
3-1/8
[79.38]
3-1/2
[88.90]
1/8 (F) GAS
PRESSURE CONNECTION
1/4 NPT EXTERNAL THREAD
(ALTERNATE GAS CONNECTION
VENT CONNECTION
ON OPPOSITE SIDE
WINDOW AND VISIBLE
ON-OFF INDICATOR
7/8 [22.23] OPENING FOR
1/2 CONDUIT CONNECTION
REMOVABLE CONDUIT
ENCLOSURE COVER
Model 1996-20 gas-air
pressure switch.
Connections,
dimensions and visible
on-off indicator are
shown.
Gas Pressure Switches
Compact, Low Cost, 4" - 20" w.c. Range
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Fairprene, brass, steel, and aluminum.
Temperature Limits: -10 to 180F (-23 to 82C).
Pressure Limit:
Single pressure use on high side:
Sustained pressure: 15 psig (1.0 bar).
Surge limit: 20 psig (1.4 bar).
Differential pressure use:
Sustained pressure, range P1: 2 psig (.14 bar).
Sustained pressure, range P2: 10 psig (0.7 bar).
Enclosure Rating: General purpose. Weatherproof and explosion-proof
optional.
Repeatability: 1% of full range.
Switch Type: SPST mercury switch, SPDT mercury switch, SPDT snap
switch, or SPDT hermetically sealed snap switch. Optional DPDT.
Electrical Rating: SPDT Mercury: 4A @ 120 VAC/VDC, 2A @ 240
VAC/VDC. SPST Mercury: 6A @ 120 VAC/VDC, 3A @ 240 VAC/VDC.
SPDT Snap: 15A @ 120 VAC, 8A @ 240 VAC, 0.5A @ 120 VDC, 0.25A @
240 VDC. SPDT H.S. Silver Snap: 5A @ 125/250 VAC, 30 VDC resistive.
SPDT H.S. Gold Snap: 1A @ 125 VAC, 30 VDC resistive.
Electrical Connections: Screw type.
Conduit Connection: 7/8 (22.23 mm) hole for 1/2 (12.7 mm) conduit hub.
Process Connection: 1/2 male NPT and 1/8 female NPT used for single
positive pressure or high differential pressure, 1/8 female NPT used for
single vacuum or low differential pressure.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical.
Set Point Adjustment: External screw.
Weight: 4.5 lb (2 kg).
Deadband: See model chart.
Agency Approvals: UL, CSA, FM for mercury switch models. UL only on
snap switch models.
Series
PG
Large diaphragm sensitivity and time proven dependable design are combined in model PG
differential pressure switches. Visible dial reduces start up time and helps prevent calibration errors.
External adjustment allows set point change without removal of cover. Unit is listed by UL, FM and CSA.
Range g
1-30 wc (.25-7.47 kPa)
0.5-5 psid (0.3-.345 bar)
1-30 wc (.25-7.47 kPa)
0.5-5 psid (.03-.345 bar)
1-30 wc (.25-7.45 kPa)
0.5-5 psid (.03-.345 bar)
1-30 wc (.25-7.47 kPa)
1-30 wc (.25-7.47 kPa)
Maximum
Deadband
1.9 wc (0.47 kPa)
0.4 psid (0.38 bar)
1.3 wc (0.32 kPa)
0.3 psid (0.21 kPa)
4 wc (1.0 kPa)
.5 psid (.035 bar)
4 wc (1.0 kPa)
4 wc (1.0 kPa)
Model
PG-153-P1
PG-153-P2
PG-3-P1
PG-3-P2
PG-7000-153-P1
PG-7000-153-P2
PG-7000-153HS-P1
1-30 w PG-7000-153HG-P1
Model
1996-5
1996-20
MERCOID
CONTROL
ADJUSTMENT
SCREW
7/8 [22.23]
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
45 30
1/2 MALE NPT X
1/8 FEMALE NPT
PROCESS
CONN.
1/8 FEMALE
NPT PRESS.
CONN.
4
[101.6]
1/4
[6.35]
3/4 [19.05]
CLEARANCE
FOR COVER
REMOVAL
1-3/16
[30.16]
1-27/64
[36.12]
17/32
[13.49]
8-1/4
[209.55]
(3) 13/64 [5.16]
MOUNTING
HOLES EQUALLY
SPACED ON
6-1/2 [165.10] B.C.
7
[177.80]
6-1/64
[152.78]
Switch Type y
SPDT Mercury
SPDT Mercury
SPST Mercury*
SPST Mercury*
SPDT Snap
SPDT Snap
SPDT Hermetically
Sealed Silver Snap
SPDT Hermetically
Sealed Gold Snap
Range g
1.4 - 5.5 w.c.
4 - 20 w.c.
036.P.N:Layout 2 2/16/11 9:47 AM Page 1
Explosion-proof Differential Pressure Switches
Compact, Low Cost, Explosion-proof and Weatherproof
D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
i
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
1950
Applications with hazardous atmospheres and a single positive
pressure may require special venting. *P=PSID range models
EXTERNAL
GROUND
(2) 17/64 [6.75]
MOUNTING HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED
ON A 4-7/8 [123.83] B.C.
RANGE
ADJUSTMENT
SCREW 5-7/16
[138.13] 1/2 FEMALE
NPT
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTION
VENT DRAIN
PLUG
CAPTIVE
SCREW
1/8 FEMALE NPT
LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1-15/32
[37.30]
3/8
[9.53]
27/32
[21.43]
27/32
[21.43]
3-1/2
[88.90]
1-23/32
[43.64]
3/8
[9.53]
1/8 FEMALE NPT
HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION
Model 1950 Explosion-Proof Differential Pressure Switch combines the best features of the popular Dwyer
Series 1900 Pressure Switch with an integral explosion-proof and weatherproof housing, making it an exceptional value
for either application. It is CE, UL and CSA listed, FM approved for use in Class I, Div 1, Groups C and D, Class II Groups
E, F, and G and Class III hazardous atmospheres (NEMA 7 & 9), Raintight NEMA 3 (IP54). Weatherproof features
include a drain plug and O-ring seal in cover. Electrical connections are easily made by removing front cover. For
convenience the set point adjustment screw is located on the outside of the housing. Twelve models offer set points from
.03 to 20 in w.c. (7.5 to 5 kPa) and from .5 to 50 psi (0.035 to 3.5 bar). The unit is very light and compact about half the
weight and bulk of other explosion-proof or weather-proof switches with separate enclosures.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases.
Temperature Limits: -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C);
0 to 140F (-17.8 to 60C) for 1950P-8, 15, 25,
and 50. -30 to 130F (-34.4 to 54.4C) for 1950-02.
Pressure Limits: Continuous: 1950s - 45 in w.c.
(0.11 bar); 1950Ps - 35 psi (2.41 bar); 1950P-50
only - 70 psi (4.83 bar). Surge: 1950s - 10 psi
(0.69 bar), 1950Ps - 50 psi (3.45 bar), 1950P-50
only - 90 psi (6.21 bar).
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP54), NEMA 7 & 9.
Switch Type: Single-pole double-throw (SPDT).
Electrical Rating: 15 A @, 125, 250, 480 VAC, 60
Hz. Resistive 1/8 HP @ 125 VAC, 1/4 HP @ 250
VAC, 60 Hz.
Electrical Connections: 3 screw type, common,
normally open and normally closed.
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical
position. Consult factory for other position
orientations.
Set Point Adjustment: Screw type on top of housing.
Weight: 3.25 Ib (1.5 kg); 1950-02 model, 4.4 lb
(2 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE, UL, CSA, FM.
Series 1950 Switches - Operating Ranges and Dead Bands
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and compatible
combustible gases.
Wetted Materials: Contact factory.
Temperature Limits: 0 to 140F (-17
to 60C).
Note: Set point drift may occur with
ambient temperature changes.
Pressure Limits: 45 in w.c. (11.2 kPa)
continuous; 10 psig (68.95 kPa) surge.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP54),
NEMA 7 & 9.
Switch Type: 1 Form C relay (SPDT).
Electrical Rating: 10A, 120/240 VAC,
28 VDC. Resistive 50 mA, 125 VDC.
Power Requirements: 24 VDC 10%.
120 or 240 VAC 10% optional.
Electrical Connections: Internal
terminal block.
NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: Screw type on
top of housing.
Weight: 2 lb, 15.7 oz (1.35 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE, UL, CSA,
FM, ATEX, IECEx.
The Model 1950G Explosion-Proof Switch combines the best features of the popular
Dwyer
Series 1950 Pressure Switch with the benefit of natural gas compatibility. Units are
rain-tight for outdoor installations, and are UL listed for use in Class I, Groups A, B, C, &
D; Class II, Groups E, F, & G and Class III atmospheres, Directive 94/9/EC (ATEX)
Compliant for II 2G Exd IIB + H
2
T6, CSA & FM approved for Class I, Div 1,
Groups B, C, D; Class II, Div 1, Groups E, F, G and Class III atmospheres IECEx Exd IIB
+ H
2
T6 (-40C < Ta < +60C). The 1950G is very compact, about half the weight and bulk
of equivalent conventional explosion-proof switches.
Easy access to the SPDT relay and power supply terminals is provided by removing the top
plate of the aluminum housing. A supply voltage of 24 VDC, 120 or 240 VAC is required.
A captive screw allows the cover to swing aside while remaining attached to the unit.
Adjustment to the set point of the switch can be made without disassembly of the housing.
Series
1950G
Explosion-proof Differential Pressure Switch
Explosion-proof, Weatherproof, Compatible with Natural Gases
EXTERNAL
GROUND
(2) 17/64 [6.75]
MOUNTING HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED
ON A 4-7/8 [123.83] B.C.
RANGE
ADJUSTMENT
SCREW 5-7/16
[138.13] 1/2 FEMALE
NPT
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTION
VENT DRAIN
PLUG
CAPTIVE
SCREW
1/8 FEMALE NPT
LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1-15/32
[37.30]
3/8
[9.53]
27/32
[21.43]
27/32
[21.43]
3-1/2
[88.90]
1-23/32
[43.64]
3/8
[9.53]
1/8 FEMALE NPT
HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION
Model
1950-02-2S
1950-00-2F
1950-0-2F
1950-1-2F
1950-5-2F
1950-10-2F
1950-20-2F
Range,
Inches W.C.
.03 to .10
.07 to .15
.15 to .50
.4 to 1.6
1.4 to 5.5
3 to 11
4 to 20
Model*
1950P-2-2F
1950P-8-2F
1950P-15-2F
1950P-25-2F
1950P-50-2F
Range,
PSID
0.5 to 2
1.5 to 8
3 to 15
4 to 25
15 to 50
UL, CSA, FM
Model
1950G-00-B-24-NA
1950G-0-B-24-NA
1950G-1-B-24-NA
1950G-5-B-24-NA
1950G-10-B-24-NA
1950G-20-B-24-NA
Range,
Inches W.C.
.07 to .15
.15 to .50
.4 to 1.6
1.4 to 5.5
3 to 11
4 to 20

Model
1950G-00-B-24
1950G-0-B-24
1950G-1-B-24
1950G-5-B-24
1950G-10-B-24
1950G-20-B-24
Approximate Dead
Band at
Min.
Set Point
.04
.06
.11
.4
.9
1.2
Max.
Set Point
.06
.11
.29
.9
1.8
3.0
Approximate Dead Band at
Max. Set Point
.05
.05
.15
.20
.40
.50
.60
Min. Set Point
.025
.04
.10
.15
.30
.40
.40
Approximate Dead Band at
Min. Set Point
.3
1.0
.9
.7
1.0
Max. Set Point
.3
1.0
.9
.7
1.5
037.P.N:Layout 2 2/10/11 3:33 PM Page 1
38
D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
i
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Explosion-proof, heavy duty, industrial unit has a unique new design which provides
sensitivity to differential pressures as low as 10 inches of water (254 mm w.c.), yet handles
total pressure of 1500 psi (103 bar). Unlike common differential pressure switches that use
a piston-type motion transfer, the Series H3 utilizes a rotary motion transfer shaft that
prevents a change in total pressure from causing a setpoint shift. Unit yields deadbands
approximately 5% of range, with zero setpoint shift due to variation in working pressures.
Friction is minimized and repeatability increased by allowing range spring to act directly
on diaphragm plate. Rolling diaphragm design maintains constant effective area to further
reduce friction. Diaphragm is allowed to seat, allowing application of full rated pressure,
up to 1500 psi (103 bar), on either high or low pressure port, without damage. Special
overtravel feature prevents overtightening of range adjust screw. Choose optional 316SS
chamber for water and water-based fluids or harsher applications.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: See pressure
chamber and diaphragm material in
model chart.
Temperature Limit: -4 to 220F
(-20 to 104C), ATEX: -20 to 90C
(-4 to 194F).
Pressure Limit: 1500 psig (103 bar).
Enclosure Rating: Standard meets
NEMA 4X (IP56), drain option meets
NEMA 3 (IP54). For hazardous use
see the hazardous location ratings
chart.
Switch Type: SPDT or DPDT snap
switch.
Electrical Rating: 5A @ 125/250 VAC,
30 VDC.
Electrical Connections: See model
chart.
Conduit Connection: 3/4 female
NPT.
Process Connection: 1/8 female
NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: Internal screw.
Weight: 4 lb, 2 oz (2 kg).
Deadband: Approximately 5% of
range.
Agency Approvals: UL, CSA, CE, and
ATEX see ratings chart.
Note: Shown without housing and cover.
Internal terminal blocks for
conductors up to 18 gauge are
optional.
Optional NEMA 3 (lP 54) housing
includes explosion-proof drain.
Standard NEMA 4X (IP 56) version is
without drain.
External Ground Connection
Standard Internal ground
connection also standard use
either one.
Explosion-Proof Differential Pressure Switches
Setpoints from 10 w.c. to 200 psid Rated 1500 psig, Weatherproof
Series
H3
11/64 [4.37]
MOUNTING HOLES
IN MTG BRACKET
1/8 NPT
HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1/8 NPT
LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
17/32
[13.5]
3
[762]
1-3/4
[44.45]
COVER
COVER
SET SCREW
3/4 NPT
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
5-3/8
[136.53]
2-13/32
[61.12]
31/32
[24.61]
OPTIONAL DRAIN
PROCESS
CONNECTION
CENTERLINE
1-25/32
[45.24]
3-9/16
[90.49]
4
[101.6]
Hazardous Location Ratings
Model
H3 _ _ _ C
H3 _ _ _ L
H3 _ _ _ T
H3 _ _ _ C-DRAIN
H3 _ _ _ L-DRAIN
UL
CI. I, Gr.B, C & D

CI. II, Gr.E, F & G
CI. I, Gr.B, C & D

CI. II, Gr.E, F & G
CSA
CI. I, Gr.B, C & D

CI. II, Gr.E, F & G
Directive 94/9/EC ATEX

Compliant p
0344
II 2 G EEx d IIB
-20C T amb 75C T6
EC-Type Certificate No.
KEMA 03ATEX 2584
0344
II 2 G EEx d IIB
-20C T amb 75C T6
EC-Type Certificate No.
KEMA 03ATEX 2584
Example
Construction
Pressure
Chamber &
Diaphragm
Material
(Wetted)
Adjustable
Operating
Range
Circuit
(Switch)
Options
Electrical
Connection
Options
H3
H3
S
A
S
2
1
2
3
4
S
S
D
C
L
T
C
MV
DRAIN
MV
VIT
H3S-2SC-MV Differential Pressure Control;
316 SS pressure chamber and
Fluoroelastomer diaphragm; weatherproof and
ATEX; SPDT snap action switch with gold
contacts; fixed deadband, automatic reset;
adjustable range 0.5-15 psid
Series designator, weatherproof and
explosion-proof
Aluminum chamber with Nitrile diaphragm
316 SS chamber with Fluoroelastomer
diaphragm
Adjustable range 10-180 in. w.c.
(2.48-44.78 kPa)
Adjustable range 0.5-15 psid
(0.03-1 bar)
Adjustable range 5-70 psid
(.34-4.8 bar)
Adjustable range 10-200 psid
(.7-13.8 bar)
SPDT snap action switch rated 5A @ 125/250
VAC, 30 VDC
DPDT snap action switch rated 5A @ 125/250
VAC, 30 VDC
18 AWG x 18 inch lead wires
UL, CSA approved internal terminal block
ATEX approved internal terminal block
Housing with drain - allows condensate to be
drained from inside enclosure (meets NEMA 3
instead of 4X)
Gold contacts on snap switch for dry circuits
rated 1A @ 125 VAC, 1A resistive or 0.5 A
inductive @ 30 VDC
Fluoroelastomer diaphragm option where
not standard
038.P.N:Layout 2 2/16/11 10:20 AM Page 1
D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass on ranges 61,
62, 63 or 316 SS on ranges 62E, 64E,
65E.
( 23 to 82C).
Pressure Limit: Maximum pressure of
the operating range.
Enclosure Rating: General purpose.
Weatherproof or explosion proof
optional.
Switch Type: Snap switch. (Contact
factory for mercury switch)
Electrical Rating: See model chart.
Electrical Connection: Screw
terminal.
Conduit Connection: General
purpose: 1/2 hole for conduit hub;
Weatherproof: 1/2 conduit hub;
Explosion proof: 3/4 female NPT.
Process Connection: General
purpose and weatherproof: 1/8 female
NPT, explosion proof: 1/4 male NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: Thumbscrew.
Weight: General purpose: 5 lb (2.3 kg),
weatherproof: 7 lb (3 kg), explosion
proof: 25 lb (11 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE, UL, cUL.
Double Bellows Differential Pressure Switches
Visible Setpoints, Adjustable or Fixed Deadband . . . High Pressure Ranges
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases.
Wetted Materials: Body, piston, and fittings: anodized aluminum; spring: steel.
Pressure Limits: 2000 psid (138 bar), 6000 psig (413 bar).
Repeatability: See table.
Switch Type: SPDT.
Electrical Rating: AC: 3 VA, 0.25A @ 120 VAC; DC: 5 VA, 0.25A @ 175 VDC.
Electrical Connection: 24 AWG X 12 (30.5 cm) wire leads.
Process Connection: 1/4 female NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Any.
Set Point Adjustment: See table.
Weight: 8.5 oz (241 g).
Rugged Series A4 Differential Pressure Switch offers field adjustments and can handle
system pressures up to 6000 psig. Piston design allows mounting in any orientation. The
switch is capable of carrying moderate shock and vibratory loads.
Series
A4
Differential Pressure Switch
Adjustable Set Point, High Overpressure
1/4 NPT
1.000 HEX
[25.40]
1-1/4
[31.75]
3-3/4
95.25]
1-1/2
[38.10]
Two opposing bellows combine maximum sensitivity and vibration resistance with
moderate cost in the Series DP differential pressure switches. Both set and reset points are
easily adjustable through non-interactive, externally accessible controls. Visible set-point
indicators simplify changes. SPDT snap action switch, 316 stainless steel or brass bellows,
flanged steel housing. Rated pressures to 600 psig.
Series
DP
13/64 [5.16] MOUNTING
HOLES EQUALLY SPACED
ON A 6-1/2 [165.10] B.C.
1/8 FEMALE
NPT LOW
PRESSURE
CONNECTION
OPERATING
ADJUSTMENT
OR RESET
45
7/8 [22.23]
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
6
[152.40]
1/8 FEMALE
NPT HIGH
PRESSURE
CONNECTION
3/4 [19.05] CLEARANCE
FOR COVER REMOVAL
4-1/4
[107.95]
2-3/4
[69.85]
1-7/32
[30.94]
7
[177.80]
Adjustable Deadband
Snap Action Switch
SPDT, 15A @ 120/240 VAC
Fixed Deadband
Snap Action Switch
SPDT, 15A @ 120/240 VAC
Bellows
Material
Brass
Brass
Brass
316SS
316SS
316SS
Range
psid (bar)
0 10 (0 0.7)
0 20 (0 1.4)
0 30 (0 2.1)
0 20 (0 1.4)
0 30 (0 2.1)
0 80 (0 5.5)
Max. Press
psig (bar)
50 (3.5)
100 (6.9)
300 (20.7)
100 (6.9)
300 (20.7)
600 (41.4)
Model
A4-1
A4-2
A4-3
A4-4
A4-5
Repeatabilty
psi (bar)
2 (.14)
4 (.28)
8 (.55)
16 (1.1)
32 (2.2)
Optional Enclosures
Weatherproof Housing to order add W suffix after DPA.
Example: D P A W 7033 153 61
Explosion-Proof Housing to order add E suffix after DPA.
Example: D P A E 7033 153 61
Model
DPA-7033-153-61
DPA-7033-153-62
DPA-7033-153-64
DPA-7043-153-62E
DPA-7043-153-64E
DPA-7043-153-65E
Model
DPS-7233-153-61
DPS-7233-153-62
DPS-7233-153-64
DPS-7243-153-62E
DPS-7243-153-64E
DPS-7243-153-65E
Min.D.B.
psid (bar)
1.5 (.10)
2.5 (.17)
6.0 (.41)
3.0 (.21)
6.0 (.41)
20(1.4)
Fixed D.B.
psid (bar)
0.5 (.03)
1.0 (.07)
1.5 (.10)
1.5 (.10)
2.0 (.14)
6.0 (.41)
Decreasing
2 7 (.14 .48)
5 16 (.34 1.1)
10 21 (.68 1.5)
20 80 (1.4 5.5)
35 120 (2.4 8.3)
Set Point psid (bar)
Increasing
7 13 (.48 .89)
13 25 (.89 1.7)
25 45 (1.7 3.1)
35 160 (2.4 11.0)
120 250 (8.3 17.2)

40
D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Magnesense
Differential Pressure Transmitter

Monitors Pressure & Air Velocity
Series
MS
3-7/16
[87.31]
2-41/64
[67.07]
1/2 NPT
21/32
[16/67]
21/32
[16/67]
29/32
[23.02]
1/2
[12.70]
57/64
[22.62]
(3) 3/16 (4.76) HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED ON A
4.115 (104.52) BC
2-11/64
[55.17]
2-9/16
[65.09]
8-1/8
[206.38]
35/84 [13.87]
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 1% for 0.25 (50 Pa), 0.5 (100 Pa), 2 (500 Pa), 5 (1250
Pa), 10 (2 kPa), 15 (3 kPa), 25 (5 kPa) 2% for 0.1 (25 Pa), 1 (250
Pa) and all bi directional ranges.
Stability: 1% / year F.S.O.
Pressure Limits: 1 psi maximum, operation; 10 psi, burst.
Power Requirements: 10 to 35 VDC (2 wire); 17 to 36 VDC or isolated
21.6 to 33 VAC (3 wire).
Output Signals: 4 to 20 mA (2 wire); 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V (3 wire).
Response Time: Adjustable 0.5 to 15 sec. time constant. Provides a
95% response time of 1.5 to 45 seconds.
Zero & Span Adjustments: Digital push button.
Loop Resistance: Current output: 0 1250 max; Voltage output: min.
load resistance 1 k.
Current Consumption: 40 mA max.
Display (optional): 4 digit LCD.
Electrical Connections:
4 20 mA, 2 Wire: European style terminal block for 16 to 26 AWG.
0 10 V, 3 Wire: European style terminal block for 16 to 22 AWG.
Electrical Entry: 1/2 NPS thread
Accessory (A 151): Cable gland for 5 to 10 mm diameter cable.
Process Connections: 3/16 ID tubing (5 mm ID). Maximum OD 9 mm.
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position.
Weight: 8.0 oz (230 g).
The Series MS Magnesense
Differential Pressure Transmitter is an

extremely versatile transmitter for monitoring pressure and air velocity. This
compact package is loaded with features such as:
Field selectable English or Metric ranges
Field upgradeable LCD display
Adjustable damping of output signal (with optional display)
Ability to select a square root output for use with pitot tubes and other
similar flow sensors
Along with these features, the patented magnetic sensing technology provides
exceptional long term performance and enables the Magnesense
Differential
Pressure Transmitter to be the single solution for your pressure and flow
applications.
Output
4 20 mA
0 10 V
4 20 mA
0 10 V
4 20 mA
4 20 mA
4 20 mA
0 5 V
0 5 V
0 5 V
0 10 V
0 10 V
0 10 V
4 20 mA
0 10 V
Model
MS-121*
MS-321*
MS-111*
MS-311*
MS-131
MS-141
MS-151
MS-721*
MS-711*
MS-621
MS-331
MS-341
MS-351
MS-021
MS-221
Standard MS with optional LCD
MS with optional LCD and static probe
Selectable Ranges
0.1, 0.25, 0.5 w.c. (25, 50, 100 Pa)
0.1, 0.25, 0.5 w.c. (25, 50, 100 Pa)
1, 2, 5 w.c. (250, 500, 1250 Pa)
1, 2, 5 w.c. (250, 500, 1250 Pa)
10 w.c. (2 kPa)
15 w.c. (3 kPa)
25 w.c. (5 kPa)
0.1, 0.25, 0.5 w.c. (25, 50, 100 Pa)
1, 2, 5 w.c. (250, 500, 1250 Pa)
0.1, 0.25,0.5 w.c. (25, 50, 100 Pa)
10 w.c. (2 kPa)
15 w.c. (3 kPa)
25 w.c. (5 kPa)
0.1, 0.25,0.5 w.c. (25, 50, 100 Pa)
0.1, 0.25,0.5 w.c. (25, 50, 100 Pa)
ACCESSORIES
A-435, Field Upgradeable LCD
A-481, Installer kit. Includes 2 plastic static pressure tips and 7 ft (2.1 m)
of PVC tubing
Note: Add LCD to end of model for units with display.
*Models available with duct mount static pressure probe. Change last
digit from 1 to 2. Ex. MS 122

D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
One Unit for all your Building Pressure Applications
The Industry Standard for Building Automation
Field Selectable Ranges in metric or English. Lowers
stock and inventory requirements. Youll always have
the right transmitter for every job.
Field Upgradable LCD. No need to order
two separate transmitters. Simply stock a
transmitter and display and you can satisfy
any customers requests. Simply remove
cover and snap the LCD onto the board.
Digital Push Button Zero and
Span. Reduces calibration time
significantly over other transmitters
that utilize potentiometers. Lowers
maintenance time and costs.
Field Selectable Air Velocity Mode for fan
and blower applications. Unit provides square
root output that accurately tracks fpm or m/s flow
rate. No need for a smart programmable
indicator or PLC to convert pressure to air flow.
Reduces components and installation time
lowering overall costs.
Adjustable Digital Dampening smooths out
unstable pressure fluctuations common in air flow
applications.
Fan
Velocity
Building
Pressure
Duct
Pressure

42
D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Cost Effective for B.A.S. Applications, Digital Push-Button Calibration
with One-Touch
Transmitter Technology
Series
616K
&
616OT
2-27/64
[61.52]
3-19/64
[83.74]
2x 3/16
[4.76]
3-7/8
[98.43]
1-1/8
[28.58]
4-3/8
[111.13]
1/8
[3.175]
3-21/64
[84.53]
The Series 616K & 616OT Differential Pressure Transmitters with One-Touch
technology are designed for simplicity making them the ideal choice for installers
and maintenance professionals.
The One Touch
Differential Pressure Transmitters are cost effective, compact

transmitters that reduce up front costs as well as expenses over the life of the
product. These instruments not only alleviate cumbersome turn pots typically found
in most transmitters, but eliminate entirely the need to span the instrument during
calibration. With a single digital push button, both ZERO AND SPAN are calibrated
properly, nothing else is required. No additional reference pressure sources and
separate calibration devices are necessary; no need to remove from service and
send to a lab. All that is required of the installer or user is to let the unit sit at zero
reference pressure, then push a button. That is it! The transmitter is now ready for
operation. Time savings are enormous over the life of the product compared to
traditional transmitters which require time to annually remove the product from
service plus the additional time to actually perform a complete full span calibration.
Mounting is simple with integral mounting holes on the 616K or mounting tabs on the
616OT that are inherent to the molded housing. The Series 616K has easy to wire
open screw terminals at the top of the housing while the Series 616OT possesses a
convenient removable terminal block that allows the installer to wire externally, then
snap the wired block back onto the board inside the enclosure. The Series 616OT
provides an enhanced NEMA 4X (IP66) enclosure.
The One Touch
family of Differential Pressure Transmitters are ideal for building

automation applications such as air handlers, duct pressure, variable air volume and
filter monitoring. Available models include ranges from 1 w.c. to 20 w.c. depending
on series.
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 616K: 2% F.S.; 616OT: 1% F.S.
Stability: 1% F.S. / year.
Temperature Limits: 616K: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C); 616OT: 0 to 140F
( 18 to 60C).
Pressure Limits: 616K: 2 psi (13.8 kPa); 616OT: 1 psi maximum operation; 10 psi
burst.
Thermal Effect: 616OT: 0.05%/F (0.03%/C).
Thermal Effect on Span: 0.11% F.S./F (+0.19% F.S./C) typ.
Thermal Effect on Zero: 616K: 616K X0: 0.6%/F (1%/C); 616K X1: 0.3%/F
(0.5%/C); 616K X2: 0.2%/F (0.33%/C); 616K X3: 0.12%/F (0.2%/C);
616K X4: 0.06%/F (0.1%/C) F.S. max.
Power Requirements: 616K: 16 35 VDC (2 or 3 wire), 20 28 VAC (3 wire);
616OT: 10 35 VDC (2 wire).
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA.
Zero and Span Adjustments: Pushbutton.
Loop Resistance: 616K: DC=1000 ohms maximum, AC=1200 ohms maximum;
616OT: 1250 ohms maximum.
Current Consumption: 616K: 21 mA maximum; 616OT: 40 mA maximum.
Electrical Connections: 616K: Screw type terminal block; 616OT: Removable
European style terminal block for 16 to 26 AWG.
Electrical Entry: 616 OT: Cable gland for 0.114 to 0.250 (2.9 to 6.4 mm)
diameter cable.
Process Connections: Barbed, dual size to fit 1/8 (3 mm) and 3/16 (5 mm) I.D.
rubber or vinyl tubing.
Enclosure Rating: 616K: NEMA1 (IP20); 616OT: NEMA 4X (IP66).
Mounting Orientation: Position insensitive.
Weight: 616K: 1.8 oz (51 g); 616OT: 4.0 oz (115 g).
Agency Approval: CE.
One Touch
Digital
Push Button sets
both zero & span
7/8
[22.23]
1/2
[12.70]
2-13/32
[61.12]
3-21/64
[84.53]
5/16
[7.94]
5/32 [3.97]
MOUNTING HOLE
2 PLACES
2-1/4
[57.15]
1-1/2
[38.10]
1/2
[12.70]
Model
616K-00
616K-01
616K-02
616K-03
616K-04
Model
616K-10
616K-11
616K-12
616K-13
616K-14
Model
616OT-10
616OT-15
616OT-20
616OT-2 KPA
616OT-3 KPA
616OT-5 KPA
Series 616K
General Purpose Housing
Series 616OT
NEMA 4X (IP66) Housing
Range
0 1 w.c.
0 2 w.c.
0 3 w.c.
0 5 w.c.
0 10 w.c.
Range
0 250 Pa
0 500 Pa
0 750 Pa
0 1250 Pa
0 2500 Pa
Range
10 w.c.
15 w.c.
20 w.c.
2 kPa
3 kPa
5 kPa
ACCESSORY

D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
616
SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
Accuracy: 0.25% F.S.
Stability: 1% F.S./yr.
( 17.8 to 60C).
Compensated Temperature Limits:
20 to 120F ( 6.67 to 48.9C).
Pressure Limits: See chart.
Thermal Effect: 0.02% F.S./F
(0.0012% F.S./C).
Power Requirements: 10 35 VDC
(2 wire).
Zero and Span Adjustments:
Potentiometers for zero and span.
Loop Resistance: DC; 0 1250 ohms
maximum.
Current Consumption: DC; 38 mA
maximum.
Electrical Connections: Screw type
terminal block.
Process Connections: Barbed, dual
size to fit 1/8 and 3/16 (3.12 mm and
4.76 mm) I.D. rubber or vinyl tubing.
5/32 [3.97]
MOUNTING HOLE
TYP 2 PLACES
1/2
[12.7]
1-1/2
[38.1]
2-1/4
[57.15]
1-13/32
[35.74]
5/16
[7.95]
15/32
[11.91]
3-21/64
[84.53]
2-13/32
[61.12]
1/2
[12.7]
7/16
[11.11]
7/8
[22.23]
Ranges from 0-1 in. w.c. to 0-100 psid, Accuracy 0.25%
Model
616-00
616-0
616-1
616-2
616-3
616-4
616-5
616-6
616-7
Range
0 1 in w.c.
0 2 in w.c.
0 3 in w.c.
0 6 in w.c.
0 10 in w.c.
0 20 in w.c.
0 40 in w.c.
0 100 in w.c.
0 200 in w.c.
Max. Press.
2 psig
2 psig
2 psig
5 psig
5 psig
11 psig
11 psig
29 psig
29 psig
Model
616-8
616-9
616-10
616-11
616-12
616-3B
616-6B
616-10B
616-20B
Range
0 10 psid
0 20 psid
0 30 psid
0 50 psid
0 100 psid
1.5 0 1.5 in w.c.
3 0 3 in w.c.
5 0 5 in w.c.
10 0 10 in w.c.
Max. Press.
29 psig
58 psig
58 psig
150 psig
150 psig
2 psig
5 psig
5 psig
11 psig
Series 616 Transmitter features an exceptional 0.25% accuracy in several factory
calibrated ranges. Choose the one just right for your application. Span and Zero controls
included for fine tuning and minor re-calibration in the field.
Series 616, models 0.25% accuracy
Series
616C
5/32 [3.97]
MOUNTING HOLE
TYP 2 PLACES
1/2
[12.7]
1-1/2
[38.1]
2-1/4
[57.15]
1-13/32
[35.74]
5/16
[7.95]
15/32
[11.91]
3-21/64
[84.53]
2-13/32
[61.12]
1/2
[12.7]
7/16
[11.11]
7/8
[22.23]
Ranges from 0-1 in. w.c. to 0-100 psid, Accuracy 1% F.S.
SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
Accuracy: 1% F.S.
( 17.8 to 60C).
20 to 120F ( 6.67 to 48.9C).
(0.0012% F.S./C).
(2 wire).
maximum.
maximum.
terminal block.
size to fit 1/8 and 3/16 (3.12 mm and
4.76 mm) I.D. rubber or vinyl tubing.
Model
616C-00
616C-0
616C-1
616C-2
616C-3
616C-4
616C-5
616C-6
616C-7
Range
0 1 in w.c.
0 2 in w.c.
0 3 in w.c.
0 6 in w.c.
0 10 in w.c.
0 20 in w.c.
0 40 in w.c.
0 100 in w.c.
0 200 in w.c.
Max. Press.
2 psig
2 psig
2 psig
5 psig
5 psig
11 psig
11 psig
29 psig
29 psig
Model
616C-8
616C-9
616C-10
616C-11
616C-12
616C-3B
616C-6B
616C-10B
616C-20B
Range
0 10 psid
0 20 psid
0 30 psid
0 50 psid
0 100 psid
1.5 0 1.5 in w.c.
3 0 3 in w.c.
5 0 5 in w.c.
10 0 10 in w.c.
Max. Press.
29 psig
58 psig
58 psig
150 psig
150 psig
2 psig
5 psig
5 psig
11 psig
Series 616C Transmitter features an exceptional 1% accuracy in several factory
calibrated ranges. Choose the one just right for your application. Span and Zero controls
included for fine tuning and minor re-calibration in the field.
Series 616C, models 1% accuracy

44
D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
DIN Rail Differential Pressure Transmitter
Mounts on 35 mm DIN Rail
2-57/64
[73.42]
2-3/8
[60.33]
1-1/2
[38.10]
2-3/8
[60.33]
13/16
[20.64]
3/4
[19.05]
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 0.25% F.S. at 70F.
Temperature Limits: 20 to 120F ( 6.67 to 48.9C).
Thermal Effect: 0.02% F.S./F (0.0012% F.S./C).
Power Requirements: 10 35 VDC (2 wire).
Zero and Span Adjustments: Potentiometers for zero and span.
Loop Resistance: DC: 0 1250 ohms max.
Current Consumption: DC: 38 mA max.
Electrical Connections: Screw type terminal block.
Process Connections: 1/8 female NPT. Accessories included are
2 barbed fittings for 1/8 (3.12 mm) and 3/16 (4.77 mm) I.D. rubber
or vinyl tubing.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical, on a 1.378 (35 mm) DIN rail.
Weight: 4.8 oz (136 g).
The Series 616D Differential Pressure Transmitter senses the pressure of air and compatible gases
and sends a standard 4-20 mA output signal. The 616D housing is specifically designed to mount on a 35
mm DIN rail in a panel. This mounting style allows for several units to be mounted closely together reducing
required space. A wide range of models are available factory calibrated to specific ranges as listed in the
chart below. The span and zero controls are for use when checking calibration. They are not intended for
re-ranging to a significantly different span. Versatile circuit design enables operation in 2-wire current
loops.
Series
616D
Model
616D-1
616D-2
616D-3
616D-4
616D-5
616D-6
616D-7
616D-8
616D-9
Range
0 3 in w.c.
0 6 in w.c.
0 10 in w.c.
0 20 in w.c.
0 40 in w.c.
0 100 in w.c.
0 200 in w.c.
0 10 psid
0 20 psid
Model
616D-10
616D-11
616D-12
616D-13
616D-14
616D-3B
616D-6B
616D-10B
616D-20B
Range
0 30 psid
0 50 psid
0 100 psid
0 12 ft w.c.
0 20 ft w.c.
1.5 0 1.5 in w.c.
3 0 3 in w.c.
5 0 5 in w.c.
10 0 10 in w.c.
Same Size as Standard Magnehelic
Differential Pressure Gage

Series
DM-2000
The Dwyer Series DM-2000 Differential Pressure Transmitter senses the pressure of air and
compatible gases and sends a standard 4-20 mA output signal. The DM-2000 housing is specifically designed
to mount in the same diameter cutout as a standard Magnehelic
gage. A wide range of models are available

factory calibrated to specific ranges.
Pressure connections are inherent to the glass filled plastic molded housing making installation quick and
easy. Digital push-button zero simplifies calibration over typical turn-potentiometers. An optional 3.5 digit
LCD shows process and engineering units. A single push button allows field selection of 4 to 6 engineering
units depending on range LCD models.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non
combustible, compatible gases.
Wetted Materials: Consult
factory.
Accuracy: 1% F.S. at 70F.
Temperature Limits: 20 to
120F ( 6.67 to 48.9C).
Pressure Limits: 10 psig
(0.69 bar).
Thermal Effect: 0.055%
F.S./F (0.099% F.S./C).
Power Requirements: 10 35
VDC (2 wire).
Digital push button zero and
span.
Loop Resistance: DC: 0 1250
ohms maximum.
Current Consumption: DC: 38
mA maximum.
Electrical Connections:
Screw type terminal block.
Display: 3.5 digit LCD, 0.7
height.
I.D. tubing.
Weight: 4.8 oz (136 g).
Model
DM-2001-LCD
DM-2002-LCD
DM-2003-LCD
DM-2004-LCD
DM-2005-LCD
DM-2006-LCD
DM-2007-LCD
DM-2012-LCD
DM-2013-LCD
DM-2019-LCD
HIGH PRESSURE PORT
1-1/4
[31.75]
7/16
[11.11]
17/32
[13.50]
1-11/16
[42.86]
5/32
[3.97]
4-3/4
[120.65]
LOW PRESSURE PORT
Range
.100 in wc
.250 in wc
.500 in wc
1.000 in wc
2.00 in wc
3.00 in wc
5.00 in wc
.250-0-.250 in wc
.500-0-.500 in wc
-0.05-0-.200 in wc
Pa
24.9
62.2
124.3
249
497
746
1243
62.2-0-62.2
124.3-0-124.3
49.8
mm wc
2.54
6.35
12.70
25.4
50.8
76.2
127-0
3.65-0-6.35
12.70-0-12.70
5.08
mBar
.249
.622
1.243
2.49
4.97
7.46
12.43
.622-0-.622
1.243-0-1.243
.498
Note: Remove LCD from the end of the model number if not needing the display.
APPLICATION
Differential pressure across filters.
Max. Press.
2 psig
5 psig
5 psig
11 psig
11 psig
29 psig
29 psig
29 psig
58 psig
Max. Press.
58 psig
150 psig
150 psig
29 psig
29 psig
2 psig
5 psig
5 psig
11 psig
psi
.108
.180
kPa
.124
.249
.497
.746
1.243
ACCESSORIES
A-299, Surface Mounting Bracket

D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
616W
SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
Accuracy: 0.25% F.S., display
accuracy 0.5%.
( 17.8 to 60C).
20 to 120F ( 6.67 to 48.9C).
(0.0012% F.S./C).
(2 wire).
maximum.
maximum.
terminal block.
size to fit 1/8 and 3/16 (3.12 and 4.76
mm) I.D. rubber or vinyl tubing.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical,
consult factory for other position
orientations.
Weight: Without LCD 8.8 oz. (249 g);
with LCD 9.6 oz (272 g).
NEMA 4X Enclosure, 0.25% F.S. Accuracy, Ranges from 0-1 in. w.c. to 0-100 psid
Positive, negative and differential pressures can be measured within a full span
accuracy of 0.25% with the Series 616W Differential Pressure Transmitter. Units are
enclosed in a polycarbonate case, rated NEMA 4X (IP66) and operate by sensing the
pressure of air and compatible gases then sending a standard 4-20 mA output signal.
Design enables operation in 2-wire current loops. A wide range of models are available
factory calibrated to specific ranges. The span and zero controls are for use when checking
calibration. They are not intended for re-ranging to a significantly different span. The LCD
(as shown above) allows local indication of pressure. (If LCD is not needed, drop from model
number).
3-1/8
[79.38]
1-1/4
[31.75]
1-3/16
[30.18] 3-3/4
[95.25]
4-1/2
[114.30]
5-1/8
[130.18]
3/16 [4.76]
MOUNTING HOLES
TYP 4 PLACES
1-5/16
[33.32] TYP
2-1/8
[53.98]
3/4 [19.05] TYP
7/16 OR 5/8
[11.13 OR 15.88] TYP
1/8 AND 3/16
[3.18 AND 4.76] I.D. TUBING 3-1/8
[79.38]
4-17/32
[115.09]
Note: Units with M in the model number are metric units. Remove LCD for models without display.
Series
616WL
Low Ranges Down to 0.25 w.c. (60 Pa), NEMA 4X Housing
The Series 616WL Differential Pressure Transmitter senses very low pressures of air
and non-combustible, compatible gases and sends a standard 4-20 mA output signal. All
models, including those featuring the 3 digit LCD digital read-out, are factory calibrated to
specific ranges as listed in the chart below.
Positive, negative and differential pressures can be measured within a full span accuracy
of 0.50%. This weatherproof unit is enclosed in a polycarbonate case, designed to meet
(IP66/NEMA 4X). Internal digital push button zero and span allow for quick and simple
field calibration.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-combustible,
compatible gases.
Accuracy: 0.50% F.S., display
accuracy 0.5%.
(-17.8 to 60C).
Compensated Temperature Limits: 20
to 120F (-6.67 to 48.9C).
(0.036% F.S./C).
Power Requirements: 12-30 VDC
(2-wire).
Zero and Span Adjustments: Digital,
push button adj.
Loop Resistance: DC; 0-900 ohms
maximum.
maximum.
Electrical Connections: Screw-type
terminal block.
size to fit 1/8 and 3/16 (3.12 and 4.76
mm) I.D. rubber or vinyl tubing.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical, consult
factory for other position orientations.
Weight: Without LCD 17 oz (482 g);
with LCD 18 oz (510 g).
3-1/8
[79.38]
4-17/32
[115.09]
5-1/8
[130.18]
63/61
[25.00]
47/64
[18.65]
FITTING TO
ACCOMODATE
CABLE DIAMETERS
OF .100 - .260
1/8 AND 3/16
[3.18 AND 4.76] I.D. TUBING
2-21/32
[67.47]
3-45/64
[94.06]
49/64
[19.45]
1-1/8
[28.58]
2-37/64
[65.48]
3/16 [4.76]
MOUNTING HOLES TYP 4 PLCS
4-17/32
[115.09]
3-1/8
[79.38]
Model
616WL-2
616WL-4
616WL-12
616WL-14
616WL-22
616WL-32
616WL-25
616WL-35
Pressure Range
0 0.25 in. w.c.
0 1 in. w.c.
0.25 0 0.25 in. w.c.
1 0 1 in. w.c.
0 60 Pa
60 0 60 Pa
0 250 Pa
250 0 250 Pa
Model
616WL-2-LCD
616WL-4-LCD
616WL-12-LCD
616WL-14-LCD
616WL-22-LCD
616WL-32-LCD
616WL-25-LCD
616WL-35-LCD
Pressure Range
0 0.25 in. w.c.
0 1 in. w.c.
0.25 0 0.25 in. w.c.
1 0 1 in. w.c.
0 60 Pa
60 0 60 Pa
0 250 Pa
250 0 250 Pa
Model
616W-00-LCD
616W-0-LCD
616W-1-LCD
616W-2-LCD
616W-3-LCD
616W-4-LCD
616W-5-LCD
616W-6-LCD
Range
0 1 in.w.c.
0 2 in.w.c.
0 3 in.w.c.
0 6 in.w.c.
0 10 in.w.c.
0 20 in.w.c.
0 40 in.w.c.
0 100 in.w.c.
Model
616W-7-LCD
616W-8-LCD
616W-9-LCD
616W-10-LCD
616W-11-LCD
616W-12-LCD
616W-3B-LCD
616W-6B-LCD
Range
0 200 in.w.c.
0 10 psid
0 20 psid
0 30 psid
0 50 psid
0 100 psid
1.5 0 1.5 in.w.c.
3 0 3 in.w.c.
Model
616W-10B-LCD
616W-20B-LCD
616W-0M-LCD
616W-1M-LCD
616W-2M-LCD
616W-3M-LCD
616W-4M-LCD
616W-5M-LCD
Range
5 0 5 in.w.c.
10 0 10 in.w.c.
0 500 Pa
0 750 Pa
0 1.5 kPa
0 2.5 kPa
0 5.0 kPa
0 25.0 kPa
Max. Press.
2 psig
4 psig
2 psig
4 psig
13.8 kPa
13.8 kPa
4 psig
4 psig
Max. Press.
2 psig
4 psig
2 psig
4 psig
13.8 psig
13.8 psig
4 psig
4 psig
Max. Press.
2 psig
2 psig
2 psig
5 psig
5 psig
11 psig
11 psig
29 psig
Max. Press.
29 psig
29 psig
58 psig
58 psig
150 psig
150 psig
2 psig
5 psig
Max. Press.
5 psig
11 psig
13.8 kPa
13.8 kPa
34.5 kPa
34.5 kPa
75.8 kPa
200 kPa

46
D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
i
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
SPECIFICATIONS
GAGE SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases.
Accuracy: See chart.
Size: 4 (101.6 mm) dial face, 5 (127 mm) O.D. x 2-11/16 (68.3 mm).
Weight: 1 lb, 12.6 oz (811 g).
TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: See chart (includes linearity, hysteresis, repeatability).
Compensated Temperature Range: 32 to 120F (0 to 48.9C).
Thermal Effect: 0.025% F.S./F (0.045% F.S./C).
Power Requirements: 10-35 VDC (2-wire).
Zero and Span Adjustments: Protected potentiometers.
Loop Resistance: DC; 0-1250 ohms maximum.
Current Consumption: DC; 38 mA maximum.
Electrical Connections: Screw terminal block.
23/32
[18.26]
1
[25.40]
30
1-1/8
[28.58]
(3) #6-32 x 3/16 [4.76]
DP HOLES EQUALLY SPACED
ON A 4-1/8 [104.78] B.C.
FOR PANEL MOUNTING
11/16
[17.46]
1/8 FEMALE NPT
LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1/2 [12.70]
1-3/4
[44.45]
1/8 FEMALE
NPT HIGH
PRESSURE
CONNECTION
2-1/16
[52.39]
2
[50.80]
1-1/4
[31.75]
2-1/2
[63.50] 3/16
[4.76]
5/8 [15.88]
PANEL MAX
5
[127.00]
4-47/64
[ 120.25]
(4) 6-32 HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED ON
A 5-1/8 [130.18] B.C.
FOR FLUSH MOUNTING
4 [101.60]
FACE
5-1/2 [139.70]
O.D. MOUNTING
RING
Series
605
Magnehelic
Indicating Transmitter
The Series 605 Magnehelic
Indicating Transmitter provides for both visual

monitoring and electronic control of very low differential pressure. The Series 605 is ideal
for control applications in building HVAC systems where local indication is desired during
routine maintenance checks or necessary when trouble shooting the system. The easily
read dial gage is complimented by the two-wire, 4-20 mA control signal utilizing the time-
proven Dwyer
Magnehelic
gage mechanical design and Series 600 transmitter

technology. The 2-wire design with terminal strip on the rear simplifies connection in any
4-20 mA control loop powered by a 10-35 VDC supply.
Model
605-00N
605-11
605-0
605-1
605-2
605-3
605-6
605-10
Range
in w.c.
.05-0-.20
.25-0-.25
0-.50
0-1.0
0-2.0
0-3.0
0-6.0
0-10
Maximum
Pressure
25 psi (1.7 bar)
25 psi (1.7 bar)
25 psi (1.7 bar)
25 psi (1.7 bar)
2 psi (13.79 kPa)
2 psi (13.79 kPa)
2 psi (13.79 kPa)
2 psi (13.79 kPa)
Electrical
Accuracy +/-%
2
2
2
2
0.5
0.5
0 5
0.5
Model
Range
in w.c.
605-20
605-30
605-50
605-60PA
605-125PA
605-250PA
605-500PA
0-20.0
0-30
0-50
Range in Pa g
0-60
0-125
0-250
0-500
Maximum
Pressure
11 psi (75.8 kPa)
11 psi (75.8 kPa)
11 psi (75.8 kPa) p ( )
25 psi (1.7 bar)
25 psi (1.7 bar)
25 psi (1.7 bar)
2 psi (13.79 kPa)
Electrical
Accuracy +/-%
0.5
0.5
0.5
2
2
2
0.5
ACCESSORIES
A-298, Flat Aluminum Bracket for flush mounting
A-370, Mounting Bracket flush mount Series 605 Transmitter in bracket. Bracket
is then surface mounted. Steel with gray hammertone epoxy finish.
Mechanical
Accuracy +/-%
4
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
Mechanical
Accuracy +/-%
2
2
2
4
3
2
2
046.P.N:Layout 2 2/11/11 8:30 AM Page 1
D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and nonconductive,
noncorrosive gases.
Accuracy: 0.5% or 0.25% F.S.
Stability: 0.5% F.S.O./yr.
( 29 to 71C), 10 to 95% RH.
Compensated Temp. Range: 35 to
135F (2 to 57C).
Thermal Effects: 0.015% FS/F (zero
and span).
Power Requirements: 12 36 VDC.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC, 2 wire.
Zero & Span Adjustments: Externally
accessible potentiometers, non
interactive, 10% F.S. adjustment.
Response Time: 250 msec max.
Loop Resistance: 0 to 1045 ohms
V
min
=12V+[(.22A)(R
L
)].
Current Consumption: 3.6 mA (min).
terminals.
Process Connection: Barbed
stainless steel for 3/16 I.D. tubing.
Housing: 300 Series SS (NEMA 2).
Weight: 1.04 lb (472 g).
Series
607
Series 607 Differential Pressure Transmitter combines very low ranges with
exceptional stability, reliability and either 0.25% or 0.5% accuracy for the most
demanding applications. Ranges from 0-0.1 to 0-25 w.c. Ultra thin glass clad
silicon diaphragm design resists shock and vibration, practically eliminates drift.
Certification to NIST standards is included with each unit. Tough stainless steel
housing is NEMA-2 rated to protect against moisture and dirt. Use with air and
other compatible gases.
Low Range Differential Pressure Transmitter
0.25% or 0.5% F.S. Accuracy, Ranges from 0-0.1 w.c.
3-5/16 [84.12]
3-59/64 [99.62]
4-9/16 [115.9]
1-21/32
[42.06] 7/32 [5.556]
3-13/32
[86.52]
3-7/8
[98.43]
4-3/8
[111.1]
1-53/64 [46.53]
1-19/64 [32.94]
* Models have a 0.25% F.S. accuracy.
Series
668
Compact Differential Pressure Transmitter
Ranges from 0 to 0.25 in. w.c., Overpressure Protection to 10 psig, 1% Accuracy
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non conductive
gases.
Accuracy: 1% of full scale (RSS)
(includes non linearity, hysteresis, and
non repeatability).
Temperature Limits:
Operating: 0 to 150F ( 18 to 65C);
Storage: 40 to 185F ( 40 to 85C).
Compensated Temperature
Range: 0 to 150F ( 18 to 65C).
Thermal Effects: 0.033% FS/F
(0.018% FS/C).
Supply Voltage: 12 30 VDC.
Output: 4 to 20 mA, 2 wire.
Zero and Span Adjust: 1 mA,
non interactive.
Response Time: <60 msec.
Loop Resistance: 0 800 ohms.
Electrical Connection: Terminal strip.
Pressure Connection: 3/16 O.D.
fitting for 1/4 I.D. tubing.
Housing: Fire retardant glass filled
polyester.
Our low cost Series 668 Differential Pressure Transmitter is capable of measuring
low pressures with a 1% accuracy ideally suited for proper building pressurization and
air flow control. Transmitters can withstand up to 10 psig overpressure with no damage
to the unit. Variable capacitance sensor design provides excellent sensitivity and long-term
stability. Compact, lightweight design makes installation simple and easy. Units also feature
reverse-polarity protection.
5/32 [3.97]
MOUNTING HOLE
TYP 2 PLACES
3-5/32
[80.16]
3/8
[9.53]
1-7/8
[47.63]
6-32 SCREW
W/TERMINAL WASHER

2-3/4
[69.85]
1
[25.40]
3/16 [4.76]
FITTING
3-1/2
[88.90]
1-41/64
[41.67]
LOW
HIGH

COM
+
EXC OUT
Bi-Directional
Model*
668-1
668-2
668-3
668-4
668-5
Model*
668-6
668-7
668-8
668-9
Model*
668-10
668-11
668-12
668-13
668-14
Model*
668-15
668-16
668-17
668-18
Range
0 to 0.25 in w.c.
0 to 0.5 in w.c.
0 to 1 in w.c.
0 to 2.5 in w.c.
0 to 5.0 in w.c.
Range
0 to 10 in w.c.
0 to 25 in w.c.
0 to 50 in w.c.
0 to 100 in w.c.
Range
0 to 0.1 in w.c.
0 to 0.25 in w.c.
0 to 0.5 in w.c.
0 to 1 in w.c.
0 to 2.5 in w.c.
Range
0 to 5 in w.c.
0 to 10 in w.c.
0 to 25 in w.c.
0 to 50 in w.c.
Model
607-0
607-01*
607-1
607-11*
607-2
607-21*
607-3
607-4
607-7
Model
607-71*
607-8
607-0B
607-1B
607-2B
607-9
607-3B
607-4B
607-7B
*Also available with optional conduit cover. To order add C to part number, i.e.
668C 1. Consult factory for additional information.
Range (in w.c.)
0 .10
0 .10
0 .25
0 .25
0 .50
0 .50
0 1.0
0 2.0
0 5.0
Range (in w.c.)
0 5.0
0 10
.10 0 .10
.25 0 .25
.50 0 .50
0 25
1.0 0 1.0
2.0 0 2.0
5.0 0 5.0

48
D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Precision Low Differential Pressure Transmitter
Ideal for Clean Rooms, Easy to Field Calibrate with Security Key
The Series 610 Low Differential Pressure Transmitters are capable of
measuring the pressures and flow of air or non-conducting gases at high
resolutions. Designed specifically for clean rooms, isolation rooms, and other
critical environments, the Series 610 uses an improved all stainless steel micro-
tig welded sensor to detect differential pressure and convert this pressure into
a linear DC electrical signal by a unique electrical circuit. This unit is ideal for
situations when accurate and reliable pressure monitoring is essential. Easy
access pressure ports and electrical connections, removable process heads, and
detachable terminal blocks make for fast and easy installation. The Series 610
transmitters are available for air pressure ranges as low as 0.1 W.C. full scale.
Standard accuracy is 0.25% full scale (terminal-based) in normal ambient
temperature environments. The tensioned sensor allows up to 2 psi
overpressure in either direction with absolutely no damage to the unit. The
Series 610 transmitters can be ordered as either a base mount or a din rail
mount and the option of a digital read out display. In addition, a calibration key
can be ordered that allows the user to set zero and span. One key will work on
multiple transmitters.
FEATURES
Ranges down to 0.1 w.c. with 0.25% or 0.5% F.S. accuracy
Removeable process head for simplified installation
Secure operation ensured with calibration only possible via separate
calibration key
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air or similar non conducting gases.
Accuracy: 0.25% or 0.5% F.S.
Stability: 0.5%/yr.
Pressure Limits: 100 psi (6.8 bar).
Thermal Effect: 0.5% FS.
Power Requirements: 13.5 to 30 VDC.
Output: 4 to 20 mA.
Loop Resistance: 800 ohms max.
Current Consumption: 25 mA.
Zero and Span Adjustments: External security key pendant.
Response Time: 0.02 to 0.04 seconds.
Electrical Connections: Detachable screw terminal connector.
Process Connections: 3/16 O.D. barbed brass fittings on removeable
process head.
Enclosure Rating: Fire retardant ABS.
DIN RAIL MOUNT
3-13/32
[86.52]
FOR 35mm DIN RAIL MOUNTING
2-29/32
[73.82]
CALIBRATION KEY
A-165
31/64
[12.3]
3/4
[19.05]
3-29/32
[99.22]
3-29/32
[99.22]
3/4
[19.05]
31/64
[12.3]
CALIBRATION KEY
A-165
5-41/64
[143.27]
2-29/32
[73.82]
BASE MOUNT VERSION
With Display
0.25% Accuracy
With Display
0.5% Accuracy
Without Display
Without Display
Model
610-01D-BDV
610-25D-BDV
610-05D-BDV
610-01A-BDV
610-25A-BDV
610-05A-BDV
610-10A-BDV
610-01C-BDV
610-25C-BDV
Model
610-01D-BNV
610-25D-BNV
610-05D-BNV
610-01A-BNV
610-25A-BNV
610-05A-BNV
610-10A-BNV
610-01C-BNV
610-25C-BNV
Model
610-01D-BDE
610-25D-BDE
610-05D-BDE
610-01A-BDE
610-25A-BDE
610-05A-BDE
610-10A-BDE
610-01C-BDE
610-25C-BDE
Model
610-01D-BNE
610-25D-BNE
610-05D-BNE
610-01A-BNE
610-25A-BNE
610-05A-BNE
610-10A-BNE
610-01C-BNE
610-25C-BNE
Series
610
Note: For Din Rail Mount use a D instead of the B in the model number (ex. 610 XXX DXX).
ACCESSORIES
A-165, Security Key
A-616, Process Head without display
A-617, Process Head with LCD display
Range
0 .1
0 .25
0 .5
0 1
0 2.5
0 5
0 10
.1
.25
Range
0 .1
0 .25
0 .5
0 1
0 2.5
0 5
0 10
.1
.25
Range
0 .1
0 .25
0 .5
0 1
0 2.5
0 5
0 10
.1
.25
Range
0 .1
0 .25
0 .5
0 1
0 2.5
0 5
0 10
.1
.25

D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Room Status Monitor
For Sensing Low Pressure Using High Accuracy
Series
RSM
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air or nonconductive, nonexplosive gases.
Accuracy: 0.5% F.S.
Humidity Limits: 5 to 95% relative humidity (non condensing).
Altitude: 2000 meters (max).
Thermal Effects: 0.03% F.S./F ( 0.05% F.S./C).
Pressure Limits: 1 psi.
Power Requirements:
Order code A (24 VAC): 18 32 VAC, 50 60 Hz;
Order code B (120 VAC): 85 265 VAC, 50 60 Hz;
Mains supply voltage fluctuations up to 10%.
Power Consumption (Voltage output): 5 W.
Output Signal: Selectable 4 20 mA (2 wire), 0 5 VDC (3 wire), or 0 10
VDC (3 wire).
Loop Resistance (4-20 mA output): 0 510 .
Electrical Connection: Removable terminal block.
Process Connections: Barbed fittings for 1/4 I.D. tubing.
Housing: Fire retardant plastic.
Mounting: 4 x 4 plaster ring (mounts to double gang electrical box).
Weight: 1.5 lb (680 g).
Agency Approval: CE, CSA.
The Series RSM Room Status Monitor is designed for critical low
differential pressure applications that require stringent pressure monitoring
and alarming. The Series RSM can be configured to monitor positive or negative
pressure in protected environments and hospital isolation rooms per CDC
guidelines. The RSM is a complete system that includes a backlit RGB LCD
display with a graphic user interface which enables access to pressure, security,
calibration, and alarm setup. The touch-screen displays menus that guide the
user through setup, as well as setting up password protection. Red and green
LED's and a local audible alarm (with time delay feature) alert personnel to
system status. The RSM has a NEMA 1 (IP20) rated fire retardant plastic for
indoor applications. True differential pressure is displayed with a resolution of
0.001 w.c.
APPLICATIONS
Hospital isolation wards
Pharmaceutical
Manufacturing
Clean rooms
Research labs
Animal facilities
Excitation/Ouput
24VAC/4 20 mA or 0 5 or 0 10 VDC
120VAC/4 20 mA or 0 5 or 0 10 VDC
Operating Range
0.05 w.c.
0.1 w.c.
0.25 w.c.
0.5 w.c.
1 w.c.
2.5 w.c.
5 w.c.
0.05 w.c.
0.1 w.c.
0.25 w.c.
0.5 w.c.
1 w.c.
2.5 w.c.
5 w.c.
Model
RSM-1-A
RSM-2-A
RSM-3-A
RSM-4-A
RSM-5-A
RSM-6-A
RSM-7-A
RSM-1-B
RSM-2-B
RSM-3-B
RSM-4-B
RSM-5-B
RSM-6-B
RSM-7-B
5-13/32
[137.16]
8
[203.20]
2-5/32
[55.12]
4-5/8
[117.09]
TUBING HEADER PORT
1-5/8
[41.66]
ROOM STATUS MONITOR
A-285 REMOTE
ANNUNCIATOR
ALARM
ACKNOWLEDGE
BUTTON
SPEAKER
LED
INDICATORS
ACCESSORY
A-285, Remote Alarm Annunciator with Visible/Audible Alarm
and Acknowledge Switch

50
D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
ISDP
Intrinsically Safe Differential
For Hazardous Zone Pressure and Flow Applications
25/32
[21.18]
1-15/16
[48.97]
1-5/16
[33]
1-17/32
[38.61] 45/64
[17.78]
5-7/32
[132.54]
4-23/32
[120]
3-7/16
[87.12]
BRACKETS
ARE OPTIONAL
4X 3/16 [4.76] CLEARANCE
HOLES FOR MOUNTING
3-17/64
[83]
MOUNTING HOLE
PATTERN
4-1/8
[105]
1-5/32
[29.59]
1-45/64
[43.18]
2-31/32
[75.39]
4-23/32
[120]
4-9/64
[105.17]
Shown with Optional A-438 Mounting Bracket
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non corrosive gases.
Wetted Materials: Ranges 5 and greater: glass, PVC, silicon, alumina ceramic,
epoxy, RTV, gold, aluminum, stainless steel and nickel; Ranges 1 and lower:
stainless steel, silicone, gold and ceramic.
Housing Materials: Aluminum, glass.
Accuracy: 0.5% at 77F (25C) including hysteresis and repeatability (after 1
hour warm up).
Pressure Limits: Ranges 2.5 in. w.c. = 2 psi; 5: 5 psi; 10: 5 psi; 25: 5 psi; 50:
5 psi; 100: 9 psi.
Output Signal: 4 20 mA DC.
Response Time: 250 ms (damping set to 1).
Display: 4 digit LCD 0.6 height.
Electrical Connections: M 12 4 PIN Connector.
Enclosure Rating: Designed to meet NEMA 4X (IP66).
Mounting Orientation: Mount unit in horizontal plane.
Agency Approvals: FM Intrinsically Safe CLI Div I GR: A, B, C, D; CLII Div I GR:
E, F, G; CLIII Div I. CE: CENELEC EN 61326/55024: 2003; IEC 61000 4 2/3/4/6:
2001/2006/2004/2005; CENELEC EN 55011: 2006; 2004/108/EC EMC Directive.
The ISDP Differential Pressure Transmitter provides a 4-20 mA process output, a
robust NEMA 4X enclosure, plus a large LCD display that can be programmed to read in
pressure, velocity or flow. The ISDP offers simplified programming via a Menu key that
enables the user to select: security level; English or Metric engineering units; pressure,
velocity or flow operation, K-factor for use with various Pitot tubes and flow sensors,
circular or rectangular duct size for volumetric flow operation plus many more. The Series
ISDP Differential Pressure Transmitter is powered on its two wire loop with 10-35 VDC
via its integral M-12 four pin male connector. The ISDP provides a 0.5% full scale accuracy
on ranges from 0.25 w.c. to 100 w.c. as well as bi-directional models up to 10 w.c. These
features make the Series ISDP Differential Pressure Transmitter the ideal instrument for
monitoring pressures or air flows in hazardous zones having a Class I Div. I Groups A, B,
C, D; Class II Div. I Groups E, F, G; Class III Div. I ratings.
Model
ISDP-002
ISDP-004
ISDP-006
ISDP-007
ISDP-008
ISDP-009
ISDP-010
ISDP-012
ISDP-014
ISDP-015
ISDP-016
ISDP-017
Range
0 0.25 w.c.
0 1 w.c.
0 5 w.c.
0 10 w.c.
0 25 w.c.
0 50 w.c.
0 100 w.c.
0.25 / +0.25 w.c.
1.0 / +1.0 w.c.
2.5 / +2.5 w.c.
5.0 / +5.0 w.c.
10 / +10 w.c.
ACCESSORIES
A-231, 16 (5 m) Shielded Cable with 4 Pin Female M 12 Connection
A-486, 4.9 (1 m) Shielded Cable with 4 Pin Female M 12 Connection
A-487, 9.8 (3 m) Shielded Cable with 4 Pin Female M 12 Connection
A-488, 33 (10 m) Shielded Cable with 4 Pin Female M 12 Connection
A-295, Female 4 Pin M 12 to Cable Gland Connector
MTL5041, Intrinsically Safe Galvanic Isolator
MTL7706, Intrinsically Safe Zener Barrier
A-438, Surface Mounting Brackets

D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
608
Intrinsically Safe Differential
Ranges Down to 0.1 w.c., FM Approved, NEMA 4X
The Series 608 Differential Pressure Transmitters convert positive,
negative (vacuum), or differential pressures of clean, dry air or other non-
conductive, non-corrosive gases into a standard two wire, 4-20 mA output signal.
The use of an ultra thin silicon diaphragm enables precision measurement of
differential pressures as low as 0.1 of w.c. while withstanding high static
working pressures up to 100 psig (6.89 bar). The Series 608 transmitters are FM
approved intrinsically safe for use in the specified hazardous locations when
used with an approved intrinsic safety barrier. The rugged NEMA 4X, stainless
steel housing makes this transmitter ideal for use in industrial and process plant
environments.
APPLICATIONS
Lab fume hood control
Clean room applications
Flow measurements and control
Filter monitoring
Furnace draft measurement
Process control
*Models have a 0.25% F.S. accuracy.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean/dry air and compatible, combustible gases. (see Agency
Approvals for FM ratings).
Accuracy: 0.5% or 0.25% full scale.
Stability: 0.5% F.S./year.
Pressure Limits: 100 psig (6.89 bar); 15 psid (1.03 bar).
Compensated Temperature Range: 0 to 160F ( 18 to 71C).
Thermal Effect: 0.5% Accuracy: 0.02% F.S./F; 0.25% Accuracy:
0.01% F.S./F.
Power Requirements: 12 to 36 VDC (2 wire).
Zero and Span Adjustments: Potentiometers for zero and span.
Loop Resistance: DC: 0 1045 ohms maximum.
Current Consumption: 4 20 mA.
Electrical Connections: Screw terminal: Two 1/2 female NPT conduit.
Process Connections: Two 1/4 female NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Not position sensitive.
Agency Approvals: FM approved intrinsically safe for use in Class I,
Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III, Div.
1 when wired with approved intrinsically safe barrier. Entity parameters:
Vmax= 36 VDC; Imax= 250 mA; CI=12 nF; LI=0 mH.
1/4
[6.35]
3
[76.20]
2-11/16
[68.26]
4-1/2
[107.95]
3-1/4
[82.55]
5-1/32
[127.79]
1/2 NPT
TYP 2 PLACES
5/8
[15.88]
1-1/2
[38.10]
1/4 NPT
TYP 2 PLACES
Model
608-00
608-10*
608-01
608-11*
608-02
608-12*
608-03
608-13*
608-04
608-14*
608-05
608-15*
608-06
608-16*
Model
608-07
608-17*
608-00B
608-10B*
608-01B
608-11B*
608-02B
608-12B*
608-03B
608-13B*
608-04B
608-14B*
608-05B
608-15B*
ACCESSORIES
MTL5041, Intrinsically Safe Galvanic Isolator
MTL7706, Intrinsically Safe Zener Barrier
Range
(in. w.c.)
0 0.1
0 0.1
0 0.25
0 0.25
0 0.5
0 0.5
0 1.0
0 1.0
0 2.0
0 2.0
0 5.0
0 5.0
0 10.0
0 10.0
Range
(in. w.c.)
0 25.0
0 25.0
0.1 0 0.1
0.1 0 0.1
0.25 0 0.25
0.25 0 0.25
0.5 0 0.5
0.5 0 0.5
1.0 0 1.0
1.0 0 1.0
2.0 0 2.0
2.0 0 2.0
5.0 0 5.0
5.0 0 5.0

52
D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
i
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
WWDP
Selectable Ranges of Uni-Directional or Bi-Directional, Selectable Outputs
The Series WWDP Wet-to-Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter offers everything
in one package by having 30 field selectable variations in just 3 models. The WWDP
provides field selectable unidirectional and bidirectional pressure ranges, configurable 0-5,
1-5, 0-10 VDC, and 4 to 20 mA output. It also provides an auto-zero capability. The field
selectable port swap feature eliminates costly replumbing if the unit is improperly installed
or if the transmitter is simply replaced. An optional LCD display is available for on-sight
indication of line and differential pressure. The all cast aluminum housing is rated NEMA
4 (IP66). These features make the WWDP transmitter an ideal instrument for measuring
the flow of various liquids and gases, pressure drop across filters, measurement of liquid
level or pressurized vessels, and for use in energy management and process control systems.
6
[152.4]
5-9/16
[141.29]
R7/64
[R2.78]
11/32
[8.73]
2
[50.8]
1-15/64
[31.35]
1-43/64
[42.47]
1-9/16
[39.69]
5-11/64
[131.37]
61/64
[24.21]
1/8 NPT
1/2 CONDUIT
OPENING
2
[50.5]
4-39/64
[117.08]
4-53/64
[122.63]
4
[101.6]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Gases or liquids compatible
with 17-4 PH stainless steel.
Accuracy: All pressure ranges have
1% full scale accuracy except the
lowest selectable range of each unit is
2% full scale.
Stability: 0.5% per year.
Temperature Limits: Compensated
temperature range: 32 to 130F
(0 to 54C); Operating temperature
range: -4 to 185F (-20 to 85C).
Pressure Limits: Max working
pressure: WWDP-1: 50 psi; WWDP-2:
100 psi; WWDP-3: 250 psi; Proof
pressure: 2.2X of full scale; Burst
pressure: 40X of full scale.
Thermal Effect: 2% FS/100F (50C)
includes zero and span.
Power Requirements: 12 to 30 VDC/18
to 28 VAC (reverse excitation protected).
Note: 4-20 mA output cannot be
powered with AC voltage.
Output Signal: Selectable 0-5, 0-10 and
1-5 VDC; 4 to 20 mA.
Zero & Span: Digital re zero button
(should be used when changing ranges).
Span can be adjusted by changing
between field selectable ranges.
Response Time: 1 to 5 sec (selectable).
Loop Resistance: 1000 ohms.
Current Consumption: VDC power: 0-
5, 1-5 VDC output 4 mA (typ);
0-10 VDC output 5 mA (typ); 4-20 mA
output 20 mA max. Current consumption
will equal the transmitter output in
current mode. VAC power: 0-5, 1-5, 0-10
VDC output 40 mA (typ).
Electrical Connections: 1/2 conduit.
NPT internal.
Enclosure Rating: Designed to meet
NEMA 4 (IP66).
Mounting Orientation: Vertical; mount
the pressure ports down (keeps debris
from building up inside the pressure
port).
Weight: 1.5 lb (680.4 g).
Description
Selectable 5, 10, 25, 50 psid
Selectable 10, 20, 50,100 psid
Selectable 25, 50,125, 250 psid
Model
WWDP-1
WWDP-2
WWDP-3
The Series 631B Differential Pressure Transmitter monitors differential pressure of
air and compatible gases and liquids with accuracy. The design employs converting pressure
changes into a standard 4-20 mA output signal for two wire circuits. Digital push-button,
zero and span adjustments are easily accessed on the front cover. The Series 631B
Differential Pressure Transmitter is designed to meet NEMA 4X (IP66) construction.
Robust housing offers 500 psi static pressure rating on ranges down to 0.5 w.c.
Series
631B
Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter
Ranges Down to 0.5 w.c. with 500 psi Static Pressure Rating
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases & liquids.
Wetted Materials: Brass, silicone, 300
SS.
Accuracy: Transmitter output: 2%
F.S. (includes linearity, hysteresis and
repeatability). Gage: 3% of full scale
at 70F (21.1C).
(-6.67 to 48.9C).
Pressure Limits: -20 Hg to 500 psig
(-0.677 bar to 34.4 bar).
Thermal Effect: 0.025%/F
(0.045%/C) includes zero & span.
Power Requirements: 10-35 VDC.
Response Time: 50 msec.
Loop Resistance: 0-1250 ohms
maximum.
Electrical Connections: M-12 circular
4 pin connector.
NPT high and low pressure taps,
duplicated - one pair top for air and
gas, and one pair bottom for liquids.
NEMA 4X (IP66).
5
[127.00]
DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC. MICHIGAN CITY, IN 46360, USA.
4-45/64
[119.46]
3-13/32
[86.52]
13/32
[10.32] TYP 3/16
[4.76]
1/4 FEMALE NPT LOW
PRESSURE CONNECTION (LIQUID)
(4) #6-32 X 3/8 (9.53) DP
HOLE ON A 4-11/32 [110.33]
BOLT CIRCLE
1/4 FEMALE NPT HIGH
PRESSURE CONNECTION (LIQUID)
1/4 FEMALE NPT LOW
PRESSURE CONNECTION
(AIR OR GAS)
1/4 FEMALE NPT HIGH
PRESSURE CONNECTION (AIR OR GAS)
3/4 [19.05]
DWYER INST. INC
MICH CITY, IND
46360 U.S.A.
35 TYP
Model
631B-0
631B-1
631B-2
631B-3
631B-5
Description
Selectable 5, 10, 25, 50 psid
Selectable 10, 20, 50,100 psid
Selectable 25, 50,125, 250 psid
Model
WWDP-1-LCD
WWDP-2-LCD
WWDP-3-LCD
Max. Working
Pressure
50 psi
100 psi
250 psi
ACCESSORY
A-164, 16.4 (5 m) cable with M-12 4-pin female connector
Range g
0-0.5 w.c.
0-1 w.c.
0-2 w.c.
0-5 w.c.
0-25 w.c.
Max. Working
Pressure
50 psi
100 psi
250 psi
052.P.N:Layout 2 2/10/11 3:40 PM Page 1
D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
0.5% Accuracy, NEMA 4X Enclosure
Series
629
The Series 629 Differential Pressure Transmitter monitors differential
pressure of air and compatible gases and liquids with 0.5% accuracy. The design
employs dual pressure sensors converting pressure changes into a standard 4-
20 mA output signal for two wire circuits. Small internal volume and minimum
moving parts result in exceptional response and reliability. Terminal block, zero
and span adjustments are easily accessed under the top cover. The Series 629
Differential Pressure Transmitter is designed to meet NEMA 4X (IP66)
construction.
APPLICATIONS
Monitor differential pressures across:
Flow elements
Heat exchangers
Filters
Pumps
Coils
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Without value: 316, 316L SS. Additional wetted parts
with 3 way valve option: Buna N, silicone grease, PTFE, brass 360,
copper, reinforced acetal copolymer.
Accuracy: 0.5% F.S. (includes linearity, hysteresis & repeatability).
Compensated Temperature Limits: 0 to 175F ( 18 to 79C).
Thermal Effect: 0.02%/F (0.036%/C) includes zero & span.
Power Requirements: 13 30 VDC (2 wire).
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA. Optional 0 5, 0 10 VDC.
Loop Resistance: 0 1300 ohms maximum for current output. For
voltage outputs, minimum load resistance: 2000 ohms.
Electrical Connections: Terminal block; 1/2 female NPT conduit.
Weight: 10.1 oz (286 g).
1/4 NPT
6-59/64 [175.82]
OPTIONAL 1/4 NPT
MALE FITTING
5-25/32 [146.84]
1/4 NPT FEMALE FITTING
1-5/8
[41.28]
3-9/32
[83.34]
1-11/32
[34.13]
43/64
[17.07]
LIQUID TIGHT FITTING
CORD DIAMETER RANGE:
.200 TO .350 [5.06 TO 8.89]
Series 629 shown with optional cable gland.
Range
(psid)
10
25
50
100
Working*
Pressure (psid)
20
50
100
200
Over
Pressure (psi)
100
250
250
500
* Pressures exceeding the working pressure limit may cause a
calibration shift of up to 3% of full scale.
Model
629-02-CH-P2-E5-S1
629-03-CH-P2-E5-S1
629-04-CH-P2-E5-S1
629-05-CH-P2-E5-S1
Model
629-02-CH-P2-E5-S1-3V
629-03-CH-P2-E5-S1-3V
629-04-CH-P2-E5-S1-3V
629-05-CH-P2-E5-S1-3V
Range
(psid)
10
25
50
100
Working*
Pressure
(psid)
20
50
100
100
Over
Pressure (psi)
100
100
100
100
Pressure Limits
Pressure Limits
3-way valve package with bleed screw
Bleed Screw
Standard
3-Way Valve Manifold
629 shown with optional Red
LED and cable gland.
OPTIONS
-LED, 4.5 Digit LED Display
ACCESSORIES
A-228, Stainless steel flex hose, 12 (30.48 cm)
long, 1/8 male NPT connections.
A-229, Stainless steel flex hose, 18 (45.72 cm)
long, 1/8 male NPT connections.
A-332, Brass adapter, 1/8 female NPT
to 1/4 male NPT.

54
D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
ESeries
647
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases or liquids
on both pressure and reference sides.
Wetted Materials: Brass, vinyl, glass
filled polyester, silicon, and
florosilicone.
Accuracy: 1.0% FS.
Stability: 1.5% FS output/year.
Temperature Limits: 32 to 122F (0 to
50C).
Pressure Limits: Ranges 1 w.c. to 5
psi: 20 psi, 15 psi range: 45 psi, 30 psi
range: 60 psi.
Thermal Effects: Zero: 0.05% FS/F,
Span: 0.05% rdg/F.
Power Requirements: 18 to 30 VDC.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA, 2 wire.
Adjustable, 10%.
Loop Resistance: 400 @ 18 VDC,
600 @ 24 VDC, 1000 @ 30 VDC.
terminals, reverse polarity protected.
Process Connections: Two 1/8
female NPT.
Housing: Gasketed steel epoxy
painted, NEMA 4 (IP66).
Monitor differential pressure in air/liquid flow systems, HVAC automation, pneumatic
systems and process control with the Series 647 Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter.
Units are temperature compensated and provide a 4 to 20 mA output signal which can be
interfaced with chart recorders, data loggers and computerized monitoring and control
systems.
(4) 1/4 [6.35] LONG X 7/32 [5.56]
WIDE MOUNTING HOLES
1-1/16 [26.97] TYP
3-5/16
[84.15]
1-1/8
[28.58] 2-7/8
[73.03]
2-15/16
[74.63]
1/8 FEMALE NPT
HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION
5-9/16
[141.30]
7/8 [22.23]
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
1/8 FEMALE NPT
LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1-17/64
[32.15]
2-1/2
[63.50]
5 [127.00]
Ranges from 0 to 1 w.c., 1.0% Accuracy, NEMA 4 Enclosure, 2-Wire
Series
645
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases or liquids
on both pressure and reference sides.
Wetted Materials: 17 4 PH stainless
steel, 300 Series stainless steel,
fluoroelastomer and silicone o rings
and bleed screw seals.
Accuracy: 0.25% FS (RSS).
Temperature Limits: Operating: 0 to
175F ( 22 to 80C); Storage: 65 to
260F ( 54 to 126C).
Pressure Limits: (High side) 1 to 5
psi: 20 x FS, 10 to 25 psi: 10 x FS, 50
psi: 5 x FS, 100 psi: 2.5 x FS; (low
side) 2.5 x FS.
Thermal Effects: (includes zero and
span) 0.02% FS/F, 30 to 150F
( 1 to 65C).
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA, 2 wire.
Adjustable, 1 mA, non interactive.
Response Time: 30 to 50 msec.
Loop Resistance: 0 to 1000.
Electrical Connection: Barrier strip
terminal block with conduit enclosure
and .875 (22 mm) diameter conduit
opening.
Process Connection: 1/4 18 female
NPT.
Housing: Stainless steel/aluminum,
NEMA 4X (IP66).
Weight: 14.4 oz (0.4 kg).
3-Valve Manifold Assembly
Manifold: Brass.
Valve Type: 90 on/off.
Process Connection: 1/4 18 female
NPT.
Series 645 Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitters are designed for use with
compatible gases and liquids which can be applied to both the pressure and reference ports.
Quick response capacitance sensor delivers a 4 to 20 mA output signal proportional to
differential pressure with .25% accuracy. The Series 645 transmitters are ideal for process
control, filter condition monitoring, refrigeration equipment, pump speed control, HVAC
equipment, and liquid level measurement. For ease of installation and maintenance, order
optional 3-valve manifold assembly. Bleed ports allow for total elimination of air in the line
and pressure cavities.
1-15/16
[49.35]
LOW PRESSURE
PORT
3-1/16
[77.59]
1 [25.44]
1/4 NPT
BOTH SIDES
1-3/32
[27.98]
1-63/64
[50.50]
1-1/2
[38.16]
1 [25.44]
BLEED
SCREWS
2-7/16
[62.01]
HIGH PRESSURE
PORT
7/8 KNOCKOUT INTENDED FOR
A 1/2 I.D. CONDUIT CONNECTION
Optional 3-Valve Manifold Assembly
0.25% Accuracy, Quick Response, 2-Wire Design
DW
Y
R N
TRUM
E
TS
NC
M
H
G
N C
TY N
U
S
A
2 5/32
[54.61]
3 1/64
[76.45]
Model
647-0
647-1
647-2
647-3
647-4
Model
647-5
647-6
647-7
647-8
Model*
645-0
645-1
645-2
645-3
645-4
645-5
645-6
Model
645-10
645-11
645-12
645-13
645-14
645-15
645-16
Range
0 to 1 psid
0 to 2 psid
0 to 5 psid
0 to 10 psid
0 to 25 psid
0 to 50 psid
0 to 100 psid
Range
0.5 psid
1 psid
2.5 psid
5 psid
10 psid
25 psid
50 psid
* For optional 3 Valve Manifold Assembly, specify 3V as suffix
Range
0 to 1 w.c.
0 to 3 w.c.
0 to 25 w.c.
0 to 5 w.c.
0 to 10 w.c.
Range
0 to 1 psid
0 to 5 psid
0 to 15 psid
0 to 30 psid

D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Fixed Range Differential Pressure Transmitter
Explosion-proof, 0.5% Accuracy
Series
636D
#22 AWG SHIELDED CABLE
24 INCHES LONG
3/4-14 FEMALE NPT
CONDUIT THREAD
1-3/4
[44.45]
1-4/33
[105.41]
1 HEX TYPICAL
SS TAG
1/2-14 FEMALE NPT
PROCESS CONNECTION
1-1/4 HEX
1-4/33
[28.45]
4-1/8
1-8/22
[33.2]
1-3/4
The Series 636D Differential Pressure Transmitter can be used for measuring
pressures of liquids, gases, and vapors. All available ranges have an excellent 0.5% F.S.
accuracy with a 4-20 mA output standard or optional 1-5 VDC output. The NEMA 4 housing
is an all 316 welded construction that is designed to withstand the harshest environmental
conditions. With all 316L wetted materials this transmitter is compatible with most media.
These units are CSA approved explosion-proof for use in the specified hazardous locations
and meet NACE standards for off-shore applications.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases, liquids, or
vapors.
Wetted Materials: Types 316L SS.
Accuracy: BFSL: 0.5% F.S. (includes
linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability).
Stability: 1.0 F.S./yr.
Pressure Limits: 3 x full scale
differential pressure; Burst: 2500 psig.
Temperature Limits: Ambient
operating: 40 to 140F ( 40 to 60C);
Process interface: 40 to 212F ( 40 to
100C); Storage: 40 to 212F ( 40 to
100C).
Compensated Temperature Range:
20 to 160F ( 29 to 71C).
Thermal Effect: 2% F.S./50F
(reference to 77F).
Power Requirements: 12 30 VDC for
4 20 mA outputs; 8 14 VDC for 1 5
VDC outputs, both with reverse polarity
protection.
Output Signal: 4 20 mA DC or 1 5
VDC.
Zero and Span Adjustment: Fixed.
Loop Resistance: 900 ohms max @
30 VDC for current outputs. For voltage
outputs, minimum lead resistance 50k
ohms.
Current Consumption: 4 20 mA for
current output models; 3 mA for voltage
output models.
Electrical Connections: 2 ft, 22 AWG
cable; 3/4 female NPT conduit.
female NPT.
Mounting Orientation: 0.05 psi/90
rotation from horizontal.
Weight: 1.8 lb (0.82 kg).
Agency Approvals: CSA approved
explosion proof for Class I, Division 1,
Groups B, C, and D; Class II, Groups
E, F, and G; Class III.
Model
4-20 mA Out
636D-0
636D-1
636D-2
636D-3
636D-4
636D-5
636D-6
636D-7
636D-8
Model
1-5 VDC Out
636D-0-LP
636D-1-LP
636D-2-LP
636D-3-LP
636D-4-LP
636D-5-LP
636D-6-LP
636D-7-LP
636D-8-LP
Range
0 6 psid
0 15 psid
0 30 psid
0 60 psid
0 100 psid
0 150 psid
0 200 psid
0 300 psid
0 500 psid
Range
0 6 psid
0 15 psid
0 30 psid
0 60 psid
0 100 psid
0 150 psid
0 200 psid
0 300 psid
0 500 psid
Series
655A
316 Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter
Ranges Down to 3 w.c., 6-Point N.I.S.T. Certificate Included
Series 655A Differential Pressure Transmitters are designed for high static/low DP
applications designed especially for the End Users and OEMs where extreme overpressure
and high performance of 0.25% accuracy and stability are required at ranges down to 3 w.c.
Each unit includes a 6-point N.I.S.T certificate of calibration which demonstrates the units
high level of performance.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gasses or liquids.
Wetted Materials: 316L SS.
Accuracy: 0.25% BFSL, RSS
(combined effect of non linearity,
hysteresis, and repeatability).
Stability: 0.25% FSO/yr.
( 29 to 93C).
0 to 170F ( 17.8 to 76.7C).
Pressure Limits: 1000 psi (68.95 bar)
continuous; 3000 psi (206.8 bar) burst.
Thermal Effects: 1.5% F.S. oven
comp. temperature range.
Static Pressure Effects: on zero:
0.25% FSO per 1000 psi; on span:
0.5% of reading per 1000 psi.
Response Time: < 10 mS.
Electrical Connections: Cable exit
with 24 cable; optional 6 pin
connector.
Process Connections: 1/4 NPT
female.
NEMA 4X (IP66).
Mounting Orientation: Mount in
vertical position: zero shifts up to
1 w.c. depending on orientation.
Model
655A-00-C
655A-01-C
655A-02-C
655A-03-C
655A-04-C
655A-05-C
655A-06-C
655A-07-C
A-232 CONNECTOR END
OPPOSITE END IS SIX WIRES
COLORS: RED, BLACK, GREEN,
WHITE, BLUE AND BROWN
655A-XX-P MODELS
4-3/4
[120.65]
2
[50.80]
655A-XX-C MODELS
4 WIRE CABLE
1/4 FEMALE
NPT
1-1/4
[31.75]
2-35/64
[64.77]
Model
655A-00-P
655A-01-P
655A-02-P
655A-03-P
655A-04-P
655A-05-P
655A-06-P
655A-07-P
ACCESSORY
A-232, Connection with cable (3) For 6 pin connection models
Note: Change C to P for optional 6 pin male connection.
Range
0 to 3 w.c.
0 to 5 w.c.
0 to 8 w.c.
0 to 10 w.c.
0 to 15 w.c.
0 to 20 w.c.
0 to 1 psid
0 to 2 psid
Range
0 to 3 w.c.
0 to 5 w.c.
0 to 8 w.c.
0 to 10 w.c.
0 to 15 w.c.
0 to 20 w.c.
0 to 1 psid
0 to 2 psid

56
D
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
a

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
30 w.c.
150 w.c.
750 w.c.
100 psi
300 psi
30 w.c.
150 w.c.
750 w.c.
100 psi
300 psi
7.5 kPa
37.3 kPa
186.5 kPa
690 kPa
2068 kPa
7.5 kPa
37.3 kPa
186.5 kPa
690 kPa
2068 kPa
30 w.c.
150 w.c.
750 w.c.
100 psi
300 psi
30 w.c.
150 w.c.
750 w.c.
100 psi
300 psi
7.5 kPa
37.3 kPa
186.5 kPa
690 kPa
2068 kPa
7.5 kPa
37.3 kPa
186.5 kPa
690 kPa
2068 kPa
0.6 to 30 w.c.
1.5 to 150 w.c.
7.5 to 750 w.c.
1 to 100 psi
3 to 300 psi
0.6 to 30 w.c.
1.5 to 150 w.c.
7.5 to 750 w.c.
1 to 100 psi
3 to 300 psi
0.15 to 7.5 kPa
0.373 to 37.3 kPa
1.865 to 186.5 kPa
6.9 to 690 kPa
20.68 to 2068 kPa
0.15 to 7.5 kPa
0.373 to 37.3 kPa
1.865 to 186.5 kPa
6.9 to 690 kPa
20.68 to 2068 kPa
Series
3100
Explosion-proof Differential Pressure Transmitter
HART
, Push Button Configuration, Rangeability (100:1)

The Mercoid
Series 3100 Smart Pressure Transmitter is a

microprocessor-based high performance transmitter, which has flexible
pressure calibration, push button configuration, and programmable using
HART
Communication. The Series 3100 is capable of being configured for

differential pressure or level applications with the zero and span buttons. A
field calibrator is not required for configuration. The transmitter software
compensates for thermal effects, improving performance. EEPROM stores
configuration settings and stores sensor correction coefficients in the event of
shutdowns or power loss. The Series 3100 is FM approved for use in hazardous
(classified) locations. The 100:1 rangeability allows the smart transmitter to
be configured to fit any application.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases, steam, liquids or vapors.
Accuracy: 0.075% FS (@ 20C).
Rangeability: 100:1 turn down.
Temperature Limits:
Process: 40 to 248F ( 40 to 120C);
Ambient: Without LCD: 40 to 185F ( 40 to 85C);
With LCD: 22 to 176F ( 30 to 80C).
Pressure Limits: Max. pressure: Range: 14.5 to 2000 psi; Burst
pressure: 10000 psi.
Thermal Effect: 0.125% span/32C.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA/HART
Communication.
Response Time: 0.12 seconds.
Damping Time: 0.25 60 seconds.
Loop Resistance:
Operation: 0 to 1500 ohm;
HART
Communication: 250 to 500 ohm.

Electrical Connection: Two 1/2 female NPT conduit, screw terminal.
Display: Optional 5 digit LCD.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66) and explosion proof for Class I, Div
I, Groups A, B, C and D.
Agency Approvals: CE, FM.
FEATURES
Completely configurable using zero/span buttons
Automatic ambient temperature compensation
Fail mode process function
Selectable engineering units
APPLICATIONS
Flow measurement
Level monitoring
Filter or pump differential pressure
Critical process monitoring
Model
3100D-2-FM-1-1
3100D-3-FM-1-1
3100D-4-FM-1-1
3100D-5-FM-1-1
3100D-6-FM-1-1
3100D-2-FM-1-1-LCD
3100D-3-FM-1-1-LCD
3100D-4-FM-1-1-LCD
3100D-5-FM-1-1-LCD
3100D-6-FM-1-1-LCD
Calibrated Span (Min to Max) Lower Range Limit Upper Range Limit
1/4 NPT
PROCESS
CONNECTION
2X DRAIN
VALVE
4X 7/16-20
UNF FOR MOUNTING
2-1/8
[54.00]
3-25/64
[86.00]
4-13/32
[112.00]
7-37/64
[192.50]
1-21/32
[42.00]
HART
is a registered trademark of Hart Communication Foundation.

NEW PRODUCT!
Consult factory for custom calibration.
LCD Display
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
ACCESSORIES
A-630, Stainless steel angle type bracket with SS bolts
A-631, Stainless steel flat type bracket with SS bolts
BBV-1F, Flanged 3 valve block manifold
BBV-22F, Flanged 5 valve block manifold

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
4.5 Stainless Steel Industrial Pressure Gage
1% Full Scale Accuracy, 316 SS Wetted Parts, NEMA 4X
Series
SGL
3-3/4
[95.25]
7/8
[22.22]
5-11/64
[131.37] 29/64
[11.51]
1-15/16 [49.21]
4-43/64
[118.67]
1/2 NPT
21/32 [16.67]
The Series SGL Gages have dual English/metric scales with 1.0% full scale accuracy.
For excellent chemical compatibility, the Series SGL gages are designed with 304 SS
housings and 316L SS wetted parts. Units can withstand ambient temperatures up to 149F
(65C) and process temperatures up to 572F (300C). Series SGL gages may be easily
liquid filled in the field without the need for a separate kit. Included is a micrometer
adjustable pointer which allows for re-zeroing the gage in the field. A wide selection of
ranges are available.
APPLICATIONS
Cryogenics, pharmaceutical, chemical, petrochemical, food and beverage,
conventional and nuclear power, pumps, presses, diesel engines, turbines and
compressors.
SPECIFICATIONS
Lens: Shatterproof safety glass.
Housing: 304 SS.
Accuracy: 1.0% full scale, ANSI
B40.1 Grade 1A.
Pressure Limit: 130% full scale for
ranges <10,000 psi, 115% for 10,000
psi and greater.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 13 to
149F ( 25 to 65C); Process: 572F
max. (300C max.).
Size: 4.5 (115 mm).
Process Connections: 1/2 male
NPT.
Model
SGL-G0124N
SGL-G0224N
SGL-G0324N
SGL-G0424N
SGL-G0524N
SGL-G0624N
Model
SGL-G0724N
SGL-G0824N
SGL-G0924N
SGL-G1024N
SGL-G1124N
SGL-G1224N
Note: For alternate ranges, contact the factory.
Ranges
30 Hg 0 ( 100 0 kPa)
0 15 psi (0 100 kPa)
0 30 psi (0 200 kPa)
0 60 psi (0 400 kPa)
0 100 psi (0 700 kPa)
0 150 psi (0 1000 kPa)
Ranges
0 200 psi (0 1400 kPa)
0 300 psi (0 2000 kPa)
0 400 psi (0 2800 kPa)
0 500 psi (0 3400 kPa)
0 600 psi (0 4000 kPa)
0 1000 psi (0 7000 kPa)
4 Stainless Steel Safety Gage
0.5% Full Scale Accuracy, 316L SS Wetted Parts
Series
SGI
3-11/32
[84.93]
4-25/64
[111.52]
7/8 SQUARE
[22.33 SQUARE]
29/64
[11.51]
2-21/64
[59.13]
3-15/16
[100.01]
1-1/32 [26.19]
1/2 NPT
The Series SGI Gages have dual English/metric scales with 0.5% ASME Grade 2A
Accuracy. The solid front design with baffle wall interposed between the sensing element
and the window face, plus a pressure relieving back, provides the increased safety required
for potentially dangerous applications.
Series SGI gages are designed with 304 SS housings and 316L SS wetted parts for excellent
chemical compatibility. Units can withstand ambient temperatures up to 149F (65C) and
process temperatures up to 518F (270C). Series SGI gages may be easily liquid filled in
the field without the need for a separate kit. Included is a micrometer adjustable pointer
which allows for re-zeroing the gage in the field. A wide selection of ranges are available.
APPLICATIONS
Oil and gas, chemical, refinery, petrochemical, cement, pharmaceutical, power,
pulp and paper, food and beverage
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing: 304 SS.
Accuracy: 0.5% full scale, ANSI B40.1 Grade 2A.
Pressure Limit: 130% full scale for ranges <10,000 psi, 115% for 10,000 psi and
greater.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 4 to 149F ( 20 to 65C); Process: 518F max.
(270C max.).
Size: 4 (100 mm).
Process Connections: 1/2 male NPT.
Model
SGI-F0124N
SGI-F0224N
SGI-F0324N
SGI-F0424N
SGI-F0524N
SGI-F0624N
Model
SGI-F0724N
SGI-F0824N
SGI-F0924N
SGI-F1024N
SGI-F1124N
SGI-F1224N
Note: For alternate ranges, contact the factory
Range
30 Hg 0 ( 100 0 kPa)
0 15 psi (0 100 kPa)
0 30 psi (0 200 kPa)
0 60 psi (0 400 kPa)
0 100 psi (0 700 kPa )
0 150 psi (0 1000 kPa)
Range
0 200 psi (0 1400 kPa)
0 300 psi (0 2000 kPa)
0 400 psi (0 2800 kPa)
0 500 psi (0 3400 kPa)
0 600 psi (0 4000 kPa)
0 1000 psi (0 7000 kPa)

58
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
2.5 Stainless Steel Industrial Pressure Gage
1.6% Full Scale Accuracy, 316 SS or Brass Wetted Parts
Series
SGD
&
SGT
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: SGD: 316 SS; SGT: Brass.
Housing: 304 SS.
Lens: Plexi glass.
Accuracy: 1.6% full scale.
Pressure Limit: 130% full scale for ranges <6000 psi; 115% for 6000
psi and greater.
Temperature Limits: SGD: Ambient: 4 to 149F ( 25 to 65C);
Process: 518F max. (270C max.); SGT: Ambient: 4 to 140F ( 20 to
60C), Process: 248F max. (120C max.).
Size: 2.5 (63 mm).
The Series SGD/SGT Gages have dual english/metric scales with 1.6% full scale accuracy. The Series
SGD/SGT gages are designed with 304 SS housings and 316 SS or brass wetted parts for excellent chemical
compatibility. These gages cover a wide variety of ranges. Series SGD/SGT gages may be easily liquid
filled in the field without the need for a separate kit. Back mount gages can be mounted in various
configurations with optional mounting kits.
Model
SGD-D0122N
SGD-D0222N
SGD-D0322N
SGD-D0422N
SGD-D0522N
SGD-D0622N
SGD-D0722N
SGD-D0822N
SGD-D0922N
SGD-D1022N
SGD-D1122N
SGD-D1222N
Model
SGT-D0122N
SGT-D0222N
SGT-D0322N
SGT-D0422N
SGT-D0522N
SGT-D0622N
SGT-D0722N
SGT-D0822N
SGT-D0922N
SGT-D1022N
SGT-D1122N
SGT-D1222N
316SS Gages Brass Gages
ACCESSORIES (for back connect gages)
Model
A-445
A-444
9/64 DIA [3.57]
TYP ON
2-61/64 DIA
[75.00] B.C.
1/32
[.80]
3-13/32 DI
[86.52]
2-29/64 DIA
[62.31]
A
A
57/64
[22.62]
33/64
[13.10]
5/16
[7.94]
R. 5/64
[2.0]
16/64
[7.54]
1-53/64
[46.43]
19/32
[15.08]
5/64
[2.0]
2-59/64
[74.39]
1-3/32
27.78]
51/64
[20.24]
2.756
1.181
2.441
2.126
DIRECT CENTER BACK
.354
SGD/SGT FRONT FLANGE SGD/SGT U-BRACKET
9/16 HEX
[14.3]
2-23/32
[69.0]
2-7/16
[61.9]
1/4 NPT
1-3/16
[30.2]
3/8
[9.5]
SGD BOTTOM SGT BOTTOM SGD/SGT BOTTOM
SGD/SGT BACK SGD/SGT BACK
SGD/SGT FRONT FLANGE SGD/SGT U-BRACKET
Note: To order with glycerin fill add PY to the end of the model
For back connect gages, change DXX22N to DXX42N
Description
U Bracket Mounting Kit for 2.5 Gage
Front Panel Mounting Flange Kit for 2.5 Gage
Range
30 Hg 0 ( 100 0 kPa)
0 15 psi (0 100 kPa)
0 30 psi (0 200 kPa)
0 60 psi (0 400 kPa)
0 100 psi (0 700 kPa)
0 150 psi (0 1000 kPa)
0 200 psi (0 1400 kPa)
0 300 psi (0 2000 kPa)
0 400 psi (0 2800 kPa)
0 500 psi (0 3400 kPa)
0 600 psi (0 4000 kPa)
0 1000 psi (0 7000 kPa)
Range
30 Hg 0 ( 100 0 kPa)
0 15 psi (0 100 kPa)
0 30 psi (0 200 kPa)
0 60 psi (0 400 kPa)
0 100 psi (0 700 kPa)
0 150 psi (0 1000 kPa)
0 200 psi (0 1400 kPa)
0 300 psi (0 2000 kPa)
0 400 psi (0 2800 kPa)
0 500 psi (0 3400 kPa)
0 600 psi (0 4000 kPa)
0 1000 psi (0 7000 kPa)

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
1.5 & 2 Stainless Steel Industrial Pressure Gage
2.5% Full Scale Accuracy, 316 SS Wetted Parts
Series
SGB
A
B
1/8 NPT
[.354]
D
E
C
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316 SS.
Housing: 304 SS.
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: 3 2 3%.
Pressure Limit: 125% full scale for ranges <1500 psi; 115% for 1500 psi
and greater.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 4 to 140F ( 20 to 60C); Process: 356F
max. (180C max.).
Size: 1.5 (40 mm) or 2 (50 mm).
The Series SGB Gages have dual English/metric scales with 2.5% full scale accuracy. The Series
SGB gages are designed with 304 SS housings and 316 SS wetted parts for excellent chemical
compatibility. These gages cover a wide variety of ranges from full vacuum to 4,000 psi. Units can
withstand ambient temperatures up to 140F (60C) and process temperatures up to 356F (180C).
Model
SGB-B0121N
SGB-B0221N
SGB-B0321N
SGB-B0421N
SGB-B0521N
SGB-B0621N
SGB-B0721N
SGB-B0821N
Model
SGB-B0921N
SGB-B1021N
SGB-B1121N
SGB-B1221N
SGB-B1321N
SGB-B1421N
SGB-B1521N
SGB-B1621N
For 2 gages, change SGB B to SGB C.
Model
SGB 1.5
SGB 2
A
1 45/64
[43.26]
2 1/8
[53.98]
B
1 23/32
[43.66]
1 15/16
[49.21]
C
21/64
[8.33]
7/16
[11.11]
D
1 1/16
[26.99]
1 5/32
[29.37]
E
1 41/64
[41.67]
2 3/64
[51.99]
Range
30 Hg 0 ( 100 0 kPa)
0 15 psi (0 100 kPa)
0 30 psi (0 200 kPa)
0 60 psi (0 400 kPa)
0 100 psi (0 700 kPa )
0 150 psi (0 1000 kPa)
0 200 psi (0 1400 kPa)
0 300 psi (0 2000 kPa)
Range
0 400 psi (0 2800 kPa)
0 500 psi (0 3400 kPa)
0 600 psi (0 4000 kPa)
0 1000 psi (0 7000 kPa)
0 1500 psi (0 10 MPa)
0 2000 psi (0 14 MPa)
0 3000 psi (0 20 MPa)
0 4000 psi (0 28 MPa)
1.5 or 2 Industrial Pressure Gage
Brass Wetted Parts, Bottom or Back Connection
Series
SGA
Series SGAGages are perfect for applications where resistance to corrosion is necessary.
The stainless steel case and ring offer excellent protection from harsh processes and the
gage can be easily filled in the field for vibration or pulsation applications. The SGA gages
are an economical choice where ambient corrosion and vibration are a concern. Also, this
line is suitable for all fluids that are compatible with brass.
SPECIFICATIONS
liquids.
Wetted Materials: Brass.
Housing Material: 304 SS.
Lens: Plastic.
Pressure Limits: Full scale range.
65C).
Size: 1.5 (40 mm) or 2 (50 mm).
Process Connection: 1/8 NPT.
Weight: 1.8 oz (51 g) or 4.3 oz (122 g).
B B
C C
E
D
1/8 NPT
1/8 NPT
BACK MOUNTING BOTTOM MOUNTING
A
U-CLAMP FOR 1.5 GAGE
A
1 13/16 [46.04]
2 17/64 [57.55]
B
63/64 [25]
1 5/16 [33.34]
C
15/64 [5.95]
15/64 [5.95]
D
1 45/64 [43.26]
2 5/16 [58.74]
E
2 27/64 [61.52]
3 3/32 [78.58]
Gage Size
1.5
2
Model
SGA-B0221N
SGA-B0321N
SGA-B0421N
SGA-B0521N
SGA-B0621N
SGA-B0721N
SGA-B0821N
SGA-B0921N
Size
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
Range
0 15 psi
0 30 psi
0 60 psi
0 100 psi
0 160 psi
0 200 psi
0 300 psi
0 400 psi
Model
SGA-B1021N
SGA-B1121N
SGA-B1221N
SGA-B1321N
SGA-C0221N
SGA-C0321N
SGA-C0421N
SGA-C0521N
Size
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2
2
2
2
Range
0 600 psi
0 800 psi
0 1000 psi
0 1500 psi
0 15 psi
0 30 psi
0 60 psi
0 100 psi
Model
SGA-C0621N
SGA-C0721N
SGA-C0821N
SGA-C0921N
SGA-C1021N
SGA-C1121N
SGA-C1221N
SGA-C1321N
Size
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Range
0 160 psi
0 200 psi
0 300 psi
0 400 psi
0 600 psi
0 800 psi
0 1000 psi
0 1500 psi
ACCESSORY
A-296, 1.5 Gage U Clamp
Connection
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
Connection
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
For back connect gages, change CXX2IN to CXX41N.
Connection
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower

60
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
The Series SSD & SSL Gages with flush 1.5 sanitary clamp connections have dual
english/metric scales with 1.6% & 1% full scale accuracies. The glycerin filled gages are
designed with 304 SS housings and 316L SS wetted parts for excellent chemical
compatibility. Units can withstand temperatures up to 149F (65C). A wide selection of
ranges are available from full vacuum, compound to 300 psi.
2.5 & 4 Stainless Steel Gage with
Sanitary Connection
1% & 1.6% Full Scale Accuracy, Glycerin Filled
Series
SSD
&
SSL
SPECIFICATIONS
liquids.
Fill Solution: Glycerin.
Housing: 304 SS.
Lens: SSD: Plexi glass; SSL: Glass.
Accuracy: SSD: 1.6% full scale;
SSL: 1% full scale.
Pressure Limit: 130% full scale.
Temperature Limit: 60 to 149F (15 to
65C).
Size: 2.5 (63 mm).
Process Connection: 1.5 sanitary
connection; Optional 2 sanitary
connection.
Weight: SSD: 15.6 oz (.442 kg); SSL:
2.3 lb (1.04 kg).
Note: For 2 sanitary connection, change end of model number from 1S to 2S; For 4 gages, change SSD D to SSL F.
A
F
B
E
C
D
Model
SSD-D0121S
SSD-D0221S
SSD-D0321S
SSD-D0421S
SSD-D0521S
SSD-D0621S
SSD-D0721S
SSD-D0821S
Model
SSD-D2121S
SSD-D2221S
SSD-D2321S
SSD-D2421S
SSD-D2521S
SSD-D2621S
SSD-D2721S
Model
SSD
SSL
A
2 23/32
[69.06]
4 23/64
[110.73]
B
1 63/64
[50.40]
2 17/32
[64.29]
C
3/8
[9.53]
29/64
[11.51]
D
1 3/16
[30.16]
1 55/64
[47.23]
E
2 29/64
[54.37]
3 15/16
[100.01]
F
2 41/64
[67.07]
4 7/64
[104.38]
A-280, 1.5 Sanitary Connection Clamp
A-281, 2 Sanitary Connection Clamp
Range
0 30 Hg ( 100 0 kPa)
0 15 psi (0 100 kPa)
0 30 psi (0 200 kPa)
0 60 psi (0 400 kPa)
0 100 psi (0 700 kPa)
0 150 psi (0 1000 kPa)
0 200 psi (0 1400 kPa)
0 300 psi (0 2000 kPa)
Range
30 Hg 0 15 psi ( 100 0 100 kPa)
30 Hg 0 30 psi ( 100 0 200 kPa)
30 Hg 0 60 psi ( 100 0 400 kPa)
30 Hg 0 100 psi ( 100 0 700 kPa)
30 Hg 0 150 psi ( 100 0 1000 kPa)
30 Hg 0 200 psi ( 100 0 1400 kPa)
30 Hg 0 300 psi ( 100 0 2000 kPa)
2.5 Stainless Steel Pressure Gage
Brass Wetted Parts, Back Connection with Mounting Bracket
Series
62000MU
2-45/64
[68.66]
2-41/64
[67.07]
MOUNTING BRACKET
1-15/64
[31.35]
9/32
[7.14]
1/4 NPT
2-27/64
[61.52]
The Series 62000MU Gages have dual english/metric scales with 1.6% full
scale accuracy, and are available in 2.5 dial sizes. Series 62000MU gages are
designed with 304 SS housings and brass wetted parts, and includes a back u-
clamp connection for panel mounting. Units can withstand ambient
temperatures up to 140F (60C) and process temperatures up to 248F (120C).
The 62000MU gages may be easily liquid filled in the field without the need for
a separate kit.
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing: 304 SS.
Lens: Plexi glass.
Pressure Limits: 130% of full scale.
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: 4 to 140F ( 20 to 60C);
Process: 248F max. (120C max.).
Size: 2 1/2 (63 mm).
Process Connection: 1/4 male NPT.
Model
62030VMU
62015MU
62030MU
62060MU
62100MU
62160MU
62200MU
62300MU
Range
0 to 30 in. Hg Vac ( 100 to 0 kPa)
0 to 15 psi (0 to 100 kPa)
0 to 30 psi (0 to 200 kPa)
0 to 60 psi (0 to 400 kPa)
0 to 100 psi (0 to 700 kPa)
0 to 160 psi (0 to 1100 kPa)
0 to 200 psi (0 to 1400 kPa)
0 to 300 psi (0 to 2000 kPa)

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Sanitary Pressure Gage
3-A Approved, All Stainless Steel Sanitary Connections
Series
SG3A
C
A
B2
MAX
BOTTOM CONNECTION
CONNECTION
The Series SG3A Sanitary Pressure Gage is made to 3-A sanitary
standards and offers several size and pressure range options, which make it
ideal for many sanitary applications particularly in the dairy, food processing,
and pharmaceutical industries. The Series SG3A Sanitary Pressure Gage is
available with 2 or 2-1/2dials with an accuracy of 1.5% or 2% depending on
range. The dials of the Series SG3A Sanitary Pressure Gage are available for
vacuum, compound and positive pressure applications. The 3/4or 1-1/2
sanitary fittings of the Series SG3A create a sanitary process connection
available on either the back or bottom of the gage. The Series SG3A can also be
ordered with food grade glycerin in the dial to reduce inaccuracies caused by
vibration to the dial indicator.
APPLICATIONS
Beverage, food & dairy, pharmaceutical
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316L stainless steel.
Case and Ring: 300 series polished stainless steel.
Lens: Polycarbonate (2.5), Glass (2).
Dial: Aluminum, black figures on white background.
Fill: USP Glycerin (optional). Not available on 2 dial gages.
Accuracy: Standard seal 1.5% for ranges 100 psi and above; 2% for
compound ranges and below 100 psi.
Pressure Limits: Working pressure should not exceed 75% of the
range. If pulsation occurs, working pressure should not exceed 65% of
range.
Temperature Limits: 25 to 300F ( 3.9 to 148.9C), process
temperature; for the 3/4 connection: 40 to 120F (4.4 to 48.9C).
Connection Location: Bottom connection; Back connection (optional).
Process Connection: 3/4, 1 1/2.
Dial Size: 2, 2.5.
Weights: 0.75 lb (.34 kg) to 2.0 lb (.91 kg) dry depending on size. Add
0.25 lb (.11 kg) for glycerin fill.
Agency Approvals: 3 A symbol authorization.
Dial Size
2
2.5
A
2 1/16
[52.39]
2 45/64
[68.66]
B2
3 45/64
[94.06]
4
[101.6]
C
1 1/8
[28.58]
1 1/8
[28.58]
2.5 with 1.5 Connection 2 with 3/4 Connection
Model
SG3A-B0624S
SG3A-B0724S
SG3A-B0824S
2 Dial with 3/4 Bottom Connection
Model
SG3A-D0121S
SG3A-D0221S
SG3A-D0321S
SG3A-D0421S
SG3A-D0521S
SG3A-D0621S
SG3A-D0721S
SG3A-D0821S
SG3A-D2121S
SG3A-D2221S
SG3A-D2321S
SG3A-D2421S
SG3A-D2521S
SG3A-D2621S
2.5 Dial with 1-1/2 Bottom Connection
Note: For Glycerin fill add PY to the end of the model. Not available on 2 dial gages.
Range
0 160 psi
0 200 psi
0 300 psi
Range
30 Hg 0
0 15 psi
0 30 psi
0 60 psi
0 100 psi
0 160 psi
0 200 psi
0 300 psi
30 Hg 0 15 psi
30 Hg 0 30 psi
30 Hg 0 60 psi
30 Hg 0 100 psi
30 Hg 0 160 psi
30 Hg 0 200 psi

62
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Spiral Tube Pressure Gage
Compact Size, 1 Dial
Series
SGC2
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Bronze spiral tube.
Housing: Chrome plated brass housing.
Lens: Plastic.
Accuracy: 5% F.S.
Pressure Limits: 1.1 x full scale.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 50 to 160F ( 45 to 71C).
Size: 1 (25 mm).
Process Connection: 1/8 male NPT center back.
Weight: 1.0 oz (28.3 g).
The compact Series SGC2 Pressure Gages are an economical solution for monitoring
high pressure applications where space is limited. These 1 gages are perfect for OEM
applications for use on pumps, compressors and portable cylinders. The Series SGC2 Gages
are housed in a rugged case and feature 1/8 male NPT center back connection.
Model
SGC2-01
SGC2-02
SGC2-03
SGC2-04
SGC2-05
SGC2-06
SGC2-07
SGC2-08
1[25.40]
13/32 [10.16]
11/32 [8.88]
8 & 10 Stainless Steel Pressure Gage
1.0% Full Scale Accuracy, 316L SS Wetted Parts
Series
SGK
The Series SGK Gages have dual english/metric scales with 1% full scale accuracy.
Series SGK gages are designed with 304 SS housings and 316L SS wetted parts. Units can
withstand ambient temperatures up to 149F (65C) and process temperatures up to 518F
(270C). SGK-I models have 8 dial faces while the SGK-J models have large 10 dial faces.
A wide selection of ranges are available from full vacuum, compound to 15,000 psi.
APPLICATIONS
Boilers, food and beverage, pumps, machine presses, engine compressors,
turbines, conventional and nuclear power, diesel engines
SPECIFICATIONS
liquids.
Housing: 304 SS.
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: 1% full scale, ANSI B40.1
Grade 1A.
Pressure Limit: 130% full scale for
ranges <10,000 psi; 115% for 10,000
psi and greater.
Temperature Limit:
Size: 8 (200 mm); 10 (250 mm).
Weight: 8: 3.1 lb (1.42 kg); 10: 4.7 lb
(2.12 kg).
9-29/64
[240.11]
4-7/16
[112.71]
5-29/32
[150.02]
1-63/64
[50.40]
1-15/64
[31.35]
7-7/8
[200.03]
8-5/64
[205.18]
1/2 NPT
7/8 HEX
[22.23 HEX]
29/32
[23.02]
Model *
SGK-I0124N
SGK-I0224N
SGK-I0324N
SGK-I0424N
SGK-I0524N
SGK-I0624N
Model*
SGK-I0724N
SGK-I0824N
SGK-I0924N
SGK-I1024N
SGK-I1124N
SGK-I1224N
Ranges
160 psi
300 psi
500 psi
750 psi
1200 psi
3000 psi
5000 psi
6000 psi
For alternate ranges, contact the factory.
* For 10 dial gages change above models from SGK I to SGK J.
Range
30 Hg 0 ( 100 0 kPa)
0 15 psi (0 100 kPa)
0 30 psi (0 200 kPa)
0 60 psi (0 400 kPa)
0 100 psi (0 700 kPa)
0 150 psi (0 1000 kPa)
Range
0 400 psi (0 2800 kPa)
0 500 psi (0 3400 kPa)
0 600 psi (0 4000 kPa)
0 1000 psi (0 7000 kPa)
0 1500 psi (0 10 MPa)
0 2000 psi (0 14 MPa)

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
2.5 Stainless Steel Low Pressure Gages
Brass or 316 SS Wetted Parts
Series
SGX
&
SGF
2-45/64
[68.66] 13/32
[10.32]
1-45/64
[43.26]
2-27/64
[61.52]
1/4 NPT
13/32
[10.32]
The Series SGX/SGF Gages have dual English/metric scales with 1.6% full scale
accuracy. The Series SGX/SGF gages are designed with 304 SS housing and brass or 316
SS wetted parts. Units can withstand ambient temperatures up to 149F (65C) and
process temperatures up to 212F (100C). Ranges of vacuum, compound and pressures to
235 inches w.c. are available. Included on the dial is a convenient zero adjustment screw
which allows the user to easily re-zero the needle.
APPLICATIONS
Pneumatic, draft measurement, filter monitoring, liquid level
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: SGX: Brass; SGF: 316/316L SS.
Housing: 304 SS.
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: 1.6% full scale on positive pressure ranges 15 w.c. and greater;
2.5% full scale on all other ranges.
Pressure Limit: Full scale value.
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: 13 to 149F ( 25 to 65C);
Size: 2.5 (63 mm).
SGX SGF
Model
SGX-D7122N
SGX-D7322N
SGX-D7522N
SGX-D7722N
SGX-D8022N
SGX-D8122N
SGX-D8222N
SGX-D8322N
SGX-D8422N
SGX-D8722N
SGX-D8922N
SGX-D9122N
SGX-D9722N
Model
SGF-D7122N
SGF-D7322N
SGF-D7522N
SGF-D7722N
SGF-D8022N
SGF-D8122N
SGF-D8222N
SGF-D8322N
SGF-D8422N
SGF-D8622N
SGF-D8722N
316SS Gages Brass Gages
Range
10 0 in. w.c. ( 250 0 mm)
25 0 in. w.c. ( 600 0 mm)
60 0 in. w.c. ( 1600 0 mm)
100 0 in. w.c. ( 2500 0 mm)
0 10 in. w.c. (0 250 mm)
0 15 in. w.c. (0 400 mm)
0 25 in. w.c. (0 600 mm)
0 40 in. w.c. (0 1000 mm)
0 60 in. w.c. (0 1600 mm)
0 160 in. w.c. (0 4000 mm)
4 0 6 in. w.c. ( 100 0 150 mm)
8 0 16 in. w.c. ( 200 0 400 mm)
80 0 160 in. w.c. ( 2000 0 4000 mm)
Range
10 0 in. w.c. ( 250 0 mm)
25 0 in. w.c. ( 600 0 mm)
60 0 in. w.c. ( 1600 0 mm)
100 0 in. w.c. ( 2500 0 mm)
0 10 in. w.c. (0 250 mm)
0 15 in. w.c. (0 400 mm)
0 25 in. w.c. (0 600 mm)
0 40 in. w.c. (0 1000 mm)
0 60 in. w.c. (0 1600 mm)
0 100 in. w.c. (0 2500 mm)
0 160 in. w.c. (0 4000 mm)

64
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
2-39/64
[66]
1-45/64
[43]
3-29/64
[87.6]
1/4 NPT
The Series LPG1 Low Pressure Gages possess inches of water column
scales with 1.5% accuracy. The 2.5 LPG1 gages are designed with chrome
plated steel housings and twist lock plastic lenses. Units are ideal for air and
gases compatible with brass. Units can withstand ambient temperatures of -40
to 140F (-40 to 60C). A wide offering of ranges are available from vacuum to
10 psi. Units come with a 1/4 male NPT bottom connection.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass socket and internals.
Housing: Chrome plated case.
Lens: Plastic.
Accuracy: 1.5%.
Pressure Limit: 110% of full scale.
Temperature Limits: Process: 40 to 140F ( 40 to 60C).
Size: 2.5 (63 mm).
Process Connection: 1/4 male NPT lower.
Weight: 8.64 oz (245 g).
Low Pressure Gage
1.5% Accuracy in 2.5 Chrome Case
Series
LPG1
2-55/64
[66]
1-39/64
[43]
55/64
[21.6]
1/4 NPT
The Series LPG2 Low Pressure Gages possess inches of water column
scales with 1.5% accuracy. The 2.5 LPG2 gages are designed with chrome
plated steel housings and twist lock plastic lenses. Units are ideal for air and
gases compatible with brass. Units can withstand temperatures of -40 to 140F
(-40 to 60C). A wide offering of ranges are available from vacuum to 10 psi.
Units come with a 1/4 male NPT center back connection.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass socket and internals.
Housing: Chrome plated case.
Lens: Plastic.
Accuracy: 1.5%.
Size: 2.5 (63 mm).
Process Connection: 1/4 male NPT center back entry.
Weight: 10.24 oz (290 g).
Low Pressure Gage
1.5% Accuracy, 2.5 Chrome Case with Back Connection
Series
LPG2
Model
LPG2-D7242N
LPG2-D7342N
LPG2-D7742N
LPG2-D8042N
LPG2-D8142N
LPG2-D8242N
LPG2-D8442N
LPG2-D8642N
LPG2-D9942N
LPG2-D0042N
Model
LPG1-D7322N
LPG1-D7522N
LPG1-D7722N
LPG1-D7922N
LPG1-D8022N
LPG1-D8122N
LPG1-D8222N
LPG1-D8422N
LPG1-D8622N
LPG1-D8722N
LPG1-D8822N
LPG1-D9822N
LPG1-D9922N
LPG1-D0022N
Range
15 0 w.c.
30 0 w.c
100 0 w.c.
0 10 w.c.
0 15 w.c.
0 30 w.c.
0 60 w.c.
0 100 w.c.
0 5 psi
0 10 psi
Range
30 0 w.c.
60 0 w.c
100 0 w.c.
200 0 w.c.
0 10 w.c.
0 15 w.c.
0 30 w.c.
0 60 w.c.
0 100 w.c.
0 160 w.c.
0 200 w.c.
0 3 psi
0 5 psi
0 10 psi

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series LPG3 Low Pressure Gages are designed to be especially sensitive with an elastic
element that expands and contracts with very small changes in pressure for ASME Grade 1A
accuracy. This series is meant for the measurement of low pressures of gases and liquids and is ideal
for air flow indicators, liquid level indicators and draft gages. Our new low pressure gages are
available in 2-1/2 dial with either a bottom or back connection option.
Series
LPG3
Low Pressure Gage
1% Full Scale Accuracy in a 2-1/2 Gage
2-5/8
[66.7)
3-29/64
[87.6]
35/64 SQ
[14.0]
2-1/2 BOTTOM CONNECTION
1/4 NPT
1-29/32
[48.3]
PUSH IN LENS
2-5/8
[66.7]
PUSH IN LENS
1-21/32
[42]
R3/32
[R2.5]
35/64 SQ
[14]
1/4 NPT
31/64
[12]
25/64
[10]
2-1/2 BACK CONNECTION
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing Materials: Steel with black finish.
Lens: Polycarbonate.
Accuracy: 1% full scale; ANSI B40.1 Grade 1A.
Pressure Limit: 110%.
Size: 2 1/2 (63 mm).
Process Connections: 1/4 NPT, bottom or back.
Weight: 6.5 oz (184 g).
2.5 Low Pressure Gage
1.5% Full Scale Accuracy in a 2-1/2 Gage
Series
LPG4
2.625
[67.7]
.550 SQUARE
[14.0]
[1/4 - 18NPT]
1.500
[38]
.850
[21.6]
BOTTOM CONNECTED
Our Series LPG4 gages offer top of the line performance and accuracy for pressure and
vacuum applications up to and including 160 in w.c. The LPG4 is constructed from a single
beryllium-copper diaphragm affixed to a precision-machined brass plate. This innovative
design, together with a high-precision, milled-teeth brass movement and nickel-silver pinion
and bearing surface, provide the user with a top of the line low pressure instrument.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass and beryllium
copper.
Housing: Drawn steel, black finish.
Lens: Polycarbonate (removable).
Pressure Limit: 100% of range scale.
Temperature Limits:
Process: 40 to 160F ( 40 to 70C);
Ambient: 40 to 140F ( 40 to 60C).
Size: 2.5 (63 mm).
Model
Bottom
LPG3-D8122N
LPG3-D8222N
LPG3-D8422N
LPG3-D8622N
LPG3-D8822N
LPG3-D9922N
LPG3-D0022N
Model
Back
LPG3-D8142N
LPG3-D8242N
LPG3-D8442N
LPG3-D8642N
LPG3-D8842N
LPG3-D9942N
LPG3-D0042N
Model
LPG4-D7122N
LPG4-D7222N
LPG4-D7322N
LPG4-D7422N
LPG4-D7522N
LPG4-D7622N
LPG4-D7722N
LPG4-D7822N
LPG4-D7922N
LPG4-D8022N
LPG4-D8122N
LPG4-D8222N
Model
LPG4-D8322N
LPG4-D8422N
LPG4-D8522N
LPG4-D8622N
LPG4-D8722N
LPG4-D8922N
LPG4-D9022N
LPG4-D9122N
LPG4-D9222N
LPG4-D9322N
LPG4-D9422N
LPG4-D9522N
Range
in w.c./oz/in
2
0 15 (0 8.6 oz/in
2
)
0 32 (0 18.5 oz/in
2
)
0 55 (0 32.0 oz/in
2
)
0 100 (0 58.0 oz/in
2
)
0 200 (0 116 oz/in
2
)
Range psi/kPa
0 5 (0 35 kPa)
0 10 (0 70 kPa)
Range
10 0 in. w.c. ( 2.5 0 kPa)
16 0 in. w.c. ( 4 0 kPa)
25 0 in. w.c. ( 6 0 kPa)
40 0 in. w.c. ( 10 0 kPa)
60 0 in. w.c. ( 15 0 kPa)
80 0 in. w.c. ( 20 0 kPa)
100 0 in. w.c. ( 25 0 kPa)
160 0 in. w.c. ( 40 0 kPa)
235 0 in. w.c. ( 60 0 kPa)
0 10 in. w.c. (0 2.5 kPa)
0 15 in. w.c. (0 3.75 kPa)
0 25 in. w.c. (0 6 kPa)
Range
0 40 in. w.c. (0 10 kPa)
0 60 in. w.c. (0 15 kPa)
0 80 in. w.c. (0 20 kPa)
0 100 in. w.c. (0 25 kPa)
0 160 in. w.c. (0 40 kPa)
4 0 6 in. w.c. ( 1 0 1.5 kPa)
6 0 10 in. w.c. ( 1.5 0 2.5 kPa)
8 0 16 in. w.c. ( 2 0 4 kPa)
16 0 24 in. w.c. ( 4 0 6 kPa)
24 0 40 in. w.c. ( 6 0 10 kPa)
30 0 50 in. w.c. ( 7.5 0 14.5 kPa)
40 0 60 in. w.c. ( 10 0 0.15 kPa)
Range
in w.c./oz/in
2
0 15 (0 8.6 oz/in
2
)
0 32 (0 18.5 oz/in
2
)
0 55 (0 32.0 oz/in
2
)
0 100 (0 58.0 oz/in
2
)
0 200 (0 116 oz/in
2
)
Range psi/kPa
0 5 (0 35 kPa)
0 10 (0 70 kPa)

66
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
4-23/64
[102.79]
6-15/64
[158.35]
1/2 NPT
23/32
[18.26]
1-25/64
[35.32]
51/64
[20.24]
21/32
[16.67]
3-15/16
[100.01]
1-57/64
[48.02]
31/64
[12.30]
Series
SGP
4 Stainless Steel Low Pressure Schaeffer Gage
1.6% Full Scale Accuracy, 316 & 316L SS Wetted Parts
The Series SGP Gages have dual english/metric scales with 1.6% full scale accuracy.
The Series SGP gages are designed with 304 stainless steel housings, a 316L SS chamber
and a 316 SS diaphragm for excellent chemical compatibility. Units can withstand ambient
temperatures up to 149F (65C) and process temperatures up to 248F (120C). Ranges
of vacuum, compound and pressures to 235 inches w.c. are available. Included is a
micrometer adjustable pointer which allows for re-zeroing the gage in the field.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316L SS chamber with 316 SS diaphragm.
Housing: 304 SS.
Lens: Glass.
Temperature Limit:
Ambient: 13 to 149F ( 25 to 65C);
Size: 4 (100 mm).
Model
SGP-F8024N
SGP-F8124N
SGP-F8224N
SGP-F8324N
SGP-F8424N
SGP-F8524N
SGP-F8624N
SGP-F8724N
SGP-F8824N
Range
0 10 in. w.c. (0 250 mm)
0 15 in. w.c. (0 400 mm)
0 25 in. w.c. (0 600 mm)
0 40 in. w.c. (0 1000 mm)
0 60 in. w.c. (0 1600 mm)
0 80 in. w.c. (0 2000 mm)
0 100 in. w.c. (0 2500 mm)
0 160 in. w.c. (0 4000 mm)
0 235 in. w.c. (0 6000 mm)
4 Stainless Steel Schaeffer Gage
1.6% Full Scale Accuracy, 316L SS & PTFE Wetted Parts
Series
SGO
1/2 NPT
31/64
[12.30]
1-57/64
[48.02]
3-15/16
[100.01] 21/32
[16.67]
23/32
[18.26]
1-3/8
[34.93]
23/32
[18.26]
3-55/64
[98.03]
The Series SGO Gages have dual english/metric scales with 1.6% full scale accuracy. The
Series SGO gages are designed with 304 SS housing, a 316L SS chamber and PTFE coated
diaphragm for excellent chemical compatibility. Units can withstand ambient temperatures
up to 149F (65C) and process temperatures up to 248F (120C). Ranges are available
from full vacuum, compound to 300 psi. Included is a micrometer adjustable pointer which
allows for re-zeroing the gage in the field.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316L SS chamber
with PTFE protected steel diaphragm.
Housing: 304 SS.
Lens: Glass.
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: 13 to 149F ( 25 to 65C);
Size: 4 (100 mm).
Model
SGO-F0124N
SGO-F0224N
SGO-F0324N
SGO-F0424N
SGO-F0524N
SGO-F0624N
SGO-F0724N
SGO-F0824N
Model
SGO-F2124N
SGO-F2224N
SGO-F2324N
SGO-F2424N
SGO-F2524N
SGO-F2624N
SGO-F2724N
Range
30 Hg 0 ( 100 0 kPa)
0 15 psi (0 100 kPa)
0 30 psi (0 200 kPa)
0 60 psi (0 400 kPa)
0 100 psi (0 700 kPa)
0 150 psi (0 1000 kPa)
0 200 psi (0 1400 kPa)
0 300 psi (0 2000 kPa)
Range
30 Hg 0 15 psi ( 100 0 100 kPa)
30 Hg 0 30 psi ( 100 0 200 kPa)
30 Hg 0 60 psi ( 100 0 400 kPa)
30 Hg 0 100 psi ( 100 0 700 kPa)
30 Hg 0 150 psi ( 100 0 1000 kPa)
30 Hg 0 200 psi ( 100 0 1400 kPa)
30 Hg 0 300 psi ( 100 0 2000 kPa)

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
2.5 Utility Pressure Gage
2.5% Accuracy, Brass Wetted Parts
Series
UGA
2-23/32
[69.06]
9/16 HEX
[14.29 HEX]
1/4 NPT
1-1/8
[28.58]
3/8
[9.53]
2-29/64
[62.31]
The Series UGA Gages have dual english/metric scales with 2.5% accuracy. The Series
UGA gages are designed with brass wetted parts, and can withstand ambient temperatures
up to 140F (60C) and process temperatures up to 248F (120C). A wide variety of ranges
are available in this economical gage.
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing: Black powder coated steel.
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: 2.5% between 10 90% of span.
Temperature Limits:
Size: 2.5 (63 mm).
The economical Series UGB gages are ideal for air and chilled water usage typically
found in refrigeration and HVAC applications. The UGB gages are enclosed in a plastic
case that will not corrode or rust and contains brass wetted parts. UGB gages have dual
English/metric scales with a 2.5% accuracy. A wide variety of ranges are available.
Series
UGB
4 Plastic Utility Gage
Ideal for HVAC Applications
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing: Plastic.
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: 2.5% between 10 to 90% of span.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 4 to 140F ( 20 to 60C); Process: Maximum
248F (120C).
Size: 4 (100 mm).
Weight: 9.6 oz (272 g).
3.150
[80.01]
4.154
[105.51]
.354
[8.99]
1.181
[30.00]
3.760
[95.50]
1/4 NPT
9/16 SQ
Model
UGA-D0122N
UGA-D0222N
UGA-D0322N
UGA-D0422N
UGA-D0522N
UGA-D0622N
UGA-D0722N
UGA-D0822N
Model
UGB-F0122N
UGB-F0222N
UGB-F0322N
UGB-F0422N
UGB-F0522N
UGB-F0622N
Range
30 Hg 0 ( 100 0 kPa)
0 15 psi (0 100 kPa)
0 30 psi (0 200 kPa)
0 60 psi (0 400 kPa)
0 100 psi (0 700 kPa )
0 150 psi (0 1000 kPa)
0 200 psi (0 1400 kPa)
0 300 psi (0 2000 kPa)
Range
30 Hg 0 ( 100 0 kPa)
0 15 psi (0 100 kPa)
0 30 psi (0 200 kPa)
0 60 psi (0 400 kPa)
0 100 psi (0 700 kPa )
0 150 psi (0 1000 kPa)

68
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
The Series UGC Utility Gages possess dual psi and bar (100 x kPa) scales
with 3-2-3% ANSI B40.1 Grade B accuracy. The 2 UGC gages are designed
with black steel housings and chrome bezels. Wetted parts include a brass socket
and phosphor bronze Bourdon tube. Units can withstand temperatures of -50 to
160F (-45 to 71C). A wide offering of ranges are available from full vacuum,
compound to 300 psi. Units may be ordered with a male bottom connection in
either 1/8 or 1/4 NPT in the UGC series.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass socket, phosphor bronze Bourdon tube.
Housing: Black steel case with chrome bezel.
Lens: Plastic.
Accuracy: 3 2 3% ANSI B40.1 Grade B.
Size: 2 (50 mm).
Process Connection: 1/8 or 1/4 male NPT lower.
Weight: 4.16 oz (118 g).
Utility Gage
2 Dials with Dual Scales
Series
UGC
2-5/64
[53]
1-1/32
[26]
2-29/32
[74]
1/8 OR 1/4 NPT
UGC
2 Dial Gages
Model (1/4 NPT)
UGC-C10122N
UGC-C10222N
UGC-C10322N
UGC-C10422N
UGC-C10522N
UGC-C10622N
UGC-C10722N
UGC-C10822N
UGC-C12222N
Model (1/8 NPT)
UGC-C10121N
UGC-C10221N
UGC-C10321N
UGC-C10421N
UGC-C10521N
UGC-C10621N
UGC-C10721N
UGC-C10821N
UGC-C12221N
Range
30 Hg 0 ( 1 bar)
0 15 psi (1 bar)
0 30 psi (2 bar)
0 60 psi (4 bar)
0 100 psi (7 bar)
0 150 psi (11 bar)
0 200 psi (14 bar)
0 300 psi (20 bar)
30 Hg 0 30 psi ( 1 0 2 bar)
Range
30 Hg 0 ( 1 bar)
0 15 psi (1 bar)
0 30 psi (2 bar)
0 60 psi (4 bar)
0 100 psi (7 bar)
0 150 psi (11 bar)
0 200 psi (14 bar)
0 300 psi (20 bar)
30 Hg 0 30 psi ( 1 0 2 bar)

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
The Series UGE Utility Gages possess dual psi and bar (100 x kPa) scales with 3-2-3%
ANSI B40.1 Grade B accuracy. The UGE gages are designed with black steel housings and
chrome bezels. Wetted parts include a brass socket and phosphor bronze Bourdon tube.
Units can withstand temperatures of -50 to 160F (-45 to 71C). A wide offering of ranges
are available from full vacuum, compound to 600 psi. The center back mounting and
compact size makes this gage the perfect choice for pneumatic air regulators.
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing: Black steel case with chrome bezel.
Lens: Plastic.
Size: 1.5 (40 mm); 2 (50 mm).
Process Connection: 1.5: 1/8 male NPT center back; 2: 1/8 or 1/4 male NPT
center back.
Weight: 1.5: 2.24 oz (63.5 g); 2: 4.16 oz (118 g).
Utility Gage
1.5 or 2 Dials with Back Connection
Series
UGE
Size
1 1/2 Dial
2 Dial
A
in (mm)
1 41/64 (42)
2 5/64 (53)
B
in (mm)
15/16 (24)
1 1/32 (26)
C
in (mm)
5/8 (16)
53/64 (21)
D
1/8 NPT
1/4 NPT
(A)
(B) (C)
(D)
Model
(1.5 w/ 1/8 NPT)
UGE-B10141N
UGE-B10241N
UGE-B10341N
UGE-B10441N
UGE-B10541N
UGE-B10641N
UGE-B10741N
UGE-B10841N
UGE-B11141N
UGE-B12241N
Model
(2 w/ 1/4 NPT)
UGE-C10142N
UGE-C10242N
UGE-C10342N
UGE-C10442N
UGE-C10542N
UGE-C10642N
UGE-C10742N
UGE-C10842N
UGE-C11142N
UGE-C12242N
Model
(2 w/ 1/8 NPT)
UGE-C10141N
UGE-C10241N
UGE-C10341N
UGE-C10441N
UGE-C10541N
UGE-C10641N
UGE-C10741N
UGE-C10841N
UGE-C11141N
UGE-C12241N
Range
30 Hg 0 ( 1 bar)
0 15 psi (1 bar)
0 30 psi (2 bar)
0 60 psi (4 bar)
0 100 psi (7 bar)
0 150 psi (11 bar)
0 200 psi (14 bar)
0 300 psi (20 bar)
0 600 psi (40 bar)
30 Hg 0 30 psi ( 1 0 2 bar)
Range
30 Hg 0 ( 1 bar)
0 15 psi (1 bar)
0 30 psi (2 bar)
0 60 psi (4 bar)
0 100 psi (7 bar)
0 150 psi (11 bar)
0 200 psi (14 bar)
0 300 psi (20 bar)
0 600 psi (40 bar)
30 Hg 0 30 psi ( 1 0 2 bar)
Range
30 Hg 0 ( 1 bar)
0 15 psi (1 bar)
0 30 psi (2 bar)
0 60 psi (4 bar)
0 100 psi (7 bar)
0 150 psi (11 bar)
0 200 psi (14 bar)
0 300 psi (20 bar)
0 600 psi (40 bar)
30 Hg 0 30 psi ( 1 0 2 bar)

Range
30 Hg 0 ( 100 0 kPa)
0 15 psi (0 100 kPa)
0 30 psi (0 200 kPa)
0 60 psi (0 400 kPa)
0 100 psi (0 700 kPa)
0 150 psi (0 1000 kPa)
Range
0 200 psi (0 1400 kPa)
0 300 psi (0 2000 kPa)
0 400 psi (0 2800 kPa)
0 500 psi (0 3400 kPa)
0 600 psi (0 4000 kPa)
0 1000 psi (0 7000 kPa)
70
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
4 Stainless Steel Industrial Pressure Gage
1.6% Full Scale Accuracy, Brass Wetted Parts
Series
SGS
3-5/32
[80.17]
9/16 HEX
[14.29 HEX]
4-5/32
[105.57]
23/64
[9.13]
1-3/16
[30.16]
3-49/64
[95.65]
1/4 NPT
The Series SGS Gages have dual english/metric scales with 1.6% full scale accuracy. Series SGS
gages are designed with 304 SS housings and brass wetted parts. Units can withstand ambient
temperatures up to 149F (65C) and process temperatures up to 257F (125C). These gages may be
easily liquid filled in the field without the need for a separate kit. A wide selection of ranges are
available.
APPLICATIONS
Pneumatics and compressors
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass for ranges 1000 psi; 316L SS for ranges greater
than 1000 psi.
Housing: 304 SS.
Lens: Plexi glass.
Pressure Limits: 125% full scale for ranges <1500 psi; 115% for ranges
1500 psi and greater.
Temperature Limits:
Size: 4 (100 mm).
Model
SGS-F0122N
SGS-F0222N
SGS-F0322N
SGS-F0422N
SGS-F0522N
SGS-F0622N
Model
SGS-F0722N
SGS-F0822N
SGS-F0922N
SGS-F1022N
SGS-F1122N
SGS-F1222N
The Series CONG Contractor Gages are ideally manufactured for contractors
because of their large dial and compact design. Since the gages are lightweight and slim,
they are easy to transport. The large scale makes them simple to read. These qualities
make the CONG series perfect for every contractor. CONG gages possess psi scales with
1% full scale accuracy and the 4.5 dial is made with stainless steel housings and brass
wetted parts. Units can withstand temperatures of -40 to 160F (-40 to 71C). A wide
offering of ranges are available from full vacuum, compound to 500 psi.
Contractor Gage
Large Easy-to-Read Dial
Series
CONG
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass socket & Bourdon tube.
Housing: Stainless steel case.
Lens: Plastic.
Accuracy: 1% full scale; ANSI B40.1 Grade 1A.
Size: 4.5 (115 mm).
Weight: 12.16 oz (345 g).
1/4 NPT
4-29/32
[124]
1-11/64
[30]
31/32
[25]
Model
CONG-G0122N
CONG-G0222N
CONG-G0322N
CONG-G0422N
CONG-G0522N
CONG-G0622N
Model
CONG-G0722N
CONG-G0822N
CONG-G1022N
CONG-G2222N
CONG-G2422N
CONG-G2522N
Range
30 Hg 0
0 15 psi
0 30 psi
0 60 psi
0 100 psi
0 160 psi
Range
0 200 psi
0 300 psi
0 500 psi
30 Hg 0 30 psi
30 Hg 0 100 psi
30 Hg 0 150 psi

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Hose Test Gage
For Checking Plumbing Water Pressure
Series
HSG
Size
w/ MP OPT.
w/o MP OPT.
A
in (mm)
2 53/64 (72)
2 9/16 (65)
B
in (mm)
1 3/16 (31)
1 7/32 (31)
C
in (mm)
1 9/64 (29)
1 9/64 (29)
D
in (mm)
37/64 (14.5)
37/64 (14.5)
E
in (mm)
1 7/32 (31)
1 7/32 (31)
F
in (mm)
13/64 (5)
The Series HSG Hose Test Gages possess psi scales with 3-2-3% ANSI
B40.1 Grade B accuracy. The 2.5 HSG gages are designed with black plastic
housings. Wetted parts include a brass socket and Bourdon tube. Units can
withstand temperatures of -40 to 120F (-40 to 49C). A 300 psi range is
available with a top connect 3/4 female brass hose coupling with rubber
washer. This connection makes the HSG gage perfect for checking plumbing
lines for proper pressures. An optional maximum indicating needle is available.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass socket and Bourdon tube.
Housing: Black plastic case.
Lens: Plastic.
Size: 2.5 (63 mm).
Process Connection: Top connect 3/4 female brass hose coupling &
tail piece with rubber washer.
Weight: 12.8 oz (363 g).
STANDARD
[C]
[D]
[E]
[A]
[B]
Model
HSG-D0865N
HSG-D0865N-MP
Standard
Max. Pointer Option
MAX. POINTER OPTION
[B] [F]
[A]
[E]
[C]
[D]
Range
0 300 psi
0 300 psi with Max. Indicating Needle

72
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
The Series FBG Forged Brass Gages possess psi scales with 1.5% full scale
accuracy. The 2.5 FBG gages are designed with industrial forged brass
housings and filled with glycerin oil to dampen out vibration. This construction
makes the FBG ideal for heavy industry applications such as hydraulic
equipment. Wetted parts include a brass socket and phosphor bronze Bourdon
tube. Units can withstand temperatures of 30 to 160F (-1 to 71C). A wide
offering of ranges are available from full vacuum, compound to 10,000 psi.
Forged Brass Gage
Heavy Duty Case Perfect for Hydraulic Systems
Series
FBG
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing: Forged brass case.
Lens: Plastic.
Fill: Glycerin.
Size: 2.5 (63 mm).
Weight: 12.8 oz (363 g).
2-37/64
[65]
1-7/16
[36.5]
3-13/32
[87]
1/4 NPT
Model
FBG-D0122N
FBG-D0222N
FBG-D0322N
FBG-D0422N
FBG-D0522N
FBG-D0622N
FBG-D0722N
FBG-D0822N
FBG-D0922N
FBG-D1122N
FBG-D1222N
FBG-D1322N
Model
FBG-D1422N
FBG-D1522N
FBG-D1722N
FBG-D1822N
FBG-D1922N
FBG-D2222N
FBG-D2422N
FBG-D2522N
FBG-D2722N
Range
30 Hg 0
0 15 psi
0 30 psi
0 60 psi
0 100 psi
0 160 psi
0 200 psi
0 300 psi
0 400 psi
0 600 psi
0 1000 psi
0 1500 psi
Range
0 2000 psi
0 3000 psi
0 5000 psi
0 7500 psi
0 10000 psi
30 Hg 0 30 psi
30 Hg 0 100 psi
30 Hg 0 150 psi
30 Hg 0 300 psi
The Series SAEG Gages possess dual psi and bar (100 x kPa) scales with 1.5% accuracy.
The 2.5 SAEG gages are designed with steel housings and bezels. These glycerin filled
gages possess brass sockets and phosphor bronze Bourdon tubes. Units can withstand
temperatures of 30 to 160F (-1 to 71C). A wide offering of ranges are available from 30
psi to 15,000 psi. Units provide a 7/16-20 SAE lower hydraulic connection that includes
a rubber O-ring and lock-nut. The SAEG gages are perfect for hydraulic and pneumatic
applications.
Hydraulic SAE Gage
7/16 SAE Process Connection with O-ring and Lock Nut
Series
SAEG
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing: 304 SS housing & bezel.
Lens: Plastic.
Fill: Glycerin.
Size: 2.5 (63 mm).
Process Connection: 7/16 20 SAE lower hydraulic connection with rubber
O ring, washer and lock nut.
Weight: 7.68 oz (218 g).
2-13/16
[71]
1-15/64
[33]
1-5/64
[27]
3-35/64
[90]
7/16-20 SAE
Model
SAEG-D11221E
SAEG-D11321E
SAEG-D11421E
SAEG-D11521E
SAEG-D11721E
SAEG-D11921E
Range
0 1000 psi (70 bar)
0 1500 psi (100 bar)
0 2000 psi (140 bar)
0 3000 psi (200 bar)
0 5000 psi (345 bar)
0 10000 psi (690 bar)

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing: Epoxy coated black steel case with removable back flange.
Lens: Plastic.
Accuracy: 1% full scale ANSI B40.1 Grade 1A.
Size: 4.5 (115 mm).
Weight: 17.6 oz (499 kg).
Bulk Tanker Gage
Monitor Tank Unloading Discharge Pressure
Series
BTG
The Series BTG Bulk Tanker Gages possess psi scales with 1% full scale ANSI B40.1
Grade 1A accuracy. The BTG gage is perfect for use on tanker trucks for monitoring
discharge pressures while tank is being unloaded. The 4.5 BTG gages are designed with
an epoxy coated black steel housing that is rust and corrosion resistant. The BTG gages
are designed with a silicone dampened counter weight attached to the movement which
allows the units to withstand vibration. Wetted parts include a brass socket and phosphor
bronze Bourdon tube. Units can withstand temperatures of -40 to 160F (-40 to 71C). Units
come with a 1/4 male NPT bottom connection.
4-61/64
[126]
5-7/16
[138]
5-29/32
[150]
6-11/32
[161]
63/64
[25]
1-11/32
[34]
13/64
[5]
1/4 NPT
The Series PPMG Process Panel Mount Gages possess psi scales with 0.5% full scale
ANSI B40.1 Grade 2A accuracy. The 4.5 PPMG gages are designed with an aluminum
front-flange safety-case. This safety-case has a solid front with pressure relief rear opening.
Internal overload and under-load protection is provided to prevent damage to the gage from
extreme over or under range sensing. A front screw is provided on the flange permitting
easy panel installation as well as allowing easy access to the adjustable needle pointer.
Excellent chemical compatibility is obtained with the 316 SS socket and Bourdon tube. Units
can withstand temperatures of -40 to 160F (-40 to 71C). A wide offering of ranges are
available from full vacuum, compound to 10,000 psi.
Process Panel Mount Gage
4.5 Safety Case with Removable Cover
Series
PPMG
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316 SS socket and Bourdon tube.
Housing: Aluminum case and ring with enamel coating.
Accuracy: 0.5% full scale ANSI B40.1 Grade 2A.
Size: 4.5 (115 mm).
Mounting Orientation: Panel mounting.
Weight: 2.34 lb (1.06 kg).
316 SS NPT
CONNECTION
F
E
B
C
D
A
3 .218 HOLES
ON A 5.375 B.C.
UNDER BEZEL
Model
BTG-G0322N
BTG-G2222N
Model
PPMG-G0132N
PPMG-G0232N
PPMG-G0332N
PPMG-G0432N
PPMG-G0532N
PPMG-G0632N
PPMG-G0732N
PPMG-G0832N
PPMG-G0932N
Model
PPMG-G1132N
PPMG-G1232N
PPMG-G1332N
PPMG-G1432N
PPMG-G1532N
PPMG-G1732N
PPMG-G2232N
PPMG-G2532N
PPMG-G2632N
Size
4 1/2
Dial
in
mm
A
6 3/16
157
B
2 9/32
58
C
33/64
13
D
29/32
23
E
1 3/16
30
F
4 49/64
121
Range
0 30 psi
30 Hg 0 30 psi
Range
30 Hg 0
0 15 psi
0 30 psi
0 60 psi
0 100 psi
0 160 psi
0 200 psi
0 300 psi
0 400 psi
Range
0 600 psi
0 1000 psi
0 1500 psi
0 2000 psi
0 3000 psi
0 5000 psi
30 Hg 0 30 psi
30 Hg 0 150 psi
30 Hg 0 300 psi

74
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
The Series TEFG Molded PVDF Gages possess dual psi and bar (100 x kPa) scales
with 1.5% full scale accuracy. The 2.5 TEFG gages are designed with a one piece PVDF
mold that makes the unit extremely durable while preventing the chance of a loss of fill. The
wetted parts include the PVDF connection and PVDF diaphragm. Units can withstand
temperatures of -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C). A wide offering of ranges are available from 15
to 200 psi. Units come with a 1/4 or 1/2 female NPT bottom connection. TEFG gages are
ideal for water treatment and chemical feed systems.
Molded PVDF Gage
One Piece Mold With All PVDF Body and Diaphragm
Series
TEFG
[A]
[E]
[F]
[C]
[H]
1/4 OR 1/2 NPT CONNECTION
[I]
[B] [C]
[D]
The Series PPG Molded Polypropylene Gages possess dual psi and bar (100 x kPa)
scales with 1.5% full scale accuracy. The 2.5 PPG gages are designed with a one piece
polypropylene mold that makes the unit extremely durable while preventing the chance of
a loss of fill. The wetted parts include the polypropylene connection and fluoroelastomer
diaphragm. Units can withstand temperatures of -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C). A wide offering
of ranges are available from 15 to 200 psi. Units come with a 1/4 or 1/2 female NPT
bottom connection. PPG gages are perfect for water treatment and chemical feed systems.
Molded Polypropylene Gage
One Piece Mold With Polypropylene Body and Fluoroelastomer Diaphragm
Series
PPG
[A]
[E]
[F]
[C]
[H]
1/4 OR 1/2 NPT CONNECTION
[I]
[B] [C]
[D]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: PVDF.
Housing: One piece molded anti impact PVDF.
Lens: Heavy duty glass.
Fill: Optional glycerin (standard no fill in gage).
Temperature Limit: 4 to 140F ( 20 to 60C).
Size: 2.5 (63 mm).
Process Connection: 1/4 or 1/2 female NPT lower.
Weight: 14.72 oz (417 g).
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Connection: polypropylene; Diaphragm: fluoroelastomer.
Housing: One piece molded polypropylene.
Lens: Heavy duty glass.
Fill: Glycerin.
Size: 2.5 (63 mm).
Process Connection: 1/4 or 1/2 female NPT lower.
Weight: 12.16 oz (345 g).
Size
2 1/2 Dial
in
mm
A
2 57/64
73.44
B
5/8
15.80
C
1 3/64
26.47
D
2 39/64
66.36
E
1/2
12.82
F
1 3/16
30.36
G
7/16
10.99
H
1 15/64
31.28
I
2 19/64
58.29
Size
2 1/2 Dial
in
mm
A
2 57/64
73.44
B
5/8
15.80
C
1 3/64
26.47
D
2 39/64
66.36
E
1/2
12.82
F
1 3/16
30.36
G
7/16
10.99
H
1 15/64
31.28
I
2 19/64
58.29
For optional glycerin fill in gage, add PY to the end of model.
Model
Model
Range
0 15 psi (1 bar)
0 30 psi (2 bar)
0 60 psi (4 bar)
0 100 psi (7 bar)
0 150 psi (11 bar)
0 200 psi (14 bar)
Range
0 15 psi (1 bar)
0 30 psi (2 bar)
0 60 psi (4 bar)
0 100 psi (7 bar)
0 150 psi (11 bar)
0 200 psi (14 bar)
1/2
TEFG-D10224F
TEFG-D10324F
TEFG-D10424F
TEFG-D10524F
TEFG-D10624F
TEFG-D10724F
1/4
TEFG-D10222F
TEFG-D10322F
TEFG-D10422F
TEFG-D10522F
TEFG-D10622F
TEFG-D10722F
1/2
PPG-D10224F
PPG-D10324F
PPG-D10424F
PPG-D10524F
PPG-D10624F
PPG-D10724F
1/4
PPG-D10222F
PPG-D10322F
PPG-D10422F
PPG-D10522F
PPG-D10622F
PPG-D10722F

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
The Series UNOG Use No Oil Gages possess psi scales with 2.5% full scale accuracy.
The 2 or 2.5 UNOG gages are designed with polished brass housings and copper alloy
wetted parts. Units can withstand temperatures of -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C). A wide
offering of ranges are available from 30 to 4000 psi. These oil-free service gages come with
a 1/4 male NPT bottom connection and are ideal for indicating compressed gas cylinder
pressures of non-corrosive gases which will oxidize with oil based compounds. Typical
applications include gas cylinders for welding and cutting manufacturing processes.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compressed, non corrosive gases.
Wetted Materials: Copper alloy socket and Bourdon tube.
Housing: Polished brass case.
Lens: Twist on plastic lens.
Size: 2 (50 mm) or 2.5 (63 mm).
Process Connection: 1/4 male NPT lower
Weight: 2: 4.48 oz (127 g); 2.5: 5.76 oz (163 g).
Use No Oil Gage
For Pressure Indication on Gas Cylinders
Series
UNOG
[B]
[C]
[E
[D]
[A]
Size
2 Dial
2 1/2 Dial
A
in (mm)
2 5/16 (59)
2 13/16 (72)
B
in (mm)
1 13/64 (31)
1 1/8 (29)
C
in (mm)
2 5/64 (53)
2 21/32 (68)
D
in (mm)
1 1/8 (29)
1 1/8 (29)
E
1/4 NPT
1/4 NPT
2 Model
UNOG-C0322N
UNOG-C0422N
UNOG-C0522N
UNOG-C0722N
UNOG-C0922N
UNOG-C1622N
2.5 Model
UNOG-D0322N
UNOG-D0422N
UNOG-D0522N
UNOG-D0722N
UNOG-D0922N
UNOG-D1622N
Tridicator Gage
Combination Pressure/Temperature Gage
Series
TRI
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass connection and phosphor bronze Bourdon tube.
Housing: Drawn steel, black finish.
Accuracy: Pressure 3 2 3%; Temperature 1 scale division.
Temperature Range: All models: 80 to 290F (30 to 140C).
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: 40 to 250F ( 40 to 120C);
Process: 80 to 290F (30 to 140C).
Size: 3 (76 mm).
Process Connections: 1/2 male NPT back or bottom, 1/4 male NPT back
connection.
Weight: 12.3 oz (348.7 g).
The Series TRI combines the value of an individual pressure gage and thermometer in
one instrument. These tridicators simplify installation which reduces time and saves
money. The moveable dial with blue pressure markings and red temperature markings
make the instrument easy to read. Pressure is indicated in both psi and kPa, while
temperature is measured in both Fahrenheit and Celsius. Series TRI comes in three
different connection options including lower mount, center back mount, and center back
mount with extension shank.
A
C
3.300
3.060
1.250
A
B
C
Model
TRI-60-25E
TRI-75-25E
TRI-100-25E
TRI-200-25E
TRI-60-50
TRI-75-50
TRI-100-50
TRI-200-5
TRI-60-50L
TRI-75-50L
TRI-100-50L
TRI-200-50L
A
4 1/2
[114.3]
5 15/64
[132.95]
6 43/64
[169.47]
B
1 21/64
[33.74]
3
[76.2]
2 13/16
[71.44]
C
1
[25.4]
2 39/64
[66.78]
2 3/8
[60.33]
Model
TRI-60-25E
TRI-75-25E
TRI-100-25E
TRI-200-25E
TRI-60-50
TRI-75-50
TRI-100-50
TRI-200-50
TRI-60-50L
TRI-75-50L
TRI-100-50L
TRI-200-50L
Range
0 60 psi (0 400 kPa)
0 75 psi (0 500 kPa)
0 100 psi (0 700 kPa)
0 200 psi (0 1400 kPa)
0 60 psi (0 400 kPa)
0 75 psi (0 500 kPa)
0 100 psi (0 700 kPa)
0 200 psi (0 1400 kPa)
0 60 psi (0 400 kPa)
0 75 psi (0 500 kPa)
0 100 psi (0 700 kPa)
0 200 psi (0 1400 kPa)
Range
30 psi
60 psi
100 psi
200 psi
400 psi
4000 psi
Range
30 psi
60 psi
100 psi
200 psi
400 psi
4000 psi
Connection
1/4 NPT CBM (ext. shank)
1/2 NPT CBM
1/2 NPT CBM
1/2 NPT CBM
1/2 NPT CBM
1/2 NPT LM
1/2 NPT LM
1/2 NPT LM
1/2 NPT LM

76
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
/
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Temperature & Pressure Gage
Eliminates Need for Two Separate Gages
Series
TPG
4-1/2
[114.30] 1-3/4
[44.45]
6-29/64
[163.96]
1/2 NPT
THERMOWELL
VENTED END
4-27/64
[112]
3-3/16
[81]
45
5-19/32
[142]
1/2 NPT
THERMOWELL
2-23/64
[60]
VENTED
BOTTOM
2-1/4
[57.17]
7-1/64
[178.00]
VENTED
BOTTOM
3/4
[19.03]
1/2 NPT
THERMOWELL
4-21/64
[110]
The Series TPG Temperature & Pressure Gage eliminates the need for
two separate temperature and pressure gages. Unique internal valve depressor
built into the well allows the gages sensing probe to be easily removed from the
thermowell without causing leakage, eliminating downtime. Installation time is
further reduced via one connection to pipe instead of two.
Series TPG is packaged in an ABS plastic case. Models are available with a back
mount, direct bottom mount, 45 bottom mount or panel or surface mount with
capillary. Side by side pressure and temperature scales allow quick and easy
readings. Series TPG has a temperature accuracy of 2% and a pressure accuracy
of 1.6% of full scale. Intended for industrial or HVAC applications, specifically
measuring water in air conditioners and heat ventilation systems.
APPLICATIONS
Air line temperatures & pressures
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean water and compatible gases.
Wetted Materials: Brass, 304 SS.
Housing Materials: ABS plastic.
Accuracy: Pressure 1.6% FS; Temperature 2.0% FS.
Pressure Limits: 150% FS. Normal operation should be between 10%
and 90% of full scale.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 4 to 140F ( 20 to 60C); Process:
Within range.
Humidity Limit: Ambient not to exceed 80%.
Size: TPG BA/TPG BO: 4.33 (110 mm) casing, 3.54 (90 mm) dial;
TPG 45: 4.41 (112 mm) casing, 3.66 (93 mm) dial.
Mounting Orientation: Dial face in vertical position.
Weight: 15.2 oz (431 g).
TPG-BA
TPG-BO
TPG-45
Model
(Back Mount)
TPG-BA-01-065
TPG-BA-02-065
TPG-BA-03-065
TPG-BA-04-065
TPG-BA-05-065
TPG-BA-06-065
TPG-BA-07-065
TPG-BA-08-065
TPG-BA-09-065
TPG-BA-10-065
TPG-BA-11-065
TPG-BA-12-065
Model
(Bottom Mount)
TPG-BO-01-065
TPG-BO-02-065
TPG-BO-03-065
TPG-BO-04-065
TPG-BO-05-065
TPG-BO-06-065
TPG-BO-07-065
TPG-BO-08-065
TPG-BO-09-065
TPG-BO-10-065
TPG-BO-11-065
TPG-BO-12-065
Model
(45 Mount)
TPG-45-01-065
TPG-45-02-065
TPG-45-03-065
TPG-45-04-065
TPG-45-05-065
TPG-45-06-065
TPG-45-07-065
TPG-45-08-065
TPG-45-09-065
TPG-45-10-065
TPG-45-11-065
TPG-45-12-065
ACCESSORY
A-167, Spare Thermowell
Description
85 psi/120F
85 psi/210F
150 psi/120F
150 psi/210F
235 psi/120F
235 psi/210F
6 bar/50C
6 bar/100C
10 bar/50C
10 bar/100C
16 bar/50C
16 bar/100C
Description
85 psi/120F
85 psi/210F
150 psi/120F
150 psi/210F
235 psi/120F
235 psi/210F
6 bar/50C
6 bar/100C
10 bar/50C
10 bar/100C
16 bar/50C
16 bar/100C
Description
85 psi/120F
85 psi/210F
150 psi/120F
150 psi/210F
235 psi/120F
235 psi/210F
6 bar/50C
6 bar/100C
10 bar/50C
10 bar/100C
16 bar/50C
16 bar/100C

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
761
Process Pressure Gage
Durable Housing, Field-Fillable
5-25/32
[146.84]
5-5/16
[134.94]
BOLT
CIRCLE
2-31/64
[63.10]
4-1/16
[103.19]
7/8 [22.23]
1/2 NPT
1/4 [6.35]
3 PLCS
EQUALLY SPACED
5-5/64
[128.98]
2-7/8
[73.03]
5/8
[15.88]
31/64
[12.30]
1-37/64
[40.08]
Series 761 Process Pressure Gages have a dual English/metric scale with 0.5% or
1% full scale accuracy. Series 761 gages may be easily liquid filled in the field without the
need for a separate kit. The gages are designed with 316L SS tube and socket for excellent
chemical compatibility and are offered in a wide selection of ranges.
APPLICATIONS
Chemical, refinery, fertilizer, petrochemical, pharmaceutical, power, oil, cement,
sugar, food and beverage, pulp and paper, and waste water
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316L SS Bourdon tube & connection.
Housing: Fiberglass reinforced polypropylene.
Accuracy: 0.5% full scale, ASME B40.1, Grade 2A.
Pressure Limit: 130% of full scale for ranges 8000 psi or less; 115% of full scale
for ranges greater than 8000 psi.
Temperature Limit: Ambient: 4 to 150F ( 20 to 65C); 761 Process: 300F max
(150C max).
Size: 4 1/2 (115 mm).
Weight: 1.4 lb (650 g).
761
Model
761-1
761-2
761-3
761-4
Model
761-5
761-6
761-7
761-8
Model
761-9
761-10
761-11
761-12
Range
0 15 psi (0 to 100 kPa)
0 30 psi (0 to 200 kPa)
0 60 psi (0 to 400 kPa)
0 100 psi (0 to 700 kPa)
Range
0 160 psi (0 to 1100 kPa)
30 Hg 0 vac (0 to 100 kPa)
0 200 psi (0 to 1400 kPa)
0 300 psi (0 to 2000 kPa)
Range
0 400 psi (0 to 2800 kPa)
0 500 psi (0 to 3400 kPa)
0 600 psi (0 to 4000 kPa)
0 1000 psi (0 to 7000 kPa)
The Series 763/764 Process Gages possess psi scales with 0.5% full scale ANSI B40.1
Grade 2A accuracy. The 763/764 gages are designed with a Phenolic safety-case. This safety-
case has a solid front with blow-out back. Internal overload and under-load protection is
provided to prevent damage to the gage from extreme over or under range sensing. Access
to the adjustable needle pointer is simple via the removable bezel. Series 763 units are
shipped dry, but can be easily liquid-filled in the field without the need for a separate kit.
Series 764 units contain glycerin fill which allows the gages to be used in high vibration
applications. Excellent chemical compatibility is obtained with the 316 SS socket and
Bourdon tube. A wide offering of ranges are available from full vacuum, compound to 20,000
psi. The 763/764 is typically used to monitor suction pressures on the blower.
SPECIFICATIONS
liquids.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS socket and
Bourdon tube.
Housing: Phenolic.
Fill: Glycerin (764 only).
Accuracy: 0.5% full scale ANSI B40.1
Grade 2A.
Pressure Limit: 115% of full scale
>1500 psi; 130% full scale 1500 psi
and below.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 763:
40 to 160F ( 40 to 71C); 764: 30 to
160F ( 1 to 71C); Process: 212F
max (100C max).
Size: 4.5 (115 mm).
Process Connection: 1/4 or 1/2
male NPT lower.
Weight: 763: 31.36 oz (0.9 kg); 764:
41.6 oz (1.18 kg).
Field-Fillable & Glycerin-Filled Process Gage
0.5% Accuracy, Internal Over and Under Load Protection
Series
763
&
764
5-5/64
[129]
5-29/64
[150]
3-1/32 [77]
29/32
[23]
1-3/8
[35]
2-9/16
[65]
1-3/8 [35]
[3 .24 HOLES
ON 5.39 B.C.]
1/4 OR 1/2 NPT
[120]
Model (1/2 NPT)
763-154N
763-174N
763-194N
763-204N
763-294N
Model (1/2 NPT)
763-014N
763-024N
763-034N
763-044N
763-054N
763-064N
763-074N
Model (1/2 NPT)
763-084N
763-094N
763-114N
763-124N
763-134N
763-144N
Model (1/2 NPT)
763-214N
763-224N
763-234N
763-244N
763-254N
763-264N
763-274N
Range
0 3000 psi
0 5000 psi
0 10000 psi
0 15000 psi
0 20000 psi
Range
30 Hg 0
0 15 psi
0 30 psi
0 60 psi
0 100 psi
0 160 psi
0 200 psi
Range
0 300 psi
0 400 psi
0 600 psi
0 1000 psi
0 1500 psi
0 2000 psi
Range
30 Hg 0 15 psi
30 Hg 0 30 psi
30 Hg 0 60 psi
30 Hg 0 100 psi
30 Hg 0 160 psi
30 Hg 0 200 psi
30 Hg 0 300 psi
For glycerin fill change series from 763 to 764. For 1/4 NPT connections, change ending 4N to 2N.

78
S
i
n
g
l
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
i
a
l
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Spirahelic
Direct Drive Pressure Gages

Use Spirahelic
Gages for:
Systems with high cycle rates
Processes with problematic pressure surges and spikes
Environments with continuous vibration or shock
Precision design ensures maintenance-free performance.
Not just another pretty gage, the Series 7000 Spirahelic
Direct Drive
Pressure Gages were originally developed in response to military
needs for unbelievable resistance to shock and vibration while
delivering premium accuracy.
The Dwyer
Spirahelic
gage features a triple coil spiral/helical wound

Bourdon tube which provides the ultimate in operator safety, while
continuing to incorporate the advantages of a low inertia movement
without gears or linkages. This low inertia movement is provided by
the unique Bourdon tube design. The direct drive helical coil eliminates
complex mechanical movements such as gears that are common in
conventional C Bourdon tube gages, which wear and cause
inaccuracy or early failure. Expensive and leaky liquid filled gages are
no longer necessary due to the triple wound Bourdon design which
withstands shock and vibration.
The direct drive movement of the lightweight, precision balanced
pointer reduces friction and mass, improving responsiveness and
accuracy. So well in fact that on ASME Grade 2A or 3A models the
accuracy is built-in for life! Center post bearing carrier ensures precise
bearing alignment for nearly friction free operation. Low volume
Bourdon tube reduces fluid volume and stored energy, reducing
potential for damage if tube ruptures from overpressure or other
causes. A large area filter keeps dirt out and restricts flow from
damaging the Bourdon tube. The small diameter tubing combined with
a solid front case and rear blowout plug provides added safety.
Convenience is enhanced by dual bottom and back process connections
on panel mount models while turret housing gages possess a dual 1/4
female NPT and 1/2 male NPT bottom connection. Impact resistant
plastic case is sized to conform to ASME B40.1, replacing existing
gages without changes in panel cutout or mounting holes. Compound
ranges are available in either panel or turret style housings for
applications where vacuum is present in the process.
Solid front case combined
with rear blowout plug
provides highest level of
operator safety.
Direct drive movement
-no cams, gears, or linkages.
Provides longer operating
life than standard "C"
Bourdon gages.
Precision balanced pointer
with reduced friction produces
higher responsiveness
than standard gage.
High impact plastic case
and lens allows gages to
last through the most
demanding applications.
Design of small diameter tubing
wound in spiral/helical coil acts like
a liquid filled gage without the fill.
Center post bearing carrier
supports pointer shaft and coil.
Rear blowout hole
covered with label.
This safety enhancement
directs an overpressure
surge or spike
away from operators.
Case and shock protection ribs help
prevent damage to Bourdon tube in
the event of severe shock.
Filter plug protects Bourdon tube
from particulate damage and reduces
pressure surges.
Available in 4-1/2 turret mount and
4-1/2, 6, and 8-1/2 panel mount housings
Tired of replacing your pressure gages?
Thats why you need Spirahelic
Direct Drive Pressure Gages!

Designed to exceed industry standards... heres how:
Acts like a liquid-filled gage without the fill
Maintenance free
No recalibration required
Only 1 moving part no gears or linkages
Not affected by pulsations, vibrations or shock
Longer service life
Accuracy built-in for life
078.P.N:Layout 2 2/18/11 8:12 AM Page 1
S
i
n
g
l
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
i
a
l
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series 7000B Spirahelic
Direct Drive Pressure Gages with turret

mount housings feature a triple coil spiral/helical wound Bourdon tube to
provide dependable service. Bourdon tube design eliminates gears, springs,
linkages and complex movements which can wear and cause inaccuracy or early
failure. Series 7000B gages come standard with a dual-size 1/2 male NPT and
1/4 female NPT process connection.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Grade A accuracy: Beryllium copper Bourdon tube,
nickel plated brass connection block.
Grade 2A accuracy: Inconel
X-750 alloy Bourdon tube, type 316L SS

connection block.
Housing: Black polycarbonate case and clear acrylic cover.
Accuracy: Grade A (2%-1%-2%); Grade 2A (0.5% F.S.).
Pressure Limit: 150% of full scale. Gage will maintain its specifications
for overpressures up to 150% maximum range. Normal operation
should be between 25% and 75% of full scale.
Temperature Limits: -65 to 180F (-53.9 to 82.2C).
Size: 4-1/2 (114.3 mm) dial face Design conforms to ASME B40.1.
Process Connections: Dual size 1/2 male NPT X 1/4 female NPT,
bottom connections.
Weight: 18.2 oz (516 g).
Spirahelic
Direct Drive Pressure Gage

4-1/2 Turret Mount Gage, ASME Grades A & 2A
7000B
(3) 7/32 [5.57] MOUNTING
HOLES EQUALLY SPACED ON A
DUAL PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1/2 MALE NPT
1/4 FEMALE NPT
3-7/64
[78.98]
5-7/8
[149.23]
120
Model
7112B-G030C
7112B-G045C
7112B-G060C
7112B-G100C
Compound Gages - Grade 2A Accuracy (1/2% of F.S.)
Model
7112B-G030
7112B-G060
7112B-G100
7112B-G160
7112B-G200
7112B-G300
7112B-G600
7112B-GC010
7112B-GC020
7112B-GC030
7112B-GC060
7112B-GC100
Grade 2A Accuracy (1/2% of F.S.)
Model
7100B-G060
7100B-G100
7100B-G200
7100B-G300
7100B-G600
7100B-GC010
7100B-GC020
7100B-GC030
7100B-GC060
Grade A Accuracy (2%-1%-2%)
Precision design ensures maintenance-free performance.
Solid front case combined
with rear blowout plug
provides highest level of
operator safety.
Direct drive movement
-no cams, gears, or linkages.
Provides longer operating
life than standard "C"
Bourdon gages.
Precision balanced pointer
with reduced friction produces
higher responsiveness
than standard gage.
High impact plastic case
and lens allows gages to
last through the most
demanding applications.
Design of small diameter tubing
wound in spiral/helical coil acts like
a liquid filled gage without the fill.
Center post bearing carrier
supports pointer shaft and coil.
Rear blowout hole
covered with label.
This safety enhancement
directs an overpressure
surge or spike
away from operators.
Case and shock protection ribs help
prevent damage to Bourdon tube in
the event of severe shock.
Filter plug protects Bourdon tube
from particulate damage and reduces
pressure surges.
Ranges (psig)
30 Hg-0-30
30 Hg-0-45
30 Hg-0-60
30 Hg-0-100
Ranges (psig)
30
60
100
160
200
300
600
1000
2000
3000
6000
10000
Ranges (psig)
60
100
200
300
600
1000
2000
3000
6000
079.P.N:Layout 2 2/17/11 9:34 AM Page 1
80
S
i
n
g
l
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
i
a
l
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
7112B
Spirahelic
Pressure Gage with Diaphragm Seal

All 316L SS with ASME Grade 2A Gage
(3) 7/32 [5.56] MOUNTING
120
5-9/16
[141.29]
1-3/4 HEX
[44.45 HEX]
5-7/8
[149.23]
1/4 NPT OR 1/2 NPT
PROCESS
CONNECTION
3-7/64
[78.98]
SPECIFICATIONS
GAGE SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Inconel
X-750 alloy Bourdon tube, type

316L SS connection block.
Housing: Black polycarbonate case and clear acrylic cover.
Accuracy: Grade 2A (0.5% full scale).
Pressure Limit: 150% of full scale. Normal operation should be
between 25% and 75% of full scale.
Size: 4-1/2 (114.3 mm) dial face design conforms to ASME
B40.1.
Process Connections: Dual size 1/2 male NPT x 1/4 female
NPT, bottom connections.
Weight: 18.2 oz (516 g).
DIAPHRAGM SEAL SPECIFICATIONS
Fill Fluid: Silicone.
Weight: 3 lb (1 oz).
The Spirahelic
Direct Drive Pressure Gage is now available with

a 316L SS diaphragm. Due to the small volume of the triple wound
Bourdon tube inside the Spirahelic
gage, a much smaller diaphragm

seal may be selected versus a standard C Bourdon tube gage. This
smaller seal is extremely compact, light weight, and durable which
eliminates difficult installation issues with bulky diaphragm seals.
These seals are also offered with an optional 1/4 NPT flush port which
makes clean outs quick and easy.
1/4 NPT Flush Port
Note: For other process connections and wetted materials
contact the factory.
Model
7112B-G060-S150
7112B-G100-S150
7112B-G200-S150
7112B-G300-S150
7112B-G600-S150
7112B-GC010-S150
Model
7112B-G060-S250
7112B-G100-S250
7112B-G200-S250
7112B-G300-S250
7112B-G600-S250
7112B-GC010-S250
Ranges (psig)
60
100
200
300
600
1000
Ranges (psig)
60
100
200
300
600
1000
080.P.N:Layout 2 2/16/11 4:07 PM Page 1
S
i
n
g
l
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
i
a
l
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Spirahelic

Direct Drive Pressure Gage
Panel Mount, 4-1/2, 6 & 8-1/2 Dials, ASME Grades 2A & 3A
Series
7000
23/64
[9.13]
2-5/32
[54.76]
4-4/64
[117.87]
(3) 7/32 [5.56] MOUNTING
5-3/8 [136.53] BOLT CIRCLE
120
5-7/8
[149.23]
1-9/32
[32.54]
1/4 FEMALE NPT PRESSURE
CONNECTION TYP 2 PLACES
1 [25.40] SQUARE
CONNECTION BLOCK
2-1/32
[51.59]
1-13/32
[35.71]
Model 7112 (4-1/2 Dial)
Model 7212 (6 Dial)
Model 7312 (8-1/2 Dial)
(3) 9/32 [7.14] MOUNTING HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED ON
A 7 [177.80] BOLT CIRCLE
120
7-19/32
[192.88]
1-9/32
[32.54]
6-1/2 [165.10]
PANEL CUTOUT
2-5/32
[54.76]
23/64
[9.13]
1-13/32
[35.71]
6-5/16
[160.32]
2-1/32
(51.59)
1/4 FEMALE NPT
PRESSURE CONNECTION
TYP 2 PLACES
1 [25.40] SQUARE
CONNECTION BLOCK
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Inconel
X-750
alloy Bourdon tube, type 316L SS
connection block.
Housing: Black polycarbonate case
and clear acrylic cover.
Accuracy: Grade 2A (0.5% F.S.) or
Grade 3A (0.25% F.S.) with mirrored
scale.
Gage will maintain its specifications for
overpressures up to 150% maximum
range. Normal operation should be
between 25% and 75% of full scale.
Temperature Limits: -65 to 180F
(-53.9 to 82.2C).
Sizes: 4-1/2 dial face (114.3 mm), 6
dial face (152.4 mm), 8-1/2 dial face
(215.9 mm), design conforms to ASME
B40.1.
female NPT field selectable back or
bottom connection.
Weight: 4-1/2 dial face: 16.3 oz
(462.1 g); 6 dial face: 19.6 oz. (555.6
g); 8-1/2 dial face: 27.3 oz (773.9 g).
Standard Accessory: One 1/4 male
NPT stainless steel plug.
(3) 9/32 [7.14]
MOUNTING HOLES EQUALLY SPACED
ON A 9-5/8 [244.48] BOLT CIRCLE
120
10-3/16
[258.76]
1-9/32
[32.54]
23/64
[9.13]
2-5/32
[54.76]
1-13/32
[35.71]
8-29/32
[226.22]
2-1/32
[51.59]
1/4 FEMALE NPT PRESSURE
CONNECTION TYP 2 PLACES
1 [25.40] SQUARE
CONNECTION BLOCK
4-1/2 Dial, Grade 2A Accuracy (1/2% of F.S.)
6 Dial, Grade 2A Accuracy (1/2% of F.S.)
8-1/2 Dial, Grade 2A Accuracy (1/2% of F.S.)
Model
7212-G060
7212-G100
7212-G200
7212-G300
7212-G600
Model
7312-G060
7312-G100
7312-G200
7312-G300
7312-G600
Model
7112-G600
7112-GC010
7112-GC020
7112-GC030
7112-GC060
7112-GC100
Model
7312-GC010
7312-GC020
7312-GC030
7312-GC060
Model
7212-GC010
7212-GC020
7212-GC030
7212-GC060
Model
7112-G030
7112-G060
7112-G100
7112-G200
7112-G300
Inconel

is a registered trademark of Huntington Alloys Corporation
Model 7114A (4-1/2 Dial)
Model 7214A (6 Dial)
Model 7314A (8-1/2 Dial)
GRADE 2A ACCURACY GRADE 3A ACCURACY
Range (psig)
30
60
100
200
300
Range (psig)
60
100
200
300
600
Range (psig)
60
100
200
300
600
Range (psig)
600
1000
2000
3000
6000
10000
Range(psig)
1000
2000
3000
6000
Range (psig)
1000
2000
3000
6000
ACCESSORIES
A-341, Brass adapter, 1/4 male NPT to G 1/2 A (per ISO 228/1)
parellel thread 2-1/2 length
A-341-1, Brass adapter, 1/2 male NPT x 1/4 female NPT 3-3/4 length
Note: Additional ranges and accuracy requirements are available. Please consult
the factory for details.
Model 7112, 4-1/2 dial, Grade 2A accuracy (1/2% of F.S.)
Model 7212, 6 dial, Grade 2A accuracy (1/2% of F.S.)
Model 7312, 8 dial, Grade 2A accuracy (1/2% of F.S.)
081.P.N:Layout 2 2/16/11 4:21 PM Page 1
82
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
The Series SGR/SGJ Gages have dual english/metric scales with
0.25% ASME Grade 3A accuracy, and contain a green dial with anti-
parallax mirror for ease of reading measurements by the user.
The Series SGR/SGJ gages are designed with 304 SS housing and
beryllium copper plus 316L SS wetted parts. Units can withstand
ambient and process temperatures up to 149F (65C). Included is a
micrometer adjustable pointer which allows for re-zeroing in the field.
A wide selection of ranges are available. Included with the SGR/SGJ
is a protective portable carrying case.
The Series SGJ Safety Test Gage has a solid front design with baffle
wall interposed between the sensing element and the window face, plus
a pressure relieving back, provide the increased safety required for
potentially dangerous applications.
APPLICATIONS
Calibration, laboratory
6 Stainless Steel Test Gage
0.25% Full Scale Accuracy, Beryllium Copper & 316L SS Wetted Parts
Series
SGR
&
SGJ
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316L SS connection & beryllium copper
Bourdon tube.
Housing: 304 SS.
Lens: Shatter-proof safety glass.
Accuracy: 0.25% full scale @ 77F (25C); ANSI B40.1 Grade
3A.
Temperature Limits: Ambient & process up to 149F (65C).
Size: 6 (150 mm).
4-29/64
[113.11]
6-15/32
[164.31]
5/8
[15.88]
2-9/16
[65.09]
1/2 NPT
5-29/32
[150.02]
1-5/32
[29.37]
7/8 SQUARE
[22.23 SQUARE]
For SGJ test gages change series from SGR to SGJ.
Test Gage Carrying Case - Included with the
SGR or SGJ is a convenient, protective
portable carrying case for the 6 test gages.
Model
SGR-H0124N
SGR-H0224N
SGR-H0324N
SGR-H0424N
SGR-H0524N
SGR-H0624N
SGR-H0724N
SGR-H0824N
SGR-H0924N
SGR-H1024N
Range
0-30 Hg (-100-0 kPa)
0-15 psi (0-100 kPa)
0-30 psi (0-200 kPa)
0-60 psi (0-400 kPa)
0-100 psi (0-700 kPa)
0-150 psi (0-1000 kPa)
0-200 psi (0-1400 kPa)
0-300 psi (0-2000 kPa)
0-400 psi (0-2800 kPa)
0-500 psi (0-3400 kPa)

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
g
t
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
DPG
0.25% or 0.5% Full Scale Accuracy, NEMA 4X Housing
Replace your outdated analog gages with the new Series DPG Digital Pressure Gage.
The Series DPG has a high 0.25% or 0.5% full scale accuracy. The 4 digit digital display
will reduce the potential for errors in readings by eliminating parallax error commonly
produced with analog gages.
Series DPG is battery powered and has an auto-shut off to conserve battery life. Battery
life, on average, will last 2000 hours. A 4 button key pad allows easy access to features
without the need to work through complex menus or difficult key combinations. These
features include backlight, peak and valley, tare or auto zero and conversion of the pressure
units.
3
[76.20]
3-5/8
[91.39]
1/4 NPT
1-5/8
[40.39]
Model
0.5%
DPG-000*
DPG-002*
DPG-003*
DPG-004*
DPG-005*
DPG-006*
DPG-007*
DPG-008*
DPG-009*
DPG-010*
DPG-011*
DPG-020*
DPG-021*
DPG-022*
DPG-023*
DPG-024*
Range psi
14.70 to 0
15.00
30.00
50.00
100.00
200.00
300.00
500.00
1000
3000
5000
14.70 to 15.00
14.70 to 30.00
14.70 to 45.00
14.70 to 60.00
14.70 to 100.0
kg/cm
2
1.033
1.055
2.109
3.515
7.03
14.06
21.09
35.15
70.3
210.9
351.5
1.033 to 1.055
1.033 to 2.109
1.033 to 3.164
1.033 to 4.218
1.033 to 7.03
bar
1.013
1.034
2.069
3.448
6.895
13.79
20.69
34.48
68.98
206.9
344.8
1.013 to 1.034
1.013 to 2.069
1.013 to 3.103
1.013 to 4.137
1.013 to 6.895
in Hg
29.93
30.54
61.08
101.8
203.6
407.2
610.8
1018
2036
6108
29.93 to 30.54
29.93 to 61.08
29.93 to 91.63
29.93 to 122.2
29.93 to 203.6
ft wc
33.94
34.61
69.21
115.4
230.7
461.4
692.1
1154
2307
6921
33.94 to 34.61
33.94 to 69.21
33.94 to 103.8
33.94 to 138.4
33.94 to 230.7
kPa
101.4
103.4
206.9
344.8
689.5
1379
2069
3448
6895
101.4 to 103.4
101.4 to 206.9
101.4 to 310.3
101.4 to 413.7
101.4 to 689.5
oz/in
2
235.2
240
480
800
1600
3200
4800
8000
235.2 to 240
235.2 to 480
235.2 to 720
235.2 to 960
235.2 to 1600
in wc
407.3
415.2
830.4
1384
2768
5536
8304
407.3 to 415.2
407.3 to 830.4
407.3 to 1245
407.3 to 1661
407.3 to 2768
mm Hg
760.7
775.7
1551
2586
5172
760.7 to 775.7
760.7 to 1551
760.7 to 2327
760.7 to 3103
760.7 to 5172
mbar
1013
1034
2069
3448
6895
1013 to 1034
1013 to 2069
1013 to 3102
1013 to 4137
1013 to 6895
cm wc
1034
1055
2109
3515
7031
1034 to 1055
1034 to 2109
1034 to 3164
1034 to 4218
1034 to 7031
Pressure Ranges
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids and combustible gases (for FM listing see Agency
Approvals below).
Wetted Materials: Type 316L SS.
Housing Materials: Polycarbonate front & back cover, anodized aluminum
extruded housing with recessed grooves, polycarbonate overlay, Buna N O rings,
316L SS sensor construction.
Accuracy: DPG 000: 0.5% full scale; DPG 100: 0.25% full scale; 1 least
significant digit @ 70F (21C) (includes linearity, hysteresis,
repeatability).
Pressure Limit: 2x pressure range for models 1000 psi; 5000 psi for 3000 psi
range; 7500 psi for 5000 psi range.
Enclosure Rating: Designed to meet NEMA 4/4X (IP66).
Thermal Effect: Between 70 to 130F is 0.016%/F; Between 32 to 70F is
0.026%/F; Between 10 to 32F is 0.09%/F.
Size: 3.00 OD x 1.90 deep (max).
Weight: 8.84 oz (275 g).
Display: 4 digit (.425 H x .234 W digits).
Power Requirements: Two AAA batteries.
Battery Life: 2000 hours typical; Low battery indicator.
Auto Shut-Off:
Gage: 60 minute auto shut off. Auto shut off may be disengaged;
Backlight: 2 minute auto shut off.
Agency Approvals: DPG 000: CE; DPG 100: CE, FM approved to be intrinsically
safe for Class I, Division I, Groups A, B, C and D, for ranges 0 15 to 0 3000 psi.
*Model is not FM approved.
DPG-100 with Protective
Rubber Boot
Protective Carrying
Case
Model
0.25%
DPG-102
DPG-103
DPG-104
DPG-105
DPG-106
DPG-107
DPG-108
DPG-109
DPG-110
DPG-111*
DPG-100 DPG-000
ACCESSORIES
A-183, Protective Rubber Boot
A-184, Carrying Case

84
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
g
t
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
DPGA
&
DPGW
1% Digital Pressure Gage
Economic Gage With Selectable Engineering Units
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: DPGA: Air and compatible gases; DPGW: Liquids and compatible
gases.
Wetted Materials: DPGA: 316L SS, silicone sensor;
DPGW: 316L SS.
Accuracy: 1.0% F.S. (includes linearity, hysteresis, repeatability).
Pressure Limits: 2X pressure range. Vacuum range max. pressure is 30
psig.
Thermal Effect: 0.05% FS/F.
Size: 2.62 O.D. x 1.52 deep.
Display: 4 digit LCD (.425 H x .234 W digits).
Power Requirements: 9 volt alkaline battery. Battery included but not
connected.
Auto Shut-off: 20 minute auto shut off.
Weight: 5.6 oz (160 g).
2-43/64
[67.87]
3-11/16
[93.66]
1-1/2 [38.10]
1/4 NPT
The Series DPGA is the only economic digital pressure gage with selectable
engineering units on the market. With its 1% accuracy and digital push-button zero,
the DPGA is the perfect choice for digitally monitoring the pressures of air and
compatible gases.
The Series DPGWis the only economic digital pressure gage for liquids with the
ability to select engineering units on the market. With its 1% accuracy and digital
push-button zero, the DPGW is the perfect choice for digitally monitoring the
pressures of compatible liquids and gases.
Model
DPGA-00
DPGA-01
DPGA-02
DPGA-03
DPGA-04
DPGA-05
DPGA-06
DPGA-07
DPGA-08
DPGA-09
DPGA-10
DPGA-11
kg/cm
2
1.033
.0508
.0703
.1406
.3515
1.055
2.109
3.515
7.03
14.06
21.09
35.15
bar
1.013
.0498
.0689
.1379
.3447
1.034
2.068
3.447
6.89
13.79
20.68
34.47
in Hg
29.93
1.471
2.036
4.072
10.18
30.54
61.1
101.8
203.6
407.2
611
1018
ft wc
33.94
1.667
2.307
4.614
11.53
34.60
69.2
115.3
230.7
461.3
692
1153
kPa
101.4
4.980
6.89
13.79
34.47
103.4
206.8
344.7
689
1379
2068
3447
oz/in
2
235.2
11.55
16.00
32.00
80.0
240.0
480.0
800
1600
3200
4800
in wc
407.3
20.00
27.68
55.4
138.4
415.2
830
1384
2768
mm Hg
761
37.37
51.7
103.4
258.6
776
1551
2586
mbar
1013
49.80
68.9
137.9
344.7
1034
2068
3447
cm wc
1034
50.8
70.3
140.6
351.5
1055
2109
3515
Pressure Ranges
Range
30 Hg to 0 (psi)
0 to 20 w.c.
0 to 1 psi
0 to 2 psi
0 to 5 psi
0 to 15 psi
0 to 30 psi
0 to 50 psi
0 to 100 psi
0 to 200 psi
0 to 300 psi
0 to 500 psi
psig
14.70
0.722
1.000
2.000
5.000
15.00
30.00
50.00
100.0
200.0
300.0
500.0
Resolution
psi
0.01
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.002
0.01
0.01
0.02
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
DPGA DPGW
Model
DPGW-00
DPGW-04
DPGW-05
DPGW-06
DPGW-07
DPGW-08
DPGW-09
DPGW-10
DPGW-11
kg/cm
2
1.033
.3515
1.055
2.109
3.515
7.03
14.06
21.09
35.15
bar
1.013
.3447
1.034
2.068
3.447
6.89
13.79
20.68
34.47
in Hg
29.93
10.18
30.54
61.1
101.8
203.6
407.2
611
1018
ft wc
33.94
11.53
34.60
69.2
115.3
230.7
461.3
692
1153
kPa
101.4
34.47
103.4
206.8
344.7
689
1379
2068
3447
oz/in
2
235.2
80.0
240.0
480.0
800
1600
3200
4800
in wc
407.3
138.4
415.2
830
1384
2768
mm Hg
761
258.6
776
1551
2586
mbar
1013
344.7
1034
2068
3447
cm wc
1034
351.5
1055
2109
3515
Pressure Ranges
Range
30 Hg to 0 (psi)
0 to 5 psi
0 to 15 psi
0 to 30 psi
0 to 50 psi
0 to 100 psi
0 to 200 psi
0 to 300 psi
0 to 500 psi
psig
14.70
5.000
15.00
30.00
50.00
100.0
200.0
300.0
500.0
Resolution
psi
0.01
0.002
0.01
0.01
0.02
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
Compound range available: DPGW 12: 30 Hg 0 100 psi.
ACCESSORY
A-293, Protective Rubber Boot

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
g
t
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
DPGAB
&
DPGWB
Digital Pressure Gage with Rubber Boot
0.5% Full Scale Accuracy, Selectable Engineering Units
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: DPGAB: Air and compatible gases; DPGWB: Liquids and
compatible gases.
Wetted Materials: DPGAB: 316L SS, silicone sensor; DPGWB: Type 316L
SS.
Accuracy: 0.5% F.S. (includes linearity, hysteresis, repeatability).
Pressure Limits: 2X pressure range. Vacuum range max. pressure is 30
psig.
Size: 2.62 O.D. x 1.52 deep.
Display: 4 digit LCD (.425 H x .234 W digits).
connected.
Auto Shut-off: 20 minute auto shut off.
Weight: 5.6 oz (160 g).
ON
OFF
ZERO
UN TS
3-3/32
[78.58]
3-59/64
[99.62]
1-25/32
[45.24]
1/4 NPT
The Series DPGWB/DPGAB digital pressure gages offer 0.5% full scale accuracy
in a rugged, easy-to-use unit at prices comparable to mechanical gauges. The DPGWB
stainless steel wetted material makes it suitable for a wide variety of liquid or gases.
The gauges feature user-selectable units of measure allowing one gauge to be used
for a variety of pressure scales. The DPGWB/DPGAB come with a protective rubber
boot to protect against short drops and rough handling.
Model
DPGAB-00
DPGAB-01
DPGAB-02
DPGAB-03
DPGAB-04
DPGAB-05
DPGAB-06
DPGAB-07
DPGAB-08
DPGAB-09
DPGAB-10
DPGAB-11
kg/cm
2
1.033
.0508
.0703
.1406
.3515
1.055
2.109
3.515
7.03
14.06
21.09
35.15
bar
1.013
.0498
.0689
.1379
.3447
1.034
2.068
3.447
6.89
13.79
20.68
34.47
in Hg
29.93
1.471
2.036
4.072
10.18
30.54
61.1
101.8
203.6
407.2
611
1018
ft wc
33.94
1.667
2.307
4.614
11.53
34.60
69.2
115.3
230.7
461.3
692
1153
kPa
101.4
4.980
6.89
13.79
34.47
103.4
206.8
344.7
689
1379
2068
3447
oz/in
2
235.2
11.55
16.00
32.00
80.0
240.0
480.0
800
1600
3200
4800
in wc
407.3
20.00
27.68
55.4
138.4
415.2
830
1384
2768
mm Hg
761
37.37
51.7
103.4
258.6
776
1551
2586
mbar
1013
49.80
68.9
137.9
344.7
1034
2068
3447
cm wc
1034
50.8
70.3
140.6
351.5
1055
2109
3515
Pressure Ranges
Range
30 Hg to 0 (psi)
0 to 20 w.c.
0 to 1 psi
0 to 2 psi
0 to 5 psi
0 to 15 psi
0 to 30 psi
0 to 50 psi
0 to 100 psi
0 to 200 psi
0 to 300 psi
0 to 500 psi
psig
14.70
0.722
1.000
2.000
5.000
15.00
30.00
50.00
100.0
200.0
300.0
500.0
Resolution
psi
0.01
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.002
0.01
0.01
0.02
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
DPGWB DPGAB
Model
DPGWB-00
DPGWB-04
DPGWB-05
DPGWB-06
DPGWB-07
DPGWB-08
DPGWB-09
DPGWB-10
DPGWB-11
kg/cm
2
1.033
.3515
1.055
2.109
3.515
7.03
14.06
21.09
35.15
bar
1.013
.3447
1.034
2.068
3.447
6.89
13.79
20.68
34.47
in Hg
29.93
10.18
30.54
61.1
101.8
203.6
407.2
611
1018
ft wc
33.94
11.53
34.60
69.2
115.3
230.7
461.3
692
1153
kPa
101.4
34.47
103.4
206.8
344.7
689
1379
2068
3447
oz/in
2
235.2
80.0
240.0
480.0
800
1600
3200
4800
in wc
407.3
138.4
415.2
830
1384
2768
mm Hg
761
258.6
776
1551
2586
mbar
1013
344.7
1034
2068
3447
cm wc
1034
351.5
1055
2109
3515
Pressure Ranges
Range
30 Hg to 0 (psi)
0 to 5 psi
0 to 15 psi
0 to 30 psi
0 to 50 psi
0 to 100 psi
0 to 200 psi
0 to 300 psi
0 to 500 psi
psig
14.70
5.000
15.00
30.00
50.00
100.0
200.0
300.0
500.0
Resolution
psi
0.01
0.002
0.01
0.01
0.02
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
Compound range available: DPGWB 12: 30 Hg 0 100 psi

86
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
,
D
g
t
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
DCG
Digital Calibration Gage
0.05% Full Scale Accuracy, 316 SS Wetted Parts
The Series DCG Digital Calibration Gage features a remarkable
0.05% full scale accuracy that includes the effects of linearity,
hysteresis, repeatability, and temperature across the entire
compensated temperature range. This gage was specifically designed
to be a portable test gage where its unmatched accuracy is required.
This is a highly durable gage that is housed in a rugged and compact
3 inch stainless steel case.
This highly accurate test gage offers menu configurable and password
protected features that include engineering unit conversion, seven
selectable languages, field calibration capabilities, as well as an
adjustable bar graph and update/dampening rates. Every unit includes
a NIST calibration certificate.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible, non-combustible liquids & gases.
Housing Materials: 300 Series SS.
Accuracy: 0.05% full scale including linearity, hysteresis,
repeatability, and thermal effects across entire compensated
temperature range.
Pressure Limit: 2 x full scale range.
Temperature Limits: 0 to 150F (-18 to 66C).
Compensated Temperature Range: 0 to 150F (-18 to 66C).
Size: 3.00 OD x 1.70 deep.
Display: 4-1/2 digit (0.66 high).
Power Requirements: Three AAA batteries.
Battery Life: >1000 hours.
Auto Shut-off: Gage: On/off, 2 min., 5 min., 15 min., 30 min.;
Backlight: On/off, 10 sec., 30 sec., 1 min., 5 min.
Weight: 8 oz (.23 kg).
3-11/32
[85]
4-11/32
[110]
1/4 NPT CONNECTION
1-11/16
[43]
5/8
[15.5]
Model
DCG-100
DCG-101
DCG-102
DCG-103
DCG-104
DCG-105
DCG-106
DCG-107
DCG-108
DCG-109
DCG-110
Model
DCG-111
DCG-112
DCG-113
DCG-114
DCG-115
DCG-117
DCG-118
DCG-119
DCG-120
DCG-121
Range
30 Hg-0 psig
30 Hg-0-15 psig
30 Hg-0-30 psig
0-5 psig
0-10 psig
0-15 psig
0-30 psig
0-60 psig
0-100 psig
0-160 psig
0-200 psig
Range
0-300 psig
0-500 psig
0-600 psig
0-800 psig
0-1000 psig
0-2000 psig
0-2500 psig
0-3000 psig
0-5000 psig
0-7000 psig

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
/
S
w
t
c
h
e
s
/
T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,

D
g
t
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Digital Indicating Transmitter
0.25% Full Scale Accuracy, Optional Switch Outputs
Series
DSGT
The Series DSGT Digital Indicating Transmitter is a versatile multi-
function process gage that features an excellent 0.25% full scale accuracy. This
all-in-one digital gage package is designed to reduce installation costs,
instrument cost, and save space where an application requires a gage,
transmitter, and switches. The Series DSGT gage comes standard with a loop-
powered 4-20 mA transmitter output and is offered with one or two optional
SPDT switches.
The Series DSGT gage is housed in a durable fiberglass reinforced
thermoplastic case that is designed to meet NEMA 4 (IP65) requirements. The
gage features a menu-driven display for easy customization. User selectable
features include 12 engineering units of measure, password protected
calibration and disable functions, as well as an adjustable bar graph and
update/dampening rates.
SPECIFICATIONS
GAGE SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible, non combustible liquids & gases.
Wetted Materials: 17 4 stainless steel sensor, 316 SS socket.
Housing Materials: Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic case.
Accuracy: 0.25% full scale (includes linearity, hysteresis, repeatability).
Pressure Limit: 2 x full scale range.
Display: 5 digit (0.88 high).
Power Supply: 12 36 VDC (loop powered).
Output Signal: 4 20 mA.
Thermal Effects: 0.04% full scale/F.
Electrical Connections: 3 ft flying leads.
Loop Resistance: DC; 0 1090 ohms maximum.
Set Point Adjustments: Adjustable through menu selections.
Weight: 1.45 lb (.66 kg).
SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS (OPTIONAL)
Switch Type: 1 SPDT ( C1S option); 2 SPDT ( C2S option).
Repeatability: 0.25% full scale.
Electrical Rating: 1A @ 24 VDC or 0.5A @ 125 VAC.
Electrical Connections: 3 ft flying leads.
Power Requirements: 12 36 VDC (separate line power).
*For optional switch outputs change C0S suffix to C1S for 1 SPDT switch, or
C2S for 2 SPDT switches.
Model*
DSGT-101-C0S
DSGT-102-C0S
DSGT-103-C0S
DSGT-104-C0S
DSGT-105-C0S
DSGT-106-C0S
DSGT-107-C0S
DSGT-108-C0S
DSGT-109-C0S
DSGT-110-C0S
Range
30 Hg 0 15 psig
30 Hg 0 30 psig
30 Hg 0 60 psig
0 30 psig
0 60 psig
0 100 psig
0 160 psig
0 200 psig
0 300 psig
0 600 psig
Range
0 800 psig
0 1000 psig
0 1500 psig
0 2000 psig
0 3000 psig
0 5000 psig
0 8000 psig
0 10,000 psig
0 15,000 psig
0 20,000 psig
Model*
DSGT-111-C0S
DSGT-112-C0S
DSGT-113-C0S
DSGT-114-C0S
DSGT-115-C0S
DSGT-116-C0S
DSGT-117-C0S
DSGT-118-C0S
DSGT-119-C0S
DSGT-120-C0S
5-3/8 B.C.
[136.4]
5-13/16
[147.6]
3-29/32
[99]
37
1/2 OR 1/4 NPT
5/8 [15.8] ACROSS FLATS
(3) 1/4 [6.3]
3-5/16
[83.8]
5-3/16
[131.8]
1-1/2
[38.1]
1-13/32
[35.6]
2-19/32
[66]
Model DSGT-XXX-C0S, Transmitter with No Switch Outputs
Model DSGT-XXX-C1S, Transmitter with 1 SPDT Switch Output
Model DSGT-XXX-C2S, Transmitter with 2 SPDT Switch Outputs

88
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
/
S
w
t
c
h
e
s
/
T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,

D
g
t
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
3-in-1: Gage, Transmitter & Switch
Series
DPG-200
The Series DPG-200 Digital Pressure Gage has a precise 0.25% full scale accuracy.
The 4 digit digital display will reduce the potential for errors in readings by eliminating
parallax error commonly produced with analog gages. The DPG-200 is packaged in a
durable extruded aluminum case designed to meet NEMA 4X (IP66). The unit is powered
by 12-24 VDC/VAC and contains two alarm set points along with a 4-20 mA process output.
A four-button keypad allows easy access to features. These features include backlight, peak
and valley, auto zero and conversion of the pressure units.
APPLICATIONS
Process control
Compressor control
3
[76.20]
2-3/8
[60.45]
1-5/8
[40.39]
1/4 NPT
3-5/8
[91.39]
SPECIFICATIONS
DIGITAL GAGE SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquids and non combustible compatible gases.
Housing: Black polycarbonate front & back cover, anodized aluminum extruded
housing with recessed grooves, polycarbonate overlay, Buna N O rings, 316L SS
sensor construction.
Accuracy: 0.25% F.S. 1 least significant digit (includes linearity, hysteresis,
repeatability).
Pressure Limit: 2x pressure range for models 1000 psi; 5000 psi for 3000 psi
range; 7500 psi for 5000 psi range.
Display: 4 digit (.425 H x .234 W digits).
Size: 3.00 OD x 1.90 deep (not including cables).
Weight: 8.84 oz (275 g).
Switch Type: 2 SPDT form C contacts.
Electrical Rating: 0.5A @ 125 VAC resistive, 1A @ 24 VDC.
Relay Differential: 1 least significant digit.
Electrical Connections: 3 ft (.91 m) cable.
Set Point Adjustment: Via menu.
Thermal Effect: Between 70 to 158F = 0.016%/F. Between 0 to 70F = 0.026%/F.
Power Requirements: 12 24 VAC +/ 20% 50 400 HZ, 12 24 VDC +/ 20%.
Loop Resistance: 600 ohms maximum.
Power Consumption: 0.8 W max.
Electrical Connections: 3 ft (.91 m) cable.
Model
DPG-200
DPG-202
DPG-203
DPG-204
DPG-205
DPG-206
DPG-207
DPG-208
DPG-209
DPG-210
DPG-211
Range
psig
14.70 0
15.00
30.00
50.00
100.0
200.0
300.0
500.0
1000
3000
5000
kg/cm
2
1.033
1.055
2.109
3.515
7.03
14.06
21.09
35.15
70.3
210.9
351.5
bar
1.013
1.034
2.069
3.448
6.895
13.79
20.69
34.48
68.98
206.9
344.8
in Hg
29.93
30.54
61.08
101.8
203.6
407.2
610.8
1018
2036
6108
ft wc
33.94
34.61
69.21
115.4
230.7
461.4
692.1
1154
2307
6921
kPa
101.4
103.4
206.9
344.8
689.5
1379
2069
3448
6895
oz/in
2
235.2
240
480
800
1600
3200
4800
8000
in wc
407.3
415.2
830.4
1384
2768
5536
8304
mm Hg
760.7
775.7
1551
2586
5172
mbar
1013
1034
2069
3448
6895
cm wc
1034
1055
2109
3515
7031
Pressure Ranges
Compound ranges available: DPG 220 range: 30 Hg 0 15 psi.
*feet of seawater @ 4C
ft sw*
33.06
33.73
67.45
112.4
224.8
449.7
674.5
1124
2248
6745

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
g
e
s
/
S
w
t
c
h
e
s
/
T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,

D
g
t
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Electronic Pressure Controller
2 Switches, Indicating Gauge, and Transmitter in One Package
Series
EDA
1/4 MALE NPT
WITH 3/4 [19.05]
WRENCHING HEX
9/32 [7.14]
5
[127.00]
4-17/32
[115.09]
1
[25.40]
3-1/16
[77.89]
27/32
[21.43]
1-59/64
[26.16]
2X 5/16 [7.93]
3-15/32
[88.11]
1-5/8 [41.28]
[40.88]
3X 1/8 [3.18]
1/2 FEMALE NPT
CONDUIT ENTRY
Series EDA Electronic Pressure Control is an extremely versatile compact package
that can replace a separate gauge, two switches, and a transmitter in a system saving
money, installation time, and panel space. The EDA incorporates two SPDT relays that
have the on and off points fully adjustable over the range for control or alarm use. Front
face has LED indicators for switch status and a large backlight two-line display showing
process value and indication units. Programming is easy with simple menu structure, two-
line display, and external programming buttons. Weatherproof housing is ideal for a wide
variety of applications with panel mount, flush mount, or pipe mount ability. Features
include zero set, adjustable dampening, menu lock out, peak and valley indication,
removable terminal blocks, adjustable time delay, and scalable transmitter output.
FEATURES
Display Units: psi, kg/cm
2
, bar, in Hg, ft w.c., kPa, MPa, %FS, in w.c., mbar, cm
w.c., mm Hg, or oz/in
2
(Choices depend on range).
Test Mode: Simulates input over the range without pressuring to easily test
switches and transmitter output function.
Failsafe: For sensor failure, over pressure, high temperature limit, low
temperature limit, or keypad short. User chooses if relay is de energized,
energized, or no action. With transmitter option, user chooses an output of 3.6 mA
22 mA, or no action.
Alternation: Selectable alternation of set points between the relays for even wear
on duplex pump applications.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids and gases.
Housing: Glass filled plastic.
Accuracy: 1% of F.S. including linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability (indicator and
transmitter).
Stability: < 2% of F.S. per year.
Pressure Limits: Ranges up to 6,000 psi: 1.5 x range; 8,000 psi range: 10,000 psi.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 20 to 140F ( 6.6 to 60C); Process: 0 to 176F
( 18 to 80C).
Thermal Effect: 0.05% of F.S./F.
Display: 4 digit backlit LCD (digits: 0.60H x 0.33 W).
Power Requirements: 12 to 30 VDC/AC.
Power Consumption: 2.5 watts.
Electrical Connections: Removable terminal blocks with two 1/2 female NPT
conduit connections.
Enclosure Rating: Meets NEMA 4X (IP65).
Warm Up Time: <10 seconds.
Mounting Orientation: Any position.
Weight: 1.18 lbs (535 g).
Agency Approvals: CE and UL pending.
Electrical Rating: 5 A @ 120/240VAC, 1 A @ 30 VDC.
Repeatability: 1% of FS (switching only).
Set Points: Adjustable 0 100% of FS.
Switch Indication: External LED for each relay on the front panel.
Switch Reset: Manual or automatic.
Output Signal: 4 20 mA, 1 6 VDC, 1 5 VDC, 0 5 VDC, or 0 10
VDC (direct or reverse output selection).
Minimum Excitation: 14 VDC.
Zero and Span Adjustments: Menu scalable within the range.
Example
Series
Housing
Process
Connection
Electrical
Connection
Range
Transmitter
Output
Options
EDA
EDA
W
N1
E1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
T0
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
STW
NIST
23444
EDAW N1E1 01T0 SST
Electronic Pressure Controller
Weatherproof
1/4 NPT male bottom
Two 1/2 female NPT conduit
connections
0 20 psi
0 60 psi
0 100 psi
0 150 psi
0 300 psi
0 600 psi
0 1000 psi
0 1500 psi
0 3000 psi
0 6000 psi
0 8000 psi
None
4 to 20 mA
1 to 5 VDC
0 to 5 VDC
1 to 6 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
Stainless Steel Tag
NIST Certificate
Oxygen Cleaning

90
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass, 403 SS, or 316 SS.
Pressure Limit: Maximum pressure of the operating range.
Enclosure Rating: General purpose, weatherproof or explosion proof.
Repeatability: 1% of full operating range, 1.5% on DS 7300 models.
Switch Type: SPST mercury switch, SPDT mercury switch, SPDT snap switch, or
SPDT hermetically sealed snap switch. Other circuit types available.
Electrical Rating: See model charts.
Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.
Conduit Connection: General purpose: 1/2 hole for conduit hub; Weatherproof:
1/2 conduit hub; Explosion proof: 3/4 female NPT.
Process Connection: General purpose and weatherproof: 1/4 male NPT, 1/2 male
NPT on ranges 15S and 16S; Explosion proof: 1/2 male NPT and 1/4 female NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: Thumbscrew.
Weight: General purpose: 4 lb (1.8 kg); Weatherproof: 6 lb (2.7 kg); Explosion proof:
8 lb (3.5 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE, UL, CSA, FM (mercury switch units are not CE approved)
(Consult factory for FM approved models).
Series
DA/DS
Bourdon Tube Pressure Switches
Pressure Ranges to 8000 psi (551.6 bar)
1/4 N.P.T.
5/8 [15.88]
GASKETED COVER
FOR ADJUSTMENTS
GASKET
REAR MOUNTING
FLANGE
(3) .203 [5.16]
DIA. HOLES AT
120 ON 6-1/2
[165.1] DIA.
BOLT CIRCLE
OPERATING
ADJUSTMENTS
2-13/16
[71.44]
4-3/16
[106.36]
7
[177.8]
DIA.
1-5/8
[41.28
8
[203.2]
15/16 [23.81]
1/2
CONDUIT
HUB
DAW
1/4 N.P.T.
6-1/64
[152.8]
DIA.
7/8 [22.23]
ADJUSTMENT SCREWS
2-1/4
[57.15]
1-5/8
[41.28]
1/2 [12.7]
CONDUIT HOLE
5/8 [15.88]
MERCOID
CONTROL
Customers tell us that this is the best pressure switch made. The Mercoid D Series is
one of the worlds broadest lines of pressure switches.
The D Series has extremely high sensitivity and great repeatability. The DA Models are
equipped with two external adjustments, one for setting high pressure operating point, the
other for setting low pressure operating point. Deadband, the difference between high and
low setpoints, is adjustable over the full scale. The DS Models are equipped with a single
external adjustment for setting operating point only. For mercury free switches choose
between the snap action switch or hermetically sealed snap action switch. Hermetically
sealed mercury switch also available.
5
3/4 PIPE THD.
CONDUIT HOLE
1-1/4
L
U
1/2 NPT
3/4 CONDUIT THD
1-3/4 10
3-7/8
3-1/2
7-3/4
3-1/2
(2) STD. 13/32 DIA.
MOUNTING HOLES
CONTROL
ADJUSTMENTS
2-9/16
DAH
FEATURES
Visible calibrated dial
On/off indication (except hermetically sealed snap switch models)
Adjustable or fixed deadband
SPDT snap action, hermetically sealed snap action or hermetically sealed
mercury switch
External switch setpoint adjustments
Minimum deadband is obtainable at any point in the range
Pressure ranges of full vacuum to 8000 psig
UL listed, CSA approved, many models FM approved
General purpose, weatherproof or explosion proof enclosures
OPTIONS
Weatherproof Enclosure, Series DAW Add W to model number after DA or DS
and change 1 to 3.
Example: DAW 33 153 7
Explosion-Proof Enclosure, Series DAH Suitable for Class I, Groups C and D;
NEMA 7; Class II, Groups E, F, G; Class III NEMA 9 and 9A, Division 1. Add H to
model number after DA or DS.
Example: DAH 31 153 7
FM Approved: For general purpose and explosion proof models see agency
approvals. Add F to model number after DA, DS, DAH or DSH.
Examples: DAF 31 153 7 or DAHF 31 153 7
Other Options (Consult Factory): DPDT switches or other switch types, fixed
deadband mercury switch units for low deadband applications, manual reset
operation, two stage operation, acetal bushed movement for applications with high
amounts of vibration and/or pulsation, fungus proofing, siphon, diaphragm seals,
mounting flange and remote connection.

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Adjustable Deadband Fixed Deadband Hermetically Sealed, Fixed Deadband
SPDT: 10A @ 120/240 VAC SPDT: 15A @ 120/240 AC SPDT: 5A @ 120/240 VAC, 5A res. @ 30 VDC
Bourdon Adjustable Minimum Model Fixed Model Fixed Model
Tube Operating Deadband Deadband Deadband
Material Range (psig) (psig) (psig) (psig)
0 30 Hg Vac 13.5 Hg DA-7031-153-2 3 Hg DS-7231-153-2 5 Hg DS-7331-153-2
10 Hg Vac 12 6 DA-7031-153-3 1.5 DS-7231-153-3 3 DS-7331-153-3
25 Hg Vac 50 12 DA-7031-153-27 2.5 DS-7231-153-27 3.75 DS-7331-153-27
1/8 15 6 DA-7031-153-1 1.5 DS-7231-153-1 3 DS-7331-153-1
1/8 20 6 DA-7031-153-3A 1.5 DS-7231-153-3A 3 DS-7331-153-3A
Brass 1 35 7.5 DA-7031-153-4 1.5 DS-7231-153-4 3 DS-7331-153-4
2 60 9 DA-7031-153-5 2 DS-7231-153-5 3 DS-7331-153-5
5 100 13.5 DA-7031-153-6 2.5 DS-7231-153-6 3.75 DS-7331-153-6
5 150 24 DA-7031-153-7 3 DS-7231-153-7 5.25 DS-7331-153-7
10 200 24 DA-7031-153-8 4 DS-7231-153-8 6.75 DS-7331-153-8
10 300 37.5 DA-7031-153-9 5 DS-7231-153-9 9 DS-7331-153-9
30 Hg Vac 60 18 DA-7021-153-25S 3.5 DS-7221-153-25S 5.25 DS-7321-153-25S
30 Hg Vac 75 22.5 DA-7021-153-26S 3.5 DS-7221-153-26S 5.25 DS-7321-153-26S
2 60 13.5 DA-7021-153-5S 3 DS-7221-153-5S 4.5 DS-7321-153-5S
5 100 19.5 DA-7021-153-6S 3.5 DS-7221-153-6S 5.25 DS-7321-153-6S
403 10 200 22.5 DA-7021-153-8S 4 DS-7221-153-8S 7.125 DS-7321-153-8S
Stainless 10 300 28.5 DA-7021-153-9S 6 DS-7221-153-9S 10.5 DS-7321-153-9S
Steel 40 350 30 DA-7021-153-9AS 6 DS-7221-153-9AS 10.5 DS-7321-153-9AS
25 600 67.5 DA-7021-153-10S 10 DS-7221-153-10S 18 DS-7321-153-10S
50 1000 142.5 DA-7021-153-11S 20 DS-7221-153-11S 33 DS-7321-153-11S
100 1500 195 DA-7021-153-12S 30 DS-7221-153-12S 52.5 DS-7321-153-12S
300 2500 390 DA-7021-153-13S 60 DS-7221-153-13S 90 DS-7321-153-13S
500 5000 1350 DA-7021-153-15S 200 DS-7221-153-15S 300 DS-7321-153-15S
800 8000 2250 DA-7021-153-16S 500 DS-7221-153-16S
30 Hg Vac 75 15 DA-7041-153-26E 3.5 DS-7241-153-26E 5.25 DS-7341-153-26E
5 75 12 DA-7041-153-23E 4 DS-7241-153-23E 6 DS-7341-153-23E
316 10 100 15 DA-7041-153-6E 3.5 DS-7241-153-6E 5.25 DS-7341-153-6E
Stainless 10 150 16.5 DA-7041-153-24E 4 DS-7241-153-24E 6.75 DS-7341-153-24E
Steel 10 300 42 DA-7041-153-9E 8 DS-7241-153-9E 12 DS-7341-153-9E
30 400 78 DA-7041-153-21E 10 DS-7241-153-21E 18 DS-7341-153-21E
75 800 180 DA-7041-153-22E 25 DS-7241-153-22E 37.5 DS-7341-153-22E
100 1000 285 DA-7041-153-11E 35 DS-7241-153-11E 52.5 DS-7341-153-11E
200 2500 600 DA-7041-153-13E 75 DS-7241-153-13E 112.5 DS-7341-153-13E
D Series Pressure Switch with Mercury Switch and General Purpose Enclosure
D Series Pressure Switch with Snap Action Switch and General Purpose Enclosure
Bourdon Adjustable Minimum SPDT SPST SPST Minimum SPST Open SPST Close
Tube Operating Deadband 4A @ 120 V Open on Close on Deadband on Increase on Increase
Material Range (psig) 2A @ 240 V Increase Increase (psig) 5A @ 120 VAC 5A @ 120 VAC
(psig) AC/DC 10A @ 120 V 10A @ 120 V 2A @ 240 VDC 2A @ 240 VDC
5A @ 240 V 5A @ 240 V 2.5A @ 120 VDC 2.5A @ 120 VDC
AC/DC AC/DC 1A @ 240 VDC 1A@ 240 VDC
0 30 Hg Vac 2 Hg DA-31-153-2 DA-31-2-2 DA-31-3-2 1 Hg DA-531-2-2 DA-531-3-2
10 Hg Vac 12 1 DA-31-153-3 DA-31-2-3 DA-31-3-3 0.5 DA-531-2-3 DA-531-3-3
25 Hg Vac 50 3.5 DA-31-153-27 DA-31-2-27 DA-31-3-27 2 DA-531-2-27 DA-531-3-27
1/8 15 1 DA-31-153-1 DA-31-2-1 DA-31-3-1 0.5 DA-531-2-1 DA-531-3-1
1/8 20 1 DA-31-153-3A DA-31-2-3A DA-31-3-3A 0.5 DA-531-2-3A DA-531-3-3A
Brass 1 35 1.75 DA-31-153-4 DA-31-2-4 DA-31-3-4 0.75 DA-531-2-4 DA-531-3-4
2 60 3 DA-31-153-5 DA-31-2-5 DA-31-3-5 1 DA-531-2-5 DA-531-3-5
5 100 3.75 DA-31-153-6 DA-31-2-6 DA-31-3-6 2 DA-531-2-6 DA-531-3-6
5 150 6 DA-31-153-7 DA-31-2-7 DA-31-3-7 3 DA-531-2-7 DA-531-3-7
10 200 8 DA-31-153-8 DA-31-2-8 DA-31-3-8 3.5 DA-531-2-8 DA-531-3-8
10 300 12 DA-31-153-9 DA-31-2-9 DA-31-3-9 6 DA-531-2-9 DA-531-3-9
30 Hg Vac 60 6 DA-21-153-25S DA-21-2-25S DA-21-3-25S 3 DA-521-2-25S DA-521-3-25S
30 Hg Vac 75 8 DA-21-153-26S DA-21-2-26S DA-21-3-26S 4 DA-521-2-26S DA-521-3-26S
2 60 4 DA-21-153-5S DA-21-2-5S DA-21-3-5S 2.5 DA-521-2-5S DA-521-3-5S
5 100 6 DA-21-153-6S DA-21-2-6S DA-21-3-6S 3 DA-521-2-6S DA-521-3-6S
403 10 300 14 DA-21-153-9S DA-21-2-9S DA-21-3-9S 7 DA-521-2-9S DA-521-3-9S
Stainless 40 350 14 DA-21-153-9AS DA-21-2-9AS DA-21-3-9AS 7 DA-521-2-9AS DA-521-3-9AS
Steel 25 600 25 DA-21-153-10S DA-21-2-10S DA-21-3-10S 15 DA-521-2-10S DA-521-3-10S
30 Hg Vac 75 7 DA-41-153-26E DA-41-2-26E DA-41-3-26E 3.5 DA-541-2-26E DA-541-3-26E
5 75 3 DA-41-153-23E DA-41-2-23E DA-41-3-23E 2 DA-541-2-23E DA-541-3-23E
10 100 7 DA-41-153-6E DA-41-2-6E DA-41-3-6E 3.5 DA-541-2-6E DA-541-3-6E
316 10 150 6 DA-41-153-24E DA-41-2-24E DA-41-3-24E 3 DA-541-2-24E DA-541-3-24E
Stainless 10 300 18 DA-41-153-9E DA-41-2-9E DA-41-3-9E 5 DA-541-2-9E DA-541-3-9E
Steel 30 400 30 DA-41-153-21E DA-41-2-21E DA-41-3-21E 15 DA-541-2-21E DA-541-3-21E
Adjustable Deadband

92
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
SA1100
Diaphragm Operated Pressure Switches
Visible Setpoint, Adjustable Deadband, Hermetically Sealed Snap Switch,
Weatherproof and Explosion-proof
Weatherproof and Explosion-Proof in One Economical Enclosure
Extremely rugged construction assures excellent reliability in chemical, petroleum and
industrial plants. New design also provides burst pressure protection to 3000 psi (206 bar).
The rolling diaphragm design maintains a constant effective area to minimize friction. This
results in a minimum deadband as low as 5% of full scale. Since many applications require
higher deadbands, the SA1100 includes a separate adjustment of this when necessary. A
pump being used to control liquid level in a tank would be a typical situation where this
feature would be important. Both setpoint and deadband adjustments are protected, yet
clearly visible behind a clear polycarbonate window and are fully isolated from the electrical
components for additional safety. A 7/16 open-end wrench is the only tool required to
change settings. Terminal blocks are provided for switch wiring connections and both
internal and external ground screws are included. Standard housing is weatherproof to
NEMA standards 1 through 4X and 13; explosion-proof to NEMA 7, Class I, Groups B, C &
D; NEMA 9, Class II, Groups E, F & G. Optional construction adds drain to meet IP54.
APPLICATIONS
Chemical, petroleum, food and drug processing industries
Used indoor, outdoor or in explosion proof area
Range
Number
Adjustable
Operating
Range
Approximate Minimum
Deadband
Approximate
Maximum
Deadband
11
12
13
psig
10 150
20 250
30 500
bar
0.7 10
1.4 17.2
2.0 34
psig
4.0
5.0
12
bar
0.28
0.35
0.83
psig
7.5
12.5
45
bar
0.52
0.86
3.1
psig
75
150
300
bar
5.2
10
21
Low High
Switch Deadband Chart
Series SA1100
*Options that do not have ATEX.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: See pressure chamber and diaphragm material in model chart.
Temperature Limits: 30 to 180F ( 35 to 82C) standard; ATEX compliant at
Ambient Temperature: 4 to 167F ( 20 to 75C); Process Temperature: 4 to 167F
( 20 to 75C).
Pressure Limit: 1200 psig (82.6 bar).
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof and Explosion proof. Listed with UL and CSA for
Class I, Groups B, C and D; Class II Groups E, F, and G. ATEX Compliant
0344 II 2 G EEx d IIC T6 Process Temperature 75C. Weatherproof UL Rated
Type 4. Meets NEMA 4X.
Switch Type: SPDT or DPDT snap switch.
Conduit Connection: 3/4 female NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Within 20 of vertical.
Set Point Adjustment: Internal 7/16 hex nuts.
Deadband: See deadband chart.
Agency Approvals: UL, CSA, CE and ATEX.
Example
Construction
Adjustable
Pressure
Ranges
Circuit
(Switch)
Options
Pressure
Chamber
Material
(Wetted)
Diaphragm
Material
(Wetted)
Circuit
(Switch)
Type
Process
Connection
Options
SA11 13 E A 4
SA11
11
12
13
E
HS
HG
A
S
K 2
4
5
K
L
2
AT
DRAIN
SA1113E-A4-K2 Pressure Control; weatherproof,

NEMA 4X,explosion proof NEMA 7&9; aluminum
pressure chamber, Buna-N diaphragm and O-ring; 1/2
inch female NPT process connection; adjustable
deadband, automatic reset; SPDT snap acting switch;
adjustable range 30-500 psig.
Series Designator, weatherproof NEMA 4X, explosion-
proof NEMA 7, 9.
Adjustable range 10-150 psig (0.7-10 bar)
Adjustable range 20-250 psig (1.4-17.2 bar)
Adjustable range 30-500 psig (2.0-34.0 bar)
Snap action switch rated 15A @ 125/250/480 VAC, 1/8
HP @ 125 VAC, 1/4 HP @ 250 VAC, 1/2 A @ 125 VDC
resistive, 1/4 A @ 250 VDC resistive.
Hermetically sealed snap action switch rated 5A @
125/250 VAC, 5A resistive @ 30 VDC*
Hermetically sealed snap action switch with gold
contacts rated 1A @ 125 VAC, 1A resistive @ 30 VDC*
Aluminum
316 SS
Buna-N diaphragm and O-ring
Fluorocarbon diaphragm and O-ring
SPDT
DPDT (not available with HS or HG switch options)
1/2 inch female NPT
ATEX certified construction
Housing with drain - allows condensate to be drained
from inside enclosure (meets NEMA 3R instead of 4X)
Model
SA1111E-A4-K2
SA1111E-S5-K2

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
*Deadband 10 15% larger when using 316SS diaphragm.
Change A1 to B2 for 316 SS diaphragm and pressure chamber e.g. 1003W B2 D.
Values shown are for mid scale.
*Deadband 10 15% larger when using 316SS diaphragm.
Change A1 to B2 for 316 SS diaphragm and pressure chamber e.g. 1003E B2 J.
Values shown are for mid scale.
Same rugged construction as used in Series 1000W plus explosion-proof design are
combined in this new unit. UL listed for Class I, Groups A, B, C & D; Class II, Groups E, F &
G. Bellville spring movement permits mounting of control in any position and helps prevent
contact chatter. High over-pressure protection and vibration resistance are also featured.
SPECIFICATIONS
Enclosure Rating: Explosion proof, UL listed for Class I, Groups A, B, C and D;
Class II, Groups E, F, and G.
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch. DPDT or hermetically sealed optional.
Electrical Rating: 15A @ 125/250/480 VAC res., 0.5A @ 125 VDC, 0.25A @ 250
VDC.
Electrical Connections: 18 AWG, 18 (460 mm) long.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 male NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: Internal thumbwheel.
Extremely rugged construction provides excellent reliability in chemical, petroleum and
industrial plants. Bellville spring movement permits mounting of control in any position and
helps prevent contact chatter. New design also provides high over-pressure protection.
Weatherproof housing is standard.
SPECIFICATIONS
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof, meets NEMA 4X.
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch. DPDT optional.
Electrical Rating: 15A @ 125/250 VAC resistive.
Electrical Connections: Screw type.
Set Point Adjustment: Internal thumbwheel.
Aluminum Press.
Chamber
Polyimide Diaph.
Model
1003W-A1-D
1004W-A1-D
1005W-A1-D
1006W-A1-D
1007W-A1-D
1008W-A1-D
1009W-A1-D
316 SS
Pressure Chamber
FEP Diaphragm
Model
1003W-B3-D
1004W-B3-D
1005W-B3-D
1006W-B3-D
1007W-B3-D
1008W-B3-D
1009W-B3-D
Adjustable
Operating
Range
psig (bar)
5 40 (.48 2.8)
10 70 (.69 4.8)
25 200 (1.7 13.8)
50 350 (3.5 24.1)
75 550 (5.2 37.9)
100 900 (6.9 62.1)
200 1400 (13.8 96.5)
Approx.*
Deadband
(Fixed) psig
(bar)
2 (.14)
4 (.28)
8 (.55)
15 (1.0)
30 (2.1)
50 (3.5)
75 (5.2)
Series
1000W
Series
1000E
3-3/32
[78.56]
1-3/4
[44.45]
5/8
[15.88]
1-11/32
[34.13]
1/4 FEMALE
NPT PRESSURE
CONNECTION
2-9/32
[57.94]
7-17/64
[184.53]
3-3/4
[95.25
2-1/4
[57.15]
3/4 FEMALE
NPT CONDUIT
CONNECTION
17/64 [6.75]
MOUNTING
HOLES TYP 4
PLACES
5
[127.00]
4-1/2
[114.30]
2-21/32
[67.47]
18 [457.20]
LONG 18 AWG
LEAD WIRES
1/2 MALE
NPT CONDUIT
CONNECTION
17/64 [6.75]
MOUNTING
HOLES
TYP 2 PLACES
ADJUSTING
WHEEL
1-15/32
[37.29]
2-15/16
[74.63]
1/4 FEMALE
NPT PRESS.
CONNECTION
2-23/64
[59.93]
4-5/32
[105.56]
3-1/4
[82.55]
1-7/8
[47.63]
3-3/4
[95.25]
4-3/8
[111.13]
Explosion-Proof Diaphragm Operated
Pressure Switches
Visible Setpoint, Fixed Deadband, Pressure Ranges to 1400 psi
Weatherproof Diaphragm Operated
Pressure Switches
Visible Setpoint, Fixed Deadband, Pressure Ranges to 1400 psi
Aluminum Press.
Chamber
Polyimide Diaph.
Model
1003E-A1-J
1004E-A1-J
1005E-A1-J
1006E-A1-J
1007E-A1-J
1008E-A1-J
1009E-A1-J
316 SS
Pressure Chamber
FEP Diaphragm
Model
1003E-B3-J
1004E-B3-J
1005E-B3-J
1006E-B3-J
1007E-B3-J
1008E-B3-J
1009E-B3-J
Adjustable
Operating
Range
psig (bar)
5 40 (.48 2.8)
10 70 (.69 4.8)
25 200 (1.7 13.8)
50 350 (3.5 24.1)
75 550 (5.2 37.9)
100 900 (6.9 62.1)
200 1400 (13.8 96.5)
Approx.*
Deadband
(Fixed) psig
(bar)
2.5 (.17)
5 (.34)
10 (.69)
18 (1.2)
36 (2.5)
60 (4.1)
90 (6.2)

94
S
i
n
g
l
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
i
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Explosion-Proof, UL & CSA Listed for Class I, Groups B, C & D and Class II,
Groups E, F & G. The H2 is designed for sequencing two different actions as pressure of
a liquid or gas increases or decreases. The design consists of two concentric pistons
operated by a single diaphragm with one pressure chamber. Each piston actuates a separate
switch independent of the other. The switches may be adjusted to operate together, at
opposite ends of the range or at two intermediate set points. The threaded top is removed
to field adjust or service switches without disturbing electrical or pressure connections. The
Duotect
switch is explosion-proof and weatherproof. It can be mounted in any position and

is not affected by vibration.
5
[127.00]
3-3/8
[85.73]
2-5/8
[66.68]
2-15/16
[74.63]
3/4 NPT ELECTRICAL
CONNECTION
1/4 NPT PRESSURE CONNECTION
Dual-Action Explosion-Proof Pressure Switches

Explosion-proof and Weatherproof Housing
Series
H2
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Aluminum chamber
with polyester film diaphragm and
Buna-N O-ring standard. 316 SS
chamber optional. FEP diaphragm
optional. Fluoroelastomer or EPDM
O-ring optional.
CSA approved: -20 to 90C (-4 to
184F).
Enclosure Rating: UL listed
explosion-proof, Class I, Groups B, C,
and D. Class II Groups E, F, and G.
Meets NEMA 4X (IP65). CSA optional.
Class I, Groups B, C & D. Class II,
Groups E, F, & G -20C Tamb 75C
T6 [optional -20C Tamb 40C T5]
Type 4.
Switch Type: Two SPDT snap
switches.
Electrical Rating: 5A @ 125/250 VAC.
5A res., 3A ind. @ 30 VDC. Gold
contacts or 10A switch optional.
Electrical Connections: 18 AWG, 18
(460 mm) long.
NPT.
NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: Internal nut.
Weight: 2 lb (.9 kg).
Deadband: Approximately 10% of
range.
Agency Approvals: CE, UL, CSA.
Model
H2A-1
H2A-2
H2A-3
Low Range psig (bar) g p g ( )
3-40 (0.21-2.76)
25-250 (1.72-17.2)
100-1000 (6.89-68.9)
Low Cost OEM Pressure Switch
Field Installable Weatherproof Enclosure
Series
A1F
Low cost and precision made, the A1F Pressure Switch is ideal for OEM industrial
applications. Wetted materials of 316 SS and fluorocarbon ensure great chemical
compatibility with a wide range of process media. The open case style is perfect for panel
mounting applications like pump skids. Field installable weatherproof enclosure is available
in polycarbonate offering a low cost weatherproof switch. Superior 15A contact allows
direct control of motors or pumps without the use of external relays, a true cost savings.
Features include a convenient indicating scale for quick and easy field adjustment.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Pressure Chamber: 316 SS;
Diaphragm: Fluorocarbon.
Temperature Limit: -40 to 175F (-40 to 80C).
Pressure Limits: 750 psig (51 bar).
Enclosure Rating: No rating for open construction. Installed properly within an
optional A-447 enclosure meets NEMA 4X standards.
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch.
Electrical Rating: 15A @ 120/240/480 VAC; 1/8 HP @ 125 VAC; 1/4 HP @ 250
VAC.
Electrical Connection: Screw terminals.
Process Connection: 1/4 female NPT and 1/2 male NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Within 20 of vertical.
Set Point Adjustment: Knurled screw cap with indicating scale.
Deadband: Fixed. See deadband chart.
Weight: 10.5 oz (297 g).
Model
A1F-O-SS-1-1
A1F-O-SS-1-2
A1F-O-SS-1-3
A1F-O-SS-1-4
Range
2 to 15
(0.14 to 1.03)
4 to 75
(0.28 to 5.17)
8 to 225
(0.55 to 15.5)
16 to 450
(1.1 to 31.0)
Deadband at
Min Range
2
(0.14)
4
(0.27)
8
(0.55)
15
(1.0)
1-53/64
[46.43]
SET POINT
ADJUSTMENT
CAP
SPDT SNAP
SWITCH
INSULATIVE BARRIER
(OPEN ON TOP)
(3) ELECTRICAL
TERMINALS
GROUND
SCREW
1-7/16
[36.51]
1/2 NPT
(MALE CONNECTION)
1/4 NPT
(FEMALE CONNECTION)
3-3/4
[95.25]
A1F A1F with A-447
5-7/16
[138.11]
1-29/32
[48.41]
4-11/16
[119.06]
1-1/2
[38.10]
4
[101.6]
1-17/32
[38.89] 3-1/16
[77.79]
psig (bar)
High Range psig (bar) g g p g ( )
5-75 (0.35-5.17)
30-400 (2.07-27.6)
150-1500 (10.3-103)
ACCESSORY
A-447, Weatherproof enclosure; Easy field installation; Meets NEMA 4X,
polycarbonate cover with 1/2 NPT female conduit entry.
Deadband at
Max Range
3
(0.21)
15
(1.0)
25
(1.7)
50
(3.5)
OPTIONS
Weatherproof enclosure. Optional A-447 enclosure factory installed. To order
change O to PC.
Example: A1F-PC-SS-1-1
094.P.N:Layout 2 2/16/11 10:42 AM Page 1
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
A1PS/
A1VS
2.375
[60.33]
3.625
[92.08]
1.625
[41.28]
1/4 NPT
Series A1PS/A1VS Economical Pressure Switches are designed with a 15 Amp
SPDT switch for direct control of pumps and motors. Available in pressure, vacuum, or
compound ranges, the switches offer a field adjustable set point. Easily adjust the switch
by aligning the top of the self locking adjusting nut with the desired setting indicated on
the adjacent range scale. Connection is 1/4 male NPT for quick installation and can be
mounted in any position.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids or gases.
Wetted Materials: Diaphragm: Buna N;
Body with fitting: Zinc alloy, chromate
finish.
( 35 to 85C).
Pressure Limits: 600 psig.
Vacuum Limits: 29.9 Hg (vacuum and
compound models only).
Switch Type: SPDT snap action.
Electrical Ratings: 15A (resistive) @
250 VAC, 1/2 HP @ 250 VAC.
Electrical Connections: Three screw
terminals.
Setpoint: Field adjustable via knurled
screw cap.
Cycling: Not to exceed 1 Hz.
Sensor Element: Diaphragm.
Weight: 7.4 oz (209 g).
Agency Approvals: UL.
Economical Pressure Switch
Vacuum and Compound Ranges Available, Adjustable Set Point
Series
APS/
AVS
Adjustable Pressure Switch
Vacuum and Pressure Ranges, 5A Switch, Compact Size
.562 MAX
[14.27]
2.590 MAX
[65.79]
1.090
[27.69]
1/8 NPT
.750
[19.05]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Capsule: 17 7 PH
SS; Fitting: 303 SS.
to 107C), a set point change of up to
2% when used below 10F ( 23C) or
above 125F (52C).
Pressure/Vacuum Limits: 150% of
range.
Electrical Ratings: 5A @ 250 VAC, 3A
@ 28 VDC.
Electrical Connections: 3 wire, 20
AWG insulated with PVC, 12 (30 cm)
length.
Setpoint: Field adjustable.
Cycling: Not to exceed 20 CPM.
Sensor Element: Capsule.
Miniature Series APS/AVS Adjustable Switches offer reliable switching for
pressure/vacuum alarm, shutdown or control. The units are readily adjustable throughout
their range using the locking adjusting ring and indicating pointer. The body is constructed
of stainless steel for durability in harsh environments. Switches include 12 (30 cm) wire
leads sealed with epoxy for additional protection.
Model
APS-150
APS-250
APS-350
APS-450
APS-550
Increasing
0.8 28.5(.06 2.0)
2.0 48.0(.14 3.3)
3.0 96.5(.21 6.7)
7.5 242(.52 16.7)
15.0 485(1.0 33.4)
Decreasing
1.6 30.0(.11 2.1)
3.0 50.0(.21 3.5)
4.5 100(.31 6.9)
9.7 250(.67 17.2)
20.0 500(1.4 34.5)
Repeatability
psi (bar)
0.6(.04)
1.0(0.7)
2.0(.14)
5.0(.35)
10.0(.69)
Deadband
psi (bar)
0.8 1.3(.06 .09)
1 1.7(.07 .12)
1.6 4(.11 .28)
2.5 9(.17 .62)
5 22(.35 1.5)
Model
AVS-150
AVS-250
AVS-350
Increasing
1.6 27.1(4.1 68.6)
4.0 24.8(10.2 63.0)
6.0 21.5(15.2 54.6)
Decreasing
2.7 28.2(6.9 71.6)
5.1 28.2(13.0 71.6)
8.4 28.2(21.3 71.6)
Repeatability
Hg (cm Hg)
1.2(3.1)
2.0(5.1)
4.0(10.2)
Deadband
Hg (cm Hg)
1.3 2.7(3.3 6.9)
1.5 3.2(3.8 8.1)
2.6 7.3(6.6 18.5)
Set Point Range psi (bar)
Set Point RangeHg (cm Hg) Vac
Model
A1PS-14
A1PS-24
A1PS-34
A1PS-44
Set Point Range
(kPa)
1.5 3.5 psi (10 24)
3 40 psi (21 276)
30 150 psi (207 1034)
100 500 psi (689 3445)
Repeatability (kPa)
0.15 psi (1)
1.0 psi (7)
5.0 psi (34)
20.0 psi (138)
Deadband
(approx.) (kPa)
0.5 1.7 psi (3 11)
2 5 psi (14 34)
5 30 psi (34 207)
30 120 psi (207 827)
Model
A1VS-14
A1VS-24
Set Point
Range (kPa)
6 28 Hg ( 20 to 94)
28 Hg to 3.5 psig ( 94 to 24)
Repeatability (kPa)
1.2 Hg ( 4)
0.15 psi (1)
Deadband
(approx.) (kPa)
3 14 Hg ( 10 to 47)
0.5 1.7 psi (3 11)

96
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series A6 Durable Pressure Switches have been specifically designed to
stand up to extended duty applications. These switches are constructed with a
polyimide film diaphragm and are compatible with a variety of fluids. For ease
of installation, the switches come with a 1/4 male NPT process connection and
can be mounted in any orientation. The Series A6 pressure switches are
compact and have great setpoint integrity, and feature simple, easy set-point
field adjustment.
Durable Pressure Switch
Designed for Extended Duty, Simple and Reliable
Series
A6
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air, motor oils, transmission oils, jet fuels, and similar
hydrocarbon media. (Consult factory for water use).
Wetted Materials: Base: Brass or 304 SS; Diaphragm: Polyimide film.
Pressure Limits:
Operating Pressure: 150 psi (10.3 bar) for 0.5 24 psi set point
ranges, 250 psi (17.2 bar) for 25 150 psi set point ranges;
Proof Pressure: 500 psi (34.5 bar);
Burst Pressure: 750 psi (51.7 bar) for 0.5 24 psi set point ranges,
1250 psi (86.2 bar) for 25 150 psi set point ranges.
Enclosure Rating: General purpose or with cover: IP65 weatherproof.
Repeatability: 10% of set point.
Electrical Ratings:
Resistive: 15A @ 6VDC, 8A @ 12VDC, 4A @ 24VDC;
Inductive: 1A @ 120VAC, 0.5A @ 240VAC.
Electrical Connections: #8 32 screw terminals.
Process Connection: 1/4 NPT male.
Mounting Orientation: Switch can be installed in any position.
Set-point Adjustment: Screw.
Weight: 0.13 lb (0.06 kg).
Model
A6-151221
A6-251221
A6-351221
A6-451221
A6-551221
A6-651221
A6-751221
A6-851221
A6-153221
A6-253221
A6-353221
A6-453221
A6-553221
A6-653221
A6-753221
A6-853221
Set Point Range
psi (bar)
0.5 1 0.3 (0.03 0.07 0.02)
1.1 3 0.5 (0.08 0.21 0.03)
3.1 7 1 (0.21 0.48 0.07)
8 13 2 (0.55 0.90 0.18)
14 24 3 (0.97 1.65 0.21)
25 50 5 (1.72 3.45 0.34)
51 90 7 (3.52 6.21 0.48)
91 150 10 (6.27 10.34 0.69)
0.5 1 0.3 (0.03 0.07 0.02)
1.1 3 0.5 (0.08 0.21 0.03)
3.1 7 1 (0.21 0.48 0.07)
8 13 2 (0.55 0.90 0.18)
14 24 3 (0.97 1.65 0.21)
25 50 5 (1.72 3.45 0.34)
51 90 7 (3.52 6.21 0.48)
91 150 10 (6.27 10.34 0.69)
Model
A-439
A-440
A-439
2
[50.8]
1-1/2
[38.1]
2-7/16
[62]
#8-32 SCREW TERMINALS
1.500
[38.1]
1/4 NPT
A-440
2-5/16
[58.74]
1-1/2
[38.1]
A-440 A-439
Base
Material
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
304 SS
304 SS
304 SS
304 SS
304 SS
304 SS
304 SS
304 SS
Description
Weatherproof IP65 Cover
Weatherproof IP65 w/ Fly wire holes

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Snap-Action Pressure Switch
High Current Capacity, High Temperature Rating
Series
A9
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Non hazardous gas, liquid or
steam.
Wetted Materials: Connection:
Copper; Diaphragm: Silicone or SS
(see model chart).
Temperature Limits: See model chart.
Pressure Limit: See model chart.
Repeatability: 5%.
Switch Type: SPDT.
Electrical Ratings: 21 A @ 125/250
VAC.
Electrical Connections: 1/4 (6.35
mm) male quick connect.
Series A9 Pressure Switches are designed for controlling pressure with higher current
capacity. These switches are used widely in steam cleaners, steam irons, and other pressure
control systems. It provides SPDT contact and Series A9 Pressure Switches utilize high-
quality miniature snap-action switches. The switch is diaphragm operated, boasting a high
temperature rating and compact size.
Model
A9-1
A9-2
A9-3
A9-4
A9-5
A9-6
Deadband psig (bar)
2.9 1.5 (0.2 0.1)
2.9 1.5 (0.2 0.1)
2.9 1.5 (0.2 0.1)
3.6 2.2 (0.25 0.1)
5.1 2.9 (0.35 0.2)
8.7 2.9 (0.6 0.2)
Temperature Limit
185F (85C)
257F (125C)
257F (125C)
257F (125C)
257F (125C)
257F (125C)
Range psig (bar)
2.9 8.7 (0.2 0.6)
7.3 17.4 (0.5 1.5)
14.5 36.3 (1.2 2.5)
21.8 58 (1.5 4.0)
29 87 (3.0 7.0)
58 130.5 (5.0 9.0)
Max Pressure psig (bar)
43.5 (3.0)
58.0 (4.0)
72.5 (5.0)
87.0 (6.0)
116.0 (8.0)
145.0 (10.0)
1-57/64
[48.02]
1-35/64
[39.29]
1-1/2
[38.10]
1-7/64
[28.18]
1/8 NPT
Designed for OEM applications, the Series A2 is economical and is equipped with high
proof pressure capabilities for demanding applications. The A2 is available with either
spade terminals or flying leads (submersible). Switches with spade terminals can be easily
adjusted in the field.
Series
A2
Subminiature Pressure Switch
Field Adjustable, Submersible Models
1/8 NPT
53/64
[21.03]
1-1/8
[28.58]
1-61/64
[49.61]
23/64
[9.13]
15/16 HEX
[23.81]
35/64
[13.89]
23/64
[9.13]
1-43/64
[42.47]
1/8 NPT
53/64
[21.03]
23/64
[9.13]
15/16 HEX
[23.81]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Polymide film and
brass.
to 121C).
Pressure Limits: 500 psi (34 bar).
Enclosure Rating: IP68 (submersible
models only).
Repeatability: 5% of highest set
point.
Switch Type: SPST, 100VA, 42V.
Electrical Connection: 1/4 (6.3 mm)
spade terminals or flying leads.
Weight: 0.14 Ib (0.06 kg).
Deadband: 1 2 psi (0.07 0.14 bar).
Model
A2-2801
A2-28032*
A2-2811
A2-28132*
Range psi (bar)
5 25 (.48 1.72)
5 25 (.48 1.72)
5 25 (.48 1.72)
5 25 (.48 1.72)
Electrical Connection
Spade Terminals
Flying Leads (Submersible)
Spade Terminals
Model
A2-3801
A2-38032*
A2-3811
A2-38132*
A2-4801
A2-48032*
A2-4811
A2-48132*
Range psi (bar)
20 60 (1.4 4.1)
20 60 (1.4 4.1)
20 60 (1.4 4.1)
20 60 (1.4 4.1)
50 150 (3.5 10.3)
50 150 (3.5 10.3)
50 150 (3.5 10.3)
50 150 (3.5 10.3)
Electrical Connection
Spade Terminals
Spade Terminals
Spade Terminals
Spade Terminals
* Submersible models are not field adjustable. Set point must be given at time of order.
Diaphragm Material
Silicone
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
NO/NC
NO
NO
NC
NC
NO/NC
NO
NO
NC
NC
NO
NO
NC
NC

98
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Compressor Pressure Switch
Adjustable Set Point and Deadband, 20 Amp Rating
Series
CX
The Series CX Compressor Pressure Switches are designed with a 20 amp normally
closed SPST switch for direct control of pumps and motors. The set point and deadband are
both easily adjustable via screw terminals inside the cover. For ease of installation, the
switches come with a 1/4 female NPT process connection or the optional 4-port connection
block on the CX-4 models. Besides making installation easier, one of the other ports can be
used to install a pressure gage. Plus, these switches can be mounted in any orientation.
These units are perfect for regulating tank pressure on small air compressors. The CX
series switches come with an unloader valve, which prevents compressors from starting
under load. They also come with an auto/off disconnect lever for manually cutting off the
load. When the lever is in the off position, there is a test button inside the housing that can
be pushed to turn on the load.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non combustible
compatible gases.
Wetted Materials: NBR (Nitrile
Butadiene) rubber diaphragm, steel
connection (CX 1), aluminum alloy
connection (CX 4).
Temperature Limits: 140F (60C).
Pressure Limits: See model chart.
Repeatability: 5 psig (0.3 bar).
Switch Type: 2 each SPST snap
action, normally closed (NC).
Electrical Ratings: 20A @ 120 VAC,
12A @ 240 VAC, 9.6A @ 240 VAC (3
phase), 8.6A @ 32 VDC, 3.1A @ 120
VDC, 1.6A @ 240 VDC. 1.5 HP @ 120
VAC, 2 HP @ 240 VAC, 3 HP @ 240
VAC (3 phase), 0.25 HP @ 32/120/240
VDC.
terminal.
Conduit Connection: 7/8 hole for
1/2 conduit hub (2 places).
NPT (CX 4: 4 places).
Mounting Orientation: Switch can be
installed in any position.
Setpoint Adjustment: Internal screws.
Weight: CX 1: 0.78 lb (0.35 kg); CX 4:
1.03 lb (0.47 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE, UL pending.
.236
[6.00]
OR
.250
[6.35]
3-35/64
[90]
3-45/64
[94]
2-17/64
[57.6]
3-3/8
[85.5]
.236
[6.00]
OR
.250
[6.35]
3-35/64
[90]
3-45/64
[94]
3-45/64
[94]
1-27/64
[36]
2-17/64
[57.5]
CX-1 CX-4
Water Pump Pressure Switch
Simple, Reliable, Adjustable Set Point and Deadband
Series
CXA
The Series CXA Water Pump Pressure Switches have been proven reliable for
controlling automatic water systems. These switches are very popular for use on water
pumping systems. The set point and deadband are both easily adjustable via screws inside
the cover. For ease of installation, the switches come with a 1/4 female NPT process
connection and can be mounted in any orientation. The series CXAs simple design makes
it a great switch for an installer at any skill level.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Silicone, steel, and
SS.
Pressure Limits: See model chart.
Repeatability: 5 psig (0.3 bar).
Switch Type: SPST snap action (see
model chart).
Electrical Ratings: 20A @ 120 VAC,
12A @ 240 VAC, 9.6A @ 240 VAC (3
phase), 8.6A @ 32 VDC, 3.1A @ 120
VDC, 1.6A @ 240 VDC.
terminal.
Conduit Connection: 7/8 hole for 1/2
conduit hub (2 places).
NPT.
installed in any position.
Setpoint Adjustment: Internal screws.
Weight: 0.75 lb (0.34 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE, UL pending.
2-17/64
[57.6]
3-3/8
[85.5]
3-45/64
[94]
2-9/16
[65]
FEATURES
Designed for electrically driven water pumps
Suitable for all types of pumps: jets, submersible, reciprocating, etc
Direct acting (NC) or reverse acting (NO) available depending on switch type and
model number
CX-1 CX-4
Approx. Adjustable
Deadband psig (bar)
20 30 (1.4 2.1)
30 40 (2.1 2.8)
35 55 (2.4 3.8)
20 30 (1.4 2.1)
30 40 (2.1 2.8)
35 55 (2.4 3.8)
Model
CX-11
CX-12
CX-13
CX-41
CX-42
CX-43
Range
psig (bar)
25 100 (1.7 6.9)
35 150 (2.4 10.3)
50 175 (3.4 12.1)
25 100 (1.7 6.9)
35 150 (2.4 10.3)
50 175 (3.4 12.1)
Number
of Ports
1
1
1
4
4
4
Approx. Adjustable
Deadband psig (bar)
15 30 (1.0 2.1)
20 35 (1.4 2.4)
30 40 (2.1 2.8)
15 30 (1.0 2.1)
20 35 (1.4 2.4)
30 40 (2.1 2.8)
Switch
Type
NC
NC
NC
NO
NO
NO
Model
CXA-S1
CXA-S2
CXA-S3
CXA-R1
CXA-R2
CXA-R3
Range
psig (bar)
15 80 (1.0 5.5)
30 100 (2.1 6.9)
35 150 (2.4 10.3)
15 80 (1.0 5.5)
30 100 (2.1 6.9)
35 150 (2.4 10.3)
Max.Pressure
psig (bar)
129 (8.9)
179 (12.3)
204 (14.1)
129 (8.9)
179 (12.3)
204 (14.1)
Max. Pressure
psig (bar)
129 (8.9)
179 (12.3)
204 (14.1)
129 (8.9)
179 (12.3)
204 (14.1)

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Nylon reinforced Buna N and steel. PTFE and 316
SS optional.
Pressure Limit: See model chart.
Enclosure Rating: General purpose. Weatherproof and explosion proof
optional.
Switch Type: SPDT mercury switch or SPDT snap switch. Other switch
types available.
Electrical Rating: Mercury switch: 4A @ 120 VAC/DC, 2A @ 240
VAC/DC; Snap switch: 15A @ 120 VAC, 8A @ 240VAC, 0.5A @ 120
VDC, 0.25A @ 240 VDC.
Conduit Connection: 7/8 (22.23 mm) hole for 1/2 (12.7 mm) conduit
hub.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical for mercury switch models, any position
for snap switch models.
Set Point Adjustment: External screw.
Weight: General purpose: 2 lbs. (0.9 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE, UL, CSA. For FM consult factory. (Mercury
switch units are not CE approved.)
Reliable and convenient, series AP pressure switch is a compact switch for
instrument air or other low pressure applications. Visible set point and external
adjustment add convenience. Used on air, noncorrosive gas or liquid service
compatible with wetted parts. Unit also available in weatherproof and explosion-
proof housing.
Diaphragm Operated Pressure Switches
Visible Setpoint Adjustment, Compact
Series
AP
2-7/8
[73.03]
4-1/8
[104.78]
7/8 [22.23]
CONDUIT
HOLE
2-13/32
[61.12]
(2) 1/4
[6.35]
MOUNTING
HOLE
1/4 NPT
4
[101.6]
3-1/8
[79.38]
ADJUSTMENT
SCREW WITH
SEALING WIRE
1-1/16 [26.99]
4-11/16 [119.06]
5-1/16 [128.59]
7/8 [22.23] KNOCK-OUT HOLE
1-13/16
[46.04]
15/16
[23.81]
1-7/16
[36.51]
*Mercury switch units are not CE approved.
Series
CS & CD
Diaphragm Pressure Switches
Visible Set Points, Fixed or Adjustable Deadband
1/2 [12.7]
CONDUIT HOLE
1-1/16
[26.99]
11/16
[17.46]
1-5/16
[33.34]
3-3/16
[80.96]
1/4 NPT
2-3/16
[55.56]
3
[76.2]
3-3/4
[95.25]
Model
CS-1
CS-3
CS-10
CS-30
CS-150
CD-10
CD-30
CD-150
Adjustable Operating Range
1 30 Hg. Vac. (25.4 762 mm Hg)
1 100" w.c. (.25 24.9 kPa)
1 10 psig (.07 .69 bar)
1 30 psig (.07 2.1 bar)
10 150 psig (.69 10.3 bar)
1 10 psig (.07 .69 bar)
1 30 psig (.07 2.1 bar)
10 150 psig (.69 10.3 bar)
Deadband Value
1.5 Hg. (38 mm Hg)
7 w.c. (1.74 kPa)
0.4 psig (0.03 bar)
1.0 psig (0.07 bar)
5 psig (0.35 bar)
Min: 1.5 psig (.1 bar),
Max: 11.5 psig (.79 bar)
Min: 2 psig (.14 bar),
Max: 12 psig (.83 bar)
Min: 14 psig (.97 bar),
Max: 24 psig (1.7 bar)
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Nylon reinforced Buna N and steel.
Pressure Limit: 30 psig (2.1 bar) for ranges 1, 3, and 10; 50 psig (3.5 bar) for
range 30; 175 psig (12.1 bar) for range 150.
Electrical Rating: 15A @ 120 VAC, 8A @ 240 VAC.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 hole for conduit hub.
Weight: .5 lb (0.23 kg).
Series CS and CD combine advanced design and precision construction in a small size.
Unit is ideal for instrument panels, small compressors and general industrial applications.
Visible set point and easy to wire SPDT snap switch reduce installation time. Operates in any
position and is vibration resistant.
Deadband
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Model
AP-153-33
AP-153-37
AP-153-39
AP-7021-153-33
AP-7021-153-37
AP-7021-153-39
Ranges
10 vac 50 wc
(2.5 12.4 kPa)
1 30 psig
(.07 2.1 bar)
10 125 psig
(.69 8.6 bar)
10 vac. 50 wc
(2.5 12.4 kPa)
1 30 psig
(.07 2.1 bar)
10 125 psig
(.69 8.6 bar)
Switch*
Type SPDT
Mercury
Mercury
Mercury
Snap
Snap
Snap
Low
5 wc
(1.2 kPa)
0.4 psig
(0.03 bar)
2 psig
(0.14 bar)
8 wc
(2.0 kPa)
0.75 psig
(0.05 bar)
3 psig
(0.21 bar)
High
6 wc
(1.49 kPa)
0.75 psig
(0.05 bar)
6 psig
(0.04 bar)
10 wc
(2.49 kPa)
1.5 psig
(0.10 bar)
7 psig
(0.48 bar)
Switch Deadband
Maximum
Pressure
15 psig
(1.03 bar)
60 psig
(4.14 bar)
160 psig
(11.0 bar)
15 psig
(1.03 bar)
60 psig
(4.14 bar)
160 psig
(11.0 bar)

100
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
A7
A7
1
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
4
5
1
1
2
1
1
2
3
00.00
Example
Series
Switch Type
Electrical
Rating
Electrical
Connection
Process
Connection
Set Point
(psi)
Model Ordering Chart
Series A7 Mini Pressure Switches have been designed for high current
applications. These switches are small and inexpensive, making them ideal for
OEM use. The Series A7 switches utilize a high-quality snap-action switch,
which is diaphragm actuated. They have a silicone diaphragm and nylon
housing. The A7 switches are compact and lightweight which adds to the ease
of installation. The set point must be factory set, but a broad operating range
makes them great for a variety of applications.
Models are built to your specification
*Setpoint is factory preset and is not field adjustable.
Minimum quantity order is 100.
Mini Pressure Switch
Designed for OEMs, High Current Capacity
Series
A7
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Non hazardous gas or liquid.
Wetted Materials: Silicone and nylon.
Repeatability: 10% of setpoint.
Mounting Orientation: Switch can be installed in any position.
Weight: 0.04 lb (0.02 kg).
Deadband: 0.6 to 0.8 in w.c. (1.5 to 2 mbar).
* Set points lower than 0.70 psi are only available with electrical rating codes 1, 2, and 3.
1-7/8
[47.4]
1-3/8
[34.8]
1-13/32
[35.56]
5/32
[4]
PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1/2
[12.7]
1
[25.4]
1-7/8
[47.4]
1-13/16
[46]
1/8-27 NPT
1-3/4
[44.2]
1-7/8
[47.4]
1/4-18 NPT
CONNECTION #1 CONNECTION #2 CONNECTION #3
A7-2211-10.00
Mini Pressure Switch
SPDT
SPST NO
SPST NC
0.1A @ 125/250 VAC (gold contacts)
3A @ 125/250 VAC
5A @ 125/250 VAC
16A @ 125/250 VAC
22A @ 125/250 VAC
4.88 mm male Q.C. tabs
6.35 mm male Q.C. tabs
4 mm tube O.D. push on (side)
1/8 male NPT (bottom)
1/4 male NPT and 4 mm tube O.D.
push on (bottom)
In the range of 0.71 to 15.0
In the range of 0.25 to 0.70*

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Compact, lightweight, and adjustable, the Series MVS Miniature Vacuum Switch is
specially designed for OEM applications. This low cost switch has a minimum life
expectancy of 10 million cycles and has an extremely fast response time. Typical
applications for the MVS are HVAC, home appliance, dairy systems, medical, office
equipment, and pump control.
Series
MVS
Miniature Vacuum Switch
SPDT N/O or N/C Switch, Adjustable Set Point, Ideal for OEMs
1/4 [6.35] OR
1/8 NPT
VACUUM PORT
1 SQ.
[25.40]
23/32
[18.26
TYP.]
1-13/16
[46.04]
3/16 [4.76]
TYP. 3 PLACES
1/64 [0.40]
MOUNTING
HOLE
TYP. 4 PLACES
23/64
[9.13] 39/64
[15.48]
1-21/32
[42.07]
NO NC
COM
*Models have 1/8 male NPT process connections
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air or compatible fluids.
Wetted Materials:
Housing: polycarbonate;
Diaphragm: polyurethane.
66C).
Pressure Limits: Up to maximum
range.
Repeatability: 20%.
Switch Type: SPDT normally open or
normally closed.
Electrical Rating: Range 3 to 8 in
w.c.: 3A, 125/250 VAC; Range 9 to 80
in w.c.: 10A, 125/250 VAC; Range 81
to 330 in w.c.: 15A, 125/250 VAC.
Contacts: Silver with brass terminals.
Electrical Connections: Terminals
0.187 x 0.20 spade for use with quick
disconnects.
Process Connections: Models MVS 1
to MVS 3: Smooth port 0.25 diameter;
Models MVS 4 to MVS 6: 1/8 male
NPT.
Mounting: Use #2 screws through
eyelets.
Weight: Less than 0.671 oz (19 g.)
Agency Approval: UL
The Series MHS Miniature High Sensitivity Pressure Switch offers a wide range
of field adjustable pressure set point options. The compact switch can be used with air or
other compatible fluids. Ideal application is for turning pumps and compressors on and off
when levels change. The Series MHS models offer a variety of electrical ratings to suit
application needs. The switch is easy to install and easy to adjust, with a long mechanical
life of over 10 million cycles.
Series
MHS
Miniature High Sensitivity Pressure Switch
SPDT N/O or N/C Switch, Adjustable Set Points from 3 in. H20 to 60 PSI
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air or compatible fluids.
Wetted Materials:
Housing: polycarbonate;
Diaphragm: polyurethane.
66C).
Pressure Limits: Up to maximum
range.
Repeatability: 20%.
Switch Type: SPDT normally open or
normally closed.
Electrical Rating: MHS 1: 3A; MHS 2:
10A; MHS 3, 4, 5: 15A, 125/250 VAC.
Contacts: Silver with brass terminals.
Electrical Connections: Terminals
0.187 x 0.20 spade for use with quick
disconnects.
Process Connections: All models
1/8 NPT port.
Mounting: Use #2 screws through
eyelets.
Weight: 0.71 oz (20 g).
Agency Approval: UL
1 SQ
[25.4]
23/32
[18.2]
9/16
[14.3]
29/64
[11.5]
COM
1-23/32
[43.6]
NONC
1/8 NPT
1-7/8
[47.6]
3/16
[4.7]
4 X 7/64
[2.5]
7/16 HEX
[11.1]
Model
MHS-1
MHS-2
MHS-3
MHS-4
MHS-5
Minimum
3 (7.5)
10 (25)
28 (69)
111 (276)
416 (1034)
Maximum
10 (25)
28 (69)
111 (276)
416 (1034)
1664 (4137)
Set Point in H2O (mbar)
Model
MVS-1
MVS-2
MVS-3
MVS-4*
MVS-5*
MVS-6*
Minimum
3 (8)
9 (21)
81 (200)
3 (8)
9 (21)
81 (200)
Maximum
8 (20)
80 (199)
330 (822)
8 (20)
80 (199)
330 (822)
Set Point in H2O (mbar)

102
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Industrial Pressure Transmitter
Complete Offering of Ranges, Connections and Outputs
Series
626
&
628
The Series 626 Pressure Transmitters possess a highly precise 0.25% piezo-resistive
sensor contained in a compact, rugged, NEMA 4X stainless steel general purpose housing
or cast aluminum conduit housing.
The Series 628 Pressure Transmitters are ideal for OEMs with 1% full scale accuracy
sensors. The transmitter is also available in the general purpose stainless steel housing
and the cast aluminum conduit housing.
The corrosion resistant 316L stainless steel wetted parts allow the Series 626 and 628
transmitters to measure the pressure in a multitude of processes from hydraulic oils to
chemicals. The Series 626 and 628 are available in ranges of vacuum, compound to 5000
psi with a variety of optional outputs, process connections and electrical terminations to
allow you to select the right transmitter for your application.
APPLICATIONS
Compressors
Pumping systems
Irrigation equipment
Hydraulic
Industrial process monitoring
FEATURES
Metal conduit housing option
Robust 316 SS oil filled sensor
Compact design
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 626: 0.25% full scale; 626 absolute ranges: 0.5% full scale; 628: 1%
full scale. (Includes linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability.)
Thermal Effect: 626: 0.02% FS/F. 628: 0.04% FS/F (includes zero and span).
Pressure Limits: See table.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA. Optional 0 5,1 5 or 0 10.
Loop Resistance: 0 1300 ohms maximum for current. For voltage outputs,
minimum load resistance: 2000 ohms.
Current Consumption: 38 mA (maximum).
Electrical Connections: Conduit Housing ( CH): terminal block, 1/2 female NPT
conduit; General Purpose Housing ( GH): cable DIN EN 175801 803 C.
Process Connection: 1/4 male or female NPT and BSPT.
General Purpose Housing (-GH)
Conduit Housing (-CH)
626 with LED Display (CH housing only)
*Please see our website for dimensional drawings.
General Purpose Housing (-GH) with DIN C

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Ordering Chart
626
628
00
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
26
67
71
75
81
CH
GH
P1
P2
P3
P5
P9
E1
E3
E4
E5
E6
S1
S2
S4
S5
Accuracy
Range
Housing
Process
Connection
Electrical
Connection
Signal Output
Options AT
NIST
LED
1 Available with GH Housing only
2 Available with CH Housing only
3 LED option is not NEMA 4X
Range
Number
00
30
06
07
08
09
10
Pressure
Range
0 15 psia
15 0 psia
0 5 psig
0 15 psig
0 30 psig
0 50 psig
0 100 psig
Over
Pressure (psig)
45
45
50
150
300
300
500
Maximum
Pressure (psig)
30
30
10
30
60
100
200
Pressure Limits
Range
Number
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
26
Pressure
Range (psig)
0 150
0 200
0 300
0 500
0 1000
0 1500
0 3000
0 5000
0 8000
Over
Pressure (psig)
750
1000
1500
2500
5000
5000
7500
10000
12000
Maximum
Pressure (psig)
300
400
600
1000
2000
3000
6000
7500
10000
0.25% Full Scale Accuracy
0 15 psia
0 5 psi
0 15 psi
0 30 psi
0 50 psi
0 100 psi
0 150 psi
0 200 psi
0 300 psi
0 500 psi
0 1000 psi
0 1500 psi
0 3000 psi
0 5000 psi
0 8000 psi
0 0.5 bar
0 2.5 bar
0 10 bar
0 40 bar
Conduit Housing
1/4 male NPT
1/4 female NPT
1/4 male BSPT
1/4 female SAE with Refrigerant Valve Depressor 1
1/2 male NPT1
Cable Gland with 3 of Prewired Cable
DIN EN 175801 803 L 1
1/2 female NPT Conduit 2
M 12 4 Pin Connector
4 20 mA
1 5 Volt
0 5 Volt
0 10 Volt
Aluminum Tag
NIST Traceable Certificate
Bright Red LED display23

104
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
628CR
OEM Pressure Transmitter, NEMA 4X
SPECIFICATIONS
liquids.
Wetted Materials: Ceramic,
fluoroelastomer, 316L SS.
Accuracy: 1.0% FS (includes
linearity, hysteresis and repeatability).
Stability: 0.25% FS/year.
( 18 to 85C).
0 to 175F ( 18 to 79C).
Pressure Limit:
Max pressure: 2x range;
Burst pressure: 3x range.
Response Time: 3 ms typ.
Loop Resistance: 0 1200 Ohm max.
Electrical Connections: Cable or DIN
connector.
Process Connection: 1/4 male NPT
or 1/4 male BSPT.
Mounting Orientation: Mount in any
position.
Weight: 4.0 oz.
The Series 628CR Pressure Transmitter, contains a low cost ceramic sensor housed
in a compact, rugged, NEMA 4X stainless steel body. Ideal for the budget conscious OEMs
that require high levels of performance, reliability and stability at an unbeatable price. The
628CR housing is small and lightweight for optimum compatibility with OEM systems. The
design allows for a variety of pressure ranges from -14.7 to 500 psi and optional electrical
connections allowing you to select the right transmitter for your application.
APPLICATIONS
Pump monitoring
Compressors
Irrigation equipment
HVAC
Pneumatic systems
7/8 [22.23]
HEX
2-27/64 [61.52]
3-13/64 [81.36]
55/64 [21.83]
Ordering Chart
628CR
08
09
10
12
13
14
71
90
91
75
92
93
81
GH
P1
P3
E1
E3
E4
S1
Accuracy
Range
Housing
Process
Connection
Electrical
Connection
Signal Output
Options AT
NIST
0 30 psi
0 50 psi
0 100 psi
0 200 psi
0 300 psi
0 500 psi
0 2.5 Bar
0 4 Bar
0 6 Bar
0 10 Bar
0 16 Bar
0 25 Bar
0 40 Bar
1/4 male NPT
1/4 male BSPT
DIN EN 175801 803 C
4 20 mA
Aluminum Tag
NIST Traceable Certificate

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
673
0.25% Full Span Accuracy, 4-20 mA Signal, Ranges to 1000 psi
The low cost Series 673 Pressure Transmitter is a fixed range
transmitter designed for harsh environments and suitable for high shock and
vibration applications. Constructed of stainless steel, the Series 673 provides a
4 to 20 mA output signal with 0.25% accuracy. Use the Series 673 in industrial
OEM equipment, hydraulic systems, HVAC equipment, industrial engines and
compressor control.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquid, gas, or vapor.
Wetted Materials: 17 4 PH SS.
Accuracy: 0.25% FS (RSS), (includes non linearity, hysteresis and
non repeatability).
Pressure Limits: 2 x maximum range.
Thermal Errors: Zero: 3.6% FS/100F(100C); Span: 2.7%
FS/100F(100C).
Output: 4 20 mA, 2 wire.
Zero & Span Adjustment: Fixed.
Loop Resistance: 0 to 800.
Stability: 0.5% FS/year.
Shock: 200 g.
Vibration: 20 g.
Electrical Connections: 2 ft (61 cm) multiconductor cable.
Conduit Connection: 1/4 18 (22.3 mm) knockout.
Enclosure: Stainless steel and Valox.
2-23/64
[59.93]
2
[50.8]
1-5/8
[41.28]
CABLE ANCHOR
3/4 HEX
[19.05 HEX]
1/4 NPT
3-5/8
[92.08]
1-19/32
[40.48]
1-13/32
[35.72]
1-11/16
[42.86]
1-5/8
[41.28]
CONDUIT VERSION
3/4 HEX
[19.05 HEX]
1/4 NPT
1/4-18 (22.3 MM)
CONDUIT KNOCKOUT
Conduit Version
* The model numbers followed by a C represent the conduit version, which
is hand tightened to ensure proper electrical seal.
Model*
673-1
673-2
673-3
673-4
673-5
673-6
673-7
673-8
673-9
673-10
673-13
673-14
Model*
673-1C
673-2C
673-3C
673-4C
673-5C
673-6C
673-7C
673-8C
673-9C
673-10C
673-13C
673-14C
Range
0 1 psi
0 2 psi
0 5 psi
0 10 psi
0 25 psi
50 psi
100 psi
200 psi
500 psi
1000 psi
14.7 30 psig
14.7 100 psig
Range
0 1 psi
0 2 psi
0 5 psi
0 10 psi
0 25 psi
50 psi
100 psi
200 psi
500 psi
1000 psi
14.7 30 psig
14.7 100 psig

106
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
672
Low Pressure Transducer
Single Pressure Connection, Ranges down to 10 w.c.
The Series 672 Low Pressure Transducer is a perfect solution to any
application where a very accurate low pressure transducer is necessary. Using
variable capacitance technology, the Series 672 is designed to measure
pressures as low as 10 w.c. up to 400 w.c., very low ranges for a single
connection pressure transducer. The 672 also features a 0.25% F.S. accuracy.
Use the Series 672 in liquid level, flood warning, waste water, clean room, and
open channel flow applications.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 318 duplex SS, ceramic, fluoroelastomer (FKM).
Housing Material: 318 stainless steel.
Accuracy: 0.25% F.S. (RSS). Includes non linearity, hysteresis, and
non repeatability.
Stability: 0.25% F.S./1 year.
Pressure Limits: 29 psi (2 bar) for up to 85 w.c. (0.2 bar) ranges; 58
psi (4 bar) for 85 to 140 w.c. (0.2 to 0.35 bar); 73 psi (5 bar) for 141 to
400 w.c. (0.35 to 1 bar).
Thermal Effects:
Zero: 1.0%F.S./100F (2.0%F.S./100C);
Span: 1.0%F.S./100F (2.0%F.S./100C).
Power Requirements:
4 20 mA: 9 35 VDC;
0 5 VDC: 7.5 35 VDC.
Output Signal: 4 20 mA (2 wire) or 0 5 VDC (3 wire).
Zero & Span Adjustment: 10% F.S. each (by potentiometer).
Max Loop Resistance: 1.325 k.
Electrical Connections: Large DIN 43650 connector with mating plug.
Process Connection: 1/4 18 NPT male.
Weight: 11.6 oz (330 g).
Model
672-1-A
672-2-A
672-3-A
672-4-A
672-5-A
672-6-A
672-7-A
672-8-A
672-9-A
672-1-V
672-2-V
672-3-V
672-4-V
672-5-V
672-6-V
672-7-V
672-8-V
672-9-V
Output
4 20 mA, 2 wire
4 20 mA, 2 wire
4 20 mA, 2 wire
4 20 mA, 2 wire
4 20 mA, 2 wire
4 20 mA, 2 wire
4 20 mA, 2 wire
4 20 mA, 2 wire
4 20 mA, 2 wire
0 5 VDC, 3 wire
0 5 VDC, 3 wire
0 5 VDC, 3 wire
0 5 VDC, 3 wire
0 5 VDC, 3 wire
0 5 VDC, 3 wire
0 5 VDC, 3 wire
0 5 VDC, 3 wire
0 5 VDC, 3 wire
Operating Range
0 10 w.c.
0 15 w.c.
0 25 w.c.
0 50 w.c.
0 100 w.c.
0 150 w.c.
0 200 w.c.
0 300 w.c.
0 400 w.c.
0 10 w.c.
0 15 w.c.
0 25 w.c.
0 50 w.c.
0 100 w.c.
0 150 w.c.
0 200 w.c.
0 300 w.c.
0 400 w.c.
3-3/4 [95.48]
1-1/2
[38.10]
1/4 MALE NPT CONNECTION

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Flush Diaphragm Transmitter
Non-liquid Filled, 0.5% F.S.O. Accuracy, SS Wetted Parts
Series
FDT
The Series FDT Flush Diaphragm Transmitter is designed for highly
cyclical conditions. Flush sensor feature prevents any potential inaccuracies due
to build-up or blockage which is a typical problem found in most non-flush
transmitter sensors. Units have a non-oil filled sensor element that provides
resistance to temperature fluctuations. Manufactured from a solid piece of steel,
the sensing diaphragm can withstand the most abrasive/cyclical applications.
Series FDT transmitters perform well in high cyclical environments with the
presence of water-hammering or spiking.
Flush feature greatly reduces chance of leakage. Tough materials allow the unit
to withstand harsh process conditions. Advanced manufacturing techniques,
extreme environmental burn-in, and thorough residual stress relieving
procedures ensure unit will maintain its high performance standard over time.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids and gases, adhesives, slurries, materials
that can harden, or where a pressure cavity is not desired.
Wetted Materials: 316 & 15 5 SST.
Accuracy: 0.5% FSO (includes non linearity, hysteresis, and
repeatability).
Stability: 0.25% FSO per year.
Pressure Limit: 150% FS; Burst: 200% FS.
Thermal Effect: 1.5% FSO over compensated range.
Output Signal: FDT A: 4 20 mADC; FDT V: 0 5 VDC.
Response Time: <1mS.
Loop Resistance: FDT A: 0 1.5 ohms; FDT V: 100 ohms.
Electrical Connections: 4 pin.
Process Connection: 7/16 20 UNF male flush diaphragm. Optional
1/4 male NPT.
7/16-20 UNF
1.00
FLUSH
DIAPHRAGM
0.525
0.400
BENDIX 4 PIN
CONNECTOR
DTIH-8-4PN
1 HEX
VITON O-RING
2.250
3.25
0-5 VDC
7/16-20 UNF
FLUSH
DIAPHRAGM
VITON O-RING
2.50
0.400
1.00
1 HEX
0.525
BENDIX 4 PIN
CONNECTOR
DTIH-8-4PN
4 - 20 MA
Series
Output
Range
Option
FDT
A
V
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
NPT
C08
FDT-V FDT-A
Series FDT Diaphragm Transmitter
4 20 mA
0 5 VDC
100 psi
150 psi
200 psi
300 psi
400 psi
500 psi
600 psi
700 psi
800 psi
900 psi
1,000 psi
2,000 psi
3,000 psi
4,000 psi
5,000 psi
6,000 psi
7,000 psi
8,000 psi
9,000 psi
10,000 psi
1/4 male NPT
0.25% FS accuracy
ACCESSORY
A-168, Mating connector for 4 pin M 12

108
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
682
0.13% FS Accuracy, External Adjustments, 4-20 mA Output
The Series 682 Industrial Pressure Transmitter is designed to withstand
environmental effects such as shock, vibration, temperature, and EMI/RFI. The electronics
and capacitive sensor are packaged in a welded stainless steel housing and meets NEMA
4 (IP65) protection ratings. The transmitter features external zero and span adjustments
and reverse polarity protection. The Series 682 delivers high performance in tough
applications such as off road equipment, hydraulic systems, compressor control, industrial
engines, or industrial refrigeration.
1-31/32
[49.73]
2
[50.8]
3/4
[19.05]
2
[50.8]
1/4 NPT
*Units calibrated in bar also available. Consult factory.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Parts: 17 4 PH SS.
Accuracy: .13% FS (includes non linearity, hysteresis and non repeatability).
Temperature Limits: 40 to 260F ( 40 to 125C) 10 to 90% RH, non condensing.
Pressure Limit: See table.
Compensated Temp. Range: 4 to 176F ( 20 to 80C).
Thermal Effect: Zero shift: 1.0% FS/100F span shift: 1.5% FS/100F.
Output: 4 20 mA, 2 wire.
Zero and Span Adjustment: 0.5 mA, non interactive.
Electrical Connections: 2 ft (51 cm) multiconductor cable.
Shock: 200 g operating.
Vibration: 20 g 50 2000 Hz.
Model*
682-0
682-1
682-2
682-3
682-4
682-5
682-6
682-7
682-8
Range
0 to 25 psi
0 to 50 psi
0 to 100 psi
0 to 250 psi
0 to 500 psi
0 to 1000 psi
0 to 3000 psi
0 to 5000 psi
0 to 10000 psi
Series 634ES Transmitters sense a single pressure for air, compatible gas or liquid and
provide 4-20 mA output signal. Positive pressure can be measured within an accuracy of
0.5% of span. The Series 634ES uses an isolated piezoresistive pressure sensor to produce
a resistance change across a wheatstone bridge. Convenient 2-wire operation simplifies
installation. Zero and span adjustments are fully protected inside a rugged die cast
aluminum housing with durable gray polyurethane finish. Enclosure is designed to meet
NEMA 4X requirements.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible, gases & liquids.
Wetted Materials: Types 316, 316L SS.
Accuracy: 0.5% F.S.
( 17.8 to 60C).
20 to 120F ( 6.67 to 48.9C).
Pressure Limit: 1.5x maximum
pressure range.
(0.045% F.S./C).
Power Requirements: 10 to 35 VDC
(2 wire).
Zero & Span Adjustments: Protected
potentiometers located in auxiliary
housing.
Loop Resistance: 1250 ohms DC max.
Current Consumption: 38 mA DC max.
Electrical Connections: Terminal
block.
Process Connection: 1/4 (6.35 mm)
female NPT x 1/2 (12.7 mm) male NPT.
NEMA 4X (IP66).
Mounting Orientation: Not position
sensitive.
Weight: 1 lb 10.6 oz (754 g).
Adjustable Range Pressure Transmitter
0.5% Full Span Accuracy, Ranges to 5000 psi
Series
634ES
2-1/2 [63.50]
TYP
1-11/16
[42.86]
5-5/16
[134.94]
1/4NPT
1/2NPT
2-7/8 [73.03]
1/16 [1.59]
25/32 [19.84]
3-3/8 [85.73]
3/4 NPT
1-9/16
[39.69]
(3) #10-32 x 1/4 [6.35] DP HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED ON A
2-1/2 [63.50] B.C.
Model
634ES-0
634ES-1
634ES-2
634ES-3
634ES-4
634ES-5
634ES-6
634ES-7
634ES-8
634ES-9
Range
in psi (bar)
10 (0.69)
30 (2.07)
50 (3.45)
100 (6.9)
200 (13.8)
300 (20.7)
500 (34.5)
1000 (69)
2000 (138)
4000 (276)
Min. Range
in psi (bar)
10 (0.69)
20 (1.38)
40 (2.76)
60 (4.14)
100 (6.9)
250 (17.2)
350 (24.1)
600 (41.4)
1250 (86)
2500 (172)
Max. Range
in psi (bar)
20 (1.38)
40 (2.76)
60 (4.14)
120 (8.3)
250 (17.2)
350 (24.1)
600 (41.4)
1250 (86)
2500 (172)
6000 (414)
Overpressure
100 psi
150 psi
300 psi
500 psi
1000 psi
2000 psi
4500 psi
7500 psi
12500 psi

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Series
681
Sanitary Pressure Transmitter
No Liquid Fill Diaphragm, Sanitary Clamp Fitting
The Series 681 Sanitary Pressure Transmitter is designed to meet sanitary
standards for applications in food, dairy, beverage and pharmaceutical processing, liquid
level control, and sanitary pipelines. The unit is fully sealed to withstand high pressure
washdown in Clean-in-Place (CIP) and Sterilize-in-Place (SIP) installations. The Series 681
is designed with a unique, no liquid fill diaphragm and a sanitary clamp pressure fitting
for easy installation with negligible clamping effect. A conduit fitting, shielded cable with
vent tube and sealed screws for zero and span adjustment combine to make the Series 681
completely watertight.
1.743
[44]
2.272
[58]
2.516
[64]
1/2 NPT
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids and
gases.
Wetted Parts: 316L SS.
Accuracy: .20% FS (includes non
linearity, hysteresis and non
repeatability).
Temperature Limits:
40 to 260F ( 40 to 125C) 10 to 90%
RH, non condensing.
Pressure Limits: See table.
20 to 180F ( 7 to 80C).
Thermal Effect: Zero and span shift:
2.0% FS/100F.
Output Signal: 4 20 mA, 2 wire.
Zero and Span Adjustment:
0.5 mA, non interactive.
Electrical Connections: 1/2 conduit
fitting and strain relief with 15 ft (4.5 m)
cable.
Process Connection: 2 or 1 1/2
sanitary clamp fitting male NPT.
Clamping Effect: Zero and span shift:
0.15% FS for ranges up to 30 psi;
0.25% FS for ranges >30 psi.
Model
681-02
681-12
681-22
681-32
681-42
681-52
681-62
681-72
681-101
Range
0 to 1 psi
0 to 2 psi
0 to 5 psi
0 to 10 psi
0 to 15 psi
0 to 30 psi
0 to 60 psi
0 to 100 psi
0 to 300 psi
Overpressure
50 psi
100 psi
150 psi
150 psi
150 psi
150 psi
180 psi
200 psi
1000 psi
Sanitary Clamp
Connection
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1 1/2
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquid, gas or vapor.
Body: 316 SS.
Accuracy: 0.25% of calibrated span.
Temperature Limits: Process
interface 40 to 212F ( 40 to 100C).
Pressure Limits: 300% full scale.
20 to 180F ( 25 to 80C).
Thermal Effect: (Includes zero and
span) 1% of upper range limit per
50F (30 to 130F); 1.6% of upper
range limit per 50F (10 to 180F).
with reverse polarity protection.
Output Signal: 4 20 mA DC, max. 30
mA DC (2 wire).
Zero and Span Adjustments: 10%
each.
Response Time: Time constant, 20
ms.
Loop Resistance: 600 ohms @ 24
VDC; max. ohms = (supply voltage
12) x 50.
Electrical Connection: 1/2 female
NPT.
Process Connection: 1 1/2 sanitary
clamp.
Weight: 1.67 Ib (752 g).
Low cost, durable sanitary pressure transmitter is designed for use in food, dairy,
beverage and pharmaceutical industries. This unit features superior 0.25% accuracy and
up to 5:1 turndown. Calibration is quick and easy with field accessible zero and span
adjustments. All stainless steel construction resists the corrosive effects of caustic washes
used in most food processing cleaning procedures. 1-1/2" sanitary clamp process connection
is suitable for Clean-in-Place (CIP) applications, eliminating the need for expensive bypass
piping, valving or removal requirements for steam cleaning.
Series
637S
Sanitary Pressure Transmitter
Meets NACE Standards, Accuracy 0.25%
Stock Range,
psi (bar)
0 15 (0 1)
0 30 (0 2)
0 100 (0 7)
0 300 (0 20)
Model
637S-0
637S-1
637S-2
637S-3
Min. Range
psi (bar)
0 6 (0 0.4)
0 15 (0 1)
0 20 (0 1.4)
0 60 (0 4)

110
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
The Series IS626 Intrinsically Safe Pressure Transmitter converts
pressure into a standard 4-20 mA output signal. The Series IS626 can be used
to accurately measure compatible gases and liquids compatible with its 316/316L
stainless steel wetted parts. Series IS626 full scale accuracy is 0.25%. Designed
for industrial environments with a NEMA 4X (IP66) housing, this transmitter
resists most effects of shock and vibration. Models are available with a 3 cable
or M-12 4 pin connection.
The IS626 is UL listed for use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. The
protection method is by Intrinsic Safety, ia. It was investigated by UL under
UL Standard 913 Sixth Edition and CSA Standard No. 157-92.
APPLICATIONS
Monitoring pressure in hazardous environments
Series
IS626
Intrinsically Safe Pressure Transmitter
For Use In Hazardous Locations
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Type 316, 316L SS.
Accuracy: 0.25% full scale; Absolute range: 0.5% full scale (includes
linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability).
Thermal Effect: 0.02% FS/F (includes zero and span).
Pressure Limits: See Pressure Range Table.
Loop Resistance: 0 900 ohms maximum.
Current Consumption: 38 mA (maximum).
Electrical Connections: 3 ft cable or 4 pin M 12 connector.
Process Connection: 1/4 male or female NPT and BSPT.
Weight: 8.9 oz (252 g).
Agency Approvals: CE, UL and cUL Intrinsically Safe to UL Standard
913.
For use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations:
Class I Div. 1 Groups A,B,C,D
Class II Div. 1 Groups E,F,G
Class III Div. 1
Temperature Code: T4 @ 80C ambient
Install in accordance with control drawing 01 700797 00.
WARNING To prevent ignition of
flammable or combustible atmospheres,
disconnect power before servicing.
Use with approved safety barriers using
entity evaluation.
1/4 NPT or
1/4 BSPT
1-1/16 [26.99] HEX
5-3/16 [131.75]
6-1/4 [158.75] MAX
1 [25.40]
1/4 NPT OR
1/4 BSPT
1-1/16 [26.99] HEX
5-1/16 [128.58]
5-21/32 [143.67]
1 [25.40]
1 [25.40] 1-1/16 [26.99] HEX
5-1/16 [128.58]
5-21/32 [143.67]
1/4 NPT OR
1/4 BSPT
FEMALE
1-1/16 [26.00] HEX
5-3/16 [131.76]
5-1/4 [158.75]
1/4 NPT OR
1/4 BSPT
FEMALE
1 [25.40]
Model
IS626-00-GH-P1-E1-S1
IS626-07-GH-P1-E1-S1
IS626-08-GH-P1-E1-S1
IS626-09-GH-P1-E1-S1
IS626-10-GH-P1-E1-S1
IS626-11-GH-P1-E1-S1
IS626-12-GH-P1-E1-S1
IS626-13-GH-P1-E1-S1
IS626-14-GH-P1-E1-S1
IS626-15-GH-P1-E1-S1
IS626-16-GH-P1-E1-S1
Range
15 psia
15 psig
30 psig
50 psig
100 psig
150 psig
200 psig
300 psig
500 psig
1000 psig
1500 psig
Maximum
Pressure
(psig)
30
30
60
100
200
300
400
600
1000
2000
3000
Male NPT/BSPT Connector with Male M-12 Connector
Female NPT/BSPT Connector with Male M-12 Connector
Male NPT/BSPT Connector with Cable Gland
Female NPT/BSPT Connector with Cable Gland
ACCESSORIES
A-295, Female four pin M 12 to cable gland connector
A-231, 16 (5 m) shielded cable with 4 pin female M 12 connection
MTL5041, intrinsically safe galvanic isolator
MTL7706, intrinsically safe zener barrier
Over
Pressure
(psig)
150
150
300
300
500
750
1000
1500
2500
5000
5000
Note: For optional M 12 4 pin electrical connection change E1 to E6.

S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Explosion-proof Pressure Transmitter
HART
Push Button Configuration, Rangeability (100:1)

Series
3200
The Mercoid
Series 3200 Smart Pressure Transmitter is a

microprocessor-based high performance transmitter, which has flexible
pressure calibration, push button configuration, and programmable using
HART
Communication. The Series 3200 is capable of being configured with

the zero and span buttons, a field calibrator is not required for configuration.
The transmitter software compensates for thermal effects, improving
performance. EEPROM stores configuration settings and stores sensor
correction coefficients in the event of shutdowns or power loss. The Series 3200
is FM approved for use in hazardous (Classified) locations. The 100:1
rangeability allows the smart transmitter to be configured to fit any application.
FEATURES
Completely configurable using zero/span buttons (No calibrator required)
Automatic ambient temperature compensation
Fail mode process function
ENGINEERING UNITS
PSI, BAR, mBAR, g/cm
2
, PA, kPA, Torr, ATM, MPA, IN H2O, IN Hg, ft H2O,
mm H2O, mm Hg, Kg/cm
2
, %
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases, steam, liquids or vapors.
Accuracy: 0.075% FS (@ 20C).
Rangeability: 100:1 turn down.
Temperature Limits:
Process: 40 to 248F ( 40 to 120C);
Ambient: Without LCD 40 to 185F ( 40 to 85C);
With LCD 22 to 176F ( 30 to 80C).
Thermal Effect: 0.125% span/32C.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA / HART

Communication.
Damping Time: 0.25 to 60 seconds.
Loop Resistance:
Operation: 0 to 1500 ohm;
HART
Communication: 250 to 500 ohm.

Electrical Connection: Two 1/2 female NPT conduit, screw terminal.
Display: Optional 5 digit LCD.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66) and explosion proof for Class I,
Div I Groups A, B, C and D.
Model
3200G-1-FM-1-1
3200G-2-FM-1-1
3200G-3-FM-1-1
3200G-4-FM-1-1
3200G-1-FM-1-1-LCD
3200G-2-FM-1-1-LCD
3200G-3-FM-1-1-LCD
3200G-4-FM-1-1-LCD
Range
psi (kPa)
14.5 to 21 ( 100 to 150)
14.5 to 217 ( 100 to 1500)
0 to 725 (0 to 5000)
0 to 3600 (0 to 25000)
14.5 to 21 ( 100 to 150)
14.5 to 217 ( 100 to 1500)
0 to 725 (0 to 5000)
0 to 3600 (0 to 25000)
Calibrated Span
(Min to Max) psi (kPa)
0.22 to 21 (1.5 to 150)
2 to 217 (15 to 1500)
7.25 to 725 (50 to 5000)
36 to 3600 (250 to 25000)
0.22 to 21 (1.5 to 150)
2 to 217 (15 to 1500)
7.25 to 725 (50 to 5000)
36 to 3600 (250 to 25000)
Max Pressure
psi (bar)
58 (4)
580 (40)
2000 (138)
10000 (690)
58 (4)
580 (40)
2000 (138)
10000 (690)
1/2 NPT
3-1/2 [89]
6-1/4
[159]
4-1/4 [108]
2-3/4
[70]
1-1/2
[38]
HART

NEW PRODUCT!
Contact factory for custom calibration.
ACCESSORIES
A-630, Stainless steel angle type bracket with SS bolts
A-631, Stainless steel flat type bracket with SS bolts
LCD Display
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

112
S
n
g
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
The Series 636 Pressure Transmitter is a low cost, fixed range, stainless steel
transmitter with 0.30% accuracy. It is designed to continuously measure pressure for
years in even the toughest environmental and media conditions. Select from 4 ranges to 0-
300 psig (0-20 bar) with choice of 4-20 mA output (model 636) or 1-5 VDC output (model
636LP). Transmitters are explosion-proof, (FM approved) and meet NACE standards for
offshore applications.
Fixed Range Pressure Transmitter
Stainless Steel, Explosion-proof, Accuracy 0.30%, 4-20 mA or 1-5 VDC Signal
Series
636
Model
Operating
Range, Bar
0 1
0 2
0 7
0 20
Operating
Range, PSI
0 15
0 30
0 100
0 300
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316 L SS.
Fill Fluid: DC 200 silicone (standard).
Stability: 0.5% of upper range limit
for six months.
Temperature Limits: Electronics
(ambient): 40 to 140F ( 40 to 60C);
Process interface: 40 to 212F ( 40 to
100C).
Pressure Limits: 300% upper range
limit.
20 to 180F ( 29 to 82C).
Thermal Effect: (includes zero and
span). Between 20 and 180F ( 29
and 82C). 2.0% per 50F (28C).
(636), 8 to 14 VDC (636LP), reverse
polarity protection.
Output Signal: 4 20 mA DC, limited to
30 mA DC (636), 1 5 VDC (636LP).
Zero & Span Adjustments:
Null: 4.0 mA 2% span (636),1 VDC
1% span (636LP);
Span: 16.0 mA 1% span (636),
4 VDC 1% span (636LP).
Loop Resistance: 900 ohms max
@ 30 V.
NPT 24 (61 cm), 22 AWG.
NPT.
Weight: 0.83 Ib (374 g).
Agency Approvals: FM, CSA.
FM and CSA approved explosion proof
for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, &
D, Class II Groups E, F, & G Class III.
Series 637 Pressure Transmitters are durable and compact with all welded 316 SS
construction and exceptional 0.25% accuracy. Four ranges are offered up to 0-300 psig (0-
20 bar). Zero and span are adjustable to 10% each; range turndown is a full 5:1. Integral
junction box simplifies field wiring. Output is 4-20 mA with 12-40 VDC power supply. Units
are explosion-proof, intrinsically safe with FM approval and they meet NACE standards for
offshore applications.
Adjustable Range Pressure Transmitter
Stainless Steel, Explosion-proof, Accuracy 0.25%, 4-20 mA Signal
Series
637
Model
637-0
637-1
637-2
637-3
Stock
Range, psi
0 15
0 30
0 100
0 300
Minimum
Range, psi
0 3
0 6
0 20
0 60
Stock
Range, bar
0 1
0 2
0 7
0 20
Minimum
Range, bar
0 0.2
0 0.4
0 1.4
0 4
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316 L SS.
Body: 316 SS.
Stability: 0.5% of upper range limit
for six months.
Temperature Limits: Process
interface 40 to 212F ( 40 to 100C).
Pressure Limits: 300% full scale.
Compensated Temperature: 20 to
180F ( 29 to 82C).
Thermal Effect: (Includes zero and
span) .02% upper range/F (30 to
130F) .032% upper range/F ( 20 to
180F).
with rev. polarity protection.
Output Signal: 4 20 mA DC, max. 30
mA DC (2 wire).
Zero and Span Adjustment: 10%
each.
Loop Resistance: 600 ohms @ 24
VDC; max. ohms = (supply voltage
12) x 50.
NPT.
NPT.
Response Time: Time constant of 20 ms.
Weight: 1.67 lb (752 g).
Agency Approvals: CE, explosion
proof for Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C,
D; Dust ignition proof for Class II, Div.
1, Groups E & G and suitable for Class
III, Div. 1; Hazardous Locations.
4-20 mA OUT
636-0
636-1
636-2
636-3
1-5 VDC OUT
636-0-LP
636-1-LP
636-2-LP
636-3-LP

AIR QUALITY
pages 114 115
Flow Sensors
pages 120 127
Pitot Tubes
pages 128 129
Fume Hood Monitors
pages 130 131
Air Velocity Transmitters
pages 132 135
Humidity Switches
page 136
Air Flow Switches
page 130
Humidity/Temperature
Transmitters
pages 137 146
Carbon Monoxide
Transmitters
page 146
Carbon Dioxide
Transmitters
page 147
Switches
page 136
Occupancy Sensors
page 148
Damper Actuators
pages 149 150
HVAC MEASUREMENT GUIDE
pages 116 119

114
T
y
p
c
a

A
p
p
c
a
t
o
n
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Air Flow
Computer
Unit
Supply
Air
Motor
Control
Variable
Speed
Motor
Fan
Series 641
Air Velocity
Transmitter
In variable air volume (VAV) HVAC systems, a computerized
control provides precise adjustment of air volume to meet
changing system needs with maximum energy efficiency. The
Dwyer
Series 641 has an optional LED display for local indication

of air flow. The LED display provides a quick, visual
acknowledgement of proper system performance. The computer
reacts to any change in velocity by signaling the motor control to
increase or decrease fan speed to maintain the required velocity.
The computer, taking inputs from other ambient condition sensors,
will establish a new required air velocity and signal an appropriate
adjustment in fan speed.
Dwyer
transmitter signals precise air velocity

adjustments to computer-controlled variable-speed
fan motor.
Magnehelic
Gage
Durablock

Inclined Manometer
Air Flow
Static Pressure Tap
HI
LO
Pitot Tube
Total Pressure Sensor
HI
LO
To measure air velocity, connect a Dwyer
Magnehelic
or
Minihelic
differential pressure gage, or a Dwyer
Durablock
inclined manometer to a Pitot tube in the air stream as shown.

The alternative method at right requires only a static tap plus a
simple tube in center of duct to pick up total pressure. The
differential pressure reading on the gage or manometer is velocity
pressure, which may be converted to air velocity by calculation or
reference to conversion chart. Where air density is known, the
gage manometer can also be calibrated directly in velocity units.
If you need an alarm or control function to maintain a preset air
velocity limit, install a Photohelic
switch/gage. Dwyer
stainless
steel Pitot tubes are made in numerous lengths and configurations
to serve in the smallest to the largest duct size.
Either of two methods used to measure air velocity.
The flow of heated air is held to a constant predetermined velocity
in this carefully controlled low temperature process drying oven.
The constant temperature air supply is modulated by a set of inlet
louvers operated by a servo-driven actuator. A Dwyer
Series 641
Air Velocity Transmitter has an optional LED display for local
indication of air flow. The LED display provides a quick, visual
acknowledgement of proper system performance. The controller
compares the Series 641s signal to the setpoint in the controller
and continuously signals appropriate louver adjustments to the
actuator.
Air velocity transmitter controls drying oven air flow.
Probe
Setpoint
Controller
Actuator
Air Supply
Conveyor Drying Oven
Series 641
Air Velocity
Transmitter
Installing air velocity measurement systems can be a burdensome
process specifying Pitot tubes, static pressure tips, orifice plates,
differential pressure transmitters, etc. Dwyer offers the VTT Air
Velocity/Temperature Transmitter to consolidate these
components into one convenient instrument. The VTT can be
easily installed into the duct or air stream to accurately measure
air flow while providing local indication as well as linear analog
output for both velocity and temperature. Microprocessor-based
technology ensures accurate, repeatable results. The VTT
combines these features for simple, reliable airflow measurement
without the problems associated with complex, traditional
systems.
Eliminate the need for Pitot tubes, orifice plates,
differential pressure sensors and temperature
sensors with a Series VTT.
Air Flow
Series VTT
Air Velocity
Temperature
Transmitter

T
y
p
c
a

A
p
p
c
a
t
o
n
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
DDC CONTROLLER
DAMPER
DUCT
RHT-W
HUMIDITY/TEMPERATURE
CONTROL
OFFICE
The Dwyer
Model RHT-W wall mount humidity and temperature

transmitter can be combined with a DDC controller and a damper
to provide comfortable working conditions in an office building.
The amount of air flow entering the room is varied based on the
temperature and humidity readings of the model RHT-W. The
compact size and mounting configuration allow this transmitter to
be discretely mounted in any room.
Accurately measure and control the humidity and
temperature in office buildings.
WOOD KILN
DUCT
RHT-D
HUMIDITY/TEMPERATURE
TRANSMITTER
The Dwyer
Model RHT-D monitors the humidity and temperature

in the return air ducts in wood dehumidification rooms. Large fans
are used to circulate air across the room. As dry conditioned air
moves across the wood, it absorbs moisture from the wood. The
humidity level of the air in the return air duct is representative of
how much moisture is in the wood. When the humidity in the duct
declines, it signifies that less dry conditioned air is needed to be
supplied to the room.
Greatly reduce the time it takes to dry wood.
Series WHT
Weather-Proof
Humidity/Temperature Transmitter
Series O-45
Outside Air
Temperature Sensors
The Dwyer Series WHT Humidity Transmitter and Series O-4
Temperature Sensors are used to control the environmental
conditions on hog and poultry farms. The amount the animals eat
is linked to how comfortable the environmental conditions are.
Thus the temperature, humidity, amount of light and other ambient
conditions are tightly controlled to insure optimal growth.
Temperature and humidity measurements used to
optimize the growth of hogs and poultry.
Series CDW
Wall Mount Carbon Dioide/
Temperature Transmitter
Since the number of people in a conference room or classroom
varies throughout the day, the amount of conditioned air needed
to properly ventilate the room varies as well. As the number of
people in a room increase, the concentration of carbon dioxide in
the room will also increase. The Dwyer Series CDW and CDD
carbon dioxide transmitters measures the amount of carbon
dioxide that is emitted so that the VAV control system can supply
enough fresh air into the space to return the concentration of
carbon dioxide in the room to normal levels.
Conserving energy by conditioning occupied rooms.

116
H
V
A
C

M
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t

G
u
d
e
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Introduction
In air conditioning, heating and ventilating work, it is helpful to understand
the techniques used to determine air velocity. In this field, air velocity
(distance traveled per unit of time) is usually expressed in feet per minute
(FPM). By multiplying air velocity by the cross section area of a duct, you can
determine the air volume flowing past a point in the duct per unit of time.
Volume flow is usually measured in cubic feet per minute (CFM) .
Velocity or volume measurements can often be used with engineering
handbook or design information to reveal proper or improper performance
of an airflow system. The same principles used to determine velocity are also
valuable in working with pneumatic conveying, flue gas flow and process gas
systems. However, in these fields the common units of velocity and volume
are sometimes different from those used in air conditioning work.
To move air, fans or blowers are usually used. They work by imparting motion
and pressure to the air with either a screw propeller or paddle wheel action.
When force or pressure from the fan blades causes the air to move, the moving
air acquires a force or pressure component in its direction of motion due to its
weight and inertia. Because of this, a flag or streamer will stand out in the air
stream. This force is called velocity pressure. It is measured in inches of water
column (w.c.) or water gage (w.g.). In operating duct systems, a second pressure
is always present. It is independent of air velocity or movement. Known as static
pressure, it acts equally in all directions. In air conditioning work, this pressure
is also measured in inches w.c.
In pressure or supply systems, static pressure will be positive on the discharge
side of the fan. In exhaust systems, a negative static pressure will exist on the
inlet side of the fan. When a fan is installed midway between the inlet and
discharge of a duct system, it is normal to have a negative static pressure at the
fan inlet and positive static pressure at its discharge.
Total pressure is the combination of static and velocity pressures, and is
expressed in the same units. It is an important and useful concept to use
because it is easy to determine and, although velocity pressure is not easy to
measure directly, it can be determined easily by subtracting static pressure from
total pressure. This subtraction need not be done mathematically. It can be done
automatically with the instrument hook-up.
Sensing Static Pressure
For most industrial and scientific applications, the only air measurements
needed are those of static pressure, total pressure and temperature. With
these, air velocity and volume can be quickly calculated.
To sense static pressure, six types of devices are commonly used. These are
connected with tubing to a pressure indicating instrument. Fig. 1-A shows a
simple thru-wall static pressure tap. This is a sharp, burr-free opening through
a duct wall provided with a tubing connection of some sort on the outside. The
axis of the tap or opening must be perpendicular to the direction of flow. This
type of tap or sensor is used where air flow is relatively slow, smooth and
without turbulence. If turbulence exists, impingement, aspiration or unequal
distribution of moving air at the opening can reduce the accuracy of readings
significantly.
Air Velocity Measurement
Fig. 1-B shows the Dwyer
No. A-308 Static Pressure Fitting. Designed for

simplified installation, it is easy to install, inexpensive, and provides accurate
static pressure sensing in smooth air at velocities up to 1500 FPM.
Fig. 1-C shows a simple tube through the wall. Limitations of this type are
similar to wall type Fig. 1-A.
Fig. 1-D shows a static pressure tip which is ideal for applications such as
sensing the static pressure drop across industrial air filters and refrigerant
coils. Here the probability of air turbulence requires that the pressure
sensing openings be located away from the duct walls to minimize impingement
and aspiration and thus insure accurate readings. For a permanent installation
of this type, the Dwyer
No. A-301 or A-302 Static Pressure Tip is used. It senses

static pressure through radially-drilled holes near the tip and can be used in air
flow velocities up to 12,000 FPM.
Fig. 1-E shows a Dwyer
No. A-305 low resistance Static Pressure Tip. It is

designed for use in dust-laden air and for rapid response applications. It is
recommended where a very low actuation pressure is required for a pressure
switch or indicating gage or where response time is critical.
Measuring Total Pressure and Velocity Pressure
In sensing static pressure we make every effort to eliminate the effect of air
movement. To determine velocity pressure, it is necessary to determine these
effects fully and accurately. This is usually done with an impact tube which faces
directly into the air stream. This type of sensor is frequently called a total
pressure pick-up since it receives the effects of both static pressure and velocity
pressure.
Types of Static Pressure Devices

H
V
A
C

M
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t

G
u
d
e
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
In Figure 2, note that separate static connections (A) and total pressure
connections (B) can be connected simultaneously across a manometer (C). Since
the static pressure is applied to both sides of the manometer, its effect is
cancelled out and the manometer indicates only the velocity pressure.
To translate velocity pressure into actual velocity requires either mathematical
calculation, reference to charts or curves, or prior calibration of the manometer
to directly show velocity. In practice this type of measurement is usually made
with a Pitot tube which incorporates both static and total pressure sensors in a
single unit.
Essentially, a Pitot tube consists of an impact tube (which receives total
pressure input) fastened concentrically inside a second tube of slightly larger
diameter which receives static pressure input from radial sensing holes around
the tip. The air space between the inner and outer tubes permits transfer of
pressure from the sensing holes to the static pressure connection at the
opposite end of the Pitot tube and then, through connecting tubing, to the low
or negative pressure side of a manometer. When the total pressure tube is
connected to the high pressure side of the manometer, velocity pressure is
indicated directly. See Figure 3.
Since the Pitot tube is a primary standard device used to calibrate all other air
velocity measuring devices, it is important that great care be taken in its design
and fabrication. In modern Pitot tubes, proper nose or tip design along with
sufficient distance between nose, static pressure taps and stem will minimize
turbulence and interference. This allows use without correction or calibration
factors. All Dwyer
Pitot tubes are built to AMCA and ASHRAE standards and

have unity calibration factors to assure accuracy.
To insure accurate velocity pressure readings, the Pitot tube tip must be
pointed directly into (parallel with) the air stream. As the Pitot tube tip is
parallel with the static pressure outlet tube, the latter can be used as a pointer
to align the tip properly. When the Pitot tube is correctly aligned, the pressure
indication will be maximum.
Because accurate readings cannot be taken in a turbulent air stream, the Pitot
tube should be inserted at least 8-1/2 duct diameters downstream from elbows,
bends or other obstructions which cause turbulence. To ensure the most precise
measurements, straightening vanes should be located 5 duct diameters
upstream from the Pitot tube.
How to Take Traverse Readings
In practical situations, the velocity of the air stream is not uniform across the
cross section of a duct. Friction slows the air moving close to the walls, so the
velocity is greater in the center of the duct.
To obtain the average total velocity in ducts of 4" diameter or larger, a series of
velocity pressure readings must be taken at points of equal area. A formal
pattern of sensing points across the duct cross section is recommended. These
are known as traverse readings. Figure 4 shows recommended Pitot tube
locations for traversing round and rectangular ducts.
In round ducts, velocity pressure readings should be taken at centers of equal
concentric areas. At least 20 readings should be taken along two diameters. In
rectangular ducts, a minimum of 16 and a maximum of 64 readings are taken at
centers of equal rectangular areas. Actual velocities for each area are calculated
from individual velocity pressure readings. This allows the readings and
velocities to be inspected for errors or inconsistencies. The velocities are then
averaged.
By taking Pitot tube readings with extreme care, air velocity can be determined
within an accuracy of 2%. For maximum accuracy, the following precautions
should be observed:
1. Duct diameter should be at least 30 times dia. of Pitot tube.
2. Locate the Pitot tube in a duct section providing 8-1/2 or more
duct diameters upstream and 1-1/2 or more diameters down
stream of Pitot tube free of elbows, size changes or obstructions.
3. Provide an egg-crate type of flow straightener 5 duct diameters
upstream of Pitot tube.
4. Make a complete, accurate traverse.
In small ducts or where traverse operations are otherwise impossible, an
accuracy of 5% can frequently be achieved by placing Pitot tube in center of
duct. Determine velocity from the reading, then multiply by 0.9 for an
approximate average.

118
H
V
A
C

M
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t

G
u
d
e
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
For example, assuming a manufacturers specification for a filter, coil, etc:
Given Flow Q (ft
3
/min.) = at differential h
(inches w.c.)
To determine flow at other differentials the formula is:
Q
n
(other flows) = Q
h
Where: Q = Quantity of flow in cubic feet per minute
h= differential in inches water column
= differential (other flow conditions)
Other Devices for Measuring Air Velocity
A wide variety of devices are commercially available for measuring air
velocities. These include hot wire anemometers for low air velocities, rotating
and swinging vane anemometers and variable area flowmeters.
The Dwyer
No. 460 Air Meter is one of the most popular and economical
variable area flowmeter type anemometers. Quick and easy to use, it is a
portable instrument calibrated to provide a direct reading of air velocity.
A second scale is provided on the other side of the meter to read static pressure
in inches w.c. The 460 Air Meter is widely used to determine air velocity and
flow in ducts, and from supply and return grilles and diffusers. Two scale
ranges are provided (high and low) with calibrations in both f.p.m. and inches
w.c.
To Check Accuracy
Use only devices of certified accuracy. All anemometers and to a lesser extent
portable manometers should be checked regularly against a primary standard
such as a hook gage or high quality micromanometer. If in doubt return your
Dwyer
instrument to the factory for a complete calibration check at no charge.

Calculating air velocity from velocity pressure
Manometers for use with a Pitot tube are offered in a choice of two scale types.
Some are made specifically for air velocity measurement and are calibrated
directly in feet per minute. They are correct for standard air conditions: i.e. air
density of .075 lbs. per cubic foot which corresponds to dry air at 70F,
barometric pressure of 29.92 inches Hg. To correct the velocity reading for
other than standard air conditions, the actual air density must be known. It may
be calculated if relative humidity, temperature and barometric pressure are
known.
Most manometer scales are calibrated in inches of water. Using readings from
such an instrument, the air velocity may be calculated using the basic formula:
h
v
=4004.4 h
v
for .075 lb/ft
3
dry air
V=1096.7 d @ 70F, 29.92 in. Hg Baro.
Where: V = Velocity in feet per minute.
h
v
= Velocity pressure in inches of water.
d = Density of air in pounds per cubic foot.
To determine dry air density, use the formula:
d=1.325
T
Where: d = Air density in pounds per cubic foot.
= Barometric (or absolute) static pressure
in inches of mercury.
T = Absolute temperature (indicated temperature in
F plus 460).
With dry air at 29.9 inches mercury, air velocity can be read directly from
curves on the following page. For partially or fully saturated air a further
correction is required. To save time when converting velocity pressure into air
velocity, the Dwyer
Air Velocity Calculator may be used. A simple slide rule,

it provides for all the factors needed to calculate air velocity quickly and
accurately. It is included as an accessory with each Dwyer
Pitot tube.
To use the Dwyer
Calculator:
1. Set relative humidity on scale provided. On scale opposite known dry bulb
temperature, read correction factor.
2. Set temperature under barometric pressure scale. Read density of air over
correction factor established in 1 (above) .
3. On the other side of calculator, set air density reading just obtained on the
scale provided.
4. Under Pitot tube reading (velocity pressure, inches of water) read air
velocity, feet per minute.
Determining Volume Flow
Once the average air velocity is known, the air flow rate in cubic feet per minute
is easily computed using the formula:
Q= AV
Where: Q= Quantity of flow in cubic feet per minute.
A=Cross sectional area of duct in square feet.
V=Average velocity in feet per minute.
Determining Air Volume by Calibrated Resistance
Manufacturers of air filters, cooling and condenser coils and similar equipment
often publish data from which approximate air flow can be determined. It is
characteristic of such equipment to cause a pressure drop which varies
proportionately to the square of the flow rate. Figure 5 shows a typical filter and
a curve for air flow versus resistance. Since it is plotted on logarithmic paper, it
appears as a straight line. On this curve, a clean filter which causes a pressure
drop of .50 inches w.c. would indicate a flow of 2,000 c.f.m.
{
{
}
}
P
B
h
n
h
n
P
B

H
V
A
C

M
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t

G
u
d
e
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
AIR VELOCITY FLOW CHARTS
A
I
R

V
E
L
O
C
I
T
Y

I
N

F
E
E
T

P
E
R

M
I
N
U
T
E
A
I
R

V
E
L
O
C
I
T
Y

I
N

F
E
E
T

P
E
R

M
I
N
U
T
E
GAGE READING WITH PITOT TUBE (VELOCITY PRESSURE) IN INCHES OF WATER
GAGE READING WITH PITOT TUBE (VELOCITY PRESSURE) IN INCHES OF WATER

120
F
o
w

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Series
SSS-1000
Lightweight Averaging Flow Sensor
Ideal for Sensing Fan Flow Rates
The Series SSS-1000 Lightweight Flow Sensor is ideal for sensing
differential pressure in the inlet section of variable air volume terminal units and
fan terminal units. Units can also be used to sense differential pressure at other
locations in the main or branch duct systems.
The H port senses total pressure and the L port senses static pressure. The
difference between these signals is the differential, or velocity pressure.
For Models SSS-1002 to SSS-1005, up to four sensing points and lengths of 3-
5/32 to 9-29/32 (8.02 to 25.26 cm) to accommodate box size diameters of 4" to
16" (10.16 to 40.64 cm) are available. For Models SSS-1006 to SSS-1011, up to 10
sensing points and lengths from 12-1/2 to 23-29/32 (31.75 to 60.72 cm) to
accommodate appropriately sized box diameters.
APPLICATION
Zone control in HVAC systems
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: ABS/polycarbonate (UL94 5V).
Temperature Limits:
Operating: 40 to 120F (4 to 49C);
Storage: 40 to 140F ( 40 to 60C).
Process Connection: 1/4 (6 mm) I.D. tubing for 3/8 (10 mm) O.D.
tubing.
Mounting Orientation: Integral flange with gasket.
3-1/2
[88.90]
1-1/4
[57.15]
2-3/4
[69.85]
MOUNTING HOLES
2X 3/16 [4.76]
7/16
[11.11]
FOAM GASKET
1/4 THK
[6.35 THK]
PUSH-ON CONNECTIONS
FOR 3/8 POLY TUBING
[9.53]
A
F
L
O
W
H
L
Model
SSS-1002
SSS-1003
SSS-1004
SSS-1005
SSS-1006
SSS-1007
SSS-1008
SSS-1009
SSS-1010
SSS-1011
Length (Dimension A)
3 5/32 (8.02 cm)
5 13/32 (13.73 cm)
7 21/32 (19.55 cm)
9 29/32 (25.26 cm)
12 1/2 (31.75 cm)
14 3/4 (37.47 cm)
17 1/8 (43.50 cm)
19 13/32 (49.29 cm)
21 21/32 (55.01 cm)
23 29/32 (60.72 cm)

F
o
w

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Averaging Flow Grid
Cost Effective Air Flow Station for Ducts up to 60
Series
AFG
The Series AFG Flow Grid is an outstandingly simple yet accurate
and cost effective alternative to other duct mounted pressure sensors.
Once installed and connected to a suitable measuring instrument, the
device will provide years of trouble free monitoring of both air and gas
flow. Installing the AFG Flow Grid is quick and easy, the AFG is
supplied in kit form to allow both workshop and on-site installation into
a wide range of square and circular ducts up to approximately 60.
The AFG Flow Grid is a fundamental pressure-sensing device designed
to transmit a continuous differential pressure signal. When this output
is connected to a suitable measuring instrument (i.e. manometer,
pressure transducer, etc.) it may be used to determine air velocity and
volume flow rate.
How the AFG Flow Grid Works
The AFG Flow Grid consists of two tubes mounted diagonally across a
square or rectangular duct, or diametrically across a round duct. The
tubes are drilled with a series of equi-spaced holes.
The holes in one tube face directly upstream and sense total pressure,
while the pairs of holes in the second tube also face forward but at an
included angle of 79 degrees, sensing static pressure.
The total and (sub) static pressures are averaged along the length of
each tube and provide pressure signals at connectors outside the duct
wall. The pressure differentials across these connectors constitute the
output signal.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Monitor air or compatible gas flow.
Wetted Materials: 304 SS, PVC, polyurethane, acetyl plastics,
and neoprene rubber.
Accuracy: 5%.
Maximum Temperature: 176F (80C).
Velocity Range: 295.2 ft/min to 5904 ft/min (1.5 to 30 m/sec).
Diameter of Tubes: 5/16 (8 mm) or 5/8 (16 mm).
Max Duct Diagonal: 60.4 (153.4 cm).
Max Duct Diameter: 59.4 (150.9 cm).
Process Connections: 5/16 barbed.
Weight: AFG-1: 1 lb (454 g); AFG-2: 3 lb (1361 g).
APPLICATIONS
The AFG Flow Grids will give useful and reliable readings in a wide
variety of in duct locations often where other flow rate measuring
devices are found to be unsatisfactory.
The signal from an AFG Flow Grid can be used in a variety of
ways, for example:
To display differential pressure, velocity or volume flow using a
micro manometer, gage or transmitter.
To give a warning of over or under flow rate using a pressure
switch.
To control air supply in a system by connecting the grid to a
pressure transmitter with an electrical output which can be used
to feed into a control system.
To display differential pressure on a simple fluid manometer to
give visual indication of changes in volume flow rate in the duct.
Model
AFG-1
AFG-2
Diameter Tube A
5/16 (8 mm)
5/8 (16 mm)
SECTION A-A
SCALE 2:1
A
A
B
1/64
[.396]
A
1-1/16
[27]
2
[51]
5/32
[2.38]
1-3/16
[30.16]
1-11/16
[42.86]
Length B
27 (688 mm)
59-4/5 (1518 mm)

122
F
o
w

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Series
FAFM
Fan Inlet Air Flow Measuring Probe
Lightweight, Durable, & Easy to Install
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Aluminum with clear anodized finish.
Accuracy: 2% (Note: Field calibration may be required).
Minimum Design Flow: 400 fpm (2.03 m/sec).
Maximum Design Flow: 12,000 fpm (60.96 m/sec).
Process Connections: 1/4 NPT female.
Example: For a fan inlet that is exactly 12 in diameter and has a depth
of more than 3 1/2 the model number will be: FAFM D 1200.
Example: For a fan inlet that is 23.89 in diameter and has a depth of less
than 3 1/2 the model number will be: FAFM S 2389.
Example: For a fan inlet that is 6.24 in diameter and has a depth of less
than 3 1/2 the model number will be: FAFM S 0624.
L
A
A
A
INLET FLOW VIEW SECTION A-A
APPLICATION DIAGRAM
D
7/8
[22.23]
12
[304.80]
3-1/8
[79.38]
3-5/8
[92.20]
MOUNTING PLATES TO
BE BENT TO FIT INLET
5/16
[7.70]
1/16
[1.63]
1
[25.40]
MODEL FAFM-D
B
B
A
INLET FLOW VIEW SECTION B-B
APPLICATION DIAGRAM
D
L
4
[101.60]
3/8
[9.53]
MOUNTING PLATES TO
BE BENT TO FIT INLET
1/16
[1.98]
R3/16
[4.76]
3/4
[19.05]
MODEL FAFM-S
FAFM-D-xxxx
FAFM-S-xxxx
FAFM - -
Fan inlet diameter in inches where the
boxes represent the tens, ones, tenths,
and hundredths digits of the diameter
respectively.
i.e. __ __ . __ __ go to the
corresponding box in the sequence.
S Fan inlet depth
less than 3 1/2
D Fan inlet depth
greater than 3 1/2
L = Fan Inlet Dia.
The Model FAFM Fan Inlet Air Flow Measuring Probes use evenly
distributed total and static pressure measuring points to deliver an accurate
measurement of flow in a fan inlet. The Air Flow Measuring Probes can be
completely installed from outside of the fan making it ideal for when proper duct
locations are unavailable. With its lightweight and durable construction in
addition to its ease of installation, this product lends itself to being used in the
HVAC industry.
There are two versions of the model FAFM fan inlet air flow probes to choose
from depending on the depth of the fan inlet.
For fan inlets with depth less than 3-1/2 (8.89 cm): Please order a fan
inlet probe with an S suffix. This probe has a diameter of .375 (.95 cm). It
employs one total flow measuring tube and one static measuring tube. Each
probe is covered with an extruded aluminum anodized coat. Each measuring
tube has multiple sensing points.
For fan inlets with depth greater than 3-1/2 (8.89 cm): Please order a
fan inlet probe with a D suffix. This probe has a diameter of 3-1/2 (8.89 cm).
It employs extruded aluminum anodized coated probes with both total and static
sensors on each tube.
Please Note: A set of two fan inlet air flow measurement probes
comes with every model ordered. A set is necessary in order to ensure
an accurate reading. No more than two air flow measurement probes will
be needed to obtain an accurate reading.

F
o
w

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Series
DAFM
Duct Air Flow Measuring Probe
Lightweight, Durable, & Easy to Install
The Model DAFM Duct Air Flow Measuring Probe uses evenly distributed
total and static pressure measuring points to deliver an accurate measurement
of flow in a duct. The Air Flow Measuring Probe can be completely installed
from outside of the duct making it very easy to install. With its lightweight and
durable construction in addition to its ease of installation, this product lends
itself to being used in the HVAC industry. These air flow measuring probes may
be ordered for either round or rectangular ducts.
In order to ensure accurate measurements you must determine the number of
probes needed for your size duct. If the duct is rectangular, then consult the
chart to determine appropriate quantity of probes.
If the duct is round, it is only necessary to purchase two probes for any size of
duct and mount them perpendicular to each other.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Aluminum with clear anodized finish.
Accuracy: 2% (Note: Field calibration may be required).
Minimum Design Flow: 400 fpm (2.03 m/sec).
Maximum Design Flow: 12,000 fpm (60.96 m/sec).
Process Connections: 1/4 barb.
Straight Run Requirements: 5 diameters or longest side dimensions.
Short Duct Dimension
Number of Probes
<12
1
12 23
2
24 35
3
36 59
4
60 89
5
>89
6
For larger sizes up to 96 (243.84 cm), please contact factory.
OUTER RADIUS TO MATCH
INNER RADIUS OF DUCT
1 INCH OUTER PERIMETER
INNER RADIUS TO MATCH
OUTER RADIUS OF DUCT
4 INCH OUTER PERIMETER
1/4 BARB FITTINGS TO
BE CENTERED ON PLATE
1-7/16
[36.51]
L
1-1/16
[52.39]
6
[152.40]
1/4
[6.35]
4X 1/2
[12.39]
1/2
[12.39]
1/4
[6.35]
2X
5
[127.00]
3/8
[9.52]
1/2
[12.70]
1/8
[3.18]
1/8
[3.18]
1
[25.40]
1/8
[3.18]
1/8
[3.18]
2
[50.80]
4
[101.60]
1/2
[12.70]
1/2
[12.70]
1/4
[6.35]
4X
6
[152.40]
1-7/16
[36.51]
L
2-1/16
[52.39]
5
[127.00]
1/4
[6.35]
2X
1/2
[12.70]
3/8
[9.52]
L = Smallest Duct Diameter
or Length
Model
DAFM-000
DAFM-001
DAFM-002
DAFM-003
DAFM-004
DAFM-005
DAFM-006
DAFM-007
DAFM-008
DAFM-009
DAFM-100
DAFM-101
DAFM-102
DAFM-103
DAFM-104
DAFM-105
DAFM-106
DAFM-107
DAFM-108
DAFM-109
Duct Shape
Round
Round
Round
Round
Round
Round
Round
Round
Round
Round
Rectangular
Rectangular
Rectangular
Rectangular
Rectangular
Rectangular
Rectangular
Rectangular
Rectangular
Rectangular
Smallest Duct Diameter
Or Length (L)
6 (15.24 cm)
8 (20.32 cm)
10 (25.4 cm)
12 (30.48 cm)
14 (35.56 cm)
16 (40.64 cm)
18 (45.72 cm)
20 (50.8 cm)
22 (55.88 cm)
24 (60.96 cm)
6 (15.24 cm)
8 (20.32 cm)
10 (25.4 cm)
12 (30.48 cm)
14 (35.56 cm)
16 (40.64 cm)
18 (45.72 cm)
20 (50.8 cm)
22 (55.88 cm)
24 (60.96 cm)

124
F
o
w

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: Within 2% of actual flow when installed in accordance with
published recommendations.
K-Factor: 0.97.
Velocity Range: 100 to 10,000 fpm (0.51 51 m/s).
Wetted Material: Elements: 6063 T5 anodized aluminum; Casings: 16 ga
G90 galvanized steel.
Coatings: Imron 333 polyurethane enamel.
Temperature Limits: Galvanized casings and aluminum elements 350F
(177C) continuous operation (in air) 400F (204C) intermittent operation
(in air).
Humidity: All airflow stations 0 to 100% non condensing.
Process Connections: 1/4 compression fittings.
How To Order:
Rectangular or Oval Models
Circular Models
Note: When ordering rectangular or oval flow stations, pressure taps will
always be located on the longer of the two dimensions
Duct Mounted Airflow Measurement Station
Rectangular, Oval or Circular Configurations
Series
FLST
The Series FLST Airflow Measurement Station is easy to install simply
connect the tubing to the station fittings, then to a differential pressure
manometer, gage, transmitter or switch. Single or multiple airflow elements are
factory mounted and pre-piped in a casing designed for flanged connection to the
ductwork. Standard materials consist of a G90 galvanized casing and 6063-T5
anodized aluminum flow sensors, suitable for most HVAC applications.
The Series FLST utilizes an airflow averaging element in a head-type device,
generating a differential (velocity) pressure signal similar to the orifice, venturi,
and other head producing primary elements. Strategically located sensing ports
continually sample the total and static pressures when inserted normal to flow.
Total pressures sensed by the upstream ports are continually averaged within
the airflow element in an isolated chamber. The static sensing ports are averaged
in a second isolation chamber. Multiple elements are joined together for
connection to a differential measurement device (gage, transmitter, etc.) for flow
measurement and indication purposes.
FEATURES
Low signal to noise ratio
Multiple total and static pressure sensing ports along the length of
the element
Factory mounted and pre piped in a flanged duct section (casing)
2% accuracy throughout velocity ranges of 100 fpm and over
Standard construction includes galvanized casing and 6063 T5
anodized aluminum flow sensors
Standard airflow stations can be operated (in air) continuously in
temperatures up to 350F or intermittently in temperatures up to 400F
All airflow stations can be operated in humidity ranges of 0 to 100%
Standard airflow stations have good salt air resistance and are suitable
for most HVAC applications
Station
Size D
8 15
16 44
45 72
73 & Over
Station
Width W
Up to 48
Over 48
Flange
Thickness
.064
.064
.188
.188
Flange
Thickness
.064
.188
Flange
Size F
1
1 1/2
1 1/2
2
Flange
Size F
1 1/2
1 1/2
Casing
Length L
6
6
10
12
Casing
Length L
6
8
Circular Flange
Oval Flange
Rectangular Flange
Flange
Size F
1 1/2
2
Station Size
H or W
8 72
73 & Over
Dimensions
FLST x - Option
R Rectangular
O Oval
Height (in) x Width (in)
IM Internal
Pressure
Connections
F Flange for Oval
Mount Station
FLST C
Diameter (in)
TOTAL PRESSURE TAKEOFF
1/4 COMPRESSION FITTING
STATIC PRESSURE TAKEOFF
L
F
D
TOTAL PRESSURE
TAKEOFF
1/4
COMPRESSION
FITTING
.25 RADIUS
BEADING EDGE
[TYP]
STATIC
PRESSURE
TAKEOFF
1/4
W
H
L
L + 2.5
TOTAL PRESSURE
(T.P.) TAKEOFF
1/4 COMPRESSION
FITTING
STATIC PRESSURE
(S.P.) TAKEOFF
1/4 COMPRESSION
FITTING
5
[F]
[W]
A
I
R
F
L
O
W
[H]
Circular Style
Oval Style
Rectangular Style

F
o
w

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Series FLST Rectangular or Oval
Series FLST Circular*
NOTE: When ordering rectangular or oval flow stations, pressure taps will always be located on the longer of the two dimensions
Size
(in)
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
Size
(in)
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
40
44
48
52
56
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
102
108
114
120
8
X
10
X
12
X
14
X
16
X
18
X
20
X
22
X
24
X
26
X
28
X
32
X
36
X
40
X
44
X
48
X
54
X
60
X
66
X
72
X
78
X
84
X
90
X
96
X
102
X
108
X
114
X
120
X
Size (in)
Size (in)
OPTIONS
IM Internal Pressure Connections
F (Oval Stations Only)
8
X
10
X
X
12
X
X
X
14
X
X
X
X
16
X
X
X
X
X
18
X
X
X
X
X
X
20
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
22
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
24
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
26
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
28
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
30
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
32
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
34
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
36
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
40
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
44
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
48
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
52
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
56
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
60
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
66
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
72
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
78
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
84
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
90
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
96
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
102
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
108
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
114
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
120
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

126
F
o
w

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: Within 2% of actual flow when installed in accordance with published
recommendations.
K Factor: 0.97.
Velocity Range: 100 to 10,000 fpm (0.51 to 51 m/s).
Wetted Materials: Elements: 6063 T5 anodized aluminum; Casings: 16 ga G90
galvanized steel, 3003 aluminum air flow straightener.
Temperature Limits: Galvanized casings and aluminum elements 350F (177C)
continuous operation (in air), 400F (204C) intermittent operation (in air).
Humidity Limits: All airflow stations 0 to 100% non condensing.
Process Connections: 1/4 compression fittings.
Duct Mounted Airflow Measurement Station
Integral Flow Straightener, Ideal for Turbulent Measuring Conditions
Series
STRA
The Series STRA Airflow Measurement Station is easy to install simply connect
the tubing to the station fittings, then to a differential pressure manometer, gage,
transmitter or switch. Single or multiple airflow elements are factory mounted and pre-
piped in a casing designed for flanged connection to the ductwork. The Series STRA utilizes
an airflow averaging element in a head-type device, generating a differential (velocity)
pressure signal similar to the orifice, venturi, and other head producing primary elements.
It has been developed with a honeycomb airflow straightening section for use in duct
systems having highly turbulent conditions at the point of measurement. Strategically
located sensing ports continually sample the total and static pressures when inserted normal
to flow. Total pressures sensed by the upstream ports are continually averaged within the
airflow element in an isolated chamber. The static sensing ports are averaged in a second
isolation chamber. Multiple elements are joined together for connection to a differential
measurement device (gage, transmitter, etc.) for flow measurement and indication purposes.
FEATURES
Low signal to noise ratio
Honeycomb airflow straightening section with 1/2 opening by 3 depth
Multiple total and static pressure sensing ports along the length of the element
Factory mounted and pre piped in a flanged duct section (casing)
2% accuracy throughout velocity ranges of 100 fpm and over
Standard construction includes galvanized casing and 6063 T5 anodized
aluminum flow sensors
Standard airflow stations can be operated (in air) continuously in temperatures up
to 350F or intermittently in temperatures up to 400F
All airflow stations can be operated in humidity ranges of 0 to 100%
Standard airflow stations have good salt air resistance and are suitable for most
HVAC applications
Great for use where turbulent conditions exist
Rectangular or Oval Models:
Circular Models:
When ordering rectangular or oval flow stations, pressure taps will always be located
on the longer of the two dimensions.
STRA x - Option
R Rectangular
O Oval
Height (in) x Width (in)
IM Internal
Pressure
Connections
F Flange for Oval
Mount Station
STRA C
Diameter (in)
Station
Size D
8 15
16 44
45 72
73 & Over
Flange
Thickness
.064
.064
.188
.188
Flange
Size F
1
1-1/2
1-1/2
2
Casing
Length L
8
8
10
12
CIRCULAR FLANGE DIMENSIONS
AIR
STRAIGHTENER
[F]
[D]
A
I
R
F
L
O
W
TOTAL PRESSURE
(T.P.) TAKEOFF
1/4 COMPRESSION
FITTING
[L]
STATIC PRESSURE
(S.P.) TAKEOFF
1/4 COMPRESSION
FITTING
3.25
[H]
[W]
.25 RADIUS
BEADED EDGE (TYP)
TOTAL PRESSURE
(T.P.) TAKEOFF
1/4 COMPRESSION
FITTING
A
I
R
F
L
O
W
STATIC PRESSURE
(S.P.) TAKEOFF
1/4 COMPRESSION
FITTING
[L]
[L+2.5]
TOTAL PRESSURE
(T.P.) TAKEOFF
1/4 COMPRESSION
FITTING
STATIC PRESSURE
(S.P.) TAKEOFF
1/4 COMPRESSION
FITTING
8
[F]
[W]
A
I
R
F
L
O
W
[H]
Station
Size H or W
8 72
73 & OVER
Flange
Size F
1-1/2
2
RECTANGULAR FLANGE DIMENSIONS
Station
Width W
Up to 44
Over 44
Flange
Thickness
.064
.188
Flange
Size
1-1/2
1-1/2
*Casing
Length L
8
10
OVAL FLANGE DIMENSIONS (OPTIONAL)
*NOTE: All oval flow stations without
flange have a casing length of 8 .
SELECTABLE SIZES:
1. OVAL OR RECTANGULAR H OR W DIMENSIONS IN INCHES CAN BE THE FOLLOWING: 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 66, 72, 78, 84, 90, 96, 102, 108, 114 or 120.
2. CIRCULAR D DIMENSION IN INCHES CAN BE THE FOLLOWING: 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 54, 60, 66, 72, 78, 84, 90, 96, 102, 108, 114 or 120

F
o
w

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Series STRA Rectangular or Oval
Series STRA Circular*
Note: When ordering rectangular or oval flow stations, pressure taps will always be located on the longer of the two dimensions.
Size
(in)
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
Size
(in)
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
40
44
48
52
56
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
102
108
114
120
8
X
10
X
12
X
14
X
16
X
18
X
20
X
22
X
24
X
26
X
28
X
32
X
36
X
40
X
44
X
48
X
54
X
60
X
66
X
72
X
78
X
84
X
90
X
96
X
102
X
108
X
114
X
120
X
Size (in)
Size (in)
OPTIONS
IM Internal Pressure Connections
F (Oval Stations Only)
8
X
10
X
X
12
X
X
X
14
X
X
X
X
16
X
X
X
X
X
18
X
X
X
X
X
X
20
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
22
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
24
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
26
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
28
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
30
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
32
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
34
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
36
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
40
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
44
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
48
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
52
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
56
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
60
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
66
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
72
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
78
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
84
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
90
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
96
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
102
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
108
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
114
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
120
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

128
P
t
o
t

T
u
b
e
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
ACCESSORIES
No. A-158 Split Flange Mounting can be added to any
Dwyer
No. 160 Standard Pitot Tube. Cadmium plated

steel. Gasket is pattern for mounting holes. Secure flange
loosely to tube, adjust tube depth and tighten screws.
Gasket of 1/16 Neoprene fits tightly around tube and
against duct for leak proof seal. Nuts, washers included.
No. A-159 Mounting Gland No. A 159 Mounting Gland
Versatile adapter slips on any Series 160, 5/16 standard
Pitot tube made after Dec. 1990. Two part stainless steel
fitting slides over tube and provides permanent, secure
mounting. Where duct interior is accessible, use the
washers and jam nut supplied. For blind applications or in
thicker materials, use model A 156 flange mounting plate.
Once tube is adjusted to proper depth and angle, tighten
smaller hex bushing to lock position. Graphite bushing
inside assures leak proof seal even at higher temperatures.
TFE bushing also available. Note: For full insertion with this
fitting, order next longer Pitot tube.
A-159 Mounting Gland is used for both duct mounting
and flange mounting. To flange mount, the A-159 must
be used with the A-156 flange mounting plate.
No. A-397 Step Drill. For fast, convenient installation of
Pitot tubes in sheet metal ducts. No center punch needed;
automatic de burring. Drills six sizes from 3/16 1/2 in
1/16 increments.
Ideal for use with our precision manometers and air velocity gages, Dwyer
Pitot Tubes
are constructed from corrosion resistant stainless steel for a lifetime of service. ASME
design meets AMCA and ASHRAE specifications for maximum accuracy over a wide
variety of flow conditions. No correction factors required as ASHRAE tip design yields a
calibration factor of 1. ASHRAE design needs no calibration! Permanent, stamped insertion
depth graduations on sides of 160 series facilitate accurate positioning. Static pressure port
is parallel to sensing tube allowing quick, easy alignment of tube with air flow. Low
sensitivity to misalignment gives accurate reading even when tube is misaligned up to 15
degrees. Various standard sizes are available for use in ducts as small as 4 dia. or as large
as 36 ft dia. A universal model fits user supplied 3/4schedule 40 (standard) pipe in any
length. Several convenient mounting options are available for permanent installations.
No calibration needed
Precisely located, burr-free static pressure holes
Hemispherical tip design, best for accuracy if imperfectly aligned and nearly impossible
to damage
Long lasting 304 SS construction
Silver soldered connections for leak-proof operation
Coefficient of 1
5/16 models rated to 1500F
Extended static connection helps guide tip within recommended 15 of air flow direction
Inch graduations on sides of 160 series to quickly determine exact insertion depth
Dwyer
Air Velocity Calculator, direct reading flow charts and instructions included
Use 1/8 models in ducts as small as 4, 5/16 models in ducts 10 or larger
Optional mounting gland or split flange make permanent installation fast and simple
Series 160 is designed to meet:
ASME Fluid Meters 6th Ed.
ANSI/AMCA 210-99
ANSI/ASHRAE 51-1999
British Standard 1042
Series
160
Stainless Steel Pitot Tubes
ASME Design Meets AMCA and ASHRAE Codes
INSERTION LENGTH
1/2 [12.70] SQ
13/16
[20.62]
1/2
[12.70]
TOTAL
PRESSURE
CONNECTION 1/4
[6.35]
1/4
[6.35]
STATIC
PRESSURE
CONNECTION
2-5/8
[66.68] 5 [127.00]
2-41/64 [67.07]
1/8 [3.18]
TOTAL
PRESSURE
5/16
[7.94]
(8) .040 [1.02]
STATIC PRESSURE
HOLES EQUALLY
SPACED
160 Series
1
[25.40]
5
[127.00]
2-1/2
[63.5]
TOTAL PRESSURE
1/8 [3.18] HOLE
STATIC PRESSURE
(8) .040 [1.02]
HOLES EQUALLY SPACED
STATIC PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1/4 [6.35
3-5/8
[92.08]
1/4
[6.350]
1/2 [12.70]
TOTAL PRESSURE
CONNECTION
96, 120, 168 OR 216
3/4 [19.05]
FOR 96 OR 120
1 [25.4]
FOR 168 OR 216
160 Series
Longer Models
with Stiffener
TOTAL PRESSURE
1/8 [3.18] HOLE
STATIC PRESSURE
(8) .040 [1.02]
HOLES EQUALLY
SPACED
1/2 NPT
5/16
[7.94]
5
[127.00]
2-1/2
[53.5]
36-5/8
[930.28]
3
[76.20]
6
[152.4]
STATIC PRESSURE CONNECTION
TOTAL PRESSURE CONNECTION
3/4 SCHEDULE 40 PIPE SUPPLIED BY CUSTOMER
3/4-12 REDUCING COUPLING
SUPPLIED BY CUSTOMER
NOTE:
CUSTOMER MUST SUPPLY 1/4 TUBING IN
APPROPRIATE LENGTHS TO THE STATIC AND
TOTAL PRESSURE CONNECTIONS. TUBING AND
CONNECTIONS WILL FIT INSIDE STANDARD
SCHEDULE 40 PIPE.
Model 160-U
STATIC PRESSURE
(8) .020 [.51]
HOLES EQUALLY
SPACED
TOTAL PRESSURE
3/64 [1.19] HOLE
MODEL 166
1 [25.4]
MODEL 167
1/2 [12.7]
MODEL 166
2 [50.8]
MODEL 167
1 [25.4]
1/8
[3.18]
6-1/2 OR 12-1/2
1/4
[6.35]
1/8 [3/18]
1/4 [6.35]
STATIC PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1/2
[12.70]
1/2
[12.70]
2-1/2
[63.50]
1/8
[3.18]
TOTAL PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1-1/2
[38.10]
1/2
[12.70]
166/167 Series
Standard Model 160 Pitot Tube
Model
160-8
160-12
160-18
160-24
160-36
160-48
160-60
Model
160-U
Standard 5/16 Diameter
Universal Model for 3/4 Pipe
Model
160-96
160-120
160-168
160-216
Longer Length w/ Stiffener
Pocket Size 1/8 Diameter
Model
166-6
166-12
167-6
167-12
ACCESSORIES & OPTIONS
A-156, Flange Mounting Plate 1/2 female NPT
A-158, Split Flange
A-159, Mounting Gland
A-397, Step Drill
1/8 male NPT compression fitting, mounting option for Series 166/167.
Add CF suffix (166 6 CF).
*Universal model for permanent installation and connection to metal tubing. Make any length Pitot
tube with 3/4 schedule 40 pipe, 3/4 to 1/2 reducing bushing and 1/4 metal tubing.
Insertion Length
8 5/8
12 5/8
18 5/8
24 5/8
36 5/8
48 5/8
60 5/8
Insertion Length
*
Insertion Length
96
120
168
216
Insertion Length
6
12
6
12

P
t
o
t

T
u
b
e
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Handy A-532 Slide Chart speeds air
velocity calculations. All plastic, stays
clean for years. Included with each Pitot
tube.
Permanent Mounting (PM)
models include 1 inch dia.
welded stainless steel sleeve
and adjustable compression
fitting with 1 inch male NPT
mounting treads. Adjust
depth, lock in place.
Series
160E
Series
160S
Ellipsoidal Tip Pitot Tube
Designed to Meet British Standard 1042
S Type Stainless Steel Pitot Tubes
Large, Open Tip Design Resists Fouling; Optional Permanent Mount Models
Ellipsoidal tip design for improved accuracy, 1.0 coefficient
304 SS construction adds strength, resists corrosion
Adjustable depth indicators for fast, consistent traverses
Alignment indicator helps keep tip parallel to flow
Series 160E Pitot Tubes are widely used in the U.K. and Europe for applications
demanding high accuracy when measuring the flow of air or other compatible gases.
Precision crafted tip configuration allows air to pass smoothly with minimum turbulence for
consistent, reliable readings. Exterior indicator arm is aligned parallel to the 5 in. (13 cm)
sensing tip so you always know that unit is properly positioned inside duct. Sliding depth
indicators grip firmly to ensure uniform insertion critical when making multiple
measurements as part of a complete traverse; the best way to determine average velocity.
Total and static pressure taps are 1/4 (6 mm), permanently silver soldered to the connection
block, leak-proof and durable. Seven fixed length sizes are offered plus a universal model
which attaches to any length of 3/4 sch. 40 pipe. See 160-U drawing.
Meets EPA specification 40 CFR (ch. 1)
Long lasting, welded stainless steel construction
1/8 female NPT connections, permanently welded
Rated to 1500F (815C)
Rated to 100 psig (6.89 bar)
0.84 flow coefficient
Series 160S Pitot Tubes are designed specifically for flow measurement of dirty,
particulate laden air or gas streams typical in smoke stack and other environmental testing.
Large 5/16 dia. stainless steel tubing resists plugging under harsh, sooty conditions which
quickly block conventional flow sensors. Total and static pressure tubes are precisely aligned
and welded together every six inches for maximum accuracy, strength and long term
durability. Versatile 1/8 female NPT connections easily adapt to any type of pipe or tubing.
A pair of 1/8 NPT to 3/16 I.D. tubing adapters is included plus a handy molded vinyl cap
to protect tip when not in use. Supplied with complete instructions.
The Model 166T Telescoping Pitot tube is a unique air flow sensor which can quickly
and easily be adjusted for any duct insertion length from 11.5 to 36 inches (29.2 to 91.4 cm).
Now, this single compact unit can replace up to five conventional fixed length Pitot tubes.
For even greater convenience, it is securely protected by a custom fitted polyethylene
carrying case. Telescoping sections lock in place as they are extended, enabling use of the
handle grip to gauge proper alignment of the tip within the airstream. Stainless steel
construction resists corrosion. Hemispherical tip has 1.0 flow coefficient, is 1/8 dia. (3.2
mm). Largest section is 3/8 (9.5 mm). Weight (with case) 1 lb, 9 oz (709 g). Case: 12.5 x 6.25
x 1.75 in.
Model
166T
Telescoping Stainless Steel Pitot Tube
Adjustable Design Extends Insertion Length to 36 Inches
160S-18
160S-18PM
Model
160E-00
160E-01
160E-02
160E-03
160E-04
160E-05
160E-06
160E-U
Model 166T
Insertion
in Meters
0.2
0.3
0.48
0.8
1.0
1.22
1.52
Model
160S-18
160S-24
160S-36
160S-48
160S-60
160S-72
Perm. Mtg.
Model
160S-18PM
160S-24PM
160S-36PM
160S-48PM
160S-60PM
160S-72PM
Insertion
In Inches
18
24
36
48
60
72

130
A
i
r

F
l
o
w

S
w
i
t
c
h
e
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Air Flow Switch
Adjustable from 400-1600 FPM, Stainless Steel Vane
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-combustible gas flow.
Vane: Stainless steel.
Switch Type: SPDT.
Electrical Rating: 125 VAC - 9.8 amp full load 58.8 amp locked rotor;
250 VAC - 4.9 amp full load 29.4 amp locked rotor; Pilot rating: 470 VA
at 125, 250 VAC; Resistive: 15 amp at 125, 250, or 480 VAC.
Electrical Connections: Screw type terminal.
Conduit Connection: 7/8 conduit hole.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal duct flow.
Set Point Adjustment: Screw type.
Weight: 1 lb 1 oz (481.94 g)
Agency Approvals: UL, CSA, CE.
CAUTION: For use only with air or non-combustible non-corrosive
gases. Unit is not sealed against dust.
Model
530
Model 660 Air Velocity Monitors are a practical, affordable way to
continuously monitor for safe airflows through laboratory fume hoods. They are
typically installed in the fume hood side fascia and connected to the interior
sidewall via 1-1/8" flexible tubing. As the exhaust fan draws air through the
device, a sensitive constant temperature thermistor measures flow and lights a
green (normal), yellow (high) or red (low) LED. An audible alarm also warns of
low flow and requires manual resetting. Mounting holes fit standard single gang
electrical box.
Air Velocity Monitor
Continuously Measures Fume Hood Airflow
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-combustible, non-corrosive gases.
High Setpoint Range: 0-275 FPM (0-1.397 m/s).
Low Setpoint Range: 0-150 FPM (0-.792 m/s).
Repeatability: 7% of full span, 0-50 and 150-275 FPM; 5% of full
span, 50-150 FPM.
Compensated Temperature Range: 50 to 90F (10 to 32.2C).
Operating Temperature Range: 32 to 120F (0 to 48.9C).
Power Supply: 24 VAC, 3 watts maximum.
Response Time: 6-10 seconds.
Warm-Up Time: 3-5 minutes (no flow).
Audible Alarm: 75 dB between 3-10 feet.
Mounting Hardware: (2) #6 x 1" sheet metal screws, (2) 6-32 x 7/8"
machine screws.
Model
660
01-3/32
[27.76]
5/8
[15.88]
3-13/64
[81.36]
1-13/64
[30.56]
7/32
[5.56]
2-3/4
[69.85]
2-53/64
[71.83]
4-1/2
[114.30]
AIR VELOCITY
MONITOR
TUBING
SIDE WALL
SASH TRACK
SASH
OUTLET HOLE
CENTER OF HOLE 4 (101)
BELOW BOTTOM OF
FULL OPEN SASH
4-10
(101 - 254)
The Model 530 air flow switch provides excellent sensitivity and reliability
at a very reasonable price. Quality features include a rugged die cast body,
stainless steel vane and SPDT snap switch. Unit is field adjustable from 400-
1600 FPM. Mounting is fast and simple, with only two screws needed. Vane fits
6 in. or larger ducts.
Model 530, Air Flow Switch
Range 400-1600 FPM mounted on top of horizontal duct.
Model 660, Air Velocity Monitor. Includes 3 flexible tubing, pre-fittings
and 90 elbow, 120 VAC to 24 VAC power transformer.
130.P.N:Layout 2 2/11/11 8:11 AM Page 1
F
u
m
e

H
o
o
d

M
o
n
t
o
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
The Model 670 Fume Hood Monitor continuously senses air flow through
the face of the fume hood, ensuring safe levels of fresh air are exhausting
potentially hazardous fumes eliminating operator exposure. The 670 provides a
highly accurate hot wire sensor to detect very low flows common on fume hoods.
This fume hood monitor provides several key features such as simplified
calibration and mounting, LED safe and alarm status indicators, audible alarm
with temporary or permanent horn silence, relay alarm output, sash alarm
input and an input for night set-back. The Model 670 comes with everything
required to quickly install the unit including a mounting bracket, 24 of tubing
for connecting to the inside of the hood wall and a 120 Volt AC power adapter.
FEATURES
Flexible surface or flush mounting
LED safe and alarm status indicators
Audible alarm
Temporary or permanent horn silence
Relay alarm output
Sash alarm input
Night set back input
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Fume hood face velocity air flow.
Alarm Range: 30 400 FPM (0.15 2.0 m/s).
Alarm Indication: Red LED & audible alarm.
Low Air Velocity Alarm Delay: Fixed 5 secs.
Visual LED Display:
Red: Alarm;
Green: Normal.
Horn Silence: Yes temporary and permanent.
Accuracy: Face velocity 10%.
Temperature Limits:
Operating temperature: 55 to 86F (13 to 30C);
Storage temperature: 40 to 150F ( 40 to 65C).
Power Requirement: 15 VDC 500 mA; 120 VAC, 60 Hz power
transformer included.
Relay Output Low Air Flow Alarm: 5 amps @ 250 VAC.
Relay Input For Night Setback: 2 wire rated for 24 VDC usage.
Sash High Indication: Using a two wire micro switch or 3 wire proximity
switch input, rated for 24 VDC usage.
Comm Port: RS232 Can be connected via serial interface to LAN
network.
Mounting: Semi flush, flush or surface mounted when using included
bracket.
Weight: 5.0 oz (141 g).
Fume Hood Monitor
Ensures Proper Fume Hood Performance
Model
670
SERIES 670
www.dwyer inst.com
SAFE
ENTER SET
ALARM
AIR VELOCITY MONITOR
3-29/64 [87.88]
2-1/64 [51.05]
13/64 [5.08]
1-1/16
[27.10]
5-45/64
[145.03]
4-61/64
[125.98]
4-9/16
[116.08]
3-17/64 [83.06]
NEW PRODUCT!
Model 670, Fume Hood Monitor

132
A
r

V
e
o
c
t
y

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Series
VTT
Hot-Wire Air Velocity/Temperature Transmitter
Configurable Air Velocity Ranges, Available with 5 Digit Display
The Series VTT Hot-Wire Air Velocity and Temperature Transmitter provides a
versatile unit for air velocity and temperature needs. The VTT offers five field-selectable
ranges as well as operating in metric (m/s, C) or english (fpm, F) units. The VTT can
measure up to 30 m/s (6000 fpm) and 50C (122F). The units are available with or without
an LCD display which alternates between velocity and temperature. Series VTT can be
ordered in duct mount or remote mount configurations with 4-20 mA or 0-10V outputs. The
VTT is a useful transmitter for many common HVAC applications.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean air and compatible, non combustible gases.
Accuracy: Air velocity: 3% of reading 60 fpm (0.3 m/s); Temperature: 0.5% of
reading 0.6F (0.4C).
Temperature Limits: Ambient and process: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C); Note chart
below for temperature effects on range. Storage: 14 to 158F ( 10 to 70C).
Power Supply: 24 VAC/VDC (10%) 3 4 wires.
Current Consumption: 4 20 mA output: 80 mA maximum; 0 10 V output: 40 mA.
Response Time: Air velocity: 2 seconds to 1/e (63%) of final value; Temperature:
5 seconds to 1/e (63%) of final value.
Maximum Loop Resistance: 4 20 mA output: 500 ; 0 10 V output: 1 k.
Display: 5 digit; Resolution 1 fpm (0.1 m/s) 1.0F (0.1C). Alternates between
velocity and temperature.
Electrical Connection: Screw terminal block.
Cable Length (Remote Probe): 6.56 ft (2 m).
Enclosure Rating: ABS rated NEMA 4X (IP65).
Mounting: Can be mounted in any orientation. Probe must be aligned with airflow.
Mounting accessory included.
Weight: With display: 0.32 lb (145 g); Without display: 0.24 lb (110 g).
Model
VTT-A-N-D-1
VTT-A-N-D-2
VTT-A-N-R-1
VTT-A-N-R-2
VTT-A-D-D-1
VTT-A-D-D-2
VTT-A-D-R-1
VTT-A-D-R-2
VTT-V-N-D-1
VTT-V-N-D-2
VTT-V-N-R-1
VTT-V-N-R-2
VTT-V-D-D-1
VTT-V-D-D-2
VTT-V-D-R-1
VTT-V-D-R-2
Output
4 20 mA Output
0 10 V Output
Display
No Display
5 Digit Display
No Display
5 Digit Display
Mounting
Duct Mount
Remote Mount
Duct Mount
Remote Mount
Duct Mount
Remote Mount
Duct Mount
Remote Mount
Field Selectable Velocity Ranges
Metric
0 to 5m/s
0 to 10m/s
0 to 15m/s
0 to 20m/s
0 to 30m/s
Imperial
0 to 1000 fpm
0 to 2000 fpm
0 to 3000 fpm
0 to 4000 fpm
0 to 6000 fpm
1-21/32
[42.00]
1-21/32
[42.00]
33/64 [13.00]
3-15/16 [100.00]
3-17/64
[83.00]
MODELS VTT-X-N-X-X
(SHOWN WITH REMOTE PROBE MOUNTING)
REMOTE PROBE ASSEMBLY
(SHOWN IN 150 MM LENGTH)
5-29/32
[150.00]
SHOWN IN 150 MM LENGTH
MODELS VTT-X-D-X-X
(SHOWN WITH DUCT MOUNT PROBE)
3-15/16
[100.00]
3-17/64
[83.00]
air velocity
maximum possible
measurements ranges
based on working
temperatures
temperature
0C 10C 20C 30C 50C 40C
V

m
a
x
.

f
(
T
)
30 m/s
25 m/s
20 m/s
15 m/s
10 m/s
5 m/s
Air Velocity Range Capability vs. Temperature
Probe Length
150 mm (6)
300 mm (11.8)
150 mm (6)
300 mm (11.8)
150 mm (6)
300 mm (11.8)
150 mm (6)
300 mm (11.8)
150 mm (6)
300 mm (11.8)
150 mm (6)
300 mm (11.8)
150 mm (6)
300 mm (11.8)
150 mm (6)
300 mm (11.8)

A
r

V
e
o
c
t
y

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Series
AVU
The Series AVU Air Velocity Transmitter is ideal for a wide range of HVAC
measurement and control applications, particularly in complete building control and energy
management systems. The Series AVU offers 5% accuracy at a surprisingly low cost, with
six units covering ranges from 0-785 fpm to 0-3150 fpm, with either 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC
output.
The Series AVU Transmitter operates by measuring the heat loss from one of the two
sensing elements in the air stream, then calculating the air velocity. Units are virtually
immune to drift due to the design of the sensing element, which makes the transmitter
accurate over the whole air velocity range.
FEATURES
4 20 mA or 0 10 V output versions
NEMA 6 (IP67) enclosure rating
AC or DC powered (loop version DC only)
5% accuracy
APPLICATIONS
Supply and exhaust fan tracking
Clean room systems
Air pollution studies and manufacturing
Process control systems
Air Velocity Transmitter
Ideal for Building Automation Systems
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean air and compatible,
non combustible gases.
Accuracy: 5% of full scale.
Response Time (90%): 5 sec (typical).
50C).
Humidity Limit: 0 90% RH, non
condensing.
Power Requirements: A models 24
VDC +10% 15%; V models 24 VDC
or 24 VAC +10% 15%.
Output Signal: A models 4 20 mA
current loop; V models 0 10 VDC.
Loop Resistance: ( A models) 700
ohms.
Current Consumption: 60 mA +
output current.
Max. Start Up Current: 85 mA; 10 V.
Output Current Limit: ( V models)
>10 mA.
terminal. Cable gland for 4 8 mm wire
(16 gauge wire).
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 6 (IP67)
except sensing point.
Probe Dimensions: 9.45 x .75 (240 x
19 mm).
Mounting Orientation: Unit not
position sensitive. Probe must be
aligned with airflow.
Weight: 8.8 oz (250 g).
8 Field Selectable Ranges in FPM or MPS
Series
641B
9-1/4
[235.0]
4-31/32
[126.21]
1/2 NPT
1-23/32
[43.66]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and compatible, non
combustible gases.
Accuracy:
5% FS process gas: 32 to 122F (0 to
50C). 6% FS process gas: 40 to 32F
& 122 to 176F ( 40 to 0C & 50 to
80C).
Response Time: Flow: 1.5 seconds to
95% of final value (output filter set to
minimum).
Temperature Limits: Process: 40 to
176F ( 40 to 80C). Ambient: 32 to
140F (0 to 60C).
Humidity Limit: Non condensing.
Power Requirements:12 35 VDC,
10 16 VAC. 1.5A rating required on
supply due to initial power surge drawn
by transmitter.
Output Signal: 4 20 mA, isolated 24V
source, 3 or 4 wire connection.
Output Filter: Selectable 0.5 15
(seconds).
Current Consumption: 300 mA max*.
terminal.
NEMA 4X.
Mounting Orientation: Unit not
position sensitive.
Weight: 12.6 oz (357.2 g).
The Series 641B Air Velocity Transmitter uses a heated mass flow sensor technology.
It has 4 user-selectable ranges from 250 FPM to 2000 FPM with corresponding metric
ranges of 1.25 MPS to 10 MPS. The 641B provides an isolated 4-20 mA output proportional
to the velocity.
The Series 641Bs steel sensor allows the unit to be used in dirty air environments. This
rugged sensor is ideally suited for quick field cleaning from a simple cloth to a pulse of air
from an air source. Proper sensor performance can be maintained in these polluted
environments by easily removing dust and debris from the sensor which is problematic for
pitot tubes and other flow sensing transmitters.
* A brief current transient exceeding 300 mA may be seen on startup
Range
0 785 fpm (0 4 m/s)
0 1575 fpm (0 8 m/s)
0 3150 fpm (0 16 m/s)
0 785 fpm (0 4 m/s)
0 1575 fpm (0 8 m/s)
0 3150 fpm (0 16 m/s)
Model
AVU-1-A
AVU-2-A
AVU-3-A
AVU-1-V
AVU-2-V
AVU-3-V
2-1/4
[57.0]
3-11/32
[85.0]
9-29/64
[240.0]
8-55/64
[225.0]
51/64
[2.0]
3/4
[19.0]
Model 641B-4, Air Velocity Transmitter
ACCESSORIES
A-156, Flange Mounting Plate with 1/2 female NPT
A-155, Mounting Gland with 1/2 male NPT fitting
Output
4 20 mA
4 20 mA
4 20 mA
0 10 VDC
0 10 VDC
0 10 VDC

134
A
r

V
e
o
c
t
y

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
16 Field Selectable Ranges in FPM or MPS
Series
641
DW
Y
R N
TRUM
E
TS
NC
2 ND
NA HW
Y 2
2
M
CH
GAN C
TY N
63
0
W
YER NST
UM
ENTS
NC
02 ND
ANA HW
Y 2
2
M
CH
G
N C
Y N 46
60
HONE
2
9
79
80
0
e
m
a
n
o@
wye
s
om
h
p
www
wye
s
om
PH
NE
2
9
8
9
80
0
e
m
a
n
o@
dw
e
ns
om
h
p
www
dw
e
ns
om
4-29/64
[113.11]
1/2 NPT
1/2-14 NPT
13/16
[20.64]
B DIMENSION
A DIMENSION
3-1/4
[82.55]
B DIMENSION
A DIMENSION
2-23/32
[29.06]
4-29/64
[113.11]
1/2 NPT
1/2-14 NPT
25/32
[19.84]
A Dimension
7 63/64
[202.80]
13 63/64
[355.20]
19 63/64
[507.60]
26 63/64
[685.40]
32 63/64
[837.80]
37 63/64
[964.80]
B Dimension
9 13/16
[249.24]
15 13/16
[401.64]
21 13/16
[554.04]
28 13/16
[731.84]
34 13/16
[884.24]
39 13/16
[1011.24]
641 AVT with Display Option
641 AVT without
Display Option
A Dimension
7 7/16
[188.91]
13 7/16
[341.31]
19 7/16
[493.71]
26 7/16
[671.51]
29 7/16
[747.71]
37 7/16
[950.91]
B Dimension
9 9/32
[235.74]
15 9/32
[388.14]
21 9/32
[540.54]
28 9/32
[718.34]
34 9/32
[870.74]
39 9/32
[997.74]
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 3% FS process gas: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C); 4% FS process
gas: 40 to 32F & 122 to 212F ( 40 to 0C & 50 to 100C).
Response Time: Flow: 1.5 seconds to 95% of final value (output filter
set to minimum).
Temperature Limits: Process: 40 to 212F ( 40 to 100C); Ambient: 32
to 140F (0 to 60C).
Pressure Limit: 100 psi (6.89 bar) maximum.
Power Requirements: 12 35 VDC, 10 16 VAC. 1.5A rating required on
supply due to initial power surge drawn by transmitter.
Output Signal: 4 20 mA, isolated 24V source, 3 or 4 wire connection.
Output Filter: Selectable 0.5 15 (seconds).
Enclosure Rating: Designed to meet NEMA 4X (IP66) for non LED
models only.
Mounting Orientation: Unit not position sensitive. Probe must be
Weight: 12.6 oz (357.2 g).
OPTIONAL DISPLAY VERSION:
Display: 4 1/2 digit 1/2 red LED.
Resolution: 1 FPM, 0.01 MPS
(10 FPM @ 10,000 and 15,000 FPM ranges).
Weight: 13.3 oz (377 g).
The new Series 641 Air Velocity Transmitter is the ideal instrument for
monitoring air flow. This transmitter uses a heated mass flow sensor which
allows for precise velocity measurements at various flow rates and
temperatures. The 641s 16 field selectable ranges provides it the versatility to
be selected for several air flow applications. The optional LED produces a
complete, low-cost solution for local indication of air flow.
FEATURES
Ranges to 15,000 FPM or 75 MPS
Optional bright LED display
Easy push button set up
Compact housing
4 20 mA output
Digital filter for signal damping
APPLICATIONS
Exhaust stack flow monitoring
Air control in drying processes
HVAC air velocity measurements
Fan supply and exhaust tracking
*Other probe lengths available contact factory.
Model
641-6
641-6-LED
641-12
641-12-LED
641-18
641-18-LED
641-24
641-24-LED
641-30
641-30-LED
641-36
641-36-LED
ACCESSORIES
A-156, Universal Mounting Plate 1/2 female NPT
A-158, Split Flange Mounting Kit
A-159, Duct Mounting Gland
Probe Length*
6 (152.4 mm)
6 (152.4 mm)
12 (304.8 mm)
12 (304.8 mm)
18 (457.2 mm)
18 (457.2 mm)
24 (609.6 mm)
24 (609.6 mm)
30 (762 mm)
30 (762 mm)
36 (914 mm)
36 (914 mm)

A
r

V
e
o
c
t
y

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Air Velocity Transmitter with Cable
For Remotely Mounting Electronic Enclosure
Series
641RM
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 3% FS process gas: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C); 4% FS process
gas: 40 to 32F & 122 to 212F ( 40 to 0C & 50 to 100C).
Response Time: Flow: 1.5 seconds to 95% of final value
(output filter set to minimum).
to 140F (0 to 60C).
Pressure Limit: 100 psi (6.89 bar) maximum.
Power Requirements: 12 35 VDC, 10 16 VAC. 1.5A rating required on
supply due to initial power surge drawn by transmitter.
Output Signal: 4 20 mA, isolated 24V source, 3 or 4 wire connection.
Output Filter: Selectable 0.5 15 (seconds).
Mounting Orientation: Unit not position sensitive. Probe must be
Weight: 13.2 oz (374.26 g).
Cable Length: 6 ft (1.82 m).
Probe Length: 12 (30.48 cm) standard.
Probe Diameter: 5/16 (0.79 cm).
OPTIONAL DISPLAY VERSION:
Display: 4 1/2 digit 1/2 red LED.
Resolution: 1 FPM, 0.01 MPS
(10 FPM @ 10,000 and 15,000 FPM ranges).
Weight: 13.9 oz (394.16 g).
The Series 641RM is the ideal instrument for monitoring air flow. This
transmitter uses a heated mass flow sensor, which allows for precise velocity
measurements at various flow rates and temperatures. The 641RMs 16 field
selectable ranges from 0-250 to 15,000 FPM (0-1.25 to 75 MPS) provide it the
versatility to be selected for a multitude of applications. The units 6 cable which
connects the sensing probe with the electronic enclosure allows the enclosure
to be mounted where it can be more easily accessed. Longer cable lengths are
available for ducts that are at very high elevations from the plant floor. The
optional LED produces a complete, compact solution for local indication of air
flow.
1/2 NPT
4-31/32
[126.21]
5/16
[7.94]
13/64
[5.16]
14-21/64
[53.07]
FOR A STANDARD 12 PROBE
1-5/8 [41.28] WITH LED
1-3/32 [27.78] WITHOUT LED
43/64
[17.07]
6 FT
[152.40]
31/64
[12.30]
1-25/32
[45.24]
1-39/64
[40.88]
Model 641RM-12, Air Velocity Transmitter with 6 cable
Model 641RM-12-LED, same as above with LED display
ACCESSORIES
A-156, Universal Mounting Plate, 1/2 female NPT

136
H
u
m
d
t
y

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Series
HS
Humidity Switch
Programmable, 8 Amp Relay, 3-Digit Display
The microprocessor based Series HS Humidity Switch provides control for
humidifying or dehumidifying. Relative humidity, output status, and error messaging can
be viewed on the bright green LED. The switch features 9 user defined parameters
including setpoint, hysteresis, control type, cycle time, and probe adjustment. Access to
programming parameters can be locked for security purposes using the password
protection feature. The Series HS includes a fitting clip for panel mounting, gasket, rear
terminal cover, and instruction manual.
3
[76]
1-11/32
[34]
2-3/8
[60]
1-7/64
[28]
SPECIFICATIONS
Relative Humidity Range: 0 to 100%
RH.
Input: 0 to 3V, 0 to 1V or 4 20 mA
(depending on model) humidity probe
not included.
Accuracy: THC P: 5% @ 20 to 80%;
HS: 1% RH.
Display: 3 digit, green, 1/2 (12.7 mm)
digits.
Resolution: 1 digit.
70C).
Storage Temperature: 4 to 176F
( 20 to 80C).
Output: 8 A SPDT relay @ 250 VAC
resistive.
Horsepower Rating (HP): 1/3 HP.
Control Type: ON/OFF.
Power Requirements: 110 VAC or
230 VAC (depending on model).
Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory.
Front Panel Rating: IP64.
Agency Approvals: CE, UL, ULc.
Panel Cutout 2-51/64 x 1-9/64 (71 x 29 mm)
Series
THC
Temperature/Humidity Switch
Independent Displays, 61 Programmable Parameters, 4 SPST Relays
Simultaneously measure and control temperature and humidity with the Series THC
Temperature/Humidity Switch. The unit offers a 3-digit red display for temperature
indication and a 3-digit green display indicating humidity. The Series THC is equipped
with four independent relays, two for temperature control and two relays for humidity
control.
The unit offers 61 programmable parameters for temperature and humidity control
including set point, differential, direct/reverse acting, cycle time, alarm clock time, and
decimal point adjustment. In the event of a probe error, the default operation of the relays
can be set to open or close. The THC features error or alarm messaging and password
protection.
The THC Temperature/Humidity Switch accepts up to two temperature probe inputs (sold
separately) and a humidity sensor. A humidity sensor with 01V, 03V (sold separately), or
420 mA output can be used with the Series THC.
4-3/32
[104.00]
5-9/32
[134.32]
2-7/16
[61.80]
1-15/16
[49.23]
5
[127.00]
3-7/8
[98.43]
SPECIFICATIONS
Measurement Range: Temperature:
58 to 302F ( 50 to 150C); Humidity:
0 to 100% RH.
Input: Up to 2 thermistors and 1
humidity sensor.
Output: 4 SPST, 8A relays @ 250
VAC.
Horsepower Rating (HP): 1/3 HP.
Control Type: ON/OFF direction,
direct or reverse acting, neutral.
Power Requirements: 110 or 230
VAC (depending on model).
Accuracy: Temperature 0.5% of
probe range; Humidity: 20 to 80%.
Display: Two 3 digit displays. 1/2
digits.
Resolution: 0.1.
Ambient Operating Temperature: 32
to 158F (0 to 70C).
( 20 to 80C).
Weight: 1.17 lb (530 g).
Panel Cutout: 5.15 x 2.37 (131 x 111
mm).
Front Panel Protection: IP64.
APPLICATIONS
HS Digital Humidity Switches are suitable for industrial chillers, environmental
chambers, walk ins and freezers, heat sealers, beer and wine chillers, mug frosters,
coolers, display cases and cabinets, meat and produce storage, floral preservation,
refrigerated transportation, laboratories, food service equipment, ovens and dryers,
green houses, museums, and tobacco preservation. Monitors humidity in ducts.
ACCESSORY
THC-P Humidity Probe, 0 to 3 V output, 4 ft (1.5m) cable
Model
THC-10
THC-11
THC-20
THC-21
Description
F 110 VAC
C 110 VAC
F 230 VAC
C 230 VAC
ACCESSORIES
THC-P, Humidity probe with 3V output & 4 ft (1.2 m) cable
TS-5, Temperature probe, PVC with 5 ft (1.5 m) cable
TS-6, Temperature probe, metal with 5 ft (1.5 m) cable
TS-51, Temperature probe, PVC with 10 ft (3 m) cable
TS-61, Temperature probe, metal with 10 ft (3 m) cable
Model
HS-311
HS-312
HS-111
HS-112
HS-411
HS-412
Input Sensor
0 to 3 V
0 to 3 V
0 to 1 V
0 to 1 V
4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Supply Voltage
110 VAC
230 VAC
110 VAC
230 VAC
110 VAC
230 VAC

H
u
m
d
t
y
/
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
*Wall mount not shown
Series
HT
Monitor and control relative humidity and temperature in building energy management
systems with the Series HT Humidity/Temperature Transmitter. Designed for demanding
HVAC/EMCS applications, the Series HT provides 3% RH accuracy and 1% stability per
year. Routine calibration is not required with the fully interchangeable sensor. Two wire
connections allow easy installation directly into air ducts or within a controlled area.
RH/Temperature Transmitter
Calibration-Free, 2-Wire Design, Duct or Wall Mount
SPECIFICATIONS
RH.
Temperature Range: Duct mount:
40 to 140F ( 40 to 60C); Wall mount:
23 to 131F ( 5 to 55C).
Accuracy: 3% RH @ 25C; 0.3C @
25C.
Temperature Limits: Duct mount: 14
to 140F ( 10 to 60C); Wall mount: 23
to 131F ( 5 to 55C).
( 40 to 60C).
Operating Humidity Range: Duct
mount: 0 to 100% RH; Wall mount: 0 to
90% RH.
Response Time: 15 seconds.
Current Consumption: 4 mA
minimum.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 NPT.
Mounting Connection: 3/4 NPT.
Drift: 2% RH over 2 years.
Temperature Sensor: Pt 1000 RTD.
RH Temperature Dependance:
<1.5% RH from 14 to 140F
( 10 to 60C).
Temperature Dependance: 0.01C/C.
Housing Material: ABS plastic.
Enclosure Rating: Duct mount
only/IP65.
Series
RH-R
Remote Mount, Field Replaceable Sensor Filter, Up to 16 Cable
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Dry clean air.
RH.
Temperature Range: 40 to 140F
( 40 to 60C).
Accuracy: 2% @ 10 90%.
( 40 to 60C).
( 40 to 80C).
4 to 140F ( 20 to 60C).
Output Signal: 4 20 mA loop powered
or 0 to 10 VDC.
Response Time: Less than 15
seconds.
Electrical Connections: Terminal
block.
Process Connection: 1/2 NPSM.
Drift: Less than 1%/year.
RH Sensor: Capacitance polymer
Cable Length: Up to 16 ft.
Housing Material: Polycarbonate,
aluminum enclosure.
The Series RH-R Humidity Transmitter is the ideal transmitter for those applications
where space is limited. The compact sensor is protected by a removable filter. It can be
mounted up to 16 feet away from the weatherproof base. The Series RH-R is ideal for
environmental chambers, rubber bladder burst detection and air handler applications.
Model
RHU-R004
RHU-R008
RHU-R012
RHU-R016
RHT-R004
RHT-R008
RHT-R012
RHT-R016
Cable
Length
4
8
12
16
4
8
12
16
Description
Humidity
Humidity
Humidity
Humidity
5-1/8
[130.18]
3-45/64
[94.06]
4-1/32
[102.39]
2-41/64
[67.07]
2-1/4
[57.15]
55/64
[21.83]
2-29/64
[11.51]
5/8
[15.88]
2-37/64
[65.48]
Model
RHU-R104
RHU-R108
RHU-R112
RHU-R116
RHT-R104
RHT-R108
RHT-R112
RHT-R116
Cable
Length
4
8
12
16
4
8
12
16
Description
Humidity
Humidity
Humidity
Humidity
Model
HT00*
HT01
HT10
HT11
3-5/32
[80.17]
3-5/32
[80.17]
1-1/2
[38.10]
19/32 DIA.
[15.09]
15/32 DIA.
[11.91]
11-5/8 [295.3]
8-1/2 [215.9]
2-1/8
[53.98]
ACCESSORY
HT5, Replacement sensor
Output
Current
Current
Current
Current
Current
Current
Current
Current
Output
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage
Description
Humidity Transmitter, wall mount
Humidity Transmitter, duct mount
Humidity/Temp Transmitter, wall mount
Humidity/Temp Transmitter, duct mount

138
H
u
m
d
t
y
/
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Series
RHP-W
Wall Mount Humidity/Temperature/
Dew Point Transmitter
Optional LCD Display, Replaceable Sensors
SPECIFICATIONS
Relative Humidity Range: 0 to 100% RH.
Temperature Range: 40 to 140F ( 40 to 60C) for thermistor and RTD sensors.
20 to 140F ( 28.9 to 60C) for solid state temperature sensors.
Dew Point Temperature Range: 20 to 140F ( 28.9 to 60C); 0 to 100F
( 17.8 to 37.8C); 40 to 90F (4.4 to 32.3C); 4 to 140F ( 20 to 60C) field
selectable ranges.
Accuracy:
RH: Model RHP 2XX 2% 10 90% RH @ 25C; Model RHP 3XX 3% 20 80%
RH @ 25C;
Thermistor temperature sensor: 0.4F @ 77F (0.22C @ 25C);
RTD temperature sensor: DIN Class B; 0.54F @ 32F (0.3C @ 0C);
Solid state temperature sensor: 0.9F @ 72F (0.3C @ 25C).
Hysteresis: 1%.
Repeatability: 0.1% typical.
Temperature Limits:
Storage: 40 to 176F ( 40 to 80C).
4-20 mA Loop Powered Models:
Power requirements: 10 35 VDC;
Output signal: 4 20 mA, 2 channels for humidity/solid state temperature sensor
models (loop powered on RH). Switch selectable RH/dew point. Switch
selectable normal or reverse output.
0-5/10V Output Models:
Power requirements: 15 35 VDC or 15 29 VAC;
Output load: 5 mA max., 2 channels for humidity/solid state temperature
sensor models. Switch selectable 0 10V/2 10V or 0 5V/1 5V output. Switch
selectable RH/dew point. Switch selectable normal or reverse output.
Solid State Temperature Sensor Output Ranges: Switch selectable, 20 to
140F ( 28.9 to 60C); 0 to 100F ( 17.8 to 37.8C); 40 to 90F (4.4 to 32.3C);
4 to 140F ( 20 to 60C).
Drift: <1% RH/year.
RH Sensor: Capacitance polymer.
Enclosure Material: Warm gray polycarbonate.
Display: Optional LCD, backlit on 0 5/10V models. Switch selectable %RH or dew
point, F/C.
Display Resolution: RH: 1%; Temperature: 0.1F (0.1C); Dew Point: 1F (1C).
The Series RHP-W Wall Mount Humidity/Temperature/Dew Point Transmitter is
the most versatile room transmitter on the market. The stylish housing is well vented to
provide air flow across the sensor to improve measurement accuracy. An optional LCD
display can be integral to the transmitter or a remote display can be ordered for building
balancing or LEED
validation. The LCD display indicates the ambient temperature along

with the humidity or dew point. The transmitter has internal dip switches to select the
temperature engineering units and whether the transmitter outputs humidity or dew point.
The humidity and temperature sensors are field replaceable to reduce service cost and
inventory. The humidity and the dew point are measured using a capacitive polymer sensor
that completely recovers from 100% saturation. The humidity and dew point can have either
a current or voltage output, while the optional temperature output can be a current, voltage,
RTD or thermistor. For models with current or voltage for the temperature output, the
temperature range is field selectable.
Example
Series
Accuracy
Housing
Humidity/
Dew Point
Output
Temperature
Output
Options
RHP
RHP
3
2
3
W
W
2
1
2
A
0
1
2
A
B
C
D
E
F
Options
LCD
1-3/16
[30.16]
1-3/16
[30.16]
.921
3x 3/8
[9.53]
35/64
[13.89]
1-13/32
[35.72]
1-53/64
[46.43]
4x 3/16
[4.76]
1-13/32
[50.01]
4-31/64
[113.9]
3-13/32
[86.52] Shown with optional LCD display
LEED
is trademark of US Green Building Council.

ACCESSORY
A-449, Remote LCD Display allows remote
indication of select Dwyer Wall Mount
Transmitters for validation or certification
purposes
RHP 3W2A LCD
Humidity/Temperature/
Dew Point Transmitter
2% Accuracy
3% Accuracy
Wall Mount
4 20mA
0 10 VDC
None
4 20mA
0 10 VDC
10K @ 25C Thermistor
Type III
Type II
3K @ 25C Thermistor
100 RTD DIN 385
1K RTD DIN 385
LCD Display

H
u
m
d
t
y
/
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Passive Temperature Outputs, Sintered Filter Options
Series
RHP
2- 9/16
[64.96]
(3) 3/16 (4.76) HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED ON A
4 115 (104.52) BC
35/64
[13.89]
9
[228.60]
2-33/64
[63.90]
1/2 NPT
2-11/64
[55.17]
2-9/64
[54.37]
3-7/16
[87.31]
3-11/64
[80.57]
2-11/64
[55.12]
1-1/8
[28.58]
3
[76.20]
6-45/64
[170.26]
4-17/32
[115.09]
5-1/8
[130.18]
3-1/8
[79.38]
2-15/64
[56.75]
3-1/8
[79.38]
3/16
[4.76]
MOUNTING HOLES
TYP 4 PLCS
55/64
[21.83]
4-17/32
[115.09]
OSA (Outside Air)
Sintered Filter Version
6-41/64
[168.67]
3-45/64
[94.06]
5-1/8
[130.18]
2-41/54
[67.07]
2-1/4
[57.15]
55/64
[21.83]
Duct Mount
The Series RHP Temperature and Humidity Transmitter combine the voltage or
current humidity transmitter output with a passive temperature thermistor or RTD output.
The polymer capacitance humidity sensor is not affected by condensation, fog, high
humidity, or contaminants. The humidity sensors are available with 2% or 3% accuracies.
Duct mounted transmitters are available with an optional two-line alpha numeric LCD
display. The Series RHP is available with interchangeable filter options as well as
replaceable sensors.
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Range: 40 to 140F ( 40 to 60C).
Accuracy, RH: Model RHP 2XXX 2% 10 90% RH @ 25C; Model RHP 3XXX
3% 20 80% RH @ 25C.
Accuracy, Thermistor Temp Sensor: 0.22C @ 25C (0.4F @ 77F).
Accuracy, RTD Temp Sensor: DIN Class B; 0.3C @ 0C (0.54F @ 32F).
Hysteresis: 1%.
Storage Temperature: 40 to 176F ( 40 to 80C).
4-20 mA Loop Powered Models: Power requirements: 10 35 VDC; Output signal:
4 20 mA.
0-10V Output Models: Power requirements: 15 35 VDC or 15 29 VAC; Output
signal: 0 10V @ 5 mA max.
Electrical Connections: Removable screw terminal block.
Conduit Connection: Duct mount: 1/2 NPS; OSA: 1/2 (22.3 mm).
Drift: <1% RH/year.
Temperature Sensor: Curves A, B, C: Thermistor; Curves D, E: Platinum RTD
DIN 385.
Enclosure: Duct mount: PBT; OSA: Polycarbonate.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65) for OSA mount only.
Display: Duct mount only, optional 2 line alpha numeric, 8 characters/line.
Display Resolution: RH: 0.1%; 0.1F (0.1C).
Weight: Duct mount: .616 lb (.3 kg); OSA: 1 lb (.45 kg).
Example
Series
Accuracy
Housing
Type
RH Output
Temperature
Sensor
Option
RHP
RHP
2
2
3
D
D
F
O
S
R
1
1
2
A
0
1
2
A
B
C
D
E
F
LCD
LCD
*Model RHRS Radiation Shield is recommended for sintered filter OSA models.
RHP 2D1A LCD
RH/Passive Temperature
Sensor Transmitter
2% Accuracy
3% Accuracy
Duct Mount
w/Plastic Tip
Duct Mount
w/Sintered Filter
OSA (Outside Air)
OSA w/Sintered Filter*
Radiation Shield
4 20mA
0 10V
None
4 20mA
0 10 VDC
Dwyer Curve A
Dwyer Curve B
3K @ 25C Thermistor
Dwyer Curve C
100 RTD DIN 385
1K RTD DIN 385
LCD Display

140
H
u
m
d
t
y
/
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Outside Air Humidity Radiation Shield
6 Plate Design, Integral Pipe Mounting Kit
Model
RHRS
The Model RHRS Radiation Shield protects outside air humidity
transmitters from rain and radiated heat. With the curved shape and color of
the plates, air flow is able to move across the sensor to keep radiated
temperatures from rooftops and surrounding surfaces from affecting humidity
readings. For ease of installation, the Model RHRS has integral pipe mounting
hardware which can be removed for surface mounting applications. The
brackets on the Model RHRS are specifically designed to be installed on the
Dwyer Series RHP outside air humidity transmitters with sintered filters. The
pipe mounting bracket fits 3/4 to 1-1/2 iron pipe.
5-1/8
[130.18]
4-31/32
[126.21]
8-43/64
[220.27]
4-47/64
[120.25]
Picture shown with Series RHP Humidity Transmitter (sold separately)
Model RHRS, Radiation Shield

H
u
m
d
t
y
/
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
RoHS
Series
WHP
The Series WHP Wireless Humidity/Temperature Sensors provides flexibility in
locating sensors and reduces wiring cost. Using a 418 MHz transmitter, the sensor can
transmit data up to 100 feet without the use of a repeater. When coupled with a receiver
and output module, the Series WHP can output voltage, current or resistance values for
humidity and temperature. Since the unit is battery powered using two AA batteries, users
can change the location of the sensor by a couple of feet or to a different wall without worry
about extra labor cost. With the transmit rate at approximately one reading every 10
seconds, the battery is estimated to last 5 to 8 years.
The duct mount and outside air mount sensors come standard with sintered filters to
protect the sensor from particulates. Set point adjustment and/or manual override buttons
are available on wall mount sensors.
Wireless Humidity/Temperature Sensors
Transmits up to 100 Feet, Battery Operated
SPECIFICATIONS
Relative Humidity Range: 0 to 100%.
Accuracy: 0.3C, 2% RH.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 32 to 140F (0 to 60C).
Power Requirements: (2) AA 3.6V lithium batteries.
Transmitter Interval Rate: Approximately 10 15 seconds.
Enclosure Rating: UL 94 V 0.
Antenna: 418 MHz Built inside enclosure.
Weight: Dust/OSA: 1.25 lb (567 g); Wall: 0.25 lb (113 g).
FCC Approval: FCC ID# T4F061213RSO.
Model
WHP-D05
WHP-OSA
WHP-W00
WHP-W10
WHP-W01
WHP-W11
Mounting
Configuration
Duct
OSA
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Set Point
Adjustment
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
5
[127.00]
2-1/2
[63.50]
1/2 NPT CONDUIT KNOCKOUT
3X 1/2 NPT
6 [152.40]
4-5/32
[105.41]
5
[127.00]
2-1/2
[63.50]
1/2 NPT
CONDUIT
KNOCKOUT
3X
1/2 NPT
6-3/4
[171.71]
2-3/4
[69.85]
1-1/16
[26.92]
4-1/2
[114.30]
COOL WARM
WALL MOUNT
DUCT MOUNT
OSA MOUNT
ACCESSORIES
WM-4SS, DIN Rail Mount Receiver
WM-PSS, DIN Rail Mount Repeater with Standard Antenna
WM-CSH-5I, DIN Rail Mount 4 to 20 mA Humidity Output Module
WM-CSF-4A, DIN Rail Mount 4 to 20 mA Temperature
Output Module Range 50 to 90F
WM-VSH-1I, DIN Rail Mount 0 to 10 VDC Humidity Output Module
WM-VSF-1A, DIN Rail Mount 0 to 10 VDC Temperature
Output Module Range 50 to 90F
WM-SSV-07, DIN Rail Mount 0 to 10 VDC Set Point Output Module
WM-RSO, DIN Rail Mount Normally Open Override Output Module
WM-RSC, DIN Rail Mount Normally Closed Override Output Module
Manual
Override
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes

142
H
u
m
d
t
y
/
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Wireless Temperature/Humidity Product Accessories
Accessories to be Used with WTP & WHP
Wireless Output Modules, Repeaters and Receivers are designed to work with
Series WHP and Series WTP Wireless Humidity and Temperature Sensors. Receivers can
be ordered to accept the 418 MHz directly from the sensors or 900 MHz from a repeater.
Repeaters expand the distance between the sensors and the output modules from 100 feet
up to more than 1000 feet.
Output modules are available with current, voltage, resistive thermistor or relay contact
outputs. Since the output module plugs directly into the receiver, the communications
signal and the supply power do not require any wiring which saves installation time and
labor costs. The integral mounting tabs allow for the output modules to be DIN rail
mounted or surface mounted.
Wireless products are intended for use in U.S. territories, Canada and Mexico
only.
SPECIFICATIONS
Repeaters and Receivers
Supply Voltages: Repeaters and 900 MHz receivers: 9 to 15 VDC; 418 MHz
receivers: 9 to 30 VDC/17 to 31 VAC.
Power Consumption: Repeaters: 150 mA max; 900 MHz receivers: 80 mA max;
418 MHz receivers: 20 mA max.
Maximum Output Modules Per Receiver: 127.
Outputs: Repeaters: 900 MHz @ 100 mW; Receivers: RS 485.
Humidity Limits: 5 to 95% (non condensing).
Housing Material: ABS UL 94V 0 plastic.
Weight: Receiver: 7.6 oz (215 g); Repeater: 9.1 oz (257 g).
Output Modules
Supply Voltages: Thermistor, Relay, 0 to 5 VDC models: 9 to 30 VDC/17 to 31
VAC; 0 to 10 VDC models: 15 to 30 VDC/17 to 35 VAC; Current models: Loop
powered 9 to 36 VDC.
Power Consumption: Thermistor, 0 to 5 VDC models: 3 mA max DC; 0.1 VA max
AC; Relay models: 15 mA max (relay on); Current models: 20 mA max.
Humidity Limits: Ambient: 5 to 95% (non condensing).
Output: Thermistor: 35 to 120F (1 to 50C) 10K Type II or 10K Type III
(depending on model); Relay: 40 V, 150 mA max; Voltage: 0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10
VDC (depending on model); Current: 4 to 20 mA.
Output Resolution: 10 bit (voltage), 12 bit (current), 40 (resistance).
Housing Material: ABS UL 94V 0 plastic.
FCC Approval: FCC ID# T4F06811RH.
RoHS
418 MHz OR 900 MHz EXTENDED ANTENNA
3-7/8 [98.31]
1-9/32
[32.51]
2-31/32
[75.38]
2-3/4
[69.85]
WM-4SX
1-9/32
[32.51]
1-15/16
[49.19]
2-31/32
[75.38]
2-3/4
[69.85]
3-7/8 [98.31]
2-3/4
[69.85]
2-31/32
[75.38]
1-9/32
[32.51]
STANDARD
900 MHz
ANTENNA
418 MHz OR
900 MHz
EXTENDED
ANTENNA
Receiver Modules
Repeater Modules Output Modules

H
u
m
d
t
y
/
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Model
WM-PSS
WM-PSE
WM-4SS
WM-9SS
WM-9SE
Type
Repeater
Repeater
Receiver
Receiver
Receiver
Input
418 MHz
418 MHz
418 MHz
900 MHz
900 MHz
Model
WM-RSO
WM-RSC
Model
WM-TS2
WM-TS3
Model
WM-SSV-00
WM-SSV-01
WM-SSV-02
WM-SSV-03
WM-SSV-04
WM-SSV-05
WM-SSV-06
WM-SSV-07
WM-SSV-08
WM-SSC
WM-SSR-20
WM-SSR-21
WM-SSR-22
WM-SSR-23
WM-SSR-24
WM-SSR-25
WM-SSR-26
WM-SSR-27
WM-SSR-28
WM-SSR-29
WM-SSR-30
WM-SSR-31
Model
WM-CSF-4A
WM-CSF-4B
WM-CSF-4C
WM-CSF-4D
WM-CSF-4E
WM-CSF-4F
WM-CSF-4G
WM-CSF-4H
WM-CSC-4A
WM-CSC-4B
WM-CSC-4C
WM-CSC-4D
WM-CSC-4E
WM-CSC-4F
WM-CSC-4G
WM-CSC-4H
WM-CSH-5I
WM-CSH-5J
Model
WM-VSF-5A
WM-VSF-5B
WM-VSF-5C
WM-VSF-5D
WM-VSF-5E
WM-VSF-5F
WM-VSF-5G
WM-VSF-5H
WM-VSF-1A
WM-VSF-1B
WM-VSF-1C
WM-VSF-1D
WM-VSF-1E
WM-VSF-1F
WM-VSF-1G
WM-VSC-1H
WM-VSC-5A
WM-VSC-5B
WM-VSC-5C
WM-VSC-5D
WM-VSC-5E
WM-VSC-5F
WM-VSC-5G
WM-VSC-5H
WM-VSC-1A
WM-VSC-1B
WM-VSC-1C
WM-VSC-1D
WM-VSC-1E
WM-VSC-1F
WM-VSC-1G
WM-VSC-1H
WM-VSH-5I
WM-VSH-5J
WM-VSH-1I
WM-VSH-1J
Range
50 to 90F
55 to 85F
60 to 80F
65 to 80F
45 to 96F
20 to 120F
32 to 185F
40 to 140F
50 to 90F
55 to 85F
60 to 80F
65 to 80F
45 to 96F
20 to 120F
32 to 185F
40 to 140F
10 to 32C
13 to 30C
15 to 27C
18 to 27C
7 to 35C
29 to 49C
0 to 85C
40 to 60C
10 to 32C
13 to 30C
15 to 27C
18 to 27C
7 to 35C
29 to 49C
0 to 85C
40 to 60C
0 to 100% RH
35 to 70% RH
0 to 100% RH
35 to 70% RH
Repeaters & Receivers
Output Modules - Relay Outputs Thermistors Outputs
Temperature Set Point Outputs
Current Output Modules
Voltage Output Modules
Antenna
Standard
Extended
Extended
Standard
Extended
Output
Normally Open
Normally Closed
Output
10K Type II
10K Type III
Output
0 to 5V
1 to 5V
3.7 to .85V
5 to 0V
4.2 to 1.2V
2.75 to 3.4V
2.88 to 3.17V
0 to 10V
2 to 10V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 5K
7.87K to 2.87K
0 to 10K
15K to 5K
9577 to 1422
1K to 11K
0 to 20K
4.75K to 24.75K
6.19K to 26.19K
7.87K to 27.87K
10K to 30K
24.75 to 4.75K
Range
50 to 90F
55 to 85F
60 to 80F
65 to 80F
45 to 96F
20 to 120F
32 to 185F
40 to 140F
10 to 32C
13 to 30C
15 to 27C
18 to 27C
7 to 35C
29 to 49C
0 to 85C
40 to 60C
0 to 100% RH
35 to 70% RH
Output
0 to 5 VDC
0 to 5 VDC
0 to 5 VDC
0 to 5 VDC
0 to 5 VDC
0 to 5 VDC
0 to 5 VDC
0 to 5 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 5 VDC
0 to 5 VDC
0 to 5 VDC
0 to 5 VDC
0 to 5 VDC
0 to 5 VDC
0 to 5 VDC
0 to 5 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 5 VDC
0 to 5 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 10 VDC

144
H
u
m
d
t
y
/
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Model
657C-1
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Humidity & temperature detection in air.
Range: Relative humidity: 0 100%; Temperature: 32 to 212F (0 to
100C)
Accuracy: Relative humidity: 2% (10 90% RH), 3% (0 10% and 90
100% RH); Temperature: 1F (0.5C).
Pressure Limits: 1 psi (.07 bar).
Compensated Temperature Range: 32 to 140F (0 to 60C).
Output Signal: 2 channels each 4 20 mA. Loop powered on the RH
channel.
Electrical Connections: 4 screw type terminal.
Probe: 5/16 x 9 1/10 (0.8 x 23.1 cm) stainless steel.
The Model 657C-1 Transmitter features the same circuit design as the 657-1
providing two 4-20 mA channels to produce separate output signals for both relative
humidity and temperature. However, this model is housed in a tough die cast
aluminum protective conduit enclosure with gasketed cover. An internal terminal
block is provided for electrical connections. The sensor employed in the 657C-1
features a state-of-the-art integrated polymer film humidity sensor and a thin-film
platinum temperature sensor to assure high reliability and rock-solid stability over
years of continuous service. Stainless steel probe measures 5/16 x 9-1/10 (0.8 x 23.1
cm) and can be easily mounted to most ductwork using either of the two optional
kits below.
11-7/8 [302]
9-1/10 [231]
4-13/32
[112.0]
3-5/8
[92.4]
2-15/32
[62.60]
1/2 NPT
1-5/32
[29.35]
3-1/2
[88.90]
1-11/32
[34.15]
Relative Humidity/Temperature Transmitter
Dual Channel Design for Simultaneous 4-20 mA Output Signals Conduit Housing
Relative Humidity/Temperature Transmitter
Dual Channel Design for Simultaneous 4-20 mA Output Signals
Model
657-1
5/16
[7.925]
2-23/32
[68.88]
2-13/32
[60.96]
1/2
[12.70]
2-1/4
[57.15]
1-1/2
[38.10]
5/32
[3.81]
7/8
[22.23]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Humidity & temperature detection in air.
Range: Relative humidity: 0 100%; Temperature: 32 to 212F (0 to
100C).
Accuracy: Relative humidity: 2% (10 90% RH), 3% (0 10% and 90
100% RH); Temperature: 1F (0.5C).
Pressure Limits: 1 psi (.07 bar).
Output Signal: 2 channels each 4 20 mA. Loop powered on the RH
channel.
Electrical Connections: 4 screw type terminal.
Probe: 5/16 x 10 (0.8 x 25.4 cm) stainless steel.
Weight: 5.5 oz (156 g).
The Model 657-1 Transmitter provides two 4-20 mA channels to produce
separate output signals for both relative humidity and temperature. This
inexpensive device delivers 2% accuracy for humidity and 1F for temperature
measurements. The sensor employed in the 657-1 features a state-of-the-art
integrated polymer film humidity sensor and a thin-film platinum temperature
sensor to assure high reliability and rock-solid stability over years of continuous
service. Stainless steel probe measures 5/16 x 10 (0.8 x 24.4 cm) and can be
easily mounted to most ductwork using either of the two optional kits below.
Model 657C-1, RH/Temperature Transmitter
ACCESSORIES
Model 657-1, RH/Temperature Transmitter
ACCESSORIES

H
u
m
d
t
y
/
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Hazardous Area Humidity/
Intrinsically Safe or Explosion-Proof Models
Series
HHT
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
13-23/32
[347.98]
4-15/32
[113.51]
2-23/32
[69.06]
3-29/32
[99.22]
4-9/32
[108.74]
The Series HHT Hazardous Area Humidity/Temperature Transmitter
takes accurate measurements in the harshest of environments. The transmitter
is offered in explosion-proof and intrinsically-safe versions depending on the
applications requirements. The explosion-proof model is offered with 4 to 20
mA output for humidity only. The intrinsically-safe version is offered with 4 to
20 mA output for humidity and temperature. Both versions have an optional
two line alphanumeric display to show the current humidity and temperature.
The Series HHT humidity/temperature transmitter is excellent for offshore
HVAC applications, dust and grain applications. Intrinsically safe models
require an intrinsically safe barrier.
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 2% 10 90% RH, 0.9F at 72F (0.3C at 25C).
Hysteresis: 1%.
Compensated Temperature: 40 to 140F ( 40 to 60C).
Power Requirements: For instrinsically safe models HHT IX, 9.5 to 28
VDC. For explosion proof models HHT EX, 16.5 to 28 VDC.
Output Signal: 4 20 mA, 2 channels for humidity/temperature models
(loop power on RH).
Drift: <1% RH/year.
Temperature Sensor: Solid state band gap.
Housing Material: Aluminum.
Display: Optional 2 line alpha numeric, 8 characters/line. Temperature
display is F/C selectable.
Display Resolution: RH: 0.1%: Temperature 0.1F (0.1C).
Weight: 2 lb 8 oz (1134 g).
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66). Models HHT EX: FM Explosion
Proof, Class I Div. 1 Group B, C, D, Class II Div. 1 Group E, F, G, Class
III Div. 1; Models HHT IX: FM Instrinsically Safe, Class I Div. 1 Group A,
B, C, D, Class II Div. 1 Group E, F, G, Class III Div. 1 T4.
Agency Approvals: FM, CE.
Model
HHT-EU
HHT-IU
HHT-IT
HHT-EU-LCD
HHT-IT-LCD
Protection
Explosion Proof
Intrinsically Safe
Intrinsically Safe
Explosion Proof
Intrinsically Safe
Description
Humidity
Humidity
Humidity
Display
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
ACCESSORIES
KFD0-SCS-EX1.55 (see page 388), Loop powered galvanic isolator
A-287, Mounting bracket for pipe or surface mounting
(Includes bracket and two 2 U bolts)

146
C
a
r
b
o
n

M
o
n
o
x
d
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Series
WHT
Weather-Resistant Humidity/
Compact Housing, Sintered Filter
The Compact Series WHT Humidity/Temperature Transmitter is designed to
withstand the elements. A removable sintered filter protects the polymer capacitance
sensor from solid objects that may come in contact with the transmitter. The transmitter
is available with 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC output signals for both temperature and
humidity. This transmitter is ideal for measuring outside air temperature and humidity
levels for air handling economizer applications.
2X 5/16 [7.94]
4
[101.6]
3-31/64
[88.5]
3
[76.2]
4-9/16
[115.89]
2-3/4
[69.85]
1-31/64
[37.70]
1-27/64
[36.12]
SPECIFICATIONS
RH.
( 40 to 60C).
Accuracy, RH: 3% 20 80% RH, 4%
@ 10 20%, 80 90%.
Accuracy, Temp Models with 4-20 mA
Temp. Output: 0.9F @ 72F (0.3C
@ 25C).
Accuracy, Temp Models with Passive
Thermistor Temp Sensor: 0.4F @
77F (0.22C @ 25C).
Hysteresis, RH: 1%.
Repeatability, RH: 0.1% typical.
( 40 to 60C).
( 40 to 80C).
Compensated Temperature Range,
RH: 4 to 140F ( 20 to 60C).
4-20 mA Loop Powered Models:
Power requirements: 10 35 VDC;
Output signal: 4 20 mA.
0-10 V Output Models:
Power requirements: 15 35 VDC or
15 29 VAC;
Output signal: 0 10 V @ 5 mA max.
0-5 V Output Models:
Power requirements: 10 35 VDC or
10 29 VAC;
Output signal: 0 5 V @ 5 mA max.
Electrical Connections: Removable
screw terminal block.
Drift: <1% RH/year.
Temperature Sensor: 4 20 mA output,
solid state band gap. Passive output:
10K @ 25C thermistor (Dwyer curve
A).
Enclosure: ABS.
NEMA 3S (IP54).
Weight: 0.3 oz (8.5 g).
Model
WHT-310
WHT-311
WHT-320
WHT-322
WHT-330
WHT-333
WHT-31A
WHT-32A
Accuracy
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
RH Output
4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V
0 to 10 V
0 to 5 V
0 to 5 V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V
Note: For 2% accuracy, change the leading 3 to a 2.
(For example, WHT 210)
Temperature
None
4 to 20 mA
None
0 to 10 V
None
0 to 5 V
10 K Ohm
10 K Ohm
Carbon Monoxide Transmitter
Current/Voltage Output, 125 PPM Range
Series
CMT
The Series CMT Carbon Monoxide Transmitter accurately detects and transmits
low concentrations of carbon monoxide inside a parking garage or loading dock.
Transmitters can be ordered in wall mount or duct mount configurations. Universal current
and voltage outputs are field selectable and match most common building management
controllers. Optional relay and alarm buzzers are available on the wall mount models to
directly connect to a warning light or exhaust fan. The Series CMT can be field calibrated
using internal potentiometers. Software settings such as set points for optional relay
outputs are password protected.
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: 0 to 125 PPM CO.
Accuracy: 2.5% of reading.
Repeatability: 1% of reading.
Response Time: Less than 60 seconds typical for 90% step change.
Ambient Operating Temperature: 4 to 104F ( 20 to 40C).
Ambient Operating Humidity: 15 to 90% non condensing.
Power Requirements: 24 VDC/VAC at 100 mA.
Internal Display: Two line 8 digit alphanumeric LCD.
Sensor: Electrochemical (2 to 3 year expected life typical).
Output: Current/voltage: 4 to 20 mA and 2 to 10 VDC; Optional relay: (2) SPDT 1
Amp dry contact; Buzzer: 85 dB @ 1 foot.
Coverage Area: 7500 square feet (max).
Weight: 5.7 oz (161.6 g).
Model
CMT-WN
CMT-WN-WP
CMT-WR-WP
CMT-WN-D
CMT-DN
CMT-DN-D
Configuration
Wall
NEMA 4X Wall
NEMA 4X Wall
Wall
Duct
Duct
External Display
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
3-1/2 [88.90]
6 [152.40]
1-3/32
[27.69]
1-19/32
[40.31]
Wall Duct
Alarm/Buzzer
No
No
Yes
No
No
No

C
a
r
b
o
n

D
o
x
d
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
The Series CDW Wall Mount Carbon Dioxide/Temperature Transmitter
combines accurate CO
2
measurements with a passive temperature output. The Non-
Dispersive Infrared (NDIR) sensor continuously updates the calibration through a
proprietary logic feature which limits the amount of error due to drift. The CDW series
is ideal for building automation systems to help control the fresh air intake in a room.
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: 0 to 2000 PPM CO
2
.
Accuracy: 100 PPM @ 22C.
Temperature Dependence: 0.2% FS
per C stability < 2% of FS mover life of
sensor.
Non-linearity: < 1% of FS.
Pressure Dependence: 0.13% of
reading per mm of Hg.
Response Time: 3 to 5 minutes for
90% step change.
to 122F (0 to 50C).
( 20 to 70C).
Power Requirements: 18 30 VAC
RMS 50/60 Hz, 18 to 42 VDC polarity
protected.
Power Consumption: 1.75 VA
average 3.25 VA peak.
Sensor: Non dispersive infrared
sensor.
Output: 0 to 10 VDC for CO
2
; 20K ohm
NTC thermistor for temperature.
Weight: 0.5 lb (227 g).
Series
CDW
Wall Mount Carbon
Dioxide/Temperature Transmitter
Measure up to 2000 PPM, NDIR Sensor
3-7/32
[81.76]
1-5/64
[27.61]
1-1/4
[31.75]
1-9/32
[32.51]
1/4
[6.35]
19/32
[15.14]
3-35/64
[90.04]
3-31/32
[100.84]
4-5/8
[117.48]
C
L
6 6
Model CDW, Wall Mount CO2/Temperature Transmitter
Model CDW-LED, Standard Model with LED Option
Duct Mount Carbon Dioxide Transmitter
NDIR Sensing Technology, 2000 PPM Range
Model
CDD
The Model CDD Duct Mount Carbon Dioxide Transmitter monitors the occupancy
in a room by detecting the concentration of carbon dioxide in the return air duct. The non-
dispersive infrared sensing technology automatically updates the calibration of the
transmitter using a proprietary logic feature which limits the amount of error due to drift.
The Model CDD can measure up to 2000 PPM in duct air flows less than 1500 FPM.
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: 0 to 2000 PPM.
Accuracy: 40 PPM + 3% of reading
@ 22C.
Temperature Dependence: 0.2% FS
per C.
Stability: < 2% of FS over life of
sensor.
Non-Linearity: < 1% of FS.
Pressure Dependence: 0.13% of
reading per mm of Hg.
Response Time: 3 minutes typical for
90% step change.
Duct Air Velocity Range: 0 to 1500
FPM (7.63 m/s).
to 122F (0 to 50C).
( 20 to 70C).
Power Requirements: 18 to 30 VAC
RMS 50/60 Hz or 18 to 42 VDC.
Power Consumption: 1.65 watts peak
(0.65 watts average at 42 VDC).
Outputs: 0 to 10 VDC.
Housing: Flammability classification
UL rated 94V 5VA.
1-39/64
[40.88]
3-1/32
[77]
1-1/8
[28.58]
4-1/8
[104.78]
1-1/4
[31.7]
4X KNOCKOUT 1/2 CONDUIT HOLE
2X 7/32
[2X 5.56]
3-1/16
[77.79]
4-31/32
[126.21]
5-11/16
[144.46]
Model CDD, Carbon Dioxide Transmitter

148
O
c
c
u
p
a
n
c
y

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
Omnidirectional Occupancy Sensor
360 Detection Pattern, Energy Efficient
Model
OSC-200
The Model OSC-200 Omnidirectional Occupancy Sensor automatically
controls a HVAC ventilation system. A spherical Fresnel lens provides a 360
detection zone with the use of infrared technology. The integrated dual delay
processor saves energy by eliminating false activation due to short-term
occupancies. The Model OSC-200 is designed to be ceiling mounted.
SPECIFICATIONS
Infrared Sensor: Dual element.
Range: 34.4 ft (10.5 m) Diameter at 13.8 ft (4.2 m) mount height.
Detectable Speed: 0.33 to 9.8 ft/sec (0.1 to 3.0 m/sec).
Control Output Rating: SPDT, 0.2A at 30 VDC.
Power Consumption: Standby: 5 mA; Operating: 18 mA.
Mounting Height: 7.9 to 13.8 ft (2.4 to 4.2 m).
Power Requirements: 22 to 26 VAC/DC.
4-11/32
[110.33]
1-47/64
[44.05]
Wall Mount Occupancy Sensor
Wide Viewing Angle, Easy To Install
Model
OSW-100
The Model OSW-100 Wall Mount Occupancy Sensor is an infrared
sensor designed to automatically control a HVAC ventilation system. A unique
dual delay processor eliminates false triggers due to short-term occupancies.
The Model OSW-100 has a wide 110 viewing angle to capture movement up to
49.2 ft (15 m) away.
SPECIFICATIONS
Infrared Sensor: Dual element.
Range: 49.2 ft (15 m).
Detectable Speed: 0.33 to 9.8 ft/sec (0.1 to 3.0 m/sec).
Control Output Rating: SPDT, 0.2A @ 30 VDC.
Power Consumption: Standby: 5 mA;
Operating: 18 mA.
Mounting Height: 5.9 to 11.8 ft
(1.8 to 3.6 m).
Weight: 3.2 oz (90.7 g).
2-39/64
[66.28]
1-25/32
[45.24]
4-27/64
[112.32]
NEW PRODUCT!
Model OSC-200, Omnidirectional Occupancy Sensor
Model OSW-100, Wall Mount Occupancy Sensor

D
a
m
p
e
r

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
DDA and DDC Series Direct Coupled Actuators are non-spring return
actuators that are perfect for positioning of dampers and valves in HVAC
systems. DDA actuators are designed to accept floating control signals and
come in a variety of power supplies. DDC actuators are designed to accept 4 to
20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC modulating control signals and are 24 VAC powered.
DDC units feature a 0 to 10 VDC feedback signal of damper position. Actuators
produce 17 to 70 in-lb (2 to 8 Nm) of torque. Contact factory for optional internal
auxiliary switch on DDA.
FEATURES
Direct mount
Actuator travel indicator
Overload protection
Manual override
Floating control signal on DDA
Modulating 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC control signal on DDC
Position feedback signal on DDC
60,000 cycles nominal
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Requirements: DDA: 110 VAC, 24 VAC, 10%, 50/60 Hz, single
phase. Optional 230 VAC; DDC: 24 VAC, 10%, 50/60 Hz, single phase.
Power Consumption: DDA: 110 VAC models: 5 VA, 230 VAC models:
5 VA, 24 VAC models: 3 VA; DDC: 4 VA.
Control Input: DDA: Two position, floating; DDC: 4 20 mA or 0 10
VDC.
Overload Protection: Magnetic clutch.
Angle of Rotation: 95 (mechanically adjustable).
Fits Shaft Diameter: 0.4 (10 mm) or 0.5 (13 mm).
Position Indication: Visual indicator.
Direction of Rotation: CW/CCW.
Running Time: 17 in lb, 35 in lb, 53 in lb: 110 sec.; 70 in lb:160 sec.
Electrical Connection: Terminal block, 18 AWG.
Manual Override: Push button.
Sound: <45 dB.
Life Expectancy: 60000 full cycles.
Housing: NEMA 2 (IP40).
Standard Accessories: (2) imitative baffles, (2) baffle setscrews, (1)
actuator body setscrew, and (1) aluminum gasket.
Weight: 1.72 lb (0.78 kg).
Model
DDA11
DDA13
DDA21
DDA23
DDA31
DDA33
DDA41
DDA43
DDC13
DDC23
DDC33
DDC43
Size/ Torque
17 in lb [2 Nm]
17 in lb [2 Nm]
35 in lb [4 Nm]
35 in lb [4 Nm]
53 in lb [6 Nm]
53 in lb [6 Nm]
70 in lb [8 Nm]
70 in lb [8 Nm]
17 in lb [2 Nm]
35 in lb [4 Nm]
53 in lb [6 Nm]
70 in lb [8 Nm]
5-23/32
[145.26]
4-53/64
[122.63]
17/32 SQ
[13.49]
3-25/64
[86.12]
63/64
[25.00]
2-59/64
[74.22]
1-47/64
[44.05]
9/64
[3.57]
21/32
[16.67]
Non-Spring Return Direct Coupled Actuators
Low Cost, Two-Position or Modulating
Series
DDA
&
DDC
Supply Voltage
110 VAC
24 VAC
110 VAC
24 VAC
110 VAC
24 VAC
110 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
Input
Floating
Floating
Floating
Floating
Floating
Floating
Floating
Floating
Modulating
Modulating
Modulating
Modulating

150
D
a
m
p
e
r

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
s
A
I
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
DDB and DDD Series Direct Coupled Actuators are non-spring return
actuators that are perfect for positioning of dampers and valves in HVAC sys-
tems. DDB actuators are designed to accept floating control signals and come
in a variety of power supplies. DDD Actuators are designed to accept 4 to 20
mA or 0 to 10 VDC modulating control signals and are 24 VAC powered. DDD
units feature a 0 to 10 VDC feedback signal of damper position. Actuators pro-
duce 88 to 265 in-lb (10 to 30 Nm) of torque. Contact factory for optional inter-
nal auxiliary switches on DDB.
FEATURES
Direct mount
Actuator travel indicator
Overload protection
Manual override
Floating control signal on DDB
Modulating 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC control signal on DDD
Position feedback signal on DDD
60,000 cycles nominal
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Requirements: DDB: 110 VAC, 24 VAC, 10%, 50/60 Hz, single
phase. Optional 230 VAC. DDD: 24 VAC, 10%, 50/60 Hz, single phase.
Power Consumption: DDB: 5.5 VA. DDD: 7.5 VA.
Control Input: DDB: Two position or floating. DDD: 4 20 mA or 0 10
VDC.
Overload Protection: Magnetic clutch.
Angle of Rotation: 95 (mechanically adjustable).
Accuracy: DDD: 5%.
Fits Shaft Diameter: 0.4 0.75 (10 20 mm).
Position Indication: Visual indicator.
Direction of Rotation: CW/CCW.
Running Time: 88 in lb: 66 sec., 132 in lb: 90 sec., 177 in lb: 110 sec.;
265 in lb:143 sec.
Electrical Connection: Terminal block, 18 AWG.
Manual Override: Push button.
Sound: <45 dB.
Life Expectancy: 60000 full cycles.
Housing: NEMA 2 (IP42).
Standard Accessories: (2) imitative baffles, (2) baffle setscrews, (1)
setting bracket.
Weight: DDB: 2.87 lb (1.3 kg) 88, 132 in lb models; 3.68 lb (1.67 kg)
177, 265 in lb models; DDD: 2.98 lb (1.35 kg) 88, 132 in lb models; 3.79
lb (1.72 kg) 177, 265 in lb models.
Model
DDB51
DDB53
DDB61
DDB63
DDB71
DDB73
DDB81
DDB83
DDD53
DDD63
DDD73
DDD83
Size/ Torque
88 in lb [10 Nm]
88 in lb [10 Nm]
132 in lb [15 Nm]
132 in lb [15 Nm]
177 in lb [20 Nm]
177 in lb [20 Nm]
265 in lb [30 Nm]
265 in lb [30 Nm]
88 in lb [10 Nm]
132 in lb [15 Nm]
177 in lb [20 Nm]
265 in lb [30 Nm]
F
A
B
D
E
C
Size
88 in lb (10 Nm) &
132 in lb (15 Nm)
177 in lb (20 Nm) &
265 in lb (30 Nm)
A
4 17/64
[108.35]
4 57/64
[124.22]
B
6 55/64
[174.23]
7 23/32
[196.06]
C
2 49/64
[70.25]
2 23/32
[69.06]
D
1 35/64
[39.29]
E
1 1/32
[26.19]
F
1 15/64
[31.35]
1 25/64
[35.32]
Non-Spring Return Direct Coupled Actuators
Low Cost, Two-Position or Modulating
Series
DDB
&
DDD
Supply Voltage
110 VAC
24 VAC
110 VAC
24 VAC
110 VAC
24 VAC
110 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
Input
Floating
Floating
Floating
Floating
Floating
Floating
Floating
Floating
Modulating
Modulating
Modulating
Modulating

FLOW
pages 152 154
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
page 155
Flowmeters,
Variable Area
pages 156 175
Flowmeters,
In-Line
pages 176 185
Flow Sensors,
In-Line
pages 186 187
Flowmeters
with Switch
pages 195 196
Flow Switches,
Paddle
pages 197 204
Flow Switches,
Shuttle/Piston
pages 205 209
Flowmeters,
Orifice Plate
pages 188 191
Sight Flow
Indicators
pages 192 194, 217 219
Flow Transmitters,
In-Line
pages 214 216
Flow Transmitters,
Paddlewheel
pages 217 220
Flow Transmitters,
Turbine
pages 219, 221 223
Flow Switches,
Thermal
pages 210 212
Flow Switches,
Piezo
page 213
Mass Flowmeters/
Controllers
pages 234 236
Flowmeters,
Totalizing
pages 219, 224 226
Flow Transmitters,
Ultrasonic
pages 227 233

152
T
y
p
c
a

A
p
p
c
a
t
o
n
s
F
L
O
W
Inlet Cyclone
Control Panel
Electronics Section
Mini-Master
Flowmeter
Air Moving
Section
Battery Pack
Optical Section
Regulations regarding air pollution levels require continuous
monitoring a source and ambient pollutants in areas where
noxious gases are generated. Ambient air quality samplers utilize
either Visi-Float
or Rate-Master
flowmeters to establish the

proper flow of sample or carrier gases into the analyzer. Top
mounted metering valves are recommended for flowmeters used
in vacuum service to maintain specified accuracy.
Metering valves on Dwyer
flowmeters control air/gas

intake on permanent air pollution analyzers.
Sample Analyzer
Vacuum Pump
Flowmeter
Sample
In Take
Metering
Valve
This low temperature incubator with CO
2
atmosphere is used in
bio-medical applications, such as short term blood work and long
term tissue culture studies. CO
2
is introduced at a high initial
purge rate controlled by a timer. After the purge period, a Dwyer
Visi-Float
flowmeter with a metering valve is utilized to adjust and

monitor the CO
2
flow in cubic centimeters per minute. The Visi-
Float
flowmeter provides the reliability and accuracy needed to

complement the host of high performance features designed into
this incubator.
Designers of a bio-medical incubator rely on a
Dwyer
flowmeter to control CO
2
flow.
037
Chamber
Controls
Visi-Float
Flowmeter
Differential
Pressure Switch
LO
HI
Purge Gas Supply
Rate-Master
Flowmeters
Switchbox
Motor
Generator
To purge motors, generators, switchgear, and industrial instrument
cases, Dwyer
flowmeters are installed in the supply line to

indicate a flow of air, manufactured inert gas, or nitrogen to these
devices. The flowmeters (with valves) allow maintenance
personnel to set the flow quickly and recheck anytime to make
sure proper flow continues. A Dwyer
differential pressure switch

can also be used to monitor proper flow on a continuous basis
and provide a signal or alarm if purge gas flow fails. Such an
optional switch is shown above, monitoring proper flow of purge
gas to the switchbox as a function of pressure drop across the
flowmeter. The purging of electrical equipment in hazardous areas
may require more extensive control and monitoring devices.
Flowmeters and/or differential pressure switches
monitor vital purge gas flow to motors, switchgear,
instruments.
The small size, accuracy, and low cost of the Dwyer
Mini-Master
Series flowmeter lends itself perfectly to use in this portable,

battery-operated dust monitor. Using a light scattering electronic
sampler, a small vacuum pump draws air through the flowmeter
into the sampling chamber, and the flowmeter verifies the proper
volume of sample air flow. Readout is digital and directly in dust
weight per cubic meter of air.
Operator uses Mini-Master
flowmeter to verify air

flow into portable dust monitor.

T
y
p
c
a

A
p
p
c
a
t
o
n
s
F
L
O
W
In this gravity feed system delivering liquid fertilizer to portable
tanks, a Midwest Model 100 sight flow indicator was installed. The
operator can see the rotating vanes to check for adequate flow at
any time.
W.E. Anderson
Midwest Sight Flow Indicator reveals

flow or stoppage.
Storage Tank
Portable
Tank
Valve
Midwest
Sight Flow
Indicator
Large air conditioning and refrigeration systems which include
water cooled condensers require that the water must circulate
through the condenser and cooling tower in sufficient volume
before the compressor is started. Here the W.E. Anderson
Flotect
flow switch is connected to the compressor control circuit

to prevent starting or to shut down the compressor control circuit
if the flow of cooling water falls below that required for proper
operation. A dual Flotect
switch (available as an option) will also

trigger a remote alarm to signal the operator of the shutdown as
soon as it occurs.
Flotect
flow switch ensures cooling water

circulation before air conditioning compressor motor
starts.
Alarm
Cooling Tower
Flotect
Switch
Circulating
Pump
Condenser
Air Conditioning
Unit
A Dwyer
brass body Capsuhelic
differential pressure gage,

required for water service to prevent corrosion damage to the
gage, is used in conjunction with a Dwyer
Series DS-300
averaging Pitot tube. The Capsuhelic
gage provides a basic

method of measuring water flow rates. As a guide in selecting the
appropriate Capsuhelic
gage range, the designer can consult

data provided with the DS-300 averaging Pitot tube. This relates
differential pressure in inches of water column to the water flow in
gallons per minute for the pipe size involved. The gage can be
calibrated directly in GPM if desired. Bleed fittings installed in the
top ports of the gage are recommended to facilitate removal of air
from the system.
Brass body gage measures water flow rates.
LO HI
Capsuhelic
Differential
Pressure Gage
(Brass Option)
Bleed Fittings
Series DS-300
Averaging Pitot Tube
Water Flow
When main pump fails, Flotect
flow switch transfers

to standby pump to maintain vital fluid circulation.
When proper fluid circulation in a system is critical, the W.E.
Anderson
Flotect
flow switch will automatically start a standby

pump should the main pump fail. The flow in the main path of the
parallel system illustrated keeps the Flotect
flow switch in an
open position. When the main pump fails, the flow will cease. The
flow switch then closes, starting the standby pump.
Check Valve
Main Pump
Supply
Standby Pump
Check Valve
Check Valve
Return
Flotect
Switch

154
T
y
p
c
a

A
p
p
c
a
t
o
n
s
F
L
O
W
Prior to atomizing a heated salt solution to produce a fog inside
this corrosion test cabinet, compressed air is bubbled through a
heated water column to properly heat and humidify the air. A
Dwyer
Visi-Float
VFA flowmeter, as part of the system, provides

precise adjustment of the bubbler air flow to meet test standards.
Salt corrosion test cabinet includes a Dwyer
flowmeter for adjustment of bubbler air flow.

Test Tank
Controls
Bubbler
Column
Visi-Float
Flowmeter
Clear Plastic Cover
Physicians and oral surgeons who use anesthesia or analgesia in
their offices on an occasional basis require a system that is
reliable but small and portable. One such system employs special
Dwyer
dual-column Visi-Float
flowmeters to meter and monitor

precise flows of nitrous oxide and oxygen to the patient. In
addition to meeting the performance level demanded by this
application, the Visi-Float
flowmeters are durable and attractive

complements to this important and visible medical device.
Durable dual-column flowmeter adds value for
physicians and oral surgeons.
Visi-Float
Dual Column
Flow
Patient Mask
O2
Tank
N2O
Tank
In this set-up, the Magnehelic
gage measures higher air

velocities as a function of the pressure drop across a sharp-edged
orifice plate in the pipe. The pressure drops can be converted to
air velocity using orifice plate data supplied by the manufacturer.
Details regarding available sizes, ranges, installation, and
limitations are available from orifice plate manufacturers and from
standard handbooks. A Dwyer
Durablock
inclined manometer
or Photohelic
differential pressure switch/gage can also be used.

In addition to the visual reading gage, the Photohelic
switch/gage
provides an alarm signal or shutdown control function. Pressure
sensing taps should be located on the side or top of the pipe or
duct to prevent condensation from draining into sensing lines or
gages.
Measuring air velocity with an orifice plate.
Flow
Orifice Plate
Duct
Static Pressure Taps
Magnehelic
Gage
LO
HI
A total of eleven Dwyer
Rate-Master
flowmeters function in the

design of this sophisticated conveyor belt furnace used in
manufacturing electronic devices. The flowmeters provide precise
adjustment and monitoring of the flows of air and gases into the
various portions of the furnace, which allow it to perform different
operations, such as decarburizing and oxidizing, metallic package
sealing, glass package sealing, and glass-to-metal sealing.
Flows of air and gases used in a special furnace are
controlled by Dwyer
flowmeters.
Furnace
Control Panel
Rate-Master
Flowmeters
Conveyor

T
e
c
h
n
c
a

I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
o
n
F
L
O
W
If more convenient, approximate correction factors may be determined
using the following formulas.
A. Pressure: Q2 = Q1 X P1 X T2
P2 X T1
where: Q
1
= Actual or Observed Flowmeter Reading
Q
2
= Standard Flow Corrected for Pressure and Temperature
P
1
= Actual Pressure (14.7 psia + Gage Pressure)
P
2
= Standard Pressure (14.7 psia, which is 0 psig)
T
1
= Actual Temperature (460 R + Temp F)
T
2
= Standard Temperature (530 R, which is 70F)
CONVERSION CURVES FOR GASES
ACTUAL GAS FLOW CORRECTED FOR PRESSURE*
SPEClFIC GRAVITY OF GAS (REFERRED TO AIR)
GAS PRESSURE PSIG BELOW ATMOSPHERE
B. Specific Gravity: Q2 = Q1 X 1
S.G.
where: Q1 = Observed Flowmeter Reading
Q2 = Standard Flow Corrected for Specific Gravity
1 = Specific Gravity of Air
S.G.= Specific gravity of gas being used in flowmeter originally calibrated for air.
Note: The corrections shown in the curves and in the formulas are for variations in specific gravity
and internal pressure* only. Further correction may be necessary for variations in viscosity and
changes in type of flow from laminar to turbulent or vice versa. This is particularly true in the case
of extremely low flows of the lighter gases. Nevertheless these charts and correction factors can
be quite useful when dealing with small changes in pressure* and specific gravity.
*Measured at discharge on all but TMV units. Inlet pressure on TMV models.
EQUIVALENT GAS FLOW CORRECTED FOR SPECIFIC GRAVITY STD. COND.*
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 1 2 3 4 5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
O
B
S
E
R
V
E
D

F
L
O
W
M
E
T
E
R

R
E
A
D
N
G
G
A
S

P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E

P
S
G

A
B
O
V
E

A
T
M
O
S
P
H
E
R
E
O
B
S
E
R
V
E
D

F
L
O
W
M
E
T
E
R

R
E
A
D
N
G
0
2
4
6
8
10
15
20
30
40
60
80
100
14 12 10 8 6 4 2
2.2 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
0.2
0.1
6 7 8 9 10

156
F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

V
a
r
a
b
e

A
r
e
a
F
L
O
W
Offering advanced features at low cost, the Series MM flowmeters are ideal
for a wide range of OEM and user applications in medical equipment, air
samplers, gas analyzers, pollution monitors, chemical injectors, cabinet
purging, etc.
The standard Model MMA flowmeter is suitable for both gas and liquid
applications. It can be configured by the user with the parts provided to have
non-removable top or bottom front mounted metering valves or no valve at all.
The transparent nylon material provides high chemical resistance, low moisture
absorption and is transparent to facilitate routine inspection. Using the
assembly key provided, the flowmeter can be disassembled anytime for cleaning
or reconfiguration. In OEM quantities, ultrasonically welded caps or
interchangeable mold cores enable production of the MMA flowmeter with a low
profile or flat front surface where no valve is required.
The MMA is practically unbreakable, mounts easily, and is easy to read. Two
5/16 O.D. mounting connection tubes permit quick push-on connection of
rubber or plastic tubing. A bottom clip for stand up mounting is also provided.
A. Standard Model MMA
B. Standard Model MMA with field configurable valve, bottom mount
C. Standard Model MMA with field configurable valve, top mount
Model MMF-50-PV
1-1/2 scale, with
metering valve, knob.
Model MMF-10
with 1-1/2 scale,
no valve.
Model MMF-10-TMV with
top-mounted valve-for
vacuum service. Use
screwdriver to adjust.
Series
MM
Mini-Master
Flowmeters
Used to Indicate or Manually Control Air or Water
Despite its compactness, the MMA flowmeter features a 2 scale which
combined with precision molding, enables highly repeatable readings to be
made to within 4% accuracy.
Where a compact flowmeter is required to measure small volume air flows, the
Model MMF is recommended. Easy to mount, they require a minimum of panel
space. A white back on the flow tube makes the ball float easy to see. The 1-1/2
scale is highly visible and easy to read. Scale graduations are printed on
aluminum alongside the flow tube (not on it), so the position of ball float is
instantly visible.
The Model MMFs bezel type mounting is modern, attractive and quickly
installed from the front of instrument panel. Two 1/4 O.D. mounting-
connection tubes are integrally molded with flowmeter body. They can be back
connected to flexible rubber or plastic tubing and held in place with two spring
retainers which are furnished. If preferred, connections may be made to metal
or rigid plastic tubing with a double compression fitting or nylon tube union
such as Dwyer Part No. A-328.
Excellent repeatability and 10% accuracy make the MMF flowmeter an
excellent value at its low cost.
A B C

F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

V
a
r
a
b
e

A
r
e
a
F
L
O
W
Model MMA Model MMF
MMA tubing connections
secured by clamp. Standup
mounting clip shown.
Spring retainers on connection
tubes secure panel mounted
MMA. Compression union, P/N
A 327 shown.
Model MMF connections.
Connector at top, installed in
panel, has retainer and flexible
tubing in place. Connector at
bottom shows alternative
connection with metal or rigid
plastic tubing, using a double
compression nylon tube union
(as Dwyer Part No. A 328).
Model MMF mounts easily from
front of panel. Drill two 9/32 or
5/16 dia. holes in panel on 2
1/16 centers. Insert mounting
connector spuds. From rear, slide
on the two spring retainers
(furnished) and push on rubber or
plastic tubing.
How To Order
MMA Range No.
Example: MMA 4
Series MMA with .5 5 SCFH Air Range
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Body: Nylon 12; O rings: Buna N (optional materials
available); Float: Black glass, K monel, stainless steel, tungsten carbide.
Pressure Limit: 100 psi (6.9 bar) with compression fitting. 50 psi
(3.4 bar) with tubing clamp.
Process Connection: 5/16 O.D. for push on rubber or plastic tubing
with provided spring tubing clamp. Connect to rigid tubing with double
compression fitting.
Weight: 1 oz (28.35 g).
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Body: Styrene acrylonitrile; Float: Stainless steel,
black glass, nylon; Valve: Polyurethane.
Pressure Limit: 50 psi (3.4 bar). Valve option: 10 psi (0.6 bar).
Process Connection: 1/4 O.D. for push on rubber or plastic tubing.
Connect to rigid tubing with compression fittings.
Weight: 0.5 oz (14.17 g).
How To Order
MMF Range No. Valve
Example: MMF 1 PV
Series MMF with .1 1 SCFH Air Range with Valve
Range SCFH Air
.1 1
.2 2
1 10
5 50
10 100
Range No.
1
2
10
50
100
Model MMF Mini-Master
Ranges
Range
SCFH Air
.5 2.5
.5 5
1 10
2 20
5 50
10 100
20 200
30 300
Range
No.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Model MMA Mini-Master
Ranges
Range
LPM Air
.2 1.2
.25 2.5
.5 5
1 10
2.5 25
5 50
10 100
15 150
Range
No.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Range GPH
Water
.5 8
1 16
4 40
5 60
CC/Min. Water
5 50
10 150
20 200
50 500
LPM Water
.1 1.1
.25 2.5
.3 3.5
Range
No.
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
Model MMA
A-327, 5/16 Union
Model MMF-X, Standard MMF
Model MMF-X-PV, MMF with bottom mount valve
Model MMF-X-TMV, MMF with top mount valve
A-328, 1/4 Union

158
F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

V
a
r
a
b
e

A
r
e
a
F
L
O
W
The Rate-Master
flowmeter line of direct reading precision flowmeters incorporates

many unique user features at moderate cost. These low cost flowmeters are ideal for
general use.
Easy to read design The direct reading scales eliminate troublesome conversions. The
scales are brushed aluminum, coated with epoxy and the graduations are on both sides of
the indicating tube. Special integral flow guides stabilize the float throughout the range
to keep it from hunting or wandering in the bore. The float is highly visible against a white
background.
Construction assures accuracy All Rate-Master
flowmeter bodies are injection

molded of tough, clear, shatter-proof polycarbonate plastic around a precision tapered pin.
The result is accurate and repeatable readings. The single piece plastic body is mounted to
a stainless steel back bone into which pipe thread inserts are welded to absorb piping
torque. Precision metering valves of brass or stainless steel (specify BV or SSV on order)
are available as an optional extra and permit precise flow adjustments. For vacuum
applications, Model RMA units are available with top mounted valves (specify TMV). The
small Series RMA models are accurate within 4% of full scale reading; Series RMB within
3%; large Series RMC within 2%.
Model RMC-SSV 10
scale, 15-3/8 high
Model RMB-SSV 5
scale, 8-3/4 high
Model RMA-SSV 2
scale, 4-13/16 high
Rate-Master
Flowmeters
Polycarbonate, Gas Flow from 0.05-1800 SCFH, Water Flows to 10 GPM
F
J
BACK WIDTH
K
D
E
G
H
I
FULL OPEN
L
C
B
A
Installation is simple The Rate-Master
Flowmeter can be neatly panel mounted to

keep flow tube centers in the same plane as the panel surface or surface mounted on the
panel by means of tapped holes in the backbone. When through-panel mounted, the bezel
automatically positions the instrument at the correct depth in the panel cutout. Surface
mounted units can also be held in place by the piping. All mounting hardware plus
installation and operating instructions are included.
Easy-to-Interchange bodies Within a given Series Rate-Master
flowmeter bodies
can be instantly interchanged. Simply unplug the body from backbone and replace it with
another. O rings provide a tight seal on inlet and outlet. Piping remains undisturbed.
Interchangeability is useful where different scale ranges are sometimes required at the
same location in the laboratory or plant.
Cleaning is easy To release the plastic flowmeter body from the stainless steel
backbone, just remove four screws. Pipe thread flow connections remain undisturbed.
Remove the slide cover and the plug ball stop, clean the flow tube with soap and water and
reassemble. Its that simple.
Series
RM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
(OPEN)
J
K
L
Model RMA
4 9/16 (11.59)
3 (7.62)
1/8 NPT CONN.
1 5/8 (4.13)
10 32 Thds.
3/8 (.95)
1 1/16 (2.70)
1 3/16 (3.02)
11/16 (1.75)
61/64 (2.42)
1 3/8 (3.49)
3/4 (1.91)
4 13/16 (12.22)
1 (2.54)
Model RMB
8 1/2 (21.59)
6 7/16 (16.35)
1/4 NPT CONN.
3 15/16 (10.00)
1/4 20 Thds.
5/8 (1.59)
1 7/8 (4.76)
1 3/4 (4.45)
1 (2.54)
1 7/16 (3.65)
1 13/16 (4.60)
1 1/4 (3.18)
8 3/4 (22.23)
1 1/2 (3.81)
Dimensions in Inches (Centimeters)
Model RMC
15 1/8 (38.42)
12 1/4 (31.12)
1/2 NPT CONN.
8 3/4 (22.23)
10 32 Thds.
1 (2.54)
2 3/4 (6.99)
2 1/2 (6.35)
1 7/16 (3.65)
1 31/32 (5.00)
2 1/2 (6.35)
2 (5.08)
15 3/8 (39.05)
2 1/4 (5.72)

F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

V
a
r
a
b
e

A
r
e
a
F
L
O
W
Model RMA-2 Scale Model RMB-5 Scale Model RMC-10 Scale
Range
SCFH Air
.05 .5
.1 1
.2 2
.5 5
1 10
2 20
5 50
10 100
15 150
20 200
CC Air/min.
5 50
10 100
30 240
50 500
100 1000
200 2500
LPM Air
.5 5
1 10
2 25
5 50
5 70
10 100
CC Water/min.
5 50
10 110
20 300
Gal.Water/hr
1 11
2 24
4 34
5 50
Range
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
151*
150*
11
12
13
14
26
21
22
23
24
25
32
33
34
42
43
44
45
Range
SCFH Air
.5 5
1 10
3 20
4 50
10 100
20 200
40 400
50 500
60 600
Gal. Water
per hour
1 12
1 20
4 40
10 100
SCFH & LPM
Air
1.2 10/0.6 5
3 20/1.5 9.5
4 50/2 23
10 100/5 50
20 200/5 95
GPH & LPM
Water
1 12/0.06 0.76
1 20/0.065 1.25
10 100/0.8 6.2
Range
No.
49+
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
82
83
84
85
50D
51D
52D
53D
54D
82D
83D
85D
Range
SCFH Air
5 50
10 100
20 200
40 400
60 600
100 1000
120 1200
200 1800
SCFM Air
1 10
2 20
4 30
Gal. Water
per hour
2 20
8 90
Gal.Water
per minute
.1 1
.2 2.2
.4 4
.8 7
1.2 10
Range
No.
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
121
122
123
134
135
141
142
143
144
145
CAUTION
Dwyer
Rate Master
flowmeters are designed to provide satisfactory

long term service when used with air, water, or other compatible media.
Refer to factory for information on questionable gases or liquids. Caustic
solutions, anti freeze (ethylene glycol) and aromatic solvents should
definitely not be used.
Top Mounted Metering Valves Same
precision construction for vacuum applications.
RMA models only.
Specials Special ranges, scales, mounting
arrangements, etc., are available on special
order, or in OEM quantities.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Body: Polycarbonate; O ring: Neoprene and Buna N;
Metal parts: stainless steel (except for optional brass valve); Float:
stainless steel, black glass, aluminum, K monel, tungsten carbide
depending on range.
Pressure Limit: 100 psi (6.9 bar).
Accuracy: RMA: 4%; RMB: 3%; RMC: 2% of full scale.
Process Connection: RMA: 1/8; RMB: 1/4; RMC: 1/2 female NPT.
Weight: RMA: 4 oz (113.4 g); RMB: 13 oz (368.5 g); RMC: 39 oz
(1105.6 g).
Adjustable pointer flags Red lined pointer
flags provide quick visual reference to a
required flow level. Of clear plastic, they snap
into place inside bezel and slide to desired level.
How To Order
Series Range No.(X) Valve Option
Example: RMA 2 SSV
Series RMA with .1 1 SCFH Air Range & Stainless Steel Valve
Popular Ranges
*Accuracy 8%
+Accuracy 5%
Model RMA
Model RMA-X, Standard RMA
Model RMA-X-BV, RMA with Brass Valve
Model RMA-X-SSV, RMA with Stainless Steel Valve
Model RMA-X-TMV, RMA with Top Mounted Valve
Model RMB
Model RMB-X, Standard RMB
Model RMB-X-BV, RMB with Brass Valve
Model RMB-X-SSV, RMB with Stainless Steel Valve
Model RMC
Model RMC-X, Standard RMC
Model RMC-X-BV, RMC with Brass Valve
Model RMC-X-SSV, RMC with Stainless Steel Valve
Model RMA-X-APF, Adjustable Pointer Flag for RMA Series
Model RMB-X-BPF, Adjustable Pointer Flag for RMB Series
Model RMC-X-CPF, Adjustable Pointer Flag for RMC Series
Model RKA, Regulator Kit for RMA Series
Model RK-RMB, Regulator Kit for RMB Series

160
F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

V
a
r
a
b
e

A
r
e
a
F
L
O
W
The Visi Float
flowmeter bodies are cut and precision machined from solid,

clear acrylic plastic blocks. This construction not only produces a handsome
finished product, but permits complete visual inspection. As a result, the Visi-
Float
flowmeters are especially popular for medical and laboratory equipment

applications.
Scales are easy to read The front scale location and white background
provides excellent visibility. The direct reading scales are hot stamped into the
plastic and will not wear off. Midrange calibration is established with a master
flowmeter. Accuracy is 5% of full scale for VFA models, 3% for VFB. Scales
average 2" long on the VFA models, 4" long on VFB.
Durable and attractive construction The machined acrylic bodies of the
VisiFloat
flowmeters are practically unbreakable. Fabrication is backed by

over 60 years of experience in acrylic instrument machining. The tapered bore
is precision machined to a smooth surface that provides perfect visibility of the
indicating float. The VFA and VFB models are available with either brass or
stainless steel inlet and outlet connections and are tapped for 1/8 NPT thread.
VFB models 85 and 86 have either 1/4 back or 3/8 end connections. All
standard models employ BunaN O rings for leak proof operation and are
available with either back or end connections for horizontal or vertical piping.
Precision metering valves in brass or stainless steel are available for most VFA
and VFB models.
Easy installation All VisiFloat
flowmeters have metal mounting inserts

on rear for panel mounting. They can also be supported directly by system
piping.
Visi-Float
Flowmeters
Used to Indicate or Manually Control Air or Water Flow
Series
VFA
&
VFB
Dimension-In-Inches
A
B
C
D
E
F
I
K
L
M
N
Model VFA
4
3 (1/8 female NPT)
1 5/8 (10 32 Thread)
1/2
1 3/16
1 1/4
2 1/16 (BV or SSV)
4 3/32
1
3/4 (EC)
3/32 (EC)
Model VFB
6 1/2
5 1/2 (1/8 female NPT)
3 1/2 (10 32 thread)
1/2
1 1/2
1 1/4
2 1/16 (BV or SSV)
6 19/32
1 3/8
3/4(EC)
3/32 (EC)
Model VFA and VFB
L
K
N
F
M
A B C
E
D
M
I
FULL OPEN

F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

V
a
r
a
b
e

A
r
e
a
F
L
O
W
Model VFA 2 Scale
Range SCFH Air
.1 1
.2 2
.6 5
1 10
2 20
4 30
5 50
10 100
20 200
CC Water per min.
6 50
10 100
20 200
Range No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
32
33
34
Range LPM Air
.06 0.5
.15 1
.6 5
1 10
3 25
6 50
10 100
Gal. Water per hour
.6 5
2 10
3 20
8 40
Range No.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
41
42
43
44
Special Multi-Column Visi-Float
Flowmeters
Perfect for OEM applications, Visi-Float
flowmeters can be custom made

with up to 10 columns in a single block of acrylic plastic.
Available with or without valves. Consult factory for more information.
How To Order
Series Range No. (X) Valve Option
Example: VFA 9 BV
Series VFA with 20 200 SCFH Air Range & Brass Valve
OEM Specials Special flowmeter designs can be supplied to meet a wide
range of requirements and specific applications. These include: on-off plunger
and push-to-test valves, special gas or fluid calibration, special ranges, scales,
name brand or other identification. Pointer flags can be furnished for instant
visual reference. For specific information, please supply an outline of your
requirements.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Body: Acrylic plastic;
O ring: Buna N (fluoroelastomer available);
Metal parts: Brass standard, stainless steel optional;
Float: Stainless steel, black glass, aluminum, K monel depending on
range.
Temperature & Pressure Limits:
Without Valve: 100 psig (6.9 bar) @ 150F (65C); 150 psig (10 bar)
@ 100F (38C);
With Valve: 100 psig (6.9 bar) @ 120F (48C).
Accuracy: VFA = 5% of full scale; VFB = 3% of full scale.
Process Connection: 1/8 female NPT. VFB ranges 85 and 86 have
1/4 NPT back connections or 3/8 NPT end connections. These ranges
not available with brass valves.
Scale Length: VFA 2 typical length; VFB 4 typical length.
Mounting Orientation: Mount in vertical position.
Weight: VFA: 4.0 to 4.8 oz (.11 to .14 kg); VFB: 7.2 to 8.8 oz
(.20 to .25 kg).
Model VFB 4 Scale
Range SCFH Air
.3 3
1 10
2 20
4 40
10 100
10 150
20 200
SCFM Air
.3 3
CC/Min. Air
100 1000
Range No.
50
91
+
51
+
52
53
+
54
+
55
+
90
60
LPM Air
.2 4
1 10
1 20
3 30
4 40
CC/Min. Water
2 30
GPH Water
.5 12
1 20
6 40
6 60
GPM Water
.2 2
.6 5
Range No.
65
66
67
68
69
82
80
+
83
+
84
81
85*
86*
Popular Ranges
VFA Series VFB Series
+
For dual range models in English and Metric add D to end of
Range No.
Popular Ranges
Model
VFA-X
VFA-X-SS
VFA-X-BV
VFA-X-SSV
VFA-X-EC
VFA-X-EC-SS
Model
VFB-X
VFB-X-SS
VFB-X-BV
VFB-X-SSV
VFB-X-EC
VFB-X-EC-SS
Description
Standard VFB
VFB with Stainless Metal Wetted Parts
VFB with Brass Valve
VFB with Stainless Steel Valve
VFB with End Connections
VFB with End Connections and Stainless
Steel Metal Wetted Parts
* Ranges 85 and 86 consult factory. Not available with brass
valve.
-PF, Red ABS Plastic Pointer Flag
-VIT, Fluoroelastomer O rings
RK-VFB, Pressure Regulator
-PF, Red ABS Plastic Pointer Flag
-VIT, Fluoroelastomer O rings
RKA, Pressure Regulator
Description
Standard VFA
VFA with Stainless Metal Wetted Parts
VFA with Brass Valve
VFA with Stainless Steel Valve
VFA with End Connections
VFA with End Connections and Stainless
Steel Metal Wetted Parts

162
F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

V
a
r
a
b
e

A
r
e
a
F
L
O
W
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Body: Acrylic plastic;
O ring: Buna N (fluoroelastomer available);
Metal parts: Stainless steel;
Float: SS.
Fittings: VFC: PVC; VFCII: Acetal thermoplastic.
Temperature & Pressure Limits: 100 psig (6.9 bar) @ 120F (48C).
Process Connection: VFC: 1 female NPT back connections. End
connections optional; VFCII: 1 male NPT back connections. End
connections optional.
Scale Length: 5 typical length.
Mounting Orientation: Mount in vertical position.
Weight: 24 to 25 oz (.68 to .71 kg).
Model VFC 5 Scale
Range SCFM Air
4 25
5 50
10 100
LPM Air
60 700
200 1400
300 2800
Range No.
121
122
123
131
132
133
Range GPM Water
.5 5
1 10
2 20
LPM Water
2 20
4 40
10 75
Range No.
141
142
143
151
152
153
Popular Ranges
The accurate and durable VFC Visi-Float
flowmeter contains a stainless

steel guide rod and large diameter float for excellent stability and visibility in
high flow rates. The large 5 scale provides a 2% full scale accuracy for
precision measurement required in medical or laboratory applications. The
VFC models have PVC 1 female NPT connections. VFC II units are equipped
with acetal thermoplastic 1 male NPT fittings. VFC II fittings also include
hex wrench flats to prevent stripped threads. All models have metal mounting
inserts on the back for panel mounting. Units may also be supported directly by
system piping.
Visi-Float
Flowmeters
Used to Indicate Air or Water Flow
Series
VFC
&
VFCII
How To Order
Series Range No. Option
Example: VFC 123 EC
Series VFC with 10 100 SCFM Air Range and 1 female NPT
End Connections
VFCII with 1 MNPT
End Connections
VFC with 1 FNPT
End Connections
VFC with 1 FNPT
Back Connections
1-1/2
[38.10]
3
[76.20]
4-1/2
[114.30]
10-1/2
[266.70]
1-1/2
[38.10]
8-1/2
[215.90]
2 NOM
[50.80]
1-1/32
[26.19]
1-1/8
[28.58]
1-1/8
[28.58]
1-1/2 HEX
[38.10]
1-3/4
[44.45]
1-1/2
[38.10]
11
[279.40]
WITH BACK
CONNECTIONS
VFC Series
Model
VFC-X
VFCII-X
VFC-X-EC
VFCII-X-EC
Description
VFC with 1 FNPT Back Connections
VFCII with 1 MNPT Back Connections
VFC with 1 FNPT In Line End Connections
VFCII with 1 MNPT In Line End Connections
OPTIONS
-VIT, Fluoroelastomer O Rings
-FDA, 316 SS Float & Guide Rod (only available on VFCII
with fluoroelastomer O Rings)

F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

V
a
r
a
b
e

A
r
e
a
F
L
O
W
Series
VFF
Visi-Float
Flowsetter Flowmeters
Indicate or Manually Control Water Flow, Install in Any Position
Set the desired flow rate with the Series VFF Visi-Float

Flowsetter Flowmeter. Used
to indicate or manually control water flow, the solid acrylic construction allows complete
visual inspection of the unit. Meters can be easily installed in any position and operation and
maintenance is very simple. Designed for use at pressures up to 100 psi (690 kPa) and
temperatures up to 150F (85C), this unit can be used to control water flow in various
applications.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids.
Wetted Materials: 302 & 304 SS, nickel plated brass, acrylic, Buna N, acetal.
Temperature & Pressure Limits: 100 psig @ 150F (85C); 150 psig @ 100F
(38C).
Accuracy: 10% of F.S.
Scale Length: 3/4 (19.1 mm) 7/8 (22.2 mm), depending on model.
Weight: 4.4 oz (124.7 g).
1.375
[34.92]
3.352
[85.14]
2.483
[63.07]
1.250
[31.75]
Series
OMA
Oxygen Flowmeter
Use to Indicate and Manually Control Oxygen Flow
The Compact Series OMA Oxygen Flowmeter is made especially for medical
applications and manually controlling flow from oxygen generators. Flow levels are kept
stable by precision valve and knob adjustment. The low cost flowmeter is made from durable
clear acrylic plastic. The easy-to-read scale is hot stamped into the acrylic so it will not wear
off. The ball float is highly visible against the light blue background. Readings are repeatable
within 4% full scale accuracy.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Oxygen.
Wetted Materials: Acrylic and electroplated brass; Ball float: SS (OMA 1); Agate
(OMA 2, 3, 4); O ring: NBR.
Connection: 1/4 I.D. tubing.
Mounting: Vertical.
OMA-1 & OMA-2 OMA-3 & OMA-4
DIMENSION-IN INCHES (MM)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Model OMA-1 & OMA-2
3 3/4 (95.25)
7/8 (22.23)
2 49/64 (70.25)
21/64 (8.33)
51/64 (20.24)
M10x1
51/64 (20.24)
Model OMA-3 & OMA-4
4 37/64 (116.28)
7/8 (22.23)
3 35/64 (90.09)
21/64 (8.33)
51/64 (20.24)
M10x1
51/64 (20.24)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Model
OMA-1
OMA-2
OMA-3
OMA-4
Model
VFF-1
VFF-2
VFF-3
ACCESSORY
A-222, .240 I.D. x .375 O.D. tubing
OPTIONS
Add to end of Model Number
VIT, Fluoroelastomer O Rings
SS, 303 SST Fittings
Scale (L/min)
0.1 1.5
0.3 3
0.5 5
1.0 10
Range GPM Water
0.5 2.0
2.0 5.0
5.0 8.5

164
F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

V
a
r
a
b
e

A
r
e
a
F
L
O
W
Series
LFM
Polycarbonate Flowmeter
In-Line or Panel Mount Meters
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Water.
Wetted Materials:
Body: Polycarbonate;
Flange nut: ABS;
Float stop: ABS;
O-rings: Fluoroelastomer;
Rod & float: 316 SS;
Connections: Metric union and male NPT fittings-ABS; 90
male NPT elbow fittings-PVC.
Pressure Limit: 120 psi (8.2 bar) at 68F (20C); 90 elbow
fittings 116 psi (8 bar) at 68F (20C).
Accuracy: 5%.
Process Connection: LFMA: 1/2 male NPT. Optional 20 mm
metric union; LFMB: 1/2 male NPT. Optional 20mm metric
union or 1/2 male NPT with 90 elbow.
Weight: LFMA: 2 oz (56.7 g); LFMB: 3 oz (85.0 g).
CAUTION: Series LFM Flowmeters are for indoor use only or
areas without direct sunlight. Polycarbonate is adversely
affected by ultraviolet light.
The New LFM Series Flowmeters are made of injection molded, heat
and chemically resistant polycarbonate bodies and fittings. Series LFM
flow meters have dual scales measuring in both GPM and LPM with 5%
accuracy. A textured background on the body enhances scale readability.
Standard in-line models come with 1/2 male NPT process connections
while panel mount installation is available with 90 elbow fittings that
include panel lock nuts. Various other fittings are available.
6-45/64
[170.26]
3-15/16
[100.1]
1/2 NPT
1-21/32
[42.07]
6-5/16
[160.34]
1/2 NPT
8-55/64
[225.03]
1-63/64
[50.40]
LFMA
LFMB LFMB
LFMA
Model
LFMA-01-A2
LFMA-02-A2
LFMA-03-A2
LFMB-04-A2
LFMB-05-A2
LFMB-06-A2
Range (GPM water)
0.1-1 (.5-4 LPM)
0.2-2 (1-7 LPM)
0.5-5 (1.8-18 LPM)
0.1-1 (.5-4 LPM)
0.2-2 (1-7 LPM)
0.5-5 (1.8-18 LPM)
Process Connection
1/2 male NPT
1/2 male NPT
1/2 male NPT
1/2 male NPT
1/2 male NPT
1/2 male NPT
ACCESSORIES
LFMA
A-560, 20 mm Metric Union Fittings-ABS
A-566, 1/2 male NPT Fittings-ABS
LFMB
A-575, 1/2 male NPT with 90 Elbow Fittings-PVC
Float
316 SS
316 SS
316 SS
316 SS
316 SS
316 SS

F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

V
a
r
a
b
e

A
r
e
a
F
L
O
W
Series
LFM
In-Line or Panel Mount Meters. New Adjustable Set Point Indicator
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Water.
Wetted Materials:
Flange nut: ABS;
Float stop: LFMC-ABS; LFMD-polypropylene;
Connections:
90 male NPT elbow fittings-PVC.
20 mm metric union fittings-ABS.
32 mm metric union fittings-PVC.
1/2 & 3/4 male NPT fittings for LFMC-ABS.
3/4 male and female NPT fittings for LFMD-PA66 nylon.
fitting 116 psi (8 bar) at 68F (20C).
Accuracy: 5%.
Process Connection: LFMC: 1/2 male NPT. Optional 20 mm
metric union, 3/4 male NPT, or 1/2 male NPT with 90 elbow;
LFMD: 3/4 male NPT. Optional 32 mm metric union, 3/4 female
NPT, or 3/4 male NPT with 90 elbow.
Weight: LFMC: 4 oz (113.4 g); LFMD: 10 oz (283.5 g).
5-9/32
[134.14]
1/2 NPT
8-9/32
[210.34]
1-63/64
[50.40]
6-45/64
[170.26]
9-27/32
[250.03]
2-21/64
[59.13]
3/4 NPT
LFMC
LFMD
accuracy. A textured background on the body enhances scale readabil-
ity. Standard in-line models come with 1/2 male NPT connections for
LFMC and 3/4 male NPT connections for LFMD. Panel mount instal-
lation is available with 90 elbow fittings that includes panel lock nuts.
Various other fittings are available.
LFMC
LFMD
Model
LFMC-07-A2
LFMC-08-A2
LFMC-09-A2
LFMD-10-C2
LFMD-11-C2
Range (GPM water)
0.25-2.5 (1-10 LPM)
0.5-5 (1.8-18 LPM)
0.8-8 (3-30 LPM)
0.8-8 (3-30 LPM)
1-10 (4-40 LPM)
Process Connection
1/2 male NPT
1/2 male NPT
1/2 male NPT
3/4 male NPT
3/4 male NPT
ACCESSORIES
LFMC
LFMD
A-563, 32 mm Metric Union Fittings-PVC
A-569, 3/4 male NPT Fittings-Nylon
A-572, 3/4 female NPT Fittings-Nylon
Float
316 SS
316 SS
316 SS
316 SS
316 SS

166
F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

V
a
r
a
b
e

A
r
e
a
F
L
O
W
Series
LFM
In-Line or Panel Mount Meters. New Adjustable Set Point Indicator
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Water.
Wetted Materials:
Flange nut: ABS;
Float stop: Polypropylene;
Connections:
Male & female NPT fittings-PA66 nylon;
1 male NPT 90 elbow fittings-PVC;
40 mm metric union fittings-PVC;
63 mm metric union fittings-ABS.
fittings 116 psi (8 bar) at 68F (20C).
Accuracy: 5%.
Process Connection: LFME: 1 male NPT. Optional 40 mm
metric union, 1 female NPT, or 1 male NPT with 90 elbow;
LFMF: 2 male NPT. Optional 63 mm metric union or 2 female
NPT.
Weight: LFME: 15 oz (425.2 g); LFMF: 40 oz (1.1 kg).
accuracy. A textured background on the body enhances scale readability.
Standard in-line models come with 1/2 male NPT connections for LFME
and 2 male NPT connections for LFMF. Panel mount installation is
available with 90 elbow fittings that includes panel lock nuts. Various
other fittings are available.
8-55/64
[225.03]
12-19/64
[312.34]
1 NPT
2-27/32
[72.23]
LFME LFMF
11-27/64
[290.12]
15-3/4
[400.05]
2 NPT
3-15/16
[100.01]
LFME LFMF
Model
LFME-12-F2
LFME-13-F2
LFME-14-F2
LFMF-15-I2
LFMF-16-I2
LFMF-17-I2
Range (GPM water)
1.2-12 (5-50 LPM)
2-20 (8-80 LPM)
2.5-25 (10-100 LPM)
2.5-25 (10-100 LPM)
5-45 (20-180 LPM)
7-70 (25-250 LPM)
Process Connection
1 male NPT
1 male NPT
1 male NPT
2 male NPT
2 male NPT
2 male NPT
ACCESSORIES
LFME
A-564, 40 mm Metric Union Fittings-PVC
A-570, 1 male NPT Fittings-Nylon
A-573, 1 female NPT Fittings-Nylon
A-578, 1 male NPT with 90 Elbow Fittings-PVC
LFMF
A-571, 2 male NPT Fittings-Nylon
A-574, 2 female NPT Fittings-Nylon
Float
316 SS
316 SS
316 SS
316 SS
316 SS
316 SS

F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

V
a
r
a
b
e

A
r
e
a
F
L
O
W
Ultra-View
Polysulfone Flowmeter
Monitor Water Flow Rates from .25 to 40 GPM, Air Rates from 1 to 100 SCFM
Series
UV
Setting a new standard in the industry, the Series UV Polysulfone Flowmeter
is an ultra pure, laboratory grade flowmeter (2% F.S. accuracy) that measures
flow in GPM and LPM of water, air and other compatible media. The Series UV
is designed to withstand high temperatures up to 212F (100C) and high pressures
up to 150 psi (10.34 bar). Highly corrosion-resistant, this instrument is an excellent
choice for monitoring many corrosive media. Easy to install and to clean, the
Series UV offers optional panel mount polysulfone fittings and a protective
polycarbonate shield.
APPLICATIONS
Monitor chill water flow
Reverse osmosis systems
Deionized water systems
Potable water systems
Picture above shown with
optional Polycarbonate Shield
12
[307.98]
15
[381.00]
17
[431.80]
1-7/16-18 UNEF
THREADS
1 NPT(M)
THREADS
1-1/2
[38.10]
2-15/16
[74.51]
IN-LINE
THREADS
1 NPT(F)
2-1/2
[63.50]
5
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
1
2
3
4
Drawing at
right shown
with optional
Polysulfone
Fittings. Picture at left
shown with
optional
Polysulfone
Fittings.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Polysulfone body, fluoroelastomer O rings and virgin
PTFE float.
Temperature Limits: 35 to 212F (2 to 100C); 35 to 130F (2 to 54C)
for PVC fitting option.
Accuracy: 2% full scale @ 70F 2F (21.1C) and 14.7 psia (in line
connection rating only).
Repeatability: 1% full scale @ 70F 2F (21.1C) and 14.7 psia (in
line connection rating only).
Process Connections: 1 female NPT. Optional 90 polysulfone elbow
1 male NPT.
Scale Length: 6 (152.40 mm) 7 (177.80 mm), depending on model.
Fitting Torque: Maximum 22 ft lb.
Weight: 1 lb (457 g) for 20 GPM range.
CAUTION: Ball valves can have a water cannon effect on opening,
creating pressure that exceeds the warrantied ratings and will
damage the flowmeter. Series UV Flowmeters are for indoor use only
or areas without direct sunlight. Polysulfone is adversely affected by
ultraviolet light.
Model
UV-0112
UV-1112
UV-2112
UV-3112
UV-4112
UV-5112
Range (GPM water)
0.25 2.5 (1 9.5 LPM)
0.5 5.0 (2 19 LPM)
1.0 10.0 (4 38 LPM)
2.0 20.0 (8 76 LPM)
3.0 30.0 (12 112 LPM)
4.0 40.0 (20 150 LPM)
Body
Polysulfone
Polysulfone
Polysulfone
Polysulfone
Polysulfone
Polysulfone
Fitting Material
Polysulfone
Polysulfone
Polysulfone
Polysulfone
Polysulfone
Polysulfone
Model
UV-A112
UV-B112
UV-C112
UV-D112
Range (SCFM air)
1 13 (30 370 LPM)
2.5 28 (70 780 LPM)
5 50 (70 1400 LPM)
14 100 (400 2800 LPM)
Body
Polysulfone
Polysulfone
Polysulfone
Polysulfone
Fitting Material
Polysulfone
Polysulfone
Polysulfone
Polysulfone
ACCESSORIES
A-801, Panel Mount Kit, Polysulfone Fittings
A-162, In line Fitting Replacement Kit. Two 1 female NPT connection
fittings included in kit.
OPTIONS
UV-XXXX-SHD, Protective Polycarbonate Shield
UV-XX22, PVC 1 female NPT Fittings
UV-XXXX-CDS, Certified Data Sheet with Traceability to NIST
Float
Virgin PTFE
Virgin PTFE
Virgin PTFE
Virgin PTFE
Virgin PTFE
Virgin PTFE
Float
Virgin PTFE
Virgin PTFE
Virgin PTFE
Virgin PTFE

168
F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

V
a
r
a
b
e

A
r
e
a
F
L
O
W
Variable Area Glass Flowmeters
65 mm and 150 mm, 2% FS Accuracy, Interchangeable Flowtubes
Accurately measure flow rates of air, water, and other commonly used gases
with the Series VA Variable Area Glass Flowmeters. Flowmeters are designed
with an easy-to-read universal mm scale and supplied with a correlation chart
containing calibration data for air and water. Correlation data for other gases
and liquids are available. Permanently fused ceramic scale with vertical locator
line reduces parallax and eye fatigue. Thick polycarbonate front shield protects
tube from breakage and also serves as a magnifying lens to enhance reading
resolution.
Glass flowmeters are suitable for metering carrier gases, liquid and gas
measurement in pilot plants, laboratories, process flow and level indicating. Units
are equipped with a standard 6-turn needle valve for flow rate control. High
precision metering valves with non-rising stems (sold separately) are available
for high sensitivity control and resolution particularly suited for very low flow
rates.
Flowmeters are shipped completely assembled and ready for panel mounting.
Use an optional acrylic tripod base to convert to self-standing bench mounting.
1.625
[41.3]
OPEN
1.125
[28.6]
.5
7/8 HEX NUT
1/2
HEX
.5 [12.7]
1.250
[31.8]
9.812
[249]
1/8 NPT
8.812
[224]
1/8 NPT
1.625
[41.3]
OPEN
1.125
[28.6]
.5
7/8 HEX NUT
1/2
HEX
.5 [12.7]
1.250
[31.8]
5.500
[140]
1/8 NPT
1/8 NPT
4.500
[114]
Panel Mounting: Drill two 5/8 dia. holes at 4.5 apart for 65 mm models
and 8.812 apart for 150 mm models (center to center).
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases or liquids.
Wetted Materials:
Flowtube: Borosilicate glass.
Floats: Glass or stainless steel (sapphire, Carboloy and tantalum are
optional).
Float stops: PTFE.
End fittings: Anodized aluminum, 316 SS or brass.
Packings: Fluoroelastomer.
O rings: Buna N on aluminum models and brass models, and
fluoroelastomer on stainless steel models.
Accuracy: 2% FS @ 70F (21.1C) and 14.7 psia (1 atm absolute).
Scales: Universal 65 mm or 150 mm with correlation charts.
Turn-down Ratio: 10:1; 20:1 with combinations of two floats installed in
meter.
Connections: Two 1/8 female NPT.
Mounting: Vertical.
Valve: 6 turn needle (standard), optional 16 turn high precision valve.
Valve Orifice: Acetal on aluminum models and brass models, PCTFE
on stainless steel models.
Series
VA
Model 65 mm Scale
Float
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Maximum
Flow Rate (Air)
scfh (ml/min)
0.104 (49)
0.307 (145)
0.220 (104)
0.633 (299)
0.43 (202)
1.1 (522)
2.09 (986)
4.12 (1946)
2.65 (1249)
5.34 (2520)
4.32 (2040)
8.45 (3990)
13.4 (6318)
25.5 (12058)
27.9 (13153)
52.3 (24680)
49.1 (23169)
89.2 (42094)
Maximum
Flow Rate (H2O)
gph (ml/min)
0.009 (0.55)
0.038 (2.38)
0.028 (1.8)
0.122 (7.7)
0.041 (2.6)
0.19 (12.0)
0.325 (20.5)
0.881 (55.6)
0.428 (27)
1.125 (71)
0.63 (40)
1.71 (108)
2.33 (147)
5.77 (364)
4.9 (309)
11.81 (745)
8.27 (522)
19.97 (1260)
Float
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Maximum
Flow Rate (Air)
scfh (ml/min)
0.792 (374)
1.725 (814)
4.9 (2313)
9.67 (4562)
8.07 (3807)
16.08 (7590)
18.38 (8678)
35.5 (16737)
49.9 (23564)
93.9 (44336)
Maximum
Flow Rate (H2O)
gph (ml/min)
0.087 (5.5)
0.323 (20.4)
0.848 (54)
2.067 (130)
1.336 (84)
3.34 (217)
3.32 (210)
8.02 (506)
9.0 (568)
21.7 (1370)
Model 150 mm Scale
ACCESSORIES
VA81, High precision valve, 316 SS, 0.42 scfh capacity
VA7, Acrylic tripod for single meter
Aluminum
Fittings
VA1043
VA1044
VA1045
VA1046
VA1047
VA1048
VA1049
VA10410
VA10411
VA10412
VA10413
VA10414
VA10417
VA10418
VA10419
VA10420
VA10421
VA10422
SS
Fittings
VA1243
VA1244
VA1245
VA1246
VA1247
VA1248
VA1249
VA12410
VA12411
VA12412
VA12413
VA12414
VA12417
VA12418
VA12419
VA12420
VA12421
VA12422
Brass
Fittings
VA1343
-
VA1345
-
VA1347
-
VA1349
-
VA13411
-
VA13413
-
VA13417
-
VA13419
-
VA13421
-
Aluminum
Fittings
VA20429
VA20430
VA20433
VA20434
VA20435
VA20436
VA20437
VA20438
VA20439
VA20440
SS
Fittings
VA22429
VA22430
VA22433
VA22434
VA22435
VA22436
VA22437
VA22438
VA22439
VA22440
Brass
Fittings
VA23429
VA23433
VA23435
VA23437
VA23439

F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

V
a
r
a
b
e

A
r
e
a
F
L
O
W
Series
VA
PTFE/Glass Flowmeters
Variable Area, Universal 65 mm and 150 mm Scales, 2% FS Accuracy
Measure flow of corrosive or ultra-pure liquids or gases with the Series VA Variable
Area PTFE/Glass Flowmeters. Flowmeters are constructed of chemically inert materials
and housed in a rigid anodized aluminum frame with a polycarbonate safety shield. Units
are designed with an easy-to-read universal mm scale and supplied with a correlation chart
containing calibration data for air and water. Correlation data for other gases and liquids
are available.
1.625
[41.3]
OPEN
1.125
[28.6]
.5
7/8 HEX NUT
1/2
HEX
.5 [12.7]
1.250
[31.8]
9.812
[249]
1/8 NPT
8.812
[224]
1/8 NPT
1.625
[41.3]
OPEN
1.125
[28.6]
.5
7/8 HEX NUT
1/2
HEX
.5 [12.7]
1.250
[31.8]
6.16
[156.5]
1/8 NPT
1/8 NPT
5.2
[132.1]
Panel Mounting: Drill two 5/8 dia.
holes at 5.2 apart for 65mm models
and 8.812 apart for 150mm models
(center to center).
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Flowtube: Borosilicate glass;
Float: Glass (sapphire optional);
Float stops and end fittings: PTFE;
O rings and packings: PTFE.
( 26 to 65C).
Accuracy: 2% FS @ 70F (21.1C)
and 14.7 psia (1 atm absolute).
Repeatability: 0.25%.
Leak Integrity: 1 x 10
7
sccs of helium.
Scales: Universal 65 mm or 150 mm
with correlation charts.
Turn-down ratio: 10:1, 20:1 with
combinations of two floats installed in
meter.
Mounting: Vertical.
Valve: 6 turn needle.
Valve Orifice: PTFE.
Series
VA-K
Variable Area Flowmeter Kits
Interchangeable Flow Tubes and Floats, 150 mm Universal Scales
7/8 HEX NUT
1/2 HEX
1/8 NPT
1/8 NPT
8-13/16
[223.82]
1/2
[12.75]
1/2
[12.75]
1-1/8
[28.57]
1-5/8
[41.28]
OPEN
9-13/16
[249.22]
1-1/4
[31.75]
SPECIFICATIONS
Scales: Universal 150 mm scales with
correlation chart.
Repeatability: 0.25% of scale
reading.
Turn-down ratio: 10:1; 20:1 with
combinations of two floats installed in
meter.
Maximum Operating Pressure: 200
psig (13.8 bar).
Maximum Operating Temperature:
250F (121C).
Mounting: Vertical.
Connection: 1/8 female NPT.
Float: Glass, 316 SS or tantalum.
Float Stops: PTFE.
End Fittings: Anodized aluminum or
316 SS.
Front Shield: Polycarbonate.
Side Panels: Black, anodized
aluminum.
O-rings: Buna N on aluminum models
and fluoroelastomer on stainless steel
models.
Valve Orifice: Acetal on aluminum
models and PCTFE on stainless steel
models.
The Series VA-K Flowmeter Kits offer an economical means of acquiring diverse flow
measurement capability. The kit includes a completely assembled flowmeter (available with
Aluminum or 316 SS end fittings) and three interchangeable 150 mm flow tubes. All flow
tubes are supplied with a glass float installed. Spare 316 SS and Tantalum floats are included
to extend flow capacities. Series VA-K kits also include a high flow valve cartridge, tripod
base, tweezers, pushrod and locking tool for changing floats and flow tubes, correlation
charts and plastic carrying case.
* Flow rates are given for standard pressure and temperature 70F (21C) @ 760
mm Hg.
APPLICATIONS
Kits are ideal for flow applications in air and water analysis, film processing, chemical
processing, gas chromatography, pharmaceutical, alcohol and tobacco production,
pulp and paper, and semiconductor industry.
Float
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Flow Rate (Air)
scfh (ml/min)
0.220 (104)
0.428 (202)
2.646 (1249)
4.322 (2040)
13.39 (6318)
27.9 (13153)
49 (23169)
Flow Rate (H2O)
gph (ml/min)
0.028 (1.8)
0.047 (2.95)
0.428 (27)
0.630 (39.7)
2.33 (147)
4.9 (309)
8.27 (522)
Model 65 mm scale
Float
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Flow Rate (Air)
scfh (ml/min)
0.104 (49)
0.792 (374)
1.75 (825)
8.07 (3807)
18.39 (8678)
Flow Rate (H2O)
gph (ml/min)
0.01 (0.61)
0.087 (5.5)
0.262 (16.5)
1.34 (84.3)
3.32 (209)
Model 150 mm scale
Max. Flow Rate (mL/min)*
Flow
Tube
Number
042-15
112-02
102-05
044-40
Float Material
Glass
Air
1.8 to 18.6
21 to 374
106 to 3807
962 to 22536
Water
0.02 to 0.19
.023 to 5.5
2 to 84
15 to 541
316 SS
Air
5.8 to 60.6
36 to 814
288 to 7590
Water
0.09 to .945
1.1 to 20.4
6 to 617
Tantalum
Air
2015 to 62588
Water
106 to 2001
ACCESSORY
VA7, Acrylic tripod for single meter
Model VA-K1, Aluminum Flowmeter Kit
Model VA-K2, 316 SS Flowmeter Kit
Valve
VA1545
VA1547
VA15411
VA15413
VA15417
VA15419
VA15421
No Valve
VA1505
VA1507
VA15011
VA15013
VA15017
VA15019
VA15021
Valve
VA25425
VA25429
VA25431
VA25435
VA25437
No Valve
VA25025
VA25029
VA25031
VA25035
VA25037

170
F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

V
a
r
a
b
e

A
r
e
a
F
L
O
W
Series
VAT
Variable Area Fluoropolymer Flowmeter
In-Line, 5% Accuracy, Chemically Inert
Constructed entirely of Fluoropolymers, the Series VAT Flowmeters are ideal for
high purity or corrosive liquid applications. Flowmeters feature a 0-10 scale for flow
indication. Each unit is individually leak tested to a leak integrity rating of 1 x 10
-7
sccs
Helium or better. The Series VAT are designed for in-line mounting and include a removable
protective shield.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Flowtube: PFA;
Float and end fittings: PTFE;
Guide rods: PCTFE.
Process Connections: See chart.
7
sccs of helium.
Scale: 0 to 10 markings.
Mounting: Vertical, in line.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A B
Dimensions
Connections
1/2 female NPT
1/2 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
Flow Rate
ml/min (gph)
125 (1.98)
250 (3.91)
400 (6.34)
500 (7.92)
1000 (15.85)
2000 (31.69)
2500 (39.62)
3000 (47.54)
5000 (79.23)
Flow Rate
L/min (gpm)
13 (3.43)
20 (5.28)
30 (7.93)
40 (10.57)
45 (11.89)
Connections
1/4 female NPT
1/4 female NPT
1/4 female NPT
1/4 female NPT
1/4 female NPT
3/8 female NPT
3/8 female NPT
3/8 female NPT
3/8 female NPT
Series
TVA
All Fluoropolymer Flowmeters
75 mm and 125 mm, 10:1 Turndown, 5% FS Accuracy
Series TVA All Fluoropolymer Flowmeters offer solutions for measuring flow rates of
highly corrosive or ultra-pure liquids. Flowmeters are designed with 0 to 10 scale graduations
denoting a discrete flow rate.
G
NPT
E
F
A
B
C
TYP.
D
.750 TYP.
124101 00
Panel Mounting: Drill two holes: 3/4 dia. at 4.97 apart for 1/4 NPT
models, 7/8 dia. at 4.97 apart for 3/8 NPT models, 1 dia. at 8.72 apart for
1/2 NPT models, and 1 1/4 dia. at 8.47 apart for 3/4 NPT models (center
to center).
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Flowtube: PFA;
Float and end fittings: PTFE;
Guide rods: PCTFE.
7
sccs of helium.
Scales: 0 to 10 markings, 75 mm or 125 mm lengths.
Turn-down Ratio: 10:1.
Mounting: Vertical.
Model Low Range
Model High Range
Connection
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
A
5 11/16 (144)
5 11/16 (144)
10 1/2 (267)
10 1/2 (267)
B
1 1/4 (31.8)
1 1/4 (31.8)
2 (50.8)
2 (50.8)
Flow Rate (H2O)
gph (ml/min)
6.34 (400)
15.9 (1000)
39.6 (2500)
79.2 (5000)
Length
75 mm
75 mm
75 mm
75 mm
Model Low Range
Model High Range
Connections
1/4 female NPT
1/4 female NPT
3/8 female NPT
3/8 female NPT
Flow Rate (H2O)
gph (l/min)
3.43 (13)
7.93 (30)
11.9 (45)
Length
125 mm
125 mm
125 mm
Connections
1/2 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
Model
TVA11XX
TVA13XX
TVA22XX
TVA24XX
A
4.97 [126]
4.97 [126]
8.72 [221]
8.47 [215]
B
0.56 [14]
0.56 [14]
0.88 [22]
1.00 [25]
C
1.06 [27]
1.25 [32]
1.75 [44]
1.75 [44]
D
3.35 [85]
4.65 [118]
4.57 [116]
5.95 [151]
E
1.25 [32]
1.50 [38]
2.00 [51]
2.25 [57]
F
6.16 [156]
6.16 [156]
10.4 [264]
10.4 [264]
G
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
Valve
TVA1113
TVA1115
TVA1317
TVA1319
No Valve
TVA1103
TVA1105
TVA1307
TVA1309
Valve
TVA22110
TVA24112
TVA24114
No Valve
TVA22010
TVA24012
TVA24014
Valve
VAT-311
VAT-312
VAT-313
VAT-314
VAT-315
VAT-316
VAT-317
VAT-318
VAT-319
No Valve
VAT-301
VAT-302
VAT-303
VAT-304
VAT-305
VAT-306
VAT-307
VAT-308
VAT-309
Valve
VAT-6110
VAT-6111
VAT-6112
VAT-6113
VAT-6114
No Valve
VAT-6010
VAT-6011
VAT-6012
VAT-6013
VAT-6014

F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

V
a
r
a
b
e

A
r
e
a
F
L
O
W
Series
DR
Direct Reading Glass Flowmeters
65 mm and 150 mm, 5% FS Accuracy, Interchangeable Flowtubes
Use Series DR Glass Flowmeters to accurately measure flow rates of air or water with
the convenience of a direct reading scale. Permanently fused ceramic scale has integral float
guides for optimum float performance. Reflective plastic background and 1.5 X magnification
lens reduces eye fatigue and allows for more accurate readings. Units include a safety blow-
out back panel for additional protection. Flowmeters are shipped completely assembled and
include standard panel mounting hardware for quick installation.
1/8
[3.175]
7-9/16
[192.09]
8-13/16
[223.8]
9-13/16
[249.2]
22/32
[17.48]
5/8
[15.88]
1-1/4 OPEN
[31.75]
1
[25.40]
1-3/8
[34.93]
1/2
[12.70]
5/8
[15.88]
1-1/4
[31.75]
150MM
SCALE
LENGTH
1
[25.40]
PANEL
LOCKNUT (2)
70047600
1/8 NPT
1/8 NPT
ADAPTERS (2)
PANEL LOCKNUTS (2)
1/8
[3.175]
5-1/2
[139.7]
4-1/2
[114.3]
5/8
[15.88]
3-1/4
[82.55]
22/32 DIA. [17.46]
5/8
[15.88]
1/2 [12.70]
1 [25.40]
1-1/4
[31.75]
1
[25.40]
65MM SCALE
LENGTH
5/8
[15.88]
1-1/4
[31.75]
70047500
Panel Mounting: Drill two 5/8 dia. holes at 4.5
apart for 65mm models and 8.812 apart for 150
mm models (center to center).
Add suffix M for metric scale.
* Denotes glass float.
Metric models use ccm as unit of measure.
APPLICATIONS
Glass flowmeters are suitable for metering gases or liquids for film processing, paper
manufacturing, chemical processing, semiconductor industry, water and air pollution
analysis equipment, metals processing, industrial fuel and energy conservation, cylinder
gas metering, and general laboratory and industrial applications.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetting Materials:
Float: 316 SS (black glass as indicated);
Float stops: PTFE;
End fittings: Anodized aluminum or 316 SS;
O rings: Buna N on aluminum models and fluoroelastomer on stainless steel
models.
Repeatability: 0.25% of scale reading.
Scales: Direct reading 65 mm or 150 mm scales for air or water.
Mounting: Vertical.
Valve: 6 turn needle (standard on models with valve).
Flow Rate (Air)
scfh (sccm)
0.24 (130
)
0.65 (300
)
1.1 (500
)
2.2 (1000
)
scfh (LPM)
5.6 (2.1)
11 (5)
20 (9.5)
55 (24)
100 (50)
Flow Rate (H2O)
gph (sccm)
0.02 (1.5)
0.1 (6.5)
0.13 (8)
0.36 (24)
0.9 (55)
2.2 (140)
4.4 (280)
10 (600)
24 (1500)
Flow Rate (Air)
scfh (sccm)
0.33 (160)
0.54 (270)
2 (840)
scfh (LPM)
3.8 (1.8)
10 (4.8)
16 (7.5)
35 (16)
90 (44)
Flow Rate (H2O)
gph (sccm)
0.05 (3.2)
0.075 (4.6)
0.34 (21)
0.75 (46)
2.2 (140)
3.6 (230)
7.5 (480)
21 (1300)
Model (65 mm scale)
Without Valve
Aluminum
DR10010*
DR10022
DR10030*
DR10042
DR10062
DR10070*
DR10082
DR10090*
DR100102
DR100120*
DR100132
DR100140*
DR100152
DR100172
DR100180*
DR100192
DR100200*
DR100212
SS
DR12010*
DR12022
DR12030*
DR12042
DR12062
DR12070*
DR12082
DR12090*
DR120102
DR120120*
DR120132
DR120140*
DR120152
DR120172
DR120180*
DR120192
DR120200*
DR120212
With Valve
Aluminum
DR10410*
DR10422
DR10430*
DR10442
DR10462
DR10470*
DR10482
DR10490*
DR104102
DR104120*
DR104132
DR104140*
DR104152
DR104172
DR104180*
DR104192
DR104200*
DR104212
SS
DR12410*
DR12422
DR12430*
DR12442
DR12462
DR12470*
DR12482
DR12490*
DR124102
DR124120*
DR124132
DR124140*
DR124152
DR124172
DR124180*
DR124192
DR124200*
DR124212
Model (150 mm scale)
Without Valve
Aluminum
DR20032
DR20082
DR200132
DR200182
DR200232
DR200282
DR200332
DR200382
DR200432
DR200482
DR200532
DR200582
DR200632
DR200682
DR200732
DR200782
SS
DR22032
DR22082
DR220132
DR220182
DR220232
DR220282
DR220332
DR220382
DR220432
DR220482
DR220532
DR220582
DR220632
DR220682
DR220732
DR220782
With Valve
Aluminum
DR20432
DR20482
DR204132
DR204182
DR204232
DR204282
DR204332
DR204382
DR204432
DR204482
DR204532
DR204582
DR204632
DR204682
DR204732
DR204782
SS
DR22432
DR22482
DR224132
DR224182
DR224232
DR224282
DR224332
DR224382
DR224432
DR224482
DR224532
DR224582
DR224632
DR224682
DR224732
DR224782

172
F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

V
a
r
a
b
e

A
r
e
a
F
L
O
W
Series
DR4
High Flow Glass Flowmeters
Direct Reading, 127 mm Scale, 10% FS Accuracy, Interchangeable Flowtubes
10-3/8
[264]
9
[229]
1-1/2
[38.1]
127 MM
SCALE
LENGTH
1-1/2
[38.1]
11/16
[17.5]
3/4
[19] 1-3/8
[35]
1-1/2 [38.1]
VALVE OPEN
3/8
NPT
FEMALE
22/32
[17.46]
7/8
HEX
1/4 HEX NUT
5/8 [15.88]
VALVE CLOSED
Panel Mounting:
Drill two 7/8 dia.
holes at 9 apart.
Series DR4 Glass Flowmeters offer a simplified solution to the problem of fluid flow
indication at higher capacity levels. Flowmeters have a direct reading scale for air or water
and are designed to withstand even the harshest industrial applications. Permanently fused
ceramic scale has integral float guides for optimum float performance. Reflective plastic
background and 1.5 X magnification lens reduces eye fatigue and allows for more accurate
readings. Units include a safety blow-out back panel for additional protection.
Series
IF
Industrial Direct Reading Flowmeter
Air/Water Direct Reading Scale, 304 SS Protective Shield, 3% Accuracy
Add suffix M for metric scale.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Float: 316 SS;
Float stops: PTFE;
End fittings: Brass or 316 SS;
O rings: Buna N on brass models
and fluoroelastomer on SS
models.
Scale: Direct reading 127 mm scales
for air or water.
Mounting: Vertical.
Valve: 6 turn needle (standard on
models with valve).
Ideal for industrial applications, the Series IF Industrial Direct Reading Flowmeters
are fully enclosed in a brushed stainless steel case. The flowmeters can directly measure
flow rates up to 116 GPM (439 lpm) for water and 250 SCFM (7080 lpm) for air service. The
detachable, clear 3/16 thick polycarbonate front shield provides protection at maximum
rated temperature and pressure. Each unit is designed with female NPT end fittings for
easy in-line installation.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquids or gases.
Wetted Materials:
Flowtube: Borosilicate glass; float,
guide rods, float stops, end;
Fittings: 316 SS;
O Rings: Fluoroelastomer.
Pressure Limit: 200 psi (13.8 bar);
125 psi for tube size 5 & 6.
Repeatability: 0.5% of full scale.
Turndown Ratio: 10:1.
Scale: Dual scale GPM and SCFM.
Process Connection: See table.
Mounting: Vertical.
Side Panels: 304 SS.
Dimensions
[B] [D]
[A] [C]
Flow Rate (Air)
scfm (SLPM)
0.2 4 (5 120)
0.5 11 (20 320)
1 16 (20 500)
Flow Rate (H2O)
GPM (LPM)
0.1 2 (0.5 8)
0.2 4 (1 16)
0.5 5 (1 22)
Model
IF2700
IF2701
IF2702
IF2703
IF2704
IF2705
IF2706
IF2707
IF2708
IF2709
IF2710
Maximum Flow Rate
Water
GPM (LPM)
0.25 (0.95)
0.36 (1.3)
0.76 (3.0)
1 (3.7)
1.5 (5.6)
2.2 (8.2)
3.8 (14)
5 (18)
6 (20)
7.4 (27.5)
9.6 (35)
Air
SCFM (LPM)
1.2 (35)
1.7 (50)
3.3 (90)
4.2 (120)
6.5 (180)
8.5 (250)
16 (475)
21.5 (650)
25.5 (725)
30 (900)
40 (1200)
Tube
Size
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
Model
IF2711
IF2712
IF2713
IF2714
IF2715
IF2716
IF2717
IF2718
IF2719
IF2720
IF2721
Maximum Flow Rate
Water
GPM (LPM)
11 (40)
14 (50)
20 (75)
22 (83)
26 (98)
41 (155)
44 (167)
60 (227)
61 (231)
86 (326)
116 (439)
Air
SCFM (LPM)
47.5 (1400)
62 (1800)
90 (2600)
90 (2550)
160 (4531)
180 (5098)
245 (6938)
250 (7080)
Tube
Size
4
4
4
5
4
6
5
6
5
6
6
Tube
Size
1 and 2
3 and 4
5 and 6
Female
NPT
1/2
1
2
A
2 [50.8]
3.5 [89]
5 [127]
B
9.54 [242]
13.69 [348]
15.59 [396]
C
2.25 [57.2]
3.75 [95.3]
5.25 [133]
D
8.04 [204]
10.50 [267]
11.55 [293]
Model (127 mm scale)
Without Valve
Brass
DR4101
DR4103
DR4104
DR4106
DR4108
DR4109
SS
DR4201
DR4203
DR4204
DR4206
DR4208
DR4209
With Valve
Brass
DR4141
DR4143
DR4144
DR4146
DR4148
DR4149
SS
DR4241
DR4243
DR4244
DR4246
DR4248
DR4249
Pressure Drop
(in H2O)
2
5
6
10
10
14
5
6
10
Pressure Drop
(in H2O)
13
24
39
16
70
5
30
16
40
25
45

F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

V
a
r
a
b
e

A
r
e
a
F
L
O
W
Series
RSF
Rotatable Scale Flowmeters
Dual, Rotatable Direct Reading Scales for Air and Water
Series RSF Flowmeters are designed with unique rotatable scales of dual, air-water direct
reading graduations. Flow rate is indicated in SCFM and SLPM for air and GPM and LPM
for water. Graduations are marked on a rotating, polycarbonate tubeshield which also serves
to protect the borosilicate glass flowtube. Flowmeters include a reflective plastic background
and 1.5 X magnification lens to reduce eye fatigue and allow for more accurate readings. A
blow-out back panel provides additional protection in the event of breakage. Series RSF
Flowmeters are available in vertical in-line mounting or panel mounting. Units are shipped
completely assembled and include standard mounting hardware for quick installation.
3/8-18 NPT
TYP 2 PLACES
11-1/8
[282.58]
10-3/8
[263.53]
3/4
[19.05]
2
[50.80]
1-3/4
[44.45]
1-7/8
[47.63]
10-3/8
[263.53]
3/4
[19.05]
2
[50.80]
1-1/2
[38.10]
1-7/8
[47.63]
9-15/32
[240.51]
3/8-18 NPT
TYP 2 PLACES
IN-LINE METER PANEL MOUNT METER
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Float: Brass/SS models: 316 SS; PTFE models: PTFE.
Tube shield: Polycarbonate
Float stops: Brass/SS models: 316 SS; PTFE models: PTFE.
End fittings: Brass/SS models: Brass or 316 SS; PTFE models: PTFE.
O rings: Brass/SS models: Fluoroelastomer; PTFE models: PTFE.
Temperature Limit: 250F (121C). PTFE models: 150F (65C).
Pressure Limit: 150 psig (10.34 bar) @ 200F (93C). PTFE models: 100 psig
(6.7 bar).
Accuracy: 7% FS.
Repeatability: 0.25% FS.
Scale: Direct Reading 127 mm scales for air and water.
Turn-Down Ratio: 10:1.
Mounting: Vertical or panel mount.
Panel Cutout: Drill two 7/8 diameter holes 9.0 (229 mm) apart (for panel mount
meters only).
Valve: 6 turn needle (standard on models indicating with valve).
APPLICATIONS
Flowmeters are suitable for metering air or water for film processing, paper
manufacturing, chemical processing, semiconductor industry, water and air pollution
analysis equipment, metals processing, industrial fuel and energy conservation, air
metering, and general laboratory and industrial applications.
Max. Flow Rate
Air scfm
(SLPM)
5 (140)
10 (280)
15 (425)
20 (575)
30 (900)
Water GPM
(LPM)
1.2 (4)
2 (8)
3 (11.5)
4 (15)
5 (20)
Max. Flow Rate
Air scfm
(SLPM)
5 (140)
10 (280)
15 (425)
20 (575)
30 (900)
Water GPM
(LPM)
1.2 (4)
2 (8)
3 (11.5)
4 (15)
5 (20)
Max. Flow Rate
Air scfm (SLPM)
3.5 (100)
7 (200)
10.5 (300)
14 (400)
17.5 (500)
Water GPM (LPM)
0.8 (3)
1.5 (5.75)
2.2 (8.25)
2.9 (11)
3.5 (13.25)
Max. Flow Rate
Air scfm (SLPM)
3.5 (100)
7 (200)
10.5 (300)
14 (400)
17.5 (500)
Water GPM (LPM)
0.8 (3)
1.5 (5.75)
2.2 (8.25)
2.9 (11)
3.5 (13.25)
Brass & SS Vertical In-Line Meters
Without Valve
Brass
RSF011
RSF012
RSF013
RSF014
RSF015
SS
RSF111
RSF112
RSF113
RSF114
RSF115
With Valve
Brass
RSF011V
RSF012V
RSF013V
RSF014V
RSF015V
SS
RSF111V
RSF112V
RSF113V
RSF114V
RSF115V
Brass & SS Panel Mount Meters
Without Valve
Brass
RSF021
RSF022
RSF023
RSF024
RSF025
SS
RSF121
RSF122
RSF123
RSF124
RSF125
With Valve
Brass
RSF021V
RSF022V
RSF023V
RSF024V
RSF025V
SS
RSF121V
RSF122V
RSF123V
RSF124V
RSF125V
PTFE Vertical In-Line Meters
Without Valve
RSF211
RSF212
RSF213
RSF214
RSF215
With Valve
RSF211V
RSF212V
RSF213V
RSF214V
RSF215V
PTFE Panel Mount Meters
Without Valve
RSF221
RSF222
RSF223
RSF224
RSF225
With Valve
RSF221V
RSF222V
RSF223V
RSF224V
RSF225V

174
F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

V
a
r
a
b
e

A
r
e
a
F
L
O
W
Series
MTF
Multitube Flow Systems
Customize to Fit Application, 65 mm or 150 mm Variable Area Flow Tubes
Customize flow systems to meet application requirements. Systems can be configured
with up to six different flow tubes with various flow capacities and flow patterns. The
Series MTF Multitube Flow Systems are ideal for multichannel metering, mixing, or
monitoring applications.
To customize your flow system:
1) Determine the flow pattern required for the application (see below).
2) Select a 65 mm or 150 mm frame (next page), along with the appropriate number
of tubes required, flow pattern, and wetted parts. Choose a 150 mm Gas
Proportioner Frame (Series MTP) to blend 2 or 3 gases at required concentrations.
Gas proportioner frames are typically used at 50 psi.
3) Choose the appropriate 65 mm or 150 mm correlated flow tubes (next page), for
air or water.
4) Select a valve cartridge if desired that matches the range of the flow tube (next
page).
SPECIFICATIONS
Scales: Universal 65 mm or 150 mm scales with correlation charts.
Turn-down Ratio: 10:1, 20:1 with combinations of two floats installed in meter.
Maximum Operating Pressure: 200 psig (13.8 bar).
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250F (121C).
Mounting: Vertical.
Float: 316 SS or black glass as indicated.
Float Stops: PTFE.
End Fittings: Anodized aluminum or 316 SS.
Side Panels: Black, anodized aluminum.
O-rings: Buna N on aluminum models and fluoroelastomer on stainless steel models.
[H] [A]
[W]
1/2
[12.70]
[O]
1/8 FEMALE NPT

9/16-18
[14.29]
35/64
[13.97]
1-27/32
[46.99]
OPEN
1-1/8
[28.70]
Dimensions
Isolated parallel channels
Common exhaust with
parallel inlets
Common inlet with
parallel exhausts
DIM A
Scale
Length
65 mm
150 mm
DIM H
5 1/2
[139.70]
9 13/16
[249.25]
DIM O
4 1/2
[114.30]
8 13/16
[223.85]
1 tube
1 1/4
[31.75]
1 1/4
[31.75]
2 tubes
2 1/4
[57.15]
2 1/4
[57.15]
3 tubes
3 1/4
[82.55]
3 1/4
[82.55]
4 tubes
4 1/4
[107.95]
4 1/4
[107.95]
5 tubes
5 1/4
[133.35]
5 1/4
[133.35]
6 tubes
6 1/4
[158.75]
6 1/4
[158.75]
DIM W

F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

V
a
r
a
b
e

A
r
e
a
F
L
O
W
Valve Cartridges
For metering or mixing applications, complete your multitube flow system by
selecting a valve cartridge suitable for the flow range. Choose a standard 6 turn
valve or high precision 16 turn valve.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Parts 6-turn Valves: For Aluminum frames: Aluminum body, 316 SS
spindle, Acetal orifice, Buna N O rings; for 316 SS frames: 316 SS body, 316
SS spindle, PCTFE orifice, Fluoroelastomer O rings.
Wetted Parts 16-turn Valves: For Aluminum frames: Brass body, 316 SS
spindle, PCTFE orifice, Buna N O rings; for 316 SS frames: 316 SS body, 316
SS spindle, PCTFE orifice, Fluoroelastomer O rings.
Flow Rate (Air)
mL/min
0 to 5000
5001 to 10000
10001 and above
Flow Rate (H2O)
mL/min
0 to 125
126 to 325
326 and above
Flow Rate (Air)
mL/min
0 to 200
201 to 400
401 to 1000
1001 to 2500
2501 to 6200
6201 and above
Flow Rate (H2O)
mL/min
0 to 6
7 to 12
13 to 26
27 to 80
81 to 200
201 and above
Model
MTF-1621
MTF-2621
MTF-1622
MTF-2622
MTF-1631
MTF-2631
MTF-1632
MTF-2632
MTF-1641
MTF-2641
MTF-1642
MTF-2642
MTF-1651
MTF-2651
MTF-1652
MTF-2652
MTF-1661
MTF-2661
MTF-1662
MTF-2662
Pattern
Isolated
Isolated
Common
Common
Isolated
Isolated
Common
Common
Isolated
Isolated
Common
Common
Isolated
Isolated
Common
Common
Isolated
Isolated
Common
Common
Tube Capacity
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
65 mm Frames
*Flow rates are given for standard pressure and
temperature 70F (21C) @ 760 mm Hg.
Model
FT-741
FT-743
FT-746
FT-748
FT-750
FT-752
FT-753
FT-754
Max. Flow Rate Air
.60 SCFM
2.2 SCFH
6.0 SCFH
10.0 SCFH
18.0 SCFH
25.0 SCFH
50.0 SCFH
90.0 SCFH
65 mm Direct Reading Flow Tubes
Model
FT-61
FT-62
FT-63
FT-64
FT-67
FT-68
FT-611
FT-612
FT-613
FT-614
FT-617
FT-618
FT-621
FT-622
Air
6
17
49
145
202
522
1249
2520
2040
3990
6318
12058
23169
42094
65 mm Correlated Flow Tubes
Water
0.07
0.28
0.55
2.38
2.60
12.0
27
71
40
108
147
364
522
1261
Model
MTF-1121
MTF-2121
MTF-1122
MTF-2122
MTF-1131
MTF-2131
MTF-1132
MTF-2132
MTF-1141
MTF-2141
MTF-1142
MTF-2142
MTF-1151
MTF-2151
MTF-1152
MTF-2152
MTF-1161
MTF-2161
MTF-1162
MTF-2162
Pattern
Isolated
Isolated
Common
Common
Isolated
Isolated
Common
Common
Isolated
Isolated
Common
Common
Isolated
Isolated
Common
Common
Isolated
Isolated
Common
Common
Tube Capacity
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
150 mm Frames
Model
MTP-112
MTP-212
MTP-113
MTP-213
Tube Capacity
2
2
3
3
150 mm Gas Proportioner Frames
Model
FT-242
FT-244
FT-245
FT-247
FT-248
FT-249
FT-251
FT-253
FT-254
FT-255
Max. Flow Rate Air
1.50 SCFM
2.50 SCFH
5.00 SCFH
8.25 SCFH
10.0 SCFH
16.5 SCFH
23.0 SCFH
50.0 SCFH
90.0 SCFH
94.0 SCFH
150 mm Direct Reading Flow Tubes
Model
FT-123
FT-124
FT-125
FT-126
FT-127
FT-128
FT-129
FT-130
FT-133
FT-134
FT-137
FT-138
FT-139
Air
19
61
49
137
92
264
374
814
2313
4562
8678
16737
22536
150 mm Correlated Flow Tubes
Water
0.19
0.94
0.53
2.45
0.90
4.70
5.50
20.4
54
130
210
506
541
Model Standard Valve 6-turn
Aluminum
FV-11
FV-12
FV-13
SS
FV-21
FV-22
FV-23
Model High Precision Valve 16-turn
Aluminum
FVH-11
FVH-12
FVH-13
FVH-14
FVH-15
FVH-16
SS
VA81
VA82
VA83
VA84
VA85
VA86
Wetted Parts
Aluminum
316 SS
Aluminum
316 SS
Aluminum
316 SS
Aluminum
316 SS
Aluminum
316 SS
Aluminum
316 SS
Aluminum
316 SS
Aluminum
316 SS
Aluminum
316 SS
Aluminum
316 SS
Float
Carboloy
Glass
Glass
316 SS
316 SS
316 SS
316 SS
316 SS
Float
Glass
316 SS
Glass
316 SS
Glass
316 SS
Glass
316 SS
Glass
316 SS
Glass
316 SS
Glass
316 SS
Wetted Parts
Aluminum
316 SS
Aluminum
316 SS
Aluminum
316 SS
Aluminum
316 SS
Aluminum
316 SS
Aluminum
316 SS
Aluminum
316 SS
Aluminum
316 SS
Aluminum
316 SS
Aluminum
316 SS
Wetted Parts
Aluminum
316 SS
Aluminum
316 SS
Float
316 SS
Carboloy
Glass
Glass
316 SS
316 SS
Carboloy
Glass
316 SS
316 SS
Float
Glass
316 SS
Glass
316 SS
Glass
316 SS
Glass
316 SS
Glass
316 SS
Glass
316 SS
Glass

176
F
l
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

I
n
-
L
i
n
e
F
L
O
W
Series RMV Rate-Master
rr Flowmeters measure higher water flow rates with 2% of full

scale accuracy at affordable prices. Rugged forged brass housing is standard on all models for
great compatibility and the strength to withstand system pressures to 1000 psig (68.9 bar).
Unlike glass tube rotameters, these units wont shatter and they work fine with even dark
and/or opaque liquids. Stocked models are fitted with 1 female NPT inlet and outlet; 3/4 and
1/2 sizes are also available. Install in line, supported by piping or flush panel mount with
complete hardware package included.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass, copper, 302 SS, sintered barium ferrite.
Temperature Limits: 20 to 200F (-6.7 to 93C).
Pressure Drop: 0-5 GPM: 3.2 psid; 0-10 GPM: 5.3 psid; 0-20 GPM: 10.4 psid.
Size: Diameter dial face 4 (101.6 mm).
Maximum Flow: 1.5 x full scale reading.
Weight: 9 Ib (4.08 kg).
APPLICATIONS
Monitor coolant flow through ingot heaters, high-amp switchgear, resistance welders,
heat exchangers, compressors, scrubbers; monitor water consumption to different
processes and operations for more efficient operation; calculate required fill or drain
times for tanks, water towers.
Rate-Master
Dial-Type Flowmeters
Brass Body; Three Ranges to 20 GPM Water
Model
RMV-1-3
RMV-2-3
RMV-3-3
RMV-1-2
RMV-2-2
RMV-3-2
RMV-1-1
RMV-2-1
RMV-3-1
Range, GPM Water g ,
0-5
0-10
0-20
0-5
0-10
0-20
0-5
0-10
0-20
Connection Size
1 female NPT
1 female NPT
1 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
1/2 female NPT
1/2 female NPT
1/2 female NPT
Series
RMV
Series RMV II Rate-Master
rr Flowmeters employ a tar get-type design combined with a

damage resistant magnetic linkage to drive a pointer over an easy-to-read litho scale. This
unique con struc tion fully isolates flowing media from gage front for leakproof operation at
pressures to 3000 psig (206.7 bar) with 5% of full scale accuracy. Solid machined brass
meter body is ideally suited for water flows. Body design fits standard 4 1/2 mounting hole
lay outs per ANSI B40.1. Inlet and outlet threads are standard 3/4 female NPT.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases & liquids & oils.
Wetted Materials: Brass, 302 SS, sintered barium ferrite, polyacetyl.
Pressure Drop: 0-5 GPM: 3.2 psid; 0-10 GPM: 5.3 psid; 0-20 GPM: 10.4 psid.
Size: Diameter dial face 4.5 (114.3 mm).
Series
RMV II
Rate-Master
Dial-Type Flowmeter
For Panel Mounting, Three Ranges to 10 GPM Water
5-7/8 DIA.
[149.2]
120
TYP.
(3) 7/32 DIA. (5.556)
HOLES ON 5-3/8 DIA.
(136.5) BOLT CIRCLE
4.440
[112.8]
3/4 NPT
1.250
[31.75]
1.0
[25.4]
.350
[8.890]
4.645
[118.0]
1.300
[33.02]
*FITS IN ANSI STANDARD 4.940 [125.5] PANEL CUTOUT.
Model
RMVII-1
RMVII-3
RMVII-6
RMVII-10
Range
GPM Water
0-3
0-5
0-10
Range
SCFM
0-10
Range
LPMAir
0-280
Model
RMVII-12
RMVII-14
RMVII-20
RMVII-21
RMVII-22
Range
GPM Oil
0-2.2
0-4.0
0-18.5
Range
SCFM
0-30
0-50
Range
LPMAir
0-850
0-1400
Range
LPM Oil
0-8
0-15
0-32
176.P.N:Layout 2 2/17/11 10:30 AM Page 1
F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

I
n
-
L
n
e
F
L
O
W
Series
HFPC
&
HFPS
Plastic Flowmeters
5% FS Accuracy, Mount in any Position
The New HFPC & HFPS Series Flowmeters are made of injection molded, polycarbonate
and polysulfone bodies. Series HFPC and HFPS flowmeters have dual scales measuring in
both GPM and LPM with 5% full scale accuracy. Models are available with 1/2, 3/4 or 1
male or female NPT connections. Female 1/2, 3/4 and 1 BSPP connections are also
available. Rugged construction allows these meters to handle maximum pressures of 325
psig and 200F. Units can be mounted in any position, even applications with downward
flow.
CAUTION: Series HFPC & HFPS Flowmeters are for indoor use only or areas
without direct sunlight. Polycarbonate & polysulfone are adversely affected by
ultraviolet light.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: HFPC: Polycarbonate body, Buna N seals, stainless steel
spring, Polysulfone connections; HFPS: Polysulfone body, Buna N seals, stainless
steel spring, polysulfone connections.
Maximum Pressure: 325 psig (22.4 bar).
Maximum Temperature: HFPC: 200F (93C); HFPS: 250F (121C).
Accuracy: 5% FS.
Repeatability: 1% FS.
Pressure Loss: See chart.
Weight: Standard models 1 lb (453.6 g). Models with optional brass connections
2 lb (907 g).
FLOW RATE: GPM
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E

D
I
F
F
E
R
E
N
T
I
A
L
:

P
S
I
D
TYPICAL PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL
2-7/16
[61.91]
L
Meter Size
1/2 male
1/2 female
3/4 male
3/4 female
1 male
1 female
DIM L
7 11/16 [195.26]
7 5/32 [181.76]
8 1/32 [204.00]
7 9/16 [192.09]
8 3/32 [205.58]
7 9/16 [192.09]
Series
Wetted Parts
Connection
Range
Option
HF
PC
PS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
BC
Series HF Plastic Flow Meters
Polycarbonate Body, Polysulfone Connections
Polysulfone Body, Polysulfone Connections
1/2 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
1 female NPT
1/2 male NPT Brass Connections Only
3/4 male NPT Brass Connections Only
1 male NPT Brass Connections Only
1/2 female BSPP
3/4 female BSPP
1 female BSPP
.5 5 GPM (1 19 LPM)
1 10 GPM (3.8 38 LPM)
2 15 GPM (7.5 55 LPM)
3 30 GPM (11 113 LPM)
Brass Connections

178
F
l
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

I
n
-
L
i
n
e
F
L
O
W
Low cost, Series HF In-Line Flow Monitors have a design based on a
floating sharp-edged orifice disk and variable area flow measurement to yield
accuracy of 2.5% over center one-third of scale. This unique design allows
accurate performance with fluid viscosities up to 500 SSU. All internal wetted
parts are contained inside a sealed metal tubular casing assuring a virtually
maintenance-free unit. Flowing media forces linear motion of a spring loaded,
sharp edge orifice disk and ring shaped transfer magnet which both ride on a
tapered center shaft. The transfer magnet drives a clearly visible magnet
follower located outside the flow tube, protected under the clear polycarbonate
tube. A ring on the magnet follower indicates flow rate on the direct reading
scale. Rubber bumpers are provided for external impact resistance.
Designed for single-direction flow, Series HF Monitors are recommended for use
with system filtration of at least 74 microns or a 200 mesh screen. Some
applications may also require magnetic filtration. These flowmeters do not require
inlet or outlet straight plumbing and can be mounted horizontally, vertically, or
inverted.
APPLICATIONS
HF Flow Monitors can be used to set flow rates, fluid motor and cylinder
speeds. Check pump high pressure performance, pressure relief valve
settings, fluid handling systems in agricultural, construction or industrial
machinery, power tools and equipment. Monitor petrochemical operations
with brass or stainless steel models. Industrial pneumatic systems air flow
can be monitored with the HFA models which are calibrated at 100 psig inlet
pressure.
Connection
Size
1/4 to 1/2 NPT
3/4 to 1 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
2 NPT
A
Reference
1-7/8 (48 mm)
2-3/8 (60 mm)
3-1/2 (89 mm)
3-1/2 (89 mm)
B
Wrench Flats
1-1/4 (32 mm)
1-3/4 (45 mm)
2-5/8 (67 mm)
2-5/8 (67 mm)
C
Reference
6-9/16 (167 mm)
7-1/8 (181 mm)
10-1/8 (257 mm)
12-5/8 (321 mm)
Series
HF
In-Line Flow Monitors
For Air, Water or Caustic Fluids, 2.5% Accuracy, Unrestricted Mounting
[A]
[C]
[B]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: HFA: Aluminum casing, Buna-N seals, PTFE coated
Alnico magnet, stainless steel disk; HFB: Brass casing, Buna-N seals,
PTFE coated Alnico magnet, stainless steel disk; HFS: 303 stainless
steel casing, FKM seals with PTFE backup, PTFE coated Alnico
magnet, stainless steel disk; HFH: Brass casing, FKM seals with PTFE
backup, PTFE coated Alnico magnet, stainless steel disk.
Maximum Viscosity: 500 SSU.
Temperature Limits: HFA, HFL, HFB and HFS models: 240F (116 C);
HFH models: 400F (204C).
Pressure Limits: HFA models: 600 psig (41 bar); HFL, HFB and HFH
models: 3500 psig (240 bar); HFS: 1000 psig (70 bar) for air and gas,
6000 psig (413 bar) for liquids.
Accuracy: 4% FS over entire range; 2.5% over center third of the
measuring range.
Shipping Weight: 1/4 to 1/2 female NPT models; 2 lb (0.9 kg); 3/4 to
1 female NPT models: 3.5 lb (1.59 kg); 1-1/2 female NPT models: 11 lb
(5 kg); 2 female NPT models: 13.5 lb (6.12 kg).
178.P.N:Layout 2 2/16/11 11:08 AM Page 1
F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

I
n
-
L
n
e
F
L
O
W
Connection (NPT female, dry seal)
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
1
1
1
1
1 1/4
1 1/4
1 1/2
1 1/2
Range scfm (lps)
1.5 12 (0.5 5.5)
4 23 (2 10)
5 50 (2.5 25)
10 100 (5 45)
1.5 12 (.5 5.5)
4 23 (2 10)
5 50 (2.5 25)
10 100 (5 45)
1.5 12 (.5 5.5)
4 23 (2 10)
5 50 (2.5 25)
10 100 (5 45)
5 50 (3 23)
10 100 (4 48)
15 150 (8 56)
30 330 (20 150)
5 50 (3 23)
10 100 (4 48)
15 150 (8 56)
30 330 (20 150)
30 470 (15 220)
150 900 (75 425)
30 470 (15 220)
150 900 (75 425)
Aluminum, Brass, and Stainless Steel for air and other non-corrosive gases:
Brass body for water based fluids (non-steam): Aluminum body for oil based fluids:
Model
HFB-2-05
HFB-3-15
HFB-3-20
HFB-4-35
HFB-5-50
HFB-5-100
HFB-6-75
HFB-6-150
Connection
Size
1/2 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
1 female NPT
1 1/2 female NPT
1 1/2 female NPT
2 female NPT
2 female NPT
Model
HFL-2-05
HFL-4-25
Connection
Size
1/2 female NPT
1 female NPT
304 SS body for high-pressure fluids:
Model
HFS-2-02
HFS-2-10
Connection
Size
1/2 female NPT
1/2 female NPT
Brass body high temperature 400F for water based fluids:
Model
HFH-2-05
HFH-2-10
HFH-4-35
Connection
Size
1/2 female NPT
1/2 female NPT
1 female NPT
Range, Water
GPM (LPM)
0.5 5.0 (1 19)
2 15 (7.5 55)
2 20 (7.5 75)
5 35 (19 130)
5 50 (19 189)
10 100 (38 379)
8 75 (31 284)
20 150 (76 568)
Range, GPM
(LPM) Oil
0.5 5.0 (1 19)
2 25 (7.5 95)
Range, Water
GPM (LPM)
0.2 2.0 (0.75 7.5)
0.5 10 (1.9 38)
Range, Water
GPM (LPM)
0.5 5.0 (1 19)
1 10 (3.8 38)
5 35 (19 130)
Aluminum
HFA-1-001
HFA-1-002
HFA-1-003
HFA-1-004
HFA-8-001
HFA-8-002
HFA-8-003
HFA-8-004
HFA-2-001
HFA-2-002
HFA-2-003
HFA-2-004
HFA-3-003
HFA-3-004
HFA-3-005
HFA-3-006
HFA-4-003
HFA-4-004
HFA-4-005
HFA-4-006
HFA-9-007
HFA-9-008
HFA-5-007
HFA-5-008
Brass
HFB-1-001
HFB-1-002
HFB-1-003
HFB-1-004
HFB-8-001
HFB-8-002
HFB-8-003
HFB-8-004
HFB-2-001
HFB-2-002
HFB-2-003
HFB-2-004
HFB-3-003
HFB-3-004
HFB-3-005
HFB-3-006
HFB-4-003
HFB-4-004
HFB-4-005
HFB-4-006
HFB-9-007
HFB-9-008
HFB-5-007
HFB-5-008
Stainless Steel
HFS-1-001
HFS-1-002
HFS-1-003
HFS-1-004
HFS-8-001
HFS-8-002
HFS-8-003
HFS-8-004
HFS-2-001
HFS-2-002
HFS-2-003
HFS-2-004
HFS-3-003
HFS-3-004
HFS-3-005
HFS-3-006
HFS-4-003
HFS-4-004
HFS-4-005
HFS-4-006
HFS-9-007
HFS-9-008
HFS-5-007
HFS-5-008

180
F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

I
n
-
L
n
e
F
L
O
W
Range
0.2 5.4 GPM Water (0.75 21 LPM)
0.2 10 GPM Water (1 35 LPM)
0.5 23 GPM Water (0.5 90 LPM)
0.5 35 GPM Water (2 130 LPM)
1 50 GPM Water (8 200 LPM)
2 70 GPM Water (2 265 LPM)
4 120 GPM Water (15 450 LPM)
2 50 SCFM Air (4 85 M
3
/HR)
6 125 SCFM Air (10 210 M
3
/HR)
4 260 SCFM Air (10 440 M
3
/HR)
2 310 SCFM Air (10 530 M
3
/HR)
10 515 SCFM Air (20 880 M
3
/HR)
35 750 SCFM Air (40 1300 M
3
/HR)
20 1000 SCFM Air (40 1700 M
3
/HR)
Max. Pressure
Loss (in w.c.)
17.2
22.0
75.0
18.5
26.0
80.0
130.0
4.5
11.8
93.0
12.0
40.0
70.0
90.0
Connection
3/4
3/4
3/4
1 1/2
1 1/2
1 1/2
1 1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
1 1/2
1 1/2
1 1/2
1 1/2
Series
SSM
&
SSB
All Metal Flowmeter
Available in Brass or Stainless Steel for Industrial Environment
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Material: T316 SS or brass body depending on series, Alnico
magnet, FKM O ring.
Pressure Limits: 3/4 models: 1000 psig (68.9 bar) @ 250F (121C),
1 1/2 models: 800 psig (55 bar) @ 250F (121C).
Repeatability: 0.5% of indicated flow rate.
Process Connections: 3/4 or 1 1/2 female NPT.
Scale Length: 3/4 models: 3.2 (8 cm); 1 1/2 models: 5.2 (13 cm).
Weight: 3/4 models: 5 lb (2.3 kg); 1 1/2 models: 13 lb (5.9 kg).
Series SSM 316 & SSB All Metal Flowmeters are ideal for dirty or opaque
fluids, high temperature and high pressure service and harsh environments. The
direct reading scale provides 2% accuracy on approximate 25 to 1 ranges, which
are wider than typical variable area ball float flow meters. The internal magnet
carries the external flow indicator in a non-wetted enclosure. Flowmeters can
quickly be disassembled without removing the body from the pipeline for easy
cleaning. Pipe adaptors may be used to adapt to alternate size liner without
altering accuracy.
10.780
[273]
2.810
[71.4]
2.680
[68]
4.026
[102]
3/4 NPT
1.350 [34.3]
2.754
[70]
15.640
[397]
4.503
[114]
3.710
[94]
5.695
[145]
2.480
[63]
4.010
[101.8]
1-1/2 NPT
124072
3/4 Models 1-1/2 Models
316 SS
Body
SSM-00
SSM-01
SSM-02
SSM-03
SSM-04
SSM-05
SSM-06
SSM-07
SSM-08
SSM-09
SSM-10
SSM-11
SSM-12
SSM-13
Brass
Body
SSB-00
SSB-01
SSB-02
SSB-03
SSB-04
SSB-05
SSB-06
SSB-07
SSB-08
SSB-09
SSB-10
SSB-11
SSB-12
SSB-13

F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

I
n
-
L
n
e
F
L
O
W
Stainless Steel Flowmeters
Ideal for Steam Applications
Series
STFLO
The STFLO Series Stainless Steel Flowmeters are ideal for high temperature and
high pressure applications such as steam. The direct reading scale provides 2% accuracy.
These flowmeters can be quickly disassembled without removing the body from the pipeline
for easy cleaning.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible with liquids and gases.
Wetted Material: T316 SS, Alnico magnet, geothermal EPR O ring.
Temperature Limits: See chart.
Repeatability: 0.5% of indicated flow rate.
Process Connections: 3/4 or 1 1/2 female NPT, optional flange connections.
Scale Length: 3/4 models: 3.2 (8 cm); 1 1/2 models: 5.2 (13 cm).
Weight: 3/4 NPT models: 5.75 lb (2.6 kg); 1 1/2 NPT models: 14 lb (6.4 kg). 3/4
Flange: 9.75 lb (4.4 kg); 1 1/2 Flange: 22 lb (10 kg).
Meter Size
& Material
(3/4 NPT)
(1 1/2 NPT)
0F
(-18C)
1000 (68.9)
800 (55)
70F
(21C)
1000 (68.9)
800 (55)
300F
(148C)
1000 (68.9)
800 (55)
350F
(176C)
990 (68.2)
790 (54.4)
400F
(204C)
970 (66.8)
780 (53.7)
450F
(232C)
950 (65.5)
770 (53)
500F
(260C)
930 (64.1)
760 (52.4)
600F
(315C)
900 (62)
750 (51.7)
MAXIMUM NON-SHOCK WORKING PRESSURE, psig (bar)
4-1/32
[102.25]
2-11/16
[68.07]
IN
10-21/32
[270.78]
OUT
2-13/16
[71.37]
2-3/4
[69.95]
1-11/32
[34.29]
3/4 NPT
15-21/32
[397.28]
IN
OUT
4-1/2
[114.38]
3-23/32
[94.23]
5-11/16
[144.65]
1-1/2 NPT
2-15/32
[62.99]
4
[101.85]
3
[76.20]
5
[127.00]
4-31/32
[125.98]
5
[127.00]
6-13/16
[172.97]
3-1/2
[88.91]
3-7/8
[98.55]
2-3/4
[69.85]
2-1/8
[53.59]
3
[76.20]
4-1/2
[114.30]
3-11/16
[93.73]
3-9/16
[90.43]
3-7/8
[98.55]
Range
2.3 50 lb/Hr. Steam
5 100 lb/Hr. Steam
5 150 lb/Hr. Steam
9.5 240 lb/Hr. Steam
14 335 lb/Hr. Steam
7 100 lb/Hr. Steam
7 150 lb/Hr. Steam
24 800 lb/Hr. Steam
35 1825 lb/Hr. Steam
Model
STFLO-00
STFLO-01
STFLO-02
STFLO-03
STFLO-04
STFLO-05
STFLO-06
STFLO-07
STFLO-08
STFLO-09
STFLO-10
STFLO-11
STFLO-12
STFLO-13
STFLO-14
STFLO-15
STFLO-16
3/4 NPT CONNECTION 1-1/2 NPT CONNECTION
3/4 FLANGE CONNECTION 1-1/2 FLANGE CONNECTION
Note: For ranges calibrated for water or air contact the factory.
OPTIONS
If you wish to change 3/4 NPT to 3/4 Flanged Connection, add F1 to the end of the
model number. If you wish to change 1 1/2 NPT to 1 1/2 Flanged Connection, add
F2 to the end of the model number.
F1, 3/4 150 lb ANSI flange connection
F2, 1 1/2 150 lb ANSI flange connection
Connection
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT

182
F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

I
n
-
L
n
e
F
L
O
W
Total View Industrial Flowmeter
View Flow Rate from 360 Water or Air Ranges
The Series TVF Total View Industrial Flowmeters are economically priced, tough,
simple and accurate meters for water, oils, coolants, compressed gases and other industrial
applications. The flowmeters have a full-scale accuracy of 2% and can be disassembled
quickly without the meter being removed from the pipeline for easy cleaning. The TVFB is
constructed of brass and the TVFS is constructed of T-316 stainless steel, and both feature
polysulphone sight tubes. The Series Total View Industrial Flowmeters are available with
standard 3/4 and 1-1/2 female NPT connections. The easy to read flowmeters provide
360 rotation of scale on plastic sight tube models.
Series
TVF
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Body: TVFB: Brass; TVFS: Stainless steel; O rings: Buna N;
Sight tube: Polysulfone.
Temperature Limits: see Operating Limits table.
Pressure Limits: see Operating Limits table.
Repeatability: 1/4% of indicated flow rate.
Process Connections: 3/4 and 1 1/2 female NPT.
Scale Length: 3.2 (8 cm) for 3/4 NPT connection, 5.2 (13 cm) for
1 1/2 NPT connection.
Weight: 4 lbs (1.8 kg) for 3/4, and 12 lbs (5.5 kg) for 1 1/2.
TVFB TVFS
Maximum Non-Shock Working Pressure psig @ F (bar @ C)
Operating Limits
Connection
3/4
1 1/2
200F (93C)
300 (20.6)
180 (12.4)
250F (121C)
250 (17.2)
145 (10.0)
300F (148C)
115 (7.9)
70 (4.8)
Range
Code
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Range
0.025 0.545 GPM Water
0.04 0.80 GPM Water
0.06 1.20 GPM Water
0.08 1.64 GPM Water
0.10 2.60 GPM Water
0.15 3.80 GPM Water
0.20 5.40 GPM Water
0.20 7.00 GPM Water
0.20 10.0 GPM Water
0.60 14.00 GPM Water
0.50 11.0 GPM Water
0.70 15.0 GPM Water
1.00 21.0 GPM Water
0.50 35.0 GPM Water
1.00 50.0 GPM Water
2.00 70.0 GPM Water
3.00 90.0 GPM Water
Connection
(female NPT)
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
Range
Code
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Range
0.16 3.20 SCFM Air
0.50 5.00 SCFM Air
0.30 7.40 SCFM Air
0.50 10.2 SCFM Air
0.60 14.0 SCFM Air
1.00 20.0 SCFM Air
1.00 26.0 SCFM Air
1.00 35.0 SCFM Air
2.00 50.0 SCFM Air
3.00 70.0 SCFM Air
4.00 85.0 SCFM Air
6.00 125.0 SCFM Air
6.0 160.0 SCFM Air
4.00 260.0 SCFM Air
Connection
(female NPT)
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
Range
Code
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Range
1.50 25.0 SCFM Air
1.00 31.0 SCFM Air
2.00 40.0 SCFM Air
3.0 70.0 SCFM Air
4.0 100.0 SCFM Air
5.0 140.0 SCFM Air
5.0 175.0 SCFM Air
6.00 250.0 SCFM Air
2.00 310.0 SCFM Air
7.50 390.0 SCFM Air
10.0 510.0 SCFM Air
35.0 750.0 SCFM Air
20.0 1000.0 SCFM Air
Connection
(female NPT)
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
Available Ranges
*Contact factory for optional metric scales (liters/minute).
REMOVAL
CLEARANCE
G
IN
OUT
A
B
D
C
CONNECTIONS
E
F
A
9.36
9.36
15.00
15.22
B
2.81
2.81
4.32
4.53
C
2.68
2.68
3.37
3.71
D
4.00
4.00
5.36
5.70
E
1.50
1.35
2.55
2.48
F
2.72
2.72
3.95
3.95
G
3.00
3.00
5.00
5.00
Female NPT
3/4
3/4
1 1/2
1 1/2
Material
Brass
SS
Brass
SS
Brass
T 316 Stainless Steel
See Range/ Connection Chart
(add Range code to Series
designator for model number)
Series
Range
Code
TVFB
TVFS
XX

F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

I
n
-
L
n
e
F
L
O
W
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: CIFN: Nickel plated steel body, 18 8 stainless steel,
Buna N O rings, polysulfone sight tube; CIFS: 18 8 stainless steel,
Buna N O rings, 18 8 stainless steel sight tube.
Maximum Pressure Drop: 2 w.c. (500 Pa).
Accuracy: 2% of reading for dry air at 14.7 psig (1 bar), 70F (21C).
Process Connections: 3/4 and 2 female NPT, optional 3 and 4
female NPT.
Weight: 8 lbs (6.4 kg) for 3/4 and 25 lbs (11.4 kg) for 2.
Combustion Flowmeter
For Low Pressure Gas Flow
Series
CIF
The Series CIF Combustion Flowmeters are tough, simple and accurate
meters for low pressure, low-density gas measurement. They have a verifiable
accuracy of 2% for combustion gases, annealing atmospheres, vacuum flows,
digesters and gas mixing. They can be disassembled quickly without the meter
being removed from the pipeline for easy cleaning. Series CIF Combustion
Flowmeters are extremely robust constructed of nickel plated steel or optional
stainless steel with maximum pressure ratings of 150 psig (10.34 bar) and
temperature ratings of 600F (315C).
Range Code
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Range
0.8 20.0 SCFH Air
1.0 30.0 SCFH Air
2.0 50.0 SCFH Air
3.0 75.0 SCFH Air
4.0 100 SCFH Air
6.0 150 SCFH Air
10 250 SCFH Air
10 350 SCFH Air
20 500 SCFH Air
30 750 SCFH Air
40 1000 SCFH Air
Connection (NPT)
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
Available Ranges
Range Code
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Range
20 500 SCFH Air
30 750 SCFH Air
40 1000 SCFH Air
50 1200 SCFH Air
60 1500 SCFH Air
80 2000 SCFH Air
100 2500 SCFH Air
120 3000 SCFH Air
160 4000 SCFH Air
200 5000 SCFH Air
Connection (NPT)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
FNPT
3/4
2
3
4
A1
18 29/32
[480.22]
26 31/32
[685]
32 13/64
[817.96]
34 37/64
[878.29]
B
7 57/64
[200.42]
12 41/64
[321.07]
14 41/64
[371.87]
16 9/64
[409.97]
C
2 13/64
[55.96]
3 13/32
[86.52]
4 57/64
[124.22]
6
[152.4]
D
2 1/2
[63.5]
3 1/2
[88.9]
4 3/4
[120.65]
6
[152.4]
E
1 29/64
[36.91]
2 3/4
[69.85]
4
[101.6]
5
[127]
A
CIFN SERIES
D
C
B
E
CIFS SERIES
A1
A
18 5/32
[461.17]
26 3/8
[699.93]
31 13/64
[792.56]
33 37/64
[852.89]
CIFN CIFS
* For optional 3 and 4 connections ranging up to 30,000 SCFH, flange
connections, and metric scales (liters/minute), contact the factory.
Ni Plated Steel Body
All Stainless Steel
See Range/ Connection Chart
(add Range code to Series
designator for model number)
XX
CIFN
CIFS
Series
Range
Code

184
F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

I
n
-
L
n
e
F
L
O
W
PVC and CPVC Flowmeters
Perfect for Compatible Acids, Caustics and D.I. Water
Series
PVF
&
CPF
NPT
HEX
CONNECTION
B
E
F
FEMALE NPT
G
REMOVAL CLEARANCE
NPT
C
D
OUT
IN
J
I
H
L
K
FLANGE VERSION
A
Range
00/10
29/40
11/17
41/51
18/22
52/56
23/28
57/62
H
12 1/4
[311.65]
18 5/8
[473.19]
22 35/64
[572.64]
26 3/8
[669.86]
I
4 5/8
[117.6]
5 15/16
[151.13]
6 7/64
[155.18]
7 1/2
[190.5]
J
4 1/16
[103.38]
5 11/16
[144.78]
6 7/64
[155.18]
7 1/2
[190.5]
K
2 3/4
[69.85]
3 7/8
[98.55]
6
[152.4]
7 1/2
[190.5]
L
3 7/8
[98.55]
5
[127]
7 1/2
[190.5]
9
[228.6]
Option
F1
F2
F3
F4
Flange
3/4
1 1/2
3
4
# of Bolt
Holes
4
4
4
8
Flange Opening
Diameter
(1 1/8)
(2)
(3 1/2)
(4 1/2)
Optional Flange
Range
00/10
29/40
11/17
41/51
18/22
52/56
23/28
57/62
NPT
3/4
1 1/2
3
4
A
11 1/32
[280.19]
16 15/16
[430.21]
24 11/32
[618.27]
26 43/64
[728.20]
B
3 25/64
[86.12]
4 1/4
[107.95]
7 29/32
[200.66]
9 13/16
[248.66]
C
2 53/64
[71.83]
4
[101.6]
7 29/32
[200.66]
9 13/16
[248.66]
D
4 43/64
[118.67]
6 29/64
[163.91]
11 19/32
[294.63]
14 9/32
[362.96]
E
3 39/64
[91.68]
5 1/32
[127.79]
5 1/32
[127.79]
5 7/16
[138.17]
F
2 35/64
[64.69]
3 29/64
[87.71]
4 5/16
[109.22]
5 7/16
[138.17]
G
3
[76.2]
5
[127]
5
[127]
5
[127]
Standard (NPT)
FEMALE NPT FLANGE VERSION
A
NPT
F
E
B HEX
CONNEC-
TION
2-1/2
[63.5]
5-23/32
[145.26]
G
REMOVAL CLEARANCE
NPT
C
D
K
L
IN
OUT
J
I
5-23/32
[145.26]
2-1/2
[63.5]
H
PVF
CPF

F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

I
n
-
L
n
e
F
L
O
W
Water Service Air Service
Note: For optional flange connections contact the factory.
Range
(GPM Water)
0.025 0.54
0.04 0.80
0.06 1.20
0.08 1.64
0.10 2.60
0.15 3.80
0.20 5.40
0.20 7.00
0.20 10.00
0.60 15.00
0.50 20.0
0.50 11.0
0.70 15.0
1.00 25.0
0.50 35.0
1.00 50.0
2.00 70.0
4.00 120
2.00 50.0
4.00 100
7.00 150
10.0 200
15.0 300
4.00 100
7.00 150
10.0 200
15.0 300
15.0 400
20.0 500
Range
(SCFM Air)
0.30 7.40
0.50 10.2
0.70 14.0
1.00 20.0
1.00 26.0
1.00 35.0
2.00 50.0
3.00 70.0
4.00 85.0
6.00 125
6.00 160
4.00 260
2.0 40.0
3.00 70.0
4.00 100
5.00 140
5.00 175
6.00 250
2.0 310
7.50 390
10.0 510
35.0 750
20.0 1000
30.0 600
40.0 1000
70.0 1750
100.0 2300
150.0 3500
40.0 1000
70.0 1750
100.0 2300
150.0 3500
150.0 4000
200.0 5000
Body Size and Description
3/4 PVC-NPT connection
1-1/2 PVC-NPT connection
3 and 4 PVC-NPT connection
3/4 PVC-Flange connection
1-1/2 PVC-Flange connection
3 and 4 PVC-Flange connection
70F (21C)
250 (17)
170 (11)
160 (11)
150 (10)
150 (10)
150 (10)
80F (26C)
255 (15)
150 (10)
150 (10)
150 (10)
150 (10)
150 (10)
100F (37C)
150 (10)
105 (7)
105 (7)
150 (10)
105 (7)
105 (7)
120F (48C)
90 (6)
65 (4)
65 (4)
65 (4)
65 (4)
65 (4)
140F (60C)
50 (3)
40 (2)
40 (2)
50 (3)
40 (2)
40 (2)
Operating Limits For Series PVF Flowmeters
Maximum Non-Shock Working Pressure, psig @ F (bar @ C)
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: PVF: PVC, fluoroelastomer O rings; CPF: CPVC,
Buna N O rings.
Temperature Limits: See operating limits chart.
Pressure Limits: See operating limits chart.
Process Connections: 3/4, 1 1/2, 3, and 4 female NPT.
Weight: 3 lb (1.4 kg) for 3/4, 9 lb (4.1 kg) for 1 1/2, 14 lb (6.4 kg) for
3, and 18 lb (8.2) for 4.
The Series PVF & CPF Flowmeters are heavy bodied meters for corrosives
and high purity fluids. They are economically priced meters ideal for acids or de-
ionized water making them suited for water & wastewater treatment facilities.
The flowmeters are comprised of all plastic wetted components for maximum
corrosion resistance. They have a full-scale accuracy of 2% and can be
disassembled quickly without the meter being removed from the pipeline for
easy cleaning. The flowmeters are available with 3/4, 1-1/2, 3, and 4 female
NPT connections. Optional flange connections are also available.
Body Size and Description
3/4 CPVC-NPT connection
1-1/2 CPVC-NPT connection
3 and 4 CPVC-NPT connection
3/4 CPVC-Flange connection
1-1/2 CPVC-Flange connection
3 and 4 CPVC-Flange connection
70F (21C)
270 (19)
180 (12)
160 (11)
150 (10)
150 (10)
150 (10)
80F (26C)
270 (19)
180 (12)
160 (11)
150 (10)
150 (10)
150 (10)
100F (37C)
250 (17)
170 (11)
140 (10)
150 (10)
150 (10)
150 (10)
120F (48C)
200 (10)
145 (10)
125 (9)
135 (9)
135 (9)
135 (9)
140F (60C)
150 (10)
115 (8)
105 (7)
110 (8)
110 (8)
110 (8)
160F (71C)
130 (9)
85 (6)
75 (5)
90 (6)
90 (6)
90 (6)
180F (82C)
80 (6)
50 (3)
50 (3)
70 (5)
70 (5)
70 (5)
210F (98C)
50 (3)
30 (2)
30 (2)
40 (2)
40 (2)
40 (2)
Operating Limits For Series CPF Flowmeters
Maximum Non-Shock Working Pressure, psig @ F (bar @ C)
Connection
(female NPT)
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
1 1/2
1 1/2
1 1/2
1 1/2
1 1/2
1 1/2
1 1/2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
Connection
(female NPT)
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
1 1/2
1 1/2
1 1/2
1 1/2
1 1/2
1 1/2
1 1/2
1 1/2
1 1/2
1 1/2
1 1/2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
Model
PVF-29
PVF-30
PVF-31
PVF-32
PVF-33
PVF-34
PVF-35
PVF-36
PVF-37
PVF-38
PVF-39
PVF-40
PVF-41
PVF-42
PVF-43
PVF-44
PVF-45
PVF-46
PVF-47
PVF-48
PVF-49
PVF-50
PVF-51
PVF-52
PVF-53
PVF-54
PVF-55
PVF-56
PVF-57
PVF-58
PVF-59
PVF-60
PVF-61
PVF-62
Model
PVF-00
PVF-01
PVF-02
PVF-03
PVF-04
PVF-05
PVF-06
PVF-07
PVF-08
PVF-09
PVF-10
PVF-11
PVF-12
PVF-13
PVF-14
PVF-15
PVF-16
PVF-17
PVF-18
PVF-19
PVF-20
PVF-21
PVF-22
PVF-23
PVF-24
PVF-25
PVF-26
PVF-27
PVF-28
Model
CPF-29
CPF-30
CPF-31
CPF-32
CPF-33
CPF-34
CPF-35
CPF-36
CPF-37
CPF-38
CPF-39
CPF-40
CPF-41
CPF-42
CPF-43
CPF-44
CPF-45
CPF-46
CPF-47
CPF-48
CPF-49
CPF-50
CPF-51
CPF-52
CPF-53
CPF-54
CPF-55
CPF-56
CPF-57
CPF-58
CPF-59
CPF-60
CPF-61
CPF-62
Model
CPF-00
CPF-01
CPF-02
CPF-03
CPF-04
CPF-05
CPF-06
CPF-07
CPF-08
CPF-09
CPF-10
CPF-11
CPF-12
CPF-13
CPF-14
CPF-15
CPF-16
CPF-17
CPF-18
CPF-19
CPF-20
CPF-21
CPF-22
CPF-23
CPF-24
CPF-25
CPF-26
CPF-27
CPF-28

186
F
o
w

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
,

I
n
-
L
n
e
F
L
O
W
In-Line Flow Sensors
Use with the Dwyer
Differential Pressure Gages or Transmitters

In-Line Flow Sensors are averaging Pitot tubes that provide accurate and
convenient flow rate sensing for schedule 40 pipe. When purchased with a
Dwyer
Capsuhelic
differential pressure gage of appropriate range, the result

is a flow indicating system delivered off the shelf at an economical price.
Pitot tubes have been used in flow measurement for years. Conventional pitot
tubes sense velocity pressure at only one point in the flowing stream. Therefore,
a series of measurements must be taken across the stream to obtain a
meaningful average flow rate. The Dwyer
flow sensor eliminates the need for

traversing the flowing stream because of its multiple sensing points and built-
in averaging capability.
The Series DS-300 flow sensors are designed to be inserted in the pipeline
through a compression fitting. They are furnished with instrument shut-off
valves on both pressure connections. Valves are fitted with 1/8 female NPT
connections. Accessories include adapters with 1/4 SAE 45 flared ends
compatible with hoses supplied with the Model A-471 Portable Capsuhelic
gage
kit. Standard valves are rated at 200 psig (13.7 bar) and 200F (93.3C). Where
valves are not required, they can be omitted at reduced cost. Series DS-300 flow
sensors are available for pipe sizes from 1 to 10.
DS-400 Averaging Flow Sensors are quality constructed from extra strong
3/4 dia. stainless steel to resist increased forces encountered at higher flow
rates with both air and water. This extra strength also allows them to be made
in longer insertion lengths up to 24 inches (61 cm). All models include
convenient and quick-acting quarter-turn ball valves to isolate the sensor for
zeroing. Process connections to the valve assembly are 1/8 female NPT. A pair
of 1/8 NPT X 1/4 SAE 45 flared adapters are included, compatible with
hoses used in the Model A-471 Portable Capsuhelic
Gage Kit. Supplied solid

brass mounting adapter has a 3/4 dia. compression fitting to lock in required
insertion length and a 3/4 male NPT thread for mounting in a Threaded
Branch Connection.
Valves Standard, brass with TFE
seat and Buna N O ring
Nameplate
Stainless steel
permanently attached
with split ring. Includes
complete size and
model information.
Head Machined stainless steel.
Packing gland Parker CPI brass
compression fitting.
Sensor tube 304 SS.
Sensing ports Multiple upstream and
downstream ports sized and positioned
to provide effective accurate pressure
averaging, even at lower velocities.
Series
DS
1-11/16 [42.86] APPROX
1-3/4 [44.45]
1-7/16 [36.53] 1/4 NPT
5/16 [7.94]
1/16 [1.59] CLEARANCE
1-15/16 [49.21]
1-5/8 [41.28]
Model DS-300
Select model with suffix which matches pipe size
Model DS-300-1
Model DS-300-1-1/4
Model DS-300-1-1/2
Model DS-300-2
Model DS-300-2-1/2
Model DS-300-3
Model DS-300-4
Model DS-300-6
Model DS-300-8
Model DS-300-10
Model DS-400-6
Model DS-400-8
Model DS-400-10
Model DS-400-12
Model DS-400-14
Model DS-400-16
Model DS-400-18
Model DS-400-20
Model DS-400-24
A-160, Threaded Branch Connection, 3/8 NPT, forged steel, 3000 psi
A-161, Brass Bushing, 1/4 x 3/8
DS 300 or DS 400 Less Valves. To order, add suffix -LV

F
o
w

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
,

I
n
-
L
n
e
F
L
O
W
How To Order
Merely determine the pipe size into which the flow sensor will be mounted
and designate the size as a suffix to Model DS 300. For example, a flow
sensor to be mounted in a 2 pipe would be a Model No. DS 300 2.
For non critical water and air flow monitoring applications, the chart below
can be utilized for ordering a stock Capsuhelic

for use with the DS 300 flow sensor. Simply locate the maximum flow rate
for the media being measured under the appropriate pipe size and read
the Capsuhelic
gage range in inches of water column to the left. The DS

300 sensor is supplied with installation and operating instructions, Bulletin
F 50. It also includes complete flow conversion information for the three
media conditions shown in the chart below. This information enables the
user to create a complete differential pressure to flow rate conversion table
for the sensor and differential pressure gage employed. Both the Dwyer
Capsuhelic
gage and flow sensor feature excellent repeatability so, once

the desired flow rate is determined, deviation from that flow in quantitative
measure can be easily determined. You may wish to order the adjustable
signal flag option for the Capsuhelic
gage to provide an easily identified

reference point for the proper flow.
Capsuhelic
gages with special ranges and/or direct reading scales in

appropriate flow units are available on special order for more critical
applications. Customer supplied data for the full scale flow (quantity and
units) is required along with the differential pressure reading at that full
flow figure. Prior to ordering a special Capsuhelic
differential pressure
gage for flow read out, we recommend you request Bulletin F 50 to obtain
complete data on converting flow rates of various media to the sensor
differential pressure output. With this bulletin and after making a few
simple calculations, the exact range gage required can easily be
determined.
Model A-471 Portable Kit
The Dwyer
Series 4000 Capsuhelic
differential pressure gage is ideally

suited for use as a read-out device with the DS-300 Flow Sensors. The gage
may be used on system pressures of up to 500 psig even when the flow sensor
differential pressure to be read is less than 0.5 w.c. With accuracy of 3% of
full scale, the Capsuhelic
gage can be used in ambient temperatures from 32

to 200F (0 to 93.3C). Zero and range adjustments are made from outside the
gage. The standard gage with a die cast aluminum housing can be used with
the flow sensor for air or oil applications. For water flow measurements, the
optional forged brass housing should be specified. The Capsuhelic
gage may
be panel or surface mounted and permanently plumbed to the flow sensor
if desired. The optional A-610 pipe mounting bracket allows the gage to be
easily attached to any 1-1/4- 2 horizontal or vertical pipe.
Capsuhelic
Gage Shown
Instaled In A-471 Portable Kit
LP
HP
1/16 [1.60]
GAP UP TO 12 PIPE
1/8 [3.175]
GAP 14 PIPE AND UP
3/4 [19.05]
DIA.
3-5/8 [92.08] APPROX.
2-1/8 [53.98]
1-5/8 [41.28] TYP.
2-1/16
[52.40]
72 700416 00
Large 3/4 Inch Diameter for Extra Strength
in Lengths to 24 Inches
DS-400
Gage Range
(in w.c.)
2
5
10
25
50
100
Media
@ 70F
Water (GPM)
Air @ 14.7 PSIA (SCFM)
Air @ 100 PSIG (SCFM)
Water (GPM)
Water (GPM)
Water (GPM)
Water (GPM)
Water (GPM)
1
4.8
19.0
50.0
7.7
30.0
83.0
11.0
41.0
120.0
18.0
63.0
185.0
25.0
90.0
260.0
36.5
135.0
370.0
1-1/4
8.3
33.0
90.5
14.0
51.0
142.0
19.0
72.0
205.0
32.0
112.0
325.0
44.0
161.0
460.0
62.0
230.0
660.0
1-1/2
11.5
42.0
120.0
18.0
66.0
190.0
25.5
93.0
275.0
40.5
155.0
430.0
57.5
205.0
620.0
82.0
300.0
870.0
2
20.5
65.0
210.0
34.0
118.0
340.0
45.5
163.0
470.0
72.0
255.0
760.0
100.0
360.0
1050.0
142.0
505.0
1500.0
2-1/2
30
113
325
47
178
610
67
250
740
108
390
1200
152
560
1700
220
800
2300
3
49
183
510
78
289
820
110
410
1100
173
640
1800
247
900
2600
350
1290
3600
4
86
330
920
138
510
1600
195
725
2000
310
1130
3300
435
1600
4600
620
2290
6500
6
205
760
2050
320
1200
3300
450
1690
4600
720
2630
7200
1000
3700
10000
1500
5000
15000
8
350
1340
3600
560
2150
5700
800
3040
8100
1250
4860
13000
1800
6400
18500
10
560
2130
6000
890
3400
10000
1260
4860
15000
2000
7700
22000
Full Range Flows by Pipe Size (Approximate)
For portable operation, the A
471 Capsuhelic
Portable
Gage Kit is available complete
with tough polypropylene
carrying case, mounting
bracket, 3 way manifold valve,
two 10' high pressure hoses,
and all necessary fittings.
See pages 10 and 11 for
complete information on the
Capsuhelic
gage

188
F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

O
r
f
c
e

P
a
t
e
F
L
O
W
Orifice Plate Flowmeter
Stainless Steel for Use with Liquids and Gases
Series
OP
The Series OP Orifice Plate Flow Meter is a complete orifice plate
flow metering package. It incorporates a stainless steel orifice plate with
a unique holder or carrier ring containing metering taps and integral
gaskets. It was designed for use wherever there is an application for a
conventional flow orifice plate. It can also be used in place of other
primary differential producers for efficiency and cost effectiveness.
Installation is accomplished simply by slipping the unit between standard
flanges (orifice flanges are not required). The Series OP is available in
line sizes from 1/2 to 24 and can be used with compatible liquids and
gases.
FEATURES
Mounted with standard flanges
Corner type metering taps
Corrosion free material
Simplified installation
Stainless steel wetted parts
Proven through a wide range of applications for energy
efficiency
Assures long term reliability and accuracy
APPLICATION
Fluid flow rates in building water lines.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: For metering compatible liquids and gases.
Wetted Material: 304 SS, Buna-N gaskets.
Accuracy: 0.6% of full scale flow. (Beta = .2-.6) 0.7% for Beta
greater than .6.
Temperature: -50 to 200F (-45 to 93C).
Pressure: Limited only by pipe and flange rating restrictions.
Head Loss: 1-Beta ratio
2
eg: 1-0.7
2
= 1-0.49 = 51% of the d.p.
Line Sizes: 1/2 to 24.
Installation: Standard flange, any rating (orifice flanges not
required).
Pipe Requirements: General requirements 10 diameter upstream
and 5 diameter downstream of orifice plate.
Weight: Varies with line size. See chart.
INCLUDES RING GASKET
ADHERED TO FACES
1-1/4
[31.75]
BODY
(CARRIER RING)
ORIFICE PLATE
1/8 [3.18]
THICK TYPICAL
1/4 NPT PRESSURE FITTING
FLOW
HI
PRESSURE
LOW
PRESSURE
4-1/2
[114.3]
A
A
C
L
C
L
OD ID

F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

O
r
f
c
e

P
a
t
e
F
L
O
W
Inch d.p.
W/C
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
at 14.7 psia
(0 psig)
2.35
12.21
32.77
3.65
20.21
59.92
5.24
34.2
91.28
9.31
62.09
180
14.57
80.82
212.18
20.92
125.74
372.09
32.71
197.54
543.99
49.17
282.9
816.7
83.58
503.76
1380.03
130.48
786.23
2152.83
187.86
1331.63
3097.20
333.87
2014.95
5532.00
521.58
3145.50
8626.42
750.9
4530
12430.00
927.14
6477.67
15251.50
1172.63
7264.58
20179.85
1565.79
9302.08
25299.92
1935.37
11588.20
32115.34
2838.14
17229.62
46810.53
at 20 psig
3.63
19.58
56.15
5.66
32.44
102.91
8.11
54.92
156.51
14.41
99.75
309.97
22.55
129.68
363.93
32.38
202.03
639.87
50.64
317.58
936.56
76.13
454.77
1404.95
129.44
810.06
2373.02
202.11
1264.42
3701.57
291
1820.05
5325.20
517.25
3241.45
9525.43
808
5060.38
14846.80
1163.44
7288.16
21397.00
1436.59
8812.87
28262.66
1817.05
11688.26
34749.32
2426.34
14966.93
43535.32
2999.11
18645.74
55303.34
4398.25
27726.33
80610.19
Model
OP-A-1
OP-A-2
OP-A-3
OP-B-1
OP-B-2
OP-B-3
OP-C-1
OP-C-2
OP-C-3
OP-D-1
OP-D-2
OP-D-3
OP-E-1
OP-E-2
OP-E-3
OP-F-1
OP-F-2
OP-F-3
OP-G-1
OP-G-2
OP-G-3
OP-H-1
OP-H-2
OP-H-3
OP-J-1
OP-J-2
OP-J-3
OP-K-1
OP-K-2
OP-K-3
OP-L-1
OP-L-2
OP-L-3
OP-M-1
OP-M-2
OP-M-3
OP-N-1
OP-N-2
OP-N-3
OP-O-1
OP-O-2
OP-O-3
OP-P-1
OP-P-2
OP-P-3
OP-Q-1
OP-Q-2
OP-Q-3
OP-R-1
OP-R-2
OP-R-3
OP-S-1
OP-S-2
OP-S-3
OP-T-1
OP-T-2
OP-T-3
Line
Size
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
1
1
1
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.5
1.5
1.5
2
2
2
2.5
2.5
2.5
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
8
8
8
10
10
10
12
12
12
14
14
14
16
16
16
18
18
18
20
20
20
24
24
24
Bore
0.200
0.310
0.430
0.250
0.400
0.580
0.300
0.520
0.720
0.400
0.700
1.00
0.500
0.800
1.100
0.600
1.000
1.450
0.750
1.250
1.750
0.920
1.500
2.150
1.200
2.000
2.800
1.500
2.500
3.500
1.800
3.000
4.200
2.400
4.000
5.600
3.000
5.000
7.000
3.600
6.000
8.400
4.000
6.600
9.300
4.500
7.600
10.700
5.200
8.600
12.000
5.780
9.600
13.500
7.000
11.700
16.300
Beta
0.32
0.50
0.69
0.30
0.49
0.70
0.29
0.49
0.69
0.29
0.51
0.72
0.31
0.50
0.68
0.29
0.48
0.70
0.30
0.50
0.70
0.30
0.49
0.70
0.30
0.50
0.70
0.30
0.50
0.69
0.30
0.49
0.69
0.30
0.50
0.70
0.30
0.50
0.70
0.30
0.50
0.70
0.30
0.50
0.70
0.30
0.50
0.70
0.30
0.50
0.70
0.30
0.50
0.70
0.30
0.50
0.70
Inch d.p.
W/C
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
Flow in
GPM
0.62
3.44
13.00
0.97
5.69
23.82
1.38
9.63
36.15
2.46
17.48
71.77
3.85
22.73
83.95
5.52
35.34
147.74
8.63
55.54
216.30
12.97
79.94
324.16
22.03
141.51
547.11
34.39
220.80
853.09
49.46
317.74
1226.98
87.95
565.77
2195.86
137.35
883.04
3421.26
197.73
1271.62
4930.86
244.14
1537.49
6052.57
308.76
2038.95
8007.74
412.26
2610.71
10027.37
509.55
3252.22
12742.82
747.18
4835.93
18572.50
Weight
(lb)
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
7.00
7.00
7.00
8.00
8.00
8.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
20.00
20.00
20.00
30.00
30.00
30.00
40.00
40.00
40.00
48.00
48.00
48.00
56.00
56.00
56.00
64.00
64.00
64.00
78.00
78.00
78.00
Series OP Orifice Plate Flowmeter
Material 304/304 L dual certified Gaskets Buna N
Based on 70F, 14.7 psia (Base Conditions)
Beta Value Based on Std Sch pipe I.D.
1.25 overall thickness
Orifice plate thickness is 0.125
Water Capacity
Note: Differential pressure values should be less than 50% of the inlet absolute pressure.
at 100 psig
6.61
36.37
107.47
10.3
60.26
197.2
14.8
102.09
300
26.3
185.5
595.2
41.16
241.5
697.39
59.13
375.8
1227.63
92.48
590.91
1798.86
139.06
846.21
2696.28
236.48
1507.64
4553.68
369.29
2353.51
7103.22
531.75
3387.93
10219.28
945.28
6034.85
18290.00
1476.77
9421.74
28506.17
2126.47
13570.33
41089.02
2625.81
16409.42
50427.78
3321.32
21764.08
66737.64
4435.12
27869.85
83587.01
5482.22
34720.84
106215.88
8038.99
51633.81
154823.78
Air Capacity - Flow in SCFM

190
F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

O
r
f
c
e

P
a
t
e
F
L
O
W
Orifice Plate Flowmeter
PVC or PTFE Orifice Plates
Series
PE
&
TE
The Series PE Orifice Plate Flow Meter offers one-piece PVC construction incorporating
a unique holder or carrier ring containing metering taps and integral gaskets. Unlike a
standard orifice plate, the Series PE is a true primary element including the various
components for differential pressure measurement. It was designed for use wherever there
is an application for a conventional flow orifice plate. It can also be used in place of other
primary differential producers for efficiency and cost effectiveness. The Series PE is available
in line sizes from 1/2 to 24 and used for air and most gases. It meets or exceeds ASME,
AGA & ISO standards.
SERIES PE FEATURES
Mounted with standard flanges
Standard corner tap configuration
Corrosion free material
Simplified installation
Built in metering taps (1/4 female NPT STD)
Proven through a wide range of applications for accuracy and energy efficiency
Assures long term reliability and accuracy
The Series TE Orifice Plate Flowmeter offers one-piece PTFE construction similar to
the OP and PE Series orifice plates, which incorporate a unique holder or carrier ring
containing metering taps and integral gaskets. Available for line sizes from 1/2 to 24, the
Series TE orifice plate can be used with gases, liquids, corrosive, and high temperature
fluids. The Series TE can be easily installed by slipping the unit between standard flanges
(orifice flanges are not required). The Series TE was designed for use anywhere there is
an application for a conventional flow orifice plate. It can also be used in place of other
primary differential producers for efficiency and cost effectiveness.
SERIES TE FEATURES
Excellent chemical resistance
Weather resistant
Flame retardant (without factory gaskets)
Low friction (minimum wear)
Orifice plate thickness 1/4 offering greater stability
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: PE: Clean air and compatible gases; TE: Compatible gases and liquids.
Wetted Material: Monolithic (single piece) constructed entirely of gray PVC for PE
or white PTPE for TE, Buna N gaskets.
Accuracy: 0.6% full scale flow. (Beta = .2 .6) 0.7% for Beta greater than .6.
Temperature: PE: 140F max (60C max); TE: 40 to 200F ( 40 to 93.3C).
Pressure: 150 psi (10 bar) max.
Head Loss: 1 Beta ratio
2
eg: 1 0.7
2
= 1 0.49 = 51% of the d.p.
Installation: Standard flange 125#/150# rating.
Pipe Requirements: General requirements 10 diameter upstream and 5 diameter
downstream.
Weight: Varies with line size. See chart.
INCLUDES RING GASKET
ADHERED TO FACES
1-1/4
[31.75]
BODY
(CARRIER RING)
ORIFICE PLATE
1/8 [3.18]
THICK TYPICAL
1/4 NPT PRESSURE FITTING
FLOW
HI
PRESSURE
LOW
PRESSURE
4-1/2
[114.3]
A
A
C
L
C
L
OD ID
PE
TE

F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,

O
r
f
c
e

P
a
t
e
F
L
O
W
Line
Size
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
1
1
1
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.5
1.5
1.5
2
2
2
2.5
2.5
2.5
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
8
8
8
10
10
10
12
12
12
14
14
14
16
16
16
18
18
18
20
20
20
24
24
24
PE
Model
PE-A-1
PE-A-2
PE-A-3
PE-B-1
PE-B-2
PE-B-3
PE-C-1
PE-C-2
PE-C-3
PE-D-1
PE-D-2
PE-D-3
PE-E-1
PE-E-2
PE-E-3
PE-F-1
PE-F-2
PE-F-3
PE-G-1
PE-G-2
PE-G-3
PE-H-1
PE-H-2
PE-H-3
PE-J-1
PE-J-2
PE-J-3
PE-K-1
PE-K-2
PE-K-3
PE-L-1
PE-L-2
PE-L-3
PE-M-1
PE-M-2
PE-M-3
PE-N-1
PE-N-2
PE-N-3
PE-O-1
PE-O-2
PE-O-3
PE-P-1
PE-P-2
PE-P-3
PE-Q-1
PE-Q-2
PE-Q-3
PE-R-1
PE-R-2
PE-R-3
PE-S-1
PE-S-2
PE-S-3
PE-T-1
PE-T-2
PE-T-3
Bore
0.200
0.310
0.430
0.250
0.400
0.580
0.300
0.520
0.720
0.400
0.700
1.00
0.500
0.800
1.100
0.600
1.000
1.450
0.750
1.250
1.750
0.920
1.500
2.150
1.200
2.000
2.800
1.500
2.500
3.500
1.800
3.000
4.200
2.400
4.000
5.600
3.000
5.000
7.000
3.600
6.000
8.400
4.000
6.600
9.300
4.500
7.600
10.700
5.200
8.600
12.000
5.780
9.600
13.500
7.000
11.700
16.300
Beta
0.3
0.5
0.69
0.3
0.49
0.7
0.29
0.49
0.69
0.29
0.51
0.72
0.31
0.5
0.68
0.29
0.48
0.7
0.3
0.5
0.7
0.3
0.49
0.7
0.3
0.5
0.7
0.3
0.5
0.69
0.3
0.49
0.69
0.3
0.5
0.7
0.3
0.5
0.7
0.3
0.5
0.7
0.3
0.5
0.7
0.3
0.5
0.7
0.3
0.5
0.7
0.3
0.5
0.7
0.3
0.5
0.7
Inch d/p
W/C
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
20
100
200
Series PE Orifice Plate Flowmeter Air Capacity Structure
Material PVC Gaskets Buna N
Based on 70F, 14.7 psia (Base Conditions)
Beta Value Based on Std Sch pipe I.D.
at 14.7 psia
(0 psig)
2.35
12.21
32.77
3.65
20.21
59.92
5.24
34.2
91.28
9.31
62.09
180
14.57
80.82
212.18
20.92
125.74
372.09
32.71
197.54
543.99
49.17
282.9
816.7
83.58
503.76
1380.03
130.48
786.23
2152.83
187.86
1331.63
3097.20
333.87
2014.95
5532.00
521.58
3145.50
8626.42
750.9
4530
12430.00
927.14
5477.67
15251.50
1172.63
7264.58
20179.85
1565.79
9302.08
25299.92
1935.37
11588.20
32115.34
2838.14
17229.62
46810.53
PE
Weight
(lb)
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
7.00
7.00
7.00
9.00
9.00
9.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
12.00
12.00
12.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
16.00
16.00
16.00
Note: Differential pressure values should be less than 50% of the inlet absolute pressure.
Air Capacity - Flow in SCFM
TE
Model
TE-A-1
TE-A-2
TE-A-3
TE-B-1
TE-B-2
TE-B-3
TE-C-1
TE-C-2
TE-C-3
TE-D-1
TE-D-2
TE-D-3
TE-E-1
TE-E-2
TE-E-3
TE-F-1
TE-F-2
TE-F-3
TE-G-1
TE-G-2
TE-G-3
TE-H-1
TE-H-2
TE-H-3
TE-J-1
TE-J-2
TE-J-3
TE-K-1
TE-K-2
TE-K-3
TE-L-1
TE-L-2
TE-L-3
TE-M-1
TE-M-2
TE-M-3
TE-N-1
TE-N-2
TE-N-3
TE-O-1
TE-O-2
TE-O-3
TE-P-1
TE-P-2
TE-P-3
TE-Q-1
TE-Q-2
TE-Q-3
TE-R-1
TE-R-2
TE-R-3
TE-S-1
TE-S-2
TE-S-3
TE-T-1
TE-T-2
TE-T-3
Series TE Orifice Plate Flowmeter Capacity Structure
Material PTFE Gaskets Buna N
Based on 70F, 14.7 psia (base conditions)
Beta value based on Std Sch pipe I.D.
TE
Weight
(lb)
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
8.00
8.00
8.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
15.00
15.00
15.00
18.00
18.00
18.00
22.00
22.00
22.00
29.00
29.00
29.00
32.00
32.00
32.00
Inch d.p.
W/C
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
20
100
320
Inch Flow
GPM
0.62
3.44
13.00
0.97
5.69
23.82
1.38
9.63
36.15
2.46
17.48
71.77
3.85
22.73
83.95
5.52
35.34
147.74
8.63
55.54
216.30
12.97
79.94
324.16
22.03
141.51
547.11
34.39
220.80
853.09
49.46
317.74
1226.98
87.95
565.77
2195.86
137.35
883.04
3421.26
197.73
1271.62
4930.86
244.14
1537.49
6052.57
308.76
2038.95
8007.74
412.26
2610.71
10027.37
509.55
3252.22
12742.82
747.18
4835.93
18572.50
Water Capacity (TE)
at 20 psig
3.63
19.58
56.15
5.66
32.44
102.91
8.11
54.92
156.51
14.41
99.75
309.97
22.55
129.68
363.93
32.38
202.03
639.87
50.64
317.58
936.56
78.13
454.77
1404.95
129.44
810.06
2373.02
202.11
1264.42
3701.57
291
1820.05
5325.20
517.25
3241.45
9525.43
808
5060.38
14846.80
1163.44
7288.16
21397.00
1436.59
8812.87
28262.66
1817.05
11688.26
34749.32
2426.34
14966.93
43535.32
2999.11
18645.74
55303.34
4398.25
27726.33
80610.19
at 100 psig
6.61
36.37
107.47
10.3
60.26
197.2
14.8
102.09
300
26.3
185.5
595.2
41.16
241.5
697.39
59.13
375.8
1227.63
92.48
590.91
1798.86
139.06
846.21
2696.28
236.48
1507.64
4553.68
369.29
2353.51
7103.22
531.75
3387.93
10219.28
945.28
6034.85
18290.00
1476.77
9421.74
28506.17
2126.47
13570.33
41089.02
2625.81
16409.42
50437.78
3321.32
21764.08
66737.64
4435.12
27869.85
83587.01
5482.22
34720.84
106215.88
8038.99
51633.81
154823.78

192
S
g
h
t

F
o
w

I
n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s
F
L
O
WMidwest Sight Flow Indicators are manufactured of quality materials and safety tested to
assure long, dependable service at economical prices. Available in window viewing style in the
100 and 300 Series and tube viewing style in the 400 and 700 Series with connection choices
of female NPT, BSPP, or BSPT threaded and flanged. Series 700 has impeller and internal
wipers for cleaning sight tube, which is perfect for fluids with suspended solids. Just rotate the
glass tube and restore full 360 visibility without disrupting the flow.
MIDWEST Sight Flow Indicators
Inexpensive Protection for Expensive Equipment and Systems
Model 100, 100MP
Model 400
Model 700
Model 300, 300MP Model 360F
Models
100 Single window with impeller
300 Double window with impeller
350 Double window with no indicator
360 Double window with flapper
400 Tube type with no indicator
700 Tube type with impeller and internal wipers to clean glass tube
Series
SFI-100, SFI-300,
SFI-350, SFI-360,
SFI-400, SFI-700
Dimensions are in inches (mm)
Model
100
Series
300
Series
700
Series
400
Series
400F
Series
300F
Series
Body
Size
1/4, 3/8
1/2, 3/4
1, 1 1/4
1 1/2, 2
1/4, 3/8
1/2, 3/4
1, 1 1/4
1 1/2, 2
1/4, 3/8
1/2, 3/4
1, 1 1/4,
1 1/2
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
3
4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
3
4
1 1/2
2
3
4
6
Length
3.000 (76)
4.000 (102)
4.375 (111)
5.688 (144)
3.063 (78)
4.063 (103)
4.375 (111)
5.500 (140)
2.750 (70)
3.688 (94)
4.875 (124)
4.500 (144)
5.125 (130)
5.625 (143)
5.750 (146)
5.875 (149)
6.125 (156)
6.250 (159)
6.250 (159)
5.000 (127)
5.125 (130)
5.250 (133)
5.370 (137)
5.750 (146)
5.750 (146)
6.375 (162)
6.500 (165)
8.875 (225)
10.250 (260)
12.500 (318)
Depth
1.813 (46)
2.250 (57)
2.563 (65)
3.250 (830)
2.250 (57)
2.750 (70)
3.125 (79)
3.688 (93)
Height
2.125 (54)
2.563 (65)
2.625 (67)
3.625 (83)
2.125 (54)
2.563 (65)
2.563 (65)
4.063 (103)
1.500 (38)
2.250 (57)
2.750 (70)
(across flats)
Flange
Diameter
3.500 (89)
3.875 (98)
4.250 (108)
4.625 (117)
5.000 (127)
6.000 (152)
7.500 (191)
9.00 (229)
4.250 (108)
4.625 (117)
5.000 (127)
6.000 (152)
7.500 (191)
9.000 (229)
5.000 (127)
6.000 (152)
7.500 (191)
9.000 (229)
11.000 (279)
Viewing
Area
Diameter
1.500 (38)
1.750 (44)
2.000 (51 )
2.000 (51)
2.500 (64)
3.000 (76)
4.000 (102)
5.000 (127)
2.000 (51)
2.000 (51)
2.500 (64)
3.000 (76)
4.000 (102)
5.000 (127)
2.313 (58)
2.313 (58)
3.000 (76)
4.000 (102)
6.000 (152)
Weight
lb (kg)
1.1 (0.5)
1.5 (0.7)
2.7 (1.2)
5.5 (2.5)
1.7 (0.8)
2.6 (1.2)
3.0 (1.4)
7.0 (3.2)
0.9 (0.4)
2.4 (1.1)
5.1 (2.3)
3.8 (1.7)
4.8 (2.2)
6.2 (2.8)
7.6 (3.5)
8.7 (4.0)
13 (6.0)
17 (7.7)
25 (11.0)
7 (3.2)
8 (3.6)
12 (5.5)
14 (6.4)
23 (10.4)
31 (14.1)
12 (5.5)
16 (7.5)
38 (17)
56 (25)
120 (55)
Sight Flow Indicator Dimensions and Weight

S
g
h
t

F
o
w

I
n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s
F
L
O
W
(Maximum flow on impeller models: 5FPS with liquids, 5000 FPM with gases)
Example
Model
Designator
Body
Style
Body
Options
Body
Size
Options
SFI-100 & SFI-300 SERIES
Window Style with Threaded Connections
SFI-300SS-2-G2 Sight Flow Indicator; double window,
temper glass, Fluoroelastomer gaskets, 316SS body,
ABS impeller, 2 inch female NPT connections.
Sight flow indicator, tempered glass standard, Buna-N
gaskets standard, female NPT connections standard.
Single window, bronze body, ABS Impeller
Double window, bronze body, ABS Impeller
Double window, bronze body, no moving indicator
Double window, bronze body, 304SS flapper
316SS body option for 300, 350, 360
150 psig maximum pressure option, includes
Fluoroelastomer gaskets
1/4 inch connection size
1 inch connection size
1-1/4 inch connection size
Plexiglass window
PTFE gasket
Fluoroelastomer gasket
316SS Shaft (Not on 350 Model)
Monel Shaft (Not on 350 Model)
ABS impeller with bronze bushing (Not on 350, 360)
316SS impeller (Not on 350, 360)
No impeller (100 only)
316SS Flapper (360 only)
BSPT threads
BSPP threads
Example
Model
Designator
Body
Style
Body
Size
Options
SFI
SFI
700SS
700
700SS
1-1/2
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
SFI-700 SERIES
Tube Style with Threaded Connections
SFI-700SS-1-1/2 Sight Flow Indicator; tube type with 8
blade Acetal impeller and integral wipers to clean tube
interior, tempered borosilicate tube, Fluoroelastomer
gaskets, 316SS body, 1-1/2 inch female NPT
connections
Sight flow indicator, tube type with 8 blade Acetal
impeller and integral wipers to clean tube interior,
tempered borosilicate tube, Fluoroelastomer gaskets
Brass body
316SS body
1/4 inch female NPT connection size
1 inch female NPT connection size
1-1/4 inch female NPT connection size
1-1/2 inch female NPT connection size
BSPT threads
BSPP threads
Example
Model
Designator
Body
Style
Body
Size
Options
SFI
SFI
360FSS
350FCS
350FSS
360FCS
360FSS
1-1/2
1-1/2
2
3
4
6
G1
G1
G2
SFI-300F SERIES
Window Style with Flanged Connections
SFI-360FSS-1-1/2-G1 Sight Flow Indicator; double
window, tempered glass, PTFE gasket, 316SS body,
304SS flapper, 1-1/2 inch raised face flange connections
Sight flow indicator, double window, tempered glass,
Buna-N gaskets standard, raised face flange connections
Carbon steel body, no moving indicator
316SS body, no moving 316SS indicator
Carbon steel body, 316SS flapper
316SS body, 316SS flapper
1-1/2 inch raised face flange connection size
2 inch raised face flange connection size
PTFE gasket
Fluoroelastomer gasket
Example
Model
Designator
Body
Style
Body
Size
SFI
SFI
400
400CI
400SS
400F
1-1/2
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
3
4
SFI-400 SERIES
Tube Style with Threaded or Flanged Connections
SFI-400SS-1-1/2 Sight Flow Indicator; tube type,
borosilicate tube, PTFE gaskets, 316SS body, 1-1/2
inch female NPT connections
Sight flow indicator, tube type, borosilicate tube,
PTFE gaskets
Female NPT connections, cast iron body (only for 1
through 2 inch sizes)
Female NPT connections, 316SS body
Raised face flange connection, 316SS body (only for
1 inch and up sizes)
(Best for use in vertical pipelines where there are no mechanical strains)
BSPT
BSPP
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Window: Tempered glass; Body: Bronze or 316 SS; Gasket:
Buna N, fluoroelastomer or PTFE; Indicator: ABS or 316 SS impeller (100 and
300), 304 SS or 316 SS flapper (360).
Pressure Limit: 125 psig (8.62 bar), 150 psig (10.34 bar) on MP models.
Connections: Threaded.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Tube: Tempered borosilicate; Body: Brass or 316 SS; Gasket:
Fluoroelastomer; Indicator: Acetal.
Connections: Threaded.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Window: Tempered glass; Body: Carbon steel or 316 SS;
Gasket: Buna N, fluoroelastomer or PTFE; Indicator: 316 SS flapper (360).
Connections: Flanged.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Tube: Borosilicate; Body: Cast iron or 316 SS; Gasket: PTFE.
Connections: Threaded or flanged.
SFI
SFI
300
100
300
350
360
SS
SS
MP
2
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
G2
W2
G1
G2
S2
S3
I1
I2
I3
F1
BSPT
BSPP

194
S
g
h
t

F
o
w

I
n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s
F
L
O
W
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Window: Glass;
Body: Plated steel.
Connections: 1/4 to 2 male NPT.
Sight Window
Shows Level or Contents of Tanks, Pipelines; Fused Glass and Steel Construction
Fused glass style sight windows feature glass to metal bond for utmost
reliability. Plated steel bodies have convenient hex wrench surfaces.
Connections are standard NPT in sizes from 1/4 to 2. Windows are clear,
ripple free, and flush with the front face, having no recess on which dirt might
collect.
APPLICATIONS
Hydraulic tanks
Pressure vessels
Coolant tanks
Hydraulic lines
Oil reservoirs
APPLICATIONS
Hydraulic tanks
Pressure vessels
Coolant tanks
Hydraulic lines
Oil reservoirs
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Window: Tempered glass;
Body: Brass, carbon steel, or 316 SS;
Gasket: Buna N on brass and carbon steel body, PTFE on 316 SS
body.
Connections: 3/4 to 2 male NPT.
Series
550
Tough, tempered glass window resists chemical attack and abrasion.
Seamless gasket assures perfect seal and is easily field replaceable. In addition
to the standard brass body, Model 500 Sight Windows are also available in
carbon steel or 316 SS to suit a wide range of chemical compatibility.
Sight Window
Shows Level or Contents of Tanks, Pipelines; Tempered, Replaceable Glass Window
Series
500
Model
SFI-500-3/4
SFI-500-1
SFI-500-1-1/4
SFI-500-1-1/2
SFI-500-2
A
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
B
3/4(19)
15/16 (24)
1 1/4 (32)
1 27/64(37)
1 1/4 (32)
C
1 3/8(35)
1 3/8(35)
2 1/8 (54)
2 1/8 (54)
2 1/2 (64)
E
1 3/8(35)
1 3/8 (35)
1 9/16 (40)
1 9/16 (40)
1 21/32(42)
D
45/64(18)
45/64(18)
27/32(22)
27/32(22)
15/32(12)
Dimensions Inches (mm)
Model
SFI-550-1/4
SFI-550-3/8
SFI-550-1/2
SFI-550-3/4
SFI-550-1
SFI-550-1-1/4
SFI-550-1-1/2
SFI-550-2
A
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
B
11/32(9)
7/16 (11)
9/16 (14)
3/4(19)
15/16 (24)
1 3/16 (30)
1 7/16 (37)
1 7/8 (48)
C
5/8(16)
3/4(19)
15/16 (24)
1 1/16 (27)
1 3/8 (35)
1 3/4 (45)
2 (51)
2 1/2 (64)
E
5/8(16)
23/32 (18)
25/32 (19)
15/16 (24)
1 1/16 (27)
1 7/32 (31)
1 7/32 (31)
1 9/32 (33)
D
3/16(5)
7/32(6)
7/32(6)
5/16(8)
5/16(8)
13/32(10)
13/32(10)
13/32(10)
Dimensions Inches (mm)
Model
Carbon Steel
SFI-500CS-3/4
SFI-500CS-1
SFI-500CS-1-1/4
SFI-500CS-1-1/2
SFI-500CS-2
Model
SFI-550-1
SFI-550-1-1/4
SFI-550-1-1/2
SFI-550-2
Model
316 SS
SFI-500SS-3/4
SFI-500SS-1
SFI-500SS-1-1/4
SFI-500SS-1-1/2
SFI-500SS-2
Model
Brass
SFI-500B-3/4
SFI-500B-1
SFI-500B-1-1/4
SFI-500B-1-1/2
SFI-500B-2
Model
SFI-550-1/4
SFI-550-3/8
SFI-550-1/2
SFI-550-3/4

F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s

w
t
h

S
w
t
c
h
F
L
O
W
The Series HFO Flow Alarm provides continuous monitoring and control of
flow rate levels. The flow alarm can be configured to open or close a contact for
an increasing or decreasing set point. The unit includes two 10A SPDT limit
switches with field adjustable alarm settings. Integral direct reading scale
provides local indication of flow rate. The flow alarm is designed to mount in any
orientation and does not require inlet or outlet straight plumbing. The Series
HFO is constructed with a rugged cast aluminum NEMA 4X (IP65) enclosure
for installations outdoors or in harsh environments.
APPLICATIONS
Monitoring flow in chemical processing, waste water processing,
lubrication systems, process control, solar systems, drain lines and pump
testing.
Series
HFO
In-Line Flow Alarms
Latching Alarm Capabilities, For Air, Water or Caustic Fluids, Unrestricted Mounting
Pressure Differential VS. Flow Rate
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Body: Aluminum, brass or 304 SS;
Seals: Buna N or fluoroelastomer;
Magnet: PTFE coated Alnico;
Other internal parts: 304 SS.
Viscosity: 500 SSU.
Accuracy: Measuring 4% FS over entire range; 2.5% over center
third of the measuring range.
Switch Type: SPDT, 10A @ 250 VAC; 0.5A @ 125 VDC, (resistive).
Shipping Weight: 1/4 to 1/2 female NPT models: 3 lb (1.4 kg); 3/4 to 1
female NPT models: 4.5 lb (2.0 kg); 1 1/2 female NPT models: 12 lb
(5.4 kg).
1/4 Female NPT 1/2 Female NPT 3/4, 1 & 1-1/2 Female NPT
Aluminum body for air or other non-corrosive gases:
600 psig (41 bar)
Wetted Parts: Aluminum, PTFE coated Alnico, 304 SS and Buna N
6000 psig (413 bar)
Wetted Parts: 304 SS, Fluoroelastomer and PTFE
Brass body for water based fluids (non-steam):
3500 psig (240 bar)
Wetted Parts: Brass, PTFE coated Alnico, 304 SS and Buna N
HFO-21123
HFO-21112
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

P
S
I
D
Flow Rate: SCFM @ 100 PSIG
10
8
6
4
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

P
S
I
D
Flow Rate: GPM
2
HFO-23210
HFO-23202
HFO-22205
10
8
6
4
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

P
S
I
D
Flow Rate: GPM
2
HFO-22315
HFO-22320
HF0-22440
12
HFO-22550
7-1/8
[180.98]
4-1/2
[114.3]
Model
HFO-21112
HFO-21123
Connection Size
1/4 female NPT
1/4 female NPT
Model
HFO-22205
HFO-22315
HFO-22320
HFO-22440
HFO-22550
Connection Size
1/2 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
1 female NPT
1 1/2 female NPT
Model
HFO-23202
HFO-23210
Connection Size
1/2 female NPT
1/2 female NPT
Range, Air SCFM
1.5 12
4 23
Range, Water
GPM (LPM)
0.5 5.0 (1 19)
1 15 (3.8 55)
2 20 (7.5 75)
4 40 (15 151)
5 50 (19 189)
Range, Water
GPM (LPM)
0.2 2.0 (0.75 7.5)
1 10 (3.8 38)

196
F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s

w
t
h

S
w
t
c
h
F
L
O
W
Direct-Reading Series FS Flowmeters offer visual flow rate indication in GPM or
LPM units. Models include an adjustable, latching flow alarm to open or close AC electrical
circuits, trigger warning lights, or activate other process control equipment. Spring-
retained moveable piston design allows installation in any position.
Flowmeter with Flow Limit Switch
Latching Relay, Adjustable, Dual Scale, Mount in any Position
Series
FS
2468
5

3/4 NPT BRASS INLET
1-1/2 HEX
BOTH ENDS
1-5/16
[33.65]
3/4 NPT BRASS OUTLET 1-3/8
[35.0]
5-1/4 [133.35]
POLYSULFONE BODY
8-1/4
[209.55]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Polysulfone body,
barium ferrite, stainless steel spring
and retaining rings.
Set Point: Adjustable 0 to 100% FS.
Relay Load: 1 A @ 30 VDC; 0.5 A @
125 VAC (resistive).
Supply Voltage: 115 VAC, 10%.
Process Connections: 1 male NPT
polysulfone or 3/4 male NPT brass.
Flow Scale: Calibrated at 1.0 specific
gravity @ 70F (21C).
Weight: 1 male NPT polysulfone; 0.55
lb (0.25 kg); 3/4 male NPT brass: 0.90
lb (0.41 kg).
APPLICATIONS
Monitoring flow in chemical processing,
waste water processing, process control,
lubrication systems, solar systems, drain
lines and pump testing.
1-47/64
[43.94]
1-7/8
[47.63]
Switch Module
Model
FS10410
FS11610
FS12810
FS20400
FS20700
Range, GPM (LPM)
0.5 to 4.0 (1.9 to 15)
1.0 to 16 (5 to 60)
4.0 to 28 (20 to 100)
0.5 to 4.0 (1.9 to 15)
1.0 to 7.0 (4 to 26)
Series
VASP
Visi-Float
Flowmeter Flowswitch/
Power Converter Pak
Designed for Use with the Dwyer
VFA Visi-Float
Flowmeter
The new VASP Visi-Float
Flowmeter Flowswitch/Power Converter Pak utilizes

infrared technology as an adjustable set point monitor used in conjunction with the Dwyer
VFA Flowmeters. The VASP consists of a sensing unit and a power converter unit allowing
remote mounting over long distances. Designed to mount onto any existing VFA Flowmeter,
the switching setpoint can be easily adjusted by a single adjustment screw. It contains a set
of SPDT relay contacts for indication of flow above or below a preset level. The units
incorporate indicating LEDs for power and status. Also, a latching and power failure circuit
is also included for more versatility.
SPECIFICATIONS
Switch Type: SPDT relay.
Electrical Rating: See chart.
Electrical Connections: Screw type terminal block.
Power Requirements: User selectable: 24 VDC or 24/120/240 VAC @ 50/60 Hz.
Current Consumption: 105 mA max. (DC), 230 mA max. (AC).
Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal.
Set Point Adjustment: Single adjustment screw.
3/16 DIA. TYP
2 11/32
4 39/64
1 3/16
5/8 DIA. X THRU
3 1/2 4 23/32
5 49/64
5 1/4
[146.45]
[133.35]
[89.00] [19.85]
[59.53]
[119.23]
[30.16]
1 13/32 TYP
[4.75]
2 PLCS [15.88]
[35.72]
1-1/64
[25.80]
13/16
[20.64]
1-1/16
[27.00]
1/4
[6.35]
2-13/32
[61.12]
1-19/64
[32.94]
7/8
[22.23]
Model
VASP-1
VASP-5
VASP-10
Connections
1 male NPT (polysulfone)
3/4 male NPT (brass)
3/4 male NPT (brass)
Output Range
.5A @ 120/240 VAC, 1A @ 30 VDC
5A @ 120/240 VAC, 5A @ 30 VDC
10A @ 120/240 VAC, 5A @ 30 VDC

F
l
o
w

S
w
i
t
c
h
e
s
,

P
a
d
d
l
e
F
L
O
W
Designed to provide an inexpensive, reliable unit to monitor the presence or
absence of flow in a system. The V10 flow switch is used to monitor unattended equipment
and protect it from costly damage. The V10 flow switch utilizes a rugged, hermetically
sealed reed switch which is encapsulated in a polypropylene switch housing that fits into a
standard heavy duty leak proof brass body or optional 303 SS body. The switch adjustment
allows the user to change the switch to Normally Open (NO) or Normally Closed (NC) in the
field merely by loosening two screws. The switch housing is located outside the process
media, making switch change-over or maintenance easy without interruption of process
flow.
A full size, trimmable stainless steel vane is provided with a removable laminated template.
This template is calibrated for brass or ductile iron reducing tees and forged steel straight
tee/bushing combinations. Allows for field installation in pipelines from 1/2 to 2 diameter.
A table with approximate actuation and deactivation values is provided below.
Mini-Size Flow Switch
Proof of Flow or No Flow in 1/2 to 2 Pipe,
Low Cost, Leak Proof Body, Weatherproof
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Vane: 301 SS;
Body: Brass or 303 SS;
Pin and spring: 301 SS, 302 SS, and 316 SS;
Magnet: Ceramic 8.
Pressure Limit: Brass body: 1000 psig (69 bar); 303 SS body: 2000 psig (138 bar).
Switch Type: SPST hermetically sealed reed switch. Field adjustable for normally
open or normally closed.
Electrical Rating: 0.5A @ 30 VAC; 1.5A @ 24 VDC.
Electrical Connections: 18 AWG, 18 (460 mm) long, PVC jacket. Rated 221F
(105C).
Process Connection: 1/2 male NPT standard. Contact factory for other options.
Mounting Orientation: Switch can be installed in any position but the
actuation/deactuation flow rates are based on horizontal pipe runs and are nominal
values.
Set Point Adjustment: Vane is trimmable.
Agency Approvals: CE, UL and CSA.
Switch Enclosure: Polypropylene.
Cold Water Flow Rates
Approximate actuation/deactuation
GPM upper, LPM lower
Pipe
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
Air Flow Rates
SCFM upper, LPM lower
Series
V10
Model
V10
V10SS
Body Material
Brass
303SS
Trim
L
J
H
E
C
Full
N.O.
2.6/2.3
9.8/8.7
3.1/2.7
11.7/10.2
4.8/4.5
18.2/17
6.2/5.6
23.5/21.2
8.2/7.7
31/29.1
9.5/9.1
36/34.4
N.C.
2.6/2.5
9.8/9.5
3.1/2.8
11.7/10.6
4.8/4.4
18.2/16.7
6.1/5.6
23.1/21.2
8.2/7.7
31/29.1
9.5/9
36/34.1
Pipe
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
Trim
L
J
H
E
C
Full
N.O.
10.3/8.8
291.7/250
13/11.6
368.3/328
19.2/17.6
543.3/498
24.8/22.2
701.7/628
33.4/31.2
946.7/883
50.2/48.4
1422/1370
N.C.
10.2/9.2
288/260
12.9/11.6
365/328
18.9/17.6
535/498
24.5/22.5
693/637
33/30.6
935/867
50.2/47.7
1422/1352
NORMALLY OPEN POSITION
4 [101.6]
2-7/8 [73.07]
1 [25.40]
18 AWG LEADWIRES
19 [482.6] LONG
2-7/8
[73.07]
1/4 [6.35] TRAVEL
TO NORMALLY
CLOSED POSITION
LOWER BODY
7/8 HEX
1/2 MALE NPT
VANE 2-3/8
[61.11]
NORMALLY CLOSED POSITION
Switch Configuration
Normally Open or Closed
Normally Open or Closed
197.P.N:Layout 2 2/16/11 11:34 AM Page 1
198
F
o
w

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,

P
a
d
d
e
F
L
O
W
Rugged and reliable the Series V4 Flotect
flow switch operates automatically to

protect equipment and pipeline systems against damage from reduction or loss of flow.
The V4 is time tested being installed in thousands of pipelines and processing plants around
the world. A unique magnetically actuated switching design gives superior performance.
There are no bellows, springs, or seals to fail. Instead, a free-swinging vane attracts a
magnet within the solid metal switch body, actuating a snap switch by means of a simple
lever arm.
FEATURES
Leak proof body machined from bar stock
Choice of custom vane calibrated for your application, Model V4, or field adjustable
multilayer vane, Model V4 2 U (see set point chart)
Weatherproof, designed to meet NEMA 4
Explosion proof (listing included in specifications)
Installs directly and easily into pipeline with a thredolet, tee, or flange (see
application drawings)
Can be used in pipes 1 1/2 and up
Electrical assembly can be easily replaced without removing the unit from
installation so that the process does not have to be shut down
High pressure rating of 1000 psig (69 bar) with the brass body and 2000 psig
(138 bar) with the 316 SS body
APPLICATIONS
Protects pumps, motors and other equipment against low or no flow
Controls sequential operation of pumps
Automatically starts auxiliary pumps and engines
Stops liquid cooled engines, machines and processing when coolant flow is
interrupted
Shuts down burner when air flow through heating coil fails
Controls dampers according to flow
Vane Operated Flow Switch
Field Adjustable Dependable Protection Against Flow
Variation or Stopping in Pipelines for Fluids, Gases and
Flowing Solids
Series
V4
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Gases or liquids compatible
with wetted materials.
Wetted Materials:
Vane: 316 SS;
Body: Brass or 316 SS standard;
Magnet Keeper: 430 SS standard,
316 SS optional;
Options: Other materials also
available, consult factory (e.g. PVC,
Hastelloy, nickel, Monel, titanium).
Temperature Limit: 4 to 275F ( 20 to
135C) standard, MT high temperature
option 400F (205C) [MT option not
UL, CSA, ATEX, or SAA].
Pressure Limit: Brass body 1000 psig
(69 bar), 316 SS body 2000 psig (138
bar), optional 5000 psig (345 bar)
available with 316 SS body and SPDT
switch only.
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof
(meets NEMA 4 (IP65)) and explosion
proof. Listed with UL and CSA for
Class I, Groups C and D; Class II,
Groups E, F, and G. ATEX 0344
II 2 G EEx d IIB T6 20CTamb75C;
EC Type Certificate No.: KEMA
03ATEX 2383; SAA: Exd II C T6 (T
amb=60C). Zone I. Also FM approved.
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch
standard, DPDT snap switch optional.
Electrical Rating: UL, FM, ATEX and
SAA models 10A @ 125/250 VAC (V~).
CSA models: 5A @ 125/250 VAC (V~);
5A res., 3A ind. @ 30 VDC (V ). MV
option: 1A @125 VAC (V~); 1A res.,
.5A ind. @ 30 VDC (V ). MT option:
5A @ 125/250 VAC (V~). [MT and MV
option not UL, CSA, FM, ATEX or
SAA].
Electrical Connections: UL and CSA
models: 16 AWG, 6 (152 mm) long.
ATEX and SAA unit: Terminal block.
NPT.
Process Connection: 1 1/2 male
NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Within 5 of
vertical for proper operation. Units for
horizontal installation (vertical pipe with
up flow) available.
Set Point Adjustment: For universal
vane: five vane combinations.
Agency Approvals: UL, CSA, CE, FM,
SAA, and ATEX.
3-11/32
[84.93]
2-23/32
[69.06]
UL AND CSA TYPE
INCLUDES 16 GA LEADS,
6 [152.4] LONG.
ATEX VERSION INCLUDES
TERMINAL BLOCK
1-5/8 [41.28]
CLEARANCE FOR
COVER REMOVAL
8
[203.20]
6-3/4
[171.45]
4-11/16
[119.06]
1
[25.40]
EXPLOSION-PROOF HOUSING
WITH 3/4 FEMALE NPT
CONDUIT CONNECTION
SWITCH BODY, SAE 72 BRASS
OR 316 STAINLESS STEEL
1-1/2 MALE NPT
PROCESS CONNECTION
MAGNET KEEPER,
430 STAINLESS STEEL
VANE BLOCK,
316 STAINLESS STEEL
FIVE LAYER VANE 316
STAINLESS STEEL DESIGNED
FOR 1-1/2 TO 8 PIPES
USABLE IN LARGER PIPE
SIZES.
Model
V4-2-U
V4-SS-2-U
V4
V4-SS
Consult factory for price and availability of fittings for V4 installation. Thredolets,
bushings, and tees are available in a variety of sizes and materials.
For custom vane models, please supply factory with following information: pipe size,
flow direction (horizontal, up), mounting, pressure, temperature, specific gravity, flow
rates (maximum normal, actuation/deactuation*), etc.
*When both values are supplied, note which is critical.
*316SS body with 430SS magnet keeper.
Aust alian
Standa d
C
ertfed
P
o
d
u
ct
OPTIONS (add as a suffix to the model number):
-D, DPDT contacts
-MV, Gold Plated Contacts, options for dry circuits
(see electrical rating in specification, no listings or approvals)
-MT, High Temperature, option rated 400F (204C)
(see electrical rating in specifications, no listings or approvals)
-TRI (increasing flow), -TRD (decreasing flow), Time Delay Relay,
option with 2 SPDT contacts, adjustable from 0 1 to 0 31 minutes.
(no listings or approvals)
-316, 316 SS Magnet Keeper, option to replace standard 430 SS
-SAA, SAA listed construction
-V, Vertical Up Flow, option for upward flow in vertical pipe
-AT, ATEX listed construction
Description
Brass body, universal vane
316SS* body, universal vane
Brass body, custom vane
316SS* body, custom vane

F
o
w

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,

P
a
d
d
e
F
L
O
W
Actuation rates are based on cold water at a specific gravity of 1.0.
For fluids of different specific gravity, actuation rates may be approximated by dividing the rate shown by the square root of the specific gravity.
Actuation rates are based on air at standard conditions. For gases at other pressures, temperatures, or specific gravities, consult factory for equivalent
flow approximations.
Vane
Layers
1
1&2
1,2,&3
1,2,3,&4
1,2,3,4,&5
1.5 Pipe
7 3
26.67 11.67
2 Pipe
15 8
56.7 30
7 4
26.7 15
3 Pipe
45 22
167 83.3
23 14
86.7 53.3
11 7
41.7 26.7
4 Pipe
95 40
367 150
50 35
190 132
27 19
102 71.7
17 12
65 45
6 Pipe
210 120
800 450
130 90
500 333
80 60
300 233
60 45
233 167
40 30
152 113
8 Pipe
375 175
1417 667
230 150
867 567
160 115
600 433
120 90
450 333
80 65
300 250
10 Pipe
600 300
2267 1133
450 250
1700 950
300 180
1133 683
230 150
867 567
135 100
517 383
12 Pipe
900 450
3400 1700
650 350
2467 1317
450 275
1700 1033
310 200
1167 750
200 140
750 533
20 Pipe
2400 1200
9083 4550
1800 1000
6817 3783
1200 700
4550 2650
850 550
3217 2083
575 400
2183 1517
18 Pipe
2000 1000
7567 3783
1450 800
5483 3033
1000 600
3783 2267
700 450
2650 1700
460 325
1733 1233
16 Pipe
1400 800
5300 3033
1200 650
4550 2467
750 450
2750 2083
550 360
2083 1367
360 250
1367 950
14 Pipe
1200 600
4550 2267
900 500
3400 1900
600 350
2267 1317
430 280
1633 1067
290 200
1100 750
Approximate Actuation/Deactuation Flow Rates for Cold Water.
Upper Figures in GPM. Lower Figures in LPM.
Application Drawings
For Flotect
Automatic Flow Switches

Vane
Layers
1
1&2
1,2,&3
1,2,3,&4
1,2,3,4,&5
1.5 Pipe
32 17
15 8
2 Pipe
65 32
30 20
23 13
10 6
3 Pipe
210 105
100 50
120 70
60 30
60 48
30 20
4 Pipe
400 200
190 90
195 140
90 70
135 100
60 50
65 50
30 20
6 Pipe
950 475
450 220
550 375
260 180
375 265
180 130
260 200
120 90
130 100
60 50
8 Pipe
1550 850
730 400
1100 700
520 330
725 500
340 240
500 400
240 190
310 250
150 120
10 Pipe
2400 1300
1100 600
1850 1200
870 570
1200 850
570 400
875 700
410 330
650 525
310 250
12 Pipe
3450 1900
1600 900
2700 1750
1300 800
1850 1300
870 610
1250 1000
590 470
1000 800
470 380
20 Pipe
10000 5500
4700 2600
7400 4800
3500 2300
5300 3700
2500 1700
3900 3100
1800 1500
3550 2850
1700 1300
18 Pipe
8000 4400
3800 2100
6000 3900
2800 1800
4300 3000
2000 1400
3100 2500
1500 1200
2800 2250
1300 1100
16 Pipe
6400 3500
3000 1700
4800 3100
2300 1500
3350 2350
1600 1100
2500 2000
1200 900
2200 1750
1040 830
14 Pipe
4700 2600
2200 1200
3400 2200
1600 1000
2600 1800
1200 800
1900 1500
900 710
1600 1250
760 590
Approximate Actuation/Deactuation Flow Rates for Cold Air.
Upper Figures in SCFM. Lower Figures in LPS.
FLOW
REQUIRED FLOW HOLDS
SWITCH OPEN WHEN FLOW
SLOWS, VANE DROPS,
ACTUATION SWITCH
ALUMINUM ENCLOSURE
FOR ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
SWITCH BODY MACHINED
FROM BAR OF BRASS OR
STAINLESS STEEL
THREADED COVER IS
EASILY REMOVED FOR
ACCESS TO SWITCH
3/4 NPT FOR CONDUIT
1-1/2 THREADED BRANCH
CONNECTION
CUT 1-15/16 MIN.
HOLE IN PIPE
Values shown in both charts are nominal. If normal flows exceed actuation rates by less than 10%, custom vanes are recommended.
Figures are based on standard vertical installation in a 1 1/2" Threaded Branch Connection in a horizontal run of pipe.
V4 Universal Vane Flow Charts
1 1/2
THREADED
BRANCH
CONNECTION
CUT HOLE
IN PIPE
1 15/16 (49 2)
DIA MINIMUM
A
3/4 N PT
ANSI RF
THREADED
REDUC NG
FLANGE
ANSI RF
WELD NG
NECK
FLANGE
3/4 N PT
1 1/2 3000 L B
COUPLING
2 1/16
(52 4)
BORE I D
1 (25 4)
FLANGE FACE TO P PE
O D SPEC FIED CUSTOMER
NORMALLY SHOULD NOT EXCEED 5 (172)
Threaded Branch Connection Installation.
May also be installed using tee, flange or coupling.
2-1/2 Threaded
Branch
Connection
2 1/2
THREADED
BRANCH
CONNECTION
2 1/2 x 1 1/2
FACE OR HEX
BRUSHING
CUT HOLE IN
PIPE 2 7/8
(73 0) DIA
MINIMUM
1-1/2 x 1-1/2
x 1-1/2
Tee Installation
Standard
Installation
Flange
Installation
2 x 2 x 2
Tee
Installation
Not Recommended,
Unless Coupling is
Bored Out to 2-1/16
(52.4) As Shown

200
F
o
w

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,

P
a
d
d
e
F
L
O
W
Mini-Size Flow Switches
Monitor flow in 1/2 to 2 pipe, Explosion-proof
Series
V6
Surprisingly compact, the Series V6 Flotect
Flow Switch is engineered to

specifically monitor liquid, gas, or airflows. Operation is simple and dependable with no
mechanical linkage as the flow switch is magnetically actuated. The lower body holds the
flow vane and one magnet, which controls the switch actuating magnet in the separate
upper housing. In most applications the switch is normally off with the pipeline flow forcing
the vane against the vane spring. As the flow decreases the vane spring pushes back the
vane, actuating the switch to signal an alarm or shutdown. Tees are available for installation
in pipelines from 1/2 to 2, with bushings added the unit is easily adapted to 1/4 and 3/8
piping.
FEATURES
Leak proof lower body machined from bar stock
Choice of models in a tee with calibrated vane or field adjustable trimmable vane
Weatherproof
Explosion proof (listing included in specifications)
Electrical assembly can be easily replaced without removing the unit from the
High pressure rating of 1000 psig (69 bar) with brass body and 2000 psig (138
bar) on the 316 SS body (see specifications)
Low flow model offers field adjustable set point
Easy installation, simply insert the tee in the pipline and complete electrical
connections
APPLICATIONS
Protects pumps, motors and other equipment against low or no flow
Controls sequential operation of pumps
Automatically starts auxillary pumps and engines
Shuts down burner when air flow through heating coil fails
Controls dampers according to flow
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Gases or liquids compatible with wetted materials.
Wetted Materials: Standard V6 models: Vane: 301 SS; Lower Body: Brass or 303
SS; Magnet: Ceramic; Other: 301, 302 SS; Tee: Brass, iron, forged steel, or 304 SS.
V6 low flow models: Lower body: Brass or 303 SS; Tee: Brass or 304 SS; Magnet:
Ceramic; O ring: Buna N standard, fluoroelastomer optional; Other: 301, 302 SS.
Temperature Limits: 4 to 220F ( 20 to 105C) standard, MT high temperature
option 400F (205C) (MT not UL, CSA or ATEX). ATEX compliant AT option ambient
temperature 4 to 167F ( 20 to 75C), process temperature: 4 to 220F ( 20 to
105C).
Pressure Limit: Brass lower body with no tee models: 1000 psig (69 bar); 303 SS
lower body with no tee models: 2000 psig (138 bar); Brass tee models: 250 psi (17.2
bar); Iron tee models: 1000 psi (69 bar); Forged and stainless steel tee models: 2000
psi (138 bar); Low flow models: 1450 psi (100 bar).
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof and explosion proof. Listed with UL and CSA for
Class I, Groups A, B, C and D; Class II, Groups E, F, and G. (Group A on stainless
steel body models only).
ATEX 0344 II 2 G EEx d IIC T6 Process Temp75C.
EC type Certificate No.: KEMA 04ATEX2128.
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch standard, DPDT snap switch optional.
Electrical Rating: UL models: 5A @125/250 VAC (V~). CSA and ATEX models: 5A
@ 125/250 VAC (V~); 5A res., 3A ind. @ 30 VDC (V ). MV option: .1A @ 125 VAC
(V~). MT option: 5A @125/250 VAC (V~). [MT option not UL, CSA or ATEX].
Electrical Connections: UL models: 18 AWG, 18 (460 mm) long; ATEX and CSA
models: terminal block.
Upper Body: Brass or 303 SS.
Conduit Connections: 3/4 male NPT standard, 3/4 female NPT on junction box
models.
Process Connection: 1/2 male NPT on models without a tee.
Mounting Orientation: Switch can be installed in any position but the
actuation/deactuation flow rates in the charts are based on horizontal pipe runs and
are nominal values.
Set Point Adjustment: Standard V6 models none. Without tee models vane is
trimmable. Low flow models are field adjustable in the range shown. See set point
charts on opposite page.
Weight: 2 to 6 lb (.9 to 2.7 kg) depending on construction.
Options not Shown: Custom calibration, bushings, PVC tee, reinforced vane.
Agency Approvals: UL, CSA, CE, and ATEX.
LOCKING COLLAR
ASSEMBLY
3/4 NPT
UPPER HOUSING
SWITCH SUPPORTS
SPDT (OR DPDT)
SNAP SWITCH
MAGNET LEVER PIN
MAGNET LEVER
ASSEMBLY
MAGNETS
LOWER HOUSING-BRASS
OR STAINLESS STEEL
VANE SPRING
VANE PIVOT PIN
VANE PIVOT
BRACKET
SNAP RING
1/2 NPT
STAINLESS
STEEL VANE
OVERALL LENGTH WITH
1-1/4 TEE CONNECTION
APPROXIMATELY 8
6-5/16
[160.34]
18 GA. LEADS
18 [457.20] LONG
3/4 NPT
SWITCH HOUSING
300 SERIES STAINLESS
STEEL OR BRASS
CERAMIC MAGNET
PISTON 300
SERIES STAINLESS
STEEL OR BRASS
INLET 1/2 NPT
VALVE BODY MATERIAL
STEEL OR BRASS
3-5/8
[92.08]
O-RING
BUNA-N
HARDWARE (SCREW, SPRINGS & CHECK
VALVE) STAINLESS STEEL
OUTLET 1/2 NPT
SWITCH BODY
1-1/8 [28.58] SQ
STEEL OR BRASS
4-3/4
[120.65]
3-3/8
[85.73]
V6 Low Flow
V6 with 1/2 Tee

F
o
w

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,

P
a
d
d
e
F
L
O
W
Pipe
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
Actuate
6.50
180
10.0
300
14.0
420
21.0
600
33.0
960
43.0
1200
Deactuate
5.00
120
8.00
240
12.0
360
18.0
540
30.0
840
36.0
1020
Approximate Actuation-
Deacuation Flow Rates for Air.
Upper figures are SCFM,
Lower figures in LPM
Pipe
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
Actuate
1.50
5.667
2.00
7.5
3.00
11.33
4.00
15.17
6.00
22.67
10.00
37.83
Deactuate
1.00
3.83
1.25
4.67
1.75
6.67
3.00
11.3
5.00
18.9
8.50
32.2
Approximate Actuation-
Deactuation Flow Rates for Cold
Water.
Upper figures are GPM,
Lower figures in LPM
V6 Set Point Charts - Factory Installed Tee
Min-Max Flow Rates in 1/2 Pipe
Media
GPM Water
LPM Water
SCFM Air
LPS Air
Actuate
.04 0.75
.15 2.84
.18 2.70
.09 1.3
Deactuate
.03 0.60
.11 2.27
.15 2.0
.07 .95
Pressure drop (head loss) is a function of both set point and flow rate. Typically,
pressure drop at actuation flow rate listed will be 5 10 psid (.34 .69 bar). Pressure
drops at other flow rates will vary in proportion to the (change in flow).
V6 Low Flow Set Point Chart
Example
Series
Construction
Upper
Body
Lower
Body
Circuit
(Switch)
Tee Connection
Size
Tee
Material
Options
V6
V6
B
B
S
EP
EP
B
B
S
S
S
D
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
LF
B
MI
FS
B
S
0
MT
CSA
AT
MV
MT
VIT
*Options that do not have ATEX.
Model
V6EPB-B-S-1-B
V6EPB-B-S-2-B
V6EPB-B-S-3-B
V6EPB-B-S-4-B
V6EPB-B-S-5-B
V6EPB-B-S-6-B
V6EPB-B-S-1-MI
V6EPB-B-S-2-MI
V6EPB-B-S-3-MI
V6EPB-B-S-4-MI
V6EPB-B-S-5-MI
V6EPB-B-S-6-MI
V6EPB-S-S-1-MI
V6EPB-S-S-2-MI
V6EPB-S-S-3-MI
V6EPB-S-S-4-MI
V6EPB-S-S-5-MI
V6EPB-S-S-6-MI
V6EPB-S-S-1-FS
V6EPB-S-S-2-FS
V6EPB-S-S-3-FS
V6EPB-S-S-4-FS
V6EPB-S-S-5-FS
V6EPB-S-S-6-FS
V6EPB-S-S-1-S
V6EPB-S-S-2-S
V6EPB-S-S-3-S
V6EPB-S-S-4-S
V6EPB-S-S-5-S
V6EPB-S-S-6-S
V6EPB-B-S-6-0
V6EPB-S-S-6-0
V6EPB-B-S-LF
V6EPB-S-S-LF
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
No Tee
No Tee
1/2
1/2
Lower Body
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
Brass
SS
Brass
SS
V6EPB B S 2 B MT flow switch; brass upper housing, brass lower housing, brass tee with 3/4 NPT
connections, SPDT snap switch, and high temperature option
Series V6 flow switch
Explosion proof
Brass
Stainless Steel
Brass
Stainless Steel
SPDT
DPDT
1/2 NPT
3/4 NPT
1 NPT
1 1/4 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
2 NPT
Low Flow Model (1/2 NPT connections)
Iron
Forged Steel
Brass
Stainless Steel
No tee, field trimmable vane
(For LF Model no tee material chosen, tee material matches lower housing choice)
CSA approved construction with junction box*
ATEX approved construction with junction box
Gold contacts on snap switch for dry circuits (see specifications for ratings)
High temperature option rated 400F (205C) (see specifications for ratings)*
Fluoroelastomer O rings in place of Buna N on low flow models
Tee
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Iron
Iron
Iron
Iron
Iron
Iron
Iron
Iron
Iron
Iron
Iron
Iron
FS
FS
FS
FS
FS
FS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
None
None
LF, Brass
LF, SS

202
F
o
w

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,

P
a
d
d
e
F
L
O
W
Series
V7
Magnetic Linkage
2X 47/64
[18.65]
2-37/64
[65.48]
1/2 FEMALE
NPSM
1-3/8
[34.93]
GROUND COMMON
NORMALLY OPEN
NORMALLY CLOSED
1 NPT
6-31/32 [177.00]
3.702
.554
11/16
[17.46]
3/4
[19.05]
A
The Series V7 Flotect
Flow Switch is an inexpensive switch for use with compatible

liquids to start or stop electronic operated equipment when flow or no-flow conditions
occur. Magnetic operation is simple and dependable with no mechanical linkages or seals
to wear or leak. Lower body is machined solid metal bar stock assuring no leak points, no
matter how long the unit is in service. Design is standard weatherproof, meeting NEMA
4X, for application versatility. Robust vane design is rigid and field trimmable for set point
adjustment.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquids compatible with wetted materials that are non coating and non
crystallizing.
Wetted Materials: Vane: 301 SS; Process connection: Brass or 316 SS; Magnet:
Ceramic; Other: 301, 302 SS.
Upper Body Material: Die cast aluminum.
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof, meets NEMA 4X (IP66).
Electrical Rating: 10A @ 125, 250, 480 VAC; 1/8 hp @ 125 VAC, 1/4 hp @ 250
VAC.
closed.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 NPSM.
Process Connection: 1 male NPT. Contact factory for optional tees.
Pipe Size: 1 to 4 inch.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal or vertical (actuation flow rates are based on
horizontal pipe runs in the vertical position). Will not work in vertical pipe with down
flow.
Set Point Adjustment: Vane is trimmable, see set point chart.
Agency Approvals: CE, UL353.
Example
Series
Construction
Lower Body
Circuit Type
Connection
Size
Vane Size
Tee & Tee
Material
Options
V7
V7
W
W
B
B
S
S
S
3
3
0
0
N
N
ST
ST
RV
Pipe Size
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
4
Approximate Actuation-Deactuation Flow Rates
for Cold Water GPM (LPM)
Actuate
7.5 (28.4)
8.1 (30.8)
11.7 (44.1)
16.9 (64.0)
19.6 (74.2)
31.6 (120)
58.0 (218)
Deactuate
6.8 (25.7)
7.6 (28.9)
10.9 (41.3)
15.6 (59.1)
18.1 (68.5)
29.6 (112)
52.0 (197)
DIM A
1 17/64 [32.15]
1 19/32 [40.48]
1 53/64 [46.43]
2 11/64 [55.17]
2 11/64 [55.17]
2 11/64 [55.17]
Pipe Size
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
3
4
NEW PRODUCT!
Contact the factory for different actuation deactuation rates.
V7 WBS 30N ST
V7 Flow Switch
Weatherproof
Brass
316 SS
SPDT
1
Full length vane
with template
No Tee
SS tag
Reinforced vane

F
o
w

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,

P
a
d
d
e
F
L
O
W
Vane Flow Switch
Low Cost, Field Adjustable Set Point
Series
FS-2
The Series FS-2 Vane Flow Switch offers an economical flow proving solution.
Custom set points tailored for the application are enabled by field adjustable vane layers
and a set point adjustment screw. The FS-2 features an aluminum weatherproof housing
for outdoor installation. Paddles are adjustable to fit 1 to 8 size pipe. FS-2 is ideal for
use in flow or no flow applications in cold and hot water systems. Perfect for proving flow
in boilers, hot water heaters, and chillers.
APPLICATION
Perfect for proving flow in boilers, hot water heaters, and chillers
FEATURES
Field adjustable paddle
Field adjustable set point
Weatherproof construction
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Bellow: Tin bronze.
Vane: Stainless Steel.
Body: Forged brass.
Electrical Rating: 10A res, 3A ind @ 250 VAC.
Electrical Connection: Cable gland with attached wire leads or optional conduit
connection.
Process Connection: 1 male NPT or BSPT.
Mounting Orientation: Switch must be installed vertically on horizontal pipe runs.
Set Point Adjustment: Four vane combinations and an adjustment screw.
Enclosure: Die cast aluminum alloy.
Weight: 28.22 oz (0.8 kg).
5-1/8
[130.2]
5-49/64
[146.5]
5
[127]
4-17/64
[108.3]
2-13/32
[61.1]
3-1/32
[77]
x
Pipe
Diameter
(inch)
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
4
5
6
8
Blade Vane
Length
in (mm)
Dim. X
1.34 (34)
1.34 (34)
2.24 (57)
2.24 (57)
3.46 (88)
3.46 (88)
3.46 (88)
6.57 (167)
6.57 (167)
6.57 (167)
Approximate Actuation and Deactuation
Flow Rates for Water
Minimum Setting
GPM (LPM)
Maximum Setting
GPM (LPM)
Actuate
4.0 (15.0)
5.3 (20.0)
7.0 (26.7)
14.1 (53.3)
18.5 (70.0)
27.7 (105.0)
59.4 (225.0)
52.8 (200.0)
75.7 (286.7)
184.9 (700.0)
Actuate
8.8 (33.3)
11.4 (43.3)
14.5 (55.0)
31.3 (118.3)
35.2 (133.3)
52.8 (200.0)
123.3 (466.7)
132.1 (500.0)
154.1 (583.3)
396.3 (1500.0)
Deactuate
1.8 (6.7)
2.6 (10.0)
4.0 (15.0)
9.7 (36.7)
15.4 (58.3)
25.1 (95.0)
52.8 (200.0)
39.6 (150.0)
52.8 (200.0)
158.5 (600.0)
Deactuate
6.6 (25.0)
8.4 (31.7)
11.4 (43.3)
22.5 (85.0)
30.8 (116.7)
46.2 (175.0)
114.5 (433.3)
123.3 (466.7)
140.9 (533.3)
374.2 (1416.7)
Flow Rate Chart
Shown with conduit
connection option
Series FS-2, Paddle Flow Switch
OPTIONS
BSPT Process Connection,
To order add suffix BSPT.
Example: FS-2-BSPT
Conduit Connection, 1 NPT female conduit connection with no wire leads.
To order add suffix CND.
Example: FS-2-CND

204
F
o
w

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,

P
a
d
d
e
F
L
O
W
V8 Flotect

Flow Switch Protects Equipment: Operation is simple and dependable.
In most applications, the switch is normally off while there is sufficient flow of liquid or air.
When flow stops, the vane spring moves the vane, actuating a single pole double throw
switch rated 5A @ 120/250 VAC to start or stop motor, pump, engine, etc. Operate a damper
or valve; shut down a burner or actuate an alarm or signal, protecting unattended
equipment from damage or loss of production.
The V8 Flotect
Flow Switch has a leak proof body and vane constructed of tough durable
polyphenylene sulfide which has excellent chemical resistance. The full size trimmable vane
is provided with molded-in graduations allowing for installation in a 1 inch through 6 inch
pipe. Operating pressures are up to 150 psig (10 bar) and temperatures to 212F (100C).
The V8 flow switch can be used in various chemical processes, industrial systems and
similar applications where process conditions are compatible with polyphenylene sulfide,
ceramic 8 and 316SS. The V8 Flotect

flow switch is UL recognized as an industrial motor
controller per UL standard 508, suitable for mounting in a protected environment.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Vane and body: Polyphenylene Sulfide (PPS);
Pin and spring: 316 SS or Inconel
;
Magnet: Ceramic 8.
Enclosure Rating: General purpose, WP/WP2 option is weatherproof.
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch, MV option: SPDT gold contact snap switch.
Electrical Rating: 5A @ 125/250 VAC, 5A resistive, 3A inductive @ 30 VDC;
MV option: 1A @ 125 VAC, 1A resistive, 0.5A inductive @ 30 VDC.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 male NPT, 1/2 female NPT on WP and WP2.
Process Connection: 1 male NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Actuation/deactuation flow rates are based on horizontal
pipe runs and are nominal values. Unit cannot be used with vertical down flow.
Set Point Adjustment: Vane is trimmable.
Agency Approvals: CE, UL 508 for US and Canada.
Cold Water Flow Rates
GPM upper, LPM lower
Pipe Size
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
3
4
6
10.8/9.1
40.9/34.6
9.8/8.3
37.2/31.4
8.6/6.8
32.4/25.7
10.9/8.8
41.2/33.4
12.9/8.9
48.8/33.5
21.1/13.8
79.7/52.2
45/33
170.2/124.7
Air Flow Rates
SCFM upper, LPM lower
39/32.6
1105/923
37.5/32.2
1062/912
33.4/26.7
945/757
43/36.8
1218/1042
52.7/38.9
1493/1100
87.6/63.6
2482/1802
168.6/137.4
4775/3890
Series
V8
Field Adjustable 1 to 6 Inch Pipe, Leak Proof Body
V8
1/2 NPTM
3-1/16
[77.79]
12-11/64
[309.17]
1-21/32
[41.31]
1-5/16 OCTAGON
[33.34]
1 NPTM
5-1/4
[133.35]
FIELD TRIMMABLE
VANE
V8-WP2
Pipe Size
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
3
4
6
APPLICATIONS
Applications are chemical processing, air conditioning, refrigeration, heating systems,
cooling lines, machinery, liquid transfer systems, water treatment, food processing, and
machine tools. Also, other applications compatible with the materials of construction.
Series V8, Flow Switch
OPTIONS
Gold Plated Contacts, for dry circuits. Rated 1A @ 125 VAC; 1A resistive, 0.5A
inductive @ 30 VDC. To order add suffix MV.
Example: V8-MV
Inconel
Alloy Option. Inconel
Alloy replaces standard 316 SS wetted parts.

Wetted parts are Inconel

Alloy, ceramic 8, and Polyphenylene Sulfide. To order add
suffix INC.
Example: V8-INC
Weatherproof Enclosure. Optional housing is phenylpolioxide and provides
weatherproof protection for electrical wiring.
To order add suffix WP. (Not UL approved)
Example: V8-WP
Weatherproof Enclosure. Optional housing is aluminum and provides weatherproof
protection for electrical wiring.
To order add suffix WP2. (Not UL approved)
Example: V8-WP2

F
o
w

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
S
h
u
t
t
e
/
P
s
t
o
n
F
L
O
W
The Series G9 Globe Flow Switch provides accurate flow detection in water and oil
with 1% repeatability. A shuttle by-pass vane inside the housing is controlled externally
using an ordinary flat blade screwdriver, allowing flow settings to be changed without
disassembly. Each switch is constructed of non-corrosive materials and resists shock and
vibration. The Series G9 is suitable for triggering alarms on interlocking shutdown
circuitry when flow rate is incorrect and for protecting bearings, gears, and cooling
systems.
Series
G9
Globe Flow Switch
Adjustable Set Point, Water or Oil Service, 90 Flow Path
1/2 NPT
3/4 NPT
1-3/8
[34.92]
1-3/8
[34.92]
1-7/16 HEX
[36.51]
3-27/32
[97.63]
The Series GVS offers accurate flow detection with 1% repeatability and external
adjustability over a broad range of flow settings. The durable construction delivers long-
life reliability in either water or oil. Generous flow paths keep pressure drop low. The
GVS are ideal for detection of improper flow rates in high volume lubrication, cooling or
process systems.
Series
GVS
Globe Valve Switch
Adjustable Set Point, Rugged Bronze Construction, Straight Through Flow
1/2 NPT
1 NPT
3
[7.62]
3-1/4
[83]
1-25/32 HEX
[45]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Housing: Bronze;
Shuttle: Acetal; Spring: 316 SS; O ring:
Fluoroelastomer; Other: Ceramic.
to 82C).
Pressure Limits: 400 psi (27 bar) @
100F (37.8C).
Accuracy: 10% of set point.
Repeatability: 1% maximum
deviation.
Switch Type: SPDT.
Electrical Rating: .17A @ 120 VAC,
.08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC, .06A
@ 240 VDC.
(61 cm), polymeric lead wires.
NPT.
Set points shown are based on vertical,
lead wires up position.
Required Filtration: 150 microns or
better.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Housing: Bronze; Shuttle: TFE; Bonnet: Bronze; Spring:
316SS.; Other: Fluoroelastomer, ceramic.
Pressure Limits: 400 psig (27 bar) @ 100F (38C).
Accuracy: 10%.
Repeatability: 1% maximum deviation.
Switch Type: SPDT.
Electrical Rating: .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC, .06A @ 240
VDC.
Electrical Connections: 18 AWG, 24 (61 cm), polymeric lead wires.
Process Connections: 1 female NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Any position. Set points shown are based on horizontal,
lead wires up positional
Required Filtration: 150 microns or better.
Model
G9-21
G9-22
G9-23
Model
GVS-111
GVS-112
GVS-113
Actuation Set Point
Range GPM (LPM)
0.75 4.0 (2.8 15.1)
2.0 8.0 (7.6 30.3)
7.0 14.0 (26.5 53.0)
Actuation Set Point
Range GPM (LPM)
1.0 6.0 (3.8 22.7)
5.0 15.0 (18.9 56.8)
2.0 8.0 (7.6 30.3)

206
F
o
w

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
S
h
u
t
t
e
/
P
s
t
o
n
F
L
O
W
Series
P2
Flow Switch
Ideal for Air and Post-Filtered Water Applications, Fixed Set Point, FDA Compliant
The compact Series P2 Flow Switch utilizes a piston-type design for both air and pure
water applications. The switches have preset actuation points from 0.05 to 1.0 GPM for
water and 25 CFH to 5 CFM for air. The piston design incorporates a hermetically sealed
SPST magnetic reed switch. The P2 is comprised of PPE and PS housing and piston and
316 SS spring and stop pin. All wetted parts are FDA compliant. Economical and superior
design make this an excellent switch for pure water equipment, filter life monitoring, heat
exchangers, and cooling applications.
1
[25.40]
25/32
[19.84]
4-5/16
[109.54]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Housing: PPE & PS (polyphenylene ether and polystyrene);
Piston: PPE & PS and epoxy; Spring and stop pin: 316 SS.
Pressure Limits: 150 psig (10.3 bar) @ 70F (21C); 50 psig (3.4 bar) @ 212F
(100C).
Switch Type: SPST, N.O.
VDC.
Electrical Connection: 22 AWG, 18 (45.7 cm), PVC lead wires.
Mounting Orientation: Any position. Set points shown are based on vertical, inlet
down position.
Model
P2-11
P2-12
P2-13
P2-14
P2-15
P2-16
P2-17
P2-18
Media
Liquids
GPM (LPM)
Gases
CFM (LPM)
@ 5 psi
Series
P3
Polypropylene Flow Switch
Fixed Set Points from 0.25 to 2.0 GPM, 3/8 NPT or Quick Disconnect Adapters
Fit almost any piping requirements with the Series P3 Polypropylene Flow Switch.
The basic piston design consists of a hermetically sealed SPST normally open reed switch.
Choose the inlet and outlet port to be 3/8 male NPT or 1/4 male Quick Disconnect.
Select a quick disconnect acetal adapter for straight through flow or with a shut off valve.
The shut off valve will stop line flow when the adapter is removed from the switch. The flow
will resume when the adapter is reconnected. With many snap-on fittings to choose from,
any flow application can integrate the P3 Flow Switch into the existing piping.
1
[25.40]
QUICK DISCONNECT
PORTS
11/16 HEX [17.46]
11/16 HEX [17.46]
3/8 NPT PORTS
4
[101.60]
1
[25.40]
7/16
[11.11]
4-15/64
[107.55]
Adapters (Price shown per unit, need two per switch)
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Housing:
Polypropylene; Piston: PPS composite;
Spring: 316SS; O ring: Flourocarbon.
to 100C).
Pressure Limits: 125 psig (8.6 bar) @
70F (21C), 50 psig (3.4 bar) @ 212F
(100C).
Repeatability: 1%.
Electrical Rating: .08A @ 120 VAC.
Electrical Connection: 24 (60.96 cm),
polymeric wire leads, 22 AWG.
Process Connection: 3/8 male NPT
or 1/4 quick disconnect.
Set points shown are based on
vertical, inlet down position.
better.
Weight: 5 oz (0.14 kg).
Model
P3-31
P3-32
P3-33
P3-34
P3-35
P3-41
P3-42
P3-43
P3-44
P3-45
Connection
3/8 NPT
3/8 NPT
3/8 NPT
3/8 NPT
3/8 NPT
Q Disconnect
Q Disconnect
Q Disconnect
Q Disconnect
Q Disconnect
Model
P3-801
P3-802
P3-804
P3-807
P3-901
P3-902
P3-907
Actuation Set Point
.05 (.19)
.25 (.95)
.50 (1.89)
1.0 (3.79)
.42 (11.9)
1.0 (28.3)
2.5 (70.8)
5.0 (141.6)
Actuation Set Point
GPM (LPM)
0.25 (.95)
0.50 (1.89)
1.0 (3.79)
1.5 (5.68)
2.0 (7.57)
0.25 (.95)
0.50 (1.89)
1.0 (3.79)
1.5 (5.68)
2.0 (7.57)
Connection
Quick disconnect straight through 1/4 NPT
Quick disconnect straight through 1/4 BSPT
Quick disconnect straight through 3/8 BSPT
Quick disconnect straight through 1/4 ID tubing
Quick disconnect straight through 1/4 NPT w/shut off valve
Quick disconnect straight through 1/4 BSPT w/shut off valve
Quick disconnect straight through 1/4 ID tubing w/shut off valve

F
o
w

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
S
h
u
t
t
e
/
P
s
t
o
n
F
L
O
W
Series
P8
High Pressure Brass Flow Switch
Up to 1500 psi, Fixed Setpoint, Up to 2.0 GPM, Rugged Brass Body
High inline pressures are no problem for the Series P8 brass flow switch. The switch
integrates a one-piece magnetic PPS composite piston to handle pressure up to 1500 psi.
The P8 switches use 100 micron filtration and are less susceptible to clogging than other
high inline pressure switches. Setpoints range from 0.25 to 2.0 GPM for liquid flow. Use
the Series P8 in industrial cleaning equipment or high pressure lubrication systems.
3/4 HEX
[19.05]
1-9/64
[28.97]
3-29/64
[87.71]
3/8 NPT TYP
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Housing: Brass; Piston: PPS composite, epoxy; Spring: 316SS;
O ring: Flourocarbon.
VDC.
Electrical Connection: No. 22 AWG, 24 (61 cm), polymeric leads.
Mounting Orientation: Any position. Set points shown are based on vertical, inlet
down position.
Model
P8-11
P8-12
P8-13
P8-14
P8-15
Series
P4
PPS Piston Flow Switch
Fixed Set Points from 0.1 to 1.5 GPM, SPST and SPDT Switching, Optional Adapters
The Series P4 PPS Flow Switch features a molded plastic construction for enhanced
performance. Monitor liquids with fixed set points from 0.1 to 1.5 GPM. Choose normally
open or normally closed SPST or SPDT hermetically sealed reed switch technology. The
industrial switch features PPS R4 housing and piston, 316SS spring, Fluoroelastomer O-
ring and Epoxy. The inlet and outlet ports are 9/16-18 UNF-28 thread with optional 1/8
and 1/4 NPT or 1/2 barbed adapters.
1
[25.40]
9/16-18 UNF-28
TYP 2 PLACES
3-41/64
[92.47]
1-17/64
[32.15]
19/32
[15.03]
59/64
[23.42]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Housing and piston:
Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) R4;
Spring: 316 SS; O ring:
Fluoroelastomer; Other: Epoxy.
107C).
Pressure Limits: 250 psig (17 bar) @
54F (12C).
Repeatability: 1%.
Switch Type: SPST or SPDT.
.08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC, .06A
@ 240 VDC.
Electrical Connection: 18 AWG, 24
(60.96 cm), PVC lead wires.
Process Connection: 9/16 18 UNF 28
or choice of connection adapters (sold
separately).
inlet down position.
better.
Model
P4-11
P4-12
P4-13
P4-14
P4-15
P4-16
P4-31
P4-32
P4-33
P4-34
P4-35
P4-36
Actuation Set Point
GPM (LPM)
.1 (.38)
.25 (.95)
.5 (1.89)
.75 (2.84)
1 (3.7)
1.5 (5.68)
.1 (.38)
0.25 (.95)
0.5 (1.89)
0.75 (2.84)
1.0 (3.79)
1.5 (5.68)
Optional Adapters
Model
P4-98
P4-94
P4-92
Actuation Set Point
GPM (LPM)
0.25 (.95)
0.50 (1.89)
1.0 (3.79)
1.5 (5.68)
2.0 (7.57)
Switch Type
SPST, N.O.
SPST, N.O.
SPST, N.O.
SPST, N.O.
SPST, N.O.
SPST, N.O.
SPDT
SPDT
SPDT
SPDT
SPDT
SPDT
Description
1/8 NPT female
1/4 NPT female
1/2 barb female

208
F
o
w

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
S
h
u
t
t
e
/
P
s
t
o
n
F
L
O
W
Series
P1
Brass Flow Switch
Fixed Setpoints, Flow Rates from 0.10 to 1.5 GPM
The Series P1 Brass Flow Switch utilizes a piston-type design for accurate detection
of excessive or insufficient flow rates. The piston magnetically actuates a hermetically
sealed SPDT reed switch. The switches have preset actuation points from 0.10 to 1.5 GPM
for liquid flow. The Series P1 is ideal for protecting against loss of fluid flow in hydraulic
systems or assuring proper coolant flow in semiconductor processing.
I N
O
U
T
1
[25.4]
1/4 NPT
1/2 NPT
1/2
[12.7]
1-3/4
[44.45]
1
[25.4]
4-1/8 [104.78]
27/32
[21.43]
1-1/4
[31.75]
(1/4 TYP)
[6.35 TYP]
2X (9/32)
[7.14]
1/4 NPT
1/2
[12.7]
2-3/8
[60.33]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Housing: Brass;
Piston: Polysulfone; Spring: 316SS; O
Ring: Fluoroelastomer; Other: Epoxy.
to 107C).
Repeatability: 1%.
Switch Type: SPDT.
.08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC, .06A
@ 240 VDC.
(60.96 cm), polymeric lead wires.
NPT.
inlet down position.
better.
Weight: 0.66 Ib (301 g).
*Calibrated for water at standard conditions.
Model
P1-011
P1-012
P1-013
P1-014
P1-015
P1-016
The Series AFS Adjustable Flow Switch is externally adjustable and is ideal for
protecting machine tools from coolant flow failure, protecting bearings from loss of
lubricant or assuring proper air flow. The Series AFS offers an infinite number of flow
settings from 0.5 to 20 GPM at pressures up to 1000 psig, with low pressure drop and
precise repeatability. The AFS is housed in either brass or stainless steel and can be used
with water, compatible liquids, oils, and gases.
Series
AFS
Adjustable Flow Switch
For Oils, Water and Gases, Infinite Adjustments
2
[50.80]
3/4
[19.05]
1-1/4
[31.75]
1/2 NPT
BOTH ENDS
4-1/8
[104.78]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Housing and Piston: See model chart; Spring: 316SS; O ring:
Fluoroelastomer; Other: Epoxy.
Temperature Limits: 20 to 300F ( 29 to 149C), 20 to 225F ( 29 to 107.2C)
with polysulfone piston.
Pressure Limit: 1000 psi (68 bar).
Accuracy: 10% of setpoint.
Repeatability: 1% maximum deviation.
Switch Type: SPDT.
VDC.
Electrical Connections: 18 AWG, 24 (61 cm), polymeric lead wires, optional 1/2
male NPT conduit connection.
Process Connection: 1/2 female NPT ports.
Setpoint Adjustment: Liquids: 0.5 to 20 GPM (1.9 to 75.7 LPM); Gases: 1.0 to 75
SCFM (28 to 2124 LPM) at 5 psig.
Model
AFS-131
AFS-141
AFS-151
AFS-231
AFS-251
AFS-132
AFS-142
AFS-152
AFS-232
AFS-252
Media
Oil
Water
Liquids
Gases
Gases
Oil
Water
Liquids
Gases
Gases
Electrical
Connection
Wire leads
Wire leads
Wire leads
Wire leads
Wire leads
1/2 NPT conduit
1/2 NPT conduit
1/2 NPT conduit
1/2 NPT conduit
1/2 NPT conduit
Piston
Brass
Polysulfone
316SS
Brass
316SS
Brass
Polysulfone
316SS
Brass
316SS
Actuation Set Point*
GPM (LPM)
0.10 (.38)
0.25 (.95)
0.50 (1.89)
0.75 (2.84)
1.00 (3.79)
1.50 (5.68)
Housing
Brass
Brass
316SS
Brass
316SS
Brass
Brass
316SS
Brass
316SS

F
o
w

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
S
h
u
t
t
e
/
P
s
t
o
n
F
L
O
W
Series V12 Flotect
Flow Switch is a low cost, versatile line of switches that can be used
in a wide range of applications and configurations. Mountable in any orientation, the Series
V12 Flow Switch utilizes a free moving shuttle that is displaced by the liquid flow, activating
an isolated, sealed reed switch. Models can be used in media that is compatible with PPE
& PS, stainless steel and FEP. Constructed of FDA approved wetted materials.
Flow Switch
Low Cost, Wide Range of Chemical Compatibility, Flow Rates 0.5 to 5.0 GPM
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Housing and
shuttle: PPE & PS (polyphenylene
ether and polystyrene). PVC with 3/4
NPT option; Spring: 316 SS; Retaining
clip: PH 15 7 MO stainless steel;
Magnet: FEP.
Temperature Limits: 0F ( 18C) to
194F (90C)
Pressure Limit: 100 psig (6.90 bar) @
70F (21C), 50 psig (3.45 bar) @
194F (90C)
Switch Type: SPST normally open
hermetically sealed reed switch.
Electrical Rating: 1.5A @ 24 VDC
resistive, 0.001A @ 200 VDC resistive,
0.5A @ 125 VAC.
Accuracy: 20%.
(460 mm) long.
Process Connection: 1 female NPT.
Optional 3/4 female NPT.
installed in any position but the
actuation flow rates are based on
vertical up flow pipe runs and are
nominal values.
Set Point Adjustment: None.
Weight: 4.2 oz (0.119 kg).
Deadband: 20% maximum.
Series
V12
Note: Standard units are designed with springs for positive return of the shuttle at
no flow condition. This allows the flow switch to be mounted in any orientation, but
actuation set points vary from stated values. Contact the factory for further
information.
RED
WHITE
(2) 22 AWG
LEAD WIRES
18 [457] LONG
V12
2-7/8
[73.03]
V12 - 3/4 NPT
3-17/32
[89.69]
V12 - 3/4 NPT
1-15/32
[37.31] V12
13/16
[20.64]
3/4 NPT
2 PLACES
1-19/32 TYP.
[40.48]
OUTLET
INLET
V12
2-11/16
[65.26]
V12 - 3/4 NPT
3-11/32
[84.93]
Model
V12-2
V12-3
V12-4
V12-5
Gallons per Minute
0.5 GPM
1.0 GPM
2.5 GPM
5.0 GPM
Series
P5
PVC Shuttle Flow Switch
Low Cost Flow/No Flow Monitoring, Visual Flow Indication, Broad Chemical Compatibility
The transparent Series P5 Shuttle Flow Switch features corrosion resistant, durable
PVC housing for visual confirmation in flow/no flow applications. The switches have preset
actuation points from 0.5 to 2.0 GPM for actuation on increasing flow. Switching is SPST
normally open at no flow. Choose from 1/2 NPT or 3/4 IPS (for 0.5 GPM) or 1 IPS (for
2.0 GPM) inlet and outlet ports. The shuttle design has only one moving part for long life
and minimum maintenance. Remove the one-piece bonnet and shuttle assembly to quickly
clean the unit without disturbing the housing or piping. Rugged construction and excellent
chemical compatibility simplify flow / no flow detection.
3-13/16 [96.84]
OR 4-3/8 [111.13]
WITH 1/2 NPT
PORT ADAPTER
1-1/2 [38.1] OR
2-1/16 [52.39] W/ 1/2 NPT
PORT ADAPTER
[A]
2 PLACES
1-5/8
[41.28]
[B]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Housing, shuttle
and bonnet: PVC; O ring: Buna N;
Epoxy.
70F (21C) to 100F (38C), 50 psig
(3.45 bar) @ 101F (38.3C) to 120F
(49C).
Repeatability: 1%.
.08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC, .06A
@ 240 VDC.
(61 cm), PVC lead wire.
NPT, 3/4 IPS or 1 IPS.
better.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical, inlet
facing down.
DIM A
1/2 NPT
3/4 IPS
1 IPS
DIM B
(25/16)
[58.74]
(2 1/16)
[52.39]
(1 15/16)
[49.21]
Model
P5-1
P5-2
P5-3
Actuation Set Point
GPM (LPM)
.5 (1.89)
.5 (1.89)
2.0 (7.57)
OPTION
3/4 female NPT connections, PVC hex bushing
To order add suffix 3/4NPT.
Example: V12 4 3/4NPT
Switch Activation Set Point on
Increasing Flow (Water), Vertical Up Direction
Liters per Minute
1.892
3.785
9.462
18.924
Process Connection
1/2 NPT port adapter
3/4 IPS
1 IPS

210
F
o
w

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
T
h
e
r
m
a
F
L
O
W
Series
TSP
Protect pumps and valves from dry running with the Series TSP Liquid Flow
Controller. The Series TSP combine a liquid flow switch with a failsafe relay controller to
detect a flow or no flow situation and provides switching for direct actuation of pumps and
valves. Controller features adjustable time delay, selectable NO or NC operation, and LED
indication of sensor, relay, and power status. Four models (TSP110S, TSP210S, TSP120S,
TSP220S) are designed with an integral flash alarm to provide immediate indication of
local alarm conditions.
Liquid Flow Controller
NO or NC Relay Output, Adjustable Time Delay
*Applies to models with flash alarm only.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Polypropylene/PPS
or polyvinylidene fluoride.
( 40 to 70C).
77F (25C), derated 1.67 psi (.113 bar)
per C above 25C.
Relay Output: 1 SPDT form C, isolated
and sealed.
Relay Load: 250 VAC, 10 A resistive,
1/2 hp.
Switching Mode: Selectable NO or NC.
Supply Voltage: 120/240 VAC, 50/60
Hz, selectable.
Current Consumption: .25 amps
maximum.
Sensor Voltage Supply: 13 VDC, 1
Watt max., nominal.
Sensor Trigger Point: Dry <10 mA, wet
>10 mA.
Time Delay: Adjustable, 0.15 to 60
seconds.
Flash Type: *Xenon tube.
Flash Frequency: *1 per second.
Brightness: *>50,000 CP.
Strobe Life: *10 M cycles.
Mounting Connection: 3/4 NPT.
Enclosure: Polypropylene, flame
retardant, probe NEMA 4X (IP65).
Thermal Dispersion Flow Switch
Adjustable Switch Point, LED Indication
Series
TDS
The Series TDS Thermal Dispersion Flow Switch offers solid state flow detection
of non-coating liquids for pump and process protection. SPDT output allows for interfacing
with remote PLC or relay control device. The adjustable switch point is factory calibrated
at 0.2 fps with LED indication of flow and calibration status. Units feature selectable NO
or NC operation and are not damaged by overranging flow velocities.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquids.
Wetted Materials: Polypropylene /PPS
or polyvinylidene fluoride.
Range: 0.04 to 10 fps (1.2X10
2
to 3.05
m/s)
60C).
25C, derated @ 1.667 psi (.113 bar)
per C above 25C.
Repeatability: 5% of setpoint.
Switch Type: SPDT.
Electrical Rating: 60 VAC/60 VDC @
1 A.
Electrical Connections: 22 AWG 3
wire, 10 ft (3 m) length.
Mounting Orientation: Any
orientation, for pipe sizes 3/4 to 1 1/2
use 3.0 (7.6 cm) length switch; for 2
to 16 pipe sizes use 4.5 (11.4 cm)
length switch.
Setpoint Adjustment: 0.04 to 3 fps
(1.2X10
2
to .91 m/s).
Setpoint Drift: 0.5% of setpoint.
Response Time: 1 10 seconds.
Viscosity Range: 1 to 200 centipoise.
Supply Voltage: 12 to 36 VDC.
Consumption: 50 mA (nominal).
Indication: LED for flow status.
"B"
"A"
3/4 NPT
1-1/16
[26.99]
45/64
[17.86]
2-13/16
[71.44]
2-13/16
[71.44]
C
B
A
3-5/16
[84.14]
3-29/32
[99.22]
C
B
A
3-5/16
[84.14]
3-29/32
[99.22]
Model
TSP110
TSP210
TSP120
TSP220
TSP110S
TSP210S
TSP120S
TSP220S
Flash Alarm
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Wetted Parts
PP
PVDF
PP
PVDF
PP
PVDF
PP
PVDF
Model
TSP110
TSP210
TSP120
TSP220
TSP110S
TSP210S
TSP120S
TSP220S
DIM A
in (cm)
6 1/2 (165.1)
6 1/2 (165.1)
7 29/32 (200.82)
7 29/32 (200.82)
8 5/16 (211.14)
8 5/16 (211.14)
9 13/16 (249.24)
9 13/16 (249.24)
DIM B
in (cm)
1 5/16 (33.34)
1 5/16 (33.34)
2 13/16 (71.44)
2 13/16 (71.44)
1 9/64 (28.97)
1 9/64 (28.97)
2 13/16 (71.44)
2 13/16 (71.44)
DIM C
in (cm)
45/64 (17.86)
45/64 (17.86)
2 7/64 (53.58)
2 7/64 (53.58)
45/64 (17.86)
45/64 (17.86)
2 7/64 (53.58)
2 7/64 (53.58)
Dim.
A
B
TDS112, TDS212
3.0 (7.6 cm)
0.7 (1.8 cm)
TDS122, TDS222
4.5 (11.4 cm)
2.1 (5.3 cm)
Model
TDS112
TDS212
TDS122
TDS222
Wetted Parts
PP/PPS
PVDF
PP/PPS
PVDF
Sensor Length
Short
Short
Long
Long
Short
Short
Long
Long
Length
3.0 (7.6 cm)
3.0 (7.6 cm)
4.5 (11.4 cm)
4.5 (11.4 cm)

F
o
w

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
T
h
e
r
m
a
F
L
O
W
Series
FMS
Flow Sensor
For Water and Water Based Liquids/Oil and Oil-Based Liquids
FMS Series Flow Sensor
Automatic scaling and set-point
No moving parts
Learn function for flow rate
Push-button re-scaling if needed
Easy to install
Series FMS Flow Sensor FMS-1 is for applications requiring RELATIVE
measurement and set-point of flow rate. This means that the actual velocity of
the flow or the quantitative measurement in GPM is not known and is not
important. What is important is that the set-point can be set as a percentage
of or relative to the full flow rate. No other flow sensor could do it this simply
or effectively.
How It Operates
The model FMS uses a set of flashing LEDs to indicate flow. All 7 of the
LEDs will remain lit to show 100% flow rate. The flow OK light will also be
lit showing that the established full flow rate is what is flowing in the pipe.
When you initially set the flow rate, it will mark that as your 100% mark. If
your flow reduces below the 50% mark, you will get an alarm from the
sensor.
If flow increases beyond the initially established flow rate, the Overflow
LED light will come on. It is then the operators decisions as to whether to
ignore it if too much flow is not a problem and may actually choose this
flow rate to be the new normal flow rate. This can be done by just
depressing the set button until all LEDs flash. The FMS has now
recalibrated itself to the new flow rate. The flow ok LED will again light
and the set point will automatically be re set at the 50% of flow point.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Water and water based liquids/oil and oil based liquids.
Wetted Materials: Sensor head: 303 SS.
Low Flow Set Point: Auto set @ 50% / adjustable via set push button.
Set Point Range: 5.0 ft/sec (0 150 cm/sec.)
Repeatability: < 0.5%.
Hysteresis: 10% of set point value typical.
Medium Temperature Limits: 4 to 176F ( 20 to 80C.)
Pressure: 450 psi (30 bar).
Response Time: 25 seconds (typical).
Supply Voltage: 20 30 VDC (short circuit protected).
Switching Current: < 200 mA.
Power Consumption: 6 W max.
Electrical Connection: M12 male socket 4 pin. Comes with 6.5 ft (2 m)
cable with M12 connector and pigtail.
Initial Operation: After 15 seconds.
Switch Type: PNP N.O. (switch closed with flow), PNP N.C. (switch
open with flow).
Weight: .55 lb (.25 kg).
M12 4 PIN CONNECTOR
49/64
[19.56]
1-31/32
[49.8]
1-11/32
[34]
1-1/16 HEX
[27 HEX]
1/2-14 NPT
21/32
[16.51]
3-3/16
[80.88]
1/2
[12.7]
Model FMS-1, Flow Sensor PNP N.O.
Model FMS-2, Flow Sensor PNP N.C.

212
F
o
w

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
T
h
e
r
m
a
F
L
O
W
Series
FTS
Thermal Flow and Temperature Switch
For Industrial Cooling Systems
Series FTS Thermal Flow Switch is especially designed, for all types of cooling systems,
as a reliable alternative to failure prone mechanical flow switches. The thermal flow switch
continually samples the temperature of the coolant and adjusts the low flow setpoint
automatically, providing a solid state switch should the coolant flow rate fall below the
setpoint value. In addition, the thermal flow switch will provide an alarm output should the
coolant temperature rise above acceptable levels. You have double protection with the FTS.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Water based liquids.
Low Flow Set Point: .4 m/s (1.2 fps) (water related) typical.
Temperature Set Point: 122F (50C) or 158F (70C), other settings possible on
OEM demand.
Response Time: 5 to 10 seconds.
Hysteresis: <20% of set point value.
Protection Class: NEMA 6 (IP 67).
Wetted Material: 303 SS.
Electrical Connection: M12 male socket 4 pin with 6 ft (2 m) connection cable
with M12 connector sold separately.
Power Requirement: 18 30 VDC.
Electrical Rating: <200 mA.
Initial Operation: After 15 seconds.
Switch Type: PNP N.O. (switch closes with flow).
STD. CABLE LENGTH 6 FT.
FTS-AL & FTS-BL
4-9/64 [105.22]
2-55/64 [72.58]
1-63/64 [50.22]
1/2 NPT
43/64
[17.02]
1-1/16 HEX
[26.78]
A-284
Model
FTS-AS
FTS-AL
FTS-BS
FTS-BL
Temp. Set Point
122F (50C)
122F (50C)
158F (70C)
158F (70C)
Series
TDC
3-29/32 [99.21]
2-13/16
[71.44]
1-13/16
[46.04]
3-7/64 [78.98]
3-45/64 [94.06]
Series TDC Remote Flow Controller coupled with a thermal dispersion flow switch
(Series TDS) provides a complete system for leak detection, signaling high or low flow
conditions, low flow cutoff, and pump or valve actuation. Controller features adjustable
time delay for dampening of relay chatter, selectable NO or NC operation, and LED
indication of sensor, relay, and power status. Model TDC1 accepts single switch input
and single relay output. Model TDC2 accepts three switch inputs and two relay outputs.
SPECIFICATIONS
Relay Output: TDC1: 1 SPDT form C; TDC2: 2 SPDT form C (one latching relay).
Relay Load: 240 VAC, 12 A resistive, 1/2 HP.
Switching Mode: Field selectable NO or NC.
Supply Voltage: 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz., selectable.
Current Consumption: .25 amps maximum.
Time Delay: Adjustable, 0.15 to 60 seconds.
Sensor Voltage Supply: 13.5 VDC, 100 mA max., nominal.
Sensor Trigger Point: Dry <12 mA; Wet >12 mA.
Sensor Input: Terminal block.
Mounting: EN 50 022 standard 32 mm DIN or panel mount.
Enclosure: Polypropylene, flame retardant.
Remote Flow Controller
Single or Dual Relay Output, Adjustable Time Delay
Model
TDC1
TDC2
ACCESSORY
A-284, Wiring cable 6 ft (2 m) long with M12 connector
Sensor Length (L)
1/2 (12.7 cm)
2 (50.8 cm)
1/2 (12.7 cm)
2 (50.8 cm)
Description
Single Point Flow Controller
Dual Point Flow Controller

F
o
w

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
P
e
z
o
F
L
O
W
Series
BFM
Bulk Flow Monitor
Monitors Movement of Solids and Liquids
Series BFM Bulk Flow Monitor provides effective monitoring for most
flow/no flow conditions in pipes and chutes. Its sensing techniques, which use
a Piezo element, makes the BFM versatile for most flow/no flow applications.
The BFM Control offers many unique advance features that exceed the
industry standards. The BFM Central Processing Unit monitors movement of
almost anything through a pipe or chute system. The BFM is ideal for sensing
the presence or absence of materials in Pneumatic Conveying Systems. The
BFM offers adjustable sensitivity depending on the application demand. Also,
it provides easy installation and requires no maintenance. The unit has LED
indicators flow (green)/ no flow (red).
The BFS-1 Sensor yields many advance features. It externally mounts to the
outside of the pipe or chute. It provides mounting tabs for easy installation. The
Sensor is prewired with 3 wire.
Series BFM has many practical applications. You can use it to monitor oil spray
systems, discharge chutes, distributors, screw conveyors, drag conveyors, water
systems, air systems, pneumatic systems, gravity feed systems, slurry systems,
chemical processing, food processing and rotary drums.
SPECIFICATIONS
BFM Specifications
Service: Solids and liquids.
Power Requirement: 120VAC, 220VAC or 12VDC.
Power Consumption: .1A.
Temperature Limits: 120F (48.9C).
Output: Relay: SPDT rated 4A @ 125/250VAC, 1/10 HP @
125/250VAC, 3A @ 30VDC. TTL: 0 5 V.
Serial Communications: RS 232.
Electrical Connection: Screw terminal.
Conduit Connection: Knockouts (four 3/4 for power, six 1/2 for sensor
and outputs).
Material: Polycarbonate.
BFS Specifications
Pipe Size: 1/2 to 60 (1.27 to 152.4 cm).
Electrical Connection: 3 (0.9 m) of 18 gauge wire.
Temperature Limits: 155F (68.3C).
Materials: PVC type 1 grade 1 grey.
Weight: 5 oz (141.8 g).
4x 3/4 CONDUIT KNOCKOUTS
5-9/64 [130.45]
3[76.20]
6X 1/2 CONDUIT
KNOCKOUT
1-19/32
[40.64]
1/2
[12.69]
3/32
[2.29]
3
[76.20]
1-1/2
[38.10]
FLOW SENSOR
3 18 AWG
WIRE
SENSOR
TIP
7
[177.80]
GREEN
LED
RED LED
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT
POTENTIOMETER
BFM FLOW MONITOR
BFM BFS
Model
BFM-1
BFM-2
BFM-3
BFS-1
Descriptions
Control Unit: NEMA 4X, Polycarbonate Housing, 120VAC
Control Unit: NEMA 4X, Polycarbonate Housing, 220VAC
Control Unit: NEMA 4X, Polycarbonate Housing, 12VDC
Sensor

214
F
o
w

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,
I
n
-
L
n
e
F
L
O
W
Compressed Air Meter
Steady-State and Cumulative Totals PNP/4-20 mA Output
Series
CAM
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compressed air; Air quality (see chart).
Wetted Materials: Stainless steel (304S15), ceramics, glass
passivated, PEEK, polyester, fluoroelastomer, anodized aluminum.
Accuracy: Class 1.4.1: 3% of measured value +0.3% of full scale
value; Class 3.4.4: 6% of measured value + .6% of full scale value.
Response Time: < 0.1 seconds.
Temperature Limit: 32 to 140F (0 to 60C).
Humidity Limit: 90% RH.
Output Signal: Output 1: PNP open collector: VOUT(max)=30 VDC /
ISINK(max)=250mA; Output 2: 4 20 mA (scaleable) or PNP open
collector.
Current Consumption: <100 mA.
Electrical Connections: 4 pin M12 (micro) cable connection.
Process Connections: 1/2, 1 and 2 NPT.
Display: 4 digit alpha numeric red LED.
Enclosure Rating: IP65 (NEMA 4X).
Mounting Orientation: Vertical, horizontal, side with pipe length facing
left.
Weight: CAM 10: 12.5 lb; CAM 20: 2.35 lb; CAM 30: 4.16 lb.
The Series CAM Compressed Air Meter operates by the calorimetric
measuring principle to detect the standard volume flow of operating compressed
air. It is designed specifically to evaluate the current flow rate and the current
consumed quantity in compressed air systems. With an easily programmable
digital display, this unit offers a quick, accurate readout. The Series CAM is
constructed of high-grade materials and is virtually maintenance free.
3-1/32
[76.99]
D
C
A
B
C
M12 x 1
4-3/8
[111.13]
3-15/16
[100.01]
Model
CAM-10
CAM-20
CAM-30
A
10 53/64
[275.3]
8 9/32
[210.34]
14 49/64
[375.05]
B
18 45/64
[475.06]
11 13/16
[300.04]
18 45/64
[475.06]
C
2 NPT
1/2 NPT
1 NPT
D
2 1/64
[51.2]
41/64
[16.27]
1 5/64
[27.38]
Dimensions
Class
1
2
3
4
5
6
Max. Residual Water Max. Residual Dust Max. Oil Content
Residual
Water
g/m
3
0.003
0.117
0.880
5.953
7.732
9.356
Pressure
Dew Point
C
70
40
20
+3
+7
+10
Dust
Concentration
mg/m
3
0.1
1
5
8
10
Particle
Size
mg/m
0.1
1
5
15
40
Oil
Content
mg/m
3
0.01
0.1
1
5
25
Model CAM-10, 2 NPT, 1.4 412.0 SCFM
Model CAM-20, 1/2 NPT, 0.2 44.1 SCFM
Model CAM-30, 1 NPT, 1.0 132.4 SCFM
ACCESSORY
A-283, 4 Wire Connector

F
o
w

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,
I
n
-
L
n
e
F
L
O
W
The Series HFT combines a direct reading HF flowmeter with electronics to
provide a proportional analog output of 4-20, 0-5, and 1-5 VDC. Use the output
to drive data acquisition devices, meters, or analog input cards. The entire
assembly is housed in a rugged cast aluminum NEMA 4X enclosure. The unit
can be installed in outdoor applications or harsh environments where liquid
tight seals are required. The flow transmitter does not require input or output
straight plumbing, and can be mounted in any orientation.
APPLICATIONS
HFT Flow Transmitters can be used to set flow rates, fluid motor and
cylinder speeds. Check pump high pressure performance, pressure relief
valve settings, fluid handling systems in agricultural, construction or
industrial machinery, power tools and equipment. Monitor air with
aluminum models; petrochemical operations with brass or stainless steel
models.
Series
HFT
In-Line Flow Transmitters
Local Flow Indication, Unrestricted Mounting, 4-20 mA, 0-5 V, and 1-5 V Output
Pressure Differential VS. Flow Rate
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Body: Aluminum, brass or 304 SS; Seals: Buna N or
Fluoroelastomer; Magnet: PTFE coated Alnico; Other internal parts: 304
SS.
Viscosity: 500 SSU.
Accuracy: 4% FS over entire range; 2.5% over center third of the
measuring range.
Output Signal: 4 20 mA; 0 5 V; 1 5 V.
Shipping Weight: 1/4 to 1/2 female NPT models: 3 lb (1.4 kg); 3/4 to 1
female NPT models: 4.5 lb (2.0 kg); 1 1/2 female NPT models: 12 lb
(5.4 kg).
1/4 Female NPT 1/2 Female NPT 3/4, 1 & 1-1/2 Female NPT
Aluminum body for air or other non-corrosive gases:
600 psig (41 bar)
Wetted Parts: Aluminum, PTFE coated Alnico, 304 SS and Buna N
6000 psig (413 bar)
Wetted Parts: 304 SS, Fluoroelastomer and PTFE
Brass body for water based fluids (non-steam):
3500 psig (240 bar)
Wetted Parts: Brass, PTFE coated Alnico, 304 SS and Buna N
HFT-1123
HFT-1112
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

P
S
I
D
Flow Rate: SCFM @ 100 PSIG
10
8
6
4
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

P
S
I
D
Flow Rate: GPM
2
HFT-3210
HFT-3202
HFT-2205
10
8
6
4
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

P
S
I
D
Flow Rate: GPM
2
HFT-2315
HFT-2320
HFT-2440
12
HFT-2550
4-1/2
[114.3]
7-1/8
[180.98]
Model
HFT-1112
HFT-1123
Connection Size
1/4 female NPT
1/4 female NPT
Model
HFT-2205
HFT-2315
HFT-2320
HFT-2440
HFT-2550
Connection Size
1/2 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
1 female NPT
1 1/2 female NPT
Model
HFT-3202
HFT-3210
Connection Size
1/2 female NPT
1/2 female NPT
Range, Air SCFM
1.5 12
4 23
Range, Water
GPM (LPM)
0.5 5.0 (1 19)
1 15 (3.8 55)
2 20 (7.5 75)
4 40 (15 151)
5 50 (19 189)
Range, Water
GPM (LPM)
0.2 2.0 (0.75 7.5)
1 10 (3.8 38)

216
F
o
w

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,
I
n
-
L
n
e
F
L
O
W
Series
DFT
Inline Differential Flow Transmitter
Low Cost, Compact and Rugged Design
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: End ports: PVC; Wedge element: PVC; Pressure
sensor: polyethermide.
Flow Measuring Ranges: 0.5 5, 1 10, 1 15 GPM.
Response Time: Indication of no less than 90% of any step change
within <500ms.
Output Signal: 4 20 mA, 0 5 VDC or 0 10 VDC.
Maximum Current Consumption: 25 mA.
Minimum Load Resistance: 1000 .
Maximum Transmission Distance: 200 ft.
Resolution: Infinite.
Maximum Particulate Size: 200 microns.
Series DFT Flow Transmitters use a segmented wedge differential producer
to measure flow rates as related to pressure to monitor process fluids. The
segmented wedge provides a simple and reliable restriction for sensing flow as
related to pressure differential. The sensor can be mounted in any position and
allows the designer to install it in any orientation: horizontal, vertical or
inverted. The sensor is offered with three flow measuring ranges: 0.5-5, 1-10
and 1-15 GPM and three electrical output signals: 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC and 1-10
VDC. The sensor offers low-cost precision with a measuring accuracy of 2% of
full-scale range and repeatability of 0.5%.
Model
DFT-PNW1-01A1
DFT-PNW1-01B1
DFT-PNW1-01C1
DFT-PNW1-02A1
DFT-PNW1-02B1
DFT-PNW1-02C1
DFT-PNW1-03A1
DFT-PNW1-03B1
DFT-PNW1-03C1
DFT-PNW1-01A2
DFT-PNW1-01B2
DFT-PNW1-01C2
DFT-PNW1-02A2
DFT-PNW1-02B2
DFT-PNW1-02C2
DFT-PNW1-03A2
DFT-PNW1-03B2
DFT-PNW1-03C2
DFT-PNW1-01A3
DFT-PNW1-01B3
DFT-PNW1-01C3
DFT-PNW1-02A3
DFT-PNW1-02B3
DFT-PNW1-02C3
DFT-PNW1-03A3
DFT-PNW1-03B3
DFT-PNW1-03C3
Flow Ranges
GPM (LPM)
0.5 5 (1.9 18.9)
0.5 5 (1.9 18.9)
0.5 5 (1.9 18.9)
0.5 5 (1.9 18.9)
0.5 5 (1.9 18.9)
0.5 5 (1.9 18.9)
0.5 5 (1.9 18.9)
0.5 5 (1.9 18.9)
0.5 5 (1.9 18.9)
1 10 (3.8 37.9)
1 10 (3.8 37.9)
1 10 (3.8 37.9)
1 10 (3.8 37.9)
1 10 (3.8 37.9)
1 10 (3.8 37.9)
1 10 (3.8 37.9)
1 10 (3.8 37.9)
1 10 (3.8 37.9)
1 15 (3.8 56.8)
1 15 (3.8 56.8)
1 15 (3.8 56.8)
1 15 (3.8 56.8)
1 15 (3.8 56.8)
1 15 (3.8 56.8)
1 15 (3.8 56.8)
1 15 (3.8 56.8)
1 15 (3.8 56.8)
Nominal
Port Size
(NPT Female)
3/8
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/8
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/8
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
6-7/8
[174.63]
FOR 3/8 & 1/2
7-1/2
[190.5]
FOR 3/4
5-1/4
[133.35]
2-7/32
[56.36]
1-3/32
[27.78]
FOR 3/8 & 1/2
1-5/16
[33.34]
FOR 3/4
Electrical
Output
0 5 VDC
0 10 VDC
4 20 mA
0 5 VDC
0 10 VDC
4 20 mA
0 5 VDC
0 10 VDC
4 20 mA
0 5 VDC
0 10 VDC
4 20 mA
0 5 VDC
0 10 VDC
4 20 mA
0 5 VDC
0 10 VDC
4 20 mA
0 5 VDC
0 10 VDC
4 20 mA
0 5 VDC
0 10 VDC
4 20 mA
0 5 VDC
0 10 VDC
4 20 mA

F
o
w

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,
P
a
d
d
e
w
h
e
e
F
L
O
W
SPDT Relay Output
Model
SF2-104
SF2-101
SF2-114
SF2-111
SF2-124
SF2-121
SF2-134
SF2-131
Pulsed Output
Model
SF2-204
SF2-214
SF2-224
SF2-234
Series
SF
Sight Flow Transmitter
2% FS Accuracy, 4 to 20 mA Output, Pressure up to 500 psig (34 bar)
Series SF Sight Flow Transmitter integrates tangential turbine technology with
hermetically sealed circuitry to provide accurate flow measurement and control in the
harshest environments. The 2-wire loop-powered design transmits a 4 to 20 mA signal
proportional to flow rate. Models can accurately measure flow in both directions and can
be mounted in any orientation. Model SF11 has a clear polycarbonate viewing cover for
visible indication of flow. Units feature LED power indication, adjustable zero and span,
polarity protection and over current limiting.
1/2 FEMALE NPT
2
[50.80]
2-5/8
[66.68]
2-29/64
[62.31]
1-9/64
[28.97]
3-45/64
[94.06]
APPLICATIONS
Ideal for measuring flow rates in cooling and lubrication circuits, HVAC systems,
aggressive chemical metering, and batching systems.
Series
SF2
Sight Flow Meters
SPDT or Pulse Output, Visual Flow Confirmation, Brass Body
A
B
C
D
E
G
F
Series SF2 Sight Flow Meters combine visual confirmation of flow with a relay or pulse
output. The brass, unibody construction, one piece composite rotor, and ceramic shaft
delivers durability with broader chemical, temperature, and pressure capabilities. For
specific flow setpoint switching, select SF2-1 meters with a SPDT relay output. Setpoints
are fully adjustable over the specified flow range. The dynamic operation of the rotor
guards against jamming and false actuation. For flow rate monitoring or metering
applications, select SF2-2 meters with a pulse output proportional to the rate of flow. The
4.5 to 24 VDC pulse output is compatible with most digital logic families.
Dimensions in [mm]
SF2-1
SF2-2
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316 SS shaft and
case, Iglide
bearings, Buna N seal

and acetal copolymer, (polycarbonate
cover on Model SF11).
Flow Range: 0.5 to 15 GPM (5.7 to
56.8 LPM).
Accuracy: 2% FS.
( 7 to 107C).
Pressure Limits: 500 psig (34 bar)
Model SF10; 200 psig (14 bar) Model
SF11.
Response Time: 2 seconds to 90%
(step change in flow rate).
Supply Voltage: 12 to 35 VDC.
Output: 4 to 20 mA.
NPT.
Electrical Connection: Wire leads:
22 AWG x 9 (2.7 m).
Max. Particle Size: 100m.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquids compatible with
wetted parts.
Wetted Materials: Brass body,
ceramic pin, PPS rotor, Polysulfone
lens and fluoroelastomer O ring.
Accuracy: Relay output: 5%; Pulsed
output: 7% for ranges up to 5.0 GPM,
15% for ranges up to 60.0 GPM.
to 100C).
70F.
Power Requirements: See table.
Output: SPDT: 1 Amp, 24 VDC
resistive; 0.3 Amp, 110 VAC or 4.5
VDC to 24 VDC pulse depending on
model.
Electrical Connections: Relay output
models: 20AWG PVC jacketed, 24
cable; Pulsed output models: 22AWG
PVC jacketed, 24 cable.
Process Connections: See table.
Setpoint Differential: 15% max for
relay output models.
Maximum Viscosity: 200 SSU.
Model
SF10
SF11
Model
SF2-104
SF2-101
SF2-114
SF2-111
SF2-124
SF2-121
SF2-134
SF2-131
SF2-204
SF2-214
SF2-224
SF2-234
A
2.37 [60]
2.37 [60]
2.37 [60]
2.37 [60]
2.57 [65]
2.57 [65]
2.57 [65]
2.57 [65]
2.37 [60]
2.37 [60]
2.37 [60]
2.37 [60]
B
2.50 [64]
2.50 [64]
2.50 [64]
2.50 [64]
2.50 [64]
2.50 [64]
2.50 [64]
2.50 [64]
2.50 [64]
2.50 [64]
2.50 [64]
2.50 [64]
C
3.01 [76]
3.01 [76]
3.01 [76]
3.01 [76]
3.94 [100]
3.94 [100]
3.94 [100]
3.94 [100]
3.01 [76]
3.01 [76]
3.94 [100]
3.94 [100]
D
0.87 [22]
0.87 [22]
1.06 [27]
1.06 [27]
0.87 [22]
0.87 [22]
1.06 [27]
1.06 [27]
E
2.32 [59]
2.32 [59]
2.32 [59]
2.32 [59]
2.32 [59]
2.32 [59]
2.95 [75]
2.95 [75]
F
0.80 [20]
0.87 [22]
1.06 [27]
1.06 [27]
G
4.50 [114]
4.50 [114]
4.76 [121]
4.76 [121]
Range (GPM)
0.5 to 5.0
0.5 to 5.0
4.0 to 20.0
4.0 to 20.0
5.0 to 30.0
5.0 to 30.0
8.0 to 60.0
8.0 to 60.0
Range (GPM)
0.5 to 5.0
4.0 to 20.0
5.0 to 30.0
8.0 to 60.0
Power
24 VDC
110 VAC
24 VDC
110 VAC
24 VDC
110 VAC
24 VDC
110 VAC
Power
4.5 to 24 VDC
4.5 to 24 VDC
4.5 to 24 VDC
4.5 to 24 VDC
Iglide

is a registered trademark of Igus GMBH
Cover Material
316 SS
Clear Polycarbonate
Connection
1/4 female NPT
1/4 female NPT
1/2 female NPT
1/2 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
1 female NPT
1 female NPT
Connection
1/4 female NPT
1/2 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
1 female NPT

218
F
o
w

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,
P
a
d
d
e
w
h
e
e
F
L
O
W
Sight Flow Indicator/Transmitter
Low Cost, Optional Output for Flow Rate and Totalization
UV Stabilized Polycarbonate Model
Series
SFI-800
SFI-800 SFI-801
SFI with A-711 Option
2-1/2
[63.50]
2-13/16
[71.44]
SFI MODEL ONLY
2-5/16
[58.74]
2
[50.80]
1/2 OR
3/4 NPT
1-3/32
[27.78]
REMOVAL
CLEARANCE
2-1/4 [57.15] 17/32
[13.50]
2-15/16
[74.61]
1-15/32
[37.30]
(4) 1/4 DIA [6.35]
HOLE ON 2-1/2 DIA [63.5]
BOLT CIRCLE
2-1/32
[51.59]
PANEL MOUNT
CUTOUT
(4) 13/64 DIA [5.16]
HOLE ON 2-1/2 DIA [63.5]
BOLT CIRCLE
SFI WITH
A-711 OPTION
The Series SFI-800 Sight Flow Indicator is a low cost, durable rotor style flow
indicator with optional Hall effect magnetic output packages for remote flow monitoring.
Both SFI-800 and 801 models are constructed of clear plastic enabling 360 viewing of the
spinning rotor for easy flow indication. SFI-800 models are constructed of polysulfone with
excellent chemical compatibility, high pressure and temperature ratings, and all wetted
materials are FDA/NSF ratable for potable water applications. SFI-801 models are
constructed of UV stabilized polycarbonate making them ideal for outdoor applications
(materials do not meet FDA/NSF). The SFI-801 models also feature an easy view bright
red impeller.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible fluids.
Wetted Materials
Body: SFI 800: Polysulfone; SFI 801: UV stabilized polycarbonate;
Window: SFI 800: Polysulfone; SFI 801: UV stabilized polycarbonate;
Rotor: SFI 800: White polysulfone; SFI 801: Red UV stabilized PBT;
Rotor Pin: 316 SS;
Thrust washers: 300 Series SS;
O ring: SFI 800: Fluoroelastomer (NSF grade); SFI 801: Buna N.
Temperature Limits: SFI 800: 20 to 212F ( 29 to 100C); SFI 801: 20 to 130F
( 29 to 55C).
Pressure Limits: SFI 800: 150 psi (10.34 bar); SFI 801: 125 psi (8.62 bar).
Viscosity Max: 200 SSU.
Weight: SFI 800: 3.35 oz (95 g); SFI 800 A711: 5.0 oz (142 g).
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (for A-711 Option Only)
Output Signal: White lead: 5 VDC; Green lead: 8 to 28 VDC equal to supply
voltage. Pulsed output with frequency rate proportional to flow rate.
Frequency Output Range: 0 to 100 Hz.
Electrical Connections: Black lead ground; White lead: 5 VDC out pulse; Green
lead: 8 to 28 VDC out pulse; Red lead: 8 to 28 VDC supply.
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (for A-712 option only)
Output Signal: White lead: 1 to 10 VDC.
Electrical Termination: Black lead: Ground; Red lead: 15 to 28 VDC input; White
lead: 1 to 10 VDC output.
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ( for A-713 option only)
Output Signal: White lead: Normally open switch; Green lead: Normally closed
switch. Both open collector, 100 mA max, 28 VDC max.
Electrical Connections: Black lead: Ground; White lead: Normally open; Green
lead: Normally closed; Red lead: 8 to 28 VDC.
*Sensor only, not attached to the flow indicator body.
Model
Polysulfone Body
SFI-800-1/2
SFI-800-3/4
SFI-800-1/2-LF
Polycarbonate Body
SFI-801-1/2
SFI-801-3/4
SFI-801-1/2-LF
Description
Indicator Only
Indicator Only
Indicator Only
Indicator Only
Indicator Only
Indicator Only
Range GPM (LPM)
2 20 (7.6 75.5)
3 35 (11.4 132.5)
0.5 6.5 (1.9 24.6)
2 20 (7.6 75.5)
3 35 (11.4 132.5)
0.5 6.5 (1.9 24.6)
Model
A-711
A-712
A-713
SENSOR ONLY
BODY ONLY
Body and Sensors Attached:
To order A-711 attached to flow indicator body add suffix A711 to the body part
number.
Example: SFI-800-1/2-A711
number.
number.
Connection Female NPT
1/2
3/4
1/2
1/2
3/4
1/2
Description
Pulsed Output
1 to 10 VDC
Two Open Collectors

F
o
w

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,
P
a
d
d
e
w
h
e
e
F
L
O
W
Sight Flow Indicator/Transmitter
Output for Flow Rate and Totalization
Series
SFI-100T
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Body: Brass; Window: Tempered glass; Rotor: Red UV
stabilized PBT; Rotor pin: 316 SS; Thrust washers: 300 series SS; Gasket: Buna N.
Viscosity Max: 200 SSU.
Weight: SFI only: 1.5 lb (0.7 kg); with A 711T: 1.8 lb (0.8 kg).
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Output Signal: White lead: 5 VDC. Green lead: 8 to 28 VDC equal to supply
voltage. Pulsed output with frequency rate proportional to flow rate.
Frequency Output Range: 0 to 100 Hz.
Electrical Connections: Black lead: Ground; White lead: 5 VDC out pulse; Green
lead: 8 to 28 VDC out pulse; Red lead: 8 to 28 VDC supply.
The SFI-100T is a low cost and durable flow transmitter that combines our popular
100 Series Sight Flow indicator with our A-711T output sensor. The SFI-100T sight flow
indicator is constructed of a robust, solid brass body and a tempered glass window. A bright
red impeller is featured for great visual indication of flow through the window. The front
window can be easily unscrewed to clean out the sight flow indicator. Ideal for outdoor
applications, the flow transmitter is weatherproof and unaffected by UV light.
The A-711T output sensor has a VDC output with pulsing for flow totalization and a
proportional frequency change for flow rate. For added versatility there are two output
choices of 5 VDC or a VDC equal to the input power supplied. The output is compatible with
digital rate meters/totalizers and other electronic systems. Great for use in monitoring
water flow especially in chillers.
2
[50.80]
4
[101.60]
3/4 NPT
2 PLCS
1-3/8
[34.93]
3
[76.20]
Model
SFI-100T-1/2-A711T
SFI-100T-3/4-A711T
A-711T
Description
Brass Indicator
with A 711T Sensor
Brass Indicator
with A 711T Sensor
Output Sensor Package
Range GPM
(LPM)
2 20
(7.6 75.5)
3 35
(11.4 132.5)
Connection
Female NPT
1/2
3/4
Electronic Totalizing Meter
Batch or Cumulative Totals, Easy-to-Read LCD Display, 5% Accuracy
Measure batch and cumulative totals in liquid transfer systems with the Series TTM
Electronic Totalizing Meter. The meter is designed for any pump, pressure, or gravity feed
system with a 3 to 30 GPM (10 to 100 LPM) flow range. View batch and cumulative totals
on the large 4-digit LCD display. Batch totals can be reset to measure flow during a single
use. The cumulative total will automatically reset to zero when a maximum reading of 9999
is obtained. Models designed for use in water applications are constructed of nylon and
rated to 150 psig (10.3 bar). Aluminum models are calibrated for fuels and rated to 300 psig
(20.7 bar).
1 NPT
2-1/2
[63.50]
2-9/64
[54.37]
4-1/8
[104.7]
*Calibrated for use with water
Calibrated for use with gasoline, diesel fuel and kerosene
Series
TTM
SPECIFICATIONS
Flow Range: 3 to 30 GPM (10 to 100
LPM).
Wetted Materials: Bearings: Ceramic;
Shaft: Tungsten carbide; Rotor: Nylon
6 6; Rings: 316 SS; Body: TTM10, 11:
Nylon 6 6, TTM20, 21: Aluminum;
Other: TTM20, 21: Ceramic magnet.
Accuracy: 5%.
Batch Total Maximum: 9999.
Cumulative Total Maximum: 9999.
to 54C).
Pressure Limits: Nylon models: 150
psig (10 bar); Aluminum models: 300
psig (20 bar).
Pressure Drop: 2 psi (0.14 bar) @ 30
GPM (100 LPM).
Maximum Particulate Size: 350
microns.
Display: 4 digit LCD, 5/8 H.
Auto Shut-off: After 1 minute.
Connections: 1 female NPT.
Power: Two AAA alkaline batteries
(included).
Battery Life: Approx. 9000 hours.
Weight: Nylon models: 0.4 lb
(190 g); Aluminum models: 0.7 lb
(340 g).
Model
TTM10
TTM11
TTM20
TTM21
Application
Water*
Water*
Fuels
Fuels
Body Material
Nylon
Nylon
Aluminum
Aluminum
Units
Gallons
Liters
Gallons
Liters

220
F
o
w

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,
P
a
d
d
e
w
h
e
e
F
L
O
W
Paddlewheel Flow Sensor
Non-Magnetic Sensing, Insertion Style for 1-1/2 to 40 Pipe
Series
PFT
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Water based fluids.
Range: 1.2 to 25 ft/s (0.37 to 7.62 m/s).
Wetted Materials: Body and fitting: Brass or 316 SS; fitting o ring: FKM standard,
silicone or Buna N optional; impeller: 316 SS; shaft: Tungsten carbide standard or
316 SS optional; bearing: PTFE standard, carbon graphite optional.
Linearity: 1.0% of full range.
Repeatability: 0.5% of full range.
Pressure Limits: 400 psig (27.6 bar) @ 100F (37.8C), 325 psig (22.4 bar) @
212F (100C).
Process Connection: 1 1/2 NPT male standard, 2 NPT male optional.
Output: NPN open collector with square wave output, rated 60V @ 50 mA
maximum.
Frequency: 3.2 to 200 Hz;
Pulse width: 2.5 msec 25%.
Power Requirement: 10 to 35 VDC.
Power Consumption: 40 mA (max).
Electrical Connection: 22 AWG shielded UL type PTLC rated 105C, 20 (6.1 m)
long with cable gland. Can be extended up to 2000 (609 m) with similar cable.
Optional UL listed burial rated cable.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 6P (IP67).
Housing Materials: Brass or 316 SS.
Weight: 3 lb.
The Series PFT is a paddlewheel flow sensor used to monitor liquid flow rates in pipes
from 1-1/2 to 40 with just one size adjustable sensor. A square wave output signal is
generated with frequency proportional to flow velocity. Multiple wetted material choices
offer application versatility. The PFT is ideal for monitoring water flow rates in irrigation
systems and building automation cooling systems.
The PFT uses inductive sensing to sense the blades of the impeller as they rotate. Sensor
technology does not use magnets allowing low flow rate monitoring and no concerns with
magnetic material in the flow. Paddlewheel, shaft and bearings are easily field replaceable.
FEATURES
Bearings and shaft offer excellent wear protection even in applications with
particulate for long life
Weatherproof and submersible rated for irrigation applications
APPLICATIONS
Irrigation, ground water remediation, cooling systems, pump protection, leak
detection, filtration systems
Model
PFT-IDN-B111-S
PFT-IDN-S111-S
Consult factory for longer cable lengths, burial rated cable, 2 NPT connection, or
other wetted materials.
1/2 NPT
2-1/2
[63.50]
3-13/16
[96.84]
1-1/2 NPT
2-25/64
[60.72]
7-29/32
[200.94]
2 HEX
[50.80]
NEW PRODUCT!
Description
Brass body, FKM o ring, 316 SS impeller, tungsten
carbide shaft, PTFE bearing, 1 1/2 NPT male
connection, 20 of cable
316 SS body, FKM o ring, 316 SS impeller, tungsten
carbide shaft, PTFE bearing, 1 1/2 NPT male
connection, 20 of cable

F
o
w

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,
T
u
r
b
n
e
F
L
O
W
Gas Turbine Flow Meter
PPS Body, 0 to 5 VDC Output
Series
TFP-GV
Series TFP-GV Gas Turbine Flow Meters are suitable for a wide variety of industrial,
commercial, and laboratory flow applications. These meters utilize a turbine wheel and
electro-optical detection to convert flow rates into a linear 0 to 5 VDC output signal for
recording and data logging. Couple this unit with a Series FIV Flow Totalizer for a remote
flow monitoring display. A power adapter or mating cable assembly is required for
operation.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean dry gases compatible
Wetted Materials: PPS, acetal,
sapphire, glass, epoxy, and
fluoroelastomer.
Linearity: 3% of full scale.
(5 to 55C); Storage: 32 to 158F (0 to
70C); Sensitivity: 0.2% of full scale
per C.
Process Connection: Compression
fitting, see model table.
Power Requirements: 11.5 to 15
VDC.
Power Consumption: 35 mA @ 12
VDC.
Output Signal: 0 to 5 VDC: Minimum
2.5 k load.
Electrical Connections: Four pin
power and signal connector. A power
adapter or mating cable required for
operation. See Accessories Table.
Enclosure Rating: IP10 (NEMA 1).
Weight: 0.16 lb (75 g).
Gas Turbine Flow Meter
PPS Body, 0 to 5 VDC Output, LCD Indication
Series
TFP-GI
Series TFP-GI Gas Turbine Flow Meters are suitable for a wide variety of industrial,
recording and data logging. A 3-1/2 digit LCD informs the user of the actual flow rate. A
power adapter or mating cable assembly is required for operation.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean dry gases compatible with wetted materials.
Wetted Materials: PPS, acetal, sapphire, glass, epoxy, and fluoroelastomer.
Temperature Limits: 41 to 131F (5 to 55C); Storage: 32 to 158F (0 to 70C);
Sensitivity: 0.2% of full scale per C.
Process Connection: Compression fitting, see model table.
Power Consumption: 35 mA @ 12 VDC.
Output Signal: 0 to 5 VDC: Minimum 2.5 k load.
Electrical Connections: Four pin power and signal connector. A power adapter or
mating cable required for operation. See Accessories Table.
Display: LCD, 0.39 (10 mm) digits (only in LPM).
Weight: 0.23 lb (101 g).
ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES
19/64
[7.62]
2-1/32
[51.69]
2x.136 THRU
CABLE
CONNECTION
ACETAL
FITTINGS
33/64
[13.21]
BLACK
TRIM LCD
DISPLAY
TRIMPOT
ADJUSTMENT
OPENING
1/4
[6.35]
A
3-1/16
[77.72]
3/5/16
[84.07]
1-1/4
[31.75]
3-3/64
[77.47]
29/32
[22.86]
2-5/32
[54.61]
4-61/64
[125.73]
A
ACETAL
FITTINGS
29/32
[22.99]
1/2
[12.70]
1-41/64
[41.53]
A
ACETAL
FITTINGS
TRIMPOT
ADJUSTMENT
OPENING
1-35/64
[39.37]
19/64
[7.62]
2X 136 THRU
2-1/32
[51.69]
33/64
[13.21]
1/4
[6.35]
2-21/64
[59.31]
15/16
[23.74]
2x.136 THRU
High Flow Configuration
Model
TFP-GV03
TFP-GV04
TFP-GV05
TFP-GV06
TFP-GV07
TFP-GV08
TFP-GV09
TFP-GV10*
TFP-GV11*
TFP-GV12*
TFP-GV13*
Range
.042 to .21 SCFH (.02 to .1 LPM)
.085 to .42 SCFH (.04 to .2 LPM)
.21 to 1.1 SCFH (.1 to .5 LPM)
.42 to 2.1 SCFH (.2 to 1 LPM)
.85 to 4.2 SCFH (.4 to 2 LPM)
2.1 to 11 SCFH (1 to 5 LPM)
4.2 to 21 SCFH (2 to 10 LPM)
8.5 to 42 SCFH (4 to 20 LPM)
21 to 110 SCFH (10 to 50 LPM)
42 to 210 SCFH (20 to 100 LPM)
85 to 420 SCFH (40 to 200 LPM)
Connection
1/8 OD
1/8 OD
1/8 OD
1/8 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
3/8 OD
3/8 OD
1/2 OD
1/2 OD
Model
A-454
A-455
A-456
Model
A-454
A-455
A-456
Model
TFP-GI03
TFP-GI04
TFP-GI05
TFP-GI06
TFP-GI07
TFP-GI08
Range
.042 to .21 SCFH (.02 to .1 LPM)
.085 to .42 SCFH (.04 to .2 LPM)
.21 to 1.1 SCFH (.1 to .5 LPM)
.42 to 2.1 SCFH (.2 to 1 LPM)
.85 to 4.2 SCFH (.4 to 2 LPM)
2.1 to 11 SCFH (1 to 5 LPM)
Connection
1/8 OD
1/8 OD
1/8 OD
1/8 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
* These modes come in high flow configuration
A (in)
3 27/64
3 27/64
3 27/64
3 27/64
3 13/16
3 13/16
3 13/16
7 7/64
7 7/64
7 1/2
7 1/2
Description
115 VAC Power Adapter and Signal Cable
36 Mating Cable with Spliced Leads
Description
A (in)
3 27/64
3 27/64
3 27/64
3 27/64
3 13/16
3 13/16

222
F
o
w

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,
T
u
r
b
n
e
F
L
O
W
Liquid Turbine Flow Meter
PPS Body, 0 to 5 VDC and Pulse Outputs
Series
TFP-LP
Series TFP-LP Liquid Turbine Flow Meters are suitable for a wide variety of
industrial, commercial, and laboratory flow applications. These meters utilize a turbine
wheel and electro-optical detection to convert flow rates into a linear 0 to 5 VDC output
signal for recording and data logging. Couple this unit with a Series TM2 Flow Totalizer
for a remote flow monitoring display. A power adapter or mating cable assembly is required
for operation.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean liquids compatible with wetted materials.
Output Signal: 0 to 5 VDC: Minimum 2.5 k load; Pulse: 7.5 VDC peak buffered
square wave.
Weight: 0.19 lb (85 g).
PPS Body, 0 to 5 VDC Output, LCD Indication
Series
TFP-LI
Series TFP-LI Liquid Turbine Flow Meters are suitable for a wide variety of industrial,
recording and data logging. A 3-1/2 digit LCD informs the user of the actual flow rate. A
power adapter or mating cable assembly is required for operation.
SPECIFICATIONS
Weight: 0.27 lb (121 g).
ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES
CABLE
CONNECTION
3-1/16
[77.72]
A
TRIMPOT
ADJUSTMENT
OPENING
BLACK TRIM
LCD DISPLAY
1/4
[6.35]
33/64
[13.21]
ACETAL
FITTINGS
2X.136 THRU
2-1/32
[51.69]
19/64
[7.62]
CABLE CONNECTION
2X9/64 THRU
2-21/64
[59.31]
15/16
[23.74]
33/64
[13.21]
1/4
[6.35]
1-35/64
[39.37]
19/64
[7.62]
2-1/32
[51.69]
A
ACETAL
FITTINGS
TRIMPOT
ADJUSTMENT
OPENING
Model
A-454
A-455
A-456
Model
TFP-LI03
TFP-LI04
TFP-LI05
TFP-LI06
TFP-LI07
TFP-LI08
TFP-LI09
Range
.21 to 1.6 GPH (.0013 to .1 LPM)
.32 to 3.2 GPH (.02 to .2 LPM)
.79 to 7.9 GPH (.05 to .5 LPM)
1.6 to 16 GPH (0.1 to 1 LPM)
3.2 to 32 GPH (.2 to 2 LPM)
7.9 to 79 GPH (.5 to 5 LPM)
16 to 160 GPH (1 to 10 LPM)
Connection
1/8 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
3/8 OD
3/8 OD
Model
TFP-LP03
TFP-LP04
TFP-LP05
TFP-LP06
TFP-LP07
TFP-LP08
TFP-LP09
Range
.21 to 1.6 GPH (.0013 to .1 LPM)
.32 to 3.2 GPH (.02 to .2 LPM)
.79 to 7.9 GPH (.05 to .5 LPM)
1.6 to 16 GPH (0.1 to 1 LPM)
3.2 to 32 GPH (.2 to 2 LPM)
7.9 to 79 GPH (.5 to 5 LPM)
16 to 160 GPH (1 to 10 LPM)
Connection
1/8 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
3/8 OD
3/8 OD
Model
A-454
A-455
A-456
Description
A (in)
3 27/64
3 13/16
3 13/16
3 13/16
3 13/16
4 1/8
4 1/8
Description
A (in)
3 9/16
3 41/64
3 41/64
3 41/64
3 41/64
3 27/32
3 27/32

F
o
w

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,
T
u
r
b
n
e
F
L
O
W
Model
A-454
A-455
A-456
Model
TFM-LI03
TFM-LI04
TFM-LI05
TFM-LI06
TFM-LI07
TFM-LI08
TFM-LI09
Range
.21 to 1.6 GPH (.0013 to .1 LPM)
.32 to 3.2 GPH (.02 to .2 LPM)
.79 to 7.9 GPH (.05 to .5 LPM)
1.6 to 16 GPH (0.1 to 1 LPM)
3.2 to 32 GPH (.2 to 2 LPM)
7.9 to 79 GPH (.5 to 5 LPM)
16 to 160 GPH (1 to 10 LPM)
Connection
1/8 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
3/8 OD
3/8 OD
316SS Body, 0 to 5 VDC and Pulse Outputs
Series
TFM-LP
Series TFM-LP Liquid Turbine Flow Meters are suitable for a wide variety of
signal for recording and data logging. Couple this unit with a Series TM2 Flow Totalizer
for a remote flow monitoring display. A power adapter or mating cable assembly is required
for operation.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316 SS, acetal, sapphire, glass, epoxy, and fluoroelastomer.
Output Signal: 0 to 5 VDC: Minimum 2.5 k load; Pulse: 7.5 VDC peak buffered
square wave.
Weight: 0.86 lb (390 g).
316SS Body, 0 to 5 VDC Output, LCD Indication
Series
TFM-LI
Series TFM-LI Liquid Turbine Flow Meters are suitable for a wide variety of
signal for recording and data logging. A 3-1/2 digit LCD informs the user of the actual flow
rate. A power adapter or mating cable assembly is required for operation.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316 SS, acetal, sapphire, glass, epoxy, and fluoroelastomer.
Weight: 0.80 lb (380 g).
ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES
BLACK
TRIM LCD
DISPLAY
STAINLESS
STEEL
FITTINGS
TRIMPOT ADJUSTMENT
OPENING
2-63/64
[75.69]
1-19/32
[40.64]
2-21/64
[59.28]
61/64
[24.10]
2X 17/32
[13.46]
29/64
[11.43]
19/64
[7.59] 2-1/32
[51.69]
19/32
[15.17]
1-47/64
[44.09]
2X 1 [25.40]
2X.125 THRU
.188 THRU
A
CABLE
CONNECTION
STAINLESS
STEEL
FITTINGS
A
1-1/32
[26.04]
2X1/8 THRU
.3/16 1/8
1-15/32
[37.21]
TRIMPOT
ADJUSTMENT
OPENING
2X 17/32
[13.34]
2-1/32
[51.69]
51/64
[20.32]
29/64
[11.43]
Model
TFM-LP03
TFM-LP04
TFM-LP05
TFM-LP06
TFM-LP07
TFM-LP08
TFM-LP09
Range
.21 to 1.6 GPH (.0013 to .1 LPM)
.32 to 3.2 GPH (.02 to .2 LPM)
.79 to 7.9 GPH (.05 to .5 LPM)
1.6 to 16 GPH (0.1 to 1 LPM)
3.2 to 32 GPH (.2 to 2 LPM)
7.9 to 79 GPH (.5 to 5 LPM)
16 to 160 GPH (1 to 10 LPM)
Connection
1/8 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
3/8 OD
3/8 OD
Model
A-454
A-455
A-456
Description
A (in)
3 9/16
3 41/64
3 41/64
3 41/64
3 41/64
3 27/32
3 27/32
Description
A (in)
3 27/64
3 53/64
3 53/64
3 53/64
3 53/64
4 1/8
4 1/8

224
F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
T
o
t
a
z
n
g
F
L
O
W
Series
WM
Multi-Jet Water Meter
Economical, Bronze Body, Dry Dial
The Series WM Multi-Jet Water Meters are ideal for commercial
and industrial applications. The multi-jet design allows simplicity and
accuracy with wide flow ranges, even in low flow applications. The
magnetically driven, hermetically sealed register will not leak or fog
and is completely separated from the water. These water meters are
designed for long service life and maintenance-free operation.
FEATURES
Magnetic drive - water is sealed from entering register
Dry dial won't discolor or fade - hermetically sealed from the
elements
Integral strainer that protects meters from particulate damage
Pointer-roller indicator
Frost resistant body
Includes two mounting adapters (couplings)
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Water.
Flow Range: See model chart.
Wetted Materials: Body: Brass, nylon, acetal; Couplings:
Brass; Measuring chamber: Fluorocarbon (FKM), polyethylene,
high impact polystyrene, ABS plastic.
Accuracy: Transitional flow: 5%; Nominal flow: 2% (see
instruction manual).
Pressure Drop: See instruction manual.
Totalizing Display Maximum: 9,999,999 counts.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal.
Weight: See dimension chart.
TAMPER PROOF
SEAL
FILTER ON
INLET
SPUD
L W
H
Spud
NPSM [BSPP]
3/4 [3/4]
1 [1]
1 [1]
1 1/4 [1 1/4]
1 1/2 [1 1/2]
2 [2]
2 1/2 [2 1/2]
Length (L)
in [mm]
6 1/2 [165]
7 11/16 [195]
7 11/16 [195]
10 1/4 [260]
10 1/4 [260]
11 13/16 [300]
11 13/16 [300]
Width (W)
in [mm]
3 15/16 [99]
3 15/16 [99]
3 15/16 [99]
4 1/16 [103]
4 1/8 [104]
4 7/8 [124]
4 15/16 [125]
Height (H)
in [mm]
4 1/8 [104]
4 3/16 [106]
4 3/16 [106]
4 1/2 [114]
4 5/8 [117]
5 13/16 [147]
6 3/4 [172]
Weight
lb [kg]
3.09 [1.4]
3.53 [1.6]
3.53 [1.6]
5.73 [2.6]
6.17 [2.8]
11.24 [5.1]
18.74 [8.5]
Size (S)
in [mm]
5/8 [15]
5/8 x 3/4 [15 x 20]
3/4 [20]
1 [25]
1 1/4 [32]
1 1/2 [40]
2 [50]
Size
5/8
5/8 x 3/4
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
Size
15 mm
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
Coupling Size
1/2 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
1 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
2 NPT
Coupling Size
1/2 BSPT
3/4 BSPT
1 BSPT
1-1/4 BSPT
1-1/2 BSPT
2 BSPT
Transitional Flow (GPM)
0.125
0.125
0.25
0.375
1.0
1.25
Transitional Flow (L/h)
30
50
70
120
200
300
Nominal Flow (GPM)
0.5-13
1-20
1-22
1.25-30
3-88
5-132
Nominal Flow (m
3
/h)
0.12-3.0
0.2-5.0
0.28-5
0.48-12
0.8-20
1.2-30
Model
WM-A-C-01
WM-A-C-02
WM-A-C-03
WM-A-C-04
WM-A-C-06
WM-A-C-07
Model
WM-B-C-08
WM-B-C-10
WM-B-C-11
WM-B-C-12
WM-B-C-13
WM-B-C-14
Note: Transition flow accuracy (5%) GPM (L/h). Nominal flow accuracy (2%) GPM (M3/h)
Max Flow (GPM)
13
20
22
30
88
132
Max Flow (m
3
/h)
3
5
7
12
20
30

F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
T
o
t
a
z
n
g
F
L
O
W
Series
WMT
Multi-Jet Water Meter/Pulsed Output
Economical, Bronze Body, Dry Dial
The Series WMT Multi-Jet Water Meters are ideal for commercial and industrial
applications. The multi-jet design allows simplicity and accuracy with wide flow ranges,
even in low flow applications. The meter is designed for long service life and relatively
maintenance-free operation, even under adverse conditions. The magnetically driven,
hermetically sealed register will not leak or fog and is completely separated from the water.
The reed switch is activated by a magnet on the dial which is directly proportional to the
flow rate. The output is perfect for remote monitoring of flow rate or flow totalization and
can interface with PLCs, counters, data loggers, and SCADA systems.
FEATURES
Magnetic drive water is sealed from entering register
Dry dial won't discolor or fade hermetically sealed from the elements
Integral strainer that protects meters from particulate damage
Pointer roller indicator
Frost resistant body
Pulsed output
Includes two mounting adapters (couplings)
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Water.
Flow Range: See model chart.
Wetted Materials: Body: Brass, nylon, acetal; Couplings: Brass; Measuring
chamber: Fluorocarbon (FKM), polyethylene, high impact polystyrene, ABS
plastic.
Accuracy: Transitional flow: 5%; Nominal flow: 2% (see instruction manual).
Pressure Drop: See instruction manual.
Totalizing Display Maximum: 9,999,999 counts.
Output Signal: Pulse output with frequency proportional to flow rate. Pulse
options: 0.1 gal, 1 gal, 10 gal, 100 gal per pulse (1L, 10L, 100L per pulse).
Electrical Rating: 0.01A @ 24VAC/DC.
Electrical Connections: Lead wires, 4.5 feet (1.5 meters) long.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal.
Weight: See dimension chart.
Note: Transition flow accuracy (5%) GPM (L/h). Nominal flow accuracy (2%) GPM (M3/h).
TAMPER PROOF
SEAL
FILTER ON
INLET
S
L W
H
Spud
NPSM [BSPP]
3/4 [3/4]
1 [1]
1 [1]
1 1/4 [1 1/4]
1 1/2 [1 1/2]
2 [2]
2 1/2 [2 1/2]
Length (L)
in [mm]
6 1/2 [165]
7 11/16 [195]
7 11/16 [195]
10 1/4 [260]
10 1/4 [260]
11 13/16 [300]
11 13/16 [300]
Width (W)
in [mm]
3 15/16 [99]
3 15/16 [99]
3 15/16 [99]
4 1/16 [103]
4 1/8 [104]
4 7/8 [124]
4 15/16 [125]
Height (H)
in [mm]
4 1/8 [104]
4 3/16 [106]
4 3/16 [106]
4 1/2 [114]
4 5/8 [117]
5 13/16 [147]
6 3/4 [172]
Weight
lb [kg]
3.09 [1.4]
3.53 [1.6]
3.53 [1.6]
5.73 [2.6]
6.17 [2.8]
11.24 [5.1]
18.74 [8.5]
Size (S)
in [mm]
5/8 [15]
5/8 x 3/4 [15 x 20]
3/4 [20]
1 [25]
1 1/4 [32]
1 1/2 [40]
2 [50]
Max Flow (GPM)
13
20
22
30
13
20
22
30
88
132
30
132
Model
WMT-A-C-01
WMT-A-C-02
WMT-A-C-03
WMT-A-C-04
WMT-A-C-01-1
WMT-A-C-02-1
WMT-A-C-03-1
WMT-A-C-04-1
WMT-A-C-06-10
WMT-A-C-07-10
WMT-A-C-04-100
WMT-A-C-07-100
Size
5/8
5/8 x 3/4
3/4
1
5/8
5/8 x 3/4
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
1
2
Coupling Size
1/2 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
1 NPT
1/2 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
1 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
2 NPT
1 NPT
2 NPT
Transitional Flow (GPM)
0.125
0.125
0.25
0.375
0.125
0.125
0.25
0.375
1.0
1.25
0.375
1.25
Nominal Flow (GPM)
0.5 13
1 20
1 22
1.25 30
0.5 13
1 20
1 22
1.25 30
3 88
5 132
1.25 30
5 132
Max Flow (m
3
/h)
3
5
7
12
3
12
30
12
30
Model
WMT-B-C-08-1
WMT-B-C-10-1
WMT-B-C-11-1
WMT-B-C-12-1
WMT-B-C-08-10
WMT-B-C-12-10
WMT-B-C-14-10
WMT-B-C-12-100
WMT-B-C-14-100
Size
15 mm
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
15 mm
32 mm
50 mm
32 mm
50 mm
Coupling Size
1/2 BSPT
3/4 BSPT
1 BSPT
1 1/4 BSPT
1/2 BSPT
1 1/4 BSPT
2 BSPT
1 1/4 BSPT
2 BSPT
Transitional Flow (L/h)
30
50
70
120
30
120
300
120
300
Nominal Flow (m
3
/h)
0.12 3.0
0.2 5.0
0.28 5
0.48 12
0.12 3.0
0.48 12
1.2 30
0.48 12
1.2 30
Gallons per Pulse
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
1
1
1
1
10
10
100
100
Liters per Pulse
1
1
1
1
10
10
10
100
100

226
F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
T
o
t
a
z
n
g
F
L
O
W
Flow Totalizer
Pulse Input, 8-digit LCD Display
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: 7.5 VDC max. pulse.
Accuracy: 0.2%.
Input Impedance: 27 k at 3 VDC.
Totalizer Type: Up count.
Rate Indication Type: Frequency.
Count Input Speed: 10 kHz @ 50% duty cycle.
Totalizing Range: 0.0001 to 100.0000 (five position decimal point).
Rate Indication Range: 0.001 to 9999 (five position decimal point).
Update Time: 0.7 seconds.
Display: 8 digit LCD, 7/16" H.
Housing Material: ABS X 17.
Power: One 3V lithium battery (included).
Average Battery Life: Approximately 5 years.
Weight: 1 Ib (0.5 kg).
Model
TM2
T R RST
1-1/2
[38.89]
1-1/4
[28.58]
1-9/16
[40.09]
2-61/64
[75.18]
Recommended Panel Cutout: 2 43/64 [67.87] x 1 19/64 [32.94]
Series
GFT
Flow Totalizer
Seven Digit Display, Easy Installation
Series GFT Flow Totalizer is designed to be used with mass flowmeters and mass flow
controllers. The totalizer accepts analog output flow signals of either 0 to 5 VDC or 5 to 10
VDC. Series GFT integrates and accumulates up to 7 digits of direct engineering units for
a given gas and flow rate (standard liters, standard cubic centimeters, etc.). Quickly connect
the GFT-10 to Series GFC and GFM mass flow controllers and meters via the modular jack
(replacing the LCD display) or use the GFT-10C to connect in parallel with the display.
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Analog Range: 0 to 5 or 5 to 10 VDC.
Power Consumption: 10 mA @ 12 VDC, less than 0.125 Watts.
Accuracy: 0.5% FS.
Temperature Stability: 100 ppm/C in the range of 5 to 50C.
Reset: Momentary tact switch.
Display: 7 digit, 5/16 (8mm) H.
Power Supply: Internal lithium battery.
2.82
[72]
1.25
[31.8]
1.25
[32]
Monitor flow rate or total flow with Model TM2 Flow Totalizer. Unit features a four
digit flow rate display and an eight digit totalizing display with a programmable, five
position decimal point. Easily toggle between rate and total with front-panel push-button.
Use scaling factor to define flow rate in engineering units such as ml/min, l/min, or gal/hr.
Model TM2
ACCESSORY
TM25, Replacement 3V lithium battery
ACCESSORIES
Model GFT-05C, Cable for 0 to 5 VDC models
Model GFT-10C, Cable for 5 to 10 VDC models
Model GFT-05, accepts 0 to 5 VDC input
Model GFT-10, accepts 0 to 10 VDC input

F
o
w

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,
U
t
r
a
s
o
n
c
F
L
O
W
Model
UXF3-A0
UXF3-B0
UXF3-A1
UXF3-B1
Power
Supply
100 240 VAC 50/60Hz
20 30 VDC
100 240 VAC 50/60Hz
20 30 VDC
Series
UXF3
Ultrasonic Flowmeter Converter
Excellent Performance and Easy Operation
The Series UXF3 Ultrasonic Flowmeter Converters are paired with
Series SX1 or SX2 sensors in order to utilize the transit-time measure method.
Thanks to microprocessor-based electronics, the flowmeter can easily be
configured from the front keypad to specific applications. The flowmeter is
suitable for liquid flow measurements for pipes from 1/2 inch to 19.5 feet
diameter. The accuracy of this flowmeter falls within 1% of the flow rate. The
UXF3 also provides excellent resistance against aerated flow such as sludge,
raw sewage, and bubble contained flow. The multilingual display supports a
variety of language choices. The combination of the easy to read LCD screen
and front panel buttons along with the variety of language selections makes this
flowmeter very user friendly. This flowmeter incorporates the latest electronics
and high-speed digital signal processing technologies (32 bit MPU), realizing
high performance and easy operation. See bulletin F-107-UXF3 for more details.
FEATURES
High accuracy
Excellent resistance against aerated flow
Quick response with high speed microprocessor
Multilingual display (English, Japanese, German, French, and Spanish)
Large type graphic LCD
Front keypad
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquid flow through which ultrasonic signal can be transmitted
(water, sea water, oil, and fluid of unknown velocity).
Inputs: Sensor cable radio frequency coaxial cable RG 58A/U2.
Range: 0 to 105 fps (0 to 32 m/s) (bi directional flow).
Display: LCD with backlight, 16 letters 2 lines.
Accuracy: 1.0% of rate.
Power Requirements: 100 to 240 VAC 10% 50/60 Hz, or 20 to 30
VDC.
Power Consumption: AC: 15 VA; DC: 6W.
Temperature Limits: Ambient 4 to 131F ( 20 to 55C).
Output: Analog: 4 to 20 mA DC current output; Digital: One mechanical
relay output, 240 VAC, 30 VDC, 1 A. Two transistor outputs available,
Open collector output: 30 VDC, 0.1A.
Serial Communications (option): RS485.
Material: Aluminum alloy.
Mounting: Wall or pipe mount.
5-19/32 [142.00]
2-53/64
[72.00]
2-61/64
[75.00]
3/32
[2.50]
9-11/64
[233.00]
CABLE GLAND
WITH 1/4
OPENING
CABLE GLAND
WITH 3/8
OPENING
2-23/32
[69.24]
EARTH TERMINAL
LED
7-7/8
[200.00]
6-11/16
[170.00]
LCD DISPLAY
25/64 [10.00]
Serial
Communications
N/A
N/A
RS485
RS485

228
F
o
w

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,
U
t
r
a
s
o
n
c
F
L
O
W
Series
SX1
Ultrasonic Flowmeter Detector
Series SX1 Ultrasonic Flowmeter Detectors are paired with Series UXF1 and UXF3
converters in order to utilize the transit-time measuring method. Two ultrasonic sensors are
mounted on the pipe exterior, and each transmits an ultrasonic pulse to the opposite sensor.
The difference in the transit times of the two waves is used to calculate the flow velocity.
Series SX1 Ultrasonic Flowmeter Detector:
Easy installation, no pipe work required
Simple maintenance, no moving parts
Free from pressure loss, choking, and leakage
Clamp on features allow for reduction of total ownership cost
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquid flow through which ultrasonic signal can be transmitted
(water, sea water, oil, and fluid of unknown velocity).
Turbidity: 10000 deg (mg/L) or less.
Type of Flow: Well developed turbulent or laminar flow in a full filled pipe.
Range: 0 to 105 fps (0 to 32 m/s) (bidirectional flow).
Flow Pipe Sizes: SX1 A: 1.97 to 15.75 in (50 to 400 mm); SX1 B: 1.97 to 47.24 in
(50 to 1200 mm); SX1 C: 7.87 to 236.2 in (200 to 6000 mm).
Accuracy:
Pipe Size: 0.51 in (13 mm) to under 1.99 in (50 mm)
0.03 m/s for flow rate: Under 2 m/s
0.75% to 1.5% of rate for flow rate: 2 m/s to 32 m/s;
Pipe Size: 11.8 in (300 mm) up to 19.69 ft (6000 mm)
0.5% to 1.0% of rate for flow rate 1 m/s to 32 m/s.
Response Time: 0.5s or less.
Temperature Limits: Ambient 176F (80C); Fluid temperature: 40 to 176F
( 40 to 80C) for SX1 A, SX1 B, SX1 C.
Enclosure Rating: IP67
Materials: SX1A: Plastic case; 304 stainless steel and plastic guide rail; SX1B and
SX1C: Plastic case; Silicone rubber couplers on all models.
Sensor Cable: Radio frequency coaxial cable (RG 58A/U), see accessories table
for specific lengths.
Mounting: Clamped on pipe wall.
Weight: SX1 A: 2.2 lb (1 kg); SX1 B: 0.88 lb (0.4 kg); SX1 C: 3.1 lb (1.4 kg).
Model
SX1-A
SX1-B
SX1-C
OPTIONS
Consult factory for other cable lengths.
FRAME END
PIPE
NAME PLATE
SENSOR
19-11/16
[500]
MOUNTING
SIZE 0 TO
9-27/32
[0-250]
2-27/32
[72]
CHAIN & SPRING
GND TERMINAL
1-37/64
[40]
3-5/32
[80]
2-3/8
[60]
SX1-A SMALL SIZE
2-27/32
[72]
DETECTOR
GND TERMINAL
WIRE ROPE

2-3/8
[60]
1-37/64
[40
4-3/32
[104]
3-21/32
[93]
DETECTOR
WIRE ROPE
2-7/16
[62]
SX1-B MEDIUM SIZE
SX1-C LARGE SIZE
ACCESSORIES
Model
SXC-1A
SXC-1B
A-186
A-187
A-188
SX1-A
SX1-B
Description
Detector, Small Sensor
Detector, Medium Sensor
Detector, Large Sensor
Description
16.4 ft (5 m) cable for SX1
32.8 ft (10 m) cable for SX1
Silicone based grease acoustic couplant, 3 oz tube
Silicone RTV acoustic couplant, 4 oz tube
Silicone free acoustic couplant, 4 oz tube

F
o
w

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,
U
t
r
a
s
o
n
c
F
L
O
W
Series
SX2
Portable Ultrasonic Flowmeter Detector
Compact and Lightweight
Series SX2 Ultrasonic Flowmeter Detectors are paired with Series UXF1 and UXF3
converters in order to utilize the transit-time method for measuring flow rates in pipes
from the outside. Two ultrasonic sensors are mounted on the pipe exterior, and each
transmits an ultrasonic pulse to the opposite sensor. The difference in the transit times of
the two waves is used to calculate the flow velocity. Paired with the UXF1 or UXF3 Series
converters, Series SX2 detectors provide ultrasonic flowmeter sensors for both small
diameter needs as well as high-temperature applications.
Series SX2 Ultrasonic Flowmeter Detectors:
Easy installation, no pipe work required
Simple maintenance, no moving parts
Free from pressure loss, choking, and leakage
Clamp on features allow for reduction of total ownership cost
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquid flow through which ultrasonic signal can be transmitted (water, sea
water, oil, and fluid of unknown velocity).
Type of Flow: Well developed turbulent or laminar flow in a full filled pipe.
Range: 0 to 105 fps (0 to 32 m/s) (bidirectional flow).
Flow Pipe Sizes: SX2 A: 0.51 to 3.94 in (13 to 100 mm), SX2 B: 1.97 to 15.75 in
(50 to 400 mm).
Accuracy:
Pipe Size:
0.51 in (13 mm) to under 1.99 in (50 mm)
Pipe Size: 11.8 in (300 mm) up to 19.69 ft (6000 mm)
0.5% to 1.0% of rate for flow rate: 1 m/s to 32 m/s.
Response Time: 0.5s or less.
Temperature Limits: Ambient 176F (80C); Fluid temperature: 40 to 212F ( 40
to 100C) for SX2 A, 40 to 392F ( 40 to 200C) for SX2 B.
Materials: SX2 A: Plastic case, aluminum and plastic guide rail, silicone rubber
coupler; SX2 B: 304SS case, aluminum and 304SS guide rail, silicone grease
coupler.
Sensor Cable: Radio frequency coaxial cable (RG 58A/U), 16.4 ft (5 m).
Mounting: Clamped on pipe wall.
Weight: SX2 A: 1.32 lb (0.6 kg); SX2 B: 3.53 lb (1.6 kg).
Description
Detector, Small Diameter Sensor
Detector, High Temperature Sensor
Model
SX2-A
SX2-B
SCALE
SCALE [mm]
SPACING:
0~13
[0~330]
CURSOR
1-1/32
[26]
2-3/64
[52]
SX2-B HIGH TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1-5/16
[33]
CONNECTOR
SADDLE
20-7/8
[530]
LOCK NUT
ELEMENT HOLDER
1-5/16
[33]
8-5/64 MAX
[205 MAX]
3-35/64 MAX
[90 MAX]
1-19/64
[33]
SCALE SCALE [mm]
DISTANCE
BETWEEN TWO
ELEMENTS
CURSOR
2-1/16
[52.5]
SX2-A SMALL DIAMETER SENSOR
CONNECTOR
LOCK NUT
ELEMENT
HOLDER
SADDLE
12-19/32
[320]
1-7/16
[36] 3-35/64 MAX
[90 MAX]
ACCESSORIES
Model
A-186
A-187
A-188
SX2-B
SX2-A
Description
Cable Length ft (m)
16.4 (5)
16.4 (5)

230
F
o
w

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,
U
t
r
a
s
o
n
c
F
L
O
W
Model
PUX2
PUX2-PR
Series
PUX2
Portable Ultrasonic Flowmeter Converter
Data Logging and BTU Capability
The Series PUX2 Portable Ultrasonic Flowmeter Converters are paired
with Series PSX2 sensors in order to utilize the transit-time difference for
measuring flow rates in pipes from the outside. It is a compact and lightweight
instrument incorporating the latest electronics and digital signal processing
technologies, realizing high performance and easy operation. This device is
designed for high accuracy and high-speed response. This portable unit is
capable of 12 hours of continuous operation with its built-in battery, which
requires only 3 hours to recharge. The rugged NEMA 3X enclosure allows the
PUX2 to be exposed to rain, while the efficient layout of the function keys aid
the user with easy page selection and setting changes. The built in USB port
allows for easy connection to a personal computer. See bulletin F-9-PUX2 for
more details.
FEATURES
SD memory card slot for recording data
USB port for easy PC connection
High accuracy
Large type color graphic LCD
Flow rate, flow velocity, and flow totalization functions
Thermal flow rate (BTU) function with two temperature inputs perfect for
energy audits
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Homogenous liquids (water, sea water, oil, and fluid of
unknown velocity) capable of ultrasonic wave propagation.
Inputs: BNC connector, coaxial cable from flow sensor. Two 4 20 mA
DC, or one 4 20 mA DC and one 1 to 5 V DC.
Range: 1 to 105 fps (0.3 to 32 m/s).
Display: LCD 240 x 320 dot (with back light).
Accuracy: 1.0 % of rate.
Power Requirements: Built in special type lithium battery (continuous
operation time: 12 hours without printer and back light off) (recharging
time: 3 hours, power adapter used).
Power Consumption: 3W.
Power Adapter: Special type power adapter 90 to 264 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
Power Failure Backup: Memory backup with lithium battery (effective
term, 10 years).
Temperature Limits: Ambient 131F (55C) without printer; 113F
(45C) with printer.
Output: 4 to 20 mA DC, 1 point (load resistance, 0 to 600 ).
Serial Communications: RS 485, 1 point.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3X (IP64) (without printer).
Material: Plastic case.
Weight: 2.2 lb (1 kg) without printer; 2.65 lb (1.2 kg) with printer.
4-23/32
[120.00]
8-17/64
[210.00]
PUX2 WITHOUT PRINTER
REMOVABLE COVER
2-9/16
[65.00]
4X M4X5
DOWNSTREAM
SENSOR
UPSTREAM
SENSOR
ANALOG
INPUT/OUTPUT
DC POWER
INPUT
12-19/32
[320.00]
PUX2-PR WITH PRINTER
VIEW UNDER REMOVABLE COVER
SD SLOT USB PORT LCD
CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT
Unit includes 5 m coaxial cable for use with PSX2 A sensor.
Portable Ultrasonic
Flowmeter Converter
Converter
Converter with Printer

F
o
w

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,
U
t
r
a
s
o
n
c
F
L
O
W
Series
PSX2
Portable Ultrasonic Flowmeter Detector
Compact and Lightweight
Series PSX2 Portable Ultrasonic Flowmeter Detectors are paired with Series PUX
and PUX2 converters in order to utilize the transit-time difference for measuring flow rates
in pipes from the outside. It is a compact and lightweight instrument incorporating the latest
electronics and digital signal processing technologies, realizing high performance and easy
operation. Series PSX2 Detectors are non-intrusive clamp-on sensors and are easy to install,
require simple maintenance, and are free from pressure-loss, choking, corrosion, and
leaking.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Homogenous liquids (water,
sea water, oil, and fluid of unknown
velocity) capable of ultrasonic wave
propagation; Turbidity: 10000 deg.
(mg/L) or less; State of flow: Axis
symmetric flow in pipe filled with fluid.
Range: 0 to 105 fps (0 to +32 m/s).
Accuracy: 1.0% of rate, except
PSX2 B: 1.5% of rate.
Response Time: 1s or less.
Temperature Limits:
Ambient 140F (60C); Fluid
Temperature: PSX2 B: 40 to
212F ( 40 to 100C) PSX2 D, and
PSX2 E: 40 to 176F ( 40 to 80C)
PSX2 HT: 40 to 392F ( 40 to 200C).
Enclosure Rating: Drip proof, IP52
(NEMA 5); Large sensor, immersion
proof, IP67 (NEMA 6).
Materials: PSX2 E, PSX2 B, and
PSX2 D: Plastic case, and aluminum
alloy and plastic mounting bracket;
PSX2 HT: 304SS case, and aluminum
alloy and 304SS mounting bracket.
Electrical Connection: Terminal
screws.
Mounting: PSX2 E and PSX2 B:
Plastic cloth belt; PSX2 D: Stainless
steel wire; PSX2 HT: Stainless steel
belt.
Weight: PSX2 E: 1.32 lb (0.6 kg);
PSX2 B: 1.76 lb (0.8 kg); PSX2 D: 3.1
lb (1.4 kg); PSX2 HT: 3.75 lb (1.6 kg).
Description
Small Diameter Sensor, General Use Structure, 5 m Coaxial Cable
Large Sensor, General Use Structure, 5 m Coaxial Cable
High Temperature Sensor, General Use Structure, 5 m Coaxial Cable
Small Sensor (2 MHz), General Use Structure
Model
PSX2-B
PSX2-D
PSX2-HT
PSX2-A
PSX2-HT HIGH TEMPERATURE SENSOR
8-5/64 MAX
[205 MAX]
1-19/64
[33]
20-7/8
[530]
CONNECTOR
SADDLE
SCALE [mm] SCALE
SPACING
0 13
[0 330]
1-5/16
[33]
CURSOR
1-1/32
[26]
2-3/64
[52]
ELEMENT
HOLDER
LOCK NUT
1-5/16
[33]
3-35/64
MAX
[90 MAX]
4-3/32
[104]
CABLE (L=5 METERS)
WIRE ROPE
BNC CONNECTOR
2-29/64
[62]
PSX2-D LARGE SENSOR
BNC CONNECTOR
WIRE ROPE
PSX2-C MEDIUM SENSOR
1-37/64
[40]
GND
TERMINAL
2-11/32
[60]
CABLE LENGTH = 5 METERS
MAIN BODY
12-19/32
[320]
ELEMENT
HOLDER
3-35/64 MAX
[90 MAX]
2-1/16
[52.5]
PSX2-B SMALL DIAMETER SENSOR
LOCK NUT
CONNECTOR
SCALE [mm] SCALE
DISTANCE
BETWEEN
TWO
ELEMENTS
CURSOR
SADDLE
2-27/32
[72]
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
TO CONVERTER
1-7/15
[36]
21-1/4
[540]
LOCK NUT
ELEMENT
HOLDER
CURSOR
2-1/16
[52. 5]
3-35/64
MAX
[90 MAX]
1-27/64
[36]
PSX2-A SMALL SENSOR (STANDARD)
& PSX2-E SMALL SENSOR (1MHZ)
SADDLE
SCALE [mm]
BNC CONNECTOR
SCALE
DISTANCE
BETWEEN
TWO
ELEMENTS
ACCESSORIES
Model
A-186
A-187
A-188
Description
Flow Pipe Sizes
0.51 to 3.94 in (13 to 100 mm)
7.87 to 236.22 in (200 to 6000 mm)
1.97 to 15.75 in (50 to 400 mm)
1.97 to 15.75 in (50 to 400 mm)

232
F
o
w

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,
U
t
r
a
s
o
n
c
F
L
O
W
Series
UXF2
Ultrasonic Flow Converter
Series UXF2 Ultrasonic Flow Converters are paired with Series SX3
detectors in order to utilize the transit-time measuring method. Two ultrasonic
sensors are mounted on the pipe exterior, and each transmits an ultrasonic
pulse to the opposite sensor. The difference in the transit times of the two waves
is used to calculate the flow velocity. This meter is a clamp-on type ultrasonic
flowmeter for permanent use and is ideal for clean liquids containing no air
bubbles such as pure water. The easy-to-use compact and lightweight design is
intended for integration into mechanical devices. The adoption of a sound
velocity measurement system, which calculates sound velocity from the transit
time, keeps the flowmeter unaffected by the temperature and the pressure of
the fluid to be measured. Additionally, with the use of a high-speed transit time
processor, the system cycle is 0.2 seconds and applicable to short batch
processes.
Series UXF2 Ultrasonic Flowmeter Converter:
Compact and lightweight
Easy operation by external keypads
Plastic housing with IP65 rating
Communication and synchronization options available
Model
UXF2-11P1
UXF2-21P1
UXF2-31P1
UXF2-12P1
UXF2-22P1
UXF2-32P1
UXF2-13P1
UXF2-23P1
UXF2-33P1
UXF2-14P1
UXF2-24P1
UXF2-34P1
Power Supply
100 to 120 VAC
200 to 240 VAC
20 to 30 VDC
100 to 120 VAC
200 to 240 VAC
20 to 30 VDC
100 to 120 VAC
200 to 240 VAC
20 to 30 VDC
100 to 120 VAC
200 to 240 VAC
20 to 30 VDC
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean liquids that pass ultrasound and do not contain air
bubbles (such as pure water and chemical solution).
Input: BNC connector, coaxial cable from sensor.
Range: 0 to 32.8 fps (0 to 10 m/s).
Display: 2 color LED (normal: green, abnormal: red), LCD with 2 lines
of 16 characters and back light, Languages: English, Japanese, French,
German, or Spanish.
Accuracy: See SX3.
Power Requirement: 100 to 120 VAC 10% 50/60 Hz, or 200 to 240
VAC 10% 50/60 Hz, or 20 to 30 VDC.
Power Consumption: 15 VA or less for AC power supply, 5W or less for
DC power supply.
Temperature Limits: Ambient 122F (50C).
Outputs: Analog: 4 to 20 mA DC, 1 point; Digital: Open Collector: 1
point; Relay contact: 1 point.
Serial Communications: RS 232C or RS 485.
Enclosure Rating: IP65.
Materials: Plastic ABS.
Mounting: Wall or pipe mount.
5-13/32
[137]
3-5/16
[84]
EARTH TERMINAL
MOUNTING PLATE
23/64
[9]
5-1/8
[130]
5-33/64
[140]
6-45/64
[170]
7-3/4
[197]
2-3/4
[70]
MOUNTING 2X 23/64 [9]
CABLE GLAND
MOUNTING PIPE
(M8) U BOLT
3/32
[2.5]
2-23/32
[69]
PIPE MOUNT (OPTION)
(PG9) FOR SENSOR CABLE
(PG13.5) FOR POWER SUPPLY
& OUTPUT CABLE
Communication
None
None
None
RS 232
RS 232
RS 232
RS 485
RS 485
RS 485
Sync
Sync
Sync

F
o
w

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,
U
t
r
a
s
o
n
c
F
L
O
W
Series
SX3
Ultrasonic Flowmeter Detector
Quick and Easy Mounting
Series SX3 Ultrasonic Flowmeter Detectors are paired with Series UXF2 converters
and employ a clamp-on type design for permanent use based on transit time measuring
method. These detectors are ideal for clean liquids containing no air bubbles such as pure
water. The easy-to-use compact and lightweight design is intended for integration into
mechanical devices. It is applicable for small to medium size pipes of diameter range from
1 to 23 in (25 to 600 mm) and provides superior cost performance.
Series SX3 Ultrasonic Flowmeter Detectors:
Helps ensure pumping efficiency
Provides accurate leak detection
Not influenced by fluids temperature or pressure
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean liquids that pass ultrasound and do not contain air bubbles (such
as pure water and chemical solution).
Type of Flow: Well developed turbulent or laminar flow in a fluid filled pipe.
Permissible Air Volume Rate: Up to 2% at 1 m/s (inversely proportional to
velocity).
Range: 0 to 32.8 fps (0 to 10 m/s).
Flow Pipe Sizes: SX3A: 0.98 to 3.94 in (25 to 100 mm) for plastic piping 1.97 to
3.94 in (50 to 100 mm) for metal piping; SX3B: 1.97 to 8.86 in (50 to 225 mm);
SX3C: 1.97 to 11.81 in (50 to 300 mm); SX3D: 11.81 to 23.62 in (300 to 600 mm).
Accuracy: 1.5 to 2% of rate.
Response Time: System cycle: 0.2 s; Dead time: 0.2 s or less; Time constant:
0.1s.
Temperature Limits: Ambient 4 to 140F ( 20 to 60C); Fluid Temperature:
SX3A/SX3B: 4 to 212F ( 20 to 100C); SX3C/SX3D w/ silicone rubber for
acoustic couplant: 4 to 176F ( 20 to 80C), w/ silicone free grease for acoustic
couplant: 32 to 140F (0 to 60C).
Enclosure Rating: SX3A and SX3B: IP65 (jetproof) when using waterproof BNC
connector; SX3C and SX3D: IP67 (immersion proof) when the terminal block is
filled with silicone rubber after wiring.
Materials: For SX3A and SX3B: Plastic PBT for sensor housing, 304SS for guide
frame; For SX3C and SX3D: Plastic PBT for sensor housing, 304SS for sensor
cover, 304SS and PBT for guide rail.
Electrical Connection: Coaxial cable up to 98.4 ft (30 m) and thermal stability of
212F (100C).
Mounting: Clamped on pipe surface.
Weight: SX3A: 10.6 oz (0.3 kg); SX3B: 14.1 oz (0.4 kg); SX3C: 2.2 lb (1 kg);
SX3D: 14.1 oz (0.4 kg).
Description
Heat Resistant Cable with waterproof BNC connector for SX3 A and SX3 B
Heat Resistant Cable with waterproof BNC connector for SX3 A and SX3 B
Heat Resistant Cable for SX3 C and SX3 D
Heat Resistant Cable for SX3 C and SX3 D
Model
SX3C-1A
SX3C-1B
SX3C-2A
SX3C-2B
Model
SX3-A0
SX3-B0
SX3-C0
SX3-D0
Kind of Detector
Small Standard
Small
Medium
Large
Flow Pipe Size in (mm)
0.98 to 3.94 (25 to 100)
1.97 to 8.86 (50 to 225)
1.97 to 11.81 (50 to 300)
11.81 to 23.62 (300 to 600)
GND TERMINAL
1-37/64
[40]
CHAIN & SPRING
3-5/32
[80]
1-3/8
[60]
FRAME END
SENSOR
NAME PLATE
PIPE
MOUNTING SIZE
0 TO 9-27/32
[0 TO 250]
19-11/16
[500]
2-27/32
[72]
FRAME
BNC
CONNECTOR
SENSOR
LOCK CLIP
SPACING
ADJUSTABLE
EVERY
7/64 [3]
H
1-21/32
[50]
1-11/32
[34]
1-7/64
[28]
L
DETECTOR
GND
TERMINAL
WIRE ROPE
2-27/32
[72]
4-31/64
[114]
2-3/8
[60]
1-37/64
[40]
ACCESSORIES
Model
A-186
A-187
A-188
Type
SX3 A
SX3 B
Pipe Size
1~4
[25~100]
2~8
[50 225]
L
8 31/32
[288]
13 45/64
[348]
H
1 7/32
[31]
1 3/16
[30]
Spacing
53/64~4 47/64
[21~120]
53/64~9 29/64
[21~240]
Units
Inches
[mm]
inches
[mm]
DETECTOR TYPE: SX3-C V METHOD DETECTOR TYPE: SX3-D Z METHOD
DETECTOR TYPE: SX3-A AND SX3-B V METHOD
Option Consult factory for other cable lengths.
Acoustic
Coupler
None
None
None
None
Description
Cable Length ft (m)
16.4 (5)
32.8 (10)
16.4 (5)
32.8 (10)

Series GFM Gas Mass Flow Meters combine a straight tube sensor with a restrictor
flow element to provide high accuracy and repeatability. Flow rates are virtually unaffected
by temperature and pressure variations. Actual gas flow is displayed in engineering units
on a 3-digit, 90 tiltable LCD readout. Units can be used with Series GFT Flow Totalizer
for applications requiring totalization. Series GFM includes a NIST traceable certificate.
Series
GFM
Gas Mass Flow Meters
Flow Range Up to 1000 L/min, Pressures Up to 500 psi, NIST Traceable
3
[76.20]
1-3/32
[27.94]
4-1/2
[114.30]
5-37/64
[141.86]
5-1/64 [127.51]
DWYER MODEL GFM-11D1 THRU GFM 1111
& GFM-2101 THRU GFM-2111
1-1/8
[28.58]
1-3/4
[44.55]
1
[25.40]
4-7/8
[123.70]
1-3/32
[27.84]
3
[76.20]
5-31/32
[151.64]
6-9/64 [156]
DWYER MODEL GFM-1140 THRU
GFM-1142 & GFM-2140 THRU GFM-2142
DWYER MODEL GFM-1130 THRU GFM-1133
& GFM-2130 THRU GFM-2133
1-1/4
[31.75]
1-3/4
[44.55]
1-1/8
[28.58]
6-1/32 [153]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean gases compatible with wetted parts.
Wetted Materials:
GFM 1XXX: Anodized aluminum, brass, 316 SS and fluoroelastomer O rings;
GFM 2XXX: 316 SS and fluoroelastomer O rings.
Accuracy: 1.5% FS including linearity over 59 to 77F (5 to 25C) and 5 to 60
psia (0.35 to 4 bar).
Response Time: 2 seconds to within 2% of actual flow.
Output: Linear 0 5 VDC and 4 20 mA.
Max. Particulate Size: 5 microns.
Power Supply: 12 VDC.
Process Connections: 1/4 compression fitting for flow rates 50 L/m; 3/8 for
100 and 200 L/m; 1/2 for 500 L/min; 3/4 for 1000 L/min.
7
sccs of helium.
Display: 90 tiltable, 3 1/2 digit.
*Specified flow ranges are for an equivalent flow of nitrogen at
70F (21C) @ 760 mm Hg.
1-3/4
[44.55]
1-1/8
[28.58]
1-1/2
[38.10]
4-35/64
[115.57]
4
[101.60]
4
[101.60]
7-19/64
[185.42]
1-17/64
[32.00]
1-7/16
[36.51]
3
[76.20]
Flow Range
0 10 sccm
0 20 sccm
0 50 sccm
0 100 sccm
0 200 sccm
0 500 sccm
0 1 L/min
0 2 L/min
0 5 L/min
0 15 L/min
0 30 L/min
0 50 L/min
0 100 L/min
0 200 L/min
0 500 L/min
0 1000 L/min
Process Connector
Compression Fitting
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
3/8
3/8
1/2
3/4
234
M
a
s
s

F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
/
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
F
L
O
W
ACCESSORIES
For Series GFM Gas Mass Flowmeters
Model GFM-110P, 110V Power Supply
Model GFM-220PE, 220V Power Supply
Model GFM-CBL4, 3 ft cable for 4 20 mA output
Model GFM-CBL5, 3 ft cable for 0 5 VDC output
Model IO-1, 0 5 VDC to RS232 Input to Output Signal Conditioner
GFT-10, Flow Totalizer with 5 10 VDC input for direct connection
to GFM and GFC (replaces GFM/GFC LCD Process display)
GFT-10C, Connection Cable for utilizing GFT 10 totalizer
in conjunction with GFM/GFC LCD process display
Model
Aluminum
GFM-1101*
GFM-1102*
GFM-1103*
GFM-1104*
GFM-1105*
GFM-1106*
GFM-1107*
GFM-1108*
GFM-1109*
GFM-1111*
GFM-1131*
GFM-1133*
GFM-1142*
GFM-1143*
GFM-1144*
GFM-1145*
SS
GFM-2101*
GFM-2102*
GFM-2103*
GFM-2104*
GFM-2105*
GFM-2106*
GFM-2107*
GFM-2108*
GFM-2109*
GFM-2111*
GFM-2131*
GFM-2133*
GFM-2142*
GFM-2143*
GFM-2144*
GFM-2145*

Series GFC Gas Mass Flow Controllers combine a straight tube sensor with a
restrictor flow element to provide high accuracy and repeatability. Gas mass flow
controllers utilize an electromagnetic valve and PID electronics to maintain continuous
control by comparing measured sensor signal set to flow rates. Setpoints can be adjusted
with local potentiometers or remotely via 0 to 5 VDC or 4 to 20 mA analog signal. Flow
rates are virtually unaffected by temperature and pressure variations. Actual gas flow is
displayed in engineering units on a 3-digit, 90 tiltable LCD readout.Units can be used with
Series GFT Flow Totalizer for applications requiring totalization. Series GFC includes a
NIST traceable certificate.
Series
GFC
Gas Mass Flow Controllers
Flow Range Up to 1000 L/min, Pressures Up to 500 psi, NIST Traceable
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
GFC 1XXX: Anodized aluminum, brass, 316 SS and fluoroelastomer O rings;
GFC 2XXX: 316 SS and fluoroelastomer O rings.
Accuracy: 1.5% FS including linearity over 59 to 77F (5 to 25C) and 5 to 60
psia (0.35 to 4 bar).
Response Time: 2 seconds to within 2% of actual flow.
Output: Linear 0 5 VDC and 4 20 mA.
Max. Particulate Size: 5 microns.
Power Supply: 12 VDC.
100 and 200 L/m; 1/2 for 500 L/min; 3/4 for 1000 L/min.
7
sccs of helium.
Display: 90 tiltable, 3 1/2 digit.
DWYER MODEL GFC-1143 THRU GFC-1145
& GFC-2140 THRU GFC-2145
7-19/64
[185.42]
1-17/64
[32.00]
4
[107.60]
4
[101.60]
4-35/64
[115.57]
1-3/4
[44.55]
1-1/2
[38.10]
1-1/8
[28.58]
3-1/8
[79.38]
1-17/64
[32.00]
3-11/64
[80.65]
1.437
3
[76.20]
3
[76.20]
5-37/64
[141.86] 3-9/16
[90.42]
6-19/64
[159.77]
1-3/4
[44.55]
1-1/8
[28.58]
1
[25.40]
5-31/32
[151.77]
3
[76.20]
3-15/16
[99.95]
7 21/64
[186.18]
1-1/4
[31.75]
2-11/16
[68.33]
11/16
[17.53]
6-32 2 11/16
[68.33]
1-3/4
[44.55]
1-1/8
[28.58]
11/16
[17.53]
6-32
Flow Range
0 10 sccm
0 20 sccm
0 50 sccm
0 100 sccm
0 200 sccm
0 500 sccm
0 1 L/min
0 2 L/min
0 5 L/min
0 15 L/min
0 30 L/min
0 50 L/min
0 100 L/min
0 200 L/min
0 500 L/min
0 1000 L/min
Process Connector
Compression Fitting
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
3/8
3/8
1/2
3/4
*Specified flow ranges are for an equivalent flow of nitrogen at 70F (21C) @ 760 mm Hg.
M
a
s
s

F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
/
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
F
L
O
W
ACCESSORIES
For Series GFC Gas Mass Flow Controllers
Model GFC-110P, 110V Power Supply
Model GFC-220PE, 220V Power Supply
Model GFC-CBL1, 8 ft cable with 15 pin connector
Model GFC-CBL3, 3 ft extension cable for LCD readout
Model IO-1, 0 5 VDC to RS232 Input to Output Signal Conditioner
GFT-10, Flow Totalizer with 5 10 VDC input for direct connection
to GFM and GFC (replaces GFM/GFC LCD Process display)
GFT-10C, Connection Cable for utilizing GFT 10 totalizer
in conjunction with GFM/GFC LCD process display
Model
Aluminum
GFC-1101*
GFC-1102*
GFC-1103*
GFC-1104*
GFC-1105*
GFC-1106*
GFC-1107*
GFC-1108*
GFC-1109*
GFC-1111*
GFC-1131*
GFC-1133*
GFC-1142*
GFC-1143*
GFC-1144*
GFC-1145*
SS
GFC-2101*
GFC-2102*
GFC-2103*
GFC-2104*
GFC-2105*
GFC-2106*
GFC-2107*
GFC-2108*
GFC-2109*
GFC-2111*
GFC-2131*
GFC-2133*
GFC-2142*
GFC-2143*
GFC-2144*
GFC-2145*

236
M
a
s
s

F
o
w
m
e
t
e
r
s
/
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
F
L
O
W
Series
DMF
Digital Mass Flow Controllers
Programmable, RS485 Interface, Up To 500 psig, 1% Accuracy

6-5/8
[167.13]
1 7/8
[47.75]
3/4
[17.53]
6-32
2 3/4
[68.33]
*FOR FLOW 60 L/M
5 5/8 or 5 7/8*
[143.51]
6 1/4
[157.23]
5 1/4
[133.86]
3/4
[17.53]
6-32
FOR FLOW 15 L/M
2 7/8
[74.42]
1 1/2
[38.10]
Program, record, analyze, and control flow rates of various gases with Series DMF
Digital Mass Flow Controller. Controllers are designed with straight tube sensors with
restrictor flow elements to ensure laminar gas flow for accurate and repeatable results.
Series DMF are unaffected by temperature and pressure variations.
Controllers can be programmed for various control functions including flow set point,
totalizer, stop totalizer, totalize from preset flow, stop and preset total, auto zero, and more.
Auto zero feature utilizes an automatic balancing circuit that virtually eliminates drift of
zero and span. In addition, Series DMF controllers have two dry contact closures to operate
pumps, valves, or other process equipment.
The Series DMF features an auto tune function to optimize control response for a specific
gas under actual process conditions. Self diagnostic tests are run at power up to ensure the
controller is in optimum working condition. Calibration information for up to 10 gases and
conversion factors for up to 256 different gases are stored in memory. High and low gas
flow alarm limits are programmed via RS-485 interface. Software supports programmable
flow modes, allowing execution of custom programming of up to ten steps.
*Specified flow ranges are for an equivalent flow of nitrogen
at 70F (21C) @ 760 mm Hg.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316 SS, 416 SS, fluoroelastomer O rings.
Accuracy: 1% FS including linearity between 59 to 77F (15 to 25C) and 10 to
60 psia (0.7 to 4 bar); 2% FS from 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) and 5 to 150 psia
(0.3 to 10 bar).
Response Time: 0.6 to 1.0 second to within 2% of setpoint over 20% to 100%
FS.
Output: Linear 0 5 VDC (2000 min. load impedance); 0 10 VDC (4000 min.
load impedance).
Maximum Particulate Size: 100 microns.
Power Supply: 15 VDC; 13.5 watts maximum.
flows 60 L/m.
9
sccs of helium.
Computer Interface: RS 485.
Model*
DMF-41401
DMF-41402
DMF-41403
DMF-41404
DMF-41405
DMF-41406
DMF-41407
Range
0 to 10 sccm
0 to 20 sccm
0 to 50 sccm
0 to 100 sccm
0 to 200 sccm
0 to 500 sccm
0 to 1 L/min
Model*
DMF-41408
DMF-41409
DMF-41411
DMF-41431
DMF-41433
DMF-41842
Range
0 to 2 L/min
0 to 5 L/min
0 to 15 L/min
0 to 30 L/min
0 to 50 L/min
0 to 100 L/min
ACCESSORIES
Model DMF-110P, 110V power supply with 25 pin connector
Model DMF-220PE, 220V power supply with 25 pin connector
Model DMF-CBL1, 6 ft cable with branch to separate power supply
Model DMF-CBL2, 6 ft cable with branch to computer port

TEMPERATURE
pages 238 239
Thermometers,
Glass
pages 248 249
Thermometers,
Digital Solar
pages 250 251
Thermometers
with Switch
page 251
Temperature
Crayons
page 254
Temperature Indicators,
Digital
pages 254 255
Temperature/Process
Controllers
pages 256 265, 267 272
Thermometers
with Transmitter
page 252
Temperature
Labels/Strips
page 253
Temperature Switches,
DIN Rail
page 281
Mechanical
pages 281 282
Temperature
Transmitters
pages 282 285
Weatherproof
Enclosures
page 266
Digital
pages 273 280
Temperature
Sensors
pages 286 312
Thermostat
Covers
page 305
Thermometers,
Dial
pages 240 247

238
T
y
p
c
a

A
p
p
c
a
t
o
n
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
In bioscience laboratories, the preferred methods of temperature
control for experiments are heated water baths. There are
experiments where water cannot be used, so the next feasible
option is to send temperature controlled air to the experiment site.
In order to use temperature controlled air, an air heater is needed.
Within this product, a Love Controls temperature controller is used
for accurate and responsive temperature control. The Love
Controls controller can adapt to a different environment through
different operating modes such as SELF-TUNE or manual PID
adjustments, or preset PID responses.
Love Controls
Controller
Air Flow
(To Heater)
Air Flow
(To Chamber)
Sensor
PV
SER ES 2600
SV
F
C
REM
%
HOLD
AL2 AL1
SP1
SP2
MAN
When storing food or other perishables in chillers or display cases,
temperature must be carefully regulated to ensure the products
remain fresh. If the storage area rises above the critical
preservation temperature, products can have their shelf life
dramatically shortened or be spoiled altogether. A Dwyer
Series
TS Digital Temperature Switch will prevent these scenarios by
monitoring temperature and activating refrigeration and defrost
cycles to ensure the storage temperature stays within safe limits.
For most wires, removing the insulation is easy, but for magnetic
and enamel wires, removing the insulation is very difficult. One
way to easily remove the insulation of the magnetic or enamel
wire is to dip them in a solution of molten fused salts. The salts are
heated to a temperature high enough to melt the salts into a liquid,
but not deteriorate them. This process uses a Love Controls
feedback temperature controller. The Love Controls controller
allows the operator to input a desired temperature and maintain
that temperature accurately. The Love Controls controller will also
retain the input temperature after the power is disconnected.
Dwyer
controllers used within heater controllers.

Love Controls controllers involved in insulation
removal.
Series TS Digital Temperature Switches regulate
temperature in chillers and display cases.
Chillers & Display Cases
Series TS
Digital
Temperature
Switches
PV
Strip Pot
Love Controls Controller
Control Unit
Power
SER ES 2600
SV
F
C
REM
%
HOLD
AL2 AL1
SP1
SP2
MAN
Environmental chambers have traditionally used separate controls
to handle the temperature and relative humidity control tasks. The
Love Controls 32DZ dual zone control with Love 5000 Series RTD
and Dwyer
RH Humidity transmitter controls both parameters in

a single small format (1/32 DIN) control to handle both zones,
simplifying wiring and reducing panel costs.
The 32DZ can switch small resistive loads directly or, when used
with Dwyer
HSSR solid state relays (not shown), can switch

larger loads.
Environmental chamber control simplified with dial
zone control.
Environmental Chamber
Series 32DZ
Control
Inside: Love RTD
Dwyer
657C-1 RH Transmitter

T
y
p
c
a

A
p
p
c
a
t
o
n
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Packaging of condiments require the sealing bars to be heated to
a temperature hot enough to seal the packages, but not destroy
the packaging material. The heat on the sealing bars needs to be
controlled to ensure the heat does not become excessive. Love
Controls controllers are used in this process to accurately control
the heat on the sealing bars. The sensors from the Love Controls
controllers are placed on the sealing bars to ensure accurate
temperature readings. Should the heat become excessive, an
alarm light on the controller notifies the operator of the impending
conditions.
Accurate control of temperature and epoxy resin flow is important
during resin transfer molding. For the epoxy resin to have an even
and thorough flow, the resin must be at a temperature high
enough to allow it to flow, yet not burn the resin. With the help of
a Love Controls controller, the temperature of the resin is
accurately controlled under different conditions through the
different PID operating modes. Another Love Controls controller,
with a flow transducer, is used in this process to control the flow
of the epoxy resin. The Love Controls controller provides
information on the temperature and flow rate to the computer
through an RS-485 serial communication option.
Love Controls controllers used in the packaging of
condiments.
Resin transfer molding.
Love Controls
Controls
Fill Head
Assembly
Condiment
Packaging
Operator Interface
Machine Control
U 1 A M1 U 2 AT A M3 L 2
LOVE CONTROLS SERIES 4C
F C
Love Controls
Controllers
Vacuum
Hose
Controls
Epoxy Resin
Molding Machine
PV
SER ES 2600
SV
F
C
REM
%
HOLD
AL2 AL1
SP1
SP2
MAN
Form, fill and seal machine control simplified with
dual zone control.
Form, fill and seal machines traditionally have used separate
controls to handle the temperature control requirement for the side
and top/bottom seal bars. The Love Controls
32DZ with Love
5000 Series thermocouples allows for a single small format (1/32

DIN) control to handle both zones, simplifying wiring and reducing
panel costs.
The 32DZ can switch small resistive loads directly or, when used
with the Love
2981 Series solid state relays (not shown), can

switch larger loads.
Control Panel
Package
Material
Feed Roll
Fill Funnel
Side Seal
Heater Bars*
Top/Bottom
Seal Bars*
Sealed
Packet
(example:
Bag of Chips)
Series 32DZ
Control
* Each sealer bar set has heaters
& a Love Thermocouple
The Series TSWB is the ideal control for monitoring water
temperature and water level in outdoor wood furnaces. The Series
TSWB controls the damper and/or the fan that provides oxygen to
the flame in the fire box. Usually an external light will also be
controlled by the Series TSWB to inform the user that the furnace
is out of wood or that the water level is low. The TSWB accepts
thermistors inputs for temperature and conductivity probe, Dwyer
CLP-1, inputs for monitoring water level.
Controlling water temperature in outdoor
wood furnace.
TS-1
TS-W
CLP-1
TSWB-010

240
T
h
e
r
m
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
D
a
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Bimetal Thermometers
2, 3 or 5 Dial, Dual Scale, 1% FS Accuracy, External Reset
Series BT Bimetal Thermometers offer accurate, reliable service
even in the toughest environments. These corrosion resistant units are
constructed from stainless steel and are hermetically sealed to prevent
crystal fogging. The bimetal element directly drives pointer,
eliminating gears and linkage. An external reset screw allows field
calibration and easy-to-read aluminum dial minimizes parallax error.
Choose back connection, lower connection or adjustable angle for easy
viewing and installation. Adjustable models can be rotated a full 360
and tilted over a 180 arc. NOTE: When using in pressurized
applications, use a suitable thermowell. Bimetal thermometers are
commonly used to measure water temperature on chillers and boilers.
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing Material: Series 300SS.
Lens: Glass.
Temperature Limits: Head: 200F (93C); Stem: Not to exceed
50% over-range or 1000F (538C) or 800F (427C)
continuously.
Process Connection: 1/4 NPT on 2 dial size; 1/2 NPT on 3
or 5 dial size.
Stem Diameter: 1/4 O.D.
Immersion Depth: Minimum 2 in liquids, 4 in gas.
*Model offered in Fahrenheit scale only.
Series
BT
Model
Back Connection
BTB22551*
BTB2405D
BTB2409D
BTB32510D
BTB3255D
BTB3257D
BTB34010D
BTB3405D
BTB3407D
BTB3605D
Dial Size,
Stem
Length
2, 2-1/2
2, 4
2, 4
3, 2-1/2
3, 2-1/2
3, 2-1/2
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 6
Temperature
Range, F(C)
0/250
0/250 (-20/120)
200/1000 (100/550)
0/200 (-20/100)
0/250 (-20/120)
50/550 (10/290)
0/200 (-20/100)
0/250 (-20/120)
50/550 (10/290)
0/250 (-20/120)
Model
Adjustable Angle Connection
BTA54010D
BTA5405D
BTA5407D
BTA56010D
BTA5605D
BTA5607D
Lower Connection
BTC3255D
Dial Size,
Stem
Length
5, 4
5, 4
5, 4
5, 6
5, 6
5, 6
3, 2.5
Temperature
Range, F(C)
0/200 (-20/100)
0/250 (-20/120)
50/550 (10/290)
0/200 (-20/100)
0/250 (-20/120)
50/550 (10/290)
0/250(-20/120)
Degree
Div., F(C)
2
2 (2)
10 (5)
2 (2)
2 (2)
5 (5)
2 (2)
2 (2)
5 (5)
2 (2)
Degree
Div., F(C)
2 (2)
2 (2)
5 (5)
2 (2)
2 (2)
5 (5)
2 (2)

T
h
e
r
m
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
D
a
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
GBT
Glow-in-the-Dark Bimetal Thermometer
Scale Background Glows, Scratch-Resistant Glass Lens
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing Material: Series 300 SS.
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: 1%.
Dial Size: 5.
Resolution: 2.
Weight: 12.7 oz (360 g).
The Series GBT Glow-in-the-Dark Bimetal Thermometer offers accurate
and reliable measurements, even in dimly-lit areas. The bimetal element directly
drives the pointer, eliminating gears and linkages. The scale background glows
brightly when mounted in dark areas for ease of reading. The glass lens can
easily be cleaned and resists scratches for better viewing of the scale. Series
GBT thermometers can be ordered in various stem lengths, connections, and
ranges to fit most applications.
1/2 NPT
ADJUSTABLE ANGLE CONNECTION
STEM LENGTH
1/2 NPT 5-9/32
[134.14]
DIAL
SIZE
1
[25.4]
BACK CONNECTION
13/16
[20.64]
* Dual scale units available by changing last digit to D.
(Example: GBTB5255D)
Model
GBTB52551
GBTB525151
GBTB525161
GBTB525141
GBTB52561
GBTB525121
GBTB52571
GBTB54051
GBTB540151
GBTB540161
GBTB540141
GBTB54061
GBTB540121
GBTB54071
GBTB56051
GBTB560151
GBTB560161
GBTB560141
GBTB56061
GBTB560121
GBTB56071
GBTB59051
GBTB590151
GBTB59071
GBTB590141
GBTB59061
GBTB590121
GBTB59071
Dial Size
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Connection
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Range*
0 to 250F
0 to 300F
0 to 500F
20 to 240F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
0 to 250F
0 to 300F
0 to 500F
20 to 240F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
0 to 250F
0 to 300F
0 to 500F
20 to 240F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
0 to 250F
0 to 300F
0 to 500F
20 to 240F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
Model
GBTA52551
GBTA525151
GBTA525161
GBTA525141
GBTA52561
GBTA525121
GBTA52571
GBTA54051
GBTA540151
GBTA540161
GBTA540141
GBTA54061
GBTA540121
GBTA54071
GBTA56051
GBTA560151
GBTA560161
GBTA560141
GBTA56061
GBTA560121
GBTA56071
GBTA59051
GBTA590151
GBTA59071
GBTA590141
GBTA59061
GBTA590121
GBTA59071
Dial Size
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Connection
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Range*
0 to 250F
0 to 300F
0 to 500F
20 to 240F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
0 to 250F
0 to 300F
0 to 500F
20 to 240F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
0 to 250F
0 to 300F
0 to 500F
20 to 240F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
0 to 250F
0 to 300F
0 to 500F
20 to 240F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
Stem
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Stem
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
9
9
9
9
9
9
9

242
T
h
e
r
m
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
D
a
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series BTL Side Reading Bimetal Thermometers are a great fit
for tight, compact areas. Series BTL thermometers are constructed
from 304 SS and have a scratch resistant glass lens for easy viewing.
These horizontally mounted thermometers face upright to allow quick
and easy measurements. With an accuracy of 1%, the durable Series
BTL thermometers are built to last for many years of great service.
Series
BTL
Side Reading Bimetal Thermometer
Horizontally Mounts to Tank
SPECIFICATIONS
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: 1% F.S.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: -40 to 392F (-40 to 200C).
Dial Size: 3.
Resolution: Less than 2% of scale.
Weight: 9.2 oz (260 g).
Model
BTLS32541
BTLS325101
BTLS32551
BTLS325121
BTLS32571
BTLS3255D
BTLS34041
BTLS340101
BTLS34051
BTLS340121
BTLS34071
BTLS3405D
BTLS36041
BTLS360101
BTLS36051
BTLS360121
BTLS36071
BTLS3605D
Stem
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
Connection
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
BTLS
BTLR
2.750
[69.85]
21/64
[12.29]
3
[76.2]
5/16
[7.94]
1-11/16
[42.85]
6-3/16
[157.15] 13/16
[20.64]
1/2-14 NPT
1/4
[6.35]
13/16
[20.64]
HEX
13/16
[20.64]
6-3/16
[157.15]
1/2-14 NPT
1/4
[6.35]
13/16
[20.64]
HEX
5/16
[7.94]
1-11/16
[42.85]
3
[76.2]
2.750
[69.85]
21/64
[12.29]
Model
BTLR32541
BTLR325101
BTLR32551
BTLR325121
BTLR32571
BTLR3255D
BTLR34041
BTLR340101
BTLR34051
BTLR340121
BTLR34071
BTLR3405D
BTLR36041
BTLR360101
BTLR36051
BTLR360121
BTLR36071
BTLR3605D
Stem
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
Connection
Right-side
Right-side
Right-side
Right-side
Right-side
Right-side
Right-side
Right-side
Right-side
Right-side
Right-side
Rightside
Right-side
Right-side
Right-side
Right-side
Right-side
Right-side
*Dual scale available by changing last digit to D.
(Example: BTLS3254D)
3 RIGHT-SIDE MOUNT VERSION SHOWN
3 LEFT-SIDE MOUNT VERSION SHOWN
Range*
-40 to 160F
0 to 200F
0 to 240F
50 to 400F
50 to 500F
0 to 250F/-20 to 120C
-40 to 160F
0 to 200F
0 to 240F
50 to 400F
50 to 500F
0 to 250F/-20 to 120C
-40 to 160F
0 to 200F
0 to 240F
50 to 400F
50 to 500F
0 to 250F/-20 to 120C
Range*
-40 to 160F
0 to 200F
0 to 240F
50 to 400F
50 to 500F
0 to 250F/-20 to 120C
-40 to 160F
0 to 200F
0 to 240F
50 to 400F
50 to 500F
0 to 250F/-20 to 120C
-40 to 160F
0 to 200F
0 to 240F
50 to 400F
50 to 500F
0 to 250F/-20 to 120C

T
h
e
r
m
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
D
a
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
The Series BTLRN Long Reach Bimetal Thermometer reaches areas that other
thermometers cant. The long reach thermometers have available stem lengths from 12 to
72. The large digits on the 3 dial are easy to read. A gripping handle is available as an
accessory to comfortably hold the thermometer during temporary installations. The Series
BTLRN is ideal for large containers and air ducts.
Series
BTLRN
Long Reach Bimetal Thermometer
Extra-long Stems Reach Remote Areas, Gripping Handle Available
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing Materials: Series 300 SS.
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: +/ 1%.
392F ( 40 to 200C).
Dial Size: 3.
Resolution: 2F (1C).
Model
BTLRN312101
BTLRN318101
BTLRN324101
BTLRN336101
BTLRN348101
BTLRN360101
BTLRN372101
Stem Length
12
18
24
36
48
60
72
3/4
[19.05]
7/8 HEX
[22.23 HEX]
1/2 NPT
STEM LENGTH
9/32
[7.14]
3-5/16
[84.14]
13/32
[10.32]
5-61/64
[151.21]
2-5/8
[66.68]
1/2 NPT
CONNECTION
1-27/64
[36.12]
* Dual scale units available
by changing last digit to D.
(Example: BTLRN31210D)
Series
BTM3
Maximum/Minimum Bimetal Thermometer
Scratch-Resistant Glass Lens, Max/Min Temperature Pointer
SPECIFICATIONS
Lens: Scratch resistant glass.
Accuracy: 1%.
300F ( 10 to 150C).
Dial Size: 3.
Resolution: 2.
Weight: 7.4 oz (210 g).
The Series BTM3 Bimetal Thermometer with Maximum/Minimum Temperature
Pointer accurately measures the current temperature along with a maximum read or
minimum read temperatures. Series BTM3 thermometers are conveniently available in
multiple temperature ranges and stem lengths ranging from 2-1/2 to 12 inches. These heavy
duty back-connected thermometers are ideal for any industrial applications such as boilers,
ovens, or refrigerated cabinets.
STEM LENGTH
1/2 NPT
1
[25.4]
13/16
[20.64]
DIAL
SIZE
3-9/32
[83.34]
Model
BTM3254D
BTM32511D
BTM32510D
BTM3256D
BTM3258D
BTM3404D
BTM34011D
BTM34010D
BTM3406D
BTM3408D
BTM3604D
BTM36011D
BTM36010D
Connection
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Range
40 to 160F ( 40 to 71.1C)
0 to 140F ( 17.8 to 60C)
0 to 200F ( 17.8 to 93.3C)
50 to 300F (10 to 148.9C)
150 to 750F (65.5 to 398.9C)
40 to 160F ( 40 to 71.1C)
0 to 140F ( 17.8 to 60C)
0 to 200F ( 17.8 to 93.3C)
50 to 300F (10 to 148.9C)
150 to 750F (65.5 to 398.9C)
40 to 160F ( 40 to 71.1C)
0 to 140F ( 17.8 to 60C)
0 to 200F ( 17.8 to 93.3C)
Model
BTM3606D
BTM3608D
BTM3904D
BTM39011D
BTM39010D
BTM3906D
BTM3908D
BTM3124D
BTM31211D
BTM31210D
BTM3126D
BTM3128D
Connection
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Range
50 to 300F (10 to 148.9C)
150 to 750F (65.5 to 398.9C)
40 to 160F ( 40 to 71.1C)
0 to 140F ( 17.8 to 60C)
0 to 200F ( 17.8 to 93.3C)
50 to 300F (10 to 148.9C)
150 to 750F (65.5 to 398.9C)
40 to 160F ( 40 to 71.1C)
0 to 140F ( 17.8 to 60C)
0 to 200F ( 17.8 to 93.3C)
50 to 300F (10 to 148.9C)
150 to 750F (65.5 to 398.9C)
ACCESSORY
BTLR-GH, Gripping Handle
Range*
0 to 200F
0 to 200F
0 to 200F
0 to 200F
0 to 200F
0 to 200F
0 to 200F
Stem
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
Stem
6
6
9
9
9
9
9
12
12
12
12
12

244
T
h
e
r
m
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
D
a
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series BTPM Panel Mount Bimetal Thermometers are designed to easily mount in
most instrument panels. The front flange has three 5/32 diameter holes to quickly attach
the thermometer to the panel. The Series BTPM thermometer has a 3 dial with a scratch
resistant glass lens. The Series BTPM Panel Mount thermometers are ideal for HVAC,
automotive, and food industry applications, chemical operations, and more.
Series
BTPM
Panel Mount Bimetal Stem Thermometer
Front Flange with Back Connection for Easy Mounting
3-21/64
[84.53]
2-1/2
[63.5]
21/32
[16.67]
1/4 NPT
1/4
[6.35]
STEM LENGTH
SPECIFICATIONS
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: 1%.
Dial Size: 2 1/2.
Weight: 9.2 oz (260 g).
Model
BTPM24041
BTPM240101
BTPM26041
BTPM260101
BTPM29041
BTPM290101
Range*
40 to 160F
0 to 200F
40 to 160F
0 to 200F
40 to 160F
0 to 200F
Sanitary Bimetal Thermometers
1-1/2 & 2 Sanitary Clamp Sizes Available
Series BTS Sanitary Bimetal Thermometers provide highly accurate measurements
and are designed to directly connect to a 1-1/2 or 2 sanitary connection. Equipped with
an external reset, Series BTS thermometers can be field calibrated for years of reliable
service. The Series BTS thermometers are available in various stem lengths, clamp sizes
and temperature ranges to meet most standard applications. Sanitary bimetal
thermometers are ideal for sanitary process applications in the food, beverage and
pharmaceutical industries.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316/316L polished
stainless steel.
Housing Materials: 316 SS.
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: 1%.
Temperature Limits: Head: 200F
(93C); Stem: 800F (427C).
Dial Size: 3 or 5.
Process Connection: 1 1/2 or 2
sanitary clamp.
Resolution: 2 (depending on range).
Weight: 1.4 lb (635 g)
Series
BT15S/BT20S
Model
BT20S32541
BT20S32551
BT20S32561
BT20S32571
BT20S34541
BT20S34551
BT20S34561
BT20S34571
Clamp Size
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Stem Length
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
Model
BT20S52541
BT20S52551
BT20S52561
BT20S52571
BT20S54541
BT20S54551
BT20S54561
BT20S54571
Clamp Size
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Stem Length
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
3 Dial Back Connection
5 Dial Back Connection
DIAL
SIZE
1/4
[6.35]
STEM LENGTH
TRICLAMP 1-1/2 SIZE
1-29/32 [48.42]
TRICLAMP SIZE 2
2 [50.8]
*Dual scales available by changing last digit to D. (Example: BTPM2404D)
Stem Length
4
4
6
6
9
9
Range
40 to 160F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 550F
40 to 160F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 550F
Range
40 to 160F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 550F
40 to 160F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 550F
*For bottom connection, add B to the end of the model number.
1.5 clamp sizes also available.

T
h
e
r
m
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
D
a
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
The Series CBT Clip-on Thermometers are designed to monitor the
temperatures of products while they are cooking. The Series CBT
thermometers give accurate readings by clipping onto the side of a pot in order
to keep the temperature probe away from the bottom and sides. These
thermometers are conveniently available in 11 ranges and two stem lengths to
fit various sized pots or kettles. The Series CBT Clip-on Thermometers are
constructed of durable stainless steel for years of reliable service. The Series
CBT can be used when preparing candies, soups, and deep fried foods.
Series
CBT
Clip-On Bimetal Thermometer
Fits Any Size Pot, Adjustable Set Point Pointer
SPECIFICATIONS
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: 1%.
Dial Size: 1 3/4, 2, and 3.
Resolution: 2.
.350
[8.89]
STEM LENGTH
.150
[3.81]
CLIP
1.636
[41.55]
.500
[12.70]
CLIP
1.550
[39.37]
1.800
[45.72]
Model
CBT25061
CBT250121
CBT25071
CBT25081
CBT25052
CBT28041
CBT280111
CBT280101
CBT280131
CBT28051
CBT28031
CBT28061
CBT280121
CBT28071
CBT28081
CBT28052
CBT38041
CBT380111
CBT380101
CBT380131
CBT38051
CBT38031
CBT38061
CBT380121
CBT38071
CBT38081
CBT38052
Model
CBT175041
CBT1750111
CBT1750101
CBT1750131
CBT175051
CBT175031
CBT175061
CBT1750121
CBT175071
CBT175081
CBT175052
CBT178041
CBT1780111
CBT1780101
CBT1780131
CBT178051
CBT178031
CBT178061
CBT1780121
CBT178071
CBT178081
CBT178052
CBT25041
CBT250111
CBT250101
CBT250131
CBT25051
CBT25031
Dial Size
1 3/4
1 3/4
1 3/4
1 3/4
1 3/4
1 3/4
1 3/4
1 3/4
1 3/4
1 3/4
1 3/4
1 3/4
1 3/4
1 3/4
1 3/4
1 3/4
1 3/4
1 3/4
1 3/4
1 3/4
1 3/4
1 3/4
2
2
2
2
2
2
Range*
40 to 160F
0 to 140F
0 to 180F
0 to 220F
0 to 250F
25 to 125F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 500F
150 to 750F
10 to 110C
40 to 160F
0 to 140F
0 to 180F
0 to 220F
0 to 250F
25 to 125F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 500F
150 to 750F
10 to 110C
40 to 160F
0 to 140F
0 to 180F
0 to 220F
0 to 250F
25 to 125F
Dial Size
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Range*
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 500F
150 to 750F
10 to 110C
40 to 160F
0 to 140F
0 to 180F
0 to 220F
0 to 250F
25 to 125F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 500F
150 to 750F
10 to 110C
40 to 160F
0 to 140F
0 to 180F
0 to 220F
0 to 250F
25 to 125F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 500F
150 to 750F
10 to 110C
*Dual scales available by changing last digit to D.
(Example: CBT17504D)
Stem
5
5
5
5
5
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
Stem
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
5
5
5
5
5
5

246
T
h
e
r
m
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
D
a
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
BTP
Pipe-Mount Bimetal Surface Thermometer
3 Spring Sizes, Fits Pipe Sizes from 3/4 to 6
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing Material: Steel.
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: 2%.
302F ( 10 to 150C).
Dial Size: 2.
Mounting: Spring.
The Series BTP Pipe Mount Bimetal Surface Thermometers are designed to
accurately measure the surface temperature of 3/4 to 6 pipe sizes. The BTP series
includes three spring sizes to securely mount the pipes surface. Pipe Mount
thermometers are perfect for temporary installation and applications that require
non-intrusive temperature measurement.
Model
BTP251
BTP241
BTP261
BTP271
Range
50 to 250F
0 to 150F
70 to 370F
70 to 500F
2-1/32
[51.59]
1-1/16
[26.99]
33/64
[13.1]
1-3/8
[34.93]
Series
STC
2
[50.8]
7/64
[2.67]
27/32
[21.44]
A
1
[25.4]
Clip Size
3/4 to 7/8
1 to 1 5/8
1 5/8 to 2 3/8
Dim. A
1 5/8 [41.28]
1 7/8 [47.63]
2 1/2 [63.5]
Pipe-Mount Bimetal Surface Thermometer
Fits Pipe Sizes from 3/4 to 2-3/8, Clip-on Mount
Model
BTP252
BTP262
BTP272
BTP242
Range
40 to 120C
20 to 180C
20 to 260C
18 to 66C
The Series STC Pipe-Mount Bimetal Surface Thermometers are designed to
accurately measure the surface temperature of 3/4 to 2-3/8 pipe sizes. The STC
series is available in three different clip sizes and feature a bimetal spiral spring
sensing element that provides quick temperature readings. Pipe mount
thermometers are perfect for temporary installations and applications that require
non-intrusive temperature measurements.
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing Material: Steel.
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: 2%.
302F ( 10 to 150C).
Dial Size: 2.
Mounting: Clip.
Model
STC151
STC141
STC161
STC171
STC152
STC162
STC172
Range
50 to 250F
0 to 150F
70 to 370F
70 to 500F
40 to 120C
20 to 180C
20 to 260C
Model
STC351
STC341
STC361
STC371
STC352
STC362
STC372
Range
50 to 250F
0 to 150F
70 to 370F
70 to 500F
40 to 120C
20 to 180C
20 to 260C
Model
STC451
STC441
STC461
STC471
STC452
STC462
STC472
Range
50 to 250F
0 to 150F
70 to 370F
70 to 500F
40 to 120C
20 to 180C
20 to 260C
Spring Size
3/4 to 6
3/4 to 6
3/4 to 6
3/4 to 6
Spring Size
3/4 to 6
3/4 to 6
3/4 to 6
3/4 to 6
Pipe Size
1 to 1 5/8
1 to 1 5/8
1 to 1 5/8
1 to 1 5/8
1 to 1 5/8
1 to 1 5/8
1 to 1 5/8
Pipe Size
3/4 to 7/8
3/4 to 7/8
3/4 to 7/8
3/4 to 7/8
3/4 to 7/8
3/4 to 7/8
3/4 to 7/8
Pipe Size
1 5/8 to 2 3/8
1 5/8 to 2 3/8
1 5/8 to 2 3/8
1 5/8 to 2 3/8
1 5/8 to 2 3/8
1 5/8 to 2 3/8
1 5/8 to 2 3/8

T
h
e
r
m
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
D
a
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
ST
Surface Mount Thermometer
2 Dual Scale Dial, 2% Full Scale Accuracy
Measure the temperature of boilers, air ducts, motors, bearings,
furnaces or other surfaces with Series ST Surface Mount
Thermometers. Dual magnet design allows easy mounting on any
ferrous surface. Bi-metallic thermal sensing coil provides quick
temperature measurement with 2% full scale accuracy.
APPLICATIONS
Manifolds, platens, boilers, air ducts, furnaces, engines, motors,
bearings, enclosures, cabinets, drums, plumbing, piping,
refrigerators, and other ferrous surfaces.
2
[50.80]
1/2
[12.70]
DW ERI STR M NTS NC
MCH G N I Y IN US A
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing Element: Bimetal
coil.
Dial Size: 2 (5.08 cm).
Response Time:
Approximately one minute.
Mounting: Two Alnico
magnets on back.
Height: 1/2 (1.27 cm).
Weight: 2 oz (56.7 g).
The HWT250 Bi-Metal Thermometer is perfect for hot water
applications. The dial has dual scales to read in F and C. There is
an adjustment screw in the stem for easy calibration. Typical
applications for the HWT250 would be heating coils, hydronic
radiant in-floor systems, and outdoor wood furnaces.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Stem and well brass.
Housing Material: Zinc plated brass.
Accuracy: 5F (2C).
Range: 30 to 250F (0 to 120C).
Lens: Glass.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: -40 to 250F (-40 to 120C).
Dial Size: 2
Model
HWT250
Hot Water Thermometer
Bi-Metal Type with Brass Separable Well
7/16
[11.11]
31/32
[24.38]
27/64
[10.67]
1
[25.4]
1/2 14 NPT
2-1/2
[63.5]
Model HWT250
Model
ST250
ST500
ST750
Range
0 to 250F (-20 to 120C)
0 to 500F (-20 to 260C)
50 to 750F (10 to 400C)

248
T
h
e
r
m
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
G
a
s
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Model
RFT
Refrigerator-Freezer Thermometer
Spirit Filled
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Range: -40 to 80F (-40 to 20C).
Ambient Temperature Range: -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C).
Accuracy: 2F.
Resolution: 2F.
Liquid Fill: Red organic spirit.
Dimensions: 4.8 x 1.2 x 0.43 in.
The Series RFT Refrigerator-Freezer Thermometer is a popular
choice for easily monitoring temperatures of reach-in refrigerators, cold
storage cabinets, and walk-in freezers. The Series RFT refrigerator-
freezer thermometers are horizontally oriented to fit discretely in any
display cabinet. The Series RFT can be mounted to a wire rack, on the
side wall, or left free standing on a shelf. By placing multiple
thermometers throughout a location, inspectors can quickly see that a
unit is safely within temperature limits. The non-toxic, organic red
liquid fill allows users to easily read the temperature settings. The
Series RFT thermometer is highly accurate and ruggedly built.
4-29/32
[124.62]
MOUNTING BRACKET
1-1/4
[31.75]
1/2
[12.70]
Spirit-Filled Glass Thermometers
Partial Immersion, F and C Ranges, Individually Serialized
Series
GT
1/4
[6.35]
[A]
Environmentally safe, Series GT Spirit-Filled Glass Thermometers
offer accurate and reliable temperature measurement without worry of
mercury contamination or disposal. Organically filled with blue or red
mineral spirits, these thermometers are designed for applications
requiring only partial immersion. Individually serialized thermometers
are calibrated over the entire scale and accurate to within NIST
tolerances.
APPLICATIONS
Manufacturing processes of petrochemicals, chemicals, food and
beverage products, waste water treatment, biotechnology, and
pharmaceutical industries. Use in ovens, water baths, incubators,
and refrigeration.
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 1 scale division below 221F (105C), 1.5 scale
divisions above 221F (105C) and 2 scale divisions above
392F (200C).
Fill Solution: Blue fill contains Isoamyl Benzoate; Red fill may
contain Kerosene, Toluene, or Pentane with aniline dye.
Thermometer Length (A): 12 (305 mm) all models except for
GT500F and GT260C which are 16 (405 mm).
Thermometer Diameter: 0.250 (6.35 mm).
Immersion Length: 3 (76 mm).
Model
GT120F
GT230F
GT300F
GT500F
GT110C
GT150C
GT200C
GT260C
GT5050C
GT10050C
Range
-30 to 120F
0 to 230F
0 to 300F
20 to 500F
-20 to 110C
-20 to 150C
-10 to 200C
-10 to 260C
-50 to 50C
-100 to 50C
Divisions
1F
2F
2F
2F
1C
1C
1C
1C
1C
1C
Length (mm)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
16 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
Model RFT-10, Refrigerator-Freezer Thermometer
Immersion (mm)
3 (76)
3 (76)
3 (76)
3 (76)
3 (76)
3 (76)
3 (76)
3 (76)
3 (76)
3 (76)

T
h
e
r
m
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
G
a
s
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
The Series IT Industrial Thermometer allows users to easily take accurate
temperature measurements in any environment. The case of the IT series is made of die
cast aluminum for extra durability in industrial environments. The glass lens is easily
cleaned and resists scratches for better viewing of the scale. The stem can be adjusted 180
in order to achieve the best viewing angle. The blue organic fill is non-toxic and allows users
to better see the temperature reading. The scales can be ordered with dual units, F, or C.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Material: Tapered cast
aluminum with graphite fill.
Housing Material: 9 (228 mm)
aluminum.
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: 1% accuracy.
Scales: Aluminum painted white with
black markings.
Process Connection: 1 1/4 18 NEF
thread.
Liquid Filling: Organic blue liquid filled
tube.
Mounting: Adjustable stem: Vertical
plane 180 horizontal plane 360.
Series
IT
Industrial Thermometer
9 Scale, Adjustable Angle Stem
2-3/8
[60.33]
10-5/16
[261.94]
8-3/4
[222.25]
17/32
[13.49]
1-13/32
[35.72] 3-1/8
[79.38]
19/32
[15.08]
1-1/4 [31.75] HEX
1-1/4-18 NEF
THREAD 3-1/2 OR 6
[88.9] OR [152.4]
1-1/32
[26.19]
Model
ITA9351D
ITA9352D
ITA9353D
ITA9354D
ITA9355D
ITA9356D
ITA9357D
ITA9358D
Model
ITA9601D
ITA9602D
ITA9603D
ITA9604D
ITA9605D
ITA9606D
3-1/2 Stem 6 Stem
Series
IT-W
Industrial Thermometer Thermowells
Fits IT Thermometers with 3-1/2 and 6 Stem Lengths
3/4
[19.05]
A
5/8
[15.88]
5/8
[15.88]
3/4-14 NPT
STANDARD TYPE
THERMOWELL
1
[25.4]
2-1/2
[63.5]
1
[25.4]
2-1/2
[63.5]
1-1/4-18 NEF
THREAD
1-1/2 [38.1]
HEX
3/4
[19.05]
1-1/4-18 NEF
THREAD
1-1/2 [38.1]
HEX
3/4-14 NPT
6 [152.4] STEM LENGTH
LAGGING EXTENSION TYPE
THERMOWELL
The Series IT-W Thermowells reduce installation cost and time by eliminating the need
to drain the system when servicing industrial thermometers. The thermowells protect
industrial thermometers from high pressure, flow and corrosive media. Series IT-W
Thermowells are available with 2-1/2 and 5 insertion lengths and with the option of a 2-
1/2 lagging extension. These cost efficient brass, 304 stainless steel, and 316 stainless steel
thermowells with 3/4 NPT threads are compatible with Series IT for most applications.
Model
IT-W01
IT-W11
IT-W21
IT-W04
IT-W14
IT-W24
IT-W07
IT-W17
IT-W27
Materials
Brass
304 SS
316 SS
Brass
304 SS
316 SS
Brass
304 SS
316 SS
Insertion Length
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
5
5
5
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
Range
40 to 110F ( 40 to 40C)
0 to 120F ( 15 to 50C)
0 to 160F ( 15 to 70C)
30 to 180F (0 to 80C)
30 to 240F (0 to 115C)
30 to 300F (0 to 150C)
Range
40 to 110F ( 40 to 40C)
0 to 120F ( 15 to 50C)
0 to 160F ( 15 to 70C)
30 to 180F (0 to 80C)
30 to 240F (0 to 115C)
30 to 300F (0 to 150C)
50 to 400F (10 to 205C)
100 to 550F (40 to 300C)
Lag
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2

250
T
h
e
r
m
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
D
g
t
a

S
o
a
r
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
DBT
Digital Solar-Powered Bimetal Thermometer
LCD Display, Adjustable Angle Stem
The Series DBT Digital Solar-Powered Bimetal Thermometer
takes the guesswork out of temperature measurement. The 3-1/2 digit
LED display is easy to read and provides resolution to 0.1F. The
adjustable angle can be mounted in virtually any position. The
engineering units can be selected in the field by removing the back
cover.
SPECIFICATIONS
Lens: Acrylic.
Accuracy: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C): 1% F.S.
Dial Size: 3.
Process Connection: 1/2 NPT-adjustable angle.
Display: 3-1/2 digit LCD.
Power Requirements: 3-Volt solar cell (minimum 35 LUX
required).
Model
DBTA3251
DBTA3252
DBTA3401
DBTA3402
DBTA3601
DBTA3602
DBTA3901
DBTA3902
DBTA3121
DBTA3122
DBTA3151
DBTA3152
DBTA3181
DBTA3182
DBTA3241
DBTA3242
Stem Length
2.5
2.5
4
4
6
6
9
9
12
12
15
15
18
18
24
24
3-13/16
[97.00]
1/2 NPT
STEM
LENGTH
1/4
[6.35]
3-1/4
[82.55]
Range
-58 to 302F (-50 to 150C)
-58 to 158F (-50 to 70C)
-58 to 302F (-50 to 150C)
-58 to 158F (-50 to 70C)
-58 to 302F (-50 to 150C)
-58 to 158F (-50 to 70C)
-58 to 302F (-50 to 150C)
-58 to 158F (-50 to 70C)
-58 to 302F (-50 to 150C)
-58 to 158F (-50 to 70C)
-58 to 302F (-50 to 150C)
-58 to 158F (-50 to 70C)
-58 to 302F (-50 to 150C)
-58 to 158F (-50 to 70C)
-58 to 302F (-50 to 150C)
-58 to 158F (-50 to 70C)

T
h
e
r
m
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
w
t
h

S
w
t
c
h
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Remotely monitor and control temperature with this economical, reliable liquid
actuated thermometer with integral 5 amp rated snap switch. The switch setpoint is fully
adjustable across the entire temperature range. Dual scale reads in both F and C. Unit is
housed in a corrosion protected, plated steel case with scratch resistant glass window. A bi-
metallic element compensates for temperature effects on the capillary for maximum
accuracy. Thermometer includes U-clamp bracket for fast, easy panel mounting. Mount
bulb in any position at any height without affecting temperature reading.
Series
RRT
Remote Reading Thermometer with Switch
3-1/4" Dial, Liquid Actuated Bulb and Capillary Type
SPECIFICATIONS
Thermal Effect (Includes Span and Zero): 1.5% of span per 100F (55.6C)
nominal.
Switch Type, Rating: SPDT, 5A @ 250 VAC, non inductive.
Electrical Connections: (3) male quick connects.
Dial Size: 3 1/4 (80 mm).
Capillary Length: 10.5 ft (3.2 meters).
Bulb Length: 3.0 in (76 mm).
Weight: 1 lb, 4.4 oz.
Model
RRT2120U
RRT2250U
RRT2300U
Range, F
40 to 120
32 to 248
0 to 300
Model
DRFT
Digital Solar-Powered Thermometer
LCD Display, Remote Probe, Compact Size
SPECIFICATIONS
( 40 to 70C).
Ambient Temperature Range: 41 to
140F (5 to 60C).
Accuracy: 0 to 50C: 1C; 40 to 0C
and 51 to 70C: 1.5C.
Display: LCD.
Dimensions: 4.5 x 1.1 x 0.6 in.
Sensor: Thermistor.
Supply Power: Solar and battery.
Case: ABS.
Capillary Length: 3.2 ft (1 m).
The Series DRFT Solar Digital Refrigerator and Freezer Thermometer makes
monitoring cold environments effortless. This thermometer can instantly show exact
temperatures of your refrigerator or freezer in F or C with the flip of a switch. The Series
DRFT digital thermometer helps monitor appliance temperature fluctuations to preserve
and prevent spoilage of food, medications, wines, and much more. Series DRFT
thermometers are powered by solar panels that make the unit environmentally attractive,
efficient and cost-saving.
5/8
[15.88]
4-1/2
[114.30]
1-1/8
[28.58]
3-13/16
[96.84]
4-5/32
[105.57]
Model DRFT-10, White Digital Solar Powered Thermometer
Model DRFT-10-BLACK, Black Digital Solar Powered Thermometer
Range, C
40 to 50
0 to 120
18 to 149

252
T
h
e
r
m
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
w
t
h

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
The Series BTO Bimetal Thermometer with Transmitter Output
eliminates the need for a separate thermometer and transmitter. By only
needing one connection, the BTO series reduces installation cost and saves
space. The head-mount transmitter is located in a weatherproof thermal head
located on the side of the stem. The BTO series is ideal for use on power
generating boilers, skid mounted compressors, and thermal oxidation systems.
Series
BTO
Bimetal Thermometer with Transmitter Output
Bimetal Stem with 4-20 mA Output, 3 or 5 Dial
3-1/4 [82.55]
OR
5-1/4 [133.35]
3-1/16
[77.79]
2-15/16
[71.61]
3/4 NPT
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
3-3/16
[80.96]
1/4
[6.35]
1/2 NPT
STEM
LENGTH
7-1/8
[180.98]
3-5/16
[84.14]
SPECIFICATIONS
Thermometer Specifications
Lens: Glass.
Temperature Limits: Ambient:
58 to 185F ( 50 to 85C).
Dial Size: 3 or 5.
Resolution: 2F (5F for
400F and 550F models).
Weight: 1.95 lb.
Transmitter Specifications
58 to 185F ( 50 to 85C).
Power Requirement: 10 to 33
VDC.
Loop Resistance: 1045.
Power Consumption: 38 mA.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X
(IP65).
Model
BTO325101
BTO32551
BTO32561
BTO325121
BTO32571
BTO340101
BTO34051
BTO34061
BTO340121
BTO34071
BTO360101
BTO36051
BTO36061
BTO360121
BTO36071
BTO390101
BTO39051
BTO39061
BTO390121
BTO39071
BTO312101
BTO31251
BTO312061
BTO312121
BTO31271
Dial Size
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Stem Length
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
9
9
9
9
9
12
12
12
12
12
Model
BTO525101
BTO52551
BTO52561
BTO525121
BTO52571
BTO540101
BTO54051
BTO54061
BTO540121
BTO54071
BTO560101
BTO56051
BTO56061
BTO560121
BTO56071
BTO590101
BTO59051
BTO59061
BTO590121
BTO59071
BTO512101
BTO51251
BTO512061
BTO512121
BTO51271
Dial Size
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Stem Length
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
9
9
9
9
9
12
12
12
12
12
Range
0 to 200F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
0 to 200F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
0 to 200F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
0 to 200F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
0 to 200F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
Range
0 to 200F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
0 to 200F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
0 to 200F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
0 to 200F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
0 to 200F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
L
a
b
e
s
/
S
t
r
p
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
KS
Irreversible Temperature Labels
Indicators and Strips, Displays both F and C
The KS Series Irreversible Temperature Labels are the ideal solution to monitor and
verify temperature specific operations such as climate conditions during storage and
transit. The labels are produced in a variety of temperature points and sizes and
permanently darken when exposed at or above the indicated temperature point. The labels
are self-adhesive and resist oil, water, and steam, which allows them to be placed on any
smooth surface quickly and easily.
8 Level Vertical Label
Temperature Range
99 to 149F (37 to 65C)
160 to 230F (71 to 110C)
241 to 309F (116 to 154C)
320 to 390F (160 to 199C)
399 to 500F (204 to 260C)
Model
KS-0101
KS-0102
KS-0103
KS-0104
KS-0105
6 Level Horizontal Mini Label
Temperature Range
84 to 108F (29 to 42C)
111 to 144F (44 to 62C)
149 to 199F (65 to 93C)
210 to 261F (99 to 127C)
270 to 320F (132 to 160C)
331 to 379F (166 to 193C)
390 to 450F (199 to 232C)
465 to 554F (241 to 290C)
Model
KS-0201
KS-0202
KS-0203
KS-0204
KS-0205
KS-0206
KS-0207
KS-0208
5 Level Clock Label
Temperature
104 to 129F (40 to 54C)
140 to 180F (60 to 82C)
190 to 230F (88 to 110C)
241 to 280F (116 to 138C)
289 to 331F (143 to 166C)
340 to 379F (171 to 193C)
390 to 435F (199 to 224C)
450 to 500F (232 to 260C)
Model
KS-0301
KS-0302
KS-0303
KS-0304
KS-0305
KS-0306
KS-0307
KS-0308
6 Level Horizontal
Mini Label
5 Level Clock Label
2
[50.80]
23/32
[18.44]
1-1/4
[31.75]
1/2
[12.70]
5/8
[15.88]
The KS-04/05 Series Reversible Temperature Strips provide a constant and reliable
indication of current temperature status. The reversible, reusable strips change color when
temperatures increase or decrease, and are constructed with non-toxic encapsulated
thermochromic liquid crystals. The temperature strips are self-adhesive, and have an
accuracy of 2F (1C). These reversible strips are resistant to oils, water and steam
ideal for monitoring pipes, food storage areas, transportation climate control, equipment
monitoring, pharmaceutical or medical applications.
Series
KS-04/05
Reversible Temperature Strips
Indicators and Strips, Displays both F and C
16 Level Vertical Label (2F Increments)
Temperature Range
26 to 56F ( 3 to 13C)
58 to 88F (14 to 31C)
90 to 120F (32 to 49C)
Model
KS-0401
KS-0402
KS-0403
7 Level Horizontal Label (5C Increments)
Temperature Range
22 to 32F ( 30 to 0C)
32 to 86F (0 to 30C)
86 to 140F (30 to 60C)
140 to 194F (60 to 90C)
194 to 248F (90 to 120C)
Model
KS-0501
KS-0502
KS-0503
KS-0504
KS-0505
7 Level Horizontal Label
1/2
[12.70]
5
[127.00]
1-3/4
[44.53]
1/2
[12.70]
No. in Package
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
No. in Package
10
10
10
10
10
No. in Package
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
No. in Package
10
10
10
No. in Package
10
10
10
10
10

254
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

C
r
a
y
o
n
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Model
CC-10K
Colotemp Crayon Kit
Indicator Crayons, Change Color with Different Temperature
The Model CC-10K Colotemp Crayon Kit is the ideal solution to monitor
and verify temperature specific operations for those who must measure many
different temperatures. The kit includes a variety of crayons for various
temperature ranges. The crayons are easy-to-use, simply mark a pre-heated
surface with a color change crayon. The color will change immediately if the
temperature is higher than the crayons rating, or it will change within 1-2
seconds if it is lower than its rating. The color change crayons are accurate to
5C of the temperature rating. The color change is irreversible.
APPLICATIONS
Paper, rubber, textile, plastics, chemical and electrical industries.
Zinc foundries, aluminum processing and the glass industry.
Iron & steel industry, enameling, welding and fabricating.
248F (120C)
383F (195C)
419F (215C)
437F (225C)
473F (245C)
572F (300C)
608F (320C)
680F (360C)
878F (470C)
1112F (600C)
Temperature Range
Second Color Change
Initial Crayon
Color
Light Gray
Pink
Pale Blue
Light Purple
Orange-Brown
Yellow-Brown
Dark Violet
Aqua Green
Red
Apple Green
First Color Change
Violet Blue
Blue Violet
Light Green
Bright Blue
Black
Red Brown
Light Violet
White Buff
White
White
Gray
White Buff
Gray
Light Gray
White Buff
563F (295C)
581F (305C)
608F (320C)
635F (335C)
860F (460C)
[4.093]
[.375]
HOLDER
CRAYON
Model CC-10K, Colotemp Crayon Kit
Model
WTI-100
Wall Plate Digital LCD Temperature Indicator
Battery Operated, Less than 1 Deep
The Model WTI-100 Wall Plate Digital LCD Temperature Indicator is
designed to display temperatures using an included remote thermistor. The
easy to read LCD display is powered by a single CR2032 Lithium 3V battery.
The wide operating range and stainless steel wall plate allows the Model WTI-
100 to monitor temperatures in walk-in freezers, indoor swimming pool areas,
or general office environments.
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: 58 to 230F.
Input: NTC thermistors.
Power Requirements: One CR2032 lithium 3V battery.
Accuracy: 1.5F.
Display: 3 digit LCD display.
Resolution: 0.1F.
Operating Temperature: 0 to 122F ( 17.7 to 50C).
Operating Humidity: 5 to 95% non condensing.
Weight: 0.4 lbs (0.18 kg).
SENSOR PROBE
BATTERY
SENSOR CABLE
35.000.250
[8896.35]
3/8
[9.523]
5/8
[15.88]
4-1/2
[114.3]
3-1/4
[82.55]
2-3/4
[69.85]
2-5/64
[52.78]
1-55/64
[47.23]
1-1/4
[31.75]
3/4
[19.05]
63/34
[25]
Model WTI-100, Digital LCD Temperature Indicator

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

I
n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s
,
D
g
t
a
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
TI
Temperature Indicator
Low Cost, Two-Digit Display, 1% Accuracy
Monitor temperature with the Series TI Temperature Indicator. Units offer
a temperature range of -58 to 99F (-50 to 99C) with an accuracy of 1%. Quickly
view temperatures on the bright red, double-digit LED. Models TI-106 & TI-216
feature an external potentiometer for probe temperature adjustment. The
compact design of the Series TI makes it ideal for any refrigeration application.
2-7/16
[62]
1-5/32
[29]
2-5/32
[55]
63/64
[25]
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: 58 to 99F ( 50 to 99C).
Input: PTC thermistor (1000 @ 25C), not included.
Power Requirements: 110 VAC or 230 VAC (depending on model).
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Display: 2 digit plus sign, red, 1/2 H digits.
Resolution: 1.
Front Panel Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65).
Panel Cutout 2.36 x 1 (60 x 26 mm)
Temperature/Process Indicator
Low Cost, 3-Digit Display, 1% Accuracy
Series
TID
3
[76.2]
1-11/32
[34.13]
2-3/8
[60.38]
1-7/64
[28.18]
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: 58 to 302F (thermistor); 999 to 999 counts (4 to 20 mA).
Input: PTC/NTC thermistor or 4 to 20 mA.
Power Requirements: 110 VAC, 230 VAC, 24 VAC/DC.
Accuracy: Better than 1%.
Display: 3 digits; red, green or blue display.
Resolution: 1 or 0.1 count.
Agency Approvals: CE, UR, URc.
The affordable Series TID allows user to monitor temperature or a process
value. Temperature ranges are available from -58 to 302F using one of our PTC
or NTC thermistors. Process values can be displayed from -999 to 999 counts
using a 4 to 20 mA from one of our various transmitters. The process indicator
has an adjustable span and zero.
Model
TI-10
TI-21
TI-106
TI-216
Power Supply
110 VAC
230 VAC
110 VAC
230 VAC
Display
F
C
F
C
ACCESSORIES
TS-5, PTC thermistor probe PVC (5 ft cable)
TS-6, PTC thermistor probe metal (5 ft cable)
Model
TID-1110
TID-1120
TID-1210
TID-1220
TID-1410
TID-1420
TID-3100
TID-3200
TID-3400
Units
F
C
F
C
F
C
None
None
None
Input
PTC thermistor
PTC thermistor
PTC thermistor
PTC thermistor
PTC thermistor
PTC thermistor
4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
ACCESSORIES
Supply Power
110 VAC
110 VAC
230 VAC
230 VAC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
110 VAC
230 VAC
24 VAC/DC
Adjustable
No
No
Yes
Yes

256
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
/
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
32A
SPECIFICATIONS
Selectable Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, DC voltage or DC current
selectable.
Display: Two 4 digit, 7 segment, 0.259 high (6.35 mm) LEDs.
Accuracy: 0.25% of span, 1 least significant digit.
Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC, nominal, +10 15%, 50 to 400 Hz.
single phase; 132 to 240 VDC, nominal, +10 20%.
Power Consumption: 5 VA maximum.
Operating Temperature: 14 to 131F ( 10 to 55C).
Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory. No batteries required.
Control Output Ratings:
Relay: SPST, 3A @ 240 VAC resistive; 1.5A @ 240 VAC inductive;
Pilot duty rating: 250 VA, 2A @ 120 VAC or 1A @ 240 VAC.
Switched voltage (non isolated): 5 VDC @ 20 mA.
Proportional current: 0 to 20 mADC scaleable into 600 Ohms max.
Agency Approvals: CE, UL E83725.
Temperature/Process Controller
1/32 DIN, Universal Input, Self-Tune, Fuzzy Logic

0.870
[22.10]
4.395
[111.60]
0.25 [6.35]
MAX. PANEL THICKNESS
1.184
[30.10]
0.433
[11.00]
2.080
[52.80]
STANDARD FEATURES
Large dual display
Self tune
Fuzzy logic
Universal input
Loop break protection
Peak/valley indication
Percent output indication
Illuminated keypad
16 segment ramp/soak function
Auto/manual station function
Four password protected security levels
The 32A Series temperature/process controllers set a new standard in
1/32 DIN power, flexibility and value. This group of controls offers the highest
level of features in the most compact industry standard size. Ease of use is assured
with the worlds first dual display 1/32 DIN temperature/ process controllers.
The Series 32A offers universal input (10 thermocouple types, 4 RTD types,
voltage and current), single or dual set point, alarm (optional), Fuzzy Logic, Self-
Tune, Peak/Valley indication, Percent Output indication and Heater Break
protection. Auto/Manual capability and 16 Segment Ramp and Soak with adjustable
time base are also offered. Process protection features include open sensor
protection, shorted sensor protection, input rate of change protection and loop
break protection.
Model
32A020
32A123
32A133
32A153
32A050
32A030
Alarm
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Output A
5 VDC
5 VDC
Relay
Current
Current
Relay
Modbus
is a registered trademark of Schrnieder Automation

Panel Cut Out: 1.772 x 0.874 x [45 x 22]
ACCESSORIES
MN-1, Mini Node

LoveLinks III, Configuration software
A-600, R/C snubber
OPTIONS (Add to the end of the model number)
-992, RS 485 Serial Communication
-9502, 12 24 VDC/VAC Power Input
Output B
None
Relay
Relay
Relay
None
None

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
/
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
The compact Series 32B Temperature/Process Controller offers
advanced control features for the most demanding temperature or process
applications. Enclosed in a 1/32 DIN housing, the Series 32B is designed with
dual, 4-digit LED displays for local indication of process value and setpoint.
Control methods include ON/OFF, PID, self-tune, and manual tune. PID control
is supported with 64 temperature and time (ramp/soak) control actions. The
dual loop output control allows simultaneous heating and cooling control. The
second output can be configured as an alarm mode using one of the thirteen
built-in alarm functions.
RS-485 communication is standard on the Series 32B. Up to 247 communication
addresses are available with transmission speeds of 2400 to 38,400 bps. The
controller also features universal input, selectable temperature units (F/C),
selectable resolution, quick sampling rate and security protection.
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, DC voltages or DC current.
Display: Two 4 digit, 7 segment .25 H (6.35 mm) LEDs. PV: red; SV:
green.
Accuracy: 0.25% span, 1 least significant digit.
Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
Operating Temperature: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Relay: SPST, 5A @ 250 VAC resistive;
Voltage pulse: 14V, 10% to 20% (max 40 mA);
Current: 4 to 20 mA.
Communication: RS 485 Modbus
A 5 11/RTU communication protocol.

1/32 DIN Temperature/Process Controller
Universal Input, Dual Temperature Output Control, RS-485 Communication
Series
32B
15/16
[24.00]
1-57/64
[48.00]
Input Types
Type K T/C
Type J T/C
Type T T/C
Type E T/C
Type W T/C
Type R T/C
Type S T/C
Type B T/C
Type L T/C
Type U T/C
Pt 100 RTD
0 50 mV
0 5 V
0 10 V
0 20 mA*
4 20 mA*
Range
328 to 2372F ( 200 to 1300C)
148 to 2192F ( 100 to 1200C)
328 to 752F ( 200 to 400C)
32 to 1112F (0 to 600C)
328 to 2372F ( 200 to 1300C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
212 to 3272F (100 to 1800C)
328 to 1562F ( 200 to 850C)
328 to 932F ( 200 to 500C)
328 to 1112F ( 200 to 600C)
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
1-49/64
[44.75]
9/64
[3.40]
3-59/64
[99.80]
55/64
[21.85]
*Requires 250 Ohm Precision Resistor.
Model
32B-23
32B-33
32B-53
Output 1
Voltage Pulse
Relay
Current
Modbus
is a registered trademark of Schrnieder Automation

ACCESSORIES
SCD-SW, Configuration Software
A-277, 250 Ohm Precision Resistor
MN-1, Mini Node

A-600, R/C snubber
Output 2
Relay
Relay
Relay

258
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
/
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
32DZ
1/32 DIN, Dual Zone Control, Fuzzy Logic, Self-Tune PID
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: Thermocouple, Type J, K, E, L, and N.
Display: Two 4 digit, 7 segment, 0.259 high (6.35 mm) LEDs.
Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC, nominal, +10 15%, 50 to 400 Hz.
single phase; 132 to 240 VDC, nominal, +10 20%.
Memory Backup: Nonvolative memory. No batteries required.
Relay: SPST, 3A @ 240 VAC resistive; 1.5A @ 240 VAC inductive;
Pilot duty rating: 250 VA, 2A @ 120 VAC or 1A @ 240 VAC;
Proportional current: 4 to 20 mA;
SSR: 0.75A at 240 VAC resistive at 77F (25C). De rates to 1.0 A at
130F (55C). Minimum load of 100 mA;
Voltage: Switched 5 VDC.
STANDARD FEATURES
Large dual display
Independent self tune for each zone
Independent fuzzy logic for each zone
Loop break protection
Peak/valley indication
Illuminated keypad
The Model 32DZ temperature/process controls set a new standard in
1/32 DIN power, flexibility, and value. Love Controls is proud to be the creator
of the worlds first dual zone control in the 1/32 DIN size. Ease of use is assured
from the creators of the worlds first dual display 1/32 DIN temperature /process
control. The 32DZ offers 5 thermocouple type inputs. Each zone offers a single
set point with mechanical relay. Standard features include independent Fuzzy
Logic, Self-Tune, and Peak/Valley indication for each zone. Process protection is
provided by open sensor protection, shorted sensor protection, input rate of
change protection, and loop break protection. Options for the 32DZ include RS-
485 Serial Communication. Designed and built in the USA, the 32DZ offers the
highest levels of features, function, and quality available today.

0.870
[22.10]
4.395
[111.60]
0.25 [6.35]
1.184
[30.10]
0.433
[11.00]
2.080
[52.80]
*Use ungrounded thermocouples.
Model
32DZ1133*
32DZ1153*
32DZ1111*
32DZ1122*
32DZ5533
Inputs
Thermocouple
Thermocouple
Thermocouple
Thermocouple
Current
Output A
Relay
Current
SSR
5 VDC
Relay
Panel Cut Out: 1.772 x 0.874 x [45 x 22]
OPTIONS (Add to the end of the model number)
-915, Auxillary Alarm Normally Open
-916, Auxillary Alarm Normally Closed
-992, RS 485 Serial Communications
-9502, 12 24 VDC/VAC Power Input
ACCESSORIES
MN-1, Mini Node

A-600, R/C snubber
Output B
Relay
Relay
SSR
5 VDC
Relay

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
/
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Latest microprocessor based technology affords full programmability with
complete array of features in compact ultra low cost unit. 16A Series
Temperature/Process Controller features universal input, Self-Tune PID, Fuzzy
Logic, and dual four-digit LED displays for process and set point value.
Selectable inputs can be thermocouple, RTD, current or voltage. Available
outputs are solid-state relay, relay, pulsed voltage, or proportional current.
Programmable alarm (optional) can be reset automatically or manually. Front
panel is waterproof and corrosion resistant (UL type 4X), making it ideal for
sanitary applications. Replace electronics without wiring changes (via
removable front panel). Self diagnostics, nonvolatile memory and selectable
control modes are all designed for greater productivity. Four security levels are
password protected. On-off, P, PI or PID manual tune control functions can be
selected or the controller will Self-Tune automatically for best PID control.
The 16A2 offers the best value in Standard Features in a Process and
Temperature control. In addition to the features listed above, the 16A2 offers
Peak/Valley indication, Percent Output indication, Digital Input Filter, and a
host of others.
For Enhanced Ramp and Soak features, change 16A2 to 16A3
1/16 DIN, Universal lnput, Fuzzy Logic, Self-Tune PID
Series
16A
1.76
[44.7]
PANEL CUT-OUT: 1.77 +0.02 [45 +0.6] SQUARE
5.24
[133]
0.45
[11.4]
1.89
[48]
0.25 [6.35]
** These options may not be combined with each other.
SPECIFICATIONS
Selectable Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, DC voltage, or DC current (see
input ranges).
Display: Two four digit LED displays, 0.3 in (7.62 mm) high.
Display Resolution: 1 degree or 0.1 degree (sensor dependent), or 1
count.
Accuracy: 0.25% of span 1 least significant digit.
Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC nominal, +10% 15%, 50 to 400 Hz
single phase; 132 to 240 VDC +10% 20%.
SSR: 2.0 A at 240 VAC resistive at 77F (25C). De rates to 1.0 A at
130F (55C). Minimum load of 100 mA;
DC SSR: 1.75 A at 32 VDC maximum;
Relay: SPST, 3A at 240 VAC resistive, 1.5 A @ 240 VAC inductive;
Pilot duty rating: 250 VA, 2 A @ 120 VAC, 1 A @ 240 VAC;
Alarm relay: SPST, 3 A @ 240 VAC resistive; 1.5 A @ 240 VAC
inductive. Pilot duty rating: 240 VA, 2 A @ 120 VAC or 1 A @ 240 VAC;
Switched voltage: 15 VDC at 20 mA;
Proportional current: 0 to 20 mADC, scalable, into 600 ohms maximum.
Agency Approvals: UL E83725, CE.
Serial Communications (Optional): RS 232 or RS 485 with either
LoveLink
Software or Modbus
RTU protocol.
Modbus

Model
16A2111
16A2030
16A2133
16A2130
16A2020
16A2110
16A2050
Alarm
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Ouput A
SSR
Relay
Relay
Relay
15 VDC
SSR
Current
OPTIONS (Add as a suffix to model number)
-934**, Process Signal Output, PV or SV. Isolated 0 to 20 mADC
-936**, Process Signal Output, PV or SV. Isolated 0 to 10 VDC
-992**, RS 485 Serial Communications Lovelink
TM
Protocol
-993**, RS 232 Serial Communications Lovelink
TM
Protocol
-995**, RS 232 Serial Communications Modbus RTV Protocol
-996**, RS 485 Serial Communications Modbus RTV Protocol
-9502, 12 24 VDC/VAC power input
ACCESSORIES
MN-1, Mini Node

A-600, R/C snubber
Output B
SSR
None
Relay
None
None
None
None

260
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
/
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
16B
Dual Control Output, RS-485 Communication, Universal Inputs
Monitor and control temperature or process applications with
precision using the Series 16B controllers. The units offer two separate outputs
for dual loop control in direct or reverse acting. Select relay, voltage, or current
output combined with a second relay output.
The Series 16B provides dual LED displays for local indication of process value
and setpoint value. Output status, engineering scale, auto tuning and alarm
status is also indicated on the front panel.
Control methods include ON/OFF, PID, self-tune and manual tune. PID control
is supported with 64 ramp/soak control actions. Two additional alarm outputs
are standard on the Series 16B. The alarm outputs can be quickly configured by
using the thirteen built-in alarm functions.
The controller easily communicates with other external devices such as PCs
and PLCs for data search and system integration using the built-in RS-485
interface. Up to 247 communication addresses are available with transmission
speeds of 2400 to 38,400 bps. The Series 16B also features universal input,
selectable F/C, selectable resolution and security functions.
SPECIFICATIONS
green.
A 5 11/RTU communication
protocol.
OUT1 AT ALM OUT2
1-49/64
[44.75]
3-5/32
[80.00]
1-57/64
[48.00]
1-57/64
[48.00]
3/8
[9.50]
Model
16B-23
16B-33
16B-53
Output 1
Voltage Pulse
Relay
Current
Input Types
Type K T/C
Type J T/C
Type T T/C
Type E T/C
Type W T/C
Type R T/C
Type S T/C
Type B T/C
Type L T/C
Type U T/C
Pt 100 RTD
0 50 mV
0 5 V
0 10 V
0 20 mA*
4 20 mA*
Range
328 to 2372F ( 200 to 1300C)
148 to 2192F ( 100 to 1200C)
328 to 752F ( 200 to 400C)
32 to 1112F (0 to 600C)
328 to 2372F ( 200 to 1300C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
212 to 3272F (100 to 1800C)
328 to 1562F ( 200 to 850C)
328 to 932F ( 200 to 500C)
328 to 1112F ( 200 to 600C)
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
*Requires 250 Ohm Precision Resistor
Modbus

ACCESSORIES
MN-1, Mini Node

A-600, R/C snubber
Output 2
Relay
Relay
Relay

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
/
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
The compact Series 16C Temperature Controller offers accurate
temperature measurement and control in a 1/16 DIN package. Designed for
direct or reverse acting (cooling or heating) control, the Series 16C can be
programmed for simple ON/OFF or more complex PID control functions. PID
control is supported with manual or auto-tuning. Select relay, voltage or current
output for control methods.
The Series 16C accepts a variety of thermocouple and RTD inputs. Process
value and setpoint value are displayed simultaneously on the large dual LED.
Auto-tuning, engineering units (F or C), and alarm status is also indicated on
the faceplate. Two alarm outputs are included on the unit with 12
preprogrammed alarm functions.
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, see chart.
green.
communication protocol.
1/16 DIN Temperature Controller
PID Control, Auto-Tuning, Dual Display, RS-485 Communication
Series
16C
OUT1 AT ALM OUT2
1-57/64
[48.00]
1-57/64
[48.00]
3/8
[9.50]
3-5/32
[80.00]
1-49/64
[44.75]
Input Types
Pt100 RTD
T/C type B
T/C type S
T/C type R
T/C type N
T/C type E
T/C type T
T/C type J
T/C type K
T/C type L
T/C type U
Range
32 to 212F (0 to 100C)
4 to 932F ( 20 to 500C)
328 to 1112F ( 200 to 600C)
212 to 3272F (100 to 1800C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
328 to 2372F ( 200 to 1300C)
32 to 1112F (0 to 600C)
4 to 752F ( 20 to 400C)
328 to 752F ( 200 to 400C)
4 to 752F ( 20 to 400C)
148 to 1562F ( 100 to 850C)
328 to 2372F ( 200 to 1300C)
328 to 932F ( 200 to 500C)
328 to 932F ( 200 to 500C)
328 to 1472F ( 200 to 800C)
Model
16C-2
16C-3
16C-5
Modbus

ACCESSORIES
MN-1, Mini Node

A-600, R/C snubber
Output
Voltage Pulse
Relay
Current

262
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
/
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series 2600 Temperature/Process Controllers set a new standard for
quality, versatility, ease-of-use and value. While they include a high level of
standard features, many function setup items appear in the control menu
only when the function is selected, so you dont have to wade through
unnecessary items. Units feature a universal input for thermocouple types J,
K, E, T, L, N, B, C, S & R; RTDs 100 Plt. NIST, 100 Plt. DIN, 120 Ni
Industrial, 1000 Plt. DIN; differential input (-10 to +10 mV DC) and process input
(0 to 20 mA DC, 0 to 10 VDC). A standard 24 Volt isolated, regulated power supply
is included to operate most standard 4-20 mA transmitters.
Standard features include Self-Tune, Fuzzy Logic, fully adjustable PID,
Auto/Manual control with bumpless transfer and front panel activation key,
percent output indication, peak and valley indication, loop break protection and
indication. For process inputs, the display is fully programmable from -1999 to
+9999 with selectable decimal point location. Most thermocouple and RTD
inputs can show whole or tenth degree displays. The Series 2600 is available
with single or dual setpoint outputs and can be programmed for on-off, PID or
heat/cool or latching alarm. All outputs are isolated from the inputs. Outputs
include 10 Amp relay, and 0-20 mA DC (scalable).
MORE STANDARD FEATURES
NEMA 4X (IP65) front panel resists dust and moisture
Front panel programmability
16 segments of ramp/soak with program end control
Operates on 100 240 VAC, 132 240 VDC
SPECIFICATIONS
Selectable Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, DC voltage or DC current.
Input Impedance:
Thermocouple: 3 Megohms minimum;
Voltage: 5000 ohms;
Current: 10 ohms;
RTD current: 200 A maximum.
Display: Two 4 digit, 7 segment, 0.56 (14.2 mm) high LED.
Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC nominal, +10% 15%, 50 to 400 Hz,
single phase; 132 to 240 VDC +10% 20%.
Control Output Ratings: Relay: SPDT,10A @ 240 VAC resistive, 1/2
hp @ 120 VAC, 1/3 hp @ 240 VAC; Alarm relay: SPST, 3A @ 240 VAC
resistive; Proportional current: 0 20 mA DC, scalable into 600 ohms
maximum.
Series
2600
1/4 DIN Self-Tune PID, Fuzzy Logic Software
4-9/16
[115.8]
17/32
[13.5]
3-25/32
[95.9]
3-19/32
[91.3]
3-25/32
[95.9]
1/4 [6.53] MAXIMUM PANEL
THICKNESS
Model
26130
26150
26133
Alarm
Yes
Yes
Yes
Output A
Relay
Current
Relay
Modbus

OPTIONS (Add to end of model number)
-924, Remote Set Point 0 to 10 VDC
-926, Remote Set Point 0 to 20 mA
-928, Remote Set Point 0 to 10 K Ohms
-934, Process Signal Output, Non Isolated 0 to 20 mADC
-936, Process Signal Output, Non Isolated 0 to 10 VDC
-992, RS XXX Serial Communications Love Link Protocol
-993, RS XXX Serial Communications Love Link Protocol
-995, RS XXX Serial Communications Modbus
RTV Protocol
-996, RS XXX Serial Communications Modbus
RTV Protocol
ACCESSORIES
MN-1, Mini Node

A-600, R/C snubber
Output B
None
None
Relay

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
/
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
4B
Dual Control Output, RS-485 Communication, Auto-Tuning
The Series 4B 1/4 DIN Temperature/Process Controller is designed to
accept thermocouple, RTD, current or voltage input and provide dual outputs
for control. Available outputs include relay/relay, voltage pulse/relay,
current/relay, or linear voltage/relay.
The units can be programmed for ON/OFF, PID, auto-tuning, or manual tuning
control methods. The PID control is supported by 64 ramp/soak actions. The
Series 4B also includes two additional alarm outputs. The second relay output
can be reconfigured as a third alarm output. The alarm type can be selected
from 13 different preprogrammed alarm functions. The controller features dual
LED displays for local indication of process and setpoint values.
SPECIFICATIONS
Display: Two 4 digit, 7 segment. PV: 3/4 H (19 mm) red; SV: 1/2 H
(12.7 mm) green.
Relay: SPDT, 5A @ 250 VAC resistive;
Current: 4 to 20 mA;
Linear voltage: 0 10V.
protocol.
Input Types
Type K T/C
Type J T/C
Type T T/C
Type E T/C
Type W T/C
Type R T/C
Type S T/C
Type B T/C
Type L T/C
Type U T/C
Pt 100 RTD
0 50 mV
0 5 V
0 10 V
0 20 mA*
4 20 mA*
Range
328 to 2372F ( 200 to 1300C)
148 to 2192F ( 100 to 1200C)
328 to 752F ( 200 to 400C)
32 to 1112F (0 to 600C)
328 to 2372F ( 200 to 1300C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
212 to 3272F (100 to 1800C)
328 to 1562F ( 200 to 850C)
328 to 932F ( 200 to 500C)
328 to 1112F ( 200 to 600C)
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
Model
4B-23
4B-33
4B-53
4B-63
Output 1
Voltage Pulse
Relay
Current
Linear Voltage
OU 1 ALM1 OUT2 AT ALM3 A M2
LOVE CONTROLS SERIES 4B
F C
3-25/32
[96.00]
3-27/32
[97.63]
3-25/32
[96.00]
5/8
[15.80)]
3-1/8
[79.2]
3-9/16
[90.81]
Modbus

ACCESSORIES
MN-1, Mini Node

A-600, R/C snubber
Output 2
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay

264
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
/
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
The Series 4C 1/4 DIN Temperature Controller offers easy-to-use
programming menus designed for quick installation. Control functions include
ON/OFF, PID, auto-tuning or manual tuning. The Series 4C is available with
relay, voltage or current output with two additional alarm outputs. The alarm
outputs can be configured from 12 different preprogrammed settings. The
Series 4C accepts a variety of thermocouple and RTD inputs. Process value and
setpoint value are simultaneously displayed with the process value in red and
setpoint in green.
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: Thermocouple or RTD, see chart.
Display: Two 4 digit, 7 segment. LEDs. PV: red .75 H (19 mm); SV:
green .5 (12.7 mm).

PID Control, Auto-Tuning, Large Dual Display, RS 485 Communication
Series
4C
OUT1 LM1 OUT2 T A M3 ALM2
LOVE CONTROLS SERIES 4C
3-25/32
[96.00]
3-27/32
[97.60]
3-25/32
[96.00]
5/8
[15.80]
3-1/8
[79.2]
3-9/15
[90.80]
F C
Model
4C-2
4C-3
4C-5
Input Types
Pt100 RTD
T/C type B
T/C type S
T/C type R
T/C type N
T/C type E
T/C type T
T/C type J
T/C type K
T/C type L
T/C type U
Range
32 to 212F (0 to 100C)
4 to 932F ( 20 to 500C)
328 to 1112F ( 200 to 600C)
212 to 3272F (100 to 1800C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
328 to 2372F ( 200 to 1300C)
32 to 1112F (0 to 600C)
4 to 752F ( 20 to 400C)
328 to 752F ( 200 to 400C)
4 to 752F ( 20 to 400C)
148 to 1562F ( 100 to 850C)
328 to 2372F ( 200 to 1300C)
328 to 932F ( 200 to 500C)
328 to 932F ( 200 to 500C)
328 to 1472F ( 200 to 800C)
Modbus

ACCESSORIES
MN-1, Mini Node USB/RS 485 Converter
A-600, R/C snubber
Output
Voltage Pulse
Relay
Current

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
/
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
The Series 4V 1/4 DIN Temperature Controller displays and controls the
current position of a valve or damper by accepting in a signal from a position
indicator such as our QV series. The controls can be programmed for ON/OFF,
PID, ramp and soak, auto-tuning or manual tuning control methods. For greater
design flexibility, the Series 4V accepts thermocouple, RTD, current or voltage
inputs. An auto/manual key is located on the front panel in order to toggle
between manual operation and automatic operation. The RS-485 serial
communications can work with either ASCII or Modbus
RTU protocol. During

normal operation, the controller will display the present value (PV), set point
value (SV) and the current valve position (%). The Series 4V is equipped with two
programmable alarm set points.
Model
4V-3
1/4 DIN Valve Temperature Controller
Valve Position Feedback, RS-485 Communications
3-3/4
[95.25]
3-51/64
[96.52]
3-43/64
[93.12]
3-11/16
[93.73]
LOVE CONTROLS SERIES 4V
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, DC Voltages or DC Current.
Display: 2 line, 7 segment LED, 4 bits and 2 bits of valve openness
display.
Accuracy: 0.25%, least significant digit.
Memory Backup: Non volatile memory.
Control Output Ratings: SPST, 5A @ 250 VAC resistive.
Communications: RS 485 Modbus
A 5 11/RTU Communication
Protocol.
Input Types
Type K T/C
Type J T/C
Type T T/C
Type E T/C
Type W T/C
Type R T/C
Type S T/C
Type B T/C
Type L T/C
Type U T/C
Pt 100 RTD
0 50 mV
0 5 V
0 10 V
0 20 mA*
4 20 mA*
Range
328 to 2372F ( 200 to 1300C)
148 to 2192F ( 100 to 1200C)
328 to 752F ( 200 to 400C)
32 to 1112F (0 to 600C)
328 to 2372F ( 200 to 1300C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
212 to 3272F (100 to 1800C)
328 to 1562F ( 200 to 850C)
328 to 932F ( 200 to 500C)
328 to 1112F ( 200 to 600C)
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
Modbus

NEW PRODUCT!
Model 4V-3, Valve Temperature Controller
ACCESSORIES
A-277, 250 ohm precision resistor
MN-1, Mini Node USB/RS 485 converter

266
W
e
a
t
h
e
r
p
r
o
o
f

E
n
c
o
s
u
r
e
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Models A-900 and A-901 are the perfect instrument housing for indoor or
outdoor applications. Protects controls from dirt, dust, oil and water. Unit is rated
weatherproof type NEMA 4X and has a fully gasketed cover. Standard features
include a lockable latch to prevent tampering and flush mounting hardware.
The Model A-900 comes standard with a 1/4 DIN cut out in the front cover.
Controller will mount with front face exposed for easy access to the programming
buttons. Love and Mercoid controllers feature weatherproof NEMA 4X rated
front panels and gaskets enabling the control to be weatherproof protected when
installed in the A-900 even though the front face is exposed. Wiring an installed
control is easy due to the hinged cover and spacious clearance for the control to
swing out with front cover. The lockable latch prevents unauthorized removal of
the control from the enclosure.
The Model A-901 comes standard with a clear plastic front window and mounting
hardware to install the control inside the box. Controller mounts just behind the
window assuring easy viewing. Mounting the control inside the enclosure
protects the control face from corrosive atmospheres or from being covered in oil,
dirt and dust. The lockable latch prevents unauthorized removal of the control
and removes access to the control programming buttons. The Mounting hardware
is attached to the rear of the enclosure and includes a bracket with a 1/4 DIN
cutout and standoffs long enough for Love and Mercoid controls to fit. Control
programming buttons are easily accessible by just opening the front cover.
FEATURES
UV stabilized for outdoor use
Snap latch with lockable hasp
Continuous cover hinge
Fiberglass material is easily punched or drilled for conduit connections
Includes feet and screws for flush mounting to a wall
Compatible with Love 2500, 2600, 4B, 4C, MPCJR and MPC
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Indoor or outdoor.
Rating: NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13.
Materials:
Body: UV stabilized fiberglass reinforced polyester;
Snap latch: 304 SS;
Hinge: Stainless steel;
Mounting feet and screws: 304 SS;
Window: UV stabilized polycarbonate;
Cover gasket: Neoprene.
Agency Approvals: UL 508.
Control Temperature Limits:
When using the enclosures with controls that have 10A relay outputs the
extra heat generation decreases the maximum ambient temperature value
that the control can be used at inside the enclosure. Other outputs on our
controls are not a concern.
1/4 DIN Control Enclosures
Weatherproof, Durable, Pre-Cut Mounting Hole
Series
A-900
&
A-901
A-900
For Models: 25XX3, 26XX3, 26X3X, 26X33, MPC, MPCJR
Ambient
Temperature
77F (25C)
104F (40C)
131F (55C)
Maximum Current
A-901
10 Amps
9 Amps
6 Amps
A-900
10 Amps
10 Amps
7.5 Amps
4-1/4
[107.95]
3-39/64
[91.68]
7-3/4
[195.33]
4-1/4
[107.95]
3-39/64
[91.68]
7-3/4
[195.33]
10-32 UNF-2B
TYP 8 PLCS
5
[127.51]
5
[127.51]
1-1/2
[38.10]
A-901 UNIT
(4-1/2 [114.30] STANDOFFS)
4 PLCS
4-1/8
[106.17]
1-3/4
[44.45]
TOP VIEW BOTTOM VIEW
SIDE VIEW
Model
A-900
A-901
A-901
Description
Weatherproof enclosure, Type 4X. Control
direct panel mounts in the front of the enclosure.
Weatherproof enclosure, Type 4X. Clear
plastic window with rear panel for mounting the
control inside the enclosure.
ACCESSORY
A-600, R/C snubber

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
/
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series 8600 Temperature/Process Controllers set a new standard for
quality, ease-of-use and value. While a high level of standard features are
included, many function setup items appear in the control menu only when the
function is selected, so you dont have to wade through unnecessary items. Units
feature a universal input for thermocouple types J, K, E, T, L, N, B, C, S, & R;
RTDs 100 Plt. NIST, 100 Plt. DIN, 120 Ni Industrial, 1000 Plt. DIN;
differential input (-10 to +10 mV DC) and process input (0 to 20 mA DC, 0 to 10
VDC). A standard 24 volt isolated, regulated power supply is included to
operate most standard 4-20 mA transmitters.
Standard features include Self-Tune, Fuzzy Logic, fully adjustable PID,
Auto/Manual control with bumpless transfer and front panel activation key,
percent output indication, peak and valley indication, loop break protection
and indication. For process inputs, the display is fully programmable from
- 1999 to +9999 with selectable decimal point location. Most thermocouple and
RTD inputs can show whole or tenth degree displays. The Series 8600 is
available with single or dual setpoint outputs and can be programmed for on-off,
PID or heat/cool or latching alarm. All outputs are isolated from the inputs.
Outputs include 10 amp relay, 2.5 amp SSR and 0-20 mA DC (scalable). 15
VDC SSR drive is standard.
MORE STANDARD FEATURES
NEMA 4X (IP 65) front panel resists dust and moisture
Front panel programmability
16 segments of ramp/soak with program end control
Operates on 100 240 VAC, 132 240 VDC
SPECIFICATIONS
Selectable Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, DC voltage or DC current.
Input Impedance:
Thermocouple: 3 megohms minimum;
Voltage: 5000 ohms;
Current: 10 ohms;
RTD Current: 200A maximum.
Display: Two 4 digit, 7 segment LED; 0.4 (10 mm) high horizontal
models; 0.3 (7.62 mm) high vertical models.
Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC nominal, +10% 15%, 50 to 400 Hz,
single phase; 132 to 240 VDC, +10% 20%.
SSR: 2.5 A at 240 VAC resistive at 77F (25C). De rate to 1.25 A at
130F (55C).
Relay: SPDT, 10 A at 240 VAC resistive, 1/2 hp at 120 VAC, 1/3 hp at
240 VAC.
Alarm relay: SPST, 3 A at 240 VAC resistive;
Switched voltage: 15 VDC at 20 mA;
Proportional current: 0 20 mA DC, scalable into 600 ohms maximum.
Series
8600
1/8 DIN Self-Tune PID, Fuzzy Logic Software
4-9/16
[115.8]
3-19/32
[91.3]
17/32
[13.5]
1-15/16
[49.1]
3-25/32
[95.9]
1/4 [6.53] MAXIMUM PANEL THICKNESS
Panel cutout 1.772 x 3.622 (45 x 92 mm).
Model
86111-0
86120-0
86133-0
86153-0
Output A
SSR
15 VDC Pulsed
Relay
0 20 mA
Output B
SSR
None
Relay
Relay
ACCESSORY
A-600, R/C snubber

268
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
/
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
The Series 8B 1/8 DIN Temperature/Process Controller offers
versatility and reliability for temperature and process monitoring applications.
Designed as a vertical mount 1/8 DIN controller, the Series 8B features dual
outputs, universal input, and up to three additional alarm outputs. The second
output can be configured as a third alarm output. Select the alarm type from 13
different preprogrammed alarm functions. Control methods include ON/OFF,
PID, auto-tune or manual tune. PID control is supported with 64 ramp/soak
control actions. RS-485 communication is standard on the Series 8B with up to
247 available addresses.
SPECIFICATIONS
green.
Linear voltage: 0 10V.
Vertical Mount, Dual Control Output, RS-485 Communication
Series
8B
Input Types
Type K T/C
Type J T/C
Type T T/C
Type E T/C
Type W T/C
Type R T/C
Type S T/C
Type B T/C
Type L T/C
Type U T/C
Pt 100 RTD
0 50 mV
0 5 V
0 10 V
0 20 mA*
4 20 mA*
Range
328 to 2372F ( 200 to 1300C)
148 to 2192F ( 100 to 1200C)
328 to 752F ( 200 to 400C)
32 to 1112F (0 to 600C)
328 to 2372F ( 200 to 1300C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
212 to 3272F (100 to 1800C)
328 to 1562F ( 200 to 850C)
328 to 932F ( 200 to 500C)
328 to 1112F ( 200 to 600C)
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
V
V
S R ES B
OU 2 OUT1
ALM1 A LM 3 A M2 AT
1-7/8
[47.80]
3-49/64
[95.70]
3-7/8
[98.20]
1/2
[12.80]
3-1/8
[79.20]
3-37/64
[91.00]
1-3/4
[44.00]
F C
Model
8B-23
8B-33
8B-53
8B-63
Output 1
Voltage Pulse
Relay
Current
Linear Voltage
Modbus

ACCESSORIES
MN-1, Mini Node

A-600, R/C snubber
Output 2
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
/
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
8C
ON/OFF or PID Control, Auto-Tuning, RS 485 Communication
The Series 8C Temperature Controller offers easy-to-use programming
menus designed for quick installation. The unit is designed for direct or reverse
acting (cooling or heating) control. The Series 8C can be programmed for
simple ON/OFF or more complex PID control functions. PID control is
supported with manual or auto-tuning. Select relay, voltage pulse, or current
output control methods. The controller also includes two additional alarm
outputs. The alarm outputs can be configured from 12 different
preprogrammed settings.
The temperature controller accepts a variety of thermocouple and RTD inputs.
The process value and setpoint value are displayed simultaneously on the large
dual LED. Auto-tuning, engineering units (F or C) and alarm status is also
indicated on the faceplate.
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: Thermocouple & RTD (see chart).
green.
Model
8C-2
8C-3
8C-5
Input Types
Pt100 RTD
T/C type B
T/C type S
T/C type R
T/C type N
T/C type E
T/C type T
T/C type J
T/C type K
T/C type L
T/C type U
Range
32 to 212F (0 to 100C)
4 to 932F ( 20 to 500C)
328 to 1112F ( 200 to 600C)
212 to 3272F (100 to 1800C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
328 to 2372F ( 200 to 1300C)
32 to 1112F (0 to 600C)
4 to 752F ( 20 to 400C)
328 to 752F ( 200 to 400C)
4 to 752F ( 20 to 400C)
148 to 1562F ( 100 to 850C)
328 to 2372F ( 200 to 1300C)
328 to 932F ( 200 to 500C)
328 to 932F ( 200 to 500C)
328 to 1472F ( 200 to 800C)
V
V
SER ES C
OU 2 OUT1
A M1 ALM3 A M2 AT
F C
LOVE CONTROLS
3-7/8
[98.20]
3-49/64
[95.70]
1-7/8
[47.80]
1/2
[12.80]
3-1/8
[79.20]
3-37/64
[91.00]
1-3/4
[44.00]
Modbus

ACCESSORIES
MN-1, Mini Node

A-600, R/C snubber
Output
Voltage Pulse
Relay
Current

270
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
/
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Multi-Loop DIN Rail Mount Temperature Controller
Up to 8 Control Loops, Optional Display
Series
SCD-8
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: Thermocouple: RTD (depending on model, see chart).
Display: Optional, single row 7 segment LED display, 4 bit PV = Red,
SV = Green.
Supply Voltage: 24 VDC, isolated switching power supply.
Power Consumption: 10W + (3W x # of SCD 2000 modules).
Relay output: SPST, 3A @ 250 VAC resistive;
Voltage pulse: Output: 24 VDC max, 40 mA;
Current output: 4 to 20 mA (resistive load < 500 ) (output 1 or 2 only);
Linear voltage: 0 to 10 VDC (resistive load > 1000 ) (output 1 or 2 only).
Communications: RS 485 Modbus
A 5 11/RTU communication protocol.

The Series SCD-8 Multi-Loop DIN Rail Mount Temperature Controller can be used
to control up to 8 independent PID control circuits. The base unit comes standard with 4
thermocouple or 3 RTD input channels. Additional input cards can be purchased if needed,
but the additional inputs must be of the same type as the inputs that came with the base unit.
If more than 8 loops are required or to mix input types, SCD-2000 slave modules can be
added without wiring additional power or communications cables. Each loop can be
programmed either through the standard RS-485 serial communications or an optional plug
in LED display module.
Each control loop will have two outputs and a single input. The outputs can be configured
for dual loop control or for a control loop and an alarm. One of the two outputs for each
control loop must be a relay or pulsed voltage output.
Model
SCD-8000
SCD-8100
Base Units
Model
SCD-4T
SCD-3R
SCD-42
SCD-43
SCD-45
SCD-46
Input/Output Modules
Input Sensor Types
Temperature measurement
resistance (Cu50)
Platinum resistance (Pt100)
Platinum resistance (JPt100)
Thermocouple TXK type
Thermocouple U type
Thermocouple L type
Thermocouple B type
Thermocouple S type
Thermocouple R type
Thermocouple N type
Thermocouple E type
Thermocouple T type
Thermocouple J type
Thermocouple K type
Note: The default setting in SCD 8000 is
thermocouple K type. The default setting in SCD
8100 is Pt100.
SCD 8100/SCD 3R
SCD 8000/SCD 4T
Range
50 to 150C
200 to 600C
20 to 400C
200 to 800C
200 to 500C
200 to 850C
100 to 1800C
0 to 1700C
0 to 1700C
200 to 1300C
0 to 600C
200 to 400C
100 to 1200C
200 to 1300C
Example
Construction
Input Selection
Output 1 Card
Selection
Output 2 Card
Selection
Options
SCDM 8
SCDM 8
X
0
1
2
3
X
0
2
3
5
6
X
0
2
3
5
6
X
LED
PV
2-1/2 [63.50]
4-21/64 [109.86]
3-35/64
[89.92]
Modbus

Shown with optional display and additional inputs and outputs.
See Series SCD on page 271 for slave modules.
Input Type
Thermocouple
RTD
Input/Output Type
4 Thermocouple Inputs
3 RTD Inputs
4 Pulse Voltage Outputs
4 Relay Outputs
4 Current Outputs
4 Linear Voltage Outputs
ACCESSORIES
SCD-PS, DIN Rail Mount 24 VDC Power Supply
SCD-LED, Optional LED Display Module
MN-1, Mini Node USB/RS 485 converter
A-600, R/C snubber
For Factory Configured Models, Relay Outputs are standard on Output Sub1
(and Sub2 if 8 inputs selected).
SCDM 8XXX X
Multi Loop DIN Rail Mount
3 RTD Inputs
6 RTD Inputs
None
Pulsed Voltage
Relay
Current
Linear Voltage
None
Pulsed Voltage
Relay
Current
Linear Voltage
LED Display
Pulsed Voltage on Alarm Output Sub 1 & Sub 2

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
/
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
The DIN Rail Mount Series SCD offers multiple PID loops in a compact size.
Each SCD-1000 master controller can be combined with up to seven SCD-2000
slave controllers without any wires. Each controller has one universal input, one
relay output and one user selected output. The outputs can be used for a dual
loop to control heating and cooling or a single loop with an alarm. These
controllers support up to 64 ramp/soak actions. The SCD series controllers are
programmed using an user-friendly software program via the RS-485 Modbus
communications.
Series
SCD
DIN Rail Temperature/ Process Controller
Universal Inputs, Up to 8 PID Loops, Modbus
Communications
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, DC linear voltage, and DC currents.
Supply Voltage: 24 VDC.
Power Consumption: 3 W.
Memory Backup: Non volatile.
Relay: Resistive load @ 250 VAC 3 A;
Voltage pulse: 12 VDC, max. output current: 40 mA;
Current: 4 20 mA output;
Linear voltage: 0 10 VDC.
protocol.
Weight: 2.7 oz (76.5 g).
Model
SCD-1023
SCD-1033
SCD-1053
SCD-1063
SCD-2023
SCD-2033
SCD-2053
SCD-2063
Output 1
Voltage Pulse
Relay
Current
Linear Voltage
Voltage Pulse
Relay
Current
Linear Voltage
Input Types
Type K T/C
Type J T/C
Type T T/C
Type E T/C
Type W T/C
Type R T/C
Type S T/C
Type B T/C
Type L T/C
Type U T/C
Pt 100 RTD
0 50 mV
0 10 V
0 20 mA*
4 20 mA*
Ranges
328 to 2372F ( 200 to 1300C)
148 to 2192F ( 100 to 1200C)
328 to 752F ( 200 to 400C)
32 to 1112F (0 to 600C)
328 to 2372F ( 200 to 1300C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
212 to 3272F (100 to 1800C)
328 to 3272F ( 200 to 850C)
328 to 932F ( 200 to 500C)
328 to 1112F ( 200 to 600C)
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
999 to 9999
Slave Controller Master Controller
Controller
Master
Master
Master
Master
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
2-1/4
[57.15]
MASTER
EXTENSION
PORT
3-13/16
[96.84]
3-35/64
[90.09]
1
[25.4]
SLAVE
EXTENSION
PORT
Modbus

ACCESSORIES
SCD-PS, 24 VDC Power Supply
MN-1, Mini Node

A-600, R/C snubber
Output 2
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay

272
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
/
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
DIN Rail Mount Temperature/Process Control
Universal Input, Two-Color Dual Display
Series
SCZ10
22.5
[0.886]
100
[3.937]
97
[3.819]
4
[0.157]
DIN RAIL
75
[2.953]
SPECIFICATIONS
Input:
Thermocouple: K, J, R, S, E, T, N, PL II, C (W/Re5 26);
External resistance: 100 or less;
B thermocouple: External resistance: 40 or less;
RTD: Pt100, JPt100 3 wire system. Allowable input wire resistance
(10 or less per wire);
DC current: 0 to 20 mADC, 4 to 20 mA input impedance 50
(50 shunt resistor sold separately);
DC voltage: 0 to 1 VDC;
Input impedance: 1M or greater.
Output Ratings:
Relay contact: 3A @ 250 VAC, Resistive; 1A @ 250 VAC
Inductive (CS =0.4), electric life 100,000 cycles.
Switched voltage (for SSR drive): 12 VDC @ 40 mA max.
(short circuit protected)
DC current: 4 to 20 mADC, Load resistance: Max. 550 output
accuracy: 0.3% of output span. Resolution: 12,000 counts.
Control Type: P, PI, PD, PID, Self Tune, on off, process retransmission.
Proportional Band: 0.0 to 110.0% (ON/OFF when set to 0.0).
Integral Time: 0 to 1000 seconds (Off when set to 0).
Derivative Time: 0 to 300 seconds (Off when set to 0).
Proportional Cycle: 1 to 120 seconds.
Manual Reset: Proportional band converted value.
Output Limit: 0 to 100% (DC current output type: 5 to 105%).
Hysteresis: Thermocouple and RTD input: 0.1 to 100.0 degrees
DC voltage and current input: 1 to 1000 (decimal point place
follows the selection).
Power Requirements: 120 240 VAC, 50 60 Hz, 24 VAC 50 60 Hz optional.
Power Consumption: Approximately 6VA.
Accuracy: Thermocouple input: 0.2% of input span, 1 digit or 4F
(2C),whichever is greater. R, S input: 0 to 400F (0 to 200C): 6C (12F). B
input: 0 to 600F (0 to 300C): Accuracy is not guaranteed.
K, J, E, N input less than 32F (0C): 0.4% of input span 1 digit.
RTD input: 0.1% of input span 1 digit or 2F (1C), whichever
is greater. DC voltage input: 0.2% of input span 1 digit. DC current input: 0.2%
of input span 1 digit.
Input Sampling Period: 0.25 seconds, 4 Hz.
PV Display: Red LED 4 digit character size: 7.5 x 4.1 mm (H x W).
SV Display: Green LED 4 digit character size 7.5 x 4.1 mm (H x W).
Display Resolution: 1 count, 1 degree, or 0.1 degree, depending on selected
range.
Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory, no battery used.
Ambient Temperature: 32 to 131F (0 to 50C).
Ambient Humidity: 35 to 85%RH (non condensing).
Weight: Approx. 5.3 oz (150 g).
The Series SCZ10 has its own dual display and keypad, making process monitoring and
programming a snap. The universal input allows field programming for a wide variety of
sensors, making the SCZ10 one of the most flexible controls or transmitters available today.
When used as a control, the SCZ10 is available with mechanical relay, switched (pulsed) DC
for SSRs, or proportional current (4-20 mA) to drive motor actuators or proportional power
units (SCRs). When used as a transmitter, the 4-20 mA output may be scaled virtually
anywhere on the input scale, allowing for the greatest application flexibility.
FEATURES
Dual display
Control or transmitter
Self Tune and PID
Directly programmable from self contained keypad
Universal input
Compact DIN rail mount
Input Type Range F Range C
Type J Thermocouple 320 to 1800 200 to 1000
1
Type K Thermocouple 320 to 25001 200 to 1370
1
Type T Thermocouple 200 to 7501 200 to 400
1
Type E Thermocouple 320 to 1500 200 to 800
Type R Thermocouple 0 to 3200 17 to 1760
Type S Thermocouple 0 to 3200 17 to 1760
Type B Thermocouple 0 to 3300 0 to 1820
Type C Thermocouple 0 to 4200 0 to 2315
Type PL II Thermocouple 0 to 2500 0 to 1390
Type N Thermocouple 320 to 1500 200 to 800
100 Plt. 0.00385 DIN RTD 300 to 1500
1
200 to 850
1
100 Plt. 0.003916 JIS1 RTD 300 to 900
1
200 to 500
1
Current/Voltage/ Voltage
2
Scalable Units from 1999 to +9999
Model
SCZ10-1000-00
SCZ10-2000-00
SCZ10-3000-00
SCZ10-3100-00
Supply Voltage
120 to 240 VAC
24 VAC/DC
1
These input ranges can be set for 0.1 display. Range may be limited
to no greater than 999.9 or less than 199.9.
2
The 0 to 20 mADC, 4 to 20 mADC, 0 to 5 VDC, 1 to 5 VDC, and 0 to
10 VDC inputs are fully scalable from a minimum of 100 counts span
placed anywhere within the range of 1999 to +9999. Decimal point
position is adjustable from the zero place (9999), tenths (999.9)
place, or hundredths (99.99) place.
Output
Relay
Switched Voltage
Current
Current
ACCESSORY
A-600, R/C snubber

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
D
g
t
a
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
SPECIFICATIONS
Selectable Inputs: 10 thermocouple, 4 RTD, DC voltage, or DC
current selectable.
Display: Two 4 digit, 7 segment 0.3 (7.62 mm) high LEDs.
Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC, nominal, +10 -15%, 50 to 400
Hz. single phase; 132 to 240 VDC, nominal, +10 -20%.
Operating Temperature: 14 to 131F (-10 to 55C).
Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory. No batteries required.
Control Output Ratings: Relay: SPST, 3A @ 240 VAC
resistive; 1.5A @ 240 VAC inductive.
Agency Approvals: UL, FM.
Series
16L
Limit Controls
FM Approved, Large Dual Display, Universal Input
STANDARD FEATURES
FM approved limit
Large dual display
Universal input
Dedicated, illuminated reset key
Remote reset capability standard
The 16L Series Temperature/Process FM Approved Limit
Controls set a new standard in 1/16 DIN limit controls. The 16L offers
universal input (10 thermocouple types, 4 RTD types, voltage, and
current), single set point or dual set point. Standard features include
remote reset capability, peak/valley indication, open sensor protection,
input rate of change protection, and much more.
Unit offers 1500 VAC resolution, selectable high or low input,
programmable sensor break protection and adjustable differential.
Outputs include normally open (form A) and normally closed (form B)
relays. Form A and form B relays can be setup one for each set point
output and logically linked to emulate a form C output.
Designed and built in the USA, the 16L family of controls offers the
highest levels of features, function, and quality available today.
0.45
[11.4]
5.24 [133]
1.89
[48]
1.76
[44.7]
0.25 [6.35]
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES (MILLIMETERS).
PANEL CUT OUT IS 1.77 +0.02 (45 + 0.6) SQUARE.
Model
16L2030
16L2034
Output A
N.O. Relays
N.O. Relays
OPTIONS (Add as a suffix to model number)
-934, Process Signal Output, Isolated 0 to 20 mADC
-936, Process Signal Output, Isolated 0 to 10 VDC
-992, RS-RS-485 Serial Communications
-993, RS-RS-232 Serial Communications
Output B
None
N.C. Relays
ACCESSORY
A-600, R/C snubber

274
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
D
g
t
a
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Thermocouple Limit Control
FM Approved High Limit Switch
Series
TSF
2-19/32
[65.88]
1-11/32
[34.13]
2-23/32
[69.06]
1-7/64
[28.18]
Panel Cutout 2 51/64 x 1 9/64 (71 x 29)
SPECIFICATIONS
Probe Range: 0 to 700C (32 to
999F) for thermocouple J type. 0 to
999C (32 to 999F) for thermocouples
K or S type.
Input: Type J, K or S thermocouple.
Output: 16A SPDT relay @ 250 VAC
resistive.
Horsepower Rating (HP): 1 HP.
Control Type: ON/OFF;
manual/automatic reset.
Power Requirements: 110 VAC, 230
VAC, 12 VAC/VDC or 24 VAC/VDC
(depending on model).
Power Consumption: 4 VA.
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Display: 3 digit, red, 1/2 (12.7 mm)
digits, plus sign.
Resolution: 1.
131F ( 10 to 55C).
( 20 to 80C).
Agency Approvals: CE, FM, UL, ULc.
Model
TSF-4010
TSF-4011
TSF-4020
TSF-4021
TSF-4030
TSF-4031
TSF-4040
TSF-4041
The Series TSF Thermocouple FM Approved Limit Control provides audible alarm
status along with a robust 16 amp relay output. Unit allows the user to easily select
automatic or manual reset along with 10 other parameters. The TSF series has a built in
reset button on the front panel or can accept an external reset.
Series
TCS
Thermocouple Temperature Switch
Heating and Cooling Control, 16 Amp Rating, Two Alarms
Monitor and control temperature in heating and cooling applications with the Series
TCS Thermocouple Switch. The Series TCS offers a wide temperature range, two
selectable alarm sets, and an internal buzzer indicating alarm condition or error. The user
can define set point, heating/cooling regulation, cycle time, alarm configuration, load status,
and ambient probe adjustment. The thermocouple switch features password protection and
error/alarm messaging. Temperature and output status is indicated on the bright red LED
display. Use the configuration key (sold separately) to quickly program multiple units. The
Series TCS includes a fitting clip for panel mounting, gasket, rear terminal cover and
instruction manual.
3
[76]
1-11/32
[34]
2-3/8
[60]
1-7/64
[28]
SPECIFICATIONS
Probe Range: 0 to 700C (32 to
999F) for thermocouple J;
0 to 999C (32 to 999F) for
thermocouples K, S.
Input: Type J or K thermocouple.
resistive.
VAC, 12 VAC/VDC or 24 VAC/VDC
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Display: 3 digit, red, 1/2 (12.7 mm)
digits, plus sign.
Resolution: 1.
158F (0 to 70C).
( 20 to 80C).
Panel Cutout 2 51/64 x 1 9/64 (71 x 29 mm)
Model
TCS-4010
TCS-4011
TCS-4020
TCS-4021
TCS-4030
TCS-4031
TCS-4040
ACCESSORIES
TCS-J, J type thermocouple, 4 probe, 48 extension
TCS-K, K type thermocouple, 4 probe, 48 extension
TS2-K, Configuration Key
Description
Type J/K/S input, 110 V, F
Type J/K/S input, 110 V, C
Type J/K/S input, 230 V, F
Type J/K/S input, 230 V, C
Type J/K/S input, 12 VAC/VDC, F
Type J/K/S input, 12 VAC/VDC, C
ACCESSORIES
TCS-J, J Type Thermocouple, 4 probe, 48 extension
TCS-K, K Type Thermocouple, 4 probe, 48 extension
Description
Type J/K/S input, 110V, F
Type J/K/S input, 110V, C
Type J/K/S input, 230V, F
Type J/K/S input, 230V, C

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
D
g
t
a
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Digital Thermocouple/RTD Temperature Switch
3-1/2 Digit Display, Programming Configuration Key
Series
40T
The Series 40T Digital Temperature Switch accepts thermocouple and
RTD inputs to allow temperature measurements and set points up to 1999F
(1300C). Observing the current status of the control is made easier with the
3-1/2 digit, multi-color LED display that has alarm, defrost and output symbols.
For added versatility, the temperature units can be field selected for F or C.
For cooling applications, manual defrost mode can be initiated by pushing a
single button. A flashing alarm informs users when the current temperature
exceeds preset limits. When programming multiple units, a programming key
is available to reduce set up time.
SPECIFICATIONS
Probe Range:
K T/C: 140 to 1999F ( 100 to 1300C);
J T/C: 140 to 1450F ( 100 to 800C);
RTD: 320 to 1200F ( 200 to 650C).
Input: Pt100 RTD and J/K type thermocouple.
Output: 16A @ 250 VAC SPDT relay (max current allowed is 10A).
Control Type: On/off.
Power Requirements: 12 to 24 VAC/VDC, 115 VAC or 230 VAC
depending on model.
Accuracy: 1% F.S.
Display: 3 1/2 digit red display.
Resolution: 0.1C.
Front Panel Rating: IP 65.
Agency Approvals: UL, CE.
Model
40T-10
40T-20
40T-40
Thermocouple Input Models
2-31/64
[63.22]
1-3/32
[27.94]
3
[76.20]
1-11/32
[33.99]
2-3/8
[60.33]
3-3/16
[80.92]
2-3/16
[55.52]
7/16
[10.92]
NEW PRODUCT!
ACCESSORIES
40X-K, Configuration key
TCS-J, J type thermocouple, 4 probe, 48 extension
TCS-K, K type thermocouple, 4 probe, 48 extension
Supply
Power
115 VAC
230 VAC
12 24 VAC/VDC

276
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
D
g
t
a
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
TS3
SPECIFICATIONS
Probe Range:
PTC: 58 to 302F ( 50 to 150C);
NTC: 58 to 230F ( 50 to 110C).
Input: PTC (1000 @ 25C) / NTC
(10K @ 25C).
Output: R1 SPDT relay resistive load
16A, inductive load 10 FLA, 60 LRA @
240 VAC.
Horsepower Rating: 1HP @ 240 VAC.
Power Requirement: 115 VAC, 230
VAC, 12 VAC/VDC, 24 VAC/DC (10%)
depending on model.
Power Consumption: 3.6VA
(115/230/24 V), 1.5VA (12V).
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Display: 3 digits plus sign.
Resolution: 0.1.
Memory Backup: Non volatile
memory.
Ambient Temperature: 32 to 131F (0
to 55C).
Digital Temperature Switch
Field Selectable Engineering Units, Real Time Clock
The Series TS3 Digital Temperature Switch is the ideal control for on/off heating or
cooling applications. This generation of controls has field selectable engineering units and
temperature probe types in order to reduce the combination of parts that need to be
stocked. A built-in real time clock is used for HACCP logging of temperature alarms caused
by temperatures outside of their set limits or loss of power. For refrigeration applications,
the defrost cycle can be initiated based on time or using the front panel keys. For
programming multiple units, the model TS2-K configuration key can be used to quickly
download parameter settings.
Model
TS3-50010
TS3-50020
TS3-50030
TS3-50040
3 [76.20]
1-3/8
[35.08]
1-3/64
[26.67]
2-3/4 [69.85]
2-5/8 [66.74]
2-7/16 [61.98]
ACCESSORIES
See page 280.
Series
TSX3
SPECIFICATIONS
Probe Range:
PTC: 58 to 302F ( 50 to 150C);
NTC: 58 to 230F ( 50 to 110C).
Input: PTC (1000 @ 25 C) / NTC (10K @ 25 C)/digital input contact.
Output: All models SPST NO relay resistive load 16A, inductive load 5A, 10 FLA,
60 LRA @ 240 VAC; dual output models also include 8A resistive, 3A inductive
SPDT @ 240 VAC; three output models also include 8A resistive SPST NO @ 240
VAC, 5A resistive SPST NO @ 240 VAC.
Horsepower Rating: 1HP @ 240 VAC.
Power Requirement: 115 VAC, 230 VAC, 12 VAC/VDC, 24 VAC/DC (10%)
depending on model.
Power Consumption: 3.6VA (115/230/24 V), 1.5VA (12V).
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Display: 3 digits plus sign.
Resolution: 0.1.
Digital Refrigeration Temperature Switch
Intelligent Defrost, HACCP Alarm Logging
The Series TSX3 Digital Temperature Switch was designed to control the compressor,
fan, and defrost in refrigeration applications. This generation of controls has field selectable
engineering units and temperature probe types in order to reduce the combination of parts
that need to be stocked. A built-in real time clock is used for HACCP logging of temperature
alarms caused by temperatures out of their set limits or loss of power. The Intelligent
Defrost parameters manage the defrost cycle in order to save energy cost. The digital input
can be used to remotely trigger a defrost cycle, monitor cooler door status, or act as an
external alarm. For programming multiple units, the model TS2-K configuration key can
be used to quickly download parameter settings.
Model
TSX3-520122
TSX3-520222
TSX3-520322
TSX3-520422
TSX3-520132
TSX3-520232
TSX3-520332
TSX3-520432
TSX3-500122
TSX3-500222
TSX3-500322
TSX3-500422
TSX3-500132
TSX3-500232
TSX3-500332
TSX3-500432
Supply
Power
115 VAC
230 VAC
12 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
115 VAC
230 VAC
12 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
115 VAC
230 VAC
12 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
115 VAC
230 VAC
12 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
# of
Outputs
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3 [76.20] 2-5/8 [66.74]
2-7/16 [61.98]
1-3/64
[26.67]
2-3/4 [69.85]
1-3/8
[35.08]
ACCESSORIES
See page 280.
Supply Power
115 VAC
230 VAC
12 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
Display
Color
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
D
g
t
a
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
TS2
Monitor and control temperature for heating and cooling applications with the
Series TS2 Digital Temperature Switch. The Series TS2 offers twelve programmable
functions to customize the unit to fit application requirements. Use the 16 (5) Amp SPDT
relay output to drive a motor, compressor, or fan. Designed with the OEM in mind, the
TS2 offers the ability to configure multiple units with the touch of a button.
Programming multiple units is quick and easy. Simply program one switch with the desired
parameter settings and connect the configuration key (sold separately) to the back of the
unit. Press the button on the configuration key and download the parameter settings.
Connect the key to the other switches to upload the stored settings with the push of a button.
The TS2 features set point adjustments, static defrost timing, compressor mean time,
hysteresis, and ambient probe adjustment. Security protection is offered using a password
code. The Series TS2 Digital Temperature Switches are designed to operate with PTC
(1000 @ 25C) probes sold separately.
SPECIFICATIONS
Probe Range: 58 to 302F ( 50 to
150C).
Input: PTC thermistor 1000 @ 25C.
resistive, 5A inductive.
VAC, 12 VAC/VDC or 24 VAC/VDC.
Accuracy: 1% F.S.
Display: 3 digit, red, 1/2 digits.
Resolution: 1.
158F (0 to 70C).
( 20 to 80C).
Agency Approvals: CE, ULc, UL.
3
[76.2]
1-11/32
[34.13]
2-3/8
[60.38]
1-7/64
[28.18]
Easy Multi-Unit Programming, 16A SPDT Relay Output
Model
TS2-010
TS2-011
TS2-020
TS2-030
TS2-040
TS2-041
Voltage Supply
110 VAC
110 VAC
230 VAC
12 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
ACCESSORIES
See page 280
Display
F
C
F
F
F
C
Series
TSS2
Regulate temperatures for heating or cooling control with the Series TSS2 Dual
Stage Temperature Switch. The Series TSS2 is designed to accept two inputs with
independent relays output for dual stage temperature control.
The Series TSS2 offers 34 programmable parameters to customize control functions. Access
to all parameters, except setpoint, can be secured with a password code.
SPECIFICATIONS
Probe Range: 58 to 302F ( 50 to
150C).
Input: PTC thermistor (1000 @
25C).
Outputs: One 16A SPDT relay @ 250
VAC, resistive; One 8A SPDT relay @
250 VAC resistive.
Power Requirements: 12 VAC/DC, 24
VAC/DC, 115 VAC, 230 VAC
depending on model.
Display: 3 digit and sign, red LED.
Resolution: 0.1 (<100); 1 (100).
Temperature Limit: Ambient: 32 to
158F (0 to 70C).
Storage Temperature: 4 to 176F ( 20
to 80C).
Dimensions: 3 x 1 27/64 x 2 7/16 in.
Dual Stage Temperature Switch
Two Independent Relay Outputs, Heating or Cooling Control
Panel Cutout 2 51/64 x 1 9/64 (71 x 29)
1-27/64
[36.12]
3
[76.2] 2-7/16
[61.91]
1-9/64
[28.97]
Model
TSS2-2100
TSS2-2200
TSS2-2300
TSS2-2400
TSS2-2110
TSS2-2210
TSS2-2310
TSS2-2410
Unit
F
F
F
F
C
C
C
C
ACCESSORIES
See page 280
Voltage Supply
115 VAC
230 VAC
12 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
115 VAC
230 VAC
12 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC

278
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
D
g
t
a
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
TSX
Dual Input, Cooling Applications, Single or Dual Relay Output
The microprocessor based Series TSX offers a low cost solution
for cooling applications. Units are designed to accept up to two
temperature probes selectable between PTC or NTC thermistor input.
The probe temperature is displayed on the bright 3-digit LED.
The Series TSX offers 23 programming parameters for specific
application requirements. To quickly program multiple units with the
same settings, use the configuration key TS2-K (sold separately). The
user can define set point, hysteresis, probe error performance, and
defrosting. The defrosting mode can also be initiated or interrupted
manually by pressing the up arrow button. Units include password
protection to secure from unwanted setting changes except for set point
adjustment. If required, the keypad can be locked out so no
adjustments can be made.
Select from single output units with one 16A SPST relay dual output
with one 16A SPST relay and one 8A SPDT relay for defrosting or
three output models with one 16A SPST, 8A SPST and 5A SPDT. The
temperature switch includes one NTC probe, gasket, mounting clips,
and instruction manual.
[1.338]
[3.000] [2.375]
[1.100]
SPECIFICATIONS
Probe Range:
PTC: -58 to 302F (-50 to 150C);
NTC: -58 to 230F (-50 to 110C).
Input: PTC thermistor 1000 @ 25C; NTC thermistor 10000
@ 25C.
Output: All models include 16A SPST relay @ 250 VAC
resistive, 5A inductive; Dual output units also have one 8A
SPDT relay @ 250 VAC resistive, 3A inductive, 3 output models
also have 5A SPDT @ 250 VAC and 8A SPST @ VAC.
Horsepower Rating (HP): 16A: 1HP 240 VAC - 10FLA, 60LRA
250 VAC.
Power Requirements: 110 VAC; 230 VAC; 24 VAC/DC;
Accuracy: 1% F.S.
Display: 3-digit, red, 1/2 (12.7 mm) digits.
Resolution: 0.1 (<100); 1 (100).
Temperature Limit: Ambient: 32 to 158F (0 to 70C).
Storage Temperature: -4 to 176F (-20 to 80C).
Dual Input, Three Output
Model
TSX-10340
TSX-11340
TSX-20340
TSX-21340
TSX-40340
TSX-41340
ACCESSORIES
See page 280
Dual Input, Dual Output
Supply Voltage
110 VAC
110 VAC
230 VAC
230 VAC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
Model
TSX-10240
TSX-11240
TSX-20240
TSX-21240
TSX-40240
TSX-41240
Supply Voltage
110 VAC
110 VAC
230 VAC
230 VAC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
Model
TSX-10140
TSX-11140
TSX-20140
TSX-21140
TSX-40140
TSX-41140
Dual Input, Single Output
Supply Voltage
110 VAC
110 VAC
230 VAC
230 VAC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
Degrees
F
C
F
C
F
C
Degrees
F
C
F
C
F
C
Degrees
F
C
F
C
F
C

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
D
g
t
a
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
TS
3-Digit Display, Heating/Cooling Control, 8 or 16 Amp Relay
The TS Digital Temperature Switch is designed to regulate many heating and cooling
applications. Easy programming via the tactile front keypad enables quick setup of the 12
parameters for simple, reliable operation. The user can define set point, heating/cooling
regulation, hysteresis, cycle time, ambient probe adjustment and defrosting time. The unit
features error or alarm messaging and password protection. View probe temperature on
the bright red, 3-digit LED display. Select between temperature display in F or C, and
110 VAC, 230 VAC, or 12 VDC power supplies. The Series TS includes a thermistor with
5 ft (1.5 m) cable, fitting clips for panel mounting, gasket, rear terminal cover, and
instruction manual.
F
3
[76.20]
1-3/8
[33.99]
2-3/8
[60.33]
1-1/8
[27.94]
SET
SPECIFICATIONS
Probe range: 58 to 302F ( 50 to 150C).
Input: 1.5 inch (4 cm) thermistor (1000 @ 25C) with 5 ft (1.5 m) cable.
Output: 16A SPDT relay @ 250 VAC resistive.
Horsepower Rating (HP): 1 HP for 16A.
Power Requirements: 110 VAC, 230 VAC or 12 VAC/VDC (depending on model).
4VA (230V).
Accuracy: 1C.
Resolution: 1.
Agency Approvals: CE, ULc, UL
Panel Cutout 2 51/64 x 1 9/64 (71 x 29)
Model
TS-13010
TS-13011
TS-13020
TS-13030
Digital Temperature/Water Level Switch
Two Temperature Set Points, Low Water Level Alarm
Series
TSWB
SPECIFICATIONS
Probe Range: PTC 58 to 302F
( 50C to 150C); NTC 58 to 230F
( 50C to 110C).
Probe Temperature Input: (Selectable
by parameter) PTC1000 probes
(25C 1000 ohm) / NTC.
Probe Level Input: Conductivity
probe: Max voltage 12 VAC. Sensitivity
established from factory at 100KOhm.
Output:
R1 SPST NO relay resistive load
5A @ 250 VAC;
R2 SPST NC relay resistive load
5A @ 250 VAC;
R3 SPDT relay resistive load
16A @ 240 VAC.
Horsepower Rating: 1HP 10FLA,
60LRA 250 VAC.
Power Requirement: 115 VAC 10%,
230 VAC 10%, 24 VAC/DC 10%, 12
VAC/DC 10%.
Power Consumption: 4VA
(230V/115V), 1.5VA (24V/12V).
Accuracy: Better than 1% of full scale.
Display: 3 digit, red 1/2 digits.
Resolution: 1 (3 digits).
Ambient Operating Temperature:
32 to 158F ( 30 to 70C).
( 30 to 80C).
Weight: 3.5 oz.
Front Protection: IP64.
The Series TSWB Digital Temperature Switch has a high and a low set point for
controlling the water temperature. The low set point can either be manually or
automatically reset. This control also has a conductivity probe input. This input supplies 12
VAC to the conductivity probe to check for low water condition. There are three relay
outputs which can be assigned in the field to the high temperature set point, low
temperature set point or the low water level input. The Model TS2-K configuration key can
make configuring multiple controls quick and easy.
Model
TSWB-010
TSWB-011
TSWB-020
TSWB-021
TSWB-030
TSWB-031
TSWB-040
TSWB-041
Supply Voltage
115 VAC
115 VAC
230 VAC
230 VAC
12 VAC/VDC
12 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
2-63/64
[75.69]
7/32
[5.33]
2-29/64
[62.23]
1-21/64
[33.73]
1-7/64
[28.19]
ACCESSORIES
See page 280
Description
110V, 16A, F
110V, 16A, C
230V, 16A, F
12 VAC/VDC, 16A, F
Units
F
C
F
C
F
C
F
C

280
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
D
g
t
a
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Digital Temperature Switch Probes
Probes to Be Used with TS, TS2, TSX, TSS2, and TSWB
LENGTH
1-9/16
[39.69]
1/4
[6.35]
1-9/16
[39.69]
1/4
[6.35]
1
[25.4]
1/4
[6.35]
1/4
[6.60]
1-9/16
[39.69]
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensor: PTC or NTC (depending on model).
Operating Temperature:
TS-1, TS-2, TS-6: -58 to 302F (-50 to 150C);
TS-5, TS-7: -58 to 221F (-50 to 105C).
Accuracy: 2C at 25C.
Response Time: 15 seconds (in air).
Cable: PVC or silicone (depending on model).
Protection: IP67.
Model
TS-1
TS-11
TS-2
TS-21
TS-5
TS-51
TS-6
TS-61
TS-7
TS-71
Sensor
PTC
PTC
PTC
PTC
PTC
PTC
PTC
PTC
NTC
NTC
Cap Material
Brass
Brass
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
PVC
PVC
Polyamide Resin Coated Brass
Polyamide Resin Coated Brass
None
None
TS-W
2
[50.80]
1-57/64
[48.01]
13/32
[10.29]
7/8
[22.22]
HEX
15/64
[5.84]
25/32
[19.81]
1/2 NPT
17/64
[6.63]
35/64
[13.97]
15/32
[11.79]
TS-1 OR TS-11
TS-2 OR TS-21
TS-5 OR TS-51
TS-6 OR TS-61
TS-7 OR TS-71
ACCESSORIES
TS-W, Brass Thermowell (for use with TS 1, TS 11, TS 2, TS 21)
Length
ft (m)
5 (1.5)
10 (3)
5 (1.5)
10 (3)
5 (1.5)
10 (3)
5 (1.5)
10 (3)
5 (1.5)
10 (3)

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
D
I
N

R
a
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Thermocouple & RTD Limit/Alarm Switch Module
Two Form C (SPDT) Switches, Small Size, Mounts Easily on 35 mm DIN Rail
The Series SC1290 & SC1490 Thermocouple Limit/Alarm Switch Modules are
on-off or limit switches with selectable, thermocouple, or RTD inputs. Input type, scale
range, output action, and output type are all selectable by the user in the field. All selections
are made through easily accessible switches without the need to open the product.
Each unit has two form C (SPDT) relays which can operate independently, or be logically
connected to operate as a DPDT output. A two color LED indicator indicates the status of
each output relay.
These units mount easily on a standard 35mm DIN rail. Low voltage (SCL XXXX) units are
also available.
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: SC1290: Thermcouple type J, K,
R, S, T, E; SC1490: RTD Pt1000,
Ni100, Ni120, Cu10, Ni Fe1000, Ni
Fe2000.
Power Supply: (SC units) 85 to 265
VDC/VAC 50 to 400 Hz (12 24 VDC,
VAC 50 400 Hz for low voltage option,
SCL units).
Isolation: 1500 V rms between outputs,
input, and power.
Set Points: Adjustable 0 to 100% of
span.
Deadband: Adjustable 0.25% to 100%
of span.
Drift: 0.02%/C typical 0.05%/C
maximum.
(operating) 32 to 131F (0 to 55C).
(storage) 40 to +176F ( 40 to +80C).
Excitation Current: (SC1490) Cu10
= 5mA; Plt 100, Ni 100, Ni 120 =
500A; Plt 500, NiFe 1000 = 100
A; Plt 1000 = 50 A.
Lead Compensation Error:
(SC1490) 0.02%/.
Open Lead Protection:
(SC1490) upscale only.
Input Impedance: (1290) 3 megohms.
Sensor Burnout Protection:
Selectable, upscale or downscale on
1290.
Relay Output: Form C, SPDT, one per
set point, 5A @ 250 VAC, resistive.
Latch Circuit Reset: Automatic at
power up. Manual with reset switch on
front of module.
Indicators: One dual color LED per set
point. Red = relay on, green = relay off.
Wiring Terminals: Screw driven
compression type.
Series
SC1290
SC1490
7 8 9
B
A
M
O
D
E
1
2
3
4
LO H D
R
A
LA
R
M
A
R
E
V
LATC
H
N
G
N
O
N
LATC
H
N
G
S
W
2
M
O
D
E
5
6
7
8
LO H D
R
A
LA
R
M
B
R
E
V
K
E
Y
=
O
N
=
O
F
F
B
LA
N
K
=
N
O
A
P
P
L
C
A
B
LE
S
W
1
290 2887
S
W
4
V
O
L
A
G
E
C
U
R
R
E
N
T
P
O
R
B
P
O
LA
R
ZE
R
O
B
A
S
E
D
ZE
R
O
+20%
M
O
D
E
1
2
3
O
U
T
P
U
T
D
A
S
N
G
LE
IN
P
U
T
0m
V
1m
A
0m
V
5m
A
00m
V
0m
A
00m
V
0m
A
V
50m
A
V
00m
A
V 0V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R
A
N
G
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3.88
[98.5]
0.886
[22.5]
2.95
[75]
1.40
[35.3]
3.88
[98.5]
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES (MILLIMETERS)
DIN EN 50022-35 (NOT SUPPLIED)
ADAPTOR BRACKET
FOR SURFACE MOUNTING
(OPTIONAL)

* Low voltage supply
Explosion-Proof, Heavy-Duty Thermostat
Line or Low Voltage, Heating or Cooling
Explosion-proof, heavy duty, the Model 862E Thermostat is designed for
hazardous-location temperature control. It is the most dependable, smallest, lightest and
most durable thermostat available. The 862E is designed to control heating, cooling, or
ventilation systems and features an adjustable set point knob for easy and convenient
setpoint adjustment. The thermostat incorporates reliable snap action switch operation in
SPDT configuration rated to 480 VAC max.
APPLICATIONS
Oil refineries, petrochemical plants, pulp and paper mills, coal mines, grain elevators,
hazardous waste water storage facilities, other hazardous locations where specific
explosive gases or dusts are present.
SPECIFICATIONS
Enclosure Rating: Explosion proof NEMA 7 & 9, Class I, Divisions 1 & 2, Groups
C & D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F & G; Class II, Division 2, Groups F & G;
Class III; Class I, Zones 1 & 2, Groups IIA & IIB.
Switch Type: SPDT snap action switch.
Electrical Rating: 22 A @ 480 VAC (res.), 1/2 HP @ 125 VAC, 1 HP @ 250 VAC.
Set Point Adjustment: External knob.
Adjustable Range: 36 to 82F (2 to 28C).
Deadband: 2.5F (1.5C).
Approval: UL and CSA.
Model
862E
2x 5/16
[7.94]
2-13/64
[55.96]
5-1/4
[133.35]
5-59/64
[150.42]
4-25/64 FEED THRU
[111.52]
Model
SC1290
SC1490
SCL1290*
SCL1490*
Model 862E, Explosion Proof, Heavy Duty Thermostat
Description
T/C Input
RTD Input
T/C Input
RTD Input

282
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
M
e
c
h
a
n
c
a
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Insertion depth can be increased through use of bulb supports or wells. Consult factory.
Temperature Switches
Bulb and Capillary, Inert Gas Fill
CONT OL
MERCO D
5/8
[15.88]
1-5/8
[41.28]
1/2 CONDUIT
CONNECTION
2
[50.80]
SEE
VIEW #1 VIEW #1
17/64 [6.75]
MOUNTING HOLES
TYP 2 PLACES 3-5/16
[84.14]
E
7/8
[22.23]
6-1/64
[152.80]
3/4 MALE NPT
BULB CONNECTION
1/4 MALE NPT
PRESSURE
CONNECTION
ADJUSTMENT
SCREWS
2-1/4
[57.15]
3/4 [19.05]
CLEARANCE
FOR COVER
REMOVAL
Series
DA-7035N
FEATURES
Adjustable deadband
Snap action switch standard
Inert gas activated Bourdon tube
No cross ambient temperature effects
No bulb elevation correction required
Visible dial calibrated in both F and C
Visible on/off indication
Model
DA-7035-153-1N
DA-7035-153-3N
DA-7035-153-4N
DA-7035-153-5N
DA-7035-153-7N
DA-7035-153-8N
DA-7035-153-9N
DA-7035-153-10N
DA-7035-153-11N
Range F (C)
60 to +30 ( 50 to 0)
0 to 100 ( 18 to 40)
50 to 150 (10 to 65)
100 to 200 (40 to 95)
140 to 300 (60 to 150)
250 to 415 (120 to 215)
350 to 550 (175 to 290)
100 to 300 (40 to 150)
100 to 500 (40 to 260)
Maximum
Temp.
F (C)
150 (65)
240 (115)
250 (120)
300 (150)
500 (260)
550 (290)
600 (315)
500 (260)
600 (315)
Min.
Deadband
F (C)
23 (13)
25 (14)
25 (14)
25 (14)
41 (23)
42 (23)
50 (28)
50 (28)
100 (56)
4-20 mA Signal, Two Wire Operation, Temperatures from -55 to 180C
The Series 650 Temperature Transmitter combines low cost with small size making
it ideal for a wide variety of HVAC, industrial and commercial multi-point temperature
monitoring applications. Non-polarized terminals simplify connection to any 12-35 VDC
power supply. Capable of operation with long cable runs, Series 650 Transmitters are well
suited for monitoring air or water temperatures at remote locations. Three models are
stocked in popular ranges factory calibrated within 0.3% of span. All are linear within 0.25%
of span and may be recalibrated within low range and span limits shown in chart. Low
range is temperature corresponding to 4 mA output. Span is temperature difference
between Low and High Ranges corresponding to 4-20 mA output signal.
Consult factory for special ranges calibrated within the limits of -55C and +180C
Series
650
Model
650-1
650-2
650-3
Range
As Stocked
23 to +10C
7 to +49C
0 to +100C
Low Range Limits
Min.
32C
12C
Max.
14C
+6C
Span Limits
Min
24C
37C
Max.
48C
150C
1-53/64
[46.43]
45/64
[17.86]
19/32
[15.08]
5/16 [7.94]
3/16 [4.76]
7/32 [5.56]
2-5/8 [66.68]
13/64 [5.16]
1-5/16
[33.34]
13/64
[5.16]
1/8 [3.18]
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: Silicone junction transistor.
Power Requirements: 12 35 volts DC.
Accuracy: 0.3% F.S. @ 20C (68F).
Linearity: Within 0.25% of span.
Thermal Drift: Less than 0.5% of span
over ambient temperature range of
0 to 50C (32 to 122F).
Probe Construction: 6 long, 0.25
O.D. Type 304 SS.
0 to 70C (32 to 158F).
Temperature Limits: (Probe): 204C
(400F).
Probe Cable Length: 7 ft (2.1 m).
Voltage Stability: Output error less
than 0.01% of span over the specified
supply voltage range.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids or
gases.
Wetted Materials: Bulb and
connection: 304 SS.
Temperature Limit: Process: See
model chart; Ambient: 180F
(82C).
Enclosure Rating: General
purpose. Optional weatherproof
and explosion proof.
Optional DPDT snap and a variety
of mercury switches.
Electrical Rating: 10A @
120/240/480 VAC.
terminal.
Conduit Connection: 7/8 (22.23
mm) hole for 1/2 (12.7 mm)
conduit hub.
Process Connection: 3/4 male
NPT. Other sizes available.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical
and level.
Set Point Adjustment: External
knobs for set point and reset point.
Deadband: Adjustable from
minimum in model chart to full
range. Optional low fixed
deadband.
Capillary: 6 ft (1.8 m) standard.
Ranges 1N 7N, and 10N: copper.
Ranges 8N, 9N, 11N: 304 SS.
Set Point Scale: Indication in F
and C.
Options: See switch type, see
enclosures, fixed deadband, longer
or shorter capillary, armored
capillary, wells, two stage, 1/2 or 1
connection sizes, manual reset,
and other bulb styles.
Series DA-7035N temperature switches include the same time-proven switching
mechanism used in our Series DA pressure switches. Bourdon tube assures high sensitivity
and long life. Fully adjustable deadband makes units suitable for a wide range of control
applications. Visible, calibrated dial and external adjustments make changing setpoints
simple and fast.
ACCESSORY
A-325, Duct Mounting Kit with flange, fitting and hardware
Min. Insertion
Depth
E in. (mm)
2 7/8 (73)
2 7/8 (73)
2 7/8 (73)
2 7/8 (73)
2 7/8 (73)
2 7/8 (73)
4 7/8 (124)
2 7/8 (73)
2 7/8 (73)

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Explosion-Proof RTD Temperature Transmitter
User Selectable Ranges, Optional LCD Display
Series
TTE
The Series TTE Explosion-Proof RTD Temperature Transmitter is the
ideal product for hazardous temperature measurement applications. The TTE
series has seven pre-programmed temperature ranges that are selectable via an
internal dip switch. For those applications that need a custom range, the
transmitter can be easily configured for any range between -30 to 250F with a
minimum span of 40F. The span and zero can be quickly adjusted with a simple
push button design. The compact housing allows for the transmitter to be
mounted in virtually any application.
10-23/64
[263.13]
1/2 NPT
1/4
[6.35]
4-15/32
[113.51]
1/2 NPT
2-23/32
[69.06]
3-29/32
[99.22]
1/2 NPT
4-9/32
[108.74]
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Sensor: Pt1000, 0.00385 DIN.
Output Temperature Ranges: User selectable any range between 30
to 250F with a minimum span of 40F.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 0 to 158F ( 18 to 70C); Process: 30 to
250F ( 34.4 to 121.1C).
Accuracy: Transmitter 0.1% F.S; Probe 0.3% F.S.
Thermal Drift Effects: 0.02%/C max.
Wetted Materials: 316 stainless steel.
Probe Length: 2 to 18 (depending on model).
Output Signal: 4 20 mA (two wire loop powered).
Optional Display: 2 lines X 8 character LCD.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66) and explosion proof for Class I,
Groups B, C, D; Class II, Groups E, F, G; Class III.
Model
TTE-104-W
TTE-106-W
TTE-109-W
TTE-112-W
TTE-115-W
TTE-118-W
TTE-104-W-LCD
TTE-106-W-LCD
TTE-109-W-LCD
TTE-112-W-LCD
TTE-115-W-LCD
TTE-118-W-LCD
Field Selectable Ranges
40 to 90F (4.4 to 32.2 C)
20 to 140F ( 28.9 to 60C)
0 to 100F ( 17.8 to 37.8C)
30 to 240F ( 1.1 to 115.6C)
32 to 212F (0 to 100C)
32 to 122F (0 to 50C)
30 to 65C ( 1.1 to 18.3C)
Custom range between 30 to 250F ( 34.4 to 121.1C)
*Shown with optional LCD display
Stem Length
4
6
9
12
15
18
4
6
9
12
15
18
LCD Display
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
ACCESSORY
A-287, Mounting bracket for pipe or surface mounting
(Includes bracket and two 2 U bolts)

284
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Linearized output for precise temperature monitoring or control is combined with small
size and quick, easy mounting. Rugged Series 651 transmitters are designed for use with
2 or 3 wire Pt100 RTDs (to DIN standard 43760 or BS1904) or ungrounded Type K
thermocouples. Thermocouple models 651TC are cold junction compensated, automatic 32
to 160F (0 to 70C) with upscale burnout. These economical devices provide the accuracy
and reliability you need at the lowest possible cost.
Series
651
RTD or Thermocouple Input, Zero and Span Adjust, Linearized 4-20 mA Signal
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: 2 or 3 wire Pt100 RTD (models 651A), or ungrounded Type K
thermocouple (models 651TC).
Output: 4 20 mA DC, linearized.
Transmitter Type: 2 wire.
Output Impedance: 700 @ 24 VDC.
Power Requirements: 10 32 VDC, reverse connection protected.
Accuracy: 0.2C plus 0.2% reading (models 651A), 0.1% FS plus cold junction
errors (models 651TC).
Temperature Drift: ZERO drift typical 0.02%/C (0.09F); SPAN typical 0.005%/C
(0.0036F).
Maximum Storage Temperature: 160F (70C).
Response Time: 10 90% in 200 ms (models 651A), 70% in 2 ms (models 651TC).
Model
651A-10
651A-20
651A-40
651TC-01
651TC-02
651TC-04
651TC-06
Input Type
Pt100 RTD
Pt100 RTD
Pt100 RTD
Type K Thermocouple
Type K Thermocouple
Type K Thermocouple
Type K Thermocouple
Series
659
1-41/64
[41.67]
1-5/16
[33.32]
3/16 [4.76]
MOUNTING HOLE
TYP 2 PLACES
29/32
[23.02]
Series 659 Push-Button Temperature Transmitters accept thermocouple (J, K, T),
RTD (Pt100) or thermistor input and provide a linearized 4 to 20 mA output. The
transmitter is quickly ranged and calibrated by using a single on-board switch. An LED
provides visual indication of sensor fault and programming mode. Models feature reverse
polarity protection. Thermocouple models are also galvanically isolated and cold junction
compensated.
The compact transmitter can be mounted directly within any standard thermal head for
connection to the sensor. The Series 659 Transmitters are ideal for temperature
measurement in boilers, burners, ducts, furnaces, refrigeration systems, food processing,
tanks, chemical processing, steam generators or any other process application.
Push-Button Temperature Transmitter
Programmable, RTD, Thermistor or Thermocouple Input, In-Head Mounting
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Range: Type J T/C: 328 to 2192F ( 200 to 1200C); Type K T/C: 328 to
2498F ( 200 to 1370C); Type T T/C: 328 to 752F ( 200 to 400C); Pt100 RTD:
328 to 1562F ( 200 to 850C); Thermistor: 13 to 257F.
Accuracy: T/C models: 0.04% F.S., 0.04% of reading or 0.5C whichever is
greater; RTD: 0.2C 0.1% of rdg; Thermistor: 0.25F (0.1C).
Output: Linearized 4 to 20 mA, 2 wire loop powered.
Sample Rate: 500 ms.
Loop Resistance: T/C: 700 @ 24 VDC; RTD: 800 @ 24 VDC; Thermistor: 24
VDC.
Output Thermal Drift: Zero: 0.2A/C; Span: 0.5A/C.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 4 to 158F ( 20 to 70C), 80% RH max.
Ambient Storage Temperature: 40 to 158F ( 40 to 70C), 95% RH max.
Burnout: Upscale 22 mA.
Weight: 0.92 oz (26 g).
Model
659TC-1
659RTD-1
659TH-1
ACCESSORY
A-709, Optional enclosure for Series 651Transmitters. NEMA 1 protective housing
is 3 x 2 1/8 (76 x 54 mm). Supplied with mounting hardware, strain relief fitting
and assembly instructions (See page 318)
Input
Thermocouple (Type J, K, T)
3 wire (RTD Pt100)
Thermistor (2252)
Range,F (C)
32 212 (0 100)
32 392 (0 200)
32 752 (0 400)
32 212 (0 100)
32 392 (0 200)
32 752 (0 400)
32 1112 (0 600)

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
The Model A-709 Temperature Enclosure can be used to mount our Series
651 and 659 transmitters to any of our 1/4 diameter temperature sensors. The
screw on enclosure core can be quickly removed and has a chain to prevent it
from getting lost. The Model A-709 comes with the necessary adapters and
fittings for attaching the temperature sensor.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Indoor or outdoor.
Rating: NEMA 4X.
Materials: Aluminum housing.
Model
A-709
Temperature Transmitter Enclosure
Fits Series 651 and 659 Transmitters
2-27/32
[72.23]
1/2 NPT
3-5/32
[80.12]
1-21/32
[42.07]
1-5/8
[41.28]
Programmable Transmitter
RTD, Thermocouple, Voltage or Potentiometer Input, Galvanically Isolated
3 FOOT
(1m) LEAD
1.648
[41.859]
2.312
[58.72]
3.00
[76.2]
3 FOOT (1m)
CONNECTING
CABLE
Model
652-0
Model 652-0 Programmable Transmitter accepts any commonly used
temperature sensor, slidewire transducer or millivolt signal and produces a 4 to
20 mA output signal. Input type and range are easily programmed using a PC
and the simple Windows
based software program model 652-C sold separately.

The user can completely reconfigure units of measure, high/low range, filtering
factor, offset, and transmitter reference details. The model 652-0 features 500V
input to output isolation to remove ground loop effects and four filter settings
to remove incoming signal noise. Outstanding versatility and compact size make
this unit ideal for any temperature application.
SPECIFICATIONS
Input/Output Isolation: 500 VAC
RMS.
Thermocouple Input Range: J:
328 to 2192F ( 200 to 1200C);
K: 328 to 2498F( 200 to
1370C); T: 328 to 752F ( 200 to
400C); R and S: 14 to 3200F
( 10 to 1760C); E: 328 to 1832F
( 200 to 1000C); F: 148 to
1112F ( 100 to 600C); N: 292 to
2372F ( 180 to 1300C).
RTD Input Range: (Pt100):
328 to 1562F ( 200 to 850C).
Output: Linearized 4 to 20 mA.
Output Impedance: 700 @ 24
VDC.
Power Requirements: 10 to 35V.
Accuracy: T/C: 0.04% full range
input, 0.04% rdg.; RTD; 0.01
full range input, 0.05% of rdg.;
Voltage: 10V, 0.07% rdg.;
Potentiometer: 0.1% full range
input.
Thermal Drift: Zero: 0.1V/C
(RTD zero drift is 0.008F/F);
Span: 100ppm/C.
Temperature Limit: Ambient:
40 to 185F ( 40 to 85C).
Response Time: <1 second.
Update Time: 250 msec max.
Filtering: Off, 2 seconds, 10
seconds, or adaptive.
Cold Junction Error: 29F
(0.5C).
Computer Interface: RS232 via
configurator 652 C, IBM
compatible 386 or above with
4mB Ram and serial port.
Housing: PPE & PS.
Weight: 0.92 oz (26 g).
Max. Output Load: 700 @ 24
VDC.
Model A-709, Temperature Transmitter Enclosure
Model 652-0, Programmable Transmitter
ACCESSORY
652-C, Configuration Kit (includes power adapter,
configuration module, software and carrying case).

286
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Temperature Sensors
Dwyer thermocouples are used in all types of applications, can
measure wide temperature ranges, and are offered in a large variety
of standard configurations.
RTDs
RTDs are usually platinum wire wound on a glass or ceramic bobbin
and sealed with a coating of ceramic or glass. They can also be made
by depositing platinum as a film on a substrate and then encapsulating
it. The electrical resistance of the RTD changes as a function of
temperature. Circuitry similar to a Wheatstone bridge is built into
controls designed for use with RTDs. Constant current into the bridge
produces an output voltage that varies with temperature. Lead wire
resistance can significantly affect the RTD measurement. This is
typically corrected using a third (compensating) lead wire. See Figures
3 and 4.
Extension wires used with RTDs may be plain copper wire. RTDs are
generally more accurate and more stable over time than
thermocouples. Dwyer RTDs are built to rigorous DIN (most common)
or NIST standards and are offered in a wide variety of standard
configurations.
Thermistors
Thermistors have a semiconductor material which changes its
electrical resistance as a function of temperature. Extension wires
used with thermistors can be plain copper wire.
Thermistors offer accuracy similar to RTDs within narrow
temperature ranges near ambient temperature. They also generally
offer faster response times. Since thermistor standards vary, care
must be taken to match the instrumentation to the sensor.
Introduction
Sensors measure temperature and pass that information to a control
or monitor. Dwyer offers three types of sensors: thermocouples,
resistance temperature detectors (RTDs), and thermistors.
Thermocouples
Thermocouples are made of two dissimilar metal wires joined at their
measuring end forming the measuring junction also known as the
hot junction. A small voltage, known as the Seeback voltage, is
created at a junction of dissimiliar metal alloys. This voltage changes
as a function of temperature. See Figure 1. The control or monitor
measures this small voltage and converts it to a temperature signal.
Modern instrumentation also measures the temperature where the
thermocouple is connected to the instrument. This is the reference
junction. See Figure 2. Any temperature effects near the instrument
can be cancelled out leaving an accurate reading of the process to be
measured.
A thermocouple may be directly connected to a control or monitor.
Extension wires, if used, must be of the same materials as the
thermocouple wires.
Thermocouples designed with their measuring junctions in contact
with new surfaces are known as grounded junction thermocouples.
These are the most common, generally have the fastest response
times, and are the most economical. Ungrounded junction
thermocouples offer the advantage of electrical isolation. Dwyer
manufactures both types of thermocouples. Thermocouples are
generally more rugged and less expensive than other sensor types. All
Dwyer thermocouples are manufactured using industry standard
alloys and meet stringent ANSI standards. This assures
interchangeability with other standard thermocouples without special
instrument recalibration.
Example
A temperature of 100F at
the measuring junction of a
J Type Thermocouple
produces a voltage
difference of 2.0 millivolts.
The third wire in the
3-wire RTD
compensates for the
wire lead resistance
and its temperature
change.

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Temperature Sensors
Ordering Sensors:
Sensors are constructed with various types of protection/mounting hardware, extensions,
and wire terminations. The sensor types and their temperature ranges are shown in the
table below. See Temperature Limits below for maximum service temperatures
applicable to the protection tube, mounting hardware, wire extensions, etc.
This section shows only a limited selection of the available sensors. The sensors are
organized by hardware type. Most hardware can house any type thermocouple, RTD, or
thermistor. Terminations are usually either lug type or standard plugs, but many other
types are available. Various head enclosures are also available. Dimensions can be custom
designed to meet your specifications. The selections listed are the most popular
configurations. Please ask your sales representative about other possible selections.
Temperature Limits:
Sensor selection depends on two separate temperatures: process temperature and
connector temperature. Make sure the local temperature at each component does not exceed
the maximum rated service temperature for that component. Note that extension wire must
withstand the process temperature. All Love
thermocouple and RTD assemblies (including

extension wire) shown in this section are designed for process temperatures to at least
900F. Please consult factory if higher service temperatures are needed.
Service Temperatures
Stainless Steel Tubing / Protection / Mounting Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1500F
Stainless Steel springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1500F
Inconel
Springs (Dwyer Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2100F

Fiberglass insulated extension wire (Dwyer Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .900F
Junction Box (BX) connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400F
Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300F
J Type Thermocouple Junction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1600F
K Type Thermocouple Junction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2500F
E Type Thermocouple Junction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1800F
DlN or NlST RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1607F
Thermocouple Wire
Types Type
J Iron/Constantan
K Chromel/Alumel
E Chromel/Constantan
T Copper/Constantan
R Plat. 13% /Rhod. Plat.
S Plat. 10% Rhod./Plat.
B Plat. 6% Rhod./Plat. 30% Rhod.
Thermistor Types
Cal. 100 2K @ 25C
Cal. 101 5K @ 25C
Cal. 109 100K @ 25C
RTD Types
DIN (100 @ OC a = .00385 //C)
NIST (100 @ OC a = .00392 //C)
Nickel (120 @ OC a = .00672 //C)
Temperature
Range (F)
32 to 1400
32 to 2300
300 to 1600
300 to 700
32 to 2700
32 to 2700
1600 to 3100
60 to 150
50 to 250
300 to 600
420 to 1500
420 to 1500
150 to 600
Temperature
Range (C)
0 to 760
0 to 1200
184 to 871
184 to 371
0 to 1482
0 to 1482
871 to 1704
51 to 66
10 to 121
140 to 315
200 to 875
200 to 875
101 to 315
Inconel

is a registered trademark of Huntington Alloys Corporation.

288
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Thermocouples & RTDs
General Purpose
Basic Model
Rigid Extension Model
Flex Hose Extension Model
Stainless Steel Overbraid Extension Model
Surface Thermocouple (900F Max.)
Special Purpose
Bolt Style
A
1/2 20 UNF 2A
3 000
FIBERGLASS INSULATED WIRE
WITH STAINLESS STEEL FLEX HOSE
STANDARD PLUG
FEP Insulation Extension
250 OD STAINLESS STEEL TUBE
6 000
FEP INSULATED WIRE
WITH SEALED TIP
36 000 4 000
MARK WHITE LEAD "+"
#6 SPADE TERMINAL
TYP 3 PLACES
MARK RED LEAD " "
Sensor Type
J
K
(3 wire) 100 RTD
Model
122095-84
122095-01
122095-04
Model
122095-96
122095-07
122095-08
122095-14
122095-00
122095-10
Sensor Type
J
J
J
100RTD
J
J
A Length
12
18
24
24
12
18
Model
122095-06
122095-15
122095-17
122095-16
122095-20
Sensor Type
J
J
100 RTD
J
100 RTD
Bend
0
0
0
90
90
Model
122095-19
122095-21
122095-22
122095-25
Sensor Type
J
J
J
100 RTD
Bend
0
0
90
0
Model
122095-24
122095-31
122095-32
Sensor Type
J
J
J
Washer Size
13/32 ID
13/32 ID
13/64 ID
(#10 Washer)
Model
122095-58
122095-57
122095-60
122095-59
Sensor Type
J
J
J
J
A Length
0
4
0
4
Tip
Flush
Flush
1/8
1/8
Model
122087-00
122087-01
122087-02
Sensor Type
100RTD
100RTD
100RTD
A Length
6
12
18
Terminal
Lug
Lug
Lug
Terminal
Open
Open
Open
Open
Plug
Plug
Terminal
Lug
Lug
Lug
Terminal
Lug
Plug
Lug
Lug
Lug
Terminal
Lug
Plug
Lug
Lug
Terminal
Lug
Plug
Lug
Terminal
Plug
Plug
Plug
Plug

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Adjustable Length Spring Type
Adjustable Length Flex Hose Type
Mineral Insulated
#6 SPADE TERMINAL
TYP 3 PLACES
MARK RED LEAD " "
MARK WH TE LEAD "+"
4 000
FIBERGLASS INSULATED W RE
WITH SEALED T P
36 000 6 000
250 OD 304 STAINLESS
STEEL SHEATH
375 OD 304 STA NLESS STEEL
POTTING ADAPTOR POTT NG ADAPTOR
AND POTTING COMPOUND MUST WITHSTAND
500F CONTINUOUS TEMPERATURE
Web Style
Special Purpose
Bayonet Mount
Mineral Insulated
Model
122095-35
122095-86
122095-34
122095-85
A Length
4
2.75
4
2.75
Model
122095-75
122095-26
122095-77
122095-76
122095-27
122095-78
Sensor Type
J
J
J
J
J
J
A Length
36
48
60
36
48
60
Model
122088-00
122088-01
122086-00
Sensor Type
100RTD
100RTD
100RTD
A Length
6
12
6
Diameter
1/4
1/4
1/8
Model
122095-79
122095-81
122095-82
122095-80
122095-29
122095-83
Sensor Type
J
J
J
J
J
J
A Length
36
48
60
36
48
60
A
A
Terminal
No
No
Yes
Yes
Terminal
Lug
Lug
Lug
Plug
Plug
Plug
Terminal
Lug
Lug
Lug
Plug
Plug
Plug
Terminal
Lug
Lug
Lug

290
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Term Descriptions
Plain Sheath
Stripped-Ends-Type 0
Lugs - Type 1
Lugs w/BX Connector -
Type 2
T/C Standard Plug - Type 3
T/C Standard Jack - Type 4
Open Terminals - Type 5
RTD Standard Plug - Type 3
RTD Standard Jack - Type 4
T/C Mini Plug - Type 6
T/C Mini Jack - Type 7
Snap Cover Head -
Type 8, B
Fast Tabs - Type 9
Fast Tabs w/ BX
Connector - Type A
Screw Cover Head -
Type E, F
RTD Mini Plug - Type 6
RTD Mini Jack - Type 7
Terminals
Bayonet Mount, Adjustable
(when made with SS Overbraid Wire)
Bayonet Mount, Adjustable (min. A = 0.5)
(when made with Flex Hose)
Bayonet Mount, Fixed (min. A = 1.8)
Hardware Type

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
General Purpose and Bayonet Type
General Purpose Type Thermocouples and RTDs have a plain sheath with no permanently attached fittings. They are usually mounted with the
use of a compression fitting which is supplied separately. Tip temperatures can be as high as 480C (900F) for fiberglass insulated wire, 250C
(500F) for FEP insulated wire. Models specified with a head cover include a 1/2 hex nipple. For higher temperatures see the section on Mineral
Insulated Probes.
A B C
A
AA AA
A
General Purpose Bayonet
AA
A
45
Bend
A
AA
B C A AA
B C
45
Bend
Fixed
Adjustable
90
Bend
90
Bend
SENSOR TYPE
HARDWARE TYPE
EXTENSION TYPE SENSOR TERMINALS SENSOR TERMINALS
ELEMENTS ELEMENTS JUNCTION TYPE JUNCTION TYPE SENSOR O.D. SENSOR O.D. BEND BEND
A
in 1/10 inch
AA
in 1/10 inch
B
in inches
C
in inches
- - - - -
J (T/C)
K (T/C)
E (T/C)
T (T/C)
6 (RTD DIN)
4 (RTD NIST)
Z (RTD DIN 1K)
5 (RTD DIN 2 Wire)
7 (RTD DIN 1K
2 Wire)
5
0 None
1 Plain Sheath
4 Type 1 with FEP
6 Bayonet Mount
Adjustable, SS
7 Bayonet Mount
Fixed Length, SS
0 No extension
1 Fiberglass
Insulation
3 Stainless Steel
Overbraid
4 FEP Insulation
5 Stainless Steel
Flex Hose
6 FEP over SS
Flex Hose
0 Stripped Ends
1 Lugs
2 Lugs with BX
3 Standard Plug
4 Standard Jack
5 Open Terminals
6 Mini Plug
7 Mini Jack
8 Snap Cover Head, AI
9 Fastabs
A Fastabs with BX
B Snap Cover Head, Plastic
E Screw Cover Head, AI w/ 3/4
NPT Conduit
F Screw Cover Head, Plastic w/
3/4 NPT Conduit
G Screw Cover Head, SS Weather
Proof Head w/ 1/2 NPT Conduit
1 Single
2 Dual
1 Grounded
2 Ungrounded
3 Exposed Tip
0 None
2 1/8
3 3/16
4 1/4
1 Straight
2 45
3 90
Model Coding For General Purpose & Bayonet Styles
Fill in the appropriate numbers or letters to specify the probe of your choice. Fill in all boxes. If an item or dimension does not apply, fill
those boxes with zeros 0.

292
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Sensors for Extruders and Plastic Machines
Injection Molding Nozzle Type
In-Melt type thermocouples and RTDs are designed to bolt into the injector nozzle and sense the temperature of the melt directly, and is rated to
450C (900F). The standard 3/8 hex head stainless steel body has 3/8-24 NFT threads. The sensor tip extends 1/8 beyond the end of the bolt
assembly. Specify your requirements from the Order Chart below.
Not In-Melt type thermocouples and RTDs are designed to screw into a blind hole in the nozzle, and is rated to 450C (900F). The standard 1/4
NFT thread fits most standard nozzles. Specify your requirements from the Order Chart below.
Extruder Bolt Type
Designed for direct mounting into extruder barrels, the Bolt Type thermocouples and RTDs offer easy interchangeability. Standard configuration
has a 1/4 inch penetration into the barrel, and industry standard 1/2-20 NF thread. Order options allow barrel penetrations of 0 inches (flush) to 1
inch in 1/100th inch increments (specify as A dimension) and flex extension in 1 inch increments (specify as B dimension). See Special Order Chart
below for more details.
SENSOR TYPE
HARDWARE TYPE
ELEMENTS ELEMENTS
A
in 1/100 inch
B
in inches
C
in inches
- - - -
JUNCTION TYPE JUNCTION TYPE
1 Not In Melt
2 In Melt
3 Bolt 3 long
4 Bolt 4 long
6 Bolt 6 long
0 No extension
1 Fiberglass
Insulation
3 Stainless Steel
Overbraid
5 Stainless Steel
Flex Hose
0 Stripped Ends
1 Lugs
2 Lugs with BX
3 Standard Plug
4 Standard Jack
6 Mini Plug
7 Mini Jack
9 Fastabs
A Fastabs with BX
1 Single
2 Dual
1 Grounded
2 Ungrounded
6
Model Coding
0
Not In-Melt Type
In-Melt Type
Bolt Type with Flex
A B Bolt Length
J (T/C)
K (T/C)
6 (RTD DIN)
4 (RTD NIST)
Z (RTD DIN 1K)
5 (RTD DIN 2 Wire)
7 (RTD DIN 1K 2 Wire)

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Protection Tube Assemblies and Replacement
Thermocouple Elements
Protection tube assembly type thermocouples are designed for high temperature applications such as ovens, kilns, or other processes. Metal protection
tubes can be used in applications ranging from 1200F to 2100F. Ceramic tubes can be used in applications from 1210F to 4100F.
Replacement Sensor Elements
Replacement sensor elements are available as separate parts. All rules regarding lengths and fittings apply. Use the standard Order
Code, using a 0 for the tube type, 0 for mounting, 0 for sensor terminals, and 0 for protection tube. See example below.
SENSOR TYPE
HARDWARE TYPE
MOUNTING TYPE SENSOR TERMINALS SENSOR TERMINALS
ELEMENTS ELEMENTS
A
in inches
AA
in inches
B
in inches
- - - -
BEND BEND
-
* **
PROTECTION TUBE PROTECTION TUBE
J (T/C)
K (T/C)
0 No mounting
1 Sleeve and Flange
2 Bushing 3/4 NPT
3 Bushing 1 NPT
4 Bushing 1 1/4 NPT
5 SS Bushing 3/4 NPT
6 SS Bushing 1 NPT
7 SS Bushing 1 1/4 NPT
1 Single
2 Dual
1 Straight
2 45
3 90
7
Model Coding
1
Metal/Ceramic
0 None/None
1 1/4 pipe/None
2 None/0.375 OD
3 None/0.687 OD
4 1/2 pipe/None
5 3/4 pipe/0.750 OD
6 None/1.125 OD
7 1 pipe/None
*Wire Gauge
0 None
1 8
3 14
5 20
6 24
7 30
To order use Order Chart below. Specify 0 for Tube Type. (e.g.
- Type K 8 ga. insulated element 12 long is 7K000-110-121-12-
02-00).
To order use Order Chart below. Specify 0 for Tube Type. (e.g.
- Type K 14 ga. bare element 12 long is 7K000-110-311-12-02-
00).
90
Elbow
Welded Bushing
AA
A
A
B
0 None
1 304 SS
2 316 SS
4 Inconel
601
5 Mullite+
6 Alumina+
B Carbon Steel
0 None
1 Snap Cover, Aluminum Head
2 Weatherproof Screw Cover
Aluminum Head.
** Insulators
1 None
2 Oval (14 ga wire or larger)
3 Round (18 ga wire or smaller)
+ Length in 6 increments
Inconel


294
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Mineral Insulated Thermocouples and RTDs are known for their excellent mechanical durability and resistance to electrical breakdown. Available
in outside diameters from 0.020 inch (0.5mm) to 0.500 inch (12.7mm), Mineral Insulated Thermocouples can be bent to most any angle without
special equipment. Because of its flexibility, the mineral insulated material can be made to extremely long lengths, coiled for inexpensive shipment,
and straightened upon arrival without damage.
Ungrounded and exposed junctions are electronically isolated from the sheath. Minimum resistance is 1.5 megohms at 500 VDC.
Due to the varying sized of connection wire and cable, a transition fitting is used between the cold end of the sheath and the connecting wires. This
fitting measures 1-1/4 long by 1/4 outside diameter for 1/8 or smaller sheaths, and 1-1/2 long by 3/8 outside diameter for 3/16 and 1/4
sheaths. Larger sheaths are usually connected to bushings or connector heads, and usually do not require transition fittings. Sheaths terminating
in connectors other than wire or cable do not require transition fittings.
A B C
SENSOR TYPE
HARDWARE TYPE
ELEMENTS ELEMENTS JUNCTION TYPE JUNCTION TYPE SENSOR O.D. SENSOR O.D. BEND BEND
A
in 1/10 inch
AA
in 1/10 inch
B
in inches
C
in inches
- - - - -
Model Coding
8
1 304 SS Sheath
2 316 SS Sheath
3 Inconel
600 Sheath
4 Inconel
601 Sheath
0 No extension
1 Fiberglass
Insulation
3 Stainless Steel
Overbraid
4 FEP Insulation
5 SS Flex Hose
6 FEP over SS
Flex Hose
1 Single
2 Dual
1 Grounded
2 Ungrounded
3 Exposed
1 None
2 45
3 90
Mineral Insulated Thermocouples and RTDs
Mineral Insulated Transitions
Basic Sheath Configuration
Sheath and Transition Fitting
(when made with SS Overbraid Wire)
(when made with Flex Hose)
(when made with Fiberglass Wire)
J (T/C)
K (T/C)
E (T/C)
T (T/C)
6 (RTD DIN)
4 (RTD NIST)
Z (1K RTD DIN)
5 (RTD DIN 2 Wire)
7 (RTD DIN 1K
2 Wire)
0 Stripped Ends
1 Lugs
2 Lugs with BX
3 Standard Plug
4 Standard Jack
5 Open Terminals
6 Mini Plug
7 Mini Jack
8 Snap Cover, AI Head
9 Fastabs
A Fastabs with BX
B Snap Cover, Plastic Head
C 3/4 NPT Hex Threaded End
D 3/4 NPT Hex Nipple
E Screw Cover, AI Head w/ 3/4
NPT Conduit
F Screw Cover, Plastic Head w/
3/4 NPT Conduit
G SS Weatherproof Head w/ 1/2
NPT Conduit
H 1/2 NPT Hex Nipple
1 1/16
2 1/8
3 3/16
4 1/4
5 3/8
6 1/2
Inconel


T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Web Type Surface Thermocouples
Web Type Surface Thermocouple
Replacement Element
Web Type Surface
Thermocouple Assembly
Special Application Thermocouples and RTDs
Special Application Thermocouples and RTDs cover a wide variety of types and configurations. This section covers FEP covered thermocouples and
RTDs in rigid and flexible types, ring type thermocouples and RTDs for surface measurement, web type thermcouples for surface measurement
of moving objects such as rollers, and penetration thermocouples and RTDs with sharp tips for measurement of viscous liquids and semisolids such
as tar and heavy oil, and other material such as frozen food and meat.
SENSOR TYPE
HARDWARE TYPE
ELEMENTS ELEMENTS JUNCTION TYPE JUNCTION TYPE SENSOR O.D. SENSOR O.D.
A
in 1/10 inch
AA
in 1/10 inch
B
in inches
C
in inches
- - - - -
J (T/C)
K (T/C)
E (T/C)
T (T/C)
6 (RTD DIN)
4 (RTD NIST)
Z (RTD DIN 1K)
9
5 FEP Covered
Bead Junction
6 Ring #10 (0.187 od)
7 Ring #8 (0.156 od)
8 Ring 13/32
9 Web
A Penetration Probe
B Penetration Probe
with D Handle
0 None
1 Lugs
2 Lugs with BX
3 Standard Plug
4 Standard Jack
5 Open Terminals
6 Mini Plug
7 Mini Jack
9 Fastabs
A Fastabs with BX
1 Single
2 Dual
1 Grounded
2 Ungrounded
3 Exposed
Model Coding
0 N/A
2 1/8
3 3/16
4 1/4
Ring Type Surface Thermocouples and RTDs
Penetration Type Thermocouples and RTDs
B C
B 1-1/4 A AA
B 1-1/4 A AA
D Handle Style
0 No extension
1 Fiberglass
Insulation
3 Stainless Steel
Overbraid
4 FEP Insulation
5 Stainless Steel
Flex Hose
6 FEP over SS
Flex Hose
Standard Style
with Transition
Fitting
A
Flexible FEP Covered Bead Junction
B C

296
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
SENSOR TYPE
SHEATH
CAP STYLE
A
in 1/10 inch
B
in inches
C
in inches
- - - -
CAP SIZE
TERMINATION ELEMENTS JUNCTION TYPE SENSOR O.D.
NOMINAL/REDUCED
J (T/C)
K (T/C)
E (T/C)
T (T/C)
6 (RTD DIN)
4 (RTD NIST)
1 Straight
3 Stepped Tip
2 16A Without Nut
3 16A With Nut
4 16AI 14I
5 16 Amp
6 16 APV Without Nut
7 16 APV With Nut
1 1/2
2 3/4
3 1 1/2
4 2
5 2 1/2
6 3
1 Single
2 Dual
0 No Termination
2 White Screw Cover PP
Head (3/4 Conduit)
3 Screw Cover 316SS Head
(1/2 Conduit)
4 Split Leads
5 Split Leads With Lugs
6 Split Leads With BX & Lugs
7 STD Plug
8 STD Jack
9 Miniature Aluminum Snap
Cover Head
1 Grounded
2 Ungrounded 1 5/32 / NA
2 1/4 / 1/8
3 3/8 / 3/16
6 1/4 / NA
7 1/2 / NA
D
Model Coding:
Size
Tube O.D.
1/2 or 3/4
1
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
16 AMP CLAMP CAP 16A BEVEL SEAT 16APV APC 16 AI-14I I-LINE
O.D.
1.00
1.98
1.98
2.51
3.03
3.57
Thickness
.188
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
Size
Tube O.D.
1
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
O.D.
1.31
1.84
2.37
2.90
3.43
Thickness
.46
.56
.62
.66
.71
Size
Tube O.D.
1
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
O.D.
1.38
1.88
2.38
2.88
3.38
Thickness
.29
.42
.46
.47
.50
Size
Tube O.D.
1
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
O.D.
2
2
2.65
3.12
3.87
Thickness
.50
.50
.56
.56
.75
STAINLESS STEEL
CONNECTION
HEAD 1/2
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
3/4
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
WHITE POLY
SCREW COVER
CONNECTION
HEAD
STANDARD WHITE POLYPROPYLENE
SNAP-COVER CONNECTION HEAD
.840 SST SUPPORT TUBE
SANITARY WELD
SANITARY CAP
3 NOM.
A
SANITARY CAP
MINIATURE ALUMINUM CONNECTION HEAD
PG9 CABLE GLAND
A
1.00
2.00
2.25
FEP JACKETED CABLE
CHEMICAL RESISTANT STRAIN RELIEF
A
SANITARY WELD
SANITARY CAP
3 NOM. B C
STANDARD WHITE POLYPROPYLENE
SNAP-COVER CONNECTION HEAD
SANITARY WELD
SANITARY CAP
3 NOM.
A
1
Sensors for Sanitary Applications

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series P Penetration Probes
Monitor internal temperature of poultry, meat, fish, dough, and other fresh or slightly frozen food products. The Series P probes can also be used
to penetrate soft process materials such as plastic compounds and rubber. The probes are constructed entirely of FDA compliant materials for use
in sanitary applications.
SENSOR TYPE
PROBE STYLE
EXTENSION TYPE
SENSOR TERMINALS SENSOR TERMINALS
JUNCTION JUNCTION SENSOR O.D. SENSOR O.D.
A dim.
1/10 inch
- - - -
B dim.
inches
C dim.
inches
J (T/C)
T (T/C)
6 (RTD DIN)
4 (RTD NIST)
Z (RTD DIN 1K)
P
1 Standard transition fitting, SS
2 Straight handle, SS
3 Saber handle, SS
4 Flanged handle, SS
6 Euro Style, FEP
7 Euro Style, SS
4 FEP Insulation
6 FEP over SS flex
hose
0 Stripped Ends
1 Lugs
2 Lugs with BX
3 Standard Plug
4 Standard Jack
6 Mini Plug
7 Mini Jack
1 Grounded
2 Ungrounded
7 0.134 OD hypodermic
8 0.180 OD hypodermic
Model Coding - Series P Penetration Probes
POINTED CLOSURE
TRANSITION FITTING
STRAIN RELIEF TUBING
"B" "C" "A" 1 1
STRAIGHT HANDLE
2-1/2 1-1/2 "B" "C" "A"
SABER HANDLE
1 3/4 2 3/8 1 1/2 "B" "C" "A"
FLANGED HANDLE
2-1/2 1-1/2 "B" "C" "A"
EURO STYLE
2-1/2 "A" "B" "C"
Probe Styles
1. Transition Fitting
2. Straight Handle
3. Saber Handle
4. Flanged Handle
6&7. Euro Style Handle
(FEP or Stainless Steel)
*
* A dimension maximum length is 12 (30 cm).

298
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Temperature Sensor Assemblies with Thermowells
Series T Sensor Assemblies are available in a variety of head styles and thermowell materials. All elements are spring loaded to ensure positive
contact in the thermowell. Thermowells are non-lagging. The sensor sheath material is constructed of 316 stainless steel regardless of the well
material specified.
SENSOR TYPE
WELL MATERIAL
TAPER AND BORE
EXTENSION EXTENSION
ELEMENTS ELEMENTS HEAD HEAD SHEATH O.D.
Nominal/Reduced
SHEATH O.D.
Nominal/Reduced
A
in inches
- -
J (T/C)
K (T/C)
E (T/C)
T (T/C)
6 (RTD DIN)
4 (RTD NIST)
Z (RTD DIN 1K)
T
1 304 SS
2 316 SS
3 Brass
1 Step/0.260
2 Straight/0.390
3 Taper/0.260
4 Taper/0.390
5 Straight/0.260
1 Steel 1/2 NPT 1 in hex
4 Steel 1/2 NPT 4 in nipple
7 Steel 1/2 NPT 4 in union
A 304 SS 1/2 NPT 1 in hex
D 304 SS 1/2 NPT 4 in nipple
G 304 SS 1/2 NPT 4 in union
K 316 SS 1/2 NPT 1 in hex
N 316 SS 1/2 NPT 4 in nipple
S 316 SS 1/2 NPT 4 in union
1 Single
2 Dual
0 Aluminum Screw
Cover
1 Cast Aluminum Snap
Cover
2 Polypropylene Snap
Cover
3 Polypropylene Screw
Cover
4 Explosion Proof+
5 304 SS Weather
Proof
Model Coding - Sensor Assemblies with Thermowells
1 5/8 / 1/2
4 3/4 / 1/2
6 7/8 / 1/2
7 7/8 / 5/8
8 1 1/16 / 5/8
9 7/8 / 49/64
A 1 1/16 / 49/64
B 1/2 straight
C 49/64 straight
D 7/8 straight
E 3/4 straight
HEX
EXTENSION
CONNECTION HEAD
THERMOWELL
"A"
NIPPLE
EXTENSION
CONNECTION HEAD
THERMOWELL
"A"
UNION
EXTENSION
CONNECTION HEAD
THERMOWELL
"A"
+Explosion proof head meets the following:
Class I, Groups C & D
Class II, Groups E, F & L
Class III, Div 1 & 2
NEMA 7, Groups C & D
NEMA 9, Groups E, F, & L
A dimension is available in lengths of 4, 6, 9,
12, 15, 18, and 24 inches only.

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Flexible extension cables are available with a variety of terminations.
J (T/C)
K (T/C)
E (T/C)
T (T/C)
2 (2 Wire RTD)
3 (3 Wire RTD)
0 No Extension
1 Fiberglass
Insulation
3 Stainless Steel
Overbraid
4 FEP Insulation
5 Stainless Steel Flex
Hose
6 FEP over SS Flex
Hose
0 Stripped Ends
1 Lugs
2 Lugs with BX
3 Standard Plug
4 Standard Jack
6 Mini Plug
7 Mini Jack
9 Fastabs
A Fastabs with BX
1 Single
2 Dual
Model Coding
Fill in the appropriate numbers or letters to specify the extension cable of your choice. Fill in all boxes. If an item or dimension does not apply, fill
"B" "C" [4 STD]
0 Stripped Ends
1 Lugs
2 Lugs with BX
3 Standard Plug
4 Standard Jack
6 Mini Plug
7 Mini Jack
9 Fastabs
A Fastabs with BX
SENSOR TYPE
EXTENSION TYPE
TERMINAL #1 TERMINAL #2 TERMINAL #2
ELEMENTS ELEMENTS
B
in feet
C
Terminal #1
in inches
C
Terminal #2
in inches
- - -
Extension Cables
EC-

300
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Thermowells
Select bore as 0.260 for 1/4 diameter elements and 0.390 for 3/8 diameter elements. Specify heavy duty mounting
for tapered sheaths.
HARDWARE TYPE
TAPER AND BORE
INSIDE THREAD
PROCESS CONNECTION PROCESS CONNECTION
MOUNTING MOUNTING LAG LAG SHEATH O.D.
Base/Taper
SHEATH O.D.
Base/Taper
- -
A Dimension Specify in 4, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 0r
24
1 304 SS Sheath
2 316 SS Sheath
3 Brass
4 Carbon Steel
W
1 1/2 female NPT
0 Straight / 0.260
1 Step / 0.260
2 Straight / 0.390
3 Taper / 0.260
4 Taper / 0.390
1 1/2 NPT
2 3/4 NPT
3 1 NPT
4 1 150# Flange
5 1 1/2 150# Flange
6 2 150# Flange
7 1 300# Flange
8 1 1/2 300# Flange
9 2 300# Flange
A 1 600# Flange
B 1 1/2 600# Flange
C 2 600# Flange
1 Threaded
2 Heavy Duty
Threaded
3 Heavy Duty
Flanged
4 Flanged
Model Coding - Thermowells
Fill in the appropriate numbers or letters to specify the thermowell of your choice. Fill in all boxes. If an item or dimension does not apply,
fill those boxes with zeros 0.
1 5/8 / 1/2
4 3/4 / 1/2
6 7/8 / 1/2
7 7/8 / 5/8
8 1 1/16 / 5/8
9 7/8 / 49/64
A 1 1/16 / 49/64
B 1/2 straight
C 49/64 straight
D 7/8 straight
E 3/4 straight
STEPPED STEM
1/4 IN ELEMENTS ONLY
1.000
[25.40]
3/4
[19.05]
1/2 NPT
.260
[6.60]
BORE
1/4
[6.35]
1/2
[12.70]
"A"
TAPERED STEM
1/4
[5.35]
5/8
[15.88]
49/64
[19.45]
0.260/0.390
[6.60]/[9.91]
BORE
1.000
[25.40]
3/4
[19.05]
"A"
1/2 NPT
0 None
2 2
3 3
Straight Stem
Tapered Stem
Stepped Stem
Tapered Flanged
Straight Flanged
TAPERED STEM
WELD
SHEATH
.260/.390
[6.60]/[9.91]
BORE
1/4
[6.35]
5/8
[15.88]
49/64
[19.45]
"A"
1/2 NPT
1-1/4
[31.75]
2-1/4
[57.15]
STRAIGHT STEM
1/4
[6.35]
.260/.390
[6.60]/[9.91]
BORE
WELD
SHEATH
"A"
1/2 NPT
1-1/4
[31.75]
2-1/4
[57.15]
STRAIGHT STEM
1/4 IN ELEMENTS ONLY
1.000
[25.40]
3/4
[19.05]
1/2 NPT
.260
[6.60]
BORE
1/4
[6.35]
1/2
[12.70]
"A"
PROCESS CONNECTION

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Plugs and Jacks
Standard Size Single Plugs (male)
Miniature Size Single Plugs (male)
Standard Size Single Jacks (female)
Miniature Size Single Jacks (female)
These adapters convert the minature plug on the end of the coiled
cable on the Master Probe Handle to a standard lug. Simply plug
the cord into the adapter.
1-3/4 x 7/16 OD
1.5
7/16
L
7/16
3/8
Pipe Adapters
Bayonet Adapters
Compression Fittings
Transition Adapter
Type
J
K
T
Cu11 (2-Wire)
E
Cu (2-Wire)
Cu (3-Wire)
Type
J
K
T
R
S
E
Cu (2-Wire)
Cu (3-Wire)
Model
1568-0007
1568-0008
1568-0009
1568-0011
1568-0012
1568-0013
1568-0020
1568-0021
Model
1568-0022
1568-0023
1568-0024
1568-0025
1568-0027
1568-0028
1568-0029
L
7/8
7/8
1-3/8
1-3/8
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
Thread Size
1/8-27 NPT
3/8-24 NPT
1/8-27 NPT
3/8-24 NPT
1/8-27 NPT
3/8-24 NPT
10 x 1.5 mm
Type
J
K
T
Cu11 (2-Wire)
E
Cu (2-Wire)
Cu (3-Wire)
Type
J
K
T
R
S
E
Cu (2-Wire)
Cu (3-Wire)
Type OD
1/8
1/8
3/16
3/16
1/4
1/4
.260 - .275
Thread Size
1/8-27 NPT
1/8-27 NPT
1/8-27 NPT
1/8-27 NPT
1/4-18 NPT
1/8-27 NPT
1/4-18 NPT
Material
Brass
Stainless Steel
Brass
Stainless Steel
Brass
Stainless Steel
FEP
Model
481-0001
481-0002
481-0003
481-0004
481-0015
481-0022
481-0134
Model
481-0006
481-0007
481-0008
481-0009
481-0016
481-0023
481-0135
Model
481-0093
481-0095
481-0094
481-0098
481-0097
481-0096
481-0099
481-0175
Model
481-0100
481-0102
481-0101
481-0105
481-0104
481-0103
481-0106
481-0174
Fits Pipe
Diameters
1/2 to 7/8
7/8 to 1-1/2
1-5/16 to 2-1/4
2-1/4 to 3-5/16
3-5/8 to 4-1/4
4-5/16 to 5-1/4
6-1/4 to 6-3/4
7-3/4 to 8-1/4
Fits Pipe
Diameters
9-3/4 to 10-1/4
11-3/4 to 12-1/4
15-3/4 to 16-1/4
17-3/4 to 18-1/4
19-3/4 to 20-1/4
23-3/4 to 24-1/4
29-3/4 to 30-1/4
Model
144-0012
144-0020
144-0009
144-0022
144-0014
144-0024
144-0037
Model
1568-0001
1568-0002
1568-0003
1568-0004
1568-0005
1568-0006
1568-0016 Model
Type K Type J Type T
481-0127 481-0126 481-0128

302
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Duct and Immersion Building Automation
Temperature Sensors
Available up to 18 Probe Length, Thermistor or RTD Outputs
Series
TE
The Series TE Duct and Immersion Temperature Sensor can be used
to monitor air or water temperature throughout a building management system
or an air handler unit. Flanged duct sensors monitor the supply or return air
and provide a thermistor or RTD output to the digital controller. Immersion
sensors which are supplied with compression fittings are typically used to
monitor the hot or chilled water lines throughout a building. Thermowells are
recommended, but not required on the immersion sensors.
For variable air volume applications, the Series TE can be configured to have
8 plenum rated cable with flying leads. Standard units come with 4 leads
with an integral terminal block to eliminate carrying extra wire nuts. For
housing models, multiple knockouts provide easy conduit access to any side of
the housing. The 1/4 turn lid comes with a chain to prevent it from being lost
during installation.
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy:
Thermistor temperature sensor: 0.22C @ 25C (0.4F @ 77F);
RTD temperature sensor: DIN class B: 0.3C @ 0C (0.54F @
32F).
Temperature Limits: Operating: 40 to 302F ( 40 to 150C).
Sensor Curves: See resistance vs. temperature table.
Housing Material: Meets UL, 94 V O polycarbonate plastic.
Weight: 5.3 oz (150.3 g).
BALL CHAIN
CONNECTOR
2X .325 x .2000
MOUNTING
SLOTS
3.295
4.163
4.788
2.216
.125
GASKET
PROBE
LENGTH
+ .336
+ .0625/-.000
4X
.875
8 FOOT
PLENUM
CABLE
.125
GASKET
4.00 .050
PROBE LENGTH + .55
+ .0625/-.000
.235
.125
GASKET
1.000
1.500
2.000
2X 218
MOUNTING
HOLES
PROBE LENGTH + .55
+ .0625/-.000
PROBE LENGTH
+ .75 +.0625/ -.000
8 FOOT
PLENUM
CABLE
PROBE LENGTH
+ .75 +.0625/ -.000
4.00 .050
BALL CHAIN
CONNECTOR
2.216
4X
.875
PROBE LENGTH
+ .366 +.0625/ -.000
3.295
TE-I
TE-D
TE-IBG
TE-DFG
NEW PRODUCT!

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Model Chart
Example
Series
Mounting
Configuration
Sensor Type
Probe Length
Probe Diameter
Termination
Thermowell
Connection
TE
TE
DFN
DFN
DFG
IBN
IBG
A
A
B
C
D
E
F
04
25
04
06
08
12
18
4
4
8
4
8
00
00
12
14
Thermowells
Model
TE-TNS-N044N-14
TE-TNS-N044N-12
TE-TNS-N064N-14
TE-TNS-N064N-12
TE-TNS-N094N-14
TE-TNS-N094N-12
TE-TNS-N124N-14
TE-TNS-N124N-12
Length
4
4
6
6
9
9
12
12
Resistance vs Temperature Table
C
55
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
120
125
130
135
140
145
150
F
67.0
58.0
49.0
40.0
31.0
22.0
13.0
4.0
5.0
14.0
23.0
32.0
41.0
50.0
59.0
68.0
77.0
86.0
95.0
104.0
113.0
122.0
131.0
140.0
149.0
158.0
167.0
176.0
185.0
194.0
203.0
212.0
221.0
230.0
239.0
248.0
257.0
266.0
275.0
284.0
293.0
302.0
Temperature
A
607800.00
441200.00
323600.00
239700.00
179200.00
135200.00
102900.00
78910.00
61020.00
47540.00
37310.00
29490.00
23460.00
18780.00
15130.00
12260.00
10000.00
8194.00
6752.00
5592.00
4655.00
3893.00
3271.00
2760.00
2339.00
1990.00
1700.00
1458.00
1255.00
1084.00
939.30
816.80
712.60
623.60
547.30
481.80
425.30
376.40
334.00
297.20
265.10
237.00
B
963849.00
670166.00
471985.00
336479.00
242681.00
176974.00
130421.00
97081.00
72957.00
55329.00
42327.00
32650.00
25392.00
19901.00
15712.00
12493.00
10000.00
8057.00
6531.00
5326.00
4368.00
3602.00
2986.00
2488.00
2083.00
1752.00
1480.00
1255.00
1070.00
915.50
786.60
678.60
587.60
510.60
445.30
389.60
341.90
301.00
265.80
235.30
208.90
186.10
C
289154.70
201049.80
141595.50
100943.70
72804.30
53092.20
39126.30
29124.30
21887.10
16598.70
12698.10
9795.00
7617.60
5970.30
4713.60
3747.90
3000.00
2417.10
1959.30
1597.80
1310.40
1080.60
895.80
746.40
624.90
525.60
444.00
376.50
321.00
274.65
235.98
203.58
176.28
153.18
133.59
116.88
102.57
90.30
79.74
70.59
62.67
55.83
D
78.32
80.31
82.29
84.27
86.25
88.22
90.19
92.16
94.12
96.09
98.04
100.00
101.95
103.90
105.85
107.79
109.74
111.67
113.61
115.54
117.47
119.40
121.32
123.24
125.16
127.08
128.99
130.90
132.80
134.71
136.61
138.51
140.40
142.29
144.18
146.07
147.95
149.83
151.71
153.58
155.46
157.33
E
783.2
803.1
822.9
842.7
862.5
882.2
901.9
921.6
941.2
960.9
980.4
1000.0
1019.5
1039.0
1058.5
1077.9
1097.4
1116.7
1136.1
1155.4
1174.7
1194.0
1213.2
1232.4
1251.6
1270.8
1289.9
1309.0
1328.0
1347.1
1366.1
1385.1
1404.0
1422.9
1441.8
1460.7
1479.5
1498.3
1517.1
1535.8
1554.6
1573.3
F
2394000.00
1646200.00
1145800.00
806800.00
574400.00
413400.00
300400.00
220600.00
163500.00
122280.00
92240.00
70160.00
53780.00
41560.00
32340.00
25360.00
20000.00
15892.00
12704.00
10216.00
8264.00
6722.00
5498.00
4520.00
3734.00
3100.00
2586.00
2166.00
1822.60
1540.00
1306.40
1112.60
951.00
815.80
702.20
606.40
525.60
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Resistance Curves (in Ohms)
Connection
(Internal/
External) (NPT)
1/4 / 1/2
1/2 / 3/4
1/4 / 1/2
1/2 / 3/4
1/4 / 1/2
1/2 / 3/4
1/4 / 1/2
1/2 / 3/4
TE DFN A0448 00
Temperature Sensor
Duct Mount Probe Only
Duct Mount in Housing
Immersion Probe Only
Immersion Probe in Housing
10K Ohm Type III Thermistor
10K Ohm Type II Thermistor
3K Ohm Thermistor
Pt100 Ohm RTD
Pt1000 Ohm RTD
20K Ohm Thermistor
2.5
4
6
8
12
18 (DFN/DFG Only)
1/4
4 leads
8 Plenum Rated Cable
Probe only
1/2 NPT Compression Fitting
1/4 NPT Compression Fitting

304
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy:
Thermistor temp sensor: 0.22C @ 25C (0.4F @ 77F);
RTD temp sensor: DIN class B; 0.3C @ 0C (54F @ 32F).
Weight: 0.3 lb (136 g).
Series
TE-W
Wall Mount Temperature Sensor
Discrete Wall Mount Housing
The Series TE-W Wall Mount Temperature Sensor provides a low cost temperature
input for any building management system. With large vents in the housing for proper air
flow, the sensor accurately measures the ambient temperature in hotel rooms or office
buildings. Multiple mounting holes on the wall plate allow for mounting to numerous
surfaces.
3-13/32
[86.52]
1-13/32
[50.01]
4-31/64
[113.9]
1-53/64
[46.43]
35/64
[13.89]
1-3/16
[30.16]
1-3/16
[30.16]
1-13/32
[35.72]
3X 3/8
[9.53]
4X 3/16
[4.76]
59/64
[23.42]
Model
TE-WND-A
TE-WND-B
TE-WND-C
TE-WND-D
TE-WND-E
TE-WND-F
TE-WND-G
Resistance vs Temperature Table
See page 303.
Sensor Type
10K Ohm Type III Thermistor
10K Ohm Type II Thermistor
3K Ohm Thermistor
Pt100 Ohm RTD
Pt1000 Ohm RTD
20K Ohm Thermistor
1.8K Ohm Thermistor
Series
WTP-W
The Series WTP-W Wireless Wall Mount Temperature Sensors allows flexibility
in office buildings with cubicles or in hotel rooms. Without any wires to limit the location
of the sensor, it can be moved quickly without any interruption in temperature
measurement. Optional temperature set point and manual override features allow users to
adjust temperatures to make the ambient conditions more comfortable.
A reliable 418 MHz signal can carry the measurements up to 100 feet without a repeater.
With the optional 900 MHz repeater, measurements can be transmitted up to 1000 feet
away.
Wireless Wall Mount Temperature Sensors
Transmits up to 100 Feet, Manual Override
RoHS
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 0.54F (0.3C).
Humidity Limits: 5 to 95% RH non condensing.
Power Requirements: 2 AA 3.6V lithium batteries.
Transmitter Interval Rate: Approximately 10 15 seconds.
Enclosure Rating: UL 94 V 0.
Weight: 0.25 lb (113 g).
FCC Approval: FCC ID# T4F061213RSO.
Model
WTP-W00
WTP-W10
WTP-W01
WTP-W11
Set Point Adjustment
No
Yes
No
Yes
2-3/4
[69.85]
1-1/16
[26.92]
4-1/2
[114.30]
COOL WARM
ACCESSORIES (see complete list on page 142)
WM-CSF-4A, DIN Rail Mount 4 to 20 mA Temperature Output
Module Range 50 to 90F (10 to 32C)
WM-VSF-1A, DIN Rail Mount 0 to 10 VDC Temperature Output
Module Range 50 to 90F (10 to 32C)
WM-SSV-07, DIN Rail Mount 0 to 10 VDC Set Point Output Module
WM-RSO, DIN Rail Mount Normally Open Override Output Module
WM-RSC, DIN Rail Mount Normally Closed Override Output Module
Manual Override
No
No
Yes
Yes

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
TG
Polycarbonate Wall Mount Thermostat Covers
Key Lock Protection, Easy to Mount
The Series TG Polycarbonate Thermostat Cover prevents physical damage and
unauthorized adjustments of thermostats. Two sizes of covers are available to fit most
common thermostats and transmitters. The low profile design with ventilation slits allows
exceptional air flow in order to obtain accurate measurements. Each cover comes with two
keys and mounting hardware for drywall and concrete walls.
4.650 [118.1]
MAXIMUM
INTERNAL
FOOTPRINT
6.890 [175]
MAXIMUM
INTERNAL
FOOTPRINT
2.000
[50.8]
MAXIMUM
INTERNAL
FOOTPRINT
MAXIMUM
INTERNAL
FOOTPRINT
2.930 [74.4]
4.840 [122.9]
MAXIMUM
INTERNAL
FOOTPRINT
9.450
[240]
6.650
[168.9]
3.000
[76.2]
2.890
[73.4]
MAXIMUM
INTERNAL
FOOTPRINT
2.125
[53.98]
4.750
[120.7]
6.750
[171.5]
Model TG-1, Large Thermostat Cover
Model TG-2, Small Thermostat Cover
ACCESSORY
TG-KEY, Replacement Keys
Series
WTP-R
The Series WTP-R Wireless Remote Probe Temperature Sensors can be used to
monitor surface temperature of water lines or in locations where space is limited. For
greater flexibility, the enclosure for the electronics can be mounted up to 25 from the
temperature measurement point. By sampling the temperature measurement every 10
seconds, the 3.6V lithium battery is able to power the unit for up to 8 years.
away.
Wireless Remote Probe Temperature Sensors
Transmits up to 100 Feet, Up to 25 Capillary
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 0.2C.
Transmitter Interval: Approximately 10 seconds.
Enclosure Rating: UL 94 V 0, NEMA 4X.
Weight: 0.85 lb (386 g).
Model
WTP-R05
WTP-R10
WTP-R15
WTP-R20
WTP-R25
5
[127.00]
4-5/32
[105.41]
3X
1/2 NPT
2-1/2
[63.50]
1/2 NPT
CONDUIT
KNOCKOUT
RoHS
WM-CSF-4G, 4 to 20 mA Temperature Output Module
Range 32 to 185F (0 to 85C)
WM-VSF-1G, 0 to 10 VDC Temperature Output Module
Range 32 to 185F (0 to 85C)
Capillary Length
5 (1.5 m)
10 (3 m)
15 (4.6 m)
20 (6.1 m)
25 (7.6 m)

306
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
WTP
The Series WTP Wireless Temperature Sensors can be quickly installed on chilled
water lines, air ducts or outside a building without having to run additional wiring. By
sampling the temperature measurement every 10 seconds, the 3.6 V lithium battery is able
to power the unit for up to 8 years.
away.
Wireless Temperature Sensors
Transmits up to 100 Feet, NEMA 4X Enclosure
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 0.3C.
Transmitter Interval: Approximately 10 seconds.
Enclosure Rating: UL 94 V 0, NEMA 4X.
Weight: Duct/OSA: 1.25 lb (566 g); Immersion: 0.8 lb (363 g).
Model
WTP-OSA
WTP-D04
WTP-D08
WTP-D12
WTP-D18
WTP-I02
WTP-I04
WTP-I08
Mounting
Configuration
OSA
Duct
Duct
Duct
Duct
Immersion
Immersion
Immersion
2-1/2
[63.50]
1/2 NPT CONDUIT
KNOCKOUT
3X 1/2 NPT
1/4
[6.35]
L
4-5/32
[105.41]
5
[127.00]
2-1/2
[63.50]
1/2 NPT
CONDUIT
KNOCKOUT
3X
1/2 NPT
5-3/4
[145.80]
1/2 NPT CONDUIT
KNOCKOUT
2-1/2
[63.50]
3X 1/2 NPT
FOR 1/2 NPT CONNECTION
1/4
[6.35]
L
4-5/32
[105.41]
DUCT MODEL
OSA MODEL
IMMERSION MODEL
5 [127.00]
DUCT & IMMERSION MODEL
RoHS
WM-4SS, 418 MHz Receiver
WM-PSS, 418 MHz Repeater with Standard Antenna
WM-CSF-4G, 4 to 20 mA Temperature Output Module
Range 32 to 185F
WM-VSF-1G, 0 to 10 VDC Temperature Output Module
Range 32 to 185F
WM-TS2, 10K Type 2 Thermistor Output Module
WM-TS3, 10K Type 3 Thermistor Output Module
Insertion
Length
N/A
4
8
12
18
2
4
8

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
AVG
Averaging Temperature Sensor
Available in 12or 24 Lengths
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: Platinum RTD: 0.6% @ 32F (0C); Nickel RTD: 0.5F @
32F (0C); Balco RTD: 0.1% @ 32F (0C); Thermistors: 0.36F from
32 to 158F (0 to 70C).
Operating Temperature: 32 to 240F ( 35.5 to 115.5C).
Capillary Length: 12 or 24 depending on model.
Cable Length: 8.
Probe Material: Bendable copper capillary.
Mounting: Flanged mounting ears.
The Series AVG Averaging Temperature Sensor can be used to measure
the average temperature up stream of the cooling coils in an air handler. The
coiled sensor unwinds to a length of 12 or 24 to take an average temperature
reading across a large space. The housing has multiple knockouts to reduce the
time to install conduit. The Series CC1 mounting brackets can be used to secure
the capillary to the wall of the air handler without kinking. The Series AVG can
be ordered with a choice of 11 output options that allow it to communicate to any
standard building control system.
Model
AVG-21121
AVG-22121
AVG-23121
AVG-24121
AVG-25121
AVG-26121
AVG-27121
AVG-28121
AVG-29121
AVG-2A121
AVG-2B121
Model
AVG-21241
AVG-22241
AVG-23241
AVG-24241
AVG-25241
AVG-26241
AVG-27241
AVG-28241
AVG-29241
AVG-2A241
AVG-2B241
Sensor Type
Pt 100 Ohm RTD
PT 1000 Ohm RTD
Ni 1000 Ohm RTD
Balco 1000 Ohm RTD
10K Ohm Type 2 Thermistor
3K Ohm Thermistor
5K Ohm Thermistor
100K Ohm Thermistor
20K Ohm Thermistor
2252 Ohm Thermistor
Sensor Type
Pt 100 Ohm RTD
PT 1000 Ohm RTD
Ni 1000 Ohm RTD
Balco 1000 Ohm RTD
3K Ohm Thermistor
5K Ohm Thermistor
100K Ohm Thermistor
20K Ohm Thermistor
2252 Ohm Thermistor
4-1/16
[103.12]
2X 0.743 [18.87 MM]
3/8 NPT CONDUIT
KNOCKOUTS
2-3/16
[55.88]
2
[50.80]
4X 0.896 [22.76 MM]
1/2 NPT CONDUIT KNOCKOUTS
FOR 1/2 NPT
THERMOWELL CONNECTION
Model
CC1-N
CC1-B
CC1-GY
The Series CC1 Averaging Temperature Sensor Clips are used to
mount the capillary of the AVG series temperature sensor to the wall of the
duct or air handler. The clips are available in grey, beige or a natural color. The
clip can hold 1/8, 1/4 or 3/8 capillary diameters. The top of the mounting
clip can also be used to hold a single 1/4 diameter temperature probes in
place. Slots are provided for using nylon zip ties to hold the tubing in place, if
needed.
Series
CC1
Averaging Temperature Sensor Clips
Grey, Natural or Beige
2-15/32
[62.66]
1-63/64
[50.29]
1-3/32
[27.94]
1/4
[6.35]
1/2
[12.65]
(sold individually)
Capillary
Length
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
Capillary
Length
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
Color
Natural
Beige
Grey

308
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
AD
Air/Duct Temperature Sensors
Air/Duct Temperature Sensors are available in precision platinum, nickel, or balco
RTDs and interchangeable NTC thermistors. Sensors are constructed with a hermetically
sealed 304 SS sheath and are unaffected by high humidity, contamination, thermal shock
or vibration. Flange mount sensors offer low profile mounting and quick installation directly
into duct work. Rugged air/duct sensors are ideal for air handlers, fan coil units, ducts,
furnaces, freezers, ovens and other through wall temperature sensing applications.
Sensor Type
1 Pt 100 RTD
2 Pt 1000 RTD
3 Ni 1000 RTD
4 1000 Balco RTD
5 10 k NTC Thermistor
A 2252 NTC Thermistor
Probe Length
04 4 (100 mm)
06 6 (150 mm)
08 8 (200 mm)
12 12 (300 mm)
AD
Installation
1 Flange mount
3 (175 mm) wire leads
2 Flange mount
6 ft (1.8 m) cable
FLANGE MOUNT
1/4
[6.35]
2
[50.80]
1-1/2
[38.10]
Model Coding
Fill in the appropriate numbers or letters to specify the probe of your choice. Fill in
all boxes. If an item or dimension does not apply, fill those boxes with zeros 0.
* Minimum order quantity of 10 pieces.
Model
O-45
Outside Air Temperature Sensors
NEMA 4X, Removable Terminal Block
The Model O-45 Outside Air Temperature Sensors are great for monitoring ambient
air temperatures in outdoor applications. The temperature sensors are mounted in a
NEMA 4X enclosure with integral mounting tabs. The mounting tabs can be used to
surface or suspension mount the temperature sensors. The removable terminal block makes
installation easy. The Model O-45 can be used to measure outside air temperatures in
building automation systems or room temperatures inside agricultural ventilation houses.
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 1F at 77F (0.5C at 25C).
Operating Temperature: 40 to 250F.
Probe Diameter: 0.235 (5.97 mm).
Probe Length: 3.5.
Probe Material: 304 SS.
Mounting: Suspension or surface.
3-31/64
[88.5]
3
[76.2]
6-3/8
[161.48]
2-3/4
[69.85]
2x 5/16
[7.94]
2X .188
2X .250
2X
.375
4
[101.6]
1-31/64
[37.70]
1-27/64
[36.12]
Model O-45, 10 K Thermistor Input

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
I2-1
Immersion Temperature Probes
RTD & Thermistor Outputs, 304 SS Probes
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: Platinum RTD: 0.6% @ 32F (0C); Nickel RTD: 0.5F @ 32F
(0C); Balco RTD: 0.1% @ 32F (0C); Thermistors: 0.36F from 32 to 158F (0
to 70C).
Operating Temperature: 32 to 240F ( 35.5 to 115.5 C).
Probe Diameter: 1/4 (6.3 mm).
Cable Length: 6 ft (1.8 m).
Mounting: 1/2 threaded connection to fit Series IW2 thermowell.
The Series I2-1 Immersion Temperature Probes are designed to monitor the hot
and chilled water lines throughout a buildings water distribution loop. The multiple
temperature sensor outputs allow these sensors to connect to virtually any digital building
controller. The Series IW2 stainless steel thermowells allow the temperature sensors to
be replaced without draining the water line. The temperature sensors are available in 4
and 6 insertion lengths.
Note: A Series IW2 Thermowell must be used on pressurized air and water lines to
prevent leakage around the probe.
Model
I2-11062
I2-12062
I2-13062
I2-14062
I2-15062
I2-16062
I2-17062
I2-18062
I2-19062
I2-1A062
I2-1B062
Model
I2-11042
I2-12042
I2-13042
I2-14042
I2-15042
I2-16042
I2-17042
I2-18042
I2-19042
I2-1A042
I2-1B042
Sensor Type
Pt 100 Ohm RTD
PT 1000 Ohm RTD
Ni 1000 Ohm RTD
Balco 1000 Ohm RTD
3K Ohm Thermistor
5K Ohm Thermistor
100K Ohm Thermistor
20K Ohm Thermistor
2252 Ohm Thermistor
Sensor Type
Pt 100 Ohm RTD
PT 1000 Ohm RTD
Ni 1000 Ohm RTD
Balco 1000 Ohm RTD
3K Ohm Thermistor
5K Ohm Thermistor
100K Ohm Thermistor
20K Ohm Thermistor
2252 Ohm Thermistor
Thermowells
Model
IW2-262
IW2-242
Material
304 SS
304 SS
1/2 INTERNAL NPT
1/2 EXTERNAL NPT
3/8 [9.53]
L
L
6 THERMOWELL: L = 6.250
4 THERMOWELL: L = 4.000
L = 7.000 FOR 6 THERMOWELL
1W2-2X2 THERMOWELL
1/2 NPT
1/4 [6.37]
12-1X0X2 SENSOR
31/32 [24.87]
1-5/16
[33.31]
1-1/8 [28.19]
1-27/32
[46.99]
Series
S
Surface Mount Temperature Sensor
RTD and Thermistor, 304 SS Probe, Waterproof
The Series S Surface Mount Temperature Sensors provide a cost effective and
reliable solution for surface contact temperature measurement of conditioned water pipes,
low pressure steam or refrigerant lines. The sensors are ideal for applications where
immersion wells are not practical to install. Models are constructed with a 2 (50 mm) 304
SS probe and a 6 ft (1.8 m) plenum rated cable. Nylon ties are included to secure the sensor
to the pipe.
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy:
Platinum RTD: 0.1% @ 32F (0C), alpha 385 per DIN 43760.
Nickel RTD: 0.5F @ 70F (21.1C).
Balco: 0.5F @ 70F (21.1C).
Thermistor: 0.2C interchangeable @ 77F (25C).
Probe Length: 2 (50 mm).
2.000
[50]
1/4
[6.3]
CABLE LENGTH
6FT [1.8]
Model
S-11
S-12
S-13
S-14
S-15
S-16
S-17
S-18
S-19
S-1A
Insertion Length
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Insertion Length
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Insertion Length
6
4
Sensor Type
Pt 100 RTD
Pt 1000 RTD
Ni 1000 RTD
1000 Balco RTD
10 k NTC Thermistor
3 k NTC Thermistor
5 k NTC Thermistor
100 k NTC Thermistor
20 k NTC Thermistor
2252 NTC Thermistor
ACCESSORY
IW-C, Thermowell Compound

310
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
I2-2
General Purpose Immersion Temperature Sensor
Locking Screw Cover, Multiple Conduit Holes
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy:
Platinum RTD: 0.6% @ 32F
(0C);
Nickel RTD: 0.5F @ 32F (0C);
Balco RTD: 0.1% @ 32F (0C);
Thermistors: 0.36F from 32 to
158F (0 to 70C).
Operating Temperature: 32 to 240F
( 35.5 to 115.5 C).
Cable Length: 8.
Mounting: 1/2 threaded connection to
fit Series IW2 thermowell.
The Series I2-2 General Purpose Immersion Temperature Sensor is ideal for
monitoring hot and chilled water lines throughout a building or mechanical room. The
plastic housing is in the shape of a standard junction box with multiple knockouts for easy
conduit access. The locking cover prevents unauthorized occupants from tampering with
the temperature sensor. The Sensor I2-2 can be ordered with a choice of 11 output options
that allow it to communicate to any standard building control system.
Model
I2-21062
I2-22062
I2-23062
I2-24062
I2-25062
I2-26062
I2-27062
I2-28062
I2-29062
I2-2A062
I2-2B062
Model
I2-21042
I2-22042
I2-23042
I2-24042
I2-25042
I2-26042
I2-27042
I2-28042
I2-29042
I2-2A042
I2-2B042
Sensor Type
Pt 100 Ohm RTD
PT 1000 Ohm RTD
Ni 1000 Ohm RTD
Balco 1000 Ohm RTD
3K Ohm Thermistor
5K Ohm Thermistor
100K Ohm Thermistor
20K Ohm Thermistor
2252 Ohm Thermistor
Sensor Type
Pt 100 Ohm RTD
PT 1000 Ohm RTD
Ni 1000 Ohm RTD
Balco 1000 Ohm RTD
3K Ohm Thermistor
5K Ohm Thermistor
100K Ohm Thermistor
20K Ohm Thermistor
2252 Ohm Thermistor
Thermowells
Model
IW2-262
IW2-242
Material
304 SS
304 SS
4X 0.896 [22.76 MM]
2
[50.80]
FOR 1/2 NPT THERMOWELL CONNECTION
L
2X 0.743 [18.87 MM]
4-1/16
[103.12]
2-3/16
[55.88]
Series
I2-4
Weather-Proof Immersion Temperature Sensor
Twist Off Cover, Multiple Conduit Holes
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy:
Platinum RTD: 0.6% @ 32F
(0C);
Balco RTD: 0.1% @ 32F (0C);
Thermistors: 0.36F from 32 to
158F (0 to 70C).
( 35.5 to 115.5 C).
Cable Length: 8.
Mounting: 1/2 threaded connection to
fit Series IW2 thermowell.
The Series I2-4 Weather-Proof Immersion Temperature Sensor is ideal for
monitoring hot and chilled water lines feeding Air Handlers and Cooling Towers. The
plastic housing has a 1/4 turn twist off cover to reduce installation time. The multiple
knockouts allow for easy conduit access to any side of the housing. The Series I2-4 can be
ordered with a choice of 11 output options that allow it to communicate to any standard
building control system.
Model
I2-41062
I2-42062
I2-43062
I2-44062
I2-45062
I2-46062
I2-47062
I2-48062
I2-49062
I2-4A062
I2-4B062
Model
I2-41042
I2-42042
I2-43042
I2-44042
I2-45042
I2-46042
I2-47042
I2-48042
I2-49042
I2-4A042
I2-4B042
Sensor Type
Pt 100 Ohm RTD
PT 1000 Ohm RTD
Ni 1000 Ohm RTD
Balco 1000 Ohm RTD
3K Ohm Thermistor
5K Ohm Thermistor
100K Ohm Thermistor
20K Ohm Thermistor
2252 Ohm Thermistor
Sensor Type
Pt 100 Ohm RTD
PT 1000 Ohm RTD
Ni 1000 Ohm RTD
Balco 1000 Ohm RTD
3K Ohm Thermistor
5K Ohm Thermistor
100K Ohm Thermistor
20K Ohm Thermistor
2252 Ohm Thermistor
Thermowells
Model
IW2-262
IW2-242
Material
304 SS
304 SS
3-31/32
[101.00]
2-7/32
[56.16]
4X 0.896 [22.76 MM]
3-3/32 [78.74]
1/4
[6.35]
L
L= 5.000 FOR 4 THERMOWELL
FOR 1/2 NPT THERMOWELL CONNECTION
Insertion Length
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Insertion Length
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Insertion Length
6
4
Insertion Length
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Insertion Length
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Insertion Length
6
4
ACCESSORY
ACCESSORY

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
S2-2
General Purpose Surface Temperature Assembly
Strap-On Design, Multiple Conduit Holes
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy:
Platinum RTD: 0.6% @ 32F (0C);
Balco RTD: 0.1% @ 32F (0C);
Thermistors: 0.36F from 32 to 158F (0 to 70C).
Probe Material: Copper conductor.
Mounting: Strap on to pipe.
The Series S2-2 General Purpose Surface Temperature Assembly is ideal for
monitoring the temperature of indoor distribution lines when it is not possible to penetrate
the pipe. The plastic housing is in the shape of a standard junction box with multiple
knockouts for easy conduit access. The strap-on connection quickly wraps around a pipe and
can be securely tightened using a flat head screw driver. The Series S2-2 can be ordered
with a choice of 11 output options that allow it to communicate to any standard building
control system.
Model
S2-21
S2-22
S2-23
S2-24
S2-25
S2-26
S2-27
S2-28
S2-29
S2-2A
S2-2B
4-1/16
[103.12]
2X 0.743 [18.87 MM]
2
[50.80]
4X 0.896 [22.76]
2-13/64
[55.88]
Sensor Type
Pt 100 Ohm RTD
PT 1000 Ohm RTD
Ni 1000 Ohm RTD
Balco 1000 Ohm RTD
3K Ohm Thermistor
5K Ohm Thermistor
100K Ohm Thermistor
20K Ohm Thermistor
2252 Ohm Thermistor
10K Ohm Type 3Thermistor
Series
S2-4
Weatherproof Surface Temperature Assembly
Strap-On Design, Twist off Housing Cover
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy:
Platinum RTD: 0.6% @ 32F (0C);
Balco RTD: 0.1% @ 32F (0C);
Thermistors: 0.36F from 32 to 158F (0 to 70C).
Probe Material: Copper conductor.
Mounting: Strap on to pipe.
The Series S2-4 Weatherproof Surface Temperature Assembly is ideal for
monitoring the temperature of distribution lines when it is not possible to penetrate the
pipe. The strap-on connection quickly wraps around a pipe and can be securely tightened
using a flat head screw driver. The twist-off housing cover reduces installation time. The
housing has multiple knockout conduit holes which allows the installer to bring conduit to
any side of the housing. The Series S2-4 can be ordered with a choice of 11 output options
that allow it to communicate to any standard building control system.
Model
S2-41
S2-42
S2-43
S2-44
S2-45
S2-46
S2-47
S2-48
S2-49
S2-4A
S2-4B
3-31/32
[101.00]
2-7/32
[56.15]
4X 0.896 [22.76 MM]
3-1/4
[82.39]
Sensor Type
Pt 100 Ohm RTD
PT 1000 Ohm RTD
Ni 1000 Ohm RTD
Balco 1000 Ohm RTD
3K Ohm Thermistor
5K Ohm Thermistor
100K Ohm Thermistor
20K Ohm Thermistor
2252 Ohm Thermistor

312
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
Series
ILA
In-Line IR Sensor
15:1 Distance-to-Target Ratio, 32 to 932F
The Series ILA Non-Contact Sensors, measure temperatures from 32 to
932F (0 to 500C) and provide a linear 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 50 mV VDC or
thermocouple output. The 2-wire signal is compatible with almost any indicator,
controller, recorder, data logger, etc., without the need for special interfacing or
signal conditioning. They are suitable for most materials such as food, paper,
textiles, plastics, leather, tobacco, pharmaceuticals, chemicals, rubber, coal, and
asphalt.
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Range: 32 to 932F (0 to 500C ).
Accuracy: 1% of reading or 1C whichever is greater.
Emissivity: 0.95 (fixed).
Distance to Target Size Ratio: 15:1.
Power Requirement: 24 VDC.
Repeatability: 0.5% of reading or 0.5C whichever is greater.
Outputs: 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 50 mV, J type thermocouple.
Cable Length: 3.3 ft (1 m).
Spectral Response: 8 to 14 microns.
Housing: Stainless steel.
Weight: 3.35 oz (95 g).
15/16
[8.0]
NUT
45/64
[18.0]
53/64
[21.0]
47/64
[18.6]
3-5/16
[84]
3 FT CABLE
[1 M]
M16 ULTRA FINE 1.0MM PITCH
M16 ULTRA FINE 1.0MM PITCH
15/32
[12]
Model
ILA10
ILA20
ILA30
APPLICATIONS
Typical applications are: air ducts, bearing temperature, oil temperature
indicator, soldering equipment, ovens, environmental test chambers,
pharmaceutical mfg., food processing, plastic molding, petroleum &
chemical processing, electric generating plants, etc.
.125 [3.175] OD
304 STAINLESS STEEL SHEATH
.250 [6.35] OD
304 STAINLESS STEEL
POTTING ADAPTOR
6.000
[152.4]
36.000
[914.4]
#8 SPADE TERMINAL
TYP 3 PLACES
RED LEAD "-"
WHITE
LEAD "+"
4.000
[101.6]
Model
RTD-686
RTD-6812
RTD-6818
RTD-646
RTD-6412
RTD-6418
Length
6 (15 cm)
12 (30.5 cm)
18 (46 cm)
6 (15 cm)
12 (30.5 cm)
18 (46 cm)
Series
RTD
Resistance Temperature Detector
High Temperature, Mineral Insulated, 316 SS Sheath
Precision RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) offers excellent accuracy
and stability over a wide temperature range. Industry standard 3-wire 100 ohm
(DIN) probes are available in 6 (15 cm), 12 (30.5 cm), or 18 (46 cm) sheath
lengths with 30 (76 cm) extension cable and spade lug terminals.
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensor Type: Wire wound, 100 ohm.
Extension Length: 30 (76 cm).
Standard: DIN .00385 (class B, 0.12%).
Output
J Thermocouple
4 20 mA
0 50 mV
Diameter
1/8
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/4

LEVEL
pages 314 315
Water Leak
Detectors
pages 318 319
Level Switches,
Float
pages 320 331
Level Switches,
Ultrasonic
page 332
Level Switches,
Conductivity
pages 334 336
Level Switches,
Capacitive
pages 336 338
Level Switches,
Tuning Fork
page 339
Level Switches,
Optical
page 333
Level Switches,
Displacer
page 334
Level Switches,
Diaphragm
pages 342 343
Level Switches,
Tilt
page 344
Level Transmitters,
Ultrasonic
page 345
Proximity
Sensors
page 340
Level Switches,
Paddle
pages 340 341
Level Transmitters,
Submersible
pages 346 347
Level Transmitters,
Capacitive
page 348
Level Indicators
pages 316 318
Level Transmitters,
Float
page 349
Level/Pump
Controllers
pages 350 354
Pump Leak Detectors
pages 354 355
Bin Vibrators/
Aerators
pages 356 362

314
T
y
p
c
a

A
p
p
c
a
t
o
n
s
L
E
V
E
L
Pneumatic conveying systems use air to transport powder and
dry bulk solids through conveying lines. The air is pressurized by
positive pressure or vacuum to move the product through the lines
into and out of silos, transporters, and receivers. Typical
applications have high and low level indication in the storage bins
to control the flow of product in or out. The PLS is perfect for level
use in these storage bins. It has a rotating paddle that is inserted
into the bin. As the product level builds up in the bin it stops the
paddle from rotating and triggers the level output. The PLS is
great for this application as it not affected by pressure changes in
the bin.
Proximity
Series PLS is used to indicate level status

in pneumatic conveying systems.
Series MPC
Pump
Controller
Inlet
Outlet
Series PBLT
Level Transmitter
Submersible Pumps
Mercoid
pump
controller with
level transmitter
control pumps
in wastewater
lift stations.
Lift stations are used to transmit wastewater to the treatment
facility. Wastewater is transmitted by gravity feed so it has to be
continually elevated to provide height to generate the flow. Lift
stations are pits located at points in the wastewater system to
collect the wastewater that usually have two submersible pumps.
Wastewater in the lift station is pumped out to a higher level from
where it can flow on to the next lift station or to the treatment
facility. The Mercoid
Series MPC pump controller is used with

the Series PBLT level transmitter to control the level in the lift
station. The PBLT is a level transmitter that is submersed in the
tank and sends a linear output of the height of wastewater above
it. The MPC takes the height input and controls the pumps
according to how it has been programmed. For a lift station, the
primary pump comes on when the tank hits a high level and turns
off when the level decreases to the set low level. The second
pump is used if the first pump cannot drain the station and comes
on at a set higher level above pump 1. High and low level alarms,
submersible pump seal failure indication, pump over temperature
protection, and pump alteration all are built into the MPC.
Supply
Series PLS
Paddle
Level Switch
Discharge
Series PLS
Paddle
Level Switch
The supply of grain pneumatically conveyed to this dispensing
hopper is controlled by two Proximity
Series PLS paddle level

switches. When the grain level falls to the low limit switch, the
supply is turned on until the hopper fills to the level of the high
limit switch which turns off the supply. Since grain dust is
explosive, the explosion-proof Series PLS provides the required
safety protection. The PLS is a paddle level switch and is not
affected by the varying pressure in the hopper due to the cycling
of the pneumatic conveying system.
Grain hopper level controlled by Series PLS Paddle
Level Switch.
To meet various tank level measuring needs, Dwyer Instruments,
Inc. offers custom-configured products built to customer
specifications that provide visual indication, continuous level
measurement, and multiple point level measurement. Series VR
or MVR View-Rite Level Indicators are a safe way to keep the
process isolated while providing true visible indication. Unlike
sight glasses, which can crack or break, View-Rite Indicators
contain liquids entirely within their stainless steel enclosure. For
continuous level measurement needs, the Series CLT uses reed
switch technology to offer a more economical solution than
expensive ultrasonic, submersible or RT transmitters. Lastly, the
Series F7-MQ can be used in virtually any tank to indicate high
and low alarms or to control pumps and valves.
Custom level sensing devices are built to meet each
customers specific requirements, providing visual
indication, continuous measurement, and point level
control.
Silo
Transporter
Receiving Bin
Series PLS
Paddle
Level Switch
High High
Alarm/System
Shutdown
High Alarm
Low Alarm
Low Low
Alarm/System
Shutdown
Series CLT
Series F7-MQ
Series VR

T
y
p
c
a

A
p
p
c
a
t
o
n
s
L
E
V
E
L
Many types of heavy industrial equipment use a liquid
cooling system for the motor. A vibratory trench roller is a
machine that compacts sub-bases for roads, parking lots,
etc., and is an example of the type of equipment that would
utilize this system. This machine incorporates a radiator
cooling system. In the system, cooling liquid circulates
through the engine preventing it from over heating. As the
engine is cooled the cooling fluid heats up. The fluid returns
to the radiator to cool down before being circulated through
again. If there is not enough cooling fluid in the system the
engine will not be cooled enough and damage will occur. A
W. E. Anderson
Series OLS optical level switch is installed

as a low level alarm. The level alarm is signaled by the OLS
before the cooling fluid gets to a critical low level, warning
the operator of the problem. The OLS uses an optical
detection system superior for this application as float
controls may trip from machine vibration. Also the compact
insertion length is ideal for a small radiator.
W.E. Anderson
Series OLS
indicates level in
heavy equipment
radiator.
Model OLS
Optical Level
Switch
Standard float switches require at least an inch of liquid to attain
enough buoyancy to switch. This can be a problem in applications
where low level sensing is required. The hat-shaped design of
W.E. Andersons F7-LL provides necessary buoyancy for
switching in only 5/8 of water. This is essential for air conditioner
drip pans, low level sumps, and drains. The F7-LL is also ideal for
low alarms, where running the process dry can result in
catastrophic failure.
Series
F7-LL
Low level float switch enables sensing in air
conditioner drip pans and other shallow level
applications.
Mercoid
model 123 level controls provide high and

low alarm on large de-aerator tank.
Liquid level in the external piping equals level in the tank.
When level rises to high limit, float in upper model 123 is
lifted, actuating switch to sound high level alarm. When
level drops to low limit, lower model 123 sounds low level
alarm.
Water In
Vent
Steam In
123
123
Water Out
Pump
Motor
Control
Pump
From
Drains
B-190
Level Control
Industrial sumps and other underground tanks are ideal
applications for top-mounted Mercoid
displacer type level

controls. Easily installed, these controls use porcelain displacers
that do not float on the surface of liquids, but are suspended on a
coil spring and cable. As the liquid in the tank reaches the level of
the upper displacers, their weight decreases by an amount equal
to the liquid displaced, allowing the spring to move the cable
upward, actuating the switch and the pump is turned on. As the
liquid level falls below the upper displacers they move only a small
amount, staying within the switch deadband until the liquid level
falls to the center of the bottom displacer. At this point the switch
is deactivated stopping the pump. The pump will remain
deactivated until the water level rises to the upper displacers,
repeating the cycle. The displacers are not affected by turbulence,
pressure or chemicals and are excellent for tanks with viscous or
dirty liquids. The level differential is easily adjusted by
repositioning of the displacers on the 316SS cable.
Mercoid
displacer type
level control is ideal for
controlling industrial
sump pumps.

316
L
e
v
e

I
n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s
L
E
V
E
L
View-Rite Level Indicator
Customized to Fit Any Application, Durable, 316 SS Housing and Float
Series
VR
Customize level indicators to meet application requirements. View-Rite level
indicators are low maintenance, environmentally friendly, durable, and require no external
power. Specify any indication length up to 96 inches (244 cm). View-Rite level indicators
incorporate a pressure tight housing with internal float that magnetically activates
external level indication flags, switches, or transmitter. Consult factory for pressure rating
up to 700 psi (48 bar) or temperature rating to 750F (339C).
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean, low viscosity liquids.
Pressure Limits: 275 psi (18.9 bar), 225 psi (15.5 bar) @ 100F (37.8C), 215 psi
(14.8 bar) @ 300F (148.9C), 195 psi (13.4 bar) @ 400F (204.4C).
Tube Diameter: 2 1/2 (64 mm).
OPTIONAL SWITCH MODULES
Clamp onto the level indicator. SPST, rated .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC,
.13A @ 120 VDC, .06A @ 240 VDC.
VR-S1, Maximum temperature is 300F (148.9C). Polysulfone with 1/4 female
NPT conduit connection.
VR-S2, Maximum temperature is 750F (399C). 316 SS with 1/2 male NPT
conduit connection.
VR-S3, Maximum temperature is 750F (399C).
Explosion proof terminal box with 1/2 female NPT conduit connection.
L1 & C to C
L1
C to C
Typical Measurements
C to C = L1 + 10.25 (260.35 mm) C to C = L1
VR SSS1 TPD 0.8 150 090 080P1 I
View Rite Level Indicator
316 L SS, Fluoroelastomer O ring
Top/Bottom Connections
Side/Side Connections
1/2 NPT (Female on TB, and Male on SS Configuration)
1 NPT (Female on TB, and Male on SS Configuration)
1 150# RF Flange
2 150# RF Flange
1 300# RF Flange
2 300# RF Flange
Top
Bottom
Top and Bottom (Only with SS Configuration)
None
Drain, 1/2 female NPT (Only with SS Configuration)
Vent, 1/2 female NPT (Only with SS Configuration)
Drain and Vent (Only with SS Configuration)
Specific Gravity of fluid, minimum 0.8
Operating Pressure, in psi. Maximum is 275 psi (18.9 bar)
Operating Temperature of the fluid, in F. Maximum is 400F (204C)
Length of level indicator, in whole inches. Maximum of 240 (6.1 m); Minimum of 6 (15.25 cm)
Plastic, white and orange [300F (149C) maximum]
Aluminum, silver and black
None
Feet and Inches
Inches Only
4 to 20 mA transmitter of level [300F (149) maximum]
0 to 5 VDC transmitter of level
Example
Construction
Wetted Materials
Configuration
Process
Connection
Float Access
Drain
and Vent
Spec. Gravity
Operating Pressure
Operating Temp.
Indicating Length, L1
Indicating Flags
Visual
Indicating
Scale
Output Options
VR
VR
S
S
SS
TB
SS
1
1
2
4
5
6
7
TP
TP
BM
TB
080
000
0.8
0.0
D
N
D
V
B
090
000
150
000
P
P
A
1
N
1
2
I
I
V
Top & Bottom Side & Side
Models are built to your specifications

L
e
v
e

I
n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s
L
E
V
E
L
Mini View-Rite Level Indicator
Customized, Visual Level Indication, Compact Size
Miniature custom level indicators are ideal for high-visibility level indication in tight
spaces. All stainless steel housing provides rugged durability with a diameter of only 1-1/4
inches (32 mm). Select the mounting type that will best fit your application and an indication
length of up to 96 inches (244 cm). View-Rite level indicators incorporate a pressure tight
housing with internal float that magnetically activates external level indication flags,
switches, or transmitter.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean, low viscosity liquids.
Pressure Limits: 300F, 400 psi (27.6 bar); 300F, 373 psi (25.7 bar).
Tube Diameter: 1 1/4 (32 mm).
SWITCH MODULES
Clamp onto the level indicator. SPST, rated .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC,
.13A @ 120 VDC, .06A @ 240 VDC.
MVR-S1, Maximum temperature is 300F (148.9C). Polysulfone with 1/4
female NPT conduit connection.
MVR-S2, Maximum temperature is 750F (399C). 316 SS with 1/2 male NPT
conduit connection.
MVR-S3, Maximum temperature is 750F (399C). Explosion proof terminal box
with 1/2 female NPT conduit connection.
L1 & C to C
L1
C to C
Typical Measurements
C to C = L1 + 7.72 (196.09 mm) C to C = L1
Top & Bottom Side & Side
Series
MVR
MVR SSS1 TPD 0.8 150 090 080P1 I
Mini View Rite Level Indicator
304 L SS Housing, 316 L SS Float, Fluoroelastomer O ring
Top/Bottom Connections
Side/Side Connections
1/2 NPT (Female on TB, and Male on SS Configuration)
1/2 150# RF Flange
Top
Bottom
Top and Bottom (Only with SS Configuration)
None
Drain, 1/2 female NPT (Only with SS Configuration)
Vent, 1/2 female NPT (Only with SS Configuration)
Drain and Vent (Only with SS Configuration)
Specific Gravity of fluid, minimum 0.8
Operating Pressure, in psi. Maximum is 400 psi (27.6 bar)
Operating Temperature of the fluid, in F. Maximum is 400F (204C)
Length of level indicator, in whole inches. Maximum of 240 (6.1 m); Minimum of 6 (15.25 cm)
Plastic, white and orange [300F (149C) maximum]
Aluminum, silver and black
None
Feet and Inches
Inches Only
4 to 20 mA transmitter of level [300F (149C) maximum]
0 to 5 VDC transmitter of level
Example
Construction
Wetted Materials
Configuration
Process
Connection
Float
Access
Drain
and
Vent
Spec. Gravity
Operating
Pressure
Operating
Temperature
Indicating
Length, L1
Indicating
Flags
Visual
Indicating
Scale
Output
Options
MVR
MVR
S
S
SS
TB
SS
1
1
3
TP
TP
BM
TB
D
N
D
V
B
0.8
0.0
150
000
090
000
080
000
P
P
A
1
N
1
2
I
I
V

318
W
a
t
e
r

L
e
a
k

D
e
t
e
c
t
o
r
s
L
E
V
E
L
Level Mount Gage
Reads in PSI & Feet of Water Column
Series
LEVG
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
Size
3 1/2 Dial
4 1/2 Dial
A
in (mm)
3 17/32 (90)
4 57/64 (124)
B
in (mm)
1 9/64 (29)
1 5/32 (29)
C
in (mm)
4 35/64 (116)
6 3/64 (154)
D
1/4 NPT
1/4 NPT
The Series LEVG Level Gages possess dual psi and feet of water column
scales with 3-2-3% ANSI B40.1 Grade B accuracy. The 3.5 or 4.5 LEVG gages
are designed with black steel housings with chrome bezels. Wetted parts
include a brass socket and phosphor bronze Bourdon tube. Units can withstand
temperatures of -50 to 160F (-45 to 71C). A wide offering of ranges are
available from 15 psi (34 ft. of w.c.) to 200 psi (460 ft. of w.c) making them the
perfect choice for monitoring water tank level. A red adjustable set-point
indicator is included on every dial.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: For use with water.
Wetted Materials: Brass socket,
phosphor bronze Bourdon tube.
Housing: Black steel case with
chrome bezel.
Lens: Plastic.
Accuracy: 3 2 3% ANSI B40.1
Grade B.
Pressure Limit: 110% of full
scale.
160F ( 45 to 71C).
Size: 3.5 (89 mm) or 4.5
(115 mm).
NPT lower.
Weight: 3.5: 8.32 oz (236 g) 4.5:
11.2 oz (317.5 g).
Model
3.5
LEVG-E50222N
LEVG-E50322N
LEVG-E50422N
LEVG-E50522N
LEVG-E50622N
LEVG-E50722N
Model
4.5
LEVG-G50222N
LEVG-G50322N
LEVG-G50422N
LEVG-G50522N
LEVG-G50622N
LEVG-G50722N
Ranges
0 15 psi (0 34 ft. H2O)
0 30 psi (0 70 ft. H2O)
0 60 psi (0 140 ft. H2O)
0 100 psi (0 230 ft. H2O)
0 160 psi (0 370 ft. H2O)
0 200 psi (0 460 ft. H2O)
Ranges
0 15 psi (0 34 ft. H2O)
0 30 psi (0 70 ft. H2O)
0 60 psi (0 140 ft. H2O)
0 100 psi (0 230 ft. H2O)
0 160 psi (0 370 ft. H2O)
0 200 psi (0 460 ft. H2O)
Water Detector and Sensor Tape
Detects Low Levels Of Conductive Liquids
The small and discreet Model WD Water Detector is designed for dependable
detection of low levels of conductive liquids. The module features a sturdy and reliable
aluminum enclosure and is powered by 24 VAC or 24 to 30 VDC. Water sensing tape
attaches to module and if any liquid comes in contact with the tape the resistance is
changed and the alarm will be triggered. The tape is hydrophobic so it does not absorb any
of the liquid it is detecting which makes for a faster drying time and faster return to service
after a water leak.
The sensing tape is 1 wide and can be bought in lengths of 5, 10, 15 and 25 feet. Multiple
tapes can be connected together to extend the coverage area which makes it ideal for
domestic as well as commercial applications. Features include power and alarm LEDs,
alarm test switch, continuous tape integrity self check and extendable tape sensor.
Model
WD
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Conductive liquid.
Switch Type: DPDT.
Electrical Rating: 1A @ 24 VAC/VDC.
Power Requirements: 24 VAC, 24 to
30 VDC.
Power Consumption: 35 mA
maximum.
terminals.
Conduit Connections: Hole for 1/2
conduit.
Enclosure: Extruded aluminum.
Sensor Tape: 1 (25.4 mm) wide and
5, 10, 15 or 25 feet long.
1/4
[6.35]
1-1/2
[38.10]
1/4
[6.35]
4-1/4
[107.32]
4-3/4
[120.02]
PUSH
BUTTON
15 PIN CABLE
CONNECTION
AMBER LED
LIGHT
GREEN LED
LIGHT
1/8
[2.10]
1-3/4
[44.17]
3
[76.38]
1/2 CONDUIT OR FLEX
CONNECTOR
7/8
[22.23]
WD
TEST
WATER DETECTOR
ALARM
POWER
Model
WD
TP05
TP10
TP15
TP25
Description
Water Module
5 (1.52 m) Tape
10 (3.05 m) Tape
15 (4.57 m) Tape
25 (7.62 m) Tape

W
a
t
e
r

L
e
a
k

D
e
t
e
c
t
o
r
s
L
E
V
E
L
The very affordable Series WD2 detects leaking conductive fluids and alarms
to prevent the leak from creating costly damage. The WD2 relies on the
electrical conductivity of water to change the resistance across the two contacts
located at the base of the enclosure. Model WD2-BP2 is battery powered,
provides audible alarm, LED visual alarm, and a SSR output. Also featured is
a low battery warning. WD2-LP units are line powered and include a green
power indication LED.
Mounting bracket A-154 is perfect for use in leak pans where it is desired to
raise the sensing level above the bottom of the pan to eliminate nuisance alarms.
The bracket can be mounted to the bottom of the pan and the height of the WD2
adjusted anywhere up to 1.75 (44.5 mm). Or the bracket can be used to mount
the WD2 to the side of the drip pan or any side wall at desired height.
Water Leak Detector
Visual & Audible Alarm, Drain Pan Level Switch
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Water.
Switch Type: WD2 BP2: SPST NO SSR; WD2 LP: SPDT relay; WD2
LP D: DPDT relay.
Electrical Rating: WD2 BP2: Pilot duty rating 250 mA @ 24 VDC
maximum; WD2 LP: 1A @ 24 VAC/DC, 1A @120 VAC.
Audible Alarm: BP models: 10 seconds on, 30 seconds off; LP models:
Continually on. None on D2 model.
LED Alarm: BP models: 10 seconds off, 30 seconds on. Two red LEDs;
LP models: Continually on. Eight red LEDs.
Power Requirements: BP models: 3 V lithium battery (approximately 2
years of life); LP models; 11 to 27 VAC/DC.
Power Consumption: BP models: 0.9 mA steady state non alarm, 3.0
mA during audible alarm, 2.4 mA during LED alarm; LP models: DC
power: 25 mA typical and 75 mA maximum, AC power: 30 mA typical
and 85 mA maximum.
Electrical Connections: PVC insulated 22 AWG cable. BP models: 0.8
ft (.25 m); LP models: 4.8 ft (1.5 m).
Enclosure: ABS and acrylic.
Weight: WD2 BP2: 3.5 oz; WD2 LP: 4.3 oz; WD2 LP D: 5.6 oz.
Series
WD2
2
[50.8]
3
[76.2]
CABLE
LENGTH
1-7/64
[28.18]
WD2-BP2 WD2-LP
Model
WD2-BP2
WD2-LP
WD2-LP-D1
WD2-LP-D2
WD with A-154
Output
SPST NO SSR
SPDT Relay
DPDT Relay
DPDT Relay
Power
Battery
11 27 VAC/DC
11 27 VAC/DC
11 27 VAC/DC
LED
Alarm
2
8
8
8
NEW PRODUCT!
Audible
Alarm
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
ACCESSORY
A-154, Mounting Bracket for WD2

320
L
e
v
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
F
o
a
t
L
E
V
E
L
Rugged and reliable the Series L4 Flotect
Level switch operates automatically to

indicate tank level. Perfect for starting or stopping pumps, opening or closing valves, or
actuate level alarm signals. A unique magnetically actuated switching design gives
superior performance. There are no bellows, springs, or seals to fail. Instead, the free-
swinging float attracts a magnet within the solid metal switch body, actuating a snap switch
by means of a simple lever arm. Float arm hinge design limits the arm angle to prevent
vertical hangup.
FEATURES
Leak proof body machined from bar stock
Choice of floats dependent on maximum pressure and specific gravity
Weatherproof, designed to meet NEMA 4
Explosion proof (listings included in specifications)
Installs directly and easily into tank with a thredolet or flange
(see application drawings)
Horizontal installation or optional top mount vertical installation
APPLICATIONS
Direct pump control for maintaining level
Automatic tank dump operations
Control levels or provide alarms in sumps, scrubber systems, hydro pneumatic
tanks, low pressure boilers, and various waste water/sewage treatment processes
1-1/2 THREADED
BRANCH CONNECTION
CUT HOLE
1-15/16 [49] DIA.
STANDARD INSTALLATION
HORIZONTAL, 2-1/2 THREADED
BRANCH CONNECTION
INSTALLATION WITH OPTIONAL
2-1/2 [64] SPHERICAL FLOAT
CUT HOLE
2-7/8 [73] DIA.
2-1/2
THREADED BRANCH
CONNECTION
2-1/2 X 1-1/2
FACE BUSHING
ANSI RF THREADED
REDUCING FLANGE
11-3/4
[298.5]
3/4 NPT
HORIZONTAL,
FLANGE INSTALLATION
3/4 NPT ANSI RF
THREADED
REDUCING
FLANGE
*FLANGE FACE TO CENTERLINE OF FLOAT
SPECIFIED BY CUSTOMER. NORMALLY
SHOULD NOT EXCEED 20 [508 mm].
VERTICAL, FLANGE INSTALLATION
Application Drawings For Flotect
Float Switches
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquids compatible with wetted materials.
Wetted Materials:
Float and rod: 316 SS;
Body: Brass or 316 SS standard;
Magnet keeper: 430 SS standard, 316 SS or Nickel optional.
Temperature Limits: 4 to 275F ( 20 to 135C) standard, MT high temperature
option 400F (205C) [MT option not UL, CSA, ATEX, or SAA].
Pressure Limit: Brass body 1000 psig (69 bar), 316 SS body 2000 psig (138 bar).
Standard float rated 100 psig (6.9 bar). For other floats see options.
Class I, Groups C and D; Class II, Groups E, F, and G.
ATEX 0344 II 2 G EEx d IIB T6 20CTamb75C
EC Type Certificate No.: KEMA 03 ATEX 2383
SAA: Exd II C T6 (T amb = 60C). IP66 C1 I, Zone I. Also FM approved.
Electrical Rating: UL, FM, ATEX and SAA models: 10A @ 125/250 VAC (V~). CSA
models: 5A @ 125/250 VAC (V~); 5A res., 3A ind. @
30 VDC (V ). MV option: 1A @ 125 VAC (V~); 1A res., .5A ind. @
30 VDC (V ). MT option: 5A @ 125/250 VAC (V~). [MT and MV option not UL,
CSA, FM, ATEX or SAA].
Electrical Connections: UL and CSA models: 16 AWG, 6 (152 mm) long. ATEX
and SAA unit: terminal block.
Process Connection: 1 1/2 male NPT standard, 2 1/2 male NPT required for
optional floats.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal installation standard, optional vertical top
mount.
Dead Band: 3/4 (19 mm) for standard float.
Specific Gravity: 0.7 minimum with standard float. For other floats see options.
Agency Approvals: UL, CSA, FM, CE and ATEX.
FLOAT OF 316 STAINLESS
STEEL (STANDARD)
FLOAT ARM
AND BLOCK
316 STAINLESS
STEEL OR BRASS
HINGE
PIN
DEFLECTION
STOP
1-1/2 NPT
SWITCH BODY OF
BRASS OR 316
STAINLESS STEEL
1-5/8
[41.28]
5
[127]
HEX FLOAT
CONNECTION
LOCK
NUT
6
[152.4]
19-5/32
[486.57]
MAGNET KEEPER
430 STAINLESS
STEEL
8-5/32
[207.17]
3-15/16
[100.01]
2-1/2
[63.5]
3-11/32
[84.93]
16 GA. LEADS,
6 [152.4] LONG
EXPLOSION PROOF
HOUSING WITH 3/4
CONDUIT CONNECTION
5-31/32
[151.61]
Series
L4
Float Switch
Magnetically Operated Switch, Leak Proof Body, Explosion-Proof
Model
L4
L4SS
*316SS body and float with 430SS magnet keeper (wetted part).
OPTIONS FOR L4 SWITCHES ABOVE Add suffixes to model numbers

DPDT contacts, add suffix -D
Gold Plated Contacts option for dry circuits, add suffix -MV
High Temperature option rated 400F (204C), add suffix -MT
Time Delay Relay option with 2 SPDT contacts, adjustable from 0 1
to 0 31 minutes. Add suffix -TRI (increasing flow) or
-TRD (decreasing flow) (no listings or approvals)
316 SS Magnet Keeper option to replace standard 430 SS, add suffix -316
ATEX approved construction, add suffix -AT
SAA approved construction, add suffix -SAA
Top Mounted option for vertical flange installation (distance from
flange face to centerline of float to be specified, 20 (508 mm)
maximum), add suffix -TOP
Optional Floats (all 2-1/2 spherical):
304 SS rated 50 psig (3.5 bar) and 0.5 min. s.g., add suffix -50
Consult factory for price and availability of fittings for L4 installation. Threaded Branch
Connection, bushings, and flanges are available in a variety of sizes and materials.
Description
Brass body, side wall mounting
316SS* body, sidewall mounting

L
e
v
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
F
o
a
t
L
E
V
E
L
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquids compatible with wetted materials.
Wetted Materials:
Float: Solid polypropylene or 304 SS;
Lower body: Brass or 303 SS;
Magnet: Ceramic;
External float chamber (tee): Matches lower body choice of brass or 303 SS;
Other: Lever arm, spring, pin, etc.: 301 SS.
Temperature Limit: 4 to 220F ( 20 to 105C) standard, MT high temperature
option 400F (205C)(MT not UL, CSA or ATEX). ATEX compliant AT option
ambient temperature: 4 to 167F ( 20 to 75C) process temperature: 4 to 220F
( 20 to 105C).
Pressure Limits: See chart below.
Class I, Groups A, B, C and D; Class II, Groups E, F, and G. (Group A on stainless
steel body models only).ATEX 0344 II 2 G EEx d IIC T6 Process
Temp75C. EC Type Certificate No.: KEMA 04ATEX2128
Electrical Rating: UL models: 5A @ 125/250 VAC (V~). CSA and ATEX models:
5A @ 125/250 VAC (V~); 5A res., 3A ind. @ 30 VDC (V ). MV
option: .1A @ 125 VAC (V~). MT option: 5A @125/250 VAC (V~). [MT option not
UL, CSA or ATEX].
Electrical Connections: UL models: 18 AWG, 18 (460 mm) long. CSA and ATEX
models: terminal block.
Upper Body: Brass or 303 SS.
Conduit Connection: 3/4 male NPT standard, 3/4 female NPT on junction box
models.
Process Connection: 1 male NPT on models without external float chamber,
1 female NPT on models with external float chamber.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal with index arrow pointing down.
Weight: Approximately 1 lb (.5 kg) without external float chamber, 1.75 lb (.8 kg)
with external float chamber.
Specific Gravity: See chart below.
Agency Approvals: UL, CSA, CE and ATEX.
Series
L6
Liquid Level Switch
Easy In-wall or External Installation, Up to 2000 psig (138 bar)
Model L6 with Spherical Float
Model L6 with Cylindrical Float
Model L6 with External Float Chamber
Surprisingly compact, the Series L6 Flotect
Level switch is designed and built for

years of trouble-free service in a wide variety of process liquid level applications. Operation
is simple and dependable with no mechanical linkage as the level switch is magnetically
actuated. The float lever pivoted within the body moves when the process liquid displaces
the float. A magnet on the opposite end of the float lever controls a second magnet on the
switch actuating lever located in the switch housing.
FEATURES
Leak proof lower body machined from bar stock
Choice of models for direct side wall mounting or mounted in a tee to act as an
external float chamber
Weatherproof
Explosion proof (listings included in specifications)
Sensitive to level changes of less than 1/2 (12 mm)
1 [25.40] x 2 [50.80]
LONG FLOAT
1 MALE NPT
2-7/8
[73.03]
1-1/16 [26.99]
6-1/2
[165.10]
1-1/16
[26.99]
3/4 MALE NPT
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
1 [25.40]
1-3/4
[44.45]
1 MALE NPT
3/4 [19.05]
6
[152.40]
1-1/16
[26.99]
3/4 MALE NPT
CONDUIT CONNECTION
1 FEMALE
NPT TYP 2 PLACES
3-5/64
[78.18]
1-9/64
[28.97]
2 [50.80]
HEX
8-9/16
[217.49]
3/4 MALE NPT
CONDUIT CONNECTION
1-1/16
[26.99]
Model
L6EPB-B-S-3-O
L6EPB-B-S-3-A
L6EPB-B-S-3-C
L6EPB-B-S-3-B
L6EPB-B-S-3-H
L6EPB-S-S-3-O
L6EPB-S-S-3-A
L6EPB-S-S-3-C
L6EPB-S-S-3-S
L6EPB-S-S-3-L
Body
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
303 SS
303 SS
303 SS
303 SS
303 SS
Installation
Side Wall Mounting
Side Wall Mounting
Side Wall Mounting
Brass External Float Chamber (Tee)
Side Wall Mounting
Side Wall Mounting
Side Wall Mounting
304 SS External Float Chamber (Tee)
Float Material
Polypropylene Spherical
304 SS Cylindrical
304 SS Spherical
304 SS Spherical
304 SS Cylindrical
304 SS Spherical
304 SS Spherical
Max. Pressure
psig (bar)
1000 (69)
200 (13.8)
350 (24.1)
250 (17.2)
250 (17.2)
2000 (138)
200 (13.8)
350 (24.1)
2000 (138)
350 (24.1)
OPTIONS
Gold Plated Contacts option for dry circuits, add suffix -MV
(see electrical rating in specifications)
High Temperature option rated 400F (204C), add suffix -MT
(see electrical rating in specifications, no listings or approvals,
only available on models with stainless steel floats)
CSA and UL approved construction, includes weatherproof and
explosion proof junction box, add suffix -CSA
ATEX approved construction includes, weatherproof and
explosion proof, junction box, add suffix -AT
DPDT contacts, change seventh character in model
number to D. Example: L6EPB B D 3 O
303 SS Upper Body, change fifth character in
model number to S. Example: L6EPS S S 3 S
Options Not Shown: 1 1/2 and 2 male NPT process connection, 2 female NPT
connection tee, and top mount.
Min.
Sp. Gr.
0.9
0.5
0.7
0.9
0.7
0.9
0.5
0.7
0.9
0.7

322
L
e
v
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
F
o
a
t
L
E
V
E
L
Liquid Level Switch
Low Cost, Leak Proof Body, Excellent Chemical Resistance
Model L8 Flotect
Liquid Level Switch features a leak proof body and float

constructed from tough, durable polyphenylene sulfide which has excellent chemical
resistance. Because the liquid level snap switch is magnetically actuated, there is no direct
mechanical linkage to leak or fail, assuring longer life and decreased maintenance costs.
This inexpensive unit is ideal for liquid level alarm, indication or control. Installation is
quick and easy simply install in a horizontal position with the index arrow pointing down.
The L8 Flotect

Liquid Level Switch is UL recognized as an industrial motor controller per
UL standard 508, suitable for mounting in a protected environment. This lightweight
switch can be used in numerous chemical process, industrial systems and similar
applications where process conditions are compatible with polyphenylene sulfide, ceramic
8 and 316 SS. This liquid level switch provides accurate setpoint control of liquids with
specific gravities as low as 0.6. This compact and reliable control is designed to handle
temperatures up to 212F (100C) and pressures to 150 psig (10 bar).
APPLICATIONS
The Model L8 Flotect
Liquid Level Switch is ideal for predetermined liquid levels in

tanks through pump control or solenoid valve control. It provides excellent liquid
level alarm or indication when combined with the Series AN14 Indicating
Annunciator.
Environmental control Chemical/Petroleum processing
Waste water Plating and washing tanks
Scrubber systems Sewage treatment
Holding tanks Car washes
Cooling towers Remediation systems
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Float and body: Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS);
Pin and spring: 316 SS or Inconel
;
Magnet: Ceramic 8.
Enclosure Rating: General purpose. WP/WP2 option is weatherproof.
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch. MV option is a SPDT gold contact snap switch.
Electrical Rating: 5A @ 125/250 VAC, 5A resistive, 3A inductive @ 30 VDC. MV
option: 1A @ 125 VAC, 1A resistive, 0.5A inductive @ 30 VDC.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 male NPT, 1/2 female NPT on WP and WP2.
Process Connection: 1 male NPT.
Agency Approvals: CE, UL 508 for US and Canada.
Specific Gravity: 0.6 minimum.
Series
L8
L8 L8-WP2
SWITCH
BODY
1 NPT(M) 1/2 NPT(M)
1-21/32
[42.07]
4-17/32
[115.09]
(3) 18 AWG
LEAD WIRES
18 [457.2] LONG
3-1/16
[77.79]
1-5/16 [33.32] OCTAGON
8-5/16
[211.12]
4-5/16
[109.52]
FLOAT
2-17/32
[64.29]
1-1/8
[28.58]
11-13/64
[284.56]
1-21/32
[42.07]
3-1/16
[77.79]
4-5/16
[109.52]
2-17/32
[64.29]
1-1/8
[28.58 ]
4-17/32
[115.09]
1 NPTM
1-5/16 OCTAGON
[33.32]
1/2 NPTM
Inconel

Series L8, Level Switch
OPTIONS
Gold Plated Contacts, for dry circuits. Rated 1A @ 125 VAC; 1A resistive, 0.5A
inductive @ 30 VDC. To order add suffix MV.
Example: L8-MV
Inconel
Alloy Option. Inconel
Alloy replaces standard 316 SS wetted parts.

Wetted parts are Inconel

Alloy, ceramic 8, and Polyphenylene Sulfide. To order add
suffix INC.
Example: L8-INC
Weatherproof Enclosure. Optional housing is phenylpolioxide and provides
weatherproof protection for electrical wiring.
To order add suffix WP. (Not UL approved)
Example: L8-WP
Weatherproof Enclosure. Optional housing is aluminum and provides
weatherproof protection for electrical wiring. To order add suffix WP2. (Not UL
approved)
Example: L8-WP2

L
e
v
e
l

S
w
i
t
c
h
e
s
,
F
l
o
a
t
L
E
V
E
L
Mini-Size Level Switch
Easy In-wall or External Installation, Specific Gravities as Low as 0.5
The Mini-Size Series L10 Flotect
Level Switches combine low cost with top quality

materials and construction for great value and years of reliable liquid level control. Wide
media compatibility is assured with a choice of brass or stainless steel bodies and external
tees; polypropylene or stainless steel floats. Two basic configurations are offered; with 1"
male NPT threads for direct side mounting through a half coupling or with factory
installed tee for external mounting.
All Series L10 switches feature a hermetically sealed, magnetically actuated SPST reed
switch which is encapsulated in a polypropylene housing. Units are quickly and easily
adjusted for your choice of normally open or normally closed operation thanks to a unique
design. Just loosen two screws and instantly slide the switch assembly to the action
required. N.O. and N.C. markings are clearly visible. This feature also speeds switch
replacement if damage occurs.
Three types of floats are offered to accommodate liquids with specific gravities as low as 0.5;
maximum pressures to 2000 psig (137.8 bar). Wire leads are 22 AWG x 18" (460 mm) and exit
the switch assembly through 1/8 male NPT threads. These controls are UL recognized
and CSA listed.
Series
L10
1-3/4
[ ] [44.5]
3-1/4
[ ] [82.6] 3/4
[19 [ .1] 1] [19.1]
] 1 [25.4]
2-1/4 [57.2]
1/4 [6.4]
TRAVEL TO
NORMALLY
CLOSED
POSITION
1 MMALE NPT
8 NPT 1/
SHOWN SWITCH S
RMALLY IN NOR
OPEN POSITION OSITION OPEN PO
] 1 [25.4] ]
DIA. FLOAAT
2-7/8
[73.0]
1 1/ 1 1 1-1/16
] [27.0]
3 1/2 3-1/2
[88.9]
[ ] 4] ] 1 [25.4]
57.15] 2-1 [ 2-1/4 [57.1
4] DIA. X 1 [25 5.4
2 [50 2 [50 8] LONG 0.8
F OAT FLO
111 PTT 1 MALE NP
11/8 NPT
SWITCH
SHOWN
IN I NORMALLLY
OPEN POSITION
1/4 [6.4]
O TRAVEL TO
Y NORMALLY
CLOSED
POSITION POSITION
0]]]] 1-1/4 [73.0
3
[76.2]
2-3/8
[60.3]
5-7/16
[138.1]
11
[25.4]
1
FEMALE
NPT
1 [ 1 4] 1 [25.4]
57.2] 2- 5 -1/4 [5
[6.4] 1/4
TRAVEL TO TRA
NORMALLY
CLOSED POSITION
PT 1/8 NP PT
CH SWITC CH
WN SHOW
IN NORMALLY O
OPEN POSITION
NORMALLY OPEN NNORMALLY CLOSED
Spherical Float
Cylindrical Float
External Float Chamber
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Float: Solid polypropylene or 304 SS;
Body: Brass or 303 SS;
Magnet: Ceramic;
External float chamber (tee): None, brass, or 304 SS;
Other: Lever arm, pin, spring, etc.: 301 SS.
Pressure Limit: See chart below.
Switch Type: SPST hermetically sealed reed switch. Field adjustable for normally
Electrical Rating: 1.5A @ 24 VDC resistive, 0.001A @ 200 VDC resistive, 0.5A @
125 VAC.
Conduit Connection: 1/8 male NPT.
Process Connection: 1 male NPT standard on models without external float
chamber. Change 3 in model number to 4 for 1-1/4, to 5 for 1-1/2, or 6 for 2. 1
female NPT on models with external float chamber.
Weight: Approximately 9 oz (0.255 kg) without external float chamber, 2.25 lb
(1.02 kg) with external float chamber.
Specific Gravity: See chart below.
Agency Approvals: UL and CSA.
Switch Enclosure: Polypropylene.
Model
L10-B-3-O
L10-B-3-A
L10-B-3-C
L10-B-3-B
L10-B-3-H
L10-S-3-O
L10-S-3-A
L10-S-3-C
L10-S-3-S
L10-S-3-L
Body
Material
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
303 SS
303 SS
303 SS
303 SS
303 SS
Installation/
Mounting
Side Wall Mounting
Side Wall Mounting
Side Wall Mounting
Side Wall Mounting
Side Wall Mounting
Side Wall Mounting
Float
Material
304 SS Cylindrical
304 SS Spherical
304 SS Spherical
304 SS Cylindrical
304 SS Spherical
304 SS Spherical
Max. Press.
psig (bar)
1000 (69)
200 (13.8)
350 (24.1)
250 (17.2)
250 (17.2)
2000 (137.8)
200 (13.8)
350 (24.1)
2000 (137.8)
350 (24.1)
Min.
S.G.
0.9
0.5
0.7
0.9
0.7
0.9
0.5
0.7
0.9
0.7
323.P.N:Layout 2 2/16/11 12:41 PM Page 1
324
L
e
v
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
F
o
a
t
L
E
V
E
L
4-5/8 MAX
[116.8]
1/2-14 NPT
22 AWG
LEAD WIRES
13/16 MIN
[20.6]
FITTING
CENTERLINE
3/32
[2.54]
1-7/32 MAX
[31.0]
APPROXIMATE
ACTUATION
LEVEL
1-5/32 MAX
[29.2]
F7 HSS is rated explosion proof for Class I, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Groups
E, F, G; Class III.
Series F6 & F7 Horizontal Mount Level Switches are designed to mount through the
walls of tanks and other vessels. Internally mounted models F6-HPS-11, F6-MHS and F7-
SS6 are secured to the wall of the tank or vessel from the inside while model F6-HPS-21 is
mounted from the outside (externally). Model F7-HSS can be installed internally or
externally.
Series
F6 & F7
Level Switches - Horizontal/Specialty
Low Cost, Hermetically Sealed Contacts
#22 AWG
TEFLON WIRE
24 -26 EXTENDED
3/4 HEX
[19.05 HEX]
3/8-24 UNF-2A
1-3/4
[44.45]
3-1/4
[82.55]
1
[25.4]
5/16
[7.94] 1-1/2
[38.1]
F7-WBB
F7-EB
Series F6 & F7 Specialty Level Switches are designed for unique applications. Model
F7-SS6 can be used with viscous liquids or liquids with suspended metal particles. Use
model F7-LL for low level detection (5/8). The non-intrusive bottle style F7-EB mounts
completely outside the tank at the actuation level. Suspend model F7-WBB in stand pipes
or sumps for leak detection or drop into wells for ground-water monitoring.
1/2
[12.7] HEX
1/8 NPT
2-3/32
[53]
1/4
[6.4]
1-15/32
[37]
15/16
[24]
5/16
[8]
1-7/8
[47]
3-1/2
[89]
1-7/16
[37]
1-5/16
[33]
1/2 NPT
FEMALE
JUNCTION BOX
F7-EBX ONLY
1-3/4
[44.5]
4-1/4
[108]
2-3/4
[70]
7
[178]
2-1/8
[54] 2-5/8
[67]
Specialty Switches
UL Listed
F6-HPS-21 F6-HPS-31
F6-HPS-11 F6-MHS
11-13/16
[300]
21/64
[8.33]
13/64
[5.16]
3-7/8
[98.43]
51/64
[20.24]
13/64
[5.16]
3/4
[19.05]
1-27/64
[36.12]
33/64
[13.1]
45/64
[17.86]
M16 X 2
16-9/64
[420.69]
2-11/64
[8.33]
11/64
[17.46]
1-13/32
[35.72]
3/4
[19.05]
21/64
[8.33]
1/4
[6.35]
2-11/64
[55.17]
3/4
[19.05]
33/64
[13.1]
1/2 NPT
9/32
[7.14]
1-23/32
[43.66]
21/64
[8.33]
15
[381]
2X 3/4
[19.05]
33/64
[13.1]
21/64
[8.33]
3/4
[19.05]
15/16
[23.81]
11/16
[17.46]
1/2 NPT
11-13/16
[300]
19/32
[15.03]
4-1/4
[107.95]
43/64
[17.07]
M16 X 2
Horizontal Float
F7-LL
F6-HPS-31
F7-HSS
F6-HPS-11
F7-SS6
F6-HPS-21
F7-SS6
F7-LL
F7-HSS
F6-MHS
Model
F6-HPS-11
F6-HPS-21
F6-HPS-31
F6-MHS
F7-HSS
Applications
Water, Oils, Chemicals
Corrosives
High temp/pressure,
corrosive, Expl.
Material Float/Stem
Polypropylene/Polypropylene
304 SS/304 SS
316 SS/316 SS
Mtg
M16 x 2
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
M16 x 2
1/2 NPT
(int/ext)
Wire Leads
22 AWG, 11.8 (30 cm)
22 AWG, 11.8 (30 cm)
22 AWG, 11.8 (30 cm)
22 AWG, 11.8 (30 cm)
22 AWG, 24 (61 cm)
Electrical Rating
20 VA: 0.08A @ 240 VAC
20 VA: 0.08A @ 240 VAC
20 VA: 0.08A @ 240 VAC
20 VA: 0.08A @ 240 VAC
30 VA: 0.14A @ 220 VAC
Min.
S.G.
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.85
0.60
Pressure
Limits
116 psig (8 bar)
116 psig (8 bar)
116 psig (8 bar)
218 psig (15 bar)
300 psig (20.7 bar)
Temperature
Limits
176F (80C)
176F (80C)
176F (80C)
257F (125C)
392F (200C)
Model
F7-SS6
F7-SS6B
F7-EB**
F7-LL
F7-WBB
Style/
Applications
Bent stem/liquids
with metal particles
Bent stem/liquids
with metal particles
Non intrusive bottle type/
outside tank mounting
Vertical/detect levels as
low as 5/8
25 ft cable, slosh shield/
sumps, stand pipes
Material
Float/Stem
316 SS/
316 SS
316 SS/
316 SS
Brass/ 316 SS
(Brass housing)
Polysulfone/
Buna N
Brass/
Buna N
Temperature
Limits
300F
(149C)
300F
(149C)
300F
(149C)
180F
(82C)
180F
(82C)
Pressure
Limits
100 psig
7 bar
100 psig
7 bar
500 psig
34 bar
50 psig
3 bar
150 psig
10 bar
Min.
S.G.
0.70
0.70
0.75
0.45
Electrical
Rating
20 VA: 0.08A @
220VAC N.O. operation
20 VA: 0.08A @
220VAC N.C. operation
20 VA: 0.08A @
240VAC
20 VA: 0.08A @
240VAC
20 VA: 0.08A @
240VAC
Wire
Leads
22 AWG, 24 (61 cm)
22 AWG, 24 (61 cm)
18 AWG, 24 (61 cm)
22 AWG, 72 (182 cm)
22 AWG, 25 ft (7.6 m)
Mtg
3/8 24 UNF 2A
3/8 24 UNF 2A
3/4 NPT female
1/8 NPT male
Explosion proof model available with DPDT switch. Specify F7 EBX.
** Model available with Normally Closed Switch. Specify F7 EBNC.
Weight
oz (g)
2
(58)
2
(58)
5 lb 5 oz
(2.4 kg)
2
(58)
10.8
(310)
Weight
oz (g)
1.23 (38)
1.23 (38)
1.41 (40)
3.35 (95)
3 (94)

L
e
v
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
F
o
a
t
L
E
V
E
L
Series F6 & F7 compact level switches combine low cost and reliability with fast,
simple installation. Hermetically sealed reed switches are actuated by magnets
permanently bonded inside the float and can be easily adapted to open or close a circuit on
rising or falling levels. Vertical mount models are shipped with normally open switch
contacts which close as the float rises toward the mounting threads. Reverse switch action
by removing the float, rotating it end-for-end and replacing it on the stem. Vertical models
mount internally, oriented within 30 of vertical, or select optional fittings for external
mounting. Switch ratings are suitable for many solid state control systems and monitors
or alarms. Simple relay interfaces can be used for higher current applications.
Distance between hex and liquid (S.G. = 1.0) level at actuation point will vary with
specific gravity changes.
*PBT Polybutylene Terephthalate.
Incudes 316 SS clip.
Spherical floats.
**F7 MPP is normally closed
F7 MPP NO is normally open
Series
F6 & F7
Level Switches - Vertical
Low Cost, Reliable and Compact, Hermetically Sealed Contacts
F7-SB
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1/8 NPT(M)
A
C
B
D
F7-ST713
UL Listed
Model
F7 SB
F7 SS2
F6 SS
F7 MPP
F7 PP
F7 BT
F7 K
F7 C11
F7 C21
F7 BB
F7 PS
F7 PVC
F7 T1
F7 ST713
F7 ST714
(A) Stem
Length
2.75 (70)
2.06 (52)
2.17 (55)
1.63 (41)
2.18 (55)
2.18 (55)
2.13 (54)
2.06 (52)
2.06 (24)
3.19 (81)
3.38 (86)
3.44 (87)
3.47 (88)
3.38 (86)
3.38 (86)
(B) Float
Diameter
1.38 (35)
1.0 (25)
1.11 (28)
0.63 (16)
1.18 (30)
1.18 (30)
1.0 (25)
1.0 (25)
1.0 (25)
1.88 (48)
1.88 (48)
1.5 (38)
2.13 (54)
2.06 (52
2.06 (52)
(C) Float
Height
1.13 (29)
1.0 (25)
1.11 (28)
0.63 (16)
1.0 (25)
1.0 (25)
1.0 (25)
1.0 (25)
1.0 (25)
1.81 (46)
1.88 (48)
1.81 (46)
1.94 (49)
2.06 (52)
2.06 (52)
(D) Actuation
from Hex
1.2 (31)
0.73 (19)
0.47 (12)
0.69 (18)
0.69 (18)
0.65 (17)
0.56 (14)
0.56 (14)
1.19 (30)
1.25 (32)
0.75 (19)
0.92 (22)
1.09 (28)
1.09 (28)
Model
F7-SB
F7-SS2
F6-SS
F7-MPP**
F7-MPP-NO**
F7-PP
F7-BT
F7-K
F7-C11
F7-C21
F7-BB
F7-PS
F7-PVC
F7-T1
F7-ST713
Applications
General purpose
High temp/pressure,
corrosives
Corrosives
Broad chemical
compatibility
Broad chemical
compatibility
Broad chemical
compatibility
Oils & Fuels
Food/beverage,
corrosives
General purpose
Oils & water,
general purpose
High viscosity liquids
Water based liquids,
complies with FDA
Chemical & plating
Viscous, sticky or
corrosive liquids
Oils, water &
chemicals
Material
Float/Stem
Buna N & Epoxy/
316 SS
316 SS (CYC)/
316 SS
316 SS/
316 SS
Polypropylene/
Polypropylene
Polypropylene/
Polypropylene
Polypropylene &
Epoxy/Polypropylene
Buna N & Epoxy/
PBT*
PVDF/
PVDF
Buna N/
Brass
Buna N/
316 SS
Buna N/
Brass
Polysulfone/
Polysulfone
CPVC/
CPVC
PTFE/
TFE
316 SS/
316 SS
Temp.
Limits
220F
(105C)
300F
(149C)
257F
(125C)
180F
(82C)
176F
(80C)
220F
(105C)
220F
(105C)
180F
(82C)
180F
(82C)
180F
(82C)
180F
(82C)
225F
(107C)
180F
(82C)
300F
(149C)
300F
(149C)
Press.
Limits
150 psig
10 bar
450 psig
31 bar
218 psig
15 bar
100 psig
6.89 bar
100 psig
6.89 bar
100 psig
6.89 bar
150 psig
10 bar
100 psig
6.89 bar
150 psig
10 bar
150 psig
10 bar
150 psig
10 bar
50 psig
3 bar
15 psig
1 bar
30 psig
2 bar
750 psig
52 bar
Min.
S.G.
0.60
0.75
0.65
0.90
0.90
0.60
0.45
1.00
0.45
0.45
0.55
0.55
0.85
0.80
0.80
Electrical
Rating
25 VA: 1A @
220 VAC
25 VA: 1A @
200 VAC
20 VA: 0.08A @
240 VAC
10 VA: 0.1A @
100 VAC
50 VA: 0.2A @
240 VAC
30 VA: 0.14A @
220 VAC
30 VA: 0.14A @
220 VAC
50 VA: 0.25A @
150 VAC
20 VA: 0.08A @
240 VAC
20 VA: 0.08A @
240 VAC
20 VA: 0.08A @
240 VAC
20 VA: 0.08A @
240 VAC
20 VA: 0.08A @
240 VAC
20 VA: 0.08A @
240 VAC
20 VA: 0.08A @
240 VAC
Wire
Leads
22 AWG 18 (45 cm)
22 AWG 18 (45 cm)
22 AWG 11.8 (30 cm)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
Mtg
NPT(M)
1/8
1/8
1/8
1/8
1/8
1/8
1/8
1/8
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
OPTIONAL FITTINGS For external mounting of vertical models
A-347, 1/8 x 1 1/4 NPT carbon steel adapter
A-347-SS, 1/8 x 1 1/4 NPT 316 SS adapter
A-348, 1/8 x 1 1/2 NPT carbon steel adapter
A-348-SS, 1/8 x 1 1/2 NPT 316 SS adapter
Weight
oz (g)
2 (58)
1.2 (34)
1.59 (45)
0.8 (23)
0.8 (23)
0.8 (23)
0.7 (20)
1.5 (43)
1.5 (43)
1.5 (43)
5 (140)
4 (110)
5 (140)
6 (170)
6 (170)

326
L
e
v
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
F
o
a
t
L
E
V
E
L
Miniature Multi-Station Level Switch
Custom, Lightweight, Low Cost, 316 SS or Buna-N Floats
Series
F7-MM
Miniature custom level switches with a sturdy, lightweight design are ideal for tanks
less than four feet (1.2 m) deep. Control up to five different level points across a maximum
length of 48 (121 cm). Stems and mounting fixtures are available in 316 SS or brass.
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
LO
A
D
B
1/8 NPT
[.125]
1/2 HEX
[12.7]
1-1/16 Hex
[26.97]
3/4 NPT
1-5/16 Hex
[33.32]
1 NPT
01.000
[25.40]
15/16
[23.80]
0 29/32
[22.86]
1-1/4
[31.75]
0 1-1/2
[38.10]
1
[25.40]
29/32
[22.61]
1-19/32
[40.49]
29/32
[22.86]
1-3/32
[27.79]
1-1/32
[26.16]
1-7/32
[30.99]
1-9/64
[29.79]
1-1/8
[28.58]
0 3-5/8
[92.08]
6 HOLES 0 5/16 [7.95]
EQUALLY SPACED
ON A 3.000 B.C.
[76.20]
1/8 NPT
3/16
[4.78]
1-1/2 HEX
[38.10]
1-5/16-12 THREAD
3/8-24
THREAD
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Stem, connection, and float.
Temperature Limits: F1 and F2: Water, 180F (82.2C); Oil, 40 to 250F
( 40 to 121.1C). All other floats: 40 to 300F ( 40 to 148.9C).
Electrical Connection: 24 (61 cm) free leads #22 AWG, TFE jacketed.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical 30.
Float A B D
Type in. in. in.
F1 7/8 1-3/4 3/4
F2 3/4 1-7/8 1-1/16
F3 3/4 1-13/16 15/16
F4 13/16 2-7/16 1-7/16
F5 9/16 2-7/16 1-3/4
F6 15/16 1-7/8 7/8, NO
1-3/16, NC
F7 13/16 2 1-1/8
F8 3/4 1-7/8 1-1/16
Float Dimensions
Mounting Dimensions
Actuation Levels
Each switching point requires one float.
A = Minimum distance from actuation point to bottom of mounting.
B = Minimum distance between actuation levels.
D = Minimum distance from end of unit to lowest actuation point.
Type 1 Type 2 Type 3
Type 4 Type 5 Type 6
F7 MMB1 5F11 03.00 07.00 11.00 15.00 20.00 25.00
Multi station level, 1 to 5 switch points
Brass with Beryllium copper stops
316SS with SS ARMCO PH 15 7MO stops
1/8 NPT
3/4 NPT (Cannot be used with float F1, F3, F7 and F8)
1 NPT (Cannot be used with float F3)
3 5/8 Flange [Maximum pressure is 50 psi (3.45 bar)]
1 5/16 12UNF 2A (Cannot be used with float F3)
3/8 24
Put 1 to 5 for the number of switch points desired
Material Min. s.g. Max. Pres. psi (bar)
Buna N .45 300 (20.68)
Buna N .60 250 (17.24)
316SS .70 100 (6.89)
316SS .85 150 (10.34)
316SS 1.1 400 (27.58)
PTFE .65 1000 (68.95)
316SS .85 275 (18.96)
316SS .90 600 (41.37)
SPST, .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC, .06A @ 240 VDC
SPST, .8A @ 120 VAC, .4A @ 240 VAC
NO switch is standard. For NC place an * after the corresponding set point distance in the model
number
In inches referenced from bottom of connection
Repeat for each switch point with dashes in between.
No numbers needed beyond the number of switches specified. In inches for example 12.25 would
be 12.25 from the bottom of the process connection.
Maximum overall length of 48 inches (121 cm). Minimum length is L1 + D.
Example
Construction
Stem & Connection
Material
Connection
Type
Switch Points
Float Type
Switch
Type
Set Point
Distance
Overall Length
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
L0
F7 MM
F7 MM
B
B
S
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
#
F1
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
1
1
2
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
F1 F2 F3
F4, F5 F6
F7 F8

L
e
v
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
F
o
a
t
L
E
V
E
L
Multi-Station Level Switch
Customize To Fit Application, Up to Six 316 SS or Buna-N Floats
Series
F7-MS
Customize level switches to meet application requirements Switches can be
configured with up to six different control points and stem lengths up to 140 inches (3.56
m). Stems and floats are available in 316 SS or brass.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Stem, connection, and float.
Temperature Limits: Buna N floats: 180F (82.2C) in water, 40 to 230F ( 40 to
110C) in oil; SS floats: 40 to 300F ( 40 to 148.9C).
Wire Leads: 24 (61 cm) free leads; #22 AWG, TFE jacketed, and #18 AWG
polymeric.
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
LO
A
D
B
Actuation Levels
Each switching point requires one float.
A = Minimum distance from actuation point to bottom of mounting.
B = Minimum distance between actuation levels.
D = Minimum distance from end of unit to lowest actuation point.
Mounting Dimensions
1/2 NPT
2 NPT
1-1/4 SQ
[31.75]
1/2 NPT
1
[25.40]
1/2 NPT
7-1/2
[190.5]
6 HOLES 3/4 [19.05]
EQUALLY SPACED
ON A 6.000 B.C.
[152.4]
1-1/4 NPT
1.000 SQ
[25.40]
1/2 NPT
Float Dimensions
1-1/4
[31.75]
1-3/4
[44.45]
1-13/16
[46.02]
1-7/8
[47.62]
2-1/16
[52.37]
2-3/32
[53.16]
F7 MSB1 5F31 04.00 07.00 11.00 15.00 20.00 24.00 J
Multi station level, 1 to 6 switch points
316SS with SS ARMCO PH 15 7MO stops
1/2 NPT (Float F2, F3 only)
1 1/4 NPT (Float F1 only)
2 NPT
3 150# Flange Carbon Steel (Conn. material S only, float F2, F3 only) [Max. pres. 150 psi (10.3 bar)]
3 150# Flange 316SS (Conn. material S only, float F2, F3 only) [Max. pres. 150 psi (10.3 bar)]
Put 1 to 6 for the number of switch points desired
Buna N, min. s.g. 0.75, 150 psi (10.3 bar) max. pres.
Buna N, min. s.g. 0.55, 150 psi (10.3 bar) max. pres.
316SS, min. s.g. 0.75, 750 psi (51.7 bar) [units >72: 300 psi (20.7) bar] max. pres.
SPST, .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC, .06A @ 240 VDC
SPST, .8A @ 120 VAC, .4A @ 240 VAC
SPDT, .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC, .06A @ 240 VDC
NO switch is standard. For NC place an * after the corresponding set point distance
in the model number.
In inches referenced from bottom of connection.
Repeat for each switch point with dashes in between.
No numbers needed beyond the number of switches specified. In inches for example 12.25 would be
12.25 from the bottom of the process connection.
Minimum length is L1+D. Maximum length with Connection Type 1: 36 (91.4 cm),
Type 2: 60 (152.4 cm), and Types 3, 4, 5: 140 (355.6 cm).
Junction box for wire leads, NEMA 4 (Not available with Connection Type 1)
Example
Construction
Stem & Connection
Material
Connection
Type
Switch Points
Float Type
Switch Type
Set Point
Distance
Overall
Length
Options
L6
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
L0
F7 MS
F7 MS
B
B
S
1
1
2
3
4
5
5
#
F3
F1
F2
F3
1
1
2
3
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
J
J
F1 F2 F3
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4, 5
A
1 1/2
(38.10 mm)
B
3
(76.20 mm)
D
2
(50.80 mm)

328
L
e
v
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
F
o
a
t
L
E
V
E
L
Model
F7-MLK
Multi-Level Switch Kit
One or Two Station Level Switch, Vertically Mount
Customize a level systemto suit your application requirements. The F7-MLK
Multi-Level Switch Kit contains all the components necessary for the design and
fabrication of a 1 or 2 station level switch for pipe plug mounting. User can
customize stem length (maximum 36), actuation point, distance between floats,
and lead wire lengths. The switch kit is ideal for general purpose, low specific
gravity, and gas and oil applications. Model F7-MLK includes two level stations
(switch, tube, and Buna-N float), two brass extension tubes 12 length, four brass
tube unions, one end fitting, and one mounting plug.
.500
[12.7]
12.000
[305]
7.991
[201]
.500
[12.7]
10.905
[277]
9.220
[234]
2 NP
PIPE
MOUNTING
1/2 NPT
2.500
[63.5]
.875
[22.2]
2 EXTENSION
TUBES
1 FITTING
ASSEMBLY
.500
[12.7]
4.000
[102]
2
SWITCHES
.500
[12.7]
.875
[22.2]
1.965
[49.9]
1.250
[31.8]
1.916
[48.7]
.875
[22.2]
2 BUNA-N
FLOATS
1 TUBE END
FITTING
4 TUBE
UNIONS
1.128
[28.7]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials (Float/Stem):
Buna N/Brass.
Temperature Limits: 221F
(105C).
Pressure Limits: 150 psig (10
bar).
Switch Type: SPST, normally
Electrical Rating: 60 Watts: 0.4A
@ 220 VAC, 0.5A @ 110 VAC,
0.2A @ 120 VDC, 0.5A @ 24
VDC.
Electrical Connections: 22 AWG
x 72 (183 cm) leads.
Process Connection: 2 male
NPT pipe plug.
Mounting Orientation: Up to 30
angle from vertical.
Stem Length: 36 (91 cm)
maximum.
Tube/Fitting Size: 1/2 O.D.
Minimum Specific Gravity: 0.45.
Model
F7-MLK2
Multi-Level Switch Kit
316 Stainless Steel, One or Two Station Level Switch, Vertically Mount
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials (Float/Stem):
316 SS.
275F ( 40 to 135C).
Pressure Limits: 750 psi
(52 bar).
Switch Type: SPST, selectable
N.O. or N.C.
Electrical Rating: 20 VA: 0.8A @
240 VAC, 0.17A @ 120 VAC, 0.3A
@ 30 VDC.
Electrical Connections: 18 AWG
x 60 (152 cm) wire leads.
Process Connections: 2 male
NPT pipe plug.
Mounting Orientation: Up to 30
angle from vertical.
Stem Length: 36 (91 cm)
maximum.
Tube Diameter: 1/2 O.D.
Minimum Specific Gravity: 0.75.
The F7-MLK2 Multi-Level Switch Kit contains all the components necessary
for the design and fabrication of a 1 or 2 station level switch for pipe plug mounting.
The user can customize stem length (maximum 36), actuation point, distance
between floats, and lead wire lengths. Model F7-MLK2 is constructed of 316 SS
ideal for chemicals, corrosive liquids, oils, or high pressure applications. Model
F7-MLK2 includes two level stations with floats (switch, tube, and float), two
extension tubes 10 (254 mm) length, three tube unions, one tube connector, one
end fitting, and one mounting plug.
1.25 SQ
[1-1/4]
2 NPT
1.5
[1-1/2]
TUBE CONNECTOR
3/8 NPT
1.75
[1-3/4]
FLOAT TUBE AND
SWITCH STATION
2.063
[2-1/16]
2.125
[2-1/8]
TUBE UNION
2.125
[2-1/8]
TUBE UNION
FLOAT TUBE AND
SWITCH STATION
2.063
[2-1/16]
1.186
[1-3/16]
TUBE END
FITTINGS
.500
[12.7]
10.000
[254]
2 NPT PIPE
MOUNTING
1/2 NPT
FEMALE
2 EXTENSION
TUBES
.500
[12.7]
4.125
[108]
2 SWITCHES
2.125
[54]
2.062
[52.4]
2 SS
FLOATS
1 TUBE
END
FITTING
1 TUBE
CONNECTOR/
3 TUBE
UNIONS
1.188
[30.1]
1.500
[38.1]
1.750
[44.5]
Model F7-MLK, Multi Level Switch Kit
Model F7-MLK2, Multi Level Switch Kit

L
e
v
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
F
o
a
t
L
E
V
E
L
Series
CFS
Cable Float Switch
No Hazardous Mercury, Adjustable Counterweight
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Polypropylene housing, PVC cable.
Switch Type: SPDT.
Electrical Rating: 10 A @ 250 VAC, resistive.
Weight: CFS-2: 1.416 lb (.62 kg); CFS-10: 3.316 lb (1.48 kg).
Control the level of liquids in filling or draining reservoirs and tanks
with the Series CFS. The mercury-free switch is designed with an
inverter microswitch housed in a polypropylene cover. The unit includes
a counterweight to adjust the stop and start levels of pump up/pump
down application.
1-5/8
[41.40]
5-5/32
[131.06]
3-3/16
[81.03]
Series
FSW
Free-Floating Level Switch
Designed for Industrial Applications, Mercury-Free
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids, slurries.
Wetted Materials: Polypropylene housing, EPDM gland, PVC
cable.
Switch Type: SPDT.
Electrical Rating: 10 A @ 250 VAC, resistive.
Weight: FSW-6: 2.6 lb (1.2 kg); FSW-15: 3.85 lb (1.75 kg);
FSW-30: 6.8 lb (3.1 kg).
Series FSW Free-Floating Level Switch is a dual level switch
designed for filling and draining of tanks, wells, and reservoirs. The
shape and interior balance weight ensure impurities and dirt will not
adhere to the surface, making it ideal for sewage and waste water
applications. The mercury-free switch is designed with an inverter
microswitch housed in a polypropylene cover.
6-13/32
[162.99]
4-3/64
[102.87]
Model
CFS-2
CFS-10
Model
FSW-6
FSW-15
FSW-30
Cable Length
6.5 ft (2 m)
32.8 ft (10 m)
Cable Length
19.5 ft (6 m)
49 ft (15 m)
98 ft (30 m)

330
L
e
v
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
F
o
a
t
L
E
V
E
L
Series
123
5-1/2
[139.70] 7
[177.80]
5-3/4
[146.05]
5-3/8
[136.53]
1/2 PIPE PLUG
TYP 2 PLACES
4-3/4
[120.65]
3-9/16
[90.50]
1 NPT
7-1/8
[180.98]
2-7/16
[61.91]
3-9/16
[90.50]
1-1/8
[28.58]
A special snap action mechanism eliminates frequent operation due to surging water level.
Visible operation adds convenience in servicing. Stainless steel trim and hand reset are
available if required. Options include DPDT switch, two stage, and weatherproof housing.
APPLICATIONS
Boiler low water cut off
Boiler feed water control
Condensate tanks
Deaerators
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids. Cast iron
is not for use with lethal or flammable
substances either liquid or gaseous.
Wetted Materials: Body: Cast iron;
Float and trim: 304 SS; Packing gland:
Brass; Packing: Carbon; Body gasket:
Carbon.
Pressure Limit: 150 psig
(10.34 bar).
Optional weatherproof.
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch or
mercury switch. Optional DPDT or two
stage.
Electrical Rating: Snap switch: 15A @
120/240/480 VAC, 0.5A @ 120 VDC
resistive, 0.25A @ 240 VDC resistive;
Mercury switch: 4A @ 120 VAC/DC, 2A
@ 240 VAC/DC.
terminal.
Conduit Connection: 7/8 (22.23 mm)
hole for 1/2 (12.7 mm) conduit.
(Snap switch is not rated).
Deadband: Approximately 1 1/2
(38.1 mm).
Options: Manual reset.
Boiler Water Level Control
Heavy Duty, Cast Iron Chamber
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids. Cast iron
is not for use with lethal or flammable
substances either liquid or gaseous.
Wetted Materials: Body: Cast iron.
Optional cast steel or 316 SS; Float and
trim: 303 SS, 304 SS, 316 SS, and 430
SS. Option of all 316 SS; Body gasket:
Carbon.
Optional rating to 400 psig (27.6 bar).
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X. Optional
general purpose or explosion proof.
Repeatability: 1/4 (6.4 mm).
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch,
hermetically sealed snap switch, or
mercury switch. Optional DPDT or two
stage.
Electrical Rating: Snap switch: 12A @
120 VAC, 5A @ 240 VAC, 0.5A @ 125
VDC resistive, 0.25A @ 250 VDC
resistive; Hermetically sealed snap
switch: 5A @ 125 VAC, 5A @ 240 VAC,
5A @ 30 VDC resistive; Mercury switch:
4A @ 120 VAC/DC, 2A @ 240 VAC/DC.
Higher contact ratings available for the
mercury switch.
terminal.
Set Point Adjustment: 1 (25.4 mm).
Series
102
Flanged Chamber Type Level Control
Operating Pressures to 300 PSIG
Flanged inspection plate allows periodic inspection and clean-out of Model 102 float
chamber, making unit ideal for use in refineries, chemical plants, and other areas with
potentially dirty liquids. Low cost cast iron chamber is standard. Carbon steel and stainless
steel chambers are available on special order. Stainless steel float is standard.
5-3/4
[146.05]
6-1/8
[155.58]
A
B
6-3/4
[171.45]
17-1/2
[444.5]
3/4 NPT CONDUIT
CONNECTION. CAN
BE ROTATED 360.
1 NPT
8-1/4
[209.55]
4-7/8
[123.83]
3-1/4
[82.55]
1-5/8
[41.28]
SP. GR.
1.0
0.6
A
5 1/16
(129 mm)
5 13/16
(148 mm)
B
3/4
(19 mm)
1
(25.4 mm)
Model
123-153
123-7000-153
Model
102-WT-4810-C-60
102-WT-7810-C-60
102-WT-7810HM-C-60
Switch Type
SPDT Mercury
SPDT Snap
Switch Type
SPDT Mercury
SPDT Snap
SPDT Hermetically Sealed Snap

L
e
v
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
F
o
a
t
L
E
V
E
L
Model 201 liquid level control is designed for long life and reliable operation in chemical plants, refineries and
industrial facilities. Stainless steel switching mechanism uses gravity return action instead of springs to prolong life.
Weatherproof enclosure is standard. Heavy duty, welded steel float chamber is suitable for 500 psi at 750F.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Body: Carbon steel. Optional
316 SS; Float and trim: 303 SS, 304 SS, 316 SS,
and 430 SS. Options of 316 SS and 430 SS or all
316 SS.
Temperature Limit: Process: 750F (399C). Heat
fins should be used for process temperatures
above 500F (260C) with mercury switches, 400F
(204C) with snap switches, and 350F (176.7C)
with hermetically sealed snap switches.
Pressure Limit: 600 psig (41 bar) at 100F
(37.7C), 500 psig (34 bar) at 750F (399C).
Higher ratings available.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X. Optional general
purpose or explosion proof.
Repeatability: 1/4 (6.4 mm).
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch, hermetically
sealed snap switch or mercury switch. Optional
DPDT or two stage.
Electrical Rating: Snap switch: 12A @ 120 VAC,
5A @ 240 VAC, 0.5A @ 125 VDC resistive, 0.25A
@ 250 VDC resistive. Hermetically sealed snap
switch: 5A @ 125 VAC, 5A @ 240 VAC, 5A @ 30
VDC resistive. Mercury switch: 4A @ 120 VAC/DC,
2A @ 240 VAC/DC. Higher contact ratings
available for the mercury switch.
Process Connections: 1 female NPT and 1
socket weld hub. Optional flange connections.
Set Point Adjustment: 1 (25.4 mm).
Agency Approvals: UL. (None on HM switch)
SP.GR
1.0
0.6
*A
6 3/4(171mm)
7 1/2 (191 mm)
B
3/4 (19 mm)
1 (25.4 mm)
*A is adjustable 1 (25.4 mm)
Series
201
6-3/4
[171.45]
5-3/4
[146.05]
4 [101.60]
CLEARANCE
FOR COVER
REMOVAL
3/4
FEMALE
NPT
ELEC.
CONN.
18-5/8
[473.08]
3-1/4
[82.55]
10-15/16
[277.83]
3-3/4
[95.25]
1 FEMALE NPT
PROCESS
CONNECTION
TYP 2 PLACES
B
A
Side Mounted-Chamber Type Level Control
Operating Pressures to 500 PSIG, 34 bar, Hermetically Sealed Snap Switch Option
Heavy duty and low cost is the perfect description for the 391 Series level control. Stainless steel switching
mechanism uses gravity return action instead of springs for long life. Weatherproof enclosure is standard. Welded
steel chamber is good for 650 psig (45 bar) at 600F (315C).
APPLICATIONS
Oil refineries, chemical plants, power generating stations, pumping stations, heat transfer systems,
sanitary/waste water facilities, drip legs, hydraulic systems, boilers.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Body: Carbon steel; Float and
trim: 303 SS, 304 SS, 316 SS, and 430 SS.
Temperature Limit: Process: 600F (315.6C).
Heat fins should be used for process temperatures
above 500F (260C) with mercury switches, 400F
(204C) with snap switches, and 350F (176.7C)
with hermetically sealed snap switches.
Pressure Limit: 800 psig (55 bar) at 100F
(37.7C), 650 psig (45 bar) at 600F (315.6C).
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch, hermetically
sealed snap switch or mercury switch. Optional
DPDT.
Electrical Rating: Snap switch: 12A @ 120 VAC,
5A @ 240 VAC, 0.5A @ 125 VDC resistive, 0.25A
@ 250 VDC resistive; Hermetically sealed snap
switch: 5A @ 125 VAC, 5A @ 240 VAC, 5A @ 30
VDC resistive; Mercury switch: 4A @ 120 VAC/DC,
2A @ 240 VAC/DC. Higher contact ratings
available for the mercury switch.
Process Connections: 1 female NPT. Optional 1
socket weld hub or flange connections.
Specific Gravity: 0.8 minimum. Optional 0.7
minimum.
A
4 3/8 (111mm)
4 11/16 (191 mm)
B
1 (25.4 mm)
1 3/16 (112.3 mm)
SP.GR
1.0
0.80
Series
391
Side Mounted-Chamber Type Level Control
Compact, Low Cost, Hermetically Sealed Snap Switch Option
4 [101.60]
CLEARANCE
FOR COVER
REMOVAL
6-3/4
[171.45]
5-3/4
[146.05]
B
A
1 FEMALE NPT
PROCESS
CONNECTION
TYP 2 PLACES
3-7/16
[87.31]
3/4 FEMALE
NPT ELEC.
CONN.
14-11/16
[373.06]
3-3/4
[95.25]
6-1/2
[165.10]
Model
391-WT-4810-C1-80
391-WT-7810-C1-80
391-WT-7810HM-C1-80
Model
201-WT-4810-C1-60
201-WT-7810-C1-60
201-WT-7810HM-C1-60
Switch Type
SPDT Mercury
SPDT Snap
Switch Type
SPDT Mercury
SPDT Snap

332
L
e
v
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
U
t
r
a
s
o
n
c
L
E
V
E
L
Gap Switch
Liquid Level Measurement, 1000:1 Wet/Dry Ratio, 316 SS Wetted Parts
Series GS Gap Switch measures liquid levels at a single point and provides a
10A relay output for high or low level alarm, overflow prevention, and pump
protection. The Series GS uses ultrasonic wave propagation between the
transducer gap to sense the presence or absence of a liquid. Integral electronics
make installation quick and easy. Units can be mounted in either a vertical or
horizontal position with no additional calibration required. Gap switch includes
a 0.5 second delay and high level failsafe.
APPLICATIONS
Monitor and control levels of water, chemicals, lubricants, acids, creams,
lotions, beverages or paints in vessels, storage bins, tanks, sumps, etc.
4
[101.6]
3-3/4
[95.25]
13/16
[20.64]
2-3/4
[69.45]
3/4 NPT
THREAD HUB
7/8
[22.23]
1-1/2 [38.10]
1
[25.40]
3/4 NPT
Series
GS
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids
(1000:1 wet/dry ratio).
Temperature Limits: Sensor:
40 to 200F ( 40 to 93C);
Electronics: 20 to 170F
( 4 to 77C).
(68.9 bar).
Enclosure Rating: Epoxy coated
cast aluminum, NEMA 4.
Repeatability: 2 mm (0.078)
typical.
Switch Type: DPDT.
Electrical Rating: 10A @ 120
VAC resistive.
50/60 Hz (230 VAC optional).
NPT.
NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical or
horizontal.
Delay [On]: 0.5 seconds.
Immersion Depth: 1 (25.4 mm).
Weight: 1 lb (453 g).
The Series MULS Miniature Ultrasonic Level Switch measures liquid at
a single point providing an output for high or low level alarm, overflow
prevention, or pump protection. The Series MULS uses ultrasonic wave
propagation between the transducer gap to sense the presence or absence of a
liquid. Units can be mounted within 15 of horizontal with no additional
calibration required. The switches include a 0.5 second delay and have
repeatability of less than .08 in. (2 mm). The Series MULS can be used to
monitor and control levels of water, chemicals lubricants, acids, or beverages in
vessels, storage bins, or tanks.
Miniature Ultrasonic Level Switch
No Mechanical or Moving Parts
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids
(non coating, low viscosity).
Wetted Material: 316L SS.
176F ( 29 to 80C).
(17.24 bar).
Enclosure Rating: General
purpose.
Repeatability: .08 (2 mm).
Switch Type: SPST normally
open dry relay, NPN transistor
sink, or PNP transistor source.
Electrical Rating: Relay: 1A @
5 30 VDC, source & sink: 100mA.
Electrical Connections: 12
(304.8 mm) 5 conductor cable, 24
AWG wire.
Leakage Current: Less than
50A, sinking and sourcing.
Process Connection: 1/4 or 1/2
male NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Within
15 of horizontal.
Delay: 0.5 seconds.
Agency Approvals: CE pending.
Series
MULS
Model
MULS-SN-A
MULS-SN-B
1/2 NPT
1/4 NPT
ALARM
POINT
3/8
[9.53]
1-7/8
[47.63]
ALARM
POINT
5/8
[15.88]
2-3/8
[60.33]
(1) HEX
[25.4]
Connection Size
1/4
1/2
Model
GS10001
GS20001
Immersion Depth
1 (25.4 mm)
1 (25.4 mm)
Supply Voltage
115 VAC
230 VAC

L
e
v
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
O
p
t
c
a
L
E
V
E
L
Low cost, rugged optical level switch provides rapid response
while employing no moving parts for stable process control. The bright
red and green LEDs indicate the presence or absence of liquid for true,
local indication. Three optional materials, 316 SS, polysulfone and PFA
provide application flexibility. Compact switch can be quickly mounted
horizontally or vertically for each installation.
Principles of Operation
The optical level switch employs an LED, which transmits infrared light.
This light is sent through a prism and reflected back to a photo-
transistor utilizing two 90 light reflections. With the prism surrounded
by a gas, the light source is cast back to the photo transistor. When a
translucent liquid is introduced to the prism at or above the point where
the light source makes contract with the prism, the light is reflected
into the liquid, not allowing the photo-transistor to energize.
FEATURES
Compact size
LED switch indication
No moving parts
APPLICATIONS
Food and beverage systems
Liquid holding tanks
Hydraulic reservoirs
Sumps
Pharmaceutical systems
Air conditioning systems
Optical Level Switch
Low Cost, Compact, LED Indication
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Noncoating compatible liquids.
Wetted Materials: See model chart.
Temperature Limit: Process: OLS-10, 11: 200F (93.3C), OLS-
12: 120F (48.9C); Ambient: OLS-10, 11: 175F (79.4C), OLS-
12: 120F (48.9C).
Pressure Limit: OLS-11, 12: 200 psig (13.8 bar); OLS-10: 1000
psig (69 bar).
Repeatability: 0.02 (0.5 mm).
Switch Type: NPN open collector.
Output Signal: Vout (max) = 28 VDC, Isink (max) = 100 mA.
Current Consumption: 35 mA maximum.
Electrical Connections: 38 (965.2 mm) 3 conductor cable, 22
AWG wire.
Mounting Orientation: Can be mounted in any position.
Specific Gravity: No minimum.
Series
OLS
OLS-10
OLS-11
OLS-12
SUGGESTED SPECIFICATIONS
Optical level switch shall be PFA, 316 SS and Polysulfone or
Polysulfone construction. Unit shall provide an NPN open
collector output signal. Switch shall be capable of mounting in
horizontal or vertical position. Switch shall incorporate LED switch
status.
1/2 NPT
1-3/4
[44.45]
1/16
[1.59]
15/64
[5.95]
7/8 HEX
[22.23 HEX]
HIGH
LOW
RED
BLK GNO
WHT CONTROL
Model
OLS-10
OLS-11
OLS-12
Wetted Materials
316 SS/Polysulfone
Polysulfone
PFA

334
L
e
v
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
D
s
p
a
c
e
r
L
E
V
E
L
One of our most versatile level controls, the model B-l90 can be used on all types of tank or sump level control
applications. Three porcelain displacers provide deadband adjustment. Unit can start a sump pump (for example) when
liquid reaches the high set point and turn the pump off when the level drops to the low set point. Unit works equally well in
pressurized tanks. Two stage units also available.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Cable, spring and stops: 316 SS.
Optional Inconel
spring; Displacers: Porcelain.

Optional 304 SS, 316 SS, or carbon graphite.
Temperature Limits: 32 to 200F (0 to 93.3C).
Pressure Limit: 125 psig (8.6 bar). Higher ratings
available.
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch, hermetically sealed
snap switch, or mercury switch. Optional DPDT or two
stage.
Electrical Rating: Snap switch: 12A @ 120 VAC, 5A
@ 240 VAC, 0.5A @ 125 VDC resistive, 0.25A @ 250
VDC resistive; Hermetically sealed snap switch: 5A @
120 VAC, 5A @ 240 VAC, 5A @ 30 VDC resistive;
Mercury switch: 4A @ 120 VAC/DC, 2A @ 240
VAC/DC. Higher contact ratings available for the
mercury switch.
Process Connections: 4 125 cast iron flange. Other
material, size, and rating flanges are available.
Set Point Adjustment: Adjustable by moving
displacers see dimension chart for minimum and
maximum values.
Deadband: Adjustable by moving displacers see
dimension chart for minimum and maximum values.
Specific Gravity: Standard is 1.0. Specify when
ordering by replacing 1.0 in model number with
specific gravity setting desired. Settable range is 0.5
to 1.2.
Cable Length: 10 ft (3 m) standard. Optional up to
100 ft (30.5 m).
Inconel
is a registered trademark of Huntington

Alloys Corporation.
A C B TB
Max.
116 1/2
(2.66m)
Min.
6 1/2
(165mm)
Max.
114
(2.9m)
Min.
6 3/4
(172mm)
Max.
2 1/2
(64mm)
Min.
122 1/4
(3.1m)
Series
B-190
Liquid Level Switches-Controls
Top Mounted Displacer Type, Adjustable Setpoints,
Magnetic Operation, Optional Hermetically Sealed Snap Switch
6-3/4
[171.45]
5-3/4
[146.05]
3/4 NPT
9-13/16
[249.24]
3 [76.20]
A
B
C
TB
OPERATES
ON LEVEL
RISE
OPERATES
ON LEVEL
DROP
TO
BOTTOM
Dimensions for 1.0 s.g. @ 100F (38C)
Conductivity Level Probe
Low Cost, Compact Design
Model
CLP
Series CLP Conductivity Level Probes are used to determine the presence of a
conductive liquid at a set level by sensing conductivity. The Series CLP is coupled with the
Series TSWB Temperature Level Controller for a complete level control system. These
probes allow for the measurement of conductivity between the probe fitting and end, which
is isolated by a ceramic insulator, or between the probe ends of two probes. The CLP can be
mounted in any orientation in a tank, tee fitting, or any compatible threaded port. The probe
end is solid stainless steel allowing substantial resistance to heat and corrosion.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Conductive liquids compatible with wetted materials.
Wetted Materials:
Probe End: 430SS;
Insulator: ceramic;
Fitting: nickel plated iron;
Seal: silicone.
Electrical Connections: Snap type post.
Mounting: Threaded port, any orientation.
Weight: 2 oz. (57 g).
Model
CLP-1
1/8
[3.18]
3-35/64
[90.09]
6-19/32
[167.48]
23/64
[9.92]
1/2 NPT
3/8
[9.53]
7/16
[11.11]
1/4
[6.35]
9/16
[14.29]
1/4
[6.35]
51/64
[20.24]
2-13/32
[61.12]
19/32
[15.03]
Model
B190-WT-4810-P-A-1.0-2
B190-WT-7810-P-A-1.0-2
B190-WT-7810HM-P-A-1.0-2
Description
Conductivity Level Probe, 1/2 NPT
Switch Type
SPDT Mercury
SPDT Snap

L
e
v
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
C
o
n
d
u
c
t
v
t
y
L
E
V
E
L
Series
LLC
Conductivity Controller
Single Point or Differential Level Service, Compact Size, Up to 6 ft. (1.82 m) Probes
Control valves, pumps and alarms with the versatile Series LLC
Conductivity Level Controller. Select the required number of probes
for single or dual point level detection. Choose probe lengths in 1-foot
increments (up to six feet) to adapt the LLC to your specific applications
requirements. The LLC features rugged 1/4-inch (6.3 mm) diameter,
stainless steel probes, LED monitoring, surge protection, low voltage
sensor and different mounting options.
To build your level switch:
Controller:
1. Determine your supply voltage. Select between 120 and
240 VAC.
2. Determine the required sensitivity. Select between 10K
and 26K .
3. Determine the socket style. Select between 8-pin octal and
DIN mount.
Probes:
4. Determine the required number of probes. Specify quantity
of Threaded Mounting Couplings, model LLC-82.
(A coupling is required for each probe.)
5. Select probe lengths. Specify model numbers for probes.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Electrically conductive fluids.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS, PTFE.
Temperature Limits: Controller: -40 to 150F (-40 to 65C);
Probes: 406F (207C).
Pressure Limits: Probes: 400 psig (27 bar).
Switch Type: SPDT, N.O. or N.C.
Electrical Rating: 10A resistive, 1/3 HP @ 120/240 VAC.
Power Requirements: 120 VAC or 240 VAC.
Electrodes: 1/4 (6.3 mm) diameter, 316 SS.
Maximum Probe Length: 72 (1.82 m).
Controller Sensitivity: 10K or 26K .
Mounting: Controller: 8 pin octal or DIN mount; Probes: 3/8
male NPT.
Weight: Controller: 6 oz (170 g).
Model
LLC-31
LLC-32
LLC-33
LLC-34
LLC-35
LLC-36
Probes
Model
LLC-118
LLC-128
LLC-115
LLC-125
LLC-218
LLC-228
LLC-215
LLC-225
Supply
Voltage
120 VAC
120 VAC
120 VAC
120 VAC
240 VAC
240 VAC
240 VAC
240 VAC
Controllers
Sensitivity
10K
26K
10K
26K
10K
26K
10K
26K
Controller
Probe
2-5/16
[58.74]
1-11/16
[42.86]
2X (3/16)
[4.76]
2
[50.8]
2-3/8
[60.33]
2-3/4
[69.85]
3-1/2
[88.9]
5/8
[15.88]
1/4 NPT
9/32
[7.14]
L
CONTROLLER
PROBE
Length feet(m)
1 (.3)
2 (.6)
3 (.9)
4 (1.2)
5 (1.5)
6 (1.8)
Socket Style
8-Pin Octal
8-Pin Octal
DIN Mount
DIN Mount
8-Pin Octal
8-Pin Octal
DIN Mount
DIN Mount
Threaded Mounted Couplings
Model LLC-82

336
L
e
v
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
C
o
n
d
u
c
t
v
t
y
L
E
V
E
L
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrodes: 1/8 dia, 24 (609.6 mm) length, standard.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS, polypropylene.
Mounting, Sensor Head: 1 male NPT.
Temperature Limits: 212
F (100
C).
Probe Enclosure: NEMA 6 (IP67).
Maximum Probe Length: 72 (1.8 m) with optional extensions.
Connecting Cable, Probe to Controller: 10 ft (3.0 m).
Sensing Voltage: 12 VAC.
Power Supply: 120 VAC 50/60 Hz.
Output: SPDT, 5 A @ 240 VAC.
Mounting, Controller: Standard octal socket or 35 mm DIN rail.
Weight, Probe Assembly: 1.5 lbs (0.68 kg).
Weight, Controller: 1.0 lb (0.45 kg).
Model
DPL110
Dual Point Level Switch
Tank High/Low Control, Conductivity Technology, Up to 72 Probes
Maintain liquid level high and low limits with the Model DPL Dual Point
Level Switch. Units can be used for single or dual point level control in semi-
solid liquids, industrial slurries or heavy-bodied liquids like wastewater.
Standard 24 inch electrodes can be cut by the end-user to a shorter length or
lengthened by adding up to two 24 inch extensions (sold separately) to reach
the maximum recommended length of 72 inches. Model DPL contains no
moving parts to get stuck or wear out. Controller features adjustable sensitivity
and DIN rail-mountable socket mount.
27.1
[687]
24.00
[610]
1 MALE NPT
0.13
[3.2]
3.11
[79]
2.385
[60.58]
2.26
[57]
1.40
[35]
3.73
[95]
2.81
[71]
2.25
[57]
1.75
[44]
Model CLS1 Capacitance Level Switch provides reliable point level
measurement of solids, liquids and slurries in metallic or non-metallic tanks
and vessels. Model CLS1 detects the presence or absence of material in contact
with the probe by sensing a change in the capacitance. Electronics provide
highly sensitive measurement detection (requires less than a 1 picofarad shift
from ambient). State of the art technology ignores material build-up on the
vessel sidewall or along the probe assembly. One time calibration is simple with
a single multi-turn potentiometer. Red LED on housing indicates sensor status.
Unit features an adjustable 1-30 second time delay and a 5 amp, SPDT fail-safe
relay output. Model CLS1 can be mounted vertically or horizontally.
APPLICATIONS
High or low level detection in bins, silos, tanks, hoppers, chutes and
other vessels where liquids, solids or slurries are stored.
Model
CLS1
Capacitance Level Switch
For Solids, Liquids or Slurries, Fail-Safe Protection, <1 pF Sensitivity
6-3/16
[157.15]
1-11/16
[42.88]
7/8
[22.23]
1-7/64
[28.18]
1/2 FEMALE
NPT CONDUIT
CONNECTION
1 MALE NPS
PROCESS
CONNECTION
1-13/16
[46.05]
3-13/16
[96.84]
21/32
[16.67]
8-5/8
[219.08]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Solids, liquids, or slurries.
Wetted Material: CPVC.
to 185F ( 40 to 85C).
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP56), PVC, dust tight, water resistant.
Switch Type: SPDT.
Power Requirements: 120 VAC, 1.5VA.
Process Connection: 1 male NPS.
Sensitivity: Adjustable to <1 pF.
Fail-Safe: Switch selectable, high/Low.
Time Delay: Adjustable 1 to 30 seconds.
Model DPL110, Dual Point Level Switch
ACCESSORY
Model DPL5, Electrode Extensions includes two 24 (610 mm) electrode
extensions and mounting hardware
Model CLS1, Capacitance Level Switch

L
e
v
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
C
a
p
a
c
t
v
e
L
E
V
E
L
Series
CLS2
Capacitive Level Switch
Powder, Bulk, or Liquids, Auto-Calibration
4-3/16
[106.36]
3/8
[9.53]
4-5/32
[105.57]
3-19/32
[91.28]
4-1/8
[104.78]
2-19/64
[58.34]
22-21/64
[567.14]
19
[482.60]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquids, powder, and bulk materials compatible with wetted materials.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS and polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF).
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 40 to 185F ( 40 to 85C), 4 to 185F ( 20 to
85C) with under 24 VAC/DC power supply; Process: 40 to 250F ( 40 to 121C).
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof, NEMA 4X.
Switch Type: DPDT (two form C).
Electrical Rating: 8A @ 120/240 VAC res., 30 VDC. 1/2 hp @ 120 VAC and 1/4
hp @ 240 VAC ind.
Power Consumption: 2.8 watts max.
Electrical Connection: 1/2 NPT conduit opening, screw termination with
removable terminal block.
Process Connection: See model chart.
Set Point Adjustment: Trips when product touches probe. Cut or extend probe to
length of desired trip point. Can be cut as short as 1 and can be extended by
welding on to probe. (Minimum length will be effected by material being sensed.)
Time Delay: Adjustable, 0 to 60 seconds.
Spark/Static Protection: 10 MEG Ohm dissipation resistance with spark gap.
Surge current to 100A max.
Sensitivity: 8 Selectable settings, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 14, 20 pF (at 30 pF nominal
free capacitance).
Example
Series
Enclosure
Switch
Power
Supply
Probe Type
Insulator
Material
Process
Connection
Probe
Length
Options
CLS2
CLS2
W
W
1
1
1
1
R
R
T
C
K
K
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
019
XXX
M20
M20
WC
CLS2 W11RK1 019 M20
Capacitive Level Switch
Weatherproof
DPDT rated 8A @ 12/240 VAC, 30
VDC res.
12 240 VAC/DC
Standard Rod: 316 SS, .375 diameter
Threaded Rod: 316 SS (can attach field
extensions.)
Cable: 316 SS with weight
PVDF
3/4 male NPT
1 male NPT
1 1/2 male NPT
3/4 BSPT
1 BSPT
1 1/2 BSPT
1 1/2 sanitary clamp
2 sanitary clamp
Insertion length in inches. Example 019
is 19 length. (Minimum length is 6,
with 3/4 sensing tip)
M20 conduit connection with cable
gland
Window Cap
The CLS2 is a capacitive technology level switch that does not have any moving parts
- no jams, no wear, nothing to break, and no maintenance. State of the art sensing
technology in the CLS2, using impulse RF admittance measurement combined with an
active guard, provides excellent level measurement and stability while being insensitive to
material buildup. This technology also provides immunity to external RF sources like
walkie-talkies and cell phones as well as minimal interference with radio communication or
other electronic systems.
Capacitive level technology can be used for liquids, powders, and bulk materials and is
great for difficult applications such as slurries, coating products, and liquids with solids. The
CLS2 is ideal for level indication in silos, receivers, and transporters in pneumatic
conveying systems. The CLS2 can also be used for liquid interface applications to detect the
level of two immiscible liquids that have different dielectric constants such as oil and water.
Wetted materials of PVDF and 316 SS assure great chemical compatibility and meet food
grade requirements.
FEATURES
Automatic Calibration: No need to turn calibration pots, just push the
calibration button. The CLS2 even has an external magnet to activate the
calibration without having to open the enclosure.
Universal Power Supply: One model works from 12 to 240 VAC/DC without any
jumpers or settings.
Coat Guard: Unit is not affected by sticky, dusty, or clingy materials that coat or
build up on the probe, preventing false alarms.
Failsafe Setting: Output switches can be set for Normally Open or Normally
Closed condition on loss of power.
Status Indication: Ultra high brightness external red LED switch status
indicator, and internal indicators for power, sensor, and switch status that can be
seen externally with window cap option (external LED on weatherproof model
only).
Time Delay: Prevent false alarms from material splashing, agitation, etc.
Removable Terminals: Removable terminal block snaps in and out enabling
easy wiring outside of the enclosure.
Example Models
CLS2-W11RK1-019

338
L
e
v
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
C
a
p
a
c
t
v
e
L
E
V
E
L
Series NCS-10 Through Wall Capacitive Sensor features a thin profile
with a sensing distance of 10 mm non-flush mounted. The switching points can
be altered by means of the push-button teach-in function. 3-wire DC output
with selectable make (NO) or break (NC) switching and NPN Alarm. The NCS-
10 is designed for front, pipe or plane mounting. Capacitive sensors can detect
metallic as well as non-metallic objects; however, their traditional use is for non-
metallic materials such as: plastics industry, chemical industry, wood industry,
ceramic and glass industry, and packing industry.
FEATURES
Thin profile capacitive level sensor
Withstands electrostatic discharge up to 40 KV
Sensing distance: 0.039 0.39 (1 10 mm)
Teach in of sensing distance via push button or wire input
Selectable make or break switching by means of teach in function
Protection: Short circuit, transients and reverse polarity
Alarm output
Alarm output when operating current > 250 mA
Series
NCS-10
Through Wall Capacitive Sensor
Non-Contact, Thin Profile Level Sensor
6-1/2 FT CABLE
7/32
[5.56]
1-7/64
[28.18]
47/64
[18.65]
1-13/16
[46.04]
1-1/2
[38.1]
2X 1/8
[3.18]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Solids, liquids, or slurries.
Temperature Limits: Operating temperature: 20 to 80C ( 4 to 176F);
Storage temperature: 40 to 185F ( 40 to 85C).
Repeatability: 5%.
Power Requirements: 10 to 30 VDC (ripple incl.).
Switch Type: NPN or PNP.
Electrical Rating: 200 mA (continuous).
Rated Operating Distance (S
n
): 0.39 (10 mm).
Sensing Range: 0.039 0.39 (1 10 mm) (factory set at 10 mm).
Sensitivity Effective Operating Distance (S
r
): Adjustable (teach in)
0.9 x S
n
S
r
1.1 x S
n
.
Usable Operating Distance (S
u
): 0.8 x S
r
S
u
1.2 x S
r
.
Hysteresis: Depending on teach in.
Ripple: 10%.
No-load Supply Current: 12 mA.
Voltage Drop: 2.5 VDC @ max. load.
Protection: Short circuit, reverse polarity, transients.
Frequency of Operating Cycles: 10 Hz.
Indication: For output ON: LED, yellow; For safe/unsafe: LED, green.
Connection: Cable: Black, 6.5 ft (2 m), 4 x 0.14 mm
2
, oil proof, PVC.
Weight: 50 g.
Approvals: CE.
Model NCS-10P, PNP
Model NCS-10N, NPN

L
e
v
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
T
u
n
n
g

F
o
r
k
L
E
V
E
L
Tuning Fork Level Switch
Perfect for Sensing Low Bulk Density or Low Dielectric Materials
Series
TFLS
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Dry powder or bulk materials compatible with wetted materials.
Can detect bulk materials submerged in liquid.
Sensitivity: Minimum bulk density of 1.8 lb/ft
3
(30 g/l), maximum particle
size 0.4 in (10 mm).
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 4 to 140F ( 20 to 60C); Process: 4 to
176F ( 20 to 80C).
Power Requirement: 90 to 265 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC.
Enclosure: Aluminum, powder coated.
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof, NEMA 4X.
Switch Type: SPDT.
Electric Connections: Screw terminals.
Process Connection: 1 1/2 male NPT.
Indication Lights: External: Red LED; Internal: Green and red LEDs.
Sensing Delay: (Maximum) covered probe: 2 seconds; Uncovered
probe: 3 to 7 seconds.
Time Delay: Separate settings for covering and uncovering the probe.
Adjustable from 2 to 20 seconds.
APPLICATIONS
Lime, styrofoam, tobacco, dry cereals, sugar, animal feed, milk powder,
flour, insulation, cement, paper shavings, plastic granules, sawdust,
carbon black, light fibers, detergent powders, dyes, chalk, silica, sand,
wood chips.
S RI S
TFLS TUN NG FORK L VEL SWTCH
SER AL
MODT LS
4-7/16
[112.73]
4-7/8
[123.83]
3-5/8 [92.08]
COVER REMOVAL
4-7/32
[107.14]
3/4 CONDUIT
CONNECTION
1-1/2 NPT
A
7/8
[22.23]
7-5/8
[193.68]
8-5/8
[219.08]
Series TFLS tuning fork level switch is ideal for level control of powders
and fine grained solids, especially those with a low bulk density. The TFLS
incorporates a piezoelectric crystal that vibrates the fork at its natural
frequency. When the fork comes in contact with material the vibration is
dampened and the switch changes state. As the fork becomes free of material
the switch changes back to its normal state. Featured in the TFLS is user-
selectable fail-safe operation of the contacts. Unit is not affected by vibration
from conveying systems, motors, or the movement of material. It can be
mounted in any position and is available with factory built extensions for
mounting on the top of the storage vessel.
Series TFLS is easy to use with no calibration required and with no mechanical
moving parts there is no routine maintenance required. The TFLS is unaffected
by the dielectric constant of the sensed material making it superior to a
capacitance level switch for applications where the dielectric constant is too low,
where there is more than one material being used in one vessel, and when
material moisture content can change. The level switch is also good for
applications when the bulk density is too low for a rotating paddle level switch.
It can also detect granular material submerged in liquids of low viscosity, for
example sand, gravel, or polyester chips in water.
FEATURES
No calibration required
Vibrating fork design: Great for low bulk density and low dielectric
constant products. Will detect products down to 1.8 lb/ft
3
(30 g/l).
Universal power supply: One model works with 90 to 265 VAC and 24
VDC.
Adjustable sensitivity: Can be set to ignore lighter bulk density products
and only detect heavier products, such as sand in water.
Status indication: External LED switch indicator, and internal indicators
for normal and alarm status.
Failsafe setting: Output switch can be set for Normally Open or Normally
Closed condition on loss of power.
Time delay: Prevent false alarms from material surges.
Extension
Length
None
6 in
12 in
18 in
24 in
36 in
48 in
DIM
A
9 1/4 (234.95)
15 7/8 (403.23)
21 7/8 (555.63)
27 7/8 (708.03)
33 7/8 (860.43)
45 7/8 (1165.23)
57 7/8 (1470.03)
Series TFLS-W11SR1
Contact factory for fork extension options in carbon steel or stainless steel.

340
P
r
o
x
m
t
y

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
L
E
V
E
L
Model
DBLM
The Mini-Bin provides reliable level sensing for dry bulk solids where
mounting space is limited. This compact, side mount control reports high,
intermediate, and low level conditions, eliminating overflows, choking, clogs or
empty vessels. Model DBLM Mini-Bin operates by using a 1 rpm synchronous
motor to rotate a four vane, plastic paddle. When material surrounds paddle and
impedes rotation, the motor is de-energized and triggers a SPDT snap switch.
Mount the Mini-Bin with optional 1-1/4" to 3/4" reducer to replace standard size
units.
Mini-Bin Dry Bulk Level Monitor
Compact, 4-Vane Paddle
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Dry bulk solids.
Wetted Materials: Polycarbonate paddle, SS shaft, PTFE washer.
Enclosure Rating: Polycarbonate, NEMA 1.
Power Requirements: 110 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 220 VAC optional, consult
factory.
Power Consumption: 1.5 Watts.
Electrical Connections 18 AWG, 12 leads wrapped in conduit.
Process Connection: 3/4 male NPT, optional flange and 1 1/4 to 3/4
reducer.
Mounting Orientation: Side mount.
Weight: 0.77 Ib (350 g).
Series
PS
Proximity Sensors
Capacitive or Inductive 3-Wire DC, Threaded Body
The Series PS Proximity Sensors are noninvasive sensors ideal for level
detection, position indicating and counting applications. Capacitive type sensors
detect electrically conducting and nonconducting materials, liquids, solids, or
powders and include a sensitivity adjustment to differentiate between various
materials. Inductive sensors detect ferrous or nonferrous metals only. A bright
LED indicates the state of the output switch. Sensors feature short circuit,
reverse polarity, and transient protection. Small size and threaded body make
installation easy. Inductive sensors are embeddable (can be mounted flush).
Capacitive sensors are environmentally protected to IP65 and Inductive sensors
are protected to IP68. Units include two fixing, screwdriver, and operating
manual.
Dim.
A
B
C
D
E
PSC20103
M18
1.065 (27)
0.157 (4)
3.156 (80)
2.36 (60)
PSC20203
M30
1.614 (41)
0.197 (5)
3.156 (80)
2.36 (60)
PSI2002203
M12
0.688 (17)
0.125 (3)
2.36 (60)
1.58 (40)
PSI2005303
M18
0.938 (17)
0.125 (3)
2.87 (73)
1.97 (50)
PSC Series
PSI Series
*PNP Transistor
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Glass GRP Crastine reinforced plastic (PSC),
stainless steel (Model PSI2002203), nickel plated brass (Model
PSI2005303).
Temperature Limits: 22 to 212F ( 30 to 100C) capacitive, 13 to
158F ( 25 to 70C) inductive.
Enclosure Rating: PSC, IP65; PSI, IP68.
Repeatability: 0.05% (Model PSC20103), 0.1% (Model PSC20203),
0.01% (PSI Models).
Switch Type: Normally open NPN transistor, sinking (PSC30203:PNP).
Electrical Rating: 250 mA (PSC), 200 mA (PSI).
Minimum Load Current: 8 mA (PSC), <25 mA (PSI).
Leakage (Off-State) Current: <3 mA (PSC), <0.08 mA (PSI).
Voltage Drop: <3.5V @ 250 mA (PSC).<2.5V @ 200 mA (PSI).
Ripple: 10%.
Electrical Connection: 9.8 ft (3 m) cable.
Deadband: 20% of range (PSC), 15% of range (PSI).
Initializing Time Delay: <10 msec.
Model
DBLM3040
DBLM3140
Model
PSC20103
PSC20203
PSC30203*
PSI2002203
PSI2005303
Type
Cap.
Cap.
Cap.
Ind.
Ind.
Switching
Frequency
400 Hz
250 Hz
250 Hz
800 Hz
500 Hz
Body Size
M18 x 1
M30 x 1.5
M30 x 1.5
M12 x 1
M18 x 1
F1, 8 x 1 1/4 NPT flexible carbon steel mounting flange
A-335, 1 1/4 to 3/4 reducer
Power Supply
110 VAC
220 VAC
Detecting
Dist. in (mm)
.04 3 (1 10)
.08 79 (2 20)
.08 79 (2 20)
.08 (2)
.19 (5)

L
e
v
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
P
a
d
d
e
L
E
V
E
L
Paddle Level Switch
Economical Rotary Paddle Level Control, Top or Side Mounting for Dry Bulk Materials
Series
PLS
Incorporated in the design of the PLS is a magnetic drive that is time proven by
decades of use in our Mark Series valve position indicator product line. A 1 rpm
synchronous motor rotates the paddle utilizing a magnetic drive. As product builds up the
paddle is impeded from moving and the resulting motor torque activates the output
switches and stops the motor. A spring mechanism reactivates the motor and returns the
switches to normal state when the product no longer impedes the paddle rotation.
Standard construction is weatherproof with explosion-proof optional, and the unit can be
side or top mounted. The PLS is designed with the industry standard 1-1/4 male NPT
connection and mounting flanges.
FEATURES
Magnetic drive that isolates and completely seals the control head from the process and
environment preventing material or dust from entering the control head.
Motor shuts-off when paddle stalls increasing motor life, preventing motor burnout, and
decreasing power usage.
Slip clutch design enabled by the magnetic drive that prevents damage to motor and
drive mechanism from sudden or excessive loading on the paddle.
Status indication light on weatherproof models.
Screw cover on the enclosure for easy access with no worries about losing bolts or screws.
Modular design to allow field installation of any paddle, flanges, shaft extensions, or shaft
guards.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Dry powder or bulk materials compatible with wetted materials.
Sensitivity: Minimum material density of 5 lb/ft
3
(80 kg/m
3
), maximum of 200 lb/ft
3
(3200 kg/m
3
).
Wetted Materials:
Paddles: 316 SS; Exposed shaft: 316 SS; Shaft seal: PTFE;
Mounting boss: Aluminum; Flexible coupling: 316 SS;
Mounting flanges: Carbon steel or 316 SS;
Shaft extension and shaft guards: Galvanized steel or 316 SS.
Temperature Limits:
Standard construction: Process: 40 to 300F ( 40 to 148.9C);
Ambient: 40 to 185F ( 40 to 85C);
High temperature option: Process: 40 to 500F ( 40 to 260C);
Ambient: 40 to 185F ( 40 to 85C).
Pressure Limit: 30 psig (2.07 bar) maximum for .5 micron or larger material.
Power Requirement: Select by part number: 110 120 VAC, 230 VAC, 24 VAC, 48
VAC, 12 VDC, or 24 VDC.
Power Consumption: Weatherproof models: 5 watts; Explosion proof models: 3
watts.
Enclosure: Aluminum, powder coated.
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof (W, WH construction): NEMA 4X; Explosion
proof (E, EH construction): NEMA 4X and rated for Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C &
D, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, & G.
Switch Type: SPDT or optional DPDT snap switch.
Electrical Rating: 15A @ 120/230 VAC, 5A @ 24 VDC.
Electric Connections: Screw terminals.
Process Connection: 1 1/4 male NPT. Optional flange.
Weight: Control head only: 4 lb (1.81 kg).
Indication Light: Red LED that activates when switch is made or when switch is
not made with RL option (Not available on explosion proof models).
Options: Time delay relay, high temperature construction, top mount, shaft
extensions, shaft shields, flexible couplings, other power voltages, reversed light.
Agency Approvals: UL approved as an auxiliary device or as an auxiliary device
for hazardous locations.
Side Mount
3/4 CONDUIT
CONNECTION
4-31/32
[126.19]
4-11/32
[110.31]
6-3/8
[162.05]
8-33/64
[216.26]
10-5/16
[261.92]
4-1/2
[113.69]
CLEARANCE FOR
COVER REMOVAL
PDL-4. Minimum bulk
density of 70 lb/ft
3
(1122
kg/m
3
). Fits through 1 1/4
coupling eliminating the
need for a mounting
flange.
PDL-2. Minimum bulk
density of 30 lb/ft
3
(481
kg/m
3
).
PDL-1. Minimum bulk
density of 5 lb/ft
3
(80
kg/m
3
).
PDL-3. Minimum bulk
density of 30 lb/ft
3
(481
kg/m
3
). Fits through a 1
1/4 coupling eliminating
the need for a mounting
flange.
Contact the factory for pricing of shaft extensions, protective shields, and other
options. More detailed information available in our Measurement & Control for
Powder, Dust, and Bulk Materials Catalog.
Control
Assemblies
PLS-W-S-1-0-0-0-0
PLS-W-S-1-3-0-0-0
PLS-W-S-1-2-CSH-0-0
Flanges
FLG-CSH
FLG-CSF
FLG-SSH
FLG-SSF
Description
Weatherproof construction, SPDT switch,
120 VAC power supply. Order paddles and
flanges separately.
Weatherproof construction, SPDT switch, 120
VAC power supply, includes PDL 3 paddle.
Weatherproof construction, SPDT switch, 120
VAC power supply, includes PDL 1 paddle and
FLG CSH flange.
Description
Carbon Steel with Half Coupling.
Carbon Steel with Full Coupling.
316 SS with Half Coupling.
316 SS with Full Coupling.
Paddles
(See top of page)
PDL-1
PDL-2
PDL-3
PDL-4

342
L
e
v
e
l

S
w
i
t
c
h
e
s
,
D
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m
L
E
V
E
L
Suspension Mounting Suspension Mounting
Flange Mounting
A unique Magnetic Linkage isolates the electrical compartment from
controlled product, reducing maintenance and improving sensitivity. The sealed
switch compartment and sealed leads yield the utmost in reliable operation. A
wide selection of diaphragms and switches are available with choices of flange
or suspension mounting to fit your specific application. The dry level Ultra-Mag
gg
Level Switch is extremely sensitive and very economical. The magnetic linkage
makes this simple explosion-proof diaphragm switch the most rugged and
reliable level control for a variety of products (see cut-away above).
Mounting Selection: A choice of either suspension or flange mounting is
available to match your application. Flange mounting is the best choice for
control of low or intermediate level in vessels containing granular product that
does not bridge, rathole, or otherwise build up on vessel walls. Choose
suspension mounting for high level in vessels and for better operation with
bridging product. See next page for more information on suspension and
flange mounting kits. Note that the mounting configuration is represented by
the letter S for suspension or F for flange which is the second digit in the
part number on the next page.
Diaphragm Selection: A wide variety of diaphragms are available to match
product bulk density, flowability, abrasiveness and temperature requirements
while providing maximum sensitivity. The best choice for vessels subject to
pressure or vacuum is breathable fabric (P Series), requiring no venting.
Non-porous elastomer (G Series) type diaphragms are the best choice for more
abrasive product and broader temperature range applications. Venting is always
required with the G series and if used in pressurized vessels, venting to the
tank atmosphere is required to allow pressure equalization. A slide rule
Diaphragm Selector is available from the factory to help you choose the
diaphragm best suited to your application.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible powder or bulk solids.
Wetted Materials:
Mounting Flange: See model chart. Aluminum or 304 SS;
Diaphragm: See model chart. Urethane, Buna-N, PTFE, silicone
rubber, polyester, fluoroelastomers, white Buna-N (food grade), or
EPDM.
Temperature Limits: Depends on diaphragm material, see model chart.
Standard switch: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C); High temperature switch:
-40 to 350F (-40 to 176C).
Enclosure Rating: General purpose or weatherproof and explosion-
proof. See model chart.
Switch Type: See model chart.
Electrical Connections: 18 gage solid core, 600 volt TEW 105C, style
1015. Epoxy sealed at conduit entrance. 12 (304.8 mm) long.
Process Connection: For flanged models standard is 8-3/8 (212.725
mm) diameter bolt hole circle.
Mounting Orientation: Flange mount or suspend depending on model.
Options: Suspension kits and flange adapter rings.
Flange Adapter Ring
Driving
Magnet
Driven
Magnet
Sealed
Junction Box
Epoxy Seal
Sealed
Switch Cavity
Explosion-Proof Ultra Mag
Level Switches
For Powder & Bulk Solids
p g p
SSUUSSPEN PENSSION HUB 1 ION HUB 1 NPT NPT
DIAPHRAGM
DIAMETER 5-7/8
7-1/2
3-1/8
S SUUSSPEN PENSSION HUB 1 ION HUB 1 NPT NPT
DIAPHRAGM
DIAMETER 5-7/8
7-1/2
3-1/8
342.P.N:Layout 2 2/16/11 2:08 PM Page 1
L
e
v
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
D
a
p
h
r
a
g
m
L
E
V
E
L
SUFFIX-SPECIAL CONTROLS
-A2 = Wood Chip Control (with 6G diaphragm only)
-A3 = High sensitivity actuator (for very light product)
Suspension Mounting is normally used for high level
monitoring in vessels. For product over 20 pounds/cu. ft.,
the level switch (diaphragm face) should be located about
1/3 of the distance from the vessel wall to the point of
entry of the product. For product less than 20 pounds/cu.
ft., the unit should be located closer to the point of entry
of the product, about 1/2 the distance from the vessel wall
to the point of entry. Pressure required to depress the
diaphragm and trip the switch is in the range of 515 oz in
the horizontal direction (perpendicular to the diaphragm). Suspension mounting
provides the easiest vertical adjustment capability, greatest sensitivity and best
maintenance conditions.
Suspension Assembly Kits: Pre-assembled kits are available from the factory, or
you can build your own kits using standard pipe fittings shown in our Proximity Bill
of Materials (Form No. 101). Pipes and fittings are normally galvanized steel, but
aluminum and stainless steel pipes and fittings are available. Units pictured on the
previous page are secured to a steel cover plate that rests on a rectangular steel flange
welded into the top of the vessel. Aluminum and stainless coverplates and flanges are
also available. Standard 48 long x 1 pipe provides working depth (WD) up to 48.
Longer pipe (to provide greater WD) is available. GS Series switches have upper (L
1
= 28 standard) and lower (L
2
= 20 standard) 1 pipes, with a tee (for stilling pot) in
between. A stilling pot is required to equalize pressure and keep dirt from building up
behind the diaphragm. PS series require a 1/2 conduit in 1 suspension pipe for
explosion-proof applications. The 1/2 conduit (56 standard length) is a standard part
of the GS series assembly.
Suggested Suggested Suggested
Product Diaphragm* Product Diaphragm* Product Diaphragm*
Abrasive 3D Gravel 3D Sand, Foundry Prepared 5A
Aggregate 3D Iron Ore, Crushed 3D Sand, Shake Out 3D
Alumina 3D Kaolin Clay 3D Sawdust, Dry 6G
Ash, Dry 3D Lime, Hydrated 5A Sea Coal 3D
Baking Powder 7B Lime, Stone 3D Sesame Seed 3D
Baking Soda 7B Oats 4B Shale, Crushed 3D
Barite 3D Peanuts in Shell 7A Silica, Flour 3D
Bark, Ground 6G Peanuts, Shelled 3D Sludge, Sewage Dried 1A
Barley, Ground or Meal 17 Perlite 7A Sludge, Sewage, Ground 1A
Barley, Whole 4B Phosphate, Rock 3D Soda Ash 3D
Beans, Edible, 4B Polyethylene Powder 7A Soybeans, Cracked 3D
Bentonite 3D Polyethylene Resin 17 Soybean, Flake 7A
Bond, Foundry 17 Polypropylene Fluff 7A Soybean, Flour, 7A
Carbon Black 7A Polypropylene Powder 7A Soybean Meal 3D
Cement, Klinker 8A Polypropylene Resin 17 Soybean, Whole 3D
Cement, Portland 4B Polystyrene Beads 3D Sugar Beets, Whole 6H
Chips, Hogged Fuel 6G Pot Ash 3D Sugar Refined 7B
Coal 3D Powdered Metal 3D Sunflower Seed 7A
Compost 5A Powdered Ore 3D Taconite Pellets 3D
Core Sand, Foundry 3D PVC Powder 7A Talcum Powder 3D
Corn, Shelled 8A PVC Resin 17 Walnut Shells, Crushed 3D
Diatomaceous Earth 7A Rice 17 Wheat 8A
Drill Mud 3D Rye 3D Wheat, Wet 5A
Flour 7B Salt 3D Wood, Chips 6G
Fly Ash 3D Sand, Dry 3D Wood, Dust 6G
Glass Batch 3D Sand, Dry Silica 3D
*Diaphragm codes become 4th and 5th characters in model number.
Proximity Ultra Mag
Level Switch
Note: The EX prefix must he added to the 6-digit model number for explosion-proof standard.
General purpose units do not require the EX or other prefix. See the Complete Model Chart on this page.
Note: OD = Outside Diameter
PREFIX - Certification
E X = Explosion-proof (UL & CSA) Class I, Div I & II, Groups C & D; Class II, Div I & II, Groups E, F, & G.
X = Explosion-proof (CSA) Class II, Div I & II, Groups F & G.
= General Purpose (No Code)
E X G S D 3 D A = EXAMPLE MODEL NUMBER*
A
1ST DIGIT-Basic Magnetic Pressure Sensing Series
G = Elastomeric Diaphragm-Venting required*. (Diaphragms 1A - 8A)
P = Breathable Fabric Diaphragm-No venting required. (Diaphragms 16 & 17 only)
2ND DIGIT-MOUNTING (Top = Suspension/Side=Flanged)
S = Suspended (G series require suspension vent fittings)* Subtract 10 lbs./cu. ft.-greater sensitivity.
F = Flanged, Aluminum standard
T = Flanged, 304 SS
3RD DIGIT-HOUSING MATERIAL
D = Aluminum
A = Aluminum, Anodized
E = Aluminum, Epoxy Coated
4TH & 5TH DIGITS-DIAPHRAGM MATERIAL (TEMPERATURE) (BULK DENSITY)
1 A = Fluoroelastomer, black, .025 thick, (25 to 300F), (>30 lbs/cu. ft.)
2 A = Neoprene, black, .025 thick, (-30 to 220F), (>30 lbs/cu. ft.)
3 D = Urethane, .031 thick, (10 to 150F), (>30 lbs./cu. ft.)
3 E = Urethane, orange, .062 thick, (10 to 150F), (>90 lbs/cu. ft.)
3 F = Urethane, 3D elastomer w/bumper for removable overlays, orange,
(10 to 150F), (>90 lbs/cu. ft.)
4 B = Buna-N, black, .020 thick, (-20 to 212F), (20 to 90 lbs./cu. ft.)
5 A = PTFE/Glass on Sil Rubber, .024 thick, (-40 to 350F), (>35 lbs./cu. ft.)
6 D = Silicone Rubber, gray, .062 thick, (-40 to 350F), (15 to 30 lbs/cu. ft.)
6 E = Silicone Rubber on Glass, red, .032 thick, (-40 to 350F), (>90 lbs/cu. ft.)
6 G = 6C w/Urethane overlay, (-40 to 350F), (wood chips diaphragm with A2)
7 A = Silcone Rubber on Glass (White), .015 thick, (-40 to 350F), (5 to 40 lbs./cu. ft.)
7 B = Buna-N (Food Applications-white), .060 thick, (-20 to 212F), (30 to 90 lbs./cu. ft.)
8 A = EPDM, black, .036 thick, (-40 to 275F), (40 to 90 lbs./cu. ft.)
1 6 = Polyester Filter Fabric, white, 150 micron permeability, (-30 to 275F),
(30 to 90 lbs./cu. ft.)
1 7 = Polyester Nitex, white, 15 micron permeability (-30 to 275F),
(30 to 90 lbs./cu. ft.)
6TH DIGIT-SWITCH TYPE
A = Standard, SPDT, 15A @ 125, 250 VAC
T = High Temp, SPDT, 5A @ 125, 250 VAC; 24 VDC(**)
V = High vibration, SPDT, 15A @ 125, 250 VAC
G = Gold contacts, SPDT, 1A @ 125 VAC, 1/2 A @ 24 VDC
G
G
G
G
P
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
P
P
Tank OD
84
96
10
12
14
24
* GS - G series suspended controls require suspension vent fittings.
(**) Non-UL/CSA listed
Suspension Assembly Kits
Diaphragm Selection Guide
Model
901-409
901-412
P and G Series Suspension Assembly Kits
Specials include aluminum or stainless steel assemblies. Flange port and
cover assemblies are sold separately. CONSULT FACTORY for details.
Model
126-009
126-010
126-011
126-012
126-013
126-014
126-015
Tank OD
15
30
36
42
48
60
72
Model
126 016
126 017
126 018
126 019
126 020
126 021
Description
P Series Suspension Assembly includes 1/2 pipe (56
Std length), 1 pipe (48 Std length), 1 pipe
coupling, 1 1/2 NPT strain relief on 1 pipe. Galvanized
mild steel pipe, explosion proof, standard.
G Series Suspension Assembly includes 1/2 pipe (56
Std length), watertight strain relief and 1 coupling, upper
1 pipe (28 Std length), lower 1 pipe (20 Std length),
strain relief with 1 1/2 NPT, 1x1x1 Tee, 1 Street Ell
and 1 pipe 4 long Stilling Pot. Galvanized steel pipe,
explosion proof, standard.
Aluminum Flange Adapter Rings
Complete Model Chart

344
L
e
v
e

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
,
T
t
L
E
V
E
L
The Series LTS Tilt Switch Probes are able to sense either the presence or absence of
material when other sensors wont work due to bin vibration, or actual walls arent available
for mounting other types of measuring units. The probes are designed for use where the
bulk material to be sensed is exposed or open. Typical applications include high or low
level detection in large hoppers, silos, crushers, or trippers, high level control under
stackers, and detection of plugged conditions at conveyor transfer points. Series LTS
probes can also be used to detect the presence or absence of bulk material on belt conveyors,
on chutes to indicate product flow, and to aid in loading rail cars or trucks.
All probe models are airtight, dust tight, and waterproof. The compact probe should be
used for applications involving small bins and hoppers where space is limited, while the
heavy duty probe should be used for applications where a heavy duty abrasion-resistant
probe is necessary.
Series
LTS
Tilt Switch Probe
Non-Mercury Probes
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Powder and bulk.
Switch Type: SPST, normally closed.
Electrical Rating: 0.25 A max, 60 V max, 3 VA max.
Electrical Connection: 16 2 type SO connection cable.
Cable Length: 3ft (0.9 m) unless otherwise specified.
Probe Length: Standard: 9 (23 cm); Compact: 6 (15 cm).
Signal Voltage: 15 VDC.
Actuation Angle: 25 from vertical.
Material: Steel or 316 SS.
Switch Surrounding: Epoxy encapsulated.
Weight: Standard: 4.75 lb (2.15 kg); Compact: 2.5 lb (1.13 kg).
Features: Fittings for hangers.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4.
Consult factory for custom cable lengths.
Probe Type
Standard
Compact
A
in (cm)
9 (22.86)
6 (15.24)
B
in (cm)
1 7/8 (47.63)
1 7/16 (36.51)
A
B
Series
LTC
Tilt Switch Control Unit
Adjustable Time Delay
8-3/4
[222.25]
8-1/4
[209.55]
1-9/32
[32.54]
4
[101.6]
1-21/32
[42.06]
RED LENS
GREEN LENS
9-1/2
[241.3]
4-7/8
[123.83]
3-29/32
[99.16]
6-3/64
[153.59]
The Series LTC Tilt Probe Control Units feature an adjustable time delay and a logic
selector switch. The logic selector switch determines when the output relay actuates and
de-actuates, thus while in position one, the relay is energized when the probe is in the
vertical position and de-energizes when the probe is in the titled position, and while in
position two, the actions are opposite. In addition, an adjustable time-delay feature may be
assigned to either the vertical or the tilt position to prevent false signals. The relay assumes
the de-energized position upon reaching the end of the delay period as well as upon failure
of power to the controller.
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Requirements: 115 VAC @
50/60 Hz.
Power Consumption: 10W.
Switch Type: DPDT.
Electrical Rating: 10 A @ 115 VAC.
Enclosure: None or carbon steel
housing with polyester coating.
Enclosure Rating: None or NEMA 4.
terminal.
Conduit Connection: None.
Indicator Lights: Green (when relay is
energized and probe vertical), Red
(when relay is de energized and probe
tilted).
Indication Light Power Required: 18
VDC.
Time Delay: 1 to 10 sec. Adjustment
will delay output relay action.
Model
LTS-N11G-003
LTS-N21G-003
LTS-N12G-003
LTS-N22G-003
Size
Standard
Compact
Standard
Compact
Model
LTC2
LTC3
Enclosure
NEMA 4
No enclosure
Probe Material
Steel
Steel
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel

Series
ULT
Ultrasonic Level Transmitter
Explosion-proof, Mapping Software
Series ULT Ultrasonic Level Transmitter provides reliable,
accurate, noncontact measurement of liquid levels. Ultrasonic non-
contact technology offers no moving parts to wear, jam, corrode, or get
coated like contact technologies. Mapping software makes effective
measuring surface only a 3 diameter column. No concerns with
ladders, pipes, or other tank intrusions in the remaining sound cone.
Unit is FM approved explosion-proof making it ideal for use in
hazardous locations. The ULT features easy programming with 6 digit
LCD display and simple menu structure. Output range is adjustable
with choices of inputting tank dimensions or just fill and empty the
tank while calibrating and it automatically scales to levels it senses.
Window cover allows early viewing of display. Failsafe output options
and diagnostic capabilities makes the ULT a good choice for critical
applications.
3 29/32
[99.21]
8 1/16
[204.79]
2X 1/2 NPT
4 9/32
[108.74]
3 21/64
[84.53]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible fluids. Not for use with powder and bulk
solids.
Wetted Materials: Sensor: PVDF; Process connection: 303 SS;
O-ring: fluoroelastomer.
Ranges: 24.6 (7.5 m), 32.8 (10 m).
Accuracy: 0.2% of maximum range.
Resolution: 0.079 (2 mm).
Blind Zone: Under 8 (20 cm).
Beam Width: 3 (7.6 cm) diameter.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C);
Process: -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C).
Temperature Compensation: -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C).
Pressure Limits: 30 psi (2 bar) up to 25C (77C). Above 25C
(77F), rating decreases 1.667 psi per 1C increase. See chart.
Power Requirement: 18 to 28 VDC (Two-wire).
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA or 20 to 4 mA (Two-wire).
Max. Loop Resistance: 250 ohms at 24 VDC.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 NPT female (two) or optional M20.
Process Connection: 2 NPT male or optional BSPT.
Enclosure Rating: Weather-proof meets NEMA 4X, explosion-
proof rated Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D; Class II/III, Div. 1,
Groups E, F, G.
Failsafe: On lost echo after 30 seconds, user selectable to 4,
20, 21, 22 mA or last signal.
Memory: Non-volatile.
Display: 6 character LCD.
Units: In, cm, ft, m, percent.
Memory: Non-volatile.
Programming: 4 button.
TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE DERATING
TEMPERATURE C
UNACCEPTABLE
RANGE
O
P
E
R
A
T
I
N
G

P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E

P
S
I
ACCEPTABLE
RANGE
40
30
20
10
0
-40 -20 0 20 40 60 80
Model
ULT-11
ULT-21
L
e
v
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,
U
t
r
a
s
o
n
c
L
E
V
E
L
Range
24.6 (7.5 m)
32.8 (10 m)

346
L
e
v
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,
S
u
b
m
e
r
s
b
e
L
E
V
E
L
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316 SS, 316L SS, Buna N, cable: ETFE or
polyurethane.
Accuracy: 0.25% full scale (includes linearity, hysteresis, and
repeatability).
Temperature Limit: PBLT2: 0 to 200F ( 18 to 93C); PBLTX: 0 to
176F ( 18 to 80C).
Compensated Temperature Range: PBLT2: 0 to 180F ( 18 to 82C);
PBLTX: 0 to 176F ( 18 to 80C).
Pressure Limit: 2X full scale.
Power Requirement: PBLT2: 13 to 30 VDC, PBLTX: 10 to 28 VDC.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC, two wire.
Electrical Connection: Wire pigtail.
Mounting Orientation: Suspended in tank below level being measured.
Electrical Protection: PBLT2: Lightning and surge protection, PBLTX:
none.
Agency Approvals: PBLT2: None, PBLTX: CE, UL intrinsically safe for
Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class
III, Div. 1. (According to control drawing 01 700797 00)
APPLICATIONS
Wastewater: Sludge pits, clarifiers, digesters; Alum tanks; Chemical
storage tanks; Oil tanks; Lime slurry; Slumps; Reservoirs.
Submersible Level Transmitters
Perfect for Sludge and Slurries, Lightning Protected, Intrinsically Safe
Series
PBLT2
&
PBLTX
PBLT2 and PBLTX Submersible Level Transmitters are manufactured
for years of trouble free service in the harshest applications. Both measure the
height of liquid above the position in the tank referenced to atmospheric
pressure. The transmitters consists of a piezoresistive sensing element, encased
in a 316 SS housing. Perfect for wastewater and slurry applications with
features to protect the unit from these demanding applications. Large diameter
316 SS diaphragm seal is non-clogging and damage resistant to floating solids.
The PBLT2 incorporates lightning and surge protection utilizing dual arrestor
technology, grounded to case, eliminating both power supply surges and
lightning ground strike transients (surge protection is not guaranteed and is
not covered by warranty). The PBLTX is UL approved intrinsically safe for use
in hazardous locations when used with proper barrier.
Units come equipped with a 270-pound tensile strength shielded and vented
cable. Ventilation tube in the cable automatically compensates for changes in
atmospheric pressure above the tank. The vent is protected with a maintenance
free filter eliminating particulate or water droplets from entering the
transducers.
FEATURES
Excellent chemical compatibility with 316 construction and ETFE cable
Lightning and surge protection on PBLT2 models
Maintenance free vent filter
UL approved intrinsically safe on PBLTX models
Large diameter, non clogging, damage resistant, 316 SS diaphragm
seal
8-3/32
[205.58]
2-3/16
[55.56]
BREATHER TUBE
1 [25.40]
1/2 NPT
SUBMERSIBLE
CABLE
60
TYP
1/4 x THRU
[6.35 x THRU]
3-7/16
[87.31]
1/4 [6.35] x THRU
ON A 1-39/64 [40.88] B.C.
7-63/64
[202.80]
2-3/16
[55.56]
1-1/2
[38.10]
1/2 NPT
BREATHER TUBE
SUBMERSIBLE
CABLE
PBLTX
PBLT2
Cable Length
ft (m)
40 (12.2)
40 (12.2)
60 (18.3)
60 (18.3)
40 (12.2)
40 (12.2)
60 (18.3)
60 (18.3)
Model
PBLT2-5-40
PBLT2-10-40
PBLT2-15-60
PBLT2-20-60
PBLT2-5-40-PU
PBLT2-10-40-PU
PBLT2-15-60-PU
PBLT2-20-60-PU
Range psi
(ft wc) [m wc]
5 (11.54) [3.52]
10 (23.09) [7.04]
15 (34.63) [10.56]
20 (46.18) [14.08]
5 (11.54) [3.52]
10 (23.09) [7.04]
15 ( 34.63) [10.56]
20 (46.18) [14.08]
OPTIONS
Intrinsically Safe Approval- Change model number from PBLT2 to
PBLTX
Custom ranges or Cable Lengths- Contact the factory
ACCESSORIES
Cable Type
ETFE
ETFE
ETFE
ETFE
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane

L
e
v
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,
S
u
b
m
e
r
s
b
e
L
E
V
E
L
Series
SBLT2
&
SBLTX
Submersible Level Transmitters
Perfect for Ground Water and Wells, Lightning Protected or Intrinsically Safe
SBLT2 and SBLTX Submersible Level Transmitters are manufactured for years of
trouble free service in the harshest applications. Both measure the height of liquid above
the position in the tank referenced to atmospheric pressure. The transmitters consist of
a piezoresistive sensing element, encased in a 316 SS housing. Bullet nose design protects
the diaphragm from damage.
The SBLT2 incorporates lightning and surge protection utilizing dual arrestor technology,
grounded to case, eliminating both power supply surges and lightning ground strike
transients (surge protection is not guaranteed and is not covered by warranty). The SBLTX
is UL approved intrinsically safe for use in hazardous locations when used with proper
barrier.
Units come equipped with a 270-pound tensile strength shielded and vented cable.
Ventilation tube in the cable automatically compensates for changes in atmospheric
pressure above the tank. The vent is protected with a maintenance free filter eliminating
particulate or water droplets from entering the transducers.
Excellent chemical compatibility
Lightning and surge protection on SBLT2 models
Maintenance free vent filter
UL approved intrinsically safe on SBLTX models
Slim design for tight applications
APPLICATIONS
Well monitoring; Ground water monitoring; Environmental remendiation; Surface
water monitoring; Down hold; Water tanks.
6-45/64
(170.26)
1
(25.40)
1/2 NPT
SUBMERSIBLE
CABLE
BREATHER
TUBE
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316 SS, 316L SS, Buna N; Cable: Polyurethane or ETFE;
Bullet nose: PVC.
Accuracy: 0.25% of full scale.
Temperature Limit: SBLT2: 0 to 150F ( 18 to 66C); SBLTX: 0 to 176F ( 18 to
80C).
Compensated Temperature Range: SBLT2: 0 to 140F ( 18 to 60C); SBLTX: 0
to 176F ( 18 to 80C).
Thermal Effect: 0.02% full scale/F.
Pressure Limit: 2X full scale.
Power Requirement: SBLT2: 13 to 30 VDC; SBLTX: 10 to 28 VDC.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC, 2 wire.
Max. Loop Resistance: 900 ohms at 30 VDC.
Electrical Connections: Wire pigtail.
Mounting Orientation: Suspended in tank below level being measured.
Electrical Protection: SBLT2: Lightning and surge protection; SBLTX: None.
Agency Approvals: SBLT2: None; SBLTX: CE, UL intrinsically safe for Class I,
Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III Div. 1.
(According to control drawing 01 700797 00)
BREATHER TUBE
SUBMERSIBLE
CABLE
1/2 NPT
6-15/16
[176.21]
1
[25.40]
SBLTX
SBLT2
Model
SBLT2-5-40-ETFE
SBLT2-10-40-ETFE
SBLT2-15-60-ETFE
SBLT2-20-60-ETFE
SBLT2-5-40
SBLT2-10-40
SBLT2-15-60
SBLT2-20-60
Range psi
(ft wc) [m wc]
5 (11.54) [3.52]
10 (23.09) [7.04]
15 (34.63) [10.56]
20 (46.18) [14.08]
5 (11.54) [3.52]
10 (23.09) [7.04]
15 (34.63) [10.56]
20 (46.18) [14.08]
Cable Length
ft (m)
40 (12.2)
40 (12.2)
60 (18.3)
60 (18.3)
40 (12.2)
40 (12.2)
60 (18.3)
60 (18.3)
OPTIONS
Intrinsically Safe Approval- Change model number from SBLT2 to SBLTX
Custom ranges or Cable Lengths- Contact the factory
ACCESSORIES
Cable
Type
ETFE
ETFE
ETFE
ETFE
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane

348
L
e
v
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,
C
a
p
a
c
t
v
e
L
E
V
E
L
Series
CRF2
Capacitive Level Transmitter
Powder, Bulk or Liquids
The Series CRF2 is a level transmitter providing a two-wire 4 to 20 mA output to indicate
level of liquids, powders and bulk materials. State of the art sensing technology in the
CRF2, using impulse RF admittance measurement provides excellent accuracy and
stability. The CRF2 senses capacitance changes resulting from the height of the material
in the tank between the probe and the tank wall. In non-metallic tanks or tanks that do not
have the wall parallel to the probe a ground reference must be used.
The CRF2 comes with either a rigid or flexible probe depending on application installation
need and probe length required. Featured in the CRF2 is easy push button calibration of
zero and span. Custom order the CRF2 to any length probe that you need for your
application. FEP covered probe is ideal for use with corrosive media. This technology also
provides immunity to external RF sources like walkie-talkies and cell phones as well as
minimal interference with radio communication or other electronic systems.
The CRF2 is perfect for level indication in bins, hoppers, or small silos of powder and bulk
materials.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquids, powders, and bulk
materials compatible with wetted
materials.
Wetted Materials: Standard:
Rod/cable: FEP, Connection: 316 SS;
Ground option: Rod/cable and
connection: 316 SS; Cable spacers:
PVC; Flange option: Material of flange.
Capacitance Range: 0 to 2000 pF.
Sensitivity: 0.15 pF.
Minimum Span: 8 pF.
Accuracy: 0.5 pF or 0.25% of span,
whichever is greater.
Repeatability: 0.25 pF or 0.1% of
span, whichever is greater.
185F ( 40 to 85C); Process: 40 to
250F ( 40 to 121C); HP option: 40 to
100F ( 40 to 37C).
Pressure Limit: 100 psi (6.9 bar); HP
option: 1200 psi (82.7 bar).
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA or 20 to 4
mA, 2 wire.
terminal.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 NPT
female.
Process Connection: Standard: 3/4
NPT male; Optional: See model chart.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66)
weather tight/corrosion resistant.
Spark/Static Protection: 10
6
ohm
dissipation resistance with spark gap.
Surge current to 100A max.
Calibration: Zero, span, 4 mA, 20 mA.
Weight: 6 ft rod type: 3.6 lb (1.63 kg).
2X 1/2 FEMALE NPT
CONDUIT CONNECTION
3-19/32
[91.28]
4-1/2
[114.30]
3/4 MALE
NPT
PROCESS
CONNECTION
9/16
[14.29]
L
C N I UO S L V L T A SM T ER
MO CR 2
S R A :
N U T I L O T O E U ME T
A I S N OF
W E I S R M N S NC
I H AN TY N 3 0 U S A
2X 1/2 FEMALE NPT
CONDUIT CONNECTION
4-7/16
[112.7]
2-3/8
[60.3]
MOUNTING
BRACKET
1-3/8
[34.9]
2-3/4
(70.0)
3-1/4
[82.6]
3-5/32
[80.2]
6
[152.4]
3/4 MALE NPT
PROCESS CONNECTION
L
Example
Series
Enclosure
Probe Type
Ground
Process
Connection
Probe Length
Options
CRF2
CRF2
W
W
R
R
R
C
0
0
A
U
1T
1T
2T
3T
1B
2B
3B
1S
2S
3S
1F
2F
3F
4F
5F
6F
048
XXX
M20
M20
HP
4-3/16
[106.36]
2X 3/4 [19.05]
CLEARANCE FOR
COVER REMOVAL
CRF2 WR01T 048 M20
Capacitive Level Transmitter
Weatherproof
Remote Mount Weatherproof Housing
Rod
Cable
None Included
Attached ground rod (3 or 4 flange process connection types only)
Unattached ground rod
3/4 NPT male
1 NPT male
1 1/2 NPT male
3/4 BSPT
1 BSPT
1 1/2 BSPT
1 sanitary clamp
1 1/2 sanitary clamp
2 sanitary clamp
2 150# flange, 316 SS
2 150# flange, PVC
3 150# flange, 316 SS
3 150# flange, PVC
4 150# flange, 316 SS
4 150# flange, PVC
Insertion length in inches. Example 048 is 48 length.
Rod Type: minimum: 24, maximum: 144
Cable Type: minimum: 24, maximum: 360
M20 conduit connection with cable gland
High pressure option (see specifications, NPT and BSPT connections only)
Remote Mount Housing
Example Models:
CRF2-WR01T-072
CRF2-WR01T-096

L
e
v
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
,
F
o
a
t
L
E
V
E
L
Continuous Level Transmitter
Customize To Fit Application, 316 SS or Buna-N Floats
Series
CLT
Continuous Output Level Transmitters provide up to the minute tank level
monitoring. Customize level transmitters to meet application requirements.
Transmitters can be configured for 4 to 20 mA or proportional voltage output,
stainless steel or Buna-N floats, and lengths up to 72 (183 cm).
B
INCHES
OF
INDICATION
C
LOWEST
LEVEL
HIGHEST
LEVEL
2 NPT
JUNCTION BOX
[CURRENT OUTPUT ONLY]
4-9/16
[115.9]
1-1/4
[31.8]
1-5/16
[33.3]
TYP.
5/16
[7.9]
1-7/8
[47.6]
5/16
[8]
1-13/16
[46.0]
TYP.
2-1/16
[52.4]
2-3/4
[69.8]
TYP.
5/16 [8]
SPECIFICATIONS
Resolution: 1/4.
Temperature Limits: Buna N floats: 180F (82C) in water, 40 to 230F
( 40 to 110C) in oil; SS floats: 40 to 230F ( 40 to 110C).
Pressure Limits: Buna N floats: 150 psig (10 bar); SS floats: 300 psig
(21 bar).
Power Requirements: Proportional voltage output models: 10 to 30 VDC;
4 20 mA output models: 10 to 40 VDC.
Loop Resistance: 1.4 k maximum.
Electrical Connections: Proportional voltage output: 24 (61 cm) free leads
#22 AWG, TFE jacketed; 4 20 mA output: Junction box.
Enclosure Rating: 4 20 mA models, NEMA 4 junction box.
Mounting Dimensions
1/2 NPT
2 NPT
1-1/4 SQ
[31.75]
1/2 NPT
1
[25.40]
1/2 NPT
7-1/2
[190.5]
6 HOLES 3/4 [19.05]
EQUALLY SPACED
ON A 6.000 B.C.
[152.4]
1-1/4 NPT
1.000 SQ
[25.40]
1/2 NPT
Float Dimensions
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4, 5
F2 F3
CLT VS5F3 20.25 02.00 25.75
Continuous Level Transmitter
Voltage, proportional signal of 0 to supply voltage
4 20 mA
316 SS with SS ARMCO PH 15 7MO stops
1/2 NPT (Output Type V only)
1 1/4 NPT (Float F1 only)
2 NPT
3 150# Flange, Carbon Steel (Connection material S only)
{Max. pres. 150 psi (10.3 bar)}
3 150# Flange, 316 SS (Connection material S only)
{Max. pres. 150 psi (10.3 bar)}
Example
Construction
Output
Stem and
Connection Material
Connection
Type
Float
Type
Indication
Length
Top Float
StopC
Dimension
Overall
Length B
CLT
CLT
V
V
C
S
B
S
5
1
2
3
4
5
F3
F1
F2
F3
25.75
00.00
02.00
00.00
20.25
00.00
Material
Buna N
Buna N
316 SS
Min s.g.
0.55
0.55
0.75
Max. Pres. psi (bar)
150 (10.3)
150 (10.3)
300 (20.7)
Float Factor in (mm)
2.0 (50.8)
2.5 (63.5)
3.5 (52.4)
Length that the unit sends an output for level. Maximum is 68 (173 cm).
Distance from bottom of mounting connection to upper float stop.
Minimum is 1/4 (6.4 mm)
To calculate overall length, add Indication Length, Top Float
Stop Dimension C, and Float Factor. Maximum length is 72 (1.82 m)
F1
Models are built to your specifications.

350
L
e
v
e
/
P
u
m
p
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
L
E
V
E
L
Duplex Pump Controller Model FPC-1200 is a float switch based
duplex pump controller intended primarily for wastewater lift stations
and other pump down applications. The FPC-1200 connects to four
float switches to measure the tank level and has relay outputs to control
two pumps and a seal-fail alarm. It includes sensor inputs for the seal
failure and temperature failure devices on most submersible pumps. In
the event of a seal failure, the Seal Fail indicator and the Seal Fail
output relay are energized, and the corresponding pump is demoted to
lag position. In the event of a temperature failure, the Temp Fail
indicator is energized and the corresponding pump is disabled until
the temperature failure condition no longer exists. Two 12V driver
outputs are included for the High Alarm horn and light. If the High
float is activated (closed), the High Alarm driver outputs are activated
and the High Alarm indicator will flash on and off. A Mute input and
High Alarm Test pushbutton allow the alarm to be silenced and tested
during operation. The controller has built-in HOA (hand-off-automatic)
switches and each pump has Call and Run indicators. The Call
indicators are energized when the controller activates each load pump
and the Run indicators are energized by feedback from each motor
starter auxiliary contact. The HOA switches allow each pump to be
energized manually, disabled, or energized automatically by the float
inputs. A lead pump selector switch permits either pump to be selected
as lead pump or alternation can be selected causing either pump to
operate as lead. The FPC-1200 uses removable terminal strips to make
replacement in the field quick and easy. With the addition of an
enclosure, circuit breakers, and motor starters, the FPC-1200 makes a
complete low cost lift station controller.
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs:
Floats:
Open circuit voltage: 5 VDC;
Short circuit current: 2 mA maximum;
Auxiliary motor starter contacts:
Temperature and seal failure:
Mute:
Short circuit current: 2 mA maximum.
Output Type: (2) form A SPST contacts for pump output, (1)
form A SPST contact for seal-fail alarm, (2) 12 VDC driver
outputs for high alarm horn and light.
Output Ratings:
Form A SPST: 5 A @ 120 VAC;
12 VDC driver: 100 mA @ 12 VDC.
Control Type: On/off pump out (down).
Power Requirements: 120 VAC 15%, 50 to 70 Hz.
Power Consumption: .25 A @ 120 VAC.
Seal Failure (Moisture Sensor): Trip point: 50,000 ohms.
Weight: 1 lb 4 oz. (454 g).
Duplex Pump Controller
Full-Featured, Low-Cost
Model
FPC-1200
4
[101.6]
39/64
[15.24]
15/64
[5.97]
1-19/32
[40.64]
7
[177.8]
39/64
[15.24]
5-3/32
[129.39]
6-13/32
[162.56]
4X
Model FPC-1200, Duplex Pump Controller

L
e
v
e
/
P
u
m
p
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
L
E
V
E
L
Relay/Controller/Power Supply
10A SPDT Relay, 24 VDC Power Supply, Latching Circuit for Level Control
The Series PCP level controller is designed to be a power supply, an external relay, and
a latching relay for differential level control with two level switches. As a power supply the
PCP can step down line voltage to 5 or 24 VDC to power NPN switches such as the OLS
and PC level switches or to power a transmitter. The PCP can function as an external relay
to increase switching capability by providing up to a 10A SPDT contact for direct control
of moderate loads. As a latching relay the PCP can be used with any two normally open level
switches and provide level control for pumps. The latching circuit can also be used to hold
the relay in an actuated state until manually reset.
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: One or two normally open switches.
Output Type: SPDT switch.
Output Rating: See model chart.
Control Type: On/off with manual reset capability.
Power Requirements: 24 VDC, 24 VAC, 120 VAC, or 240 VAC.
Power Consumption: DC power: 15 mA maximum; AC power: 55 mA maximum.
Weight: 1.06 lb (0.48 kg).
Loop Power Supply: 5 or 24 VDC regulated. 200 mA maximum.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal or vertical.
Series
PCP
3/16 DIA. TYP
2-11/32
4-39/64
1-3/16
3-1/2 4-23/32
5-49/64
5-1/4
[146.45]
[133.35]
[89.00] [19.85]
[59.53]
[119.23]
[30.16]
1-13/32 TYP
[4.75]
[35.72]
5/8 DIA. X THRU
2 PLCS [15.88]
Model
PCP-1
PCP-5
PCP-10
120 VAC
0.5A
5A
10A
30 VDC
1A
5A
5A
Electrical Rating of Contact
Max. Switching Capacity
62.5 VA, 33 W
600 VA, 150 W
1250 VA, 150 W
Series
DPC
Duplexing Pump Controller
Dual Pump Protection
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Requirement: 120 VAC/DC, 240 VAC or 24 VAC/DC.
Power Consumption: 3 VA (approximate).
Temperature Limits:
Storage: 40 to 185F ( 40 to 85C).
Switch Type: SPDT.
Switching Current: 1 mA.
Electrical Rating: 10 A @ 240 VAC resistive, 1/8 hp @ 120 VAC, 1/4 hp @ 240
VAC inductive, 360 VA @ 240 VAC inductive.
Indicators: (2) LEDs show active output relay.
Enclosure: Polycarbonate dust cover.
Mounting: 8 pin octal.
Weight: 4.5 oz (128 g).
Series DPC Duplexing Pump Controller is used where two pumps are required to
alternate to provide equal run time on each. Alternating loads allows for equal wear on both
pumps lengthening their operation life. The controlled relay alternates each time the control
switch opens. Two LED indicators show the load that is energized by the SPDT output
relay. The DPC-ACS model is a standard duplexing controller providing the automatic
alternating sequence. The DPC-ALS offers the same automatic sequencing as well as A-B
or B-A sequence lock selectable by a three-position toggle switch.
13/32 [10.32]
3
[76.20]
2-3/8
[60.32]
1-3/4
[44.45]
Model
DPC-ACS
DPC-ACL
DPC-BCS
DPC-BCL
DPC-CCS
DPC-CCL
Description
120 VAC/DC Duplexing Pump Controller
120 VAC/DC Duplexing Pump Controller w/ Sequence Lock
24 VAC/DC Duplexing Pump Controller
24 VAC/DC Duplexing Pump Controller w/ Sequence Lock
240 VAC Duplexing Pump Controller
240 VAC Duplexing Pump Controller w/ Sequence Lock

352
L
e
v
e
/
P
u
m
p
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
L
E
V
E
L
The Mercoid
MPC Junior Pump Controller provides versatile

level control in a standard 1/4 DIN package. Designed for use with
almost any style level transmitter the unit displays the present level
and main set point value. Incorporated in the MPC Jr. is programmable
level differential for on/off control of one or two pumps, valves, or other
devices through two SPDT relays. Also featured are two additional
programmable alarm contacts with front alarm light indication.
The MPC Jr. is flexible and incorporates a user-friendly programming
menu. The front face meets NEMA 4X for outdoor panel mounting.
FEATURES
Selectable pump alternation when used with two pumps to
minimize pump wear.
Integral 24 VDC power supply for transmitter.
User selectable security lock-out of programming and/or set
points.
Optional process input retransmission as a current
(4 to 20 mA) or voltage (2 to 10 VDC) analog signal.
Analog output of pump on condition for activation of separate
pump run time meters.
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: 4 (or 0) to 20 mA DC or 2 (or 0) to 10 VDC selectable.
Input Impedance: Current = 10 ohms; Voltage = 5 K ohms.
Output Ratings:
Control relays: SPDT, rated 10A @ 240 VAC res.,1/4 hp @
120 VAC, 1/3 hp @ 240 VAC;
Alarm relays: SPST, 3A @ 240 VAC res., 1/10 hp @ 120
VAC;
Others: 15 VDC @ 20 mA for output one and output two.
Control Type: On/off, reverse (pump out) or direct (pump in)
acting.
Power Requirements: 100 to 240 VAC nominal, +10%-15%,
50 to 400 Hz, single phase; 132 to 240 VDC nominal, +10%-
15%.
Power Consumption: 7.5 VA maximum.
Display: Two 4-digit, 7 segment 0.56 high LEDs.
Display Resolution: 1 count.
Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory (no batteries required).
Serial Communications: Optional RS-232 or RS-485 with
Modbus
protocol.
Ambient Operating Temperature/RH: 14 to 131F (-10 to
55C)/0 to 90% up to 104F (40C) non-condensing, 10 to 50%
at 131F (55C) non-condensing.
Front Panel Rating: Meets UL Type 4X (IP66).
Loop Power Supply (isolated): 24 VDC @ 50 mA, regulated.
Agency Approvals: UL 508, CE.
Pump Controller
One or Two Pump Control with Built-In Alternation
Series
MPC Jr.
A-901
ACCESSORY
Weatherproof Enclosures, NEMA 4X.
See page 266 for details.
For compatible level transmitters see
Mercoid
Series SBLT2 and PBLT2.

4-1/2
[114.3]
17/32
[13.5]
3-19/32
[91.3]
3-25/32
[95.9]
3-25/32
[95.9]
MAX. PANEL
THICKNESS 0.25 [6.35]
PANEL CUT-OUT: 3.620 X 3.620 IN, +0.032/-0.000
(92 X 92 MM, +0.8/-0.0).
ALLOW FOR 0.5 IN (13 MM) CLEARANCE
AT THE REAR OF THE INSTRUMENT.
MEETS IP66 (UL TYPE 4X)
Modbus
is a registered trademark of Schnieder Automation.

Series MPCJR, Pump Controller
Options
Retransmisssion of input, 4 to 20 mA,
Add suffix RC
Retransmission of input, 0 to 10 VDC,
Add suffix RV
RS-232 Modbus
-RTU Serial Communications

Add suffix 232
RS-485 Modbus
-RTU Serial Communications

Add suffix 485

L
e
v
e
/
P
u
m
p
C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
L
E
V
E
L
Modbus

The Mercoid
MPC Pump Controller provides versatile level control in a

standard 1/4 DIN package. Designed for use with almost any style level
transmitter the unit displays the present level and main set point value.
Incorporated in the MPC is programmable level differential for on/off control
of one or two pumps, valves, or other devices through two SPDT relays. Also
featured are two additional programmable alarm contacts with front alarm light
indication.
The MPC is flexible and incorporates a user-friendly programming menu. The
front face meets NEMA 4X for outdoor panel mounting. So many features are
combined into the MPC that it eliminates many components in a pump control
system.
FEATURES
Selectable pump alternation when used with two pumps to minimize
pump wear. With alternation on a seal failure or over temperature
condition will force the non failed pump to lead status and stop
alternation.
When used with a submersible pump including a moisture sensor the
MPC has alarm light indication of seal failure.
When used with a pump including a thermostat the MPC has alarm
light indication of pump over temperature and removes the pump
from service. The pump can be brought back into service
automatically or by manual reset when the pump has cooled down.
Alarms can be programmed for output indication of pump seal failure
or over temperature.
Selectable time delay, for pump two, on power up to prevent both
pumps from starting at the same time. If power is lost, upon regaining
power a time delay of up to 60 seconds can be selected to prevent
too large of a current draw.
Integral 24 VDC power supply for level transmitter.
Displays pump run time from a front panel button.
Test system function that simulates the process input to insure the
pumps are operating or to test programming.
User selectable security lock out of programming and/or set points.
Process input retransmission as a current (4 to 20 mA) or voltage
(2 to 10 VDC) analog signal*.
* Standard model MPC is set for current retransmission. For voltage
retransmission add suffix RV.
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: 4 (or 0) to 20 mA DC or 2 (or 0) to 10 VDC selectable.
Input Impedance: Current = 10 ohms; Voltage = 100 K ohms.
Output Ratings:
Control relays: SPDT, rated 10A @ 240 VAC res., 1/4 hp @
120 VAC, 1/3 hp @ 240 VAC;
Alarm relays: SPST, 3A @ 240 VAC res., 1/10 hp @ 120 VAC.
Control Type: On/off, reverse (pump out) or direct (pump in) acting.
Power Requirements: 100 to 240 VAC nominal, +10% 15%,
50 to 400 Hz, single phase; 132 to 240 VDC nominal, +10% 15%.
Power Consumption: 7.5 VA maximum.
Display: Two 4 digit, 7 segment 0.56 high LEDs.
Display Resolution: 1 count.
Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory (no batteries required).
Serial Communications: Optional RS 232 or RS 485 with Modbus
protocol.
Ambient Operating Temperature/RH: 14 to 131F ( 10 to 55C)/0 to
90% up to 104F (40C) non condensing, 10 to 50% at 131F (55C)
non condensing.
Weight: 16 oz. (454 g).
Front Panel Rating: Meets UL Type 4X (IP66).
Loop Power Supply (isolated): 24 VDC @ 50 mA, regulated.
Seal Failure (Moisture Sensor):
Power: 2.5 VDC;
Search Current: 3 micro amps;
Resolution: 10K to 500K ohms in 10K ohm steps.
Agency Approvals: UL 508, CE.
Pump Controller
One or Two Pump Control with Built-In Alternation,
Over Temperature Protection and Seal Failure Monitoring
4-1/2
[114.3]
17/32
[13.5]
3-19/32
[91.3]
3-25/32
[95.9]
3-25/32
[95.9]
MAX. PANEL
THICKNESS 0.25 [6.35]
PANEL CUT-OUT: 3.620 X 3.620 IN, +0.032/-0.000
(92 X 92 MM, +0.8/-0.0).
ALLOW FOR 0.5 IN (13 MM) CLEARANCE
AT THE REAR OF THE INSTRUMENT.
MEETS IP66 (UL TYPE 4X)
A-901
ACCESSORY
Weatherproof Enclosures, NEMA 4X.
See page 266 for details.
For compatible level transmitters see
Mercoid Series SBLT2 and PBLT2.
Series
MPC
OPTIONS
RS 232 Modbus
RTU Serial Communications.

Add suffix 232
RS 485 Modbus
RTU Serial Communications.

Add suffix 485
Series MPC, Pump Controller

354
P
u
m
p

L
e
a
k

D
e
t
e
c
t
o
r
s
L
E
V
E
L
Series
QPC
Quadraplex Pump Controller
Multiple Loads, SOSO or FOFO Output Logic
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Requirement: 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
Power Consumption: 2.5 VA (approximate).
Sensitivity: 100 k ohm.
Isolation Voltage: 2500 V (input to output).
Temperature Limits:
Storage: 40 to 185F ( 40 to 85C).
Switch Type: SPST.
Switch Voltage: 5.1 V open circuit.
Switching Current: 10 A, short circuit.
Electrical Rating: 5 A @ 120 VAC resistive; 278 VA inductive.
Response Times: Power Up: <1 s; Operate: <25 ms; Inrush: 5 s; Release: <150 ms.
Indicators: (4) LEDs show active load.
Mounting: Surface.
Agency Approval: Intrinsically safe to UL standard 913. For use in hazardous
(classified) locations: Class I, Group A, B, C, D; Class II, Group E, F, G; Class III.
Series QPC Quadraplex Pump Controller is used where four pumps are required to
alternate to provide equal run time on each. Alternating loads allows for equal wear on all
pumps lengthening their operation life. The Series QPC has five inputs allowing the four
outputs to operate properly even if one of the inputs fails to open or close. Four LED
indicators show the load that is energized by the SPST output contacts. The QPC is
available in two sequence configurations: sequence-on-simultaneous-off (SOSO) and first-on-
first-off (FOFO). In the SOSO sequence, an additional load is energized each time a higher
level switch is activated, and all loads are de-energized simultaneously when the lowest
level switch deactivates. In the FOFO sequence, the loads are energized in the same manner
as the SOSO sequence, but loads are de-energized individually as each level switch
deactivates. In either sequence, the lead load position is advanced to equalize run time on
each pump. An inrush delay on both models reduces line sags by preventing multiple loads
from energizing simultaneously. Please see the online service manual for more details on
SOSO and FOFO sequencing.
Model
QPC-ASX
QPC-ASY
1/4
[6.35]
3
[76.20]
3/8
[9.53]
4
[101.6]
3-1/4
[82.55]
3-1/4
[82.55]
7/32
[5.56]
4
[101.6]
#8-32
Leak/Over Temperature Detection Relay
Shaft Seal Leak and Stator Temperature Monitor
Model
LDT
The Model LDT is used to monitor the shaft seal and the stator temperature of a
submersible pump to detect a leak or over-temperature before pump failure. A leak is
detected by sensing the status of a float or conductivity switch installed in the seal cavity.
When this resistance drops below the set sensitivity, the output relay energizes and the
LED indicator illuminates. When the seal failure condition clears, the relay automatically
resets. A normally closed temperature switch mounted on the stator detects over-
temperature. The temperature safety feature incorporates a bistable relay that retains its
position during power loss and latches on until the remote reset button is pressed. The
LDT has adjustable leak sensitivity from 1 k to 35 k ohm. Installation is made simple with
a surface mount configuration.
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensitivity: 1 k to 35 k ohm adjustable.
Temperature Limits: Operating: 4 to 131F ( 20 to 55C); Storage: 40 to 185F
( 40 to 85C).
Sensor Voltage: 12 VDC.
Switch Type: (2) SPDT.
Electrical Rating: 10 A @ 120 VAC resistive.
Response Times: Leakage trip: 1 s; Leakage reset: 1 s; Temperature trip: 0.1 s.
Indicators: Green LED illuminates under normal operation; Red LEDs illuminate
when leak or over temperature is detected.
Mounting: Surface mount.
Agency Approval: UL 508.
19/64
[7.54]
1/4
[6.35]
3
[76.20]
3/8
[9.53]
4
[101.6]
3-1/4
[82.55]
3-1/4
[82.55]
#8-32
4
[101.6]
7/32
[5.56]
Description
Quadraplex Pump Controller, SOSO sequence
Quadraplex Pump Controller, FOFO sequence
Model LDT-AS, Leak/Over Temperature Detection Relay

P
u
m
p

L
e
a
k

D
e
t
e
c
t
o
r
s
L
E
V
E
L
Series
SLD
Single Channel Leak Detection Relay
Shaft Seal Leak Protection
SPECIFICATIONS
Isolation Voltage: 2500 V.
Temperature Limits:
Storage: 40 to 185F ( 40 to 85C).
Switch Type: DPDT.
Switch Voltage: 9 VDC.
Electrical Rating: 10 A @ 250 VAC resistive, 360 VA inductive.
Response Time:
Energize: 15 ms (approximate);
Release: 8 ms (approximate).
Indicators: Red LED illuminates when leak is detected.
Mounting: 11 pin socket.
Agency Approval: UL 508.
Series SLD Single Channel Leak Detection Relay is used to monitor the shaft seal
of a submersible pump to detect a leak before pump failure. A leak is detected by sensing
the status of a float or conductivity switch installed in the seal cavity. When this resistance
drops below the set sensitivity, the output relay energizes and the LED indicator
illuminates. The SLD offers normally open and normally closed relay contacts to energize
an alarm and de-energize the pump in the event of a leak. When the seal failure condition
clears, the relay automatically resets.
Model
SLD-ACX
SLD-ACY
SLD-ACZ
19/64
[7.54]
3
[76.20]
2-3/8
[60.32]
1-3/4
[44.45]
Series
DLD
Dual Channel Leak Detection Relay
Shaft Seal Leak Protection
SPECIFICATIONS
Isolation Voltage: 2500 V.
Temperature Limits:
Storage: 40 to 185F ( 40 to 85C).
Switch Type: (2) N.O. SPST.
Switch Voltage 9 VDC.
Electrical Rating: 5 A @ 120 VAC resistive, 345 VA inductive.
Response Times:
Energize: 6 ms (approximate);
Release: 2.5 ms (approximate).
Indicators: Respective red LED illuminates when leak is detected.
Mounting: 8 pin octal.
Agency Approvals: UL 508.
Series DLD Dual Channel Leak Detection Relay is used to monitor the shaft seals
of two submersible pumps to detect a leak before pump failure. A leak is detected by
sensing the status of a float or conductivity switch installed in the seal cavity. When this
resistance drops below the set sensitivity, the output relay energizes and the corresponding
LED indicator illuminates. The DLD offers normally open relay contacts to energize an
alarm or de-energize the pump in the event of a leak. When the seal failure condition clears,
the relay automatically resets.
Model
DLD-ACY
DLD-ACZ
19/64
[7.54]
3
[76.20]
1-3/4
[44.45]
2-3/8
[60.32]
Sensitivity
470 ohm fixed
470 to 10 k ohm adjustable
4.7 k to 100 k ohm adjustable
Sensitivity
10 k to 25 k ohm adjustable
4.7 k to 100 k ohm adjustable

356
B
n

V
b
r
a
t
o
r
s
/
A
e
r
a
t
o
r
s
L
E
V
E
L
Series
BAP
Bin Aerator Pad
Inexpensive, Quiet Operation
Series BAP Bin Aerator Pad provides positive flow of dry, finely ground
materials from any bin using the proven principle of aeration. Low pressure
air is introduced into the product, restoring its natural ability to flow. In this
way congestion, bridging and rat-holing are overcome without resorting to brute
force. Almost all flow problems inherent to dry, fine materials are caused by
compaction. When low pressure air is introduced to a finely ground material it
will flow like water uniformly and quickly. Series BAP is non-clogging and
provides equal distribution and consumption of air. The aerator pads feature
simple and quick installation, are inexpensive, and adapt to any bin
configuration.
There are many advantages of the bin aerator pad. It provides a positive,
uniform, and easily controlled flow with quiet operation. Also, it yields first
in/first out flow. Heavy-duty construction features stiffeners to prevent crushing
of air compartment. These stiffeners eliminate the possibility of the bin aerator
Pad being crushed by a head of material or by a man stepping on it when
cleaning bin. The stiffeners do not obstruct the diffusion of air.
The BAP-K bin aerator pad mounting kit completely eliminates the need to
enter the bin to install or service bin aerator pads. By cutting a 2-5/8 x 6-3/8
hole in the bin wall, the mounting kit can be completely installed and serviced
from outside of the bin. After the initial hole has been cut, the bin aerator pad
can be mounted on the adapter assembly and inserted into the bin in less than
two minutes. There are no other holes to drill, tapping or welding. The bin
aerator pad is positively sealed and securely held in place in the bin. Removal
is just as simple and quick.
Aeration gives the best results on materials with a 60 mesh size or smaller and
with a 3% or less moisture content. Specific materials that respond well to
aeration content are as follows: Lime, portland cement, carbon black,
diatomaceous earth, flour, soda ash, gypsum, fly ash, pigments, soap powders,
bentonite, bran, clay, cereals, fullers earth, detergents and many others.
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Limit:
BAP C and BAP SSC: 180F (82C);
BAP F and BAP SSF: 600F (316C).
Supply Pressure: 3 to 5 psi (0.2 to 0.3 bar).
Air Consumption: See chart.
Air Connection: 1/8 NPT male.
Materials: See model chart.
Air Consumption Guide per Bin Aerator Pad
Air Pressure, psi (bar)
1 (0.07)
2 (0.14)
3 (0.21)*
4 (0.28)
5 (0.34)
Cubic Feet Per Minute (lpm)
4.2 (118.9)
5.7 (161.4)
6.5 (184.1)
7.1 (201.0)
7.6 (215.2)
*Recommended for most applications
BAP-K Optional External Mounting Kit
7-1/2
[190.50]
3-3/4
[95.25]
11/16
[17.46]
5/32
[3.81]
1/8 FEMALE NPT
FOR TANK NIPPLE
1/16 GASKET
MOUNTING BRACKET
3/16 GASKET
SPRING
STEEL
CLAMP
1/2 OPENING
IN CENTER
OF CLAMP
2X WASHERS
RUBBER
GASKET
1/8 NPT X 2
TANK NIPPLE
3/4 NUT
MOUNTING HARDWARE
OPTIONAL BAP-K MOUNTING KIT
BAP AERATOR
Model
BAP-C
BAP-SSC
BAP-F
BAP-SSF
BAP-K
Description
Zinc Plated Steel Body with Galvanized Steel Mesh and Cotton Diffuser
316 Stainless Steel Body with 316SS Mesh and Cotton Diffuser
Zinc Plated Steel Body with Galvanized Steel Mesh and Fiberglass Diffuser
316 Stainless Steel Body with 316SS Mesh and Fiberglass Diffuser
Optional External Mounting Kit

B
n

V
b
r
a
t
o
r
s
/
A
e
r
a
t
o
r
s
L
E
V
E
L
Fluidizer Disk
Self-Cleaning
Model
FD
The Model FD Fluidizer Disk combines aeration and vibration to solve the most difficult
bulk solid flow applications. The special design creates a vibration as the air flows between
the pads boot and bin wall. This provides a very effective flow aid for all types of dry
products. Plus the FD does not require a specific air pressure for operation. Your
pneumatic system pressure can range from 29 to 87 psi.
FEATURES
Self cleaning
Abrasion resistant
Easy to install
Food grade
Economical
SPECIFICATIONS
to 170C).
Air Supply: 29 to 87 psi (2 to 6 bar).
Air Connection: 3/8 female BSP and
1/2 male BSP.
Material: Disk: Silicon 50 SH (A)
Elastosil (FDA approved); Center shaft:
304 SS; Sealing washer: EPDM; Flat
washer: Galvanized steel; Hexagonal
nuts: Nickel plated brass.
CFM
3.53
LPM
150
CFM
5.29
LPM
250
CFM
8.82
4-3/32 [104.0]
1-19/64
[33.0]
4-19/64
[109.0]
1/2 BSP
3/8 BSP
Silo cutaway showing FD in use.
29 psi (2 bar) 58 psi (4 bar) 87 psi (6 bar)
LPM
100
Air Consumption
NEW PRODUCT!
Model FD-1, Fluidizer Disk
Micro Fluidizer Disk
Compact Design
Model
MFD
The Model MFD Micro Fluidizer Disk combines aeration and vibration to solve the
most difficult bulk solid flow applications. The micro disk is half the size of standard disk,
capable of fitting into tight locations. The special design creates a vibration as the air flows
between the pads boot and bin wall. This provides a very effective flow aid for all types of
dry products. Plus the MFD does not require a specific air pressure for operation. Your
pneumatic system pressure can range from 29 to 87 psi.
FEATURES
Self cleaning
Abrasion resistant
Easy to install
Food grade
Economical
SPECIFICATIONS
( 40 to 170C).
Air Supply: 29 to 87 psi (2 to 6 bar).
Air Connection: 1/4 male BSP, 1/4
ID compression fitting.
Material: Disk: Polyurethane sintup
70A (FDA approved); Center shaft:
Aluminum; Sealing washer: EPDM;
Flat washer: Galvanized steel;
Hexagonal nuts: Nickel plated brass.
2-11/64
[55.0]
2-1/8
[54.0]
1/4 BSP
COMPRESSION
FITTING
Silo cutaway showing MFD in use.
CFM
2.47
LPM
90
CFM
3.17
LPM
120
CFM
4.23
29 psi (2 bar) 58 psi (4 bar) 87 psi (6 bar)
LPM
70
Air Consumption
Model MFD-1, Micro Fluidizer Disk

358
B
n

V
b
r
a
t
o
r
s
/
A
e
r
a
t
o
r
s
L
E
V
E
L
Series BPV Pneumatic Ball Vibrators are the best choice for
bridge-break in thin walls and small tanks. This model can be used in
vibrating separators, vibrating conveyors, and against electroplating
build-up. It can also be used on material compacted while packing or
sand compacted while molding.
How It Operates
The aluminum body is equipped with a steel ring and ball inside
that is tightly closed by plastic side covers. Vibration is caused
when the internal ball, pushed by compressed air, runs in a rotary
motion to produce centrifugal force.
Pneumatic Ball Vibrator
Small Size and Light Weight
IN OUT
C
B
D
A
E
H
Series
BPV
FEATURES
The body is made of high strength aluminum alloy.
Small in size and light-weight.
Can be used in high humidity or dusty working areas.
Frequency and amplitude of vibration can be adjusted as
needed.
SPECIFICATIONS
Noise Level: 75-95 dBA.
Supply Pressure: 29 to 87 psi (2 to 6 bar).
Air Consumption: See model chart.
Air Connections: 1/4 BSPT female with 1/4 NPT female
adapter on BPV-1, BPV-2, BPV-3, BPV-4, BPV-5. 3/8 BSPT
female with 3/8 NPT female adapters on BPV-6. Also includes
muffler for exhaust port.
87 psi
(6 bar)
160 (710)
195 (870)
247 (1100)
387 (1720)
461 (2050)
722 (3210)
Weight
lb (kg)
.31 (0.14)
.57 (.26)
.66 (.30)
1.2 (.53)
1.4 (.63)
2.54 (1.15)
Model
BPV-1
BPV-2
BPV-3
BPV-4
BPV-5
BPV-6
29 psi
(2 bar)
22500
15000
13000
10500
9200
7800
58 psi
(4 bar)
28000
18500
17000
14500
12200
9700
87 psi
(6 bar)
34000
22500
19500
16500
14000
12500
29 psi
(2 bar)
56 (250)
72 (320)
101(450)
162 (720)
209 (930)
339 (1510)
58 psi
(4 bar)
106 (470)
124 (550)
180 (800)
274 (1220)
353 (1570)
555 (2470)
29 psi
(2 bar)
3.25 (92)
3.32 (94)
4.31 (122)
4.59 (130)
5.65 (160)
7.59 (215)
58 psi
(4 bar)
5.30 (150)
5.58 (158)
7.06 (200)
8.12 (230)
10.24 (290)
13.24 (375)
87 psi
(6 bar)
7.06 (200)
7.95 (225)
9.89 (280)
12.01 (340)
15.01 (425)
20.13 (570)
Frequency (V.P.M.)
Pressure Input
Force lbf (N)
Pressure Input
Air Consumption cfm (l/min)
Pressure Input
V.P.M. = vibrations per minute
Model
BPV-1
BPV-2
BPV-3
BPV-4
BPV-5
BPV-6
A
2.01 (51 mm)
2.64 (67 mm)
2.64 (67 mm)
3.27 (83 mm)
3.27 (83 mm)
4.06 (103 mm)
B
3.39 (86 mm)
4.45 (113 mm)
4.45 (113 mm)
5.04 (128 mm)
5.04 (128 mm)
6.30 (160 mm)
C
2.68 (68 mm)
3.54 (90 mm)
3.54 (90 mm)
4.09 (104 mm)
4.09 (104 mm)
5.12 (130 mm)
D
0.47 (12 mm)
0.63 (16 mm)
0.63 (16 mm)
0.63 (16 mm)
0.63 (16 mm)
0.79 (20 mm)
E
0.79 (20 mm)
0.94 (24 mm)
0.94 (24 mm)
1.30 (33 mm)
1.30 (33 mm)
1.73 (44 mm)
H
0.79 (7 mm)
0.94 (9 mm)
0.94 (9 mm)
1.30 (9 mm)
1.30 (9 mm)
1.73 (11 mm)
Connection
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
3/8

B
n

V
b
r
a
t
o
r
s
/
A
e
r
a
t
o
r
s
L
E
V
E
L
Series PRV Pneumatic Roller Vibrators have a high vibration
frequency feature that can prevent material jams in pipe delivery. It
can also be applied for bridge-break or concrete injection operation
conditions.
How It Operates
The special aluminum body is equipped with a roller and ring with
multi-nozzles. It is tightly closed by plastic side covers. Vibration
is caused when the roller pushed by compressed air runs in a
rotary motion to produce centrifugal force.
Pneumatic Roller Vibrator
Prevent Material Jams
IN
C
B
D
H
A
E
Series
PRV
FEATURES
Special aluminum body is small in size and light-weight.
required.
The strongest vibration force driven by rollers among the
same size products.
SPECIFICATIONS
Noise Level Range: 75-100 dBA.
Air Connection: 1/8 BSPT female with 1/8 NPT female adapter
on PRV-1; 1/4 BSPT female with 1/4 NPT female adapter on
PRV-2 and PRV-3; 3/8 BSPT female with 3/8 NPT female
adapter on PRV-4.
Model
PRV-1
PRV-2
PRV-3
PRV-4
29 psi
(2 bar)
25000
19000
15500
11000
58 psi
(4 bar)
35000
21000
18500
14000
87 psi
(6 bar)
36000
26000
19000
16000
29 psi
(2 bar)
241 (1070)
614 (2730)
674 (3000)
843 (3750)
58 psi
(4 bar)
656 (2920)
1086 (4830)
1369 (6090)
1517 (6750)
87 psi
(6 bar)
948 (4200)
1376 (6120)
1675 (7450)
2001 (8900)
29 psi
(2 bar)
3.53 (100)
7.06 (200)
0.24 (290)
13.07 (370)
Weight
lb (kg)
.53 (0.24)
1.19 (0.54)
2.1 (0.95)
3.97 (1.8)
Frequency (V.P.M.)
Pressure Input
Force lbf (N)
Pressure Input
Pressure Input
58 psi
(4 bar)
5.12 (145)
10.59 (300)
15.19 (430)
19.42 (550)
87 psi
(6 bar)
6.89 (195)
14.13 (400)
20.13 (570)
25.78 (730)
Model
PRV-1
PRV-2
PRV-3
PRV-4
A
2.01 (51 mm)
2.64 (67 mm)
3.27 (83 mm)
4.06 (103 mm)
B
3.39 (86 mm)
4.45 (113 mm)
5.04 (128 mm)
6.30 (160 mm)
C
2.68 (68 mm)
3.54 (90 mm)
4.09 (104 mm)
5.12 (130 mm)
D
0.47 (12 mm)
0.63 (16 mm)
0.63 (16 mm)
0.79 (20 mm)
E
1.14 (29 mm)
1.46 (37 mm)
1.67 (42.5 mm)
2.05 (52 mm)
Connection
1/8
1/4
1/4
3/8
H
0.28 (7 mm)
0.35 (9 mm)
0.35 (9 mm)
0.43 (11 mm)

360
B
n

V
b
r
a
t
o
r
s
/
A
e
r
a
t
o
r
s
L
E
V
E
L
Series PTV Pneumatic Turbine Vibrators are the best choice of
high vibration frequency types for a low noise environment. It is
usually installed on a vibrating separator, conveyor, automatic
arrangement machine, packing machine, or filling machine.
How It Operates
The vibration is produced by centrifugal force which arises from
the imbalance of movement when compressed air impacts the
tangent of the turbine to make it move. The operation noise is low
because of ball bearing supports on the running turbine.
Pneumatic Turbine Vibrator
Low Noise, High Vibration Frequency
IN OUT
A
E
D
C
B
H
Series
PTV
FEATURES
Aluminum body allows low noise and high vibration frequency
Small in size and light-weight
Sudden power on/off is allowed
required
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Limit: : 212F (100C).
Noise Level: 60-75 dBA.
Air Connection: BSPT female with NPT female adapter, see
dimension chart. Also includes muffler for exhaust port.
Model
PTV-1
PTV-2
PTV-3
PTV-4
PTV-5
A
2.01 (51 mm)
2.64 (67 mm)
2.64 (67 mm)
3.27 (83 mm)
3.27 (83 mm)
B
3.39 (86 mm)
4.45 (113 mm)
4.45 (113 mm)
5.04 (128 mm)
5.08 (129 mm)
C
2.68 (68 mm)
3.54 (90 mm)
3.54 (90 mm)
4.09 (104 mm)
4.09 (104 mm)
D
0.47 (12 mm)
0.63 (16 mm)
0.63 (16 mm)
0.63 (16 mm)
0.63 (16 mm)
E
1.30 (33 mm)
1.65 (42 mm)
1.65 (42 mm)
2.20 (56 mm)
2.20 (56 mm)
H
0.28 (7 mm)
0.35 (9 mm)
0.35 (9 mm)
0.35 (9 mm)
0.35 (9 mm)
Model
PTV-1
PTV-2
PTV-3
PTV-4
PTV-5
29 psi
(2 bar)
27500
26000
17000
17000
12000
58 psi
(4 bar)
35000
30000
21500
20000
15500
87 psi
(6 bar)
37500
33000
24000
23000
17000
29 psi
(2 bar)
189 (840)
315 (1400)
274 (1220)
488 (2170)
477 (2120)
58 psi
(4 bar)
312 (1390)
549 (2440)
470 (2090)
908 (4040)
789 (3510)
87 psi
(6 bar)
540 (2400)
839 (3730)
710 (3160)
1241 (5520)
1140 (5070)
29 psi
(2 bar)
1.62 (46)
4.24 (120)
4.24 (120)
6.53 (185)
6.53 (185)
Weight
lb (kg)
.56 (0.26)
1.25 (0.57)
1.28 (0.58)
2.4 (1.1)
2.4 (1.1)
Frequency (V.P.M.)
Pressure Input
Force lbf (N)
Pressure Input
Pressure Input
58 psi
(4 bar)
2.83 (80)
7.06 (200)
7.06 (200)
11.5 (325)
11.5 (325)
87 psi
(6 bar)
4.0 (112)
10.2 (290)
10.2 (290)
16.1 (455)
16.1 (455)
Connection
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4

B
n

V
b
r
a
t
o
r
s
/
A
e
r
a
t
o
r
s
L
E
V
E
L
Series APV-C Piston Vibrators are air cushioned to provide low
noise. This makes it suitable for quiet area applications. It is a good
solution to prevent clogs on tank walls and material delivery problems.
It can also be applied on vibrating separators and conveyors.
Series APV-I impact version piston vibrators can help to get rid
of dust or material accumulated inside of pipes or tanks. It allows direct
impact on the tank with low specific gravity and high moisture
materials inside. It also helps prevent material build-up, pipe clogs,
and rust.
How They Operate
There are air-breathing tubes located in both ends of the cylinder.
Compressed air pushes the piston from one side to the other.
Vibration power arises when the piston moves back and forth in
the body. In APV-C air cushion at both ends produced by the to-
and-fro motion will keep the piston from striking the body.
Therefore, the piston will not produce much noise. In APV-I, air
cushion at the top end is produced by the to-and-fro compression.
This will keep the piston from striking onto the body top. The
piston will strike directly on the bottom side of the body to produce
a strong impact.
Piston Vibrator
Air Cushioned or Piston Vibrators
Series
APV
FEATURES
The body is made of high strength aluminum alloy.
APV-C: Low frequency vibration is the best solution to
bridge-break.
APV-I: Allows direct impact onto the target object to produce
the optimum vibration.
Frequency and amplitude can be adjusted as needed.
Sudden power on/off will not damage.
Movement by air, easy operation, and no sparking. They can
be installed in hazardous areas or high humidity work
environments.
SPECIFICATIONS
Noise Level Range: APV-C: 60-75 dBA; APV-I: 80-115 dBA.
Air Connection: BSPT female with NPT female adapter, see
dimension chart. Also includes muffler for exhaust port.
A
IN
OUT
D
C
H
B
Model
APV-C1
APV-C2
APV-C3
APV-I1
APV-I2
APV-I3
A
5.43 (138 mm)
6.54 (166 mm)
8.19 (208 mm)
5.43 (138 mm)
6.54 (166 mm)
8.19 (208 mm)
B
3.15 (80 mm)
3.94 (100 mm)
5.51 (140 mm)
3.15 (80 mm)
3.94 (100 mm)
5.51 (140 mm)
C
2.36 (60 mm)
2.95 (75 mm)
4.13 (105 mm)
2.36 (60 mm)
2.95 (75 mm)
4.13 (105 mm)
D
0.47 (12 mm)
0.63 (16 mm)
0.63 (16 mm)
0.47 (12 mm)
0.63 (16 mm)
0.63 (16 mm)
H
0.79 (20 mm)
0.94 (24 mm)
0.94 (24 mm)
0.79 (20 mm)
0.94 (24 mm)
0.94 (24 mm)
Connection
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/8
1/4
1/4
87 psi
(6 bar)
126 (560)
161 (715)
231 (1030)
3996 (17776)
6048 (26904)
8276 (36816)
Air
Consumption
cfm (l/min)
8.12 (230)
8.79 (249)
9.50 (269)
8.8 (250)
9.5 (270)
10.6 (300)
Model
APV-C1
APV-C2
APV-C3
APV-I1
APV-I2
APV-I3
29 psi
(2 bar)
1765
1333
1000
1973
1744
1277
58 psi
(4 bar)
2308
1677
1200
2885
2459
1875
87 psi
(6 bar)
2857
1875
1340
3571
3000
1973
29 psi
(2 bar)
44 (195)
62 (275)
91 (404)
1818 (8086)
3245 (14443)
3470 (15434)
58 psi
(4 bar)
85 (380)
119 (531)
175 (780)
3044 (13542)
4934 (21948)
7799 (34692)
Frequency (V.P.M.)
Pressure Input
Force lbf (N)
Pressure Input
Weight
lb (kg)
1.98 (0.9)
4.19 (1.9)
9.92 (4.5)
2.2 (1.0)
4.6 (2.1)
10.6 (4.8)

362
B
n

V
b
r
a
t
o
r
s
/
A
e
r
a
t
o
r
s
L
E
V
E
L
Series IPV Air Hammer (single impact model) focuses on a limited target. Other
equipment of the target is minimally affected by it. It is often applied onto a pipe or clean
elbow in a tank filled with humidity or low specific gravity material.
FEATURES
One impact wave caused by one shot
High strength aluminum structure
Impact force and interval timing can be set based on needs
Magnetic hammer stores magnetic strength to increase the pistons impact power
Air Hammer
Single Impacting Type
IN
OUT
A
D
H
C
B
Series
IPV
SPECIFICATIONS
Noise Level Range: 60 75 dBA.
Supply Pressure: 43.5 to 87 psi (3 to 6 bar).
Air Connection: 1/8 BSPT female with 1/8 NPT female adapter on IPV 1, IPV 2
and IPV 3; 1/4 BSPT female adapter with 1/4 NPT female adapter on IPV 4.
How It Operates
The IPV series air hammer contains a powerful magnet inside the hammer. The
hammer and magnet are tightly closed before activation. As the inlet air pressure
gets higher than the force, this tightens the hammer and magnet. The hammer and
magnet will separate and cause more strength for impact power. The spring will bring
the hammer back to the initial position automatically after the impact. By doing this,
the air pressure will be released and the strength of the air pressure will be delivered
to the target impact container. It will help to smooth the flow and prevent
accumulation inside the container.
Model
IPV-1
IPV-2
IPV-3
IPV-4
A
5.43 (138 mm)
6.54 (166 mm)
8.19 (208 mm)
10.56 (269 mm)
B
3.15 (80 mm)
3.94 (100 mm)
5.51 (140 mm)
6.77 (172 mm)
C
2.36 (60 mm)
2.95 (75 mm)
4.13 (105 mm)
5.51 (140 mm)
D
0.47 (12 mm)
0.63 (16 mm)
0.63 (16 mm)
0.94 (24 mm)
H
0.35 (9 mm)
0.43 (11 mm)
0.59 (15 mm)
0.75 (19 mm)
Connection
1/8
1/8
1/8
1/4
Model
IPV-1
IPV-2
IPV-3
IPV-4
Impulse
lbfs (NS)
.225 (1.0)
.630 (2.8)
1.66 (7.4)
2.81 (12.5)
Air Consumption
in
3
(l) per stroke
1.71 (0.028)
5.0 (0.082)
14.0 (0.228)
27.8 (0.455)
Weight
lb (kg)
2.43 (1.1)
3.97 (1.8)
8.82 (4.0)
18.52 (8.4)
Series
EBV
Electric Bin Vibrator
Adjustable Vibration Intensity
The Series EBV Electric Bin Vibrator incorporates adjustable force features without
creating irritating noise. The low amperage draw at 120V reduces power consumption and
makes the vibrators useable in any application. The EBV eliminates drawbacks associated
with non-adjustable constant force units. The conventional fix force units are sized with
narrow operating limits and may not move material from bins or pack material in
containers if the moisture content changes. The adjustable force feature increases
application flexibility; reducing equipment downtime and labor expense. The EBV is
capable of running continuously at 100% force output without overheating or mechanical
damage.
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Requirements: 120 VAC (60
Hz), 230 VAC (50 Hz).
Power Consumption: See model
chart.
to 40C).
Enclosure: Aluminum.
Noise Level: 20 dB.
Electrical Connection: Electrical
junction box.
Rotational Speed: 3600 RPM.
Weight: See model chart.
Approvals: CE.
Model
EBV-1
EBV-2
EBV-3
EBV-4
Max Power
Kw Hp
230
VAC
0.08
0.1
0.18
0.27
120
VAC
0.09
0.11
0.21
0.28
230
VAC
0.11
0.13
0.24
0.36
120
VAC
0.12
0.15
0.28
0.38
Centrifugal Force
Kg Lb
230
VAC
68
101
187
321
120
VAC
59
110
189
323
230
VAC
149.9
222.7
412.3
707.7
120
VAC
130.1
242.5
416.7
712.1
Current
Max Amps
230
VAC
0.43
0.54
1.14
1.58
120
VAC
1.03
1.3
2.62
3.43
D
E
A
B
C
Model
EBV-1
EBV-2
EBV-3
EBV-4
A
5 1/8 (130)
5 1/8 (130)
5 1/8 (130)
6 7/64 (155)
B
5 23/64 (136)
5 23/64 (136)
6 17/64 (159)
6 23/32 (170)
C
8 5/16 (211)
8 5/16 (211)
9 3/32 (231)
10 23/64 (263)
Dimensions-Inches (mm)
D
4 11/64 (106)
4 11/64 (106)
4 11/64 (106)
4 7/16 (113)
E
2 43/64 (68)
2 43/64 (68)
2 43/64 (68)
5 1/8 (130)
NEW PRODUCT!
FEATURES
Continuous operation at 100% force output
NEMA 4X (IP66)
Robust aluminum body
Silent operation (20 dB)
Adjustable centrifugal force
Weight
Kg
230
VAC
4.2
4.6
7.0
9.8
120
VAC
9.3
10.1
15.4
21.6
Lb

PROCESS CONTROL
pages 364 365
Annunciators/
Alarm Modules
pages 376 377
Fan Speed
Controls
page 377
Signal Conditioners/
Isolating Transmitters
pages 378 380
SSR Monitors
page 386
Signal Converters
pages 386 387
Intrinsically Safe
Barriers
pages 388 390
Relays
pages 381 383
Current Transformers/
Switches
pages 384 385
Timer Controllers
pages 394 398
Ground/Continuity
Controls
page 398
Particulate (Dust or
Broken Bag) Transmitters
page 399
Power Supplies
page 391
Timers
pages 392 393
Belt Alignment
Switches
page 404
Particulate (Dust or
Broken Bag) Sensors
pages 400 401
Speed Switches
pages 402 403
Cable Pull
Switches
page 404
Panel Meters/
Indicators
pages 366 376

364
T
y
p
c
a

A
p
p
c
a
t
o
n
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Photohelic
Gages
Filter Unit Filter Unit
Hopper
Series DCT500
Low Cost
Timer
Controller
A Dwyer
DCT1000 Dust Collector Timer Controller with

attachable DCP pressure sensing module monitors and controls
the dust levels and corresponding pressure drop across the filter
bags. The DCT1000/DCP control automatically activates the
cleaning cycle when the DCT1000's pre-programmed set points
have been exceeded. This on-demand control system alleviates
excessive air compressor usage by preventing unnecessary
cleaning which lowers energy and maintenance costs.
An automatic filter cleaning control system is created with the
combination of the Dwyer
Photohelic
switch/gage and a
DCT500 Dust Collector Timer Controller. The Photohelic
gage
monitors the filters for dust build-up. When the dust build-up and
pressure drop across the filters exceeds a preset limit, the
Photohelic
gage activates the DCT500s cleaning cycle. The

DCT500 controls the cleaning process until the dust levels and
corresponding pressure drop on the filters falls back below the
preset limit. Static pressure tips and line filters are recommended
to prevent migration of particulate into the Photohelic
gage.
Automatic filter cleaning control system. Bag house cleaning system uses Dust Collector
Timer Controller to initiate optimum cleaning cycle.
Clean
Air Outlet
Filter Bags
Dirty
Air
Inlet
Airshock
Blower
Dust Hopper
Series DCT1000
with DCP
Dust Collector
Timer Controller
This portable dust collector can be rolled from job to job in an
industrial building. An operator places the large diameter
collection hose where it is needed and dust is collected by filters
located inside the access doors on the units side. The top
mounted blower draws air through the filters. To monitor the
pressure drop across the filters, the manufacturer supplies a
Magnehelic
differential pressure gage. When the pressure drop

due to dust build up on the filter indicates that cleaning is
necessary, the DCT500DC Dust Collector Timer Controller is
manually activated to initiate a cleaning cycle which involves
solenoid valves releasing pulses of air. This process removes the
dust from the filters where it drops into a storage bin. A Dwyer
Minihelic
differential pressure gage can be used instead of the

Magnehelic
gage, and, if automatic cleaning is required, a

Photohelic
differential pressure switch/gage can provide the

electrical contact to actuate the cleaning cycle when the pressure
drop reaches the preset limit.
Dust Collector Timer Controller shows filter
condition in dust collector.
Magnehelic
Gages
Collection Hose Dust Bin
Filter
Door
Filter
Door
Exhaust
Blower
Series DCT500
Low Cost
Timer
Controller
Series MPC
Pump
Controller
Inlet
Outlet
Series PBLTX
Level Transmitter
Submersible Pumps
Series MTL
Intrinsically
Safe Barrier
Lift stations are pits located at points in the wastewater system,
which are used to collect the wastewater and transmit it to the
treatment facility. The fluid level is monitored in the lift station to
turn on pumps that empty the lift station when it is full. Depending
on the local government code it may be necessary to use
products that are hazardous use rated in a lift station due to the
levels of methane in the atmosphere. The Mercoid Series PBLTX
level transmitter can be used in lift stations to monitor the fluid
level and is intrinsically safe rated when used with a proper
intrinsically safe barrier. The Dwyer
Series MTL barrier can be

used with the PBLTX to complete the intrinsically safe system.
The barrier is placed in the 4 to 20 mA loop away from the
hazardous area and limits the amount of energy allowed to pass
into the hazardous area, which inhibits ignition in flammable
atmospheres.
Barrier completes intrinsically safe system for
wastewater lift station level monitoring.

T
y
p
c
a

A
p
p
c
a
t
o
n
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
The Dwyer
Series DPM Particulate Monitor and PMS Particulate

Sensor combine to make a particulate monitoring system for the
exhaust stream of dust collectors. The amount of particulate
leaking out of the dust collector is measured using low
maintenance induction technology and shown on a display for
easy viewing. The DPM has programmable thresholds of leakage
for switch output indication of dust collector problems such as
broken or leaking filters. Proper use of the system will allow the
user to catch breaking filters early. Advantages of the system are
maintaining regulatory compliance, maximizing product recovery,
optimizing filtration efficiency, preventing fines and plant
shutdowns, and reducing the amount of pollutants released.
Detect broken filters in dust collectors.
Dust Collector
(Larger Volume) DPM
Particulate Monitor
Inlet
Cable
Outlet
PMS
Particulate
Sensor
Blower
A Proximity Series NSS Speed Switch is used to monitor the
speed of a product belt conveyor indicating proper operation.
Common applications include grain, feed, aggregate, mining, and
textiles. Belt slippage or a slowdown in belt speed indicates
problems that could lead to product waste or could generate
sparks leading to a fire or explosion. The belts speed is monitored
via the rotational speed of the shaft at the end of the belt. The
NSS is a non-contact magnetic actuated system allowing easy
installation and long operational life. A magnetic disc is installed
on the rotating shaft and the sensor is mounted across from it.
The sensor picks up the rotation of the disc to detect the rotational
speed of the belt. Inside the sensor is a programmable switch that
can be set for any speed. In this application as the speed
decreases and hits the set point the switch is activated for
indication of a problem. Proper usage of an NSS can help with
predictive maintenance and decrease down-time.
Monitoring belt conveyor for proper operation.
Series NSS Speed Switch
The Series DPML, DPMP and DPMW Digital LCD Panel Meters
provide remote indication in the designated engineering units for
pressure, humidity and temperature measurements. The panel
meters can take in a voltage or current input signal from
transmitters such as the Dwyer Series TTE, Series 626 or Series
RH. The jumper selection allows the user to choose the
appropriate engineering units.
Providing remote indication of pressure, humidity or
temperature.
1. 00
PSI
%
F
Series 626
Series RH
Transmitter
Series TTE
Explosion-Proof
RTD Temperature
Transmitter
The Dwyer Series SCS Current Switches monitor the input current
into a fan or pump motor starter in order to monitor the status of
the equipment. As the current passes through the core of the
switches, it generates enough energy to power up the switch
eliminating the need for extra power wires. The solid core models
are typically used on new installations, while the split core models
are able to mount on existing or new installations.
Monitor the status of your fan or pump.
Series SCS
Current Switches
Contactor
Controller
DI
Motor
Fan Or Pump

366
P
a
n
e

M
e
t
e
r
s
/
I
n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: 4 20 mA, 0 5 VDC, or 0 10
VDC.
Input Impedance: 300 nominal.
Accuracy: (0.05% FS + 1 count).
Power Supply: 24 VDC or 12 VDC
(DPMA 5XX).
Current Consumption: 35 mA DC for
current models. 10 mA DC for voltage
models. Backlight: 35 mA.
Span and Zero: Adjustable. (1999
counts).
Display: 3 1/2 digits, 7 segments,
1 (25.4 mm) H.
Decimal Points: 3 position, user
selectable.
Engineering Units: F, C, %, psi.
Polarity: Automatic, displayed.
( 10 to 50C).
( 40 to 75C).
Mounting: Snap in panel mount or
clamp (gasket included).
Connection: Screw terminals.
Weight: 4 oz (113.4 g).
Series DPMA Adjustable LCD Digital Panel Meter offers a 3-1/2 digit display for easy
viewing in a standard 1/8 DIN package. Unit accepts 4-20 mA, 0 to 5 VDC, or 0 to 10 VDC
inputs with a wide bipolar zero and span adjustment. Standard features include field
selectable engineering units and decimal point positions. Choose from red, amber, or green
segments for easy viewing at a distance. A 24 VDC power supply is required for the
operation of the backlight.
Model
DPMA-401
DPMA-402
DPMA-404
DPMA-501
DPMA-502
DPMA-504
3-35/64
[89.9]
PANEL CUTOUT
FOR SNAP IN
MOUNTING
1-49/64
[45.0]
3-5/8
[92.1] 4X 1/64
[.25]
4-29/64
[113.0]
MOUNTING BRACKET
OUTLINE
REAR VIEW
1-59/64
[48.8]
5/64 [1.9]
1-15/16
[49.2]
3/16 [4.76]
63/64
[24.9]
1
[25.4]
15/32
[11.9]
1-57/64
[48.0]
3-25/32
[96.0]
LCD Digital Panel Meters
1/8 DIN, Loop Powered, Large 3-1/2 Digit Display
Series
DPMA
Input
Current
Current
Current
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage
3-1/2 Digits, Window Mount
Series
DPMW
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: 4 20 mA DC.
Power Supply: 24 VDC @ 35 mA typical.
Span and Zero: Adjustable. ( 1999).
Display: 3 1/2 digits, 7 segments, 0.45 (11.4 mm) H.
Decimal Points: 3 position, user selectable.
Annunciator: F, C, %, psi.
Mounting: Window mount.
Conversion Rate: 3 per second.
Warm-Up: 10 minutes typical.
.270
[6.85]
.140
[3.6]
2 PLCS
2.380
[60.5]
2.310
[58.4]
.910
[22.9]
PANEL CUTOUT FOR
WINDOW MOUNTING
1.562
[39.67]
.400
[10.2]
.120
[3.05]
.120
[3.05]
.988
[25.1]
The Series DPMW LCD Digital Panel Meter is designed with a 3-1/2 digit, high contrast
LCD display. The colored segments are available in red, amber, or green - ideal for viewing
at a distance. The Series DPMW features user selectable engineering units, selectable
decimal point position and adjustable zero and span. The meter accepts a 4 to 20 mA input
signal for pressure, level, flow, and temperature transmitter. A 24 VDC power supply is
required to illuminate the colored segments. The Series DPMW can be quickly installed in
a window cutout.
Model
DPMW-401
DPMW-402
DPMW-404
APPLICATION
Used to display process values from pressure, humidity or temperature transmitters
ACCESSORIES
DPM-12P, Regulated 120 VAC to 12 VDC Power Supply
ACCESSORY
Backlighting
Amber Segments
Red Segments
Green Segments
Amber Segments
Red Segments
Green Segments
Backlighting
Amber Segments
Green Segments
Red Segments

P
a
n
e

M
e
t
e
r
s
/
I
n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
The Series DPML LCD Digital Panel Meter offers a large 4-1/2 digit LCD display with
a choice of red, amber or green segments for easy viewing at a distance. The meter accepts
loop powered 4-20 mA DC input, 0 to 5 VDC, or 0 to 10 VDC voltage input. Standard
features include field engineering units and decimal point positions. A 24 VDC power
supply is required for the operation of the back light.
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: 4 20 mA DC, 0 5 VDC, 0 10 VDC.
Power Supply: 24 VDC or 12 VDC (DPML 5XX) @ 35 mA typical.
Span and Zero: Adjustable (19999 counts).
Mounting: Snap in bezel mount.
2.540 [64.6]
2.390 REAR HOUSING
[60.6]
.120
[3.05]
1.000
[25.4]
1.750
[44.45]
1.000
[25.4]
PANEL CUTOUT FOR
WINDOW MOUNTING
2.400 [61]
4-1/2 Digit LCD, Selectable Engineering Units
Series
DPML
Model
DPML-401
DPML-402
DPML-403
DPML-501
DPML-502
DPML-503
Input
Current
Current
Current
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage
APPLICATION
Used to display process values from pressure, humidity or temperature
transmitters
DPML-401
3-1/2 Digit, User Selectable Engineering Units, Panel Mount
Series
DPMP
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: 4 20 mA DC, 0 5 VDC or 0 10 VDC.
Power Supply: 24 VDC or 12 VDC (DPMP 5XX) @ 35 mA typical.
Span and Zero: Adjustable. (1999 Counts).
Mounting: Snap in bezel mount.
The Series DPMP LCD Digital Process Meter provides easy viewing on the 3-1/2 digit
LCD display. The display segments are available in a choice of amber, red or green. The
meter features user-selectable engineering units, adjustable zero and span and field-
selectable decimal point position. The snap-in bezel mount eliminates mounting hardware
for quick installation. A 24 VDC power supply is required for the operation of the backlight.
2.540
[64.6]
1.140
[29]
2.390 REAR HOUSING
[60.6]
2.400
[61]
PANEL CUTOUT FOR
WINDOW MOUNTING
1.000
[25.4]
1.750
[44.45]
1.000
[25.4]
.120
[3.05]
Model
DPMP-401
DPMP-402
DPMP-403
DPMP-501
DPMP-502
DPMP-503
Input
Current
Current
Current
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage
ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES
Backlighting
Amber Segments
Green Segments
Red Segments
Amber Segments
Green Segments
Red Segments
Backlighting
Amber Segments
Green Segments
Red Segments
Amber Segments
Green Segments
Red Segments

368
P
a
n
e

M
e
t
e
r
s
/
I
n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Economical, short depth (0.5" behind panel) unit is a 4-20 mA loop powered process indicator with 0.6" LCD
display. This bipolar 3-1/2 digit panel meter fits standard 1/8 DIN cutout and includes adjustable scale (gain),
offset and decimal point selection for quick field calibration. Standard model supplied 0-100.0% for 4-20 mA
input.
SPECIFICATIONS
Display Range: 000 to 1999.
Inputs: 4 20 mA or 10 50 mA.
Accuracy: 1% of reading, 1 digit.
Resolution: Selectable, 1.XXX, 1X.XX,1XX.X, 1XXX.
Ambient Operating Temperature: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Power Requirements: None required, powered by current source.
Temperature Coefficient:100 ppm /C typical.
Polarity: If negative input, minus sign at left.
Panel Cutout: 3.55W x 1.72H (90.17 x 43.6 mm).
Dimensions: 1.9H x 4.130W x 1.250D (48 x 104.90 x 31.75 mm).
Model
A-705-20
Loop Powered Process Indicator
Series
DPMX
Extra Large Digital Panel Meter
3-1/2 Digit LED Display, 2.3 Segment Height, Process Inputs
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs:
Set voltage: 200 mVDC, 2 VDC, 20 VDC;
Adjustable voltage: 200 mVDC, 5 VDC, 10 VDC;
Adjustable current: 0(4) to 20 mA DC.
Input Impedance:
Set voltage: >1 M (>10 M on 200 mV range);
Adjustable voltage: 392 k;
Adjustable current: 300 nominal.
Accuracy: (1% F.S. + 1 count).
Power Supply: 90 to 250 VAC @ 12 VA or 10.5 to 30 VAC/DC @ 6VA (depending
on model).
Display: 3 1/2 digits, 2.3 height, 7 segment LED.
Sampling Rate: 3 readings per second.
Storage Range: 40 to 167F ( 40 to 75C).
Warm Up: 10 minutes.
Mounting: 180 gimbal mounting with 30 stops or bezel mount.
The Series DPMX Digital Panel Meter can easily be viewed from across a room or in
dark areas. The 2.3 LED segments are available in red, green, or blue. These panel meters
come equipped with a universal power supply and user selectable process inputs to fit most
applications. The Series DPMX includes a mounting bracket that can be adjusted up to
180.
FEATURES
Large display
Inputs for most processes
Protective metal casing
29/32
[22.86]
4[101.60]
4-5/32
[105.66]
1-31/32
[50.04]
(2-43/64)
[67.87]
10-19/32
[261.11]
10-19/32
[269.24]
3-7/64
[78.99]
Model
DPMX-1
DPMX-2
DPMX-3
DPMX-1-LV
DPMX-2-LV
DPMX-3-LV
LED Segment Display
Blue
Green
Red
Blue
Green
Red
Model A-705-20, Process Indicator
Power Supply
90 to 250 VAC
90 to 250 VAC
90 to 250 VAC
10.5 to 30 VAC/VDC
10.5 to 30 VAC/VDC
10.5 to 30 VAC/VDC

P
a
n
e

M
e
t
e
r
s
/
I
n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Series
SI
Smart Indicator
Temperature or Process, Interchangeable Output Modules
Series SI Smart Indicator is fully programmable and accepts all commonly used
temperature or process inputs. Programming is via the front panel keys following a
logical menu structure which can be set to short (default) for common usage features
or full where the full range of programmable features are available. The indicator
can also be programmed via a PC using the RS-485 Modbus
communication module.
Password protection can be enabled to prevent any unauthorized setting changes.
The Series SI features a 4-digit red LED with selectable resolution. The display can
be set to indicate a fixed number of decimal places or auto scale for maximum
resolution. Optional interchangeable modules for relay, 4 to 20 mA retransmission, or
Modbus
RS-485 serial communication output are easily installed without the need for
dismantling or recalibration.
Model SI-13 Smart Indicator is designed to accept 2 or 3-wire Pt100 RTD or Types
J, K, T, R, S, E, F, N, or custom thermocouple inputs. Temperature measurements can
be displayed in selectable F or C. High/low scale burnout, input filtering or
smoothing, and offset can be defined by the user.
Select Model SI-23 Smart Indicator for process signal input. The indicator has an
internal power supply to provide excitation to field transmitters. Parameters such as
input type, range, engineering units, resolution, burnout condition, and filter time
constant can be easily programmed.
3.780
[96.01]
.430
[10.922]
5.500
[139.7]
1.750
[44.45]
2.688
[68.28]
.750
[19.05]
INTERCHANGABLE
MODULE
Interchangeable Output Modules can quickly be connected to the Smart
Indicator and are automatically recognized. Dual relay output module has two
changeover relays with a common wiper. Each relay can be set as high or low alarm
independently. An isolated retransmission module provides 0 to 10 mA, 0 to 20 mA,
or 4 to 20 mA output in active (source) or passive (sink) modes. The output can be any
portion of the display. The Modbus
serial communication module allows

communication with a PC for configuring or monitoring.
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
Input/Output Isolation: 500VAC
RMS (galvanically isolated).
Display Range: 999 to 9999.
Output Impedance: 700 @ 24
VDC.
Power Supply: 90 to 253VAC 50/60
Hz.
22 to 140F ( 30 to 60C).
Filtering: Off, 2 seconds, 10
seconds, or adaptive.
Time Constant (Filter Off):
<1 second (to 63% of final value).
Update Time: 250 msec maximum.
Weight: 2 lb (0.9kg)
MODEL SI-13
Thermocouple Input Range:
J: 328 to 2192F ( 200 to 1200C);
K: 328 to 2498F ( 200 to 1370C);
T: 328 to 752F ( 200 to 400C); R
and S: 14 to 3200F
( 10 to 1760C); E: 328 to 1832F
( 200 to 1000C); F: 148 to 1112F
( 100 to 600C); N: 292 to 2372F
( 180 to 1300C); custom: 9999.
RTD Input Range: Pt100 2 or
3 wire: 328 to 1562F
( 200 to 850C).
Accuracy: T/C: 0.04% full range
input, 0.04% rdg; RTD; 0.01 full
range input, 0.05% of rdg.
Thermal Drift: Zero: 0.05V/F
(0.1V/C), (RTD zero drift is
0.008F/F); Span: 50ppm/F
(100ppm/C).
Cold Junction Range: 40 to 185F
( 40 to 85C).
Cold Junction Error: 1F.
Cold Junction Tracking: 0.05F/F
(0.05C/C).
Excitation Current: 300A to
550A.
Maximum Lead Resistance:
50 ohms/leg.
Lead Resistance Effect:
0.004F/ohm (0.002C/ohm).
MODEL SI-23
Voltage Input Range: 0 to 1V, 1 to
5V, 0 to 10V.
Current Input Range: 0 to 20 mA,
4 to 20 mA, 0 to 10 mA.
Thermal Drift: Zero: 0.05V/F
( 0.1V/C); Span: 50ppm/F
(100ppm/C).
Excitation: 24V 5% @ 50 mA.
DUAL RELAY MODULE
Contacts: Two changeover relays,
common wiper.
Electrical Rating: AC: 253V; DC:
125V.
Maximum Load: AC: 7A @ 250V;
DC: 7A @ 30V.
Maximum Power: AC: 1750VA; DC:
210W.
Connections: 5 way tension clamp
connector.
4 TO 20mA RETRANSMISSION
MODULE
Ranges: 0 to 10 mA, 0 to 20 mA,
4 to 20 mA (active or passive).
Isolation: 500VAC.
Maximum Output Load: Active: 1 K
ohm; Passive: [(Vsupply 2)/20] K
ohm.
Max. External Supply: 30V
(passive).
connector.
RS-485 MODBUS
COMMUNICATION MODULE
Isolation: 500VAC.
Physical Layer: 4 wire or 2 wire
half duplex RS 485.
Baud Rate: 19,200 or 9,600.
Protocol: Modbus
RTU format.
Maximum Fan Out: 32 Units.
connector.
Modbus

Model SI-13, Smart Indicator for Temperature
Model SI-23, Smart Indicator for Process
ACCESSORIES
SI-02P, Dual Relay Output (2 per unit max.)
SI-04P, 4 to 20 mA Retransmission (1 per unit max.)
SI-05P, Modbus

Communication (1 per unit max.)

370
P
a
n
e

M
e
t
e
r
s
/
I
n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Series
LCI132
Process Indicator
1/32 DIN, Fully Programmable
SPECIFICATIONS
LCI132-0x
Input Volts (DC) Input Amperes
Range: 200V 20V 10V 100mV 20 mA
Resolution: 0.1V 0.01V 1 mV 0.1mV 0.01 mA
Input Impedance
Volts 1 Mohms.
mV: 100 Mohms.
mA: 12.1 ohms.
LCI132-1x
Input Volts Input Amperes
Range AC: 600.0 100.0 5.000 1.000
Range DC: 199.9 +600.0 100.0 1.999 +5.0001.000
Resolution: 0.1 V 1 mA
Input Impedance
Volts: 3 Mohms (106).
Amp: 12 mohms (10 3).
Accuracy at 23C 5C
100/600 VDC 1/5 A DC; 600V/5A AC: (0.2% reading + 3 digits).
100 V / 1A AC: (0.4% reading + 4 digits).
Temperature Coefficient: 100 ppm/C.
Warm Up: 5 minutes.
Power Supply and Fuses (DIN 41661) (Not supplied):
LCI132-x0: 85 265 VAC 50/60 Hz and 100 300 VDC: Fuse: 0.1A/ 250V.
LCI132-x1: 21 53 VAC 50/60Hz and 10.5 70 VDC: Fuse 0.5A/ 250V.
Display
Range: 1999 to 9999 (DC) 0 to 9999 (AC).
Type: 4 red digits 10 mm.
Reading Rate: 4/s.
Overflow Indication: OVR.
Environmental
Operating Temperature: 10 to 60C.
Storage Temperature: 25 to 85C.
Relative Humidity (non condensed): <95% @ 40C.
Panel Sealing: NEMA 4X (IP65).
21.0
[0.827]
70.0
[2.756]
43.5
[1.713]
48.0
[1.890]
24.0
[0.945] ]
11
[0.433]
6.35 [0.25]
MAXIMUM PANEL THICKNESS
The LCI132 Series process indicators offer flexibility, and value in a low
cost, compact 1/32 DIN package. This family of indicators offers input
availability for most types of process measurement.
The LCI132 has a 7.62mm (0.3 inch) high display. The shallow depth of these full
size panel meters allows installation in panels only 70mm (2.76 inches) deep with
room to spare.
Inputs are available for Process (0 to 10V, 4 to 20 mA), AC Volts, AC Amps, DC
Volts, and DC Amps.
FEATURES
Large display
Easy to program
Inputs for most processes
IP65 (NEMA 4X) front
Program Keys
Process Display
Model
LCI132-00
LCI132-01
LCI132-10
LCI132-11
Input
100 VDC; 20 VDC
10 VDC; 200 VDC; 20 mA DC
100 VAC; 600 VAC; 5A (DC) 1A (AC)
199.9 to +600 VDC;
100 VDC 1.999 to 5A (DC)
1A (DC)
Supply
Voltage
120/240 VAC
24/48 VAC
120/240 VAC
24/48 VAC

P
a
n
e

M
e
t
e
r
s
/
I
n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Input Type
Type J Thermocouple
Type K Thermocouple
Type T Thermocouple
Type R Thermocouple
Type S Thermocouple
Type E Thermocouple
100 Ohm Plt. 0.00385 DIN RTD
100 Ohm Plt. 0.00392 NIST RTD
Process (Includes excitation power supply)
10V
20mV
Digital Frequency/Counter (Includes excitation power supply)
0.1 to 25,000 Hz
Potentiometer
Load Cell (includes excitation power supply)
Input Ranges
Range C
50.0 to +800.0
50.0 to +1250.0
200.0 to +400.0
0.0 to 1750.0
50.0 to +1750.0
50 to +1000.0
200.0 to +800.0
200 to +875
Panel Meter Indicators
1/8 DIN, High Accuracy, Peak & Valley Display
Series
LCI308
&
LCI408
The Series LCI308 and LCI408 panel meter indicators offer flexibility
and value in a standard 1/8 DIN package. This family of indicators offers input
availability for virtually all types of process measurement.
The LCI308 offers a 4-3/4 digit display scalable to 32,000 counts. This flexible
indicator is available for Process Inputs (0-10VDC, 4-20 mA, etc. and
potentiometer inputs).
The LCI408 has a universal input that accepts the Process, Temperature, and
Load Cell inputs of the LCI308, plus a Potentiometer input. The full 5-digit
display can be scaled between 99999 counts. The dual display allows
simultaneous display of the measured value plus other values such as peak or
valley.
Options include relay and transistor set point outputs, BCD Parallel output, RS-
232/RS-485 computer communications, and 4 to 20 mA analog retransmission.
MAX MUM
ESC
IM T RESET TARE
PROG
A
B
RUN
PRG
TARE
NP1
HOLD
DSP1
L MIT
N 2
M N
F T
DATA
STORE
1
2
3
4
EACH ENTER
DA A
MAX
DSP2
96
[3.78]
16
[0.63]
120
[4.72]
7
[0.28]
44
[1.73]
91
[3.583]
96
[3.78]
48
[1.89]
Consult Factory for add in option cards.
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: Process, temperature (T/C & RTD), frequency/counter, load cell
(dependent on model number).
Input Impedance:
Process: Voltage, 1 M; current, 12.1;
Load cell: 100 M for 300 mV, 1 MW for 30 mV.
Display: 5 digit, 7 segment, 14 mm red with a fixed decimal point. 14
LEDs (programming & control).
Accuracy: 0.1% of reading (+2 count). Thermocouples: 0.4% of
reading for types J, K, T, & E; .05% of reading for types R & S. RTD:
0.2% of reading.
Power Requirements: 115/230 VAC 50/60 Hz 10%.
Power Consumption: 3W max.
Part Number
LCI308-00
LCI408-00
Range F
58.0 to +1472.0
58.0 to +2282.0
328.0 to +752.0
+32.0 to +3182.0
58.0 to +3182.0
58.0 to +1832.0
328 to 1472.0
328 to 1607
Scalable Units from 32000 to + 32000 (LCI308);
99999 to +99999 (LCI408)
Scalable Units from 1999 to +19999
Resolution to 0.001% (LCI408)
30mVDC
Modbus

LCI308
LCI408
ACCESSORIES
LCIA-01, Dual Relay Card. Two SPDT relays, 8A @ 240 VAC
LCIA-02, Quad Relay Card. Four SPST relays, 0.2A @ 240 VAC
LCIA-03, Quad Transistor Output Card. Four NPN optically
coupled transistors, 50 mA @ 50 VDC max.
LCIA-04, Quad Transistor Output Card. Four PNP optically
coupled transistors, 50 mA @ 50 VDC max.
LCIA-05, Analog Retransmission, 4 to 20 mADC
or 0 to 10 VDC, selectable.
LCIA-07, BCD Output Card.
LCIA-08, RS 232 Serial Communication (Modbus

Protocol)
Protocol)
MN-1, Mini Node

Description
1/8 DIN Indicator, 10 VDC, 20 mADC,
Potentiometer
1/8 DIN Indicator, Universal Input

372
P
a
n
e

M
e
t
e
r
s
/
I
n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
The Series LCI508/608 Digital Panel Meters offer high performance and
a multitude of features for displaying and manipulating input variables. The unit
accepts analog process input, load cell and potentiometer inputs. Standard
features include data hold, peak and valley display, store function, tare function
and reset. Both models offer a built-in excitation power supply. The Series
LCI508/608 can be fitted with optional output modules for control capabilities.
The Model LCI508 is designed with 31 programmable functions and a high
conversion rate of 555 reads per second. Up 30 points can be set using the
multipoint scaling function for non linear applications.
The Model LCI608 is designed for measuring and integrating analog signals
containing two sets of information simultaneously (for example Flow and
Totalization). The units can be configured to accept and display two analog input
signals and allowing interaction between them. The model LCI608 offers 26
logical programmable functions.
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: Voltage process: 5 and 10 V (input impedance: 1M);
Voltage: 0 1V (input impedance: 100M); Current input: 0 20 mA
(input impedance: 11.8).
Load-Cell:
Voltage input: 30, 60, 120, 300, 500 mV (input impedance:
100M); 4 wires, unipolar or bipolar.
Potentiometer Input: Minimum resistance: 120 (input impedance:
>10 M). Excitation voltage: 2.2 V.
Excitation: 2.2 V @ 30 mA not adjustable. 24 V @ 30 mA not regulated.
5 V 100 mV @ 120 mA with fine adjust (50ppm/C). 10 V 10 mV @
120 mA with fine adjust (50ppm/C).
Display: Main display: 9999/9999, 5 red digits, 7 segments. Aux.
display: 9999999 / 9999999, 8 green digits 8 mm (LCI608 only).
Decimal point: Programmable (both displays).
Sampling Rate: LCI508: 555/s; LCI608: 100/s.
Accuracy: Error max: 0.1% reading +2 digits.
Temperature Coefficient: 50 ppm/C.
Warm up time: 10 minutes.
Power Requirements: 115/230VAC 50/60Hz. Consumption (without
options): 5W.
Storage Temperature Range: 13 to 185F ( 25 to 85C).
Panel Cutout: 3.6 x 1.8 (92 x 45 mm).
Case Material: s/UL 94 V 0 polycarbonate.
Series
LCI508
&
LCI608
120
[4.72]
7
[0.28]
44
[1.73]
48
[1.89]
96
[3.78]
91
[3.583]
MAX MUM
ESC
L M T RESET
8
PROG
A
B
RUN
PRG
TARE
INP1
HOLD
DSP1
L M T
NP2
MIN
FLT
DATA
STORE
1
2
3
4
ENTER
DATA
MAX
DSP2
16
[0.63]
96
[3.78]
Digital Panel Meters
1/8 DIN, Process, Load Cell & Potentiometer Input
LCI508
LCI608
Model LCI508-00, Panel Meter
Model LCI608-00, Panel Meter/Totalizer
ACCESSORIES
LCIA-01, Dual Relay Card. Two SPDT relays, 8A @ 240 VAC
LCIA-02, Quad Relay Card. Four SPST relays, 0.2A @ 240 VAC
LCIA-03, Quad Transistor Output Card. Four NPN optically coupled
transistors, 50 mA @ 50 VDC max.
LCIA-04, Quad Transistor Output Card. Four PNP optically coupled
transistors, 50 mA @ 50 VDC max.
LCIA-05, Analog Retransmission,
4 to 20 mADC or 0 to 10 VDC, selectable.
LCIA-07, BCD Output Card.
Protocol)

Protocol)
MN-1, Mini Node

P
a
n
e

M
e
t
e
r
s
/
I
n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
The LCI108 & LCI108J Series 3-1/2 digit panel meter offer flexibility, and value in a low cost,
compact 1/8 DIN package. This family of indicators offers input availability for virtually all types of
process measurement. The LCI108 & LCI108J are identical except for the size of the display. The
LCI108 has a 0.56 inch (14 mm) high display. The LCI108J (jumbo) has a 0.80 inch (20 mm) display
for viewing from longer distances. Inputs are available for Process (0 to 10V, 4 to 20 mA), AC Volts,
AC Amps, DC Volts, DC Amps, Temperature (RTD), Temperature (Thermocouple), and Frequency,
depending on the model. The process and frequency inputs have appropriate transducer excitation
power supplies, giving you everything you need in a compact package.
91
[3.583]
96
[3.78]
7
[0.28]
44
[1.73]
60
[2.36]
16
[0.63]
96
[3.78]
48
[1.89]
Series
LCI108
&
LCI108J
3-1/2 Digit Panel Meter
3-1/2 Digit Display, Self-Tune/Fuzzy Logic
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: Process, Thermocouple, RTD, VAC, VDC, A AC, A DC, Frequency.
Input Impedance:
Process: Voltage, 1 M; Current, 12.1.
AC & DC Current: 0.012 for 5 A, 0.06 for 1 A.
AC & DC Voltage: 3 M for 600 V, 300 k for 200 V, 30 k for 20 V.
Display: 4 digit, 14 mm red for LCI108; 4 digit, 20 mm red for LCI108J;
Programmable decimal point with 2 LEDs for output status indication on all units.
Accuracy: 0.1% of reading (except T/C & RTD); 0.4% of reading for T/C; 0.1%
for RTD.
Power Requirements: 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 10%.
Operating Temperature: 14 to 140F ( 10 to 60C) / <95% @ 104F (40C) non
condensing.
SPECIFICATIONS
Relay Output: 2 SPDT relays rated at 8 A @ 250
VAC resistive.
Maximum Power: 2000VA, 192W.
Maximum Voltage: 250 VAC, 150 VDC.
Contact Resistance: 3m maximum.
Output Response Time: 10 ms maximum.
LCIA-01 Dual Relay Output Option Card for LCI108, LCI108J, LCI208, LCI308,
and LCI408 1/8 DIN panel meters
SPECIFICATIONS
Relay Output: 4 SPDT relays rated at 0.2 A @ 250
VAC resistive.
Maximum Power: 25VA, 192W.
Maximum Voltage: 250 VAC, 10 VDC.
Contact Resistance: 200m maximum.
Output Response Time: 6 ms maximum.
LCIA-02 Quad Relay Output Option Card for LCI208, LCI308, and LCI408 1/8
DIN panel meters
SPECIFICATIONS
Output: Selectable 0 to 10 VDC into 500 ohms
minimum, 4 to 20 mADC into 800 ohms maximum.
Resolution: 12 bits.
Accuracy: 0.1% of full scale 1 bit.
Response Time: 60 ms maximum.
Thermal Drift: 0.2 mV/C; 0.5A/C.
LCIA-05 Isolated Analog Retransmission for LCI308, and LCI408 1/8 DIN panel
meters
SPECIFICATIONS
Output: 5 1/2 digits Tri state logic for 5V TTL or
24VDC signals.
Data Transfer Time: 2 ms.
LCIA-07 BCD Output Option Card for LCI308 and LCI408 1/8 DIN panel meters.
SPECIFICATIONS
Output: RS 232 C, full duplex, 4 wire, via RJ 11
connector.
Protocol: Selectable ISO1745 (ASCII) or Modbus
RTU protocol.
Baud Rates: 1200 or 19200 baud, selectable.
Address Range: 0 to 99.
LCIA-08 RS-232 Serial Communications Option Card for LCI308 and LCI408
1/8 DIN panel meters.
SPECIFICATIONS
Output: RS 485, half duplex, 3 wire, via RJ 11
connector.
Protocol: Selectable ISO1745 (ASCII) or Modbus
RTU protocol.
Baud Rates: 1200 or 19200 baud, selectable.
Address Range: 0 to 99.
LCIA-09 RS-485 Serial Communications Option Card for LCI308 and LCI408
1/8 DIN panel meters.
Accessories for LCI Series
Model
LCI108-00
LCI108-10
LCI108-20
LCI108J-10
LCI108J-20
Input
Process
T/C (J, K, T)
RTD
T/C (J, K, T)
RTD
Modbus

Consult factory for VAC, VDC, AAC, ADC and frequency input models.
ACCESSORY
LCIA-01, Dual Relay Output Option Card
Display
.56 (14 mm) H
.56 (14 mm) H
.56 (14 mm) H
.80 (20 mm) H
.80 (20 mm) H

374
P
a
n
e

M
e
t
e
r
s
/
I
n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Model
PM706 Temperature Panel Meter
Dual Alarm, Relay and Analog Output
Model PM706 Digital Temperature Meter monitors and displays
temperature measurements using a Type K thermocouple input. Meter features
dual adjustable set points with lA relays and a selectable 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC
output signal . View alarm settings by depressing the tactile alarm button on the
front panel. The bright red LED display has a floating decimal point and displays
temperature in F or C. Meter is equipped with overrange indication to alert
operator of an open thermocouple or faulty connections. Sealed front panel is
rated to NEMA 12 to protect against dust and fluids.
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Range: 148 to
1999F ( 100 to 1200C).
Input: Type K thermocouple.
Output: Dual alarm rated 1A @
250VAC, 4 20 mA with 8V max
compliance or 0 10 VDC 1 k
min.
Power Requirements: 115/230
VAC, 10%, 50/60 Hz.
Accuracy: 2% at 23C ambient.
Resolution: 1F/C.
Operating Temperature: 32 to
122F (0 to 50C).
Ambient Temperature Effect:
+0.01% of rdg., 0.05 per degree.
Temperature Coefficient: 100
ppm/C.
Set Point Adjustment: 0 to 2000
counts, adj. within 5 counts or
better.
Read Rate: 2.5 readings/sec.
Weight: 1 Ib (500 g).
Front Panel Rating: 1/8 DIN,
NEMA 12.
Suggested Specifications
Temperature meter shall have dual
relay alarms and selectable 4-20 mA
or 0-10 VDC analog output.
Temperature shall be displayed in
F/C (selectable). The housing shall
be suitable for NEMA12 service.
Meter shall be Dwyer
Model No.
PM706.
Digital Panel Meter
1/8 DIN Housing, Integral Power Supply
Model
A-701
3-1/2 digit, 0.6 high LED display is combined with an integral 24 VDC power
supply to provide a complete digital indicating system when used with Dwyer 2-
wire transmitters. Standard unit is supplied to read 0-100.0% and is field
adjustable from 1.999 to 1999 for readout of actual engineering units. Panel
mounting hardware included. 1/8 DIN size: 1.64H X 3.59W X 4.13D.
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Requirements: 120 VAC 15%, 50/60 Hz.
Input Impedance: 40 ohms.
Accuracy: 0.05% of reading.
DC Output: 24 VDC regulated.
Maximum Current Output: 50 mA.
Power Consumption: 6 watts.
1-9/16
[39.69]
3-39/64
[91.69]
3-3/8
[85.73]
39/64
[15.48]
1-59/64
[48.82]
4-1/16
[103.19]
Model PM706, Digital Temperature Panel Meter
Model A-701, Digital Panel Meter

P
a
n
e

M
e
t
e
r
s
/
I
n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
The micropressure based Model LPI Loop Powered Indicator accepts a 4-20
mA input signal and displays the associated process variable such as pressure, level, flow,
temperature or relative humidity. Local or remote indication of process variable can be
viewed on the bright red four-digit LED. The user can quickly modify the instrument
configuration via three push buttons. Program input/output scaling, engineering units,
offset, decimal point position, and password protection. The Series LPI contains several
linearizations which can be applied to the display including straight linear, square root,
x 3/2, x 5/2, or a user defined 19 segment linearization curve. The indicator is housed in
a NEMA 4X (IP65) polycarbonate enclosure with a 1/2 female NPT side port.
SPECIFICATIONS @ 68F (20C)
Input: 4 to 20 mA.
Maximum Input Current: 100 mA for 1 minute.
Accuracy: 0.02% of full scale.
Stability: Zero: 0.002%/C; Span: 100 ppm/C.
Power Requirements: 2 wire 4 20 mA loop powered.
Display: 4 digit, 7.6 mm (high) red LED.
Maximum Display Range: 1999 to 9999.
Storage Temperatures: 58 to 185F ( 50 to 85C).
Weight: 6.0 oz (170 g).
Front Panel Protection: NEMA 4X (IP65).
Model
LPI
Loop Powered Indicators
Square Root Function and User Defined Curves 4-Digit LED
3-11/32
[84.9]
BOTTOM OF COVER
1/2 NPT
2-15/64
[56.7]
9/16
[14.2]
1-11/64
[29.7]
The Series BPI Battery Powered Indicator accepts RTD or Thermocouple input
and provides local or remote display of temperature measurements. Quickly navigate the
menu system to customize for each application. Three push buttons allow the user to
select input type, engineering units (F or C), offset temperature, decimal point position,
and password protection. The indicator is housed in a polycarbonate NEMA 4X (IP65)
enclosure for additional protection from the environment.
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: Thermocouple or RTD depending on model.
Accuracy: Thermocouple input: 0.1% of FS, 0.5C (plus sensor); RTD:
0.2C 0.1% of reading (plus sensor error).
Power Requirements: 3.6 V lithium battery.
Battery Life: >2 years.
Display: 4 digit LCD.
Resolution: 0.1C.
Weight: 6.0 oz (170 g).
Front Panel Protection: NEMA 4X (IP65).
Measuring Ranges
Series
BPI
Battery Powered Temperature Indicator
RTD or T/C Input, 4-Digit Display, Selectable F or C
Sensor
K
J
T
N
R
Range F (C)
328 to 2498F ( 200 to 1370C)
148 to 2192F ( 100 to 1200C)
346 to 752F ( 210 to 400C)
292 to 2372F ( 180 to 1300C)
14 to 3200F ( 10 to 1760C)
Model
BPI-101
BPI-102
Sensor
S
E
F
Pt100
Ni120
Range F (C)
14 to 3200F ( 10 to 1760C)
328 to 1832F ( 200 to 1000C)
148 to 1112F ( 100 to 600C)
148 to 1472F ( 100 to 800C)
148 to 1472F ( 100 to 800C)
1/2 NPT
9/16
[14.2]
2-15/64
[56.7]
1-11/64
[29.7]
3-11/32
[84.9]
Model LPI-111, Loop Powered Indicator with plastic enclosure
Input
3 wire Pt100 or Ni120
K, J, T, N, R, S, E, or F thermocouples

376
A
n
n
u
n
c
a
t
o
r
s
/
A
a
r
m

M
o
d
u
e
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Low cost 1/16 DIN units provide 3-1/2 digit, 0.3 high LED readings from four field
selectable input ranges. Includes integral power supply to operate 2-wire transmitters.
Optional low/high SPST alarm relays can be set for direct or reverse action.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage: 100 240 VAC. 132 240 VDC.
Input Ranges: 4 20 mA, 0 100 mV, 0 1 V or 0 10 V.
Optional Relay Ratings: 3A @ 250 VAC resistive, 1.5A @ 250 VAC inductive.
Pilot duty 250 VA, 2A @ 125 VAC or 1A @ 250 VAC.
Temperature Range: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Weight: 6.5 oz (185 g).
Process Indicator
1/16 DIN Housing, Optional Alarm
Series
1000
Indicating Alarm Annunciator
Up to 8 Inputs, Integral Power Supply
Series
AN2
The Series AN2 Indicating Alarm Annunciator provides visible and audible alarms for
up to eight inputs. The annunciator also has two SPDT relay outputs that can be used to
initiate external alarms, buzzers, or paging devices. The Integral 24 VDC power supply
can power most level, temperature, pressure, and flow switches. Audible alarm conditions
can be acknowledged, reset, or silenced either via the front panel push buttons or the rear
terminal block. The Series AN2 can be set to any common ISA sequences including First-
Out.
Number of
Outputs
4
4
8
8
4-5/32
[105.57]
2-7/32
[56.36]
1-31/32
[50]
3-29/32
[99.22]
4-7/32
[107.16]
3-9/16
[90.49]
37/64
[14.68]
4
[101.6]
4-13/16
[22.24]
3-1/2
[88.9]
Model
AN24-1
AN24-2
AN28-1
AN28-2
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: NO or NC switches, open collector transistor (open circuit voltage = 3.3
VDC); Logic levels: LO = 0 to 0.9 VDC, HI = 2.4 to 28 VDC (100 K input
impedance).
Outputs: Two SPDT relay (3 A @ 250 VAC or 30 VDC, resistive; 1/14 HP @
125/250 VAC, inductive).
Power Requirements: 85 to 265 VAC 50/60 Hz, 90 to 265 VDC; 12 to 36 VDC, 12
to 24 VAC (depending on model).
Power Consumption: 20 W (6 W on low voltage models).
Mounting: 1/8 DIN.
Housing Material: UL rated 94V 0 high impact plastic.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65) front panel.
Weight: 9.6 oz (272 g).
MODEL 1000 MADE N U S A
CONTROLS
1-7/8
[47.60]
1-3/4
[44.74] SQ.
1/4
[6.35]
4-15/16
[124.73] SQ.
PANEL
SPRING LOOP
MOUNTING COLLAR
(SHOWN IN POSITION)
Model 1000, Process Indicator
Model 1010, Process Indicator w/Alarm
Power Supply
85 to 265 VAC
12 to 36 VDC
85 to 265 VAC
12 to 36 VDC

F
a
n

S
p
e
e
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Process/Alarm Switch Module
Two Form C (SPDT) Switches, Small Size, Mounts Easily on 35 mm DIN Rail
The Series SC1090 Thermocouple Limit/Alarm Switch Modules are on-off or
limit switches with selectable process signal. Input type, scale range, output action,
and output type are all selectable by the user in the field. All selections are made
through easily accessible switches without the need to open the product. Each unit has
two form C (SPDT) relays which can operate independently, or be logically connected
to operate as a DPDT output. A two color LED indicator indicates the status of each
output relay.
These units mount easily on a standard 35 mm DIN rail. Low Voltage (SCL XXXX)
units are also available.
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: 4 to 20 mA, 10 to 50 mA, 0 to
20 mA, 0 to 10 V, 10 to 10 mV.
Power Supply: (SC units) 85 to 265
VDC/VAC 50 to 400 Hz (12 24 VDC,
VAC 50 400 Hz for low voltage
option, SCL units).
Isolation: 1500V rms between
outputs, input, and power.
Set Points: Adjustable 0 to 100% of
span.
Deadband: Adjustable 0.25% to
100% of span.
Drift: 0.02%/C typical 0.05%/C
maximum.
Ambient Temperature Range:
Storage: 40 to 176F ( 40 to 80C).
Input Impedance: (1090) voltage
input = 1 megohms, current input =
10 ohms.
Sensor Burnout Protection:
Selectable.
Relay Output: Form C, SPDT, one
per set point, 5A @ 250 VAC,
resistive.
Latch Circuit Reset: Automatic at
power up. Manual with reset switch
on front of module.
Indicators: One dual color LED per
set point. Red = relay on, green =
relay off.
Wiring Terminals: Screw driven
compression type.
Series
SC1090
&
SCL1090
DIN EN 50022-35
(NOT SUPPLIED)
ADAPTOR
BRACKET
FOR SURFACE
MOUNTING
(OPTIONAL)
7
10
8 9
B
A
M
O
D
E
1
2
3
4
O H D
R
A
LA
R
M
A
R
E
LATC
H
N
G
N
O
N
LATC
H
N
G
S
W
2
M
O
D
E
5
6
7
8
LO
D
R
A
LA
R
M
B
R
E
V
K
E
Y
=
O
N
=
O
F
F
B
LA
N
K
=
N
O
A
P
P
L
C
A
B
LE
S
W
1
290 2887
S
W
4
V
O
L
A
G
E
C
U
R
R
E
N
T
P
O
L
R
B
P
O
LA
R
ZE
R
O
B
A
S
E
D
ZE
R
O
+20%
M
O
D
E
1
2
3
4
O
U
T
P
U
T
D
A
S
N
G
LE
IN
P
U
T
10m
V
m
A
50m
V
m
A
100m
V
10m
A
200m
V
20m
A
0
V
5
m
A
1V
00m
A
5V 10V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R
A
N
G
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES (MILLIMETERS)
3.88
[98.5]
0.886
[22.5]
2.95
[75]
1.40
[35.3]
3.88
[98.5]
* Low Voltage Supply
The Model FC-1000 Electronic Fan Speed Control provides precise speed
modulation of small AC motors. Popular 0-10 VDC input works with most process
controllers, eliminating the need for more expensive dampers, damper actuators and
linkages while improving overall energy efficiency of the system. This inexpensive
unit enables variable control of ventilation fans, condenser fans and interfacing with
VAV box controllers.
Electronic Fan Speed Control
Low Cost, 0-10 VDC Input, Selectable Hard Start
Model
FC-1000
SPECIFICATIONS
Line Voltage Range: 120 277 VAC, 60 Hz.
Input Signal Voltage: 0 10 VDC.
Low Voltage Input: 24 VAC, class 2.
Input Signal Impedance: 10K ohms.
Full Load Amp Rating: 9.8 @120 VAC, 9.3 @ 208 VAC, 8.0 @ 240 VAC,
6.9 @ 277 VAC.
Locked Rotor Amp Rating: 24.0.
Electrical Connections: Line voltage: 10 32 screw terminals. Signal and low
voltage input: 1/4 quick connects.
Transient Protection: 320 V surge suppression. Exceeds IEEE C62.41
standards.
Housing Materials: Cold rolled steel.
Mounting: Vertical only; four holes provided for #10 screws.
Weight: 1 Ib, 11 oz (.77 kg).
Model
SC1090
SCL1090*
Model FC-1000, Electronic Fan Speed Control
Power Supply
85 to 2655 VDC/VAC
12 to 24 VDC/VAC

378
S
g
n
a

C
o
n
d
t
o
n
e
r
s
/
I
s
o
a
t
n
g

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Linearized and isolated RTD and Thermocouple transmitters are part
of the Series SC4000 Iso Verter
II Signal Conditioning Modules. These

modules completely isolate the input from the output and from ground.
Compatible with industry standard 35 mm DIN Rail mount transmitters and
isolators, these modules are easily applied in new or existing installations.
The SC4380 Process Signal Converter/Isolator accepts virtually all
standard process signals as an input, and isolates and retransmits the signal in
either the same units or virtually any other standard process signal. The
SC4380 can be field programmed for reverse or direct action and can receive
and transmit single sided or bipolar* signals. Low Voltage units (SCL) are also
available.
The SC4151 RTD Transmitters each offer a fixed scale range input (selected
when ordered) and a linearized, isolated, field selectable 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10
VDC output. Output is selected by simple switch settings. Low Voltage units
(SCL) are also available.
The SC4130 Thermocouple Transmitter offers a fixed scale range input
(selected when ordered) and a linearized, isolated, field selectable 4 to 20 mA
or 0 to 10 VDC output. Output is selected by simple switch settings.
Low Voltage units (SCL) are also available.
Note: The term bipolar refers to an input or output that crosses zero
volts. Certain devices have ranges that run from minus to plus voltages
(eg. 1 to +5 VDC, 10 to +10 VDC, etc.). The SC4380 Iso Verter
II can
be set up to accept a bipolar signal input or provide a bipolar output.
Iso Verter
II Signal Conditioning Modules

Accepts Virtually All Standard Process Signals
SPECIFICATIONS
Isolation: 1500 VAC RMS.
Linearity: 0.1% of full scale.
Drift: 0.02%/C typical, 0.05%/ C maximum.
Power Supply: SC: 85 to 265 VDC/VAC 50 to 400 Hz; SCL: 12 to 24
VDC/VAC 50 to 400 Hz.
Output Loads: Current: 600 ohms maximum voltage: 500 ohms
minimum (20 mA maximum).
Input Characteristics: SC4380: Voltage: 1 megohms impedance;
Current: 10 ohms; SC4151: RTD Search current < 500 A; SC4130: 3
megohms impedance.
Case Size: 0.866 W (22.5 mm) x 2.950 H (75.0 mm) 3 3.880 D
(98.5 mm).
Mounting: Mounts on industry standard 35 mm DIN Rail (DIN EN50022
35).
Inputs
0.886
[22.5]
2.950
[75]

3.880 [98.5]
1.400
[35.5]
Current
0 to 5 mA
0 to 10 mA
0 to 10 mA
0 to 20 mA
0 to 50 mA
0 to 100 mA
1 to 5 mA
4 to 20 mA
10 to 50 mA
Voltage
0 to 100 mV
0 to 200 mV
0 to 500 mV
0 to 1 V
0 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
1 to 5 V
2 to 10 V
Current
0 to 1 mA
0 to 5 mA
0 to 20 mA
1 to 5 mA
4 to 20 mA
Voltage
0 to 1 V
0 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
1 to 5 V
2 to 10 V
Series
SC4130
SC4151
SC4380
Model SC4151 Range Codes
A = DIN, 100 to 200C
B = DIN, 0 to 100C
C = DIN, 0 to 150C
D = DIN, 0 to 200F
E = DIN, 0 to 200C
F = DIN, 0 to 400F
G = DIN, 0 to 250C
H = DIN, 0 to 500F
J = DIN, 0 to 500C
K = DIN, 0 to 1000F To Order Use Range Code as Suffix:
SC4130 & SCL4130
SC4151 & SCL4151
SC4380 & SCL4380 Operating Ranges
Model SCL4130 Range Codes
A = J, 100 to 200C
C = J, 0 to 100C
D = J, 0 to 500F
E = J, 0 to 250C
F = J, 0 to 750C
G = J, 0 to 1000F
H = K, 150 to 350F
J = K, 100 to 200C
K = K, 0 to 500F
L = K, 0 to 250C
M = K, 0 to 1000F
N = K, 0 to 500C
P = K, 0 to 2000F
R = K, 0 to 1000C
S = T, 300 to 250F
T = T, 200 to 200C
Model SC4130 Range Codes
A = J, 100 to 200C
C = J, 0 to 100C
D = J, 0 to 500F
E = J, 0 to 250C
F = J, 0 to 750C
G = J, 0 to 1000F
H = K, 150 to 350F
J = K, 100 to 200C
K = K, 0 to 500F
L = K, 0 to 250C
M = K, 0 to 1000F
N = K, 0 to 500C
P = K, 0 to 2000F
R = K, 0 to 1000C
S = T, 300 to 250F
T = T, 200 to 200C
Model SCL4151 Range Codes
A = DIN, 100 to 200C
B = DIN, 0 to 100C
C = DIN, 0 to 150C
D = DIN, 0 to 200F
E = DIN, 0 to 200C
F = DIN, 0 to 400F
G = DIN, 0 to 250C
H = DIN, 0 to 500F
J = DIN, 0 to 500C
K = DIN, 0 to 1000F
Outputs

S
i
g
n
a
l

C
o
n
d
i
t
i
o
n
e
r
s
/
I
s
o
l
a
t
i
n
g

T
r
a
n
s
m
i
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
ACCESSORIES
SCC-4W, Power Supply 85 - 265 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
SCC-CC-A1, Windows
Software and Cable

Isolating Transmitters
Adds Single Channel Analog In or Out to a PLC
Series
MSP
Enclosure
Cover
Green
Indicator
Red
Indicator
Terminal Set
Screw (6)
88
[3.5]
12
[0.48]
The MSP family of analog I/O blocks offers the freedom to use any analog sensor with
many models of PLC. Each MSP block provides a single analog input (or output) interface
between the PLC and the analog world. Communications between the MSP unit and the
PLC is through a protocol that provides truly "open" architecture for analog signals to be
processed digitally.
The MSP is factory preconfigured to support specific analog input or output signals,
depending on the model. Optionally, the MSP signal range can be reconfigured in the field
using the windows based configuration software model SCC-CC-A1 (sold separately). Signal
Conditioners used in panels for isolation and converting signals for Boilers and Controls
Systems.
Input Analog Signal
The analog input signal is isolated, filtered, amplified, scaled and/or linearized by the MSP
micro-processor and converted to a 16-bt, binary weighted, digital word which is transmitted
serially (one bit at a time) at 24VDC signal levels to the PLCs discrete I/O port. At the
PLC, each binary-weighted bit sent to the discrete input is temporarily stored until all 16
bits have been received. The digital word is then reassembled and its value (proportional to
the analog signal) is placed in a working register of choice for decision making by the PLC
program.
Output Analog Signal
The numerical value representing a desired analog output signal is placed into a PLC
working register of choice. This value is transmitted serially (one bit at a time) at 24VDC
signal levels to the MSP through the PLCs discrete I/O port. The MSP scales, linearizes and
proportionally converts the digital signal to the voltage or current output signal. The signal
is then sent to the isolated output channel for use by a analog actuator connected at the
output channel.
SPECIFICATIONS
Isolation: 1500 VAC continuous (3-way, 2-way for excitation).
Inputs: See range chart.
Input Impedance: 1G ohm (mV/TC), 55K ohm (V), 82 ohm (C).
Output Impedance: >10M ohm (C), -0 ohm (V).
Power Requirements: 15-32 VDC @ 25 mA - 45 mA.
Accuracy: 0.05% F.S.
CJC Accuracy: 0.2C over 15 to 55C (ambient); 1.0C over -40 to 14C; .3C over
56 to 75C.
Drift: 0.01% F.S. per C (offset + gain).
Dimensions: 88 mm (H) x 68 mm (D) x 12 mm.
Ambient Operating Temperature: -40 to 167F (-40 to 75C).
Storage Temperature: -49 to 185F (-45 to 85C).
Humidity Conditions: 95% non-condensing.
Mounting: DIN rail (32 mm-G and 35 mm-H).
Connections: Screw terminals for 14-22 AWG.
Agency Approvals: UL, cUL, CSA, CE.
APPLICATION
Signal conditioners used in panels for isolation and converting signals for boilers and
controls systems.
- In
+ In -VDC
+VDC
+ OUT PLC
MSP-C-IN
68
[2.7]
Input/Output Ranges
Range C
-200 to 0 & 0 to 760
-200 to 0 & 0 to 1370
-200 to 0 & -160 to 400
-200 to 0 & -160 to 400
0 to 1768
0 to 1768
0 to 1832
-200 to 0 & 0 to 1300
-200 to +850
80 to +200
-200 to +850
g
Model
MSP-TC-IN
MSP-RTD-IN
MSP-V-IN
MSP-V-OUT
MSP-C-IN
MSP-C-OUT
MSP-POT-IN
Parameter
Thermocouple
RTD
Voltage
Voltage
Current
Current
Potentiometer
Input Type
Type J Thermocouple
Type K Thermocouple
Type T Thermocouple
Type E Thermocouple
Type R Thermocouple
Type S Thermocouple
Type B Thermocouple
Type N Thermocouple
100 Ohm Plt. 0.00385 DIN RTD
120 Ohm Nickel 0.00628 US RTD
1000 Ohm Plt. O.00385 DIN RTD
Potentiometer
Current/Voltage
Range F g
-328 to 32 & 32 to 1400
-328 to 32 & 32 to 2498
-328 to 32 & -256 to 752
-328 to 32 & -148 to 1832
32 to 3214
32 to 3214
32 to 3322
-328 to 32 & 32 to 2373
-328 to 1562
-112 to +392
-328 to +1562
0 to 500 min.; 0 to 100K max.
0-20 mADC/ 0 to 10 VDC
Signal Direction
To PLC
To PLC
To PLC
From PLC
To PLC
From PLC
To PLC
379.P.N:Layout 2 2/16/11 3:02 PM Page 1
380
S
g
n
a

C
o
n
d
t
o
n
e
r
s
/
I
s
o
a
t
n
g

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Series
SCC
Signal Conditioners
0.05% Accuracy, 1500 VAC Isolation, 3-Way
The Series SCC Signal Conditioners provide maximum accuracy with
minimal cost. Built-in microprocessor digitally scales, amplifies, linearizes and
isolates thermocouple, RTD, current, voltage, frequency or potentiometer analog
input signals. Units offer 16-bit input resolution with 0.05% full scale accuracy.
Eliminate ground loops with 1500VAC isolation. Two LEDs, one red and one
green, located on the front face of the enclosure provide visual indication of
operation. Additional features include short circuit, reverse power protection,
digital calibration and cold junction compensation.
Installation is a snap with the DIN rail mountable enclosure. Units are factory
set to support a specific analog input and output, however, can be easily
reconfigured to suit your application with the user-friendly Windows
Configuration software and cable (sold separately).

Also available is the SCC-4W DIN Rail Mount power supply and SCC-L1 Loop
Isolator. Model SCC-4W is designed specifically to provide 24 VDC power for the
SCC modules. Model SCC-L1 accepts a 4 to 20 mA signal and provides an isolated
4 to 20 mA signal output.
3.500
[88.90]
2.094
[53.18]
.500
[12.70]
* Units can be reconfigured from their factory (default) settings with the
SCC CC A1 Windows
Software (sold separately).

SPECIFICATIONS
Isolation: 1500 VAC. 3 way: C, V,
TC; 2 way: RTD, POT, FRQ, LI.
Input Protection: 220 VAC
continuous.
Input Impedance: 1G (mV/TC);
>55K (voltage); 82 (current).
Excitation: 150A (RTD), 1.25V
(POT).
Output Impedance: >10M
(current); ~ 0 (voltage).
Output Load: 600 (current);
4K (10 Volts); 2K ( 5
volts).
Power Requirements: 15 32
VDC @ 25 45 mA.
Over Voltage: 240 Vrms
continuous.
Accuracy: 0.05% full scale
(includes linearity, repeatability
and calibration errors).
Cold Junction Compensation:
0.2C ( 15 to 55 C) for all T/C.
Resolution: 16 bit (input); 13 bit
(output).
Drift: 0.01% full scale per C.
Ambient Operating
Temperature: Operating: 40 to
167F ( 40 to 75C).
Storage Temperature: 49 to
185F ( 45 to 85C); 0 95% RH,
non condensing.
Mounting: DIN rail (32 mm G and
35 mm H).
Connections: Socketed screw
terminals for 14 22 AWG.
Response Time: 150 ms @ 60
Hz, typical.
Housing Material: Polyamide.
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA,
FM, cUL, UL.
Model
SCC-C/C
SCC-C/V
SCC-V/C
SCC-V/V
SCC-TC/C
SCC-TC/V
SCC-RTD/C
SCC-RTD/V
SCC-POT/C
SCC-POT/V
SCC-FRQ/C
SCC-FRQ/V
Input Types and Ranges
0 to 10 mA, 0 to 20 mA,
4 to 20 mA, 10 mA, 20 mA
0 to 5V, 1 to 5V, 5V, 1.5V, 0 to 1.5 V, 0 to 1.25V,
1.25V, 300mV, 0 to 300 mV, 10mV,
0 to 10 mV, 0 to 50 mV, and 50mV
148 to 1832F, 328 to 32F (Type E T/C),
32 to 1400F, 328 to 32F (Type J T/C),
328 to 32, 32 to 2372F (Type N T/C),
32 to 2498F, 328 to 32F (Type K T/C),
256 to 752F, 32 to 752F (Type T T/C)
328 to 1562F (Pt100),
148 to 500F (Ni120),
148 to 500F (Cu10)
0 to 500
0 to 500 (min.) or 0 to 100K (max.)
[0 to 100] kHz at a magnitude of
0 to 50 mV, 0 to 500 mV, 0 to 5V,
0 to 50V or 0 to 250V
Default Input Range
4 20 mA
0 10V
Type J
32 to 1400F
Pt100
328 to 1562F
0 to 10K
0 10KHz (24 VDC)
Output Types and Ranges
0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 5V or 10V
0 to 5V, 1 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 2 to 10V
0 to 5V or 0 to 10V
0 to 5V or 0 to 10V
5V, 10V, 0 to 5V or 0 to 10V 1 to 5V
0 to 5V or 0 to 10
Default Output
Range
4 20 mA
0 to 10V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V
4 20 mA
0 to 10V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V
Windows

ACCESSORIES
SCC-L1, Loop Isolator 4 to 20 mA input and output
SCC-4W, Power Supply 85 265 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
SCC-CC-A1, Windows
Software and Cable

R
e
a
y
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Series
DSSR
DIN/Panel Mountable Solid State Relay
10 Amp, SPST-NO Operation, Internal Heat Sink
Series DSSR DIN/Panel Mountable Solid State Relay features an internal heat sink,
bistable clips for DIN rail or panel mounting and an LED indicator light. It is a completely
solid state relay - it has NO moving parts. The DSSR provides reliable switching and long-
life operation in applications where high inrush currents or induced currents can affect
mechanical state relay operation. The compact housing also minimizes panel space.
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating and Load Voltage Range:
24 to 280 VAC.
Sensor Current: 10 amps max.
terminals.
Switching Operation: SPST normally
open.
Switching Type: Zero cross.
( 30 to 80C).
Voltage Loss: 1.6 VAC max.
Output Leakage Current: 10 mA max.
Housing: Lexan 943.
Weight: 4.1 oz.
Agency Approvals: cUL, UL, CE,
RoHS.
AC Operated
Model
DSSR-10A-AC
DC Operated
Model
DSSR-10A-DC
Input Voltage Range
90 to 280 VAC
Input Voltage Range
3 to 32 VDC
45/64
[17.78]
19/32
[15.24]
13/64
[5.08]
GREEN
LED
19/64
[7.62]
13/64
[5.08]
19/32
[15.24]
3/32
[2.54]
45/64
[17.78]
3/32
[2.54] 2-37/64
[65.53]
1-13/32
[35.56]
3-1/2
[88.90]
2-19/32
[66.04]
1-51/64
[45.72]
1-13/32
[35.56]
3-19/32
[91.44]
RoHS
FEATURES
Internal heat sink
No contact bounce
No mechanical delay
DIN and panel mountable
17 mm wide modular design
Rated Current Load
10 amp
Rated Current Load
10 amp
Series
HSSR
Hockey Puck Solid State Relay
10 or 25 Amp, SPST-NO Operation
Series HSSR Hockey Puck Style Solid State Relay features a terminal cover and
LED status indicator. The optically coupled circuitry isolates the input terminals from the
output terminals to give the relay 100% pure solid state performance.
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating and Load Voltage Range:
24 to 280 VAC.
Electrical Connection: Spade lug.
Switching Operation: SPST normally
open.
Switching Type: Zero cross.
( 40 to 80C).
Voltage Loss: 1.6 VAC max.
Output Leakage Current: 10 mA max.
Housing: Polyamide 6.
Weight: 3.5 oz.
Agency Approvals: cUR, UR, CE,
RoHS.
AC Operated
Model
HSSR-10A-AC
HSSR-25A-AC
DC Operated
Model
HSSR-10A-DC
HSSR-25A-DC
Input Voltage Range
90 to 280 VAC
90 to 280 VAC
Input Voltage Range
3 to 32 VDC
3 to 32 VDC
LED
1-3/32
[27.94]
1
[25.40]
1-45/64
[43.18]
1-51/64
[45.72]
2-19/64
[58.42]
1
[25.40]
DATE CODE
1-13/32
[35.56]
1 2 OUTPUT
SOLID STATE RELAY
HSSR XXA XX
INPUT
INPUT VOLTAGE)
4 3
RoHS
FEATURES
Hockey puck design
Finger safe cover
LED status indicator
Optically coupled circuitry
ACCESSORY
151-0011, Heat Sink
Rated Current Load
10 amp
25 amp
Rated Current Load
10 amp
25 amp

382
R
e
a
y
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Current Amplifying
Model
SSR-25
SSR-210
On/Off Control
Model
SSR-312
Model
SSR-15
Intrinsically Safe Relay
SPST Switch Operation, 5 Amp
1-3/8
[33.34]
7/8
[22.23]
1-3/8
[34.93]
2-1/2 [63.50]
3 [76.20]
3-1/2 [88.90]
2-7/8
[73.03]
Model SSR-15 Intrinsically Safe Relay offers low power switching with
solid state reliability and eliminates explosive conditions. Units are completely
encapsulated and impervious to dust, moisture, or foreign material. Model SSR-
15 can be mounted in any orientation and is shock and vibration resistant.
Series
SSR
Solid State Relay
5 or 10 Amp, SPST Switch Operation
2-3/4 [69.8]
MTNG. CTRS.
7/32
[5.5]
2 HOLES
2-3/8
[60.3]
2-3/8
[60.3]
1
[25.4]
6-32
THREAD
1-9/16
[39.6]
2-3/4 [69.8]
MTNG. CTRS.
2-3/8
[60.3]
7/32
[5.5]
2 HOLES 6-32
THREAD
1-3/8
[34.9]
Series SSR Solid State Relays amplify the current handling capability of a
variety of sensors for controlling higher power loads. The relays are compact,
totally encapsulated and impervious to shock or vibration. Units feature SPST,
normally open switch operation and can control loads up to 5A or 10A depending
on model.
Models SSR-312 and SSR-324 are specifically designed to provide low current
start-stop or on-off switching for industrial motor, liquid level, and other
control systems. Units hold operational state up to a 1/2 second during
momentary power loss to cut nuisance shutdowns.
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating and Load Voltage Range: 105 to 125 VAC.
Max. Load Current: 5 Amp.
Switching Operation: SPST normally open.
Sensitivity: Turn on: 500; Turn off: 2000.
Voltage Loss: 2 VAC.
Max. Output Leakage Current: 6 mA @ 120 VAC.
Housing: Polysulfone.
Agency Approvals: Rated explosion proof for Class I, II, Div. 1 & 2,
Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G. UL, CSA, FM, and MSHA.
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating and Load Voltage Range: SSR 25 and SSR 210: 24 to 260
VAC; SSR 310: 100 to 130 VAC; SSR 324: 200 to 250 VAC.
Maximum Sensor Current: 20 mA.
Switching Operation: SPST normally open.
Voltage Loss: 2 VAC.
Leakage Current: Thru load terminal: 12 mA @ 240 VAC.
Max. Output Leakage Current: 6 mA @ 120 VAC.
Housing: Polysulfone.
Operating Range
24 to 260 VAC
24 to 260 VAC
Operating Range
100 to 130 VAC
Model SSR-25 Models SSR-210, -312, -324

Model SSR-15, Intrinsically Safe Relay
Max. Load
5 Amp
10 Amp
Max. Load
5 Amp

R
e
a
y
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
AC Operated
Model
EMR-24AC-SPDT
EMR-120AC-SPDT
EMR-24AC-DPDT
EMR-120AC-DPDT
DC Operated
Model
EMR-24DC-SPDT
EMR-12DC-DPDT
EMR-24DC-DPDT
Input
Voltage
24 VAC 50/60 Hz
120 VAC 50/60 Hz
24 VAC 50/60 Hz
120 VAC 50/60 Hz
Input
Voltage
24 VDC
12 VDC
24 VDC
Series
EMR
Electromechanical Relay
30 Amp, SPDT and DPDT Operation
The EMR Electromechanical Relay is small in size, features Class F
insulation for a max coil temperature of 155C, quick-connect terminals for
simple connection, and is panel mountable. The relays are compact and
impervious to shock and vibration. The EMR is perfect for motor control, power
supplies, lighting, and compressor loads.
FEATURES
Compact size
30 amp rating
Quick connect terminals
Flange mounting
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating and Load Voltage Range: 12 277 VAC; 5 110 VDC.
Electrical Connection: Quick connect tab terminals. SPDT 0.187 coil
terminal/0.25 contact terminal; DPDT 0.25 coil terminal/0.25 contact
terminal.
Switching Operation: SPDT or DPDT.
Electrical Rating:
SPDT: NO 30 A @ 240 VAC / 28 VDC
NC 10 A @ 240 VAC / 28 VDC;
DPDT: 30 A @ 240 VAC 20 A @ 28 VDC.
Temperature Limits:
Storage: 40 to 185F ( 40 to 85C);
Operation: 40 to 131F ( 40 to 55C)
Voltage Loss: 2.5 VA (VAC); 1W (VDC).
Cycle Life: 100,000 cycles (electrical); 10,000,000 cycles (mechanical).
Housing: Polyester resin.
Weight: 1.16 oz (45 g) (SPDT); 3 oz (85 g) (DPDT).
Agency Approvals:
UR, URc (EMR XXXX SPDT);
UL, ULc, CE, RoHS (EMR XXXX DPDT).
DPDT
SPDT
5/64
[2.03]
1-61/64
[49.53]
19/64
[7.62]
1-15/64
[31.50]
1-3/32
[27.94]
R 5/64
[R 1.80]
1-5/8
[41.40]
1-1/16
[26.92]
1
[25.25]
3/32
[2.29]
FOR #8 SCREWS
1-11/32
[34.29]
0.25 X 0.033 [6.35 X 0.84]
QUICK CONNECT TEMINALS
WITH SOLDER HOLE
1-39/64
[40.89]
1-3/16
[29.97]
3/16
[4.83]
2-3/64
[51.85]
2-11/16
[68.07]
2-11/32
[59.44]
RoHS
SPDT
DPDT
ACCESSORY
EMR-DIN, Din Adaptor
Coil
Resistance
500
3000
250
1600
Coil
Resistance
576
86
1600

384
C
u
r
r
e
n
t

T
r
a
n
s
f
o
r
m
e
r
s
/
S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Series
LTTJ
Current Transformers
0 to 10 VDC Analog Output, Fully Adjustable Output, Over Voltage Protection
Model
LTTJ-010
LTTJ-020
LTTJ-030
LTTJ-040
LTTJ-050
LTTJ-060
LTTJ-070
LTTJ-080
LTTJ-090
LTTJ-100
LTTJ-103
LTTJ-305
LTTJ-103I
LTTJ-305I
LTTJ-103S
LTTJ-305S
Series
SCS
Current Switches
Optional Relay Output, Solid or Split Core Case
The Series SCS Low Cost Current Switches are ideal for monitoring whether fans,
pumps, or motors are operating. The current flowing through the core of the device powers
the circuit without an external power supply. All models have a built in solid state output
and are easy to install. Optional LEDs and 10 Amp relay modules are available. The Series
SCS is available in both split and solid core configurations.
SPECIFICATIONS
Output: Isolated, normally open.
External Relay: SPST N.O., 10A at 260 VAC (5A at 30 VDC).
Power Requirements: None, self powered.
Isolation Voltage: 600 VAC RMS.
Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
Enclosure Rating: UL, 94 V O flammability rated, ABS plastic housing.
Agency Approvals: UL, CE.
1-27/32
[47.0]
2-35/64
[64.5]
63/64
[24.9]
1-5/64
[27.4]
1-9/16
[39.6]
1-5/64
[27.4]
2-35/64
[64.5]
2-9/16
[65.0]
2-45/64
[68.6]
2-9/16
[65.0]
2-45/64
[68.6]
2-9/16
[65.0]
1-1/16
[26.9]
1-1/16
[26.9]
Case
Solid
Solid
Solid
Split
Split
Split
Split
Split
Amperage
Range
.25 to 200 A
1 to 135 A
1 to 135 A
.15 to 200 A
1.5 to 200 A
1.25 to 135 A
1.5 to 200 A
1.25 to 135 A
Set Point
0.25 Fixed
Adjustable
Adjustable
0.15 Fixed
1.5 Fixed
Adjustable
1.5 Fixed
Adjustable
Switch
Mode
Under
Over/Under
Over/Under
Under
Under
Over/Under
Under
Over/Under
Model
SCS-120025
SCS-111100
SCS-111100-R
SCS-220015
SCS-220150
SCS-211125
SCS-220150-R
SCS-211125-R
Love Controls Series LTTJ Current Transformers allow easy monitoring of the
current flowing to your load. This easy to use device provides a 0 to 10 VDC signal into
both low and high impedance circuits, and is easily scalable to your needs.
Available in a number of different ranges, the Series LTTJ can be easily mounted on most
Series LTP Solid State Relays for convenient wiring. Some models feature an LED for
visual confirmation that current is flowing through the device.
FEATURES
0 to 10 VDC analog output
Impedance matching for high or low impedance inputs
Fully adjustable output
Over voltage protection
Models
SCS-111100 AND SCS-120025
Model
SCS-111100-R
Models
SCS-220015, SCS-220150, AND SCS-211125
Models
SCS-220150-R AND SCS-211125-R
[1.600] [1.550]
[1.650]
[1.150]
[.500]
Description
Current Transformer Calibrated to 10 VDC at 10 Amps
Current Transformer Adjustable from 10 to 30 Amps,
5 10 VDC Output
Current Transformer Adjustable from 30 to 50 Amps,
5 10 VDC Output
Current Transformer Adjustable from 10 to 30 Amps, LED Output
Current Transformer Adjustable from 30 to 50 Amps, LED Output
Current Transformer Adjustable from 10 to 30 Amps, NPN
Transistor Output
Current Transformer Adjustable from 30 to 50 Amps, NPN
Transistor Output
Snap-on
Relay
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

T
r
a
n
s
f
o
r
m
e
r
s
/
S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
True RMS Current Transformer
Field Selectable Range, Split Core Case
Series
CT60/70
Current Transformer
4-20 mA or 0-5 VDC Output, Split Core Case
Series
CT40/50
Split Core-Top Terminals
Split Core-Top Terminals
Series CT40/50 combine current transformer and signal conditioner into a
single package. Transformers feature jumper selectable ranges and split core
case. Units are designed for applications on linear or sinusoidal AC loads.
Series CT60/70 Current Transformers provide true RMS output
on distorted AC waveforms ideal for nonlinear loads or noisy
environments. Each model offers three jumper selectable ranges and
1270 VAC isolation. Split core case allows easy installation.
SPECIFICATIONS
Output Signal: 0 5 VDC or 4 20 mA, depending on model.
Power Requirements: See table.
Accuracy: CT40/50 102: 1.0% FS; CT40/50 100: 0.5% FS.
Response Time: CT40/50 102: 100 ms; CT40/50 100: 300 ms.
Isolation Voltage: 1270 VAC.
Frequency: CT40/50 102: 50 60 Hz; CT40/50 100: 20 100 Hz
(sinusoidal waveforms only).
Enclosure Rating: UL 94V 0 flammability rated.
SPECIFICATIONS
Output Signal: 4-20 mA, loop powered, true RMS.
Power Requirements: 24 VDC nominal.
Accuracy: 0.8% FS.
Response Time: 600 ms to 90%.
Isolation Voltage: 1270 VAC.
Frequency: 10-400 Hz.
Enclosure Rating: UL 94V-0 flammability rated.
33/64
[13.21]
1/8
[3.18]
33/64
[13.21]
1-3/16
[29.94]
23/32
[18.33]
3-17/32
[89.70]
2-13/32
[61.01]
3-3/64
[77.36]
RANGE JUMPER
3/16 I.D. TYP.
2 PLACES
55/64
[21.85]
2-13/32
[60.99]
23/64
[9.15]
2-1/4
[57.15]
55/64
[21.73]
33/64
[13.21]
1/8
[3.18]
33/64
[13.21]
1-3/16
[29.94]
23/32
[18.33]
3-17/32
[89.70]
2-13/32
[61.01]
3-3/64
[77.36]
RANGE JUMPER
3/16 I.D. TYP.
2 PLACES
55/64
[21.85]
2-13/32
[60.99]
23/64
[9.15]
2-1/4
[57.15]
55/64
[21.73]
Output
4 20 mA
0 5 VDC
4 20 mA
0 5 VDC
Range
10/20/50 A
10/20/50 A
100/150/200 A
100/150/200 A
Model
CT40-100
CT40-102
CT50-100
CT50-102
Model
CT60-100
CT70-100
Power Requirements
12 40 VDC,
Loop Powered
Self Powered
12 40 VDC,
Loop Powered
Self Powered
Range
10/20/50 A
100/150/200 A

386
S
S
R

M
o
n
t
o
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Series
LTT
SSR Monitors
Monitors SSRs for Loss of Line, Open Load, Shorted SSR, Loss of DC Power
Love Controls LTT Series SSR Monitors allow easy monitoring of the
operation of your SSR switches. This handy device compares the input status
with the output status. An alarm operates a relay contact to tell you if the load
circuit has opened or if the SSR has shorted. The LTT mounts easily on most
SSRs with no additional hardware. Protect your system today.
FEATURES
Monitors SSRs for loss of line, open load, shorted SSR, loss of DC power
Mounts on standard SSRs over the connection terminals
Designed to fit under finger safe cover
LED status indicator
Normally closed dry relay contact 200 VDC @ 0.5A max.
Model
LTT12-0
LTT24-0
LTT12-1
LTT24-1
Model
MN-1
Mini-Node
Communication Signal Converter

Converts RS-485 to USB, Integral USB Connector, No External Power
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Requirements: No external power required.
Power Consumption: 0.4 W.
Isolated Voltage: 3000 VDC.
Input Impedance: 96 k.
USB Connector: B type (female).
RS-485 Connector: RJ 45.
Baud Rate: 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,
57600, and 115200 bps.
Compatibility: Full compliance with USB V.2.0 specification.
The Model MN-1 Mini-Node
Communication Signal Converter is a low

cost device that converts half duplex RS-485 serial communications signals into
a signal that can be read by any computer with a USB port. The integral USB
connector and RJ-45 connector reduces set up time by eliminating extra wiring.
The Model MN-1 is powered via the USB connection which eliminates the need
for an external power source. The compact size is great for field installation,
control panels, and lab testing.
YELLOW LED GREEN LED
27/32
[21.43]
3-13/64
[81.36]
57/64
[22.62]
[2.500]
[1.550]
Model MN-1, Mini Node
USB to RS 485 Converter

Description
Solid State Relay Monitor, 10 19 VDC Trigger,
100 660 VAC Load
100 660 VAC Load
100 660 VAC Load w/Driver Circuit Test
100 660 VAC Load w/Driver Circuit Test

S
g
n
a

C
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Mother Node
Communication
Signal Converter
Converts RS-232 to RS-485, Isolates & Repeats
Series
350
The Mother Node
Communication Signal Converter line of RS-232

to RS-485 converters offers an easy way to use virtually any PC to
communicate with half duplex RS-485 devices. Complicated hand-
shaking issues are eliminated with these easy to use converters. The
Mother Node
TM
converters come in three levels of sophistication to offer
the exact combination of features you need. The Mother Node
Silver
Converter is a low cost device that converts signals at baud rates to
19.2 KBaud. Installation is simple, just connect the two RS-485 wires,
the quick connect RS-232 cable, and the power transformer. No
additional connections or settings are required. The Mother Node
Gold Converter adds optical isolation and an additional quick connect

(RJ-11) RS-485 output. The Mother Node
Platinum Converter adds

the ability to operate as either a converter or a RS-485 repeater. In
repeater mode the RS-485 standard of 32 devices and 1800m (6000 ft.)
of cable run can be increased. In place of the 32nd device on the line,
the Mother Node

Platinum Converter reforms and repeats the wave
forms to add an additional 32 devices and 1800m (6000 ft.) of cable.
When used with Love Controls products with Option 992, you can
address up to 1020 devices on a single port.
FEATURES
Converts RS-232 signals to RS-485
Connects half-duplex devices to full duplex hosts
Transmission speeds to 19.2 kbaud
Available with 1500V optical isolation
Operates on 12 VDC
Available with 120 VAC adaptor
Available repeater allows expansion of RS-485 beyond standard
32 devices and 1800 m (6000 ft)
Model
351-9
351-9N
352-9
352-9N
Description
Mother Node
Silver RS-232 to RS-485 Converter

Mother Node
Silver RS-232 to RS-485 Converter

Mother Node
Gold RS-232 to RS-485 Converter

Mother Node
Gold RS-232 to RS-485 Converter

Isolator
Power Transformer
Model
Silver
Gold
Platinum
A
109.5
(4.312)
139.7
(5.500)
188.1
(6.562)
B
61.9
(2.437)
84.1
(3.312)
98.4
(3.875)
C
61.9
(2.437)
34.9
(1.375)
31.8
(1.250)
D
84.1
(3.312)
114.3
(4.500)
139.7
(5.500)
A
B
C
D
Connector
DB9F
DB9F
DB9F
DB9F

388
I
n
t
r
n
s
c
a
y

S
a
f
e
B
a
r
r
e
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Model
KFD0
Galvanic Barrier
Loop Powered, Intrinsically Safe Isolators
The Model KFD0 Loop Powered, Galvanic Barrier provides complete
isolation for communication with Dwyer
intrinsically-safe transmitters
approved for use in hazardous areas. Galvanic barrier eliminates the need for
a high integrity earth ground required when using shunt type diode type safety
barriers. Unlike most other isolators, the Model KFD0 does not require external
power and has a low current draw. The housing is designed to easily mount on
most standard DIN rails.
SPECIFICATIONS
Hazardous Area Input:
Signal range: 4 to 20 mA (linear transmission 1 22 mA);
Available transmitter voltage: 16 V for supply voltage > 21 V.
Safe Area Output:
Signal range: 4 to 20 mA;
Transmitter voltage: 30 VDC.
Response Time: 20 s at 0, and 600 s at 800 load.
Maximum Power Disipation: 150 mW @ 20 mA and V<24 V.
Temperature Drift: 0.5 A/C.
Weight: 4.2 oz (120 g).
Model
KFD0-SCS-EX1.55
Approval
FM for Class I, Zone 1,
Groups IIC, IIB, IIA; Class I, II, III,
Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D, F, G
Dwyer Series
HHT IX
Model
KFD0-SCS-EX1.55
Vo (V)
23.1
mH
0.5
2.5
2.5
Io (mA)
38.2
Group
IIC (A, B)
IIB (C)
IIA (D, F, G)
F
0.042
0.267
0.267
4-37/64 [116.46]
4-3/8 [111.20]
25/32 [20.00]

I
n
t
r
n
s
c
a
y

S
a
f
e
B
a
r
r
e
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Group
A & B
C
D
Series
MTL5041/
5045
Galvanic Barrier
Intrinsically Safe Isolators for Hazardous Locations
The MTL5041/5045 Galvanic Barrier provide total intrinsically safe
isolation for communication with Dwyer
pressure transmitters approved for

location in hazardous areas. Galvanic barrier eliminates the need for a high
integrity earth ground required when using shunt diode type safety barriers.
DIN rail mounting and plug-in signal and power connectors simplify installation
and maintenance
SPECIFICATIONS
Hazardous Area Input:
Signal range: 0 to 24 mA (including over range);
Transmitter voltage: 16.5 V at 20 mA.
Safe Area Output:
Signal range: 4 to 20 mA;
Safe area load resistance: 0 to 1k;
Safe area output resistance: >2M.
Power Requirement: 20 to 35 VDC.
Response Time: Settles to within 10% of final value within 250 s.
Current Consumption (20 mA signal):
70 mA at 24 VDC;
85 mA at 20 VDC;
55 mA at 35 VDC.
Maximum Power Dissipation (20 mA signal): 1.2 W at 24 VDC.
Isolation: 250 V rms between input, output and power supply terminals.
Transfer Accuracy at 68F (20C): Better than 20 A (typically 5 A).
LED Indicator: Green: Power indication.
Temperature Limits: Operating: 4 to 140F ( 20 to 60C); Storage: 40
to 176F ( 40 to 80C).
Temperature Drift: <1 A/C.
Humidity: 5 to 95% RH.
Mounting: 1.4 (35 mm) top hat rail to:
EN 50022 35 x 7.5;
BS 5584;
35 x 27 x 7.3 DIN 46277.
Terminals: Accommodate up to 2.5 mm
2
stranded or single core.
Safety Description: 28 V, 300, 93 mA; Um=250 rms or dc.
Weight: 3.9 oz (110 g).
Agency Approvals: See table below.
MTL5041
41/64
[16.27]
HAZARDOUS
AREA TERMINAL
SAFE AREA
TERMINAL
4-3/32
[103.98]
4-11/32
[110.33]
Compatible Models: 637, 638, 608, 2700, 2800, 2900,
SBLTX, PBLTX, IS626
Galvanic
Barrier
MTL5041
MTL5041
MTL5041
MTL5041
MTL5045
MTL5045
Approval
FM for Class I, II, II; Div. 1 Groups
C, D, F, G
UL for Class I; Div. 1 Groups A, B, C, D
Class II Div. 1 Groups E, F, G Class III Div 1
FM for Class I, II, III; Div. 1 Groups B, C, D,
E, F, G
FM for Class I, II, III; Div. 1 Groups A, B, C,
D, E, F, G
FM for Class I, II, III; Div. 1 Groups C, D, E,
F, G
FM for Class I, II, III; Div. 1 Groups C, D, E,
F, G
Dwyer
Series
638
IS626,
SBLTX,
PBLTX
637
608
2900
2700/2800
Region (Authority)
USA (FM)
Canada (CSA)
UK (BASEEFA)
UK (BASEEFA)
Systems
Standard
3600, 3610 entity
3611, 3810
CAN/CSA
E60070, UL698,
UL913, UL1604,
IEC60079, C22.2
EN 50014, EN 50020
EN 50039
Approved For
AIS/I,II,III/1/Entity ABCDEFG
SCI 942; NI/I/@/ABCD/T4
[I/0] AEx[ia]IIC SCI 942
Entity; NI/1/2/IIC/T4;
Ta=140F (60C)
Class I, Div.2, Gps A, B, C, D;
Ex nA [iA] IIC T4
Class I, Xone 2, Aex nA IIC
T4
EEx ia IIC
EEx ia IIC
Certificate/file no.
3010737
1345550
BAS01ATEX7217
Ex01E2219
M
T
L
5
0
4
1
/
5
0
4
5
F
0.13
0.30
1.04
mH
4.2
12.6
33.6
BASEEFA (ATEX)
FM
Group
IIC
IIB
IIA
F
0.083
0.85
2.15
mH
3.05
9.15
244
H/
55
210
444

390
I
n
t
r
n
s
c
a
y

S
a
f
e
B
a
r
r
e
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Series
MTL7706/
7787
Zener Barrier
Intrinsically Safe Barriers for Hazardous Locations
The MTL7706/7787 is an intrinsically safe (IS) shunt-diode barrier that can
be used to communicate with and provide isolations for certain Dwyer
transmitters approved for use in hazardous areas. These barriers limit the
amount of energy allowed to pass into the hazardous area, which inhibit ignition
in flammable atmospheres.
SPECIFICATIONS
Transmitter Voltage: 16.2 V at 20 mA with 250 load (negative w.r.t.
earth); 11.0 V at 20 mA with 500 load (negative w.r.t. earth).
Safe Area Output: 4 to 20 mA.
Load Resistance: 0 to 500.
Power Requirement: 20 to 35 VDC w.r.t. earth.
Accuracy: 2 A under all conditions.
LED Indicator: Green: Power indication.
Temperature Limits:
Storage: 40 to 176F ( 40 to 80C).
Humidity: 5 to 95% RH.
Terminals: Accommodate up to 2.5 mm
2
stranded or single core.
Safety Description: 28 V, 300, 93 mA.
Weight: 4.9 oz (140 g).
Agency Approvals: See table below.
Compatible Models: 637, 638, 608, SBLTX, PBLTX, IS626
MTL Zener Barrier
MTL7706
MTL7706
MTL7706
MTL7706
Approval
FM for Class I, II, II; Div. 1 Groups
C, D, F, G
UL for Class I; Div. 1 Groups A, B, C, D
CL II; Div. 1 Groups E, F, G; CL III Div. 1
FM for Class I, II, III; Div. 1 Groups B,
C, D, E, F, G
FM for Class I, II, III; Div. 1 Groups A,
B, C, D, E, F, G
Dwyer
Series
638
IS626
SBLTX
PBLTX
637
608
Region (Authority)
USA (FM)
Canada (CSA)
UK (BASEEFA)
UK (BASEEFA)
Systems
Standard
3600, 3610 entity
3611, 3810
CAN/CSA
E60070, UL698,
UL913, UL1604,
IEC60079, C22.2
EN 50014, EN 50020
EN 50039
Approved For
AIS/I,II,III/1/Entity ABCDEFG
SCI 942; NI/I/@/ABCD/T4
[I/0] AEx[ia]IIC SCI 942
Entity; NI/1/2/IIC/T4;
Ta=140F (60C)
Class I, Div.2, Gps A, B, C, D;
Ex nA [iA] IIC T4
Class I, Xone 2, Aex nA IIC
T4
EEx ia IIC
EEx ia IIC
Certificate/file no.
3010737
1345550
BAS01ATEX7217
Ex01E2219
M
T
L
7
7
0
6
MTL7787
HAZARDOUS
AREA TERMINALS
SAFE AREA
TERMINAL
1/2
[12.70]
3-35/64
[90.09]
4-5/32
[105.57]
Group
A & B
Group
IIC
F
0.083
F
0.083
mH
4.2
mH
4.2
BASEEFA (ATEX)
FM
M
T
L
7
7
8
6Group
A & B
Group
IIC
F
0.083
F
0.083
mH
3.05
mH
3.05
BASEEFA (ATEX)
FM

P
o
w
e
r

S
u
p
p
e
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Model
BPS-015
Low Cost DC Power Supply
1.5A, Fuse Protection
SNAPTRACK
4-1/16
[103.12]
2-19/64
[58.17]
1-15/16
[49.02]
11/16
[17.27]
The Model BPS Building Automation Power Supply is used to convert 24 VAC to
a regulated DC power source for transmitters with 4 to 20 mA outputs. The output voltage
can be field adjusted from 1.5V to 27V using a potentiometer. The 3A fuse protects the
power supply from over-current conditions. The snap-on bracket can be quickly surface
mounted to any flat surface.
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: 24 VAC/VDC 50/60 Hz.
Output: 24 VDC (full wave rectified and regulated) adjustable 1.5 to 27 VDC.
Maximum Current Output: 1.5A (de rated to 400 mA for non isolated circuits).
Humidity Limits: 95% (non condensing).
Weight: 0.4 lb. Model BPS-015, Power Supply
Economical and reliable power supply is suitable for powering all Dwyer pressure,
temperature or air velocity transmitters. Inexpensive, open-frame design allows
convenient access to input/output solder terminals. Auxiliary inputs are selectable for
operation from power sources found worldwide. Compact size eases enclosure
installations.
SPECIFICATIONS
AC Input: 100/120/220/230 240 VAC 10%, 47 63 Hz.
DC Output: 24 28 VDC regulated.
Maximum Current Output: 500 mA (derated to 450 mA @ 50 Hz. operation).
External Fuse Required: 0.5 Amp for 100 120 VAC, 0.25 Amp for 220 240 VAC.
Dimensions: 4 7/8H x 4W x 1 5/8D
Weight: 2 lb.
Series
A-700
Power Supply
Model
A-699
Control Transformer
UL and CSA listed Class 2 step down transformer is mounted on a 4-1/4 square plate
stand-off for direct installation in standard 4 x 4 x 1-1/2 junction boxes. The A-699 is
suitable for powering all Dwyer 4-wire transmitters and Model 660 Air Velocity Monitor.
SPECIFICATIONS
AC Input: 120 VAC, 60 Hz.
AC Output: 24 VAC.
Maximum Current output: 400 mA (typically). 10 VA max.
Electrical Connections: Primary, 6 1/2 leads; Secondary, 6 32 screw terminals.
(Manufactured for Dwyer Instruments, Inc.)
Weight: 1 lb, 4 oz.
Model A-700, (0.5 Amp)
Model A-700-2, (2 Amp)
Model A-700-4, (4.8 Amp)
Model A-699, Control Transformer

392
T
m
e
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Series
LCT016
Analog Timers
Low Cost, 1/16 DIN Panel Mount, Four Timing Functions
The LCT016 Analog Timers provide simple, yet economical solutions for a
variety of timing applications. Installation is simple with compact 1/16 DIN
package. Scale and timing functions are easily adjusted with individual front
mounted switches. The included tamper resistant cover discourages
unauthorized changes of the scale, timing functions and restricts movement of
the analog set point knob. Two LEDs on the front indicate power and output
status. Four different timing functions and sixteen different time scales give
you the greatest flexibility.
48.0
[1.890]
48.0
[1.890]
DIMENSIONS IN MM [INCHES]
16.0
[0.630]
37.0
[1.460]
80.4
[3.165]
94.0
[3.701]
44.8
[1.764]
13.6
[0.535]
63.7
[2.062]
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature Range:
32 to 131F (0 to 55C).
Humidity Conditions: 35 to 85%
RH, non condensing.
Control Output Ratings: Relay,
SPDT, 5A @ 250 VAC resistive.
Weight: 3.17 oz (90 g).
Socket: LCT016 3x: Standard 8
pin plug in socket; LCT016 1x:
Standard 11 pin plug in socket.
Accuracy: Repeatability: 0.3%
of maximum rated time. 0.3%
10ms for 1.2 sec range; Line
stability: 0.5% of maximum rated
time, 0.5% 10ms for 1.2 second
range.
Reset Time: 0.1 second,
maximum.
Status Lights: Green LED
indicates power on; Red LED
indicates output status.
Inputs: Logic inputs for start,
reset, and inhibit.
Timing Functions: a. Signal on
delay; b. Flicker off start; d. Signal
on/off Delay; e. Signal off delay.
Supply Voltage: 100 to 240
VDC/VAC 50~60 Hz.
Power Consumption: 10VA.
Series
LCT116
Digital Timers
Low Cost, 1/16 DIN Panel Mount,Ten Timing Functions
The LCT116 Digital Timers provide simple, yet economical solutions for a
variety of timing applications. Installation is simple with compact 1/16 DIN
package. Set point and timing functions are easily adjusted with the individual
set buttons. A LCD display on the front indicates current time status and a
bargraph for indicating relative time remaining. Ten different timing functions
and ten different time scales give you the greatest flexibility.
15/64
[5.99]
2-47/64
[69.51]
17/32
[13.60]
1-49/64
[44.97]
2-31/32
[75.50]
1-57/64 SQ
[48.00]
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature Range:
32 to 131F (0 to 55C).
Humidity Conditions: 35 to 85%
RH, non condensing.
Control Output Ratings: Relay,
SPDT, 5A @ 250 VAC resistive.
Weight: 5.3 oz (150 g).
Socket: LCT116 1x: Standard
8 pin plug in socket; LCT116 2x:
Standard 11 pin plug in socket.
Accuracy: Repeatability: 0.3%
of maximum rated time; Line
stability: 0.5% of maximum rated
time.
Status Light: LCD shows time
and function details.
Inputs: Logic inputs for start,
reset, and inhibit.
Timing Functions: a. Signal on
Delay; b. Flicker on start; c. Signal
on/off delay; d. Signal off delay; e.
Interval mode; f. One shot and
flicker; g. Integration time; h.
Interval delay; i. Flicker One
shot; j. Power on start.
Supply Voltage: 100 to 240
VDC/VAC 50~60 Hz.
Model LCT016-10, 11 pin timer
ACCESSORIES
481-0159, (8 pin sockets)
481-0164, (11 pin sockets)
ACCESSORIES
481-0159, (8 pin sockets)
481-0164, (11 pin sockets)

T
m
e
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Series
LCT216
Digital Timer/Tachometer/Counter
3 Controls in 1 Device, DIP Switch Configuration
The Series LCT216 combines a versatile timer, counter, and tachometer in
one device. The bright, easy-to-read display shows both the desired set point
and the current process value as well as the operating mode that the control is
functioning in. The fourteen pre-programmed timer functions are easy to set up
and cover most applications. The counting functions include one stage or two
stage counting along with batch, total, or dual counting modes. The Series
LCT216 can also be used as a tachometer to measure rotational speeds. For
quick set up, many of the programming parameters can be set with external dip
switches located on the side of the unit.
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature Range: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Humidity Conditions: 35 to 85% RH (non condensing).
Control Output Ratings: (Out 1) Relay: SPST 5A at 250 VAC;
Transistor: NPN open collector 100 mA / 30 VDC residual voltage = 1.5
VDC max; (Out 2) Relay: SPST 5A at 250 VAC, Transistor: NPN open
collector 100 mA / 30 VDC residual voltage = 1.5 VDC max.
Reset Time: 0.001 seconds minimum.
Inputs: Dry contact, PNP, or NPN.
Timing Functions: 14 pre programmed timing functions.
Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC 50 / 60 Hz.
Power Consumption: Less than 10 VA.
Internal Power Supply: 12 VDC 10%, 100 mA.
Display: Two line 6 digit negative transmissive LCD display.
1-7/8
[47.63]
1-7/8
[47.63]
3-1/8
[79.50]
3-23/64
[85.22]
DIP SWITCH
1-3/4
[44.45]
Model
LCT216-100
LCT216-110
The Series LCT316 Low Cost Digital Timer provides accurate countdown
timing for a variety of applications. The timer can be triggered remotely using
the digital input terminals or locally via the set button. Time intervals can be
set up to 999 minutes or seconds. The Series LCT316 has an internal buzzer to
alert when the time interval has expired.
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature Range: 32 to 158F (0 to 70C).
Control Output Ratings: Relay, SPST NO, 16A at 250 VAC resistive.
Weight: 5.6 oz (158.8 g).
Status Light: LED shows time and operation.
Inputs: Digital input for start and reset.
Supply Voltage: 115 VAC, 230 VAC, 12 VAC/DC, 24 VAC/DC
depending on model.
Power Consumption: 4VA.
Agency Approvals: CE, UR.
Series
LCT316
Low Cost Digital Timer
Quick Installation, Digital Input, Audible Alarm
Model
LCT316-100
LCT316-200
LCT316-300
LCT316-400
1-1/8
[28.57]
2-7/16
[61.91]
3
[76.20]
1-11/32
[33.99]
Output Type
Transistor
Relay
Supply Voltage
115 VAC
230 VAC
12 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC

394
T
m
e
r

C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Ideal for pneumatic conveying systems, the Series DCT500A Low Cost Timer
Controller is designed to provide continuous or on-demand cleaning for receivers and pulse
jet systems. Available in either 4, 6 or 10 channels, each unit is the same size, minimizing
enclosure space and reducing overall system installation cost.
The DCT500A is simple and easy to use. Time-On and Time-Off settings are selected using
two potentiometers. High Limit and Low Limit control inputs are provided for use with
on demand systems. The new enhanced board circuitry of the DCT500A synchronizes the
on-time pulse to the power line to achieve a pulse stability of 1 msec.
For added safety, the control circuitry including the control inputs are isolated from the line
voltage.
To meet your system requirements, an optional weatherproof enclosure is available. For
on demand systems, a Dwyer Series A3000 Photohelic
gage or Series 1800 Pressure

Switch may be used with the DCT500A.
SPECIFICATIONS*
Output Channels: 4, 6, & 10
channels.
Power Requirements: 102 to 132
VAC 50 or 60 Hz.
Solenoid Supply: 3A max. per
channel.
Fuse: Type 3 AG, 3 A @ 250 VAC.
( 40 to 60C).
Storage Temperature Limits:
40 to 176F ( 40 to 80C).
On Time: 50 msec to 500 msec.
On Time Accuracy: 10 msec.
On Time Stability: 1 ms.
Off Time: 1 second to 180 seconds.
Off Time Accuracy: 5% of setting.
Agency Approval: CE, UL, cUL.
Low Cost Timer Controller
Compact, Easy to Use; 4, 6 or 10 Channels
Series
DCT500A
CONNECT UMPER TO LAST
CHANNEL USED
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
25
1
50
75
TIME OFF 100
1 5
150
75
200 SEC
mSEC
0
1 0
15
200
250 00
350
4 0
4 0
00
T ME ON
R29 R31
D
W
YER
N
STR
U
M
EN
TS
M
C
H
G
AN
C
TY
N
N
D
U
STR
AL C
O
N
TR
O
L EQ
U
PM
EN
T
L
N
E N
P
T R
AT
N
G
1
0 VAC

10%
5%
50
60 H
Z S
N
G
LE PH
ASE
TH
S U
N
T M
U
ST BE
EN
C
LO
SED
U
SE N
EC
C
LASS 1 W
R
N
G
R
TED

6
C
7
C
U
SE 14
22 G
A C
O
PPER
O
N
Y FO
R
L
N
E
AN
D
LO
AD
C
O
N
N
EC
T
O
N
S
TO
R
Q
U
E TER
M
N
ALS
TO
5 N

B
R
EPLAC
E FU
SE W
TH
TYPE 3AG
FAST
AC
T
N
G
3
M
P 250V O
N
Y
F
LU
R
E TO
C
O
M
PLY
W
TH
TH
ESE R
E
U
R
EM
EN
TS W
LL VO
D
M
AN
U
FAC
TU
R
ES W
AR
R
AN
TEE
WRE STR P GAUGE
0 250 IN MAX
L1 L2 SOL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
COM OUTPUTS 300 VA MAX)
DO NOT USE SLOW BLOW FUSES
LINE VOLTAGE
102 VAC TO 132 VAC MAX
50-60 HZ
0
5
4
4
3
1
7
9
-0
0
V
E
R
0
H GH
L MIT
COM
LOW
L MIT
POWER
ON
D
164-1/4
[107.95]
4-7/8
[123.8]
1/16
[1.59]
1/2
[12.70]
1-21/64
[33.73]
6-3/4 [171.45]
6-1/4 [158.75]
FVN
0
0
Low Cost Timer Controller
For Low Voltage Applications
Ideal for pneumatic conveying systems, the Series DCT500ADC Low Cost Timer
Controller is designed to provide continuous or on-demand cleaning for 10-35 volt powered
receivers and pulse jet systems. Available in either 4, 6 or 10 channels, each unit is the
same size, minimizing enclosure space and reducing overall system installation cost.
The DCT500ADC is simple and easy to use. Time-On and Time-Off settings are selected
using two potentiometers. High Limit and Low Limit control inputs are provided for use
with on demand systems.
For added safety, the control circuitry including the control inputs are isolated from the line
voltage.
To meet your system requirements, an optional weatherproof enclosure is available. For on
demand systems, a Dwyer Series A3000 Photohelic
gage or Series 1800 Pressure Switch

may be used with the DCT500ADC.
1/16
[1.59]
1/2
[12.70]
1-3/16
[30.16]
6-1/4 [158.75]
6-3/4 [171.45]
4-1/4
[107.95]
4-7/8
[123.83]
TIME OFF TIME ON
SEC mSEC
F1
SPECIFICATIONS*
channels.
Solenoid Supply: 3A max. per
channel.
( 40 to 60C).
40 to 176F ( 40 to 80C).
On Time Stability: <1 ms.
Off Time: 1 second to 180 seconds.
Series
DCT500ADC
Model
DCT504A
DCT506A
DCT510A
Description
Timer Controller
Timer Controller
Timer Controller
Model
DCT504ADC
DCT506ADC
DCT510ADC
Description
Timer Controller
Timer Controller
Timer Controller
*Additional specifications on IOM.
OPTIONS
WP Weatherproof Housing Only
L Mounting Bracket for Field Retrofits:
8 1/4 x 6 1/4 (209.55 mm x 158.75 mm)
OPTIONS
L Mounting Bracket for Field Retrofits:
8 1/4 x 6 1/4 (209.55 mm x 158.75 mm)
No. of Channels
4
6
10
No. of Channels
4
6
10

T
m
e
r

C
o
n
t
r
o
e
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
The Series DCT600 Timer Controller is a timing system for pulse-jet type
dust collectors or pneumatic conveying systems in either continuous or on-
demand cleaning applications. It provides either 4, 6, 10, 22 or 32 channels. The
DCT600 was designed for ease of installation in your dust collector system.
For installations requiring fewer channels than available on the board, a
shorting plug (DCT604 & DCT610) or dip switches (DCT622 & DCT632) allows
selection of the last used channel. Time-on and time-off settings are selected
using two potentiometers. High-limit and low-limit control inputs are provided
for use with on-demand systems. Units can also work in continuous clean mode.
The new enhanced board circuitry of the DCT600 synchronizes the on-time
pulse to the power line to achieve a pulse stability of 1 msec. For safety, the
control circuitry including the control inputs and the last channel jumper is
isolated from the power line.
SPECIFICATIONS*
Output Channels: 4, 6, 10, 22 and 32 channels available.
Power Requirements: 85 to 270 VAC.
Solenoid Supply: 300 VA.
Storage Temperature Limits: 40 to 176F ( 40 to 80C).
On Time Accuracy: 5% of setting.
On Time Stability: 1 msec.
Off Time:1 second to 180 seconds.
Agency Approvals: UL, cUL, CE pending.
Timer Controller
With Universal Power For Both 120 and 220 VAC
Series
DCT600
1/16
[1.59]
4-7/8
[123.8]
4-1/4
[107.95]
1-23/64
[34.53]
1/2
[12.7]
6-1/4 [158.75]
6-3/4 [171.45]
8-1/4 [209.55]
8-3/4 [222.25]
6-1/4
[158.75]
6-7/8
[174.62]
1/16
[1.59]
1-3/16
[30.16]
1/2
[12.7]
4 thru 10 channel boards
22 and 32 channel board
Model
DCT604
DCT606
DCT610
DCT622
DCT632
Description
Timer Controller
Timer Controller
Timer Controller
Timer Controller
Timer Controller
No. of Channels
4
6
10
22
32
OPTIONS
WP Weatherproof Housing
L Mounting Bracket for Field Retrofits
(4, 6 or 10 channel boards only): 8 1/4 x 6 1/4
(209.55 mm x 158.75 mm)
Note: L mounting bracket available with 4, 6, or 10 channel models only.

396
T
i
m
e
r

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Dust Collector Timer Controller
Modular Design, User Friendly, Up to 22 Channels
Model DCAC02
Cable Connection:
For connecting
multiple boards.
Simplify your on-demand cleaning requirements with the Series DCT1000
Dust Collector Timer Controller. Relying on one timer board for on demand and
continuous cleaning applications, the DCT1000 eliminates external devices such as
pressure switches, relays and timers.
Offering a universal power supply, the DCT1000 accepts 85-270 VAC/VDC at either
50 or 60 Hz for both domestic and overseas requirements. The units modular design
allows for use as a continuous cleaning control or on-demand cleaning control using
the optional plug-in pressure module. A 4-20 mA process output is integral to the
plug-in pressure module, eliminating the need to purchase an expensive process
transmitter. Mounting holes are standard to other dust collector controllers used in
the industry, allowing you to use the DCT1000 for existing installations.
In addition, the DCT1000 is the same size for 6, 10 and 22 channels. One board size
allows the standardization on one enclosure. Latching relays and jumper wires are
eliminated for large installations requiring channel expanders. Each channel
expander connected is automatically detected.
Series
DCT1000
DCT in optional
Explosionproof
Enclosure.
DCT in optional NEMA
4/4X weatherproof
enclosure.
Master Board
Stacked with
Channel Expander.
SPECIFICATIONS
DCT1000 Timer Controller:
channels. Expandable to 255
channels using DCT1122 &
DCT1110 channel expander boards.
Power Requirements: 85 to 270
VAC, 50 or 60 Hz.
Solenoid Supply: 3A maximum per
channel.
Fuse: 3A @ 250 VAC. Low voltage
control circuitry is isolated from the
line voltage for system safety.
(-40 to 60C).
Storage Temperature Limits: -40
to 176F (-40 to 80C).
On Time: 10 msec to 600 msec, 10
msec steps.
On Time Accuracy: +/- 10 msec.
Off Time: 1 second to 255 seconds,
1 second steps.
Off Time Accuracy: 1% of the
value or 50 msec, whichever is
greater.
Weight: 1 lb 3.0 oz (538.6 g).
Agency Approvals: UL, cUL.
DCP Pressure Module:
Pressure Ranges: 10 w.c. or 20
w.c.
(-40 to 60C).
Pressure Limit: 10 psi (68.95 kPa).
Pressure Limit (differential): 10 psi
(68.95 kPa).
Accuracy: 1.5% F.S. @ 73F
(22.8C).
Output Signal: 4-20 mA.
Alarm Contacts: 1.5A inductive
load, 3A resistive load @ 30 VAC or
40 VDC.
Process Connections: Two barbed
connections for use with 1/8 (3.18
mm) or 3/16 (4.76 mm) I.D. tubing.
Weight: 5.5 oz (155.9 g).
6-1/4
[158.75]
6-7/8
[174.62]
1-13/16
[46.04]
1/16
[1.59]
2-3/4
[69.85]
8-1/4
[209.55] 8-3/4
[222.25]
Model
DCT1022
DCT1010
DCT1006
DCT1122
DCT1110
DCP200A
DCP100A
Description
Master Controller
Master Controller
Master Controller
Channel Expander
Channel Expander
Pressure Module
Pressure Module
No. of Channels
22
10
6
OPTIONS
WPP Weatherproof Housing with Pressure Ports
WPPS Weatherproof Housing with
Pressure Ports, Three Position
Rotary Switch Installed
EXPL Explosion-proof Housing
Multiple Boards, stacked in enclosure available
ACCESSORIES
DCA, Channel expander cable available
in 1 ft., 2 ft., and 4 ft. lengths
Series 1000, Process Indicator
Series 1010, Process Indicator with Alarm
D.P. Range
20 w.c.
10 w.c.
396.P.N:Layout 2 2/11/11 9:32 AM Page 1
T
i
m
e
r

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
SPECIFICATIONS
DCT1000DC Timer Controller:
channels.
Power Requirements: 10 - 30
VDC.
Solenoid Supply: 3A maximum
per channel.
Fuse: 3A @ 250 VAC.
(-40 to 60C).
-40 to 176F (-40 to 80C).
On Time: 10 msec to 600 msec,
10 msec steps.
Off Time: 1 second to 255
seconds, 1 second steps.
Off Time Accuracy: 1% of the
value or 50 msec, whichever is
greater.
Weight: 1 lb 3.0 oz (538.6 g).
DCP Pressure Module:
Pressure Ranges: 10 w.c. or 20
w.c.
(-40 to 60C).
Pressure Limit: 10 psi (68.95
kPa).
Pressure Limit (differential): 10
psi (68.95 kPa).
Accuracy: 1.5% F.S. @ 73F
(22.8C).
Output Signal: 4-20 mA.
Alarm Contacts: 1.5A inductive
load, 3A resistive load @ 30 VAC
or 40 VDC.
Process Connections: Two
barbed connections for use with
1/8 (3.18 mm) or 3/16 (4.76 mm)
I.D. tubing.
Weight: 5.5 oz (155.9 g).
Dust Collector Timer Controller
For Low Voltage Applications
Model DCAC02
Cable Connection:
For connecting
multiple boards.
Simplify your on-demand cleaning requirements with the Series
DCT1000DC Dust Collector Timer Controller. Relying on one timer board for
on demand and continuous cleaning applications, the DCT1000DC eliminates
external devices such as pressure switches, relays and timers.
The DCT1000DC accepts 10-30 VDC power. The units modular design allows
for use as a continuous cleaning control or on-demand cleaning control using
the optional DCP plug-in pressure module. A 4-20 mA process output is integral
to the DCP pressure module, eliminating the need to purchase an expensive
process transmitter. A solenoid fault light on the DCT1000DC notifies the
operator when a solenoid valve fails to activate properly.
The DCT1000DC is the same size for 6, 10 and 22 channels. One board size
allows the standardization on one enclosure. For larger installations the
DCT1000DC may be expanded by connecting multiple boards in series with the
DCA cable.
Series
DCT1000DC
DCT in optional
Explosion proof
Enclosure.
DCT in optional NEMA
4/4X weatherproof
enclosure.
DCT expanded with
multiple boards.
SETUP
UP
DOWN
SELECT
MANUAL
OVERRIDE
PROCESS (IN H2O)
TIME OFF (SEC)
LAST OUTPUT
TIME ON (M SEC)
HIGH LIMIT
LOW LIMIT
HIGH ALARM
LOW ALARM
CYCLE DELAY (MIN)
DOWN TIME CYCLES
AUTO ALARM RESET
(MIN)
(SEC)
ALARM
RESET
STATUS
RUN
8-1/4
[209.55]
8-3/4
[222.25]
6-1/4
[158.75]
6-7/8
[174.62]
1/16
[1.59]
2-3/4
[69.85]
Model
DCT1022DC
DCT1010DC
DCT1006DC
DCP200A
DCP100A
Description
Master Controller
Master Controller
Master Controller
Pressure Module
Pressure Module
No. of Channels
22
10
6
OPTIONS
WPP Weatherproof Housing with Pressure Ports
WPPS Weatherproof Housing with
Pressure Ports, Three Position
Rotary Switch Installed
EXPL Explosion-proof Housing
Multiple Boards stacked in enclosure available
ACCESSORIES
DCA, Channel expander cable available
in 1 ft., 2 ft., and 4 ft. lengths
Series 1000, Process Indicator
Series 1010, Process Indicator with Alarm
D.P. Range
20 w.c.
10w.c.
397.P.N:Layout 2 2/11/11 9:38 AM Page 1
398
G
r
o
u
n
d
/
C
o
n
t
n
u
t
y
C
o
n
t
r
o
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Series
SVT
The Series SVT Solenoid Valve Enclosure with Timer is a compact, reliable and
economic package designed for small to medium filtration systems. It combines a timer
board and solenoid valve enclosure into one package, eliminating the need for separate
enclosures and wiring. The SVT is available with 2, 4 or 6 valves. For larger systems
expansion modules can be daisy chained to the SVT for a maximum of 60 outputs. The
universal power supply accepts 90-240 VAC at either 50 or 60 Hz for both domestic and
international requirements. On-demand cleaning or down time cleaning functions can be
selected with a simple dip-switch. Time-on and time-off settings are selected using two
potentiometers.
For on demand systems, a Dwyer
A3000 Photohelic
gage or Series 1950 pressure switch

may be used with the SVT.
Solenoid Valve Enclosure with Timer
Compact Size, NEMA 4X Enclosure
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases, filtered
and oil free.
Wetted Materials: Pilot body: Brass;
Spring: 302 SS; O ring: NBR.
to 60C).
Power Requirements: 90 to 240 VAC,
50 or 60 Hz.
Fuse: 0.5 A delayed.
Electrical Connection: 2 DIN A 43652
connectors.
Enclosure Material: Polyamide with
carbon fiber, polycarbonate, TPE
rubber.
Process Connection: 1/4 OD push to
connect.
On-Time: 150 msec to 700 msec.
Off-Time: 4 seconds to 210 seconds.
Model
SVT-2
SVT-4
SVT-6
SVTE-4
SVTE-6
Description
Expansion Module
Expansion Module
2-7/16
[61.77]
9-55/64
[250.49]
9-5/8
[244.48]
5-3/16
[131.80]
NEW PRODUCT!
Number of Solenoids
2
4
6
4
6
Series
TR-7
SAFE-T-GROUND
Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Ground and Continuity Control
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing: 356 T6 cast aluminum alloy (copper free), explosion proof Class I,
Group D.
Size: 6 5/8 W x 10 3/8 H x 5 5/8 D.
Power Requirements: 105 125 VAC, 60 Hz. 7.75 watts with light, 1.75 watts
without lights. Optional 220 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz call factory.
Electrical Rating, Relay: DPDT, 10 amps, 125 VAC, 60 Hz contact rating.
Wiring Hookup: On terminal strip.
Conduit Connection: 3/4 NPT
Installation: 7/16 mounting lugs, integrally cast.
Contactor: (Grounding clamp) molded polyethylene with beryllium copper contact
clips. 16 2 type SO coiled cable; retracts to 3, extends to 16.
Grounding Studs: 2 supplied. Order a pair for each truck.
Shipping Weight: 20 lb with contactor and cord.
Options: Integral pilot lights; 30 coiled cable; Temporary contactor assemblies,
clamp connectors, and other supply voltages.
TR-7L
Model TR-7 Safe-T-Ground provides continuous monitoring of a trucks ground
connection throughout loading operations. Static electricity is often brought in by tank
trucks entering the loading area. The Safe-T-Ground Model TR-7 instantly stops loading
operations if a tank truck loses its ground. The simple but rugged Model TR-7 circuit
continuously measures resistance through the truck by applying a small voltage to one
terminal of the truck grounding contactor. The other terminal is connected to the loading
rack ground. If the Safe-T-Ground detects a resistance of more than a few ohms across the
contactor terminals, the relay opens, breaking the control circuit. The relay will not close
until the grounding contactor is properly connected.
To safeguard loading operations, the Safe-T-Ground circuit can be wired into your pump
control and to an audible alarm or signal light.
The double wire TR-7 system provides an extra safeguard against explosion, compared to
single wire grounding, which cannot measure the quality of the electrical ground connection
during loading. The transistorized TR-7 circuit generates little heat an added safety
feature.
The Model TR-7 Safe-T-Ground is simple and easy to install. Removal of the cover on the
explosion-proof aluminum housing reveals the easily accessible terminal strip for relay and
ground control wiring, and a complete schematic wiring diagram appears on a label next
to the terminal strip for easy wiring. Coiled grounding cable/contactor-handle assembly is
easily replaced via mil-spec connector on housing.
Model TR-7
Model TR-7-L (Integral Pilot Lights)

P
a
r
t
c
u
a
t
e

(
D
u
s
t

o
r
B
r
o
k
e
n

B
a
g
)

T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and compatible gases, any type particulate conductive or non
conductive.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS and PFA.
Air Velocity Range: 300 ft/min and higher.
Minimum Detection: Standard: 10.0 pA; Optional: 5.0 pA and 0.5 pA.
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: 15 to 160F ( 25 to 70C);
Process: Standard: 40 to 250F ( 40 to 120C);
Optional: 40 to 450F ( 40 to 232C).
Power Requirement: 18 28 VDC (24V nominal).
Loop Resistance: 300 ohms maximum.
Current Consumption: Powered from
4 20 mA loop.
Electrical Connection: Terminal block.
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof,
NEMA 4X (IP 66).
Weight: Varies with length of probe
and type of mount.
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA.
Example
Series Designator
Enclosure Rating
Process Connection
Maximum Process
Temperature
Maximum Process
Pressure
Range
Insertion Length
(Recommended
at Least
1/2 Duct Diameter)
PMT
PMT
A1
A1
AHZ2
1
1
2
3
4
T1
T1
T2
P1
P1
L1.5
L1.5
L03
L05
L10
L15
L20
L30
L36
1
1
2
3
The Series PMT Particulate Transmitter is a reliable dust collector emissions monitor
and leak detector. The loop powered design is ideal for direct connection to existing PLCs
or other baghouse diagnostic control systems. Adjustable linear or logarithmic output
scaling enables trending both the baseline emissions and the high peak emissions that are
caused by filter cleaning cycles and developing leaks. Observation of both baseline and
peaks is essential to setting proper alarms.
The PMT Particulate Transmitter employs a field-proven combination of induction and
protected-probe technologies. As particles flow near and around the probe, minute currents
are dynamically induced into the probe. The signal is processed into an absolute output
relative to the amount of particulate and thus leakage. Protective-layers over the probe
work in combination with induction-sensing to ensure reliable operation with all types of
particulate including moist powders and highly conductive dusts. Maintenance is minimal
and there is no need for an air purge
The Series PMT Particulate Transmitter:
For baghouses, cartridge filters, bin vents, and cyclones
Simple, low cost 2 wire installation for PLCs
Prevent false readings from:
Moist and conductive dusts
Corrosive gases and condensate
Dust buildup
Protect downstream blowers, oxidizers, HEPAs, etc.
Repeatable in all applications (conductive and moist ducts)
Series
PMT
Particulate Transmitter
2-Wire Loop Powered
5-3/64
[128.19]
2-15/16
[74.61]
CONDUIT ENTRY
NPT MOUNT
INSERTION
LENGTH
6-3/32
[154.78]
FLANGE
2-15/16
[74.61]
OPTIONAL HIGH
PRESSURE / TEMPERATURE
SEALING GLAND
DO NOT LOOSEN
3-13/16
[96.84]
NIPPLE
3 [76.2]
MOUNT
FLANGE MOUNT
INSERTION
LENGTH
2-15/16
[74.61]
3-29/32
[99.22]
3-13/16
[96.84]
NIPPLE INSERTION
LENGTH
3 [76.2]
MOUNT
1 MALE NPT
QUICK CLAMP MOUNT
QUICK CLAMP
PMT A11T1P11 L1.5: PMT Particulate Transmitter, Weatherproof/NEMA 4X, 1/2 NPT
Connection, 250F Max Temp., 10.0 psi Max Pressure, 10.0 pA 1.5 Probe.
PMT Particulate Transmitter (1 piece configuration, Sensor included in price)
Ordinary/General Purpose Locations, CE Approval, NEMA 4X, CSA
Hazardous Location, CSA Approval, Class I, Division II, Groups A D. Class II, Groups F, G
1/2 NPT
1 NPT with 1.5 Quick Clamp Connection
2 150# ANSI Flange
2 150# ANSI Flange with Process Mating Flange and Installation Kit
250F (120C)
450F (232C)
10 psi
10.0 pA 5000 pA
5.0 pA 5000 pA
0.5 pA 5000 pA (required for low levels or EPA leak detection)
1.5 Probe
3 Probe
5 Probe
10 Probe
15 Probe
20 Probe
30 Probe
36 Probe

400
P
a
r
t
c
u
a
t
e

(
D
u
s
t

o
r
B
r
o
k
e
n

B
a
g
)

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Particulate Monitor & Control
Real-Time Leak Gauge, Adjustable Alarm Points
Series
DPM
The DPM Particle Monitor and PMS Particulate Sensor combine to provide
a basic baghouse and cartridge filter leak detector designed for general
maintenance planning and process protection. It is easy to use and reliable.
Leakage is gauged in real-time, on-the-spot, without prior baseline data and
without signal tuning. Simply apply power and the general condition of the filter
is quickly determined. An alarm point is set by simply moving an indicator up
and down the gauge with the convenient, lockable key pad. For more precise
alarm setup the large display provides both a logarithmic analog bar graph and
an absolute digital readout. The log scale enables the user to observe both the
baseline bleed through and the high peaks that are caused by filter cleaning
cycles and developing leaks. Observation of both baseline and peaks is essential
to setting proper alarms. The digital readout in absolute units ensures correct
interpretation of the readings and provides accurate historical comparisons.
The DPM Particle Monitor is housed in a rugged cast aluminum enclosure.
An LCD displays particulate levels in bar-graph and digital forms. A lockable
membrane keypad is provided for setup and adjustment.
Together the DPM Particle Monitor and the PMS Particle Sensor:
Prevent false readings from:
Moist and conductive dusts
Corrosive gases and condensate
Dust buildup
For baghouses, cartridge filters, bin vents, and cyclones
Keep a clean workplace and be a good neighbor
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: From PMS sensor.
Output Ratings:
Alarm relays: 2 form A (SPST) rated 5A @ 240V res. (must provide
an 8A (maximum) fuse in series with relay load);
Analog: 4 to 20 mA (option RC).
Power Requirements: 115 VAC 50/60Hz, 230 VAC 50/60Hz, or 24
VDC.
Power Consumption: 6 watts max.
Accuracy: Standard: 5% of range, Optional: 1% of range.
Display: LCD.
Display Resolution: Standard: 5 pA; Optional: 0.5 pA.
Memory Backup: For set point storage only.
Weight: 4.5 lb (2.0 kg)
Enclosure: Cast aluminum, weatherproof, NEMA 4X.
Loop Power Supply (Isolated): 17 VDC loop supply provided by DPM
control unit for PMS sensor.
Agency Approvals: CE & CSA.*
4-3/8
[11.13]
6-19/64
[159.94]
6-5/16
[160.34]
6-19/64
[159.94]
4-3/8
[111.13]
4-11/32
[110.33]
MOUNTING
4-11/32
[110.33]
MOUNTING
Model
DPM-A111
DPM-A112
DPM-A113
DPM-A121
DPM-A122
DPM-A123
DPM-AHZ111
DPM-AHZ112
DPM-AHZ113
DPM-AHZ121
DPM-AHZ122
DPM-AHZ123
System Rating
Weatherproof/NEMA 4X
Intrinsically Safe*
Intrinsically Safe*
Intrinsically Safe*
Intrinsically Safe*
Intrinsically Safe*
Intrinsically Safe*
Range
5.0 pA 5000 pA
5.0 pA 5000 pA
5.0 pA 5000 pA
0.5 pA 5000 pA
0.5 pA 5000 pA
0.5 pA 5000 pA
5.0 pA 5000 pA
5.0 pA 5000 pA
5.0 pA 5000 pA
0.5 pA 5000 pA
0.5 pA 5000 pA
0.5 pA 5000 pA
*DPM models listed intrinsically safe are to be used with corresponding intrinsically safe PMS
models making an intrinsically safe control loop. The PMS model can then be installed in a
hazardous location according to approval ratings listed. The DPM itself is not intrinsically safe and
must be installed outside the hazardous location.
OPTION
Analog Output (4 20 mA), add -RC to the end of
the model number
Input Power
115 VAC 50/60Hz
230 VAC 50/60Hz
24 VDC
115 VAC 50/60Hz
230 VAC 50/60Hz
24 VDC
115 VAC 50/60Hz
230 VAC 50/60Hz
24 VDC
115 VAC 50/60Hz
230 VAC 50/60hz
24 VDC

P
a
r
t
c
u
a
t
e

(
D
u
s
t

o
r
B
r
o
k
e
n

B
a
g
)

S
e
n
s
o
r
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Series
PMS
Particulate Sensor
Reliable Operation, Minimal Maintenance
The PMS Particulate Sensor employs a field-proven combination of passive-induction
and protected-probe technologies. As particles flow near and around the probe, minute
currents are dynamically induced into the probe by flowing particulate. A DSP processes
the signal into an absolute output that is reasonably linear to mass. Protective layers over
the probe work in combination with induction-sensing to ensure reliable operation with all
types of particulate including moist powders and highly conductive dusts. Maintenance is
minimal and there is no need for an air purge. For durability, the sensors are passive and
free of electronics. The PMS Particulate Sensor is designed to be used with the DPM
Particle Monitor in order to be intrinsically safe.
PMS Particulate Sensor
More effective control than broken bag detectors.
For baghouses, cartridge filters, bin vents, and cyclones.
Repeatable in all applications (conductive and moist dusts).
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and compatible gases, any type particulate.
Wetted Materials: T1 and T2: 316SS and PFA; T3 and T4: 316SS and ceramic.
Minimum Detection: 5.0 pA.
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: Maximum 40 to 392F ( 40 to 200C) (maximum must be
calculated for each application);
Process: See model chart.
Pressure Limits:
Standard: Full vacuum to 10 psi (0.69 bar);
Optional: 100 psi (6.89 bar).
Output Signal: pA.
Electrical Connection: Low noise coaxial.
Enclosure:
Standard: Painted cast aluminum, weatherproof, NEMA 4X;
Optional: Intrinsically safe, CSA (must use with proper DPM model).
Weight: Varies depending on length of probe and type of mount.
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA
5-3/64
[128.19]
2-15/16
[74.61]
CONDUIT ENTRY
NPT MOUNT
INSERTION
LENGTH
6-3/32
[154.78]
FLANGE
2-15/16
[74.61]
OPTIONAL HIGH
PRESSURE / TEMPERATURE
SEALING GLAND
DO NOT LOOSEN
3-13/16
[96.84]
NIPPLE
3
[76.2]
MOUNT
FLANGE MOUNT
INSERTION
LENGTH
2-15/16
[74.61]
3-29/32
[99.22]
3-13/16
[96.84]
NIPPLE
INSERTION
LENGTH
3
[76.2]
MOUNT
1 MALE NPT
QUICK CLAMP MOUNT
K CLAMP
Model
CAB-10
CAB-20
Model
CAB-30
CAB-40
Example
Series Designator
Enclosure Rating
Process Connection
Maximum Process
Temperature
Maximum Process
Pressure
Insertion Length
(Recommended at Least 1/2
Duct Diameter)
PMS
PMS
A1
A1
AHZ1
1
1
2
3
4
T1
T1
T2
T3
T4
P1
P1
P2
L1.5
L1.5
L03
L05
L10
L15
L20
L30
L36
L48
L60
L72
How To Order:
Determine model number from model chart using example as a guide.
Select desired length of Particulate Sensor cable from cable model chart.
Consult factory for custom cable lengths up to 300 feet.
PMS A11T1P1 L1.5: PMS Particulate Sensor, Weatherproof, NEMA 4X, 1/2
NPT Connection, 250F Max Temp., 10 psi Max Pressure, 1.5 Probe.
PMS Particulate Sensor
Weatherproof, NEMA 4X
Intrinsically Safe, CSA & CEA Approvals, Class I, II, and III. Division I & II, All
Groups, NEMA 4X (requires Quick Clamp connection or flange mount)
1/2 NPT
1 NPT with 1.5 Quick Clamp Connection
2 150# ANSI Flange
2 150# ANSI Flange with Process Mating Flange and Installation Kit
250F (121C)
450F (232C)
800F (426C) requires flange mount
1200F (649C) requires flange mount
10 psi
100 psi requires flange mount
1.5 Probe
3 Probe
5 Probe
10 Probe
15 Probe
20 Probe
30 Probe
36 Probe
48 Probe
60 Probe
72 Probe
Description
30 foot sensor cable
Description

402
S
p
e
e
d

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
3-1/8
[79.38]
2-1/8
[53.98]
1-25/32
[45.24]
6-1/4
[158.75]
1-17/32
[38.89]
4-9/32
[108.74]
Non-Contact Speed Switch
Compact PVC or Aluminum Housing, Easy Installation
Series
NSS
The Series NSS are self-contained rotation monitoring systems that are ideal for
detecting the unwanted slowdown of process equipment. These systems bring efficiency
and safety to your operations by preventing machine damage, product waste and costly
downtime.
Each switch is used with a shaft-end mounted pulsar DISC which generates an alternating
magnetic field that is picked up by the speed switch. The switch decodes this frequency
signal to determine shaft speed and compares this to the pre-adjusted set point, easily
calibrated via a single-turn potentiometer. In the event of rotational failure, such as a broken
drive, belt slippage, product overloads or clogs, the relay can be used to provide an alarm
or equipment shutdown, assuring machine protection and process integrity. The miniature
speed switch series is fail-safe; any malfunction during operation will de-energize the control
circuit.
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Limits: Operating 40 to 140F ( 40 to 60C).
Enclosure: NSSP: Polyvinylchloride (PVC). NSSM: Cast aluminum.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X. NSSM: Class I, group D; Class II, groups E, F, G;
Class III.
Switch Type: SPDT.
Electrical Connections: 18 AWG, 12 (30.48 cm) long.
Conduit Connections: 1 female NPT.
Power Requirements: 115 VAC, 60 Hz standard.
Input Signal Type: NPN open collector.
Set Point Adjustment: Single turn (270) potentiometer.
Gap Distance: 3/8 1/8.
Weight: NSSP A1W: 0.54 lb (0.82 lb with disc); NSSP B1W: 0.54 lb (0.64 lb with
disc); NSSM A1W: 1.58 lb (1.88 lb with disc); NSSM B1W: 1.60 lb (1.70 lb with
disc).
Agency Approvals: UL pending, CE.
DISC SPECIFICATIONS
Materials: Pulsar discs: Nylon 12, PVC; Disc guards: SS; Easy mount bracket:
Aluminum with SS shaft.
Maximum Speed: 10,000 RPM at ambient temperature.
2-3/8
[60.33]
3-3/8
[85.73]
5-17/32
[140.49]
1 NPT
Model
NSSP-A1W
NSSP-B1W
NSSM-A1W
NSSM-AKIT
NSSM-B1W
NSSM-BKIT
Set Point Range
10 100 RPM
100 5000 RPM
10 100 RPM
10 100 RPM
100 5,000 RPM
100 5,000 RPM
Supply Voltage
115 VAC
115 VAC
115 VAC
115 VAC
115 VAC
115 VAC
Enclosure
Plastic
Plastic
Metal
Metal
Metal
Metal
NSSM NSSP NSSM NSSP
Model
DISCA
DISCB
A-290
A-291
A-292
Disc A Disc B
4
[101.6]
13/64
[5.16]
2-1/2
[63.5]
13/64
[5.16]
N
1
A-290 A-291 A-292
Disc A Disc B
Disc Included
NONE
NONE
NONE
4 A DISC
NONE
2 1/2 B DISC
Description
4 Pulsar disc, 16 magnetic poles for 10 100 RPM units
2 1/2 Pulse disc, 8 magnetic poles for 100 5000 RPM units
Easy Mount Bracket assembly for NSSM includes 4 disc
Disc Guard for easy mount bracket, A 290
Disc Guard for NSS AM/BM

S
p
e
e
d

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
ACCESSORIES
The Series DSS Direct-Contact Speed Switch is a compact switch designed to
include all mechanical and electronic components in one housing. It will produce an output
signal at a predetermined speed which may be either over-speed, under-speed or zero-
speed. Rugged, heavy-duty construction combined with solid state electronics and photo-
electric technology makes this one of the most advanced motion detectors available. Series
DSS protects all valuable rotating equipment including belt conveyors, bucket elevators,
rotary feeders or screw conveyors. It operates in a clockwise or counter-clockwise direction
and mounts in any position.
Series DSS senses motion by means of a precision metal disc mounted on the input shaft.
This disc generates measurable light pulses as a series of slots on its periphery rotate past
an infra-red light source. A photo-electric sensor monitors the series of light pulses and
converts them into a digital electronic signal. Solid state circuitry then analyzes the digital
signal and activates or de-activates the output relay at the pre-set signal speed. It also
features an adjustable built-in time delay eliminating the need for a separate start-up time
delay relay.
The DSS will sense under-speed or over-speed conditions. Three signal speed ranges are
available with each unit. The low signal speed range is from 0.1 to 10 RPM. The medium
signal speed range is from 1 to 100 RPM, and the high speed range is 10 to 1000 RPM.
Field adjustment of the signal set point is easily accomplished by means of an adjustment
screw. The signal speed ranges are selected by a three position toggle switch on the printed
circuit board. For under-speed sensing, the signal point is set below the normal operating
speed of the unit. The output relay will then de-energize if the speed drops below the signal
set point. For over-speed sensing the signal set point is set above the normal operating
speed. The output relay will energize if the speed exceeds the signal set point. The output
relay can be wired either normally open or normally close.
Zero-speed sensing can be accomplished by locking the signal set point adjustment screw
at its lowest setting of 0.1 RPM. The output relay will then de-energize when the shaft
speed of the unit approaches zero.
Direct-Contact Speed Switch
Rugged Housing, Electronics and Mechanical Components in One Housing
Series
DSS
SPECIFICATIONS
Enclosure: Aluminum with screw cover.
Enclosure Rating: DSS W: Meets NEMA 4X. DSS E: Meets NEMA & 4X, UL:
Class I groups C & D, Class II groups F & G.
Switch Type: DPDT.
Electrical Rating: 3A @ 120/240 VAC, 1/10 Hp @120/240 VAC.
Conduit Connections: (2) 3/4 female NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: Adjustment screw.
Power Requirements: 105 135 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 210 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz; or 24
VAC/DC depending on model.
Power Consumption: 3 Watts.
Repeatability: 2% maximum at constant voltage and temperature.
Pick-up Point: 3 speed ranges at which relay will energize:
Low: 0.1 to 10 RPM.
Medium: 1 to 100 RPM.
High: 10 to 1000 RPM.
Signal Point: Speed at which relay will de energize. Recommended to be 15 20%
lower than pick up point.
Start-up Delay: Adjustable up to 45 seconds.
Radial Load on Input Shaft: 125 lbs maximum.
End Thrust on Input Shaft: 100 lbs maximum.
Rotation: Either clockwise or counter clockwise.
Driving Torque: 1/lb maximum.
Shaft: 5/8 diameter with 3/16 x 7/8 key.
Weight: 5 lbs (2.3 kg).
Model
DSS-W1
DSS-E1
DSS-W2
DSS-E2
DSS-W3
DSS-E3
Supply Voltage
120 VAC
120 VAC
240 VAC
240 VAC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
Enclosure Rating
Weatherproof
Explosion Proof
Weatherproof
Explosion Proof
Weatherproof
Explosion Proof
4-3/4
[120.65]
4-7/8
[123.83]
FRONT VIEW
2
[50.8]
2-1/4
[57.15] 7/8
[22.23]
2-1/2
[63.50]
MOUNTING HOLE PLAN
8-63/64 [228.09]
3/4 NPT PIPE
TAP BOTH SIDES
3/8
[9.53]
SIDE VIEW
1-1/4
[31.75]
1-17/64
[32.03]
Model
A-426
A-427
A-428
A-422
Enclosure Type
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Description
Stub Shaft
Flexible Coupling
Coupling Guard
Mounting Bracket for DSS Switch

404
B
e
t

A
g
n
m
e
n
t

S
w
t
c
h
e
s
P
R
O
C
E
S
S

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Belt Alignment Switch
Adjustable Activation Angles, Two Micro Switches
Model
CBAS
The Model CBAS Belt Alignment Switch is a rugged and reliable conveyor belt
alignment switch. The compact die cast aluminum housing is designed for easy installation.
The switch cover allows for simple access to wiring terminals and CAM adjustments. Belt
alignment switches are typically used in pairs with one switch on each side of the conveyor
belt mounted near the first and/or last pulley of a conveyor. Each CBAS is equipped with
two micro switches, allowing one actuation angle for small belt deviations and a second
actuation angle for extreme belt deviations. The actuation angles are factory set at 20
degrees and 35 degrees, each actuation angle can be easily adjusted in the field to fit any
application.
SPECIFICATIONS
Enclosure: Die cast aluminum.
Switch Type: 2 SPDT.
Electrical Rating: 10 amp @ 125/250 VAC; 1/2 amp @ 125 VDC.
Electrical Connection: 3 screw type, common, normally open, normally closed.
Electrical Conduit: Two 3/4 female NPT.
Activation Angles: 20 and 35 (adjustable).
Activation Force: 0.8 to 1.2 lb. (0.36 to 0.54 kg).
Control Type: Automatic reset.
5-9/16
[141.29]
TOUCH
PULLEY
29/32
[25.02]
9/32
[7.14]
75
5-21/64
[135.33]
5-49/64
[70.25]
2X 1-1/2
[38.1]
5-1/8
[130.18]
2X2-11/64
[55.17]
3-43/64
[93.27]
2X 13/32 [10.32]
MOUNTING HOLES
1-15/32
[37.31]
1-63/64
[50.4]
10-9/16
[268.29]
3-11/32
[84.93]
2X 3/4 NPT
3/16
[4.76]
51/64
[20.24]
1/4
[6.35]
2-9/16
[65.09]
2-9/16
[65.09]
2-3/8
[60.33]
Cable Pull Switch
For Emergency or Normal Shut-Off
Model
CPS
The Model CPS Cable Pull Switch is designed to provide a switching system to isolate
the power to the conveyor system or other similar process equipment in event of a shut-
down condition. A steel wire is placed along the side of the conveyor and attached to the
cable pull switch. When the cable is pulled at any point along the conveyor it will trip the
cable pull switch causing the conveyor to shut down. To restart the conveyor the CPS must
be manually reset. The CPS has a universal design for bi-directional activation and utilizes
a highly visible red flag to indicate the switch status. The compact design makes it ideal
for easy installation.
SPECIFICATIONS
Enclosure: Die cast aluminum.
Switch Type: 2 SPDT.
Electrical Rating: 10 amp @ 125/250 VAC; 1/2 amp @ 125 VDC.
Electrical Connection: 3 screw type, common, normally open, normally closed.
Electrical Conduit: Two 3/4 female NPT.
Activation Angles: 30 degrees.
Activation Force: 11 2.25 lb. (5 1 kg).
Control Type: Manual reset.
5-1/8
[130.18]
3-7/16
[87.31]
2-9/16
[65.09]
1-1/8
[28.58]
19/32
[15.03]
RESETTING
LEVER
63/64
[25]
61/64
[24.21]
3-23/64
[85.33]
1-31/32
[50]
29/32
[23.02]
1-31/32
[50]
51/64
[20.24]
6-1/16
[153.99]
1/8
[3.18]
2-21/64
[59.13]
3-15/16
[100.01]
2X 3/4
NPT
3-15/16
[100.01]
8-7/16
[214.31]
2-15/64
[5.95]
1/4
[6.35]
30
LOCK POSITION
31/64
[12.3]
2-49/64
[70.25]
2X2-11/64
[55.17]
2-9/16
[65.09]
2X 1-1/2
[38.1]
5-1/8
[130.18] 1-37/64
[40.08]
9/32
[7.14]
13/32 [10.32]
MOUNTING
HOLES
OPERATING
DIRECTION
Model CBAS-1, Conveyor Belt Alignment Switch
Model CPS-1, Cable Pull Switch

DATA LOGGERS & RECORDERS
page 406
Data Loggers,
Indicating
pages 407 410
Data Loggers,
Miniature
pages 410 412
Data Loggers,
Stainless Steel
pages 413 414
Data Loggers,
Surface Mount
pages 416 417
Data Loggers,
Level
page 418
Data Acquisition
Software
page 419
Data Loggers,
USB
pages 414 415
Recorders,
Paper
pages 419 420

406
T
y
p
c
a

A
p
p
c
a
t
o
n
s
D
A
T
A

L
O
G
G
E
R
S

&

R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
When transporting temperature-sensitive products such as meat,
produce, beer and wine over long distances, it is necessary to
verify that the storage compartment has not exceeded the critical
preservation temperature at any time. Dwyer
BDL Button
Dataloggers offer a low cost way to measure and record storage
temperatures throughout transport. By placing several buttons
throughout the storage compartment and setting an appropriate
measurement interval, transportation services can retrieve data
at the completion of delivery to assure their customers of
adequate preservation temperatures.
Button Datalogger monitors food and beverage
temperature in refrigerated transport vehicles.
Series BDL
Button Data
Logger
10
Data acquisition is an essential tool for process monitoring and
system evaluation. It is also an integral factor in troubleshooting
and malfunction testing. Dwyer
DL8 Process Datalogger

enables users to acquire data from up to seven transmitters or
other instruments by accepting industry standard analog inputs.
With easy-to-use software, plots of the instruments performance
can be conveniently uploaded and viewed graphically or
numerically on a PC or laptop. Additionally, the DL8 can monitor
data in real time for instant results or acquire data over a user-
defined interval for long-term monitoring.
Dataloggers simplify performance assessment for
multiple transmitters and other measurement devices.
Temperature
Transmitter
Flow
Transmitter
Air Velocity
Transmitter
Level
Transmitter
Pressure
Transmitter
Series DL8
The Love Controls
Model LCR20 dual pen circular chart recorder

can be used to monitor the humidity and temperature in an
environmental chamber. The 10 chart size makes it easy to see
the blue and red pen markings on the chart paper. The recorder
takes in most common thermocouples and process inputs for both
channels. It is recommended that the LCR20 be used with a
Dwyer
RH series humidity / temperature transmitter for best

results.
Monitor the test environment for accurate laboratory
tests.
Data Recorder
Component
Oven Doors
Power Supplies
The environment in which a wine is stored must be controlled to
insure great taste and that the wine upholds it value. The Model
MTL-30 has the ability to record the temperature and humidity of
its ambient surroundings and also has built in audible and visual
alarms if the environment changes outside of the allowed settings.
These features will allow the owner to know if the cabinet doors
were left open or if the cabinets refrigeration system is working
properly.
Temperature and humidity monitoring in wine
cabinets.
MTL-30

D
a
t
a

L
o
g
g
e
r
s
,
I
n
d
c
a
t
n
g
D
A
T
A

L
O
G
G
E
R
S

&

R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
Universal Input Data Logger
Internal Temperature Sensor, Optional Internal Humidity Sensor
and Display, Universal Inputs
Series
UDL
The Series UDL Universal Input Data Loggers are available with 0, 2, or
4 universal inputs. Each universal input can be individually configured to accept
a thermocouple, RTD, thermistor, voltage, or current input. All Series UDL data
loggers have an internal temperature sensor and a digital input which can be
used as a trigger to start logging or as a pulse counter for interfacing with
flowmeters or other sensors with a pulse output. Optional features include an
internal humidity sensor, an LCD display, and an external humidity and
temperature sensor. The Series UDL loggers interface to the USB port of a PC.
The unit includes software, USB connection cable and installed battery.
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: RTD, thermocouple, thermistor, current, voltage, slidewire.
Range: Internal temperature: 22 to 158F ( 30 to 70C); Internal RH: 0
to 100%; External temperature: 22 to 158F ( 30 to 70C); External RH:
0 to 100%.
Accuracy: Internal temperature: 1F ( 0.5C); External temperature:
1F (0.5C) over 30 to 122F (0 to 50C), 2F (1C) over 30 to
32F ( 30 to 0C) and 122 to 158F (50 to 70C); Internal/external RH:
2.0% RH over 10% 90%, 4.0% RH over 0 10% and 90 100% RH.
Memory Size: 0 or 2 universal inputs: 62,000 readings; 4 universal
inputs: 128,000 readings.
Resolution: All universal inputs: 16 Bit; Internal & external temperature:
12 Bit; Internal & external RH: 8 Bit.
Sampling Method: Stop when full or continuous logging (wrap when
full).
Sampling Rate: Selectable from 1 second to 24 hours.
Computer Requirements: Windows

98, Windows

2000, Windows
ME, Windows NT
, Windows

XP, and Windows Vista
operating system
with 16 MB RAM, one free USB port.
Power Requirements: 3.6 VDC lithium AA.
Battery Life: 6 years (approx.).
Alarms: Programmable high/low.
Interface: USB port (cable included).
Weight: 5.8 oz (165 g).
Agency Approval: CE, RoHS.
Windows
, Windows NT
, and Windows Vista
are registered trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation.
Model
UDL-000
UDL-100
UDL-010
UDL-110
UDL-002
UDL-102
UDL-012
UDL-112
UDL-004
UDL-104
UDL-014
UDL-114
3-1/16
[77.79]
4-13/16
[122.24]
2-5/8
[66.68]
4-1/4
[107.95]
1-1/4
[31.75]
RoHS
ACCESSORIES
DL500-LITE*, Lite Version Windows
Operating System Software

DL500**, Full Version Windows
Operating System Software Key

UDL-RH, Remote Humidity Probe
UDL-PS, Power Supply
* Free download from website
** Need lite version also
Sensors Included
Internal temperature sensor
Internal temperature sensor w/ display
Internal temperature/RH sensor
Internal temperature/RH sensor w/ display
Internal temperature sensor, 2 universal inputs
Internal temperature sensor, 2 universal inputs w/
display
Internal temperature sensor/RH, 2 universal inputs
w/ display
Internal temperature sensor, 4 universal inputs
Internal temperature sensor, 4 universal inputs w/
display
w/ display

408
D
a
t
a

L
o
g
g
e
r
s
,
I
n
d
c
a
t
n
g
D
A
T
A

L
O
G
G
E
R
S

&

R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
Series
DLI
LCD Data Logger
Front Keypad, Wall Mountable, Remote Readings
The Series DLI LCD Data Logger gives instant remote readings of
temperature, humidity, or atmospheric pressure. The large, back-lit LCD and 8-
button keypad provide convenient access to current data and recorder setup as
well as memory and battery levels. The wall-mountable data logger can store at
least 87,000 readings per channel. The easy to use DL700 software makes
creating permanent records, performing data calculations, and graphing of data
simple. The DLI can easily be started and stopped from a PC or delayed to start
up to six months in advance. It can also stop recording at a specified time or
after a certain number of readings have been taken.
SPECIFICATIONS
RTD Sensor: Range: 328 to 1562F ( 200 to 850C); Probe accuracy:
0.09F (0.05C) for 328 to 500F ( 200 to 260C), 0.5F (0.3C) for
500 to 1562F (260 to 850C); Resolution: 0.01F (0.01C).
Thermocouple Sensor: Internal range: 4 to 140F ( 20 to 60C);
Accuracy: 0.9F (0.5C) internally and for types J, K, T, E, and N,
3F (2C) for types R, S, and B; Resolution: 0.2F (0.1C) internally
and for types J, K, T, E, and N, 0.9F (0.5C) for types R, S, and B.
Temperature/Humidity Sensor: Range: 4 to 140F ( 20 to 60C), 0 to
95% RH; Accuracy: 0.9F (0.5C) for 32 to 122F (0 to 50C), 3% RH;
Resolution: 0.2F (0.1C), 0.1% RH.
Temperature/Humidity/Pressure Sensor: Range: 40 to 302F
( 20 to 60C), 0 to 95% RH, 0 to 30 psia; Accuracy: 0.9F (0.5C),
3% RH, 1.0% FSR @ 77F (25C); Resolution: 0.1F (0.05C), 0.1%
RH, 0.002 psia.
Memory Size: 174,762 readings (DLI R), 131,071 readings per channel
(DLI T, DLI H) and 87,381 readings per channel (DLI P).
Sampling Method: Stop on memory full or continuous recording.
Sampling Rate: Selectable from 2 sec to 24 hrs.
95, Windows
98, Windows
2000, Windows
ME, Windows NT
, and Windows
XP operating
system, one free USB port.
Power Requirements: User replaceable, 9V lithium battery. Optional
AC adapter.
Battery Life: 1 year with display off, 30 days with continuous display
usage (approx).
Interface: USB port (interface cable required).
Housing: Black anodized aluminum case.
Agency Approvals: CE, model DLI R not CE approved.
Thermocouple Type
Type J
Type K
Type T
Type E
Type R
Type S
Type B
Type N
Range F
346 to 1400
436 to 2498
436 to 752
436 to 1796
58 to 3200
58 to 3200
140 to 3308
436 to 2372
Range C
210 to 760
260 to 1370
260 to 400
260 to 980
50 to 1760
50 to 1760
60 to 1820
260 to 1300
1/8 JACK
FOR USB
INTERFACE
CABLE
1-1/4
[31.75]
4-3/4
[120.65]
2-3/4
[69.85]
3-1/4
[82.55]
1-29/64
[36.83]
Model
DLI-R
DLI-T
DLI-H
DLI-P
Input Type
RTD Temperature
Thermocouple Temperature
Temperature/Humidity/Pressure
ACCESSORIES
DL700, Software, Manual and USB Interface Cable
U9VL-J, 9V Replacement Battery
DLI-120, 9V Power Adapter (North America
DLI-230, 9V Power Adapter (Europe)

D
a
t
a

L
o
g
g
e
r
s
,
I
n
d
c
a
t
n
g
D
A
T
A

L
O
G
G
E
R
S

&

R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
Series
DLI2
LCD Pressure Data Logger
1/4 NPT Fitting, Records 262,143 Readings, Front Keypad
The Series DLI2 accurately records pressure and gives instant remote readings. The
large, back-lit LCD and 8-button keypad provide convenient access to current data and
recorder setup as well as memory and battery levels. The Series DLI2 can be ordered for
absolute or gauge pressure measurements up to 5,000 psi. Using the keypad or software,
measurements can be read in psi, in. Hg, mm Hg, bar, atm, Torr, Pa, kPa, or MPa. The
large memory capacity allows over 260,000 readings to be stored. The easy to use DL700
software makes creating permanent records, performing data calculations, and graphing of
data simple. The DLI2 can easily be started and stopped from a PC or delayed to start up
to six months in advance. It can also stop recording at a specific time or after a certain
number of readings have been taken.
SPECIFICATIONS
Ranges: 0 to 30 psia (g), 0 to 100 psia
(g), 0 to 300 psia (g), 0 to 500 psia (g),
0 to 1000 psia, and 0 to 5000 psia
depending on the model.
Memory Size: 262,143 readings.
Accuracy: 2% FSR, 0.25% at 77F
(25C) typical.
Resolution: 0.002 psi (30 psi), 0.005
psi (100 psi), 0.02 psi (300 psi), 0.05
psi (500 and 1000 psi), and 0.2 psi
(5000 psi) depending on model.
Sampling Method: Stop on memory
full or continuous recording.
Sampling Rate: Selectable from 2 sec
to 12 hrs.
95, Windows

98, Windows

2000,
Windows

ME, Windows NT
, or
Windows

XP operating system, and
one free USB port.
Power Requirements: User
replaceable, 6 alkaline AA batteries.
Optional AC adapter.
Battery Life: 1 year (approx).
Interface: USB port (interface cable
required).
Housing Material: Black anodized
aluminum case.
Wetted Material: 316L SS.
Weight: 40 oz (1134 g).
1-51/64
[45.72]
3-19/32
[91.44]
7/8 HEX
1/4-18
NPT
4-9/64
[105.16]
5-3/32
[129.54]
Model
DLI2-A08
DLI2-G08
DLI2-A10
DLI2-G10
DLI2-A13
Windows
, Windows NT
, and Windows Vista
are registered trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation.
Model
DLI2-G13
DLI2-A14
DLI2-G14
DLI2-A15
DLI2-A19
ACCESSORIES
DLI-120, 9V Power Adapter (North America)
DLI-230, 9V Power Adapter (Europe)
U9VL-J, 9V Replacement Battery
Pressure Range
0 to 30 psia
0 to 30 psig
0 to 100 psia
0 to 100 psig
0 to 300 psia
Pressure Range
0 to 300 psig
0 to 500 psia
0 to 500 psig
0 to 1000 psia
0 to 5000 psia
Pressure/Temperature Data Logger
1/4 NPT Fitting, Up to 5000 PSIA
Series
DLP
3/8 NPT CONNECTION
1/8 JACK FOR USB
INTERFACE CABLE
6-15/64
[158.43]
1
[25.40]
1-1/4
[31.75]
The Series DLP data logger can record pressure and temperature. The 1/4 NPT fitting
comes standard and allows the logger to be adapted to almost any pressure fitting. The
internal temperature sensor provides accurate temperature measurements without the need
of a separate temperature recorder, and many of the models provide a choice between
measuring pressure in PSIA or PSIG. The DLP can easily be started and stopped from a PC
or delayed to start up to six months in advance. The battery-powered data logger can store
over 16,000 measurements per channel, and the easy to use DL700 software makes retrieving
data simple.
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: Temperature: 40 to 176F ( 40 to 80C); Pressure: 0 to 30 psia(g), 0 to
100 psia(g), 0 to 300 psia(g), 0 to 500 psia(g), 0 to 1000 psia, and 0 to 5000 psia
depending on the model.
Memory Size: 16,383 readings per channel.
Accuracy: Temperature: 0.2F (0.1C); Pressure: 2% FSR, 0.25% at 77F
(25C) typical.
Resolution: Temperature: 0.2F (0.1C); Pressure: 0.002 psia(g), 0.005 psia(g),
0.05 psia(g), 0.05 psia, and 0.2 psia depending on the model.
Sampling Method: Stop on memory full.
95, Windows
98, Windows 2000,

Windows
ME, Windows NT
, and Windows
XP operating system, one free USB

port.
Power Requirements: User replaceable, 3.6V lithium battery.
Material: 303 stainless steel.
Model
DLP-A08
DLP-G08
DLP-A10
DLP-G10
DLP-A13
DLP-G13
DLP-A14
DLP-G14
DLP-A15
DLP-A19
Windows

ACCESSORIES
TL-2150, 3.6V Replacement Battery
Description
0 30 psia Pressure and Temperature Recorder
0 30 psig Pressure and Temperature Recorder

410
D
a
t
a

L
o
g
g
e
r
s
,
M
n
a
t
u
r
e
D
A
T
A

L
O
G
G
E
R
S

&

R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
Graphical Display Data Logger
Measure Temperature, Humidity and Dew Point, Instant Display
Model
GDL
The Model GDL Graphical Display Data Logger can record and instantly display
trends for temperature, humidity and dew point. The display can show measurement trends
in text or graphic format. Other features include a logging summary which details the sample
rate and memory status. Recording starts immediately with the push of a button or at a user
specified date and time. With the Windows based software, the user can select the sampling
interval, high/low alarm settings, logging channels and recording start time. Over 40,000
data points can be downloaded by way of a PCs USB port. Measured data stays secure with
a recording session counter and password-protected calibration. The Model GDL comes
equipped with batteries, software and a USB cable.
SPECIFICATIONS
Memory Size: 43,344 temperature; 21,672 temperature, RH and dew point.
Temperature Accuracy: 1F (0.5C).
Temperature Resolution: 0.01F (0.01C).
Humidity Range: 0 to 99% RH.
Humidity Accuracy: 2% RH, from 10 to 90% RH.
Humidity Resolution: 0.01% RH.
Sampling Rate: 1 second to 18 hours, 1 second increments.
98 and above (software included).

Power Requirements: 3 AA alkaline or lithium batteries (included).
4
[101.6]
1-1/2
[38.1]
3-1/16
[77.79]
Windows

Model GDL, Graphical Display Data Logger
Model
TDL-10
Portable Temperature Data Logger
Push Button Start, High/Low Alarm Setting
The Model TDL-10 is a compact and portable data logger used for recording temperature
of goods in-transit. It records a wide temperature range from -4 to 158F (-20 to 70C).
The data logger features programmable high and low alarms that are indicated with green
and red LEDs on the face of the logger. The label on the back of the logger allows for
important shipping information to be recorded. The TDL-10 can record over 8,000
measurements, and the easy to use TDL-SC software makes retrieving data simple. The
TDL-10 can easily be started and stopped from a PC, delayed to start up to thirty days in
advance, or begin to start by a push of a button.
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: 4 to 158F ( 20 to 70C).
Accuracy: 0.9F (0.5C) for 14 to
104F ( 10 to 40C), 2F (1C) for
4 to 158F ( 20 to 70C).
Resolution: 0.2F (0.1C).
full.
to 30 min.
95, Windows
98, Windows
2000,
Windows
ME, Windows NT
, and
Windows
XP operating system, one

free USB port.
Power Requirements: Single use, 3 V
lithium coin cell battery.
Battery Life: 90 days (approx).
Interface: RS 232 Series (interface
cable required).
1-41/64
[41.84]
2-35/64
[64.77]
19/32
[15.24]
Windows

Windows NT

Model TDL-10, Portable Temperature Data Logger
ACCESSORY
TDL-SC, Software, manual and RS 232 interface cable

D
a
t
a

L
o
g
g
e
r
s
,
M
n
a
t
u
r
e
D
A
T
A

L
O
G
G
E
R
S

&

R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
Mini Temperature Data Logger
High/Low Temperature Alarm with Visual Indication, Software Included
Model
MTL10
2.312
[58.72]
.813
[20.65]
1.438
[36.53]
Measure and record the temperature of the surrounding environment with the Model
MTL10 Mini Temperature Data Logger. Each unit is factory calibrated to an accuracy of
0.9F (0.5C) over the operating range of -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C). Model MTL10 can
store up to 2048 temperature measurements and can be set for continuous measurement or
stop recording when the memory becomes full. Sampling rate is selectable from one minute
to once every four hours. Recordings can be programmed to begin immediately, delayed (up
to 6 weeks), or initiated by a push button. The logger can also be used to monitor long-term
high and low alarms. Up to 12 low and 12 high temperature alarm events can be recorded.
The logger has visual indication of an alarm condition without the need to connect to the
computer.
SPECIFICATIONS
( 40 to 85C).
Memory Size: 2048 samples.
Alarm Memory: Up to 12 temperature
high and 12 temperature low.
Sampling Mode: Stop on memory full
or continuous recording with memory
rollover.
Sampling Rate: Selectable from 1
min. to 4 hrs. in 1 min. increments.
Computer Requirements: Intel
compatible 486 or above and
Windows
95 or later with 8 MB RAM

and 2 MB hard drive disk space, one
free RS232 port.
Power Requirements: 3.0V lithium
battery.
Battery Life: 3 years (approx).
Recording Start: Push button,
computer controlled or up to 6 week
delayed start.
Real Time Clock: Displays seconds,
minutes, hours, month, day of the
week and year.
Real Time Status: Updated every
second.
Interface: RS232 serial port.
Windows

3
[76.2]
1-39/64
[30.88]
39/64
[15.48]
Series
MTL
20/30
Miniature USB Data Logger
Measure Temperature, Humidity, and Dew Point
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Range: MTL20: 40 to
185F ( 40 to 85C); MTL30: 40 to
160F ( 40 to 70C), 0% to 99% RH
(non condensing).
Accuracy: MTL20: 1F (0.5C);
MTL30: 1F (0.5C), 2% RH from
10% to 90% RH.
Resolution: MTL20: 0.01F (0.01C);
MTL30: 0.01F (0.01C), 0.01% RH.
Memory Size: 43,334 temperature;
21,672 each temperature and RH.
Sampling Mode: Stop on memory full
or memory rollover for continuous
recording.
Sampling Rate: 1 sec. to 18 hrs.
based application software included.

Power Requirements: 3.0 V lithium
battery (included).
The Series MTL Miniature USB Data Logger measures and records accurate readings
for temperature or temperature/humidity/dew point in a wide range of applications.
Sampling intervals and high/low alarm settings are user selectable through the included
easy to use Windows
based software. The series MTL can be field configured to begin

measuring based on a time delayed-start or by push-button. The logger can store up to
43,344 readings and can be set to stop on memory full or for continuous recording. Stored
data is downloaded by plugging the unit into a PCs USB port (cable included). The loggers
provide measurements for many environment conditions, which make them ideal for
refrigeration systems, laboratories, and medical storage facilities.
Model
MTL-20
MTL-30
Windows

Model MTL10, Mini Temperature Data Logger
Input Type
Temperature
Temperature/Humidity/Dew Point

412
D
a
t
a

L
o
g
g
e
r
s
,
M
n
a
t
u
r
e
D
A
T
A

L
O
G
G
E
R
S

&

R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
Series
BDL
Button Data Logger
Self-Powered, Compact Size, USB Interface
The Series BDL Button Data Logger records temperatures and humidity in applications
where size and cost effectiveness are key. The BDL is housed in a stainless steel case and is
water resistant, making it durable in hostile environments where excessive moisture is
present. The BDL is self-powered and features a USB interface. Sample rate and high/low
alarms are user selectable through the Windows
-based application. The included software

displays downloaded data graphically with trace and zoom functions. The logger is very
small which enables it to be inserted into small items and packages. The Series BDL-K
Logger Kit includes 2 buttons, 2 magnets, an interface cable, and a plastic button holder.
43/64
[17.07]
1/4
[6.35]
Windows
, Windows NT
, and Windows Vista
are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: BDL 1: 40 to 185F
( 40 to 85C); BDL 2: 4 to 185F
( 20 to 85C), 0 to 100% RH.
Memory Size: BDL 1: 2048 readings;
BDL 2: 4096 temperature and 4096
humidity readings (low resolution),
2048 temperature and 2048 humidity
readings (high resolution).
Accuracy: BDL 1: 1.5F (1C) from
22 to 158F ( 30 to 70C); BDL 2:
0.9F (0.5C) from 14 to 158F
( 10 to 70C), 5% RH.
Resolution: BDL 1: 8 bit; BDL 2: 8 or
11 bit.
Sampling Rate: BDL 1: Selectable
from 1 to 255 min; BDL 2: Selectable
from 1 sec to 24 hrs.
98, Windows

2000, Windows

ME,
Windows NT
, Windows

XP, and
Windows Vista
operating system with

16 MB RAM, one free USB port.
Power Requirements: Internal, non
replaceable 3.0V lithium battery.
Battery Life: BDL 1: 10 years
(approx); BDL 2: 5 years (approx).
Model
BDL-1
BDL-2
BDL-K1
BDL-K2
Input Type
Temperature
Temperature
RoHS
** Must also have lite version
Temperature/Process Data Logger
Visual and Audible Alarm, Infrared Transfer, USB Interface
Series
IDL
The Series IDL Temperature/Process Data Loggers provide an accurate record of
temperature or process signals, depending on the model chosen. The compact logger can
store over 16,000 records and uses an infrared transfer dock with a RS232 Serial interface
for fast downloads. The Series IDL logger has a user selectable sample rate and features
programmable high and low alarms that are indicated with an LED and an audible alarm.
SPECIFICATIONS
DATA LOGGER SPECIFICATIONS
Ranges: IDL 0: 40 to 158F ( 40 to
70C); IDL 2: 0 to 22 mA; IDL 3: 0 to
10 V.
Accuracy: IDL 0: 0.9F (0.5C);
IDL 2: 16 A; IDL 3: 10 mV.
Resolution: 12 bit.
full.
Sampling Rate: IDL 0/IDL 1:
Selectable from 30 sec to 24 hrs; IDL
2/IDL 3: Selectable from 2 sec to 24
hrs.
98, Windows

2000, Windows

ME,
Windows NT
, Windows

XP, and
Windows Vista
operating system with

16 MB RAM, one free RS232 port.
Power Requirements: One time use,
non replaceable lithium battery
(included).
Battery Life: 5 years (approx).
Alarms: Programmable high/low visual
and audio indication option.
Interface: Infrared dock with RS232
Series connection.
PROBE SPECIFICATIONS
Ranges: IDL LT: 40 to 257F
( 40 to 125C); IDL HT: 140 to 482F
(60 to 250C).
Accuracy: IDL LT: 1.4F (0.8C);
IDL HT: 2F (1.5C).
Windows
, Windows NT
, and Windows Vista
are registered
2-23/64
[60]
1-3/8
[35]
25/32
[20]
3-29/64
[99.22]
1-61/64
[49.6]
1
[25.4]
DATA LOGGER
Model
IDL-0
IDL-1
IDL-2
IDL-3
** Must also have lite version
ACCESSORIES
DL500-LITE, Lite Version Windows
Operating System Software*

DL500, Full Version Windows
Operating System Software Key**

BDL-SIL, Weatherproof Silicone Housing (5 pk)
BDL-WALL, Wall Mounting Bracket (5 pk)
BDL-CLIP, Plastic Button Holder (5 pk)
Kit
No
No
Yes
Yes
ACCESSORIES
DL500, Full Version Windows

Operating System Software Key**
IDL-COM, IR Dock with RS232 Interface
DL500-LITE, Lite Version Windows
Operating System Software*

IDL-LT, Low Temperature External Probe
IDL-HT, High Temperature External Probe
Input Type
Internal Temperature Sensor
External Temperature Sensor
Current
Voltage

D
a
t
a

L
o
g
g
e
r
s
,
S
t
a
n
e
s
s

S
t
e
e
D
A
T
A

L
O
G
G
E
R
S

&

R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
Model
STDL-10
Submersible Temperature Data Logger
High/Low Alarm Setting, Continuous Recording, Compact
1/8 JACK FOR
USB CABLE
GASKET
REMOVABLE
CAP
5/8
[15.88]
23/32
[18.42]
REMOVABLE
CAP
GASKET
USER REPLACEABLE
BATTERY
SIZE 1/2AA
2-19/64
[58.42]
The Model STDL-10 is a miniature data logger that accurately records temperatures
from -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C). The submersible, compact data logger features
programmable high and low alarms that are indicated with green and red LEDs. Standing
only 2.6 in (66 mm) tall and 0.7 in (18 mm) in diameter, it can record over 32,000
measurements. The easy to use DL700 software makes retrieving data simple and allows
for user selectable sampling rates. The STDL-10 can easily be started and stopped from a
PC or delayed to start up to six months in advance.
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: 40 to 176F ( 40 to 80C).
Accuracy: 0.9F (0.5C) for 32 to
122F (0 to 50C).
to 12 hrs.
95, Windows
98, Windows
2000,
Windows
ME, Windows NT
, and
Windows

free USB port.
replaceable, 3.6V lithium battery.
required).
Housing Material: 316L stainless
steel (food grade).
Windows
and Windows NT
are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Model STDL-10, Submersible Temperature Data Logger
ACCESSORIES
ER14250, 3.6V Replacement Battery
Temperature/Humidity Data Logger
Submersible, Measures Humidity and Temperature
Series
ISDL
1
[25.40]
3-53/64
[97.11]
ISDL-T10
The Series ISDL Temperature/Humidity Data Logger accurately records temperatures
that range from -40 to 185F (-40 to 80C). The easy to use DL700 software makes retrieving
data simple and allows for user selectable sampling rates. The ISDL can easily be started and
stopped from a PC or delayed to start up to six months in advance.
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: Temperature: 40 to 176F
( 40 to 80C); Humidity: 0 to 100%RH.
Memory Size: ISDL T10: 32,767
readings; ISDL R10: 21,845 readings
per channel.
Accuracy: Temperature: 0.9F
(0.5C); Humidity: 3%RH.
Resolution: Temperature: 0.2F
(0.1C); Humidity: 0.5%RH.
full.
sec to 12 hrs.
95, Windows
98, Windows
2000,
Windows
ME, Windows NT
, and
Windows

free USB port.
required).
Material: Aluminum or 303 SS
Weight: ISDL T10: 4 oz (110 g); ISDL
T10 SS: 8 oz (230 g);
ISDL R10: 5 oz (145 g); ISDL R10
SS: 10 oz (285 g).
Model
ISDL-T10
ISDL-T10-SS
ISDL-R10
ISDL-R10-SS
Windows

ISDL-R10
VENTS TO
HUMIDITY SENSOR
4-63/64
[126.75]
1
[25.40]
Description
Temperature, Aluminum Enclosure
Temperature, Stainless Steel Enclosure
Temperature/Humidity, Aluminum Enclosure
Temperature/Humidity, Stainless Steel Enclosure
ACCESSORIES
ER14250, 3.6V Replacement Battery

414
D
a
t
a

L
o
g
g
e
r
s
,
U
S
B
D
A
T
A

L
O
G
G
E
R
S

&

R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
Model
HTDL-10
High Temperature Data Logger
Submersible, Continuous Recording, Compact
3-3/64
[77.30] 1-11/32
[34.29]
1-3/64
[26.67]
29/64
[11.51]
1-3/4
[44.45]
19/32
[15.24]
7/64
[2.71] 13/64
[5.25]
1/8 JACK FOR USB
INTERFACE CABLE
UNDER CAP
The Model HTDL-10 is a high temperature data logger that can handle being placed in
conditions of extreme heat of up to 302F (150C). This submersible and portable data
logger can record over 32,000 measurements and has a 2 inch rigid external probe to ensure
fast and accurate temperature readings. The easy to use DL700 software makes retrieving
data simple. The HTDL-10 can easily be started and stopped from a PC or delayed to start
up to six months in advance.
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: 40 to 302F ( 40 to 150C).
95, Windows
98, Windows
2000, Windows
ME, Windows NT
, and Windows
XP operating system, one free USB port.

Power Requirements: Factory replaceable, 3.9 V high temperature lithium battery.
Housing Material: 316 stainless steel.
Windows
and Windows NT

Model HTDL-10, High Temperature Data Logger
ACCESSORY
DL700, Software, manual, and USB interface cable
Model
DW-USB-RT
Real-time USB Data Logger
Powered from USB Port, Compact
The DW-USB-RT Real-time USB Data Logger allows users to monitor temperature,
humidity, and dew-point through the USB port of their PC. Real-time and recorded readings
are displayed within the included Windows
-based application and can be exported to Excel
spreadsheet software. The DW-USB-RT can be configured to send e-mail notifications

should a user-defined alarm condition be met.
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: Temperature: 4 to 158F ( 20 to 70C); Humidity: 0 to 100%RH.
Accuracy: Temperature: 3F (1.5C); Humidity: 4.5%RH.
Resolution: Temperature: 0.1F (0.1C); Humidity: 1%RH.
Sampling Mode: Continuous recording.
Sampling Rate: 1 sec.
98, Windows
2000, Windows
XP,
Windows NT

or Windows Vista
32 bit operating systems.

Power Requirements: Powered from USB port.
Housing: ABS plastic blend.
Alarms: Programmable high/low e mail alerts.
Interface: USB port.
Weight: 0.08 oz (23 g).
RoHS
2-61/64
[75.18]
2-1/2
[63.50]
3/4
[19.05]
3/8
[9.52]
BLUE LED VENT TO HUMIDITY
SENSOR
Windows
, Windows NT

and Windows Vista

Model DW-USB-RT, Real time USB Data Logger

D
a
t
a

L
o
g
g
e
r
s
,
U
S
B
D
A
T
A

L
O
G
G
E
R
S

&

R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
Series
DW-USB
Compact USB Data Logger
Measure Temperature, Humidity, Dew Point, Current, Voltage, or Carbon Monoxide
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Sensor: Range: 31 to
176F ( 35 to 80C); Accuracy: 2F
(1C); Resolution: 1F (0.5C).
Sensor: Range: 31 to 176F ( 35 to
80C), 0 to 100% RH; Accuracy: 2F
(1C), 3.5% RH; Resolution: 1F
(0.5C), 1% RH.
Voltage Sensor: Range: 0 to 30 VDC;
Accuracy: 1%; Resolution: 50 mVDC.
Current Sensor: Range: 4 to 20 mA;
Accuracy: 1%; Resolution: 0.05 mA.
Thermocouple Sensor: Range: J
type: 202 to 1652F ( 130 to 900C);
K type: 328 to 2372F ( 200 to
1300C); T type: 328 to 662F ( 200 to
350C); Accuracy: 1.5F (1C);
Carbon Monoxide Sensor: Range: 0
to 1000 ppm; Accuracy: 6%;
Resolution: 0.5 ppm.
Memory Size: 16,382 temperature;
16,382 each temperature and RH;
32,764 readings for voltage, current,
and thermocouple; and 32,510 for
carbon monoxide.
Sampling Mode: Stop on memory full.
sec to 12 hrs (DW USB 1, DW USB 2),
1 sec to 12 hrs (DW USB 3, DW USB
4, DW USB 5) and 10 sec to 5 min
(DW USB 6).
98, Windows

2000, Windows

XP,
Windows NT

or Windows Vista

32 bit
operating systems.
battery.
Housing: ABS plastic blend.
Interface: USB Port.
The compact design of the DW-USB Series data loggers allows the user to monitor
temperature, humidity, dew point, voltage, current, or carbon monoxide almost anywhere.
The user can select the sampling rate, start time, high/low alarm settings, and temperature
unit parameters with easy to install Windows
-based application. Stored data is

downloaded by simply plugging the module into a PCs USB port with no cable required.
Alarm status and low battery is indicated via built-in flashing LEDs. When the protective
cap is fitted, the data logger resists moisture to IP67 standards. These features make the
data logger ideal for calibration labs, pharmaceutical plants, environmental chambers, and
storage warehouses.
Model
DW-USB-1
DW-USB-2
DW-USB-3
DW-USB-4
DW-USB-5
DW-USB-6
RoHS
Windows
, Windows NT
, and Windows Vista
are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Y
X
MODEL DW-USB-X
LED
CO SENSOR CAP
TERMINAL BLOCK CAP
VENTED
CLIP
STANDARD
CLIP
4-51/64
[121.73]
1-3/32
[27.76]
MODEL DW-USB-CASE
1-3/64
[26.59]
1-1/16
[26.99]
Model
DW USB 1
DW USB 2
DW USB 3
Overall
Length (X)
3 55/64
4 1/16
4 27/64
Overall
Length (Y)
3 55/64
4 1/16
4 27/64
Body/Clip
Standard
Vented
Standard
Cap
Standard
Standard
Black Tip Term Block
LED
Clear/Red
Clear/Clear
Red/Green
Model
DW USB 4
DW USB 5
DW USB 6
Overall
Length (X)
4 27/64
4 59/64
4 21/32
Overall
Length (Y)
4 27/64
4 59/64
4 21/32
Body/Clip
Standard
Vented
Standard
Cap
Blue Tip Term Block
Red Tip Term Block
Standard
LED
Red/Green
Red/Green
Red/Green
Input Type
Temperature
Voltage
Current
Carbon Monoxide
Thermocouple
Model DW-USB-CASE, Waterproof case for DW USB 1
Model
DW-USB-LITE
Mini Temperature Data Logger
Single Channel, USB Interface
The Model DW-USB-LITE Data Logger is a low cost temperature data logger that
measures and stores up to 4080 temperature readings over a measurement range 14 to
122F. The stand-alone device has a fixed 30-min sample rate and a battery life of 1 month
with continuous use. High/low alarm settings are user programmable through easy to
install Windows

based software (included). The DW-USB-LITE features a visual LED
alarm indicator. Stored data is downloaded by directly plugging the data logger into a PCs
USB port and running the software, no cable required. Downloaded data can then be
graphed, printed and exported to other applications.
32/32
[18.26]
3/8
[22.23]
2-11/16
[69.26]
D
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Range: 14 to 122F ( 10
to 50C).
Temperature Accuracy: 4.5F
(2.5C).
Temperature Resolution: 2F (1C).
Memory Size: 4080 readings.
Sampling Mode: Continuous.
Sampling Rate: 30 min (fixed).
98, Windows

2000, Windows
XP, and
Windows Vista
(software included).
Power Requirements: 3V coin cell
battery (included).
Interface: USB.
Windows
, Windows NT

and Windows Vista

Model DW-USB-LITE, Mini Temperature Data Logger

416
D
a
t
a

L
o
g
g
e
r
s
,
S
u
r
f
a
c
e

M
o
u
n
t
D
A
T
A

L
O
G
G
E
R
S

&

R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
Model
DL001
Temperature Data Logger
Self-Powered, 2-Channel, Store up to 32,768 Readings, Compact
Record temperature in a wide range of applications including HVAC testing and
balancing, transportation, and energy management with the Model DL001 Temperature
Data Logger. Temperature logger has an on-board thermistor and an external sensor
channel for remote temperature measurements. Microprocessor controlled circuitry
includes solid state memory that can store up to 32,768 readings. Model DL001 logger
operates totally independently from any external power supply with built-in lithium battery.
Units feature a magnetic backing and locking hole for easy and secure mounting. Quickly
program the temperature logger or upload data to a computer using Model DL200
Windows
software (sold separately).

INPUT JACK FOR
INTERFACE CABLE SECURITY EYELET
MAGNETIC
STRIP
.744
[18.9]
3.825
[97]
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
.664
[16.9]
2.856
[75.1]
3.375
[85.7]
.450
[11.4]
12403500
Series
DL6
Monitor and troubleshoot HVAC systems, verify energy management systems, or track
performance of pneumatically controlled valves with Series DL6 Pressure/Temperature/RH
Data Logger. Units include an on-board thermistor for ambient temperature measurement
and pressure module. Remote humidity/temperature sensor and plug-in humidity sensor are
sold separately. Loggers can store up to 32,768 readings and operate independently from
any external power supply with built-in lithium battery. Use Model DL200 Windows
software (sold separately) to quickly program the logger or upload data to a computer.
XXXXXX
.744
[18.9]
3.825
[97]
RELATIVE HUMIDITY PLUG IN
INPUT JACK FOR INTERFACE CABLE
SECURITY EYELET
MAGNETIC
STRIP
.644
[16.9]
2.956
[75.1]
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
3.375
[85.7]
.450
[11.4]
DWYER INS RUM NTS NC
MICH GAN C TY N 4 361 U S A
1240
6-00
Pressure/Temperature/RH Data Logger
Self-Powered, 5-Channel, Store up to 32,768 Readings, Compact
SPECIFICATIONS
No. of Channels: Two, one internal
thermistor and one external
temperature sensor.
Internal Thermistor Range: 40 to
158F ( 40 to 70C).
Accuracy: 0.5C (0.9F).
Clock Accuracy: 8 seconds per day
plus one sampling interval.
Internal Thermistor Resolution:
0.7F (0.4C), R25 value equal to
10,000.
Resolution: 8 bits (1 in 256).
Sampling Methods: Continuous (first
in, first out) or stop when full (fill then
stop).
Sampling Rates: 8 seconds to once
every 5 days, selectable.
Ambient Operating Temperature/RH:
50 to 160F ( 45 to 70C), 0 to 95%
RH, non condensing.
Connection: Removable screw
terminal.
Computer Requirements: IBM
Windows
3.1 or later with 2 MB RAM

serial port.
battery.
Power Consumption: 5 10 A.
Housing Material: Polyphenylene
ether and polystyrene PPE & PS.
External Sensor: Interchange
able NTC (negative temperature
coefficient) thermistor recommended
(not included).
SPECIFICATIONS
No. of Channels: Five; internal
thermistor, pressure module (included),
plug in humidity sensor, remote
humidity/temperature sensor.
158F ( 40 to 70C).
32 to 158F (0 to 70C).
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Clock Accuracy: 8 sec/day plus one
sampling interval.
Thermal Accuracy: 1% FS.
Drift: 0.2% FS/yr.
Internal Thermistor Resolution: 0.7F
(0.4C), R25 value equal to 10,000.
stop).
Sampling Rates: Selectable from 8
seconds to once every 5 days.
50 to 160F ( 45 to 70C), 0 to 95%
RH, non condensing.
terminal.
compatible 386 or above and Windows
3.1 or later with 2 MB RAM and 2 MB

hard drive disk space, one serial port.
Power Requirements: Built in 3.6V
lithium battery.
Service: Air and noncorrosive gases.
Max. Pressure Rating: 4x rated
pressure.
Housing Material: Polypenylene ether
and polystyrene.
Windows

Model
DL6005
DL6030
DL6100
Windows

ACCESSORY
DL200, Windows
Software and Connecting Cable

Model DL001, Temperature Data Logger
ACCESSORIES
DL200, Windows

DL690, Remote Humidity/Temperature Sensor
DL691, Plug in Humidity Sensor
Pressure Range
0 to 5 psig (30 kPa)
0 to 30 psig (200 kPa)
0 to 100 psig (700 kPa)

D
a
t
a

L
o
g
g
e
r
s
,
S
u
r
f
a
c
e

M
o
u
n
t
D
A
T
A

L
O
G
G
E
R
S

&

R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
Series
DL7
Differential Pressure Data Logger
Also Measures and Logs Temperature, Self-Powered, 2-Channel, Compact
Monitor and Record low differential pressures and temperature with the Model DL7
Differential Pressure Data Logger. Unit includes an on-board thermistor for ambient
temperature measurement. Sampling rates are user selectable from 0.04 seconds to 8
hours with First-in first-out or Fill-then-stop sampling options. Loggers can store up to
21,500 readings and operate totally independently from any external power supply with
built-in lithium battery. Use Model DL200 Windows
software (sold separately) to quickly

program the logger or upload data to a computer. The Series DL7 logger is ideal for
monitoring air duct velocity, testing and balancing HVAC systems, or verifying room
pressure.
MAGNETIC
STRIP
11/32
[8.730]
2-1/2
[62.29] TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1/2
[12.70]
2-7/32
[56.36]
SECURITY
EYELET
Series
DL8
Process Data Logger
8-Channels, Compact, Self-Powered, Stores up to 32,768 Readings
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
MAGNETIC
STRIP
0.45
[12]
3.375
[9.5]
SECURITY EYELET
2.95
[75]
0.656
[17]
Eliminate traditional paper chart recorders with the Series DL8 Process Data
Logger. This versatile, multi-channel data logger monitors and stores up to 32,768 process
readings for later download to an IBM compatible computer. Seven external input channels
easily interface with common transducer and transmitter outputs. Internal thermistor
measures ambient temperature conditions. Programming is simple and easy with the
DL200 Windows
software and connecting cable (sold separately). The Series DL8 Process
Data logger is ideal for monitoring temperature, relative humidity, pressure, wind speed,
current, voltage and power.
SPECIFICATIONS
No. of Channels: Two; internal
thermistor, and a differential pressure
sensor.
158F ( 40 to 70C).
Compensated Temp Range: 32 to
158F (0 to 70C).
Accuracy: 0.05 w.c. (up to 2 range)
1 (5 and 10 range).
Thermal Accuracy: 0.5% FS.
Clock Accuracy: 2 sec/day plus one
sampling interval.
Resolution: 0.01 w.c.
Internal Thermistor Resolution:
0.7F (0.4C), R25 value equal to
10,000 [10k @ 25C (77F)].
Nonlinearity: 0.05% FS (BFSL).
Hysteresis and Repeatability:
0.05% FS.
Drift: 0.5% FS/yr.
Sampling Methods: Continuous
(first in, first out: not available from 40
ms to 8 sec.), stop when full (fill then
stop), or delayed start.
Sampling Rates: Selectable from 0.04
seconds to 8 hours.
40 to 158F ( 40 to 70C), 0 to 95%
RH, non condensing.
Connection: Two 1/8 I.D. permanent
protective tubing.
Windows

serial port.
Service: Dry air and noncorrosive
gases.
Max. Pressure Rating: 4X rated
pressure.
lithium battery.
Housing Material: Polyphenylene
ether and polystyrene PPE & PS.
SPECIFICATIONS
No. of Channels: Eight; One for
internal thermistor and seven for
external analog inputs.
158F ( 40 to 70C).
Clock Accuracy: 8 seconds per day
plus one sampling interval.
stop).
Sampling Rates: Selectable from 8
seconds to once every 5 days.
to 160F ( 45 to 70C), 0 to 95% RH,
non condensing.
terminal.
Windows

serial port.
lithium battery.
Housing Materials: Polyphenylene
ether and polystryrene PPE & PS.
Windows

Windows

ACCESSORY
DL200, Windows

ACCESSORY
DL200, Windows
Software and cable

Model
DL70
DL71
DL72
DL75
DL710
Pressure Range
0.5 w.c. (1.2 mbar)
1 w.c. (2.5 mbar)
2.0 w.c. (5.0 mbar)
5 w.c. (12.4 mbar)
10 w.c.(24.9 mbar)
Model
DL8
DL81
Input Type
0 to 2.5 VDC, 0 to 5 VDC (2 ch.), 0 to 10 VDC,
0 to 200 mV DC, and 0 to 25 mA DC (2 ch).
All channels 0 to 25 mA.

418
D
a
t
a

L
o
g
g
e
r
s
,
L
e
v
e
D
A
T
A

L
O
G
G
E
R
S

&

R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
Model
LDL-030
Unvented Water Level Data Logger
Stainless Steel, Measures Temperature and Water Level
The Model LDL-030 Unvented Water Level Data Logger is a compact
and portable device. It measures water level up to 30 ft (9.14 m) and has an
internal temperature sensor that accurately records temperatures between -40
to 176F (-40 to 80C). The battery-powered data logger can store over 16,000
measurements per channel. The easy to use DL700 software allows the LDL-
030 to be easily started and stopped from a PC or delayed to start up to six
months in advance. The software also allows for user selectable sampling rates.
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: Temperature: 40 to
176F ( 40 to 80C); Water level:
0 to 30 ft (0 to 9.14 m).
Memory Size: 16,383 readings
per channel.
Accuracy: Temperature: 0.9F
(0.5C); Level: 0.3% FSR @
77F (25C).
(0.1C); Water Level: 0.05 in
(0.127 cm).
Sampling Method: Stop on
memory full.
Sampling Rate: Selectable from
2 sec to 12 hr.
Computer Requirements:
Windows
95, Windows

98,
Windows

2000, Windows

ME,
Windows NT
, and Windows

XP
operating systems, one free USB
port.
Interface: USB port (interface
cable required).
Windows
, Windows NT
, and Windows Vista

are registered
1 [25.40]
1-1/4
[31.75]
5-31/64
[139.37]
Model
LDL2-030
Vented Water Level Data Logger
Stainless Steel, Automatically Compensates for Atmospheric Pressure
The Model LDL2-030 Vented Water Level Data Logger has a vented
cable and end cap to allow it to automatically compensate for atmospheric
pressure fluctuations. The data logger measures water level up to 30 ft (9.14 m)
and has an internal temperature sensor that accurately records temperatures
between -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C). The innovative design makes it ideal for use
in wastewater treatment facilities as well as monitoring well and ground water
levels. The battery-powered data logger can store over 16,000 measurements
per channel, and the software allows for user selectable sampling rates. The
easy to use DL700 software allows the LDL2-030 to be easily started and
stopped from a PC or delayed to start up to six months in advance.
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: Temperature: 40 to
176F ( 40 to 80C); Water level:
0 to 30 ft (0 to 9.14 m).
Memory Size: 16,383 readings
per channel.
Accuracy: 0.9F (0.5C),
0.3% FSR @ 77F (25C).
(0.1C); Water level: 0.02 in
(0.051 cm).
Sampling Method: Stop on
memory full.
Sampling Rate: Selectable from
2 sec to 12 hr.
Computer Requirements:
Windows
95, Windows

98,
Windows

2000, Windows

ME,
Windows NT
, and Windows

XP
operating systems, one free USB
port.
Interface: USB port (interface
cable required).
Wetted Materials: 303 SS; Cable:
Polyurethane.
Windows
, Windows NT
, and Windows Vista

are registered
8-53/61
[224.41] 7-1/32
[178.44]
1-1/4
[31.75]
SENSOR END
CONNECTED TO
RECEIVER END BY
30 FOOT CABLE
1 [25.40]
CONNECTED TO
SENSOR END BY
30 FOOT CABLE
RECEIVER END
6-53/64
[173.33]
4-19/32
[116.84]
Model LDL-030, Water Level Data Logger
ACCESSORIES
Model LDL2-030, Vented Water Level Data Logger
ACCESSORIES

D
a
t
a

A
c
q
u
s
t
o
n
S
o
f
t
w
a
r
e
D
A
T
A

L
O
G
G
E
R
S

&

R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
Data Acquisition and Logging Software
Designed for Love Temperature Controller Interface
Model
LoveLinkIII
Computer Requirements
The LOVELINK
III software application will run on Windows
95/98 and Windows
NT
Workstation 4.0 (Service Pack 3 recommended), Windows
2000, and
Windows
XP Software. The hardware requirements for each of these operating

systems can be found in the documentation provided with that operating system.
One available RS 232 or RS 485 port is needed to communicate with the
temperature control(s). A minimum of 4 MB of hard disk space is needed for the
LOVELINK
III software application files, and additional hard disk space is needed
to store temperature log files. Log file size will vary depending on the Duration and
Rate selected for the controls and the number of controls on line.
Control Requirements
The temperature controls supported by LOVELINK
III software are the Love 2600,

8600, 16A, 16L, 32A, and 32DZ Series (with Options 992 or 996, RS 485 Serial
Communications; or Options 993 or 995, RS 232 Serial Communications). (Note:
The 32A and 32DZ Series supports RS 485 communications only.
Other Requirements
To communicate with controls equipped with Options 992 or 996, RS 485 Serial
Communications, from an RS 232 communications port, an RS 485 to RS 232
converter (Mother Node) is needed. The converter models recommended are the
Love Models 351, 352, and 356 (See page 416). For RS 485 systems a 120 ohm
resistor is also needed to terminate the last control on the control network. Shielded
twisted pair cable is recommended for wiring the controls together.
LoveLink
III Data Acquisition and Logging Software is the second generation of data
acquisition software from Love Controls. This easy to use program allows connection of up
to 40 controls on a single computer port. Data logging can be set up by individual control
with varying logging periods. LoveLink
III Software is compatible with all Love Controls

2600, 8600, 16A, 16L, 16S, 32A, and 32DZ Series controls.
FEATURES
Address and store data for up to 40 controls
Data logging at individually adjustable rates
On screen graphing for up to 10 zones
Upload and download control configuration profiles
Save and retrieve profiles to/from disk
Easy to use operator interface
Supports Love Series 2600, 8600, 16A, 16L, 32A & 32DZ controls,
and Series PP45 indicators
Low cost
Windows

Windows NT

Minigraph Recorders combine compact size, durability, accuracy and low cost for an
exceptional value. Units are widely used in applications ranging from commercial,
industrial, and process to laboratory, field, marine, aerospace and more.
Series 1200 Minigraph Recorders use a unique stylus which records on special pressure
sensitive paper. No messy ink pens, reservoirs or ink cartridges are used, eliminating
maintenance problems and data loss caused by dry pens.
Stock temperature recorders come complete with 6" long x 3/16" dia. K type thermocouple
protected by a 304 SS sheath with 8 ft. fiberglass insulated cable. They will record a full
31 days of information on a single 62 ft. x 2-9/16" wide paper roll. Stock units operate from
a 120 VAC power source; special units are available for 240 VAC or 12 VDC.
SPECIFICATIONS
Pen Response Speed: 1 second full
scale. Stylus strikes chart once in two
seconds. Dot density depends on chart
speed.
50C).
Accuracy: 2% of span for DC and
temperature inputs; 3% of span for
AC inputs.
Power Supply: Standard: 120 VAC,
60 Hz, 3W nominal; Optional: 240
VAC, 60 Hz, 3W nominal or 12 VDC,
20 mA nominal.
Chart Size: 2 9/16 wide x 62 long, 2
1/8 active width (65 mm wide x 19 m
long, 54 mm active width).
Housing Size: 3 5/8 wide x 5 5/8
height x 4 5/8 depth. (92 mm wide x
143 mm height x 111 mm depth).
Weight: 3 1/2 Ib (1.6 kg).
Series
1200
Minigraph Recorders
Temperature and Process Inputs
Charts (Packed 6 per box)
11/16
[11.48]
2-1/4
[57.15]
3-5/8
[92.08]
5/8
[15.88]
5-5/8
[142.88]
6-3/8
[161.93]
6-7/8
[174.63]
13/16
[20.64]
1-5/16
[33.35]
4-13/32
[111.92]
3/16 X 5/16
[4.76 X 7.94]
MOUNTING SLOTS
Model
1201-11-09-04
1201-12-09-04
1201-20-09-04
1201-21-09-04
1202-05-09-04
1202-12-09-04
1203-01-09-04
1204-05-09-04
Range
0 100 mV
0 1V
4 20 mA
4 20 mA
0 200F
0 1000F
20 to 130F
0 300 V
Parts No.
MG651-691630
MG651-691760
MG651-691770
MG651-691950
MG651-691650
MG651-220920
Input Type
DC Voltage
DC Voltage
DC Current
0 14 PH
Type K T/C
Type K T/C
Thermistor
AC Voltage
Major/Minor Division
8/40
10/50
15/75
10/47
12/60
14/70

420
R
e
c
o
r
d
e
r
s
,
P
a
p
e
r
D
A
T
A

L
O
G
G
E
R
S

&

R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
Dual Pen Circular Chart Recorder
Dual Pen, Adjustable Rotation Speeds, Selectable Recording Times
The LCR20 Dual Pen Circular Chart Recorder offers a wide range of features in an
easy to use package. The large 10 in (254 mm) circular chart allows easy reading of your
data. Available in clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation, the LCR20 is compatible with
Honeywell and Partlow circular charts. The LCR20 has one pen input that can be easily
programmed for any of six different thermocouple types, 100 ohm platinum DIN RTDs,
or process inputs (0 to 5 VDC or 4 to 20 mA). Inputs may be scaled to a minimum of 100
units (or degrees) to a maximum of the sensor scale or -1999 to +9999.
The Series LCR10 Circular Chart Recorder offers a wide range of features in an easy
to use package. The large 10 in (254 mm) Circular chart allows easy reading of your data.
Available in clockwise and counter clockwise rotation, the LCR10 is compatible with
Honeywell and Partlow circular charts. The LCR10 can be easily programmed for any of
six different thermocouple types, 100 ohm platinum DIN RTDs, or process inputs (0 to 5
VDC or 4 to 20 mA). Inputs may be scaled to a minimum of 100 units (or degrees) to a
maximum of the sensor scale or -1999 to +9999.
Circular Chart Recorder
Single Pen, Clockwise or Counter-clockwise Rotation
SPECIFICATIONS
Ranges: Thermocouple: Type J, K, T, R, S, B; RTD: 100 ohm platinum DIN curve
(0.00385 ohms per ohm per C); Process: 0 to 5 VDC, 250 ohms impedance, 4 to
20 mA across 250 ohms.
Chart Size: 10 (254 mm).
Accuracy: 0.5% of span (100 division span).
Output Relay: Form C (DPDT), 1A @ 240 VAC resistive.
Chart Speed: Programmable 4, 8, 12, 24, 48, 72, 168 hour rotation (168 hours=7
days).
Ambient Operating Temperature/RH: 32 to 140F (0 to 60C); 0 90% RH
(non condensing).
Power Requirements: 110/220 VAC 10%; Battery backup: 9 V alkaline.
Housing Material: Fire retardant polyphenylene ether and polystyrene PPE & PS
w/ acrylic window.
Mounting: 20 degrees of vertical, 10 degrees of horizontal.
Series
LCR10
Series
LCR20
12-5/8
[320.68]
11-29/32
[302.41]
14
[355.60]
13-3/16
[334.95]
14
[355.60]
3-35/64
[90.10]
12-5/8
[320.68]
12-5/8
[320.68]
11-29/32
[302.41]
14
[355.60]
13-3/16
[334.95]
14
[355.60]
3-35/64
[90.10]
12-5/8
[320.68]
SPECIFICATIONS
Ranges Input 1: Thermocouple: Type J, K, T, R, S, B; RTD: 100 ohm platinum
DIN curve (0.00385 ohms per ohm per C); Process: 0 to 5 VDC, 250 ohms
impedance, 4 to 20 mA across 250 ohms.
Ranges Input 2: Thermocouple: Type J, K, T, R, S, B; RTD: 100 ohm platinum
DIN curve (0.00385 ohms per ohm per C); Process: 0 to 5 VDC, 250 ohms
impedance, 4 to 20 mA across 250 ohms.
Chart Size: 10 (254 mm).
Accuracy: 0.5% of span (100 division span).
Output Relay: Form C (DPDT), 1A @ 240 VAC resistive.
Chart Speed: Programmable 4, 8, 12, 24, 48, 72, 168 hour rotation
(168 hours = 7 days).
Ambient Operating Temperature/RH: 32 to 140F (0 to 60C); 0 90% RH
(non condensing).
Power Requirements: 110/220 VAC 10%; Battery backup: 9 V alkaline.
Housing Material: Fire retardant polyphenylene ether and polystyrene PPE & PS
w/ acrylic window.
Mounting: 20 degrees of vertical, 10 degrees of horizontal.
Model
LCR10-101
LCR10-111
LCR10-201
LCR10-211
Rotation
Counter Clockwise
Counter Clockwise
Clockwise
Clockwise
Model
LCR20-101
LCR20-111
LCR20-201
LCR20-211
Rotation
Counter Clockwise
Counter Clockwise
Clockwise
Clockwise
Output
No
Yes
No
Yes
Output
No
Yes
No
Yes

TEST EQUIPMENT
pages 422 423
Manometers,
Air Velocity
pages 433 435
Air Velocity
Meters
page 434
Thermo-Anemometers
pages 436 437
Vane Anemometers
page 441
Thermohygrometers
pages 441 442
Thermometers,
Thermocouple
pages 443 444
Air Flow Hoods
page 438
Wind Meters
pages 439 440
Thermometers,
Immersion
page 447
Thermometers,
Infrared
pages 448 451
pH/ORP Temperature
Meters
page 451
Thermocouple
Calibrators
page 445
Hand Held
Thermocouples
page 446
pH Testers
page 452
Switch Testers
page 452
Manometers,
Portable
pages 424 432
Total Dissolved
Solids Testers
page 453
Conductivity
Testers
page 453
Gas Leak Detectors
page 454
Gas Analyzers/Kits
pages 455 456
Signal Generators/
Multimeters
pages 457 458
Calibration Pumps
pages 458 461
Pressure
Calibrators
pages 462 463
Tachometers
page 464

422
T
y
p
c
a

A
p
p
c
a
t
o
n
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
The Model CSG Digital Signal Generator is perfect for generating
or simulating input signals to panel meters and process
controllers. The signal generator is capable of sourcing up to 10
VDC or 20 mA in 1 VDC or 1 mA steps. The backlit digital display
allows users to quickly compare the reading on the Model CSG to
that of the panel meter or process controller. The signal from the
Model CSG can be used to set up the upper and lower limits of the
process range. It can also be used to insure that set point and
alarm functions are working properly on the panel meter or
process controller.
Combustion analyzer maximize boiler efficiency while
monitoring harmful products of combustion.
Current/voltage signal generator used to calibrate
panel meters.
There are several critical factors in attaining efficient combustion
for boilers and other combustors. Monitoring the temperature of
combustion and minimizing the amount of excess air in the
system are undoubtedly essential steps. A Dwyer 1207-NO
X
Flue
Gas Analyzer can break down the products of combustion, giving
an accurate volumetric composition of harmful NO
X
compounds,
O
2
, CO
2
, and CO. Additionally, the 1207-NO
X
will monitor
differential temperature, excess air and poison index. Results can
be easily viewed on screen or uploaded to a PC via the user-
friendly software.
Preheater Boiler
Feedwater Steam
CH4
Air
Combustion gas
mA Source Output
Series CSG
Current Voltage Calibrator
Series DPMA
Panel Meter
The ability of chlorine to kill microorganisms in swimming pools
depends on the pH level of the water in a swimming pool. Chlorine
is most effective at killing microorganisms at lower pH levels.
However, if the pH level is too low, the water will be very corrosive
and irritate the skin of the swimmers. The Model PHO-1
accurately measures the levels of pH, ORP, and temperature.
Based on the values, the pH level can be lowered or increased by
adding acidic solutions or base solutions to the pool to reach the
perfect balance.
Maximize the effectiveness of chlorine in swimming
pools.
PHO-1 Meter
Pool
Field calibrate and certify pressure gauges.
Using the series PHP-1 with a DPG-100, a technician can
calibrate or certify process pressure gauges up to 1% accurate.
The PHP-1 hand pump can easily supply pressures up to 600 PSI
by squeezing the handle and adjusting the volume control valve.
The pump has two connections to be connected with a test gauge,
such as the Dwyer Model DPG-100, and a process gauge, such
as the Dwyer SGL series.
U H F R A U M
DPG-100 Digital Pressure Gage SGL Pressure Gage
PHP-1 Hand Pump

T
y
p
c
a

A
p
p
c
a
t
o
n
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Checking the gas pressure to a heating unit on the burner side of
the regulator is a standard installation and service routine. The
Dwyer
Series 475 Handheld Digital Manometer is a low-cost,

durable device that is easily transportable in a pocket or briefcase.
Units are highly accurate with 0.5% full scale accuracy. Some
servicemen prefer our portable Dwyer Magnehelic
differential
pressure gage with dial type scale for field use.
Main Valve
Gas
Pilot Gas
Regulator
Main Burner
Control
Valve
Series 475
Pressure Tap
Digital Manometers used to check gas pressure to a
heating burner.
Duct
Air Out
Air In
Series 471
Digital Thermo-Anemometer
Determine air velocity and temperature levels in ducts
or air supply grills.
The Dwyer
Series 471 Digital Thermo-Anemometer is the ideal

portable product for determining air velocity and temperature
levels in ducts or air supply grills. The 471-1's versatility is due to
its four field selectable ranges from 0-500 FPM (0-3 MPS) up to
15,000 FPM (70 MPS). With a push of a button, FPM and
Fahrenheit readings are converted to MPS and Celsius. Readings
may be stored and retrieved which allows the user greater
efficiency with HVAC balancing at various locations in a building.
Model 471-2 has an extendable probe and model 471-3 provides
a bendable extending probe for hard to reach sampling locations.
Handheld anemometers are an excellent, portable tool for
performing tests on HVAC system performance; however, large
rotating vanes can prevent easy access to ducts. Dwyer
introduces the VT-200 Vane Thermo-Anemometer to eliminate
this problem. Additionally, simple keypad programming enables
the user to view volumetric flow rates in CFM or CMM.
Datalogging software is also available to easily record and view
data on a PC or laptop.
Handheld anemometer enables measuring duct flow
measurements.
Air Flow
Series VT-200
Series THI-10
Digital
Hygrometer
768
52.4
The Dwyer
THI-10 Handheld Digital Hygrometer is a simple,

portable device for quickly measuring humidity and temperature
levels in ambient air. The dew point and wet-bulb temperature
readings are derived from relative humidity and temperature
measurements. The THI-10 is often used in agricultural
applications where proper humidity and temperature levels are
critical in plant or animal well being.
Quickly measure humidity and temperature levels in
ambient air.

424
M
a
n
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
P
o
r
t
a
b
e
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Series 476A Single Pressure Digital
Manometer & Series 478A Digital Manometer
Electronic Zeroing, 1.5% Accuracy
Series
476A
&
478A
Ideal for field or laboratory use, the Model 476A Single Pressure Digital
Manometer measures low pressures from -20 to 20 w.c. with 1.5% full scale
accuracy. Designed especially for the HVAC contractor, the Model 476A can be
used to set supply pressures, verify pressure switch operation, adjust regulators,
check pneumatic systems and computer peripherals. The rugged, handheld unit is
constructed with an extruded aluminum case for exceptional durability.
The Series 478A manometer can be used to measure positive, negative, or
differential pressures. The unit features selectable units, auto zero, hold and a
Min/Max function. Press the Hold key to freeze the current pressure
measurement on the display. The 478A manometer includes a zeroing button to
null out any minor pressure differences.
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 1.5% F.S. at 72F (22.2C). Includes linearity and
repeatability.
Pressure Hysteresis: 0.1% of F.S.
Pressure Limits: 5 psig (.74 bar).
Thermal Effect: 0.05% F.S./F.
Display: 4 digit LCD (.425H x .234W digits).
Power Requirements: 9V alkaline battery. Battery included but not
connected.
Process Connections: For use with 3/16 or 1/4 I.D. tubing.
Weight: 10.8 oz (306 g).
Model
476A-0
Range
in w.c.
20.0 to 20.0
kPa
4.98
Maximum
Pressure
5 psig
bar
.0498
psi
0.723
in Hg
1.471
in w.c.
20.00
mm Hg
37.4
mbar
49.8
Available Pressure Units
mm w.c.
508
Resolution
in w.c.
0.02
Model
478A-0
478A-1
Range
in w.c.
4.00 to 4.00
60.0 to 60.0
kPa
0.996
14.95
Maximum
Pressure
5 psig
5 psig
bar
.1495
psi
.1445
2.168
in Hg
.294
4.41
in w.c.
4.00
60.0
mm Hg
7.47
112.1
mbar
9.96
149.5
mm w.c.
101.6
1524
Pa
996
Resolution
in w.c.
0.01
0.1
FEATURES
One button auto zero function
Auto power off.
Large, easy to read display.
Extruded aluminum case.
Instant selection from up to eight english/metric units.
A-402A CARRYING CASE Tough gray nylon pouch
protects any Series 476A/478A Manometer. Double
zippered for quick and easy access. With belt loop that
snaps closed.
7 1/2H x 3W x 2 1/4D (191 x 76 x 57 mm)
Model 476A-0, Digital Manometer, 20 to 20 w.c.
Model 478A-0, Digital Differential Manometer, 4 0 4 w.c.
Model 478A-1, Digital Differential Manometer, 60 0 60 w.c.

M
a
n
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
P
o
r
t
a
b
e
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
The Dwyer
Series 475-FM Mark III Handheld Digital Manometer is ideal for

field calibration, monitoring or trouble shooting HVAC systems, clean rooms,
or a wide range of other low pressure pneumatic systems. This handy
instrument measures positive, negative or differential pressures of air and
natural gases in ranges from 1 in. w.c. (0.249 kPa) to 150 psid (10.34 bar). The
Series 475-FM is approved and is intrinsically safe for hazardous locations, Class
1, Div. 1, Group A, B, C, D, T4. Its simple operation and easy to read digital
display make it an indispensable test instrument for the plant engineer,
industrial hygienist and HVAC technician. When used with a Dwyer
Pitot tube
(see Flow and Air Velocity), the Series 475-FM Mark III can also be used as an
air velocity gage. See the complete 475-1-FM-AV kit described below.
The Series 475-FM Mark III is housed in a durable extruded aluminum case
with its solid state circuitry mounted on a tough fiberglass epoxy circuit board.
To meet the most demanding applications and to provide stability of instrument
reading, the 1 in. w.c. range is compensated for position sensitivity through the use
of a unique patented dual sensor system. A standard 9 volt battery provides up to
100 hours of operation. Dual push pads on the front panel control on-off, auto
zero, and pressure unit selection. No set-up or leveling. The large 0.42 LCD
display is easy to read, minimizing data collection errors. Units include a low
battery indicator. The pressure sensor used is a highly stable silicon
piezoresistive device. Standard connections are dual sized for 1/8" or 3/16" I.D.
vinyl or rubber tubing. Complete instructions are conveniently printed on rear
of housing.
Series
475
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and compatible combustible gases.
Accuracy: 0.5% F.S., 60 to 78F (15.6 to 25.6C); 1.5% F.S. from 32
to 60F and 78 to 104F (0 to 15.6C and 25.6 to 40C).
Pressure Hysteresis: 0.1% of full scale.
Display: 0.42 (10.6 mm) 4 digit LCD.
Resolution: See chart.
Power Requirements: 9 volt alkaline battery. Battery not connected.
Weight: 10.8 oz (306 g).
Connections: Two barbed connections for use with 1/8 (3.18 mm) or
3/16 (4.76 mm) I.D. tubing. Two compression fittings for use with 1/8
(3.18 mm) I.D. x 1/4 (6.35 mm) O.D. tubing for 475 7 FM & 475 8 FM
only.
Mk III Handheld Digital Manometer
Ranges from 1 in. w.c. to 150 psid, 0.5% Accuracy
Model
475-000-FM
475-00-FM
475-0-FM
475-1-FM
475-2-FM
475-3-FM
475-4-FM
475-5-FM
475-6-FM
475-7-FM
475-8-FM
English
Range
0 1.000 in w.c.
0 4.000 in w.c.
0 10.00 in w.c.
0 20.00 in w.c.
0 40.00 in w.c.
0 200.0 in w.c.
0 10.00 psi
0 20.00 psi
0 30.00 psi
0 100.0 psi
0 150.0 psi
Metric
Range
.2491 kPa
0.996 kPa
2.491 kPa
4.982 kPa
9.96 kPa
49.82 kPa
.6895 bar
1.379 bar
2.069 bar
6.895 bar
10.34 bar
FEATURES
New low range option 0 1.000 in. w.c.
Measures positive, negative and differential pressures
Rugged, extruded aluminum case
Lightweight, fast and easy to use
Selectable english/metric units
FM approved
475-AV AIR VELOCITY KIT Includes the Series
475 FM Manometer, two A 303 static pressure tips
two 9 ft. lengths 3/16 I.D. rubber tubing, no. 166 6
CF Pitot tube, A 397 step drill, A 532 air velocity slide
chart and instruction bulletin H 11, all packed in a
tough, molded plastic carrying case with die cut foam
liner. To order, add AV suffix to any standard 475
model no.
Example: 475 1 FM AV
A-402A Carrying Case Tough gray nylon pouch
protects any Series 475 Manometer. Double zippered
for quick and easy access. With belt loop that snaps
closed.
7 1/2H x 3W x 2 1/4D (191 x 76 x 57 mm)
Maximum
Pressure
5 psig
5 psig
5 psig
10 psig
10 psig
30 psig
30 psig
60 psig
60 psig
150 psig
200 psig

426
M
a
n
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
P
o
r
t
a
b
e
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T

Series 477 Handheld Digital Manometers are packed with features you need
to make pressure measurement and recording faster, easier and more accurate
than ever. First, you can instantly select from up to nine of the most widely used
pressure units without having to waste time and risk mistakes with tedious
conversions. Next, a non-volatile memory function enables storage of up to 40
readings perfect for HVAC technicians making Pitot tube traverses of airflow
readings across a duct. The FM approved models are intrinsically safe for
hazardous locations, Class 1, Div. 1, Group A, B, C, D, T4.
When working in poorly lighted areas, just switch on the handy backlight
feature. It automatically shuts itself off after 20 minutes to minimize battery
drain. Electronic zeroing means you simply touch a single key to perfectly null
out any minor pressure differences. A display HOLD key freezes the current
pressure for those all-too-common situations where readings fluctuate. We even
included an audible alarm to warn you of overpressure plus a visual alarm
warning in case ambient noise levels are too high to hear the alarm. Audible
alarm also confirms a value has been stored, eliminating the need to observe
display during a duct traverse.
A new option for the Series 477 is a USB interface. Combined with the 477s
datalogging capability, a user can now quickly and conveniently download the
stored readings to any USB compatible device. Data manipulation can be easily
accomplished in a multitude of word processing or spreadsheet programs. USB
models come with a USB cable and a software CD.
Handheld Digital Manometer
Selectable Pressure Units, 0.5% Accuracy, FM Approved Intrinsically
Safe for Hazardous Locations, Class 1, Div. 1, Group A, B, C, D, T4
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and compatible gases. FM models air and compatible
combustible gases.
Accuracy: 0.5% F.S., 60 to 78F (15.6 to 25.6C); 1.5% F.S. from 32
to 60F and 78 to 104F (0 to 15.6C and 25.6 to 40C).
connected.
Weight: 10.2 oz (289 g).
3/16 (4.76 mm) I.D. tubing. Two compression fittings for use with 1/8
(3.18 mm) I.D. x 1/4 (6.35 mm) O.D. tubing for 477 7 FM & 477 8 FM
only.
Agency Approvals: CE and FM, USB models are not FM approved
Intrinsically safe.
New USB Connection
Capability
Series
477
Model*
477-000-FM
477-00-FM
477-0-FM
477-1-FM
477-2-FM
477-3-FM
477-4-FM
477-5-FM
477-6-FM
477-7-FM
477-8-FM
Range
0 1.000 in w.c.
0 4.000 in w.c.
0 10.00 in w.c.
0 20.00 in w.c.
0 40.00 in w.c.
0 200.0 in w.c.
0 10.00 psi
0 20.00 psi
0 30.00 psi
0 100.0 psi
0 150.0 psi
kPa
.2491
0.996
2.491
4.982
9.96
49.82
68.95
137.9
206.9
689.5
1034
bar
.0498
.0996
.4982
.6895
1.379
2.069
6.895
10.34
psi
.1445
.3613
.7225
1.445
7.225
10.00
20.00
30.00
100.0
150.0
in Hg
.0736
.2942
.7355
1.471
2.942
14.71
20.36
40.72
61.08
203.6
305.4
in w.c.
1.000
4.000
10.00
20.00
40.00
200.0
276.8
553.6
830.4
2768
4152
mm Hg
1.868
7.473
18.68
37.36
74.73
373.6
517.1
1034
1551
5171
7757
mbar
2.491
9.96
24.91
49.82
99.6
498.2
689.5
1379
2069
6895
mm w.c.
25.40
101.6
254.0
508.0
1016
5080
7031
Pa
249.1
996
2491
4982
9964
FEATURES
New low pressure ranges
USB option comes with cable and software for easy data downloading
Instant selection from up to nine english/metric units
Stores 40 readings in memory for later reference
Measure positive, negative or differential pressures
Large easy to read 0.4 LCD display includes switchable backlight for
great visibility anywhere
Both audible and visual overpressure alarms
Includes + and indicators plus low battery warning
Operates up to 100 Hours on a Single 9 volt battery
Maximum
Pressure
5 psig
5 psig
5 psig
10 psig
10 psig
30 psig
30 psig
60 psig
60 psig
150 psig
200 psig
A-402A Carrying Case Tough gray nylon pouch
protects any Series 477 Manometer. Double zippered for
quick and easy access. With belt loop that snaps closed.
7 1/2H x 3W x 2 1/4D (191 x 76 x 57 mm)
*Note: USB models include a software CD and cable. Change FM to USB. Example: 477 2 FM becomes 477 2 USB

M
a
n
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
P
o
r
t
a
b
e
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Precise Air Pressure Measurement, 0.1% F.S. Accuracy
Series
477A
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non combustible compatible gases.
Wetted Parts: Consult factory.
Accuracy: 0.10% of full scale from 60 to 78F (15.6 to 25.6C); 1%
of full scale from 32 60 and 78 104F (0 15.6 and 25.6 40C).
connected.
Weight: 10.2 oz. (289 g).
3/16 (4.76 mm) I.D. tubing for 477A 1, 477A 2, 477A 3, 477A 4 and
477A 5 only. Two compression fittings for use with 1/8 (3.18 mm) I.D.
x 1/4 (6.35 mm) O.D. tubing for 477A 6 and 477A 7 only.
The Popular Model 477 is now available with 0.1% full scale accuracy in the new
Series 477A. The 477A contains a highly accurate differential pressure sensor
that offers a 0.1% full scale accuracy on air ranges from 20 w.c. to 100 psid. Series
477A Handheld Digital Manometers are packed with features needed to make
pressure measurement and recording faster, easier and more accurate than ever.
Instantly select from up to nine of the most widely used pressure units without
having to waste time and risk mistakes with tedious conversions. A non-volatile
memory function enables storage of up to 40 readings perfect for HVAC
technicians making Pitot tube traverses of airflow readings across a duct. The
477A is also ideal for maintenance personnel or technicians that require a highly
accurate standard to check their instrumentation or equipment to ensure proper
performance.
When working in poorly lighted areas, just switch on the handy backlight
feature. The manometer automatically shuts itself off after 20 minutes to
minimize battery drain. Electronic zeroing means you simply touch a single key
to perfectly null out any minor pressure differences. A display HOLD key
freezes the current pressure for those all-too-common situations where readings
fluctuate. Included is an audible alarm to warn of overpressure plus a visual
alarm warning in case ambient noise levels are too high to hear the alarm.
Audible alarm also confirms a value has been stored, eliminating the need to
observe display during a duct traverse.
Clear, concise operating instructions for all functions are printed on the rear of
the rugged extruded aluminum case for quick reference. One-piece front
membrane fully protects all keys from dust and moisture; wipes clean in
seconds. Detailed written instructions, a wrist strap and 9 volt alkaline battery
are included.
Model
477A-1
477A-2
477A-3
477A-4
477A-5
477A-6
477A-7
Range
0 20.00 in w.c.
0 40.00 in w.c.
0 200.0 in w.c.
0 10.00 psi
0 30.00 psi
0 50.00 psi
0 100.0 psi
kPa
4.982
9.96
49.82
68.95
206.9
344.7
689.5
Maximum
Pressure
3 psig
3 psig
15 psig
30 psig
60 psig
100 psig
200 psig
bar
.0498
.0996
.4982
.6895
2.069
3.447
6.895
psi
.7225
1.445
7.225
10.00
30.00
50.00
100.0
in Hg
1.471
2.942
14.71
20.36
61.08
101.8
203.6
in w.c.
20.00
40.00
200.0
276.8
830.4
1384
2768
mm Hg
37.36
74.73
373.6
517.1
1551
2585
5171
mbar
49.82
99.6
498.2
689.5
2069
3447
6895
mm w.c.
508.0
1016
5080
7031
Pa
4982
9964
FTWC
1.667
3.333
16.67
23.07
69.20
115.3
230.7
FEATURES
Measure positive, negative, or differential pressures
Instant selection from up to nine english/metric units
Stores 40 readings in memory for later reference
Both audible and visual overpressure alarms
Operates up to 100 hours on a single 9 volt battery
New adjustable damping feature for averaging fluctuating reading

428
M
a
n
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
P
o
r
t
a
b
e
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
The High Precision Series HM35 Digital Manometer is designed to
reliably measure and log pressure measurements for critical applications. This
family of manometer can measure absolute pressure, differential pressure or
gauge pressure with up to 0.05% accuracy. The data logging function can store
up to 10,742 readings and transmit the readings to a PC through an IR serial
port. The large display can graphically display trends in the data as well as peaks
and valleys. The series HM35 comes standard with a calibration certificate so
that the instrument can be used as a secondary calibration standard when
testing other pressure instrumentation. This manometer is ideal for
laboratories, calibration facilities, and other critical pressure applications.
Series
HM35
Precision Digital Pressure Manometer
Up to 0.05% Accuracy, Graphical Display, Data Logging Capability
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Connections: Hose 4/6 mm or 1/8 NPT.
Accuracy: (Includes linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability): Depending
on model.
0.20% full scale 1 digit
Measuring Media: Instrument air or inert gases that are compatible with
18/8 stainless steel.
Humidity: Maximum 95% RH non condensing.
Display: Graphical back lit LCD. 128 x 64 points.
Power Requirements: 3 x 1.5 VDC Mignon Cell AA batteries
(included). Can operate on 6 to 9 VDC external power.
Current Consumption: 25 mA without back lit display, IR, or buzzer.
Memory: 10,742 readings. Recording intervals adjustable from 1
second to 24 hours or manual.
Case Protection: IP54.
Weight: 10.5 oz (300 g).
Model
HM3531DLB300
HM3531DLC300
HM3531DLE300
HM3531DLF300
HM3531DLG300
HM3531DLH300
HM3531DLJ300
HM3531DLK300
HM3531DLL310
HM3531DLM310
Range
0 10 in w.c. (0 2.5 kPa)
0 28 in w.c. (0 7 kPa)
0 80 in w.c. (0 20 kPa)
0 120 in w.c. (0 30 kPa)
0 200 in w.c. (0 50 kPa)
0 14.5 psi (0 100 kPa)
0 29 psi (0 200 kPa)
0 108 psi (0 750 kPa)
0 145 psi (0 1000 kPa)
0 245 psi (0 1700 kPa)
Error Limit 0.2% F.S. for gauge, vacuum, and differential pressure
3-11/16
[93.66]
7-7/8
[200.03]
1-9/16
[39.69]
ACCESSORIES
HM28-0, 1/8 NPT Adapter (1 Piece)
HM35-1, Communication software and cable
HM35-2, Infrared RS 232 Serial Adapter
HM35-3, External Power Adapter
Over Pressure
50 in w.c.
140 in w.c.
600 in w.c.
600 in w.c.
58 psi
58 psi
100 psi
245 psi
390 psi
390 psi
For higher accuracy models change the 10th digit from a 3 to a 1 (0.05%
F.S.), 2 (0.1% F.S.), or 6 (0.1% of reading). For example, 0 to 28 in of w.c.
with 0.05% accuracy would be model number HM3531DLC100. Higher
accuracies are only available on 0 28 in of w.c. range or higher.

M
a
n
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
P
o
r
t
a
b
e
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
High Accuracy (0.2%, 0.1% or 0.05%), Differential, Gage or Absolute
Series
HM28
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Connection: Hose; 4/6 mm or
1/8 NPT.
Accuracy: (Includes linearity, hysteresis,
and repeatability): per order code.
Measuring Media: Instrument air or inert
gases. For HM28G3XXXXX, any material
compatible with 18/8 stainless steel.
( 5 to 50C).
( 20 to 60C).
Humidity: 30 to 95% rH, non condensing.
Display: 2 line, 16 character, dot matrix
LCD, with switchable display sizes.
Battery: 9V alkaline (included). Can
operate from external power supply of 7 to
14 VDC.
Current Consumption: <9 mA.
Memory: 964 measured values. Recording
intervals adjustable from manual, 1, 5, 10,
20, 30 seconds, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 30, 60
minutes.
Case Protection: IP54.
Case Dimensions: 6 x 3.27 x 1.34 in (152
x 83 x 34 mm).
Weight: 9.5 oz (270 g).
Maximum Measurement Rates: Stand
alone: 2 1/2 readings/sec (0.1% and
0.05% ratings), 5 readings/sec (0.2%
rating). Output to RS 232: 20
measurements/sec (0.2% rating). 10
measurements/sec (0.1% and 0.05%
ratings).
RS-232 Baud Rate: Adjustable, 1200,
2400, 4800, or 9600 baud.
The Series HM28 Digital Hand-Held Manometer is a precision instrument
designed to measure a wide range of pressures to a very high accuracy. The unit
incorporates a variety of features in an easy to use format that makes it useful in a
wide variety of applications. Features include: measurement in all common pressure
ranges, display resolution to 0.001, differential or relative measurement, two line
liquid crystal display, and adjustable auto power off to conserve battery.
We are so proud of the accuracy of the HM28 that we provide a certificate of
calibration with the unit at no additional cost. Depending on your application, the
HM28 can be used as a secondary calibration standard for your other pressure
instrumentation.
Consult factory for 0.10% models.
Model
490-1
490-2
490-3
490-4
490-5
490-6
Range
0 15.00 psi
0 30.00 psi
0 50.00 psi
0 100.0 psi
0 500.0 psi
0 200.0 psi
kPa
103.4
206.9
344.7
689.5
3447
1379
Maximum
Pressure
30 psig
60 psig
100 psig
200 psig
1000 psig
400 psig
Wet/Wet Handheld Digital Manometer
Liquid & Gas Pressure Measurement, 0.5% F.S. Accuracy
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Without valve: 316L
SS; Additional wetted parts with 3 way
valve option: Buna N, silicone grease,
PTFE, brass 360, copper, reinforced acetal
copolymer.
Accuracy: 0.5% F.S., 60 to 78F (15.6 to
25.6C); 1.5% F.S. from 32 to 60F and
78 to 104F (0 to 15.6C and 25.6 to
40C).
(0 to 40C).
Storage Temperature Limits: 4 to 176F
( 20 to 80C).
Power Requirements: 9 volt alkaline
battery. Battery included but not
connected.
Weight: 14.1 oz (400 g).
Connections: Two 1/8 (3.18 mm) female
NPT.
Series
490
Series 490 Digital Manometers are versatile, hand-held, battery operated
manometers available in several basic ranges for positive or positive differential
pressure measurement and can tolerate most liquid media compatible with 316LSS.
A memory function allows storage of up to 40 readings for later recall and a backlight
provides auxiliary lighting for hard-to-see locations.
Standard are a hold feature and both visual and audible overpressure alarms. A new
feature added to the Series 490 is a field adjustable damping. This allows the user to
choose the level of display averaging rate corresponding to the fluctuation level
common in many applications. A 9V alkaline battery is included that provides up to
100 hours of operation.
bar
1.034
2.069
3.447
6.895
34.47
13.79
psi
15.00
30.00
50.00
100.0
500.0
200.0
in Hg
30.54
61.08
101.8
203.6
1018
407.2
in w.c.
415.2
830.4
1384
2768
5536
mm Hg
775.7
1551
2585
5171
mbar
1034
2069
3447
6895
FTWC
34.60
69.20
115.3
230.7
1153
461.3
ACCESSORIES
HM28-0, 1/8 NPT Adaptor 1 piece
HM28-1, Communication Software & Cable
HM28-2, Universal Power Adaptor
Part Number Features
Error limit 0.2% F.S. for gage, underpressure and differential pressure
HM28D3B10000 0 10 in w.c. (2.5 kPa)
HM28D3C10000 0 28 in w.c. (7 kPa)
HM28D3F10000 0 120 in w.c. (30 kPa)
HM28D3H10000 0 14.5 psi (100 kPa)
Error limit 0.05% F.S. for gage, underpressure and differential pressure
HM28D3C30000 0 28 in w.c. (7 kPa)
HM28D3F30000 0 120 in w.c. (30 kPa)
HM28D3H30000 0 14.5 psi (100 kPa)
HM28D3K30000 0 100 psi (700 kPa)
HM28D3M31000 0 245 psi (1700 kPa)
For Absolute pressure
HM28A3I10000 0 15.9 psia (0.2% F.S. (110 kPa abs)
A-402A, Carrying Case Tough gray nylon pouch protects any Series 490
Wet/Wet Handheld Digital Manometer. Double zippered for quick and easy
access. With belt loop that snaps closed.
7 1/2H x 3W x 2 1/4D (191 x 76 x 57 mm)
OPTIONS
-3V, 3 way Valve Package
Note: Option only available on ranges up to 100 psi.

430
M
a
n
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
P
o
r
t
a
b
e
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Flex-Tube
U-Tube Manometers
These inexpensive manometers measure positive, negative and differential pressures. Dwyer
Flex-Tube
U-Tube Manometers combine the inherent accuracy of the simple U Tube with
the durability of tough, long-lasting plastic construction. Columns are of .375 O.D. flexible
and shatter proof clear butyrate tubing. They are easily accessible for cleaning. Indicating
tube is backed by white scale channel to provide maximum color contrast. Scales are extruded
high impact polystyrene plastic, formed to hold columns in perfect alignment. Stark white
scales have graduations and numbers silkscreen-printed in black for maximum legibility.
You can choose from numerous models and features including over-pressure safety traps, in
full scale ranges from 8 to 36 of water or mercury. All are suitable for total pressures to 100
psi for determining velocity and static pressures, leakage, fan and blower efficiency, filter
resistance, and gas pressures. Ideal wherever a portable, direct reading manometer is needed.
Standard ranges and markings as shown, or special ranges, colors, logos and brand names for
OEM quantity orders are available.
Minor Divisions of 1/10 inch water column (or 2 mm water column on metric units) are
silkscreened in jet black on stark white scale for positive definition. Easy to read, even
at a distance, they are acrylic coated for permanence. All models are furnished with one
3/4 ounce bottle of fluorescein green color concentrate with special wetting agent for
W/M models, or 3/4 ounce bottle of red gage oil for D units.
Series 1221 Manometer, Our simplest, lowest cost basic U gage. A dependable U
tube manometer that withstands hard use and provides accurate, high visibility
readings. For use with water, mercury or red gage oil. For mercury filled manometers,
a scale clamp bar, Dwyer
Part No. A 363 (available as an extra for Series 1221 and

standard on Series 1222) is recommended. One pair of carrying plugs and a pair of
non kink vinyl tube connectors are included with each manometer.
Series 1222 Manometer, All the features of the 1221 plus magnetic clips for mounting
to any vertical steel surface, and clamp bar to insure against U tube slipping.
(Especially recommended for manometers used with mercury.) Both magnets are
easily removed and replaced at the users convenience.
Series 1223 Manometer, Our finest U gage for either portable or stationary use.
Safety traps prevent loss of indicating fluid in case of accidental over pressure. Tubing
is permanently bonded to a molded, high impact acrylic plastic top that contains safety
traps. Large magnetic clips and clamp bar are provided. Standard type a connections
include two rapid shut off type molded nylon tubing connections, two 3 foot lengths of
flexible Tygon
plastic tubing, and two 1/8 pipe thread to tube adapters.

Series 1221 2 plastic carrying plugs; 2 flexible plastic tubing connectors for
attachment of 3/16 rubber or plastic tubing without kinking. 3/4 ounce bottle .826
sp. gr. red gage oil furnished for D style manometers. Fluorescein green dye
concentrate furnished with W/M style manometers.
Series 1222 2 magnetic mounting clips; tube clamp; 2 plastic carrying plugs and
2 flexible plastic tubing connectors for attachment of 3/16 rubber or plastic tubing
without kinking. 3/4 ounce bottle .826 sp. gr. red gage oil furnished for D style
manometers. Fluorescein green dye concentrate furnished with W/M style
manometers.
Series 1223 Magnetic mounting clips; tube clamp and Type a connections
consisting of two rapid shut off molded nylon tubing connectors; two 1/8 pipe
thread to tube adapters; two 3 foot lengths of Tygon
plastic tubing, 3/4 ounce

bottle .826 sp. gr. red gage oil is furnished for D style manometers; fluorescein
green dye concentrate with W/M style.
1221 1222 1223
Note: To order models with red gage oil change W/M to D.
Range
Inches H2O
8 (4 0 4)
12 (6 0 6)
16 (8 0 8)
20 (10 0 10)
24 (12 0 12)
36 (18 0 18)
Millimeters H2O
M200 (100 0 100)
M300 (150 0 150)
M400 (200 0 200)
M600 (300 0 300)
M1000 (500 500)
Grams
178.5
225.5
269
314.5
353.1
379.7
491.1
526.6
Ounces
6.3
7.9
9.5
11.1
12.4
13.4
17.3
18.5
W/M
12 1/4
16 1/4
20 3/8
24 1/4
27 7/8
28 1/4
40 1/4
43 5/8
D
14
18 7/8
23 5/8
28 1/2
32 7/8
33 3/8
47 7/8
52
Hg Required
to Fill
1221, 2 & 3
Scale LengthA
W/M
15 1/4
19 1/4
23 1/4
27 1/4
30 3/4
31 1/2
43 1/4
46 1/2
D
17
21 3/4
26 1/2
31 1/2
35 3/4
36 1/4
50 3/4
55
1221 & 2
O.A. Length B
W/M
18 1/2
21 1/8
26 1/8
30 1/8
33 5/8
33 3/8
46 1/8
49 3/8
D
19 7/8
24 5/8
30 3/8
34 3/8
38 5/8
39 1/8
53 5/8
57 7/8
1223 O.A.
Length B
Ranges
8 (4 0 4) in w.c.
12 (6 0 6) in w.c.
16 (8 0 8) in w.c.
20 (10 0 10) in w.c.
24 (12 0 12) in w.c.
36 (18 0 18) in w.c.
M200 (100 0 100) mm w.c.
M300 (150 0 150) mm w.c.
M400 (200 0 200) mm w.c.
M600 (300 0 300) mm w.c.
M1000 (500 0 500) mm w.c.
Not recommended for vacuum service above 5 in. Hg (68 in. w.c.).
Series
1221
1222
1223
Tygon

is a registered trademark of Saint Gobain Performance Corporation
1221
Model
1221-8-W/M
1221-12-W/M
1221-16-W/M
1221-20-W/M
1221-24-W/M
1221-36-W/M
1221-M200-W/M
1221-M300-W/M
1221-M400-W/M
1221-M600-W/M
1221-M1000-W/M
1222
Model
1222-8-W/M
1222-12-W/M
1222-16-W/M
1222-20-W/M
1222-24-W/M
1222-36-W/M
1222-M200-W/M
1222-M300-W/M
1222-M400-W/M
1222-M600-W/M
1222-M1000-W/M
1223
Model
1223-8-W/M
1223-12-W/M
1223-16-W/M
1223-20-W/M
1223-24-W/M
1223-36-W/M
1223-M200-W/M
1223-M300-W/M
1223-M400-W/M
1223-M600-W/M
1223-M1000-W/M

M
a
n
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
P
o
r
t
a
b
l
e
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Slack Tube
Manometers
Dwyer
Slack Tube
Manometers are as accurate as the finest laboratory U gages yet

they are made to roll up compactly for easy carrying and to withstand rough usage.
Simply unroll the Dwyer
Slack-Tube
Manometer and set up to read static pressure, vacuum,

or differential pressure. Magnetic clips hold it firmly to any steel surface or hang it on a nail.
Turn connectors one revolution to open. When the pressure is imposed, add the number of
inches one column travels up to the number of inches the other column travels down. When
reading is completed turn connectors to seal columns, roll up manometer into compact coil
and tuck it away in its plastic case or a tool box. No fluid lost. No loose caps or inserts to lose.
Dwyer
Slack Tube
Manometers cover a wide range of pressure readings from 4-0-4 inches

up to 60-0-60 inches. Use them in determining velocity and static pressures, for leakage, fan
and blower tests, calibrating control devices, checking gas pressure and many other
applications. All models have flexible vinyl-plastic columns and flexible spring steel scale
calibrated in inches of water using water, and inches of mercury using mercury. Scale is
center-mounted between columns to eliminate parallax error and has a full 2-inch sliding zero
adjustment.
Slack Tube
Manometers are suitable for intermittent total pressure to 50 psi and vacuum
not exceeding 20 Hg. Avoid temperatures above 130F and continuous high total pressure.
Not for use with red gage oil; use only water or mercury.
The Handy Roll-Up Manometer With Laboratory Accuracy
Plastic case, magnetic mounting clips, two rapid shutoff type molded nylon rubber
tubing connectors and one bottle of fluorescein green color concentrate with wetting
agent.
1212 Gas Pressure Kit For Servicing Gas Appliances
A handy, complete kit containing a 16"
Slack Tube
Manometer, necessary
tubing and connection fittings for
checking gas pressures in virtually all
gas appliances such as water heaters,
furnaces, stoves and dryers. Different
range manometers may be specified at
corresponding prices. Compared to the
cost of purchasing items separately the
assembly of component parts into kit
form represents substantial savings.
What the kit consists of:
1 #1211-16 Slack Tube
Manometer,
reads pressure to 16 water.*
1 Carrying case, plastic, 8-1/2 x 7 x 3-1/8
1 3/4 oz. bottle Fluorescein green color
concentrate with wetting agent
2 1/8 pipe thread rubber tubing adapters
1 1/8 to 1/4 pipe thread bushing
1 3 ft. length 3/16 rubber tubing
1 Rubber tubing adapter to fit standard
7/16 dia. spud.
*Other ranges available.
Model 1212
Gas Pressure Kit
Slack Tube
Manometer
rolled up for easy
handling and storage.
Two plastic carrying plugs with retainers for use
when manometer is not in service. Two magnetic
clips to hold instrument to metal surface. Flexible
red vinyl plastic tubing connectors. Brass
terminal tube 1/4 diameter x 8 long. One
terminal tube holder. Brass adapter, 1/8 pipe
thread to plastic tubing. One 4-1/2-foot length of
Tygon

plastic tubing. One 3/4 ounce bottle .826
sp. gr. red gage fluid. Vinyl carrying case.
Model 1227
Dual Range
Dual Range Flex-Tube
U-Inclined Manometers
Use Series 1227 as a regular U-tube
manometer to read high-range pressure
on the right leg (shown to the right), or as
an inclined manometer (shown below) to
read low-range pressure on the bottom
leg. Simply incline manometer until fluid
levels read zero. No spirit level required.
Magnetic clips hold the gage in position
on a steel duct surface.
Series 1227 Manometer,
Most versatile and useful low cost
manometer we know of. Designed for
installation and servicemen. A sturdy,
clear plastic manometer, it offers single,
direct readings in two ranges: As a U-
tube, it reads from 0 to 16 of water; as
an inclined gage, it reads from -.20 to 0
to 2.6 of water. Model 1227M (Metric) is
0 400mm water column as a U-tube
and -5 to 0 to 70mm water column as an
inclined gage. How-to-use instructions
are printed directly on the scale.
Indicating Tube - Clear .400 O.D.,
tough, shatterproof butyrate. Pressure
connection end is bent to provide over
pressure protection when used as an
inclined gage. One 4-1/2' x 3/8 Tygon
tube included for pressure source

connection.
Scale - Stark white high-impact styrene,
21 long. Adjustable for precise zeroing.
Markings - 1 major, .2 minor
graduations on high range; .02
graduations on low range (50 mm major,
10 mm minor graduations on high range,
10 mm major, 1 mm minor graduations on
low range for metric model). Silkscreened
in black on stark white for positive
definition. Acrylic-coated for permanence.
As Vertical U-Tube Manometer
0-16 water with 1 major
divisions, .2" minor divisions
Model 1227M (metric)
is 0-400 mm water column
As Inclined Manometer
Scale is 17 long, reading .20-0-2.6
water with .02" minor divisions
Model 1227M (metric) is
-5 to 0 to 70 mm water column
Model 1227 mounted
in incline position.
Series
1211
Series
1227
Model
1211-8
1211-12
1211-16
1211-24
1211-30
1211-36
1211-48
1211-60
1211-72
1211-120
Range, In.
4-0-4
6-0-6
8-0-8
12-0-12
15-0-15
18-0-18
24-0-24
30-0-30
36-0-36
60-0-60
Metric
1211-50
1211-100
1211-200
Range, CM
25-0-25
50-0-50
100-0-100
g
Model 1212, Gas Pressure Kit
Hg Reqd (oz)
6
7
9
12-1/2
15
17-1/2
22-1/2
27
32
57
Hg Req'd (oz)
11
18-1/2
35
431.P.N:Layout 2 2/16/11 3:09 PM Page 1
432
M
a
n
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
P
o
r
t
a
b
e
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Series
1213
Gas Pressure Manometer
The Tube in a Tube Direct Reading Manometer
Provide visual indication of pressure with the Series 1213 Gas Pressure Manometer.
Designed for use with natural gas, the manometer can also be used to monitor any
compatible gases up to 15 inches of water column. Tap water is used as the sensing media
and a magnetic clip provides temporary or permanent mounting. Economically priced and
made of durable plastic for years of trouble-free service. Includes three feet of vinyl tubing
and 1/8 nylon male NPT to barb fitting.
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Limit: 140F (60C)
maximum.
Pressure Limits: 15 in. w.c. (381 mm).
Piping Connections: 1/8 male NPT
connector provided.
Wetted Materials: Vinyl, PVC and
nylon.
1/2
[12.70]
1
[25.40]
3/4 DIA
[19.05]
*17
[431.80]
1/8-27 NPT
1/4 ID x 3/8 OD
x 3 FT LONG
VINYL TUBING
[6.35 ID x 9.53 OD
x 914.40]
*1213-15 SHOWN.
1213-7 IS
11 INCHES LONG
OVERALL
W
ATER
O
F
N
C
H
ES
Model
1213-7
1213-15
Length (mm)
7 (177.8)
15 (381)
Durablock
Solid Plastic Portable Gages

Suitable for Total Pressures Up to 100 psig, Temperatures Up to 150F,
Accuracy 2% of Full Scale (1% on Model 115 Only)
Plastic or steel carrying case (plastic pouch for 170, 171 and 172), two magnetic
mounting clips, two rapid shut off nylon tubing connections, one 9 length rubber
tubing, terminal tube and extra bottle .826 red gage oil.
Note: Model 100.5 replaces model 100. Model 102.5 replaces model 102.
104, solid plastic portable vertical manometer shown
attached to inside of carrying case cover. Gage may
also be removed from case and used in standing
position or attached to any vertical steel surface with
magnetic clips provided.
100.5, solid plastic portable gage with .10 0 1.0 w.c.
range. Shown with carrying case and standard
accessories.
Dwyer
solid plastic portable manometers are precision instruments in inclined and

vertical (well-type) styles for the measurement of static pressure, vacuum or differential
pressure.
To assure the accuracy required in instruments of this type, all machining of bores and
wells is to the highest standards of precision backed by Dwyers years of experience in the
fabrication of acrylic instruments.
A
11 11/16
8 1/2
12
11 1/2
9 1/2
5 3/4
5 3/4
C
3 11/16
4 3/16
4 5/8
5 5/16
Dimensions Model
100.5
101
102.5
109
115
170
171
104
104-6
104-8
104-10
B
2 15/16
2 5/16
4 1/2
5 11/16
3 1/16
2 7/16
1 7/8
D
8 1/4
10 7/8
13 1/16
15 1/4
Series
100
Inclined Type
0 4
0 6
0 8
0 10
.10
.10
.10
.10
4 1/2
7 3/4
9
11 1/8
12 1/4 x 6 1/4 x 1 3/4
13 1/2 x 10 x 2 3/8
18 1/2 x 4 3/8 x 2 1/4
18 1/2 x 4 3/8 x 2 1/4
Plastic
Plastic
Metal
Metal
104
104-6
104-8
104-10
Model
100.5
101
102.5
109
115
170
171
Range
Inches
of Water
.10 0 1.0
.05 0 .50
.20 0 2.0
.20 0 3.0
.05 0 .25
0 .50
0 .25
Minor
Scale
Divisions
.01
.01
.01
.02
.005
.02
.01
Scale
Length
8 1/4
5
8 3/4
8 3/4
6
2 1/2
2 1/2
Dimensions
13 1/2 x 10 x 2 3/8
12 1/4 x 6 1/4 x 1 3/4
13 1/2 x 10 x 2 3/8
13 1/2 x 10 x 2 3/8
12 1/4 x 6 1/4 x 1 3/4
7 x 9
7 x 9
Type
Plastic
Plastic
Plastic
Plastic
Plastic
Plastic
Plastic
Carrying Case
Vertical Type
3 0
4 8
4 12
4 15
Weight
Ib-oz.
5 1
3 5
5 10
6
3 10
1 7
1 6

M
a
n
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
A
i
r

V
e
l
o
c
i
t
y
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Designed to measure air velocity, static pressure, vacuum or differential pressure, where
the additional range of the 400 Series gages is not required. Series 100 Gages offer superb
accuracy combined with portability. In Dwyers
Durablock
precision machined solid

acrylic plastic construction, the wells and inclined bore are machined to tolerances of
.0002.
Design and service features:
Plastic Body A 1 thick solid acrylic block, virtually unbreakable. It is stable and
free of the danger of distortion.
Drilled Bore Permanently free of bends never requires recalibration due to
distortion.
Reflective Chrome Finish Scales Easily eliminate parallax errors in reading.
Adjustable, with thumbscrew locking for easy zeroing. (Model 125 AV uses screw
plunger to adjust zero setting).
Red Gage Oil .826 specific gravity. Forms a well-shaped, easy-to-read meniscus
the result of high wetability.
Leveling Adjustment Screw allows quick, accurate leveling. Integral ground
glass bubble level provides ready reference.
Complete Air Velocity Kits include:
Dwyer
Inclined Manometer described above,

stainless steel Pitot tube (12 with Models
102-AV & 115-AV, 24 with Model 125-AV and
telescoping 36" with Model 115T-AV), two 9'
lengths of rubber tubing with connectors,
extra red gage oil, instruction card H-7,
Bulletin H-11, magnetic mounting clips, air
velocity calculator slide rule and carrying case
(plastic with models 102-AV, 115-AV and
115T-AV, steel with model 125-AV).
Model
102-AV
115-AV
115T-AV
125-AV
Range,
Inches of
Water
.20-0-2.0
.05-0-.25
.05-0-.25
0-1.0
Velocity,
Feet per
Minute
400-5500
400-2000
400-2000
300-4000
Minor
Scale
Divisions
.02
.005
.005
.005
Scale
Length
8-1/4 in
6 in
6 in
20 in
Dimensions,
In Inches Pitot Tube
ModelLength
166-12 12 in.
166-12 12 in.
166T 36 in.
160-24 24 in.
Model 102-AV Model 115-AV
Model 125-AV
Series
100 AV
Model
102-AV
115-AV
115T-AV
125-AV
A
11-1/2
9-1/2
9-1/2
23-3/4
B
4-5/16
3-1/16
3-1/16
4
Durablock
Air Velocity Gage Kits

Suitable for Total Pressures to 100 psig (6.89 bar), Temperatures to 150F (65.6C)
Molded Plastic Air Velocity Meters
Low in Cost Direct Reading Scales Offer 3% Accuracy
For Portable or Stationary Applications
Pitot tube not included with models above.
Construction and installation features:
Construction is simple with virtually indestructible molded white styrene-acrylonitrile
housing, indicating tube and fluid wells, molded ABS knobs and zero adjust plunger, shock
mounted glass level vial and leak proof Oring seals. Scales are lithograph printed on
aluminum and epoxy coated.
For stationary applications, the Mark II air velocity meters can be easily mounted on any
vertical surface with the two screws provided. A built in spirit level simplifies leveling.
Just fill the reservoir, adjust fluid level to zero, connect the pitot tube, and it is ready for
operation. For portable applications, the Model A-612 portable stand is available for Models
27 and 28.
A molded plastic swing-out stand and leveling screw for user installation are provided with
Models 40-1-AV and 41-2-AV which also feature rapid shutoff tubing connectors and built-
in over pressure traps.
Additional standard accessories include plastic connection tubing, mounting screws, 3/4
oz. bottle of indicating fluid and instructions. Metric ranges are also available.
Model 40-AV Shown with standard swing-out stand and leveling screw installed.
Series
Mark II
Model 27
OEM Specials All models of the Dwyer
Mark II molded plastic air velocity meters

can be supplied with your logo or special scale in OEM quantities. Consult factory for
details.
See also our Digital Manometers and Pitot tubes.
Model
Mark II 27
Mark II 28
Mark II 40-1-AV
Mark II 41-2-AV
Mark II 40-250 Pa-AV
Carrying Case
Dimensions
13-1/2 X10 X 2-1/2
13-1/2 X10 X 2-1/2
13-1/2 X10 X 2-1/2
9 X 26 X 1-5/8
ACCESSORY
A-612, Portable Stand (for models 27, 28)
Range
0-7,000 fpm
0-10,500 fpm
0-4,200 fpm
0-6,300 fpm
0-21 mps
433.P.N:Layout 2 3/1/11 9:33 AM Page 1
434
M
a
n
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
A
r

V
e
o
c
t
y
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Air Velocity Meters
Series
400
Series 400 Air Velocity Meters with Combination Inclined/Vertical Scales
Rated for total pressures to 100 psig (6.89 bar); temperatures to 150F (65C)
Model
400-5-S-Kit
400-5-L-Kit
400-5-Gage
400-10-Kit
400-10-Gage
400-23-Kit
400-23-Gage
Range
in w.c.
0 5
0 5
0 5
0 10
0 10
0 23
0 23
Velocity
FPM
400 9000
400 9000
400 9000
400 12,600
400 12,600
400 19,200
400 19,200
Inclined
Scale
.01, 0 1.0
.01, 0 1.0
.01, 0 1.0
.01, 0 1.0
.01, 0 1.0
.02, 0 2.3
.02, 0 2.3
Vertical
Scale
.10, 1 5
.10, 1 5
.10, 1 5
.10, 1 10
.10, 1 10
.20, 2.3 23
.20, 2.3 23
Minor Div.; Range, in w.c.
*Model 400 5 S is 11 x 11 1/2 x 2 1/2. Contact factory for extra long steel cases for use with longer Pitot tubes.
Measure both pressure and air velocity
Read the red figures directly in feet per minute of velocity from 400 to 10,000
f.p.m. No conversion tables needed for air at standard conditions. Read the
black figures in inches of water column air pressure from 0 to 10" w.c.
Our most popular precision air velocity instrument, the Series 400 is used to balance air
conditioning systems, measure pressure drop across filters, and test fan and blower
discharge and inlet pressures, as well as air velocity in ducts. It offers the convenience of a
dual purpose instrument plus high accuracy on easy-to-read scales. The Series 400
includes leveling adjustment and glass bubble level, which makes it a versatile all around
manometer for the air conditioning and balancing contractor or industrial plant.
Model 400-5 Air Meter
0 5" W.C., 400 9000 f.p.m.
Complete Kit, Model 400-10
Size* 11 1/2H x 20 1/4W x 1 1/2D.
Only 13 1/4 lb with equipment.
Pitot
Tube
8 in
18 in
none
18 in
none
18 in
none
Air Meter
A Low-Cost, Direct Reading Instrument Used for Both
Air Velocity & Static Pressure Tests
A Complete Pocket-Size Kit
Includes air meter, return and supply grille probes, angle connector, cleaning
materials, instruction card, air velocity calculator and carrying case.
Furnace
draft (left)
Grille
velocities
(right)
Simple and quick, the 460 Air Meter is popular for servicing air conditioning, heating and
ventilating equipment. Direct reading velocity and static pressure scales both low and
high ranges show supply and return grille velocities, furnace draft, pressure drop across
filters, etc. The 460 gives consistent, accurate results with no tedious calibration. Rugged
plastic for rough daily use. Dual velocity ranges read 260-1200 and 1000-4000 fpm; pressure
ranges from .005-.09 and .05 -1.0 inches w.c.
Model
460
Model 460, Air Meter, complete kit
ACCESSORIES
A-378, Tube of 3 replacement floats
A-379, Supply grill probe
A-380, Return grill probe
A-381, Cleaning kit including 1 anti static chemically treated
pipe stem cleaner and nylon high range orifice cleaner

M
a
n
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
A
r

V
e
o
c
t
y
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Model 475-1-FM-AV
Convenient all-in-one kit is small, light and easy to use. No set-up or leveling
needed. Digital manometer reads from 0-19.99 in. w.c. with 0.5% F.S. accuracy
and minor divisions to 0.01. Large 1/2 LCD readout is easy to see in poorly
lighted areas and has low battery warning. Included is a 6" stainless steel
Pitot tube with integral compression fitting to hold it securely when taking
readings. Also, two static pressure tips with magnetic mounting measure
pressure drop across filters, condenser coils, etc. Kit comes complete with
rubber tubing, 9V battery, step drill, AV calculator slide rule, and custom fitted
carrying case. An indispensable test kit for the plant engineer, and HVAC
technician that must balance system air flows at start-up.
Complete Kit Includes:
Model 475 1 Digital Manometer,
range 0 19.99 in. w.c.
Model 166 6 CF, 6 Pitot Tube
with Compression Fitting
Two No. A 303 Static Pressure
Tips with Magnetic Mounting
Two 9 Ft. Lengths 3/16 I.D.
Rubber Tubing
No. A 397 Step Drill for 3/16
1/2 Holes in 1/16 Increments
No. A 532 AV Slide Chart
9 Volt Battery
Fitted Polyethylene Case
Air Velocity Kits
Digital Manometer and Pitot Tube for Balancing System Air Flows
Model 475-1T-FM-AV
needed. Digital manometer reads from 0-19.99 in. w.c. with 0.5% F.S. accuracy
and minor divisions to 0.01. Large 1/2 LCD readout is easy to see in poorly
lighted areas and has low battery warning. Kit includes convenient telescoping
Pitot tube, Model 166T, fully adjustable from 11.5 to 36 inches (29.2 to 91.4 cm).
Also, two static pressure tips with magnetic mounting measure pressure drop
across filters, condenser coils, etc. Kit comes complete with rubber tubing, 9V
battery, step drill, AV calculator slide rule, and custom fitted carrying case. An
indispensable test kit for the plant engineer, and HVAC technician that must
balance system air flows at start-up.
Model 477-1T-FM-AV
needed. Digital manometer reads from 0-20 in. w.c. with 0.5% F.S. accuracy.
The Series 477 stores up to 20 readings in memory for later reference, instantly
selecting up to nine English/Metric pressure units that are visible on a large,
backlit 0.4 LCD readout. Both audible and visual overpressure alarms and a
low battery warning are standard features.
Each kit includes convenient telescoping Pitot tube, Model 166T which is fully
adjustable from 11.5 to 36 inches (29.2 to 91.4 cm). In addition, two static
pressure tips with magnetic mountings measure pressure drop across filters,
condenser coils, etc.
Kit comes complete with rubber tubing, 9V battery, step drill, AV calculator slide
rule, and custom fitted carrying case. An indispensable test kit for the plant
engineer, and HVAC technician that must balance system air flows at start-up.
range 0 20 in. w.c.
Model 166T, 36 Telescoping
Stainless Steel Pitot Tube
Two 4 1/2 Ft. Lengths 3/16 I.D.
Rubber Tubing
No. A 397 Step Drill for 3/16
1/2 Holes in 1/16 Increments
9 Volt Battery
range 0 19.99 in. w.c.
Model 166T, 36 Telescoping
Stainless Steel Pitot Tube
Two 4 1/2 Ft. Lengths 3/16 I.D.
Rubber Tubing
No. A 397 Step Drill for 3/16 1/2
Holes in 1/16 Increments
9 Volt Battery
Series
475
&
477
Model 475-1-FM-AV, Air Velocity Kit
Model 475-1T-FM-AV, Air Velocity Kit
Model 477-1T-FM-AV, Air Velocity Kit

436
T
h
e
r
m
o
-
A
n
e
m
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Model
VT120
Integral Vane Thermo-Anemometer
Large 1-1/4 Dual Display, One Hand Operation
APPLICATIONS
Air duct measurement and analysis, fume hood analysis, ionizer flow output
monitoring, positive pressure reading in clean rooms, or ventilation system
inspection.
Simultaneously measure air velocity and temperature with the Model VT120
Integral Vane Thermo-Anemometer. Easily view readings on the large 1.25 (31.75 mm)
dual display. User-selectable air velocity ranges include ft/min, m/sec, mph, knots, and
km/hr. Built-in thermistor records ambient temperature in F or C. Model VT120 features
include data hold and record/recall minimum, maximum and average readings. Also, units
have the ability to record and average up to 2 hours of data while displaying the continuous
running average. If desired, sleep mode automatically shuts down the meter after 20
minutes of non-use. Model VT120 includes hard carry case, one 9V battery, and instruction
manual.
T
H
E
R
M
O
-
A
N
E
M
O
M
E
T
E
R
R
E
C
O
R
D
U
N
IT
S
S
E
T
-
U
P
H
O
L
D
O
N
-
O
F
F
V
T
1
2
0
3.000
7.190
1.700
2.600
1.400
[43.18]
[182.63]
[76.20]
[35.56]
[66.04]
SPECIFICATIONS
Air Velocity Ranges: 80 to 5900 ft/min, 0.4 to 30 m/sec, 0.9 to 68 mph, 0.8 to 58
knots, 1.4 to 108 km/hr.
Accuracy:
Air velocity: 3%;
Temperature: 1F (0.6C).
Resolution: 1 ft/min, 0.01 m/sec, 0.1 mph, 0.1 knots, 0.1 km/hr, 0.1F, 0.1C.
Temperature Sensor: Thermistor.
Temperature Limits: 14 to 122F ( 10 to 50C) max 80% RH.
Power Supply: One 9V battery.
Battery Life: 100 hours continuous (with 20 min sleep mode enabled).
Display: Large 1.25 x 1.62 (37 x 42 mm) LCD, 9999 count.
Housing: ABS plastic.
Sensor Diameter: 2.87 (70 mm).
Weight: 1.5 lb (680 g).
Model VT120, Integral Vane Thermo Anemometer
Model
VT-200
Vane Thermo-Anemometer
Measures Air Volume, Air Velocity, and Temperature, Built-in Datalogging
Model VT-200 Vane Thermo-Anemometer is ideal for balancing air conditioning and
heating ducts or checking the operation of fans and blowers. Model VT-200 measures air
volume in cubic feet per minute and cubic meters per minute. Air velocity measurements
can be viewed in ft/min, m/s, knots, km/hr, and mph with 3% accuracy. The multifunction
LCD can simultaneously display air velocity and temperature in selectable units or air flow
and air area. Built-in datalogger can store up to 1000 measurements or transfer the data to
a PC via RS-232 communication. Additional features include data hold and record/recall
minimum, maximum and average readings. Model VT-200 includes RS-232 interface, PC
Windows software, cable, 9V battery, carrying case, and instruction manual.
6.400
[162.56]
3.206
[81.4]
2.375
[121]
5.00
[127]
SPECIFICATIONS
Air Velocity Ranges: 0.3 to 45 m/s; 0.7 to 100 mph; 0.6 to 88.0 knots; 1 to 140.0
km/hr; 60 to 8,800 ft/min.
Temperature Range: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Air Volume Ranges: CFM (ft
3
/min) or CMM (m
3
/min).
Accuracy:
Air velocity: 3% of reading 0.1, whichever is greater;
Temperature: 1.5 F (0.8C).
Resolution: 0.1 knots, m/s, km/hr, and mph; 0.1/1 ft/min; 0.1C.
Temperature Sensor: Type K thermocouple.
Display: Dual line, 4 digit, 1.1 (27.9 mm) height.
Power: 9V alkaline battery (included). Battery life: approx. 50 hours.
Output: RS232 serial interface via DB9 female connector.
Housing: ABS plastic, 1 (25 mm) diameter.
Weight: 12.3 oz (350 g).
Model VT-200, Vane Thermo Anemometer

T
h
e
r
m
o
-
A
n
e
m
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Velocity,
FPM
0-500
0-1500
0-5000
0-15000
The Series 471 Digital Thermo Anemometers are versatile dual function
instruments that quickly and easily measure air velocity in four field selectable
ranges, in either feet per minute or meters per second, plus air temperature in
F or C. High contrast LCD display shows both range selected and present
velocity. Convenient backlight provides perfect visibility in low light conditions.
Light automatically shuts off after 2-1/2 minutes to prolong battery life. Low
battery warning is included.
Stainless steel probe with comfortable hand grip is etched with insertion depth
marks from 0-8 inches and 0-20 cm on the Model 471-1. When fully extended,
the probe length on models 471-2 and 471-3 reach 33 inches (83 cm). Model 471-
3 features a telescoping bendable probe for easy access in hard-to-reach
locations.
Extruded aluminum housing fully protects electronics, yet is lightweight and
comfortable to hold even when taking multiple readings as part of duct
traverses. An integral sliding cover protects sensors when not in use.
Standard accessories are 9 volt alkaline battery, wrist strap, custom fitted
carrying case and step drill for making duct holes from 3/16 to 1/2.
SPECIFICATIONS
AIR VELOCITY SPECIFICATIONS:
Service: Air.
Range: Field selectable 0 500, 0 1500, 0 5000, 0 15000 FPM (see
chart for metric conversions).
Accuracy: Depending on range (See chart) @ 59 to 86F (15 to 30C).
Outside this range add 0.11% per F (0.2% per C).
Temperature Limits: Probe: 0 to 200F ( 18 to 100C).
Ambient: 32 to 104F (0 to 40C).
Display: 4 1/2 Digit 0.4 High.
Resolution: 1 FPM / 0.1 MPS.
Power Requirements: 9 volt alkaline battery, included.
Probe: 5/16 (8.13 mm) diameter probe with integral hand grip and 6 ft.
(15.2 cm) coiled cord. Length of probe: Model 471 1 = 10 (25.4 cm);
Models 471 2 and 471 3 = 33 (83 cm) extended.
TEMPERATURE SPECIFICATIONS:
Range: 0 to 200F ( 18 to 100C).
Accuracy: 2F (1C).
Temperature Limits:
Probe: 0 to 200F ( 18 to 100C);
Display: 4 1/2 Digit 0.4 high.
Resolution: 0.1.
Range
Number
1
2
3
4
Velocity,
MPS
0-3.0
0-7.0
0-30
0-75
Accuracy
3% F.S.
3% F.S.
4% F.S.
5% F.S.
Digital Thermo-Anemometer
Four Field Selectable Ranges from 500 to 15,000 FPM
Series
471
Model 471-2 w/
Telescopic Probe
Model 471-3 w/
Telescoping Bendable Tip
Note: Ranges are field selectable.
Model 471-1
Model 471-1, Digital Thermo Anemometer
includes battery, wrist strap, 6-step drill,
carrying case and instructions.
with telescoping probe includes battery,
wrist strap, 6-step drill, carrying case
and instructions.
with telescoping bendable tip includes
battery, wrist strap, 6-step drill,
carrying case and instructions.

438
A
r

F
o
w

H
o
o
d
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Model
AFH2
Air Flow Hood
Measures Volumetric Flow Rate with Highly Accurate Digital Manometer
The Model AFH2 Air Flow Hood is designed to measure volumetric air flow
from diffusers, grilles and registers. The AFH2 Air Flow Hood maintains a
running average of measurements in the desired units and provides the ability
to manually record measurements with the manometer over a given time period.
The highly accurate digital manometer has an auto-zero feature and will auto-
zero at user-defined intervals. The digital manometer easily mounts to the flow
hood with its magnet back-plate. Break down is very quick and easy as tools are
not required. In addition to these features, the unit will alert you when its
battery is running low in order to avoid recording inaccurate measurements.
This lightweight flow hood is durable and easily stores into an included travel
case.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air.
Volume Flow Rate Units: CFM, l/s, m
3
/hr.
Volume Flow Ranges:
Supply: CFM: 41 to 1176; l/s: 19 to 555; m
3
/hr: 69 to 2000;
Exhaust: CFM: 45 to 1176; l/s: 21 to 555; m
3
/hr: 76 to 2000.
Accuracy @ 20C (68F):
Supply: 3% of reading 9 CFM (4 l/s, 14 m
3
/hr) when flow
>85 CFM (40 l/s);
Exhaust: 3% of reading 9 CFM (4 l/s, 14 m
3
/hr) when flow
>85 CFM (40 l/s).
Span Stability v. Temperature: Better than 0.1% of range in use per
2F (1C).
Zero System Accuracy: 1 count (0.05 Pascal typical; 0.0002 w.c.).
Temperature Limits:
Storage: 23 to 122F ( 5 to 50C).
Thermal Effect: 0.1% of range in use per 2F (1C).
Zero Drift: Negligible due to auto zero system. When auto zero set at
30 second intervals (2 minute warm up).
Orientation Effect: Any 45 degree change 0.0004 w.c. (0.1 Pascal)
typical.
System Air Leak: 0.366 in
3
/hr (0.1 ml/min) @ 20 w.c. (5 kPa) typical.
Maximum Differential Pressure: 60 w.c. (15 kPa).
Auto Ranging Display: 0.375 high digits.
Resolution: 1 CFM, 1 l/s, 1 m
3
/hr.
Output: RS 232 serial interface (baud rate 9600).
Memory Capability: 2500 readings in any engineering unit.
Power: Rechargeable 8.4 V 120 mAh (optional 9V may be used in place
of rechargeable).
Dimensions: 30 x 24 x 24 (965 x 610 x 610 mm). Hood only: 2 x 2
(600 mm x 600 mm).
Weight: 8.8 lb (4 kg).
24 SQ. [609.60]
38
[965.20]
MOUNTING
PLATE
HOOD FRAME ASSEMBLY
8
[203.20]
18-1/2 [469.90]
NEW PRODUCT!
Model AFH2, Air Flow Hood with 2x2 hood
ACCESSORIES
A-175, Hood Adapter Kit.
Required for use with all alternative hoods
A-176, 1x4 canvas hood
A-190, Software and cable

W
n
d

M
e
t
e
r
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Perfect for your living room, den, workshop or office. Instruments are accurate,
low-cost and practical. Standard model indicates wind speed directly on liquid
filled scale reading in both Miles per Hour (0-80) and Beaufort scale (1-12). Also
available is metric model, same as above but reading 0-130 kilometers per hour.
To order, specify Mk II Wind Speed Indicator, MPH or Mk II Wind Speed
Indicator, KPH.
Mark II Wind Speed Indicator
Portable Wind Meter
Ideal for yachtsmen, outdoorsmen, farmers, etc. A welcome gift. Use anywhere.
Direct reading, no calculations. Hold meter at eye level, back of unit to wind.
White ball in tube indicates wind speed. Meter has two scales for maximum
accuracy and easy reading low, 2-10 and high, 4-66 m.p.h. range. For high
range, cover hole with finger. Pocket size, sturdy plastic, has case.
Hold this way
for low scale reading.
Note: Standard discounts do not apply to the Windmeter. Sporting
goods dealers and distributors: Contact factory for quantity
discounts.)
Molded white plastic instrument has gold tone scale,
7-3/8"W X 5-5/8"H X 1-1/8"D. Includes ABS plastic vane,
50 tubing, mounting hardware and gage oil.
Note: Standard discounts do not apply to the Wind Speed Indicator.
Sporting goods dealers and distributors: Contact factory for quantity
discounts.
For high scale reading, finger
covers hole.
Dimensions: 5/8 W X 6 3/4 H X 17/32 D.
Wind Meter-MPH, mph scale
Wind Meter-KNOT, knots scale
Wind Meter-KPH, kph scale
Wind Meter-MPS, mps scale
A-376, Replacement floats for windmeter, tube of 3
Mark II WSI, mph scale
Mark II WSI Metric, kph scale

440
W
n
d

M
e
t
e
r
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Measure wind speed and temperature with the Series MW Pocket Wind Meter. Easily
view readings on the four digit 2 (51 mm) high LCD display with wind speed bar graph.
Selectable air velocity ranges include m/s, ft/min, km/h, mph, and knots. Ambient
temperature recorded in F or C. The MW also features automatic shut-off, detailed
instruction manual and protective plastic water resistant housing that floats. Accessories
include a lanyard.
Pocket Wind Meter
MW-1 Mini Thermo-Anemometer
SPECIFICATIONS
Air Velocity Range: 0 to 30 m/s, 0 to
5860 ft/min, 0 to 90 km/h, 0 to 65 mph,
0 to 55 knots.
Temperature/Wind-chill Ranges: 14
to 113F ( 10 to 45C).
Temperature Resolution: 0.36F
(0.2C).
Accuracy: Wind speed: 5% of
reading. Temperature: 3.6F (2C).
Resolution: 0.1 m/s, 19 ft/min, 0.3
km/h, 0.2 mph, 0.2 knots.
Sample Time: 1 reading per second.
Water-resistant: up to 3 ft (1 meter).
Power: Lithium battery CR 2032 or
equivalent (not included).
Auto-off: 14 minutes after last key is
pressed.
Impeller: Plastic, replaceable.
Case: Plastic.
Display: 2.32 x 2 in (59 x 51 mm).
Weight: 1.84 oz (52.1 g).
Series
MW
4-1/8
[104.78]
1-37/64
[40.08]
MODE SET
Model MW-1, Hand held, Mini vane Thermo Anemometer
ACCESSORY
A-166, Replacement vane for MW 1
The Model 89088 measures wind speed, temperature and wind chill accurately with its
rotating vane and thermo-anemometer sensor. The body and rotating vane are
constructed of light weight, sturdy ABS plastic. The ABS impeller spins on a high
precision jewel bearing allowing for maximum performance. Wind speed, maximum wind
speed, temperature and wind chill can quickly be viewed on the LCD display in user
selectable measuring units of degrees F or C, m/s, ft/min, knots, mph, k/hr and beauforts.
The 89088 also features a data hold button and a 5 minute automatic shut-off to conserve
battery life. Accessories include a supplied battery and a cloth carrying pouch.
SPECIFICATIONS
Air Velocity Range: 1.1 20.0 m/s, 60 3937 ft/min, 0.4 38.8 knots,
0.8 72.0 k/hr, 0.5 44.7 mph, 1 8 beaufort.
Wind Speed Limits: 0.5 44.7 mph (60 3937) ft/min.
Temperature/Wind Chill Limits: 0 to 50C (32 to 122F).
Accuracy: Velocity: 5% or last significant digit (whichever is greater);
Temperature: 1C (2F).
Resolution: Temperature: 0.1; Air velocity: See chart.
Power: Supplied with CR2032 battery. 48 hour life under continuous usage. Auto
off: After 5 minutes.
Materials: Impeller: ABS; Case: ABS.
Display: 28 (L) x 16 (W) mm.
Weight: 50 g (1.76 oz).
Pocket Wind Meter
Measures Wind Speed, Wind Chill and Temperature
Model
89088
1-3/4
[44.45]
5/8
[15.88]
5-7/64
[129.79]
Unit
M/S
FT/MIN
KNT
KMH
M/H
BF
Range
1.1 20.0
60 3937
0.4 38.8
0.8 72.0
0.5 44.7
1 8
Resolution
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
1
Units vs. Range as shown on display
Model 89088

V
a
n
e

A
n
e
m
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Vaneometer
Swing Vane Anemometer

Use This Sensitive Dwyer Unit to Measure Low Air Velocities at Low Cost
*
The 480 Vaneometer
Swing Vane Anemometer is a durable low-priced instrument

specifically designed to simplify the measurement of low air velocities from 25 to 400 feet per
minute. OSHA, EPA and other safety ventilation requirements for spray booths and at fume, smoke
and dust exhaust hoods can now be quickly checked, even by untrained personnel. Its small size and
light weight only four ounces make it ideal to carry from one work station to another. A versatile
steel mounting bracket for continuous monitoring is also included. The Vaneometer Swing
Anemometer is accurate to 5% of full scale to 100 FPM and 10% from 100 FPM to top of scale. It
has a spirit level to ensure accurate readings and the large scales are easy to read and visible from
both sides. The housing is molded from tough ABS plastic and easy to clean with soap and water.
The polyester vane can be cleaned with lacquer thinner. A spare vane is provided.
Use a Vaneometer
TM
Swing
Vane Anemometer to measure
velocity of air flow into
laboratory fume hoods and at
paint spray booths to determine
when to change filters. Or
wherever needed to meet
OSHA standards of ventilation
for smoke, dust or fume
removal.
Model
480
Model
480
M480
A-390
A-406
A-407
Description
25-400 fpm
0-2.0 m/s
Extra vanes, pkg. of 2
Molded carrying case
Plastic carrying pouch
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: RH: 10 to 90%, temp: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Accuracy: RH: 5%, temp: 1.5F or C.
Display: Dual 3 digit LCD.
Resolution: RH: 1%; Temp: 0.1F or C.
Response Time: Temp: 1 sec; RH: 1 min 80% of change.
Power Requirements: 3V lithium (CR2032) battery (included).
Thermohygrometer Pen
Dual Display, Compact Design
Series
TH
Simultaneously measure temperature and relative humidity with
the Series TH Thermohygrometer Pen. This unit features a dual LCD,
user selectable units of measure, MAX/MIN functions, reset and display
hold. A built-in self calibration utility allows for field calibration using
the optional relative humidity calibration reference. The Model TH-10
includes a pocket clip, battery and instruction manual. The optional
kit, Model TH-10K, includes thermohygrometer pen with 33% and 75%
RH calibration standards and a hard vinyl carrying case.
APPLICATIONS
Measure temperature and humidity in greenhouses, clean rooms,
drying rooms, HVAC, food, pharmaceutical, and textile industries.
6.50
[165]
1.20
[30.5]
0.50
[14]
Model TH-10, Thermohygrometer Pen
Model TH-10K, Thermohygrometer Pen Kit
ACCESSORY
TH-CAL, 33% and 75% RH Calibration Standards

442
T
h
e
r
m
o
h
y
g
r
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Digital Hygrometer
Measures % RH and Temperature
Series
485
Model 485 Digital Hygrometer is a versatile, compact, hand-held instrument for
measuring percentage of relative humidity and temperature in F or C. Dew point and wet
bulb temperature is derived from relative humidity and temperature measurements and
displayed on the 0.4 LCD display. Hold key freezes the current temperature and relative
humidity readings for situations where readings fluctuate. Store up to 25 readings with the
non-volatile memory function ideal for technicians needing to take multiple readings for
later analysis.
Model 485-2
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Humidity and temperature detection in air.
Range: Relative humidity: 0 to 100% (non condensing); Temperature: 22 to 185F
( 30 to 85C).
Accuracy: Relative humidity: 2%; Temperature: 1F (0.5C).
Display: Dual 4.5 digit LCD. Temperature 0.4 high, RH: 0.2 high.
Temperature Limits:
Probe: 22 to 185F ( 30 to 85C);
Resolution: Relative humidity: 0.1%; Temperature: 0.1.
Power Requirements: 9V alkaline battery (included).
Probe: 485 2 only 8 5/8 (219 mm).
Model 485-1
Model 485-1, Digital Hygrometer
Model 485-2, Digital Hygrometer with Remote Probe
ACCESSORY
A-402A Carrying Case Tough grey nylon pouch protects Series 485 Digital
Hygrometer. Double zippered for quick and easy access. With belt loop that snaps
closed. 7 1/2H x 3W x 2 1/4D (191x76x57 mm)
Model
THI-10
Digital Thermohygrometer
Large Memory, Dew Point and Wet Bulb Temperature Functions
The Model THI-10 Digital Thermohygrometer accurately measures relative humidity
and ambient temperature. Up to 99 readings can be stored in non-volatile memory allowing
the HVAC technician to record the data after returning to the office. This compact
thermohygrometer also features user selectable engineering units, Maximum/Minimum
functions, dew point and wet bulb temperature measurements. The Model THI-10 includes
a soft carrying case with a belt loop for easy transportation.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Humidity and temperature detection in air.
Range: Relative humidity: 1 to 99% (non condensing); Temperature: 4 to 140F
( 20 to 60C).
Accuracy: Relative humidity: 3%; Temperature: 1.5F (0.8C).
Display: Dual LCD display (4 digit upper display / 3 digit lower display).
Resolution: Relative humidity: 0.1%; Temperature: 0.1.
Power Requirements: 9V alkaline battery.
Battery Life: Approximately 200 hours.
Weight: 5.6 oz (160 g).
1-7/8
[47.62]
8-7/16
[214.33]
1-1/2
[38.16]
Model THI-10, Digital Thermohygrometer

T
h
e
r
m
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
T
h
e
r
m
o
c
o
u
p
e
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Model
TC20
Dual Input Thermocouple Thermometer
Accepts Type J or K, High/Low Alarm, Selectable Resolution
Quickly measure differential temperatures with Model TC20 Dual Input
Thermocouple Thermometer. Model TC20 accepts type J or K thermocouples and
simultaneously displays T1, T2, or T1-T2 and elapsed time on a large, multi-function LCD.
The unit features programmable high/low audible alarms, max/min, average readings,
display hold and relative mode. The relative mode permits the user to store the current
temperature value and compare it to subsequent temperature readings. Model TC20
thermometer includes two type K bead wire probes, rubber holster, 9V battery and
instruction manual.
7.600
[193.04]
3.600
[91.44]
2.100
[53.34]
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: Type J or K [Two 4 ft (1.22 m)
type K thermocouple bead probes
included].
( 200 to 1050C) for type J; 328 to
2498F ( 200 to 1370C) for type K.
Accuracy: 58 to 2498F ( 50 to
1370C): 0.05% of reading + 0.6F
(0.3C); 328 to 58F ( 200 to
50C): 0.05% of reading + 1.4F
(0.7C).
Display: 0.8 (20 mm) height, 5 digit
LCD with switchable back light.
Resolution: Selectable 1 or 0.1.
Response Time: 1 second.
(0 to 50C) max 80% RH.
( 20 to 60C) max 70% RH.
Power Requirements: 9V alkaline
(included).
Battery Life: 200 hours typical.
Thermocouple Connection: Standard
female mini connector.
Housing: ABS plastic.
Pocket-Size Thermocouple Thermometer
Selectable F/C, Accepts Mini-Plug Input
Model
DKT-1
The Model DKT-1 Pocket-Size Thermocouple Thermometer accurately monitors
temperatures in a variety of applications. The wide measurement range and
selectable engineering units allow users to easily view readings in either F or C. The
automatic power down feature conserves battery life. This compact thermometer
accepts any K type thermocouple sensors (sold separately) with mini plug
connectors.
SPECIFICATIONS
Measurement Range: 83.2 to 1999F ( 64 to 1400C).
Accuracy: 1% of reading or 1.8F (1.0C).
Probe Connection: K type mini jack.
Resolution: 0.1F/C.
Battery Life: CR2032 lithium battery estimated 100 hours continuous use.
Weight: 1.42 oz (40.15 g).
1-45/64
[43.26]
51/64
[20.24]
3-5/64
[78.18]
Model TC20, Dual Input Thermocouple Thermometer
Model TC20-N, Includes NIST Certification
Model DKT-1, Thermocouple Thermometer
ACCESSORIES
1818-0074, Immersion Probe
1818-0078, Penetration Probe
1818-0082, Surface Probe
1818-0085, Air Duct Probe

444
T
h
e
r
m
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
T
h
e
r
m
o
c
o
u
p
e
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Series
472
Digital Thermocouple Thermometer
Differential or Relative Temperature Readings, Stores Up to 25 Readings
The Series 472 Digital Thermocouple Thermometer is a precision
general purpose thermometer designed for use with Type J or Type K
thermocouples that can be field calibrated. A standard ANSI thermocouple
connector allows the use of a wide variety of probe styles. The unit records and
displays minimum and maximum temperature readings and has a 20 minute
auto power off to conserve the battery. The 4-1/2 digit LCD is backlit for dark
or low light conditions.
SPECIFICATIONS
Probe Types: Type J and K thermocouples.
Probe Connection: ANSI female mini connector.
Input Protection: 50V rms.
Temperature: Range: J: 350 to 2192F ( 210 to 1200C); K: 418 to
2500F ( 250 to 1372C); Accuracy: 0.1% of reading 0.7F/0.4C
(> 150C); 0.1% of reading 2F/1C (< 150C); Resolution: 0.1
(below 1999).
Linearization: Conforms to NIST monograph 175 revised to ITS 90.
Operating Conditions: Stated accuracy: 64 to 82F (18 to 28C);
Operating ambient temperature: 14 to 104F ( 10 to 40C); Storage
temperature: 40 to 176F ( 40 to 80C).
Display: Dual 4 1/2 digit LCD.
Battery: 9V alkaline.
Battery Life: 200 hours (typical).
Memory: 25 samples (normal or DT mode).
Housing Size: 6 9/16 H x 2 13/16 W x 29/32 D (166 x 71 x 23 mm).
FEATURES
High accuracy temperature measurement using Type J and Type K
thermocouples.
Measures in degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius.
Selectable resolution for readings in degree or in 0.1 degree
increments.
Differential or relative temperature measurement using the mode.
Stores and recalls up to 25 temperature measurements in either
normal or mode.
Complete kits include:
Master probe handle
Surface, air duct, immersion and bare tip probes
9V battery
High accuracy Series 472 Digital Thermocouple Thermometer that
measures temperature using Type J or Type K thermocouples
Features of the Series 472 unit include:
Measurement in F or C
Selectable resolution for readings in degree or in 0.1 degree
increments
Differential or relative temperature measurement using the mode
Stores and recalls up to 25 temperature measurements in either
normal or mode
Series
472 Kits
Digital Thermocouple Thermometer Kits
Accepts Type J or K Thermocouples
Model 472, Digital Thermocouple Thermometer
A-402A CARRYING CASE Tough gray nylon pouch
protects any Series 472 Thermometer. Double zippered for
quick and easy access. With belt loop that snaps closed.
72H x 3W x 24D (191 x 76 x 57 mm)
Model 472-2-KIT with Type K Thermocouple
Model 472-3-KIT with Type J Thermocouple

T
h
e
r
m
o
c
o
u
p
e
C
a
b
r
a
t
o
r
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
7.60
[193]
3.60
[91]
2.10
[53]
Thermocouple Calibrator
Accepts Type K Thermocouples, High/Low Alarm, Selectable Resolution
Dual function CA10 Thermocouple Calibrator can be used to source Type K
thermocouple output values or measure Type K thermocouples. Quickly select output value
using the rotary switch with coarse and fine adjustments. Model CA10 accepts up to two
Type K thermocouples and features data hold and max functions. Measurements are
displayed on a 3-1/2 digit backlit display. Units include a 4 (100 m) Type K bead wire
temperature probe, calibration cable, 9V battery and instruction manual.
Model
CA20
Thermocouple Calibrator
Accepts Type J Thermocouples, High/Low Alarm, Selectable Resolution
Dual function CA20 Thermocouple Calibrator can be used to source Type J thermocouple
output values or measure Type J thermocouples. Quickly select output value using the
rotary switch with coarse and fine adjustments. Model CA20 accepts up to two Type J
thermocouples and features data hold and max functions. Measurements are displayed on
a 3-1/2 digit backlit display. Units include a 4 (100 m) Type J bead wire temperature probe,
calibration cable, 9V battery and instruction manual.
7.60
[193]
3.60
[91]
2.10
[53]
SPECIFICATIONS
Measurement Range: 40 to 1400F
( 40 to 760C), selectable.
Thermocouple Input: Type K.
Input Protection: 24 VDC or 24 VAC
rms max input voltage on any
combination of input pins.
Accuracy: 0.1% rdg. + 2F on 40 to
1400F; 0.1% rdg. +1C on 40 to
760C, over operating temperature of
64 to 82F (18 to 28C).
Output Range: 328 to 2192F
( 210 to 1200C).
Display: 0.8 (20 mm) height, 3 1/2
digit LCD with switchable back light.
Reading Rate: 2.5 times/second.
32 to 122F (0 to 50C) max 80% RH.
( 20 to 60C) max 70% RH.
(included).
Temperature Coefficient: 0.1 times
the applicable accuracy specification
per F from 32 to 64F and 82 to 122F
(0 to 18C and 28 to 50C).
Weight: 15.5 oz (440 g).
SPECIFICATIONS
( 40 to 760C), selectable.
Thermocouple Input: Type J.
Input Protection: 24 VDC or 24 VAC
rms max input voltage on any
combination of input pins.
Accuracy: 0.1% rdg. +2F on 40 to
1400F; 0.1% rdg. +1C on 40 to
760C, over operating temperature of
64 to 82F (18 to 28C).
Output Range: 328 to 2192F
( 210 to 1200C).
Display: 0.8 (20 mm) height, 3 1/2
digit LCD with switchable back light.
Reading Rate: 2.5 times/second.
32 to 122F (0 to 50C) max 80% RH.
( 20 to 60C) max 70% RH.
(included).
Temperature Coefficient: 0.1 times
the applicable accuracy specification
per F from 32 to 64F and 82 to 122F
(0 to 18C and 28 to 50C).
Weight: 15.5 oz (440 g).
Model
CA10
Model CA10, Thermocouple Calibrator
Model CA20, Thermocouple Calibrator

446
H
a
n
d

H
e
d
T
h
e
r
m
o
c
o
u
p
e
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Hand Held Thermocouples
Master Probe Handle Probes plug into the master probe handle. The
handle has a mini jack at one end and a coiled cable with mini plug on the other.
Individual probes may be connected to allow easy reach to your process.
Description
8
[203.20]
1/8
[3.18]
4
[101.60]
1/8 [3.18]
1/8 [3.18]
8
[203.20]
1/2
[12.70]
1/8 [3.18]
8
[203.20] 1-5/8 [41.28]
7/16 [11.11]
9/16 [14.29]
4
[101.60]
1/16
[1.59]
4
[101.60]
1/16
[1.59]
10
[3048.00]
T/C
Type
J
K
J
K
J
K
J
K
J
K
J
K
J
K
J
K
Model
1718-0076
1718-0077
1818-0073
1818-0074
1818-0077
1818-0078
1818-0081
1818-0082
1818-0084
1818-0085
1818-0088
1818-0089
1818-0092
1818-0093
1558-0030
1558-0013
Immersion Probe This general purpose probe can be used in liquids and gases.
Includes mini plug.
Penetration Probe Used for penetrating meat, plastic, rubber, asphalt, or other
semi soft materials. Includes mini plug.
Surface Probe For flat or semi flat surfaces of metal, paper or plastic. Small gauge
spring contoured tip allows fast response. Includes mini plug.
Air Duct Probe Measures temperature in ducts for air or compatible gases,
environmental chambers, ovens, rooms, etc. Perforated shield has good air flow and
prevents heating by radiation. Includes mini plug.
Exposed Junction Probe Small gauge tip allows high sensitivity and quick
response. The thermocouple junction is exposed for readings in air or
compatible gases. Includes mini plug.
Needle Probe Small diameter penetrating probe gives fast response in soft
materials and liquids. Made with mineral insulated sheath for extra durability.
Includes mini plug.
Bare Tip Probe This probe consists of 10 feet of 24 gauge wire with fiberglass
braided cable and a bare wired junction. Shipped with a spool for easy storage.
Includes mini plug.
Integral Handle Probes Featuring fixed handles and coiled cords, these rugged hand held probes will plug into any device with a mini jack.
General Purpose Probe Featuring a built in handle with coiled cord and mini plug,
this general purpose probe can be used in liquids and air compatible gases. For use
to 800F.
High Temperature General Purpose Probe Featuring a built in handle with coiled
cord and mini plug, this general purpose probe can be used in liquids and air
compatible gases. For use to 1600F.
Penetration Probe Featuring a built in handle with coiled cord and mini plug, this
probe is used for penetrating meat, plastic, rubber, asphalt, or other semi soft
materials.
Straight Surface Probe Featuring a built in handle with coiled cord and mini plug,
this probe is used for flat or semi flat surfaces of metal, paper or plastic. Small gauge
spring contoured tip allows fast response.
Angled Surface Probe Featuring a built in handle with coiled cord and mini plug,
this probe is used for flat or semi flat surfaces of metal, paper or
plastic. Small gauge spring contoured tip allows fast response.
Round Surface Probe Featuring a built in handle with coiled cord and mini plug, this
probe measures temperature in ducts for rollers, convex surfaces. Spring stainless
steel replaceable band stretched across C shaped bow.
Air Duct Probe Featuring a built in handle with coiled cord and mini plug, this probe
measures temperature in ducts for air or compatible gases, environmental chambers,
ovens, rooms, etc. Perforated shield allows good air flow and prevents heating by
radiation.
J
K
J
K
J
K
J
K
J
K
J
K
J
K
1718-0001
1718-0002
1718-0005
1718-0006
1718-0014
1718-0015
1718-0008
1718-0009
1718-0011
1718-0012
1718-0022
1718-0023
1718-0018
1718-0019

T
h
e
r
m
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
I
m
m
e
r
s
o
n
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
The Model FST-300 Infrared Thermometer is designed to monitor
temperatures in the food service industry. The thermometer has both an
infrared sensor and an immersion probe to safely monitor surface and product
temperatures. The quick HACCP zone display gives visual indication when
products are within a safe storage temperature range for both hot and cold food
products. The Model FST-300 also has a built-in white light to illuminate the
measurement area.
Model
FST-300
Food Service Infrared Thermometer
HACCP Zone Display, In Contact Thermocouple Probe, Perfect for
Food Service and Inspection
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: Infrared Sensor: 67 to
482F ( 55 to 250C); Probe
Sensor: 67 to 626F ( 55 to
330C).
Ambient Operating
Temperature: 32 to 122F
(0 to 50C).
Display: Two line 3 digit LCD.
Distance to Target: 2.5:1 optics
ratio.
Emissivity Range: 0.95 default
adjustable 0.1 to 1.0.
Battery Life: 18 hours continuous
use (auto power off after 15
seconds).
Weight: 3.5 oz (98.1 g).
7/8
[22.23]
1-1/2
[38.1]
6-5/16
[160.34]
4-1/2
[114.3]
WT-10
13/16
[20.32]
45/64
[17.78]
5-57/64
[149.86]
Completely submersible, the pocket size Model WT-10 Waterproof
Thermometer is designed with a waterproof housing and a 2.75 (70 mm)
stainless steel stem. The unit offers dual scale temperature measurements up
to 392F (200C) on the 3-digit LCD display. The WT-10 comes complete with
protective cover to store the unit while not in use. The features include
MAX/MIN recall of high and low temperatures, hold, switchable F or C and
auto shut off. Ideal applications include laboratory, food and beverage, HVAC
and scientific markets.
Model
WT-10
Waterproof Thermometer
Stainless Steel Stem, Selectable F or C, Max/Min Recall, Auto Off
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 2F (1C) from 14 to 212F ( 26 to 100C); all other
temperature ranges 3F (2C).
Display: 3 digit LCD.
Resolution: 0.1F/C.
Power Requirements: One 1.5V button style battery (included).
Battery Life: Approximately 1 year.
Construction: 2.75 (70 mm) stainless steel pointed stem and ABS
waterproof housing.
Model FST-300, Food Service Thermometer
Model WT-10, Waterproof Thermometer

448
T
h
e
r
m
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
I
n
f
r
a
r
e
d
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Infrared Temperature Thermometer
12:1 Distance-to-Target Size Ratio, Laser Sighting, Thermocouple Input
Model
IR3
SPECIFICATIONS
Measurement Range: 76 to 932F ( 60 to 500C).
Operating Range: Ambient: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Accuracy: 2% of reading or 4F (2C), whichever is greater.
Resolution: 0.1F/0.1C.
Distance to Target: 12:1.
Emissivity Range: 0.95 adjustable; 0.5 1.0.
Additional Input: Type K.
Battery Life: 2 AAA. 180 hours (without laser or LCD backlight).
Weight: 6.3 oz (179 g) with batteries.
The Model IR3 Infrared Thermometer utilizes infrared technology for
precise, non-contact temperature measurement. This model features a 12:1
distance to target ratio and single point laser sighting for accurate temperature
measurements. The IR3 offers an adjustable emissivity, selectable
temperature units, MAX, MIN, DIF and AVG functions and locking mode for
continuous measurement and backlight display. A K-type thermocouple can be
used to take dual contact and IR temperature measurements simultaneously.
The IR3 offers high and low audible alarms for safety checks.
1-35/64
[39.29]
5-7/8
[149.23]
6-15/16
[176.21]
Infrared Non-Contact Thermometer
12:1 Distance-to-Target Ratio, Laser Sighting
Model
IR2
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Range: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Distance to Target: 12:1.
Emissivity: 0.95 fixed.
Battery Life: 2 AAA, 180 hours continuous use (auto power off after 15
seconds).
Weight: 3.61 oz (102 g).
The Model IR2 Infrared Temperature Thermometer allows users to
economically take accurate measurements in hard to reach areas.
Measurements can be taken at a safe distance with a 12:1 Distance to Target
Ratio. The IR2 easily takes measurements within 2% accuracy using a built-in
laser sighting. The fixed emissivity of 0.95 is perfect for measuring surface
temperatures of concrete, asphalt, rubber or oxidized metals. Besides reading
the process temperature, the back lit display also reads the maximum
temperature seen. Excellent for monitoring surface temperatures of air ducts,
boilers, engines or light fixtures.
1-35/64
[39.29]
5-7/8
[149.23]
6-15/16
[176.21]
Model IR3, Infrared Temperature Thermometer

T
h
e
r
m
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
I
n
f
r
a
r
e
d
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Infrared Non-Contact Thermometer
20:1 Distance-to-Target Ratio, Thermocouple Input, Laser Sighting
Model
IR4
For those long range applications, the IR4 Non Contact Infrared Thermometer is
the perfect instrument. It has a distance to target ratio of 20:1 and laser sighting to
accurately measure within 1% of reading. The adjustable emissivity allows this
thermometer to measure the temperature of virtually any surface. There is no guessing
when the battery is low as the IR4 has a battery indicator on its back lit display. This useful
hand held has programmable low and high audible alarms built in. The IR4 accepts any K-
type thermocouple to display both a IR and a contact reading simultaneously. MAX, MIN,
DIF, and AVG can be displayed with a push of a button. Excellent for monitoring surface
temperatures of air ducts, boilers, engines or light fixtures.
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 1% of reading or 1.8F (1C) whichever is greater.
Distance to Target: 20:1 optics ratio.
Emissivity Range: 0.95 default adjustable 0.05 to 1.00 emissivity.
Additional Input: K type thermocouple.
Battery Life: 2 AAA typical, 180 hours continuous use (auto power off after 15
seconds).
Weight: 6.31 oz (179 g).
1-35/64
[39.29]
6-15/16
[176.21]
5-7/8
[149.23]
The Series IR6/IR7 Dual Laser Extended Range Infrared Thermometer is ideal
for accurately measuring surface temperatures from long distances. This feature packed
handheld device allows the user to read the maximum, minimum, average, and differential
readings. The high and low alarms give audible and visual indication of the process
temperature. When taking measurements in dark areas, a built-in white light can be used
to illuminate the measurement area. For long term measurements, the unit includes a dual
magnetic base attachment that allows hands-free measurements.
Series
IR6/IR7
Dual Laser Extended Range Infrared
Thermometer
Up to 50:1 Distance to Target Ratio
SPECIFICATIONS
Measurement Range: IR6: 76 to 1600F ( 60 to 900C); IR7: 76 to 1832F ( 60
to 1000C).
Accuracy: 2% of readings or 4F (2C) whichever is greater.
Distance to Target: IR6: 30:1; IR7: 50:1.
Emissivity: 0.95 default adjustable 0.10 to 1.00 in 0.01 steps.
Battery Life: 2 AAA, 180 hours continuous use.
Units: User selectable F or C.
Weight: 13.62 oz (386.1 g).
1-13/16
[46.04]
9-1/8
[231.78]
5-59/64
[150.42]
Distance to Target Ratio
30:1
50:1
30:1
50:1
Model
IR6
IR7
IR6-NIST
IR7-NIST
NIST
No
No
Yes
Yes

450
T
h
e
r
m
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
,
I
n
f
r
a
r
e
d
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Miniature Infrared Non-Contact Thermometer
6:1 Distance-to-Target Ratio with Laser Sighting
Model
MIT
The Model MIT Miniature Infrared Temperature Thermometer
is the ultimate portable infrared solution. This unit has features such
as MIN and MAX temperature, adjustable emissivity, battery life
indicator, and laser sighting. This affordable thermometer also has a 6
to 1 distance to target ratio in key chain size housing.
SPECIFICATIONS
Measurement Range: -67 to 482F (-55 to 250C).
Resolution: 0.1F/0.1C (switchable).
Distance To Target: 6:1 optics ratio.
Emissivity Range: 0.95 default adjustable 0.05 to 1.00
emissivity.
Battery Life: Typical 40 hours of continuous use (auto power off
after 15 seconds). (2) CR2032 batteries included.
Weight: 2.29 oz (65 g) including batteries.
2
[50.8]
13/16
[20.64]
4-3/32
[103.99]
Model
PIT
Pocket Size Infrared Thermometer
1:1 Distance to Target Ratio, Pocket Clip
The Model PIT Pocket Size Infrared Thermometer is the most
portable infrared thermometer on the market. The sturdy mounting
clip can be attached to any pant or shirt pocket. The Model PIT can be
field selected to read in F or C. The compact size and single button
operation allow users to take quick accurate temperature readings.
SPECIFICATIONS
Measurement Range: -27 to 428F (-33 to 220C).
Accuracy: 2%.
Resolution: 0.1F or C.
Distance to Target Ratio: 1:1.
Emissivity: Fixed at 0.95.
Weight: 4 oz (113.4 g).
3-27/64
[86.92]
19/32
[15.03]
Model MIT, Miniature Infrared Non-Contact Thermometer
Model PIT, Pocket Size Infrared Thermometer

p
H
/
O
R
P

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
M
e
t
e
r
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Model
IRM20
Noncontact Infrared Thermometer
6:1 Distance-to-Target Size Ratio, Selectable F or C, Laser Sighting
The economical, handheld Model IRM20 Noncontact Infrared
Thermometer is compact, rugged and easy to usejust aim, push the button,
and read current surface temperatures in less than a second. Hot, hazardous,
or hard-to-reach objects are safely measured without contact. The unit has a
wide temperature range from 0 to 500F (-18 to 260C) and a distance-to-spot
size ratio of 6:1. The LCD shows temperatures in switchable F or C, holds
the reading for 7 seconds after the button is released and indicates when the
battery is low. The IRM20 is ideal for industrial, electrical, heating and air
conditioning, automotive and food safety.
1-5/8
[41.28]
1-1/2
[38.10]
7-1/4
[184.15]
SPECIFICATIONS
( 18 to 260C).
Operating Range: Ambient: 32 to
120F (0 to 50C).
Accuracy: 2% of reading or
3.5F (2C) whichever is
greater for targets at 30 to 500F
( 1 to 260C); 5F (3C) for
targets at 0 to 30F ( 18 to 1C).
Repeatability: 2% of reading or
3F (2C).
Resolution: 1F/C.
Response Time: 500 ms, 95%
response.
Distance-to-Target: 6:1.
Emissivity: Fixed 0.95.
Battery: One 9V battery. 12 hours
continuous use.
150F ( 20 to 65C) without
battery.
Relative Humidity: 10 95% RH
noncondensing up to 86F (35C).
Spectral Response: 7 18 m.
Weight: 0.5 lb (227 g).
Model IRM20, Noncontact Infrared Thermometer
Series
PHO-1
pH/ORP/Temperature Meter
0 to 14 pH, Automatic Temperature Compensation, Data Logging
3-5/16
[84.14]
2
[50.8]
2-31/32
[74.9]
7-11/32
[186.20]
2-13/16
[71.4]
1-5/8
[41.2]
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: pH electrode with BNC
connector, temperature probe.
Range: pH: 0.00 to 14.00 pH; mV: 0 to
1999 mV.
(0 to 100C).
(0 to 50C).
Compensated Temperature Limit:
Manual (MTC): 32 to 200F
(0 to 100C); Automatic (ATC): 32 to
200F (0 to 100C).
Operating Humidity: Max. 80% RH.
Sampling Rate: About 1.5 time/sec.
Battery Life: Approximately 120
hours.
Power Supply: Six AA batteries.
Power Current: Approximately 20 mA
DC.
Data Output: RS 232 PC serial
interface.
Dimension: 7.4 x 2.9 x 2
(187 x 73 x 53 mm).
Weight: 1 lb (.45 kg) meter only.
The microprocessor based pH/ORP/Temperature Meter offers quick response and
high accuracy. Simultaneously measure and display pH from 0 to 14 pH (0 to 1999 mV) and
temperatures up to 200F (100C). Model PHO-1 meter features manual or automatic
temperature compensation, auto buffer recognition, and data logging capabilities, and the
recording interval can be defined by the user. The Model PHO-1 accepts any pH electrode
with a BNC connector.
For additional convenience, select model PHO-1K kit, which contains a meter, RS-232 cable,
batteries, software, pH electrode, temperature probe, gender changer, carrying case and
manual.
Measurement
pH
mV
Temp (C)
Temp (F)
Range
0 to 14 pH
0 to 600 mV
601 mV to 1999 mV
0 to 100C
32 to 200F
Resolution
0.001 pH
0.1 mV
0.1C
0.1F
Accuracy
0.01 pH
(0.05% + 1 digit)
0.1%
0.5C
0.9F
SPECIFICATIONS
Model PHO-1, pH/ORP/Temperature Meter
Model PHO-1K, pH/ORP/Temperature Kit

452
p
H

T
e
s
t
e
r
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Model
A-800
Proximity Switch Tester
For 2, 3 or 4 Wire DC Switches
2-3/8
[60.33]
1
[25.40]
3/4
[18.42]
3-3/8
[85.73]
1/4 [7.14]
TYP.
1/2 [11.13]
TYP.
Quickly check the operation of DC proximity sensors or level switches without
dismounting. Designed to test any two-, three- or four-wire sensor with a solid state switch
output. The A-800 provides visual and audible indication of whether the switch is
operational. Switch status (NPN/PNP) indication is designated by a yellow LED. Power
on is indicated by a bright green LED, low battery is indicated by a red LED. Unit can
be used with capacitive, inductive, or photo electric sensors. The pocket sized A-800 is
supplied with two 9 volt batteries.
SPECIFICATIONS
Voltage Supply: 18 VDC.
Batteries: Two 9 volt (included).
Connections: Three spring loaded terminals.
Weight: 0.77 Ib (350 g).
Model A-800, DC Proximity Switch Tester
Series
WPH
Waterproof Pocket-Size pH Testers
0.01 pH Resolution
The Series WPH Waterproof Pocket-Size pH Testers are designed to accurately
take repeatable readings in a variety of applications. The replaceable double junction sensor
contains a regressed glass pH bulb to protect against breaking. The large 4 digit display is
easy to read and has a resolution of up to 0.01 pH. The Series WPH comes standard with
automatic temperature compensation and can be ordered with a dual pH/temperature
display.
APPLICATIONS
Water quality testing in pools, spas, aquariums, hydroponics, ecology studies, water
and wastewater treatment, boiler/steam generators, printing and chemical industries,
sanitation plants and labs.
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: WPH 10: 1.0 to 15.0 pH; WPH 20: 0.00 to 14.99 pH; WPH 30: 10.00 to
15.00 pH; Temperature: 0 to 50C (32 to 122F).
Accuracy: WPH 10: 0.1 pH; WPH 20 and WPH 30: 0.01 pH.
Display: 4 digit, 5/16 (8 mm) high LCD.
Resolution: WPH 10: 0.1 pH; WPH 20 and WPH 30: 0.01 pH.
Ambient Operating Temperature: 0 to 50C (32 to 122F).
Power Requirements: Four 1.5V LR44 alkaline batteries (Over 500 hours).
Calibration: WPH 10: Up to three points USA/NIST buffers (4.0/4.0, 7.0/6.86,
10.0/9.18); WPH 20 & WPH 30: Up to 3 points US/NIST (4.01/4.01, 7.00/6.86,
10.00/9.18).
Electrode: Replaceable double junction.
Weight: WPH 10: 7.2 oz (200 g); WPH 20 & WPH 30: 4.5 oz (125 g).
6.5 [16.5 CM]
1.5 [3.8 CM]
Model WPH-10, Water proof pH Tester 0.1 pH Accuracy
Model WPH-20, Water proof pH Tester 0.01 pH Accuracy
Model WPH-30, Water proof pH Tester 0.01 pH Accuracy with Temperature
ACCESSORY
WPH-RS, Replaceable Double Junction Sensor

T
o
t
a

D
s
s
o
v
e
d
S
o
d
s

T
e
s
t
e
r
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Series
TDS
Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) Tester
1% FS Accuracy, Automatic Temperature Compensation, Replaceable Sensor
Take precise measurements of total dissolved solids with Series TDS. Lightweight
and compact, these testers are ideal for field testing of TDS concentrations. Large easy-to-
read LCD displays the full scale readout in ppm (parts per million)no additional
calculations are required to obtain actual test values. Durable 316 SS Electrodes provide
excellent chemical compatibility. Automatic temperature compensation from 32 to 122F
(0 to 50C) ensures reliable, repeatable results. Additional features include flip-up battery
compartment, sturdy pocket clip, and a splash-resistant membrane keypad.
Series
EC
Conductivity Tester
Waterproof, 1% FS Accuracy, Large Easy to Read Display
Monitor conductivity levels quickly and easily with Series EC Conductivity Testers.
These pocket-sized testers are ideal for conductivity measurements in the lab, industrial
plant or out in the field. Series EC measures conductivity from 0 to 1990 micromhos (S)
or 0 to 19.90 milliohms (mS). The reading is displayed on a large 3-1/2-digit LCD. Splash-
proof membrane keypad prevents water damage. Glass reinforced thermoplastic polyester
housing and 316 SS electrodes withstand most chemicals. Since conductivity changes with
temperature, units feature automatic temperature compensation from 32 to 122F (0 to
50C) to ensure accurate results.
APPLICATIONS
Testing pollution controls, water treatment systems, testing for water hardness,
hydroponics, and fertilizer/chemical concentrations.
APPLICATIONS
Monitor conductivity levels quickly and accurately to determine water hardness,
check pollution control, recirculating systems, and waste water.
1.500
[38.10]
6.600
[167.64]
.875
[22.22]
1.500
[38.10]
6.600
[167.64]
.875
[22.22]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316 SS and glass
reinforced thermoplastic polyester.
Range: TDS2: 0 to 1990 ppm; TDS3: 0
to 10.00 ppt.
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Display: 3 1/2 digit LCD, 5/16
(8 mm) high.
Resolution: TDS2: 10 ppm; TDS3:
0.10 ppt.
to 122F (0 to 50C).
32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Power Requirements: Four 1.5V
alkaline batteries (included).
Battery Life: 140 hrs. continuous.
Calibration: 1 point push button
calibration.
Calibration Standard Range: TDS2:
300 to 1990 ppm; TDS3: 3 to 10.00
ppt.
Weight: 4.5 oz (125 g).
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316 SS and glass
reinforced thermoplastic polyester.
Range: EC1: 0 to 1990 S; EC2: 0 to
19.90 mS.
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Display: 3 1/2 digit LCD, 5/16
(8 mm) high.
Resolution: EC1:10 S;
EC2: 0.10 mS.
Ambient Operating Limits: 32 to
122F (0 to 50C).
32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Power Requirements: Four 1.5V
alkaline batteries (included).
Battery Life: 140 hrs. continuous.
Calibration: 1 point push button
calibration.
Calibration Standard Range: EC1:
300 to 1990 S; EC2: 3 to 19.90 ms.
Weight: 4.5 oz (125 g).
Model TDS3, TDS Tester, 0 10.00 ppm
ACCESSORY
TDS15, Replacement Sensor
Model EC1, Conductivity Tester, 0 1990 S
Model EC2, Conductivity Tester, 0 19.90 mS
ACCESSORY
TDS15, Replacement Sensor

454
G
a
s

L
e
a
k

D
e
t
e
c
t
o
r
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Model
CLD20
Combustible Leak Detector
Adjustable Tick Rate, <1 Second Response
Quickly locate leaks of combustible gases with the Model CLD20 Combustible Leak
Detector. Unit provides accurate detection of Methane, Butane, Ammonia, Ethylene Oxide,
Alcohols, Industrial Solvents and other combustible or toxic gases. Adjustable tick rate
accelerates as the sensor tip approaches a leak and can be re-zeroed to pinpoint the exact
location of the leak. The Model CLD20 offers visual LED indication of leak level and
automatically recalibrates when turned off and on. Flexible gooseneck and small sensor
head allows use in tight, difficult to reach areas.
1.350
[34.29]
7.250
[184.15]
2.750
[69.85]
3.250
[82.55]
.500 MAX
[12.7]
GOOSENECK LENGTH
15.750 [400.05]
Model
RLD1
Refrigerant Leak Detector
Audio and Visual Indication, Flexible Gooseneck Design
Detect and pinpoint even small leaks of refrigerant gases using the Model RLD1
Refrigerant Leak Detector. The RLD1 is effective in detecting existing refrigerants
including HFC, HCFC, CFC, SF6, R134a, and R123. Unit features thumbwheel operation
to increase sensitivity and audio and visual indication. An increasing tick rate sounds as a
leak is pinpointed and the red indication light flashes more rapidly. The flexible gooseneck
probe is ideal for hard to reach areas. Use the model RLD1 in domestic and commercial
refrigeration systems, automotive, air conditioning, and quality control testing
environments.
1.350
[34.29]
7.250
[184.15]
2.750
[69.85]
3.250
[82.55]
.500 MAX
[12.7]
GOOSENECK LENGTH
15.750 [400.05]
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensitivity: 50 ppm.
Response Time: Less than 1 second.
Sensor: Solid state semiconductor.
Ambient Operating Temperature/RH: 32 to 104F (0 to 40C), 0 to 80% RH
(non condensing).
Power Requirements: One 9V alkaline battery.
Battery Life: Approximately 10 hours of continuous usage.
Warm-up Time: 10 seconds.
Pre-programmed fuels: (partial listing) Methane, Natural gas, Ammonia,
Hydrogen, Butane, Propane, Acetone, Ethylene Oxide, Halon, Hydrogen Sulphide,
Alcohol, Jet Fuel. Lacquer, and Thinners.
Alarm Settings: Audio: adjustable tick rate 75dB @ 1 ft (30 cm), Visual: flashing
LED.
Probe: 16 (40 cm) length, flexible gooseneck.
Dimensions: 7.3H x 3.4W x 1.4D (18.5 x 8.5 x 3.4 cm).
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensitivity: 0.4 oz/year (11 gm/year)
R134a.
Response Time: Less than 1 second.
Sensor: Advanced ionization detection.
32 to 104F (0 to 40C), 0 to 80% RH
(non condensing).
Power Requirements: One 9V
alkaline battery.
Battery Life: Approximately 16 hours.
Warm-up Time: 10 seconds.
Pre-programmed gases: (partial
listing) CFCs: R11, R12, R13, HCFCs:
R22, R502, R500, HFCs: R134a,
R123, R125, R23, and other halogen
based compounds.
Alarm Settings: Audio: adjustable tick
rate, Visual: flashing LED.
Probe: 15 3/4 (40 cm) length, flexible
gooseneck.
Dimensions: 7.3H x 3.4W x 1.4D
(18.5 x 8.5 x 3.4 cm).
Model CLD20, Combustible Leak Detector
Model RLD1, Refrigerant Leak Detector

G
a
s

A
n
a
y
z
e
r
s
/
K
t
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Model
1205A-5
Handheld CO Analyzer
Dual-Line Alpha-Numeric Display, Auto Calibration
Model 1205A-5 Handheld CO Analyzer provides a simple, cost effective answer to
detecting and monitoring colorless, odorless, toxic carbon monoxide. The portable, battery
operated unit measures CO from 0 to 2000 ppm and can record maximum CO values. Use
a Type K thermocouple (sold separately) to measure temperatures. Simultaneously display
two different functions on the large two-line alpha-numeric LCD. Quickly program time,
date, engineering units, language and other display functions. The rotary dial allows easy
function selections. The analyzer features auto zeroing, battery indication, infrared printer
link, and a backlight display for low light areas. The Model 1205A-5 is ideal for ambient air
monitoring in residential and commercial markets, flue testing in small boilers, and source
investigation in areas where CO monitors have alarmed. The unit includes a stainless steel
flue probe with filter and flexible tubing, batteries and instruction manual.
3-1/2
[88.90]
1-13/16
[46.04]
7-29/32
[200.82]
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: CO: 0 to 2000 ppm;
Temperature: 32 to 1112F (0 to 600C).
Accuracy: CO: 5% of reading;
Temperature: 5F (2C).
Display: Alpha numeric LCD, dual
digits.
Ambient OperatingTemperature: 32
to 104F (0 to 40C).
Operating RH: 10 to 90% non
condensing.
Response Time: 20 to 30 seconds.
Sensor Type: Electrochemical cell.
Calibration: Auto zero function.
Flexible Tubing: 9 ft (3 m)
polyurethane tubing with quick fit
connector. Max. temperature: 180F
(82C).
Flue Probe: 11.8 (30 cm) length,
stainless steel with quick fit connector
to aluminum handle. Max. temperature:
1100F (600C).
Temperature Probe: Type K
thermocouple with mini connector (sold
separately).
Power Requirements: Four AA size
alkaline batteries.
Battery Life: 8 hours with alkaline
batteries (continuous use without
backlight).
Model 1205A-5, Handheld CO Analyzer
ACCESSORY
1718-0002, Type K Thermocouple with integral handle
Model
1207A
Handheld Flue Gas Combustion Analyzer
Rotary Dial Selection, Display 4 Parameters Simultaneously
The versatile Model 1207A Handheld Flue Gas Combustion Analyzer makes
adjusting boilers for optimum efficiency quicker and easier. With the large LCD display,
users can monitor four parameters simultaneously and change the parameters shown using
the rotary dial selection switch. For extra protection, the analyzer comes standard with a
protective boot and magnetic back. In order to track the measurements, the 1207A can
store up to 255 time stamped test sets in memory and can output measurements to a serial
printer. The 1207A comes preprogrammed for natural gas, light oil, propane, butane, LPG,
and wood pellets. Along with analyzing combustion measurements, the analyzer can be
used as a CO/CO
2
indicator, pressure manometer, or thermocouple thermometer.
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: O
2
: 0 to 21%; CO: 0 to 2000
PPM (4000 PPM max for 15 minutes);
CO
2
: 0 to 30%; Temp. (flue and net):
32 to 1112F (0 to 600C); Efficiency:
0 to 99.9%; Excess air: 0 to 250%.
Accuracy: O
2
: 0.2%; CO: 10 PPM
< 100 PPM else 5% of reading; CO
2
:
0.3% reading; Temp. (flue and net):
2C 0.3% reading; Efficiency: 1%
reading; Excess air: 0.2%.
Resolution: O
2
: 0.1%; CO: 1 PPM;
CO
2
: 0.1%; Temp. (flue and net):
0.1F/C; Efficiency: 0.1%; Excess air:
0.1%.
to 104F (0 to 40C).
Power Requirements: 4 AA batteries
or optional AC adapter.
Pre-Programmed Fuels: Natural gas,
light oil, propane, butane, LPG, and
wood pellets.
Probe: 11.8 (300 mm) length x 0.25
(6 mm) diameter with 7.8 (200 mm)
stainless steel shaft.
Hose: 10 ft (3 m).
1/4
[6.35]
7-7/8 [200.00]
10 [3000]
LONG NEOPRENE
HOSE
3-3/4
[95.25]
8
[203.20]
3-11/32
[85.09]
7-35/64
[191.77]
1-21/32 [41.91]
(FRONT VIEW SHOWN W/ BOOT)
NEW PRODUCT!
Model 1207A, Handheld Flue Gas Combustion Analyzer
ACCESSORIES
1207A-US, 120 VAC Power Adapter
1207A-EU, 230 VAC Power Adapter
1207A-SP, Serial Printer
1207A-PP, Printer Paper for 1207A SP
1207A-RF, Replacement Filter

456
G
a
s

A
n
a
y
z
e
r
s
/
K
t
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Gas Pressure Test Kit
Convenient Kit Perfect For Testing LP and Natural Gas Controls
Model
LPTK
The Model LPTK Gas Pressure Test Kit is ideal for testing LP and natural
gas lines and controls. The kits gage shows if proper pressure is present or if
a leak exists. The LPTK Gas Pressure Test Kit is available in two different gage
ranges, and each gage is 3% full scale accurate with an easy to use calibration
screw on the back of the gage. It is easier to use than a manometer, and includes
a sturdy case for added durability and safe handling.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Gage: brass, hose: rubber.
Housing Materials: Steel with black finish.
Pressure Limit: 110% of range.
Size: 2 1/2 (63 mm).
Process Connections: 1/8 NPT, brass hose barb.
Case: ABS plastic.
Hose: Rubber, 36 (91.4 cm).
Tube Nipple: Rubber.
Model
LPTK-01
LPTK-02
LPTK-03
LPTK-04
*Consult factory for other range options.
2-17/32
[64.5]
CLOSED
6-9/64
[156]
4-1/64
[102]
8-17/64
[210]
9-29/64
[240]
12-31/64
[317]
OPEN PLACE OF
ADAPTOR
PLACE OF
GAGE
GAGE & HOSE ADAPTOR
2-5/8
[66.7]
35/64 SQUARE
[13.8 SQUARE]
H33/64
[H13]
1-9/16
[39.6]
Range
0 to 15 w.c. & 0 to 8.6 oz/in
2
0 to 32 w.c. & 0 to 18.5 oz/in
2
0 to 4 kPa & 0 to 40 mbar
0 to 8 kPa & 0 to 80 mbar
Easy-to-Use Smoke Gage Kit enables you to quickly balance maximum CO
2
with minimum smoke for clean, efficient combustion. Simply take an actual
sample of the smoke being tested and compare it to the standards on the smoke
chart included. Just 10 full strokes of the pump produces an accurate test
sample. Complete testing instructions are included.
Popular with professional heating engineers, the Model 920 Smoke
Gage Kit includes these quality components:
(1). Dwyer
Smoke Gage Pump Fast working; the first known unit to

conform with ASTM D 2156 XX standards for testing smoke density
in flue gases from burning distillate fuels. Filter paper clamps
instantly into pump inlet.
(2). Hole Plugs Packet of 20 to fill awl holes.
(3). Smoke Chart For easy comparison with samples taken.
Laminated plastic, wipes clean.
(4). Awl Pierces smoke pipe for thermometer and sampling tubes.
Large, comfortable plastic handle.
(5). Smoke Gage Filter Paper An exclusive, time saving Dwyer
development. Roll of filter paper is contained in dispenser box, kept
clean and convenient.
(6). Metal Terminal Tube 8 1/2 long, heavy gauge brass.
(7). How to Use Instructions Simple with step by step illustrations.
(8). Rubber Tubing Flexible, long lived.
(9). Spring Holders A superior design for holding thermometer and
sampling tubes.
(10). Kit Case Tough, durable, one piece high density polyethylene
with living hinge and clasp. Foam liner protects contents.
Smoke Gage Kit
Complete Kit, Includes 10 Components
Model
920
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Model 920, Smoke Gage Kit

S
g
n
a

G
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r
s
/
M
u
t
m
e
t
e
r
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
The pocket size model ASG Analog Signal Generator is an ideal tool for
troubleshooting transmitters, transducers, motors and actuators. The unit generates a 0
to 10 VDC signal in increments of 1 volt or a 4 to 20 mA signal in increments of 2 mA. An
LED bar graph visually indicates analog signal level. The model ASG will also continuously
ramp to user defined maximum and minimum values with user defined ramp interval
timing. Units are furnished with 6 ft (1.8 m) leads with alligator clips, 120 VAC plug in
adapter protective carrying case and instruction manual.
Analog Signal Generator
Ramp Function, Bar Graph LED, Selectable Auto Shut Off
Model
ASG
SPECIFICATIONS
Impedance: Voltage: 1000 min. Current: 300 max.
Output: 0 to 20 mA (2 mA increments); 0 10 VDC (1 VDC increments).
Resolution: 2 mA (current). 1 VDC (voltage).
Ramping Time Intervals: 2 to 20 sec (2 sec increments).
Power Requirements: 9 Volt battery or 120 VAC (provided).
Auto Shutoff Times: 2 to 20 min. (2 min. increments) (6 minute default).
Electrical Connections: 6 ft (1.8 m) with alligator clips.
Weight: 3.2 oz (without battery).
55/64
[21.6]
2-13/32
[61.0]
4-45/64
[119.4]
Model ASG, Analog Signal Generator
Model
CSG
Current/Voltage Signal Generator
Ramp Function, Large Numeric LCD Display
SPECIFICATIONS
Impedance: Voltage: 1000 min. Current: 300 max.
Output: 0 to 20 mA (1 mA increments); 0 10 VDC (1 VDC increments).
Resolution: 1 mA (current); 1 VDC (voltage).
Ramping Time Intervals: 1 to 20 sec (1 sec increments).
Power Requirements: 9 Volt battery or 120 VAC (provided).
Auto Power Off: 1 to 20 min.
Electrical Connections: 6 ft (1.8 m) with alligator clips.
The pocket size CSG Current and Voltage Signal Generator is an ideal tool for
troubleshooting transmitters, transducers, motors, and actuators. The unit generates a 0
to 10 VDC signal in increments of 1 volt or a 0 to 20 mA signal in increments of 1 mA. The
Model CSG features a large LCD display with a blue backlight for use in dimly lit areas. The
Model CSG continuously ramps the output using user selected minimum, maximum, and
ramp interval timing parameters. Units are furnished with a 9V battery, 120 VAC plug-in
power supply, test leads with alligator clips, carrying case, and instruction manual.
FEATURES
Large backlit display
Timed ramp function
Auto power off
2-1/2
[63.5]
1-13/32
[35.72]
5-1/2
[139.7]
Model CSG, Current Voltage Signal Generator

458
S
g
n
a

G
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r
s
/
M
u
t
m
e
t
e
r
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Model
MM10
Digital Multimeter
Measures DC /AC Voltage, DC Current and Resistance, Overload Protection
E B C E
LED +
2K/ +
MM10
NPN/LED 2m
MAX
DC 60 V
AC 60 V
mA V COM
200/
PNP
20m
10A
MAX
1 A
MAX
5 0V
10A
DCA
20
2
200m
20m
200K
20K
2m
F ACV
600
200
600
200
DCV
2.750
[69.85]
5.000
[127.0]
1.000
[25.4]
Our compact, low cost Model MM10 Digital Multimeter is ideal for general
electrical testing and troubleshooting. This full function multimeter measures
DC and AC voltage to 600V, DC current to 10A and resistance to 20M. In
addition to volts, amps and ohms, this meter includes audible continuity, diode,
LED and transistor hFE tests. The 3-1/2 digit LCD features automatic polarity
correction, low battery and overload indication. Rugged, high impact case
comes equipped with built-in tilt-stand for versatile, hands-free operation.
Overload protected to 600VAC/600VDC for voltage ranges and to
500VAC/500VDC for resistance, diode and continuity test ranges. Current
ranges are protected by 0.5A/250V, replaceable fuse. Multimeter is furnished
with 22 test leads, 9V battery and instruction manual.
SPECIFICATIONS
DC VOLTAGE
Ranges: 2V, 20V, 200V, 600V.
Resolution: 1 mV, 10 mV, 100
mV, 1V.
Accuracy: 2V: (0.5% + 1 digit);
20 to 600V: (1.5% + 1 digit).
AC VOLTAGE
Ranges: 200V, 600V.
Resolution: 100mV, 1V.
Accuracy: 200V: (2% + 3 digits);
600V: (2.5% + 3 digits).
RESISTANCE
Ranges: 200, 2k, 20k,
200k, 2M, 20M.
Accuracy: 200: (2% + 2 digits);
2k to 2M: (1.5% + 2 digits);
20M: (2.5% + 2 digits).
DC CURRENT
Ranges: 2 mA, 20 mA, 200 mA,
10A.
Resolution: 1A, 10A, 100A,
10 mA.
Accuracy: 2 to 200 mA: (1.5% +
1 digit); 10A: (2% + 1 digit).
CONTINUITY TEST
Range: < 30. Resolution: 0.1.
DIODE TEST
Resolution: 1 mV.
Test Current: 1 mA.
TRANSISTOR (hFE) TEST
Type: NPN, PNP.
Range: 0 1000.
LED TEST
Test Voltage: < 3V.
Range: 1.5 3V.
GENERAL
Display: 3 1/2 digit LCD with a
maximum reading of 1999.
Sampling Rate: 2.5 times per
second.
Ambient Operating
(0 to 40C), 0 to 80% RH.
140F ( 10 to 60C), 0 to 80% RH.
Power Requirements: One 9V
battery.
Battery Life: 150 hrs. approx.
Weight: 5.2 oz (150 g).
Model MM10, Digital Multimeter
Model
A-396A
Calibration Pump
Serves as pressure source to calibrate gages and transmitters or to set
pressure switches. Use with manometer or other pressure standard. Includes
volume adjuster enabling fine pressure control and bleed valve. Generates
pressures from a fraction of an inch w.c. to 72 psig (5 bar). Includes barbed
fitting, tee connector and three 36 lengths of vinyl tubing.
Model A-396A, Calibration Pump

C
a
b
r
a
t
o
n

P
u
m
p
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Hand Pump
Generates Pressures up to 45 psig (3 bar), Single Hand Operation
Model
HP
Model HP Hand Pump provides a dual source of pneumatic pressure and vacuum for
verifying the calibration of pressure instrumentation. Pump can generate pressures up to
45 psig (3 bar) and vacuum to -27 Hg (-910 mbar). The compact pump is designed for portability
and single hand operation.
Model HP features a pressure relief valve and fine adjustment for control better than 0.0015
psi (0.1 mbar). Pump includes two 39 (1 m) hoses terminating in 1/4 female NPT connections
and instruction manual.
SPECIFICATIONS
Output Ranges: 27 Hg to 45 psig ( 910 mbar to 3 bar).
Process Connection: 1/4 female NPT (quick fit).
Fine Adjustment: Better than 0.0015 psi (0.1mbar).
Materials: Nickel plated brass and anodized aluminum.
1-13/16
[46.04]
3-9/32 MIN
[83.34]
4-1/16 MAX
[103.19]
5-29/32
[150.02]
2-41/64 MIN
[67.07]
3-9/32 MAX
[83.34]
1-13/16
[45.04]
QUICK FIT CONNECTIONS FOR
FLEXIBLE HOSING TERMINATING
IN 1/4 NPT
Model HP-1, Hand Pump
ACCESSORIES
Model HP-1K, Service Kit
Model HP-1C, Hard Case
Series
CHP
Pneumatic Hand Pump
Vacuum or Pressure, Ranges up to 100 psig
The Series CHP Pneumatic Hand Pump is the most dependable and rugged pump for
applications up to 100 psi or 28.8 Hg Vacuum. The durable Acetel plastic and anodized
aluminum construction prevents body heat transfer, resulting in drift-free, accurate
readings. The Series CHP is equipped with oversized check valves in order to provide
smooth and controlled operation. Dual O-Rings on all pistons ensure the pump to be leak-
free. The unit includes a 2 foot long hose, 1/8 female NPT gauge fitting, and 1/8 NPT pipe
plug. An optional hose kit is available so that a tee is not required when connecting a sensor
and a calibrator. The Series CHP is ideal for checking calibration of pressure or vacuum
gauges, switches, or transmitters.
SPECIFICATIONS
Output Range: CHP P: 0 to 100 psi; CHP V: 0 to 28.8 Hg.
Process Connection: Two 1/8 female NPT ports, one with a removable plug.
Materials: Acetel plastic and anodized aluminum.
Temperature Limit: Not to exceed 150F (65.6 C).
Displaced Volume: Approximately 4 in
3
.
Dimensions: 9 length x 1.5 diameter.
Weight: 1.5 lb (680 g).
11-19/32
[294.48]
WHEN PUMP EXTENDED
1/4 NPT
GAGE FITTING
8-21/32
[219.87]
WHEN PUMP EXTENDED
1/8 NPT PORT
SHOWN WITH CHP-KIT INSTALLED
1/8 NPT
PIPE PLUG
PRESSURE VENTING
VALVE CAP
1-1/2
[38.1]
Model CHP-P, Pressure Calibration Pump
Model CHP-V, Vacuum Calibration Pump
ACCESSORY
CHP-KIT, 2 Hose and NPT Fitting

460
C
a
b
r
a
t
o
n

P
u
m
p
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Pneumatic Hand Pump
Generates Pressures up to 600 psi (40 bar), Portable
Model
PHP
Verify calibration of pressure transmitters, switches, controllers, indicators, and
recorders with Model PHP Pneumatic Hand Pump. The Model PHP is a hand operated
pump for sourcing pressure and vacuum. Use in conjunction with an analog or digital gage
for a complete calibration system.
The unit provides output pressures up to 600 psi (40 bar) or vacuum down to -28.5 Hg (-
0.960 bar). The reliable pump reaches 100 psi in 4 strokes. Model PHP is fitted with a fine
adjustment valve for precise volume control and an adjustable stroke to provide over
pressure protection.
Model PHP includes a 39 (1 m) hose with a 1/4 female NPT quick fit connector. The
optional service kit includes seals, O-rings, retaining screws and an allen key.
SPECIFICATIONS
Output Ranges: 28.5 Hg to 600 psi ( 0.960 to 40 bar).
Gage Connection: 1/4 female NPT.
Materials: Nickel plated brass, anodized aluminum, and nylon.
1/4 FEMALE NPT
PRESSURE PORT
1-1/4
[32]
3-1/64
[80 MAX]
8-25/64
[213]
7-21/64
[186]
4-7/8
[124]
Pneumatic Calibration Hand Pump
Generates up to 600 psi, Comfort Grip Handles
Series
PCHP
The Series PCHP Pneumatic Hand Pump comfortably sources pressure and vacuum
to check calibration of gages, switches, transmitters, and recorders. The contoured cushion
handles provide extra comfort while preventing the pump from sliding. The oversized check
valve provides smooth operation throughout the output range. The dual O-rings on all
pistons ensure zero leakage.
SPECIFICATIONS
Output Ranges: 28 Hg to 600 psi ( 0.945 to 40 bar).
Process Connection: 1/4 NPT/BSP.
Gauge Connection: 1/8 NPT/BSP.
Materials: Stainless steel fittings, anodized aluminum housing, plastic/rubber
handles, and nitrile o rings.
1-1/8
[28.58]
3-11/64
[80.57]
5
[127]
7-3/32
[180.1]
8-41/64
[219.48]
1/4 BSP WITH
1/4 NPT ADAPTER
1/8 BSP WITH
1/8 NPT ADAPTER
1/8 NPT
PLUG
SLIDE
BUTTON
Model PHP-1, Pneumatic Hand Pump
ACCESSORIES
PHP-1K, Service Kit
PHP-1C, Hard Case
Model PCHP-1, Pneumatic Calibration Hand Pump
Model PCHP-1K, Pneumatic Calibration Hand Pump with Hose Kit
ACCESSORY
PCHP-HK, High Pressure Hose

C
a
l
i
b
r
a
t
i
o
n

P
u
m
p
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Hydraulic Hand Pump
Pressures up to 10,000 psi (700 bar), Oil or Water
Model
HHP
Generate pressures up to 10,000 psi (700 bar) with Model HHP-1 Hydraulic Hand Pump.
Scissor action pump allows quick priming and pressure generation. Use in conjunction with
an analog or digital pressure gage for a complete calibration system.
The pump is designed with a large, see through reservoir with a capacity of over 4 oz. A
variety of fill liquids can be used including mineral oil, distilled water, and alcohol. The
sealed stainless steel and tempered glass construction provide leak free operation.
Model HHP offers adjustable over pressure protection, fine control, and a unique selector
switch to move from priming to high pressure generation.
SPECIFICATIONS
Output Ranges: 0 to 10,000 psi (0 to 700 bar).
Gage Connection: 1/4 female NPT.
Materials: Stainless steel and tempered glass.
1/4 FEMALE NPT
PRESSURE PORT
4-7/32
[107] MAX
1/4 FEMALE NPT
4-13/16
[202]
9-1/8
[232]
8-11/32
[212]
3-3/16
[81]
Triple Filtration, Generates pressure up to 10,000 psi
Series
HCHP
The Series HCHP Hydraulic Calibration Hand Pump utilizes a fully adjustable stroke
control that allows for quick priming, easy pumping and fast pressure generation up to
10000 psi (700 bar). The ergonomically engineered handles provide extra comfort, while the
triple filtration system ensures pump operation in spite of dirty conditions. The
shatterproof reservoir and stainless steel construction guarantee leak free operation. The
Series HCHP has oversized check valves to provide smooth controlled operation.
SPECIFICATIONS
Output Ranges: 0 to 10,000 psi (0 to 700 bar).
Process Connection: 1/4 NPT/BSP.
Gauge Connection: 1/4 NPT/BSP.
Materials: SS, polyurethane, anodized hard-coat aluminum, PTFE, and nitrile.
5-5/32
[130.97]
9-3/8
[238.13]
7-3/4
[196.85]
1/4 NPT
PLUG
4-1/16
[103.19]
1/4 BSP WITH
1/4 NPT ADAPTER
2-3/32
[53.18]
1/4 BSP WITH
1/4 NPT
ADAPTER
ACCESSORIES
HHP-1K, Service Kit
HHP-1C, Hard Case
HHP-6K, High Pressure Hose Kit
Model HCHP-1, Calibration Hand Pump
Model HCHP-1K, Calibration Hand Pump with Hose Kit
Model HHP-1, Hydraulic Hand Pump
ACCESSORY
HCHP-1F, Spare Washer and Filter Kit
461.P.N:Layout 2 2/16/11 3:25 PM Page 1
462
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

C
a
b
r
a
t
o
r
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Multi-Cal Benchtop Calibrator
Interchangeable Ranges, 0.05% Accuracy, Datalogging Capability, NIST Traceable
Model
MC6
Model MC6 Multi-Cal Benchtop Calibrator performs a wide variety of
simple and complex pressure based measurement, test, and calibration operations.
Modular sensor design allows user to select pressure measurement range for
application flexibility. Calibrator can accommodate up to two interchangeable
pressure modules (sold separately below) in any combination of range or accuracy.
Simultaneously display two separate measurements on the two line, alphanumeric
display. Readings can be displayed in a choice of twelve preprogrammed
engineering units or any single user-defined unit. Calibrator features min/max
recall, hi/lo alarm, percentage of full scale pressure readings, mA/voltage
measurement, leak rate and pressure decay measurement, switch testing
capabilities, including trip point and dead band, and velocity/volume flow rates.
Quickly document calibration procedures using the data logging feature which
stores up to 384 sets of pressure and time/date stamped measurements. The
automatic % error calculation simplifies transmitter calibration. Easily upload
stored data to an IBM compatible computer via the RS232 two-way
communications port. Calibrators and modules include certification to NIST
traceabilityideal as a secondary standard for calibrating pressure equipment.
Multi-Cal Pressure Calibrator includes utility software, protection module,
adjustable handle, AC adapter, and instruction manual.
APPLICATIONS
Pressure measurement for clean room control, filter performance
monitoring, HVAC testing and setup, draft measurement, airflow
measurement control, differential pressure measurement in laminar
flowhoods, paint booths, industrial ovens and fume hoods. Use as a
secondary standard for calibrating pressure equipment.
6-3/4
[171.4]
9/16
[14.27]
9-1/4
[234.9]
1-1/4
[31.75]
1-1/2
[38.10]
3-5/16
[84.12]
1-1/8
[28.57]
6-11/32
[161.1]
9/64
[3.571]
31/32
[24.60]
15/16
[23.80]
3-1/2
[88.9]
4
[101.6]
Multi-Cal Pressure Modules are interchangeable and available in a wide
selection of pressure ranges and accuracies. Benchtop calibrator accepts up to
two pressure modules. Modules include NIST calibration certification.
OPTIONS
Consult factory for other pressure ranges and accuracies.
2.170
[55.12]
2.042
[51.87]
2.868
[72.85]
2.268
[57.61]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean, dry, nonconductive, noncorrosive gases.
Accuracy: Differential pressure modules: 0.06% FS; Gauge pressure
modules: 0.05% FS; Voltage input: 0.025% FS @ 0/10 VDC, 0.10%
FS @ 0/30 VDC; Current input: 0.03% FS @ 0/20 mA, 0.05% FS @
0/50 mA.
Sensitivity: 0.002% of span with dampening 1 part in 50,000 (max).
Repeatability: Ranges 0/2 psi: 0.05% of span; Ranges 0/5 psi:
0.02% of span.
Output: RS232 serial interface, 9 pin.
Alarm Output: SPST form C 110 VDC, 120 VDC (max.), 1 A (max), 30
W, 62.5 VA (resistive).
Display: Alphanumeric LCD, 0.37 (9.5 mm) height per line, 2 lines, 16
characters/line.
Display Update: 100 msec.
Electrical Connections: Standard banana jacks.
Power Supply: 110 VAC/60 Hz adapter, 500 mA.
Engineering Units: in H2O, psi, in Hg, kPa, mbar, bar, cm H2O, mm Hg,
ftSW, MPa, mmH2O, kg/cm
2
and user defined.
Overpressure: Differential pressure modules: 50 psi positive direction,
15 psi negative direction; Gauge pressure modules: 2x range (0/5 psi to
0/1000 psi).
Temperature Compensation: 20 to 120F ( 7 to 49C).
Temperature Error: Maximum of 0.004% of span per F over
compensated range for zero and span.
Temperature Effect Electrical Measurement: 0.001% of span per F
over compensated range.
Dampening: (Measurement averaging) programmable from 0 to 16
consecutive readings.
Baud Rate: 300, 1200, 2400, or 9600, selectable.
Computer Requirements: IBM compatible 386 or above and Windows
3.1 or later with 2mB RAM and 2mB hard drive disk space, one serial
port.
Weight: Calibrator: 3.0 lb (1.4 kg); Pressure module: 0.5 lb (0.3 kg).
Model
MC1000
MC1001
MC1004
MC1006
MC2010
MC2012
MC2016
Windows

Model MC6, Benchtop Calibrator
Range
0.25 H2O Differential Pressure, 0.07
25 H2O Differential Pressure, 0.06
5.0 psig Gauge Pressure, 0.05

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

C
a
b
r
a
t
o
r
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Multi-Cal Pressure Calibrator
Interchangeable Ranges, 0.05% Accuracy, Datalogging Capability, NIST Traceable
Series
MC
Series MC Portable Multi-Cal Pressure Calibrator performs a wide
variety of simple and complex pressure based measurement, test, and
calibration operations. Modular sensor design allows user to select pressure
measurement range for application flexibility. Calibrator can accommodate up
to two interchangeable pressure modules (sold separately below) in any
combination of range or accuracy.
Simultaneously display two separate measurements on the two line,
alphanumeric display. Readings can be displayed in a choice of 12
preprogrammed engineering units or any single user-defined unit. Calibrator
features min/max recall, hi/lo alarm, percentage of full scale pressure readings,
mA/voltage measurement, leak rate and pressure decay measurement, switch
testing capabilities, including trip point and dead band, and velocity/volume
flow rates.
Quickly document calibration procedures using the data logging feature which
stores up to 384 sets of pressure and time/date stamped measurements. Easily
upload stored data to an IBM compatible computer via the RS232 port.
Calibrators and modules include certification to NIST traceabilityideal as a
secondary standard for calibrating pressure equipment.
Multi-Cal Pressure Calibrator includes utility software, test leads, protection
module, adjustable hand strap, AC adapter, two 9V batteries, instruction
manual, and hard carrying case.
APPLICATIONS
Pressure measurement for clean room control, filter performance monitoring,
HVAC testing and setup, draft measurement, airflow measurement control,
differential pressure measurement in laminar flowhoods, paint booths, industrial
ovens and fume hoods. Use as a secondary standard for calibrating pressure
equipment.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean, dry, nonconductive, noncorrosive gases.
Accuracy: Differential pressure modules: 0.06% FS; Gauge pressure
modules: 0.05% FS; Voltage input: 0.025% FS @ 0/10 VDC, 0.10%
FS @ 0/30 VDC; Current input: 0.03% FS @ 0/20 mA, 0.05% FS @
0/50 mA.
Sensitivity: 0.002% of span with dampening 1 part in 50,000 (max).
Repeatability: Ranges 0/2 psi: 0.05% of span; Ranges 0/5 psi:
0.02% of span.
Output: RS232 serial interface, 9 pin.
Alarm Output: SPST form C 110 VDC, 120 VDC (max.), 1 A (max), 30
W, 62.5 VA (resistive).
Display: Alphanumeric LCD, 0.37 (9.5 mm) height per line, 2 lines, 16
characters/line.
Display Update: 100 msec.
Electrical Connections: Miniature recessed banana jacks.
Power Requirements: Internal: two 9 VDC alkaline batteries; External:
AC adapter 9 VDC, 500 mA.
Battery Life: 30 hours (approximate).
Engineering Units: inH
2
O, psi, inHg, kPa, mbar, cmH
2
O, mmHg, and
user defined.
Overpressure: Differential pressure modules: 50 psi positive direction,
15 psi negative direction; Gage pressure modules: 2x range (0/5 psi to
0/1000 psi).
Temperature Compensation: 20 to 120F ( 7 to 49C).
Temperature Error: Maximum of 0.004% of span per F over
compensated range for zero and span.
Temperature Effect Electrical Measurement: 0.001% of span per F
over compensated range.
Dampening: (Measurement averaging) programmable from 0 to 16
consecutive readings.
Baud Rate: 300, 1200, 2400, or 9600, selectable.
Weight: Calibrator: 2.2 lb (1.3 kg); Pressure module: 0.5 lb (0.3 kg).
MODULES INSERTED HERE
4-1/4
[108.0]
1/2
[12.70]
7-7/8
[200.0]
3-1/4
[82.55]
3-1/4
[82.55]
1-3/4
[44.45]
Multi-Cal Pressure Modules are interchangeable and available in a wide
selection of pressure ranges and accuracies. Handheld calibrator accepts up to
two pressure modules. Modules include NIST calibration certification.
OPTIONS
Consult factory for other pressure ranges and accuracies. FM approved
models are also available.
Model
MC1000
MC1001
MC1004
MC1006
MC2010
MC2012
MC2016
2.170
[55.12]
2.042
[51.87]
2.868
[72.85]
2.268
[57.61]
Model MC2K, Handheld Calibrator
ACCESSORY
CP40, Serial Printer
Range
25 H2O Differential Pressure, 0.06
100.0 psig Gage Pressure, 0.05

464
T
a
c
h
o
m
e
t
e
r
s
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
TM
Series
TAC3
Pocket Tachometer
Multi-Function, NIST Certified
The Series TAC3 Pocket Tachometer measures and displays rotational speed of
saw blades, grinders, engines, motors, and conveyor belts. The unique ergonomic
design provides direct line-of-sight viewing of display and target. Easy-to-read 5-digit
alphanumeric dual LCD also displays on-target, continuous measurement, laser and
low batter indication. Measurements of up to 999,999 can be viewed with the on-
screen multiplier.
The Model TAC3 is a 32 function tachometer/ratemeter, totalizer/counter, and timer.
It is programmable to read in English or Metric units. An input socket accepts remote
sensing devices and an output socket allows for pulse output to external indicating
devices. The Model TAC3 can be tripod mounted and Locked-On for accurate and
continuous operation. This tachometer also stores minimum, maximum, and last
measurement in memory.
Model TAC3-K Kit comes with tachometer, plastic case, remote contact assembly,
concave and convex contact tips, 3.9 in (10 cm) circumference contact wheel, N.I.S.T.
certification, and 5 ft (1.5 m) of reflective tape. Optional TAC3-91 Remote Optical
Sensor allows this unit to measure rps, rpm, or rph in hard to reach locations.
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: Non contact: 0.01% of reading; Contact: 0.05% of reading;
Timer: 0.2 sec.
Display: Dual LCD display (5 digit upper display / scrolling 5 digit
alphanumeric lower display).
Resolution: User selectable from 0.001 to 1 (10 above 99,999); Timer: 0.1
sec.
Max. Measuring Distance: 25 and up to 70 from perpendicular.
Power Requirements: 2 AA batteries.
Measurement Ranges
Speed Ranges
Optical*
Contact Tips*
10 cm/12 Wheel*
Linear Menu
Inches/Min*
Feet/Min*
Yards/Min*
Miles/Hour
Centimeters/Min*
Meters/Min*
Totalizer/
Counter
Timer
(Stopwatch)
Model TAC3
5 200,000 rpm
N/A
N/A
Linear Menu
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
0 999,999 counts
99 min, 59 sec,
0.9 sec
0 999,999 revolutions**
99 min, 59 sec, 0.9 sec
10 cm
1.969 78,740
0.164 6,561.7
0.055 2,187.2
0.002 74.564
5.000 200,000
0.050 2,000.0
12
6.000 144,000
0.500 12,000
0.167 4,000.0
0.006 136.36
15.240 365,760
0.153 3,657.0
* Also reads units per second and per hour.
** Also totalizes inches, feet, yards, centimeters, and meters.
M
1
[25.40]
2-1/4
[57.15]
1-19/32
[40.64]
2-13/32
[60.95]
6-5/16
[160.41]
1-31/32
[49.97]
BATTERY
COMPARTMENT
4-45/64
[119.38]
6-19/64
[160.02]
1-29/32
[48.26]
19/64
[7.62]
1-21/32
[41.91]
5/16
[7.87]
7/8
[22.35]
1/2
[12.70]
57/64
[22.72]
23/32
[18.41]
1-1/4
[31.75]
Model TAC3K
5 200,000 rpm
0.5 20,000 rpm
0.5 12,000 rpm
Model TAC3, Pocket tachometer includes 12 of reflective tape
and N.I.S.T. certification
Model TAC3-K, Pocket tachometer plus kit
ACCESSORIES
TAC2K-91, Remote optical sensor includes mounting
bracket and 8 ft (2.5 m) cable (optional 100 ft)
TAC-5, Reflective tape, 5 ft (1.5 m) roll, 1/2 (13 mm) wide
TAC3-1, Remote contact assembly for TAC3 includes 6 ft (1.8 m) cable,
convex and concave tips and 10 cm contact wheel

VALVES
page 466
Valves,
Globe
pages 468 476
Valves,
Needle
pages 476 477
Valves,
Angle Seat
pages 478 481
Valves,
Check
pages 504 507
Valves,
Butterfly
pages 508 514
Manual Gear
Operators
page 511
Valves,
Plug
page 482
Valves,
Ball
pages 483 503
Valves,
Diaphragm Pulse
page 518
Valves,
Solenoid
pages 519 521
Bulk Head
Connectors
page 519
Valves,
Shuttle
page 515
Valves,
Zone
pages 516 517
Steam Traps
page 522
Current to Pressure
Transducers
pages 523 526
Electro-Pneumatic
Controllers
page 524
Positioners
pages 527 529
Position Indicators/
Switches/Transmitters
pages 530 536
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
page 467

466
T
y
p
i
c
a
l

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
V
A
L
V
E
S
Process temperature control using pneumatic
Hi-Flow control valves.
Pneumatic Hi-Flow control valves provide excellent control with
high flow, wide rangeability and tight shutoff capabilities. The
dispensing application shown uses a Lin-E-Aire
pneumatic
actuator, operating off standard 3-15 psi control air signals, and a
Hi-Flow linear control valve that apportions steam or water to a
user process. The valve regulates cooling water or steam flow
depending on the process requirement resident in the
temperature controller program. This package can be provided
with a Precisor
rr positioner and Proximity
position transmitter
which provides an excellent process control application problem
solution.
Pump
Water or Steam
Air Supply
I/P
Overpressure
Relief Valve
Control
Valve Temperature
Sensor
Temperature
Controller
Process
Heat
Exchanger
Mark Series position indicator is utilized in valve

automation packages in harsh environments. The Mark Series
mounts onto the top of rotary valve actuators and connects to the
actuator shaft or attaches to the shaft of a linear valve for
indicating valve position. Standard with the Mark Series is visual
position indication with OPEN, CLOSED, and degree position
status. The Mark Series is available with continuous position
retransmission with a 4 to 20 mA output and up to six adjustable
position indication switches for remote indication of valve status.
Remote status transmitter is used for indication of exact valve
position and switches provide discrete indication of valve open
and closed status in the control room. The Mark Series is perfect
for this application because of the 316 SS enclosure that
withstands the sea spray environment, and the magnetic drive
mechanism that completely seals the switch cavity from the
environment.
Quick response Hi-Flow valves control water flow
in cooling process.
Proximity
Mark Series valve position indicator is

perfect for valve position indication on offshore oil
rigs.
Dependable W.E. Anderson
Hi-Flow control valves with Lin-E-

Aire
air-to-raise actuators combine to provide unsurpassed water

flow management. This retort system employs the Hi-Flow
valve because of its excellent control capabilities, which are
necessary for this application. After the cooking process, the valve
is opened slowly. Once the desired temperature has been
reached, the supply is shut off and any additional cooling is done
by use of the hand valve.
Air
Supply
Check
Valve
Retort
Hand
Valve
60 psi
Water Supply
Optional
Cooling Enable
Solenoid Valve
Position
Indicator
Actuator
Control
Valve
Local or
Remote
Electrical
Position
Indication
Control Panel
Light
Alarm
Discrete
Electrical
Continuous
Electrical
(4-20mA)
To ensure efficient utilization of cold water in HVAC systems, W.E.
Anderson
ABFV 3-way butterfly valves are called upon to

modulate flow. This common water-side economizer allows
water from the plate heat exchanger to be diverted directly to the
cooling tower if the temperature is cool enough, instead of coming
directly from the condenser on the chiller.
Water-side Economizer System includes ABFV
3-way butterfly valve for accurate control of flow.
Tower Exhauster
Fan
Cooling Tower
Chiller
Plate
Heat
Exchange
466.P.N:Layout 2 2/16/11 3:29 PM Page 1
T
e
c
h
n
c
a

I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
o
n
V
A
L
V
E
S
Terminology
Pressure Drop The difference in upstream and downstream
pressures of the fluid flowing through the valve.
Critical Flow The flow has reached the point of being choked. At
the choked condition the flow rate has hit a maximum limit and does
not increase with further increase in pressure drop across the valve.
C
v
or Valve Flow Coefficient - The number of U. S. gallons per
minute of water at 60F that will pass through the valve with a pressure
drop of 1 psi. For example, a Hi-Flow valve with a maximum C
v
of
10.75 has an effective port area in the full open position such that it
passes 10.75 GPM of water with a pressure drop of 1 psi.
Full Port The port diameter of the valve is the same diameter as the
piping connections.
Rangeability The ratio of maximum controllable flow to minimum
controllable flow of a valve. For example, a valve with a 50 to 1
rangeability and a total flow capacity of 100 GPM at full open controls
flow accurately to as low as 2 GPM.
Valve Flow Characteristic The relationship between the stem
travel or rotation of a valve, expressed in percent travel, and the fluid
flow through the valve, expressed in percent of full flow.
Control Valve Sizing
The C
v
method is an accepted way to size control valves. Basic
equations are provided as a guide to use in sizing a control valve, and
the results of the equations will only be as accurate as the information
provided of the flowing conditions. The equations are broken down into
the type of media - liquid, gas or steam, and whether or not the flow is
critical. The critical flow equations are to be used for vapor flow when
the pressure drop across the valve is greater than half of the upstream
pressure. As a general guide to avoid cavitation do not size a valve for
liquid service where the pressure drop is greater than 50% of the
upstream pressure.
Sub-Critical Flow Critical Flow
Nomenclature
C
v
= Valve flow coefficient
g = Specific gravity of liquid at flowing conditions
G = Specific gravity of gas at flowing conditions
P
1
= Upstream pressure, psia
P
2
= Downstream pressure, psia
P = Actual pressure drop (P
1
-P
2
), psi
q = Liquid volumetric flow rate, U.S. GPM
Q = Gas volumetric flow rate, SCFH
W= Steam weight (mass) flow rate, LB/HR
T= Flowing Temperature, R (460 + F)
Once the required C
v
is determined, selection of the proper size control
valve can be obtained by comparing the required C
v
to the C
v
values for
the valve. As a general rule the maximum capacity of a control valve
should be 15 to 50% above the maximum process flow, and the minimum
required C
v
must be within the available rangeability of the valve for
proper control. If only the maximum process flow rate was used to
calculate C
v
, then the percent travel of the valve should be checked and
should fall in the range of 65 to 80% of total travel.
Valves
( Liquid Cv = q
g
P
1/2
)
( Gas Cv =
Q
963
1/2
)
G x T
P(P1 + P2)
Steam Cv =
W
2.1 [P(P1 + P2)]
1/2
Gas or steam where P>
P1
2
Cv =
Q (G x T)
750 x P1
1/2
Cv =
W
1.65 x P1

468
V
a
v
e
s
,

G
o
b
e
V
A
L
V
E
S
Hi-Flow
Control Valves
Globe Valves, Ideal for Steam and Water Flow Control,
1/2 to 4 Sizes, 2-Way or 3-Way
Hi-Flow
control valves are single seated, top or cage guided globe valves -
probably the simplest, from a construction standpoint, yet most versatile
control valve in use. The Hi-Flow
valve can fit applications with a smaller size

valve since the valve has a greater flow capacity than most conventional valves
of the same size.
Coupled with the high flow capacity, the Hi-Flow
valve maintains a wide

rangeability of 50:1 to insure precise control. Heavy duty Hi-Flow
valves are
ruggedly constructed of the highest quality materials, precision machined, and
performance tested to assure years of trouble free service. Standard packing
consists of PTFE V-rings and wiper to minimize friction without leakage at high
operating pressures. Available in brass, iron, or 316 SS body, trim is 316 SS
with all welded plug construction to provide superior durability and corrosion
resistance.
FEATURES
Wide Rangeability of 50:1
Exceptional shut off and leak rate that meets ANSI/FCI 70 2 Class IV
(0.01% of Cv in the closed position)
Selectable fail safe condition with Air to Raise or Air to Lower actuators
and Push to Open or Push to Close valve bodies
Linear or equal percentage flow characteristics
Low flow options of restricted trim or needle plug
Removable and replaceable seat ring
APPLICATIONS
Flow control, mixing, or diverting service
Perfect for steam, water or compatible glycol solutions
SPECIFICATIONS
VALVE BODY
Service: Compatible liquids, gases, and steam.
Line Size: 1/2 to 2 1/2.
Body Style: 2 way or 3 way globe.
End Connections: 1/2 to 2 female NPT, 2 1/2 flanged.
Pressure Limit: Iron and bronze body: 250 psi (17.2 bar); 316 SS body:
300 psi (20.7 bar).
Wetted Materials:
Body material: Iron, bronze, or 316 SS;
Trim: 316 SS.
Packing: PTFE.
ACTUATOR
Type: Pneumatic spring/diaphragm.
Control Signal: 3 to 15 psi (0.21 to 1.0 bar) standard. Custom ranges
available.
Maximum Supply Pressure: 220, 222, and 230: 100 psi (6.89 bar).
221, 223, 231, and 233: 50 psi (3.45 bar).
Air Connection: 1/4 female NPT.
Positioners and current to pressure transducers available factory
mounted. See Series 165 for positioners and see Series 2800 and 2900
for transducers.
How to Order:
Select model number from model chart or standard product chart and
supply maximum upstream pressure, USP.
2-Way Flanged 3-Way 2-Way with positioner and current to
pressure transducer

V
a
v
e
s
,

G
o
b
e
V
A
L
V
E
S
Hi-Flow
Control Valves
2-Way Simplified Selection Guide with Standard Products
Caution: Use of an actuator supply gas other than air can create a hazardous
environment because a small amount of gas continuously vents to atmosphere.
Pipe
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
*2 1/2
Cv
100%
6.45
10.75
17.42
25.30
32.10
50.30
78.60
Body
Material
BRONZE
316SS
BRONZE
316SS
BRONZE
316SS
BRONZE
316SS
BRONZE
316SS
BRONZE
316SS
IRON
BRONZE
316SS
Max USP
psi (bar)
3-15 (.21-1.0)
250
(17.2)
300
(20.7)
250
(17.2)
250
(17.2)
285
(19.7)
300
(20.7)
166
(11.4)
250
(17.2)
166
(11.4)
300
(20.7)
98
(6.8)
245
(16.9)
250
(17.2)
98
(6.8)
245
(17.0)
300
(20.7)
65
(4.5)
168
(11.6)
250
(17.2)
65
(4.5)
168
(11.6)
300
(20.7)
31
(2.1)
88
(6.1)
175
(12.1)
31
(2.1)
88
(6.1)
175
(12.1)
105
(7.2)
105
(7.2)
105
(7.2)
A
in (mm)
19 3/4
(501.7)
19 3/4
(501.7)
19 3/4
(501.7)
20 3/8
(517.5)
19 3/4
(501.7)
20 3/8
(517.5)
20 3/16
(512.8)
20 13/16
(528.6)
20 3/16
(512.8)
20 13/16
(528.6)
20 5/16
(515.9)
20 15/16
(531.8)
25 13/32
(645.3)
20 5/16
(515.9)
20 15/16
(531.8)
25 13/32
(645.3)
20 11/16
(525.5)
21 5/16
(541.3)
25 25/32
(654.8)
20 11/16
(525.5)
21 5/16
(541.3)
25 25/32
(654.8)
20 15/16
(531.8)
21 9/16
(547.7)
26 1/32
(661.2)
20 15/16
(531.8)
21 9/16
(547.7)
26 1/32
(661.2)
26 1/4
(666.8)
26 1/4
(666.8)
26 1/4
(666.8)
C
in (mm)
7 3/4
(196.9)
7 3/4
(196.9)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
13 3/8
(339.7)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
13 3/8
(339.7)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
13 3/8
(339.7)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
13 3/8
(339.7)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
13 3/8
(339.7)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
13 3/8
(339.7)
13 3/8
(339.7)
13 3/8
(339.7)
13 3/8
(339.7)
Max. USP
psi (bar)
3-15 (.21-1.0)
250
(17.2)
300
(20.7)
250
(17.2)
250
(17.2)
300
(20.7)
300
(20.7)
192
(13.2)
250
(17.2)
192
(13.2)
300
(20.7)
115
(7.9)
250
(17.2)
250
(17.2)
115
(7.9)
300
(20.7)
300
(20.7)
80
(5.5)
235
(16.2)
250
(17.2)
80
(5.5)
235
(16.2)
300
(20.7)
44
(3.0)
140
(9.7)
250
(17.2)
44
(3.0)
140
(9.7)
272
(18.8)
190
(13.1)
190
(13.1)
190
(13.1)
B
in (mm)
18 7/16
(468.3)
18 7/16
(468.3)
18 7/16
(468.3)
19 1/8
(485.8)
18 7/16
(468.3)
19 1/8
(485.8)
18 7/8
(479.4)
19 9/16
(496.9)
18 7/8
(479.4)
19 9/16
(496.9)
19
(482.6)
19 11/16
(500.1)
23 1/8
(587.4)
19
(482.6)
19 11/16
(500.1)
23 1/8
(587.4)
19 3/8
(492.1)
20 1/16
(509.6)
23 1/2
(596.9)
19 3/8
(492.1)
201/16
(509.6)
23 1/2
(596.9)
19 5/8
(498.5)
20 5/16
(515.9)
23 3/4
(603.3)
19 5/8
(498.5)
20 5/16
(515.9)
23 3/4
(606.3)
24 7/16
(620.7)
24 7/16
(620.7)
24 7/16
(620.7)
C
in (mm)
7 3/4
(196.9)
7 3/4
(196.9)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
13 3/8
(339.7)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
13 3/8
(339.7)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
13 3/8
(339.7)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
13 3/8
(339.7)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
13 3/8
(339.7)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
13 3/8
(339.7)
13 3/8
(339.7)
13 3/8
(339.7)
13 3/8
(339.7)
Use the chart below to aid in the selection of Hi-Flow Control Valve. As long as the
maximum upstream pressure (USP) is less than, or equal to, the value listed, the model
shown can be manufactured and calibrated to your specific requirements. Specify maximum
upstream pressure, USP, when ordering.
C
C
B
A
Model
(Air-To-Open)
2000VA32-230
2000VA42-230
2001VA32-230
2001VA32-231
2001VA42-230
2001VA42-231
2002VA32-230
2002VA32-231
2002VA42-230
2002VA42-231
2003VA32-230
2003VA32-231
2003VA32-233
2003VA42-230
2003VA42-231
2003VA42-233
2004VA32-230
2004VA32-231
2004VA32-233
2004VA42-230
2004VA42-231
2004VA42-233
2005VA32-230
2005VA32-231
2005VA32-233
2005VA42-230
2005VA42-231
2005VA42-233
2006VA12-233
2006VA32-233
2006VA42-233
Model
(Air-To-Close)
2000VA32-220
2000VA42-220
2001VA32-220
2001VA32-221
2001VA42-220
2001VA42-221
2002VA32-220
2002VA32-221
2002VA42-220
2002VA42-221
2003VA32-220
2003VA32-221
2003VA32-223
2003VA42-220
2003VA42-221
2003VA42-223
2004VA32-220
2004VA32-221
2004VA32-223
2004VA42-220
2004VA42-221
2004VA42-223
2005VA32-220
2005VA32-221
2005VA32-223
2005VA42-220
2005VA42-221
2005VA42-223
2006VA12-223
2006VA32-223
2006VA42-223
* Valve has flanged connections. Max. USP (PSI) is for Linear Valves. Consult factory for optional trim.

470
V
a
v
e
s
,

G
o
b
e
V
A
L
V
E
S
Use the standard models chart to aid in the selection of the most economical Hi-Flow
3-
Way Control Valve for your application. Specify maximum upstream pressures (USPs);
Mixing: USP
U
and USP
L
; Diverting: USP
C
; based on standard 3-15 psi (.21-1.0 bar) pneumatic
control signal.
Hi-Flow
Control Valves
2-Way Stock Models, 3-Way Standard Products for Mixing or Diverting
For diverting service, add USP
U
and USP
C
to
determine the shutoff pressure. For mixing service compute: (USP
U
- USP
C
) + (USP
L
-
USP
C
) to determine the shutoff pressure.
Caution: Use of an actuator supply gas other than air can create a hazardous
environment because a small amount of gas continuously vents to atmosphere
Dimension Data
Mixing Service:
FLOW IN ports U&L
FLOW OUT port C
Diverting Service:
FLOW IN port C
FLOW OUT ports U&L
Standard Models include
LIN E AIRE

Air To Lower Actuator
port L opens on loss of Air
D
in (mm)
4 1/8
(104.8)
4 1/8
(104.8)
4
(101.6)
3 3/4
(95.3)
3 11/16
(93.7)
3 11/16
(93.7)
B
in (mm)
2 9/16
(65.1)
2 9/16
(65.1)
3
(76.2)
3 3/16
(81.0)
3 3/4
(95.3)
3 15/16
(100.0)
C
in (mm)
2 3/16
(55.6)
2 3/16
(55.6)
2 7/16
(61.9)
2 1/2
(63.5)
2 3/4
(69.9)
3 3/16
(81.0)
Pipe
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
Control Valves - Hi-Flow Series, 2-Way
Hi-Flow

Control Valves, 3-Way Simplified Selection Guide with Standard Products
F
in (mm)
7 3/4
(196.9)
7 3/4
(196.9)
7 3/4
(196.9)
7 3/4
(196.9)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
13 3/8
(339.7)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
13 3/8
(339.7)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
13 3/8
(339.7)
7 3/4
(196.9)
10 5/8
(269.9)
13 3/8
(339.7)
13 3/8
(339.7)
Body
Material
Bronze
316SS
Bronze
316SS
Bronze
316SS
Bronze
316SS
Bronze
316SS
Bronze
316SS
Iron
Bronze
316SS
Cv
100%
6.45
10.75
17.42
25.30
32.10
50.30
78.6
Pipe
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
*2 1/2
Pipe
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1
1 1/4
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2
Cv
100%
6.45
10.75
17.42
17.42
25.30
25.30
32.10
50.30
50.30
Body
Material
Bronze
Bronze
Bronze
Bronze
Bronze
Bronze
Bronze
Bronze
Bronze
Set at USP
psig (bar)
125 (8.6)
125 (8.6)
125 (8.6)
125 (8.6)
98 (6.8)
125 (8.6)
125 (8.6)
88 (6.1)
125 (8.6)
Adjustable USP
Range psig (bar)
96 200 (6.8 13.8)
81 155 (5.6 10.7)
123 166 (8.5 11.5)
71 155 (4.9 10.7)
66 98 (4.6 6.8)
121 165 (8.3 11.4)
104 137 (7.2 9.5)
68 88 (4.7 6.1)
116 145 (8.0 10.0)
USP(S)
PSI (bar)
250
(17.2)
300
(20.7)
250
(17.2)
300
(20.7)
200
(13.8)
250
(17.2)
200
(13.8)
300
(20.7)
120
(8.4)
250
(17.2)
120
(8.3)
300
(20.7)
80
(5.6)
200
(13.8)
250
(17.2)
80
(5.5)
200
(13.8)
300
(20.7)
45
(3.1)
100
(6.9)
175
(12.1)
45
(3.1)
100
(6.9)
175
(12.1)
97
(6.7)
E
in (mm)
18 1/16
(458.8)
18 1/16
(458.8)
18 1/16
(458.8)
18 1/16
(458.8)
18 5/16
(465.1)
19
(482.6)
18 5/16
(465.1)
19
(482.6)
18 3/8
(466.7)
19 1/16
(484.2)
18 3/8
(466.7)
19 1/16
(484.2)
18 5/8
(473.1)
19 5/16
(490.5)
21 3/8
(542.9)
18 5/8
(473.1)
19 5/16
(490.5)
21 3/8
(542.9)
19 1/16
(484.2)
19 3/4
(501.7)
21 13/16
(554.0)
19 1/16
(484.2)
19 3/4
(501.7)
21 12/16
(554.0)
24.52
(622.8)
*Valve has flanged connections. Max. USP (PSI) is for Linear Valves. Consult factory for optional trim.
Model
2000VA32-230-QS
2001VA32-230-QS
2002VA32-230-QS
2002VA32-231-QS
2003VA32-230-QS
2003VA32-231-QS
2004VA32-231-QS
2005VA32-231-QS
2005VA32-233-QS
Model
3000WA32-220
3000WA42-220
3001WA32-220
3001WA42-220
3002WA32-220
3002WA32-221
3002WA42-220
3002WA42-221
3003WA32-220
3003WA32-221
3003WA42-220
3003WA42-221
3004WA32-220
3004WA32-221
3004WA32-223
3004WA42-220
3004WA42-221
3004WA42-223
3005WA32-220
3005WA32-221
3005WA32-223
3005WA42-220
3005WA42-221
3005WA42-223
3006WA12-223
3006WA32-223
3006WA42-223

V
a
v
e
s
,

G
o
b
e
V
A
L
V
E
S
The Series GV1 globe valves can be conveniently paired with the Series EVA1
electric actuators, creating a low cost and compact control valve package. The
globe design allows for exceptional throttling control in a wide range of
applications, including central heating and air conditioning, water handling,
and industrial manufacturing systems. Valves are manufactured in a variety of
sizes, and are available in either two-way or three-way body styles. The forged
brass body and equal percentage flow characteristic are ideal for many flow
control systems.
FEATURES
Low leakage rate (less than 0.05% of Cv)
Equal percentage flow characteristic for excellent low flow control
Forged brass construction
Direct mounting actuator (Series EVA1) for compact control valve
package
SPECIFICATIONS
Line Size: 1 to 2.
Body Style: 2 way, push to open globe; 3 way globe.
End Connections: Female NPT.
Wetted Materials:
Body material: Brass;
Stem: 302 SS;
Disc: Brass with Nitrile gasket;
Packing: Fluon
filler with Nitrile O ring.

Flow Characteristic: Equal percentage.
Flow Leakage: Less than 0.05% of Cv factor.
Stem Connection: M8 thread.
Pipe
Size
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
Model
GV121
GV122
GV123
GV124
GV131
GV132
GV133
GV134
Type
2 Way
3 Way
Max. Diff. Pres.
Fit with EVA1- Cv
9.3
17.4
25.5
40.6
9.3
17.4
25.5
40.6
C
B
A
GV1
87 psi
(6 bar)
58 psi
(4 bar)
43 psi
(3 bar)
29 psi
(2 bar)
87 psi
(6 bar)
58 psi
(4 bar)
43 psi
(3 bar)
29 psi
(2 bar)
Dimensions
A
4 11/32 (110 mm)
4 47/64 (120 mm)
5 1/8 (130 mm)
5 23/32 (145 mm)
4 11/32 (110 mm)
4 47/64 (120 mm)
5 1/8 (130 mm)
5 23/32 (145 mm)
B
2 3/8 (60 mm)
2 39/64 (66 mm)
2 11/16 (68 mm)
2 27/32 (72 mm)
3 5/64 (78 mm)
3 15/64 (82 mm)
3 15/64 (82 mm)
3 19/32 (91 mm)
C
4 3/8 (111 mm)
4 3/8 (111 mm)
4 1/2 (114 mm)
4 31/32 (126 mm)
4 3/8 (111 mm)
4 3/8 (111 mm)
4 1/2 (114 mm)
4 31/32 (126 mm)
Model
GV121
GV122
GV123
GV124
GV131
GV132
GV133
GV134
APPLICATIONS
Mixing or diverting services with three way models
Control water flow in heating or cooling processes
HVAC zone management
Series
GV1
Globe Control Valve
Low Cost, 1 to 2 Sizes, 2-Way or 3-Way
Stroke
in (mm)
19/32
(15)
3/4
(19)
3/4
(19)
3/4
(19)
19/32
(15)
3/4
(19)
3/4
(19)
3/4
(19)

472
V
a
v
e
s
,

G
o
b
e
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
GV2
&
GV3
Globe Control Valves
Low Cost, 1 to 2-1/2 Sizes, 2-Way or 3-Way
Dimensions
The Series GV2 and GV3 globe valves can be conveniently paired with the
Series EVA2 and EVA3 electric actuators, creating a low cost and compact con-
trol valve package. The globe design allows for exceptional throttling control in
a wide range of applications, including central heating and air conditioning,
water handling, and industrial manufacturing systems. Valves are manufac-
tured in a variety of sizes, and are available in either two-way or three-way body
styles. The forged brass body and equal percentage flow characteristic are ideal
for many flow control systems. Series GV3 models incorporate a high intensity
body casting for high temperature applications, including steam service.
FEATURES
Low leakage rate (less than 0.05% of Cv)
Equal percentage flow characteristic for excellent low flow control
Forged brass construction
Direct mounting actuator (Series EVA2 and EVA3) for compact control
valve package
GV3: Higher temperature rating, capable of steam service
Control flow in heating or cooling processes
SPECIFICATIONS
Service:
GV2: Compatible liquids and gases;
GV3: Compatible liquids, gases, and steam.
Line Size: 1 to 2 1/2.
Body Style: 2 way, push to open globe; 3 way globe.
Pressure Limit: 232 psi (16 bar) WOG; GV3: 130 psi SWP (9.0 bar).
Wetted Materials:
Body material: Brass;
Stem: SS (1Cr18Ni9);
Disc: GV2: Brass with Nitrile gasket;
GV3: Brass with Fluon
gasket;
Packing: GV2: Fluon
filler with Nitrile O ring;

GV3: Fluon
filler with Fluorine O ring.

Temperature Limits: GV2: 35 to 201F (2 to 94C); GV3: 35 to 356F
(2 to 180C).
Flow Characteristic: Equal percentage.
Flow Leakage: Less than 0.05% of Cv factor.
Stem Connection: M8 thread.
C
B
A
Series GV3
Max. Diff. Pres.
A
4 11/32 (110 mm)
4 47/64 (120 mm)
5 1/8 (130 mm)
5 23/32 (145 mm)
4 11/32 (110 mm)
4 47/64 (120 mm)
5 1/8 (130 mm)
5 23/32 (145 mm)
5 1/8 (145 mm)
6 29/32 (175 mm)
B
2 31/64 (63 mm)
2 23/32 (69 mm)
2 13/16 (71 mm)
3 3/64 (77 mm)
3 9/32 (83 mm)
3 13/64 (81 mm)
3 23/64 (85 mm)
3 23/64 (85 mm)
3 51/64 (96 mm)
4 7/64 (104 mm)
C
4 17/64 (108 mm)
4 17/64 (108 mm)
4 3/8 (111 mm)
4 1/2 (114 mm)
4 25/32 (121 mm)
4 17/64 (108 mm)
4 17/64 (108 mm)
4 3/8 (111 mm)
4 1/2 (114 mm)
4 25/32 (121 mm)
Model
GV221/321
GV222/322
GV223/323
GV224/324
GV225/325
GV231/331
GV232/332
GV233/333
GV234/334
GV235/335
Fit with
EVA3-
174 psi
(12 bar)
145 psi
(10 bar)
102 psi
(7 bar)
58 psi
(4 bar)
50 psi
(3.5 bar)
174 psi
(12 bar)
145 psi
(10 bar)
102 psi
(7 bar)
58 psi
(4 bar)
50 psi
(3.5 bar)
Fit with
EVA2-
116 psi
(8 bar)
87 psi
(6 bar)
58 psi
(4 bar)
29 psi
(2 bar)
29 psi
(2 bar)
116 psi
(8 bar)
87 psi
(6 bar)
58 psi
(4 bar)
29 psi
(2 bar)
29 psi
(2 bar)
Cv
9.3
18.6
29.0
46.4
73.1
9.3
18.6
29.0
46.4
73.1
Pipe
Size
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
Model
GV321
GV322
GV323
GV324
GV325
GV331
GV332
GV333
GV334
GV335
Type
2 Way
3 Way
Series GV2
Max. Diff. Pres.
Fit with
EVA3-
203 psi
(14 bar)
160 psi
(11 bar)
116 psi
(8 bar)
72 psi
(5 bar)
50 psi
(3.5 bar)
203 psi
(14 bar)
160 psi
(11 bar)
116 psi
(8 bar)
72 psi
(5 bar)
50 psi
(3.5 bar)
Fit with
EVA2-
145 psi
(10 bar)
109 psi
(7.5 bar)
72 psi
(5 bar)
43 psi
(3 bar)
29 psi
(2 bar)
145 psi
(10 bar)
109 psi
(7.5 bar)
72 psi
(5 bar)
43 psi
(3 bar)
29 psi
(2 bar)
Cv
9.3
18.6
29.0
46.4
73.1
9.3
18.6
29.0
46.4
73.1
Pipe
Size
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
Model
GV221
GV222
GV223
GV224
GV225
GV231
GV232
GV233
GV234
GV235
Type
2 Way
3 Way
Fluon
is a registered trademark of AGC Chemicals Americas, Inc.

Stroke
in (mm)
19/32
(15)
3/4
(19)
3/4
(19)
7/8
(22)
7/8
(22)
19/32
(15)
3/4
(19)
3/4
(19)
7/8
(22)
7/8
(22)
Stroke
in (mm)
19/32
(15)
3/4
(19)
3/4
(19)
7/8
(22)
7/8
(22)
19/32
(15)
3/4
(19)
3/4
(19)
7/8
(22)
7/8
(22)

V
a
v
e
s
,

G
o
b
e
V
A
L
V
E
S
The Series EVA Electric Actuators are designed to mount directly onto the Series GV
globe valves, creating a complete, low cost, and compact control valve package. Floating or
modulating control inputs are available, and the 24 VAC synchronic motor includes a mag-
netic clutch to protect the motor in stall conditions. Actuators are ruggedly constructed
with a fire-proof ABS housing and robust aluminum bracket. Features include a visual po-
sition indicator and manual override to make this actuator an excellent choice for any size
area, large or small.
FEATURES
Manual override
Compact size
Floating control or selectable 0 10 VDC or 4 20 mA proportional control
Reversible direction on proportional models
Magnetic clutch protects motor in stall conditions
Series
EVA
Electric Actuator
Easily Installs Onto a Series GV Valve
SPECIFICATIONS
Series EVA1
Output Force: 112 lb (500 N).
Power Requirements: 24 VAC.
Power Consumption: EVA1F: 2.5 VA; EVA1M: 4.5 VA.
Cycle Time: 262 sec/in. (10.3 sec/mm).
Housing Material: Fire proof ABS plastic (UL94V 0).
Bracket Material: Aluminum.
Humidity Limit: <90%, non condensing.
Modulating Input: 0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA.
Weight: EVA1F: 1.81 lb (0.8 kg); EVA1M: 1.92 lb (0.9 kg).
Series EVA2, EVA3
Output Force: EVA2: 225 lb (1000 N); EVA3: 337 lb (1500 N).
Power Requirements: 24 VAC.
Power Consumption: EVA2F (EVA3F): 5.5 VA; EVA2M (EVA3M): 7.5 VA.
Cycle Time: EVA2F (EVA2M): 97 sec/in. (3.8 sec/mm); EVA3F (EVA3M): 164
sec/in. (6.45 sec/mm).
Housing Material: Fire proof ABS plastic (UL94V 0).
Bracket Material: Aluminum.
Humidity Limit: <90%, non condensing.
Modulating Input: 0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA.
Weight: EVA2F (EVA3F): 2.43 lb (1.1 kg); EVA2M (EVA3M): 3.31 lb (1.15 kg).
Output Force
112 lb (500 N)
112 lb (500 N)
225 lb (1000 N)
225 lb (1000 N)
337 lb (1500 N)
337 lb (1500 N)
Actuator
Action
Floating
Modulating
Floating
Modulating
Floating
Modulating
EVA1 EVA2/EVA3
3-3/16 SQ
[97]
3-25/64
[87]
7/16
[11.1]
4-3/4
[120]
4-1/32
[102.4]
4-57/64
[124.22]
3-15/16
[100]
RED/BLUE
INDICATOR
NUT
U-TYPE CONNECTOR
KNOB
POWER
CONNECT
CONNECTOR
ACTUATOR BRACKET
Model
EVA1F
EVA1M
EVA2F
EVA2M
EVA3F
EVA3M
Valve Size
1 to 2
1 to 2
1 to 2 1/2
1 to 2 1/2
1 to 2 1/2
1 to 2 1/2
EVA1 Series
EVA2 & EVA3 Series
Compatible
Valve Type
GV1
GV1
GV2 or GV3
GV2 or GV3
GV2 or GV3
GV2 or GV3

474
V
a
v
e
s
,

G
o
b
e
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series 38R Self-Acting Temperature Control Valves require no
external power sources and are ideal for regulating the temperature of
tanks, process streams and various types of industrial equipment. The
actuators are made with a rugged die-cast aluminum housing with a
fully enclosed bellow assembly and internal over-range protection.
Valves are offered in 1/2 through 6 connection sizes and 1/8
through 6 port sizes. The valve bodies are available in single-seated
direct or reverse-acting, double-seated direct or reverse-acting, and 3-
way designs with four choices of body material: bronze, cast-iron, cast-
steel, and 316 stainless steel. Actuators are available with or without
indicating dials or in Fail-Safe. Non-indicating actuators feature a
lower profile and should be implemented where space constraints may
be an issue while the indicating actuator allows the operator to verify
the process temperature and aid in temperature adjustment. Fail-Safe
actuators are designed to cause the valve to fail in the safe control
position (open in cooling application, closed in a heating application)
should some accidental damage occur to the terminal system, resulting
in loss of pressure charge. Also available with the Series 38R are a
wide range of capillaries, bulbs, and thermowells.
Please request a copy of our Valve Catalog, CT-VC, or visit our
website at www.dwyer-inst.com to see full model information and
ordering details for the 38R Series.
Self-Acting Temperature Control Valve
Require No External Power
Series
38R
SPECIFICATIONS
VALVE BODY
Service: Compatible liquids, gases, and steam.
Line Size: 1/2 to 2.
Body Style: 2 way or 3 way.
End Connections: 1/2 to 2 female NPT.
Wetted Materials: Body material: Bronze or 316 SS; Trim: 316 SS;
Packing: PTFE.
Temperature Limits: 410F (210C) @ 250 psi (17.24 bar).
ACTUATOR
Power Requirements: Fully self contained, no external power required.
Indicator: 3 1/2 dial thermometer, stainless steel case, swivel and
angle adjustable (available for Indicating Actuator only).
Housing: Die cast aluminum, epoxy powder coated blue finish.
Set Point Scale: Integral to housing.
Bellows: High pressure brass, corrosion resistant, tinplated finish.
Adjustment Screws: Brass.
Range Adjustment Spring: Cadmium plated.
Overrange Protection: 100F over upper range limit for temporary
situations
Note: See website for additional options.

V
a
v
e
s
,

G
o
b
e
V
A
L
V
E
S
38R Self-Acting Temperature Control Valve Model Chart
Example
Series
Valve
Actuator
Bulb and Capillary
Capillary Length
Thermowell
Temperature Range
38R
38R
D00VA32
D00VA32
D01VA32
D02VA32
D03VA32
D04VA32
D05VA32
R00VA32
R01VA32
R02VA32
R03VA32
R04VA32
R05VA32
D00VA42
D01VA42
D02VA42
D03VA42
D04VA42
D05VA42
R00VA42
R01VA42
R02VA42
R03VA42
R04VA42
R05VA42
300WA31
301WA31
302WA31
303WA31
304WA31
305WA31
300WA41
301WA41
302WA41
303WA41
304WA41
305WA41
1
1
2
01
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
36
XX
2
0
1
2
R09
R03
R04
R05
R06
R07
R09
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
38R DA3VA32 101362 R09, 1/2 NPT Single Seat Two Way Bronze Valve, Direct
Acting, Non Indicating Actuator, Brass Union Connection, Brass Thermowell, 1 1/4
External Connection, Range 155 to 250F (68 to 121C)
Self Acting Temperature Control Valve
1/2 NPT Single Seat Two Way Bronze Valve, Direct Acting
3/4 NPT Single Seat Two Way Bronze Valve, Direct Acting
1 NPT Single Seat Two Way Bronze Valve, Direct Acting
1 1/4 NPT Single Seat Two Way Bronze Valve, Direct Acting
1 1/2 NPT Single Seat Two Way Bronze Valve, Direct Acting
2 NPT Single Seat Two Way Bronze Valve, Direct Acting
1/2 NPT Single Seat Two Way Bronze Valve, Reverse Acting
3/4 NPT Single Seat Two Way Bronze Valve, Reverse Acting
1 NPT Single Seat Two Way Bronze Valve, Reverse Acting
1 1/4 NPT Single Seat Two Way Bronze Valve, Reverse Acting
1 1/2 NPT Single Seat Two Way Bronze Valve, Reverse Acting
2 NPT Single Seat Two Way Bronze Valve, Reverse Acting
1/2 NPT Single Seat Two Way 316SS Valve, Direct Acting
3/4 NPT Single Seat Two Way 316 SS Valve, Direct Acting
1 NPT Single Seat Two Way 316 SS Valve, Direct Acting
1 1/4 NPT Single Seat Two Way 316 SS Valve, Direct Acting
1 1/2 NPT Single Seat Two Way 316 SS Valve, Direct Acting
2 NPT Single Seat Two Way 316 SS Valve, Direct Acting
1/2 NPT Single Seat Two Way 316 SS Valve, Reverse Acting
3/4 NPT Single Seat Two Way 316 SS Valve, Reverse Acting
1 NPT Single Seat Two Way 316 SS Valve, Reverse Acting
1 1/4 NPT Single Seat Two Way 316 SS Valve, Reverse Acting
1 1/2 NPT Single Seat Two Way 316 SS Valve, Reverse Acting
2 NPT Single Seat Two Way 316 SS Valve, Reverse Acting
1/2 NPT Three Way Bronze Valve
3/4 NPT Three Way Bronze Valve
1 NPT Three Way Bronze Valve
1 1/4 NPT Three Way Bronze Valve
1 1/2 NPT Three Way Bronze Valve
2 NPT Three Way Bronze Valve
1/2 NPT Three Way 316 SS Valve
3/4 NPT Three Way 316 SS Valve
1 NPT Three Way 316 SS Valve
1 1/4 NPT Three Way 316 SS Valve
1 1/2 NPT Three Way 316 SS Valve
2 NPT Three Way 316 SS Valve
Non Indicating Actuator
Indicating Actuator
Brass Union Connection
316 SS Union Connection
Brass Adjustable Union Connection
316SS Adjustable Union Connection
Brass Plain Bulb
316 SS Plain Bulb
FEP Covered Brass Bulb
FEP Covered 316 SS Bulb
Brass Union with Stainless Steel Spiral Armor
316 SS Union with Stainless Steel Spiral Armor
Capillary Length in Inches. Example 36 is 36 length
No Thermowell
316 SS Thermowell, 1 1/4 External Connection
Brass Thermowell, 1 1/4 External Connection
30 to 115F ( 1 to 46C)
50 to 140F (10 to 60C)
75 to 165F (24 to 74C)
105 to 195F (41 to 91C)
125 to 215F (52 to 102C)
155 to 250F (68 to 121C)
200 to 280F (93 to 138C)
225 to 315F (107 to 157C)
255 to 370F (124 to 188C)
295 to 420F (146 to 216C)
310 to 440F (154 to 227C)

476
V
a
v
e
s
,

G
o
b
e
V
A
L
V
E
S
The Series HGV Hand Operated Globe Valves are an economical and functional
alternative to large actuator/control valve packages. Metal-to-metal seating ensures
excellent flow control and shut-off service. The body and bonnet are each constructed of
CF8M (316) stainless steel for superb corrosion resistance and chemical compatibility.
FEATURES
Threaded ends conform to ANSI B 2.1, BS 21, DIN 259/2999, ISO 228
Stainless steel inside screw, screwed bonnet, swivel disc integral seat, rising
stem and hand wheel
Series
HGV
Hand Operated Globe Valve
Low Cost, High Pressure Rating
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Limits: 725 psi (50.0 bar) from 20 to 200F ( 28.9 to 93.3C); 500 psi
(34.5 bar) at 300F (148.9C); 450 psi (31.0 bar) at 325F (162.8C); 100 psi (6.9
bar) at 350F (176.7C).
Wetted Materials: Body, bonnet, packing nut: CF8M (316) SS. disc, stem,
retainer ring; Gland: 316 SS; Packing: PTFE.
Other Materials:
Hand wheel: Cast iron;
Plate: Aluminum;
Wheel nut: 316 SS.
H
C
L
D
Pipe Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
D
in. [mm]
13/32
[10]
15/32
[12]
19/32
[15]
25/32
[20]
63/64
[25]
1 1/4
[32]
1 37/64
[40]
1 31/32
[50]
L
in. [mm]
2 3/64
[52]
2 3/64
[52]
2 3/64
[52]
2 3/8
[60]
2 53/64
[72]
3 5/32
[80]
3 35/64
[90]
4 11/64
[106]
H (OPEN)
in. [mm]
4 1/64
[102]
4 1/64
[102]
4 1/64
[102]
4 7/16
[113]
4 27/32
[123]
5 53/64
[148]
6 19/64
[160]
7 3/32
[180]
C
in. [mm]
2 3/8
[60]
2 3/8
[60]
2 3/8
[60]
2 3/4
[70]
2 3/4
[70]
3 5/32
[80]
3 17/32
[90]
3 15/16
[100]
Dimensions
Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
Model
HGV00
HGV01
HGV02
HGV03
HGV04
HGV05
HGV06
HGV07
Series
NVII
Needle Valve
Economical, Pressures Up to 2000 psi, Blowout-Proof Stem
Model NVII Needle Valve provides easy flow regulation in all applications, including
shut off and throttling for pressure gages and instruments. With a one piece, hot forged
brass body construction, years of maintenance-free service can be expected. The Model
NVII, with its tamper-proof design and blowout-proof stem, provides excellent
performance and reliability.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Gases and liquids compatible with wetted materials. Not rated for steam
use.
End Connection Size: 1/4 NPT.
Pressure Limit: 2000 psi (138 bar) (CWP).
Wetted Materials:
Valve body: Brass (CW617N);
Retainer, handwheel: Brass (CW614N);
O Ring: Fluoroelastomer.
Temperature Limits: 40 to 350F ( 40 to 176.7C). (Warning: freezing of the fluid
in the installation may severely damage the valve.)
Flow Coefficient: 0.31.
Weight: 0.22 lb.
Turns 1/2 1 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3
Flow Coefficient at Turns Open
NVII
Others
C
v

U
S
G
P
M

@

1

p
s
i
Turns Open
0.35
0.3
0.25
0.2
0.15
0.1
0.05
0
1-3/4 OPEN
[44.45 OPEN]
1-41/64 CLOSED
[41.67 CLOSED]
23/32
[18.26]
1-41/64
[41.67]
1/4 - 18 NPT
63/64
[25.00]
1/4-18 NPT
33/64 TYP
[13.10 TYP]
1-23/32
[43.66]
1/4-18 NPT
23/32
[18.26]
1-41/64 CLOSED
[41.67 CLOSED]
1-3/4 OPEN
[44.45 OPEN]
63/64
[25.00]
33/64 TYP
[13.10 TYP]
NVII-1B NVII-2B
NVII-1B NVII-2B
Model NVII-1B, Needle Valve (Female x Female)
Model NVII-2B, Needle Valve (Male x Female)
Cv Value
0.6
1.38
2.46
5.76
10.69
17.1
25.2
47.1

V
a
v
e
s
,

N
e
e
d
e
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
HNV
Needle Valve
For Use with Gas and Liquids, Pressures Up to 6000 psi
Series HNV Needle Valve is a barstock style needle valve that is designed for controlling
low flow rates of liquids or gases. The valve series features fine threading and large seat
area to ensure precise flow control. Wetted materials are 316 SS and PTFE making these
ideal for use with corrosives. The HNV has been tested to assure vibration and thermal
stability.
Body includes a lock pin to prevent accidental bonnet disengagement. The HNV is available
in male x male, male x female, and female x female connections from 1/8 to 1. Tee handle
is constructed of 316 SS and allows low torque operation.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Gases and liquids compatible with wetted materials.
End Connections: NPT.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS and PTFE packing.
Pressure Limits: 6000 psi (431 bar) @ 200F (93C). 4000 psi (276 bar) @ 464F
(240C).
Other Materials: Handle: 316 SS.
Options: Contact the factory for tube and BS connections, other materials of
construction, NACE certified, and round handwheel handles. HNV Needle Valve
Pipe Size
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
H MAX
CONNECTION SIZE
A
A
L
Dimensions in (mm)
Connection
1/8 F x F
1/8 M x F
1/8 M x M
1/4 F x F
1/4 M x F
1/4 M x M
A
7/8
(22.3)
63/64
(25)
L
1 31/32
(50.01)
2 11/64
(55.17)
2 3/8
(60.33)
2 3/8
(60.33)
2 9/16
(65.09)
2 49/16
(70.25)
H
2 3/8
(60.33)
2 9/16
(65.09)
Connection
3/8 F x F
3/8 M x F
3/8 M x M
1/2 F x F
1/2 M x F
1/2 M x M
A
63/64
(25)
1 17/64
(32.15)
L
2 3/8
(60.33)
2 9/16
(65.09)
2 49/64
(70.25)
2 9/16
(65.09)
2 49/64
(70.25)
2 61/64
(59.13)
H
2 9/16
(65.09)
2 49/64
(70.25)
Connection
3/4 F x F
3/4 M x F
3/4 M x M
1 F x F
1 M x F
1 M x M
A
1 1/2
(38.10)
1 25/32
(45.24)
L
2 61/64
(59.13)
3 5/32
(80.17)
3 23/64
(85.33)
3 23/64
(85.33)
4 7/64
(104.38)
4 9/64
(105.17)
H
3 23/64
(85/33)
3 3/4
(95.25)
Female X Female
Model
HNV-SSS31B
HNV-SSS32B
HNV-SSS33B
HNV-SSS34B
HNV-SSS35B
HNV-SSS36B
Model
HNV-SSS11B
HNV-SSS12B
HNV-SSS13B
HNV-SSS14B
HNV-SSS15B
HNV-SSS16B
Male X Male
Model
HNV-SSS21B
HNV-SSS22B
HNV-SSS23B
HNV-SSS24B
HNV-SSS25B
HNV-SSS26B
Female X Male
Model
TNV
PTFE Needle Valve
All PTFE and PCTFE Wetted Parts
The Model TNV PTFE Needle Valve is designed for laboratory and industrial
applications for regulating corrosive gases and liquids for high purity services. Media only
come in contact with PTFE and PCTFE. Valve spindles are made of ridged PCTFE to
minimize creeping normally associated with PTFE. The TNV is designed to be used in
pressure or non-critical vacuum applications and can be used as a shut off valve.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Gases and liquids compatible
End Connections: 3/8 female NPT.
Pressure Limits: 75 psi (517 kPa).
Wetted Materials: Body and O ring:
PTFE; Ball: Valve spindle: PCTFE.
Flow Coefficient: 0.75.
Max. Flow: Air: 300 LPM; Water: 9
LPM.
Weight: 5.6 oz (158.8 g).
3/8 NPT
CONNECTIONS
3-5/16
[84.23]
2-9/32
[58.06]
1-1/4
[31.75]
5/8
DOUBLE SIDED
FLATS
5/8 WIDE
Model TNV-1, PTFE Needle Valve (Female x Female)

478
V
a
v
e
s
,

A
n
g
e

S
e
a
t
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
SAV-BT
Angle Seat Valve - Bronze NPT
Low Cost, Compact Design, For Use with Gases and Liquids
Save space while maintaining flow rates with the compact Series SAV-BT Angle Seat
Valve. The pneumatic, externally piloted angle seat valve is operated by a single acting
actuator with a mechanical spring for failsafe operation. Select from either normally closed
(NC) or normally open (NO) configurations. Bi-directional valves (normally closed) are
designed for special applications that require flow in both directions and incorporate an anti-
waterhammer design for liquid applications flowing under the seat. Normally open valves
can also be used to prevent waterhammer on valve closure in liquid applications.
Constructed of bronze, 316 SS, and PTFE seals, the Series SAV-BT can be used in most gas,
liquid, and steam applications. Integral heat sinks dissipate heat protecting the Polyamide
actuator, ensuring longer life.
The Series SAV-BT can be mounted in any position. For added flexibility, the actuator housing
rotates 360 degrees for positioning of the pressure ports. Standard visual indicator shows
open or closed position.
SPECIFICATIONS
VALVE BODY
Wetted Materials: Valve body: Bronze; Plug and stem: AISI 316L SS; Stem O ring:
Fluoroelastomers; Seat and seal: PTFE.
Line Sizes: 1/2 to 2 NPT.
Pressure Limits: See table below.
Flow Leakage: Meets ANSI Class VI.
ACTUATOR
Type: Piston/pneumatic spring.
Pilot Connections: 1 3/4 dia. act.: 1/8 BSP; 2 1/2 dia. act.: 1/4 BSP; 3 9/16
dia. act.: 1/4 BSP.
Pilot Media: Air, water, inert gas.
Port
Connection
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
1 NPT
1 NPT
1 NPT
1 1/4 NPT
1 1/4 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
2 NPT
2 NPT
Actuator
Diameter
1 3/4
2 1/2
1 3/4
2 1/2
1 3/4
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
Port
Connection
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
1 NPT
1 NPT
1 NPT
1 1/4 NPT
1 1/4 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
2 NPT
2 NPT
Actuator
Diameter
1 3/4
2 1/2
1 3/4
2 1/2
1 3/4
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
Cv
4.7
4.7
8.8
8.8
19.6
19.6
19.6
29.4
29.4
45.5
45.5
57.8
57.8
A
2 9/16
2 9/16
2 61/64
2 61/64
3 35/64
3 35/64
3 35/64
4 11/32
4 11/32
4 47/64
4 47/64
5 29/32
5 29/32
B
5 43/64
7 9/16
6 7/64
7 51/64
6 39/64
8 23/64
8 25/32
8 55/64
9 7/32
9 1/16
9 27/64
9 49/64
10 1/8
C
4 7/8
6 47/64
4 31/32
6 15/16
6 47/64
7 19/64
7 23/32
7 39/64
4 61/64
7 51/64
8 5/32
8 5/32
8 33/64
Dimensions (in)
B
45
A
C
Port
Connection
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
1 NPT
1 NPT
1 NPT
1 1/4 NPT
1 1/4 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
2 NPT
2 NPT
Normally Closed Normally Open Bi-Directional (Normally Closed)
Max.
Line
Pres.
230
290
230
290
230
290
290
230
230
230
230
160
220
Max.
Steam
Pres.
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
Flow
Direction
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Min.
Pilot
Pres.
26
22
26
22
26
22
15
44
36
44
36
44
36
Max.
Pilot
Pres.
150
150
150
150
150
150
120
150
120
150
120
150
120
Max.
Line
Pres.
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
175
230
Max.
Steam
Pres.
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
Flow
Direction
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Min.
Pilot
Pres.
26
22
26
22
26
22
15
22
15
22
15
22
15
Max.
Pilot
Pres.
150
150
150
150
150
150
115
150
115
150
115
116
115
Max.
Line
Pres.
230/230
230/230
230/100
230/230
230/75
230/160
230/200
230/90
230/175
175/60
230/115
115/36
200/75
Max.
Steam
Pres.
130/130
130/130
130/100
130/130
130/75
130/130
130/130
130/90
130/130
130/60
130/115
115/36
130/75
Flow
Direction
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Min.
Pilot
Pres.
73
55
73
55
73
55
48
55
48
55
48
55
48
Max.
Pilot
Pres.
150
150
150
150
150
150
115
150
115
150
115
150
115
Actuator
Diameter
1 3/4
2 1/2
1 3/4
2 1/2
1 3/4
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
Line and Pilot Pressure Chart (psi)
Normally
Closed
SAV-BTA1-NC
SAV-BTA2-NC
SAV-BTB1-NC
SAV-BTB2-NC
SAV-BTC1-NC
SAV-BTC2-NC
SAV-BTC3-NC
SAV-BTD2-NC
SAV-BTD3-NC
SAV-BTE2-NC
SAV-BTE3-NC
SAV-BTF2-NC
SAV-BTF3-NC
Normally
Open
SAV-BTA1-NO
SAV-BTA2-NO
SAV-BTB1-NO
SAV-BTB2-NO
SAV-BTC1-NO
SAV-BTC2-NO
SAV-BTC3-NO
SAV-BTD2-NO
SAV-BTD3-NO
SAV-BTE2-NO
SAV-BTE3-NO
SAV-BTF2-NO
SAV-BTF3-NO
Bi-directional
(NC)
SAV-BTA1-BD
SAV-BTA2-BD
SAV-BTB1-BD
SAV-BTB2-BD
SAV-BTC1-BD
SAV-BTC2-BD
SAV-BTC3-BD
SAV-BTD2-BD
SAV-BTD3-BD
SAV-BTE2-BD
SAV-BTE3-BD
SAV-BTF2-BD
SAV-BTF3-BD
ACCESSORIES
A-538 1/8 BSP to 1/8 NPT adapter,
for 1 3/4 dia. actuators
for 2 1/2, 3 9/16 dia. actuators
For Solenoid Valve see Series PV.

V
a
v
e
s
,

A
n
g
e

S
e
a
t
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
SAV-ST
Angle Seat Valve - Stainless Steel NPT
Low Cost, Compact Design, For Use with Gases & Liquids
Save space while maintaining flow rates with the compact Series SAV-ST Angle Seat
Constructed of investment case stainless steel and PTFE seals, the Series SAV-ST can be
used in most gas, liquid, steam and corrosive applications. Integral heat sinks dissipate heat
protecting the Polyamide actuator, ensuring longer life.
The Series SAV-ST can be mounted in any position. For added flexibility, the actuator housing
SPECIFICATIONS
VALVE BODY
Wetted Materials: Valve body: AISI 316L SS; Plug and stem: AISI 316L SS; Stem
O ring: Fluoroelastomer; Seat and seal: PTFE.
Line Sizes: 1/2 to 2 NPT.
ACTUATOR
dia. act.: 1/4 BSP.
Port
Connection
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
1 NPT
1 NPT
1 1/4 NPT
1 1/4 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
2 NPT
2 NPT
Actuator
Diameter
1 3/4
2 1/2
1 3/4
2 1/2
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
Port
Connection
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
1 NPT
1 NPT
1 1/4 NPT
1 1/4 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
2 NPT
2 NPT
Actuator
Diameter
1 3/4
2 1/2
1 3/4
2 1/2
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
Cv
4.9
4.9
9.1
9.1
21.7
21.7
31.5
31.5
49.0
49.0
60.1
60.1
A
2 9/16
2 9/16
2 61/64
2 61/64
3 35/64
3 35/64
4 11/32
4 11/32
4 47/64
4 47/64
5 29/32
5 29/32
B
5 43/64
7 9/16
6 7/64
7 51/64
8 23/64
8 25/32
8 55/64
9 7/32
9 1/16
9 27/64
9 49/64
10 1/8
C
4 7/8
6 47/64
4 31/32
6 15/16
7 19/64
7 23/32
7 39/64
4 61/64
7 51/64
8 5/32
8 5/32
8 33/64
Dimensions (in)
B
45
A
C
Port
Connection
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
1 NPT
1 NPT
1 1/4 NPT
1 1/4 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
1 1/2 NPT
2 NPT
2 NPT
Max.
Line
Pres.
230
290
230
290
290
290
230
230
230
230
160
220
Max.
Steam
Pres.
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
Flow
Direction
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Min.
Pilot
Pres.
26
22
26
22
22
15
41
41
41
41
41
41
Max.
Pilot
Pres.
150
150
150
150
150
115
150
115
150
115
150
115
Max.
Line
Pres.
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
175
230
Max.
Steam
Pres.
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
Flow
Direction
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Min.
Pilot
Pres.
26
22
26
22
22
15
22
15
22
15
22
15
Max.
Pilot
Pres.
150
150
150
150
150
115
150
115
150
115
116
115
Max.
Line
Pres.
230/230
230/230
230/100
230/230
230/160
230/200
230/90
230/175
175/60
230/115
115/36
200/75
Max.
Steam
Pres.
130/130
130/130
130/100
130/130
130/130
130/130
130/90
130/130
130/60
130/115
115/36
130/75
Flow
Direction
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Min.
Pilot
Pres.
60
55
60
55
55
48
55
48
55
48
55
48
Max.
Pilot
Pres.
150
150
150
150
150
115
150
115
150
115
150
115
Actuator
Diameter
1 3/4
2 1/2
1 3/4
2 1/2
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
Normally
Closed
SAV-STA1-NC
SAV-STA2-NC
SAV-STB1-NC
SAV-STB2-NC
SAV-STC2-NC
SAV-STC3-NC
SAV-STD2-NC
SAV-STD3-NC
SAV-STE2-NC
SAV-STE3-NC
SAV-STF2-NC
SAV-STF3-NC
Normally
Open
SAV-STA1-NO
SAV-STA2-NO
SAV-STB1-NO
SAV-STB2-NO
SAV-STC2-NO
SAV-STC3-NO
SAV-STD2-NO
SAV-STD3-NO
SAV-STE2-NO
SAV-STE3-NO
SAV-STF2-NO
SAV-STF3-NO
Bi-directional
(NC)
SAV-STA1-BD
SAV-STA2-BD
SAV-STB1-BD
SAV-STB2-BD
SAV-STC2-BD
SAV-STC3-BD
SAV-STD2-BD
SAV-STD3-BD
SAV-STE2-BD
SAV-STE3-BD
SAV-STF2-BD
SAV-STF3-BD
ACCESSORIES

480
V
a
v
e
s
,

A
n
g
e

S
e
a
t
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
SAV-SF
Angle Seat Valve - Stainless Steel Flange
Save space while maintaining flow rates with the compact Series SAV-SF Angle Seat
Constructed of investment case stainless steel and PTFE seals, the Series SAV-SF can be
The Series SAV-SF can be mounted in any position. For added flexibility, the actuator housing
SPECIFICATIONS
VALVE BODY
O ring: Fluoroelastomers; Seat and seal: PTFE.
Connections: ANSI 150# flange.
ACTUATOR
dia. act.: 1/4 BSP.
Port
Connection
1/2
3/4
1
1
1 1/4
1 1/4
1 1/2
1 1/2
2
2
Actuator
Diameter
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
Port
Connection
1/2
3/4
1
1
1 1/4
1 1/4
1 1/2
1 1/2
2
2
Actuator
Diameter
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
Cv
4.9
9.1
21.7
21.7
31.5
31.5
49.0
49.0
60.1
60.1
A
5 1/2
6
6 1/2
6 1/2
7 1/4
7 1/4
8
8
9
9
B
8 19/32
9 19/64
9 27/64
9 27/32
9 59/64
10 23/64
10 1/8
10 9/16
10 53/64
11 17/64
C
6 47/64
6 15/16
7 19/64
7 23/32
7 39/64
4 61/64
7 51/64
8 5/32
8 5/32
8 33/64
Dimensions (in)
B
45
A
C
Port
Connection
1/2
3/4
1
1
1 1/4
1 1/4
1 1/2
1 1/2
2
2
Normally Closed
Normally Open Bi-Directional (Normally Closed)
Max.
Line
Pres.
290
290
290
290
230
230
230
230
160
220
Max.
Steam
Pres.
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
Flow
Direction
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Min.
Pilot
Pres.
22
22
22
15
41
41
41
41
41
41
Max.
Pilot
Pres.
150
150
150
115
150
115
150
115
150
115
Max.
Line
Pres.
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
175
230
Max.
Steam
Pres.
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
Flow
Direction
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Min.
Pilot
Pres.
22
22
22
15
22
15
22
15
22
15
Max.
Pilot
Pres.
150
150
150
115
150
115
150
115
116
115
Max.
Line
Pres.
230/230
230/230
230/160
230/200
230/90
230/175
175/60
230/115
115/36
200/75
Max.
Steam
Pres.
130/130
130/130
130/130
130/130
130/90
130/130
130/60
130/115
115/36
130/75
Flow
Direction
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Min.
Pilot
Pres.
55
55
55
48
55
48
55
48
55
48
Max.
Pilot
Pres.
150
150
150
115
150
115
150
115
150
115
Actuator
Diameter
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
Normally
Closed
SAV-SFA2-NC
SAV-SFB2-NC
SAV-SFC2-NC
SAV-SFC3-NC
SAV-SFD2-NC
SAV-SFD3-NC
SAV-SFE2-NC
SAV-SFE3-NC
SAV-SFF2-NC
SAV-SFF3-NC
Normally
Open
SAV-SFA2-NO
SAV-SFB2-NO
SAV-SFC2-NO
SAV-SFC3-NO
SAV-SFD2-NO
SAV-SFD3-NO
SAV-SFE2-NO
SAV-SFE3-NO
SAV-SFF2-NO
SAV-SFF3-NO
Bi-directional
(NC)
SAV-SFA2-BD
SAV-SFB2-BD
SAV-SFC2-BD
SAV-SFC3-BD
SAV-SFD2-BD
SAV-SFD3-BD
SAV-SFE2-BD
SAV-SFE3-BD
SAV-SFF2-BD
SAV-SFF3-BD
ACCESSORIES

V
a
v
e
s
,

A
n
g
e

S
e
a
t
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
SAV-SSC
Angle Seat Valve - SS Sanitary Clamp
Save space while maintaining flow rates with the compact Series SAV-SSC Angle
Seat Valve. The pneumatic, externally piloted angle seat valve is operated by a single acting
Constructed of investment cast stainless steel and PTFE seals, the Series SAV-SSC can be
The Series SAV-SSC can be mounted in any position. For added flexibility, the actuator hous-
ing rotates 360 degrees for positioning of the pressure ports. Standard visual indicator shows
SPECIFICATIONS
VALVE BODY
O ring: Fluoroelastomer; Seat and seal: PTFE.
Connections: Sanitary clamp to ISO 2582 (clamp and clamp gasket not included).
ACTUATOR
dia. act.: 1/4 BSP.
Port
Connection
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
1
1
1 1/4
1 1/4
1 1/2
1 1/2
2
2
Actuator
Diameter
1 3/4
2 1/2
1 3/4
2 1/2
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
Port
Connection
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
1
1
1 1/4
1 1/4
1 1/2
1 1/2
2
2
Actuator
Diameter
1 3/4
2 1/2
1 3/4
2 1/2
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
Cv
4.9
4.9
9.1
9.1
21.7
21.7
31.5
31.5
49.0
49.0
60.1
60.1
A
4 1/64
4 1/64
4 29/64
4 29/64
5 3/32
5 3/32
5 9/16
5 9/16
6 17/64
6 17/64
7 31/64
7 31/64
B
6 27/64
8 9/32
6 37/64
8 35/64
9 3/32
9 37/64
9 29/64
9 57/64
9 13/16
10 1/4
10 33/64
10 63/64
C
4 7/8
6 47/64
4 31/32
6 15/16
7 19/64
7 23/32
7 39/64
4 61/64
7 51/64
8 5/32
8 5/32
8 33/64
Dimensions (in)
B
45
A
C
Port
Connection
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
1
1
1 1/4
1 1/4
1 1/2
1 1/2
2
2
Max.
Line
Pres.
230
290
230
290
290
290
230
230
230
230
160
220
Max.
Steam
Pres.
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
Flow
Direction
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Overseat
Min.
Pilot
Pres.
26
22
26
22
22
15
41
41
41
41
41
41
Max.
Pilot
Pres.
150
150
150
150
150
115
150
115
150
115
150
115
Max.
Line
Pres.
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
175
230
Max.
Steam
Pres.
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
Flow
Direction
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Min.
Pilot
Pres.
26
22
26
22
22
15
22
15
22
15
22
15
Max.
Pilot
Pres.
150
150
150
150
150
115
150
115
150
115
116
115
Max.
Line
Pres.
230/230
230/230
230/100
230/230
230/160
230/200
230/90
230/175
175/60
230/115
115/36
200/75
Max.
Steam
Pres.
130/130
130/130
130/100
130/130
130/130
130/130
130/90
130/130
130/60
130/115
115/36
130/75
Flow
Direction
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Ovr/Undr
Min.
Pilot
Pres.
60
55
60
55
55
48
55
48
55
48
55
48
Max.
Pilot
Pres.
150
150
150
150
150
115
150
115
150
115
150
115
Actuator
Diameter
1 3/4
2 1/2
1 3/4
2 1/2
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
2 1/2
3 9/16
Normally
Closed
SAV-SSCA1-NC
SAV-SSCA2-NC
SAV-SSCB1-NC
SAV-SSCB2-NC
SAV-SSCC2-NC
SAV-SSCC3-NC
SAV-SSCD2-NC
SAV-SSCD3-NC
SAV-SSCE2-NC
SAV-SSCE3-NC
SAV-SSCF2-NC
SAV-SSCF3-NC
Normally
Open
SAV-SSCA1-NO
SAV-SSCA2-NO
SAV-SSCB1-NO
SAV-SSCB2-NO
SAV-SSCC2-NO
SAV-SSCC3-NO
SAV-SSCD2-NO
SAV-SSCD3-NO
SAV-SSCE2-NO
SAV-SSCE3-NO
SAV-SSCF2-NO
SAV-SSCF3-NO
Bi-directional
(NC)
SAV-SSCA1-BD
SAV-SSCA2-BD
SAV-SSCB1-BD
SAV-SSCB2-BD
SAV-SSCC2-BD
SAV-SSCC3-BD
SAV-SSCD2-BD
SAV-SSCD3-BD
SAV-SSCE2-BD
SAV-SSCE3-BD
SAV-SSCF2-BD
SAV-SSCF3-BD
ACCESSORIES

482
V
a
v
e
s
,

P
u
g
V
A
L
V
E
S
The Series PGV Compact Plug Valves are designed to stop forward flow of
up to 3000 psig with ease. The combination of 1/4 turn operation and low
operating torque allows for quick opening and closing providing positive shut off
to instrumentation and process systems. The PGV series comes in either
fractional tube fitting or female NPT connections. Available in either 316 stainless
steel or brass, the one-piece body makes this valve an economical choice for your
application.
SPECIFICATIONS
Body: 1 piece.
Wetted Materials:
Body: 316 stainless steel or brass;
O rings: PTFE coated fluorocarbon FKM;
Plug: PTFE coated 316 SS or PTFE coated brass.
Pressure Limits:
Stainless steel: 3000 psig (207 bar);
Brass: 3000 psig (207 bar): 2.3 mm or 4.4 mm orifice;
2000 psig (138 bar): 7.2 mm orifice.
Connections: Female NPT, fractional tube fitting.
Compact Plug Valve
One Piece Body, Low Operating Torque
Series
PGV
FLOW
OUTLET
FLOW
INLET
B
A
C
D
E
F
Connection
Type
Fractional
Tube Fitting
Female NPT
Inlet/Outlet
Size
1/8
1/4
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
Orifice
in [mm]
3/32 [2.36]
11/64 [4.37]
11/64 [4.37]
9/32 [7.19]
9/32 [7.19]
11/64 [4.37]
11/64 [4.37]
9/32 [7.19]
9/32 [7.19]
A
in [mm]
2 [50.5]
2 11/64 [55.1]
2 19/64 [58.2]
2 21/32 [67.6]
2 35/64 [64.8]
1 25/32 [45.2]
2 3/32 [53.1]
2 3/8 [60.5]
2 7/8 [73.2]
B
in [mm]
63/64 [24.9]
1 5/64 [27.4]
1 9/64 [29.0]
1 21/64 [33.8]
1 7/16 [36.6]
57/64 [22.6]
1 3/64 [26.7]
1 3/16 [30.2]
1 7/16 [36.6]
C
in [mm]
15/32 [11.7]
15/32 [11.7]
15/32 [11.7]
21/32 [16.8]
21/32 [16.8]
15/32 [11.7]
15/32 [11.7]
21/32 [16.8]
21/32 [16.8]
D
in [mm]
3/8 [9.4]
3/8 [9.4]
3/8 [9.4]
9/16 [14.2]
9/16 [14.2]
3/8 [9.4]
3/8 [9.4]
9/16 [14.2]
9/16 [14.2]
E
in [mm]
1 41/64 [41.7]
1 41/64 [41.7]
1 41/64 [41.7]
2 3/16 [55.4]
2 3/16 [55.4]
1 41/64 [41.7]
1 41/64 [41.7]
2 3/16 [55.4]
2 3/16 [55.4]
F
in [mm]
2 [50.4]
2 [50.4]
2 [50.4]
2 5/8 [66.8]
2 5/8 [66.8]
2 [50.4]
2 [50.4]
2 5/8 [66.8]
2 5/8 [66.8]
Valve
Body
Brass
316
Stainless
Steel
Connection
Type
Fractional
Tube Fitting
Female
NPT
Fractional
Tube Fitting
Female
NPT
Inlet
Size
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
1/8
1/4
1/2
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
1/8
1/4
1/2
Outlet
Size
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
1/8
1/4
1/2
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
1/8
1/4
1/2
Orifice
in (mm)
0.093 (2.3)
0.172 (4.4)
0.172 (4.4)
0.283 (7.2)
0.283 (7.2)
0.172 (4.4)
0.172 (4.4)
0.283 (7.2)
0.283 (7.2)
0.093 (2.3)
0.172 (4.4)
0.172 (4.4)
0.283 (7.2)
0.283 (7.2)
0.172 (4.4)
0.172 (4.4)
0.283 (7.2)
0.283 (7.2)
Model
PGV-BD11
PGV-BD22
PGV-BD32
PGV-BD33
PGV-BD43
PGV-BF12
PGV-BF22
PGV-BF23
PGV-BF43
PGV-SD11
PGV-SD22
PGV-SD32
PGV-SD33
PGV-SD43
PGV-SF12
PGV-SF22
PGV-SF23
PGV-SF43

V
a
v
e
s
,

B
a
V
A
L
V
E
S
The Series MSV Compact Two Way Ball Valves are the perfect choice for
directional control of fluid in instrumentation and process systems. The micro
finished ball and PTFE seats ensure quality seal and easy operation. The
straight through flow path design allows for minimal pressure drop. The valve
body comes in either brass or 316 stainless steel, offering a variety of options.
Blow out proof ball and stem provides extra durability and safety in the event
of over pressure.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Body, connector: 316 SS or brass;
Stem, ball: 316 SS;
Stem o ring, connector o ring, back up rings: Fluoroelastomer;
Ball seats: PTFE.
Compact Two Way Ball Valve
Blowout-Proof Ball & Stem
Series
MSV
F
D
C
FLOW
INLET
FLOW
OUTLET
A
B1 B2
E
Inlet/Outlet
Size
1/8
1/4
1/4
3/8
1/2
1/2
3/4
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
Orifice
in [mm]
1/8 [3.18]
1/8 [3.18]
1/4 [6.35]
1/4 [6.35]
1/4 [6.35]
7/16 [11.1]
7/16 [11.1]
1/8 [3.18]
1/8 [3.18]
1/4 [6.35]
7/16 [11.1]
A
in [mm]
2 7/32 [56.4]
2 7/32 [56.4]
2 49/64 [70.4]
2 7/8 [73.2]
3 7/64 [79.0]
3 49/64 [95.8]
3 49/64 [95.8]
2 1/64 [51.3]
2 41/64 [67.1]
3 17/64 [82.8]
3 27/64 [86.9]
B1
in [mm]
1 15/64 [31.5]
1 11/32 [34.0]
1 5/8 [41.4]
1 11/16 [42.9]
1 51/64 [45.7]
2 5/32 [54.6]
2 5/32 [54.6]
1 5/32 [29.2]
1 37/64 [40.1]
2 1/64 [51.1]
2 1/64 [51.1]
B2
in [mm]
63/64 [24.9]
1 5/64 [27.4]
1 9/64 [29.0]
1 13/64 [30.5]
1 5/16 [33.3]
1 5/8 [41]
1 5/8 [41]
7/8 [22.4]
1 1/16 [26.9]
1 1/4 [31.8]
1 13/32 [35.8]
C
in [mm]
13/32 [10.2]
13/32 [10.2]
7/16 [11.2]
7/16 [11.2]
33/64 [13]
3/4 [19.1]
3/4 [19.1]
13/32 [10.2]
7/16 [11.2]
3/4 [19.1]
3/4 [19.1]
D
in [mm]
3/8 [9.7]
3/8 [9.7]
7/16 [11.2]
7/16 [11.2]
33/64 [13]
3/4 [19.1]
3/4 [19.1]
3/8 [9.7]
7/16 [11.2]
3/4 [19.1]
3/4 [19.1]
E
in [mm]
1 17/64 [32.3]
1 17/64 [32.3]
1 23/32 [43.4]
1 11/16 [42.9]
1 23/32 [43.4]
2 13/64 [56.1]
2 13/64 [56.1]
1 17/64 [32.3]
1 23/32 [43.4]
2 13/64 [56.1]
2 13/64 [56.1]
F
in [mm]
29/32 [23.0]
15/16 [23.9]
1 1/16 [26.9]
1 1/16 [26.9]
1 1/16 [26.9]
1 1/2 [38.4]
1 1/2 [38.4]
15/16 [23.9]
1 1/2 [38.4]
1 33/64 [38.4]
1 33/64 [38.4]
Valve
Body
Brass
316
Stainless
Steel
Connection
Type
Fractional
Tube Fitting
Female
NPT
Fractional
Tube Fitting
Female
NPT
Inlet
Size
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
Outlet
Size
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
Orifice
in (mm)
0.093 (2.36)
0.125 (3.18)
0.187 (4.75)
0.250 (6.35)
0.250 (6.35)
0.437 (11.10)
0.437 (11.10)
0.125 (3.18)
0.250 (6.35)
0.250 (6.35)
0.437 (11.10)
0.093 (2.36)
0.125 (3.18)
0.187 (4.75)
0.250 (6.35)
0.25. (6.35)
0.437 (11.10)
0.437 (11.10)
0.125 (3.18)
0.250 (6.35)
0.250 (6.35)
0.437 (11.10)
Connection
Type
Fractional
Tube Fitting
Female NPT
Model
MSV-BD110
MSV-BD220
MSV-BD230
MSV-BD340
MSV-BD440
MSV-BD450
MSV-BD550
MSV-BF120
MSV-BF240
MSV-BF340
MSV-BF450
MSV-SD110
MSV-SD220
MSV-SD230
MSV-SD340
MSV-SD440
MSV-SD450
MSV-SD550
MSV-SF120
MSV-SF240
MSV-SF340
MSV-SF450

484
V
a
v
e
s
,

B
a
V
A
L
V
E
S
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Gases and liquids compatible with wetted materials. Not rated for
steam use.
End Connections: NPT, See model chart.
Pressure Limits:
MV4: 29 Hg to 200 psi ( 736 mm Hg to 13.8 bar) (CWP);
MV5: 29 Hg to 450 psi ( 736 mm Hg to 31 bar) (CWP).
Temperature Limits:
MV4: 4 to 200F ( 20 to 93.3C);
MV5: 4 to 250F ( 20 to 121C).
Wetted Materials:
Valve body: Nickel plated brass (CW617N);
Valve ball: Chrome plated brass;
O ring stem seal: Fluoroelastomer;
Ball seats: PTFE.
Series
MV
Mini Brass Ball Valve
Economical, Blowout-Proof Stem
Series MV Mini Brass Ball Valves are ideal for use in small, confined spaces, where larger valves
are inappropriate. Installation is made easy with a choice of Female x Female or Male x Female
process connections. Pure PTFE ball seats provide broad media compatibility and bubble tight
shutoff. Double seal system allows valve to be operated in both directions. All handles are nylon,
except a screwdriver type with a slotted screw. Wedge handle and screwdriver style have a blowout-
proof brass stem for maximum safety and durability.
Series MV Mini Brass Ball Valves
Pipe Size
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
Max. Pressure
200 psi (CWP)
450 psi (CWP)
Female x Female Handle Style
Lever Handle
Tee Handle
Wedge Handle
Screwdriver Slot
Cv Value
5.3
6.6
6.6
11
5.3
6.6
6.6
11
5.3
6.6
6.6
11
5.3
6.6
6.6
11
Lever Handle Tee Handle Wedge Handle Screwdriver Slot
Male x Female
Series
SMV
Mini Stainless Steel Ball Valve
Economical, Compact
The Series SMV Mini Stainless Steel Ball Valves are ideal for small, confined spaces,
where larger valves are inappropriate. The 316SS, PTFE and fluoroelastomer wetted
materials are ideal for applications with corrosive media. The handles are made of an ABS
plastic for extra durability. Installation is made easy with a choice of female x female or
male x female process connections. PTFE ball seats provide broad media compatibility and
bubble tight shutoff.
FEATURES
High working pressure
Abrasion resistant
Easy to install
Economical
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Gases and liquids compatible with wetted materials. Not rated for steam
use.
End Connections: NPT, see model chart.
Pressure Limits: 800 psi (51.1 bar), WOG.
Wetted Materials:
Valve body: CF8M;
Valve ball, insert and stem: 316SS;
Ball seat: PTFE;
O ring: Fluoroelastomer.
Pipe Size
1/8 NPT
1/4 NPT
3/8 NPT
1/2 NPT
CV Value
3
4
4
6
Max Pressure
800 psi (51.1 bar)
WOG
Female X Female Male X Female
WEDGE
HANDLE WEDGE HANDLE
FEMALE NPT
FEMALE
NPT
MALE NPT
FEMALE
NPT
1-1/16
[27]
1-17/32
[39]
1-31/32
[50]
1-31/32
[50]
1-53/64
[46]
1-53/64
[46]
NEW PRODUCT!
See website for dimensions
Model
MV4-LF1
MV4-LF2
MV4-LF3
MV4-LF4
MV4-TF1
MV4-TF2
MV4-TF3
MV4-TF4
MV5-WF1
MV5-WF2
MV5-WF3
MV5-WF4
MV5-SF1
MV5-SF2
MV5-SF3
MV5-SF4
Model
MV4-LM1
MV4-LM2
MV4-LM3
MV4-LM4
MV4-TM1
MV4-TM2
MV4-TM3
MV4-TM4
MV5-WM1
MV5-WM2
MV5-WM3
MV5-WM4
MV5-SM1
MV5-SM2
MV5-SM3
MV5-SM4
Model
SMV-WF1
SMV-WF2
SMV-WF3
SMV-WF4
Model
SMV-WM1
SMV-WM2
SMV-WM3
SMV-WM4

V
a
v
e
s
,

B
a
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
BV2MB
Two-Piece Hand Lever Brass Ball Valve
Full Port, Economical, Blowout-Proof Stem
C
A
B
D
Dimensions (inches)
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
Size
A (Ref)
1.800
2.000
2.070
2.360
2.950
3.370
3.740
4.290
5.650
6.180
B (Ref)
3.800
3.800
3.800
3.800
4.350
5.470
5.470
6.380
8.720
8.720
C (Ref)
.393
.393
.551
.748
.944
1.181
1.496
1.850
2.440
2.990
D (Ref)
1.250
1.250
1.830
1.950
2.170
2.800
3.030
3.330
4.000
4.310
SPECIFICATIONS
End Connections: 1/4 to 3 female NPT.
Pressure Limit: 1/4 to 1: 600 psi (41.4 bar), 1 1/4 to 2: 400 psi
(27.6 bar), 2 1/2 to 3: 200 psi (13.8 bar) WOG.
Wetted Materials: Body and body cap: forged brass (ASTM B283
C37700); ball and stem: brass; seat and packing: TFE.
Other Materials: Body seal: rubber; handle: plated steel; nut and
gasket: brass.
The Series BV2MB is an economical hand lever ball valve for commercial and
general industrial use. The Series BV2MB is perfect as a manual shut off valve
for hot and cold water systems. Valve body, body cap, and ball are made of
quality brass. Seats and stem packing are constructed of TFE for long lasting
service. Blowout-proof stem provides safety in the event of overpressure. Full
port design allows for maximum Cv and minimal pressure drop.
Model
BV2MB00
BV2MB01
BV2MB02
BV2MB03
BV2MB04
Model
BV2MB05
BV2MB06
BV2MB07
BV2MB08
BV2MB09
Size
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
Series
DV
Timed Automatic Drain Valve
Motorized Ball Valve with Adjustable Digital Timer
5
[127.00]
1/2, 3/4 OR 1 NPT
BOTH ENDS
4-3/4
[119.89]
3-3/4
[95.25]
SPECIFICATIONS
Body: 2 piece.
Pressure Limit: 200 psi
(13.8 bar).
Wetted Materials: Body, end cap:
Forged brass ball; Stem: Chrome
plated brass; Seat: RTFE; Stem
seal: Fluoroelastomer; Bushings:
Brass.
(2 to 74C).
Other Materials: Thrust washer:
RTFE; Fasteners: Stainless steel.
Discharge Time: 3.5 seconds
non adjustable.
Discharge Volume Cycle: 1/2:
0.92 gal @ 80 psi (valve only);
3/4: 1.64 gal @ 80 psi; 1: 2.50
gal @ 80 psi.
ACTUATOR
Electric
60 Hz, single phase.
Power Consumption: 2.5 A.
Cycle Time Adjustable: 5 min,
10 min, 15 min, 30 min, 1 hr, 2 hr,
4 hr, 8 hr, 16 hr, 24 hr.
Housing Material:
Polycarbonate.
Electrical Connection: 18
AWGX3C, 8 ft (2.4 m) power cord.
Series DV is an automatic drain systemdesigned to eliminate the need to
manually drain water and harmful sediments from your compressed air
system, thereby improving the systems performance. The unit can be used on
receivers, dryers, tanks, and drop legs for sampling and purging a wide variety
of liquids. The Series DV has a heavy-duty motor for operation under adverse
conditions and an adjustable timer to meet specific user requirements. By
design, the Series DV eliminates major drawbacks of other compressed air
draining systems. The valve is brass for corrosion resistance and it is a full port
ball valve giving maximum and unobstructed flow with no clogging. A test
button allows for the unit to be cycled at any time. It is mountable in any
position for easy plumbing and trouble free operation.
*Standard is 1/2 with 1/4 bushing.
Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
Model
DV02
DV03
DV04
Cv
7.5
7.5
16
43
58
Cv
105
160
325
475
780
Size
1/4 and 1/2*
3/4
1

486
V
a
v
e
s
,

B
a
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
TBV
True Union Ball Valve
PVC Construction, Economical, Full Port
The Series TBV True Union Ball Valves are an economical, PVC
constructed ball valve ideal for chemical and wastewater applications. The true
union design allows for easy removal from a piping system without breaking
down piping connections. The valve body can be lifted out of the line by
unscrewing two assembly nuts. Series TBV ball valves feature a double o-ring
stem seal for twice the leakage protection of valves with only a single stem seal.
All plastic construction gives this series of ball valves superior corrosion
resistance. Full port design provides maximum Cv with minimal pressure drop.
FEATURES
Ideal corrosion resistant ball valve for chemical and wastewater
applications
Easy to service
Double stem seals
Low operating torque
SPECIFICATIONS
Process Connections: Socket or female NPT.
Pressure Limits:
1/2 to 2: 240 psi (16.5 bar);
2 1/2 to 4: 150 psi (10.3 bar).
Wetted Materials: Ball, stem, end connector, body connector O ring,
seal carrier: PVC; Stem O ring, body O ring, dampener seal, end:
EPDM; Seat: HDPE.
Other Materials: Handle: PP; Union nut: PVC.
Agency Approvals: Meets NSF.
[A] TYP
[B]
TYP
[C]
[D]
TYP
A
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
4
B
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.5
1.7
2.0
2.4
C
3.3
4.3
4.9
5.6
6.6
7.8
9.1
10.6
13.8
D
2.0
2.4
2.8
3.3
4.1
4.7
5.8
7.0
7.0
Weight lb (kg)
0.4 (0.18)
0.7 (.32)
1.1 (0.5)
1.7 (0.8)
2.6 (1.2)
4.5 (2.0)
6.1 (2.8)
10.2 (4.6)
20 (9.1)
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
2 1/2
3
3
4
4
Model
TBV-1102D
TBV-1103D
TBV-1104D
TBV-1105D
TBV-1106D
TBV-1107D
TBV-1108T
TBV-1108S
TBV-1109T
TBV-1109S
TBV-1110T
TBV-1110S
Cv
7
18
32
114
203
243
292
292
441
441
476
476
Connection
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Threaded
Socket
Threaded
Socket
Threaded
Socket

V
a
v
e
s
,

B
a
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
TBV2
Industrial True Union Ball Valves
PVC or CPVC Construction, Full Port
The Series TBV2 Industrial True Union Ball Valves are an economical, PVC or
CPVC constructed ball valve ideal for chemical and wastewater applications. The true
union design permits easy removal from a piping system without breaking down piping
connections. The valve body can be easily lifted out of the line by unscrewing two assembly
nuts. A special threaded seal retainer allows for the seat to be adjusted while maintaining
downstream system pressure. Series TBV2 ball valves feature a double o-ring stem seal
for twice the leakage protection of valves with only a single stem seal. All plastic
construction gives this line of valves superior corrosion resistance. Full port design
provides maximum Cv with minimal pressure drop.
FEATURES
Ideal corrosion resistant ball valve for chemical and waste water applications
Threaded seal carrier
Easy to service
Double stem seals
Reversible PTFE seats
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Ball, stem, end connector, body, seal retainer: PVC or CPVC;
O ring: EPDM or FPM; Seat: PTFE.
Temperature Limits: PVC: 150F (43C); CPVC: 215F (93C).
Other Materials: Handle: PP; Union nut: PVC or CPVC.
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
2 1/2
3
3
4
4
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
2 1/2
3
3
4
4
Cv
7
18
32
114
203
243
292
292
441
441
476
476
7
18
32
114
203
243
292
292
441
441
476
476
Model
TBV2-1102D
TBV2-1103D
TBV2-1104D
TBV2-1105D
TBV2-1106D
TBV2-1107D
TBV2-1108T
TBV2-1108S
TBV2-1109T
TBV2-1109S
TBV2-1110T
TBV2-1110S
TBV2-1202D
TBV2-1203D
TBV2-1204D
TBV2-1205D
TBV2-1206D
TBV2-1207D
TBV2-1208T
TBV2-1208S
TBV2-1209T
TBV2-1209S
TBV2-1210T
TBV2-1210S
Body Material
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
Seal
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
[C]
[B]
TYP
[A] TYP
[D]
TYP
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
2 1/2
3
3
4
4
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
2 1/2
3
3
4
4
Cv
8
16
29
75
90
150
340
340
490
490
600
600
8
16
29
75
90
150
340
340
490
490
600
600
Model
TBV2-2102D
TBV2-2103D
TBV2-2104D
TBV2-2105D
TBV2-2106D
TBV2-2107D
TBV2-2108T
TBV2-2108S
TBV2-2109T
TBV2-2109S
TBV2-2110T
TBV2-2110S
TBV2-2202D
TBV2-2203D
TBV2-2204D
TBV2-2205D
TBV2-2206D
TBV2-2207D
TBV2-2208T
TBV2-2208S
TBV2-2209T
TBV2-2209S
TBV2-2210T
TBV2-2210S
BodyMaterial
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
Seal
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
A
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
4
B
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.5
1.7
2.0
2.4
C
3.3
4.3
4.9
5.6
6.6
7.8
9.1
10.6
13.8
D
2.0
2.4
2.8
3.3
4.1
4.7
5.8
7.0
2.0
Weight lb (kg)
0.63 (0.03)
0.81 (0.37)
1.38 (0.62)
1.75 (0.79)
2.75 (1.25)
4.66 (2.11)
6.0 (2.7)
10.5 (4.8)
21.0 (9.5)
Connection
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Threaded
Socket
Threaded
Socket
Threaded
Socket
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Threaded
Socket
Threaded
Socket
Threaded
Socket
Connection
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Threaded
Socket
Threaded
Socket
Threaded
Socket
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Threaded
Socket
Threaded
Socket
Threaded
Socket

488
V
a
v
e
s
,

B
a
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
BV2M
Two-Piece Stainless Steel Ball Valve
Full Port, 1000 psig (69 bar)
E
F
TAPPING: G
F
TAPPING: G
A
B
D
C
B
Torque
Size A B C D E F G (UNC) Cv (in-lb)
1/4 2.00 0.38 1.97 3.78 1.125 0.500 10 24 6 30
3/8 2.00 0.46 1.97 3.78 1.125 0.500 10 24 7 30
1/2 2.40 0.50 1.97 3.78 1.125 0.500 10 24 10 40
3/4 2.95 0.79 2.52 5.12 1.375 0.875 10 24 24 80
1 3.42 0.98 2.60 5.91 1.375 0.875 10 24 45 120
1 1/4 3.97 1.26 3.11 5.91 1.500 1.000 1/4 20 90 240
1 1/2 4.33 1.50 3.26 6.69 1.500 1.000 1/4 20 125 420
2 5.19 1.97 3.70 6.69 1.500 1.000 1/4 20 190 560
2 1/2 6.57 2.56 4.52 9.05 2.750 1.375 1/4 20 240 1100
3 7.60 3.15 4.92 9.05 2.750 1.375 1/4 20 425 1600
Dimensions (in)
The Series BV2 is the economical choice for high quality, stainless steel ball valves
for use in chemical, petrochemical, pulp and paper and general applications. The
Series BV2 body and endcaps are constructed of investment cast stainless steel,
while stem is 316 SS. Seats and body seals are 15% glass reinforced PTFE providing
broad media compatibility and bubble tight shutoff to 1000 psig (69 bar). Internally
loaded, blowout-proof stem provides safety in the event of overpressure. Full port
design allows for maximum Cv with minimal pressure drop. Integral actuator
mounting pads allows for ease of automation.
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Limits: 1000 psi (69 bar) WOG, 150 psi (10.3 bar) SWP.
Wetted Materials: Body, ball, end cap: CF8M SS; Stem: 316 SS; Seat,
thrust washer: RTFE; End gasket, stem packing: PTFE.
Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
Size
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
Series
2BVS
Three-Piece Stainless Steel Ball Valve
Investment Cast Stainless Steel Construction, Hand Lever, Full Port
The Series 2BVS is an economical, stainless steel, ball valve ideal for food, and
chemical applications. Three piece design allows for easy swing-out inline
maintenance and cleaning. The 2BVS Series is investment cast stainless steel,
ensuring exceptional quality and corrosion resistance. Reinforced RTFE seats
provide strength and excellent sealing up to 1000 psi. Standard ISO 5211 mounting
pad allows for easy automation. Full port design provides maximum Cv with minimal
pressure drop.
FEATURES
Ideal for food and chemical applications
Swing out 3 piece design for easy maintenance
ISO 5211 mounting pad
Full port
Self adjusting stem packing
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Limits: 1000 psi (69 bar) WOG; 125 psi (8.6 bar) SWP.
Wetted Materials: Body, ball, end cap: ASTM A351 CF8M (316 SS); Washer,
nut, Belleville washer, stem nut: 304 SS; Stem: 316 SS; Body seal, stem
seal, stem packing: TFE; Seat: RTFE; O ring: Fluoroelastometer.
B DIAMETER
BOLT CIRCLE ISO 5211
MOUNTING PAD
A
45
C THREADS
F
E
D
Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
A
.354
.354
.354
.354
.433
.433
.551
.551
B
1.42/1.65
1.42/1.65
1.42/1.65
1.42/1.65
1.65/1.97
1.65/1.97
1.97/2.76
1.97/2.76
C
.22/.28
.22/.28
.22/.28
.22/.28
.28/.35
.28/.35
.28/.35
.28/.35
D
.45
.50
.59
.79
.98
1.26
1.50
1.97
E
2.36
2.36
2.95
3.15
3.45
4.33
4.72
5.51
F
1.93
1.93
1.93
2.09
2.60
2.83
3.23
3.63
Dimensions (in)
Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
Model
2BVS3AT1000
2BVS3BT1000
2BVS3CT1000
2BVS3ET1000
2BVS3FT1000
2BVS3GT1000
2BVS3HT1000
2BVS3JT1000
Model
BV2M100
BV2M101
BV2M102
BV2M103
BV2M104
Model
BV2M105
BV2M106
BV2M107
BV2M108
BV2M109
Cv
6
9
21
37
58
93
139
232

V
a
v
e
s
,

B
a
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
BV3HL-3A
Three-Piece Sanitary Ball Valve
Hand Lever, Cavity Filled, Meets 3A Sanitary Standards
Series BV3HL-3A Sanitary Ball Valves are designed to meet 3A standards and feature
sanitary clamp ends for easy line removal. The sanitary polish is ideal for use in pharmaceutical,
food & beverage, and chemical processing systems, while the cavity filler aids to reduce
product entrapment, and the full bore design provides consistent flow characteristics. The
swing-out design of the valve allows for maintenance of the center section while leaving the
ends clamped in place. Superior leak protection is accomplished by using a live-loaded packing
system. An ISO 5211 mounting pad is provided for easy automation when combined with an
electric or pneumatic actuator.
FEATURES
Designed to meet 3A sanitary standards
Ideal sanitary ball valve for high purity applications, including food & beverage,
pharmaceutical and biotech industries
Three piece stainless steel investment cast body
15RA internal bore polish
Polished clamp end to sanitary finish
TFE cavity filler to reduce the threat of product entrapment
Dimensions
Size
(in.)
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
4
ISO
5211
F03 F04
F03 F04
F04 F05
F05 F07
F05 F07
F07
F07
F10
A
(in.)
3.50
3.98
4.49
5.51
6.14
7.76
9.02
9.49
B
(in.)
0.37
0.63
0.87
1.38
1.87
2.37
2.87
3.84
C
(in.)
2.05
2.24
2.36
3.54
4.02
5.51
6.10
7.09
D
(in.)
3.94
5.16
5.16
7.36
7.36
10.24
10.24
11.24
Cv
14
45
81
215
410
618
940
1840
Torque
(in-lb)
60
80
100
380
450
650
900
1632
Weight
lb (kg)
1.55 (0.70)
1.95 (0.88)
2.80 (1.27)
7.00 (3.18)
9.50 (4.31)
19.50 (8.85)
29.50 (13.38)
43.00 (19.50)
SPECIFICATIONS
Body: 3 piece.
End Connections: Sanitary clamp (liner meets BS 4825, part 3).
Pressure Limits: 1000 psi (69 bar) WOG.
Wetted Materials: Body, ball, end caps: CF8M SS; Stem: 316 SS; Seats, body
seal, thrust washer, packing: TFE.
Temperature Limits: 40 to 450F ( 40 to 232C) CWP. 297F (147C) steam
maximum.
Other Materials: 304 SS, vinyl.
Agency Approvals: Meets 3A.
C
D
B
A
Series
BV3HL
Three-Piece Sanitary Ball Valve
Hand Lever, Stainless Steel Construction, Cavity Filled
Series BV3HL Sanitary Ball Valves feature sanitary clamp ends for easy line removal.
The sanitary polish is ideal for use in pharmaceutical, food & beverage, and chemical processing
systems. PTFE filled cavities aid to reduce product entrapment, while the full bore design
provides consistent flow characteristics. The swing-out design of the valve allows for
maintenance of the center section while leaving the ends clamped in place. Superior leak
protection is accomplished by using a live-loaded packing system. An ISO 5211 mounting
pad is provided for easy automation when combined with an electric or pneumatic actuator.
FEATURES
Ideal sanitary ball valve for high purity applications, including food & beverage,
Three piece stainless steel investment cast body
240 grit internal polish
PTFE cavity filler to reduce the threat of product entrapment
SPECIFICATIONS
Body: 3 piece.
End Connections: Sanitary clamp (liner meets BS 4825, part 3).
Pressure Limits: 1000 psi (69 bar) WOG.
Wetted Materials: Body, ball, end caps: CF8M stainless steel; Stem: 316 SS; Stem
seal: Fluoroelastomer; Seats, body seal, thrust washer, packing: PTFE.
Temperature Limits: 40 to 450
( 40 to 232C) CWP. 297F (147C) steam maximum.
Other Materials: 304 SS, vinyl.
Dimensions
Size
(in.)
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
4
ISO
5211
F03 F04
F03 F04
F04 F05
F05 F07
F05 F07
F07
F07
F10
A
(in.)
4.33
4.68
4.88
5.55
6.37
7.76
9.02
9.49
B
(in.)
0.37
0.63
0.87
1.37
1.87
2.07
2.87
3.83
C
(in.)
2.05
2.24
2.36
3.54
5.51
5.91
6.10
7.09
D
(in.)
3.94
5.16
5.16
7.36
7.36
10.24
10.24
11.24
E
(in.)
1.42/1.65
1.42/1.65
1.65/1.97
1.97/2.76
1.97/2.76
2.76
2.76
4.02
G
(in.)
1.46
1.46
1.87
2.20
2.20
3.15
3.15
4.26
Cv
14
45
81
215
410
618
940
1840
Torque
(in-lb)
60
80
100
380
450
650
900
1632
Weight
lb (kg)
1.4 (0.64)
2.0 (0.91)
2.9 (1.3)
5.7 (2.6)
9.0 (4.1)
19.3 (8.8)
31.2 (14.2)
43.7 (19.8)
[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
4
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
4
[E] BOLT CIRCLE
[G SQ.]
Model
BV3HL02TC
BV3HL03TC
BV3HL04TC
BV3HL06TC
BV3HL07TC
BV3HL08TC
BV3HL09TC
BV3HL10TC
Model
BV3HL02TC-3A
BV3HL03TC-3A
BV3HL04TC-3A
BV3HL06TC-3A
BV3HL07TC-3A
BV3HL08TC-3A
BV3HL09TC-3A
BV3HL10TC-3A

490
V
a
v
e
s
,

B
a
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
HBV
Series HBV NI-Alloy C Ball Valve incorporates several innovative design features for
improved process performance. The ISO 5211 mounting pad facilitates direct mounting of
pneumatic and electric actuators. In combination with our high-cycle, live-loaded stem
packing system, the HBV series ball valve is an ideal choice for all your automation
requirements.
NI-Alloy C Ball Valve
Corrosion Resistant, Full Port
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Gases, steam and liquids compatible with wetted materials.
Pressure Limits: 2000 psi (137.9 bar); ASME B16.34 Class 900 (see chart).
Wetted Materials:
Valve body, end caps, ball and stem: ASTM 494 Type CW12MW;
Seat, body seal, and stem packing: TFM.
Other Materials:
Body bolt, gland washer, stem nut, space washer, and handle: 304 SS; Handle
c over: Vinyl.
Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E

[
P
S
I
]
TEMPERATURE [F]
2200
1800
1400
1000
600
200
-50
100 400 300 200 0 500
PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE
CHART
[TFM SEATS]
ISO 5211
MOUNTING PAD
45
HANDLE LOCKING
CLIP
B
C
A
Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
B
2.638
2.638
2.677
3.370
3.780
4.213
4.370
5.071
Model
HBV-M01
HBV-M02
HBV-M03
HBV-M04
HBV-M05
HBV-M06
HBV-M07
HBV-M08
CV
6
8
12
32
Hastelloy

is a registered trademark of Haynes International, Inc.
A
.433
.492
.492
.591
.787
.984
1.260
1.496
C
2.126
2.126
2.126
2.087
2.362
2.441
2.972
3.366
Size
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
CV
46
82
120
400
Model
HBV-M01
HBV-M02
HBV-M03
HBV-M04
Model
HBV-M05
HBV-M06
HBV-M07
HBV-M08
Series
SVB
Series SVB Stainless Steel V-Ball Valve is available in various degrees of V angles
allowing control valve capabilities in a quarter turn valve. SVB V port ball valves are
available with 90V and 60V notches. V-Port valves offer more consistent control than
traditional round ported ball valves, an alternative to expensive linear control valves. The
ISO 5211 mounting pad allows direct mounting of pneumatic and electric actuators.
Stainless Steel V-Ball Valve
Control Valve, ISO 5211 Mounting Pad
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Gases and liquids compatible with wetted
materials.
Wetted Materials:
Valve body and end caps: CF8M;
Ball and stem: 316 SS;
Stem seal, body seal, and stem packing: PTFE;
Seat: TFM1600.
Other Materials: Body bolt, gland, stem nut, space
washer, and handle: 304 SS; Handle cover: Vinyl.
90
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
Model
SVB-M903
SVB-M904
SVB-M905
SVB-M906
SVB-M907
SVB-M908
BALL ANGLES
TEMPERATURE
-30 0 100 200 300 400F
PSI
1200
1000
800
600
400
200
50
0
1/2-2
ISO 5211
MOUNTING PAD
PROCESS
CONNECTIONS
B
LOCKOUT
TAB
LOCKOUT
HOLE
C
A
COUNTRY OF OR G N)
45
HANDLE
STOP
60
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
Model
SVB-M603
SVB-M604
SVB-M605
SVB-M606
SVB-M607
SVB-M608
Size (NPT)
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
A
.591
.787
.984
1.260
1.496
1.969
B
.559
2.953
3.465
3.976
4.291
4.843
C
1.756
1.874
2.469
2.657
3.197
3.520
NEW PRODUCT!
Ball Angle
(Degrees)
90
90
90
90
90
90
Ball Angle
(Degrees)
60
60
60
60
60
60

V
a
v
e
s
,

B
a
V
A
L
V
E
S
The Series 3MSV Compact 3-Way Ball Valves are the perfect choice for
directional control of fluid in instrumentation and process systems. The micro
finished ball and PTFE seats ensure quality seal and easy operation. The
straight through flow path design allows for minimal pressure drop. The valve
body comes in either brass or 316 stainless steel, offering a variety of options.
Blow-out-proof ball and stem provides extra durability and safety in the event of
over pressure.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Body, connector: 316 SS or brass;
Stem, ball: 316 SS;
Stem O ring, connector O ring, back up rings: Fluoroelastomer;
Ball seats: PTFE.
Compact 3-Way Ball Valve
3-Way Blow-Out-Proof Ball & Stem
Series
3MSV
Valve
Body
Brass
316
Stainless
Steel
Connection
Type
Fractional
Tube Fitting
Female
NPT
Fractional
Tube Fitting
Female
NPT
Inlet
Size
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
Outlet
Size
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
Orifice
in (mm)
0.093 (2.36)
0.125 (3.18)
0.187 (4.75)
0.250 (6.35)
0.250 (6.35)
0.437 (11.10)
0.437 (11.10)
0.125 (3.18)
0.250 (6.35)
0.250 (6.35)
0.437 (11.10)
0.093 (2.36)
0.125 (3.18)
0.187 (4.75)
0.250 (6.35)
0.250 (6.35)
0.437 (11.10)
0.437 (11.10)
0.125 (3.18)
0.250 (6.35)
0.250 (6.35)
0.437 (11.10)
Handle Position
Right
Left
Straight
Flow Path
B C
B A
All closed
A
B
C
F
E
D
C
B1 B2
A
Model
3MSV-XD110
3MSV-XD220
3MSV-XD230
3MSV-XD340
3MSV-XD440
3MSV-XD450
3MSV-XD550
3MSV-XF120
3MSV-XF240
3MSV-XF340
3MSV-XF450
End Connection Type
Fractional Tube Fitting
Female NPT
Female NPT
Female NPT
Female NPT
Inlet Size
1/8
1/4
1/4
3/8
1/2
1/2
3/4
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
Outlet Size
1/8
1/4
1/4
3/8
1/2
1/2
3/4
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
Orifice
.093 [2.36]
.125 [3.18]
.187 [4.75]
.250 [6.35]
.250 [6.35]
.437 [11.10]
.437 [11.10]
.125 [3.18]
.250 [6.35]
.250 [6.35]
.437 [11.10]
A in [mm]
2.49 [63.25]
2.68 [68.07]
3.26 [82.80]
3.38 [85.85]
3.60 [91.44]
4.30 [109.22]
4.30 [109.22]
2.30 [58.42]
3.16 [80.26]
4.03 [102.36]
4.03 [102.36]
B1 in [mm]
1.24 [31.50]
1.34 [34.04]
1.63 [41.40]
1.69 [42.93]
1.80 [45.72]
2.15 [54.61]
2.15 [54.61]
1.15 [29.21]
1.58 [40.13]
2.01 [51.05]
2.01 [51.05]
B2 in [mm]
1.24 [31.50]
1.34 [34.04]
1.63 [41.40]
1.69 [42.93]
1.80 [45.72]
2.15 [54.61]
2.15 [54.61]
1.15 [29.21]
1.58 [40.13]
2.01 [51.05]
2.01 [51.05]
C in [mm]
1.42 [36.07]
1.52 [38.61]
1.82 [46.23]
1.88 [47.75]
1.99 [50.55]
2.54 [64.52]
2.54 [64.52]
1.33 [33.78]
1.77 [44.96]
2.41 [61.21]
2.41 [61.21]
D in [mm]
.38 [9.65]
.38 [9.65]
.44 [11.18]
.44 [11.18]
.44 [11.18]
.75 [19.05]
.75 [19.05]
.38 [9.65]
.44 [11.18]
.75 [19.05]
.75 [19.05]
E in [mm]
1.27 [32.26]
1.27 [32.26]
1.71 [43.43]
1.71 [43.43]
1.71 [43.43]
2.21 [56.13]
2.21 [56.13]
1.27 [32.26]
1.71 [43.43]
2.21 [56.13]
2.21 [56.13]
F in [mm]
.94 [23.88]
.94 [23.88]
1.06 [26.92]
1.06 [26.92]
1.06 [26.92]
1.51 [38.35]
1.51 [38.35]
.94 [23.88]
1.06 [26.92]
1.51 [38.35]
1.51 [38.35]
DIMENSIONS (IN [MM])
Model
3MSV-BD110
3MSV-BD220
3MSV-BD230
3MSV-BD340
3MSV-BD440
3MSV-BD450
3MSV-BD550
3MSV-BF120
3MSV-BF240
3MSV-BF340
3MSV-BF450
3MSV-SD110
3MSV-SD220
3MSV-SD230
3MSV-SD340
3MSV-SD440
3MSV-SD450
3MSV-SD550
3MSV-SF120
3MSV-SF240
3MSV-SF340
3MSV-SF450

492
V
a
v
e
s
,

B
a
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
ABV
Automated Two-Piece Brass Ball Valve
Electric and Pneumatic Actuators
Series ABV incorporates a full port brass ball valve for great flow rates with minimal
pressure drop. The valve features a blowout proof stem for added safety, reinforced PTFE
seats and seals for longer life, and a chrome/nickel plated ball for better performance.
Actuators are direct mounted creating a compact assembly for tight spaces. Double o-ring
stem seals assure leak free operation.
The ABV Series is an economical automated valve package with either an electric or pneumatic
actuator. Electric actuated models are weatherproof, NEMA 4, powered by standard 115
VAC supply, and are available in either two-position or proportional control. Two-position
actuators use the 115 VAC input to drive the valve open or closed, while the modulating
actuator accepts a 4 to 20 mA input for infinite valve positioning. Actuator features thermal
overload protection and a permanently lubricated gear train.
The pneumatic double acting actuator uses an air supply to drive the valve open and closed.
The actuator has two supply ports with one driving the valve open and the other driving the
valve closed. Spring return pneumatic actuator uses the air supply to open the valve and
internally loaded springs return the valve to the closed position. Also available is the SV3
solenoid valve to electrically switch the air supply pressure between the air supply ports for
opening and closing the valve. Actuators are constructed of anodized and epoxy coated
aluminum for years of corrosion free service.
FEATURES
Full port brass ball valve
Direct mount actuators for compact assembly
Electric actuator that is rated NEMA 4 and is available in two position or modulating
Pneumatic double acting or spring return rack and pinion actuator
A 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4
B 6.130 6.130 6.130 6.199 6.570 6.700 8.290 8.620 9.180 12.260 13.060
C 4.000 4.000 4.000 4.000 4.000 4.000 4.220 4.220 4.220 8.500 8.500
D 2.640 2.640 2.640 2.980 3.350 3.660 4.130 4.820 6.500 7.400 8.590
E 5.630 5.630 5.630 5.630 5.630 5.630 5.630 6.880 6.880 7.000 7.000
F 2.310 2.310 2.310 2.310 2.310 2.310 2.430 2.430 2.430 3.130 3.130
C
B
A D
E
F
Electric (inches)
SPECIFICATION
Body: 2 piece.
Pressure Limit: 600 psi (41 bar) WOG,
100 psi (6.9 bar) SWP.
Wetted Materials: Body, end cap, stem:
Brass; Ball: Chrome/nickel plated brass;
Seat, stem seal: PTFE.
Other Materials: Body seal, body
O ring, stem O ring: Fluoroelastomer.
ACTUATORS
Electric
Power Requirements: 115 VAC, 50/60
HZ, single phase. Optional 220 VAC, 24
VAC, 12 VDC, and 24 VDC.
Power Consumption (Locked Rotor
Current): Two position: U11: 0.55A; U12,
U13, U14: 0.75A; U15: 1.1A; Modulating:
V12, V13, V14: 0.75A; V15: 1.1A.
Cycle Time (per 90): Two position:
U11: 2.5 sec.; U12, U13: 5 sec.; U14: 10
sec.; U15: 15 sec. Modulating: V12, V13:
10 sec.; V13: 20 sec.; V15: 30 sec.
Duty Cycle: Two position: U11: 75%;
U12, U13, U14, U15: 25%. Modulating:
V12, V13, V14, V15: 75%.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4. Optional
NEMA 7.
Housing Material: Aluminum with
thermal bonding polyester powder finish.
Temperature Limit: 0 to 150F
( 17 to 65C).
Electrical Connection: 1/2 female NPT.
Modulating Input: 4 to 20 mA.
Standard Features: Manual override
and position indicator except modulating
units.
Pneumatic DA and SR Series
Type: DA Series is double acting and SR
Series is spring return (rack and pinion).
Normal Supply Pressure: 80 psi
(5.5 bar).
Maximum Supply Pressure: 130 psig
(9.0 bar).
Air Connections: DA/SR1 to 5: 1/8
female NPT, all other sizes: 1/4 female
NPT.
Air Consumption (per stroke):
DA1: 2.32 cu. in.; DA2, SR2: 9.34 cu. in.;
DA3, SR3: 17.21 cu. in.; DA5, SR5:
39.54 cu. in.; SR6: 54.37 cu. in.
Cycle Time (per 90): DA1: .03 sec.;
DA2: .05 sec.; DA3: .06 sec.; DA5: .18
sec.; SR2: .09 sec.; SR3: .13 sec.; SR5:
.28 sec.; SR6: .39 sec.
Housing Material: Anodized aluminum
body and epoxy coated aluminum end
caps.
( 20 to 85C).
Accessory Mounting: NAMUR
standard.
Standard Features: Position indicator.
Pneumatic Double Acting (inches)
A
B
C
D
E
1/4
4.200
1.780
2.638
4.257
3/8
4.200
1.780
2.638
4.257
1/2
4.200
1.780
2.638
4.257
3/4
4.269
1.780
2.980
4.527
1
4.644
1.780
3.350
4.527
1-1/4
4.770
1.780
3.657
4.527
1-1/2
6.226
2.880
4.126
6.585
2
6.558
2.880
4.805
6.585
2-1/2
7.552
3.169
6.496
7.717
3
7.986
3.169
7.402
7.717
4
9.801
4.178
8.856
9.842
Pneumatic Spring Return (inches)
A
B
C
D
E
1/4
5.060
2.880
2.638
6.585
3/8
5.060
2.880
2.638
6.585
1/2
5.060
2.880
2.638
6.585
3/4
5.129
2.880
2.980
6.585
1
5.504
2.880
3.350
6.585
1-1/4
5.630
2.880
3.657
6.585
1-1/2
6.666
3.175
4.126
7.788
2
6.998
3.175
4.805
7.788
2-1/2
8.532
4.173
6.496
9.843
3
8.996
4.173
7.402
9.843
4
10.315
5.249
8.858
11.693

E
C
B
A
D
Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
4
Cv
6.3
7.0
19.0
19.0
34.5
50.2
268.4
309.3
629.5
944.5
1493.0
Note: All spring return actuators are factory standard as spring (fail) close.
Double Acting
Pneumatic
Two Position
Electric
Modulating
Electric
OPTIONS Spring Return
Pneumatic
Model
ABV1DA100
ABV1DA101
ABV1DA102
ABV1DA103
ABV1DA104
ABV1DA105
ABV1DA206
ABV1DA307
ABV1DA308
ABV1DA309
ABV1DA510
Model
ABV1SR200
ABV1SR201
ABV1SR202
ABV1SR203
ABV1SR204
ABV1SR205
ABV1SR306
ABV1SR307
ABV1SR508
ABV1SR509
ABV1SR610
Optional Electric Actuator Supply
Voltages
Contact factory for model number change
Solenoid Valve See Model SV3.
Model
ABV1U1100
ABV1U1101
ABV1U1102
ABV1U1103
ABV1U1104
ABV1U1105
ABV1U1206
ABV1U1207
ABV1U1308
ABV1U1409
ABV1U1510
Model
ABV1V1200
ABV1V1201
ABV1V1202
ABV1V1203
ABV1V1204
ABV1V1205
ABV1V1206
ABV1V1207
ABV1V1308
ABV1V1409
ABV1V1510
Explosion Proof Electric Actuators
-add -EX to model number

V
a
v
e
s
,

B
a
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
PBV
Automated Ball Valve Two-Way Plastic
The Series PBV is ideal for services in industrial, chemical, turf and irrigation, and pool
and spa applications, as well as for use with potable water. The valve features a shear-proof
stem designed to prevent leakage in the event of damage, reinforced TFE seats and EPDM
seals for longer life, and an all-plastic construction (PVC or CPVC) for heavyweight durability
at a lightweight cost. Valves also come standard with selectable NPT or socket process
connections.
The PBV is an economical automated valve package with either an electric or pneumatic
actuator. Electrically actuated models are weatherproof, NEMA 4, powered by standard 115
actuators use the 115 VAC input to drive each of the valve ports open or closed, while the
modulating actuator accepts a 4 to 20 mA input for infinite valve positioning. Actuator features
include thermal overload protection to withstand stall conditions, visual position indication
and a permanently lubricated gear train.
The pneumatic double acting actuator uses an air supply to drive each of the actuator ports.
Spring return pneumatic actuators use the air supply to drive the valve stem one direction,
and internally loaded springs return the valve to its original position. Also available is the
SV3 solenoid valve to electrically switch the supply pressure between the air supply ports.
Actuators are constructed of anodized aluminum and are epoxy coated for years of corrosion
free service.
PVC Body CPVC Body
0
50
100
150
200
250
62 92 122 152 182 212
73 140
32
1/2 to 2
2 to 4
232
40
WORKING TEMPERATURE (F)
W
O
R
K
I
N
G
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
(
p
s
i
)
PRESSURE - TEMPERATURE RATINGS
SERIES PBV
SPECIFICATIONS
Body: 2 way.
End Connections: Female NPT or
socket (field selectable).
Pressure Limit: 1/2 to 2: 232 psi
(16.0 bar) @ 73F (23C); 2 1/2 to 4:
150 psi (10.3 bar) @ 73F (23C) WOG.
Vacuum: 29 Hg.
Wetted Materials: Body, end
connectors: PVC or CPVC; Ball, stem:
PVC or CPVC; Seat: TFE; Stem seal:
EPDM.
(0 to 60C).
Other Materials: Stem bearing:
Polypropylene (1 1/4 and up).
ACTUATORS
Electric
Hz, single phase. Optional 220 VAC, 24
Power Consumption: (Locked rotor
current): Two position: 1/2 to 1 1/2:
.55A, 2 to 4: 0.75A. Modulating: 1/2 to
2: 0.75A, 2 1/2: 1.1A, 3 and 4: 0.75A.
Cycle Time: (per 90): Two position:
1/2 to 1 1/2: 2.5 sec., 2 and 2 1/2: 5
sec., 3 and 4: 15 sec. Modulating: 1/2
to 2 1/2: 5 sec., 3 and 4: 15 sec.
Duty Cycle: Two position: 1/2 to 1 1/2:
75%, 2 to 4: 25%. Modulating: 75%.
NEMA 7 (Class 1, Div. II groups A, B, C,
D).
thermal bonding polyester powder
finish.
( 18 to 65C).
and visual position indicator except
modulating units.
Type: DA series is double acting and
SR series is spring return (rack and
pinion).
(5.5 bar).
(8 bar).
NPT.
Air Consumption: (per stroke) DA1:
2.32 cu. in.; DA2: 9.34 cu. in.; DA3:
17.21 cu. in.; DA4: 20.5 cu. in.; SR2:
9.34 cu. in.; SR3: 17.21 cu. in.; SR6:
54.34 cu. in.; SR7: 85.43 cu. in.
Cycle Time: (per 90) DA1: .03 sec.;
DA2: .04 sec.; DA3: .08 sec.; DA4: .12
.46 sec.; SR7: .83 sec.
caps.
( 20 to 82C).
standard.
Standard Features: Visual position
indicator.
Double Acting Pneumatic Spring Return Pneumatic Two Position Electric Modulating Electric
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
4
CV
25
51
97
204
285
540
712
1294
2629
Series PBV Automated 2-Way Plastic Ball Valves - PVC
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
4
CV
25
51
97
204
285
540
712
1294
2629
*Please see website for dimensional drawings
OPTIONS
Series PBV Automated 2-Way Plastic Ball Valves - CPVC
Note: All spring return actuators are factory standard as spring (fail) close. For spring (fail) open valves, add suffix -FO to the model number.
Optional Electric Actuator Supply Voltages
Solenoid Valve - See Model SV3.
Model
PBVPDA102
PBVPDA103
PBVPDA104
PBVPDA105
PBVPDA206
PBVPDA207
PBVPDA308
PBVPDA309
PBVPDA410
Model
PBVPSR202
PBVPSR203
PBVPSR204
PBVPSR205
PBVPSR306
PBVPSR307
PBVPSR608
PBVPSR609
PBVPSR710
Model
PBVPU1102
PBVPU1103
PBVPU1104
PBVPU1105
PBVPU1106
PBVPU1207
PBVPU1308
PBVPU1509
PBVPU1510
Model
PBVPV1202
PBVPV1203
PBVPV1204
PBVPV1205
PBVPV1206
PBVPV1207
PBVPV1308
PBVPV1509
PBVPV1510
Model
PBVCDA102
PBVCDA103
PBVCDA104
PBVCDA105
PBVCDA206
PBVCDA207
PBVCDA308
PBVCDA309
PBVCDA410
Model
PBVCSR202
PBVCSR203
PBVCSR204
PBVCSR205
PBVCSR306
PBVCSR307
PBVCSR608
PBVCSR609
PBVCSR710
Model
PBVCU1102
PBVCU1103
PBVCU1104
PBVCU1105
PBVCU1106
PBVCU1207
PBVCU1308
PBVCU1509
PBVCU1510
Model
PBVCV1202
PBVCV1203
PBVCV1204
PBVCV1205
PBVCV1206
PBVCV1207
PBVCV1308
PBVCV1509
PBVCV1510

494
V
a
v
e
s
,

B
a
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
BV2
Automated Two-Piece Stainless Steel Ball Valve
BV2 Series Automated Ball Valves:
BV2B Series is a modulating electric actuator that is rated
NEMA 4X
BV2L Series is a low cost electric actuator that is rated NEMA
2 and is available in 120 VAC or 24 VAC/DC power supply with
or without spring return
BV2F Series is a pneumatic double acting rack and pinion
actuator
BV2J Series is a pneumatic spring return rack and pinion
actuator
BV2C Series is a pneumatic spring return rack and pinion
actuator that is specifically for adverse environments and
corrosive process materials
The Series BV2B incorporates a weatherproof, NEMA 4X, electric
actuator powered by standard 115 VAC supply. The BV2B provides an
economical weatherproof automated valve package. The modulating
actuator accepts a 4 to 20 mA input for infinite valve positioning.
Actuator features a single phase capacitor run motor with overload
protection and a permanently lubricated gear train.
The Series BV2L is a low cost electric actuator combined with our
durable two-piece stainless steel ball valve to make a compact, low cost,
automated valve package. Electric actuators are available in either 24
VAC/DC or 120 VAC supply voltage. Spring return models return the
valve to its failsafe position upon loss of power and are factory supplied
to return to the closed position upon failure. The BV2L is an ideal valve
package for HVAC applications and OEMs such as boiler
manufacturers.
The Series BV2F is pneumatic double acting, rack and pinion
actuated. The double acting actuator uses a pneumatic supply to drive
the valve open and closed. The actuator has two supply ports with one
driving the valve open and the other driving the valve closed. Available
is a factory installed solenoid valve to electrically switch the air supply
pressure between the air supply ports for opening and closing the
valve. Actuators are constructed of anodized and polyurethane coated
The Series BV2J is the spring return version of the BV2F. The
actuator uses the air supply to open the valve and internally loaded
springs return the valve to the closed position.
The Series BV2C is designed to withstand the toughest
environments. Incorporated in the BV2C is our two-piece stainless
steel ball valve coupled with a pneumatic spring return rack and pinion
actuator. The actuator body is constructed of glass-filled polyester with
303 SS shaft, polyarilamide pistons, cylinder guides, and racks to
provide optimum protection from adverse environments and corrosive
process materials. All mounting hardware and couplings are
constructed of 316 SS. This series is ideal for pharmaceutical,
chemical, food and dairy, or pulp and paper industries where metal
actuators would not survive.

V
a
v
e
s
,

B
a
V
A
L
V
E
S
SPECIFICATIONS
Body: 2 piece.
Pressure Limit: 1000 psi (69 bar) WOG, 150 psi (10.3 bar) SWP.
Wetted Materials:
Body, ball, end cap: CF8M SS (316 SS);
Stem: 316 SS;
Seat, thrust washer: RTFE;
End gasket, stem packing: PTFE.
Electric L Series
Power Requirements: L9, LQ: 120 VAC 10% 50/60 Hz; L1, L7, LR, LS, LT: 24
VAC 20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10%.
Power Consumption: LS: 2 W, LT: 2.5 W, L1: 3 W, L7, LR: 5W, LQ: 5.5 W, L9: 6
W.
Cycle Time (per 90): LQ, LR: Motor <40 to 75 sec., Spring Return <25 sec. (<60
sec. under 4F ( 20C)); L9, L7: Motor 150 sec., Spring Return < 20 sec.; LS: 110
sec. Maximum; LT: 150 sec. Maximum; L1: 140 sec. Maximum.
Duty Rating: Continuous.
Temperature Limits: 22 to 122 F ( 30 to 50 C).
Electrical Connection: 3 ft, 18 GA cable and 1/2 conduit connector (except LS).
Weight: LS: 1.2 lb (.55 kg), LT: 2.8 lb (1.3 kg), LR: 3.1 lb (1.4 kg),
LQ: 3.4 lb (1.54 kg), L1: 4.0 lb (1.8 kg), L7: 6.0 lb (2.7 kg), L9: 6.9 lb (3.1 kg).
Approvals: UL 873, CE (except L1), CSA.
Features: Position indicator.
Pneumatic F and J Series
Type: F Series is double acting and J Series spring return (rack and pinion).
Normal Supply Pressure: 80 psi (5.5 bar).
Maximum Supply Pressure: 125 psig (8.6 bar).
Air Connections: 1/4 female NPT.
Air Consumption (per stroke): F1, J1: 9.6 cu. in.; F2, J2: 11.4 cu. in.; F3, J3: 27.5
cu. in.; J5: 55.5cu. in.
Cycle Time (per 90): F: 1 sec., J: 2 sec.
Housing Material: Anodized aluminum body and polyurethane coated aluminum
end caps.
Accessory Mounting: NAMUR standard.
Weight: F1, J1: 2.0 lb (.91 kg); F2, J2: 4.0 lb (1.81 kg); F3, J3: 7.5 lb (3.4 kg), J5:
13.2 lb (6.0 kg).
Pneumatic C Series
Type: Spring return (rack and pinion).
Normal Supply Pressure: 80 psi (5.5 bar) [Can use air, water, or any other non
aggressive fluid].
Air Consumption (per stroke): C1: 4.58 cu. in., C2: 9.15 cu. in., C3: 21.4 cu. in.
Cycle Time (per 90): Open/closed: C1: 0.15/0.30 sec., C2: 0.20/0.40 sec, C3:
0.60/1.10 sec.
Housing Material: Glass filled polyester body and endcaps.
Shaft: 303 SS with double Buna N O ring seal. Pistons, guides, and racks: Molded
Polyarilamide resin.
Accessory Mounting: NAMUR standard.
Weight: C1: 1.5 lb (.68 kg), C2: 3.0 lb (1.36 kg), C3: 6.0 lb (2.72 kg).
BV2 - L Actuators
All spring return actuators are factory standard as spring (fail) close. For spring (fail) open valves add suffix FO to the model number.
BV2 - F, J, C, and B Actuators
Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
Cv
6
7
10
24
45
6
7
10
24
45
6
7
10
24
45
90
Model
BV2LQ00
BV2LQ01
BV2L902
BV2L903
BV2L904
BV2LR00
BV2LR01
BV2L702
BV2L703
BV2L704
BV2LS00
BV2LS01
BV2LT02
BV2LT03
BV2LT04
BV2L105
Supply
Voltage
120 VAC
120 VAC
120 VAC
120 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
Cv
6
7
10
24
45
90
125
190
Double Acting
Pneumatic
F Series
Spring Return
Pneumatic
J Series
Spring Return
Pneumatic
C Series
Modulating Electric
B Series
OPTIONS
Factory Mounted Solenoid Valve (Pneumatic Actuators) - See Model SV3
Spring
Return
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Model
BV2F100
BV2F101
BV2F102
BV2F103
BV2F104
BV2F205
BV2F306
BV2F307
Model
BV2J100
BV2J101
BV2J102
BV2J203
BV2J204
BV2J305
BV2J506
BV2J507
Model
BV2C100
BV2C101
BV2C102
BV2C203
BV2C204
BV2C205
BV2C306
BV2C307
Model
BV2BA00
BV2BA01
BV2BA02
BV2BA03
BV2BA04
BV2BA05
BV2BA06
BV2BA07

496
V
a
v
e
s
,

B
a
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
BV3
Automated Ball Valve Three-Piece SS NPT
BV3 Series Automated Ball Valves
Ideal for food or chemical processing
3-piece stainless steel investment cast body
Internal entry blow-out stem
100% factory hydro-tested
Polished stem for high cycling
1000 WOG PSI, 125 psi steam
Series BV3 incorporates a full port three piece stainless steel ball valve for great flow rates
with minimal pressure drop. The valve features a blowout proof stem for added safety, rein-
forced PTFE seats and seals for longer life, and a 316SS (ASTM A351 GR CF8M) ball for
better performance. Actuators are direct mounted creating a compact assembly for tight
spaces. Double o-ring stem seals assure leak free operation.
The BV3 Series is an economical automated valve package with either an electric or pneu-
matic actuator. Electrically actuated models are weatherproof, NEMA 4, powered by stan-
dard 115 VAC supply, and are available in either two-position or proportional control. Two-
position actuators use the 115 VAC input to drive the valve open or closed, while the modu-
lating actuator accepts a 4 to 20 mA input for infinite valve positioning. Actuator features
thermal overload protection and a permanently lubricated gear train.
valve closed. Spring return pneumatic actuators use the air supply to open the valve and
opening and closing the valve. Actuators are constructed of anodized and epoxy coated alu-
minum for years of corrosion free service.
Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
Cv
10
10
18
40
70
120
210
340
400
675
Double Acting
Pneumatic
Spring Return
Pneumatic
Two Position
Electric
Modulating
Electric
CLEARANCE REQUIRED FOR COVER REMOVAL: 3.000
E
F
C
B
A D
C
B
A D
E
Pneumatic Double Acting
A
B
C
D
E
ACT.
1/4
4.524
1.770
2.362
4.330
DA1
3/8
4.524
1.770
2.362
4.330
DA1
1/2
4.524
1.770
2.952
4.330
DA1
3/4
4.682
1.770
3.149
4.330
DA1
1
5.687
2.800
3.543
6.810
DA2
1 1/4
6.103
2.800
4.330
6.810
DA2
1 1/2
6.497
2.800
4.724
6.810
DA3
2
7.281
3.170
5.511
7.720
DA3
2 1/2
8.860
4.170
6.540
9.840
DA5
3
9.260
4.170
7.400
9.840
DA5
Pneumatic Spring Return
A
B
C
D
E
ACT.
1/4
5.394
2.800
2.362
6.810
SR2
3/8
5.394
2.800
2.362
6.810
SR2
1/2
5.394
2.800
2.952
6.810
SR2
3/4
5.552
2.800
3.149
6.810
SR2
1
6.297
3.170
3.543
7.720
SR3
1 1/4
6.533
3.170
4.330
7.720
SR3
1 1/2
6.927
3.170
4.724
9.550
SR4
2
8.271
4.170
5.511
9.550
SR5
2 1/2
10.190
5.390
6.540
13.580
SR7
3
10.590
5.390
7.400
13.580
SR7
Electric
A
B
C
D
E
F
ACT.
1/4
6.274
4.000
2.362
5.600
2.300
U11,
V12
3/8
6.274
4.000
2.362
5.600
2.300
U11,
V12
1/2
6.274
4.000
2.592
5.600
2.300
U11,
V12
3/4
6.432
4.000
3.149
5.600
2.300
U11,
V12
1
7.427
4.250
3.543
6.880
2.430
U12,
V12
1 1/4
7.663
4.250
4.330
6.880
2.430
U12,
V12
1 1/2
8.057
4.250
4.724
6.880
2.430
U12,
V12
2
8.411
4.250
5.511
6.880
2.430
U13,
V13
2 1/2
12.570*
7.000
6.540
7.000
2.380
U15,
V15
3
12.970*
7.000
7.400
7.000
2.380
U16,
V16
*Includes declutchable manual override and handwheel.
SPECIFICATIONS
Body: 3 piece.
(69 bar) WOG; 2 1/2 to 3: 800 psi
(55 bar) WOG.
316 SS; Ball: 316 SS; Seat, stem seal:
PTFE.
( 40 to 232C).
ACTUATORS
Electric
Current): Two position: 1/4 to 3/4:
0.55A, 1 to 1 1/2 : 0.75A, 2: 0.75A, 2
1/2: 0.75A, 3: 1.1A; Modulating: 1/4 to
3/4: 0.55A, 1 to 1 1/2: 0.75A, 2 and 2
1/2: 0.75A; 3: 1.1A.
Cycle Time (per 90): Two position: 1/4
to 3/4: 2.5 sec., 1 to 2: 5 sec., 2 1/2
and 3: 15 sec.; Modulating: 1/4 to 2;
10 sec., 2 1/2: 20 sec., 3: 30 sec.
Duty Rating: Two position: 1/4 to 3/4:
75%, 1 to 3: 25%; Modulating: 75%.
NEMA 7.
( 18 to 65 C).
NPT.
units.
(5.5 bar).
(9.0 bar).
NPT.
Air Consumption (per stroke): DA1:
2.32 cu. in.; DA2, SR2: 9.34 cu. in.; DA3,
SR3: 17.21 cu. in.; SR4: 17.15 cu. in.;
DA5, SR5: 39.54 cu. in.; SR6: 54.37 cu.
in.; SR7: 103.74 cu. in.
DA2: .05 sec.; DA3: .06 sec.; DA5: .18
.17 sec.; SR5: .28 sec.; SR6: .39 sec.;
SR7: .60 sec.
caps.
( 20 to 82C).
standard.
OPTIONS
Contact factory for
model number change
Model
BV3DA100
BV3DA101
BV3DA102
BV3DA103
BV3DA204
BV3DA205
BV3DA306
BV3DA307
BV3DA508
BV3DA509
Model
BV3SR200
BV3SR201
BV3SR202
BV3SR203
BV3SR304
BV3SR305
BV3SR406
BV3SR507
BV3SR708
BV3SR709
Model
BV3U1100
BV3U1101
BV3U1102
BV3U1103
BV3U1204
BV3U1205
BV3U1206
BV3U1307
BV3U1508
BV3U1609
Model
BV3V1200
BV3V1201
BV3V1202
BV3V1203
BV3V1204
BV3V1205
BV3V1206
BV3V1307
BV3V1508
BV3V1609

V
a
v
e
s
,

B
a
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
BV2-F1
Automated Ball Valve Two-Piece SS Flange
Series BV2-F1 ball valves offer ANSI 150# flanged ends for easy installation. 1/2 through
4 sizes are standard for great flow rates with minimal pressure drop. The valve features a
blowout-proof stem for added safety, reinforced TFE seats and seals for longer life, and a
316SS (ASTM A351 GR CF8M) ball for better performance. Actuators are direct mounted,
creating a compact assembly for tight spaces. Double o-ring stem seals assure leak-free
operation.
The BV2-F1 Series is an economical automated valve package with either an electric or
pneumatic actuator. Electrically actuated models are weatherproof, NEMA 4, powered by
standard 115 VAC supply, and are available in either two-position or proportional control.
Two-position actuators use the 115 VAC input to drive the valve open or closed, while the
thermal overload protection and a permanently lubricated gear train.
FEATURES
150# full port flanged ball valve
2 piece stainless steel investment cast body
PTFE seats and seals
Ideal for industrial operations
Electric or pneumatic actuators
E
F
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
A
B
C
D
E
F
ACT.
1/2
8.210
4.000
4.250
5.630
2.310
U11,
V12
3/4
9.010
4.250
4.620
6.880
2.430
U12,
V12
1
9.340
4.250
5.000
6.880
2.430
U12,
V12
1 1/2
13.060*
7.000
6.500
7.000
2.380
U13,
V13
2
13.900*
7.000
7.000
7.000
2.380
U15,
V15
2 1/2
14.970*
7.000
7.500
7.000
2.380
U15,
V15
3
15.680*
7.000
7.500
7.000
2.380
U16,
V16
4
18..900*
10.000
9.000
10.000
3.750
U17,
V17
Electric
A
B
C
D
E
ACT.
1/2
7.390
2.800
4.250
6.810
DA2
3/4
7.450
2.800
4.620
6.810
DA2
1
7.780
2.800
5.000
6.810
DA2
1 1/2
8.860
3.170
6.500
9.550
DA3
2
9.200
3.170
7.000
9.550
DA4
2 1/2
11.760
4.170
7.500
9.840
DA5
3
12.980
4.840
8.000
11.690
DA5
4
13.590
4.840
9.000
11.690
DA7
A
B
C
D
E
ACT.
1/2
7.760
3.170
4.250
7.720
SR2
3/4
7.880
3.170
4.620
7.720
SR3
1
8.210
3.170
5.000
9.550
SR4
1 1/2
10.360
4.840
6.500
11.690
SR4
2
10.700
4.840
7.000
11.690
SR6
2 1/2
13.530
5.830
7.500
15.910
SR7
3
15.810
7.360
8.000
20.550
SR8
4
16.420
7.360
9.000
20.550
SR9
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
4
Cv
15
40
70
240
400
700
980
1700
Double Acting
Pneumatic
Spring Return
Pneumatic
Two Position
Electric
Modulating
Electric
SPECIFICATIONS
Body: 2 piece.
End Connections: 150# Flange.
PTFE.
( 40 to 232C).
ACTUATORS
Electric
Current): Two position: 1/2: 0.55A, 3/4
and 1: 0.75A, 1 1/2: 0.99A, 2 and 2
1/2: 0.75A, 3: 1.1A; Modulating: 1/4 to
3/4: 0.55A, 1 to 1 1/2: 0.75A, 2:
0.75A, 2 1/2: 0.75A; 3 and 4: 1.1A.
Cycle Time (per 90): Two position: 1/2:
2.5 sec., 3/4 to 1 1/2: 5 sec., 2 to 3:
15 sec., 4: 30 sec.; Modulating: 1/2 to
1 1/2 : 10 sec., 2 and 2 1/2: 20 sec.,
4: 30 sec.
Duty Rating: Two position: 1/2: 75%,
3/4 to 4: 25%; Modulating: 75%.
NEMA 7.
( 18 to 65C).
units.
(5.5 bar).
(9.0 bar).
NPT.
Air Consumption (per stroke): DA2,
SR2: 9.34 cu. in.; DA3, SR3: 17.21 cu.
in.; DA4, SR4: 20.5 cu. in.; DA5, SR5:
39.54 cu. in.; SR6: 54.37 cu. in.; SR7:
85.43 cu. in.; SR8: 122.05 cu. in.; SR9:
215.11 cu. in.
DA2: .05 sec.; DA3: .06 sec.; DA5: .08
sec.; DA6: .18sec.; SR2: .07 sec.; SR3:
.13 sec.; SR4: .17 sec.; SR5: .28 sec.;
SR6: .39 sec.; SR7: .60 sec. ; SR8: .90
sec.; SR9: 1.75 sec.
caps.
( 20 to 82C).
standard.
OPTIONS
Model
BV2DA202F1
BV2DA203F1
BV2DA204F1
BV2DA306F1
BV2DA407F1
BV2DA508F1
BV2DA509F1
BV2DA710F1
Model
BV2SR202F1
BV2SR303F1
BV2SR404F1
BV2SR406F1
BV2SR607F1
BV2SR708F1
BV2SR809F1
BV2SR910F1
Model
BV2U1102F1
BV2U1203F1
BV2U1204F1
BV2U1306F1
BV2U1507F1
BV2U1508F1
BV2U1609F1
BV2U1710F1
Model
BV2V1202F1
BV2V1203F1
BV2V1204F1
BV2V1306F1
BV2V1507F1
BV2V1508F1
BV2V1609F1
BV2V1710F1
Explosion Proof Electric Actuators -
add -EX to model number

498
V
a
v
e
s
,

B
a
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
BV3-TC
Automated Ball Valve - Three-Piece SS Sanitary
Series BV3-TCball valves feature sanitary clamp ends for easy line removal. The sanitary
polish is ideal for use in pharmaceutical, food & beverage, and chemical processing systems,
while the cavity filler aids to reduce product entrapment, and the full bore design provides
consistent flow characteristics. Best of all, Dwyer Instruments sanitary ball valves are
economical and durable.
The BV3 Series is an economical automated valve package with either an electric or pneumatic
actuators use the 115 VAC input to drive the valve open or closed, while the modulating
actuator accepts a 4 to 20 mA input for infinite valve positioning. Actuator features thermal
overload protection and a permanently lubricated gear train.
FEATURES
Ideal sanitary ball valve for high purity applications including food & beverage,
240 grit internal polish
Cavity filler to reduce the threat of product entrapment
C
B
A
E
F
D
C
C
B
A
E
D
A
B
C
D
E
F
ACT.
1/2
7.840
4.000
3.500
5.600
2.300
U11,
V12
3/4
8.000
4.000
3.980
5.600
2.300
U12,
V12
1
8.758
4.250
4.490
6.880
2.430
U12,
V12
1 1/2
13.040*
7.000
5.510
7.000
2.380
U14,
V14
2
13.390*
7.000
6.140
7.000
2.380
U15,
V15
2 1/2
14.060*
7.000
7.760
7.000
2.380
U16,
V16
3
15.360*
7.000
9.020
7.000
2.380
U16,
V16
a4
18..390*
10.000
9.490
10.000
6.750
U18,
V18
Electric
A
B
C
D
E
ACT.
1/2
6.091
1.770
3.500
4.330
DA1
3/4
7.109
2.800
3.980
6.810
DA2
1
7.187
2.800
4.490
6.810
DA2
1 1/2
8.336
3.170
5.510
9.550
DA4
2
8.680
3.170
6.140
9.550
DA4
2 1/2
10.340
4.170
7.760
9.840
DA5
3
11.210
4.840
9.020
11.690
DA5
4
12.900
5.390
9.490
13.580
DA7
A
B
C
D
E
ACT.
1/2
6.951
2.800
3.500
6.810
SR2
3/4
7.549
3.170
3.980
7.720
SR3
1
7.627
3.170
4.490
7.720
SR3
1 1/2
9.826
4.840
5.510
11.690
SR6
2
10.180
4.840
6.140
11.690
SR6
2 1/2
11.680
5.390
7.760
13.580
SR7
3
12.590
5.830
9.020
15.910
SR8
4
15.468
7.360
9.490
20.550
SR9
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
4
Cv
12
30
65
205
380
430
675
1110
Double Acting
Pneumatic
Spring Return
Pneumatic
Two Position
Electric
Modulating
Electric
SPECIFICATIONS
Body: 3 piece.
End Connections: Tri Clamp.
(69 bar) WOG; 2 1/2 to 4: 800 psi
(55 bar) WOG.
PTFE.
( 40 to 232C).
Other Materials: Body seal, thrust
washer: PTFE.
ACTUATORS
Electric
Current): Two position: 1/2: 0.55A, 3/4
to 2: 0.75A, 2 1/2 and 3: 1.1A, 4:
1.5A; Modulating: 1/4 to 3/4: 0.55A, 1
to 1 1/2: 0.75A, 2: 0.75A, 2 1/2: 0.75A;
3: 1.1A; 4: 1.5A.
Cycle Time (per 90): Two position: 1/2:
2.5 sec., 3/4 and 1: 5 sec., 1 1/2: 10
sec., 2 to 3: 15 sec., 4: 12 sec.;
Modulating: 1/2 to 1 1/2: 10 sec., 2: 20
sec., 2 1/2 to 4: 30 sec.
Duty Cycle: Electric two position 1/2:
75%; All Others: 25%; Modulating: 75%.
NEMA 7.
( 18 to 65C).
units.
Normal Supply Pressure: 80 psi (5.5
bar).
(8.0 bar).
NPT.
2.32 cu. in.; DA2, SR2: 9.34 cu. in.; DA3,
SR3: 17.21 cu. in.; DA4, SR4: 20.5 cu.
in.; DA6, SR6: 66.75 cu. in.; DA7, SR7:
103.74 cu. in.; SR8: 122.05 cu. in.; SR9:
215.11 cu. in.
DA2: .05 sec.; DA3: .06 sec.; DA5: .08
sec.; DA6: .18 sec.; SR2: .09 sec.; SR3:
.13 sec.; SR4: .17 sec.; SR5: .28 sec.;
SR6: .39 sec.; SR7: .60 sec.; SR8: .90
sec.; SR9: 1.75 sec.
caps.
( 20 to 82C).
standard.
OPTIONS
Voltages
Contact factory for model number
change
Model
BV3DA102TC
BV3DA203TC
BV3DA204TC
BV3DA406TC
BV3DA407TC
BV3DA508TC
BV3DA509TC
BV3DA710TC
Model
BV3SR202TC
BV3SR303TC
BV3SR304TC
BV3SR606TC
BV3SR607TC
BV3SR708TC
BV3SR809TC
BV3SR910TC
Model
BV3U1102TC
BV3U1203TC
BV3U1204TC
BV3U1406TC
BV3U1507TC
BV3U1608TC
BV3U1609TC
BV3U1810TC
Model
BV3V1202TC
BV3V1203TC
BV3V1204TC
BV3V1406TC
BV3V1507TC
BV3V1608TC
BV3V1609TC
BV3V1810TC

V
a
v
e
s
,

B
a
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
BV3-3A
Automated Ball Valve - 3A Three-Piece SS
SPECIFICATIONS
Body: 3 piece.
End Connections: Tri clamp (liner
meets BS 4825, part 3).
(69 bar) WOG; 2 1/2 to 4: 800 psi
(55 bar) WOG.
Wetted Materials: Body, ball, end
caps: CF8M SS; Stem: 316 SS; Seats,
body seal, thrust washer, packing:
TFE.
( 40 to 232C) CWP.
Other Materials: 304 SS, Vinyl.
Agency Approvals: Meets 3A.
ACTUATORS
Electric
Hz, single phase. Optional 220 VAC,
24 VAC, 12 VDC, 24 VDC.
Current): Two position: U11: 0.55A;
U12 & U14: 0.75A; U15 & U17: 1.10A;
U18: 2.60A; U19: 2.90A; Modulating:
V11: 0.55A; V12 & V14: 0.75A; V15 &
V17: 1.10A; V18: 2.60A; V19: 2.90A
Cycle Time (per 90): Two position:
U11: 2.5 seconds; U12: 5 sec; U14: 10
sec; U15:15 sec; U17: 30 sec; U18: 12
sec; U19: 14 sec.; Modulating: V11: 5
seconds; V12: 10 sec; V14: 20 sec;
V15: 30 sec; V17: 60 sec; V18: 24 sec;
V19: 28 sec.
Duty Cycle: U11: 75%; U12, U14,
U15, & U17: 25%; U18 & U19: 100%.
Modulating: 75%.
NEMA 7.
finish.
( 40 to 65C).
Electrical Connection: 1/2 to 2 1/2:
1/2 NPT; 3 & 4: 3/4 NPT.
Standard Features: Manual override,
thermal overload protection,
permanently lubricated gears, and
position indicator except modulating
units.
Type: DA Series is double acting and
SR Series is spring return (rack and
pinion).
(5.5 bar).
Maximum Supply Pressure: 120 psi
(8 bar).
NPT.
1.71 in
3
; DA2: 9.34 in
3
; DA4: 20.5 in
3
;
DA6: 66.76 in
3
; DA7: 103.74 in
3
; SR2:
7.69 in
3
; SR3: 14.22 in
3
; SR6: 54.37
in
3
; SR7: 85.43 in
3
; SR9: 215.11 in
3
.
Cycle Time (90): DA1: .03 sec; DA2:
.04 sec; DA4: .12 sec; DA6: .27 sec;
DA7: .47 sec; SR2: .09 sec; SR3: .14
sec; SR6: .46 sec; SR7: .78 sec; SR9:
1.34 sec.
caps.
( 20 to 85C).
standard.
A
B
C
D
E
F
ACT.
1/2
7.84
4.00
3.50
5.60
2.30
U11,
V11
3/4
8.00
4.00
3.98
5.60
2.30
U12,
V12
1
8.76
4.25
4.49
6.80
2.43
U12,
V12
1 1/2
13.04*
7.00
5.51
7.00
2.38
U14,
V14
2
13.39*
7.00
6.14
7.00
2.38
U15,
V15
2 1/2
14.06*
7.00
7.76
7.00
2.38
U17,
V17
3
15.36*
7.00
9.02
7.00
2.38
U18,
V18
4
18.39*
10.00
9.49
10.00
6.75
U19,
V19
Electric-3A
A
B
C
D
E
ACT.
1/2
6.02
1.77
3.50
4.33
DA1
3/4
7.15
2.80
3.98
5.49
DA2
1
7.31
2.80
4.49
5.49
DA2
1 1/2
9.76
3.72
5.51
8.15
DA4
2
10.07
3.72
6.14
8.15
DA4
2 1/2
11.31
4.17
7.76
9.35
DA6
3
12.17
4.84
9.02
10.69
DA7
4
13.07
5.39
9.49
12.91
DA7
Pneumatic Double Acting-3A
A
B
C
D
E
ACT.
1/2
6.98
2.80
3.50
5.49
SR2
3/4
7.59
3.17
3.98
6.38
SR3
1
8.75
3.17
4.49
6.38
SR3
1 1/2
10.72
4.84
5.51
10.69
SR6
2
11.03
4.84
6.14
10.69
SR7
2 1/2
11.81
5.39
7.76
12.91
SR9
3
13.35
5.39
9.02
12.91
SR9
4
14.79
7.36
9.49
20.55
SR9
Pneumatic Spring Return-3A
*Includes declutchable manual override
C
B
A
E
F
D
C
C
B
A
E
D
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
4
Cv
14
45
81
215
410
618
940
1840
Double Acting Pneumatic Spring Return Pneumatic
Two Position Electric
Modulating Electric
OPTIONS
Series BV3-3A ball valves meet 3A sanitary standards and feature tri-clamp ends for
easy line removal. This three-piece sanitary ball valve is ideal for use in food, beverage,
semi-conductor, or pharmaceutical applications. The cavity filled and full bore designs aid
to reduce product entrapment, and provide consistent flow characteristics.
The BV3-3A Series is an economical automated valve packaged with either an electric or
pneumatic actuator. Electrically actuated models have a standard weatherproof, NEMA 4
enclosure, powered by a 115 VAC supply, and are available in either two-position or
proportional control. The two position actuators use the 115 VAC input to drive the valve
open or closed, while the modulating actuator accepts a 4 to 20 mA input for infinite valve
positioning. Actuator features a visual indicator, manual override, thermal overload
protection, and permanently lubricated gears.
The actuator has two supply ports with one driving the valve open and the other driving
the valve closed. Spring return pneumatic actuators use the air supply to open the valve
and internally loaded springs return the valve to the closed position. Also available is the
SV3 solenoid valve to electrically switch the air supply pressure between the air supply
ports for opening and closing the valve. Actuators are constructed of anodized and epoxy
coated aluminum for years of corrosion free service.
FEATURES
Designed to meet 3A sanitary standards
Ideal sanitary ball valve for food, beverage, semi conductor, or pharmaceutical
applications
240 grit bore polish
Cavity filled design
Voltages
change
Solenoid Valve- See Model SV3
Model
BV3DA102TC-3A
BV3DA203TC-3A
BV3DA204TC-3A
BV3DA406TC-3A
BV3DA407TC-3A
BV3DA608TC-3A
BV3DA709TC-3A
BV3DA710TC-3A
Model
BV3SR202TC-3A
BV3SR303TC-3A
BV3SR304TC-3A
BV3SR606TC-3A
BV3SR707TC-3A
BV3SR908TC-3A
BV3SR909TC-3A
BV3SR910TC-3A
Model
BV3U1102TC-3A
BV3U1203TC-3A
BV3U1204TC-3A
BV3U1406TC-3A
BV3U1507TC-3A
BV3U1708TC-3A
BV3U1809TC-3A
BV3U1910TC-3A
Model
BV3V1102TC-3A
BV3V1203TC-3A
BV3V1204TC-3A
BV3V1406TC-3A
BV3V1507TC-3A
BV3V1708TC-3A
BV3V1809TC-3A
BV3V1910TC-3A

500
V
a
v
e
s
,

B
a
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
3ABV
Automated Ball Valve - 3-Way Brass NPT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ACT.
1/4
3.96
1.77
2.64
4.33
1.43
1.33
0.76
0.86
DA1
3/8
3.96
1.77
2.64
4.33
1.43
1.33
0.76
0.86
DA1
1/2
3.96
1.77
2.64
4.33
1.43
1.33
0.76
1.06
DA1
3/4
4.30
1.77
3.03
4.33
1.59
1.53
0.86
1.25
DA1
1
4.86
2.80
3.43
5.49
1.87
1.88
1.00
1.61
DA2
1-1/4
5.00
2.80
4.13
5.49
2.20
2.36
1.22
1.96
DA2
1-1/2
5.94
3.17
4.82
6.38
2.44
2.83
1.45
2.16
DA3
2
6.95
3.72
5.45
8.15
2.87
3.38
1.75
2.75
DA4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ACT.
1/4
4.45
2.80
2.64
5.49
1.43
1.33
0.76
0.86
SR2
3/8
4.45
2.80
2.64
5.49
1.43
1.33
0.76
0.86
SR2
1/2
4.45
2.80
2.64
5.49
1.43
1.33
0.76
1.06
SR2
3/4
4.52
2.80
3.03
5.49
1.59
1.53
0.86
1.25
SR2
1
5.30
3.17
3.43
6.38
1.87
1.88
1.00
1.61
SR3
1-1/4
5.44
3.17
4.13
6.38
2.20
2.36
1.22
1.96
SR3
1-1/2
6.59
3.17
4.82
8.15
2.44
2.83
1.45
2.16
SR4
2
7.40
4.17
5.45
9.35
2.87
3.38
1.75
2.75
SR5
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ACT.
1/4
5.90
4.00
2.64
5.63
1.43
1.33
0.76
0.86
U11,V11
3/8
5.90
4.00
2.64
5.63
1.43
1.33
0.76
0.86
U11,V11
1/2
6.13
4.00
2.64
5.63
1.43
1.33
0.76
1.06
U11,V11
3/4
6.20
4.00
3.03
5.63
1.59
1.53
0.86
1.25
U11,V11
1
6.57
4.75
3.43
6.88
1.87
1.88
1.00
1.61
U12,V12
1-1/4
6.70
4.75
4.13
6.88
2.20
2.36
1.22
1.96
U12,V12
1-1/2
8.29
4.75
4.82
6.88
2.44
2.83
1.45
2.16
U12,V12
2
8.62
4.75
5.45
6.88
2.87
3.38
1.75
2.75
U13,V13
Electric [NEMA 4 ENCL.] (inches)
E
C A
D
C
F
B
I
F H
E
F
AG
D
C
B
I
F H
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids, gases or
steam.
Body: 3 way.
Pressure Limits: 1/4 to 1 1/4: 435 psi
(30 bar) WOG; 1 1/2: 232 psi (16 bar)
WOG; 2: 145 psi (10 bar) WOG. 100 psi
(6.9 bar) SWP.
Brass; Ball: Brass, chrome plated; Seat,
stem seal: TFE.
ACTUATORS
Electric
Current): Two position: 1/4 to 3/4: .55A,
1 to 2: .75A; Modulating: 1/4 to 3/4:
.55A, 1 to 2: .75A.
Cycle Time: (per 90): Two position: 1/4
to 3/4: 2.5 sec., 1 to 2: 5 sec.;
Modulating: 1/4 to 3/4: 2.5 sec., 1 to 2:
5 sec.
Duty Cycle: Two position: 1/4 to 3/4:
75%, 1 to 2: 25%; Modulating: 75%.
NEMA 7.
( 18 to 65C).
modulating units.
Type: DA series is double acting and SR
series is spring return (rack and pinion).
(5.5 bar).
(8 bar).
NPT.
2.32 cu. in.; DA2, SR2: 9.34 cu. in.; DA3,
SR3: 17.21 cu. in.; DA4, SR4: 20.5 cu.
in.; SR5: 39.54 cu. in.
DA2: .04 sec.; DA3: .08 sec.; DA4: .12
.22 sec.; SR5: .33 sec.
caps.
( 20 to 82C).
standard.
indicator.
The Series 3ABV incorporates a standard port valve for great flow rates with minimal
pressure drop. Features include a blowout proof stem for added safety and reinforced TFE
seats and seals for longer life and leak-free operation. The four seat design allows for high
cyclic capabilities and tight shut-off in any position. Perfect for mixing or diverting services
in the food and chemical processing industries.
The 3ABV is an economical automated valve package with either an electric or pneumatic
modulating actuator accepts a 4-20 mA input for infinite valve positioning. Actuator features
include thermal overload protection to withstand stall conditions, visual position indication,
Spring return pneumatic actuators use the air supply to drive the valve stem in one direction,
free service.
How To Order:
1. Select Model No. to specify pipe
size and actuator.
2. Choose a Port Configuration
to determine valve flow path.
Example: 3ABV1DA204 T2
Port
Configuration
T Port
L Port
T1
T2
T3
T4
L1
L2
L3
Act. Open
All Open
A B
A C
B C
B C
A B
All Closed
Act. Closed
A B
A C
B C
All Open
A B
All Closed
B C
Flow Path
L-Port
3.26
3.50
4.20
7.00
12.83
18.67
29.75
43.76
T-Port
3.50
4.08
5.02
7.70
14.24
19.72
30.69
44.58
Cv Double Acting Pneumatic Spring Return Pneumatic Two Position Electric Modulating Electric
* Complete model includes Port Configuration see How to Order above.
Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
OPTIONS
Optional Electric Actuator
Supply Voltages
change
Model*
3ABV1DA100
3ABV1DA101
3ABV1DA102
3ABV1DA103
3ABV1DA204
3ABV1DA205
3ABV1DA306
3ABV1DA407
Model*
3ABV1SR200
3ABV1SR201
3ABV1SR202
3ABV1SR203
3ABV1SR304
3ABV1SR305
3ABV1SR406
3ABV1SR507
Model*
3ABV1U1100
3ABV1U1101
3ABV1U1102
3ABV1U1103
3ABV1U1204
3ABV1U1205
3ABV1U1206
3ABV1U1307
Model*
3ABV1V1100
3ABV1V1101
3ABV1V1102
3ABV1V1103
3ABV1V1204
3ABV1V1205
3ABV1V1206
3ABV1V1307

V
a
v
e
s
,

B
a
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
3PBV
Automated Ball Valve - Three-Way Plastic
The Series 3PBV is ideal for mixing or diverting services in industrial, chemical, turf and
irrigation, and pool and spa applications, as well as for use with potable water. The valve
features a 3-seat design for efficient automation, reinforced TFE seats and EPDM seals for
longer life, and an all PVC construction for heavyweight durability at a lightweight cost. Valves
also come standard with field selectable NPT or socket process connections.
The 3PBV is an economical automated valve package with either an electric or pneumatic
free service.
SPECIFICATIONS
Body: 3 way.
End Connections: Female NPT or
socket (field selectable).
Pressure Limit: 1/2 to 1: 232 psi (16.0
bar) @ 73F (23C); 1 1/4 to 2: 150 psi
(10.3 bar) @ 73F (23C) WOG;
Vacuum: 29 Hg. See chart for curve.
Wetted Materials: Body, end
connectors: PVC; Ball, stem: PVC;
Seat: TFE; Stem seal: EPDM.
(0 to 60C).
ACTUATORS
Electric
Current): Two position: 1/2 to 1 1/2:
.55A, 2: 0.75A; Modulating: 0.75A.
1/2 to 1 1/2: 2.5 sec., 2: 5 sec.;
Modulating: 5 sec.
Duty Cycle: Two position: 1/2 to 1 1/2:
75%, 2: 25%; Modulating: 75%.
NEMA 7 (Class 1, Div. II groups A, B, C,
D).
( 18 to 65C).
modulating units.
(5.5 bar).
(8 bar).
NPT.
2.32 cu. in.; DA2, SR2: 9.34 cu. in.;
SR3: 17.21 cu. in.
DA2: .04 sec.; SR2: .09 sec.; SR3: .14
sec.
caps.
( 20 to 82C).
standard.
indicator.
How To Order:
1. Select Model No. to specify pipe size and actuator.
2. Choose a Port Configuration to determine valve flow path.
Example: 3PBVPSR204 L3
Series 3PBV Automated Ball Valves - 3-Way Plastic
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
CV
See
Chart Above
Port
Configuration
T Port
L Port
T1
T2
T3
T4
L1
L2
L3
Act. Open
All Open
A B
A C
B C
B C
A B
All Closed
Act. Closed
A B
A C
B C
All Open
A B
All Closed
B C
Flow Path
Cv Values
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
Position
A
3.85
9.50
14.4
27.3
33.3
63.0
B
2.45
6.65
9.80
18.9
23.1
43.4
C
4.55
10.2
17.2
32.2
42.0
84.0
D
13.7
26.6
53.2
73.5
119
224
E
5.11
10.5
18.6
33.3
43.4
85.4
*Please see website for dimensional drawings and Cv positions
0
50
100
150
200
250
62 92 122 152 182 212
73 140
32
1/2 to 1
1 1/4 to 2
232
40
WORKING TEMPERATURE (F)
W
O
R
K
I
N
G
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
(
p
s
i
)
PRESSURE - TEMPERATURE RATINGS
SERIES 3PBV
OPTIONS
Model*
3PBVPDA102
3PBVPDA103
3PBVPDA104
3PBVPDA105
3PBVPDA206
3PBVPDA207
Model*
3PBVPSR202
3PBVPSR203
3PBVPSR204
3PBVPSR205
3PBVPSR306
3PBVPSR307
Model*
3PBVPU1102
3PBVPU1103
3PBVPU1104
3PBVPU1105
3PBVPU1106
3PBVPU1207
Model*
3PBVPV1202
3PBVPV1203
3PBVPV1204
3PBVPV1205
3PBVPV1206
3PBVPV1207
Supply Voltages
Contact factory for model
number change

502
V
a
v
e
s
,

B
a
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
3BV3
Automated Ball Valve - 3-Way SS NPT
A
B
C
D
E
F
M
ACT.
1/2
5.93
2.80
3.78
5.49
1.61
1.89
DA2
3/4
6.30
2.80
4.96
5.49
1.61
2.11
DA2
1
6.46
2.80
4.96
5.49
1.61
2.48
DA2
1 1/4
7.09
2.80
5.24
5.49
1.61
2.62
DA2
1 1/2
8.07
3.72
5.94
8.15
2.07
2.97
DA4
2
6.74
3.72
6.54
8.15
2.07
3.27
DA4
A
B
C
D
E
F
M
ACT.
1/2
5.93
2.80
3.78
5.49
1.61
1.89
SR2
3/4
6.30
3.17
4.21
6.38
1.77
2.11
SR3
1
7.11
3.72
4.96
8.15
2.07
2.48
SR4
1 1/4
7.74
3.72
5.24
8.15
2.07
2.62
SR4
1 1/2
9.03
4.84
5.94
10.69
2.68
2.97
SR6
2
10.88
5.39
6.54
12.91
2.87
3.27
SR7
A
B
C
D
E
F
M
ACT.
1/2
6.47, 7.35
4.00, 4.25
3.78
5.83, 6.88
2.31, 2.43
1.89
U11,V12
3/4
7.72
4.25
4.21
6.88
2.43
2.11
U12,V12
1
7.88
4.25
4.96
6.88
2.43
2.48
U12,V12
1 1/4
8.51
4.25
5.24
6.88
2.43
2.62
U13,V13
1 1/2
11.95*
7.00
5.94
7.00
2.38
2.97
U14,V14
2
12.62*
7.00
6.56
7.00
2.38
3.27
U15,V15
Electric [NEMA 4 ENCL.] (inches)
E
A
D
C
F
B
M
E
F
A
D
C
B
M
SPECIFICATIONS
steam.
Body: 3 way.
Pressure Limit: 1000 psi (69 bar) WOG;
150 psi (10.3 bar) SWP.
RTFE.
Temperature Limit: 40 to 450F ( 40 to
232C). Steam max.: 366F (186C).
ACTUATORS
Electric
Current): Two position: 1/2: .55A, 3/4
to 1 1/2: .75A, 2: 1.1A; Modulating: 1/2
to 1 1/2: .75A, 2: 1.1A.
1/2: 2.5 sec., 3/4 to 1 1/4: 5 sec., 1
1/2: 10 sec., 2: 15 sec.; Modulating:
1/2 to 1 1/4: 5 sec., 1 1/2: 10 sec., 2:
15 sec.
Duty Cycle: Two position: 1/2: 75%,
3/4 to 2: 25%; Modulating: 75%.
NEMA 7.
( 18 to 65C).
modulating units.
(5.5 bar).
(8 bar).
NPT.
2.32 cu. in.; DA2, SR2: 9.34 cu. in.; DA3,
SR3: 17.21 cu. in.; DA4, SR4: 20.5 cu.
in.; SR5: 39.54 cu. in.; SR6: 54.37 cu.
in.; SR7: 85.43 cu. in.
DA2: .04 sec.; DA3: .08 sec.; DA4: .12
.22 sec.; SR5: .33 sec.; SR6: .46 sec.;
SR7: .78 sec.
caps.
( 20 to 82C).
standard.
indicator.
The Series 3BV3 incorporates a full port design for maximum flow rates with minimal
pressure drop. Features include a blowout proof stem for added safety and reinforced RTFE
seats and seals for longer life and leak free operation. The four seat design allows for high
cyclic capabilities and tight shut off in any position. Perfect for mixing or diverting services
in the food and chemical processing industries.
The 3BV3 is an economical automated valve package with either an electric or pneumatic
free service.
How To Order:
1. Select Model No. to specify pipe size and actuator.
2. Choose a Port Configuration to determine valve flow path.
Example: 3BV3SR404 T2
Port
Configuration
T Port
L Port
T1
T2
T3
T4
L1
L2
L3
Act. Open
All Open
A B
A C
B C
B C
A B
All Closed
Act. Closed
A B
A C
B C
All Open
A B
All Closed
B C
Flow Path
L-Port
10.0
14.0
25.0
34.0
56.0
110.0
T-Port
16.0
24.0
45.0
77.0
100.0
430.0
Cv Double Acting Pneumatic Spring Return Pneumatic Two Position Electric Modulating Electric
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
OPTIONS
Model*
3BV3DA202
3BV3DA203
3BV3DA204
3BV3DA205
3BV3DA406
3BV3DA407
Model*
3BV3SR202
3BV3SR303
3BV3SR404
3BV3SR405
3BV3SR606
3BV3SR707
Model*
3BV3U1102
3BV3U1203
3BV3U1204
3BV3U1305
3BV3U1406
3BV3U1507
Model*
3BV3V1202
3BV3V1203
3BV3V1204
3BV3V1305
3BV3V1406
3BV3V1507
Supply Voltages

V
a
v
e
s
,

B
a
V
A
L
V
E
S
The Series 3BV2 incorporates a full port design for maximum flow rates with minimal
pressure drop. Features include a blowout proof stem for added safety and reinforced
RTFE seats and seals for longer life and leak free operation. The four seat design allows
for high cyclic capabilities and tight shut off in any position. Perfect for mixing or diverting
services in the food and chemical processing industries.
The 3BV2 is an economical automated valve package with either an electric or pneumatic
actuator. Electrically actuated models are weatherproof, NEMA 4, powered by standard
115 VAC supply, and are available in either two-position or proportional control. Two
position actuators use the 115 VAC input to drive each of the valve ports open or closed,
while the modulating actuator accepts a 4 to 20 mA input for infinite valve positioning.
Actuator features include thermal overload protection to withstand stall conditions, visual
position indications and permanently lubricated gear train.
The pneumatic double acting actuator uses an air supply to drive each of the actuator
ports. Spring return pneumatic actuators use the air supply to drive the valve position.
Also available is the SV3 solenoid valve to electrically switch the supply pressure between
the air supply ports. Actuators are constructed of anodized aluminum and are epoxy
coated for years of corrosion free service.
Series
3BV2
Automated Ball Valves, 3-Way SS Flange
SPECIFICATIONS
steam.
Body: 3 Way.
End Connections: 150# Flange.
Wetted Materials: Body, end cap,
stem: 316 SS; Ball: 316 SS; Seat, stem
seal; PTFE.
Temperature Limit: 40 to 450F ( 40
to 232C). Steam max. 366F (186C).
ACTUATORS
Electric
Current): Two position: U11: .55 A;
U12, U13, U14: .75A; U15, U16, U17:
1.1A; U18: 2.6A; Modulating: V12, V13,
V14: .75A; V15,V16, V17: 1.1A; V18:
2.6A.
U11:2.5 sec., U12, U13: 5 sec., U14:
10 sec., U15, U16: 15 sec., U17: 30
sec., U18: 12 sec.; Modulating: V12,
V13: 10 sec., V14: 20 sec., V15,V16:
30 sec., V17: 60 sec., V18: 12 sec.
Duty Cycle: Two position: U11: 75%,
U12, U13, U14, U15, U16, U17: 25%,
U18: 100%; Modulating: V11, V12, V13,
V14, V15, V16, V17: 75%, V18: 100%.
NEMA 7.
finish.
( 18 to 65C).
modulating units.
Type: DA series is double acting and
SR series is spring return (rack and
pinion).
Normal Supply Pressure: 80 psig
(5.5 bar).
(8 bar).
Air Consumption: (per stroke) DA1
2.32 cu. in.; DA2, SR2: 9.34 cu. in.;
DA3, SR3: 17.21 cu. in.; DA4, SR4:
20.5 cu. in.; SR5: 39.54 cu. in.; SR6:
54.37 cu. in.; SR7: 85.43 cu. in.
DA2: .04 sec.; DA3: .08 sec.; DA4: .12
sec.; SR2: .09 sec.; SR3: .14 sec.;
SR4: .22 sec.; SR5: .33 sec.; SR6: .46
sec.; SR7: .78 sec.
caps.
( 20 to 82C).
standard.
indicator.
HOW TO ORDER:
1. Select Model No. to
specify pipe size and
actuator.
2. Choose a Port
Configuration to
determine valve flow path.
Example: 3BV2SR404 T2
Port
Configuration
T Port
L Port
Flow Path
T1
T2
T3
T4
L1
L2
L3
Act. Open Act. Closed
All Open
A B
A C
B C
A B
A C
B C
All Open
B C
A B
All Closed
A B
All Closed
B C
OPTIONS
G
F
C
B
D
A
D
E
*SHOWN WITH MANUAL OVERRIDE AND HANDWHEEL
D
C
G
E
F
B
A
D
ACTUATOR
SIZE
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
ACT.
1/2
5 15/16
2 13/16
2 63/64
5 63/64
1 39/64
5 31/64
DA2
3/4
6 19/64
2 13/16
3 19/64
6 9/16
1 39/64
5 31/64
DA2
1
6 15/32
2 13/16
3 41/64
7 9/32
1 39/64
5 31/64
DA2
1 1/4
7 17/32
3 11/64
3 63/64
7 63/64
1 49/64
6 3/8
DA3
1 1/2
8 1/16
3 23/32
4 21/64
8 21/32
2 1/16
8 5/32
DA4
2
8 47/64
3 23/32
4 63/64
9 31/32
2 1/16
8 5/32
DA4
2 1/2
12 25/64
5 53/64
5 29/32
11 13/16
2 7/8
12 29/32
DA7
3
17 3/16
7 23/64
6 1/64
12 1/64
2 7/8
12 29/32
DA7
4
18 37/64
7 23/64
7 17/64
14 35/64
2 7/8
12 29/32
DA7
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
ACT.
1/2
5 15/16
2 13/16
2 63/64
5 63/64
1 39/64
5 31/64
SR2
3/4
6 19/64
3 11/64
3 19/64
6 9/16
1 49/64
6 3/8
SR3
1
7 7/64
3 23/32
3 41/64
7 9/32
2 1/16
8 5/32
SR4
1 1/4
7 47/64
3 23/32
3 63/64
7 63/64
2 1/16
8 5/32
SR4
1 1/2
9 1/32
4 27/32
4 21/64
8 21/32
2 11/16
10 11/16
SR6
2
10 7/8
5 25/64
4 63/64
9 31/32
2 7/8
12 29/32
SR7
2 1/2
16 5/8
5 53/64
5 29/32
11 13/16
3 5/32
14 13/32
SR8
3
18 17/64
7 23/64
6 1/64
12 1/64
3 15/16
20 35/64
SRA
4
19 21/32
7 23/64
7 17/64
14 35/64
3 15/16
20 35/64
SRA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
ACT.
1/2
6 15/32, 7 11/32
4, 4 1/4
2 63/64
5 63/64
2 5/16, 2 4/16
5 5/8, 6 7/8
U11, V12
3/4
7 23/32
4 1/4
3 19/64
6 37/64
2 7/16
6 7/8
U12, V12
1
7 7/8
4 1/4
3 41/64
7 9/32
2 7/16
6 7/8
U12, V12
1 1/4
8 1/2
4 1/4
6 63/64
7 63/64
2 7/16
6 7/8
U13, V13
1 1/2
11 31/62*
7
4 21/64
8 21/32
2 3/8
7
U14, V14
2
12 5/8*
7
4 63/64
9 31/32
2 3/8
7
U15, V15
2 1/2
17 19/32**
7
5 29/32
11 13/16
2 3/8
7
U16, V16
3
18 5/16**
7
6 1/64
12 1/64
2 3/8
7
U17, V17
4
22 25/64**
10
7 17/64
15 35/64
3 3/4
10
U18, V18
Electrical (NEMA 4 ENCL.) (inches)
*Includes declutchable manual override and handwheel. **Includes declutchable manual override, handwheel, and mounting kit.
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
4
L-Port
10.0
14.0
25.0
34.0
56.0
110.0
141.0
265.0
430.0
T-Port
16.0
24.0
45.0
77.0
100.0
430.0
670.0
1120.0
2066.0
Double Acting Pneumatic Spring Return Pneumatic Two Position Electric Modulating Electric Cv
Supply Voltages
Contact factory for model change
and price
Solenoid Valve See Model SV3
Model*
3BV2DA202F1
3BV2DA203F1
3BV2DA204F1
3BV2DA205F1
3BV2DA406F1
3BV2DA407F1
3BV2DA708F1
3BV2DA709F1
3BV2DA710F1
Model*
3BV2SR202F1
3BV2SR303F1
3BV2SR404F1
3BV2SR405F1
3BV2SR606F1
3BV2SR707F1
3BV2SR808F1
3BV2SRA09F1
3BV2SRA10F1
Model*
3BV2U1102F1
3BV2U1203F1
3BV2U1204F1
3BV2U1305F1
3BV2U1406F1
3BV2U1507F1
3BV2U1608F1
3BV2U1709F1
3BV2U1810F1
Model*
3BV2V1202F1
3BV2V1203F1
3BV2V1204F1
3BV2V1305F1
3BV2V1406F1
3BV2V1507F1
3BV2V1608F1
3BV2V1709F1
3BV2V1810F1
* Complete Model includes Port configurations see How to Order above.
Explosion Proof Electric Actuator
Add suffix EX to the model number

504
V
a
v
e
s
,

C
h
e
c
k
V
A
L
V
E
S
SPECIFICATIONS
Line Size: 4 to 8.
Process Connections: Standard flanges.
Pressure Limits: 4: 150 psi (10.3 bar) at 73F (22.8C); 6 or 8: 90 psi
(6.2 bar) at 73F (22.8C).
Wetted Materials: PVC body and flap with EPDM O rings, silicone free
construction.
Other Materials: Plug: PP.
Series
FPV
Flap Check Valve
Wafer Style 4 to 8, PVC Construction
Series FPV Flap Check Valves prevent reversal of flow in piping systems.
They are ideal where backflow could potentially cause damage to pumps, filters,
or process equipment. The valves operate without the need for any adjustments
or settings. Line pressure moves the solid plastic flap off the elastomer seat,
opening the valve. When the inlet flow stops, back pressure moves the flap back
onto the seat, stopping the flow. These flap check valves have been designed to
provide excellent flow characteristics. Because of their straight-through flow
design they have a lower pressure drop than other check valve designs, and
their compact size takes up less space in the pipeline than other types of check
valves. Because of their all plastic construction, these valves will never jam or
stick as a result of rust or corrosion. Additionally, they will not contaminate
sensitive fluids that come into contact with them. Series FPV Flap Check Valves
are the valves of choice for cost sensitive applications that require a full featured,
no compromise valve.
These flap check valves are supplied with o-rings set into the body faces. In
most cases, flange gaskets are not required. Valves up to 8 usually require a
spacer and should always be used with the same material as the valve. Spacers
allow full disc opening with minimum interference. Spacers are not required for
DIN and PVDF pipe.
FEATURES
Low pressure drop design
Compact, lightweight
Easy installation
No flange gaskets needed
Installs between two standard flanges
Rugged, cost effective design
Model
FPV-1104
FPV-1106
FPV-1108
Size
4
6
8
Cv
126
655
945
A
B
C
Model
FPV - 1104
FPV - 1106
FPV - 1108
A
6.5
8.7
10.8
B
2.8
4.4
5.9
C
.9
1.0
1.3
Weight lbs (kg)
1.3 (0.59)
2.5 (1.13)
5 (2.27)
Description
4 PVC Flap Check Valve, EPDM

V
a
v
e
s
,

C
h
e
c
k
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
SCV
Spring Check Valve
PVC or CPVC, True Union, Compact Design
SPECIFICATIONS
Process Connections: Socket or NPT female.
Pressure Limits: 1/2 to 2: rated 240 psi (16.5 bar) at 73F (22.8C);
2 1/2 to 4: rated 150 psi (10.3 bar) at 73F (22.8C).
Wetted Materials: PVC or CPVC with EPDM or FPM O rings, PP foot
valve screen, silicone free construction, 316 SS spring.
Model
SCV-1102D
SCV-1103D
SCV-1104D
SCV-1105D
SCV-1106D
SCV-1107D
SCV-1108T
SCV-1108S
SCV-1109T
SCV-1109S
SCV-1110T
SCV-1110S
Body
Material
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
Seal
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
2 1/2
3
3
4
4
Model
SCV-2202D
SCV-2203D
SCV-2204D
SCV-2205D
SCV-2206D
SCV-2207D
SCV-2208T
SCV-2208S
SCV-2209T
SCV-2209S
SCV-2210T
SCV-2210S
Body
Material
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
Seal
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
2 1/2
3
3
4
4
2x L
NPT E
D
B
VALVE
STRAINER
Series SCV Spring Check Valves provide an exact and reliable control of
fluids. The SCV Spring Check Valves prevent reversal of flow in piping systems.
They are ideal where backflow could potentially cause damage to pumps, filters,
or process equipment. The valves operate without the need for any adjustments
or settings. Line pressure moves the plastic cone off the elastomer seat, opening
the valve. When the inlet flow stops, a spring moves the cone back onto the seat,
stopping the flow. The spring is constructed from 316 stainless steel. All valves
feature a true union design that allows for easy removal from a piping system
without breaking down piping connections. Just unscrew the two assembly nuts
and lift the valve body out of the line. Series SCV Spring Check Valves are the
valves of choice for cost sensitive applications that require a full-featured, no
compromise value.
FEATURES
Easy installation and maintenance
Rugged, cost effective design
May be used either vertically or horizontally
O rings available in EPDM or FPM
Silicone free construction
Cv
68
133
208
383
667
850
1533
1533
147
147
160
160
Cv
68
133
208
383
667
850
1533
1533
147
147
160
160
NPT
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
4
L
39/64
[15.48]
45/64
[17.86]
29/32
[23.02]
1
[25.4]
1 1/4
[31.75]
1 1/2
[38.1]
1 45/64
[43.26]
2
[50.8]
2 13/32
[61.12]
D
3 5/16
[84.14]
4 5/16
[109.54]
4 45/64
[119.46]
5 39/64
[142.48]
6 13/32
[162.72]
7 39/64
[193.28]
9 7/64
[231.38]
10 39/64
[269.48]
11
[279.4]
E
2
[50.8]
2 13/32
[61.12]
2 13/16
[71.44]
3 5/16
[84.14]
3 45/64
[94.06]
4 39/64
[117.08]
5 13/16
[147.64]
7
[177.8]
7
[177.8]
B
4 13/64
[106.76]
5 7/64
[129.78]
6 7/64
[155.18]
6 29/32
[175.42]
8
[203.2]
9 13/32
[238.92]
12
[304.8]
14 5/16
[363.54]
14 13/32
[365.92]
Weight lbs (kg)
0.5 (0.23)
0.75 (0.34)
1.5 (0.68)
1.625 (0.74)
1.75 (0.79)
3.5 (1.59)
7 (3.18)
9.5 (4.31)
19 (8.62)
Connection
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Threaded
Socket
Threaded
Socket
Threaded
Socket
Connection
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Threaded
Socket
Threaded
Socket
Threaded
Socket

506
V
a
v
e
s
,

C
h
e
c
k
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
BCV
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Limits: 1/2 to 2: 240 psi (16.5 bar); 2 1/2 to 4: 150 psi (10.3 bar).
Wetted Materials: Body, ball, end connector, closing ring, seal carrier: PVC or CPVC;
Body O ring, end connector O ring: EPDM or FPM; Foot valve screen: PP.
Temperature Limits: PVC: 32 to 110F (0 to 43C); CPVC: 32 to 200F (0 to 93C).
Other Materials: Union nut: PVC or CPVC.
Cv
6.9
9.0
21.6
31.7
55.7
72.8
135.3
135.3
192.9
192.9
250
250
6.9
9.0
21.6
31.7
55.7
72.8
135.3
135.3
192.9
192.9
250
250
Body
Material
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
2 1/2
3
3
4
4
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
2 1/2
3
3
4
4
Model
BCV-1102D
BCV-1103D
BCV-1104D
BCV-1105D
BCV-1106D
BCV-1107D
BCV-1108T
BCV-1108S
BCV-1109T
BCV-1109S
BCV-1110T
BCV-1110S
BCV-1202D
BCV-1203D
BCV-1204D
BCV-1205D
BCV-1206D
BCV-1207D
BCV-1208T
BCV-1208S
BCV-1209T
BCV-1209S
BCV-1210T
BCV-1210S
Seal
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
Body
Material
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
2 1/2
3
3
4
4
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
2 1/2
3
3
4
4
Model
BCV-2102D
BCV-2103D
BCV-2104D
BCV-2105D
BCV-2106D
BCV-2107D
BCV-2108T
BCV-2108S
BCV-2109T
BCV-2109S
BCV-2110T
BCV-2110S
BCV-2202D
BCV-2203D
BCV-2204D
BCV-2205D
BCV-2206D
BCV-2207D
BCV-2208T
BCV-2208S
BCV-2209T
BCV-2209S
BCV-2210T
BCV-2210S
Seal
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
FPM
Cv
6.9
9.0
21.6
31.7
55.7
72.8
135.3
135.3
192.9
192.9
250
250
6.9
9.0
21.6
31.7
55.7
72.8
135.3
135.3
192.9
192.9
250
250
The Series BCV True Union Ball Check Valves are economical, thermoplastic ball
check valves ideal for chemical and wastewater applications. The true union design allows
for easy removal from a piping system without breaking down any piping connections. The
valve body can be lifted out of the line by unscrewing two assembly nuts. Series BCV
check valves are applied where back flow could potentially cause damage to pumps, filters,
or process equipment. Line pressure moves the solid plastic ball off the elastomer seat,
opening the valve. When the inlet flow stops, back pressure (3.75 psi minimum) moves the
ball back onto the seat, stopping the flow. All plastic construction gives this series of check
valves superior corrosion resistance and they will not contaminate sensitive fluids that
come into contact with them. BCV check valves can be easily installed horizontally or
vertically.
FEATURES
Ideal corrosion resistant ball check valve for chemical and wastewater
applications
Horizontal or vertical installation
Easy to service
Silicon free construction
(A) TYP
(B)
TYP
(D)
TYP
(C)
VALVE
SCREEN
(E)
True Union Ball Check Valve
PVC or CPVC Construction, Economical
A
NPT
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
3
4
B
in [mm]
39/64
[14.78]
45/64
[17.86]
29/32
[23.02]
1
[25.40]
1 13/64
[30.56]
1 1/2
[38.10]
2
[50.80]
2 19/64
[58.34]
C
in [mm]
3 51/64
[96.44]
4 13/64
[106.76]
4 1/2
[114.30]
5 13/64
[132.16]
6
[152.40]
6 45/64
[170.26]
9 19/32
[243.68]
11 13/64
[284.56]
D
in [mm]
1 29/32
[48.42]
2 19/64
[58.34]
2 45/65
[68.66]
3 13/64
[81.36]
3 45/64
[94.06]
4 19/64
[109.14]
5 51/64
[147.24]
7
[177.80]
E
in [mm]
4 7/32
[107.16]
5 1/8
[130.18]
6 1/16
[153.99]
6 15/16
[176.21]
7 61/64
[202.01]
9 27/64
[239.32]
14 1/4
[361.95]
14 29/64
[367.11]
Weight lbs
(kg)
0.5
(0.22)
0.75
(0.34)
1.5
(0.68)
1.625
(0.74)
1.75
(0.8)
3.5
(1.6)
9.5
(4.3)
18
(8.2)
Connection
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Threaded
Socket
Threaded
Socket
Threaded
Socket
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Threaded
Socket
Threaded
Socket
Threaded
Socket
Connection
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Threaded
Socket
Threaded
Socket
Threaded
Socket
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Socket/Threaded
Threaded
Socket
Threaded
Socket
Threaded
Socket

V
a
v
e
s
,

C
h
e
c
k
V
A
L
V
E
S
Brass Inline Check Valve
Economical, Spring-Loaded for Fast Seating
Series
BICV
The Series BICV Brass Inline Check Valves are ideal for use with a
broad array of service mediums including compatible oils, gases, fuels and
hydrocarbons. They incorporate a soft seat for a bubble-tight shutoff and are
spring-loaded for rapid reseating at high and low temperatures. The Series
BICV was designed with a smooth flow profile to minimize head loss and
accumulation of debris. The low 0.5 psi (0.04 bar) cracking pressure and
patented guided-disc technology ensure reliability at low and high service
pressure.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquids and gases compatible with wetted material.
Body: 1 piece.
Line Size: See model chart.
Process Connection: Female NPT.
Pressure Limits: 1/4 to 2: 400 psi (27.6 bar) WOG; 2 1/2 to 4: 175
psi (12.1 bar) WOG; All sizes: 125 psi (8.6 bar) SWP.
Wetted Materials: Valve body: Brass (CW617N); Obstructer:
Polyethermide; Seat: 1/4: NBR rubber, 3/8 to 4: Fluoroelastomer;
Spring: 302 SS.
B
CH
C
A
NPT
(SEE CHART
FOR SIZES)
5
4
3
I
2
1
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Description
Body
End Connection
Obstructer
Seat
Spring
NPT
Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
4
A
in [mm]
1 47/64
[44]
1 47/64
[44]
2 21/64
[59]
2 9/16
[65]
2 49/64
[70]
2 15/16
[74.5]
3 11/64
[80.5]
3 3/8
[85.5]
4 3/8
[111]
4 55/64
[123.5]
5 13/32
[137.5]
B
in [mm]
51/64
[20]
51/64
[20]
63/64
[25]
1 13/64
[30.5]
1 31/64
[37.5]
1 7/8
[47.5]
2 7/64
[53.5]
2 11/16
[68]
3 15/64
[82]
3 27/32
[97.5]
5
[127]
C
in [mm]
1 1/16
[27]
1 1/16
[27]
1 23/64
[34.5]
1 21/32
[42]
1 15/16
[49]
2 13/32
[61]
2 7/8
[73]
3 15/32
[88]
4 25/64
[111.5]
5 15/64
[133]
6 27/64
[163]
CH
in [mm]
51/64
[20]
51/64
[20]
63/64
[25]
1 7/32
[31]
1 1/2
[38]
1 57/64
[48]
2 1/8
[54]
2 41/64
[67]
3 17/64
[83]
3 55/64
[98]
5 3/64
[128]
I
in [mm]
25/26
[10]
13/32
[10.3]
17/32
[13.6]
35/64
[14]
21/32
[16.8]
11/16
[17.3]
11/16
[17.3]
45/64
[17.7]
15/16
[23.65]
1 1/64
[25.8]
1 3/32
[27.8]
Connection
Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
4
Cv Value
4.55
4.55
6.0
11.0
16.9
27.4
39.1
60.7
98.4
158.0
225.4
Model
BICV-0N00
BICV-0F01
BICV-0F02
BICV-0F03
BICV-0F04
BICV-0F05
BICV-0F06
BICV-0F07
BICV-0F08
BICV-0F09
BICV-0F10
Weight
3.5 oz (100 g)
5.9 oz (168 g)
5.1 oz (145 g)
7.8 oz (222 g)
10.9 oz (308 g)
1.1 lb (.051 kg)
1.6 lb (0.73 kg)
2.3 lb (1.03 kg)
4.8 lb (2.19 kg)
6.7 lb (3.04 kg)
12.4 lb (5.64 kg)

508
V
a
v
e
s
,

B
u
t
t
e
r
f
y
V
A
L
V
E
S
Butterfly Valve
Low Cost, S.A.E. Flange, Hydraulic Reservoir Shut Off Valve
Series
SAE
The Series SAE Butterfly Valves are an ideal low cost hydraulic
reservoir shut off valve. These valves are designed to meet the
demanding needs of the fluid power industry. Unique features include
an O-ring flange face seal complying with S.A.E. J518 dimensional
requirements. This design provides for bubble tight reservoir shut off
up to 25 psi (1.72 bar) and a maximum temperature of 180F (82.2C).
The compact envelope dimension reduces space requirements. Unit
allows for adjustment by incorporating an open/close detent position
lock which can be infinitely positioned to achieve a desired flow rate.
The unique design resists the vibrations associated with hydraulic
pumps and pumping systems. Optional fluoroelastomer seals and
locking handle are available.
APPLICATIONS
As a standard feature on injection molding machines and large
earth moving equipment, the low cost SAE valve provides
excellent shut-off on the reservoir side of hydraulic systems. Valve
is typically open during normal operation until service would be
required on any part of the hydraulic system at which time the
valve is closed, allowing for service without loss of hydraulic fluid.
H
F
A
J
B
L-O-RING
I.D. WIDTH
C
K
D
G
E - 4 PLACES
SPECIFICATIONS
Line Size: 2 to 5.
Body Style: 2-way, lug butterfly.
End Connections: O-ring flange face seal (SAE J518).
Pressure Limit: Shut-off: 25 psi (1.72 bar) bubble tight; Body
shell: 500 psi (34.5 bar).
Wetted Materials: Body and disc/vane: Cast iron; O-rings: Buna-
N or fluoroelastomer; Stem: Steel.
Temperature Limits: Buna-N: 180F (82C); Fluoroelastomer:
300F (149C).
Valve
Size
2
2 1/2
3
4
5
A
in (mm)
2
(50.80)
2 1/2
(63.50)
3
(76.20)
4
(101.60)
5
(127.00)
B
in (mm)
2
(50.80)
2
(50.80)
2 1/2
(63.50)
3 1/4
(82.55)
4
(101.60)
C
in (mm)
3 1/16
(77.79)
3 1/2
(88.90)
4 3/16
(106.36)
5 1/8
(130.18)
6
(152.40)
D
in (mm)
1 11/16
(42.86)
2
(50.80)
2 7/16
(61.91)
3 1/16
(77.79)
3 5/8
(92.08)
E
in (mm)
1/2
(12.70)
1/2
(12.70)
5/8
(15.88)
5/8
(15.88)
5/8
(15.88)
F
in (mm)
1 3/4
(44.45)
2 1/16
(52.39)
2 5/16
(58.74)
2 3/4
(69.85)
3 5/16
(84.14)
G
in (mm)
2 13/16
(71.44)
3 1/8
(79.38)
3 3/8
(85.73)
4
(101.60)
4 3/8
(111.13)
H
in (mm)
5 1/8
(130.18)
5 1/8
(130.18)
5 1/8
(130.18)
5 5/8
(142.88)
6
(152.40)
J
in (mm)
13/16
(20.64)
13/16
(20.64)
1 1/16
(26.99)
1 1/4
(31.75)
1 1/2
(38.10)
K
in (mm)
5
(127.00)
5
(127.00)
5
(127.00)
5
(127.00)
5
(127.00)
L
in (mm)
2 1/4
(57.15)
2 3/4
(69.85)
3 3/8
(85.73)
4 3/8
(111.13)
5 3/8
(136.53)
I.D. x
WD
1/8
(3.18)
1/8
(3.18)
1/8
(3.18)
1/8
(3.18)
1/8
(3.18)
Model
SAE-20
SAE-25
SAE-30
SAE-40
SAE-50
Fluoroelastomer O-ring seals. Add VIT suffix
(SAE-30-VIT)
Locking handle. Add LHR suffix
(SAE-30-LHR)
S.A.E. Flange Size
2
2-1/2
3
4
5

V
a
v
e
s
,

B
u
t
t
e
r
f
y
V
A
L
V
E
S
The Series PBFV Thermoplastic Butterfly Valves are an economical
thermoplastic constructed butterfly valve ideal for chemical and wastewater
applications. A one-piece body design incorporates fully supported flanged bolt
holes to prevent stressing of the mating pipe flanges. Series PBFV valves
feature a blowout-proof stainless steel stem and a unique, full body liner that has
a V-notch retention design that assures positive sealing of the liner to the valve
body. An integrally molded face seal provides positive sealing against the
mating flange without the need for additional gaskets. Plastic construction gives
this valve superior corrosion resistance and the valves will not contaminate
sensitive fluids that come into contact with them.
FEATURES
Ideal corrosion resistant butterfly valve for chemical and wastewater
applications
Easily fitted into metal piping system
Blowout proof shaft
Full body liner seal
Series
PBFV
Thermoplastic Butterfly Valve
One-Piece Body, Wafer Design
SPECIFICATIONS
Line Size: 2 to 10.
Body Style: Wafer.
End Connections: Flange, to be used with flanges that are ANSI class
150 dimensions.
Wetted Materials: Body material: PP H; Disc: PVC or CPVC; Liner and
seals: FPM or EPDM; Stem: 316 SS.
Operator: L at end of model number denotes locking hand lever. G at
end of model number denotes manual gear.
Cv
126
126
282
282
580
580
1134
1134
2311
2311
3655
2311
2311
3655
Size
2
2
3
3
4
4
6
6
8
8
10
8
8
10
Model
PBFV-202L312L
PBFV-202L311L
PBFV-203L312L
PBFV-203L311L
PBFV-204L312L
PBFV-204L311L
PBFV-206L312L
PBFV-206L311L
PBFV-208L312L
PBFV-208L312G
PBFV-210L312G
PBFV-208L311L
PBFV-208L311G
PBFV-210L311G
Cv
126
126
282
282
580
580
1134
1134
2311
2311
3655
2311
2311
3655
Size
2
2
3
3
4
4
6
6
8
8
10
8
8
10
Disc Material
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
Model
PBFV-202L322L
PBFV-202L321L
PBFV-203L322L
PBFV-203L321L
PBFV-204L322L
PBFV-204L321L
PBFV-206L322L
PBFV-206L321L
PBFV-208L322L
PBFV-208L322G
PBFV-210L322G
PBFV-208L321L
PBFV-208L321G
PBFV-210L321G
Disc Material
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
(G) (H)
(S)
(M)
(N)
(L)
(E)
(A)
(E)
(F)
K B.C.
(B)
(C)
Valve Size
2 IN
3 IN
4 IN
6 IN
8 IN/8 IN*
10 IN*
DIM A
7-57/64
[201]
9-9/64
[232]
10-3/64
[255]
11-3/16
[284]
12-23/64
[314]
14-7/8
[378]
DIM B
6-9/64
[156]
7-31/64
[190]
8-11/64
[212]
9-3/8
[238]
10-7/16
[265]
12-19/32
[320]
DIM C
4-23/32
[120]
5-23/64
[136]
5-53/64
[148]
6-29/64
[164]
7-3/32
[180]
8-35/64
[217]
DIM E
1-37/64
[40]
1-37/64
[40]
1-37/64
[40]
1-37/64
[40]
1-37/64
[40]
1-31/32
[50]
DIM E
1-3/8
[35]
1-3/8
[35]
1-3/8
[35]
1-3/8
[35]
1-3/8
[35]
1-55/64
[47]
DIM F
23/32
[18]
3/4
[19]
3/4
[19]
7/8
[22]
61/64
[24]
29/32
[23]
DIM G
4-13/32
[112]
4-13/32
[112]
4-13/32
[112]
4-13/32
[112]
4-13/32
[112]
5-11/32
[136]
DIM H
1-57/64
[48]
2-3/64
[52]
2-21/64
[112]
2-17/64
[66]
2-53/64
[72]
2-7/8
[73]
DIM K
4-59/64 & 5-23/32
[125-145]
5-57/64 & 6-11/16
[150-170]
7-3/32 & 7-9/16
[180-192]
7-31/64 & 8-15/32
[190-215]
9-29/64
[240]
10-5/8 & 11-47/64
[270-298]
DIM L
8-21/32
[220]
9-41/64
[245]
9-41/64
[245]
12-19/32
[320]
12-19/32
[320]
15-25/64
[391]
DIM M
2-3/4
[70]
2-3/4
[70]
2-3/4
[70]
2-3/4
[70]
2-3/4
[70]
4-1/64
[102]
DIM N
23/64
[9]
23/64
[9]
23/64
[9]
23/64
[9]
23/64
[9]
7/16
[11]
DIM S
13/32
[10]
31/64
[12]
5/8
[16]
25/32
[20]
25/32
[20]
1-1/32
[26]
Holes
4
8
8
8
8
8
Weight lb (kg)
4.5
(2.0)
6
(2.7)
8
(3.6)
13.5
(6.1)
21(9.5)/
30(13.6)
37
(16.8)
*Manual gear operator
Seal
EPDM
FPM
EPDM
FPM
EPDM
FPM
EPDM
FPM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
FPM
FPM
FPM
Seal
EPDM
FPM
EPDM
FPM
EPDM
FPM
EPDM
FPM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
FPM
FPM
FPM

510
V
a
v
e
s
,

B
u
t
t
e
r
f
y
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
BFV
Butterfly Valve
Low Cost, Lever Operated, Lug or Wafer Pattern, 225 psig
Series BFV Butterfly Valves
Phenolic backed cartridge seat design for extended service and ease of replacement.
Can be used for vacuum service.
Extended neck for insulation no fabricated extensions required.
Machined flats attach disc/stem no pins.
Valve features a retainer lip for dead end service.
Triple seal reduces possibility of external leakage.
Silicone free from the factory no aftermarket cleaning required.
The most critical aspect of the Series BFV Butterfly Valves is the cartridge seat design,
which alleviates installation problems associated with common dove tail design seats.
Valve torque is lower and more consistent because the seat dynamics do not rely on being
mated between two flanges. Precision machining of the disc and body allow the cartridge
design to maintain a tighter disc to seat tolerance, providing a perfect low torque seal each
and every time the valve is cycled. Seat to disc seal is independent of flange support and
capable of full rated dead end service. Select from wafer or lug patterns with either a 10-
position locking handle lever or manual gear operator. Standard valves provide bubble
tight sealing to 225 psi (15.5 bar) and are designed to comply with MSS-SP-67 and API-609.
SPECIFICATIONS
VALVE BODY
Service: Compatible liquids, gases,
and steam.
Line Size: 2 to 12.
Body Style: 2 way, wafer or lug
butterfly.
End Connections: Flange, to be used
with flanges that are ANSI Class 125
(B16.1) and ANSI Class 150 (B16.5)
dimensions.
Pressure Limit: 225 psi (15.5 bar)
WOG.
Wetted Materials:
Body material: Ductile iron;
Disc: 316 SS;
Seat and O ring: EPDM or PTFE;
Stem: 410 SS.
Temperature Limits: Disc: EPDM: 50
to 250F ( 46 to 121C); PTFE: 0 to
300F ( 18 to 149C).
Bearings: Nylatron.
Flow Rate: See Cv chart.
Operator: 2 to 6: 10 position locking
hand lever; 8 to 12: manual gear.
APPLICATIONS
Perfect for on off or throttling service
Ideal for shut off of water in chillers, cooling towers, and thermal storage systems
Irrigation systems
Tank trucks
Sewage systems, waste water treatment
BFV202WFB311HL0 WF=Wafer Pattern LT=Lug Pattern
B
A
n =
# of holes
EPDM Seats
Service Pressure
50 psi
100 psi
150 psi
200 psi
PTFE Seats
Service Pressure
50 psi
100 psi
150 psi
200 psi
Operating Torque Valves (inch lb)
Size (inches)
Size (inches)
2
86
108
126
150
2-1/2
126
144
150
198
3
179
195
210
297
4
295
310
335
400
5
540
610
699
725
6
750
780
847
940
8
1440
1490
1549
1800
10
2466
2910
3360
3890
12
3510
4100
5560
7558
2
125
130
142
180
2-1/2
130
145
160
220
3
195
210
248
340
4
390
430
443
490
5
650
690
720
795
6
890
940
974
1020
8
1690
1710
1770
1890
10
3699
4365
5040
5835
12
5265
6150
8340
11367
Degree Opening
Size
2
2 1/2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
Full Open
10
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.8
2
3
4
5
20
5
8
12
17
29
45
89
151
234
30
12
20
22
36
61
95
188
320
495
40
24
37
39
78
133
205
408
694
1072
50
45
65
70
139
237
366
727
1237
1911
60
64
98
116
230
392
605
1202
2047
3162
70
90
144
183
364
620
958
1903
3240
5005
90
135
220
302
600
1022
1579
3136
5340
8250
80
125
204
275
546
930
1437
2854
4859
7505
Cv is the number of U.S. GPM of 60F water that will pass
through the valve with a 1 PSI pressure drop.
Cv Values
Dimensions (in)
C
A
B
n =
# of holes
Size
6
8
10
12
A
8.9
10.24
11.5
13.27
B
5.47
6.89
7.99
9.53
C
2 1/4
2 1/2
2 3/4
3 1/8
n, WF
8
8
12
12
n, LT
8
8
12
12
Cv
1579
3136
5340
8250
Weight
17.2
29.1
42.33
71.65
Size
2
2 1/2
3
4
5
A
6.34
6.89
7.13
7.87
8.39
B
3.15
3.5
3.74
4.49
5
C
1 3/4
1 7/8
1 7/8
2 1/8
2 1/4
n, WF
4
4
4
4
8
Cv
135
220
302
600
1022
Weight
5.5
7.05
7.93
10.8
15.43
n, LT
4
4
4
8
8
Wafer Style
Lug Style
WAFER STYLE
WF
LUG STYLE
LT
Liner
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
Liner
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
Size
5
6
8
10
12
Size
2
2 1/2
3
4
5
Model
BFV202WFB311HL0
BFV202WFB341HL0
BFV202LTB311HL0
BFV202LTB341HL0
BFV225WFB311HL0
BFV225WFB341HL0
BFV225LTB311HL0
BFV225LTB341HL0
BFV203WFB311HL0
BFV203WFB341HL0
BFV203LTB311HL0
BFV203LTB341HL0
BFV204WFB311HL0
BFV204WFB341HL0
BFV204LTB311HL0
BFV204LTB341HL0
BFV205WFB311HL0
BFV205WFB341HL0
Model
BFV205LTB311HL0
BFV205LTB341HL0
BFV206WFB311HL0
BFV206WFB341HL0
BFV206LTB311HL0
BFV206LTB341HL0
BFV208WFB312MG0
BFV208WFB342MG0
BFV208LTB312MG0
BFV208LTB342MG0
BFV210WFB312MG0
BFV210WFB342MG0
BFV210LTB312MG0
BFV210LTB342MG0
BFV212WFB312MG0
BFV212WFB342MG0
BFV212LTB312MG0
BFV212LTB342MG0

M
a
n
u
a

G
e
a
r

O
p
e
r
a
t
o
r
s
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
MGO
Gear Operator
Rugged, Cast Iron Housing
The Series MGO Gear Operators offer heavy-duty on-off or throttling
service for valves or dampers, including our BFV Series butterfly valves. These
gear operators are self-lubricated for smooth, trouble-free operation. The
rugged, cast iron body with O-ring body seals is weatherproof. A self-locking
worm and worm gear holds the valve in the desired position. Features include
a readily accessible hand wheel, a valve position indicator and mechanical travel
stops that permit field adjustment for valve movement to specific degrees of
rotation.
When choosing a gear operator, make sure that the input/output specifications
meet those of the chosen valves requirements. To determine the input torque,
divide the required torque of the chosen valve by the mechanical advantage of
the appropriate gear operator. Once the input torque is known, the hand wheel
rim effort can be found by dividing the input required at the nut divided by the
radius of the hand wheel.
SPECIFICATIONS
Materials: Cast iron housing, hardened steel internals, NBR seals.
Keyway Type: Square ISO male.
Ratio: 2 to 6: 24:1; 8 to 10: 30:1; 12: 50:1.
Mechanical Advantage: 2 to 6: 6.72; 8 to 10: 8.1; 12: 13.5.
Model
MGO-1T
MGO-2T
MGO-3T
MGO-4T
MGO-5T
MGO-6T
Compatibility
Works with 2, 2.5, & 3 size BFV Series butterfly valves
Works with 4 size BFV Series butterfly valves
Min.
1328 (150)
1328 (150)
1328 (150)
4425 (500)
4425 (500)
8851 (1000)
Output Torque in-lb (N*m)
Max.
2390 (270)
2390 (270)
2390 (270)
6196 (1200)
6196 (1200)
10621 (1200)
C
B
A
E
H
F
G
K
J
Size in
2 6
8 10
12
A
2.047
(52 mm)
2.953
(75 mm)
3.203
(81.36 mm)
B
1.781
(45.24 mm)
2.484
(63.10 mm)
3.156
(80.17 mm)
C
2.922
(74.22 mm)
3.984
(101.20 mm)
4.656
(118.27 mm)
E
2.047
(52 mm)
2.953
(75 mm)
3.203
(81.36 mm)
F
6.000
(152.4 mm)
9.844
(250.03 mm)
8.938
(227.01 mm)
G
2.953
(75 mm)
3.391
(86.12 mm)
3.281
(83.34 mm)
H
5.906
(150.02 mm)
11.813
(300.04 mm)
11.813
(300.04 mm)
J
1.391
(35.32 mm)
2.766
(70.25 mm)
2.766
(70.25 mm)
K
.109
(2.78 mm)
.125
(3.18 mm)
.125
(3.18 mm)
Weight lb (kg)
11.5 (5.2)
11.5 (5.2)
11.5 (5.2)
28.6 (13)
28.6 (13)
33 (15)

512
V
a
v
e
s
,

B
u
t
t
e
r
f
y
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
ABFV
Automated Butterfly Valve
Resilient Seated, Direct Mount Actuators
The ABFV Series is offered with standard 316 SS disc, a through shaft that does not
come in contact with the media, and choices of EPDM, BUNA-N, or fluoroelastomer liners
for great chemical compatibility. Valve design has integral ISO mounting for direct mount
actuators creating a more compact automated package. Body is epoxy coated for durable
and attractive finish. Liner fully covers the body and assures tight seal with mating flanges
without additional gaskets. One-piece shaft ensures positive valve positioning and is an anti-
blowout design. Series ABFV is perfect for flow control of water in chillers, cooling towers,
and thermal storage systems.
ABFV valves come in two-way and three-way packages. Three-way assemblies include
valves and actuators mounted onto a 125# cast iron tee. When ordering you have the choice
of valve arrangement for mixing or diverting applications. Valves come in lug or wafer style
and wafer models have guide holes for bolts.
ABFV is an economical automated valve package with either an electric or pneumatic
modulating actuator accepts a 4 to 20 mA input for infinite valve positioning. Actuator
features include thermal overload protection to withstand stall conditions, visual position
indication and a permanently lubricated gear train.
Actuators are constructed of anodized aluminum and are epoxy coated for years of
corrosion free service.
SPECIFICATIONS
Valve Body
Body: 2 way or 3 way.
Line Size: 2 to 12.
End Connections: Wafer or lug pattern
designed for flanges to ANSI B16.1,
BS4504, DIN 2501.
Pressure Limits: Up to 8: 225 psi (15.5
bar); 10 12: 150 psi (10.3 bar).
Wetted Materials: Disc: 316 SS; Liner:
EPDM BUNA N, or Fluoroelastomer.
Temperature Limits: EPDM:
30 to 275F ( 34 to 135C); Buna N: 10
to 180F ( 12.2 to 82.2C);
Fluoroelastomer: 400F (204C).
Other Materials: Shaft: 316SS;
Bottom/top bushing: Bronze; Body: Cast
iron; Shaft seal: EPDM.
ACTUATORS
Electric U and V Series
Power Consumption: (Locked rotor
current): U 1, V 1: .55A; U 2, 3, 4, V 2,
3, 4: 0.75A; U 5, 6, 7, V 5, 6, 7: 1.1A;
U 8, V 8: 2.6A; U 9, V 9: 2.9A. (Only
for 115 VAC, for other voltages contact
the factory).
Cycle Time: (sec. per 90): U 1, V 1:
2.5; U 2, 3, V 2, 3: 5; U 4, V 4: 10; U
5, 6, V 5, 6: 15; U 7, V 7: 30; U 8,
V 8: 12; U 9, V 9: 14. (Only for 115
VAC, for other voltages contact the
factory).
Duty Cycle: U 1: 75%; U 2 to 7: 25%;
U 8, 9: 100%; V 1 to 7: 75%; V 8, 9:
100%.
NEMA 7 (Class 1, Div. II Groups A, B, C,
D).
( 18 to 65C).
Modulating Input (V Series):
4 to 20 mA.
modulating units.
Normal Supply Pressure: 80 psi (5.5
bar).
(8 bar).
Air Connections: DA1 to 5 and SR2 to
5: 1/8 female NPT, all others: 1/4
female NPT.
Air Consumption: (cu. in. per stroke)
DA1: 2.32, DA2: 6.59, DA3: 12.14, DA4:
16.32, DA5: 30.2, DA6: 45.3, DA7: 61.0,
DA8: 106.9, DA9: 137.9, DAA: 220.1,
DAB: 348.1, DAC: 915.4, SR2: 7.7,
SR3: 14.2, SR4: 17.2, SR5: 32.4, SR6:
54.4, SR7: 85.4, SR8: 122.1, SR9:
146.5, SRA: 215.1, SRB: 462.6, SRC:
945.9.
Cycle Time: (sec. per 90): DA1: .03,
DA2: .04., DA3: .08, DA4: .12, DA5: .19,
DA6: 0.27, DA7: .47, DA8: .66, DA9:
.93, DAA: 1.1, DAB: 1.7, DAC: 4.5, SR2:
.09, SR3: .14, SR4: .22, SR5: .33, SR6:
.46, SR7: .78, SR8: .90, SR9: .97, SRA:
1.34, SRB: 2.19, SRC: 6.20.
caps.
( 20 to 82C).
standard.
indicator.
Cv Values
Valve Size
2
2 1/2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
10
0.1
0.7
0.3
0.5
0.8
2
3
4
5
20
5
8
12
17
29
45
89
151
234
30
12
20
22
36
61
95
188
320
495
40
24
37
39
78
133
205
408
694
1072
50
45
65
70
139
237
366
727
1237
1911
60
64
98
116
230
392
605
1202
2034
3162
70
90
144
183
364
620
958
1903
3240
5005
80
125
204
275
546
930
1437
2854
4859
7507
90
135
220
302
600
1022
1539
3136
5340
8250
Pneumatic Electric
*Please see website for dimensional drawings

V
a
v
e
s
,

B
u
t
t
e
r
f
y
V
A
L
V
E
S
Complete Model Chart See next page for built model numbers
ABFV303WFB331DA3E SV
Two Way
Three Way
2
2 1/2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
Wafer
Lug
316 SS
316 SS
EPDM
Buna N
Fluoroelastomer
Direct Acting Rack and Pinion Actuator, Size 32
Spring Return Rack and Pinion Actuator, Size 52
Electric Two Position, Size 100
Electric Modulating, Size 100
2 Way, Normally Open
2 Way, Normally Closed
3 Way, Common/NO/NC
3 Way, Common/NC/NO
3 Way, NO/Common/NC
3 Way, NC/Common/NO
3 Way, NO/NC/Common
3 Way, NC/NO/Common
Factory Mounted Solenoid Valve (Pneumatic Only)
Explosion Proof Electric Actuator (Electric Only)
Example
Construction
Configuration
Size
Body
Stem
Disc
Liner
Actuator Type
Arrangement
Options
ABFV
ABFV
3
2
3
03
02
25
03
04
05
06
08
10
12
WFB
WFB
LTB
3
3
3
3
1
1
2
3
DA3
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
DA5
DA6
DA7
DA8
DA9
DAA
DAB
DAC
SR2
SR3
SR4
SR5
SR6
SR7
SR8
SR9
SRA
SRB
SRC
U 1
U 2
U 3
U 4
U 5
U 6
U 7
U 8
U 9
U A
V 1
V 2
V 3
V 4
V 5
V 6
V 7
V 8
V 9
V A
E
A
C
E
G
I
K
L
M
SV
SV
EX
For Electric U and V actuators middle term, V 1, is the power supply required. Model Code 1 is for 120 VAC, 2 is for 220 VAC, 3 is for 24 VAC and 4 is for 24 VDC.
Example, U11, is 120 VAC two position. Consult factory for pricing.
Example:
3-way top view
(Common/NO/NC)
NO Common
NC
Series
ABFV

514
V
a
v
e
s
,

B
u
t
t
e
r
f
y
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
ABFV
2-Way, Lug Style, EPDM Liner
For your convenience, sample model configurations are listed with the proper sized actuators. Models listed have cast iron body, 316 SS disc, and EPDM liner and o-rings. The 2-way models
have a valve arrangement shown of normally closed, while the 3-way models have no valve arrangement code shown, please specify when ordering. All electric actuators shown are 115 VAC
and NEMA 4. All pneumatic actuators are sized with an air supply pressure of 80 psi. Consult the factory for model number changes for electric actuator options of explosion-proof and other
supply voltages.
Size
2
2 1/2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
Double Acting Pneumatic Spring Return Pneumatic
Two Position Electric Modulating Electric
Model Numbers shown are normally closed, change the model code at the end from C to A for normally open.
2-Way, Wafer Style, EPDM Liner
Size
2
2 1/2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
Model Numbers shown are normally closed, change the model code at the end from C to A for normally open.
3-Way, Lug Style, EPDM Liner
Size
2
2 1/2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
*Complete model includes Valve Arrangement - see Model Chart on previous page.
Model
ABFV202LTB331DA3C
ABFV225LTB331DA3C
ABFV203LTB331DA3C
ABFV204LTB331DA3C
ABFV205LTB331DA5C
ABFV206LTB331DA5C
ABFV208LTB331DA6C
ABFV210LTB331DA8C
ABFV212LTB331DAAC
Model
ABFV202LTB331SR4C
ABFV225LTB331SR4C
ABFV203LTB331SR5C
ABFV204LTB331SR6C
ABFV205LTB331SR6C
ABFV206LTB331SR8C
ABFV208LTB331SR8C
ABFV210LTB331SR9C
ABFV212LTB331SRBC
Model
ABFV202LTB331U12C
ABFV225LTB331U12C
ABFV203LTB331U13C
ABFV204LTB331U14C
ABFV205LTB331U16C
ABFV206LTB331U16C
ABFV208LTB331U17C
ABFV210LTB331U19C
ABFV212LTB331U19C
Model
ABFV202LTB331V12C
ABFV225LTB331V12C
ABFV203LTB331V13C
ABFV204LTB331V14C
ABFV205LTB331V16C
ABFV206LTB331V16C
ABFV208LTB331V17C
ABFV210LTB331V19C
ABFV212LTB331V19C
Model
ABFV202WFB331DA3C
ABFV225WFB331DA3C
ABFV203WFB331DA3C
ABFV204WFB331DA3C
ABFV205WFB331DA5C
ABFV206WFB331DA5C
ABFV208WFB331DA6C
ABFV210WFB331DA8C
ABFV212WFB331DAAC
Model
ABFV202WFB331SR4C
ABFV225WFB331SR4C
ABFV203WFB331SR5C
ABFV204WFB331SR6C
ABFV205WFB331SR6C
ABFV206WFB331SR8C
ABFV208WFB331SR8C
ABFV210WFB331SR9C
ABFV212WFB331SRBC
Model
ABFV202WFB331U12C
ABFV225WFB331U12C
ABFV203WFB331U13C
ABFV204WFB331U14C
ABFV205WFB331U16C
ABFV206WFB331U16C
ABFV208WFB331U17C
ABFV210WFB331U19C
ABFV212WFB331U19C
Model
ABFV202WFB331V12C
ABFV225WFB331V12C
ABFV203WFB331V13C
ABFV204WFB331V14C
ABFV205WFB331V16C
ABFV206WFB331V16C
ABFV208WFB331V17C
ABFV210WFB331V19C
ABFV212WFB331V19C
Model*
ABFV302LTB331DA3
ABFV325LTB331DA3
ABFV303LTB331DA4
ABFV304LTB331DA5
ABFV305LTB331DA6
ABFV306LTB331DA7
ABFV308LTB331DA9
ABFV310LTB331DAA
ABFV312LTB331DAB
Model*
ABFV302LTB331SR5
ABFV325LTB331SR6
ABFV303LTB331SR6
ABFV304LTB331SR7
ABFV305LTB331SR9
ABFV306LTB331SR9
ABFV308LTB331SR9
ABFV310LTB331SRB
ABFV312LTB331SRC
Model*
ABFV302LTB331U13
ABFV325LTB331U14
ABFV303LTB331U15
ABFV304LTB331U16
ABFV305LTB331U16
ABFV306LTB331U17
ABFV308LTB331U19
ABFV310LTB331U19
ABFV312LTB331U1A
Model*
ABFV302LTB331V13
ABFV325LTB331V14
ABFV303LTB331V15
ABFV304LTB331V16
ABFV305LTB331V16
ABFV306LTB331V17
ABFV308LTB331V19
ABFV310LTB331V19
ABFV312LTB331V1A
OPTIONS
Solenoid Valve Add suffix SV

V
a
v
e
s
,

S
h
u
t
t
e
V
A
L
V
E
S
CVA Series Actuated Valves
Integrated pneumatic actuator.
NAMUR solenoid mounting pad.
Operating life over 1,000,000 cycles.
Use in any mounting position.
Ideal for air drying, laundry, dispensing, and pollution control equipment, process control
applications, textile dyeing and drying, and industrial compressors.
Series CVA actuated valves combine a pneumatic actuator and a fast on-off control
valve into one body, eliminating packing glands, actuators, and mounting kits. There are
no exposed moving parts, eliminating pinch points and increasing operator safety. Because
the actuator is part of the valve, costs are greatly reduced when compared to standard
actuated valves. Balanced design reduces friction and wear, allowing the operating life to
be tested to well over 1,000,000 cycles. The stroke is linear and parallel to the flow,
dramatically reducing the required force to close or open the valve. The internal waterway
design allows for optimum flow characteristics.
The pneumatic actuated valve can be double acting, spring return normally closed or
normally open. The double acting model uses two supply ports (1/8 NPT) with one driving
the valve open and the other driving the valve closed. Normally closed spring return
pneumatic actuated models use the air supply to open the valve and internally loaded
springs return the valve to the closed position. The normally open spring return model
uses the air supply to close the valve and internally loaded springs return the valve to the
open position.
APPLICATIONS
Ideal to use as an automated on/off valve on the compressed air lines for pneumatic
conveying systems or pulse jet dust collectors.
Series
CVA
Compact Valve and Actuator
Pneumatic Actuated, Direct Acting or Spring Return
SPECIFICATIONS
Body: 1 piece.
End Connections: NPT female.
Wetted Materials: Body: Nickel plated brass; Seals: Buna N, fluoroelastomer or
EPDM.
Temperature Limit: Buna N (NBR) seals: 4 to 176F ( 20 to 80C);
Fluoroelastomer seals: 4 to 302F ( 20 to 150C); EPDM seals: 4 to 302F ( 20
to 150C).
ACTUATORS
Pneumatic Type: DA is double acting and SR is spring return.
Normal Supply Pressure: 43.5 psig (3 bar) for double acting; 61 psig (4.2 bar) for
spring return.
Maximum Supply Pressure: 116 psig (8 bar) for double acting; 116 psig (8 bar)
for spring return.
Air Connections: 1/8 NPT.
Air Consumption: 3/8: 0.73 cu. in.; 1/2: 1.05 cu. in.; 3/4: 1.90 cu. in.; 1: 2.45
cu. in.; 1 1/4: 4.58 cu. in.; 1 1/2: 6.70 cu. in.; 2: 12.75 cu. in.
Stroke Time: DA01 & DA02: .01 sec; DA03 & DA04: .02 sec; DA05: .03 sec;
DA06: .06 sec; DA07: .07 sec.(spring stroke) NC01 & NC02: .02 sec; NC03: .03
sec; NC04 .04 sec; NC05: .07 sec; NC06: .11 sec; NC07: .13 sec. (air stroke)
NC01 & NC02: .01 sec; NC03 & NC04 .02 sec; NC05: .04 sec; NC06: .06 sec;
NC07: .07 sec. NO same as NC.
Accessory Mounting: NAMUR.
C
B
E
A
2x 1/8 NPT PORTS
4x 10-24 UNC-2B
NAMUR INTERFACE
Size
in [mm]
3/8
[9.53]
1/2
[12.7]
3/4
[19.05]
1
[25.4]
1 1/4
[31.75]
1 1/2
[38.1]
20
[50.8]
A
in [mm]
2 7/32
[56.36]
2 15/64
[56.76]
2 9/32
[57.94]
3
[76.2]
3 19/32
[91.28]
4
[101.6]
4 1/2
[114.3]
B
in [mm]
1 3/16
[30.16]
2
[50.8]
2 7/64
[53.58]
2 47/64
[69.45]
3 11/32
[84.93]
3 25/32
[96.04]
4 19/64
[190.14]
C
in [mm]
3 3/8
[85.73]
4 7/32
[107.16]
4 59/64
[125.02]
5 5/16
[134.94]
6 1/32
[153.19]
6 47/64
[171.05]
7 33/64
[190.9]
E
in [mm]
1 7/32
[30.96]
1 5/16
[33.34]
1 33/64
[38.5]
1 41/64
[41.67]
1 29/32
[48.42]
2 1/8
[53.98]
2 23/64
[59.93]
Spring Return:
Normally Open
Spring Return:
Normally Closed Double Acting Seat & Seal
Material
Fluoroelastomer
Fluoroelastomer
Fluoroelastomer
Fluoroelastomer
Fluoroelastomer
Fluoroelastomer
Fluoroelastomer
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
BUNA N
BUNA N
BUNA N
BUNA N
BUNA N
BUNA N
BUNA N
Size
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
Cv
8
10
13
17
28
57
81
8
10
13
17
28
57
81
8
10
13
17
28
57
81
*Solenoid Valve See Model SV3
Model
CVAA-NO01
CVAA-NO02
CVAA-NO03
CVAA-NO04
CVAA-NO05
CVAA-NO06
CVAA-NO07
CVAB-NO01
CVAB-NO02
CVAB-NO03
CVAB-NO04
CVAB-NO05
CVAB-NO06
CVAB-NO07
CVAC-NO01
CVAC-NO02
CVAC-NO03
CVAC-NO04
CVAC-NO05
CVAC-NO06
CVAC-NO07
Model
CVAA-NC01
CVAA-NC02
CVAA-NC03
CVAA-NC04
CVAA-NC05
CVAA-NC06
CVAA-NC07
CVAB-NC01
CVAB-NC02
CVAB-NC03
CVAB-NC04
CVAB-NC05
CVAB-NC06
CVAB-NC07
CVAC-NC01
CVAC-NC02
CVAC-NC03
CVAC-NC04
CVAC-NC05
CVAC-NC06
CVAC-NC07
Model
CVAA-DA01
CVAA-DA02
CVAA-DA03
CVAA-DA04
CVAA-DA05
CVAA-DA06
CVAA-DA07
CVAB-DA01
CVAB-DA02
CVAB-DA03
CVAB-DA04
CVAB-DA05
CVAB-DA06
CVAB-DA07
CVAC-DA01
CVAC-DA02
CVAC-DA03
CVAC-DA04
CVAC-DA05
CVAC-DA06
CVAC-DA07

516
V
a
v
e
s
,

Z
o
n
e
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
ZV1
Two-Way Zone Valve
Economical, Manual Override
ZV1 Series Zone Valves are ideal for flow control in hot and cold water HVAC
systems. Zone valves are typically used in conjunction with a thermostat to control room
temperature. The ZV1 is electrically driven to open and spring to close. Units are available
in 1/2, 3/4, and 1 sizes with 24 or 120 VAC power supply. Easy to install these units are
direct replacements for competitor units. Manual override lever is easily accessible
externally. Consult factory for 220 VAC power supply, optional auxiliary switches, and BSP
or sweat connections.
Normally Open
ZV1022-NO
ZV1024-NO
ZV1032-NO
ZV1034-NO
ZV1042-NO
ZV1044-NO
SPECIFICATIONS
Body: 2 way.
End Connections: Female NPT (optional BSP, sweat connections).
Pressure Limits: Maximum: 300 psi (20.7 bar); Close off: 1/2 to 3/4: 22 psi (1.5
bar), 1: 14.5 psi (1 bar).
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 32 to 104F (0 to 40C); Process: 32 to 201F (0 to
94C).
Wetted Materials: Brass, stainless steel, NBR.
Flow Characteristic: Quick opening.
Power Requirements: 120 VAC or 24 VAC, 10%, 50/60 Hz (optional 220 VAC).
Input: On/off.
Electrical Connection: 22 AWG, 5 (127 mm) long.
Cycle Time: Opening time: 11 seconds; Closing time: 5 seconds.
Cv
3.78
3.78
3.78
3.78
8.02
8.02
Size
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
1
1
Size
1/2
3/4
1
A [in (mm)]
4.15 (105.5)
4.15 (105.5)
4.31 (109.5)
C [in (mm)]
2.48 (63)
2.48 (63)
2.48 (63)
B [in (mm)]
3.54 (90)
3.66 (93)
3.74 (95)
A
B C
Series
3ZV1
Three-Way Zone Valve
Economical, Manual Override
3ZV1 Series Zone Valves are ideal for flow control in hot and cold water HVAC
systems. The 3ZV1 is electrically driven to open and spring to close. Units are available in
1/2, 3/4, and 1 sizes with 24 or 120 VAC power supply. Easy to install these units are
direct replacements for competitor units. Manual override lever is easily accessible
externally. Consult factory for 220 VAC power supply, optional auxiliary switches, and BSP
or sweat connections.
SPECIFICATIONS
Body: 3 way.
End Connections: Female NPT (optional BSP, sweat connections).
Pressure Limits: Maximum: 300 psi (20.7 bar); Close off: see model chart.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 32 to 104F (0 to 40C); Process: 32 to 201F
(0 to 94C).
Wetted Materials: Brass, stainless steel, NBR.
Power Requirements: 120 VAC or 24 VAC, 10%, 50/60 Hz (optional 220 VAC).
Input: On/off.
Electrical Connection: 22 AWG, 5 (127 mm) long.
Cycle Time: Opening time: 11 seconds; Closing time: 5 seconds.
Cv
3.78
3.78
3.78
3.78
8.02
8.02
Size
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
1
1
Supply Voltage
120 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
Size
1/2
3/4
1
A [in (mm)]
4.57 (116)
4.69 (119)
4.92 (125)
C [in (mm)]
2.48 (63)
2.48 (63)
2.48 (63)
B [in (mm)]
3.54 (90)
3.66 (93)
3.74 (95)
A
B
Model
3ZV1022
3ZV1024
3ZV1032
3ZV1034
3ZV1042
3ZV1044
C
Normally Closed
ZV1022
ZV1024
ZV1032
ZV1034
ZV1042
ZV1044
Model
Close-off Pressure psi (bar)
22 (1.5)
22 (1.5)
14.5 (1.0)
14.5 (1.0)
10 (.70)
10 (.70)
Supply Voltage
120 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC

V
a
v
e
s
,

Z
o
n
e
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
ZV2
Two-Way Detachable Zone Valves
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
A [in (mm)]
4.53 (115)
4.53 (115)
4.61 (117)
5.16 (131)
C [in (mm)]
2.64 (67)
2.64 (67)
2.64 (67)
2.64 (67)
B [in (mm)]
3.15 (80)
3.50 (89)
3.66 (93)
4.13 (105)
A
B
C
TURN KEY TURN KEY
ZV2 Series Zone Valves are ideal for flow control in hot and cold water HVAC
temperature. The ZV2 is electrically driven to open and or close via a bidirectional motor.
Units are available in 1/2, 3/4, 1, and 1-1/4 sizes with 24 or 120 VAC power supply.
Easy to install, these units are direct replacements for competitor units. Manual override
lever is easily accessible externally. Consult factory for 220 VAC power supply, optional
auxiliary switches, and BSP or sweat connections.
ZV2 models come in floating or modulating input types. Floating units are controlled
directly from the thermostat and modulation units accept either a 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10
VDC input. Modulating models include a motor time out feature that automatically turns
off the motor after the full stroke of the valve to increase motor life. Featured in the ZV2
is a detachable actuator that is easily removable by a turn key allowing the valve body to
be installed without the actuator. Actuator housing is constructed of fire resistant plastic.
SPECIFICATIONS
Body: 2 way, normally closed.
End Connections: Female NPT
(optional BSP, sweat connections).
Pressure Limits: Maximum: 300 psi
(20.7 bar); Close off: 43 psi (2.96 bar).
104F (0 to 40C); Process: 37 to 201F
(3 to 94C).
Wetted Materials: Brass, stainless
steel, NBR.
Input: Floating: 3 wire; Modulating: 0 to
10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA (24 VAC power
only).
Power Requirements: 120 VAC or 24
VAC, 10%, 50/60 Hz (optional 220
VAC).
Power Consumption: Floating: 2.5 VA;
Modulating: 3.5 VA.
Electrical Connection: 18 AWG
jacketed, 9 (228 mm) long.
Cycle Time: Opening time: 50 to 65
seconds.
Housing Material: PVC and
polycarbonate.
Model
ZV20212
ZV20214
ZV20224
ZV20312
ZV20314
ZV20324
Cv
3.8
3.8
3.8
3.8
3.8
3.8
Size
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
Supply Voltage
120 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
Series
3ZV2
Three-Way Detachable Zone Valves
3ZV2 Series Zone Valves are ideal for flow control in hot and cold water HVAC
temperature. The 3ZV2 is electrically driven to open and or close via a bidirectional motor.
Units are available in 1/2, 3/4, 1, and 1-1/4 sizes with 24 or 120 VAC power supply.
Easy to install, these units are direct replacements for competitor units. Manual override
lever is easily accessible externally. Consult factory for 220 VAC power supply, optional
auxiliary switches, and BSP or sweat connections.
3ZV2 models come in floating or modulating input types. Floating units are controlled
directly from the thermostat and modulation units accept either a 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10
VDC input. Modulating models include a motor time out feature that automatically turns
off the motor after the full stroke of the valve to increase motor life. Featured in the 3ZV2
is a detachable actuator that is easily removable by a turn key allowing the valve body to
be installed without the actuator. Actuator housing is constructed of fire resistant plastic.
SPECIFICATIONS
Body: 3 way.
End Connections: Female NPT
(optional BSP, sweat connections).
Pressure Limits: Maximum: 300 psi
(20.7 bar); Close off: 43 psi (2.96 bar).
104F (0 to 40C); Process: 37 to 201F
(3 to 94C).
Wetted Materials: Brass, stainless steel,
NBR.
Input: Floating: 3 wire; Modulating: 0 to
10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA (24 VAC power
only).
Power Requirements: 120 VAC or 24
VAC, 10%, 50/60 Hz (optional 220
VAC).
Power Consumption: Floating: 2.5 VA;
Modulating: 3.5 VA.
Electrical Connection: 18 AWG
jacketed, 9 (228 mm) long.
Cycle Time: Opening time: 50 to 65
seconds.
Housing Material: PVC and
polycarbonate.
Model
3ZV20212
3ZV20214
3ZV20224
3ZV20312
3ZV20314
3ZV20324
Cv
3.8
3.8
3.8
5.4
5.4
5.4
Size
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
Supply Voltage
120 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
Model
ZV20412
ZV20414
ZV20424
ZV20512
ZV20514
ZV20524
Cv
8.0
8.0
8.0
11.7
11.7
11.7
Size
1
1
1
1 1/4
1 1/4
1 1/4
Supply Voltage
120 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
A
B
C
TURN KEY TURN KEY
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
A [in (mm)]
4.53 (115)
4.53 (115)
4.61 (117)
5.16 (131)
C [in (mm)]
2.64 (67)
2.64 (67)
2.64 (67)
2.64 (67)
B [in (mm)]
3.15 (80)
3.50 (89)
3.66 (93)
4.13 (105)
Model
3ZV20412
3ZV20414
3ZV20424
3ZV20512
3ZV20514
3ZV20524
Cv
6.7
6.7
6.7
9.8
9.8
9.8
Size
1
1
1
1 1/4
1 1/4
1 1/4
Supply Voltage
120 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
Input
Floating
Floating
Modulating
Floating
Floating
Modulating
Input
Floating
Floating
Modulating
Floating
Floating
Modulating
Input
Floating
Floating
Modulating
Floating
Floating
Modulating
Input
Floating
Floating
Modulating
Floating
Floating
Modulating

518
V
a
v
e
s
,

D
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

P
u
s
e
V
A
L
V
E
S
Diaphragm Valves
Series
DCV/RDCV
DCV62T1D
DCV20C1D
RDCV62T
RDCV20C
The Series DCV/RDCV Dust Collection Valves are ideal for use with the Series
DCT1000 and Series DCT500 duct collection timer boards for controlling the air pulse in
jet pulse type dust collectors to clean the filters. Both the Series DCV and RDCV have the
option for either coupling or NPT connections. The coupling connection allows for a quick
and simple installation. Only the stub pipe and blowtube need to be cleaned and deburred
before the valve is fit into position. The T Series DCV has female threaded connections.
Both the C and T versions have a 90 angle between the inlet and outlet the most suit-
able configuration for pulse valve applications. The design offers not only ease of installa-
tion, but also minimal airflow restriction for an exceptional cleaning pulse. The valves are
offered in both integrated and remote coil configurations.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases, filtered and oil free.
Wetted Materials: Body: Aluminum; Trim: 304 SS; Diaphragm and seals: NBR;
Diaphragm disc: Polyamide.
Other Materials: Cover: Aluminum; Body bolts and spring: 304 SS.
Pressure Limits: Minimum of 4.4 psi (0.3 bar), maximum of 124.7 psi (8.6 bar).
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 4 to 140F ( 20 to 60C) for RDCV models, 4 to
122F ( 20 to 50C) for DCV models; Operating: 4 to 185F ( 20 to 85C).
Power Requirements: 110 VAC, 10 to 20 for 220 VAC, or to 30 for 24 VDC for
DCV models.
Power Consumption: 12 W, inrush: 17 VA; holding: 14.5 VA for DCV models.
Electrical Connection: DIN connection for DCV models.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65) for DCV models.
Model
RDCV20T
RDCV20C
DCV20T1D
DCV20C1D
RDCV25T
RDCV25C
DCV25T1D
DCV25C1D
RDCV35T
RDCV35C
DCV35T1D
DCV35C1D
RDCV45T
RDCV45C
DCV45T1D
DCV45C1D
RDCV50T
DCV50T1D
RDCV62T
DCV62T1D
RDCV76T
DCV76T1D
Solenoid
Remote
Remote
Integral*
Integral*
Remote
Remote
Integral*
Integral*
Remote
Remote
Integral*
Integral*
Remote
Remote
Integral*
Integral*
Remote
Integral*
Remote
Integral*
Remote
Integral*
Connection
NPT
Coupling
NPT
Coupling
NPT
Coupling
NPT
Coupling
NPT
Coupling
NPT
Coupling
NPT
Coupling
NPT
Coupling
NPT
NPT
NPT
NPT
NPT
NPT
Number of
Diaphragms
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
Size
3/4
1
1 1/2
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
* 110 VAC with DIN Connector.
Model
A-237
A-238
Description
1/8 NPT
3/8 NPT
The Muffler Accessory can be easily field installed to any diaphragm valve with an ex-
haust. Pneumatic exhaust ports are on the diaphragm valves that have dual diaphragms
and the units with the integral mounted solenoid. The muffler decreases the amount of
noise when the air is exhausted from the valve. Valves with dual diaphragms and an inte-
gral solenoid have two exhaust ports and will require one A-237 and one A-238.
A-238 A-237
ACCESSORIES
Fits Valve Sizes
3/4, 1, 1 1/2, RSV
1 1/2, 2, 1 1/2, 3
Cv
Factor
(gal/min)
14
23
42
51
106
136
167

V
a
v
e
s
,

S
o
e
n
o
d
V
A
L
V
E
S
Pilot Solenoid Valve
For Use with Remote Valves
Series
RSV
13/16
[21]
1-21/32
[42]
1-1/8
[32]
5/8
[16]
25/32
[19.5]
1-1/2
[38.5]
2-9/32
[83.5]
(WIDTH)
1-11/32
[34]
RSV1D RSV1L
The Series RSV Pilot Solenoid Valve is used to operate the Series RDCV
remote type diaphragm valve to air pulse clean filters in dust collectors. Consult
factory for mounting of RSV valves with our DCT timer boards together in one
enclosure all pre-wired.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases,
filtered and oil free.
Wetted Materials: Body:
Aluminum; Core and spring: 304
SS; Seals: NBR.
Pressure Limits: Minimum of 4.4
psi (0.3 bar), maximum of 124.7
psi (8.6 bar).
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 4
to 122F ( 20 to 50C); Operating:
4 to 185F ( 20 to 85C).
220 VAC, or 24 VDC.
Power Consumption: 12 W,
inrush: 17 VA, holding: 14.5 VA.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X
(IP65).
Electrical Connection: DIN
connection or wire leads, 18
AWG, 22 (55 cm) long.
Process Connection: 1/8
female NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Any
position.
Weight: 0.60 lb (0.27 kg).
Pneumatic Tube Length:
Maximum of 9.8 ft (3 m).
Model
RSV1D
RSV2D
RSV3D
RSV1L
RSV2L
RSV3L
Electrical
Connections
DIN
DIN
DIN
Wire Leads
Wire Leads
Wire Leads
Voltage
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VDC
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VDC
Cv
.33
.33
.33
.33
.33
.33
Bulk Head Connector
Coupling Accessories
Series
BHC
B
A
BHC35DD BHC35D
Series BHC Bulk Head Connectors allow for easy installation of blow tube
through the dust collector wall and eliminate the need for welding or use of
additional flanges. The fittings enable easy removal and reassembly of blow
tubes for cleaning and maintenance. BHC models are available in single
connection for through tube mounting or double connection for two piece tube
mounting.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Material: Body, ring nut, DIN nut: Aluminum; Washer: SS41;
Gasket: NBR.
Pressure Limits: 124.7 psi (8.6 bar).
Model
BHC20D
BHC20DD
BHC25D
BHC25DD
BHC35D
BHC35DD
Size
3/4
3/4
1
1
1 1/2
1 1/2
Model
BHC20D
BHC20DD
BHC25D
BHC25DD
BHC35D
BHC35DD
A in (mm)
2 3/8 (60.5)
3 19/32 (91)
2 23/32 (69)
3 31/32 (101)
2 15/16 (75)
4 11/32 (110)
B in (mm)
2 5/16 (58.5)
2 5/16 (58.5)
2 3/4 (70)
2 3/4 (70)
3 15/32 (88)
3 15/32 (88)
D in(mm)
1 25/32 to 2
(45 to 51)
2 7/32 to 2 7/16
(56 to 62)
2 27/32 to 3 1/16
(72 to 78)
Min L in (mm)
3 27/32
(97)
4 21/32
(118)
6 3/16
(157)
B
A
Connections
One
Two
One
Two
One
Two

520
V
a
v
e
s
,

S
o
e
n
o
d
V
A
L
V
E
S
Solenoid Valve Enclosure
For the Series RSV Remote Solenoid Valves
Series
SVE
B
D
A
C WIDTH
SVE06WP61
SVE06WP61
SVE06
SVE12
The Series SVE are multi-valve enclosures for the RSV pilot valve. The SVE
offers a convenient weatherproof enclosure package with all solenoids pre-wired
to a terminal block. Enclosures are available in 6 or 12 valve size with choice of
pilot valve voltage.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: (For RSV) Compatible gases, filtered and oil free.
Wetted Materials: (For RSV) Body: Aluminum; Core and spring: 304
SS; Seals: NBR.
Pressure Limits: (For RSV) Minimum of 4.4 psi (0.3 bar), maximum of
124.7 psi (8.6 bar).
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 4 to 122F ( 20 to 50C); Operating: 4
to 185F ( 20 to 85C).
Power Requirement: (For RSV) 110 VAC, 220 VAC, or 24 VDC.
Power Consumption: (For RSV) 12 W, inrush: 17 VA, holding: 14.5 VA.
Enclosure Material: Anodized aluminum with NBR gasket.
Electrical Connection: All RSV are pre wired to a terminal strip.
Process Connection: (For RSV) 1/8 female NPT (consult factory for
1/4 NPT).
Pneumatic Tube Length: Maximum of 9.8 ft (3 m).
Model
SVE06WP61
SVE06WP62
SVE06WP63
SVE12WP121
SVE12WP122
SVE12WP123
Quantity of
Solenoid
6
6
6
12
12
12
Enclosure
Type
Weatherproof
Weatherproof
Weatherproof
Weatherproof
Weatherproof
Weatherproof
Model
SVE06
SVE12
A (mm)
10 5/8 (270)
18 29/32 (480)
B (mm)
4 11/64 (106)
4 11/64 (106)
C (mm)
6 5/16 (160)
6 5/16 (160)
D (mm)
9 7/32 (234)
17 9/16 (446)
C WIDTH
D
A
B
Voltage
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VDC
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VDC

V
a
v
e
s
,

S
o
e
n
o
d
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series SV Solenoid Valve will electrically operate pneumatic actuators for on-off
applications. When the solenoid valve receives the electrical input signal it switches the
pneumatic supply pressure to the actuator, which moves the valve from the closed to open
position. The next impulse to the solenoid valve will make the valve move back to the closed
position. The low cost solenoid valve directly mounts onto pneumatic actuators with
standard NAMUR mounting configuration eliminating external tubing and fittings. Buna-
N O-rings are included to seal the valve ports to the side of the actuator. Standard features
include a manual override, safety position by mechanical spring, and a NEMA 4X
enclosure. Direct mounts onto D, S, J, F, C, DA, or SR actuators.
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Requirements: 120 VAC, 240 VAC, 24 VAC, 24 VDC, or 12 VDC.
Supply Pressure: 20 psi (1.4 bar) to 120 psi (8.3 bar).
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X.
Mounting: NAMUR VDI/VDE 3845.
Standard Features: Manual override, mechanical spring safety position.
Optional Features: Other power voltages.
Series
SV3
Solenoid Valve
Direct Mounts to NAMUR Pneumatic Actuators
SV3 on Type D Actuator
Series
PV
Solenoid Pilot Valve
Low Cost, Compact Design, For Use with SAV Angle Seat Valves
The Series PV three-way normally closed electro-pneumatic solenoid pilot valve can
be direct mounted to operate the Series SAV Angle Seat Valve actuators. When the
solenoid valve receives the electric input signal, it switches the pneumatic supply pressure
to the actuator, which moves the valve from the closed to open position, or reversely for
normally open valves. When the input to the solenoid valve stops, the pneumatic supply
pressure is again blocked, and the valve returns to the normal position. Suitable for use
with air or other inert gases, the valve is supplied with a DIN connector, and is fitted with
a manual override. Water can also be used as a pilot media provided that a suitable drain
line is attached to the exhaust outlet. Select the proper model according to the SAV valve
actuator diameter and power requirements.
SPECIFICATIONS
Pilot Media: Air, water, or inert gases.
Power Requirements: See model chart.
Wetted Materials: Body: Niploy coated brass; Seal: FKM.
Maximum Supply Temperature: 150 psig (10.3 bar).
Actuator Connection: PV1 : 1/8 BSP; PV2 , PV3 : 1/4 BSP.
Pilot Media Connection: 1/8 NPT.
Coil Consumption: PV1 , PV2 : AC: 9A (res.), 14A (ind.); DC: 6A; PV3 : AC: 15A
(res.), 30A (ind.); DC: 10A.
Mounting: Banjo connection.
Enclosure Rating: IP65 (with DIN connector).
Standard Features: Manual override, DIN connector.
GROUND
TERMINAL
B
C
DIN CONNECTOR
A
2-3/4
[69.3]
5-1/4
[132.1]
1-9/16
[39.6]
Model
SV3
SV3-A
SV3-B
SV3-C
SV3-D
Model
PV11
PV12
PV13
PV14
PV21
PV22
PV23
PV24
PV31
PV32
PV33
PV34
Voltage
240VAC
120VAC
24VAC
24VDC
240VAC
120VAC
24VAC
24VDC
240VAC
120VAC
24VAC
24VDC
SAV
Actuator
Diameter
1 3/4
2 1/2
3 9/16
Power
120 VAC
12 VDC
24 VDC
240 VAC
24 VAC
Dimensions
C in
(mm)
1 1/16
(27.0)
1 1/16
(27.0)
1 1/16
(27.0)
B in
(mm)
3 1/32
(77.0)
3 1/16
(77.8)
3 3/4
(95.3)
A in
(mm)
1 1/4
(31.8)
1 3/8
(35.0)
1 3/8
(35.0)

522
S
t
e
a
m

T
r
a
p
s
V
A
L
V
E
S
Thermodynamic Steam Trap
Compact, Works in Any Position
Series
TDST
Series TDST Thermodynamic Steam Traps control steam and condensate
movement to maximize removal of latent heat from steam for efficient system
operation. The thermodynamic trap has cyclic on-off operation with a disk that
is pushed open by incoming condensate and closes tightly when steam tries to
escape. The compact design allows the steam trap to be mounted in any position
and models available with an integral strainer remove the need for additional
apparatus. When the trap is mounted vertically, it self-drains, making it freeze-
resistant. The trap also handles water hammer, superheat, is resistant to
internal and external corrosion, and is easy to install. A hardened 316 SS disc
is the only moving part in the trap ensuring long service life. Audible discharge
cycling makes it simple to check steam trap operation.
SPECIFICATIONS
Line Size: 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1.
End Connection: Female NPT.
Wetted Materials: Body: 420F SS; Cap & disc: 416 SS; Strainer: SS.
Temperature Limit: 800F (426.67C).
Capacity: See capacity chart.
Size
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
Model
TDST-SSSD-N1
TDST-SSSD-N2
TDST-SSSD-N3
TDST-SSSD-N4
TDST-SSST-N1
TDST-SSST-N2
TDST-SSST-N3
TDST-SSST-N4
Integral
Strainer
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NPT
Connection
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
Capacity Chart
TDST-SSSD Maximum Capacity - lb/hr 10F Below Saturation
Differential Pressure psig (bar)
3.5
(0.24)
180
300
405
640
5
(0.34)
185
310
420
670
10
(0.7)
190
345
470
725
20
(1.4)
200
410
560
865
30
(2.1)
215
465
640
980
50
(3.4)
245
575
810
120
75
(5.2)
305
700
1000
147
100
(6.9)
370
810
1160
175
150
(10.3)
500
1000
1450
2200
200
(13.8)
610
1140
1670
2600
300
(20.7)
790
1410
2100
3250
400
(27.6)
960
1630
2430
3780
500
(34.5)
1100
1830
2750
4250
600
(41.3)
1250
2000
3050
4700
TDST-SSST Maximum Capacity - lb/hr 10F Below Saturation
NPT
Connection
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
10
(0.7)
315
315
650
650
20
(1.4)
370
370
740
740
30
(2.1)
425
425
800
800
50
(3.4)
520
520
1000
1000
75
(5.2)
575
575
1100
1100
100
(6.9)
800
800
1400
1400
150
(10.3)
900
900
1540
1540
200
(13.8)
1080
1080
1630
1630
300
(20.7)
1280
1280
1760
1760
400
(27.6)
1380
1380
1930
1930
500
(34.5)
1480
1480
2070
2070
600
(41.4)
1650
1650
2200
2200
Differential Pressure psig (bar)
No Strainer
D A
C
B
With Strainer
A
3 (76.2 mm)
3 (76.2 mm)
3 (76.2 mm)
3 1/4 (82.5 mm)
B
2 3/8 (60.3 mm)
2 3/8 (60.3 mm)
2 3/8 (60.3 mm)
2 1/2 (63.5 mm)
C
1 7/8 (47.6 mm)
1 7/8 (47.6 mm)
1 7/8 (47.6 mm)
2 1/8 (53.9 mm)
D
1 11/16 (42.84 mm)
1 11/16 (42.84 mm)
1 11/16 (42.84 mm)
1 11/16 (42.84 mm)
A
B
C
A
2 (50.8 mm)
2 11/16 (68.3 mm)
2 13/16 (71.4 mm)
3 5/16 (84.1 mm)
B
1 3/4 (44.5 mm)
1 3/4 (44.5 mm)
2 5/19 (58.7 mm)
2 1/2 (63.5 mm)
C
1 3/4 (44.5 mm)
2 (50.8 mm)
2 7/16 (61.9 mm)
2 7/8 (73.0 mm)
Size
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
Size
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
With Strainer No Strainer
Weight lb (kg)
0.8 (0.36)
1.2 (0.55)
1.85 (0.86)
3.1 (1.8)
2.4 (1)
2.3 (1)
2.7 (1.2)
3.3 (1.5)

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

t
o

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
T
r
a
n
s
d
u
c
e
r
s
V
A
L
V
E
S
Electro-Pneumatic Transducer
Low Cost, Selectable Input/Output, Manual Override
Series
EPTA
The Series EPTA is an electric to pneumatic transducer that converts an analog input
signal to a linearly proportionate pneumatic output by modulating its control valves to
regulate branch line pressure to the set point determined by the input signal. All models
incorporate two low voltage valves, an integral in-barb filter, a 0 to 30 psi analog gauge, an
anodized aluminum manifold, and brass barbed fittings. The EPTA offers adjustable span
and offset as well as manual override. This unit has no air consumption and is immune to
mounting orientation. Output pressure ranges include field selectable 0 to 10, 0 to 15, and
0 to 20 psig. Also included is an analog 0 to 5 VDC feedback signal indicating the resultant
branch line pressure. Universal 24 VAC/24 VDC supply voltage and field selectable 4 to 20
mA, 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 0 to 15 VDC inputs ensure single unit compatibility with
most systems. The standard models maintain branch pressure on power loss while the Fail-
Safe models will drop the branch pressure to 0 psi on power loss. Mounting configurations
include a metal bracket mount in the EPTA-B models and a snap-track mount in the EPTA-
S models. The A-400 accessory kit will allow the EPTA-S models to be mounted on a
standard DIN rail.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean dry air or any inert gas.
Input Signal: DC current (4 20 mA) or DC voltage (0 5/0 10/0 15).
Input Impedance: Current: 250 ohms; Voltage: Infinite.
Output Signal: Jumper selectable 0 10 psig (0 69 kPa), 0 15 psig (0 103 kPa), or 0
20 psig (0 138 kPa).
Feedback Output: 0 to 5 VDC.
Air Supply: 25 psig (172 kPa) maximum.
Air Flow: 750 scim.
Air Consumption: 0 scim normal operation, fail safe model vents to 0 psi on power
loss.
Accuracy: 1.0% full scale @ room temperature; 2.0% full scale @ 32 to 120F (0 to
48.8C).
Supply Voltage: 24 VDC (+10%/ 5%) or 24 VAC (10%) 50/60 Hz.
Supply Current: 180 mA maximum, 200 mA maximum on fail safe model.
Temperature Limits: Operating: 32 to 120F (0 to 48.8C); Storage: 20 to 150F ( 6.7
to 65.6C).
Operating Humidity Range: 5 to 95%, non condensing.
Pressure Connections: 1/4 O.D. (polyethylene tubing optimum).
Electrical Connections: Plug in block terminal type with 5 mm pin spacing.
Wire Size: Up to one 14 AWG per terminal.
Weight: EPTA S0: 6.9 oz. (196 g); EPTA S1: 9.2 oz. (261 g); EPTA B: 14.5 oz. (411 g).
Model
EPTA-S0
EPTA-B0
EPTA-S1
EPTA-B1
POWER
MANUAL
AUTO MANUAL
0% 100%
SPAN
OFFSET
10V
15V
20mA
0 10 PSI
0 15 PSI
0 20 PSI
5V
4X 13/64
[5.16]
SHOWN WITH METAL BRACKET MOUNTING
3-23/64
[85.33]
1-23/64
[34.53]
23/64
[9.13]
4-1/16
[103.19]
4-5/16
[109.54]
3-25/64
[86.12]
4-15/32
[113.5]
PWR C SIG FB OV OV
3/16
[4.76]
23/32
[18.26]
1/2
[12.7]
27/32
[21.43]
3-27/64
[86.92]
SHOWN WITH SNAP-TRACK MOUNTING
3-1/4
[82.55]
3
[76.20]
3-1/4
[82.55] 23/32
[18.26]
PWR C S FB OV OV
EPTA-B
EPTA-S
ACCESSORIES
A-400, DIN Mounting Kit
A-403, Replacement Integral Barb Filter
Description
Standard Snap Track Mount Transducer
Standard Metal Bracket Mount Transducer
Snap Track Mount Transducer with Fail Safe
Metal Bracket Mount Transducer with Fail Safe

524
C
u
r
r
e
n
t

t
o

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
T
r
a
n
s
d
u
c
e
r
s
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
IP
Current to Pressure Transducer
Intrinsically Safe, NEMA 4X Enclosure, Field Reversible, Low Cost
The Series IP Current to Pressure Transducer converts a current input
signal to a linearly proportional pneumatic output pressure. The features
include built-in volume booster, low air consumption, field reversible (provides
output which is inversely proportional to input signal) and flexible zero and
span adjustments. The rugged NEMA 4X enclosure allows splashdown and
outdoor installation. The IP can be used for applications that require operation
of valve actuators, pneumatic valve positioners, damper and louver actuators,
final control elements and relays.
1/2 NPT
FEMALE
1-1/2
[38.10]
1/4 NPT FEMALE
35/64
[13.97]
4-1/4
[107.70]
1-7/16
[36.58]
2-3/16 SQ
[55.37]
1-1/2
[38.10]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Oil free, clean dry air
filtered to 40 microns.
Input Signal: 4 20 mA.
Input Impedance: IP 42: 180
ohms; IP 43 and IP 44: 220 ohms.
Air Pressure: Minimum: 3 psig
(21 kPa) above maximum output;
Maximum: 100 psig (700 kPa).
Linearity: <0.75% of span.
Hysteresis: <1% of span.
Repeatability: <0.5% of span.
Supply Pressure Sensitivity:
<0.1% of span per psig
(<0.15% of span per 10 kPa).
Power Requirements: Loop
powered.
140F ( 30 to 60C).
Pressure Connections: 1/4
female NPT.
Electrical Connection: 1/2
female NPT.
Air Consumption: 0.03 SCFM
(0.5 m
3
/h) typical.
Output Capacity: 4.5 SCFM (7.6
m
3
/h ANR) at 25 psig (175 kPa)
supply; 12 SCFM (20 m
3
/h) at 100
psig (700 kPa) supply.
Relief Capacity: 2 SCFM (3.4
m
3
/h) at 5 psig (35 kPa) above 20
psig (140 kPa) setpoint.
Series
EP1000
E I S B LO E ON R LS
10-1/2
[266.7]
8-1/5
[215.9]
Model
IP-42
IP-43
IP-44
Input
Ranges
4 20 mA
4 20 mA
4 20 mA
Stop wasting time and money trying to find a suitable location to mount
your controller and current to pressure trans ducer The Series EP1000
Electro-pneumatic Controller combines the highest quality instrumentation in
one compact NEMA 4X enclosure for easy, low cost installation. Simply provide
a supply pressure and voltage with a standard thermocouple, RTD, DC voltage
or DC current input to this unit and a traditional pneumatic process quickly
converts to a state-of-the-art electronic operation. The versatile microprocessor
based controller incorporates a high level of standard features. Typical function
setup items appear in the control menu only when the function is se lected, so
you dont have to wade through unnecessary items. Standard features include
Self-Tune,fully adjustable PID and Auto/Manual control. Combine this versatile
controller with the Hi-Flow
Valve for excellent process operation in industries

like food and beverage processing, pulp and paper, chemical and pharmaceutical.
Model
EP1000
EP1011
OU P T U P Y
6-1/4
[158.75]
1-5/8
[41.28]
Electro-pneumatic Controller
Low Cost, Easy Installation, Weatherproof, Fully Programmable Controller
SPECIFICATIONS
Front Panel Selectable Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, DC voltage or DC
current
Supply Pressure: Minimum: EP1000: 18 psig (1.24 bar); EP1011: 33
psig (2.28 bar). Maximum: 100 psig (6.89 bar).
Output: EP1000: 3 to 15 psig (0.21 to 1.03 bar); EP1011: 6 to 30 psig
(0.41 to 2.07 bar).
Accuracy: 1.0% of span.
Linearity: 0.75% of span.
Hysteresis: 1.0% of span.
Repeatability: 0.5% of span.
Power Requirements: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
Pressure Connections: 1/4 female NPT.
Air Consumption: 0.03 scfm (0.5 m
3
/h) typical.
Output Capacity: 4.5 scfm (7.6 m
3
/h) at 25 psig (1.72 bar) supply; 12
scfm (20 m
3
/h) at 100 psig (6.89 bar) supply.
Enclosure: NEMA 4X.
Output Range
kPa
20 100
20 185
40 200
psi
3 15
3 27
6 30
Output Range psi (bar)
3 to 15 (0.21 to 1.03)
6 to 30 (0.41 to 2.07)

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

t
o

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
T
r
a
n
s
d
u
c
e
r
s
V
A
L
V
E
S
The Series 2700 Current to Pressure Transducer combines economical startup cost,
low air consumption, and reliable performance to make the 2700 a great investment. The
unit converts a variable current signal to a proportional pneumatic output. It has input
and output ports on both the front and back which allows for versatile plumbing. The
NEMA 4X enclosure enables the unit to be installed indoors or outdoors, however, the unit
is not vibration resistant. It is FM and CSA approved for intrinsically safe operation. The
2700 is designed for remote or panel mounting. An integral volume booster provides high
flow capacity, increasing control speed in critical applications. Other features include
external zero and span adjustments which are convenient for field calibration.
The Series 2800 Current to Pressure Transducer utilizes a closed loop pressure
feedback system that closely controls output and compensates for vibration, mounting
angle, temperature, and supply pressure variations. These characteristics make this unit
ideal for field mounting on a valve. The control mechanism is a piezoceramic actuator
encapsulated in a protective skin, which provides a constant defense against humidity and
contaminants. These features make this unit ideal for use in demanding applications. The
2800 also comes in a NEMA 4X enclosure and is field reversible. It is FM and CSA
approved intrinsically safe, as well. For ease of installation, this model has input and output
ports on both the front and back and can be easily panel mounted.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Oil free, clean dry air filtered to 40 microns.
Air Supply: Minimum: 5 psig (0.3 bar) above maximum output; Maximum: 100
psig (6.9 bar).
Output: 3 to 15 psig (0.2 to 1.0 bar), 6 to 30 psig (0.4 to 2.1 bar).
Accuracy: Series 2800: 0.1% of span.
Linearity: Series 2700: <0.5% of span.
Hysteresis: Series 2700: <0.5% of span; Series 2800: 0.1% of span.
Repeatability: Series 2700: <0.5% of span; Series 2800: 0.1% of span.
Deadband: Series 2800: 0.02% of span.
Supply Pressure Sensitivity: Series 2700: <0.1% of span per 1.0 psig (0.1 bar).
Power Requirement: Loop powered.
Temperature Limits: Series 2700: 20 to 150F ( 29 to 66C); Series 2800:
Operating: 40 to 160F ( 40 to 71C); Storage: 40 to 200F ( 40 to 93C).
Air Consumption: Series 2700: 0.03 scfm (0.01 l/s) at midrange typical; Series
2800: 0.025 scfm (0.01 l/s) at midrange typical.
Output Capacity: 4.5 scfm (2.1 l/s) at 25 psig (1.7 bar) supply; 12.0 scfm (5.7 l/s)
at 100 psig (6.9 bar) supply.
Enclosure: Chromate treated aluminum with epoxy paint.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65) and intrinsically safe.
Weight: Series 2700: 1.3 lb (0.59 kg); Series 2800: 0.8 lb (0.37 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA, FM.
NEMA 4X Enclosure, Compact Size, Reliable
Series
2700 &
2800
Series 2700
39/64
[15.5]
1-11/16
[42.7]
1
[25.4]
1/8
[3.17]
DIN RAIL MOUNTING
OPTION
1-1/2
[38.1]
1-19/64
[33.0]
1/2
[12.7]
1-51/64
[45.7]
PIPE CLAMP MOUNTING
OPTION FOR 1-1/2 PIPE
2-3/16
[55.4]
3-11/16
[93.7]
5/16
[7.92]
MOUNTING HOLES
#10-32 UNF-2B x 3/8 DP
2 PLCS
2-15/16
[74.7]
22 GA. WIRE LEADS
APPROX. 18 LONG
POS, NEG, GRD
49/64
[19.4]
33/64
[13.1]
3-1/8
[79.2]
1-1/2
[38.1]
25/64
[9.72]
IN & OUT PORTS
1/4-18 NPT
4 PLCS
1-1/8
[28.7]
1/2 NPT
3-23/64
[85.3]
2-1/4
[57/2]
Series 2700
FM Intrinsically Safe Ratings:
Class I, II, III, Division 1, Groups C, D, E, F and G; Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B,
C and D; Class II and III, Division 2, Groups F and G.
CSA Intrinsically Safe Ratings: Class I, Division 2, Groups C and D; Class II,
Groups E, F and G; Class III.
Series 2800
FM Intrinsically Safe Ratings:
Class I, II, and III, Division 1, Groups C, D, E, F, and G; Class I, Zone 0, Group IIB;
Class I, II, and III, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D, F, and G.
CSA Intrinsically Safe Ratings:
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D; Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G; Class
III.
Series 2800
Model
2713-WP
2716-WP
Input
4 20 mA
4 20 mA
Model
2813-WP
2816-WP
Input
4 20 mA
4 20 mA
ACCESSORIES
A-180 Valve Mounting Kit, for Hi Flow
TM
control valves
(Series 2800 only)
A-181 DIN Rail Mounting Kit, suitable for EN 50035,
EN 50042, and EN 50022 rails
A-182 Pipe Mounting Kit, for 1 1/2 and 2 pipes
Valve Mount, for factory mounting and calibration to Hi Flow
TM
control valves, add Current to Pressure Transducer model
number as suffix (Series 2800 only)
Output
3 15 psig (0.2 1.0 bar)
6 30 psig (0.4 2.1 bar)
Output
3 15 psig (0.2 1.0 bar)
6 30 psig (0.4 2.1 bar)

526
C
u
r
r
e
n
t

t
o

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
T
r
a
n
s
d
u
c
e
r
s
V
A
L
V
E
S
The Series 2900 Current to Pressure Transducer delivers reliable high
performance for the toughest applications in the most hazardous environments.
Its NEMA 4X housing is designed and FM and CSA approved for both
intrinsically safe and explosion-proof operation. This unit has advanced circuitry
which includes electronic feedback control for superior vibration protection and
highly accurate output. The 2900 is not position sensitive and the easily
accessible zero and span adjustments make field calibration quick and easy. For
ease of installation, this model has input and output ports on both the front and
back. It is also not vibration sensitive, which makes the 2900 ideal for field
mounting on a valve. These features coupled with the units compact size help
make set-up and installation simple.
FEATURES
Designed for hazardous environments
Vibration resistant
Explosion proof
Weatherproof and intrinsically safe
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Oil free, clean dry air filtered to 40 microns.
Air Supply: Minimum: 5 psig (0.3 bar) above maximum output;
Maximum: 100 psig (6.9 bar).
Output: 3 to 15 psig (0.2 to 1.0 bar), 6 to 30 psig (0.4 to 2.1 bar).
Accuracy: 0.1% of span.
Hysteresis: 0.1% of span.
Repeatability: 0.1% of span.
Deadband: 0.02% of span.
Power Requirement: Loop powered.
Temperature Limits:
Storage: 40 to 200F ( 40 to 93C).
Air Consumption: 0.05 scfm (0.02 l/s) at midrange typical.
Output Capacity: 4.5 scfm (2.1 l/s) at 25 psig (1.7 bar) supply; 12.0
scfm (5.7 l/s) at 100 psig (6.9 bar) supply.
Enclosure: Chromate treated aluminum with epoxy paint.
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof NEMA 4X (IP65), explosion proof and
intrinsically safe.
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA, FM.
FM Ratings:
Explosion proof for Class I Division 1, Groups B, C, and D. T6, Dust
Ignitionproof for Class I, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G, T6; Intrinsically
safe for Class I, II, and III, Division 1, Groups C, D, E, F, and G, T4
hazardous (classified) locations and intrinsically safe for Class I, Zone 0,
Group IIB, T4 hazardous (classified) locations and suitable for Class I,
Groups A, B, C, D, T4, and Class II and III, Division 2, Groups F and G, T6
hazardous (classified) locations.
CSA Ratings:
Class I Division 1, Groups B, C, and D; Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B,
C and D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G; Class II and III, Division
2, Groups F and G.
Intrinsically Safe, Explosion-Proof, NEMA 4X Enclosure
Series
2900
1/2 NPT PORT FOR
CONDUIT PIPING
4-19/32
[116.6]
2-5/64
[52.6]
33/64
[13.1] 1-1/2
[38.1]
49/64
[19.4]
4 #10-32-UNF
TAPPED HOLES FOR
MOUNTING
3-1/2
[88.9]
1
[25.4]
27/32
[21.3]
2-1/2
[63.5]
2-3/16
[55.6]
57/64
[22.4]
IN & OUT
PORTS 1/4-18 NPT
4 PLACES
Model
2913-E
2916-E
Input
4 20 mA
4 20 mA
ACCESSORIES
A-180 Valve Mounting Kit, for Hi Flow
TM
control valves
Valve Mount, for factory mounting and calibration to
Hi Flow
TM
control valves, add Current to Pressure
Transducer model number as suffix
Output
3 15 psig (0.2 1.0 bar)
6 30 psig (0.4 2.1 bar)

P
o
s
t
o
n
e
r
s
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
165
PRECISOR
II Pneumatic and
Electro-Pneumatic Positioner
Low Cost, Linear Operation, Field Selectable Cam Design
The Series 165 PRECISOR
II Pneumatic and Electro-Pneumatic

Positioners deliver stable process control at an exceptionally low price. Its
rugged, durable design makes it ideal for harsh environments while maintaining
precise, accurate positioning of the control element. Units can be easily changed
from direct to reverse action, or vice versa. Low air consumption keeps
operating costs at a minimum, while still responding quickly and accurately.
Excellent for use in chemical processing, food and beverage, pulp and paper,
and pharmaceutical industries, as well as many others.
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Signal: Pneumatic: 3 to 15 psig (0.2 to 1 bar); Electro pneumatic:
4 20 mA DC.
Input Impedance: (165EL only): 250 15 ohm.
Material: Aluminum diecasting.
Air Supply: 20 to 100 psig (1.4 to 6.9 bar).
Air Supply Connection: 1/4 NPT.
Gage Connection: 1/8 NPT.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 NPT (165EL only).
Hysteresis: 1% of full scale.
Sensitivity: 0.2% of full scale.
Air Consumption: 0.10 scfm (3 LPM) at 20 psig (1.4 bar) supply.
Flow Capacity: 28 scfm (80 LPM) at 20 psig (1.4 bar) supply.
Stroke: 0.5 to 6 (10 to 150 mm).
Weight: 165NL: 3.1 lb (1.7 kg); 165EL: 6.1 lb (2.7 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE (165EL only).
3-5/8
[92.08]
M8X 1.25P
4 PLCS
2-49/64
[70.25]
1-31/32
[50.01]
4-41/64
[117.87]
1-25/32
[45.24]
M8X 1.25P
6-9/16
[166.69]
6-43/64
[169.47]
APPLICATIONS
Series 165 PRECISOR
II Pneumatic and Electro Pneumatic Positioners

provide excellent modulating control when used between the Dwyer
Temperature Controllers, Current to Pressure Transducer and the Hi
Flow
Valve in such industries as the food and beverage processing,

chemical, pharmaceutical, and wood pulp and paper.
SUGGESTED SPECIFICATIONS
Pneumatic and Electro Pneumatic Positioners shall be cam characterized,
with 0.5% full scale repeatability. The unit shall accept an input of 3 15
psig or 4 20 mA with capability of field selectable modes of direct or
reverse operation. Supply pressure shall be capable of 100 psig
maximum. Unit shall be W.E. Anderson
Positioner Series 165.

How To Order:
1. Select Model No. to specify input control signal
2. For proper mounting hardware, order according to which actuator the
positioner will be mounted to:
Model
A-233
A-234
A-235
A-236
7-1/4
[184.15]
6-33/64
[165.50]
3-9/32
[83.34]
7/8
[22.23]
13/32
[10.32]
1-37/64
[40.08]
(4) M8X 1.25P
2-3/8
[60.33]
2-9/16
[65.09]
(8) M8X 1.25P
2-3/8
[60.33]
2-49/64
[70.25]
3-39/64
[91.68]
Series 165EL
Series 165NL
Model
165NL
165EL
Mounting Kits
Valve Mount: For factory mounting and calibration to Hi Flow
control
valves, add suffix to valve model number of positioner.
Example: 2004VA32 231 165EL
Input
3 15 psig
4 20 mA
For Actuator Models
220 and 221 Air to Lower
222 and 223 Air to Lower
230 and 231 Air to Raise
233 Air to Raise

528
P
o
s
t
o
n
e
r
s
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
265
PRECISOR

II Pneumatic and
Electro-Pneumatic Positioner
Low Cost, Rotary Operation, Field Selectable Cam Design
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Signal: Pneumatic: 3 to 15 psig (0.2 to 1 bar); Electro pneumatic:
4 20 mA DC.
Input Impedance: (265ER only): 250 15 ohm.
Material: Aluminum diecasting.
Air Supply: 20 to 100 psig (1.4 to 6.9 bar).
Air Supply Connection: 1/4 NPT.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 NPT (265ER only).
Hysteresis: 1% of full scale.
Air Consumption: 0.10 scfm (3 LPM) at 20 psig (1.4 bar) supply.
Flow Capacity: 28 scfm (80 LPM) at 20 psig (1.4 bar) supply.
Stroke: 0 to 90.
Weight: 265NR: 3.1 lb (1.7 kg); 265ER: 6.2 lb (2.8 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE (265ER only).
7.244
6.516
3.268
.394
2.560
2.363
1.575
(4) M8X1.25P
(8) M8X1.25P
3.602
2.362
2.756
.984
3-5/8
[92.08]
M8X 1.25P
4 PLCS
2-49/64
[70.25]
4-15/32
[113.51]
1-25/32
[45.24]
1-31/32
[50.01]
M8X 1.25P
6-43/64
[169.47]
6-9/16
[166.69]
Series 265NR
Series 265ER
W.E. Anderson Series 265 PRECISOR
II Pneumatic and Electro-

Pneumatic Positioners combine outstanding performance with an extremely
low price, making it an exceptional value for industrial applications. Rotary
valves with single or double acting pneumatic actuators can be precisely
controlled, such as our ball and butterfly valves. The PRECISOR
II positioner
proportionally modulates the valve from either an electric 4-20 mA or pneumatic
3-15 psig input signal, based on the model chosen. Its rugged, durable design
makes it ideal for use in harsh environments, while maintaining precise,
accurate positioning of the control elements. Includes a bracket for mounting
onto actuators with NAMUR standard connections, and features a versatile
linear cam for direct action, reverse action, or split ranges. An excellent choice
when used in the chemical processing, food and beverage, pulp and paper, and
pharmaceutical industries. Consult factory for other lever types.
Pneumatic Hosing and Fittings
Hosing and fittings for connecting positioners, current to pressure transducers,
air filter gauges and other accessories to pneumatic actuated valves.
Model
265ER-S5
265ER-D5
265NR-S5
265NR-D5
Input
4 20 mA
4 20 mA
3 15 psig
3 15 psig
Lever Type
NAMUR
NAMUR
NAMUR
NAMUR
Model
A-228
A-229
A-332
Description
Stainless steel flex hose, 12 (30.48 cm) long,
1/8 male NPT connections
Stainless steel flex hose, 18 (45.72 cm) long,
1/8 male NPT connections
Brass adapter, 1/8 female NPT to 1/4 male NPT
Action
Single
Double
Single
Double

P
o
s
t
o
n
e
r
s
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
275
PRECISOR
III Electro-Pneumatic Positioners

Low Cost, Rotary Operation
W.E. Anderson Series 275 PRECISOR
III Electro-Pneumatic
Positioners combine an easy to use, high performance unit with a low price.
Series 275 models accurately control valve stroke of rotary motion valves such
as Dwyer Instruments ball or butterfly valves according to an input signal of 4
to 20 mA from the controller. Its rugged, durable design makes it ideal for harsh
environments. The NEMA 4X (IP 66) enclosure rating protects the highly
efficient microprocessing unit. An analog feedback signal is outputted to
stabilize any valve system, and easy to use functions such as auto calibration
ensure the accuracy of the Series 275. Low air consumption reduces operating
cost, but does not sacrifice the performance of the positioner. The compact
design of this unit makes it easy to use with any size actuator. PRECISOR

III
Positioners feature an LCD screen attached to the outer face of the unit,
allowing for an easy inspection of the positioner condition while in the field.
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Signal: 4 20 mA DC.
Input Impedance: 460 ohm max @ 20 mA DC.
Enclosure: Aluminum diecasting.
Air Supply: 20 to 100 psi (1.4 to 6.9 bar).
Air Connection: 1/4 NPT.
Hysteresis: 0.5% of full scale.
Air Consumption: Below 0.07 scfm (2 LPM) at 20 psig (1.4 bar) supply.
Flow Capacity: 2.5 scfm (70 LPM) at 20 psig (1.4 bar) supply.
Stroke: 0 to 90.
Temperature Limits: Operating: 40 to 185F ( 40 to 85C).
Lever: NAMUR.
6-13/64
[157.56]
3-17/32
[89.69]
21/64
[8.33]
5-11/32
[135.73]
CONDUIT
1/2
NPT 1/4
SUPPLY
6-7/64
[155.18]
31/64
[12/30]
3/8
[9.53]
13/64
[5.16]
1-25/32
[45.24]
2-11/32
[59.53]
1-25/32
[45.24]
1-21/32
[42.07]
1-25/32
[45.24]
2-49/64
[70.25]
NPT 1/4
OUT 2
NPT 1/4
OUT 1
2-3/8
[60.33]
MOUNTING BRACKETS
6-31/64
[164.70]
3-35/64
[90.09]
6-17/32
[165.89]
3-35/64
[90.09]
4-5/64
[103.58]
4-5/8
[117.48]
Communication
None
None
HART
None
None
HART
Model
275ER-S5000
275ER-S5001
275ER-S5021
275ER-D5000
275ER-D5001
275ER-D5021
Action
Single
Single
Single
Double
Double
Double
HART

Option
None
Transmitter
Transmitter
None
Transmitter
Transmitter

530
P
o
s
t
o
n

I
n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s
/
S
w
t
c
h
e
s
/
T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
V
A
L
V
E
S
Valve Position Indicator
Low Cost, Mechanical or Proximity Limit Switches
Series
VPI
The Series VPI Rotary Valve Position Indicators are compact yet rugged
for confined and severe locations. These versatile units offer visual position
indication as well as two internal limit switches. The spring-loaded splined cams
require no tools for a quick and precise adjustment. The Series VPI is available
with mechanical or proximity limit switches. The mechanical models feature
two SPDT limit switches. The proximity models feature two solid-state inductive
limit switches eliminating the need for the cams to make contact with the
switches. The NEMA 6 (IP67) rating ensures protection against the ingress of
liquid and debris.
SPECIFICATIONS
Minimum Rotation Travel: 60.
Maximum Rotation Travel: 360.
Switch Type: VPI M: (2) mechanical SPDT limit switches; VPI P: (2)
inductive proximity limit switches.
Electrical Rating: VPI M: AC: 3A at 250 V, 5A at 125 V; DC: 0.2A at 250
V, 0.4A at 125 V, 4A at 30 V.
Power Requirements: VPI P: 12 to 24 VDC, 30 VDC maximum.
Enclosure Material: Aluminum die casting.
Electrical Connections: 8 contact screw terminal strip.
Conduit Connection: (2) 1/2 female NPT.
Mounting: NAMUR.
Model
VPI-M01
VPI-P01
VPI-B01
VPI-B02
VPI-B03
VPI-B04
W4 W3
L1
L2
3-27/32
[97.5]
1-61/64
[49.8]
2-25/32
[70.8]
3-51/64
[96.5]
1/2 NPT
4-3/4
[120.5]
BRACKET
H
Model
VPI-B01
VPI-B02
VPI-B03
VPI-B04
H in (mm)
1 13/64 [30.5]
1 19/64 [40.5]
1 19/64 [40.5]
2 3/8 [60.5]
L1 in (mm)
3 5/32 [80]
5 1/8 [130]
L2 in (mm)
3 15/16 [100]
5 29/32 [150]
W3 in (mm)
1 3/16 [30]
W4 in (mm)
2 [50]
Bracket Dimensions
NEW PRODUCT!
Description
Rotary Valve Position Indicator, Dual Mechanical SPDT, 1/2 NPT Conduit
Rotary Valve Position Indicator, Dual Proximity SPDT, 1/2 NPT Conduit
Bracket 1, See Dimension Chart

P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n

I
n
d
i
c
a
t
o
r
s
/
S
w
i
t
c
h
e
s
/
T
r
a
n
s
m
i
t
t
e
r
s
V
A
L
V
E
S
Note: Stocked position indicators include two 10 amp SPDT mechanical snap
switches, are direct drive type and include the standard quarter-turn OPEN/CLOSED
visual indicator. Standard units are CSA & UL approved but not for hazardous
locations. Specify EX for hazardous location option.
FEATURES AND BENEFITS
The QUICK-VIEW
Rotary Valve Position Indicators, now UL and CSA rated, are produced
by Proximity with up to four individual mechanical or proximity switches. The QUICK-
VIEW
indicator is also available with optional backlighting. Benefits include:

The lowest cost position indication
Extremely compact design
Easily interchangeable with key competition
Backlighting option available for maximum visibility
QUICK-VIEW
Indicator and mounting kits, including NAMUR kits, are stocked for
fast delivery
Flame retardant
UV protection
Hazardous location option
APPLICATIONS
The QV Series Proximity Position Indicators are designed for maximum reliability in
general purpose and corrosive environments. Applications include: rotary and linear
valves, actuators, manual valves, gear operators and positioners.
Consult factory for optional VI colors.
Series
QV
6-32 UNC
1/4 DP [6.350]
1/4
[6.350]
1/4
[6.350]
2-3/8
[60.33]
3-1/16 3 6
[77.79]
1-1/2
[38.10]
2 MTG HOLES
1/4-20 UNC
7/16 DP [11.11]
CONDUIT
ENTRANCE
3/4 NPT
3 [76.20] CLEARANCE REQUIRED FOR COVER REMOVAL L
4-15/32
[113.5]
1/2
[12.70] ]
5/16
[7.938]
1/4 DIA.
[6.350]
SHAFT
LEVER
DRIVE
ONLY
1/8 DIA. PINS (2)
4-3/4
[120.7]
A D
W
YER
IN
STR
U
M
EN
TS CO
M
PAN
Y
FER
G
U
S FALLS, M
N
56537
M
AD
E IN
TH
E U
.S.A.
SPECIFICATIONS
Minimum Rotation Travel - Switches only: 5.
Maximum Rotation Travel - Switches only: 360.
Switch Type: SPDT.
Electrical SPDT Switch Ratings:
QV-X1XXXX: 10A @ 125/250 VAC; 0.5A 125 VDC;
10A @ 24 VDC mech. switch;
QV-X2XXXX: 1A @ 125 VAC; 1A @ 24 VDC mech. switch;
QV-X3XXXX: 2A @ 125 VAC; 2A @ 30 VDC prox. switch;
QV-X4XXXX: 5-25 VDC NAMUR sensor;
QV-X5XXXX: 10-30 VDC INDUCTIVE sensor;
QV-X6XXXX: 10A @ 125/250 VAC mech. switch.
Lighting Supply Voltage: 24-28 VDC.
Enclosure Material: Polycarbonate housing and conduit.
Conduit Entrance: One 3/4 NPT.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4, 4X. Optional explosion-proof, rated: Class I, Groups
A, B, C, D; Class II, Groups F & G; Div. 2.
Maximum Altitude: 2000 m (6560 ft).
Agency Approvals: CSA, UL, cUL.
0 None+
1 One Switch+
2 Two Switches+
3 Three Switches+
4 Four Switches+
2nd Code (2nd X) Switch Type
0 No Switches+
1 10A Mechanical Snap Switch
2 1A Mechanical Gold Contacts
3 2A Proximity Reed Switch+
4 5-25 VDC Namur Sensor
5 10-30 VDC Inductive Sensor
6 10A Mechanical Snap Switch
4th Code (4th X) Driving Style
1 Direct Drive+
2 Lever Drive+
3 Namur Drive+
5th Code (5th X) Lighting Option
0 None+
1 24 to 28 VDC Bright White LEDs
6th Code (6th X) Visual Indication
0 None
1 Standard (Open Closed)+
2 Upside Down (Open Closed)+
7th Code (7th X) Additonal Options
EX Class I, Div. II, Groups A, B, C & D.
Class II, Div. II Groups F & G.
QV Model Number Prefix
1st Code (1st X) Number of Switches
3rd Code (3rd X)
0
QV 2 1 0 1 0 1 - Example Popular Model Number

( ) y
p
( ) g g p

( )
+ EX, Explosion-proof option available.
Note: The 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 6th codes can not all be zero
Quick-View
ww Complete Model Chart

Model
QV-210101
QV-210111
QUICK-VIEW
Valve Position Indicator/Switch

Ultra-Low Cost, Compact, Backlit, Corrosion Resistant
Backlighting
No
Yes
531.P.N:Layout 2 2/10/11 3:30 PM Page 1
532
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n

I
n
d
i
c
a
t
o
r
s
/
S
w
i
t
c
h
e
s
/
T
r
a
n
s
m
i
t
t
e
r
s
V
A
L
V
E
S
Mark 1 Magnetic Coupling
Cutaway Model 12VDOJ2
Mark
Series
Environmentally sealed for corrosive areas.
Mark 3 Multi Turn
Mark 4 Thru-Shaft
Cutaway Model 42RDOJ2
The Proximity Mark Series is a line of position indicators with a selection of various
output options. Three model styles make up the Mark series to cover almost any
application. Standard models in the Mark Series have visual position indicators and are
weatherproof, explosion-proof, and submersible. A large variety of outputs are available
to fit specific applications. There is a choice of 1 to 6 switch outputs of 16 varieties
including inductive sensors, high temperature switches, gold contact switches,
hermetically sealed switches, and high current switches. Besides the switch outputs
the Series offers potentiometer outputs, transmitters and HART Communications. The
units are purchased for either direct drive applications, such as rotary valves, or lever
drive applications, such as linear valves. Adjustable visual indicator is standard on direct
drive units that displays OPEN / CLOSED status and degrees.
A magnetic drive that completely seals the switch compartment from the atmosphere
for maximum leak protection is utilized in the Mark 1. The Mark 3 uses the same
magnetic drive of the Mark 1, but it can be used for multi-turn applications with 1 to 25
revolutions, such as gate valves. A through shaft drive is incorporated in the Mark 4
making the unit a lower cost alternative to the Mark 1 for applications that are not as
demanding.
Features a magnetic coupling that isolates the switch compartment,
completely sealing the unit from the surrounding atmosphere for maximum hazard
and leak protection.
EZset cams on switch models provide simple set point adjustment.
Flexible design allows multiple switches and transmitter options.
Ideal for corrosive environments.
Features a magnetic coupling that isolates the switch compartment,
completely sealing the unit from the surrounding atmosphere for maximum hazard
and leak protection.
Multi-Turn models that can provide switch signals between 1 and 25 revolutions,
and transmitter models for up to 10 revolutions without gear reduction.
Ideal for corrosive environments.
Thru-Shaft design that features a 1 bushing for long life and O-rings to seal the
switch compartment for hazard, corrosion, and leak protection.
EZset cams on switch models provide simple set point adjustment.
A lower cost alternative to the Mark 1 Series for less demanding applications.
Mark 1
Mark 3
Mark 4
Mark 1
Stainless Steel
Mark 1
Polyester Coated
Aluminum
Position Indicators/Switches/Transmitters
Australian
Standard
C
ertified
P
ro
d
u
ct
532.P.N:Layout 2 2/16/11 3:37 PM Page 1
P
o
s
t
o
n

I
n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s
/
S
w
t
c
h
e
s
/
T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
V
A
L
V
E
S
Mark
Series
Switch Type
& Rating
Construction
1
3
4
1
2
3
32
35
310
320
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
G
H
I
M
0
R
S
T
V
W
Mark 1, Magnetic Coupling
Mark 3, Multi Turn
Mark 4, Thru Shaft
1 Switch
2 Switches
Potentiometer, 1K Ohm. Available with switches, see note below.*
Potentiometer, 10K Ohm. Available with switches , see note below.*
4 Switches
Transmitter, 4 to 20 mA. Available with switches, see note below.*
6 Switches. Available with Switch Types B, C, I, R, V, W.
AS interface and 1 Switch. Available with Switch Types B, I, R, W.
AS interface and 2 Switches. Available with Switch Types B, I, R, W.
HART
Transmitter. Available with switches, see note below.*

SPDT Snap, Rated: 15A @ 125/250/480 VAC (~) ; 1/8 hp @ 125 VAC (~),
1/4 hp @ 250 VAC (~) , 1/2A @ 125 VDC , 1/4A @ 250 VDC .
Inductive Sensor. 10 to 30 VDC . Load: 0.1A.
SPDT High Temperature Snap, 350F (176C) for 600 hours, Rated: 15.1A @ 125/250/277 VAC (~).
DPDT Snap, Rated: 10A @ 125/250 VAC (~), 0.3A @ 125 VDC , 0.15A @ 250 VDC .
SPDT Gold Contact Snap, Rated: 1A @ 125 VAC (~).
SPDT Hermetically Sealed Snap, Rated: 1A @ 125 VAC .
NAMUR Inductive Sensor. 15 mA max @ 5 25 VDC (~).
SPDT Magnetic Blow Out, Rated: 10A @ 125 VAC (~)/VDC , 1/4 hp @ 125 VAC (~)/VDC .
No Switches
SPDT Hermetically Sealed Reed, Rated: 2A @ 125 VAC (~), 2A @ 24 VDC .
SPDT Snap, Rated: 4A @ 125/250 VAC (~).
SPDT High Temperature Snap, 250F (121C) Continuous, Rated: 5A @ 125/250/480 VAC (~).
SPDT Snap, Rated: 10A @ 125/250 VAC (~), 1/3 hp @ 125/250 VAC (~),
1/2A @ 125 VDC , 1/4A @ 250 VDC , 4A @ 125 VAC (~) (tungsten).
SPDT Gold Contact Snap, Rated 0.1A @ 125 VAC (~).
Available Options A signifies
available with corresponding
construction style.
Mark
1 3 4
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) ( )
( )
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
*Note: Mark 1 and 4 potentiometer and transmitter outputs will have no switches when ordered with switch type 0; 2 switches if ordered with switch types B, C, I, R, V,
or W; and 4 switches if ordered with switch type S. Mark 3 potentiometer and transmitter outputs will have no switches when ordered with switch type 0, and 2 switches
if ordered with switch types A, G, M or T.
Minimum temperature depends on output and switch type selected.
Driving
Method
Enclosure
Options
D
L
J1
J2
S
SV1
SV2
MT
B
IS
Junction Package with One 1/2 NPT Female Conduit Connection and Terminal Strip.
Junction Package with Two 1/2 NPT Female Conduit Connection and Terminal Strip.
SAA Listed Flameproof
1 Attached Solenoid Valve (Must be ordered with J1 option).
2 Attached Solenoid Valves (Must be ordered with J2 option).
Metric Threaded Conduit Connection, M25 (M20 for optional J1 and J2 connections).
Directive 94/9/EC, KEMA 03 ATEX 2391, II 2 G Ex d IIC T6 ( 25/ 40/ 50C
Tamb 70C)
(T5 ( 25/ 40/ 50C
Tamb 80C) optional wording).

Directive 94/9/EC, KEMA 03 ATEX 1392 x, II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4.
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
0
1
6
Aluminum, Painted Black
Aluminum, Painted White Epoxy with SS trim
Cast 316 Stainless Steel
EXAMPLE MODEL NUMBERS
12VD0-J1
Mark 1, 2 Switches both Type V SPDT, Direct Drive, Painted Aluminum Enclosure with Junction Package.
15VD0
Mark 1, 2 Switches both Type V SPDT, 4 to 20 mA transmitter, Direct Drive, Painted Aluminum Enclosure.
Direct Drive (Yoke) with Stainless Steel Visual Indicator.
Lever Drive (Shaft), No Visual Indicator.
Output Type

534
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n

I
n
d
i
c
a
t
o
r
s
/
S
w
i
t
c
h
e
s
/
T
r
a
n
s
m
i
t
t
e
r
s
V
A
L
V
E
S
Mounting kits with drive yoke (see drawing), or slotted lever arm, bracket, fasteners and other zinc plated or stainless steel hardware fit
over 2000 popular valves and actuators. A high strength spring tempered stainless steel drive yoke/coupling is tailored to fit securely to a
specific valve or actuator stem. There is no slippage or binding. No special alignment fixtures are required due to switch offset design and
yoke to stem engagement that makes installation a snap. Each kit is specially designed for a particular valve or actuator, making field
mounting simple with standard tools. Please specify make and model of valve or actuator on order.
Mounting kits can be used interchangeably with all models since external mounting features are identical. Rotary valves utilize direct drive
couplings and a slotted lever drive is used with linear valves. Lever drives convert linear motion to rotary. Stainless steel visual indicators are
standard for direct drive, automated quarter-turn valve applications.
Mark
Series
WITCH SW
VISUAL INDICATOR V
RIVE YOKE DR
OUNTING KIT MO
CLEARANCE REQUIRED
FOR COVER REMOVAL
LEVER DRIVE
1-1/16
(26.99)
SPECIFICATIONS
General
Product Ratings:
Weatherproof and flameproof. NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 6, 7, 9, 12, 13.
UL rated: Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D (Some units available for Group A,
consult factory); Class II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, and G.
CSA rated: Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F,
and G; Submersible to 50 feet.
SAA rated: -S suffix, Certified Ex d IIC T6 IP68 (15 meters).
ATEX Compliant:
-B suffix, directive 94/9/EC,
KEMA 03 ATEX 2391, II 2 G Ex d IICT6 for -25C/-40C/-50C Tamb
70C andT5 for (-25C/-40C/-50C Tamb 80Coptional wording)
depending on output and switch type selected.
IS suffix directive 94/9/EC,
KEMA 03 ATEX 1392X, II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4.
(Switch type C is not available with ATEX; Switch type B is not available with ATEX
intrinsically safe, -IS suffix).
Electrical Connections: Screw terminal. Optional factory sealed leads that are
36 (914.4 mm) of 16 AWG.
Conduit Connection: 3/4 female NPT standard. Optional one or two 1/2
female NPT. M25 and M20 optional (Standard on SAA certified products).
Weight: 4 to 6 lb (1.5 to 3.0 kg).
Operational Life: 10,000,000 cycles.
Maximum Altitude: 2000 meters.
Mark 1, 3 and 4 with Switch Outputs
Temperature Limits: -58 to 176F (-50 to 80C). Switch Type C rated to 350F
(176C) for 600 hours, Switch Type T rated to 250F (121C) continuous. (ATEX
flameproof, -B suffix, rated -50C (-58F) to 80C (176F) for switch type A, G, H, T,
or M, -40C (-40F) to 80C (176F) for switch type O, R, S, V, or W, -25C (-13F)
to 80C (176F) for switch type B, D, I, or AS Interface; ATEX intrinsically safe, -IS
suffix rated -25C (-13F) to 40C (104F) for switch type D or I, -40C (-40F) to
40C (104F) for switch type R, V, or W, or -50C (-58F) to 40C (104F) for switch
type A, G, or H.)
Switch Type: See model chart on page 527.
Electrical Rating: See model chart on page 527.
Set Point Adjustment: Mark 1 and 4: 5 to 360. Mark 3: 1 to 25 revolutions.
Mark 1, 3, and 4 with Potentiometer
Accuracy: 0.5% of full span. Optional 0.25% of full span.
Temperature Limits: -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C).(ATEX flameproof, -B suffix, rated
-40C (-40F) to 80C (176F) for switch types A, G, M, O, R, S, T, V, or W, -25C
(-13F) to 80C (176F) for switch types B, D, or I.; ATEX intrinsically safe, -IS
suffix, rated -25C (-13F) to 40C (104F) for switch type I, -40C (-40F) to 40C
(104F) for switch types O, R, S, V, or W.)
Power Rating: 1.5 Watt maximum.
Output Signal: 1000 Ohm standard. Optional 2000, 5000, 10000, or 20000 Ohms.
Zero and Span Adjustments: Span trim pot with 2000 Ohm adjustment. No zero
adjustment.
Rotational Travel: Mark 1 and 4: Minimum: 0, Maximum: 340. Mark 3: 0 to 10
revolutions.
Mark 1, 3, and 4 with Transmitter
Accuracy: 0.5% of full span. Optional 0.25% of full span.
Temperature Limits: -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C). (ATEX flameproof, -B suffix, rated
-40C (-40F) to 80C (176F) for switch types A, G, M, O, R, S, T, V, or W, -25C
(-13F) to 80C (176F) for switch types B, D, or I.; ATEX intrinsically safe, -IS suffix,
rated -25C (-13F) to 40C (104F) for switch type I, -40C
(-40F) to 40C (104F) for switch types O, R, S, V, or W.)
Zero and Span Adjustments: Trim pots for adjusting both. Mark 1 and 4: Span is
adjustable from 50 to 300. Mark 3: Span is adjustable from 1.5 to 8.5 revolutions.
female NPT. M25 and M20 optional (Standard on SAA models).
Rotational Travel: Mark 1 and 4: Minimum: 50, Maximum: 300. Mark 3:
Minimum: 1.5 revolutions, Maximum: 8.5 revolutions.
Mark 1, 3, and 4 with HART
Transmitter
Accuracy: 0.25% of full span.
Temperature Limits: -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C). (ATEX flameproof, -B suffix, rated
-40C (-40F) to 80C (176F) for switch types A, G, M, O, R, S, V or W, -25C
(-13F) to 80C (176F) for switch types B, D or I.)
HART
Receive Impedance: Rx = 500 k; Cx = 2500 pF.

Zero and Span Adjustments: Pushbuttons or HART master for setting both. Mark
1 and 4: Span is adjustable from 0 to 330. Mark 3: Span is adjustable from 1.5 to
8.5 revolutions.
female NPT. M25 and M20 optional (Standard on SAA models).
Rotational Travel: Mark 1 and 4: Maximum: 330. Mark 3: Minimum: 1.5
revolutions, Maximum: 8.5 revolutions.
534.P.N:Layout 2 2/16/11 3:45 PM Page 1
P
o
s
t
o
n

I
n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s
/
S
w
t
c
h
e
s
/
T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
V
A
L
V
E
S
Series
VPS
Valve Position Sensor
Dual Inductive, 2-Wire AC/DC Sensor, Fully Adjustable Target in 2 Increments
M12 x 1 THD,
4-PIN, QUICK
DISCONNECT
0.218 [5.54] (2) PL
0.812 [20.62]
1.125 [28.58]
1.180 [29.97]
0.50 [12.7]
0.781 [19.84]
1.562 [39.67]
0.250 [6.35]
1.032 [26.21]
0.313 [7.95]
1.687 [42.85]
0.2375
[60.33]
1.879
[47.73]
The dual inductive, 2-wire AC/DC Series VPS Valve Position Sensor
maintains VDI/VDE 3845 dimensions so positioners can be easily mounted on
top of the sensor and target. The Model VPS2411 Sensor and Model P1 Target
mount easily and directly to actuators with ISO NAMUR topworks (see picture
below). Fully adjustable target in 2 increments, the sensor has two independent
LEDs and bright flow line indicator that provide local visual indication. All
electrical connections are made with the Model VIP82 4-pin quick disconnect
cable (6 ft. in length) for ease in installation. Solid state components are fully
embedded in an epoxy resin to prevent condensation build-up and to protect
against vibration and shock. The rugged PBTP housing provides excellent
corrosion resistance and moisture protection.
Model VPS and P1 mounted on an
actuator with a positioner mounted on top.
Model P1 Model VPS2411
Model P1 Model VPS2411
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Requirements: 20 140 VAC (50/60 Hz), 10 200 VDC.
Switch Type: Dual normally open.
Electrical Rating: 200 mA.
Minimum Load Current: 5 mA.
Leakage Current: 0.8 mA.
Voltage Drop: 5.0 V.
Repeatability: 0.01 mm.
Hysteresis: 3 15% of sensing range.
Switching Frequency: 25 Hz.
Housing Material: Polybutylene terephthalate.
Mounting Holes: NAMUR mounting 3.15 x 1.18 (80 x 30 mm) or 5.118
x 1.18 (130 x 30 mm).
Electrical Connection: 4 pin quick disconnect.
Model VPS2411, Valve Position Sensor
Model P1, Valve Position Target
Model VIP82, Quick Disconnect Cable

536
P
o
s
t
o
n

I
n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s
/
S
w
t
c
h
e
s
/
T
r
a
n
s
m
t
t
e
r
s
V
A
L
V
E
S
Detector Position Sensor
Reliable Magnetic Point Sensor, Stainless Steel Housing, AC or DC
1.000 HEX
1/2 14 NPT
1.250
[3.18 CM]
3.750
[9.525 CM]
5/8 18 UNF
1.750
[4.45 CM]
DETECTOR ACTUATOR
Series
DT
The Series DT Detector Position Sensors are reliable, magnetically
actuated, stainless steel, completely interchangeable with competitive units. AC
or DC for user friendly operation. They have no moving parts, eliminate costly
seal fittings and offer enhanced reliability by eliminating arcing. Unintentional
actuation by metals is not a problem. The sensor consists of a durable
hermetically sealed reed switch potted in a stainless steel housing and a
separate 316 SS magnetic actuator bolt. As the actuator moves within the
sensing range of the sensor, the magnet in the actuator changes the state of
reed switch contacts inside the sensor. This either opens or closes a circuit
depending on wiring configuration. Sensing distance is 0.1 (2.54 mm) for the
standard actuator. Greater sensi tivity of a larger magnetic actuator increases
the sensing distance to 0.5 (12.7 mm).
The detector is excellent for hazardous and corrosive environments, solid state
and intrinsically safe applications. A detector may be mounted in any position.
For installation in hazardous locations be sure to check local and national
electrical codes. The detector is designed to NEMA 1, 3, 4, 4X, 6, 7, 9, 12 and
13.
APPLICATIONS
The detector is used for control element position monitoring and indication
with devices such as linear valves actuators & cylinders rotary valves
dampers.
SUGGESTED SPECIFICATION
Position sensor shall be magnetically operated Proximity Detector model
(DT1060) (DT1160). Sensing distance shall be (0.1) (0.5). The sensor
shall be SPDT, Form C, hermetically sealed and rated 3 amps 125 VAC,
3 amps 30 VDC, and shall include a stainless steel actuator with internal
magnet. The 316 SS housing shall be designed to NEMA 4, 4X, 7, 9, UL
& CSA certified Class I, Groups A, B, C & D; Class II, Groups E, F, & G,
Divs. 1 & 2 requirements and have a 1/2 NPT conduit entrance.
Detector Actuator
Standard Actuator with DT1060 High Strength Actuator with DT1160
(3/816 UNC X 3/4) (1/213 UNC X 3/4)
TM
SPECIFICATIONS
Switch Type: Tungsten, SPDT, Form C.
Electrical Rating: 3A @ 125 VAC, 3A @ 30 VDC.
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof; Hermetically sealed; Explosion proof
UL & CSA listed for Class I, Groups A, B, C, & D; Class II, Groups E, F &
G. Divisions 1 & 2.
Intrinsically Safe: Simple apparatus (w/barrier).
Operating/Response Time: 3.0 m sec.
Initial Contact Resistance: 0.50 ohms (max).
Repeatability: 0.005 in (.01 cm).
Hysteresis: 0.030 in (.08 cm).
Electrical Connection: Factory sealed leads with 18 minimum, 4
conductor, PVC insulated, 18 AWG green/red/black/white (ground/NC/
NO/common).
Housing: 316 SS.
Potting: Epoxy resin.
Conduit: 1/2 14 female NPT.
Weight: 0.32 lb (145 g); 0.45 lb (204 g) with actuator.
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA, UL, cUL.
Model
DT1060
DT1160
Decription
Detector and
standard actuator
detector and
high strength actuator
Sensing Distance
0.1 (2.54 mm)
0.5 (12.7 mm)

ACCESSORIES & BOOKS
Shut-Off
Valves
pages 546, 559
Cooling
Extensions
page 547
Pressure
Snubbers
pages 547 548
Fittings,
Stainless Steel
pages 549 553, 556 557
Fittings,
Nylon
pages 554 555
Static Pressure
Sensors
pages 557 559
Gage Guards
page 548
Strap Wrenches
page 548
Mounting Brackets
and Accessories
page 560
Pumps
page 561
Product Carrying
Cases
page 561
Gage Connectors
page 559
Pressure Connectors
and Fittings
page 560
Psychrometers
page 561
Slide Charts
page 561
Air Filter Kits
page 561
Gage Fluids
page 562
Pressure Tubing
page 562
Reference
Books
pages 538 539
Filters, Regulators
and Lubricators
pages 540 546

538
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e

B
o
o
k
s
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
HVAC Fundamentals
Volume 3: Air Conditioning, Heat Pumps, and Distribution Systems
Fourth Edition
By James E. Brumbaugh, 2004
Learn to install and service todays popular electronic air cleaners and filters
Service less common heating systems such as coal-fired furnaces
Install, maintain, and repair humidifiers and dehumidifiers
Handle radiators, convectors, and baseboard heating units
This book provides a comprehensive, hands-on guide to installing, servicing, and repairing all basic air-conditioning systems. It also includes
complete coverage of specialized heating units such as radiant heating systems, fans, exhaust systems, air filters, and more.
HVAC Fundamentals
Volume 2: Heating System Components, Gas and Oil Burners & Automatic Controls
Fourth Edition
Install and repair thermostats, humidistats, automatic controls, and oil or gas burner controls
Review pipes, pipe fittings, piping details, valve installation, and duct systems
Learn the best ways to handle hydronics and steam line controls
Deal with solid fuels and understand coal firing methods
This guidebook covers everything you need to know to install, maintain, and repair the components that run, regulate, and fuel both old and
new systems.
HVAC Fundamentals
Volume 1: Heating Systems, Furnaces, and Boilers
Fourth Edition
Review the basics of installation, wiring, and troubleshooting for different HVAC systems
Compare the economy and efficiency of various fuel types
Find formula cross references, data tables with conversions, and listings of trade organizations and equipment manufacturers
Whether youre installing, servicing, repairing, or troubleshooting an old or new heating system, youll find what youre looking for, from
wood and coal furnace maintenance to new calculations and the latest environmental technologies and regulations.
Technical Reference Books
HVAC Pocket Reference
By James Brumbaugh, 2005
Your one-stop reference for:
Conversion tables, electrical formulas, pipe thread standards, and motor ratings
Fuel cost comparisons and offset calculations and valve details
Gas and oil burner specifications and pipe performance data
Weather and design factors affecting heating/cooling calculations
Troubleshooting guidelines
When you need to check specs, confirm measurements, or make a quick metric conversion on the job, find the answers quickly and easily
right in your pocket.
Pumps & Hydraulics
Sixth Edition
By Rex Miller & Mark Richard Miller, 2004
Learn to install and service pumps for nearly any application
Service and maintain individual pumping devices that use smaller motors
See how pumps are used in robotics, taking advantage of hydraulics to lift larger, heavier loads
Know the appropriate servicing schedule for different types of pumping equipment
This handbook is widely known as a highly useful and definitive reference for HVAC engineers and technicians alike, and those who work
on domestic hot and cold-water services, gas supply, and steam services. Newly updated on natural ventilation, ventilation rates, free cooling
and nighttime cooling.
Order Number: BK-0005
ISBN: 0764542060, Pages: 698, Paperback
ISBN: 0 7645 8810 9, Pages: 370, Paperback

R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e

B
o
o
k
s
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
Air Conditioning: Home & Commercial
Fifth Edition
Information on installing and maintaining both residential and commercial systems
Understand the physics of air conditioning and filtration
Make accurate temperature measurements using various methods and devices
Work with room air conditioners, water cooling systems, and auto air conditioning
Learn about refrigerants, compressors, condensers, evaporators, and AC motors
Whether youre an AC professional, an independent repair technician, or a cost-conscious homeowner, this guidebook contains everything
you need. It includes information on installing, servicing, maintaining, and troubleshooting.
Refrigeration: Home & Commercial
Fifth Edition
Know how different types of refrigerants are used and how to handle them safely
Perform routine maintenance on various types of compressors and test for leakage and resolve common problems such as freeze-ups
Repair and replace refrigerator cabinet parts and troubleshoot common problems with home freezers
Breakdown of electrically driven and absorption-type refrigeration units
Learn to troubleshoot and maintain the wide variety of motors used in cooling devices
Service and repair automatic icemakers, water coolers, and display cases
Whether youre a student, apprentice, cost-conscious homeowner, or skilled technician, this reference manual will provide you with valuable
information. Beginning with the essential physics and math, it provides a complete course in maintaining, troubleshooting, and repairing
both new and vintage refrigeration systems for home and light industry.
Plant Engineers Handbook
Edited by R. Keith Mobley, 2001
Produced in association with Plant Engineering Magazine and created by leading authors and editor
International perspective with dual units and regulations
Offers comprehensive coverage of an enormous range of subjects, which are of vital interest to the plant engineer and anyone connected with
industrial operations or maintenance. Includes plant site selection, basic facilities, lubrication, corrosion, energy conservation, maintenance,
insurance matters, materials handling, financial concerns, and environmental considerations.
Guide to the 2005 National Electrical Code
By Paul Rosenberg, 2004
Understand the terms and rules for installation set forth in the NEC
Review each section of the NEC that applies to electrical installation
Learn about the significant changes in bonding and grounding requirements
Explore the expanded section covering communications equipment
This guide extracts the necessary information for installers and arranges it for easy access, highlighting the changes so you can quickly spot
whats new. If youre a novice or even a veteran, youll want this book with you on every job.
Electricians Pocket Manual
Second Edition
By Paul Rosenberg, 2003
Explains updated maintenance and construction standards and provides details on motors, controllers, and circuits
Examines electronic components and communications wiring and offers guidelines for dealing with hazardous location wiring
Covers generators, mechanical power transmission, and electrical power distribution
The Electricians Pocket Manual is packed with charts, conversions, photographs, diagrams, code standards, and other information you
need on the job. It even includes a chapter on tools and safety. This on-the-job reference will help you find answers quickly and easily.
Technical Reference Books
ISBN: 0750673281, Pages: 2400, Hardback

540
F
t
e
r
s
,

R
e
g
u
a
t
o
r
s
a
n
d

L
u
b
r
c
a
t
o
r
s
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
Filters, Regulators and Lubricators
For Pneumatic Air Applications
Size 1
Air
41 to 140F (5 to 60C)
165 psig
1/8, 1/4 NPT
5, 25, 50
165 psi
Manual/Semi-Auto
0.75 inch
3
55, 85 SCFM
1/8, 1/4 NPT
<0.2 psig
<0.25 SCFM
40, 60 SCFM
0-10 psig
0-30 psig
0-60 psig
0-120 psig
0.3 SCFH
1/8, 1/4 NPT
Mist
1.22 inch
3
55, 115 SCFM
Size 2
Air
41 to 140F (5 to 60C)
165 psig
1/4, 3/8, 1/2 NPT
5, 25, 50
165 psi
Manual/Semi-Auto
2.75 inch
3
120, 120, 120 SCFM
1/4, 3/8, 1/2 NPT
<0.2 psig
<0.25 SCFM
90, 120, 120 SCFM
0-10 psig
0-30 psig
0-60 psig
0-120 psig
0.3 SCFH
1/4, 3/8, 1/2 NPT
Mist
5.18 inch
3
125, 125, 125 SCFM
General
Service
Temperature Limits
Maximum Supply Pressure
Filters
Process Connection
Filtration (micron)
Drain
Bowl Capacity
Flow (based on 100 psi inlet pressure
w/ 50 micron filter)
Construction
Regulators
Process Connection
Effect of Supply Pressure Variation
(25 psig) on Outlet Pressure
Exhaust Capacity (5 psig above 20
psig set point)
Flow Capacity at 100 psig Supply and
70 psig Outlet
Output Pressure Ranges
Total Air Consumption @
Maximum Output
Construction
Lubricators
Process Connection
Lubrication
Bowl Capacity
Flow (based on 100 psi inlet pressure)
Construction
Body: Aluminum; Filter: Sintered Bronze
Body: Aluminum; Bowl: Polycarbonate
Body: Aluminum
SPECIFICATIONS
Series R Regulators
Series L Lubricators
Series F Filters
F Series Filters keep air and pneumatic systems operating cleanly and efficiently.
Port sizes, filter elements, and drain options available to service broad application
requirements.
R Series Pressure Regulators offer economic prices and high performance
pressure regulation. Configurable units offer a variety of fitting and port sizes, and
supply pressures ranging from 10 to 120 psig. The non-rising adjustment knob allows
for simple and precise monitoring of pressure and features push-pull lock ring.
L Series Lubricators maintain safe operation and longevity of pneumatic systems.
Top plug permits filling without removing bowl or disconnecting air-lines. Adjustable
drop rate fits any application.
R1 R2
L1 L2
Series
F, R, L
MOUNTING BRACKET
FOR SERIES 2
13/32 TYP
[10.32 TYP]
1-3/16
[30.16]
1-20/32
[45.24]
49/64
[19.45]
SERIES 2
5-15/16
[150.81]
41/64
[16.27]
2-31/64
[63.10]
1-25/32 TYP
[45.24 TYP]
NPT CONNECTION
FILTER
RELEASE
LATCH
1/4 TYP
[6.35 TYP]
3-1/2
[88.90]
27/32
[27.43]
SERIES 1
1-21/32
[42.07]
1-37/64
[40.08]
NPT
CONNECTION
ASSEMBLY MOUNTING
BRACKET HERE
SERIES 2
MOUNTING BRACKET
FOR SERIES 2
1/4 TYP
[6.35 TYP]
1-25/32
[45.24]
NPT
CONNECTION
7-9/64
[181.37]
13/32 TYP
[10.32 TYP]
1-3/16
[30.16]
49/64
[19.45]
1-25/32 TYP
[45.24 TYP]
1/2
[12.70]
1-1/8
[28.58]
1-13/64
[30.56]
5/64 TYP
[1.98 TYP]
17/65 TYP
[6.75 TYP]
MOUNTING BRACKET FOR
SERIES 1 SERIES 1
1-1/8 TYP
[28.58 TYP]
1-21/32
[42.07]
25/64
[9.92]
4-3/64
[102.79]
NPT CONNECTION
F1 F2
1-13/64
[30.60]
25/64 TYP
[9.92 TYP]
MOUNTING BRACKET
FOR SERIES 2
17/64
[6.75]
1-23/32
[43.66]
1-33/84
[38.50] 1-9/32
[32.54]
1
[25.40]
17/64
[6.75]
MOUNTING BRACKET
FOR SERIES 1
1-17/64
[32.15]
5/64 TYP
[7.98 TYP]
MOUNTING BRACKET
FOR SERIES 1
1-13/64
[30.56]
5/64 TYP
[1.98 TYP]
17/64 TYP
[6.75 TYP]
1-1/8
[28.58]
SERIES 1
5-7/64
[129.78]
1-1/8 TYP
[28.58 TYP]
NPT
CONNECTION
1/2
[12.70]
5-9/16
[141.29]
NPT
CONNECTION
SERIES 2
1-17/64
[32.15]
2-31/64
[63.10]
2-31/64
[63.10]
ASSEMBLE
MOUNTING
BRACKET
HERE
Model
F1-150M
F2-250M
Process
Connection
1/8 NPT
1/4 NPT
Filtration
50 microns
50 microns
Model
R1-1120
R2-2120
Process
Connection
1/8 NPT
1/4 NPT
Model
L1-1
L2-2
Drain
Manual
Manual
Pressure
Range
120 psi
120 psi
Process
Connection
1/8 NPT
1/4 NPT

F
t
e
r
s
,

R
e
g
u
a
t
o
r
s
a
n
d

L
u
b
r
c
a
t
o
r
s
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
1-1/8 NPT 1-1/4 NPT 2-1/4 NPT 2-3/8 NPT 2-1/2 NPT
REGULATED PRESSURE VS. FLOW
5.5
4.8
4.1
3.4
2.8
2.1
1.4
0.7
0
psig
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
BAR
SCFM 0
LPM 0
20.0
575
40.0
1150
60.0
1700
80.0
2265
100.0
2875
120.00
3450
FEATURES
Filter
Polycarbonate bowl with metal guard
Filter options 5, 25, 50
Manual, semi automatic or automatic drain options
Regulator
Rolling diaphragm
Panel/pipe/bracket mountable
Aluminum body, polycarbonate bonnet and knob
Non rising adjustment knob with push pull lock ring
Lubricator
Field serviceable polycarbonate bowl
Polycarbonate bowl includes metal guard and top plug
Adjustable drip rate
Function
Body Style
Process
Connection
L
1
2
1
2
3
4
L Series Lubricators
Function
Body Style
Process
Connection
Filtration
Drain
1
2
1
2
3
4
50
25
05
M
S
A
F Series Filters
F
Function
Body Style
Process
Connection
Pressure
Range
R
1
2
1
2
3
4
R Series Pressure Regulators
010
030
060
120
Filter
1 Size
2 Size
1/8 NPT (1 Size only)
1/4 NPT
50 micron filter
25 micron filter
5 micron filter
Manual drain
Semi Automatic drain
Automatic drain (2 Size only)
Regulator
1 Size
2 Size
1/4 NPT
0 10 psi outlet pressure
Lubricator
1 Size
2 Size
1/4 NPT

542
F
t
e
r
s
,

R
e
g
u
a
t
o
r
s
a
n
d

L
u
b
r
c
a
t
o
r
s
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
Filters, Regulators and Lubricators
Combination Packages For Pneumatic Air Applications
Size 1
Air
41 to 140F (5 to 60C)
165 psig
1/8, 1/4 NPT
5, 25, 50
165 psi
Manual/Semi-Auto
0.75 inch
3
55, 85 SCFM
1/8, 1/4 NPT
<0.2 psig
<0.25 SCFM
40, 60 SCFM
0-10 psig
0-30 psig
0-60 psig
0-120 psig
0.3 SCFH
1/8, 1/4 NPT
Mist
1.22 inch
3
55, 115 SCFM
Size 2
Air
41 to 140F (5 to 60C)
165 psig
1/4, 3/8, 1/2 NPT
5, 25, 50
165 psi
Manual/Semi-Auto
2.75 inch
3
120, 120, 120 SCFM
1/4, 3/8, 1/2 NPT
<0.2 psig
<0.25 SCFM
90, 120, 120 SCFM
0-10 psig
0-30 psig
0-60 psig
0-120 psig
0.3 SCFH
1/4, 3/8, 1/2 NPT
Mist
5.18 inch
3
125, 125, 125 SCFM
General
Service
Temperature Limits
Filters
Process Connection
Filtration (micron)
Drain
Bowl Capacity
Flow (based on 100 psi inlet pressure
w/ 50 micron filter)
Construction
Regulators
Process Connection
Effect of Supply Pressure Variation
(25 psig) on Outlet Pressure
Exhaust Capacity (5 psig above 20
psig set point)
Flow Capacity at 100 psig Supply and
70 psig Outlet
Output Pressure Ranges
Total Air Consumption @
Maximum Output
Construction
Lubricators
Process Connection
Lubrication
Bowl Capacity
Flow (based on 100 psi inlet pressure)
Construction
Body: Aluminum; Filter: Sintered Bronze
Body: Aluminum; Bowl: Polycarbonate
Body: Aluminum
SPECIFICATIONS The Series FR Filter-Regulators are combination units that provide maximum
options in minimal space. Constructed of aluminum and polycarbonate, these rugged
units offer the same air pressure regulation features as our standard R Series units
side-by-side with the convenience of an F Series filter. Unscrewing the adjustment knob
and retaining flange easily adapts panel or bracket mounting.
The Series FRL takes the FR Series to the next level by including an L Series
lubricator. The package is completely installed and ready to go right out of the box.
Series FR Filter-Regulator Series FRL Filter-Regulator-Lubricator
8-25/64
[213.12]
1-25/52
[45.25]
2-9/84
[54.37]
SERIES FRL2 2-17/32
[54.29]
9/32
[2.82]
7-9/84
[181.37]
FR1 FR2
Series
FR, FRL
9-7/16
[239.71]
SERIES FR2
NPT
CONNECTION
3-7/8
[98.43]
1-23/32
[45/56]
7-33/64
[38.50]
1-13/64
[30.60]
25/54 TYP
[9.92 TYP]
17/64
[6.75]
MOUNTING BRACKET
FOR SERIES FRL2
5-49/54
[146.45]
1-31/32 [80.01]
1-15/32
[57.31]
15/64
[5.95]
SERIES FRL1
5-7/64
[129.79]
NPT
CONNECTION
1-15/85
[30.56]
61/64
[24.27]
7/32
[5.56]
6-3/8
[161.93]
1-37/64
[40.08]
SERIES FR1
NPT
CONNECTION
MOUNTING BRACKET
FOR SERIES FR2
1-13/64
[30.60]
17/84
[6.75]
1-33/64
[38.50]
1-23/32
[43.66]
25/64 TYP
[9.92 TYP]
MOUNTING BRACKET
FOR SERIES FR1
1-17/64
[32.15]
1
[25.70]
1-9/32
[32.54]
17/64
[6.75]
5/64 TYP
[1.98 TYP]
Model
FR1-112050M
FR2-212050M
FRL1-112050M
FRL2-212050M
Process
Connection
1/8 NPT
1/4 NPT
1/8 NPT
1/4 NPT
Pressure
Range
120 psi
120 psi
120 psi
120 psi
Filtration
50 microns
50 microns
50 microns
50 microns

F
t
e
r
s
,

R
e
g
u
a
t
o
r
s
a
n
d

L
u
b
r
c
a
t
o
r
s
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
1-1/8 NPT 1-1/4 NPT 2-1/4 NPT 2-3/8 NPT 2-1/2 NPT
REGULATED PRESSURE VS. FLOW
5.5
4.8
4.1
3.4
2.8
2.1
1.4
0.7
0
psig
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
BAR
SCFM 0
LPM 0
20.0
575
40.0
1150
60.0
1700
80.0
2265
100.0
2875
120.00
3450
FEATURES
FR Filter Regulator Combo
Aluminum and polycarbonate construction
Manual, semi auto or autodrain available
1 Size has polycarbonate bowl, 2 Size has polycarbonate bowl with
metal guard
Non rising adjustment knob with push pull lock ring feature
Panel or bracket mounting
FRL Package
All in one package ready for installation
Automatic drain
50 filter standard (others available)
120 psi regulator & 1/8 NPT on 1 Size
120 psi regulator & 1/4 NPT on 2 Size
Function
Body Style
Process
Connection
Pressure Range
Filtration
Drain
FR
FRL
1
2
1
2
3
4
010
030
060
120
50
25
05
M
S
A
Filters - Regulators & Filters-Regulators-Lubricators
Filter Regulator
Filter Regulator Lubricator
1 Size
2 Size
1/4 NPT
50 micron filter
25 micron filter
5 micron filter
Manual drain (standard)
Semi Automatic drain
Automatic drain (2 Size only)

544
F
t
e
r
s
,

R
e
g
u
a
t
o
r
s
a
n
d

L
u
b
r
c
a
t
o
r
s
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
Series
MPR
Miniature Pressure Regulator
Air or Water Regulator, Compact and Lightweight, Low Cost
The Series MPR Miniature Pressure Regulators are compact units that
provide low cost, high performance pressure regulation of compressed air or
air/water. The low torque, non-rising adjustment knob with locking capability
provides easy and precise adjustment. Models for use with air are self relieving.
Models for air/water are non-relieving.
3/8
[9.65]
2-27/32
[71.88]
1-5/8
[41.40]
1-1/2
[38.10]
(2) 1/4 NPT
INLET & OUTLET
PORTS
(2) 1/8 NPT
GAGE PORTS
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compressed air or water.
Wetted Materials: Body: Zinc; Bonnet: Acetal; Diaphragm/seals: Nitrile;
Internals: Aluminum, brass, acetal, steel, music wire (MPR2 is plated
with electroless nickel for water use).
Flow Capacity: 24 SCFM (48 m
3
/hr) at 100 psig (6.9 bar) supply, 60
psig (4.1 bar) output.
Process Connection: Inlet and outlet: Two 1/4 female NPT; Two 1/8
female NPT gage ports.
Series AFR Air Filter Regulator provides clean air pressure to pneumatic
controllers, valve positioners, air cylinders and other equipment. Self-relieving
regulator is equipped with a 40 micron filter housed in a dripwell with gage port.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air only.
Wetted Materials: Body: Aluminum alloy, irridite, and lock epoxy finish;
Filter: Phenolic impregnated cellulose; diaphragm and valve seat plug:
Nitrile elastomer.
Max. Supply Pressure: 250 psig (1700 kPa).
Sensitivity: 1 (2.5 cm) of water.
Consumption: <6 SCFH (0.17 m
3
/hr).
Flow Capacity: 20 SCFM (33 m
3
/hr) @ 100 psig (700 kPa) supply.
Exhaust Capacity: 0.1 SCFM (0.17 m
3
/hr) with downstream pressure 5
psig (35 kPa) above set point.
Weight: 1.6 lb (725 g).
Series
AFR
Air Filter Regulator
3.130
[79.5]
3.130
[79.5] DRAIN
7-3/4
[196.8]
2-19/32
[65.8]
21/32
[16.5]
2-53/64
[71.6]
INPUT
1/4 NPT
3/8
[9.6]
GAUGE PORT
1/4 NPT
OUTPUT
1/4 NPT
Model
Air
MPR1-0
MPR1-1
MPR1-2
MPR1-3
MPR1-4
Air/Water
MPR2-0
MPR2-1
MPR2-2
MPR2-3
MPR2-4
Range
0 to 5 psi
0 to 15 psi
0 to 30 psi
0 to 60 psi
0 to 100 psi
Model
AFR1
AFR2
AFR3
AFR4
AFR-BRKT, Mounting Bracket
ACCESSORIES
MPR-B, Mounting Bracket
MPR-N, Panel Mounting Nut
Range
0 to 10 psi (0 to 65 kPa)
0 to 30 psi (0 to 200 kPa)
0 to 60 psi (0 to 400 kPa)
0 to 120 psi (0 to 800 kPa)

F
t
e
r
s
,

R
e
g
u
a
t
o
r
s
a
n
d

L
u
b
r
c
a
t
o
r
s
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
SPECIFICATIONS
Filtration Efficiency: 93% (removal of 0.01 micron particles).
Maximum Pressure: 150 psig (10 bar).
Max. Flow at 100 psig: 22 scfm (F222); 45 scfm (F451).
Inlet & Outlet Ports: 1/4 female NPT.
Mounting: In line only (F222); 1/4 20 mounting holes (F451).
Materials of Construction: Anodized aluminum head, polycarbonate
bowl, cadmium plated steel tie rod, nylon internals, Buna N seal.
Weight: 0.5 lb (0.2 kg) (F222); 1.1 lb (0.5 kg) (F451).
Models F222 & F451 Liquid/Particle Filters
Compressed air filters protect equipment and instrumentation from harmful
contaminant's such as dirt, water and oil. Liquids are continuously coalesced and
released through the manual drain valves. Replaceable filter element removes
particles and droplets as small as 0.01 micron with 93% efficiency. Units have 1/4
female NPT inlet and outlet and manual drain valve.
F222 F451
Model F195 Disposable In-Line Filter
Remove 99.99% of unwanted particles from within your gas flow with the
Model F195 Disposable In-Line Filter. Encapsulated microfiber filter elements
are able to filter particles as small as 0.1 micron. Filters are completely
disposable simply remove the filter from your line and throw it away when it
becomes dirty. The transparent nylon housing makes it simple to determine if
the filter needs to be changed.
SPECIFICATIONS
Filtration Efficiency: 99.99% (removal of 0.1 micron particles).
Housing Construction: Nylon.
Filter Tube Dimensions: 0.59 ID x 1.39 length.
Maximum Temperature: 230F @ 0 psig (110C @ 0 bar), 120F @
125 psig (49C @ 9 bar).
Maximum Pressure: 125 psig (8.6 bar).
Maximum Differential Pressure: 60 psi (4 bar) (in to out flow
direction), 20 psi (1.4 bar) (out to in flow direction).
Internal Volume: 11.5 cc (11.5 ml).
Connections: Barbed for 1/4 I.D. tubing.
1.100
[27.94] .750
[19.05]
.750
[19.05]
3.220
[81.79]
.250
[6.35]
.100
[2.54]
Line Pressure (psig) 1.5 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 125
Gas Flow (scfm) 0.6 0.9 1.3 1.6 2.0 2.7 3.5 4.2 5.7
* 1.5 psi pressure drop.
Flowmeter Accessories and Options
Line Pressure vs. Flow
Regulator Kits are available as optional extras for both Rate-Master
Flowmeters and Visi-Float
Flowmeters models. This view shows Model VFA

Visi-Float
flowmeter with integrally connected constant differential pres-

sure regulator. Recommended for use where inlet air pressure fluctuates
widely and constant flow is required.
The regulator maintains a constant pressure differential of approximately 3
.15 psig. Supply pressure must be at least 3 psig above the flowmeter dis-
charge to operate. The standard regulator may be used with any Dwyer Series
RM or VF flowmeter up to 200 scfh. For higher flow rates consult the factory.
Regulator Kits
1/4 NPT
1/4 NPT
Model F222, Liquid/Particle Filter
Model 1201-2, Replacement Filters for F222 (pk of 3)
Model F451, Liquid/Particle Filter
Model 1201-3, Replacement Filters for F451 (pk of 3)
Model F195, Disposable In Line Filter
Model RKA, Regulator Kit for RMA Series
Model RK-RMB, Regulator Kit for RMB Series

546
F
t
e
r
s
,

R
e
g
u
a
t
o
r
s
a
n
d

L
u
b
r
c
a
t
o
r
s
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
Series
F700
Nylon Filter
Ideal For Filtering Liquids and Gases in Low Pressure Systems
The F700 Series of filters is ideal for the filtering of liquids or gases in low
pressure systems. The nylon construction is resistant to harmful components
often found in sample streams. Replaceable filter elements remove particles and
droplets as small as .01 micron with 95% efficiency.
SPECIFICATIONS
Filtration Efficiency: 95% (removal of .01 micron particles).
Max. Flow at 100 psig (6.98 bar): F710N, F711N: 23 SCFM (651 lpm);
F760N, F761N: 27 SCFM (765 lpm).
Inlet & Outlet Connections: F710N: 1/8 NPT; F711N, F760N: 1/4
NPT; F761N: 1/2 NPT.
Mounting: In line only.
Materials of Construction: Complete nylon construction (head, bowl,
internals) with a fluorocarbon (FKM) O ring seal.
Internal Volume: F710N, F711N: 3.05 in
3
(50 cc [mL]); F760N, F761N:
10.5 in
3
(172 cc [mL]).
Weight: F710N, F711N: .15 lb (.068 kg); F760N, F760N: .4 lb (.18 kg).
M6 MOUNTING
THREADS
55/64
[21.93]
17/64
[6.69]
F71XN
FILTER
ELEMENT
1-19/64
[33.02]
4-9/64
[105.16]
FILTER
ELEMENT
M6 MOUNTING
THREADS
NPT INLET/OUTLET
[SEE CHART FOR SIZES]
1-45/64
[43.18]
1-19/64
[33.02]
3/8
[9.52]
NPT INLET/OUTLET
[SEE CHART FOR SIZES]
2-35/64
[64.77]
F76XN
25/64
[9.72]
1-3/8
[34.79]
6-5/32
[156.21]
1-45/64
[43.18]
19/32
[15.24]
2-1/4
[57.15]
F760N, F761N F710N, F711N
Model
F710N
F711N
F710-R
F760N
F761N
F760-R
Product
Nylon Liquid/Particle Filter with a 1/8 NPT connection and
3.05 in
3
internal volume
3.05 in
3
internal volume
Replacement Filters for F710N and F711N, pack of 3
10.5 in
3
internal volume
Nylon Liquid Particle Filter with a 1/2 NPT connection and
10.5 in
3
internal volume
Replacement Filters for F760N and F761N, pack of 3
Pneumatic Shut-Off Valves with
Quick-Connect Connection
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air (no other gases or liquids).
Pressure Limits: 29.5 in Hg to 150 psi ( 750 mm Hg to 990 kPa).
Model
A-478
A-479
A-473
A-474
2-5/16
[58.7]
1-19/32
[40.5]
1-15/32
[37.3]
11/16
[17.4]
Description
6 mm OD tubing to 1/8 NPT shut off valves

C
o
o
n
g

E
x
t
e
n
s
o
n
s
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
Perforated or Spiral Cooling Tower
Protect Instrumentation in High Temperature Applications
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Parts: 316L SS.
Height: 6 (150 mm).
Model
A-240-A
A-240-B
A-240-C
A-240-D
A-240-E
A-240-F
Model
A-250-A
A-250-B
A-250-C
A-250-D
A-250-E
A-250-F
Style
Perforated
Perforated
Perforated
Perforated
Perforated
Perforated
Style
Spiral
Spiral
Spiral
Spiral
Spiral
Spiral
PROCESS CONNECTION
PROCESS CONNECTION
B
B
[5-29/32]
[150]
5-27/35
[148.80]
A
PROCESS CONNECTION
A
PROCESS CONNECTION
The Perforated and Spiral Cooling Towers protect pressure instruments
during high temperature applications. Both the spiral and perforated styles are
made with 316L stainless steel and are available with various process
connections in NPT or BSPT style. Both Cooling Towers are ideal for use with
pressure gages, switches, and transmitters where the process media
temperature exceeds the rating of the instrument.
A-240 A-250
Adjustable Pressure Snubber
Protect Instruments from Pressure Spikes or Fluid Hammer
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Parts: Brass or 316 SS.
Weight: 8.4 oz (238 g).
A
A
[A]
[B]
[C]
[HEX H] Brass 316 SS
Dimensions
C
13
16
20
B
42
44
40
Connections
1/4 M x F
3/8 M x F
1/2 M x F
A
55
60
60
H
25.0
25.0
28.0
The Adjustable Pressure Snubbers protect pressure instruments against
fluctuations, surges, spikes and fluid hammer. The fine thread adjustable valve
allows you to fine tune harmful harmonic vibration from the fluid systems and
isolate the instrument from process when service or replacement is necessary.
These Pressure Snubbers are designed to provide fully field adjustable
dampening. By using our Adjustable Pressure Snubbers, you will alleviate
surges and pulsations to assure steady pressure readings and extend the life of
your instrument.
1/4 male/female NPT
3/8 male/female NPT
1/2 male/female NPT
1/4 male/female BSPT
Connection Chart
Model
A-251
A-252
A-253
A-254
A-255
A-256
Material
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Model
A-257
A-258
A-259
A-260
A-261
A-262
Material
316 SS
316 SS
316 SS
316 SS
316 SS
316 SS
Series
A-240/A-250
Connections
1/4 male/female NPT
3/8 male/female NPT
1/2 male/female NPT
Connections
1/4 male/female NPT
3/8 male/female NPT
1/2 male/female NPT
Connections
1/4 male/female NPT
3/8 male/female NPT
1/2 male/female NPT
Connections
1/4 male/female NPT
3/8 male/female NPT
1/2 male/female NPT

548
G
a
g
e

G
u
a
r
d
s
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
SPECIFICATIONS
Maximum Pressure: Liquids: 160 psi (11 bar) @
70 to 185F (21 to 85C); Gases: 100 psi (6.9 bar)
@ 70 to 100F (21 to 38C) and 30 psi (2.1 bar) @
100 to 185F (38 to 85C).
Accuracy: 4%.
Wetted Parts: Glass-filled polypropylene housing,
Buna-N or fluoroelastomer diaphragm.
Dimensions: 1/4 female NPT instrument side;
1/2 male NPT system side; 1-3/8 (35 mm)
diameter.
Protecting pressure or vacuum instruments from clogging,
corrosion, or damage, the Series GG Gage Guard provides
a protective barrier between the process fluid and the
instrument. The hermetically-sealed uni-body protects from
the possibility of leaking. Glass-filled Polypropylene housing
is suitable for most inorganic chemicals and temperatures
up to 185F (85C). A fluid fill station is recommended for
proper installation.
SPECIFICATIONS
Maximum Pressure: Brass: 10,000 psi (689 bar),
SS: 15,000 psi (1034 bar).
Filter Disc Material: AISI 316 SS.
Approx. Micron Rating: Air & gases: 2-5; water
& oils (30-225 SSU): 10.
Dimensions: 1/4 NPT: 3/4 (19 mm) hex size, 1.5
(38 mm) length.
Designed to protect pressure instrumentation by
dampening surges and pulsations and assuring steady
average pressure readings. Snubbers are available in a
variety of pore sizes for use with gases, water, and oils.
Model
PS114
PS214
PS122
PS124
PS222
PS224
PS225
Service
Air & Gases
Air & Gases
Water & Oils
Air & Gases
Water & Oils
Air & Gases
Pulsating Gas
Series
GG
Gage Guard
Strap Wrench
The SWUK1 offers the user a versatile tool to grip, undo
& tighten a wide variety of awkwardly shaped and sized
objects.
The SWUK1 also makes the job of fitting Adjustable Signal
Flags (ASF) covers to Magnehelic
Gages much easier by simply following the instruction
included with each cover supplied.
FEATURES
Reinforced plastic handle provides extra
leverage.
Rubber strap reinforced with 38 cords of
high tensile polycarbon to give a
breaking strength in excess of 2,000 lbs.
Strap will grip objects from .79 inches to
6.30 inches diameter.
Low cost, rugged and simple to use.
Handy multi-purpose tool.
Model
SWUK1
Series
PS
Pressure Snubber
Model GG1, (Buna-N diaphragm)
Model GG2, (Fluoroelastomer diaphragm)
Construction
Brass 1/8 NPT
SS 1/8 NPT
Brass 1/4 NPT
Brass 1/4 NPT
SS 1/4 NPT
SS 1/4 NPT
SS 1/4 NPT
Model SWUK1
548.P.N:Layout 2 2/15/11 3:29 PM Page 1
F
t
t
n
g
s
,
S
t
a
n
e
s
s

S
t
e
e
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
Introduction to Stainless Steel Fitting Line
The Dwyer Series A-1000 quality tube fittings have been designed and
manufactured to provide reliable leak-free connections in a wide variety of
applications. A reliable leak-free tubing system will be achieved by combining the
proper selection and handling of tubing with the proper tube fitting selection and
installation. The following information is provided to assist in the tube selection
process.
Material
The tubing material chosen must be compatible with the systems
contained media, pressure and temperature, as well as with the
environment in which it will be installed. Also, the tubing and fittings
materials should be similar for optimum sealing action to occur (stainless
fittings for stainless tube, brass fittings for copper tube, carbon steel fittings
for carbon steel tube, etc.). The mixing and contact of dissimilar materials
may leave the system susceptible to galvanic corrosion and/or not allow
proper tube fitting makeup to be achieved.
Pressure and Flow
The size of the tubes outside diameter (O.D.) and the necessary wall
thickness are determined by the systems pressure and flow requirements.
Table A details the suggested tubing sizes and wall thickness for use with
instrumentation tube fittings. If no pressure is shown on the table for a
particular size, the tube is not recommended for use with instrumentation
tube fittings. The tubing system should not be utilized above the tubes
maximum allowable working pressure.
Temperature
The systems operating temperature may affect the initial choice of tubing
material and may also affect the maximum allowable working temperature
for the given tube size (see Table B for temperature stress factors).
Light Gas Service
To provide a successful connection for light gas service, the tubing must
have a thick enough wall to provide resistance for the setup action of the
ferrules to further compensate for the tubes potential surface condition.
Handling and Installation
Surface scratches and gouges on tubing are a source of potential leaks.
Some precaution when handling the tubing can help reduce surface
scratches and maintain the surface finish as originally intended by the
manufacturer. Tubing should never be dragged across rocks, blacktop,
pavement, or tubing storage racks as scratches and gouges can occur.
Sharp blades should always be used in the tube cutters or hacksaws used
to cut the tubing so as to provide a clean, square cut. Dull cutting blades
can cause internal and external hanging burrs, and cause the tubing to
become oval and affect proper insertion within the fitting. As a good
handling practice, tubing should always be deburred prior to tube fitting
installation to help assure easy and complete tube insertion. Additionally,
for bent tube assemblies, it is important to bend tubing prior to installing
tube fittings, and to provide a sufficient straight length of tubing after the
bend to allow the tube to be fully inserted into the fitting. Also, to eliminate
weight stress from the tubing upon the fitting and to provide additional
system support for vibration and thermal shock resistance, the tubing
should always be supported by tube hangers, clamps or trays.
*The precipitation of chromium carbides potentially resulting in intergranular
corrosion may occur when exposed to operating temperatures.
Tube O.D.
[Size (in)]
1/16
1/8
3/16
1/4
5/16
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
.010
5600
.012
6850
.014
8150
.016
9500
.020
12100
.028
8550
5450
4000
.035
11000
7000
5100
4050
3300
2450
.049
10300
7500
5850
4800
3500
2950
2400
2050
.065
10300
8050
6550
4750
4000
3300
2800
2400
.083
6250
5200
4250
3600
3150
2450
.095
6050
4950
4200
3650
2850
2350
.109
5800
4850
4200
3300
2700
2000
.120
4700
3650
3000
2200
.134
4150
3400
2500
.156
4900
4000
2900
.188
4900
3600
Wall Thickness of Tube (Inches)
STAINLESS STEEL TUBING - TABLE A
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (psig)
F
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1200
Temperature
Stress Factors For Determining Tubing Pressure Ratings at
Elevated Temperatures - TABLE B
C
38
93
149
200
260
316
371
427
482
538
649
Stainless Steel 316
1.00
1.00
1.00
.97
.90
.85
.82
.80*
.78*
.73*
.37*

550
F
t
t
n
g
s
,
S
t
a
n
e
s
s

S
t
e
e
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
Series
A-1000
Series A-1001 Male Elbow Fitting Line
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquid, steam and compatible gases.
Temperature Ranges: See reference Table B.
Pressure Ranges: See reference Table A.
Connections: 1/16 to 1 1/2.
Dimensions: Consult website, or contact factory.
H WRENCH PAD
BY
F
E
P PIPE THREAD
C
D
T
G NUT
HEX
A
BX
G NUT HEX
B BODY
F
E
P PIPE THREAD
H BODY HEX
A
C
D
T
Series A-1002 Male Connector Fitting Line
SPECIFICATIONS
Connections: 1/16 to 2.
Model
A-1001-1
A-1001-2
A-1001-3
A-1001-4
A-1001-5
A-1001-6
A-1001-7
A-1001-8
A-1001-9
A-1001-10
A-1001-11
T=Tube O.D.
1/16
1/16
1/8
1/8
1/8
3/16
3/16
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
Model
A-1001-12
A-1001-13
A-1001-15
A-1001-16
A-1001-17
A-1001-18
A-1001-19
A-1001-20
A-1001-21
A-1001-22
A-1001-23
T=Tube O.D.
5/16
5/16
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
Model
A-1001-24
A-1001-25
A-1001-26
A-1001-27
A-1001-28
A-1001-29
A-1001-30
A-1001-31
A-1001-32
A-1001-33
T=Tube O.D.
5/8
5/8
5/8
3/4
3/4
7/8
1
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
Model
A-1002-1
A-1002-2
A-1002-3
A-1002-4
A-1002-5
A-1002-6
A-1002-7
A-1002-8
A-1002-9
A-1002-10
A-1002-11
A-1002-12
A-1002-13
A-1002-15
A-1002-16
T=Tube O.D.
1/16
1/16
1/16
1/8
1/8
1/8
1/8
1/8
3/16
3/16
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
Model
A-1002-17
A-1002-18
A-1002-19
A-1002-20
A-1002-21
A-1002-22
A-1002-23
A-1002-24
A-1002-25
A-1002-26
A-1002-27
A-1002-28
A-1002-29
A-1002-30
A-1002-31
T=Tube O.D.
5/16
5/16
5/16
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
5/8
5/8
Model
A-1002-32
A-1002-33
A-1002-34
A-1002-35
A-1002-36
A-1002-37
A-1002-39
A-1002-40
A-1002-41
A-1002-42
A-1002-43
A-1002-44
A-1002-45
T=Tube O.D.
5/8
5/8
3/4
3/4
3/4
7/8
1
1
1
1 1/4
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
P=Pipe
Thread Male
1/16
1/8
1/16
1/8
1/4
1/8
1/4
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
P=Pipe
Thread Male
3/8
1/2
3/4
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
P=Pipe
Thread Male
1/8
1/4
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
P=Pipe
Thread Male
1/16
1/8
1/4
1/16
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
1/8
1/4
1/16
1/8
1/4
1/2
3/4
P=Pipe
Thread Male
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
3/8
1/2
P=Pipe
Thread Male
1/2
3/4
1/2
3/4
1
3/4
1/2
3/4
1
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2

F
t
t
n
g
s
,
S
t
a
n
e
s
s

S
t
e
e
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
Series
A-1000
Series A-1003 Union Fitting Line
SPECIFICATIONS
B BODY
H BODY
HEX
G NUT HEX
T
D
C
A
C
D
E T
G NUT HEX
A
C
D
E T
BX
H WRENCH PAD
A
T
G NUT HEX
Series A-1004 Union Elbow Fitting Line
SPECIFICATIONS
B BODY G NUT HEX
E T
D
C
AX
A
AX
BX
AX
BX
BX
H WRENCH
PAD
Series A-1005 Union Tee Fitting Line
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
A-1003-1
A-1003-2
A-1003-3
A-1003-4
A-1003-5
Model
A-1003-6
A-1003-7
A-1003-8
A-1003-9
A-1003-10
Model
A-1003-11
A-1003-12
A-1003-13
A-1003-14
Model
A-1004-1
A-1004-2
A-1004-3
A-1004-4
A-1004-5
Model
A-1004-6
A-1004-7
A-1004-8
A-1004-9
A-1004-10
Model
A-1004-11
A-1004-12
A-1004-13
A-1004-14
Model
A-1005-1
A-1005-2
A-1005-3
A-1005-4
A-1005-5
Model
A-1005-6
A-1005-7
A-1005-8
A-1005-9
A-1005-11
Model
A-1005-12
A-1005-13
A-1005-14
T=Tube O.D.
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
T=Tube O.D.
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
T=Tube O.D.
1/16
1/8
3/16
1/4
5/16
T=Tube O.D.
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
T=Tube O.D.
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
T=Tube O.D.
1/16
1/8
3/16
1/4
5/16
T=Tube O.D.
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
1
T=Tube O.D.
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
T=Tube O.D.
1/16
1/8
3/16
1/4
5/16

552
F
t
t
n
g
s
,
S
t
a
n
e
s
s

S
t
e
e
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
Series
A-1000
Series A-1006 Front Ferrule Fitting Line
SPECIFICATIONS
T
T
Series A-1007 Back Ferrule Fitting Line
SPECIFICATIONS
G NUT HEX
T
L
Series A-1008 Nut Fitting Line
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
A-1008-8
A-1008-9
A-1008-10
A-1008-11
A-1008-12
A-1008-13
A-1008-14
Model
A-1007-1
A-1007-2
A-1007-3
A-1007-4
A-1007-5
A-1007-6
A-1007-7
Model
A-1008-1
A-1008-2
A-1008-3
A-1008-4
A-1008-5
A-1008-6
A-1008-7
Model
A-1007-8
A-1007-9
A-1007-10
A-1007-11
A-1007-12
A-1007-13
A-1007-14
Model
A-1006-8
A-1006-9
A-1006-10
A-1006-11
A-1006-12
A-1006-13
A-1006-14
Model
A-1006-1
A-1006-2
A-1006-3
A-1006-4
A-1006-5
A-1006-6
A-1006-7
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Limits: See reference Table B on the website.
Pressure Limits: See reference Table A on the website.
Connections: 1/8 to 1/2.
Dimensions: Consult website or contact factory.
DC
H
G HEX
B
A
E F
Series A-1012 Stainless Steel Fitting Line
Model
A-1012-1
A-1012-2
A-1012-3
A-1012-4
A-1012-6
A-1012-9
Hose Barb
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/4
3/8
1/2
T=Tube O.D.
1/16
1/8
3/16
1/4
5/16
3/8
1/2
T=Tube O.D.
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
T=Tube O.D.
1/16
1/8
3/16
1/4
5/16
3/8
1/2
T=Tube O.D.
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
T=Tube O.D.
1/16
1/8
3/16
1/4
5/16
3/8
1/2
T=Tube O.D.
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
T=Tube O.D.
1/8
1/4
1/4
3/8
3/8
1/2

F
t
t
n
g
s
,
S
t
a
n
e
s
s

S
t
e
e
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
Series
A-1000
Series A-1009 Ferrule Set Fitting Line
SPECIFICATIONS
T
B BODY
H BODY HEX
T
D
C
A
AX
D
E
G NUT HEX
BX
H JAM NUT HEX
Series A-1010 Bulkhead Union Fitting Line
SPECIFICATIONS
Series A-1011 Female Connector Fitting Line
SPECIFICATIONS
Connections: 1/16 to 1 1/2.
G NUT HEX
B BODY
P PIPE THREAD
H BODY HEX
T
D
C
A
Model
A-1009-1
A-1009-2
A-1009-3
A-1009-4
A-1009-5
A-1009-6
A-1009-7
Model
A-1010-1
A-1010-2
A-1010-3
A-1010-4
A-1010-5
A-1010-6
A-1010-7
A-1010-8
A-1010-9
A-1010-10
Model
A-1011-1
A-1011-2
A-1011-3
A-1011-4
A-1011-5
A-1011-6
A-1011-7
A-1011-8
A-1011-9
A-1011-11
T=Tube O.D.
1/16
1/16
1/8
1/8
3/16
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
5/16
Model
A-1011-12
A-1011-13
A-1011-14
A-1011-15
A-1011-16
A-1011-17
A-1011-18
A-1011-19
A-1011-20
A-1011-21
T=Tube O.D.
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
5/8
Model
A-1011-22
A-1011-23
A-1011-24
A-1011-25
A-1011-26
A-1011-27
A-1011-28
A-1011-29
T=Tube O.D.
5/8
3/4
3/4
7/8
1
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
T=Tube O.D.
1/16
1/8
3/16
1/4
5/16
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
1
P=Pipe
Thread Male
1/16
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/8
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
1/4
P=Pipe
Thread Male
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
3/8
P=Pipe
Thread Male
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
T=Tube O.D.
1/16
1/8
3/16
1/4
5/16
3/8
1/2

554
F
t
t
n
g
s
,
N
y
o
n
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
Nylon Fittings
Dwyer Instruments offers a wide variety of nylon and stainless steel fittings.
Nylon fittings are generally acceptable for use at working pressures up to 150 psi at normal room tempera-
tures, and at very low pressures, temperatures can approach 175F.
Nylon Fittings
Series A-2001 Male Pipe Thread (MPT) by
Hose Barb (HB)
Model
A-2001-1
A-2001-2
A-2001-3
A-2001-4
A-2001-5
A-2001-6
Model
A-2002-1
A-2002-2
A-2002-3
A-2002-4
Series A-2002 Female Pipe Thread
(FPT) by Hose Barb (HB)
Series A-2003 Elbows: Male Pipe
Thread by Hose Barb
Series A-2004 Elbows: Female Pipe
Thread by Hose Barb
Model
A-2003-1
A-2003-2
A-2003-3
A-2003-4
Model
A-2004-1
A-2004-2
Model
A-2005-1
A-2005-2
A-2005-3
Thread by Male Pipe Thread
Model
A-2006-1
A-2006-2
A-2006-3
Thread-90
Model
A-2007-1
A-2007-2
A-2007-3
Series A-2007 Tees: Female Pipe
Thread
Model
A-2008-1
Series A-2008 Tees: Female Pipe
Thread with 1/4 Gauge Port
Model
A-2009-1
A-2009-2
A-2009-3
A-2009-4
A-2009-5
A-2009-6
A-2009-7
A-2009-8
A-2009-9
A-2009-10
Model
A-2009-11
A-2009-13
A-2009-14
A-2009-15
A-2009-16
A-2009-17
A-2009-18
A-2009-19
A-2009-20
Series A-2009 Reducer: Bushings
A-2001
A-2002
A-2004
A-2005
A-2008
A-2006
A-2007
A-2003
A-2009
Series
A-2000
Male NPT x HB
1/8 x 3/16
1/8 x 1/4
1/8 x 5/16
1/8 x 3/8
1/4 x 3/16
1/4 x 1/4
Female NPT x HB
1/4 x 1/4
1/4 x 3/8
3/8 x 1/4
3/8 x 3/8
Male NPT x HB
1/8 x 1/4
1/8 x 3/8
1/4 x 3/16
1/4 x 1/4
Female NPT x HB
1/8 x 1/4
1/4 x 1/4
Female NPT x Male NPT
1/4 x 1/4
3/8 x 3/8
1/2 x 1/2
Female NPT x Female NPT
1/2 x 1/2
3/4 x 3/4
1 x 1
Female NPT
1/4
1/2
3/4
Female NPT
1/2
Male NPT x Female NPT
3/8 x 1/8
3/8 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/8
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 3/8
3/4 x 1/8
3/4 x 1/4
3/4 x 3/8
3/4 x 1/2
1 x 1/2
1 1/4 x 3/4
1 1/4 x 1
1 1/2 x 3/4
1 1/2 x 1
1 1/2 x 1 1/4
2 x 3/4
2 x 1
2 x 1 1/4
2 x 1 1/2

F
t
t
n
g
s
,
N
y
o
n
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
Model
A-2011-1
A-2011-2
A-2011-3
A-2011-4
Series A-2011 Nipples: Male Pipe
Model
A-2012-1
A-2012-2
A-2012-3
Series A-2012 Couplings:
Female Pipe Thread
Model
A-2013-1
A-2013-2
Series A-2013 Elbows: Hose Barb
Model
A-2014-1
A-2014-2
Series A-2014 Hose Menders
w/o Center Stop
Series A-2015 Hose Menders
with Center Stop
Model
A-2015-1
A-2015-2
Series A-2016 Tees: Hose Barb
Model
A-2016-1
A-2016-2
Series A-2017 Tees:
Male Pipe Thread by Hose Barb
Model
A-2017-1
A-2017-2
A-2017-3
A-2017-4
A-2011
A-2012 A-2013
A-2014 A-2015
A-2016
A-2017
A-2010
Model
A-2010-1
A-2010-2
A-2010-3
A-2010-4
A-2010-5
A-2010-6
A-2010-7
Series A-2010 Reducing Nipples: Male
Pipe Thread
Nylon Fittings
Series
A-2000
Male NPT x Male NPT
1/8 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/4
3/8 x 3/8
1/2 x 1/2
Female NPT x Female NPT
1/2 x 1/2
3/4 x 3/4
1 x 1
HB x HB
1/4 x 1/4
3/8 x 1/4
HB x HB
1/4 x 3/16
5/16 x 5/16
HB x HB
1/8 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/4
HB(1) x HB(2&3)
1/4 x 1/4
1/4 x 3/8
Male NPT (1) x HB (2&3)
1/8 x 1/4
1/4 x 1/4
1/4 x 3/8
1/4 x 1/2
Male NPT x Male NPT
1/4 x 1/8
3/8 x 1/8
3/8 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 3/8
3/4 x 3/8
3/4 x 1/2

556
F
t
t
n
g
s
,
S
t
a
n
e
s
s

S
t
e
e
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
A-2020
Series A-2022 Elbow:
Female Pipe Thread, 90
Model
A-2022-1
A-2022-2
A-2022-3
A-2022-4
A-2022-5
A-2022-6
A-2022-7
A-2022-8
A-2022-9
A-2022-10
Series A-2023 Elbow: Female
Pipe Thread, 45
Model
A-2023-1
A-2023-2
A-2023-3
A-2023-4
A-2023-5
A-2023-6
A-2023-7
A-2023-8
A-2023-9
A-2023-10
Series A-2024 Reducer Bushings
Model
A-2024-1
A-2024-2
A-2024-3
A-2024-4
A-2024-5
A-2024-6
A-2024-7
A-2024-8
A-2024-9
A-2024-10
A-2024-11
A-2024-12
A-2024-13
A-2024-14
A-2024-15
A-2024-16
A-2024-17
A-2022
A-2023
A-2024
A-2018
A-2019
A-2021
Series A-2018 316 SS Hose Barb: Male
Pipe Thread
Model
A-2018-1
A-2018-2
Series A-2019 Cap: Female
Pipe Thread
Model
A-2019-1
A-2019-2
A-2019-3
A-2019-4
A-2019-5
A-2019-6
Series A-2020 Cross:
Female Pipe Thread
Model
A-2020-1
A-2020-2
A-2020-3
A-2020-4
A-2020-5
A-2020-6
Series A-2021 Coupling:
Female Pipe Thread
Model
A-2021-1
A-2021-2
A-2021-3
A-2021-4
A-2021-5
A-2021-6
A-2021-7
A-2021-8
A-2021-9
A-2021-10
Stainless Steel Fittings
Our stainless steel fittings and pipe nipples are made
from 304 or 316 SS and are rated at 150 psi.
Series
A-2000
Female NPT
1/8 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/4
3/8 x 3/8
1/2 x 1/2
3/4 x 3/4
1 x 1
1 1/4 x 1 1/4
1 1/2 x 1 1/2
2 x 2
3 x 3
Female NPT
1/8 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/4
3/8 x 3/8
1/2 x 1/2
3/4 x 3/4
1 x 1
1 1/4 x 1 1/4
1 1/2 x 1 1/2
2 x 2
3 x 3
1/4 x 1/8
3/8 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 3/8
3/4 x 1/4
3/4 x 1/2
1 x 1/2
1 x 3/4
1 1/4 x 3/4
1 1/4 x 1
1 1/2 x 3/4
1 1/2 x 1
1 1/2 x 1 1/4
2 x 1
2 x 1 1/4
2 x 1 1/2
3 x 2
Male NPT x HB
1/4 x 1/4
1/4 x 3/8
Female NPT
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
Female NPT
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
Female NPT
1/8 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/4
3/8 x 3/8
1/2 x 1/2
3/4 x 3/4
1 x 1
1 1/4 x 1 1/4
1 1/2 x 1 1/2
2 x 2
3 x 3

S
t
a
t
c

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
S
e
n
s
o
r
s
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
A-2026
A-2027 A-2028
Series A-2026 Tee:
Female Pipe Thread
Model
A-2026-1
A-2026-2
A-2026-3
A-2026-4
A-2026-5
A-2026-6
A-2026-7
A-2026-8
A-2026-9
A-2026-10
Series A-2027 Union:
Female Pipe Thread
Model
A-2027-1
A-2027-2
A-2027-3
A-2027-4
A-2027-5
A-2027-6
A-2027-7
A-2027-8
A-2027-9
A-2027-10
Model
A-2028-1
A-2028-2
A-2028-3
A-2028-4
A-2028-5
A-2028-6
A-2028-7
A-2028-8
A-2028-9
A-2028-10
A-2028-11
A-2028-12
A-2028-13
A-2028-14
Model
A-2028-15
A-2028-16
A-2028-17
A-2028-18
A-2028-19
A-2028-20
A-2028-21
A-2028-22
A-2028-23
A-2028-24
A-2028-25
A-2028-26
A-2028-27
Series A-2028 Nipple: Male Pipe Thread
A-2025
Series A-2025 Street Elbow: Female Pipe
Model
A-2025-1
A-2025-2
A-2025-3
A-2025-4
A-2025-5
A-2025-6
A-2025-7
A-2025-8
A-2025-9
A-2025-10
Series
A-2000
Female NPT
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
3
Female NPT
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
3
Male NPT x Length
1/8 x 3/4
1/8 x 1 1/2
1/8 x 2
1/4 x 7/8
1/4 x 1 1/2
1/4 x 2
3/8 x 1
3/8 x 1 1/2
3/8 x 2
1/2 x 1 1/8
1/2 x 1 1/2
1/2 x 2
3/4 x 1 3/8
3/4 x 1 1/2
Male NPT x Length
3/4 x 2
1 x 1 1/2
1 x 2
1 1/4 x 1 5/8
1 1/4 x 2
1 1/2 x 1 3/4
1 1/2 x 2
2 x 2
2 x 2 1/2
3 x 2 5/8
3 x 3
4 x 2 7/8
4 x 4
Female NPT x Male NPT
1/8 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/4
3/8 x 3/8
1/2 x 1/2
3/4 x 3/4
1 x 1
1 1/4 x 1 1/4
1 1/2 x 1 1/2
2 x 2
3 x 3
Stainless Steel Static Pressure Tips
SPECIFICATIONS
Sizes: 4 (101 mm), 6 (152 mm), 8 (203 mm).
Materials: 304 SS sensor tube, 303 SS hose barb, 430 SS flange.
Connection: Barb connection for use with 3/16 I.D. tubing.
Flange View
1/4 [6.0]
GASKET
FLANGE BRACKET
1/4 HOSE BARB
1/2 [12.70]
1-1/16
[26.92]
LENGTH
4 [101.6], 6 [152.4] OR 8 [203.2]
A-489
A-491
A-493
4
6
8
The Stainless Steel Static Pressure Tips are used to measure static
pressures in ducts or rooms. They are to be connected to differential pressure
switches and transmitters. Two static sensors are used in applications where
differential pressure is required across a filter or coil. These sensors include a
mounting flange with integral rubber gasket and two screws for simplifying
mounting on a duct.
A-489, 4 Straight Static Pressure Tip with Flange

558
S
t
a
t
c

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
S
e
n
s
o
r
s
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
A-420 Typical outdoor
mounting
Static Pressure Accessories
A-417 A-418
A-419 A-420
A-421 Surge Damper
Advantages and Specifications of the A-465 Kit
The professional way to sense space pressure.
Mounting options include: Sheetrock walls, ceiling tiles or single gang
electrical boxes.
Non block reference opening prevents plugging.
Saves time and money.
Outside dimensions: 2 3/4 x 4 1/2 x 1/4 inches (6.9 x 11.4 x 0.6 cm).
Attractive design blends in with building decor.
Materials: White ABS plastic.
The A-465 Space Pressure Sensor Kit provides a clean solution for sensing
space pressure. Typical applications include: sensing the pressure in clean rooms,
laboratories and building lobbies. The kink resistant tubing provided in the kit is
connected to the tubing running to a pressure transducer, Magnehelic
Gage, VAV
unit or any other types of pressure sensing devices. The sensor can be mounted on
sheetrock walls, single gang electrical boxes or on ceiling tiles. The block free
pressure reference opening along with the kink resistant tubing ensure accurate
readings at all times.
Flush Mount Space Pressure Sensor
Ideal for Clean Rooms
Model
A-465
03/16
[04.8]
3/4
[19.1]
1/4
[6.4]
2-3/4
[69.9]
3-1/4
[82.5] 4-1/2
[114.3]
Model A-417, Static Pressure Pickup. For use in clean rooms, 100 micron filter
picks up static pressure. Stainless steel wall plate fits 2 x 4 electrical box.
Sealed with foam gasket, screws included. Barbed brass fitting holds 1/8 to
5/32 I.D. tubing.
Model A-418, Static Pressure Pickup. Room mount with Delta Style plastic
enclosure fits 2 x 4 electrical box. Fine mesh screen hides static pressure
pickup port. Clean connection to 1/8 to 5/32 I.D. tubing and pressure sensor.
Sealed with foam gasket, screws included.
Model A-419, Static Pressure Pickup Ceiling Mount. Plate rests on top of
standard 3/4 thick ceiling tile while 100 micron filter faces down through 5/8
hole in tile. Filter is barely noticeable in room being monitored. Screws included
for optional mounting to junction box. Barbed brass fitting holds 1/8 to 5/32
I.D. tubing.
Model A-420, Static Pressure Pickup for Roof or Outside Wall Mount. Port
especially reduces effects of wind gusts to keep pressure readings stable
when plate is parallel to ground. NEMA 4X (IP66) rated structure withstands
harsh environmental elements. Structure is 3 5/8 across and 2 1/2 deep.
EMT Conduit fitting is 1/2. Pressure connection is brass barbed fitting for 1/4
tubing.
Model A-421, Static Pressure Tip measures duct static air pressure. Assembly
includes 6 probe, silicon rubber hose, and screws. Built in surge damper
ensures stable readings on pressure sensor. Pressure spike reducer can be
added to end of tube to further smooth over pressure fluctuations.
Model A-465

M
s
c
e
a
n
e
o
u
s
A
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
e
s
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
Static Pressure Sensors
Valves Connectors
A-301
A-302
A-303
A-306-A
A-305
A-307
A-310A A-310B
A-311
A-312
A-355 A-365
A-315 A-316 A-317 A-318
A-319 A-321 A-322
A-308
A-345
MODELS
MODELS
A-414
ACCESSORIES
These sensors are for use with manometers, Magnehelic
gages, pressure switches

and other controllers to pick up or sense static pressure drop across air filters and
cooling coils, blower input and discharge pressures, etc. The angled tips shown have 4
insertion depth. Each has four radially drilled .040 sensing holes. All except Model A
303 mount in 3/8 hole in duct. For portable use, a magnet holds No. A 303 in place. No.
A 305 is used where a very low actuation or sensing point is required on a pressure
switch or gage or where response time is critical. No. A 307 and A 308 are suitable for
use in low velocity systems or where the need for accuracy is less critical.
A-301, Static Pressure Tip, for 1/4 metal tubing connection.
A-301-A, Static Pressure Tip, same as A 301 with 6 insertion depth.
A-301-B, Static Pressure Tip, same as A 301 with 8 insertion depth.
A-301-C, Static Pressure Tip, same as A 301 with 12 insertion depth.
A-301-SS, same as A 301 in Stainless Steel.
A-302, Static Pressure Tip, for 3/16 and 1/8 I.D. plastic or rubber tubing.
A-302-A, Static Pressure Tip, same as A 302 with 6 insertion depth.
A-303, Portable Static Pressure Tip, for 3/16 I.D. rubber or plastic tubing with 3
insertion.
A-305, Static Pressure Tip, low resistance application, furnished with two (2) hex jam
nuts and two (2) mounting washers for duct mounting and with 1/8 NPT pipe thread
for pressure connection.
A-305-SS, same as A 305 in Stainless Steel.
A-306, Outdoor static pressure sensor. Provides average outdoor pressure signal for
reference in building pressurization applications. Includes sensor, 50 ft. vinyl tubing,
mounting bracket and hardware.
A-306-A, Outdoor static pressure sensor. Provides average outdoor pressure signal
for reference in building pressurization applications. Includes sensor, 50 ft. vinyl
tubing, mounting bracket and hardware. Gray Sensor.
A-307, Static Pressure Fitting, for 1/4 metal tubing connection.
A-307-SS, as above in Stainless Steel.
A-308, Static Pressure Fitting, for 3/16 and 1/8 I.D. plastic or rubber tubing.
A-345, Flange for mounting A 301, A 302, A 307, A 308 or 1/8 dia. Pitot Tubes with
compression fitting when interior of duct is not accessible. Aluminum, with gasket and
sheet metal screws.
A-414, 316 SS Clean Room Pressure Sensor.
Instrument valves for permanent installation. They mount in part A 316, A 317, type C
manometer connections or Magnehelic
gage and connect to metal tubing or 1/8 pipe.

A-310A, 3 Way Vent Valve, plastic, 1/8 NPT to 1/4 metal tubing. Positions are: (1)
Line: Gage connected to pressure source. (2) Off: Both gage and connection to
pressure source closed. (3) Vent: Gage vented to atmosphere and connection to
pressure source closed. 80 psi rating. Replaces former model A310 (brass).
A-310B, same as A 310A but with 10 psi rating.
A-311, Shut Off Valve, brass, 1/8 NPT to 1/8 NPT.
A-312, Shut Off Valve, brass, 1/8 NPT to 1/4 metal tubing.
A-355, Porting Valve, acrylic plastic, 1/8 NPT inserts. Used for convenient indication
of pressure at two points with a single gage.
A-365, Dual Porting Valve, acrylic plastic, 1/8 NPT fittings. For monitoring three
pressures, two at a time, with one gage.
Gage Connectors for Manometers. Molded nylon construction, threaded .786 x 27
N.S., with O ring seal.
A-315, Gage connector, Shut off type, for 3/16 rubber tubing.
A-316, Gage connector, bushing, 1/8 pipe thread opening.
A-317, Gage connector, 1/8 pipe thread opening, less O.D. thd., for slip fit in 3/4 dia.
opening in 250 series A.F. gages.
A-318, Gage connector 1/4 pipe thread opening.
A-319, Flexible Red P.V.C. connector, 3/16 I.D. Rubber Tubing to 1/4 I.D. Plastic
Tube for 1221,1222 and 1227 Manometers.
A-321, Brass Safety Relief Valve Protects Magnehelic
or Photohelic
Gage against
over pressure due to regulator failure etc. Opens at 10 psi. Mounts in tee fitting in
sensing line or in unused gage port with addition of A 349 reducer. 1/4 male NPT
(Use two for D.P. application).
A-322, Gage connector for 1/4 tubing. Slip fits in 3/4 opening in 250 series A.F. gages
(Compression nut and ferrule not included).

560
M
i
s
c
e
l
l
a
n
e
o
u
s
A
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
Fittings Filters
Miscellaneous
F222
A-351
A-354
A-356
A-357
A-366
A-370 A-369 A-368 A-362
A-371 A-395 A-497
A-397
A-364
A-363
A-353 A-352
A-346
A-339
A-334
A-330 A-331 A-332
A-333
A-324 A-326 A-327, A-328 A-329
A-336 A-337
A-338
A-340 A-342 A-345
A-349 A-391 A-392 A-398
F451
MODELS
MODELS
A-300
A-465 A-464
ACCESSORIES
A-298, Flat Aluminum Bracket for flush mounting Capsuhelic
gage, 603A, 605, and

3000MR
A-299, Mounting Bracket, flush mount Magnehelic
gage in bracket. Bracket is then

surface mounted. Steel with gray hammertone epoxy finish
A-300, Flat Aluminum Bracket for flush mounting Magnehelic
gage
A-351, Pinch Clamp to seal rubber tubing, as in a leakage test
A-352, Magneclip, slip on magnetic holder for acrylic plastic gages. Per pair
A-353, Magnetic Mounting. Flat style, secures to flowmeter, etc. with 6-32 machine
screw and boots insert
A-354, Magnetic Mounting, Edge style, secures edge of acrylic manometer with 10-32
machine screw and boots insert
A-356, Gage plug with retainer loop, polyethylene plastic. For 1/4 I.D. tubing. Slip loop
over tubing O.D. and insert plug for seal
A-357, Thermometer and terminal tube holder. Stainless steel wire
A-362, Stand-Hang bracket, aluminum, for Minihelic
II gage
A-363, Scale Clamp Bar for 1221 Manometer
A-364, Magnet Assembly for 1222 Manometers, 2 required (3 required for 1222-36 and
M-1000)
A-366, Manometer Cleaning Brush 1/4 O.D. x 2-1/8 Long. Attach to wire for use
A-368, Surface mounting plate, aluminum, for Magnehelic
gage
A-369, Stand-Hang Bracket, aluminum, for Magnehelic
gage
A-370, Mounting Bracket, Flush mount Capsuhelic
gage or Series 631B Transmitter in

bracket. Bracket is then surface mounted. Steel with gray hammertone epoxy finish
A-371, Surface Mounting Bracket. Use with Photohelic
gage on horizontal or vertical

surfaces. Also for Capsu-Photohelic
gages on vertical only

A-395, Surface Mounting Bracket for Series 4000 Capsuhelic
gages. Steel with gray

hammertone epoxy finish
A-397, Step Drill. Rugged Step Drill quickly provides true round holes in thin materials.
Ideal for installation of Dwyer Pitot Tubes in sheet metal duct. No centerpunch needed
to steel. Drills 3/16 through 1/2 holes in 1/16 increments. (Net Price, No Discount
Allowed)
A-464, Flush Mount Kit for Magnehelics

gages
A-465, Flush Mount Space Pressure Sensor
A-497, Surface Mounting Bracket for Minihelic
II gage. Steel with satin black finish

A-170, Stainless Steel Pigtail Siphon.
A-323, Elbow Compression Fitting, brass 1/8 NPT to 1/4 metal tubing.
A-324, Compression Fitting, brass 1/8 NPT to 1/4 metal tubing.
A-326, Compression Fitting, brass 1/8 NPT to 3/8 tubing.
A-327, 5/16 Nylon Tube Union.
A-328, 1/4 Nylon Tube Union.
A-329, 1/8 NPT Close Coupled Street Ell, Brass.
A-330, 1/8 Pipe Plug, socket hex, plated steel.
A-331, 1/8 NPT Filter Vent Plug, nylon and sintered metal.
A-332, Bushing, brass, 1/8 to 1/4 NPT.
A-333, Bushing, brass, 1/8 to 1/2 NPT.
A-334, Close Nipple, brass, 1/8 NPT.
A-336, 90 Street L, brass, 1/8 NPT.
A-337, Coupling, brass, 1/8 NPT.
A-338, Servel Adapter, brass 3/8 and 5/16 N.F. Threads for gas appliances to 1/8
and 3/16 I.D. rubber or plastic tubing.
A-339, Adapter, brass, 1/8 NPT to 3/16 rubber and 1/8 I.D. plastic tubing.
A-340, Adapter, nylon, 1/8 NPT to 3/16 I.D. rubber or 1/4 plastic tubing.
A-342, T Assembly, plastic, for 3/16 I.D. rubber or 1/4 plastic tubing.
A-343, T Assembly, plastic, for 3/16 plastic tubing.
A-343-1, T Assembly, plastic, for 1/8 I.D. plastic tubing.
A-344, Terminal Tube, Brass 1/4 diameter tube, 8" length (not shown).
A-345, Flange, aluminum with gasket and sheet metal screws, 1/8 NPT.
A-346, T Compression Fitting, brass, 1/4 metal tubing.
A-349, Reducer, brass, 1/4 female NPT to 1/8 male NPT.
A-385, 1/2 Plastic Hole Plugs 20/bag.
A-386, 5/16 Metal Hole Plugs 20/bag.
A-391, Line Filter for Capsuhelic
gage,1/4 female NPT X 1/4 male NPT.

A-392, Line Filter for Magnehelic
gage, 1/8 female NPT x 1/8 male NPT.

A-398, Probe Extension Adapter for series 640 air velocity transmitter. Brass, 1/2
female NPT x 5/16 compression.
F222, Liquid/Particle Filter for compressed air. Removes dirt, water and oil. 22 scfm
maximum flow, 1/4 female NPT inlet and outlet.
1201-2, Replacement Filter Element for F222 filter, package of 3.
F451, Liquid/Particle Filter for compressed air. Removes dirt, water and oil. 45 scfm
maximum flow, 1/4 female NPT inlet and outlet.
1201-3, Replacement Filter Element for F451 filter, package of 3.
560.P.N:Layout 2 2/15/11 3:34 PM Page 1
M
s
c
e
a
n
e
o
u
s
A
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
e
s
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
Thermometers, Psychrometer, Slide Charts
Carrying Cases
Pumps
A-350
A-394
A-396A
A-401
A-430-1
A-404
A-503 A-525
A-530
A-527
A-532
A-533 A-531
A-534
MODELS
MODELS
MODELS
Optional Accessory Kits for Air Filter Switches
A-602
A-603
A-604
MODELS
ACCESSORIES
A-350, Aspirator Bulb. Used as pressure source in calibration and leakage tests, to
draw gas sample into CO
2
Indicator or smoke gage.
A-394, Electric Air Pump. Provides convenient source of purge air in bubbler type
liquid level systems. Dual diaphragm design allows operation of two systems
simultaneously.
A-396A, Calibration pump. Serves as pressure source to calibrate gages and
transmitters or to set pressure switches. Use with manometer or other pressure
standard. Includes volume adjuster enabling fine pressure control and bleed valve.
Generates pressures from a fraction of an inch w.c. to 72 psig (5 bar). Includes
barbed fitting, tee connector and three 36 lengths of vinyl tubing.
A-502, Dial Thermometer, 0 to 250F and 20 to 120C.
A-503, Dial Thermometer, 200 to 1000 F and 100 to 540C.
A-525, Pocket type sling Psychrometer. Furnished complete with Psychrometric
charts. Psychrometric slide chart, and carrying case.
A-527, Replacement Wick for Psychrometer.
A-530, Psychrometric Slide Chart.
A-531, Oil Burner Efficiency Slide Chart.
A-532, Air Velocity Calculator Slide Chart.
A-533, Metric English Pressure and Flow Conversion Slide Chart.
A-534, International L.H.V. Combustion Efficiency Slide Chart.
A-536, Metric Air Velocity Calculator Slide Chart.
Steel cases are substantially constructed and finished in gray hammerloid.
Molded plastic cases are gray, high density polyethylene.
A-401, Plastic Carrying Case for 1212 Gas Pressure Kit, 910 Smoke Gage and
up to 36 Roll up Manometers 7 9/16 x 5 7/8 x 2 13/16
A-402A, Nylon Carrying Pouch for Series 475, 477, 490 Digital Manometers
7 1/2 x 3 x 2 1/4
A-404, Plastic Carrying Case for Portable Inclined Gages 100, 101, 108, 115
12 1/4 x 6 1/4 x 1 3/4
A-405, Plastic Carrying Case for Portable Inclined Gages 109, 100.5, 104 6, 102,
102.5 13 1/2 x 10 x 2 3/8
A-413, Steel Carrying Case for Portable Draft Gages 104 8, 104 10 and 48 and
larger Slack Tube Manometers 18 1/2 x 4 3/8 x 2 1/4
A-430-1, Plastic Carrying Case for 1200 series Combustion Test Kit
A-431, Steel Carrying Case for Air Velocity Meter, 400 5
A-432, Plastic Carrying Case for Magnehelic
Gage includes mounting stand,

rubber tube, etc. (pgs. 4 5)
A-433, Steel Carrying Case for Air Velocity Meter, 400 10
A-460, Plastic Envelope for inclined Gages 170, 171, 172
A-463, Plastic Carrying Case with foam liner for 475 1 AV Air Velocity Kit 13
1/2 x 10 x 2 3/8
A-602, Air Filter Kit. Accessory package for using switch without a gage includes two
pressure tips with integral compression fittings, two 5 ft. lengths of 1/4 aluminum
tubing and two 1/8 NPT to 1/4 tubing compression fittings.
A-603, T Kit. Accessory package for using pressure switch in conjunction with an
air filter kit equipped Magnehelic
or Series 250 AF gages. Includes two 1/8 NPT to

1/4 tubing compression fittings and two compression tees.
A-604, T Kit. Accessory package for using pressure switch in conjunction with
Mark II gages includes two plastic tubing connector tees and two plastic tubing to
1/8 NPT adapters.

562
M
s
c
e
a
n
e
o
u
s
A
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
e
s
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S

&

B
O
O
K
S
Gage Fluids
Gage Tubing
A-101
A-103
A-104
A-201
A-210
A-222
A-225
A-102
MODELS
MODELS
ACCESSORIES
Gage fluids in the 3/4 ounce size are furnished in unbreakable plastic dispenser
type bottles. Larger sizes are supplied in plastic bottles with screw caps.
CAUTION: Use only Dwyer fluids in Dwyer gages.
Red Gage Oil, .826 sp. gr. The standard fluid for use in inclined manometers, D
type vertical manometers and all Dwyer gages using red oil.
A-101, 3/4 oz. dispenser bottle
A-102, 4 oz. bottle
A-103, 1 pt. bottle
A-104, 1 qt. bottle
Note: Also available is Yellow gage oil, .826 Sp. Gr. This is normally used on
special 422 style manometers. Order by description and size of bottle. Dont use
part nos above. Prices same as Red oil.
Blue Gage Oil, 1.910 sp. gr. For special instruments and Mark II Models 26 and 28.
A-111, pt. bottle
Violet Gage Oil, 1.000 sp. gr. Use in place of water if better meniscus is desired.
A-121, 4 oz. bottle
A-122, 1 pt. bottle
Fluorescein Green Color Concentrate, water coloring agent. Not to be used full
strength. Add 3/4 oz to a quart of distilled water. Contains a wetting agent to
improve the meniscus characteristics. Use in vertical manometers only.
A-140, 2 oz. bottle CO2 Absorbent Solution
Clear plastic tubing is easily inspected and is therefore best for test applications
where a possibility of fluid entering the tubing exists. Rubber tubing has less
tendency to kink in storage and occupies less space, thus is best for portable work.
Metal Tubing is recommended for permanent installations. Double column tubing is
used with Mark II manometers and the Wind Speed Indicator.
A-201, Rubber Tubing, 3/16 I.D., 9 ft length
A-202, Rubber Tubing, 3/16 I.D. length to 50 ft
A-203, PVC Tubing, 1/8 I.D. x 1/4 O. D.
A-225, Flexible Double Column Plastic tubing Lt. Gray, with red color code stripe,
1/8 I.D., lengths to 750 ft
A-210, Aluminum Tubing, 1/4 O.D., 5 ft length, 500 psi maximum pressure @
200F
A-211, Aluminum Tubing, 1/4 O. D., length to 50 ft, 500 psi maximum pressure @
200F
A-220, Flexible Vinyl Tubing, Clear 3/16 I.D. x 5/16 O.D., lengths to 500 ft, 45 psi
maximum pressure @ 73F
A-221, Flexible Vinyl Tubing, Clear 1/8 I.D. x 3/16 O.D. lengths to 500 ft, 40 psi
maximum pressure @ 165F
A-222, Flexible Vinyl Tubing, Clear .240 I.D. x .375 O.D. lengths to 500 ft, 35 psi
maximum pressure @ 73F.
A-223, Black Polyethylene 1/8 I.D. 1/4 O.D. 10 ft length, 200 psi maximum @
140F

Glossary
Absolute Pressure (psia): The total force per unit area exerted by a
fluid. The sum of atmospheric and gage pressures.
Accuracy: The degree to which an observed value matches the actual
value of a measurement over a specified range.
Alternating Current (AC): Current that reverses polarity at a uniform
frequency.
ANSI: The American National Standards Institute is a private nonprofit
organization that oversees the development of voluntary consensus
standards for products, services, processes, systems, and personnel
in the United States.
ASTM: (Formerly known as The American Society for Testing and
Materials) An international standards developing organization that
develops and publishes voluntary technical standards for a wide range
of materials, products, systems, and services.
Atmospheric Pressure: The force exerted per unit area by the weight
of the atmosphere.
Capacitance: A measure of the amount of electric charge stored (or
separated) for a given electric potential. The most common form of
charge storage device is a two-plate capacitor.
Cavitation: The process where vapor bubbles in a flowing liquid
collapse inside a control valve as the pressure begins to increase.
Closed Loop: A control system that provides feedback to a controller
on the state of the process variable.
Cold Junction: The end of thermocouple that is kept at a constant
temperature in order to provide a reference point.
Critical Pressure: The ratio of upstream to downstream pressure
where the gas velocity out of the valve is sonic and further decreases
in downstream pressure no longer increase the flow.
British Thermal Unit (BTU): The amount of heat required to raise the
temperature of one pound of water by one degree Fahrenheit. Melting
a pound of ice at 32F requires 143 BTU.
BSPT: British Standard Pipe Thread.
Contacts: Elements used to mechanically make or break an electric
circuit.
Cv or Valve Flow Coefficient: The number of US gallons per minute
of water at 60F that will pass through the valve with a pressure drop of
1 psi.
Deadband: The value of measurement between when a switch
actuates and deactuates.
Density: The mass of a given substance per unit volume.
Derivative Control: A method of changing the output of a controller in
proportion to the rate of change of the process variable.
Dewpoint: The temperature to which air must be cooled for the air to
be saturated with water.
Dielectric: The insulating material between the conductors of a
capacitor.
Dielectric Constant: The ratio of the insulating ability of a material to
the insulating ability of vacuum.
DIN: Deutsches Institut fr Normung e.V., The German national
organization for standardization and is that country's ISO member body.
DIN and mini-DIN connectors, as well as DIN rails are several examples
of older DIN standards that are today used around the world.
Direct Current (DC): A current with a constant polarity.
Double Pole Double Throw (DPDT) Switch: Two separate switches
that operate simultaneously, each with a normally open and a normally
closed contact and a common connection.
Drift: A gradual change in an element over time when the process
conditions are constant.
Dry Bulb Temperature: The ambient air temperature measured by a
thermometer that is freely expose to the air but shielded from other
heating or cooling effects.
Emissivity: The ratio of energy radiated by the material to energy
radiated by a black body at the same temperature. It is a measure of a
material's ability to absorb and radiate energy.
Form-C Contact: A contact that has both normally open and normally
closed contacts.
Fuzzy Logic: A system that uses mathematical or computational
reasoning based on fuzzy sets derived from analog inputs.
Gage Pressure (psig): The measure of force per area exerted by a
fluid using atmospheric pressure as the zero reference.
Gain: The ratio of change in output to the change in input of a process.
Hot Junction: The joined end of the thermocouple that is exposed to
the process where the temperature measurement is desired.
Humidity: The amount of water vapor in a given volume of air or gas.
Hydrostatic Pressure: The pressure due to the head of a liquid
column.
Hysteresis: A property of systems (usually physical systems) that do
not instantly react to the forces applied to them, but react slowly, or do
not return completely to their original state.
Impedance: The opposition in an electric circuit to the flow of an
alternating current consisting of inductive reactance, ohmic resistance
and capacitive reactance.
Inductive Load: Current passing through wound or coiled wire creates
a magnetic field that in turn produces mechanical work.
Integral Control: A method of changing the output of a controller by an
amount proportional to the error and the duration of that error.
Laminar Flow: Smooth fluid flow that has a parabolic flow profile with
no mixing between streamlines.
Linearity: The degree to which performance or response approaches
the condition of being linear, stated as a percentage.
Low Pressure Steam: As defined by ASME, steam under 15 psi
pressure.
Manual Reset: A control that must have human input before it will return
to its normal state from an alarm state.
Maximum Surge Pressure: Safe pressure for the switch housing but
which may damage the mechanism by continuous or repetitive
application.

564
Glossary
NEMA: The National Electrical Manufacturers Association, a trade
association in the US of electrical equipment manufacturers that
develops many industry technical standards in particular is the standard
for electrical equipment enclosures.
NIST: The National Institute of Standards and Technology, is a non-
regulatory agency of the United States Department of Commerces
Technology Administration. The institute provides standard references
and calibration services.
Normally Closed Switch: A switch in which the contacts are normally
closed. Actuation opens the contact.
Normally Open Switch: A switch in which the contacts are normally
open. Actuation closes the contacts.
NPT: National Pipe Thread.
NSF: A not-for-profit, non-governmental organization that develops
standards and provides product certification and education in the field
of public health and safety.
Null Switch: A floating contact switch with a zone of no contact. Often
used to operate reversible motors.
pH: An indication of the acidity or alkalinity of a solution in units ranging
from 0 (most acidic), to 7 (neutral), to 14 (most alkaline).
Pressure Drop: The difference in upstream and downstream pressure
of the fluid flowing through a valve.
Proportional Control: A method of changing the output of a controller
by an amount proportional to the error.
Proportional-Integral Control (PI): Proportional and integral control
combined.
Proportional-Integral-Derivative Control (PID): Proportional, integral,
and derivative control combined.
Range: The span of rates within which the sensing element of a given
switch can be set to actuate an electric switch.
Rated Pressure: The maximum pressure that the actuating
components of the switch in contact with the media can withstand
continuously and/or repeatedly without risk of permanent damage.
Relative Humidity: The ratio of the quantity of water vapor in the air to
the quantity of water vapor required for saturation at the same
temperature.
Repeatability: The degree to which an element provides the same
result with successive occurrences of the same condition.
Repetitive Accuracy: The ability of a switch to operate repetitively at
its set point under consistent conditions.
Response Time: The time it takes an element to respond to a change
in the value of the measured variable or to produce a change in the
output signal.
Rotameter: A variable area flowmeter consisting of tapered tube and a
float.
RS-232: (Recommended Standard 232) is a standard for serial binary
data signals connecting between a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and
a DCE (Data Circuit-terminating Equipment).
RS-485: (Now known as EIA-485) is an OSI model physical layer
electrical specification of a two-wire, half-duplex, multipoint serial
connection.
Saturation Point: The point at which condensation is formed.
Serial Transmission: Sending one bit at a time on a single
transmission line.
Set or Actuation Point: The exact rate which will cause the electric
switch to actuate.
Single-Pole Single Throw (SPST) Switch: A switch that only has one
of either a normally open or a normally closed contact.
Single-Pole Double-Throw (SPDT) Switch: A switch combining both
normally open and normally closed switch contacts.
Solid State: Any element that controls current without moving parts,
vacuum gaps or heated filaments.
Span: The difference between the highest and lowest numbers in a
range.
Specific Gravity: The ratio of the density of a fluid to the density of a
reference fluid.
Static Pressure: The pressure exerted by a fluid at rest. The outward
push of a fluid against the walls of a container.
Temperature Compensation: The correction for the influence of
temperature on a measurement.
3-A: 3-A Sanitary Standards Inc., A non-profit association representing
equipment manufacturers, processors, regulatory sanitarians, and other
public health professionals that creates standards and accepted
practices for dairy and food processing equipment and systems.
Total Pressure: The sum of velocity and static pressure.
Transducer: Any device that generates an electrical signal from
physical measurements.
Transmitter: A device that translates the low-level output of a sensor or
transducer to a higher level signal suitable for transmission to a site
where it can be further processed.
Turbulent Flow: Fluid flow in which the flow profile is a flattened
parabola, the streamlines are not present, and the fluid is freely mixing.
Turndown Ratio: The ratio of the maximum to minimum measurable
value that can still produce full-scale output.
Velocity Pressure (Dynamic Pressure): The pressure exerted by the
velocity of a fluid. Can be measured by the difference between total
and static pressure.
Viscosity: The resistance of a fluid to flow when subjected to shear
stress.
Wet Bulb Temperature: The lowest temperature that can be obtained
through the cooling effect of water evaporating into the atmosphere.

International Distributors
ARGENTINA
Equitecnica S.A.
Sanchez De Loria 1852/54
Capital Federal (1241)
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Ph: (54) 11 4912-4590
Fax: (54) 11 4911-2382
AUSTRALIA
Dwyer Instruments Pty Ltd.
Unit 1, 11 Waverley Drive
P.O. Box 359
Unanderra NSW 2526, Australia
Ph: (61) 2 4272-2055
Fax: (61) 2 4272-4055
AUSTRIA
AAF- Luftreinigungssysteme
Gesellschaft m.b.H.
IZ N Sd, Strasse 16, Objekt 61
A-2355 Wr. Neudorf, Austria
Ph: 02236-677628
Fax: 02236-677628-1
Kobold Instruments GmbH
Gurkgasse 8
A-1140 Wien
Ph: (+43) (0) 1 786 53 53
Fax: (+43) (0) 1 786 53 53/10
BAHRAIN
Prudent Solutions W.L.L.
P.O. Box 11091
Building # 1530, Road # 736
Block # 607, Abu Al-Aish (Sitra)
Kingdom of Bahrain
Ph: +973 17 456 180
Fax: +973 17 456 190
BELGIUM
Hitma Instrumentatie
Brusselstraat 51
2018 Antwerp, Belgium
Ph: (+32) (0) 2387 2864
Fax: (+32) (0) 2387 1886
Industrial Products & Pneumatics
Biesthoevelaan 25
2610 Wilrijk, Antwerp, Belgium
Ph: (32) 3-830-6111
Fax: (32) 3-830-6399
BOLIVIA
Tritec S.R.L.
AV. Oquendo #N -0452 Piso 4
Cochabamba, Bolivia
South America
Ph: 591 4 4256993
Fax: 591 4 4250981
BRAZIL
Hygro-Therm Comercial e Tcnica Ltda.
Rua Paulino Rolim De Moura, 102, Vila Feliz
03616-050 So Paulo SP, Brazil
Ph: (55) 11 26870328
Fax: (55) 11 26845279
Instrucamp Instrumentos de Medicao LTDA
R DR Eduardo Edarge Badaro
No 1.148 Jardim Eulina-Campia
13063-140 So Paulo CEP, Brazil
Ph: (55) 19 32435972
Fax: (55) 19 32136404
BULGARIA
Katincharov & Co.
1172 Dianabad 31 B entr 4
Sofia/Bulgaria
Ph: (359) 2 8688417
Fax: (359) 2 9626065
CANADA
ALBERTA
ITM - Canada
#434, 11979-40st Street SE
Calgary, AB T2Z 4M3
Ph: (800) 561-8187
Fax: (403) 248-5194
ITM Instruments Inc.
2301 Premier Way, Suite #144
Sherwood Park, Alberta, Canada T8H 2K8
Ph: (800) 561-8187
Fax: (780) 409-9279
BRITISH COLUMBIA
Dwyer Instruments
102 Highway 212
Michigan City, IN 46361
Ph: 219-879-8868
Fax: 219-872-9057
MANITOBA
Flo-Crest Equipment
52 Caithness Street
Winnipeg, Manitoba, Canada R3H 0V4
Ph: (204) 633-0682
Fax: (20) 632-5461
NEW BRUNSWICK
Coastal Controls & Instrumentation
19 Lime Kiln Road
Stanley, NB E6B1E5
Ph: (506) 367-2849
Fax: (902) 835-8166
NOVA SCOTIA
Coastal Controls & Instrumentation
20 Duke Street, Ste 107
Bedford, NS B4A2Z5
Ph: (902) 835-9337
Fax: (902) 835-8166
ONTARIO
Furneco International Inc.
3455 Harvester Road Unit 17
Burlington, Ontario, Canada L7L 3P2
Ph: (905) 333-6508
Fax: (905) 333-6784
ITM-Canada
16975 Leslie Street
Newmarket, Ontario, Canada L3Y 9A1
Ph: (800) 561-8187
Fax: (905) 947-1551
Ontor Limited (Industrial/Wastewater)
12 Leswyn Road
Toronto, Ontario M6A 1K3
Ph: (800) 567-1631
Fax: (800) 417-6337
QUEBEC
Furneco International, Inc.
9600 Ignace, Suite J
Brossard, Quebec, Canada J4Y 2R4
Ph: (450) 444-5885
Fax: (450) 444-9778
ITM
20800 Boul Industriel
Ste-Anne-de-Bellevue,
Quebec, Canada H9X 0A1
Ph: (800) 561-8187
Fax: (514) 457-4329
Ontor Limited (Industrial/Wastewater)
460, rue Wright
Saint-Laurent, Quebec H4N 1M6
Ph: (514) 733-3375
Fax: (514) 733-3442
SASKATCHEWAN
Flo-Crest Equipment
52 Caithness Street
Winnipeg, Manitoba, Canada R3H 0V4
Ph: (204) 633-0682
Fax: (204 632-5461
CHILE
Soltex Chile S.A.
Victor Uribe 2260
Quilicura, Santiago, Chile
Ph: (56) 2 730-4706
Fax: (56) 2 730-4800
Instaplan S.A.
Los Industriales 2781, Macul
Santiago, Chile
Ph: (56) 2 7927000
Fax: (56) 2 7927035
CHINA
Beijing Longradar Technology & Trading Co.
LTD.
RM. 918, JinJiYe Bld. 5#
#2, ShengGu Middle RD., ChaoYang
Beijing 100029, P.R. of China
Ph: (86) 10 64449938
Fax: (86) 10 64449915
Chengdu Gontrol Instruments Inc.
1-2-9-B SiJiHuaCheng Plaza
No.16 GaoShengQiao Road
WuHou District, Chengdu City
Sichuan Province 610041, P. R. of China
Ph: (86) 28 68228008
Fax: (86) 28 68228009
Nanjing Adonis + Tamaid Instruments Ltd.
A8-610, No.8 ShenTai Dong Road
Jiang Ning District
Nanjing City, Jiangsu Province
211100, P R China
Ph: (86) 25 52125809
Fax: (86) 25 52125803
Shaanxi Kingger Science & Technology Co.,
Ltd
B1202 ShiJiJingDian Bldg
No.161 YanTa West Road
YanTa District, Xian City
ShaanXi Province 710061, P. R. of China
Ph: (86) 29 86695005
Fax: (86) 29 86695006
Shangdong Huiyuxing Sci. & Tech. Co., Ltd
1804 No.18th Floor, West Wing No.8 Building,
Shuntai Square, No.2000 Shunhua Road,
Jinan, China
Ph: 0086-531-55582616 55582617 55582618
Fax: 0086-531-55582620
Shanghai Jinshen Industry & Trading Co Ltd
Flat D, 2/F 2nd Jinnan Garden
No 725 Pujian Road
Shanghai
200127, P R China
Ph: (86) 21 58890468
Fax: (86) 21 58890469
Shenzhen CATIC Intelligent System Co. Ltd.
5A, Shuisong Building, No. 8 Tairan Road,
Futian District, Shenzhen 518040, P.R. China
Ph: 86-755-23935155
Fax: 86-755-23935156
Shenzhen Deweida Technology Co. Ltd
Room 1109, Futian Bldg.
Shennan Middle Rd. Futian District
Shenzhen 518033, P R China
Ph: (86) 755 83692627
Fax: (86) 755 83692660
COLOMBIA
Tecnicas Andinas Industriales Ltda.
Calle 60 No. 9a-31 Ofc. 305
Apartado 101701
Santafe De Bogota D.C.
Colombia, South America
Ph: (571) 3476494
Fax: (571) 3476493
COSTA RICA
NV Technologies
Grecia, Costa Rica
Ph: (506)-2444-3112
Fax: (506)-2494-9042
CZECH REPUBLIC
Garija Trade s.r.o.
Trida Generala Piky 3
613 00 Brno
Czech Republic
Ph: +420 603 540 823
Ph: +420 546 222 743
Fax: +420 545 223 423
DENMARK
Hans Buch
Roskildevej 8-10
2620 Albertslund
Copenhagen, Denmark
Ph: (45) 43685000
Fax: (45) 43685050
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC
Lezcano Hnos., C por A.
Av San Martin #243
Santo Domingo, R.D.
Ph: 809 544 1055
Fax: 809 567 5052
ECUADOR
Genesys Control
Km 16.5 Via a Daule
Calle Cobre y Rosavin
P.O. Box 09-01-5175
Guayaquil, Ecuador
Ph: 593 4 289 6694
Fax: 593 4 289 6707
EGYPT
Nile Import & Export Company
3 Yossef El Kady Str,
El Merghany, Helipolis
Cairo, Egypt, 11341
Ph: +202-4193469
Fax: +202-291-8567
ESTONIA
Stig Wahlstrom OY
Hannuksentie 1
FIN-02270
Espoo, Finland
Ph: (358) 9 5024 400
Fax: (358) 9 4522 735
FINLAND
Stig Wahlstrom OY
Hannuksentie 1
FIN-02270
Espoo, Finland
Ph: (358) 9 5024 400
Fax: (358) 9 4522 735
FRANCE
ADMI
Le Pave Neuf
51 Rue de L'Universite 93191 Noisy Le
Grand Cedex
Ph: (33) 1430422214
Fax: (33) 143042375

566
GERMANY
Briem Steuerungstechnik GmbH
Lauterstrsse 23
72622 Nrtingen, Germany
Ph: (+49) 7022 6092 0
Fax: (+49) 7022 6092 60
Profimess GmbH
Twischlehe 5
D-27580 Bremerhaven, Germany
Ph: (+49) (0) 471 982 4151
Fax: (+49) (0) 471 982 4152
Techmark GmbH
Kirschstrasse 20
D-80999 Muenchen Germany
Ph: (+49) 898926570
Fax: (+49) 8989265733
GREECE
Nikolaos A. Likoudis & Co
36 Epirou Street
10433 Athens, Greece
Ph: (30) 01 8221352
Fax: (30) 01 8212696
FBM Auto
22 Parnithos Str
135 62 Ag. Anargiri
Athens, Greece
Ph: +30 210 232 0881
Fax: +30 210 238 9070
HONG KONG
Asia Technology & Instrument Ltd.
Unit 5, 9/F Free Trade Centre
49 Tsun Yip Street
Kwun Tong, Hong Kong
Ph: (852) 2716 5556
Fax: (852) 2716 2880
The China Engineers, Ltd.
No. 8 Fuk Wang St.
Yeun Long Industrial Estate
New Territories, Hong Kong
Ph: (852) 2 882 9090
Fax: (852) 2 882 9982
United Controls Ltd.
Room 1501, Cornell Centre
50 Wing Tai Road
Chai Wan, Hong Kong
Ph: (852) 2556 1001
Fax: (852) 2566 1298
HUNGARY
ControlShop Hungary Ltd
Antalhegyi U.34
H-2100, Godollo
Ph: +36 28 415 105
Fax: +36 28 415 834
ICELAND
Varmi EHF
Laugavegi 168
P.O. Box 5254
125 Reykjavik, Iceland
Ph: (354) 551-7560
Fax: (354) 562-4110
INDIA
ALM Systems
C-5082 Bima Complex
PLT No 119 Iron & Steel M Kalamboli
New Bombay, India
Ph: (91) 2225034985
Fax: (91) 2225034985
Savant Instruments Limited
418 4th Floor Kuhera Towers
Narayanaguda,
Hyderabad, 500-029, India
Ph: 91 40 2322 5399
Fax: 91 40 2322 4326
Waaree Instruments Limited
36, Damji Shamji Industrial
Complex off Mahakali Caves Rd.
Andheri East Mumbai 93, India
Ph: 91 22 6696 3030
Fax: 91 22 2687 3613
INDONESIA
PT Swahusada Guna Instrumentas
Komplek Green Garden Blok A-14
No 14
Jakarta Barat 11520, Indonesia
Ph: +6221-5824955
Fax: +6221-5802767
IRELAND
Hanley Controls
Gortnafleur
Clonmel
Co Tipperary, Ireland
Ph: (353) 5222722
Fax: (353) 5222024
Manotherm Limited
4 Walkinstown Road
Dublin 12, Ireland
Ph: (353) 1 4522355
Fax: (353) 1 4516919
ISRAEL
Lachman Limited
P.O. Box 2121
21 Atir Yeda St.
Kfar Saba 44641, Israel
Ph: (972) 9 7668990
Fax: (972) 9 7668991
ITALY
Comhas SRL
Via Matteotti 66
20092-Cinisello Balsamo (MI), Italy
Ph: (39) 0261298551
Fax: (39) 0266594921
Rometec
Via Alessandro
Minuziano 89
00128 Roma (Loc. Trigoria), Italy
Ph: (39) 065061635
Fax: (39) 065061542
Spirax-Sarco s.r.l.
Via per Cinisello, 18
20054 Nova Milanese, Italy
Ph: (39) 036249171
Fax: (39) 03624917310
S.E.I. Strumentazione Elettrotecnica
Industriale S.p.A.
V.le Europa 41
20090 Cusago
Milan, Italy
Ph: (39) 024842021
Fax: (39) 02484202300
JAPAN
Nesstech Inc.
1-106 Togasaki, Misato-shi
Saitama 341-0044, Japan
Ph: (81) 48 953 5507
Fax: (81) 48 953 5901
Yamada Kaisha, Ltd.
50-21, Tobe-Honchou
Nishi-Ku
Yokohama, 220-0041, Japan
Ph: (81) 45 3234081
Fax: (81) 45 3234084
JORDAN
Engineering Dimension Of Technology
P.O. Box 395
Al-Jubaiha
Amman 11941, Jordan
Ph: +962-6-551 9982
Fax: +962-6-551 9983
KOREA
Han il Jong Hap Sensor Co.
K.P.O. Box 525
Ma-Dong, 1503, Chung Ang Circulation
Complex, 1259
Kuro-Bon-Dong, Kuro-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Ph: (82) 2 26157486
Fax: (82) 2 26147486
Hwall Instruments Co. Ltd
Suite C-32-115 Kuro Industrial Tools
Commercial B/d
604-1, Kuro-dong, Kuro-gu
Young Heung Corporation
Suite #139 Ansung Machine Bldg.
410-13 Shindorim-Dong
Kuro-Ku Seoul, Korea
Ph: (82) 2 26713956
Fax: (82) 2 26716490
KUWAIT
Bader Al Mulla & Bros. Co. WLL
EG, P.O. Box 177,
Safat 13002,
Kuwait
Ph: (965) 4815050
Fax: (965) 4839725
LATVIA
Olil Ltd
Vagonu 18 Street
LV-1009
Tiga, Latvia
Ph: +371 727 0580
Fax: +371 727 0581
MALAYSIA
P & P Process & Pneumatics Sdn Bhd
17, Jalan Pantai Jerjak
Sungai Nibong
11900 Penang, Malaysia
Ph: (60) 4 659 8286
Fax: (60) 4 659 8300
Signal Transmission (M) Sdn Bhd
No.18 Jalan USJ 7/3C
47610 Subang Jaya,
Selangor De, Malaysia
Ph: (60) 356371911
Fax: (60) 356371987
MEXICO
Aquasistemas Integrales S.A. de C.V.
Av. Coahuila No. 898
Colonia Esperanza
Mexicali, B.C. Mxico C.P.21140
Ph: (686) 556-7423
Fax: (686) 556-7422
Controles Y Valvulas, S.A. de C.V.
Av. Paseo de los Leones #1307 Cumbres
Monterrey N.L. 64610, Mexico
Ph: (52) 81 83464440
Fax: (52) 81 83480594
Dapamar Instrumentacion
Reforma #305
Edif. B Dep. 5 Col. Lomas Estrella
C.P. 09890 Mexico D.F.
Ph: (52) 55 56-08-38-25
Fax: (52) 55 56-56-61-47
Distribuidora Industrial Enterprise,
S.A. de C.V.
SUR 114 NO. 17-B
Col. Cove, Delegacion Alvaro Obregon
CP 01120 Mexico DF, Mexico
Ph: (52) 55 30030540
Fax: (52) 55 30030545
Equipos Refacciones Y Controles
De Occidente SA DE CV
Domicilio Calle Zonzontle 904 Fraac 8 De Julio
Guadalajara JAL CP 44910, Mexico
Ph: (52) 33 38110202
Fax: (52) 33 38101080
THE NETHERLANDS
Hitma B.V.
P.O. Box 175, Anton Philipsweg 1
1420 AD Uithoorn, The Netherlands
Ph: (31) 297 514614
Fax: (31) 297-514777
NEW ZEALAND
Accurate Measurement (NZ) Ltd.
P.O. Box 12992
16 Botha Road
Penrose, Auckland, New Zealand
Ph: (64) 9 5790141
Fax: (64) 9 579 1888
Applied Instrument Group (2007) Ltd
P.O. Box 97036
SAMC 2240
Auckland, New Zealand
Ph: (64) 9 2638893
Fax: (64) 9 2638897
Homersham Ltd.
P.O. Box 280
3 Homersham Place
Burnside, Christchurch, New Zealand
Ph: (64) 3 358 8309
Fax: (64) 3 358 2516
NORWAY
Kaare A. Rustad A/S
P.O. Box 62-Tveita
Tvetenveien 152
0671 Oslo, Norway
Ph: (47) 23 126200
Fax: (47) 23 126201
OMAN
Zawawi Trading Co-Engineering Div
P.O. Box: 58, PC 100.
Sultanate Of Oman
Ph: (968) 24562077 Ext: 285
Fax: (968) 24565501

PAKISTAN
Star Automation
83-N, Model Town Ext.
Lahore, Pakistan
Ph: (+92) (0) 42-35175265/6
Fax: (+92) (0) 42-35165283
PERU
G R Tech S.A.
Alcanfores 1059
Miraflores
Lima 18, Peru
Ph: (511) 4446659
Fax: (511) 2425415
NPI Peru S A C
Calle Ricardo Aicardi
361 Surco
Lima 33, Peru
Ph: (511) 2731166
Fax: (511) 2731238
PHILIPPINES
Tradepoints Inc.
431 Tabayog Street
Mandaluyong City 1550, Philippines
Ph: (632) 7194688/7194689
Fax: (632) 5338672
POLAND
TEST-THERM Sp. z o.o.
30-009 Krakw, ul. Friedleina 4-6, Poland
Ph: +48 12 632 13 01, +48 12 632 61 88
Fax: +48 12 632 10 37
PORTUGAL
MegaControl
Ouressa Parque, EDIF 12
AV. Almirante Gago Coutinho
2725-418 Mem Martins
Ph: + 351 21 924 5230
Fax: + 351 21 9245239
QATAR
Qatar International Trading Company
P.O. Box 9920
Doha
Qatar
Ph: (468)-53-03
Fax: (468)-69-44
ROMANIA
S.C. Termodensirom S.A. BD. Basarabia,
No.171, Sector 3, Bucharest, 030351,
Pob 49-90, Romania
Ph: + 4021 2553170
Fax: +4021 2550776
office@tdr.ro
www.tdr.ro
RUSSIAN FEDERATION
Olil Ltd
115533, Visokaja Street 21, of. 93
Moscow, Russian Federation
Ph: +7 (495) 5438854
Fax: +7 (499) 6168178
SAUDI ARABIA
Middle East Trading Company
Al-Rashid Al-Mangour Building
Ali Bin Abu Talib Street
Opposite Jarir Panda
Malaz
P.O. Box 3577
Riyadh 11481
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ph: 00966 1 4782748
Fax: 00966 1 4763458
metco@metco.com.sa
SERBIA
Eurocons Group d.o.o.
Trg Save Kovacevica 3/1
26300 Vrsac
Serbia
Ph/Fax: (381) 13 801 460
SINGAPORE & S.E. ASIA
Raco Instruments Pte Ltd.
P.O. Box 0737
Serangoon Central Post Office
Singapore, 915508
Ph: (65) 6281-0377
Fax: (65) 6382-4233
Shipping Address:
Raco Instruments Pte Ltd.
Blk 38 Defu Lane 10 #04-17
Singapore, 539215
REGVA Controls Pte Ltd.
P.O. Box #81
Toa Payoh Central
Singapore, 913103
Ph: (65) 6272-0633
Fax: (65) 6270-2033
Shipping Address:
REGVA Controls Pte LTD
35 Telok Blangah Rise
Unit #01-285
Singapore, 090035
SOUTH AFRICA
Controltech CC
P.O. Box 767
Ferndale, 2160, South Africa
Ph: (27) 11 7931127
Fax: (27) 27 7923373
Gosair Instruments Pty Ltd
Greenhills Industrial Estate
Sam Green Road Tunney Ext6
Germiston, South Africa
Ph: (27)118226709
Fax: (27) 118221514
Pro-Flow
PO Box 856
Isando 1600 South Africa
Ph: 27 11 923 7145
Fax: 27 11923 7146
SLOVENIA
Energo Plus, d.o.o.,
Ljubljana
Koprska 108d, p.p. 382
SLO - 1000 Ljubljana
Slovenia
Ph: +386 1 200 73 71
Fax: +386 1 423 33 46
SPAIN
Equitrol
C/ Cristobal Bordiu 35
Planta 5a-09
28003 Madrid, Spain
Ph: (34) 91 5351461
Fax: (34) 91 5352195
Sico (Sistemas De Control CV, S.L.)
Av. Doctor Waksman, 19
46006 Valncia, Spain
Ph: 96-395 38 15
Fax: 96-395 34 29
SWEDEN
Stig Wahlstrom AB
Box 64
S-123 22
Farsta, Sweden
Ph: (46) 8 6833300
Fax: (46) 8 6058174
Shipping Address:
Stig Wahlstrom AB
Marbackagatan 27
S-123 43 Farsta, Sweden
SWITZERLAND
CAS Clean-Air-Service AG
Reinluftweg 1
CH-9630 Wattwil
Ph: 41(0) 71 987 01 01
Fax: 41(0) 71 987 01 11
TAIWAN
Pan Instruments Int'l Corporation
No. 382, Der-Min Rd.
Nan-Tzu District
Kaohsiung, Taiwan ROC
Ph: (886) 7 3621197
Fax: (886) 7-3621196
Sinom Corporation
No. 33, Sec. 4, Chung Hsing Road
Wu Ku Hsiang
Taipei Hsien, Taiwan ROC
Ph: (886) 2 22920001
Fax: (886) 2 22920199
TMA Technology Corporation
NO 163 Richang Rd.
Gushan Dist.
Ph: (886) 7 588 9398
Fax: (886) 7 583 2253
Tuner Technology Co., Ltd.
No. 500, Her Ti Road
San Ming Dist.
Ph: (886) 7 3488818
Fax: (886) 7 3488819
Tuner Technology Co,. Ltd. (Northern Taiwan)
11F-8 No. 233, Fusing 2nd Road
Jhubei City
Hsinchu County 302, Taiwan R.O.C.
Ph: (886) 3 6576677
Fax: (886) 3 6576655
THAILAND
Industrial Electrical Co., Ltd.
85/2, 85/3 Soi Sot Phin San
Rang Nam Rd
Rajthevee, Bangkok 10400, Thailand
Ph: (66) 2 642 6700
Fax: (66) 2 642 4250
PVN Engineering Company Ltd.
1532/24-25 Soi Tanuthai
Bangkok-Nonthaburi Rd.
Bangsue Bangkok 10800, Thailand
Ph: (66) 2 9114761
Fax: (66) 2 9114760
TURKEY
I T M Muhendislik Van Ve Ticas
Ibrahim Karaoglanoglu Cad.
Ethem Zengin Ls Merkezi
No: 25 Kat: 3
Seyrantepe-Istanbul, Turkey
Ph: (90) 2122787812
Fax: (90) 2122787811
Tetisan Endustriyel Klima
Tunc Caddesi
Has Sanayi Sitesi A Blok 34538
Bahcesehir, Istanbul, Turkey
Ph: +90 212 623 2015
Fax: +90 212 623 2017
info@tetisan.com or tetisan@tetisan.com
www.tetisan.com
UKRAINE
SV Altera Ltd.
4, Ivana Lepse blvd, Kyiv, Ukraine 03680
Ph: (380) 44 496-18-88
Fax: (380) 44 496-18-18
UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
Bednayel Electronic LLC
P.O. Box 42581
Dubai, U A E
Ph: (971) 42223105
Fax: (971) 42223109
EuroMechanical & Electrical Contractors
P.O. Box 46153
Mohd. Al Hurr.
Al Suwedi Bldg. Tourist Club
Abu Dhabi, U A E
Ph: (971) 26781133
Fax: (971) 256781953
Shree Waaree Middle East LLC
P.O. Box 46123
Dubai, U A E
Ph: (971) 43552303
Fax: (971) 43552302
UNITED KINGDOM
Dwyer Instruments Limited
Unit 16 The Wye Estate
London Road High Wycombe
Buckinghamshire, HP11 1LH United Kingdom
Ph: (44) 1494 461707
Fax: (44) 1494 465102
URUGUAY
ISAI S.R.L.
Carabelas 2891
CP11800 Montevideo
Uruguay
Ph: (59) 852030569
Fax: (59) 829027782
VENEZUELA
Comercial AaZ, C.A.
Av. Constitucion Este No. 255
San Jose - Maracay
Edo. Aragua 2103, Venezuela
Ph: (58) 2432328905
Fax: (58) 2432331868
VIETNAM
MinH Hai Viet Company Ltd.
305/10 Nguyen Trong Tuyen
Ward 10
Phu Nhuan District
Ho Chi Minh City
Vietnam
Ph: (84) 8 38454818
Fax: (84) 8 38457773

568
Registered trademarks of Dwyer Instruments, Inc.
Common law marks of
Dwyer Instruments, Inc.
Commonly used
marks and graphics
Marks registered to companies other
than Dwyer Instruments, Inc.
Capsuhelic
Capsu-Photohelic
Digihelic
DigiMag
Duotect
Durablock
Dwyer Group
Dwyer
rr
Flex-Tube
Flotect
Iso Verter
rr
Lin-E-Aire
Lite Rite
Love
Love Controls
Magnehelic
MagneSense
Mercoid
Mercoid Control
Mercontrol
Microtector
rr
Minihelic
Mini-Master
rr
Mini-Photohelic
One-Touch
Optitrol
Photohelic
Plast-A-Vane
Precisor
rr
Quick-View
Rate-Master
rr
Safe-T-Ohm
Slack Tube
Spirahelic
The Low Pressure People
Visi-Float
AQStick
Even-Action
Hi-Flow
Loop Alarms
Lovelink
Mini-Node
Minitactor
Mother Node
Pre-Trac
Proximity
S-D
Slide Guide
SLiquid
Tell Tale
Tell Tale Jr.
Thermoguide
Ultra-Mag
Ultra-View
Vaneometer
Visa International
Services Association
MasterCard
International Inc.
Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc.
Canadian Standards
Association
FM Global
Technology
Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc.
Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc.
Trademark Acknowledgements
Alumel
Conceptech, Inc.
BACnet
ASHRAE
Chromel
Conceptech, Inc.
Darina
Shell Trademark Management B.V.

Duracell
The Gillette Company

Eveready
Eveready Battery Company, Inc.

Fluon
AGC Chemicals Americas, Inc.

Fluorolube
Gabriel Performance Products LLC

Freon
E.I. DuPont De Nemours and

Company
HART
Hart Communication Foundation

Hirschmann
Hirschmann Electronics GMBH

HyperTerminal
Hilgraeve, Inc.
Iglide
Igus GMBH
Inconel
Huntington Alloys Corporation

Lexan
SABIC Innovative Plastic IP B.V.

Loctite
Henkel Corporation
Modbus
Schnieder Automation, Inc.

Nylatch
Southco, Inc.
Open I/O
Easton Controls, Inc.

Open Signal

Sensorpak

Sensorpulse

Swagelock
Swagelock Company
Trendreader
rr ACR Systems, Inc.

Tygon
Saint-Gobain Performance
Corporation
VCR
Swagelok Company
Velcro
Velcro Industries B.V.

Windows
Microsoft Corporation
Windows NT
Windows Vista
Excel
Powerpoint
Air Flow
TM
TSI, Inc.
No More Leaks
TM
Permatex
Precision Flow Sierra Instruments, Inc.
ProHood
TM
TSI, Inc.
Smart Interface
TM
Ientek Co., Ltd.
Information about Mercury-added Products
Dwyer Instruments, Inc. continues its development of non-mercury replacement alternatives for those products currently offered containing mercury. We
will continue to work with all customers to supply mercury added products as needed for replacement of products currently in use and to guide customers
towards non-mercury added products for new applications.
Dwyer Instruments, Inc. will comply with all local, state, federal, and international laws regarding the sale of mercury added products. These laws may
affect our ability to sell, distribute, or transport products into restricted states and/or countries. Mercury added product sales may be limited or denied to
certain customers depending on the location or intended use of the product.
Dwyer Instruments, Inc. encourages all customers to become familiar and comply with all mercury legislation. Sales of any and all mercury added products
will be discontinued to any customer that knowingly or willfully disregards any legislation concerning mercury.
Dwyer Instruments, Inc. requests that all mercury containing products are properly disposed of at the end of their useful life. Many web sites are available
to help educate consumers about proper disposal of mercury added products. Please visit www.newmoa.org for addition information related to mercury
usage.
568.P.N:Layout 2 2/15/11 3:40 PM Page 1

Product Section Page Product Section Page
16A 1996
16A Temperature 259
16B Temperature 260
16C Temperature 261
16L Temperature 273
100 Test Equipment 432
100AV Test Equipment 433
102 Level 330
123 Level 330
160 Air Quality 128
165 Valves 527
160E, 160S, 166T Air Quality 129
1000 Process Control 376
1000E Pressure 93
1000W Pressure 93
1200 Data Loggers/Record. 419
1205A-5 Test Equipment 455
1207A Test Equipment 455
1221, 1222, 1223 Test Equipment 430
1227, 1227M Test Equipment 431
1230, 1235 Pressure 25
1620 Pressure 35
1630 Pressure 34
1638 Pressure 34
1640 Pressure 35
1700 Pressure 27
1800 Pressure 32
1823 Pressure 32
1900 Pressure 33
1910 Pressure 33
1950, 1950G Pressure 37
1996 Pressure 36
2-5000 201
2-5000 Pressure 8-9
2BVS Valves 488
200 Pressure 24
201 Level 331
250-AF 2900
250-AF Pressure 24
265 Valves 528
275 Valves 529
2000 Pressure 4-5
2000VA Valves 468-470
2600 Temperature 262
2700 Valves 525
2800 Valves 525
2900 Valves 526
3ABV 3200
3ABV Valves 500
3BV2 Valves 503
3BV3 Valves 502
3MSV Valves 491
3PBV Valves 501
3ZV1 Valves 516
3ZV2 Valves 517
32A Temperature 256
32B Temperature 257
32DZ Temperature 258
38R Valves 474-475
300 Pressure 24
350 Process Control 387
391 Level 331
3000MR/3000MRS Pressure 22
3000WA Valves 470
3100 Pressure 56
3200 Pressure 111
4B 471
4B Temperature 263
4C Temperature 264
4V-3 Temperature 265
40T Temperature 275
421, 422, 424 Pressure 25

570
472 43000
472 Kits Test Equipment 444
475-AV Kit Test Equipment 435
477-AV Kit Test Equipment 435
4000 Pressure 10-11
43000 Pressure 23
500 5000
500 Flow 194
530 Air Quality 130
550 Flow 194
605 634ES
605 Pressure 46
607 Pressure 47
608 Pressure 51
610 Pressure 48
616 Pressure 43
616C Pressure 43
616D Pressure 44
616K Pressure 42
616OT Pressure 42
616W Pressure 45
616WL Pressure 45
626 Pressure 102-103
628 Pressure 102-103
628CR Pressure 104
629 Pressure 53
631B Pressure 52
634ES Pressure 108
636 62000MU
636 Pressure 112
636D Pressure 55
637 Pressure 112
637S Pressure 109
641 Air Quality 134
641B Air Quality 133
641RM Air Quality 135
645 Pressure 54
647 Pressure 54
650 Temperature 282
651 Temperature 284
652-0 Temperature 285
655A Pressure 55
657-1 Air Quality 144
657C-1 Air Quality 144
659 Temperature 284
660 Air Quality 130
668 Pressure 47
670 Air Quality 131
672 Pressure 106
673 Pressure 105
681 Pressure 109
682 Pressure 108
62000MU Pressure 60

761 7314A
761 Pressure 77
763 Pressure 77
764 Pressure 77
7000 Pressure 78-81
7000B Pressure 79
7100 Pressure 79
7112 Pressure 81
7112B Pressure 79-80
7114A Pressure 81
7212 Pressure 81
7214A Pressure 81
7312 Pressure 81
7314A Pressure 81
8B 862E
8B Temperature 268
8C Temperature 269
862E Temperature 281
920 9000
Accessories (A) A-286
Accessories (A) Access./Books 538-562
A1F Pressure 94
A1PS/A1VS Pressure 95
A2 Pressure 97
A4 Pressure 39
A6 Pressure 96
A7 Pressure 100
A9 Pressure 97
A3000 Pressure 20-21
A-286 Pressure 6
A-396A AVU
A-396A Test Equipment 458
A-432 Pressure 6
A-464 Pressure 6
A-465 Access./Books 558
A-605 Pressure 6
A-610 Pressure 6
A-699 Process Control 391
A-705-20 Process Control 368
A-709 Temperature 285
A-800 Test Equipment 452
A-900, A-901 Temperature 266
A-1000 Access./Books 549-553
A-2000 Access./Books 554-557
ABFV Valves 512-514
ABV Valves 492
AD Temperature 308
ADPS Pressure 28
AFG Air Quality 121
AFH2 Test Equipment 438
AFR Access./Books 544
AFS Flow 208
AN2 Process Control 376
AP Pressure 99
APS/AVS Pressure 95
APV-C Level 361
APV-I Level 361
ASG Test Equipment 457
AVG Temperature 307
AVU Air Quality 133

572
B-190 BYDS
B-190 Level 334
BAP Level 356
BCV Valves 506
BDL Data Loggers/Record. 412
BFM Flow 213
BFV Valves 510
BHC Valves 519
BICV Valves 507
BPI Process Control 375
BPS-015 Process Control 391
BPV Level 358
BT Temperature 240
BT15S/BT20S Temperature 244
BTG Pressure 73
BTL Temperature 242
BTLRN Temperature 243
BTM3 Temperature 243
BTO Temperature 252
BTP Temperature 246
BTPM Temperature 244
BV2 Valves 494-495
BV2-F1 Valves 497
BV2M Valves 488
BV2MB Valves 485
BV2B, C, F, J, L Valves 494-495
BV3 Valves 496, 498-499
BV3-TC Valves 498
BV3HL Valves 489
BV3HL-3A Valves 489
BV3-3A Valves 499
BYDS Pressure 30
CA10 CXA
CA10 Test Equipment 445
CA20 Test Equipment 445
CAM Flow 214
CBAS Process Control 404
CBT Temperature 245
Capsuhelic
Gage Pressure 10-11

Capsu-Photohelic
Gage Pressure 23
CC1 Temperature 307
CC-10K Temperature 254
CD Pressure 99
CDD Air Quality 147
CDW Air Quality 147
CFS Level 329
CHP Test Equipment 459
CIF Flow 183
CLD20 Test Equipment 454
CLP Level 334
CLS1 Level 336
CLS2 Level 337
CLT Level 349
CMT Air Quality 146
CONG Pressure 70
Cooling Tower/Snubber Access./Books 547
CPF Flow 184-185
CPS Process Control 404
CRF2 Level 348
CS Pressure 99
CSG Test Equipment 457
CT40/50 Process Control 385
CT60/70 Process Control 385
CVA Valves 515
CX Pressure 98
CXA Pressure 98

D DPG-000
D Temperature 296
DA/DS Pressure 90-91
DA-7035N Temperature 282
DAFM Air Quality 123
DBLM Level 340
DBT Temperature 250
DCG Pressure 86
DCT500A Process Control 394
DCT500ADC Process Control 394
DCT600 Process Control 395
DCT1000 Process Control 396
DCT1000DC Process Control 397
DCV Valves 518
DDA Air Quality 149
DDB Air Quality 150
DDC Air Quality 149
DDD Air Quality 150
DFT Flow 216
DH Pressure 16-17
DH Links Pressure 18
DHII Pressure 15
DH3 Pressure 14
Digihelic
Controller Pressure 14-17

Digihelic Links Pressure 18
DigiMag
Gage Pressure 12
DKT-1 Test Equipment 443
DL001 Data Loggers/Record. 416
DLD Level 355
DLI Data Loggers/Record. 408
DLI2 Data Loggers/Record. 409
DLP Data Loggers/Record. 409
DM-1100 Pressure 12
DM-1200 Pressure 12
DM-2000 Pressure 44
DMF Flow 236
DP Pressure 39
DPC Level 351
DPG-000 Pressure 83
DPG-100 DW-USB-RT
DPG-100 Pressure 83
DPG-200 Pressure 88
DPGA Pressure 84
DPGAB Pressure 85
DPGW Pressure 84
DPGWB Pressure 85
DPL110 Level 336
DPM Process Control 400
DPMA Process Control 366
DPML Process Control 367
DPMP Process Control 367
DPMW Process Control 366
DPMX Process Control 368
DR Flow 171
DR4 Flow 172
DRFT Temperature 251
DS300, DS400 Flow 186-187
DSGT Pressure 87
DSS Process Control 403
DSSR Process Control 381
DT Valves 536
Duotect
Switch Pressure 38, 94

Durablock
Gage Test Equipment 433

Durablock
Gage Pressure 24
Durablock
Manometer Pressure 25
DV Valves 485
DW-USB Data Loggers/Record. 415
DW-USB-LITE Data Loggers/Record. 415
DW-USB-RT Data Loggers/Record. 414
EBV EVA
EBV Level 362
EC Temperature 299
EC Test Equipment 453
EDA Pressure 89
EDPS Pressure 29
EMR Process Control 383
EP1000 Valves 524
EPTA Valves 523
EVA Valves 473

574
F FTS
F Access./Books 540-541
F195 Access./Books 545
F222, F451 Access./Books 545
F6/F7 Level 324-325
F7-MLK Level 328
F7-MLK2 Level 328
F7-MM Level 326
F7-MS Level 327
F700 Access./Books 546
FAFM Air Quality 122
FBG Pressure 72
FC-1000 Process Control 377
FD Level 357
FDT Pressure 107
Flex-Tube
Manometer Test Equipment 430-432

Flotect
Switch Flow 197-202, 204, 209

Flotect
Switch Level 320-323

FLST Air Quality 124-125
FMS Flow 211
FPC-1200 Level 350
FPV Valves 504
FR Access./Books 542-543
FRL Access./Books 542-543
FS Flow 196
FS-2 Flow 203
FST-300 Test Equipment 447
FSW Level 329
FTS Flow 212
G9 GVS
G9 Flow 205
GBT Temperature 241
GDL Data Loggers/Record. 410
GFC Flow 235
GFM Flow 234
GFT Flow 226
GG Access./Books 548
GS Level 332
GT Temperature 248
GV1 Valves 471
GV2/GV3 Valves 472
GVS Flow 205
H2 HWT250
H2 Pressure 94
H3 Pressure 38
HBV Valves 490
HCHP Test Equipment 461
HF Flow 178-179
HFO Flow 195
HFPC Flow 177
HFPS Flow 177
HFT Flow 215
HGV Valves 476
HHP Test Equipment 461
HHT Air Quality 145
Hi-Flow Valve Valves 468-470
HM28 Test Equipment 429
HM35 Test Equipment 428
HNV Valves 477
HP Test Equipment 459
HS Air Quality 136
HSG Pressure 71
HSSR Process Control 381
HT Air Quality 137
HTDL-10 Data Loggers/Record. 414
HWT250 Temperature 247

I2-1 IT-W
I2-1 Temperature 309
IDL Data Loggers/Record. 412
IF Flow 172
ILA Temperature 312
IP Valves 524
IPV Level 362
IR2 Test Equipment 448
IR6/IR7 Test Equipment 449
IRM20 Test Equipment 451
Iso Verter
Module Process Control 378

IS626 Pressure 110
ISDL Data Loggers/Record. 413
ISDP Pressure 50
IT Temperature 249
IT-W Temperature 249
KFD0 KS-04/05
KFD0 Process Control 388
KS Temperature 253
KS-04/05 Temperature 253
L LCT116
L Access./Books 540-541
L4 Level 320
L6 Level 321
L8 Level 322
L10 Level 323
LCI108/108J Process Control 373
LCI132 Process Control 370
LCI308/408 Process Control 371
LCI508/608 Process Control 372
LCR10 Data Loggers/Record. 420
LCR20 Data Loggers/Record. 420
LCT016 Process Control 392
LCT216 LTTJ
LDL-030 Data Loggers/Record. 418
LDL2-030 Data Loggers/Record. 418
LDT Level 354
LEVG Level 318
LFM Flow 164-166
LLC Level 335
LoveLink III Data Loggers/Record. 419
LPG1 Pressure 64
LPG2 Pressure 64
LPG3 Pressure 65
LPG4 Pressure 65
LPI Process Control 375
LPTK Test Equipment 456
LTC Level 344
LTS Level 344
LTT Process Control 386
LTTJ Process Control 384
Magnehelic
Gage MIT
Magnehelic
Gage Pressure 4-5

Magnehelic
Transmitter Pressure 46
MagneSense
Transmitter Pressure 40-41

Mark 1, 3, 4 Valves 532-534
Mark II Test Equipment 433
Mark II Pressure 26
Mark II WSI Test Equipment 439
MC Test Equipment 463
MC6 Test Equipment 462
MDA Pressure 31
MDS Pressure 31
MFD Level 357
MGO Valves 511
MHS Pressure 101
Minihelic
Gage Pressure 8-9

Mini-Master
Flowmeter Flow 156-157

Mini-Node Process Control 386
Mini-Photohelic
Gage Pressure 19
MIT Test Equipment 450

576
MM MW
MM Flow 156-157
MM10 Test Equipment 458
MN-1 Process Control 386
MotherNode Process Control 387
MP Pressure 19
MPC Level 353
MPC Jr. Level 352
MPR Access./Books 544
MS Pressure 40-41
MSP Process Control 379
MSV Valves 483
MTF Flow 174-175
MTL10 Data Loggers/Record. 411
MTL20/30 Data Loggers/Record. 411
MTL5041/5045 Process Control 389
MTL7706/7787 Process Control 390
Muffler Accessory Valves 518
MULS Level 332
MV Valves 484
MVR Level 317
MVS Pressure 101
MW Test Equipment 440
NCS-10 NVII
NCS-10 Level 338
NSS Process Control 402
NVII Valves 476
O-45 OSW-100
O-45 Temperature 308
OLS Level 333
OMA Flow 163
One-Touch
Transmitter Pressure 42
OP Flow 188-189
OSC-200 Air Quality 148
OSW-100 Air Quality 148
P PVF
P Temperature 297
P1 Flow 208
P2 Flow 206
P3 Flow 206
P4 Flow 207
P5 Flow 209
P8 Flow 207
PBFV Valves 509
PBLT2 Level 346
PBLTX Level 346
PBV Valves 493
PCHP Test Equipment 460
PCP Level 351
PDPS Pressure 27
PE Flow 190-191
PFT Flow 220
PG Pressure 36
PGV Valves 482
PHO-1 Test Equipment 451
Photohelic
Gage Pressure 20-22

PHP Test Equipment 460
PIT Test Equipment 450
PLS Level 341
PM706 Process Control 374
PMS Process Control 401
PMT Process Control 399
PPG Pressure 74
PPMG Pressure 73
PRECISOR
Positioner Valves Valves 527-529

PRV Level 359
PS Access./Books 548
PS Level 340
PSX2 Flow 231
PTGD Pressure 13
PTV Level 360
PUX2 Flow 230
PV Valves 521
PVF Flow 184-185

QPC QV
QPC Level 354
Quick-View
Indicator Valves 531

QV Valves 531
R RTD
R Access./Books 540-541
Rate-Master
Flowmeter Flow 158-159, 176

RDCV Valves 518
Regulator Kits Access./Books 545
RFT Temperature 248
RH-R Air Quality 137
RHP Air Quality 139
RHP-W Air Quality 138
RHRS Air Quality 140
RLD1 Test Equipment 454
RM Flow 158-159
RMV Flow 176
RMVII Flow 176
RRT Temperature 251
RSF Flow 173
RSM Pressure 49
RSV Valves 519
RTD Temperature 312
S SC1290, SC1490
S Temperature 309
S2-2 Temperature 311
S2-4 Temperature 311
SA1100 Pressure 92
SAE Valves 508
SAEG Pressure 72
SAV-BT Valves 478
SAV-SF Valves 480
SAV-SSC Valves 481
SAV-ST Valves 479
SBLT2 Level 347
SBLTX Level 347
SC1090/SCL1090 Process Control 377
SC1290, SC1490 Temperature 281
SC4130, SC4151, SC4380 SSB
SC4130, SC4151, SC4380 Process Control 378
SCC Process Control 380
SCD Temperature 271
SCD-8 Temperature 270
SCS Process Control 384
SCV Valves 505
SCZ10 Temperature 272
SF Flow 217
SFI100 Flow 192-193
SF2 Flow 217
SFI Flow 192-193
SFI-100T Flow 219
SFI300, SFI350, SFI360 Flow 192-193
SFI300F, SFI360F Flow 192-193
SFI400, SFI400F Flow 192-193
SFI700 Flow 192-193
SFI-500 Flow 194
SFI-550 Flow 194
SFI-800 Flow 218
SG3A Pressure 61
SGA Pressure 59
SGB Pressure 59
SGC2 Pressure 62
SGD Pressure 58
SGF Pressure 63
SGI Pressure 57
SGJ Pressure 82
SGK Pressure 62
SGL Pressure 57
SGO Pressure 66
SGP Pressure 66
SGR Pressure 82
SGS Pressure 70
SGT Pressure 58
SGX Pressure 63
SI Process Control 369
Slack Tube
Manometer Test Equipment 431

SLD Level 355
SMV Valves 484
Spirahelic
Gage Pressure 78-81

SSB Flow 180

578
SSD SX3
SSD Pressure 60
SSL Pressure 60
SSM Flow 180
SSR Process Control 382
SSR-15 Process Control 382
SSS-1000 Air Quality 120
ST Temperature 247
STC Temperature 246
STDL-10 Data Loggers/Record. 413
STFLO Flow 181
STRA Air Quality 126-127
SVB Valves 490
SV3 Valves 521
SVE Valves 520
SVT Process Control 398
SWUK1 Access./Books 548
SX1 Flow 228
SX2 Flow 229
SX3 Flow 233
T TFP-GI
T Temperature 298
TAC3 Test Equipment 464
TBV Valves 486
TBV2 Valves 487
TC20 Test Equipment 443
TCS Temperature 274
TDC Flow 212
TDL-10 Data Loggers/Record. 410
TDS Flow 210
TDS Test Equipment 453
TDST Valves 522
TE Flow 190-191
TE Temperature 302-303
TE-W Temperature 304
TEFG Pressure 74
TFLS Level 339
TFM-LI Flow 223
TFM-LP Flow 223
TFP-GI Flow 221
TFP-GV TVF
TFP-GV Flow 221
TFP-LI Flow 222
TFP-LP Flow 222
TG Temperature 305
TH Test Equipment 441
THC Air Quality 136
THI-10 Test Equipment 442
TI Temperature 255
TID Temperature 255
TM2 Flow 226
TNV Valves 477
TPG Pressure 76
TR-7 Process Control 398
TRI Pressure 75
TS Temperature 279
TS Probes Temperature 280
TS2 Temperature 277
TS3 Temperature 276
TSF Temperature 274
TSP Flow 210
TSS2 Temperature 277
TSWB Temperature 279
TSX Temperature 278
TSX3 Temperature 276
TTE Temperature 283
TTM Flow 219
TVA Flow 170
TVF Flow 182

UDL UXF3
UDL Data Loggers/Record. 407
UGA Pressure 67
UGB Pressure 67
UGC Pressure 68
UGE Pressure 69
Ultra-Mag Switch Level 342-343
Ultra-View Flowmeter Flow 167
ULT Level 345
UNOG Pressure 75
UV Flow 167
UXF2 Flow 232
UXF3 Flow 227
V4 VTT
V4 Flow 198-199
V6 Flow 200-201
V7 Flow 202
V8 Flow 204
V10 Flow 197
V12 Flow 209
VA Flow 168-169
VA-K Flow 169
Valve Mounting Kits Valves 534
Vaneometer
Anemometer Test Equipment 441
VASP Flow 196
VAT Flow 170
Venturi Flow Meter Pressure 7
VFA, VFB Flow 160-161
VFC, VFCII Flow 162
VFF Flow 163
Visi-Float
Flowmeter Flow 160-163, 196

VPI Valves 530
VPS Valves 535
VR Level 316
VT120 Test Equipment 436
VT-200 Test Equipment 436
VTT Air Quality 132
W WWDP
W Temperature 300
WD Level 318
WD2 Level 319
WHP Air Quality 141
WHT Air Quality 146
Wind Meter Test Equipment 439
WM Flow 224
WM-4SS Air Quality 142-143
WM-9SE Air Quality 142-143
WM-9SS Air Quality 142-143
WM-CSC Air Quality 142-143
WM-CSF Air Quality 142-143
WM-CSH Air Quality 142-143
WM-PSE Air Quality 142-143
WM-PSS Air Quality 142-143
WM-RSC Air Quality 142-143
WM-RSO Air Quality 142-143
WM-SSC Air Quality 142-143
WM-SSR Air Quality 142-143
WM-SSV Air Quality 142-143
WM-TS2 Air Quality 142-143
WM-TS3 Air Quality 142-143
WM-VSC Air Quality 142-143
WM-VSF Air Quality 142-143
WM-VSH Air Quality 142-143
WMT Flow 225
WPH Test Equipment 452
WSI Test Equipment 439
WT-10 Test Equipment 447
WTI-100 Temperature 254
WTP Temperature 306
WTP-R Temperature 305
WTP-W Temperature 304
WWDP Pressure 52
ZV1 ZV2
ZV1 Valves 516
ZV2 Valves 517

580
Page Page
A
Accessories
Carrying Cases 561
Connectors 519, 500-557, 559
Enclosures 266
Filters 540-544, 548, 560
Fittings 519, 549-557, 559-560
Gage Fluids 562
Gage Tubing 562
Miscellaneous 187, 547-548, 560
Mounting 6, 560
Psychrometers 561
Pumps 351-355, 458-461, 561
Slide Charts 561
Static Pressure Sensors 558-559
Thermometers 248-254, 561
Actuators
Damper 149-150
Valve 473
Air Filter Instruments 4-5, 11-12, 24, 26, 540
Air Flow
Gages 4-5, 8-11
Meters 156-163, 166-176, 178-185
Meters with Switch 195-196
Sensors 120-128, 186-191
Switches 130, 195-196, 198-201, 203-204, 206, 208
Air Velocity
Flow Stations 124-127
Flow Switch 130, 197-201, 204
Gages 433-434
Indicators 130, 433-439
Manometer, Digital 425, 435
Manometer, Fluid 433-434
Meters 433-439
Monitors 130, 433-434
Sensors 120-129, 186-191
Test Kits 433-435, 439-440
Transmitters 132-135
Windmeters 439-440
Alarms
Loop and Limit 273-274, 281, 384
Process Indicator 255, 366-376, 419
Analyzers
CO 455
Flue Gas 455
ANDERSON-MIDWEST 192-193
Anemometers 436-437
B
Bin Level
Switches 336-344
Transmitters 348
Bin Vibrators 356, 358-361
Books
Technical Reference 538-539
Bulk Flow Monitors 213
BTU Measurement 230
C
Calibrators 445, 462-463
Capsuhelic
Gage 10-11
Carbon Dioxide
Indicators 455-456
Transmitters 147
Carrying Cases 561
Combustion Test Kits 455-456
Combustion Flowmeter 183
Connectors 519, 549-558
Controllers
Dust Collection 394-397
Electro-Pneumatic 524
Fan Speed 377
Flow 210, 212
Level 344, 350-354
Mass Flow 234, 236
Process 256-258, 262-263, 267-268, 272-273
Pump 350-354
Temperature 256-262, 267-269, 271-274, 278-279
Current Switches 384
D
Damper
Actuators 149-150
Position Sensing 531-536

Page Page
Data Loggers 407-418
Detector 318, 401, 454, 536
Gages 4-5, 8-10
Indicating Transmitters 14-17, 40-41, 44-46, 48-50, 52-53
Indicators 4-5, 8-10, 24-26, 424-431
Regulators 547
Switch/Gages 14-23
Switches 27-28, 31-40
Transmitters 40-56
Digihelic
Controller 14-18
Digimag
12
Digital Indicating
Meters, Panel 255, 366-376
Pressure Transmitters 14-17, 40-41, 44-46, 48-50,
52-53, 87-89, 102-103
Temperature/Controller 256-262, 267-268, 272-273
Temperature/Process 255, 369, 371, 373
Temperature/Switch 274, 277-279
Digital Manometers 424-427, 429
Digital Panel Meters 255, 366-376
Digital Gages 83, 86-88
Digital Pressure Kits 435
Digital Timers 392-397, 399-403
Duotect
Switch 38, 94
Durablock
Gage/Manometer 24, 26, 433

Dust Collector Timer Controls 394-397
E
Electrical Multimeters 458
Explosion-Proof
Bin Level Switches 341-343
Differential Pressure Switches 27-28, 31, 34-39
Flow Switches 198-201
Liquid Level Switches 320-321, 324, 330-331, 334
Position Indicator Switches/Transmitters 531-534, 536
Pressure Switches 90-93, 98-99
Speed Switch 403
Thermostat 281
Temperature Transmitter 283
Temperature/Humidity Transmitter 145
Ultrasonic Level Transmitter 345
F
Fan Speed Controllers 377
Filters 540-546, 560
Filters-Liquid Particle 546
Fittings 519, 549-560
Flex-Tube
Manometer 25, 430

Float Switches 320-331
Flotect

Switch 197-201, 204, 209, 320-324
Flow
Controllers 210-212
Gages 4-5, 8-10
Indicators 192-194, 217-219
Meters 156-185, 188, 195-196, 214, 235
Dial 7, 176
Digital 222-223, 235-236
Fluoropolymer 170
Glass 168-169, 171-175
In-Line 164-167, 172-173, 177-179
Mass 234-236
Multitube 160-161, 174-175
Orifice Plate 188-191
Polycarbonate 158-159, 164-166
Polysulfone 167
Rotatable Scale 173
Switch Output 195-196, 217-219
Transmitter Output 214-218, 221-223, 227-236
Turbine 221-223
Ultrasonic 227-233
Variable Area 156-175
Sensors 7, 120-129, 186-191
Stations 124-127
Switches 130, 195-213, 217-219
Paddle 130, 197-204
Shuttle/Piston 205-209
Thermal 210-212
Totalizers 219, 224-225, 227-233
Transmitters
Inline 214-216
Ultrasonic 227-233
Differential Pressure 216
Paddlewheel 217-220, 225
Turbine 221-223

582
Page Page
Flowmeters/Controllers
Dial-Type 7, 176
Flow Switch 195-196, 210, 212
Mass 227-229
Multitube 160-161, 174-175
G
Gage Guards 548
Gage Oils 562
Gages
Air Filter 4-5, 11-12, 24-26
Air Velocity 4-5, 433-434
Differential Pressure 4-5, 8-11
Digital 11, 14-17, 83-88
Draft 4-5, 11, 24-26, 430-431
Low Pressure 63-65
Pressure, Dial 57-73, 75-82
Pressure/Temperature 74-75
Spirahelic 78-81
Stainless Steel 57-63, 66, 70
Utility 67-69
Temperature 240-252
Gas Pressure Kits 431
Gas Pressure Switches 36-37
Grounding 398
H
Handheld Instruments
Air Velocity 434-437
Calibrators 445, 457-458, 463
Humidity 441-442
Pressure 424-429
Temperature 443, 447-451
Humidity
Controllers 136
Handheld 441-442
Loggers/Recorders 407-408, 410-412, 414-416
Switches 136
Display 136, 138
Hygrometers 441-442
I
Indicators
Air Flow 156-163, 166-176, 178-184, 192-193
Air Velocity 130, 433-439
Damper Position 531-536
Differential Pressure 4-5, 8-11, 24-26, 424-431, 433
Humidity 408, 410, 441-442
Level 194, 316-318
Liquid Flow
In-Line 176-177
Sight Flow 192-194, 217-219
Totalizers 219, 224-226
Turbine 222-223
Ultrasonic 227-233
Variable Area 156-176
Process 255, 366-376
Sight Flow 192-194, 217-219
Temperature 240-252, 443, 447-450
Valve Position 531-536
Wind Speed 439-440
Infrared Thermometers 312, 447-450
Intrinsically Safe
Barrier 390
Current to Pressure Transducer 524-526
Differential Pressure Transmitters 50-51
Humidity/Temperature Transmitters 145
Isolator 387-388
Level Transmitters 345-347
Particulate Sensor 400-401
Particulate Transmitter 399
Position Transmitter 532-534
Pressure Transmitter 110
Relays 382
IsoVerter Module 378
K
Kits
Combustion 455-456
Level Switch 328
Portable Gage 431, 433-434
Smoke Gage 456
Variable Area Flowmeter 169

Page Page
L
Leak Detectors 319, 354-355, 399-401, 454
Level
Bin Vibrators 356, 358-362
Controllers 344, 350-353
Multi-point 326-328, 334-336
Sensors 320-344
Switches 336-338, 340
Capacitive 336-338, 340
Conductivity 334-336
Diaphragm 342-343
Displacer 334
Float 320-332
Inductive 340
Optical 333
Paddle 340-341
Tilt 344
Tuning Fork 339
Ultrasonic 332
Capacitive 348
Float 349
Pressure 345
Submersible 346-347
Ultrasonic 345
Water Detectors 318-319
Limit Switches
Air Flow 130, 195-197, 201, 205-208
Flow 130, 195-197, 201, 205-208
Gas Pressure 36
Level 320-344
Pressure 27-28, 31-40, 88-101
Temperature 251, 273-274, 277-278, 281-282
Liquid Level
Controllers 344, 350-354
Switches 320-337
Lubricators 540-543
M
Magnehelic

Gage 4-5, 11, 46
Magnesense
Transmitter 40-41
Manometers
Digital Handheld 424-431
Fluid Filled
Inclined 24-26
Inclined/Vertical 24, 26, 431
U-Tube 430-431
Well Type 25
Minihelic

Gage 8-9, 44
Mini-Master

Flowmeter 156-157
Mini-Node
386
Mini-Photohelic
Gage 19
Mother Node
387
Multi Jet Water Meters 224-225
P
Panel Meters 255, 366-368, 372-374
pH Testers 452
Photohelic

Gage 20-23
Pitot Tubes 128-129
Position Indicating Control 531-536
Positioners 526-528
Power Supplies 374, 548
Pressure
Calibrators 458-463
Data Loggers 407, 409, 415-417
Differential
Gages 4-5, 8-12
Switches, Dial 18-23
Switches, Digital 14-17
Transmitters 14-17, 40-55
Regulators 558
Switches 27-28, 31-40
Single
Gages, Dial 57-82
Gages, Digital 83-88
Switches 88-101
Switch/Gages 20-21, 87-88
Transmitters 86-88, 106-112

584
Page Page
Process
Controllers 256-260, 262-263, 267-268, 271-273
Current Transformers/Switches 384-385
Data Loggers 407, 412, 414-417
Fan Speed Controllers 377
Panel Meters/Indicators 255, 366-376
Relays 381-382
Sensor
Particulate (Dust or Broken Bag) 399-401
Signal Converters/Isolators 378-380
SSR Monitors 386
Switches
Alarm 376-377
Speed 402-403
Timer Boards 394-397
Transmitters
Particulate (Dust or Broken Bag) 401
Psychrometers 561
Pump
Accessories 561
Controllers 350-355
Purge Meters 156-162
Q
Quick-View

Indicator 531
R
Rate-Master

Flowmeter 158-159, 176
Recorders
Circular Chart 420
Strip Chart 419
Reference Books 538-539
Regulators 540-545
Relays 381-382, 386
RTD Sensors 287-299, 307-311
S
Sensors
Broken Bag 399-401
Current 384-385
Flow 7, 120-129, 186-191
Particulate 399-401
Position 536
Speed 402-403
Static Pressure 558-559
Temperature 280, 287-307
Sight Flow Indicators 192-194, 217-219
Sight Windows 194
Slack-Tube

Manometer 431
Slide Charts 561
Smoke Gages 456
Speed Sensors 402-403
Spirahelic

Gage 78-80, 106
Static Pressure Sensors 558-559
Steam Trap 522
Switch/Gages 14-23, 87-88, 94
Switches
Bin Level 336-343
Current 384
Differential Pressure 27-28, 31-40, 426-428
Flow 130, 191-213, 217-218
Gas Pressure 36-37
Humidity 136
Level 320-344
Limit - Air Flow 130, 195-196, 198-201, 208
Limit - Gas Pressure 36-37
Limit - Pressure 27-28, 31-40, 88-101
Limit - Temperature 251, 273-274, 277-278, 281-282
Liquid Level 319-320
Single Pressure 88-101
Speed 402-403
Temperature 251, 273-274, 277-278, 281-282

Page Page
T
Temperature
Calibrators 445
Conditioners 378, 380
Control Valves 471-473, 516
Controllers 256-264, 267-274, 277-279
Data Loggers 407-417
Humidity Switches 136
Indicator Crayons 451
Indicators 240-252, 274, 277-279, 366-376,
443, 448-451
Labels, Irreversible 253
Recorders 419-420
Sensors 280, 287-307
Switches 251, 273-274, 277-278
Digital Panel Mount 273-274, 281-282
Mechanical 251, 277-278
RTD/Thermocouple 277
Thermometers 240-252, 443, 448-451
Dial 240-247, 251
Digital 250-251, 443, 448-451
Glass 248-249
Infrared 447-451
Thermocouple, Digital 443
Thermostat 377
Transmitters 137-139, 144-145, 283-285, 312
Test Equipment
Analyzers
CO 455
Flue Gas 455
Calibrators 445, 462-463
Pressure 462-463
Thermocouple 445
Kits
Air Velocity 433-434, 439-440
Combustion 455-456
Gas Pressure 431
Portable Gage 431, 433-434
Smoke Gage 456
Variable Area Flowmeter 169
Leak Detectors
Combustion 454
Refrigerant 454
PH/ORP/Temperature Meters 458
Pump 459-461
Testers
Conductivity 453
pH 452
Total Dissolved Solids 453
Thermal Anemometers 436-437
Thermohygrometers 441-442
Thermometers
Dial 240-247, 251
Digital 250-251, 443, 448-451
Glass 248-249
Infrared 449-451
Thermocouple, Digital 443
Thermometers with Switch 251, 277
Timers 392-393
Timer Boards 394-397
Totalizing Meters 224-226
Transducer
Current to Pressure 523-526
Transformers 384-385
Transmitters
CO
2
156
Flow 213-219, 221-223, 227-236
Level 345-349
Particulate 398-401
Position 528-530
Pressure Indicating 14-17, 40-41, 45-46, 48-49, 52,
86-88, 102-103, 106
RH/Temperature 137-139, 144-145
Sanitary 112
Single Pressure 86-88, 106-112
Temperature 137-139, 144-145, 285, 312
Tubing 528, 562

586
Page
U
U-Tube Manometers 430-431
Ultra-Mag
Switch 342-343
Ultra-View
Flowmeter 167
V
Valves
Accessories 559
Actuators 149-150, 473
Angle Seat 478-481
Ball 484-503
Butterfly 508-514
Check 504-507
Controls 468-475
Controllers 524
Diaphragm Pulse 518
Drain 485
Globe 468-476
Manual Gear Operator 511
Miniature 484
Needle 476-477
Piston 515
Position Indicator/Switch/Transmitter 531-536
Positioners 528-530
Self Acting Temperature Control 474
Shuttle 515
Solenoid 519-520
Temperature Control 474
Zone 516
Vaneometer
Anemometer 441
Variable Area Rotometers 156-175
Venturi Meter/Gage 7
Vibrators 356-362
Visi-Float

Flowmeter 160-163, 196
W
Water Detectors 318-319
Wind Meters 440-443
Wind Speed Indicators 440-443

Pressure Conversion Chart
in/H
2
O
.1
.2
.4
.6
.8
1.0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
P.S.I.
.0036
.0072
.0144
.0216
.0289
.0361
.0722
.1083
.1444
.1804
.2165
.2526
.2887
.3248
.3609
.3970
.4331
.4692
.5053
.5414
.5774
.6136
.6496
.6857
.7218
.7579
.7940
.8301
.8662
.9023
.9384
.9745
1.010
1.047
1.083
1.119
1.155
1.191
1.227
1.263
1.299
1.335
1.371
1.408
1.444
1.480
1.516
1.552
1.588
1.624
1.660
1.696
1.732
1.768
1.804
1.841
1.877
1.913
1.949
1.985
2.021
2.057
2.093
2.129
2.165
2.202
2.238
2.274
2.310
2.346
2.382
2.418
2.454
2.490
2.526
2.562
2.598
2.635
2.671
2.707
2.743
2.779
2.815
2.851
2.887
2.923
2.959
2.996
3.032
3.068
3.104
3.140
3.176
3.212
3.248
3.284
3.320
3.356
3.392
3.429
3.456
3.501
3.537
3.573
3.609
in/Hg
.0073
.0146
.0293
.0440
.0588
.0735
.1470
.2205
.2940
.3673
.4408
.5143
.5878
.6613
.7348
.8083
.8818
.9553
1.029
1.102
1.176
1.249
1.322
1.396
1.470
1.543
1.616
1.690
1.764
1.837
1.910
1.984
2.056
2.132
2.205
2.278
2.352
2.425
2.498
2.571
2.645
2.718
2.791
2.876
2.940
3.013
3.086
3.160
3.233
3.306
3.378
3.453
3.526
3.600
3.673
3.748
3.822
3.895
3.968
4.041
4.115
4.188
4.261
4.335
4.408
4.483
4.556
4.630
4.703
4.776
4.850
4.923
4.996
5.070
5.143
5.216
5.290
5.365
5.438
5.511
5.585
5.658
5.731
5.805
5.878
5.951
6.024
6.100
6.173
6.246
6.320
6.393
6.466
6.450
6.613
6.686
6.760
6.833
6.906
6.981
7.055
7.128
7.201
7.275
7.348
mm/H
2
O
2.534
5.067
10.13
15.20
20.34
25.41
50.81
76.22
101.62
127.0
152.4
177.8
203.2
228.6
254.0
279.4
304.8
330.2
355.6
381.0
406.4
431.8
457.2
482.6
508.0
533.4
558.8
584.2
609.6
635.0
660.4
685.8
710.8
736.8
762.2
787.5
812.8
836.2
863.5
888.9
914.2
939.5
964.9
990.9
1016
1042
1067
1092
1118
1143
1168
1194
1219
1244
1270
1296
1321
1346
1372
1397
1422
1448
1473
1498
1524
1550
1575
1600
1626
1651
1676
1702
1727
1752
1778
1803
1828
1854
1880
1905
1930
1956
1981
2006
2032
2057
2082
2108
2134
2159
2184
2210
2265
2260
2286
2311
2336
2362
2387
2413
2438
2464
2489
2514
2540
mm/Hg
.1863
.3726
.7452
1.118
1.496
1.868
3.736
5.604
7.472
9.335
11.203
13.072
14.940
16.808
18.676
20.544
22.412
24.280
26.148
28.016
29.879
31.752
33.616
35.484
37.352
39.22
41.09
42.96
44.82
46.69
48.56
50.43
52.26
54.18
56.04
57.91
59.77
61.63
63.49
65.36
67.22
69.08
70.95
72.86
74.72
76.59
78.45
80.31
82.18
84.04
85.90
87.76
89.63
91.49
93.35
95.27
97.13
98.99
100.8
102.7
104.6
106.4
108.3
110.2
112.0
113.9
115.8
117.7
119.5
121.4
123.3
125.1
127.0
128.8
130.7
132.6
134.4
136.4
138.2
140.1
141.9
143.8
145.7
147.5
149.4
151.2
153.1
155.0
156.9
158.8
160.6
162.5
164.4
166.2
168.1
169.9
171.8
173.7
175.5
177.4
179.3
181.2
183.0
184.9
186.8
kg/cm
2
.0002
.0005
.0010
.0015
.0020
.0025
.0051
.0076
.0102
.0127
.0152
.0178
.0203
.0228
.0254
.0279
.0304
.0330
.0355
.0381
.0406
.0431
.0457
.0482
.0507
.0533
.0558
.0584
.0609
.0634
.0660
.0685
.0710
.0736
.0761
.0787
.0812
.0837
.0862
.0888
.0913
.0938
.0964
.0990
.1015
.1040
.1066
.1091
.1116
.1142
.1167
.1192
.1218
.1243
.1268
.1294
.1320
.1345
.1370
.1395
.1421
.1146
.1471
.1497
.1522
.1548
.1573
.1599
.1624
.1649
.1674
.1700
.1725
.1750
.1776
.1801
.1826
.1852
.1878
.1903
.1928
.1954
.1979
.2004
.2030
.2055
.2080
.2106
.2131
.2157
.2182
.2207
.2233
.2258
.2283
.2309
.2334
.2359
.2384
.2410
.2436
.2461
.2486
.2512
.2537
bar
.0002
.0005
.0010
.0015
.0020
.0025
.0050
.0075
.0099
.0124
.0149
.0174
.0199
.0224
.0249
.0274
.0299
.0324
.0348
.0373
.0398
.0423
.0448
.0473
.0498
.0523
.0547
.0572
.0597
.0622
.0647
.0672
.0696
.0722
.0747
.0772
.0796
.0821
.0846
.0871
.0896
.0920
.0945
.0971
.0996
.1020
.1045
.1070
.1095
.1120
.1144
.1169
.1194
.1219
.1244
.1269
.1294
.1319
.1344
.1369
.1393
.1418
.1443
.1468
.1493
.1518
.1543
.1568
.1593
.1618
.1642
.1667
.1692
.1717
.1742
.1766
.1791
.1817
.1842
.1866
.1891
.1916
.1941
.1966
.1991
.2015
.2040
.2066
.2091
.2115
.2140
.2165
.2190
.2215
.2239
.2264
.2289
.2314
.2339
.2364
.2389
.2414
.2439
.2464
.2488
mbar
.2482
.4964
.9928
1.489
1.992
2.489
4.978
7.467
9.956
12.44
14.93
17.42
19.90
22.39
24.88
27.37
29.86
32.35
34.84
37.33
39.81
42.31
44.79
47.28
49.77
52.26
54.74
57.23
59.72
62.21
64.70
67.19
69.64
72.19
74.67
77.15
79.63
82.12
84.60
87.08
89.56
92.04
94.53
97.08
99.56
102.0
104.5
107.0
109.5
112.0
114.5
116.9
119.4
121.9
124.4
126.9
129.4
131.9
134.4
136.9
139.3
141.8
144.3
146.8
149.3
151.8
154.3
156.8
159.3
161.8
164.2
166.7
169.2
171.7
174.2
176.6
179.1
181.7
184.2
186.6
189.1
191.6
194.1
196.6
199.1
201.5
204.0
206.6
209.1
211.5
214.0
216.5
219.0
221.5
223.9
226.4
228.9
231.4
233.9
236.4
238.9
241.4
243.9
246.4
248.8
Pa
24.82
49.64
99.28
148.9
199.2
248.9
497.8
746.7
995.6
1244
1493
1742
1990
2239
2488
2737
2986
3235
3484
3733
3981
4231
4479
4728
4977
5226
5474
5723
5972
6221
6470
6719
6964
7219
7467
7715
7963
8212
8460
8708
8956
9204
9453
9708
9956
10204
10452
10701
10949
11197
11445
11694
11942
12190
12438
12693
12941
13190
13438
13686
13934
14182
14431
14679
14927
15182
15430
15679
15927
16175
16423
16672
16920
17168
17416
17664
17912
18168
18416
18664
18912
19160
19409
19657
19905
20153
20402
20657
20905
21153
21401
21650
21898
22146
22394
22642
22890
23139
23387
23642
23890
24138
24387
24635
24883
kPa
.0248
.0496
.0993
.1489
.1992
.2489
.4978
.7476
.9956
1.244
1.493
1.742
1.990
2.239
2.488
2.737
2.986
3.235
3.484
3.733
3.981
4.231
4.479
4.728
4.977
5.226
5.474
5.723
5.972
6.221
6.470
6.719
6.964
7.219
7.467
7.715
7.963
8.212
8.460
8.708
8.956
9.204
9.453
9.708
9.956
10.20
10.45
10.70
10.95
11.20
11.44
11.69
11.94
12.19
12.44
12.69
12.94
13.19
13.44
13.69
13.93
14.18
14.43
14.68
14.93
15.18
15.43
15.68
15.93
16.18
16.42
16.67
16.92
17.17
17.42
17.66
17.91
18.17
18.42
18.66
18.91
19.16
19.41
19.66
19.90
20.15
20.40
20.66
20.90
21.15
21.40
21.65
21.90
22.15
22.39
22.64
22.89
23.14
23.39
23.64
23.89
24.14
24.39
24.64
24.88
P.S.I.
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
6.0
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.8
8.0
8.2
8.4
8.6
8.8
9.0
9.2
9.4
9.6
9.8
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
14.7
15.0
16.0
17.0
18.0
19.0
20.0
21.0
22.0
23.0
24.0
25.0
in/H
2
O
27.71
30.45
33.22
35.98
38.75
41.52
44.29
47.06
49.82
52.59
55.36
58.13
60.90
63.67
66.43
69.20
71.97
74.74
77.51
80.27
83.04
85.81
88.58
91.35
94.11
96.88
99.65
102.4
105.2
108.0
110.7
113.5
116.3
119.0
121.8
124.6
127.3
130.1
132.9
135.6
138.4
141.2
143.9
146.7
149.5
152.2
155.0
157.8
160.5
163.3
166.1
168.8
171.6
174.4
177.2
179.9
182.7
185.5
188.2
191.0
193.8
196.5
199.3
202.1
204.8
207.6
210.4
215.9
221.4
227.0
232.5
238.0
243.6
249.1
254.7
260.2
265.7
271.3
276.8
304.5
332.2
359.8
387.5
406.9
415.2
442.9
470.6
498.2
525.9
553.6
581.3
609.0
636.7
664.3
692.0
in/Hg
2.036
2.240
2.443
2.647
2.850
3.054
3.258
3.461
3.665
3.686
4.072
4.276
4.479
4.683
4.886
5.090
5.294
5.497
5.701
5.904
6.108
6.312
6.515
6.719
6.922
7.126
7.330
7.535
7.737
7.940
8.144
8.348
8.551
8.775
8.958
9.162
9.366
9.569
9.773
9.976
10.18
10.38
10.59
10.79
10.99
11.20
11.40
11.60
11.81
12.01
12.22
12.42
12.62
12.83
13.03
13.23
13.44
13.64
13.84
14.05
14.25
14.46
14.66
14.86
15.07
15.27
15.47
15.88
16.29
16.70
17.10
17.51
17.92
18.32
18.73
19.14
19.54
19.95
20.36
22.40
24.43
26.47
28.50
29.93
30.54
32.58
34.61
36.65
36.68
40.72
42.76
44.79
46.83
48.86
50.90
mm/H
2
O
703.1
773.4
843.7
914.0
984.3
1055
1125
1195
1266
1336
1406
1476
1547
1617
1687
1758
1828
1898
1969
2039
2109
2180
2250
2320
2390
2461
2531
2601
2672
2742
2812
2883
2953
3023
3094
2164
3234
3304
3375
3445
3515
3586
3656
3726
3797
3876
3973
4008
4078
4148
4218
4289
4359
4429
4500
4570
4640
4711
4781
4851
4922
4992
5062
5132
5203
5273
5343
5484
5625
5765
5906
6047
6187
6328
6468
6609
6750
6890
7031
7734
8437
9140
9843
10340
10550
11250
11950
12660
13360
14060
14770
15470
16170
16870
17580
mm/Hg
51.75
56.89
62.06
67.23
72.40
77.57
82.74
87.92
93.09
98.26
103.4
108.6
113.8
118.9
124.1
129.3
134.5
139.6
144.8
150.0
155.1
160.3
165.5
170.7
175.8
181.0
186.2
191.3
196.5
201.7
206.9
212.0
217.2
222.4
227.5
232.7
237.9
243.1
248.2
253.4
258.6
263.7
268.9
274.1
279.3
284.4
289.6
294.8
299.9
305.1
310.3
315.5
320.6
325.8
331.0
336.1
341.3
346.5
351.7
356.8
362.0
367.2
372.3
377.5
382.7
387.9
393.0
403.4
413.7
424.1
434.4
444.7
455.1
465.4
475.8
486.1
496.5
506.8
517.1
568.9
620.6
672.3
724.0
760.2
775.7
827.4
879.1
930.9
982.6
1034
1086
1138
1189
1241
1293
kg/cm
2
.0703
.0773
.0844
.0914
.0984
.1055
.1125
.1195
.1266
.1336
.1406
.1476
.1547
.1617
.1687
.1758
.1828
.1898
.1968
.2039
.2109
.2180
.2250
.2320
.2390
.2461
.2531
.2601
.2672
.2742
.2812
.2883
.2953
.3023
.3094
.3164
.3234
.3304
.3375
.3445
.3515
.3586
.3656
.3726
.3797
.3867
.3937
.4007
.4078
.4148
.4218
.4289
.4359
.4429
.4500
.4570
.4640
.4710
.4781
.4851
.4921
.4992
.5062
.5132
.5203
.5273
.5343
.5484
.5625
.5765
.5906
.6046
.6187
.6328
.6468
.6609
.6749
.6890
.7031
.7734
.8437
.9140
.9843
1.033
1.055
1.125
1.195
1.265
1.336
1.406
1.476
1.547
1.617
1.687
1.758
bar
.0689
.0758
.0827
.0896
.0965
.1034
.1103
.1172
.1241
.1310
.1379
.1448
.1517
.1586
.1655
.1724
.1793
.1862
.1930
.1999
.2068
.2137
.2206
.2275
.2344
.2413
.2482
.2551
.2620
.2689
.2758
.2827
.2896
.2965
.3034
.3103
.3172
.3240
.3310
.3378
.3447
.3516
.3585
.3654
.3723
.3792
.3861
.3930
.3999
.4068
.4137
.4206
.4275
.4344
.4413
.4482
.4550
.4619
.4688
.4757
.4826
.4895
.4964
.5033
.5102
.5171
.5240
.5378
.5516
.5654
.5792
.5929
.6067
.6205
.6343
.6481
.6619
.6757
.6895
.7584
.8274
.8963
.9652
1.014
1.034
1.103
1.172
1.241
1.310
1.379
1.448
1.517
1.586
1.655
1.724
mbar
68.95
75.84
82.74
89.63
96.52
103.4
110.3
117.2
124.1
131.0
137.9
144.8
151.7
158.6
165.5
172.4
179.3
186.2
193.0
199.9
206.8
213.7
220.6
227.5
234.4
241.3
248.2
255.1
262.0
268.9
275.8
282.7
289.6
296.5
303.4
310.3
317.2
324.0
331.0
337.8
344.7
351.6
358.5
365.4
372.3
379.2
386.1
393.0
399.9
406.8
413.7
420.6
427.5
434.4
441.3
448.2
455.0
461.9
468.8
475.7
482.6
489.5
496.4
503.3
510.2
517.1
524.0
537.8
551.6
565.4
579.2
592.9
606.7
620.5
634.3
648.1
661.9
675.7
689.5
758.4
827.4
896.3
965.2
1014
1034
1103
1172
1241
1310
1379
1448
1517
1586
1655
1724
Pa
6895
7584
8274
8963
9652
10340
11030
11720
12410
13100
13790
14480
15170
15860
16550
17240
17930
18620
19300
19990
20680
21370
22060
22750
23440
24130
24820
25510
26200
26890
27580
28270
28960
29650
30338
31030
31720
32400
33100
33780
34470
35160
35850
36540
37230
37920
38610
39300
39990
40680
41370
42060
42750
43440
44130
44820
45500
46190
46880
47570
48260
48950
49640
50330
51020
51710
52400
53780
55160
56540
57920
59290
60670
62050
63430
64810
66190
67570
68950
75840
82740
98630
96520
101400
103400
110300
117200
124100
131000
137900
144800
151700
158600
165500
172400
kPa
6.895
7.584
8.274
8.963
9.652
10.34
11.03
11.72
12.41
13.10
13.79
14.48
15.17
15.86
16.55
17.24
17.93
18.62
19.30
19.99
20.68
21.37
22.06
22.75
23.44
24.13
24.82
25.51
26.20
26.89
27.58
28.27
28.96
29.65
30.34
31.03
31.72
32.40
33.10
33.78
34.47
35.16
35.85
36.54
37.23
37.92
38.61
39.30
39.99
40.68
41.37
42.06
42.75
43.44
44.13
44.82
45.50
46.19
46.88
47.57
48.26
48.95
49.64
50.33
51.02
51.71
52.40
53.78
55.16
56.54
57.92
59.29
60.67
62.05
63.43
64.81
66.19
67.57
68.95
75.84
82.74
89.63
96.52
101.4
103.4
110.3
117.2
124.1
131.0
137.9
144.8
151.7
158.6
165.5
172.4
CONVERSION P.S.I. x 27.71 = in. H
2
O P.S.I. x .0689 = bar
FACTORS P.S.I. x 2.036 = in. Hg P.S.I. x 68.95 = mbar
NOTE:
P.S.I. x 703.1 = mm/H
2
O P.S.I. x 6895 = Pa
CONVERSION FACTORS P.S.I. x 51.75 = mm/Hg P.S.I. x 6.895 = kPa
ROUNDED P.S.I. x .0703 = kg/cm
2
2
0
1
1
D
W
Y
E
R

I
N
S
T
R
U
M
E
N
T
S
,

I
N
C
.

-

I
n
s
t
r
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n

&

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
w
w
w
.
d
w
y
e
r
-
i
n
s
t
.
c
o
m
TO ORDER:
Phone: 219/879-8000
Fax: 219/872-9057
www.dwyer-inst.com DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC.
Printed in U.S.A. 09/10 - INTL
2011ofcobc.P:Layout 4 7/27/10 2:45 PM Page 1

Cat Dwyer Catalogo General 2011

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cat Dwyer Catalogo General 2011

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CT-D-I

pressure gages, Photohelic

manometers, and Dwyer

flow and level switches, Hi-Flow

signal converters/isolators, are the products of companies that are now

differential pressure gage with

switch/gage will provide

gages indicate pressurization of

Series DPG with oxygen cleaning and 5000 psi range

differential pressure gage

gage always be mounted above the sensing tap

differential pressure gage

differential pressure switch/gage to monitor either

Series DA adjustable deadband pressure switch is included to turn

Series DA pressure switch maintains desired

gages. They can be flush or surface mounted with standard

gage is connected by metal or plastic tubing

gages often provides adequate protection

gage for high accuracy guaranteed within 2% of full

gage movement, it quickly indicates low air or non-

gage is the industry standard to measure fan and blower pressures,

Differential Pressure Gages

gage directly to magnetic surface

gage of standard range, except high

gage for use as an air filter gage. Includes

Gages may be conveniently

gages ideal for both

Gage Panel Mounting Flange

Gage is fabricated from

gage provides a large, clear and

AV sealant, commercial black rubber, neoprene,

Differential Pressure Gage

II gage offers the latest

II is designed for panel mounting in a single 2-5/8

gage by means of a blow-out membrane

II gage finds many end use

II gage is suitable for many of the same

gage where the greater accuracy, sensitivity,

II Differential Pressure Gages

II gage is supplied with

II gage for panel

gage is designed to give fast, accurate indication of differential

gage, the Capsuhelic

gage requires no filling liquid which might limit its

gages may be flush mounted in a panel or surface mounted.

Differential Pressure Gages

Digital Differential Pressure

Series DM-1000 Digital Differential Pressure and Flow Gages

Digital Differential Pressure and Air Flow Gages possess a

Digital Differential Pressure Gages offer power

Differential Pressure Controller

Gage, Square Root Output for Flow

Differential Pressure Controller is a 3 in 1

controller allows the selection of pressure, velocity

II Differential Pressure Controller

Pressure Controller and packages them in a robust

II Pressure Controller combines the 2 SPDT control relays, 4-20

communications with a large, brightly backlit

II Differential Pressure Control in the new NEMA 4 (IP66)

RTU, RS485, 9600

silver RS 232 to RS 485 Converter with DB9F

USB/RS 485 converter

Differential Pressure Controller